DB2 Utility Guide and Reference PDF

DB2 Version 9.
1 for z/OS
Utility Guide and Reference
SC18-9855-05
DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS
SC18-9855-05
Note
Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information under Notices at the
end of this information.
Sixth edition (December 2009)

This edition applies to DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS (DB2 V9.1 for z/OS), product number 5635-DB2, and to any
subsequent releases until otherwise indicated in new editions. Make sure you are using the correct edition for the
level of the product.
Specific changes are indicated by a vertical bar to the left of a change. A vertical bar to the left of a figure caption
indicates that the figure has changed. Editorial changes that have no technical significance are not noted.
Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1983, 2009.
US Government Users Restricted Rights Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
Contents
About this information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Who should read this information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
DB2 Utilities Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Terminology and citations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Accessibility features for DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
How to send your comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Naming conventions used in this information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
How to read syntax diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Part 1. Introduction to the DB2 utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Chapter 1. Basic information about the DB2 utilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Types of DB2 utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Privileges and authorization IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Utilities that can be run on declared temporary objects . . . . .
Effect of utilities on objects that have the DEFINE NO attribute . .
Effect of utilities on data that is encrypted through built-in functions
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3
3
4
4
5
Chapter 2. DB2 utilities packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

SMP/E jobs for DB2 utility products . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The operation of DB2 utilities in a mixed-release data sharing environment .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 7
. 8
Part 2. DB2 online utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Chapter 3. Invoking DB2 online utilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Data sets that online utilities use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Utility control statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required authorizations for invoking online utilities on tables that have multilevel security with row-level
granularity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Invoking DB2 online utilities in a trusted connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the DB2 Utilities panel in DB2I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Invoking a DB2 utility by using the DSNU CLIST command in TSO . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSNU CLIST command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Invoking a DB2 utility by using the supplied JCL procedure (DSNUPROC) . . . . . . . . . . .
Invoking a DB2 utility by creating the JCL data set yourself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
. 13
. 15
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18
18
18
21
22
28
30
Chapter 4. Monitoring and controlling online utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Monitoring utilities with the DISPLAY UTILITY command . . .
Running utilities concurrently . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Online utilities in a data sharing environment . . . . . . . .
Termination of an online utility with the TERM UTILITY command
Restart of an online utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the RESTART parameter . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding or deleting utility statements . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying utility control statements . . . . . . . . . .
Restarting after the output data set is full . . . . . . . .
Restarting with templates. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How DB2 restarts with lists . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
33
34
35
36
36
39
40
40
40
40
41
Chapter 5. BACKUP SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Syntax and options of the BACKUP SYSTEM control statement .
Before running BACKUP SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . .
Data sets that BACKUP SYSTEM uses . . . . . . . .
Copyright IBM Corp. 1983, 2009
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 44
. 46
. 47
iii
Concurrency and compatibility for BACKUP

Dumping a fast replication copy to tape . . .
Termination or restart of BACKUP SYSTEM .
Sample BACKUP SYSTEM control statements .
SYSTEM
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
47
47
48
48
Chapter 6. CATENFM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Syntax and options of the control statement . .
Before converting the catalog . . . . . . .
Data sets that CATENFM uses when converting
Concurrency and compatibility for CATENFM.
Converting to new-function mode . . . . . .
Termination or halt of CATENFM . . . . . .
. . . .
. . . .
the catalog
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
51
52
52
53
53
53
Chapter 7. CATMAINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
|
|
|
|
Syntax and options of the CATMAINT control statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Before running CATMAINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data sets that CATMAINT uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Concurrency and compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating the catalog for a new release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Renaming the owner, creator, and schema of database objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the ownership of objects from an authorization ID to a role . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the catalog name used by storage groups or index spaces and table spaces. . . . . . . . .
Identifying invalidated plans and packages after the owner, creator, or schema name of an object is renamed
Termination or restart of CATMAINT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
55
56
56
57
57
57
57
58
58
58
Chapter 8. CHECK DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Syntax and options of the CHECK DATA control statement

Before running CHECK DATA . . . . . . . . . .
Data sets that CHECK DATA uses . . . . . . . .
Concurrency and compatibility for CHECK DATA . .
Create exception tables . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exception processing for tables with auxiliary columns . .
Specifying the scope of CHECK DATA . . . . . . .
How violations are identified . . . . . . . . . .
Detect and correct constraint violations . . . . . . .
Resetting CHECK-pending status . . . . . . . . .
LOB column errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting auxiliary CHECK-pending status . . . . . .
Termination and restart of CHECK DATA . . . . . .
Sample CHECK DATA control statements . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
62
69
70
74
76
77
77
77
78
78
79
80
80
81
Chapter 9. CHECK INDEX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Syntax and options of the CHECK INDEX control statement
Data sets that CHECK INDEX uses . . . . . . . .
Defining the work data set for CHECK INDEX . . .
Shadow data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Concurrency and compatibility for CHECK INDEX . . .
Single logical partitions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indexes in parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reviewing CHECK INDEX output. . . . . . . . .
Termination or restart of CHECK INDEX . . . . . .
Correcting XML data after running CHECK INDEX . . .
Sample CHECK INDEX control statements . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
86
89
90
90
92
94
95
98
99
99
99
Chapter 10. CHECK LOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Syntax and options of the CHECK LOB control statement
Before running CHECK LOB . . . . . . . . . .
Data sets that CHECK LOB uses . . . . . . . .
Concurrency and compatibility for CHECK LOB . .
How CHECK LOB identifies violations . . . . . . .
iv
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
104
107
107
109
110
Resetting CHECK-pending status for a LOB

Resolving media failure . . . . . . .
Termination or restart of CHECK LOB . .
Sample CHECK LOB control statements .
table
. .
. .
. .
space
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
110
111
111
111
Chapter 11. COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
|
|
|
Syntax and options of the COPY control statement .

Before running COPY . . . . . . . . . .
Data sets that COPY uses . . . . . . . .
Concurrency and compatibility for COPY . . .
Full image copies . . . . . . . . . . . .
Incremental image copies . . . . . . . . .
Multiple image copies . . . . . . . . . .
Copying a list of objects . . . . . . . . . .
Using more than one COPY statement . . . . .
Copying segmented table spaces . . . . . . .
Copying partitions or data sets in separate jobs . .
Copying partition-by-growth table spaces . . . .
Copying an XML table space . . . . . . . .
Copying indexes . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using DFSMSdss concurrent copy . . . . . .
Specifying conditional image copies . . . . . .
Preparing for recovery . . . . . . . . . .
Improving performance . . . . . . . . . .
Copying table spaces with mixed volume IDs . .
Defining generation data groups . . . . . . .
Using DB2 with DFSMS products . . . . . .
Image copies on tape . . . . . . . . . . .
Termination of COPY. . . . . . . . . . .
Restart of COPY . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample COPY control statements . . . . . . .
Chapter 12. COPYTOCOPY
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
114
124
124
126
129
130
131
133
134
135
135
135
135
136
136
138
139
140
141
141
141
141
142
142
143
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Syntax and options of the COPYTOCOPY control statement . . .

Data sets that COPYTOCOPY uses . . . . . . . . . . .
Concurrency and compatibility for COPYTOCOPY . . . . . .
Full or incremental image copies with COPYTOCOPY. . . . .
Incremental image copies with COPYTOCOPY . . . . . . .
Using more than one COPYTOCOPY statement . . . . . . .
Copying an inline copy made by REORG with a range of partitions
Copying from a specific image copy . . . . . . . . . . .
Using TEMPLATE with COPYTOCOPY . . . . . . . . .
Updating SYSCOPY records . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to determine which input copy to use . . . . . . . .
Defining generation data groups . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using DB2 with DFSMS products . . . . . . . . . . .
Image copies on tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying a LOB table space . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying a list of objects from tape . . . . . . . . . . .
Termination or restart of COPYTOCOPY . . . . . . . . .
Sample COPYTOCOPY control statements. . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
156
161
162
163
163
164
164
164
164
164
165
165
165
166
166
166
167
167
Chapter 13. DIAGNOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Syntax and options of the DIAGNOSE control statement
Data sets that DIAGNOSE uses . . . . . . . .
Concurrency and compatibility for DIAGNOSE . . .
Forcing a utility abend . . . . . . . . . . .
Termination or restart of DIAGNOSE . . . . . .
Sample DIAGNOSE control statements . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
173
177
177
177
178
178
Contents
Chapter 14. EXEC SQL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Syntax and options of the EXEC SQL control statement
Concurrency and compatibility for EXEC SQL . . .
Termination or restart of EXEC SQL . . . . . . .
Sample EXEC SQL control statements . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
181
183
183
183
Chapter 15. LISTDEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Syntax and options of the LISTDEF control statement
Concurrency and compatibility for LISTDEF . . .
Creating the LISTDEF control statement . . . .
Including objects in a list . . . . . . . . .
Previewing the contents of a list . . . . . . .
Creating LISTDEF libraries . . . . . . . . .
Using lists in other utility jobs. . . . . . . .
Using the TEMPLATE utility with LISTDEF . . .
Using the OPTIONS utility with LISTDEF . . . .
Termination or restart of LISTDEF . . . . . .
Sample LISTDEF control statements . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
185
193
193
194
197
197
198
199
200
200
200
Chapter 16. LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
|
|
|
|
Syntax and options of the LOAD control statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Before running LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data sets that LOAD uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Concurrency and compatibility for LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When to use SORTKEYS NO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading variable-length data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How LOAD orders loaded records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing data with LOAD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using LOAD for tables with identity columns, ROWID columns, or row change timestamp
Adding more data to a table or partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting all the data in a table space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Partition-by-growth table spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading data containing XML columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading delimited files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading data with referential constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Correcting referential constraint violations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compressing data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading data from DL/I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading data by using the cross-loader function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using inline COPY with LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Improving LOAD performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Improving performance for parallel processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Improved performance with SORTKEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Improving performance with LOAD or REORG PREFORMAT . . . . . . . . .
Converting input data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying input fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the TRUNCATE and STRIP options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How LOAD builds indexes while loading data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Building indexes in parallel for LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How LOAD leaves free space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading with RECOVER-pending, REBUILD-pending, or REORG-pending status . . .
Exit procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading ROWID columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading a LOB column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOAD LOG on a LOB table space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading an XML column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOAD LOG on an XML table space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running LOAD RESUME YES SHRLEVEL CHANGE without logging . . . . . . .
Collecting inline statistics while loading a table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
columns
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
207
248
249
253
256
256
256
257
259
260
260
260
262
262
263
265
267
267
269
270
271
272
273
273
274
275
276
277
277
278
280
281
281
282
282
283
283
284
284
285
Inline COPY for a base table space . . . . . . . . . . .

Termination of LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restart of LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
After running LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying the loaded table space or partition . . . . . . .
Resetting COPY-pending status . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting REBUILD-pending status . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting the CHECK-pending status . . . . . . . . .
Running CHECK INDEX after loading a table that has indexes.
Recovering a failed LOAD job . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reorganization of an auxiliary index after LOAD . . . . .
Effects of running LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample LOAD control statements. . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
285
285
286
288
288
288
288
289
291
291
292
292
293
Chapter 17. MERGECOPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Syntax and options of the MERGECOPY control statement
Data sets that MERGECOPY uses . . . . . . . .
Concurrency and compatibility for MERGECOPY . . .
Full or incremental image copy . . . . . . . . .
How to determine which input copy MERGECOPY uses .
Merging online copies . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using MERGECOPY with individual data sets . . . .
Using MERGECOPY or COPY. . . . . . . . . .
Avoiding MERGECOPY LOG RBA inconsistencies . . .
Creating image copies in a JES3 environment. . . . .
Terminating or restart of MERGECOPY. . . . . . .
Sample MERGECOPY control statements . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
308
310
311
312
313
313
313
313
313
314
314
314
Chapter 18. MODIFY RECOVERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Syntax and options of the MODIFY RECOVERY control statement
Before running MODIFY RECOVERY . . . . . . . . . .
Data sets that MODIFY RECOVERY uses . . . . . . . .
Concurrency and compatibility for MODIFY RECOVERY. . .
How MODIFY RECOVERY deletes rows . . . . . . . . .
How MODIFY RECOVERY deletes SYSOBDS entries . . . . .
Reclaiming space in the DBD . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Improving REORG performance after adding a column . . . .
Termination or restart of MODIFY RECOVERY . . . . . . .
The effect of MODIFY RECOVERY on version numbers . . . .
Sample MODIFY RECOVERY control statements . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
318
321
321
321
322
323
323
324
324
324
325
Chapter 19. MODIFY STATISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Syntax and options of the MODIFY STATISTICS control statement
Data sets that MODIFY STATISTICS uses . . . . . . . . .
Concurrency and compatibility for MODIFY STATISTICS. . . .
Deciding which statistics history rows to delete . . . . . . .
Deleting specific statistics history rows . . . . . . . . . .
Termination or restart of MODIFY STATISTICS . . . . . . .
Sample MODIFY STATISTICS control statements . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
328
330
330
331
331
331
332
Chapter 20. OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Syntax and options of the OPTIONS control statement
Concurrency and compatibility for OPTIONS. . . .
Executing statements in preview mode . . . . . .
Specifying LISTDEF and TEMPLATE libraries . . .
Overriding standard utility processing behavior . . .
Termination or restart of OPTIONS . . . . . . .
Sample OPTIONS control statements . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
335
338
339
339
339
339
339
Chapter 21. QUIESCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Contents
vii
Syntax and options of the QUIESCE control statement.

Before running QUIESCE . . . . . . . . . .
Data sets that QUIESCE uses . . . . . . . .
Concurrency and compatibility for QUIESCE . . .
Using QUIESCE on catalog and directory objects . .
Common quiesce points . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying a list of table spaces and table space sets .
Running QUIESCE on a table space in pending status .
Determining why the write to disk fails . . . . .
Termination and restart of QUIESCE . . . . . .
Sample QUIESCE control statements . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
344
345
346
346
348
348
348
349
349
350
350
Chapter 22. REBUILD INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Syntax and options of the REBUILD INDEX control statement

Before running REBUILD INDEX. . . . . . . . . .
Data sets that REBUILD INDEX uses . . . . . . .
Concurrency and compatibility for REBUILD INDEX . .
Access with REBUILD INDEX SHRLEVEL . . . . . .
Rebuilding index partitions. . . . . . . . . . . .
Rebuilding indexes on partition-by-growth table spaces . .
Improving performance when rebuilding index partitions .
Rebuilding multiple indexes . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting the REBUILD-pending status . . . . . . . .
Rebuilding critical catalog indexes . . . . . . . . .
Recoverability of a rebuilt index . . . . . . . . . .
Termination or restart of REBUILD INDEX . . . . . .
The effect of REBUILD INDEX on index version numbers .
Sample REBUILD INDEX control statements . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
353
361
362
364
366
366
367
367
368
372
373
373
373
373
374
Chapter 23. RECOVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
|
|
|
|
|
Syntax and options of the RECOVER control statement . . . . . . . .

Before running RECOVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data sets that RECOVER uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Concurrency and compatibility for RECOVER . . . . . . . . . .
Using a system-level backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to determine which system-level backups DB2 recovers . . . . . .
Determining the recovery base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determining whether the system-level backups reside on disk or tape . . .
Recovering a table space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recovering a list of objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recovering a data set or partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recovering with incremental copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recovering a page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recovering an error range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effect on RECOVER of the NOT LOGGED or LOGGED table space attributes .
Recovering with a data set copy that is not made by DB2 . . . . . . .
Recovering catalog and directory objects . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reinitializing DSNDB01.SYSUTILX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recovering a table space that contains LOB or XML data . . . . . . . .
Recovering a table space that contains clone objects . . . . . . . . .
Point-in-time recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Avoiding specific image copy data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Improving RECOVER performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimizing the LOGAPPLY phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recovering image copies in a JES3 environment . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting RECOVER-pending or REBUILD pending status . . . . . . .
How the RECOVER utility allocates incremental image copies . . . . . .
How the RECOVER utility performs fallback recovery. . . . . . . . .
How the RECOVER utility retains tape mounts . . . . . . . . . . .
Avoiding damaged media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
379
387
387
388
390
390
391
391
391
392
393
393
394
394
395
395
396
401
401
402
403
408
409
409
411
411
412
412
413
413
Termination or restart of RECOVER . .

Effects of running RECOVER . . . .
Sample RECOVER control statements .
Chapter 24. REORG INDEX
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 413
. 414
. 414
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Syntax and options of the REORG INDEX control statement . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Before running REORG INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data sets that REORG INDEX uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Concurrency and compatibility for REORG INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determining when an index requires reorganization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the LEAFDISTLIMIT and REPORTONLY options to determine when reorganization is needed
Access with REORG INDEX SHRLEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temporarily interrupting REORG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Improving performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Termination of REORG INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restart of REORG INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Review of REORG INDEX output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effect of REORG INDEX on index version numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample REORG INDEX control statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
420
432
433
437
439
439
440
441
442
442
443
444
445
445
Chapter 25. REORG TABLESPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Syntax and options of the REORG TABLESPACE control statement

Before running REORG TABLESPACE . . . . . . . . . .
Data sets that REORG TABLESPACE uses . . . . . . . .
Concurrency and compatibility for REORG TABLESPACE . .
Determining when an object requires reorganization . . . . .
Access with REORG TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL . . . . . . .
Omitting the output data set . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unloading without reloading . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reclaiming space from dropped tables . . . . . . . . . .
Reorganizing the catalog and directory . . . . . . . . . .
Changing data set definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temporarily interrupting REORG. . . . . . . . . . . .
Building a compression dictionary . . . . . . . . . . .
Overriding dynamic DFSORT and SORTDATA allocation. . . .
Rebalancing partitions by using REORG . . . . . . . . .
How to unload and reload partitions in parallel . . . . . . .
Using inline copy with REORG TABLESPACE . . . . . . .
Improving REORG TABLESPACE performance . . . . . . .
Parallel index building for REORG TABLESPACE . . . . . .
Methods of unloading data . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Encountering an error in the RELOAD phase. . . . . . . .
Reorganization of partitioned table spaces . . . . . . . . .
Reorganization of partition-by-growth table spaces . . . . . .
Reorganization of segmented table spaces . . . . . . . . .
Counting records loaded during RELOAD phase . . . . . .
Reorganization of a LOB table space. . . . . . . . . . .
Termination of REORG TABLESPACE . . . . . . . . . .
Restart of REORG TABLESPACE . . . . . . . . . . . .
Review of REORG TABLESPACE output . . . . . . . . .
After running REORG TABLESPACE . . . . . . . . . .
Effects of running REORG TABLESPACE . . . . . . . . .
Sample REORG TABLESPACE control statements . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
452
481
486
493
498
499
501
502
502
502
504
504
505
505
505
507
507
508
509
512
513
513
513
514
514
514
515
517
519
519
520
521
Chapter 26. REPAIR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

Syntax and options of the REPAIR control statement
Before running REPAIR . . . . . . . . . .
Data sets that REPAIR uses. . . . . . . .
Concurrency and compatibility for REPAIR . .
Resetting table space status. . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
536
550
551
551
554
ix
Resetting index space status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Repairing a damaged page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the DBD statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locating rows by key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using VERIFY with REPLACE and DELETE operations . . . . . .
Repairing critical catalog table spaces and indexes . . . . . . . .
Updating version information when moving objects to another subsystem
Termination or restart of REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Review of REPAIR output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
After running REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample REPAIR control statements . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
555
555
555
556
557
557
557
558
558
559
559
Chapter 27. REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

Syntax and options of the REPORT control statement
Data sets that REPORT uses . . . . . . . .
Concurrency and compatibility for REPORT . . .
How REPORT recovers information . . . . . .
Running REPORT on the catalog and directory . .
Terminating or restarting REPORT . . . . . .
Review of REPORT output . . . . . . . . .
Sample REPORT control statements . . . . . .
Chapter 28. RESTORE SYSTEM
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
564
568
568
568
570
570
571
577
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Syntax and options of the RESTORE SYSTEM control statement

Before running RESTORE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . .
Data sets that RESTORE SYSTEM uses . . . . . . . .
Concurrency and compatibility for RESTORE SYSTEM . .
Restoring data in a data sharing environment . . . . . .
Using DISPLAY UTILITY with RESTORE SYSTEM . . . . .
Termination and restart of RESTORE SYSTEM . . . . . .
Effects of running RESTORE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . .
After running RESTORE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . .
Sample RESTORE SYSTEM control statements . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
586
587
588
589
589
589
589
590
590
590
Chapter 29. RUNSTATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Syntax and options of the RUNSTATS control statement . . . . .
Before running RUNSTATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data sets that RUNSTATS uses . . . . . . . . . . . .
Concurrency and compatibility for RUNSTATS . . . . . . .
When to use RUNSTATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assessing table space status . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Collecting distribution statistics for column groups . . . . . . .
Updating statistics for a partitioned table space . . . . . . . .
Running RUNSTATS on the DB2 catalog . . . . . . . . . .
Improving RUNSTATS performance . . . . . . . . . . . .
Collecting frequency statistics for data-partitioned secondary indexes
Invalidating statements in the dynamic statement cache . . . . .
Collecting statistics history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Collecting statistics on LOB table spaces . . . . . . . . . .
Termination or restart of RUNSTATS . . . . . . . . . . .
Review of RUNSTATS output . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access path statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Space statistics (columns for tuning information) . . . . . .
After running RUNSTATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample RUNSTATS control statements . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
594
608
608
610
612
612
613
613
613
613
614
615
615
615
615
615
620
623
629
629
Chapter 30. STOSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635

Syntax and options of the STOSPACE control statement .
Data sets that STOSPACE uses . . . . . . . . .
Concurrency and compatibility for STOSPACE . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 636
. 636
. 637
How STOSPACE ensures availability of objects it STOSPACE

Obtaining statistical information with STOSPACE . . . .
Analysis of the values in a SPACE or SPACEF column . .
Terminate or restart of STOSPACE . . . . . . . . .
Sample STOSPACE control statement . . . . . . . .
requires
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
637
637
638
638
639
Chapter 31. TEMPLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Syntax and options of the TEMPLATE control statement

Before running TEMPLATE. . . . . . . . . .
Concurrency and compatibility for TEMPLATE . .
Key TEMPLATE operations . . . . . . . . .
Creating data set names . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling data set size . . . . . . . . . . .
Default space calculations . . . . . . . . . .
Working with TAPE . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with GDGs . . . . . . . . . . . .
Template switching . . . . . . . . . . . .
Termination or restart of TEMPLATE . . . . . .
Sample TEMPLATE control statements . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
641
654
654
654
655
656
656
657
657
657
658
658
Chapter 32. UNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Syntax and options of the UNLOAD control statement .

Before running UNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . .
Data sets that UNLOAD uses . . . . . . . . .
Concurrency and compatibility for UNLOAD . . .
Unloading partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unloading XML data . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting tables and rows to unload . . . . . . . .
Selecting and ordering columns to unload . . . . . .
Unloading data from image copy data sets . . . . .
Converting data with the UNLOAD utility . . . . .
Output field types . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output field positioning and size. . . . . . . . .
Layout of output fields . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unloading delimited files . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying TRUNCATE and STRIP options for output data
Generating LOAD statements . . . . . . . . . .
Unloading compressed data . . . . . . . . . .
Field specification errors. . . . . . . . . . . .
Termination or restart of UNLOAD . . . . . . . .
Sample UNLOAD control statements . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
664
699
699
700
702
702
703
703
703
705
705
707
708
710
713
713
714
714
714
715
Part 3. DB2 stand-alone utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721

Chapter 33. Invoking stand-alone utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
Creating utility control statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying options by using the JCL EXEC PARM parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effects of invoking stand-alone utilities on tables that have multilevel security with row-level granularity
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 723
. 723
. 724
Chapter 34. DSNJCNVB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725

Chapter 35. DSNJLOGF (preformat active log) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Chapter 36. DSNJU003 (change log inventory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
Syntax and options of the DSNJU003 control statement
Making changes for active logs . . . . . . . .
Making changes for archive logs . . . . . . . .
Creating a conditional restart control record . . . .
Deleting log data sets with errors. . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
730
743
745
745
746
xi
Altering references to NEWLOG and DELETE data sets . . .

Defining the high-level qualifier for catalog and directory objects
Renaming DB2 system data sets . . . . . . . . . . .
Renaming DB2 active log data sets . . . . . . . . . .
Renaming DB2 archive log data sets . . . . . . . . . .
Sample DSNJU003 control statements . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 37. DSNJU004 (print log map)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
747
747
748
748
748
748
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
Syntax and options of the DSNJU004 control statement .

Sample DSNJU004 control statement . . . . . . .
DSNJU004 (print log map) output . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 752
. 753
. 753
Chapter 38. DSN1CHKR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763

Syntax and options of the DSN1CHKR control statement .
Sample DSN1CHKR control statements. . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 764
. 766
Chapter 39. DSN1COMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771

Syntax and options of the DSN1COMP control statement. . . . .
Before running DSN1COMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Estimating compression savings achieved with option REORG . . .
Free space in compression calculations on table space . . . . . .
The effect of running DSN1COMP on a table space with identical rows
Sample DSN1COMP control statements . . . . . . . . . .
DSN1COMP output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
772
775
776
776
777
777
779
Chapter 40. DSN1COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781

Syntax and options of the DSN1COPY control statement . . .
Before running DSN1COPY . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data sets that DSN1COPY uses . . . . . . . . . .
The effect of altering a table before running DSN1COPY . . .
Checking for inconsistent data. . . . . . . . . . . .
The effects of not specifying the OBIDXLAT option. . . . .
Requirements for using an image copy as input to DSN1COPY.
Resetting page log RBAs . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying from an image copy . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restoring indexes with DSN1COPY . . . . . . . . . .
Restoring table spaces with DSN1COPY . . . . . . . .
Printing with DSN1COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying tables from one subsystem to another . . . . . .
Sample DSN1COPY control statements . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
783
788
789
794
794
794
795
795
795
796
796
797
797
798
Chapter 41. DSN1LOGP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803

Syntax and options of the DSN1LOGP control statement
. .
Reading archive log data sets on tape . . . . . .
Locating table and index identifiers . . . . . . .
Sample DSN1LOGP control statements . . . . . .
DSN1LOGP output . . . . . . . . . . . .
| Determining the PSID for base and clone objects
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
805
811
812
813
813
816
Chapter 42. DSN1PRNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823

Syntax and options of the DSN1PRNT control statement
Printing with DSN1PRNT instead of DSN1COPY . .
Determining page size and DSSIZE . . . . . . .
Sample DSN1PRNT control statements . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
824
830
830
831
Chapter 43. DSN1SDMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833

Syntax and options of the DSN1SDMP control statement .
Assigning buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conditions for generating a dump . . . . . . . .
xii
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 834
. 839
. 840
Stopping or modifying DSN1SDMP traces .

Sample DSN1SDMP control statements . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 840
. 841
Part 4. Appendixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845

Appendix A. Limits in DB2 for z/OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
Appendix B. DB2-supplied stored procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
DSNUTILS stored procedure .
DSNUTILU stored procedure .
DSNACCOR stored procedure.
DSNACCOX stored procedure.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
860
871
874
895
Appendix C. Advisory or restrictive states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
Auxiliary CHECK-pending status .

Auxiliary warning status . . . .
CHECK-pending status . . . . .
COPY-pending status . . . . . .
DBET error status . . . . . . .
Group buffer pool RECOVER-pending
Informational COPY-pending status .
REBUILD-pending status . . . .
RECOVER-pending status . . . .
REFRESH-pending status . . . .
REORG-pending status . . . . .
Restart-pending status . . . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
status .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
925
926
927
927
928
928
929
929
930
931
931
932
Appendix D. Productivity-aid sample programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933

DSNTIAUL . . . . .
DSNTIAD . . . . .
DSNTEP2 and DSNTEP4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 934
. 940
. 941
Appendix E. How real-time statistics are used by DB2 utilities . . . . . . . . . . . 947

Appendix F. Real-time statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Setting up your system for real-time statistics . . . . . . . .

Setting the interval for writing real-time statistics . . . . . .
Establishing base values for real-time statistics . . . . . . .
Contents of the real-time statistics tables . . . . . . . . . .
Operating with real-time statistics . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSNACCOX stored procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSNACCOR stored procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . .
When DB2 externalizes real-time statistics . . . . . . . . .
How DB2 utilities affect the real-time statistics . . . . . . .
How non-DB2 utilities affect real-time statistics. . . . . . .
Real-time statistics on objects in work file databases and the TEMP
Real-time statistics for DEFINE NO objects . . . . . . . .
Real-time statistics on read-only or nonmodified objects . . . .
How dropping objects affects real-time statistics . . . . . .
How SQL operations affect real-time statistics counters . . . .
Real-time statistics in data sharing . . . . . . . . . . .
How the EXCHANGE command affects real-time statistics . . .
Improving concurrency with real-time statistics . . . . . .
Recovering the real-time statistics tables . . . . . . . . .
Statistics accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
database .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 949
. 949
. 949
. 949
. 949
. 950
. 978
. 999
. 999
. 1007
. 1007
. 1007
. 1007
. 1007
. 1007
. 1009
. 1009
. 1010
. 1010
. 1010
Appendix G. Delimited file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011

Delimited data types . . .
Examples of delimited files .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Contents
. 1012
. 1013
xiii
Information resources for DB2 for z/OS and related products . . . . . . . . . . . 1015
How to obtain DB2 information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021
How to use the DB2 library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029
Programming Interface Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General-use Programming Interface and Associated Guidance Information . .
Product-sensitive Programming Interface and Associated Guidance Information .
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1030
1031
1031
1031
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077
xiv
About this information

This information contains usage information for the tasks of system administration,
database administration, and operation. It presents detailed information about
using utilities, specifying syntax (including keyword and parameter descriptions),
and starting, stopping, and restarting utilities. This book also includes job control
language (JCL) and control statements for each utility.
This information assumes that your DB2 subsystem is running in Version 9.1
new-function mode. Generally, new functions that are described, including changes
to existing functions, statements, and limits, are available only in new-function
mode. Two exceptions to this general statement are new and changed utilities and
optimization enhancements, which are also available in conversion mode unless
stated otherwise.
Who should read this information

This information is intended for system administrators, database administrators,
system operators, and application programmers of DB2 online and stand-alone
utilities.
Recommendation: Familiarize yourself with DB2 for z/OS prior to using this
book.
DB2 Utilities Suite

Important: In this version of DB2 for z/OS, the DB2 Utilities Suite is available as
an optional product. You must separately order and purchase a license to such
utilities, and discussion of those utility functions in this publication is not intended
to otherwise imply that you have a license to them.
The DB2 Utilities Suite is designed to work with the DFSORT program, which you
are licensed to use in support of the DB2 utilities even if you do not otherwise
license DFSORT for general use. If your primary sort product is not DFSORT,
consider the following informational APARs mandatory reading:
v II14047/II14213: USE OF DFSORT BY DB2 UTILITIES
v II13495: HOW DFSORT TAKES ADVANTAGE OF 64-BIT REAL
ARCHITECTURE
These informational APARs are periodically updated.
Related information
DB2 utilities packaging (Utility Guide)
Terminology and citations

In this information, DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS is referred to as DB2 for z/OS. In
cases where the context makes the meaning clear, DB2 for z/OS is referred to as
DB2. When this information refers to titles of DB2 for z/OS books, a short title is
used. (For example, See DB2 SQL Reference is a citation to IBM DB2 Version 9.1
for z/OS SQL Reference.)
xv
When referring to a DB2 product other than DB2 for z/OS, this information uses
the products full name to avoid ambiguity.
The following terms are used as indicated:
DB2
Represents either the DB2 licensed program or a particular DB2 subsystem.
OMEGAMON
Refers to any of the following products:
v IBM Tivoli OMEGAMON XE for DB2 Performance Expert on z/OS
v IBM Tivoli OMEGAMON XE for DB2 Performance Monitor on z/OS
v IBM DB2 Performance Expert for Multiplatforms and Workgroups
v IBM DB2 Buffer Pool Analyzer for z/OS
C, C++, and C language
Represent the C or C++ programming language.
CICS Represents CICS Transaction Server for z/OS.
IMS Represents the IMS Database Manager or IMS Transaction Manager.

MVS
Represents the MVS element of the z/OS operating system, which is

equivalent to the Base Control Program (BCP) component of the z/OS
operating system.
RACF
Represents the functions that are provided by the RACF component of the
z/OS Security Server.
Accessibility features for DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS

Accessibility features help a user who has a physical disability, such as restricted
mobility or limited vision, to use information technology products successfully.
Accessibility features
The following list includes the major accessibility features in z/OS products,
including DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS. These features support:
v Keyboard-only operation.
v Interfaces that are commonly used by screen readers and screen magnifiers.
v Customization of display attributes such as color, contrast, and font size
Tip: The Information Management Software for z/OS Solutions Information
Center (which includes information for DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS) and its related
publications are accessibility-enabled for the IBM Home Page Reader. You can
operate all features using the keyboard instead of the mouse.
Keyboard navigation
You can access DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS ISPF panel functions by using a keyboard
or keyboard shortcut keys.
For information about navigating the DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS ISPF panels using
TSO/E or ISPF, refer to the z/OS TSO/E Primer, the z/OS TSO/E Users Guide, and
the z/OS ISPF Users Guide. These guides describe how to navigate each interface,
including the use of keyboard shortcuts or function keys (PF keys). Each guide
includes the default settings for the PF keys and explains how to modify their
functions.
xvi
Related accessibility information

Online documentation for DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS is available in the Information
Management Software for z/OS Solutions Information Center, which is available at
the following Web site: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/dzichelp
IBM and accessibility

See the IBM Accessibility Center at http://www.ibm.com/able for more information
about the commitment that IBM has to accessibility.
How to send your comments

Your feedback helps IBM to provide quality information. Please send any
comments that you have about this book or other DB2 for z/OS documentation.
You can use the following methods to provide comments:
v Send your comments by e-mail to db2zinfo@us.ibm.com and include the name
of the product, the version number of the product, and the number of the book.
If you are commenting on specific text, please list the location of the text (for
example, a chapter and section title or a help topic title).
v You can send comments from the Web. Visit the DB2 for z/OS - Technical
Resources Web site at:
http://www.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?&uid=swg27011656
This Web site has an online reader comment form that you can use to send
comments.
v You can also send comments by using the feedback link at the footer of each
page in the Information Management Software for z/OS Solutions Information
Center at http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/db2zhelp.
Naming conventions used in this information

This topic describes naming conventions that are unique to commands and
utilities.
When you use a parameter for an object that is created by SQL statements (for
example, tables, table spaces, and indexes), identify the object by following the
SQL syntactical naming conventions. See the description for naming conventions in
DB2 SQL Reference.
In this book, characters are classified as letters, digits, or special characters.
v A letter is any one of the uppercase characters A through Z (including the three
characters that are reserved in the United States as alphabetic extenders for
national languages, #, @, and $.).
v A digit is any one of the characters 0 through 9.
v A special character is any character other than a letter or a digit.
See DB2 SQL Reference for an additional explanation of long identifiers, short
identifiers, and location identifiers.
authorization-id
A short identifier of one to eight letters, digits, or the underscore that identifies
a set of privileges. An authorization ID must begin with a letter.
xvii
connection-name
An identifier of one to eight characters that identifies an address space
connection to DB2. A connection identifier is one of the following values:
v
v
v
v
TSO (for DSN processes that run in TSO foreground).

BATCH (for DSN processes that run in TSO batch).
DB2CALL (for the call attachment facility (CAF)).
The system identification name (for IMS and CICS processes).
See DB2 Administration Guide for more information about managing DB2
connections.
correlation-id
An identifier of 1 to 12 characters that identifies a process within an address
space connection. A correlation ID must begin with a letter.
A correlation ID can be one of the following values:
v The TSO logon identifier (for DSN processes that run in TSO foreground
and for CAF processes).
v The job name (for DSN processes that run in TSO batch).
v The PST#.PSBNAME (for IMS processes).
v The entry identifier.thread_number.transaction_identifier (for CICS
processes).
See DB2 Administration Guide for more information about correlation IDs.
cursor-name
An identifier that designates a result set. Cursor names that are specified with
the EXEC SQL and LOAD utilities cannot be longer than eight characters.
database-name
A short identifier that identifies a database. The identifier must start with a
letter and must not include special characters.
data-set-name
An identifier of 1 to 44 characters that identifies a data set.
dbrm-member-name
An identifier of one to eight letters or digits that identifies a member of a
partitioned data set.
A DBRM member name should not begin with DSN because of a potential
conflict with DB2-provided DBRM member names. If you specify a DBRM
member name that begins with DSN, DB2 issues a warning message.
dbrm-pds-name
An identifier of 1 to 44 characters that identifies a partitioned data set.
ddname
An identifier of one to eight characters that identifies the name of a DD
statement.
hexadecimal-constant
A sequence of digits or any of the letters from A to F (uppercase or lowercase).
hexadecimal-string
An X followed by a sequence of characters that begins and ends with the
string delimiter, an apostrophe. The characters between the string delimiters
must be a hexadecimal number.
index-name
A qualified or unqualified name that identifies an index.
xviii
|
|
A qualified index name is a schema name followed by a period and an

identifier.
|
|
An unqualified index name is an identifier with an implicit schema name

qualifier. The implicit schema is determined by the rules in DB2 SQL Reference.
|
|
If the index name contains a blank character, the name must be enclosed in
quotation marks when specified in a utility control statement.
location-name
A location identifier of 1 to 16 letters (but excluding the alphabetic extenders),
digits, or the underscore that identifies an instance of a database management
system. A location name must begin with a letter.
luname
An SQL short identifier of one to eight characters that identifies a logical unit
name. A LU name must begin with a letter.
member-name
An identifier of one to eight letters (including the three alphabetic extenders)
or digits that identifies a member of a partitioned data set.
A member name should not begin with DSN because of a potential conflict
with DB2-provided member names. If you specify a member name that begins
with DSN, DB2 issues a warning message.
qualifier-name
An SQL short identifier of one to eight letters, digits, or the underscore that
identifies the implicit qualifier for unqualified table names, views, indexes, and
aliases.
string
A sequence of characters that begins and ends with an apostrophe.
subsystem-name
An identifier that specifies the DB2 subsystem as it is known to the operating
system.
table-name
A qualified or unqualified name that designates a table.
|
|
|
|
A fully qualified table name is a three-part name. The first part is a location
name that designates the DBMS at which the table is stored. The second part is
a schema name. The third part is an SQL identifier. A period must separate
each of the parts.
|
|
|
A two-part table name is implicitly qualified by the location name of the

current server. The first part is a schema name. The second part is an SQL
identifier. A period must separate the two parts.
|
|
|
|
A one-part or unqualified table name is an SQL identifier with two implicit

qualifiers. The first implicit qualifier is the location name of the current server.
The second is a schema name, which is determined by the rules in DB2 SQL
Reference.
|
|
If the table name contains a blank, the name must be enclosed in quotation
marks when specified in a utility control statement.
table-space-name
A short identifier that identifies a table space of an identified database. The
identifier must start with a letter and must not include special characters. If a
database is not identified, a table space name specifies a table space of
database DSNDB04.
xix
utility-id
An identifier of 1 to 16 characters that uniquely identifies a utility process
within DB2. A utility ID must begin with a letter. The remaining characters can
be uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers 0 through 9, and the following
characters: #, $, ., , !, , and @.
How to read syntax diagrams

Certain conventions apply to the syntax diagrams that are used in IBM
documentation.
Apply the following rules when reading the syntax diagrams that are used in DB2
for z/OS documentation:
v Read the syntax diagrams from left to right, from top to bottom, following the
path of the line.
The symbol indicates the beginning of a statement.
The symbol indicates that the statement syntax is continued on the next
line.
The symbol indicates that a statement is continued from the previous line.
The symbol indicates the end of a statement.
v Required items appear on the horizontal line (the main path).
required_item
v Optional items appear below the main path.

required_item

optional_item
If an optional item appears above the main path, that item has no effect on the
execution of the statement and is used only for readability.
optional_item
required_item
v If you can choose from two or more items, they appear vertically, in a stack.
If you must choose one of the items, one item of the stack appears on the main
path.
required_item
required_choice1
required_choice2
If choosing one of the items is optional, the entire stack appears below the main
path.
required_item

optional_choice1
optional_choice2
If one of the items is the default, it appears above the main path and the
remaining choices are shown below.
xx
default_choice
required_item

optional_choice
optional_choice
v An arrow returning to the left, above the main line, indicates an item that can be
repeated.
required_item repeatable_item
If the repeat arrow contains a comma, you must separate repeated items with a
comma.
,
required_item repeatable_item
A repeat arrow above a stack indicates that you can repeat the items in the
stack.
|
|
|
v Sometimes a diagram must be split into fragments. The syntax fragment is

shown separately from the main syntax diagram, but the contents of the
fragment should be read as if they are on the main path of the diagram.
|
|
required_item
fragment-name:
fragment-name
required_item
optional_name
|
|
|
|
v With the exception of XPath keywords, keywords appear in uppercase (for

example, FROM). Keywords must be spelled exactly as shown. XPath keywords
are defined as lowercase names, and must be spelled exactly as shown. Variables
appear in all lowercase letters (for example, column-name). They represent
user-supplied names or values.
v If punctuation marks, parentheses, arithmetic operators, or other such symbols
are shown, you must enter them as part of the syntax.
xxi
xxii
Part 1. Introduction to the DB2 utilities

These topics provide an overview of the DB2 for z/OS utilities, including the types
of utilities and several restrictions when running utilities on certain objects. These
topics also include information about utilities packaging and installation.
Chapter 1. Basic information about the DB2 utilities

DB2 online and stand-alone utilities have specific authorization rules for coding
utility control statements and the data sets that the utilities use.
Types of DB2 utilities

There are two types of DB2 utilities: online utilities and stand-alone utilities.
DB2 online utilities run as standard batch jobs or stored procedures, and they
require DB2 to be running. They do not run under control of the terminal monitor
program (TMP); they have their own attachment mechanism and they invoke DB2
control facility services directly.
The stand-alone utilities run as batch jobs that are independent of DB2. The only
way to run these utilities is to use JCL. See the topics on the individual utilities for
information about the ways to run these utilities.
Related concepts
Chapter 33, Invoking stand-alone utilities, on page 723
Related tasks
Chapter 3, Invoking DB2 online utilities, on page 13
Privileges and authorization IDs

A command or a utility job can be issued by an individual user, by a program that
runs in batch mode, or by an IMS or CICS transaction.
The term process describes any of these initiators.
A process is represented to DB2 by a set of identifiers (IDs). What the process can
do with DB2 is determined by privileges and privileges that can be held by its
identifiers. The phrase privilege set of a process means the entire set of privileges
and authorities that can be used by the process in a specific situation.
Three types of identifiers exist: primary authorization IDs, secondary authorization
IDs, and SQL authorization IDs.
v Generally, the primary authorization ID identifies a specific process. For example,
in the process that is initiated through the TSO attachment facility, the primary
authorization ID is identical to the TSO logon ID. A trace record identifies the
process by that ID.
v Secondary authorization IDs, which are optional, can hold additional privileges
that are available to the process. A secondary authorization ID is often a
SecureWay Security Server Resource Access Control Facility (RACF) group ID.
For example, a process can belong to a RACF group that holds the LOAD
privilege on a particular database. Any member of the group can run the LOAD
utility to load table spaces in the database.
DB2 commands that are entered from a z/OS console are not associated with
any secondary authorization IDs.
v An SQL authorization ID (SQL ID) holds the privileges that are exercised when
issuing certain dynamic SQL statements. Generally, this topic does not discuss
the SQL ID.
Within DB2, a process can be represented by a primary authorization ID and

possibly one or more secondary IDs. For DB2 online utilities, the process can be
represented by a primary authorization ID, possibly one or more secondary IDs,
and role, if running in a trusted connection with an associated role.
An administrator can grant or revoke a privilege or authority for an identifier by
executing an SQL GRANT or a REVOKE statement.
If you use the access control authorization exit routine, that exit routine might
control the authorization rules, rather than the exit routines that are documented
for each utility.
Related information
Processing of sign-on requests (DB2 Administration Guide)
Utilities that can be run on declared temporary objects

The REPAIR DBD utility and the STOSPACE utility can be run on declared
temporary objects.
v You can use the REPAIR DBD utility on declared temporary tables, which must
be created in a database that is defined with the AS TEMP clause.
v You can use the STOSPACE utility on storage groups that have objects within
temporary databases.
No other DB2 utilities can be used on a declared temporary table, its indexes, or its
table spaces.
For detailed information about target object support, see the Concurrency and
compatibility topic for each utility.
Effect of utilities on objects that have the DEFINE NO attribute

With DB2 Version 7 or above, you can run certain online utilities on table spaces or
index spaces that were defined with the DEFINE NO attribute. When you specify
this attribute, the table space or index space is defined, but DB2 does not allocate
the associated data sets until a row is inserted or loaded into a table in that table
space.
You can populate table spaces whose data sets are not yet defined by using the
LOAD utility with either the RESUME keyword, the REPLACE keyword, or both.
Using LOAD to populate these table spaces results in the following actions:
1. DB2 allocates the data sets.
2. DB2 updates the SPACE column in the catalog table to show that data sets
exist.
3. DB2 loads the specified table space.
For a partitioned table space, all partitions are allocated even if the LOAD utility is
loading only one partition. Avoid attempting to populate a partitioned table space
with concurrent LOAD PART jobs until after one of the jobs has caused all the data
sets to be created.
Online utilities that encounter an undefined target object might issue informational
message DSNU185I, but processing continues.
The following online utilities issue informational message DSNU185I when a table
space or index space with the DEFINE NO attribute is encountered. The object is
not processed.
v CHECK DATA
v CHECK INDEX
v COPY
v MERGECOPY
v MODIFY RECOVERY
v QUIESCE
v REBUILD INDEX
v RECOVER
v REORG INDEX
v REORG TABLESPACE
v REPAIR, but not REPAIR DBD
v RUNSTATS TABLESPACE INDEX(ALL) 1
v RUNSTATS INDEX 1
v UNLOAD
Note:
1. RUNSTATS recognizes DEFINE NO objects and updates the catalogs access
path statistics to reflect the empty objects.
You cannot use stand-alone utilities on objects whose data sets have not been
defined.
Effect of utilities on data that is encrypted through built-in functions

You can copy and recover encrypted data. You can also move encrypted data
between systems. Data remains encrypted throughout these processes.
However, running any of the following utilities on encrypted data might produce
unexpected results:
v CHECK DATA
v LOAD
v
v
v
v
v
REBUILD INDEX
REORG TABLESPACE
REPAIR
RUNSTATS
UNLOAD
v DSN1PRNT
Chapter 1. Basic information about the DB2 utilities
Chapter 2. DB2 utilities packaging

Several utilities are included with DB2 at no extra charge. Other utilities are
available as a separate product.
|
|
The following utilities are core utilities, which are included (at no extra charge)
with Version 9.1 of DB2 for z/OS:
v CATENFM
v CATMAINT
v DIAGNOSE
v LISTDEF
v OPTIONS
v QUIESCE
v REPAIR
v REPORT
v TEMPLATE
v All DSN stand-alone utilities
|
|
All other utilities are available as a separate product called the DB2 Utilities Suite
(5655-N97, FMIDs JDB991K), which includes the following utilities:
v BACKUP SYSTEM
v CHECK DATA
v CHECK INDEX
v CHECK LOB
v COPY
v COPYTOCOPY
v EXEC SQL
v LOAD
v MERGECOPY
v MODIFY RECOVERY
v MODIFY STATISTICS
v REBUILD INDEX
v RECOVER
v REORG INDEX
v REORG TABLESPACE
v RESTORE SYSTEM
v RUNSTATS
v STOSPACE
v UNLOAD
All DB2 utilities operate on catalog, directory, and sample objects, without
requiring any additional products.
SMP/E jobs for DB2 utility products

To load the DB2 utility products, use System Modification Program Extended
(SMP/E). SMP/E processes the installation cartridges and creates DB2 distribution
target libraries.
DB2 provides several jobs that invoke SMP/E. These jobs are on the cartridge that
you received with the utility product. The job prologues in these jobs contain
directions on how to tailor the job for your site. Follow these directions carefully to
ensure that your DB2 Utilities Suite SMP/E process works correctly.
|
|
|
The SMP/E RECEIVE job, DSNRECVK, loads the DB2 Utilities Suite Version 9
program modules, macros, and procedures into temporary data sets (SMPTLIBs). If
these jobs fail or abnormally terminate, correct the problem and rerun the jobs.
|
|
|
The SMP/E APPLY job, DSNAPPLK, copies and link-edits the program modules,
macros, and procedures for the DB2 Utilities Suite Version 9 into the DB2 target
libraries.
|
|
The SMP/E ACCEPT job, DSNACCPK, copies the program modules, macros, and
procedures for the DB2 Utilities Suite Version 9 into the DB2 distributed libraries.
Related information
SMP/E step 4: Run the receive jobs: DSNRECV1, DSNRECV2, DSNRECV3,
DSNRECV4 (DB2 Installation Guide)
SMP/E step 6: Run the apply job: DSNAPPL1 (DB2 Installation Guide)
SMP/E step 7: Run the accept job: DSNACEP1 (DB2 Installation Guide)
The operation of DB2 utilities in a mixed-release data sharing

environment
The utilities batch module, DSNUTILB, is split into multiple parts: a
release-independent module called DSNUTILB and multiple release-dependent
modules, DSNUT910 and the utility-dependent load modules that are listed in the
following table.
To operate in a mixed-release data sharing environment, you must have the
release-dependent modules from both releases and all applicable utility-dependent
modules available to the utility jobs that operate across the data sharing group.
The procedure for sharing utility modules is explained in DB2 Data Sharing:
Planning and Administration. Use the information in the following table and the
procedures that are outlined in DB2 Data Sharing: Planning and Administration to
implement a mixed-release data sharing environment.
|
Table 1. Relationship between utility names and load modules
Utility name
Load module name
BACKUP SYSTEM and RESTORE SYSTEM
DSNU91LV
CATMAINT and CATENFM
DSNU91LA
CHECK
DSNU91LB
COPY
DSNU91LC
COPYTOCOPY
DSNU91LT
DIAGNOSE
DSNU91LD
EXEC SQL
DSNU91LU
LISTDEF
DSNU91LE
LOAD
DSNU91LF
MERGECOPY
DSNU91LG
|
|
MODIFY RECOVERY and MODIFY

STATISTICS
DSNU91LH
OPTIONS
DSNU91LI
QUIESCE
DSNU91LJ
REBUILD INDEX
DSNU91LK
Table 1. Relationship between utility names and load modules (continued)
Utility name
Load module name
RECOVER
DSNU91LL
REORG INDEX and REORG TABLESPACE
DSNU91LM
REPAIR
DSNU91LN
REPORT
DSNU91LO
RUNSTATS
DSNU91LP
STOSPACE
DSNU91LQ
TEMPLATE
DSNU91LR
|
|
UNLOAD
DSNU91LS
Chapter 2. DB2 utilities packaging
10
Part 2. DB2 online utilities

DB2 online utilities run as standard batch jobs or stored procedures, and they
require DB2 to be running. They do not run under control of the terminal monitor
program (TMP); they have their own attachment mechanism and they invoke DB2
control facility services directly.
11
12
Chapter 3. Invoking DB2 online utilities

You can invoke DB2 online utilities using one of five methods.
Requirement: In the JCL for all utility jobs, specify a load library that is at a
maintenance level that is compatible with the DB2 system. Otherwise, errors can
occur.
To run DB2 online utilities:
1. Prepare the necessary data sets.
2. Create a utility control statement using the syntax, option descriptions, and
samples.
3. Check for any concurrency and compatibility restrictions.
4. Plan for a restart in case the utility job does not complete.
5. Invoke the online utilities using one of the following methods:
v Use the DB2 Utilities panel in DB2I.
This method involves little involvement with JCL. You can edit the generated
JCL to alter or add necessary fields on the JOB or ROUTE cards before you
submit the job.
Requirement: To use this method you must have TSO and access to the DB2
Utilities Panel in DB2 Interactive (DB2I).
v Use the DSNU CLIST command in TSO.
This method involves little involvement with JCL. You can edit the generated
JCL to alter or add necessary fields on the JOB or ROUTE cards before you
submit the job.
Requirement: To use this method you must have TSO.
v Use the supplied JCL procedure (DSNUPROC).
This method involves working with or creating your own JCL.
v Use the EXEC statement to create the JCL data set yourself.
This method involves working with or creating your own JCL.
v Use the DSNUTILS or DSNUTILT stored procedure.
This method involves invoking online utilities from a DB2 application
program.
Related concepts
Appendix B, DB2-supplied stored procedures, on page 853
Related reference
DSNUTILS stored procedure on page 860
DSNUTILU stored procedure on page 871
DSNACCOR stored procedure on page 874
DSNACCOX stored procedure on page 895
Data sets that online utilities use

Every online utility job requires a SYSIN DD statement to describe an input data
set; some utilities also require other data sets.
13
For input data sets

The online utilities use the logical record length (LRECL), the record
format (RECFM) and the block size (BLKSIZE) with which the data set was
created. Variable-spanned (VS) or variable-blocked-spanned (VBS) record
formats are not allowed for utility input data sets. The only exception is for
the LOAD utility, which accepts unloaded data in VBS format.
For output data sets
The online utilities determine both the logical record length and the record
format. Any specified values for LRECL or RECFM are ignored. If you
supply block size, that size is used; otherwise, the utility lets the system
determine the optimal block size for the storage device. DB2 supports the
large block interface (LBI) that allows block sizes that are greater than 32
KB on certain tape drives. LBI is supported in new function mode (NFM)
only. Partitioned data sets (PDS) are not allowed for output data sets. The
TAPEBLKSZLIM parameter of the DEVSUPxx member of SYS1.PARMLIB
controls the block size limit for tapes. See the z/OS MVS Initialization and
Tuning Guide for more details.
|
|
|
|
For both input and output data sets

The online utilities use the value that you supply for the number of buffers
(BUFNO), with a maximum of 99 buffers. The default number of buffers is
20. The utilities set the number of channel programs equal to the number
of buffers. The parameters that specify the buffer size (BUFSIZE) and the
number of channel programs (NCP) are ignored. If you omit any DCB
parameters, the utilities choose default values.
Increasing the number of buffers (BUFNO) can result in an increase in real
storage utilization and page fixing below the 16-MB line.
Restriction: DB2 does not support the undefined record format (RECFM=U) for
any data set.
Data set concatenation

DB2 utilities let you concatenate unlike input data sets. Therefore, the data sets in a
concatenation list can have different block sizes, logical record lengths, and record
formats. If you want to concatenate variable and fixed-blocked data sets, the logical
record length must be 8 bytes smaller than the block size.
You cannot concatenate output data sets.
Controlling data set disposition

Most data sets need to exist only during utility execution (for example, during
reorganization). However, you must retain several data sets in certain
circumstances:
v Retain the image copy data sets until you no longer need them for recovery.
v Retain the unload data sets if you specify UNLOAD PAUSE, UNLOAD ONLY,
UNLOAD EXTERNAL, or DISCARD for the REORG utility.
v Retain the SYSPUNCH data set if you specify UNLOAD EXTERNAL or
DISCARD for the REORG utility until you no longer need the contents for
subsequent loads.
v Retain the discard data set until you no longer need the contents for subsequent
loads.
14
Because you might need to restart a utility, take the following precautions when
defining the disposition of data sets:
v Use DISP=(NEW,CATLG,CATLG) or DISP=(MOD,CATLG) for data sets that you
want to retain.
v Use DISP=(MOD,DELETE,CATLG) for data sets that you want to discard after
utility execution.
v Use DISP=(NEW,DELETE) for DFSORT SORTWKnn data sets, or refer to
DFSORT Application Programming: Guide for alternatives.
v Do not use temporary data set names.
Preventing unauthorized access to data sets

To prevent unauthorized access to data sets (for example, image copies), you can
protect the data sets with the Resource Access Control Facility (RACF) licensed
program. To use a utility with a data set that is protected by RACF, you must be
authorized to access the data set.
Utility control statements

Utility control statements define the function that the utility job performs.
Create the utility control statements with the ISPF/PDF edit function and use the
rules that are listed below.
After the utility control statements are created, save them in a sequential or
partitioned data set.
Control statement coding rules

DB2 typically reads utility control statements from the SYSIN data set. DB2 can
read LISTDEF control statements from the SYSLISTD data set and TEMPLATE
control statements from the SYSTEMPL data set. The statements in these data sets
must obey the following rules:
v If the records are 80-character fixed-length records, DB2 ignores columns 73
through 80.
v The records are concatenated before they are parsed; therefore, a statement or
any of its syntactical constructs can span more than one record. No continuation
character is necessary.
v All control statements in a given data set must be written entirely in a single
character set. Two character sets are supported, EBCDIC (code page 500) or
Unicode UTF-8 (code page 1208). DB2 automatically detects and processes
Unicode UTF-8 control statements if the first character of the data set is:
A Unicode UTF-8 blank (x20)
A Unicode UTF-8 dash (x2D)
A Unicode UTF-8 upper case A through Z (x41 through x5A)
In all other cases, the control statement data set is processed as EBCDIC. An
informational message is issued to identify the character set that is being
processed.
v The utility statement must start with the syntax for a utility.
v Other syntactical constructs in the utility control statement describe options; you
can separate these constructs with an arbitrary number of blanks.
v The SYSIN stream can contain multiple utility control statements.
15
The options that you can specify after the online utility name depend on which
online utility you use. To specify a utility option, specify the option keyword,
followed by its associated parameter or parameters, if any. The parameter value
can be a keyword. You need to enclose the values of some parameters in
parentheses. The syntax diagrams for utility control statements that are included in
this information show parentheses where they are required.
You can specify more than one utility control statement in the SYSIN stream.
However, if any of the control statements returns a return code of 8 or greater, the
subsequent statements in the job step are not executed.
When specifying in a utility control statement multiple numeric values that are
meant to be delimited, you must delimit these values with a comma (,),
regardless of the definition of DECIMAL in DSNHDECP. Likewise, when
specifying a decimal number in a utility control statement, you must use a period
(.), regardless of the definition of DECIMAL in DSNHDECP.
You can enter comments within the SYSIN stream. Comments must begin with two
hyphens (--) and are subject to the following rules:
v You must use two hyphens on the same line with no space between them.
v You can start comments wherever a space is valid, except within a delimiter
token.
v The end of a line terminates a comment.
Two comments are shown in the following statement:
// SYSIN DD *
RUNSTATS TABLESPACE DSNDB06.SYSDBASE
-- COMMENT HERE
/*
-- COMMENT HERE
Tips for using multi-byte character sets
|
|
Multi-byte character sets can be difficult to work with in fixed 80-byte SYSIN data
sets. Long object names and long character literals might not fit on a single line.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Where possible, avoid having to break object names or character literals:

v Use a SYSIN with variable length records or sufficiently large record length.
v Use shorter object names. The longer the name, the more likely there will be
continuation issues.
v If possible, process the object by space name (tablespace or indexspace) and
avoid using long multi-byte table and index names in utility syntax.
|
|
|
|
If necessary, use a continuation technique:

v Shift the starting point of the string left or right within the input record such
that a complete multi-byte character ends in column 72. Continue with the next
character in column 1 of the next input record.
|
|
|
|
v Separate qualified object names into two parts following the dot . which
separates the qualifiers. Separating long names into multiple parts makes it
easier to follow the continuation rules This technique can not be used in the
EXEC SQL utility, which must follow both utility and SQL syntax rules.
|
|
|
|
v Use the || concatenation operator to divide long identifiers into two or more
parts that fit properly into each SYSIN record. Place the || concatenation
operator between two delimited character strings or between two non-delimited
character strings. Delimited character strings are enclosed in double quotation
16
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
marks. The || concatenation operator must be preceded and followed by at

least one blank space. An example of the || concatenation operator is shown in
the following statement:
LOAD INTO TABLE
CREA ||
TOR.
"TABL" ||
"ENAME"
In this example, the strings CREA and TOR are non-delimited, and the strings
TABL and ENAME are delimited by double quotation marks. The processed
output of this example is equivalent to the following statement:
LOAD INTO TABLE CREATOR."TABLENAME"
The utility || operator is ignored in an EXEC SQL control statement by utility

processing since the operator has an existing SQL meaning. The operators
remain part of the SQL statement for subsequent processing by SQL.
Using the concatenation operator
|
|
|
|
|
|
Utility control statements support the || concatenation operator. The operator is

allowed between two non-delimited character strings or two quoted character
strings. The result is a character string consisting of the string following the
operator concatenated after the string preceding the operator. The operation is
shown in the following statement:
|
|
|
|
Both string1 and string2 must be syntactically correct within each SYSIN input
record. Quotes must be balanced within each string. If DBCS characters are used,
shift-out and shift-in characters must be balanced within each string. Any one
multi-byte character must be contained entirely within a single SYSIN record.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The || operator must be entered as a stand-alone token, with one or more blanks
preceding and following it. It may be entered on the same input record as
string1, alone or on an input record, or on the same input record with string2.
This operator functions at the token level before any context is detected or
semantic meaning is applied. An example utility statement is shown in the
following statement:
|
|
|
The utility || operator is ignored in an EXEC SQL control statement by utility

processing since the operator has an existing SQL meaning. The operators remain
part of the SQL statement for subsequent processing by SQL.
string1
||
string2
COPY
INDEX
"A" ||
"B"
results in:
COPY INDEX
"AB"
Descriptions of utility options

Where the syntax of each utility control statement is described, parameters are
indented under the option keyword that they must follow. The following option is
a typical example:
WORKDDN ddname
Specifies a temporary work file.
ddname is the data set name of the temporary file.
The default value is SYSUT1.
17
In the example, WORKDDN is an option keyword, and ddname is a variable

parameter. As noted previously, you can enclose parameter values in parentheses,
but parentheses are not always required. You can specify the temporary work file
as either WORKDDN SYSUT1 or WORKDDN (SYSUT1).
Required authorizations for invoking online utilities on tables that have

multilevel security with row-level granularity
If you use RACF access control with multilevel security, you need additional
authorizations to run certain LOAD, UNLOAD, and REORG TABLESPACE jobs on
tables that have multilevel security with row-level granularity. These authorizations
are explained in the authorization information for each utility.
All other utilities ignore the row-level granularity. They check only for
authorization to operate on the table space; they do not check row-level
authorization.
Related information
Multilevel security (DB2 Administration Guide)
|
Invoking DB2 online utilities in a trusted connection

The DB2 online utilities can run in a trusted connection if a matching trusted
context is defined where the primary authorization ID matches the trusted context
SYSTEM AUTHID and the job name matches the JOBNAME attribute defined for
the identified trusted context. The primary authorization ID can acquire special set
of privileges in a trusted context, by roles.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Using the DB2 Utilities panel in DB2I

If you do not have much JCL knowledge, using the DB2 Utilities panel is probably
the best way to execute the DB2 online utilities.
Restriction: You cannot use the DB2 Utilities panel in DB2I to submit a BACKUP
SYSTEM job, a COPYTOCOPY job, a RESTORE SYSTEM job, or a COPY job for a
list of objects.
If your site does not have default JOB and ROUTE statements, you must edit the
JCL to define them. If you edit the utility job before submitting it, you must use
the ISPF editor and submit your job directly from the editor.
To use the DB2 Utilities panel in DB2I:
1. Create the utility control statement for the online utility that you intend to
execute, and save it in a sequential or partitioned data set. For example, the
following utility control statement specifies that the COPY utility is to make
an incremental image copy of table space DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D with a
SHRLEVEL value of CHANGE:
COPY TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D
FULL NO
SHRLEVEL CHANGE
For the rest of this example, suppose that you save the statement in the
default data set, UTIL.
2. From the ISPF Primary Option menu, select the DB2I menu.
18
3. On the DB2I Utilities panel, select the UTILITIES option. Items that you must
specify are highlighted on the DB2 Utilities panel, as shown in the following
figure.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||
|
DSNEUP01
===>
DB2 UTILITIES
Select from the following:

1 FUNCTION ===> EDITJCL
2 JOB ID
===> TEMP
3 UTILITY ===> COPY
(SUBMIT job, EDITJCL, DISPLAY, TERMINATE)

(A unique job identifier string)
(CHECK DATA, CHECK INDEX, CHECK LOB,
COPY, DIAGNOSE, LOAD, MERGE, MODIFY,
QUIESCE, REBUILD, RECOVER, REORG INDEX,
REORG LOB, REORG TABLESPACE, REPORT,
REPAIR, RUNSTATS, STOSPACE, UNLOAD.)
4 STATEMENT DATA SET
===>
UTIL
Specify restart or preview option, otherwise specify NO.

5 RESTART
===> NO
6 LISTDEF? (YES|NO) ===>

7 LIB ==>
*
(NO, CURRENT, PHASE or PREVIEW)

TEMPLATE? (YES|NO) ===>
(BLANK or DB2 LIB NAME)
The data set names panel will be displayed when required by a utility.
PRESS:
ENTER to process
END to exit
HELP for more information
Figure 1. DB2 Utilities panel
4. Fill in field 1 with the function that you want to execute. In this example, you
want to submit the utility job, but you want to edit the JCL first, so specify
EDITJCL. After you edit the JCL, you do not need to return to this panel to
submit the job. Instead, type SUBMIT on the editor command line.
5. Ensure that Field 2 is a unique identifier for your utility job. The default value
is TEMP. In this example, that value is satisfactory; leave it as is.
6. Fill in field 3 with the utility that you want to run. In this example, specify
COPY.
7. Fill in field 4 if you want to use an input data set other than the default data
set. Unless you enclose the data set name between apostrophes, TSO adds
your user identifier as a prefix. In this example, specify UTIL, which is the
default data set.
8. Change field 5 if this job restarts a stopped utility or if you want to execute a
utility in PREVIEW mode. In this example, leave the default value, NO.
9. Specify in field 6 whether you are using LISTDEF statements or TEMPLATE
statements in this utility. If you specify YES for LISTDEF or TEMPLATE, DB2
displays the Control Statement Data Set Names panel, but the field entries are
optional.
10. Fill in field 7 with the data set name of the DB2 subsystem library when you
want the generated JCL to use the default DB2 subsystem library.
11. Press Enter.
v If you specified COPY, LOAD, MERGECOPY, REORG TABLESPACE, or
UNLOAD as the utility in field 3, you must complete the fields on the Data
Set Names panel, as shown in the following figure.
19
DSNEUP02
===>
DATA SET NAMES
Enter data set name for LOAD or REORG TABLESPACE:

1 RECDSN
==>
Enter data set name for
LOAD, REORG TABLESPACE or UNLOAD:
2 DISCDSN ==>
Enter output data sets for local/current site for COPY, MERGECOPY,
LOAD, or REORG:
3 COPYDSN ==> ABC
4 COPYDSN2 ==>
Enter output data sets for recovery site for COPY, LOAD, or REORG:
5 RCPYDSN1 ==> ABC1
6 RCPYDSN2 ==>
Enter output data sets for REORG or UNLOAD:
7 PUNCHDSN ==>
PRESS: ENTER to process
END to exit
Figure 2. Data Set Names panel
a. Fill in field 1 if you are running LOAD, REORG, or UNLOAD. For

LOAD, you must specify the data set name that contains the records that
are to be loaded. For REORG or UNLOAD, you must specify the unload
data set. In this example, you do not need to fill in field 1, because you
are running COPY.
b. Fill in field 2 if you are running LOAD or REORG with discard
processing, in which case you must specify a discard data set. In this
example, you do not need to fill in field 2, because you are running
COPY.
c. Fill in field 3 with the primary output data set name for the local site if
you are running COPY, LOAD, or REORG, or with the current site if
you are running MERGECOPY. The DD name that the panel generates
for this field is SYSCOPY. This is an optional field for LOAD and for
REORG with SHRLEVEL NONE; this field is required for COPY, for
MERGECOPY, and for REORG with SHRLEVEL REFERENCE or
CHANGE. In this example, the primary output data set name for the
local site is ABC.
d. Fill in field 4 with the backup output data set name for the local site if
you are running COPY, LOAD, or REORG, or the current site if you are
running MERGECOPY. The DD name that the panel generates for this
field is SYSCOPY2. This is an optional field. In this example, you do not
need to fill in field 4.
e. Fill in field 5 with the primary output data set for the recovery site if
you are running COPY, LOAD, or REORG. The DD name that the panel
generates for this field is SYSRCOPY1. This is an optional field. In this
example, the primary output data set name for the recovery site is
ABC1.
f. Fill in field 6 with the backup output data set for the recovery site if you
are running COPY, LOAD, or REORG. The DD name that the panel
generates for this field is SYSRCOPY2. This field is optional. In this
example, you do not need to fill in field 6.
g. Fill in field 7 with the output data set for the generated LOAD utility
control statements if you are running REORG UNLOAD EXTERNAL,
20
REORG DISCARD, or UNLOAD. The DD name that the panel generates

for this field is SYSPUNCH. In this example, you do not need to fill in
field 7.
h. Press Enter.
v If you specified LISTDEF YES or TEMPLATE YES in field 6, you must
complete the fields on the Control Set Data Set Names panel, as shown in
the following figure.
DSNEUP03
===>
CONTROL STATEMENT DATA SET NAMES
SSID:
Enter the data set name for the LISTDEF data set (SYSLISTD DD):
1 LISTDEF DSN ===>
OPTIONAL or IGNORED
Enter the data set name for the TEMPLATE data set (SYSTEMPL DD):
2 TEMPLATE DSN ===>
OPTIONAL or IGNORED
PRESS:
ENTER to process
END to exit
Figure 3. Control Statement Data Set Names panel
a. Fill in field 1 to specify the data set that contains a LISTDEF control
statement. The default is the SYSIN data set. This field is ignored if you
specified NO in the LISTDEF? field in the DB2 Utilities panel.
b. Fill in field 2 to specify the data set that contains a TEMPLATE. The
default is the SYSIN data set. This field is ignored if you specified NO in
the TEMPLATE? field in the DB2 Utilities panel.
Related reference
Chapter 15, LISTDEF, on page 185
Chapter 31, TEMPLATE, on page 641
Invoking a DB2 utility by using the DSNU CLIST command in TSO

You can initiate a DB2 online utility by invoking the DSNU CLIST command under
TSO. The CLIST command generates the JCL data set that is required to execute
the DSNUPROC procedure and to execute online utilities as batch jobs. When you
use the CLIST command, you do not need to be concerned with details of the JCL
data set.
Restriction: You cannot use the DSNU CLIST command to submit a COPY job for
a list of objects.
The CLIST command creates a job that performs only one utility operation.
However, you can invoke the CLIST command for each utility operation that you
need, and then edit and merge the outputs into one job or step.
To use the DSNU CLIST command, follow these steps:
1. Create a file containing the required utility control statements. DB2 uses the file
to create the SYSIN data set in the generated job stream. Do not include
double-byte character set (DBCS) data in this file.
2. Ensure that the DB2 CLIST library is allocated to the DD name SYSPROC.
3. Execute the command procedure by using the DSNU CLIST command syntax.
21
4. Optional: Edit the generated JCL data set to alter or add DD statements as
needed.
DSNU CLIST command

You can execute the DSNU CLIST command from the TSO command processor or
from the DB2I Utilities panel.
Syntax
DSNU UTILITY(utility-name) INDSN(data-set-name
(member-name)
CONTROL (
NONE
DB2I
NO
DB2I
YES
)

:
control-option
CONTROL (
DISCDSN(data-set-name)
)

COPYDSN(data-set-name)
COPYDSN2(data-set-name)

RCPYDSN1(data-set-name)
RECDSN(data-set-name)
RCPYDSN2(data-set-name)
EDIT (
NO
RESTART (
NO
)

PUNCHDSN (
SUBMIT (
data-set-name )
NO
EDIT
SYSTEM (
SPF
TSO
DSN
RESTART (
CURRENT
PHASE
PREVIEW

SUBMIT (
YES
PROMPT
UNIT
SYSDA )
UNIT
unit-name )
SYSTEM (
subsystem-name
group-attach
UID(utility-id)

VOLUME(vol-ser)
LIB(data-set-name)
DSNU CLIST option descriptions

The parentheses that are shown in the following descriptions are required. If you
make syntax errors or omit parameter values, TSO prompts you for the correct
parameter spelling and omitted values.
% Identifies DSNU as a member of a command procedure library. Specifying this
parameter is optional; however, it does improve performance.
UTILITY (utility-name)
Specifies the utility that you want to execute.
22
|
|
|
|
|
|
DB2 places the JCL in a data set that is named DSNUxxx.CNTL, where
DSNUxxx is a control file name. The control file contains the statements that
are necessary to invoke the DSNUPROC procedure which, in turn, executes the
utility. If you execute another job with the same utility name, the first job is
deleted. See the table below for a list of the online utilities and the control file
name that is associated with each utility.
INDSN(data-set-name(member-name))
Specifies the data set that contains the utility statements and control
statements. Do not specify a data set that contains double-byte character set
data.
(data-set-name)
Specifies the name of the data set. If you do not specify a data set name,
the default command procedure prompts you for the data set name.
(member-name)
Specifies the member name. You must specify the member name if the data
set is partitioned.
CONTROL(control-option: ...)
Specifies whether to trace the CLIST command execution.
NONE
Omits tracing.
control-option
Lists one or more of the following options. Separate items in the list by
colons (:). To abbreviate, specify only the first letter of the option.
LIST
Displays TSO commands after symbolic substitution and before

command execution.
CONLIST
Displays CLIST commands after symbolic substitution and before
command execution.
SYMLIST
Displays all executable statements (TSO commands and CLIST
statements) before the scan for symbolic substitution.
NONE
Generates a CONTROL statement with the options NOLIST,
NOCONLIST, and NOSYMLIST.
DB2I
Indicates the environment from which the DSNU CLIST command is called.
(NO)
Indicates that DSNU CLIST command is not being called from the DB2I
environment.
(YES)
Indicates that DSNU CLIST command is called from the DB2I
environment. Only the utility panels should execute the CLIST command
with DB2I(YES).
DISCDSN (data-set-name)
The name of the cataloged data set that LOAD and REORG use for a discard
data set. For LOAD, this data set holds records that are not loaded; for
REORG, it holds records that are not reloaded.
23
COPYDSN(data-set-name)
The name of the cataloged data set that DB2 utilities use as a target (output)
data set. If you do not supply this information, the CLIST command prompts
you for it. This keyword is optional for LOAD and for REORG with
SHRLEVEL NONE; it is required for COPY, for MERGECOPY, and for REORG
with SHRLEVEL REFERENCE or CHANGE.
COPYDSN2 (data-set-name)
data set for the backup copy. This keyword is optional for COPY,
MERGECOPY, LOAD, and REORG.
RCPYDSN1 (data-set-name)
data set for the remote-site primary copy. This keyword is optional for COPY,
LOAD, and REORG.
RCPYDSN2 (data-set-name)
data set for the remote-site backup copy. This keyword is optional for COPY,
LOAD, and REORG.
RECDSN (data-set-name)
The name of the cataloged data set that LOAD uses for input or that REORG
TABLESPACE or UNLOAD use as the unload data set. If you do not supply
this information, the CLIST command prompts you for it. This keyword is
required for LOAD and REORG TABLESPACE only.
PUNCHDSN (data-set-name)
The name of the cataloged data set that REORG or UNLOAD use to hold the
generated LOAD utility control statements for UNLOAD EXTERNAL or
DISCARD.
EDIT
Specifies whether to invoke an editor to edit the temporary file that the CLIST
command generates.
(NO)
Does not invoke an editor.
(SPF)
Invokes the ISPF editor.
(TSO)
Invokes the TSO editor.
RESTART
Specifies whether this job restarts a current utility job, and, if so, at what point
it is to be restarted.
(NO)
Indicates that the utility is a new job, not a restarted job. The utility
identifier (UID) must be unique for each utility job step.
(CURRENT)
Restarts the utility at the most recent commit point.
(PHASE)
Restarts the utility at the beginning of the current stopped phase. You can
determine the current stopped phase by issuing the DISPLAY UTILITY
command.
24
(PREVIEW)
Restarts the utility in PREVIEW mode. While in PREVIEW mode, the
utility checks for syntax errors in all utility control statements, but normal
utility execution does not take place.
SUBMIT
Specifies whether to submit the generated JCL for processing.
(NO)
Does not submit the JCL data set for processing.
(YES)
Submits the JCL data set for background processing, using the TSO
SUBMIT command.
(PROMPT)
Prompts you, after the data set is processed, to specify whether to submit
the JCL data set for batch processing. You cannot use PROMPT when the
CLIST command is executed in the TSO batch environment.
SYSTEM (subsystem-name)
Specifies the DB2 subsystem or group attach name. The default value is DSN.
UID (utility-id)
Provides a unique identifier for this utility job within DB2. Do not reuse the
utility ID of a stopped utility that has not yet been terminated, unless you
want to restart that utility. If you do use the same utility ID to invoke a
different utility, DB2 tries to restart the original stopped utility with the
information that is stored in the SYSUTIL directory table.
The default value is tso-userid.control-file-name, where control-file-name for each
of the utilities is listed in the following table.
Table 2. Control-file name for each utility
Utility
control-file-name
CHECK INDEX
DSNUCHI
CHECK DATA
DSNUCHD
CHECK LOB
DSNUCHL
COPY
DSNUCOP
DIAGNOSE
DSNUDIA
LOAD
DSNULOA
MERGECOPY
DSNUMER
MODIFY
DSNUMOD
QUIESCE
DSNUQUI
REBUILD INDEX
DSNUREB
RECOVER
DSNUREC
REORG INDEX
DSNURGI
REORG LOB
DSNURGL
REORG TABLESPACE
DSNURGT
REPAIR
DSNUREP
REPORT
DSNURPT
RUNSTATS
DSNURUN
STOSPACE
DSNUSTO
25
Table 2. Control-file name for each utility (continued)

Utility
control-file-name
UNLOAD
DSNUUNL
UNIT (unit-name)
Assigns a unit address, a generic device type, or a user-assigned group name
for a device on which a new temporary or permanent data set resides. When
the CLIST command generates the JCL, it places unit-name after the UNIT
clause of the generated DD statement.
The default value is SYSDA.
VOLUME (vol-ser)
Assigns the serial number of the volume on which a new temporary or
permanent data set resides. When the CLIST command generates the JCL, it
places vol-ser after the VOL=SER clause of the generated DD statement. If you
omit VOLUME, the VOL=SER clause is omitted from the generated DD
statement.
LIB (data-set-name)
Specifies the data set name of the DB2 subsystem library. The value that you
specify is used as the LIB parameter value when the DSNUPROC JCL
procedure is invoked.
|
|
|
|
DSNU CLIST command output

DSNU builds a one-step job stream. The JCL data set consists of a JOB statement,
an EXEC statement that executes the DB2 utility processor, and the required DD
statements. This JOB statement also includes the SYSIN DD * job stream, as shown
in the following figure. You can edit any of these statements.
//DSNUCOP JOB your-job-statement-parameters
//
USER=userid,PASSWORD=password
//*ROUTE PRINT routing-information
//UTIL
EXEC DSNUPROC,SYSTEM=DSN,UID=TEMP,UTPROC='
//SYSCOPY
DD
DSN=MYCOPIES.DSN8D91A.JAN1,DISP=(MOD,CATLG,CATLG),
//
UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(1,1))
//SYSIN
DD
*
COPY TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D
FULL NO
SHRLEVEL CHANGE
/*
Figure 4. Control file DSNUCOP.CNTL. This is an example of the JCL data set before editing.
The following list describes the required JCL data set statements:
Statement
Description
JOB
The CLIST command uses any JOB statements that you saved when using
DB2I. If no JOB statements exist, DB2 produces a skeleton JOB statement
that you can modify. The job name is DSNU, followed by the first three
letters of the name of the utility that you are using.
EXEC The CLIST command builds the EXEC statement. The values that you
specified for SYSTEM (DSN, by default), UID(TEMP), and RESTART (none)
become the values of SYSTEM, UID, and UTPROC for the DSNUPROC.
26
The CLIST command builds the necessary JCL DD statements. Those statements
vary depending on the utility that you execute. The following DD statements are
generated by the CLIST command:
SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=A
Defines OUTPUT, SYSPRINT as SYSOUT=A. Utility messages are sent to the
SYSPRINT data set. You can use the TSO command to control the disposition
of the SYSPRINT data set. For example, you can send the data set to your
terminal. For more information, see z/OS TSO/E Command Reference.
UTPRINT DD SYSOUT=A
Defines UTPRINT as SYSOUT=A. If any utility requires a sort, it executes
DFSORT. Messages from that program are sent to UTPRINT.
SYSIN DD *
Defines SYSIN. To build the SYSIN DD * job stream, DSNU copies the data set
that is named by the INDSN parameter. The INDSN data set does not change,
and you can reuse it when the DSNU procedure has finished running.
Editing the generated JCL data set

You can edit the data set before you process it by using the EDIT parameter on the
command procedure. Use the editor to add a JCL statement to the job stream, to
change JCL parameters (such as ddnames), or to change utility control statements.
If you use a ddname that is not the default on a utility statement that you use, you
must change the ddname in the JCL that is generated by the DSNU procedure. For
example, in the REORG TABLESPACE utility, the default option for UNLDDN is
SYSREC, and DSNU builds a SYSREC DD statement for REORG TABLESPACE. If
you use a different value for UNLDDN, you must edit the JCL data set and change
SYSREC to the ddname that you used.
When you finish editing the data set, you can either save changes to the data set
(by issuing SAVE), or instruct the editor to ignore all changes.
The SUBMIT parameter specifies whether to submit the data set statement as a
background job. The temporary data set that holds the JCL statement is reused. If
you want to submit more than one job that executes the same utility, you must
rename the JCL data sets and submit them separately.
Example 1: Generating a data set

The following CLIST command statement generates a data set that is called
authorization-id.DSNURGT.CNTL and that contains JCL statements that invoke the
DSNUPROC procedure.
%DSNU UTILITY(REORG TABLESPACE) INDSN(MYREOR.DATA)
RECDSN(MYREOR.WORK) RESTART(NO)
EDIT(TSO) SUBMIT(YES)
The DSNUPROC procedure invokes the REORG TABLESPACE utility. The

MYREOR.DATA data set is merged into the JCL data set as SYSIN input.
MYREOR.WORK is a temporary data set that is required by REORG
TABLESPACE. The TSO editor is invoked to allow editing of the JCL data set,
authorization-id.DSNURGT.CNTL. The TSO editor then submits the JCL data set as
a batch job. This JCL data set is not modified by this CLIST command statement
until a new request is made to execute the REORG TABLESPACE utility.
27
Example 2: Invoking the CLIST command for the COPY utility

The following example shows how to invoke the CLIST command for the COPY
utility.
%DSNU
UTILITY (COPY)
INDSN ('MYCOPY(STATEMNT)')
COPYDSN ('MYCOPIES.DSN8D91A.JAN1')
EDIT (TSO)
SUBMIT (YES)
UID (TEMP)
RESTART (NO)
Invoking a DB2 utility by using the supplied JCL procedure

(DSNUPROC)
Another method of invoking a DB2 online utility uses the supplied JCL procedure,
DSNUPROC, which is shown in the figure below. This procedure uses the
parameters that you supply to build an appropriate EXEC statement that executes
an online utility.
To execute the DSNUPROC procedure, write and submit a JCL data set like the
one that the DSNU CLIST command builds (An example is shown in Figure 4 on
page 26.) In your JCL, the EXEC statement executes the DSNUPROC procedure.
DSNUPROC syntax
LIB=prefix.SSPGM
,SIZE=OM
,SYSTEM=DSN
LIB=DB2library-name
,SIZE=region-size
,SYSTEM=subsytem-name
DSNUPROC
,UID=
,UTPROC=
,UID=utility-qualifier
,UTPROC=

RESTART
RESTART(CURRENT)
RESTART(PHASE)
PREVIEW
DSNUPROC option descriptions

The following list describes all the parameters. For example, in Figure 4 on page
26, you need to use only one parameter, UID=TEMP; for all others, you can use the
default values.
LIB=
Specifies the data set name of the DB2 subsystem library.
The default value is prefix.SSPGM.
SIZE=
Specifies the region size of the utility execution area; that is, the value
represents the number of bytes of virtual storage that are allocated to this
utility job.
The default value is 0M.
28
SYSTEM=
Specifies the DB2 subsystem or group attach name.
The default value is DSN.
UID=
Specifies the unique identifier for your utility job. The maximum name length
is 16 characters. If the name contains special characters, enclose the entire
name between apostrophes (for example, PETERS.JOB). Do not reuse the
utility ID of a stopped utility that has not yet been terminated. If you do use
the same utility ID to invoke a different utility, DB2 tries to restart the original
stopped utility with the information that is stored in the SYSUTIL directory
table.
The default is an empty string.
|
|
|
|
UTPROC=
Controls restart processing. The default is an empty string. Use the default if
you want to allow DB2 to perform default restart processing as documented in
Restart of an online utility on page 36.
To override the default restart behavior, specify:
RESTART
To restart at the most recent commit point. This option has the same
meaning as RESTART(CURRENT).
RESTART(CURRENT)
meaning as RESTART.
RESTART(PHASE)
To restart at the beginning of the phase that executed most recently.
PREVIEW
To restart in preview mode. While in PREVIEW mode, the utility
checks for syntax errors in all utility control statements, but normal
utility execution does not take place.
The DSNUPROC procedure provides the SYSPRINT and UTPRINT DD statements
for printed output. You must provide DD statements for SYSIN and other data sets
that your job needs. See Data sets that online utilities use on page 13 for a
description of data sets that you might need.
Sample DSNUPROC listing

The following figure is the DSNUPROC procedure that was executed by the JCL
example in Figure 4 on page 26.
//DSNUPROC PROC LIB='DSN!!0.SDSNLOAD',
//
SYSTEM=DSN,
//
SIZE=0K,UID='',UTPROC=''
//********************************************************************
//* PROCEDURE-NAME:
DSNUPROC
//*
//* DESCRIPTIVE-NAME:
UTILITY PROCEDURE
//*
//* FUNCTION: THIS PROCEDURE INVOKES THE ADMF UTILITIES IN THE
//*
BATCH ENVIRONMENT
//*
//* PROCEDURE-OWNER:
UTILITY COMPONENT
//*
//* COMPONENT-INVOKED:
ADMF UTILITIES (ENTRY POINT DSNUTILB).
//*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
29
//* ENVIRONMENT:
BATCH
*
//*
*
//* INPUT:
*
//*
PARAMETERS:
*
//*
LIB
= THE DATA SET NAME OF THE DB2 PROGRAM LIBRARY. *
//*
THE DEFAULT LIBRARY NAME IS PREFIX.SDSNLOAD,
*
//*
WITH PREFIX SET DURING INSTALLATION.
*
//*
SIZE
= THE REGION SIZE OF THE UTILITIES EXECUTION AREA.*
//*
THE DEFAULT REGION SIZE IS 2048K.
*
//*
SYSTEM = THE SUBSYSTEM NAME USED TO IDENTIFY THIS JOB
*
//*
TO DB2. THE DEFAULT IS "DSN".
*
//*
UID
= THE IDENTIFIER WHICH WILL DEFINE THIS UTILITY
*
//*
JOB TO DB2. IF THE PARAMETER IS DEFAULTED OR
*
//*
SET TO A NULL STRING, THE UTILITY FUNCTION WILL *
//*
USE ITS DEFAULT, USERID.JOBNAME. EACH UTILITY *
//*
WHICH HAS STARTED AND IS NOT YET TERMINATED
*
//*
(MAY NOT BE RUNNING) MUST HAVE A UNIQUE UID.
*
//*
UTPROC = AN OPTIONAL INDICATOR USED TO DETERMINE WHETHER *
//*
THE USER WISHES TO INITIALLY START THE REQUESTED*
//*
UTILITY OR TO RESTART A PREVIOUS EXECUTION OF
*
//*
THE UTILITY. IF OMITTED, THE UTILITY WILL
*
//*
BE INITIALLY STARTED. OTHERWISE, THE UTILITY
*
//*
WILL BE RESTARTED BY ENTERING THE FOLLOWING
*
//*
VALUES:
*
//*
RESTART(PHASE) = RESTART THE UTILITY AT THE *
//*
BEGINNING OF THE PHASE EXECUTED
*
//*
LAST.
*
//*
RESTART = RESTART THE UTILITY AT THE LAST
*
//*
OR CURRENT COMMIT POINT.
*
//*
*
//* OUTPUT: NONE.
*
//*
*
//* EXTERNAL-REFERENCES: NONE.
*
//*
*
//* CHANGE-ACTIVITY:
*
//*
*
//**********************************************************************
//DSNUPROC EXEC PGM=DSNUTILB,REGION=&SIZE,
//
PARM='&SYSTEM,&UID,&UTPROC'
//STEPLIB DD
DSN=&LIB,DISP=SHR
//**********************************************************************
//*
*
//* THE FOLLOWING DEFINE THE UTILITIES' PRINT DATA SETS
*
//*
*
//**********************************************************************
//*
//SYSPRINT DD
SYSOUT=*
//UTPRINT DD
SYSOUT=*
//SYSUDUMP DD
SYSOUT=*
//*DSNUPROC PEND
REMOVE * FOR USE AS INSTREAM PROCEDURE
Figure 5. Sample listing of supplied JCL procedure DSNUPROC
Invoking a DB2 utility by creating the JCL data set yourself

DB2 online utilities execute as standard z/OS jobs.
To execute the utility, you must supply the JOB statement that is required by your
installation and the JOBLIB or STEPLIB DD statements that are required to access
DB2. You must also include an EXEC statement and a set of DD statements. The
EXEC statement and the DD statements that you might need are described in
Data sets that online utilities use on page 13.
30
Recommendation: Use DSNUPROC to invoke a DB2 online utility, rather than

creating the JCL yourself.
The EXEC statement can be a procedure that contains the required JCL, or it can be
of the following form:
//stepname
EXEC PGM=DSNUTILB,PARM='system,[uid],[utproc]'
The brackets, [ ], indicate optional parameters. The parameters have the following
meanings:
DSNUTILB
Specifies the utility control program. The program must reside in an
APF-authorized library.
system
Specifies the DB2 subsystem.
uid
The unique identifier for your utility job. Do not reuse the utility ID of a
stopped utility that has not yet been terminated. If you do use the same utility
ID to invoke a different utility, DB2 tries to restart the original stopped utility
with the information that is stored in the SYSUTIL directory table.
utproc
The value of the UTPROC parameter in the DSNUPROC procedure. Specify
this option only when you want to restart the utility job. Specify:
RESTART
meaning as RESTART(CURRENT).
RESTART(CURRENT)
To restart the utility at the most recent commit point. This option has
the same meaning as RESTART.
RESTART(PHASE)
To restart at the beginning of the phase that executed most recently.
RESTART(PREVIEW)
To restart the utility in preview mode. While in PREVIEW mode, the
utility checks for syntax errors in all utility control statements, but
normal utility execution does not take place.
For the example in Figure 5 on page 30 you can use the following EXEC statement:
//stepname
EXEC PGM=DSNUTILB,PARM='DSN,TEMP'
31
32
Chapter 4. Monitoring and controlling online utilities

You can monitor utilities, run utilities concurrently, terminate utilities, and restart
utilities.
Monitoring utilities with the DISPLAY UTILITY command

Use the DB2 DISPLAY UTILITY command to check the current status of online
utilities.
The following figure shows an example of the output that the DISPLAY
UTILITY command generates. In the example output, DB2 returns a message that
indicates the member name (A), utility identifier (B), utility name (C), utility
phase (D), the number of pages or records that are processed by the utility (In a
data sharing environment, the number of records is current when the command is
issued from the same member on which the utility is executing. When the
command is issued from a different member, the count might lag substantially. For
some utilities in some build phases, the count number is not updated when the
command is issued from a different member.) (E), the number of objects in the
list (F), the last object that started (G), and the utility status (H). The output
might also report additional information about an executing utility, such as log
phase estimates or utility subtask activity.
DSNU100I - DSNUGDIS - USERID = SAMPID
A MEMBER = DB1G
B UTILID = RUNTS
PROCESSING UTILITY STATEMENT 1
CUTILITY = RUNSTATS
D PHASE = RUNSTATS E COUNT = 0
F
NUMBER OF OBJECTS IN LIST = n
G
LAST OBJECT STARTED = m
H STATUS = STOPPED
DSN9022I - DSNUGCC '-DISPLAY UTILITY' NORMAL COMPLETION
Figure 6. DISPLAY UTILITY command sample output
Determining the status of a utility

To determine the status of an online utility, look at the status part (H) of the
DISPLAY UTILITY output. An online utility can have one of these statuses:
Status Description
Active The utility has started execution.
Stopped
The utility has abnormally stopped executing before completion, but the
table spaces and indexes that were accessed by the utility remain under
utility control. To make the data available again, you must take one of the
following actions:
v Correct the condition that stopped the utility, and restart the utility so
that it runs to termination.
v Terminate the utility with the DB2 TERM UTILITY command.
33
Terminated
The utility has been requested to terminate by the DB2 TERM UTILITY
command. If the utility has terminated, no message is issued.
Determining which utility phase is currently executing

DB2 online utility execution is divided into phases. Each utility starts with the
UTILINIT phase, which performs initialization and set up. Each utility finishes
with a UTILTERM phase, which cleans up after processing has completed. The
other phases of online utility execution differ, depending on the utility. See the
Execution Phases information in the descriptions of each utility. To determine
which utility phase is currently executing, look at the output from the DISPLAY
UTILITY command. The example output in the figure above shows the current
phase (D).
Determining why a utility failed to complete

If an online utility job completes normally, it issues return code 0. If it completes
with warning messages, it issues return code 4. Return code 8 means that the job
failed to complete. Return code 12 means that an authorization error occurred.
To determine why a utility failed to complete, consider the following problems that
can cause a failure during execution of the utility:
v Problem: DB2 terminates the utility job step and any subsequent utility steps.
Solution: Submit a new utility job to execute the terminated steps. Use the same
utility identifier for the new job to ensure that no duplicate utility job is running.
v Problem: DB2 does not execute the particular utility function, but prior utility
functions are executed.
Solution: Submit a new utility step to execute the function.
v Problem: DB2 places the utility function in the stopped state.
Solution: Restart the utility job step at either the last commit point or the
beginning of the phase by using the same utility identifier. Alternatively, use a
TERM UTILITY (uid) command to terminate the job step and resubmit it.
v Problem: DB2 terminates the utility and issues return code 8.
Solution: One or more objects might be in a restrictive or advisory status.
Alternatively, a DEADLINE condition in online REORG might have terminated
the reorganization.
Related concepts
Termination of an online utility with the TERM UTILITY command on page 36
Related tasks
Using the DBD statement on page 555
Related reference
Chapter 24, REORG INDEX, on page 419
Running utilities concurrently

Some online utilities allow other utilities and SQL statements to run concurrently
on the same target object.
34
To determine if utilities can be run concurrently, look in the compatibility and

concurrency topic for each online utility. Each concurrency and compatibility topic
includes the following information:
v For each target object on which the utility acts, the topic outlines the claim
classes that the utility must claim or drain. The topic also outlines the restrictive
state that the utility sets on the target object.
v For other online utilities, the topic summarizes the compatibility of the utility
with the same target object. If two actions are compatible on a target object, they
can run simultaneously on that object in separate applications. If compatibility
depends on particular options of a utility, that dependency is also shown.
If the utility supports parallelism, it can use additional threads to support the
parallel subtasking. Consider increasing the values of subsystem parameters that
control threads, such as MAX BATCH CONNECT and MAX USERS.
Related information
Claims and drains for concurrency control (DB2 SQL Reference)
Thread management panel: DSNTIPE (DB2 Installation Guide)
Online utilities in a data sharing environment

You can run online utilities in a data sharing environment.
Submission of online utility jobs in a data sharing environment

When you submit a utility job, you must specify the name of the DB2 subsystem to
which the utility is to attach or the group attach name. If you do not use the group
attach name, the utility job must run on the z/OS system where the specified DB2
subsystem is running. Ensure that the utility job runs on the appropriate z/OS
system. You must use one of several z/OS installation-specific statements to make
sure this happens. These include:
v For JES2 multi-access spool (MAS) systems, insert the following statement into
the utility JCL:
/*JOBPARM SYSAFF=cccc
v For JES3 systems, insert the following statement into the utility JCL:
//*MAIN SYSTEM=(main-name)
The preceding JCL statements are described in z/OS MVS JCL Reference. Your
installation might have other mechanisms for controlling where batch jobs run,
such as by using job classes.
Stop and restart of utilities in a data sharing environment

In a data sharing environment, you can terminate an active utility by using the
TERM UTILITY command only on the DB2 subsystem on which it was started. If a
DB2 subsystem fails while a utility is in progress, you must restart that DB2
subsystem, and then you can terminate the utility from any system.
You can restart a utility only on a member that is running the same DB2 release
level as the member on which the utility job was originally submitted. The same
utility ID (UID) must be used to restart the utility. That UID is unique within a
data sharing group. However, if DB2 fails, you must restart DB2 on either the same
or another z/OS system before you restart the utility.
35
Termination of an online utility with the TERM UTILITY command

You can terminate online utilities with the TERM UTILITY command
Use the TERM UTILITY command to terminate the execution of an active
utility or to release the resources that are associated with a stopped utility.
Restriction: If the utility was started in a previous release of DB2, issue the TERM
UTILITY command from that release.
After you issue the TERM UTILITY command, you cannot restart the terminated
utility job. The objects on which the utility was operating might be left in an
indeterminate state. In many cases, you cannot rerun the same utility without first
recovering the objects on which the utility was operating. The situation varies,
depending on the utility and the phase that was in process when you issued the
command. These considerations about the state of the object are particularly
important when terminating the COPY, LOAD, and REORG utilities.
In a data sharing environment, TERM UTILITY is effective for active utilities when
the command is submitted from the DB2 subsystem that originally issued the
command. You can terminate a stopped utility from any active member of the data
sharing group.
Restriction: In a data sharing coexistence environment, you can terminate a utility
only on the same release in which the utility was started.
If the utility is active, TERM UTILITY terminates it at the next commit point. It
then performs any necessary cleanup operations.
You might choose to put TERM UTILITY in a conditionally executed job step; for
example, if you never want to restart certain utility jobs. the following figure
shows a sample job stream.
//TERM EXEC PGM=IKJEFT01,COND=((8,GT,S1),EVEN)
//*
//**********************************************************
//* IF THE PREVIOUS UTILITY STEP, S1, ABENDS, ISSUE A
//* TERMINATE COMMAND. IT CANNOT BE RESTARTED.
//**********************************************************
//*
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=A
//SYSTSPRT DD SYSOUT=A
//SYSOUT
DD SYSOUT=A
//SYSUDUMP DD SYSOUT=A
//SYSTSIN DD *
DSN SYSTEM(DSN)
-TERM UTILITY(TEMP)
END
/*
Figure 7. Example of conditionally executed TERM UTILITY
Alternatively, consider specifying the TIMEOUT TERM parameter for some online
REORG situations.
Restart of an online utility

If a utility finishes abnormally, you might be able to restart it.
36
With the autonomic restart procedure, you avoid repeating much of the work that
the utility has already done.
Before you restart a job, correct the problem that caused the utility job to stop.
Then resubmit the job. DB2 recognizes the utility ID and restarts the utility job if
possible. DB2 retrieves information about the stopped utility from the SYSUTIL
directory table.
Do not reuse the utility ID of a stopped utility that has not yet been terminated,
unless you want to restart that utility. If you do use the same utility ID to invoke a
different utility, DB2 tries to restart the original stopped utility with the
information that is stored in the SYSUTIL directory table.
Two different methods of restart are available:
v You can do a phase restart from the beginning of the phase that was being
processed. This method is indicated by the value RESTART(PHASE).
v You can do a current restart from the last checkpoint that was taken during the
execution of the utility phase. If the utility phase does not take any checkpoints
or has not reached the first checkpoint, current restart is equivalent to phase
restart. This method is indicated by the value RESTART or
RESTART(CURRENT).
For each utility, DB2 uses the default RESTART value that is specified in the
following table. For a complete description of the restart behavior for an individual
utility, including any phase restrictions, refer to the restart topic for that utility.
You can override the default RESTART value by specifying the RESTART
parameter in the original JCL data set. DB2 ignores the RESTART parameter if you
are submitting the utility job for the first time. For instructions on how to specify
this parameter, see the following table.
Table 3. Default RESTART values for each utility
Utility
Default RESTART value
BACKUP SYSTEM
RESTART(CURRENT)
CATMAINT
No restart
CHECK DATA
RESTART(CURRENT)
CHECK INDEX
RESTART(CURRENT)
CHECK LOB
RESTART(CURRENT)
COPY
RESTART(CURRENT)
COPYTOCOPY
RESTART(CURRENT)
DIAGNOSE
Restarts from the beginning
EXEC SQL
LISTDEF
LOAD
RESTART(CURRENT) or RESTART(PHASE)1
MERGECOPY
RESTART(PHASE)
MODIFY RECOVERY
RESTART(CURRENT)
MODIFY STATISTICS
RESTART(CURRENT)
OPTIONS
QUIESCE
RESTART(CURRENT)
37
Table 3. Default RESTART values for each utility (continued)

Utility
Default RESTART value
REBUILD INDEX
RESTART(PHASE)
RECOVER
RESTART(CURRENT)
REORG INDEX
REORG TABLESPACE
REPAIR
No restart
REPORT
RESTART(CURRENT)
RESTORE SYSTEM
RESTART(CURRENT)
RUNSTATS
RESTART(CURRENT)
STOSPACE
RESTART(CURRENT)
TEMPLATE
UNLOAD
RESTART(CURRENT)
Note:
1. The RESTART value that DB2 uses for these utilities depends on the situation.
Refer to the restart topic for each utility for a complete explanation.
If you cannot restart a utility job, you might have to terminate it to make the data
available to other applications. To terminate a utility job, issue the DB2 TERM
UTILITY command. Use the command only if you must start the utility from the
beginning.
Restarting hints
The following guidelines provide additional information about restarting utilities:
v If the data set is not dynamically allocated, ensure that the DD name that is
specified in the restart JCL matches the DD name for the original job; dont
change DD names on a restart job. If the data set is dynamically allocated, the
file sequence numbers must match for the restart and the original run. In either
case, if the data set is not cataloged, any explicit specification of VOLSERs must
match for the restart and the original job. If you copy a work data set, such as
SYSUT1, after an ABENDB37, and the number of volumes changes, do not
specify RESTART CURRENT. If you do, ABEND 413-1C occurs. To prevent this
abend, start the utility in RESTART(PHASE).
v When restarting a utility with cataloged data sets, do not specify VOLSER. Let
DB2 determine the VOLSER of the data sets from the system catalog.
v Do not change the utility function that is currently stopped and the DB2 objects
on which it is operating. However, you can change other parameters that are
related to the stopped step and to subsequent utility steps.
v Do not specify z/OS automatic step restart.
v If a utility is restarted in the UTILINIT phase, it is re-executed from the
beginning of the phase.
v Run the RUNSTATS utility after the completion of a restarted LOAD, REBUILD
INDEX, or REORG job with the STATISTICS option. When you restart these jobs,
DB2 does not collect inline statistics. The exception is REORG UNLOAD PAUSE;
when restarted after the pause, REORG UNLOAD PAUSE collects statistics.
v Ensure that the required data sets are properly defined.
38
Recommendation: Allocate the data sets by using TEMPLATE statements that

do not specify the DISP and SPACE parameter values. When these parameters
are not specified, DB2 determines the correct disposition and size of these data
sets.
v When using the DSNUTILS stored procedure, specify NONE or ANY for the
utility-name parameter. These values suppress the dynamic allocation that is
normally performed by DSNUTILS. You can then specify TEMPLATE statements
(in the utstmt parameter) to allocate the necessary data sets.
Restart is not always possible. The restrictions applying to the phases of each
utility are discussed under the description of each utility.
Using the RESTART parameter

You can use the RESTART parameter to override the default RESTART value.
You do not need to use the RESTART parameter to restart a utility job. When you
resubmit a job that finished abnormally and has not been terminated, DB2
automatically recognizes the utility ID from the SYSUTIL directory table and
restarts the utility job if possible. However, if you want to override the default
RESTART value, you can update the original JCL data set by adding the RESTART
parameter. Any RESTART values that you specify always override the default
values. DB2 ignores the RESTART parameter if you are submitting the utility job
for the first time.
To add the RESTART parameter, you can use one of the following three methods:
v Use DB2I.
1. Access the DB2 Utilities panel.
2. Fill in the panel fields, as documented in Figure 2 on page 20, except for field
5.
3. Change field 5 to CURRENT or PHASE, depending on the desired method of
restart.
4. Press Enter.
v Use the DSNU CLIST command. When you invoke the DSNU CLIST command,
as described in Invoking a DB2 utility by using the DSNU CLIST command in
TSO on page 21, change the value of the RESTART parameter by specifying
either RESTART, RESTART (CURRENT), or RESTART(PHASE).
v Create your own JCL. If you create your own JCL, you can specify RESTART
(CURRENT) or RESTART(PHASE) to override the default RESTART value. You
must also check the DISP parameters on the DD statements. For example, for
DD statements that have DISP=NEW and need to be reused, change DISP to
OLD or MOD. If generation data groups (GDGs) are used and any (+1)
generations were cataloged, ensure that the JCL is changed to GDG (+0) for such
data sets.
Automatically generated JCL normally has DISP=MOD. DISP=MOD allows a
data set to be allocated during the first execution and then reused during a
restart.
When restarting a job that involves templates, DB2 automatically changes the
disposition from NEW to MOD. Therefore, you do not need to change template
specifications for restart.
39
Adding or deleting utility statements

During restart processing, DB2 remembers the relative position of the stopped
utility statement in the input stream. Therefore, you must include all the original
utility statements when restarting any online utility; however, you can add or
delete DIAGNOSE statements.
Modifying utility control statements

When restarting a utility job, do not change any EXEC SQL or OPTIONS utility
control statements that have been executed prior to the stopped utility, if possible.
If you must change these utility control statements, use caution; any changes can
cause the restart processing to fail. For example, if you specify a valid OPTIONS
statement in the initial invocation, and then on restart, specify OPTIONS
PREVIEW, the restart fails.
Use caution when changing LISTDEF lists prior to a restart. When DB2 restarts list
processing, it uses a saved copy of the list. Modifying the LISTDEF list that is
referred to by the stopped utility has no effect. Only control statements that follow
the stopped utility are affected.
Do not change the position of any other utilities that have been executed.
Restarting after the output data set is full

You can restart a job at the last commit point after the output data set is full.
If a utility job terminates with an out-of-space condition on the output data set and
you want to restart the job at the last commit point, follow these steps:
1. Copy the output data set to a temporary data set. Use the same DCB
parameters. Use z/OS utilities that do not reblock the data set during the copy
operation (for example, DFDSS ADRDSUU or DFSORT ICEGENER). Avoid
using the IEBGENER or ISPF 3.3 utilities.
2. Delete or rename the output data set. Ensure that you know the current DCB
parameters, and then redefine the data set with additional space. Use the same
VOLSER (if the data set is not cataloged), the same DSNAME, and the same
DCB parameters.
3. Copy the data from the temporary data set into the new, larger output data set.
Use z/OS utilities that do not reblock the data set during the copy operation
(for example, DFDSS ADRDSUU or DFSORT ICEGENER).
Restarting with templates

Unlike most other utility control statements, TEMPLATE control statements can be
modified before restarting a utility, and, in some cases, they must be modified in
order to correct a prior failure.
Use caution when modifying templates. In some cases, modifications can cause
restart processing to fail. For example, if you change the template name of a
temporary work data set that was opened in an earlier phase and closed but is to
be used later, restart processing fails.
TEMPLATE allocation during a restart automatically adjusts data set dispositions
to reallocate the data sets from the prior execution. No modification to the
TEMPLATE DISP is required. If the prior failure was due to space problems on a
data set, the same restart considerations apply as if DD statements were being
used. If the prior failure was due to insufficient space on a volume, you can alter
40
the TEMPLATE statement. How the TEMPLATE statement needs to be altered

depends on whether the SPACE keyword was specified. If SPACE was specified,
specify a different volume or alter the primary and secondary space quantities. If
SPACE was not specified, specify a different volume or add the PCTPRIME and
NBRSECND keywords. Lower PCTPRIME to decrease the size of the primary
allocation, and increase NBRSECND to decrease the size of the secondary
allocation. DB2 takes checkpoints for the values that are used for TEMPLATE DSN
variables, and the old values are reused on restart.
How DB2 restarts with lists

Unlike other utility control statements, LISTDEF control statements can be
modified before restarting a utility. However, the modification does not affect the
currently running utility. It affects only those utilities that follow it.
If the utility that you are restarting was processing a LIST, you will see a list size
that is greater than 1 on the DSNU100 or DSNU105 message. DB2 checkpoints the
expanded, enumerated list contents prior to executing the utility. DB2 uses this
checkpointed list to restart the utility at the point of failure. After a successful
restart, the LISTDEF is re-expanded before subsequent utilities in the same job step
use it.
41
42
Chapter 5. BACKUP SYSTEM

The online BACKUP SYSTEM utility invokes z/OS DFSMShsm (Version 1 Release
7 or above) to copy the volumes on which the DB2 data and log information
resides for either a DB2 subsystem or data sharing group.
|
|
|
|
You can use BACKUP SYSTEM to copy all data for a single application (for
example, when DB2 is the database server for a resource planning solution). All
data sets that you want to copy must be SMS-managed data sets. You can
subsequently run the RESTORE SYSTEM utility to recover the entire system.
In a data sharing environment, if any failed or abnormally quiesced members exist,
the BACKUP SYSTEM request fails.
The BACKUP SYSTEM utility uses copy pools. A copy pool is a defined set of
storage groups that contain data that DFSMShsm can backup and recover
collectively. For more information about copy pools, see z/OS DFSMSdfp Storage
Administration Reference.
Each DB2 subsystem can have up to two copy pools, one for databases and one for
logs. BACKUP SYSTEM copies the volumes that are associated with these copy
pools at the time of the copy.
|
|
|
With the BACKUP SYSTEM utility you can manage the dumping of system-level
backups (copy of the database, the log copy pools, or both) to tape. To use this
functionality, you need to have z/OS DFSMShsm V1R8 or above.
To use the DISPLAY UTILITY command for BACKUP SYSTEM on a data sharing
group, you must issue the command from the member on which the BACKUP
SYSTEM utility is invoked. Otherwise, the current utility information is not
displayed.
Output
The output for BACKUP SYSTEM is the copy of the volumes on which the DB2
data and log information resides. The BACKUP SYSTEM history is recorded in the
bootstrap data sets (BSDSs).
Authorization required
To execute this utility, you must use a privilege set that includes SYSCTRL or
SYSADM authority.
Execution phases of BACKUP SYSTEM

The BACKUP SYSTEM utility operates in these phases:
Phase Description
UTILINIT
Performs initialization and setup
COPY Copies data
43
UTILTERM
Performs cleanup
Related information
System-level point-in-time recovery using the BACKUP SYSTEM utility (DB2
Administration Guide)
Syntax and options of the BACKUP SYSTEM control statement

The BACKUP SYSTEM utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines
the function that the utility job performs.
Use the ISPF/PDF edit function to create a control statement and to save it in a
sequential or partitioned data set. When you create the JCL for running the job, use
the SYSIN DD statement to specify the name of the data set that contains the
utility control statement.
When you specify BACKUP SYSTEM, you can specify only the following
statements in the same step:
v DIAGNOSE
v OPTIONS PREVIEW
v OPTIONS OFF
v OPTIONS KEY
v OPTIONS EVENT WARNING
In addition, BACKUP SYSTEM must be the last statement in SYSIN.
Syntax diagram
FULL
BACKUP SYSTEM

DATA ONLY
ESTABLISH FCINCREMENTAL
END FCINCREMENTAL

FORCE
DUMP
dumpclass-spec
FORCE
DUMPONLY
TOKEN (Xbyte-string)
dumpclass-spec:
44
dumpclass-spec
,
DUMPCLASS
dc1
dc2
dc3
dc4
dc5
Option descriptions
FULL
Indicates that you want to copy both the database copy pool and the log copy
pool.
You must ensure that the database copy pool is set up to contain the volumes
for the databases and the associated integrated catalog facility (ICF) catalogs.
You must also ensure that the log copy pool is set up to contain the volumes
for the BSDSs, the active logs, and the associated catalogs.
Use BACKUP SYSTEM FULL to allow for recovery of both data and logs. You
can use the RESTORE SYSTEM utility to recover the data. However, RESTORE
SYSTEM does not restore the logs; the utility only applies the logs. If you want
to restore the logs, you must use another method to restore them.
DATA ONLY
Indicates that you want to copy only the database copy pool. You must ensure
that the database copy pool is set up to contain the volumes for the databases
and the associated ICF catalogs.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Specifies that a persistent incremental FlashCopy relationship is to be
established, if none exists, for source copy volumes in the database copy pool.
Use this keyword once to establish the persistent incremental FlashCopy
relationships. Subsequent invocations of BACKUP SYSTEM (without this
keyword) will automatically process the persistent incremental FlashCopy
relationship.
|
|
|
|
|
END FCINCREMENTAL
Specifies that a last incremental FlashCopy be taken and for the persistent
incremental FlashCopy relationship to be withdrawn for all of the volumes in
the database copy pool. Use this keyword only if no further incremental
FlashCopy backups of the database copy pool are desired.
|
|
|
|
|
FORCE
Indicates that you want to overwrite the oldest DFSMShsm version of the fast
replication copy of the database copy pool. You can overwrite these copy pools
even if the dump to tape or the copy pools DFSMShsm dump classes have
been initiated, but are only partially completed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You should only use the FORCE option if it is more important to take a new
system-level backup than to save a previous system-level backup to tape.
DUMP
Indicates that you want to create a fast replication copy of the database copy
pool and the log copy pool on disk and then initiate a dump to tape of the fast
replication copy. The dump to tape begins after DB2 successfully establishes
relationships for the fast replication copy.
45
|
|
The BACKUP SYSTEM utility does not wait for the dump processing to
complete.
This option requires z/OS Version 1.8.
|
|
|
|
|
DUMPCLASS
Indicates the DFSMShsm dump class that you want to use for the dump
processing. You can specify up to five dump classes. If you do not specify a
dump class, DB2 uses the default dump classes that are defined for the copy
pools.
|
|
|
|
|
DUMPONLY
Indicates that you want to create a dump on tape of an existing fast replication
copy (that is currently residing on the disk) of the database copy pool and the
log copy pool. You can also use this option to resume a dump process that has
failed.
|
|
The BACKUP SYSTEM utility does not wait for the dump processing to
complete.
This option requires z/OS Version 1.8.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
TOKEN (Xbyte-string)
Specifies which fast replication copy of the database copy pool and the log
copy pool to dump to tape. The token is a 36-digit hexadecimal byte string that
uniquely identifies each system-level backup and is reported in the DSNJU0004
job output. For a data sharing system, you should run DSNJU0004 with the
MEMBER option so that the system-level backup information is displayed for
all members.
|
|
If you do not specify TOKEN, the most recent fast replication copy of the copy
pools is dumped to tape.
Before running BACKUP SYSTEM

Certain activities might be required before you run the BACKUP SYSTEM utility,
depending on your situation.
To run BACKUP SYSTEM, ensure that the following conditions are true:
v The data sets that you want to copy are SMS-managed data sets.
v You are running z/OS V1R7 or above.
v You are running z/OS V1R8 or above if you want to use the DUMP,
DUMPONLY, or FORCE options and if you want the RECOVER utility to be
able to use system-level backups for object-level recoveries.
v You have disk control units that support ESS FlashCopy.
v You have defined a copy pool for your database data. If you plan to also copy
the logs, define another copy pool for your logs. Use the DB2 naming
convention for both of these copy pools.
v The ICF catalog for the data must be on a separate volume than the ICF catalog
for the logs.
|
|
|
v You have defined an SMS backup storage group for each storage group in the
copy pools.
For information about defining copy pools and associated backup storage groups,
see z/OS DFSMSdfp Storage Administration Reference. Use the following DB2
naming convention when you define these copy pools:
DSN$locn-name$cp-type
46
The variables that are used in this naming convention have the following
meanings:
DSN
The unique DB2 product identifier.
A delimiter. You must use the dollar sign character ($).
locn-name
The DB2 location name.
cp-type The copy pool type. Use DB for database and LG for log.
Data sets that BACKUP SYSTEM uses

The BACKUP SYSTEM utility uses a number of data sets during its operation.
The following table lists the data sets that the BACKUP SYSTEM utility uses. The
table lists the DD name that is used to identify the data set, a description of the
data set, and an indication of whether it is required. Include statements in your
JCL for each required data set
Table 4. Data sets that BACKUP SYSTEM uses
Data sets
Description
Required?
SYSIN
An input data set that contains the utility

control statement
Yes
SYSPRINT
An output data set for messages
Yes
Concurrency and compatibility for BACKUP SYSTEM

The BACKUP SYSTEM utility has certain concurrency and compatibility
characteristics associated with it
The BACKUP SYSTEM utility can run concurrently with any other utility; however,
it must wait for the following DB2 events to complete before the copy can begin:
v Extending of data sets
v Writing of 32-KB pages
v Writing close page set control log records (PSCRs)
v Creating data sets (for table spaces, indexes, and so forth)
v Deleting data sets (for dropping tables spaces, indexes, and so forth)
v Renaming data sets (for online reorganizing of table spaces, indexes, and so
forth during the SWITCH phase)
Only one BACKUP SYSTEM job can be running at one time.
Dumping a fast replication copy to tape

You can dump a fast replication copy of a system-level backup to tape to manage
the available disk space, retain the system-level backups, and provide a means of
recovery after a media failure.
To dump a fast replication copy of a system-level backup to tape that was taken
without the DUMP option, or to re-initiate dump processing that has failed:
1. Identify the token (a 36 digit hexadecimal byte string) in the DSNJU004 output.
47
2. Create and run your utility control statement with the DUMPONLY option.
Specify the token if the system-level backup is not the most recent system-level
backup taken.
Restriction: Do not dump system-backups to the same tape that contains
image copies or concurrent copies because the RECOVER utility requires access
to both
3. Run the DFSMShsm command LIST COPYPOOL with the ALLVOLS option to
verify that the dump to tape was successful. The BACKUP SYSTEM utility
issues the DFSMShsm command to initiate a dump, but it does not wait for the
dump to be completed.
Termination or restart of BACKUP SYSTEM

You can terminate BACKUP SYSTEM by using the TERM UTILITY command.
BACKUP SYSTEM checks for the TERM UTILITY command before the call to copy
data. TERM UTILITY deletes the copy that is being created through the BACKUP
SYSTEM utility.
To use TERM UTILITY to terminate BACKUP SYSTEM on a data sharing group,
you must issue the command from the member on which the BACKUP SYSTEM
utility is invoked.
You can restart a BACKUP SYSTEM utility job, but it starts from the beginning
again.
Sample BACKUP SYSTEM control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own BACKUP
SYSTEM control statements.
Example 1: Creating a full backup of a DB2 subsystem or data

sharing group.
The following control statement specifies that the BACKUP SYSTEM utility is to
create a full backup copy of a DB2 subsystem or data sharing group. The full
backup includes copies of both the database copy pool and the log copy pool. In
this control statement, the FULL option is not explicitly specified, because it is the
default.
//STEP1
//
//
//SYSIN
BACKUP
/*
EXEC DSNUPROC,TIME=1440,
UTPROC='',
SYSTEM='DSN'
DD *
SYSTEM
Example 2: Creating a data-only backup of a DB2 subsystem or

data sharing group.
The following control statement specifies that BACKUP SYSTEM is to create a
backup copy of only the database copy pool for a DB2 subsystem or data sharing
group.
48
//STEP1
//
//
//SYSIN
BACKUP
/*
UTPROC='',
SYSTEM='DSN'
DD *
SYSTEM DATA ONLY
Example 3: Creating a fast replication copy of the database copy

pool and dumping the copy to tape.
|
|
|
The following control statement specifies that BACKUP SYSTEM is to create a fast
replication copy of the database copy pool and initiate a dump to tape of the fast
replication copy.
//SYSOPRB JOB (ACCOUNT),'NAME',CLASS=K
//UTIL EXEC DSNUPROC,SYSTEM=V91A,UID='TEMB',UTPROC=''
//*
//*
//DSNUPROC.SYSUT1 DD DSN=SYSOPR.SYSUT1,
//
DISP=(MOD,DELETE,CATLG),
//
SPACE=(16384,(20,20),,,ROUND),
//
UNIT=SYSDA
//DSNUPROC.SYSIN
DD *
BACKUP SYSTEM DATA ONLY DUMP
/*
Example 4: Creating a fast replication copy of the database copy

pool, dumping the copy to tape, and allowing oldest copy to be
overwritten.
|
|
|
The following control statement specifies that BACKUP SYSTEM is to create a fast
replication copy of the database copy pool, initiate a dump to tape of the fast
replication copy, and allow the oldest fast replication copy to be overwritten.
//*
//*
//
//
SPACE=(16384,(20,20),,,ROUND),
//
UNIT=SYSDA
//DSNUPROC.SYSIN
DD *
BACKUP SYSTEM DATA ONLY DUMP FORCE
/*
Example 5: Dumping an existing fast replication copy to tape.

|
|
|
The following control statement specifies that BACKUP SYSTEM is to dump the
existing fast replication copy XE5F9F1C1BD1909683AA8A1A600000E6962DE to
tape, using the DB2STGD2 dump class.
//*
//*
//
//
SPACE=(16384,(20,20),,,ROUND),
//
UNIT=SYSDA
//DSNUPROC.SYSIN
DD *
BACKUP SYSTEM DATA ONLY DUMPONLY
TOKEN (X'E5F9F1C1BD1909683AA8A1A600000E6962DE')
DUMPCLASS(DB2STGD2)
/*
49
50
Chapter 6. CATENFM
The CATENFM utility enables a DB2 subsystem to enter DB2 Version 9.1
enabling-new-function mode and Version 9.1 new-function mode. It also enables a
DB2 subsystem to return to enabling-new-function mode from new-function mode.
All new Version 9.1 functions are unavailable when the subsystem is in conversion
mode or enabling-new-function mode.
Output
Output from the CATENFM utility consists of:
v If you specify the CONVERT option, the CATENFM utility converts table spaces
during the enabling-new-function mode process.
v If you specify the ALTER option, some objects in the DB2 catalog are altered or
created.
v For other options, there is no output.
The required authorization for CATENFM is installation SYSADM.
Execution phases of CATENFM

The CATENFM utility operates in these phases:
Phase Description
UTILINIT
UTILTERM
Performs cleanup
Syntax and options of the control statement

The CATENFM utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
function that the utility job performs.
The CATENFM utility is invoked by jobs DSNTIJEN, DSNTIJNF, DSNTIJES, and
DSNTIJCS.
|
|
Syntax diagram
CATENFM
START
COMPLETE
ENFMON
CMON
CONVERT INPUT
table-space-name
51
Option descriptions
START
Invokes the CATENFM utility and indicates the start of enabling-new-function
mode processing. Drops and recreates the DSNKSX01 index with new key
columns. Adds BIGINT columns to the SYSTABLESPACESTATS and
SYSINDEXSPACESTATS tables. No start processing is done if CATENFM
START was run previously; however, you can run the CATENFM utility as
many times as needed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
COMPLETE
Checks if the DB2 subsystem has completed enabling-new-function mode
processing. If the subsystem has completed this processing, the CATENFM
utility returns 0, and the subsystem enters new-function mode.
|
|
|
|
|
|
ENFMON
Returns DB2 to enabling-new-function mode. If the subsystem is currently in
enabling-new-function mode, no change occurs. If the subsystem has been to
new-function mode, ENFMON returns it to enabling-new-function* mode.
New Version 9.1 functions are not available in Version 9.1
enabling-new-function mode.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CMON
Returns DB2 to conversion mode. If the system is currently in conversion
mode, no change occurs. If the system has been to enabling-new-function
mode or new-function mode, CMON returns it to conversion* mode.
Conversion* mode is similar to conversion mode, but the * indicates that at
one time the system was in enabling-new-function mode or new-function
mode. You can still access objects that were created in enabling-new-function
mode or new-function mode. Data sharing groups cannot have any Version 8
members. You cannot fall back to Version 8 from conversion* mode or coexist
with a Version 8 system.
CONVERT
Starts enabling-new-function mode processing for the table space that is listed
after the INPUT keyword.
INPUT table-space-name
Specifies the table space for which enabling-new-function mode processing
should begin.
table-space-name
The name of the table space for which enabling-new-function mode
processing should begin.
Before converting the catalog

Certain activities might be required before you run the CATMAINT utility,
Before you run the CATENFM utility to convert the catalog, take image copies of
all catalog and directory objects and save your entire subsystem.
To convert the catalog, you must run the DSNTIJEN job.
Data sets that CATENFM uses when converting the catalog

The CATENFM utility uses a number of data sets during its operation.
52
A CATENFM job allocates all of the data sets that it needs. CATENFM uses data
sets only when the CONVERT option is specified.
The following table lists the data sets that CATENFM uses during conversion. The
data set, and an indication of whether it is required.
Table 5. Data sets that CATENFM uses during conversion
Data set
Description
Required?
SYSIN
Input data set that contains the utility

control statement.
Yes
SYSPRINT
Output data set for messages.
Yes
Concurrency and compatibility for CATENFM

The CATENFM utility has certain concurrency and compatibility characteristics
associated with it.
Certain catalog and directory objects are not available during some of the
CATENFM phases. The objects that are unavailable vary based on the CATENFM
option that you specify. The unavailability of these objects can cause other jobs to
time out with message DSNT3761 or DSNT5011. You cannot run CATMAINT when
the DB2 catalog or directory are in UT status.
Converting to new-function mode

When you migrate to DB2 Version 9.1, the DB2 subsystem enters conversion mode.
In conversion mode, the DB2 subsystem can coexist with other data sharing
members that are at either Version 8 or Version 9.1 conversion mode.
The following task is required when you convert to DB2 Version 9.1 new-function
mode.
The DB2 subsystem leaves conversion mode and enters enabling-new-function
mode when you invoke CATENFM START by running the DSNTIJEN job. The
subsystem cannot begin enabling-new-function mode processing if any Version 8
members are active in the data sharing group. All members, including members
that are not converting to Version 9.1 new-function mode, must be running Version
9.1 when the subsystem enters enabling-new-function mode. Note that when a
member starts enabling-new-function mode, the group enters enabling-newfunction mode.
After enabling-new-function mode completes, the DB2 subsystem can enter Version
9.1 new-function mode. All new Version 9.1 functions are unavailable until the DB2
subsystem enters new-function mode.
The DSNTIJEN job runs CATENFM START, which causes the DB2 subsystem to
enter enabling-new-function mode. Run CATENFM START only when you are
ready to begin the enabling-new-function mode conversion process.
Termination or halt of CATENFM

You can terminate CATENFM by using the TERM UTILITY command.
Chapter 6. CATENFM
53
You can stop the enabling-new-function mode processing by specifying CATENFM

HALTENFM. This statement stops the enabling-new-function mode processing at
the completion of the step that is currently executing.
CATENFM CONVERT cannot be restarted. If you attempt to restart CATENFM
CONVERT, you receive message DSNU191I, which states that the utility cannot be
restarted. You must terminate the job, and rerun job DSNTIJEN from the beginning
to convert the catalog.
54
Chapter 7. CATMAINT
The CATMAINT utility updates the catalog; run this utility during migration to a
new release of DB2 or when IBM Software Support instructs you to do so.
Output
Output for CATMAINT UPDATE is the updated catalog.
The required authorization for CATMAINT is installation SYSADM.
Execution phases of CATMAINT

The CATMAINT utility operates in these phases:
Phase Description
UTILINIT
Performs initialization
UTILTERM
Performs cleanup
Syntax and options of the CATMAINT control statement

The CATMAINT utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
Syntax diagram
|
|
|
|
CATMAINT UPDATE
SCHEMA SWITCH(schema_name,new_schema_name)
,
OWNER FROM
|
|
owner_name
TO ROLE
VCAT SWITCH(vcat_name,new_vcat_name)
55
Option descriptions
UPDATE
Indicates that you want to update the catalog. Run this option only when you
migrate to a new release of DB2 or when IBM Software Support instructs you
to do so.
|
|
|
|
|
SCHEMA SWITCH(schema_name,new_schema_name)
Changes the owner, creator, and schema of database objects, plans, and
packages. The schema is not changed for views, materialized query tables, SQL
scalar function, and triggers. The authorization IDs of the creator or owner for
plans and packages that use the objects are not changed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
schema_name is a string that identifies the existing owner, creator, or schema to

be changed. It will be ignored if it does not identify any owner, creator, or
schema names. schema_name cannot identify a schema(qualifier) of any object
that triggers, views, SQL functions, and materialized query tables depend on. It
cannot be referenced in check condition in any check constraints. Ownership of
objects will not be changed if the owner is a role.
|
|
new_schema_name specifies the new name for the owner, creator, or schema. The
name cannot be a schema that qualifies existing objects.
OWNER FROM(owner_name) TO ROLE
Changes the ownership of objects from a user to a role. A trusted context must
have been created for INSTALL SYSADM before CATMAINT UPDATE
OWNER can run. The authorization IDs of the creator or owner for plans and
packages that use the objects are not changed.
|
|
|
|
|
owner_name specifies the current owner of the object. You can specify multiple
owners.
|
|
VCAT SWITCH(vcat_name,new_vcat_name)
Changes the catalog name that is used by storage groups, user indexes, and
table spaces.
|
|
|
|
|
vcat_name identifies the integrated catalog facility catalog that is currently used
by user-managed data sets for indexes, table spaces, and storage groups.
|
|
new_vcat_name specifies the new integrated catalog facility catalog that is to be

used by user-managed data sets for indexes, table spaces, and storage groups.
|
|
To specify any non-alphanumeric characters, enclose each name in single

quotes.
Before running CATMAINT

Certain activities might be required before you run the CATMAINT utility,
During migration, the work file database is used for CATMAINT sorting. If you
are migrating from a previous verson, calculate the size of the work file database.
Data sets that CATMAINT uses

The CATMAINT utility uses a number of data sets during its operation.
Include DD statements for all data sets that your job uses. The following table lists
the data sets that CATMAINT uses. The table lists the DD name that is used to
identify the data set, a description of the data set, and an indication of whether it
is required.
56
Table 6. Data sets that CATMAINT uses

Data set
Description
Required?
SYSIN

control statement
Yes
SYSPRINT
Yes
Concurrency and compatibility

The CATMAINT utility has certain concurrency and compatibility characteristics
associated with it.
Many catalog and directory indexes are not available while CATMAINT is
running. The unavailability of these indexes can cause other jobs to time out with
message DSNT318I, DSNT376I or DSNT501I.
Updating the catalog for a new release

When you install or migrate to a new release of DB2, you must update the catalog
for the prior release to the new version.
The DSNTIJTC job runs CATMAINT UPDATE to update the catalog. DB2 displays
migration status message DSNU777I at several points during CATMAINT
execution.
If an abend occurs during migration processing, message DSNU776I or DSNU778I
can give you information about the problem.
|
Renaming the owner, creator, and schema of database objects
You can rename the owner, creator, and schema of database objects.
To rename the owner, creator, and schema of database objects, plan, and packages:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Run the CATMAINT utility with the SCHEMA SWITCH options. This process
updates every owner, creator or schema name in the catalog and directory that
matches the schema_name value. All grants that were made by or received by the
original owner are changed to the new owner. You can change multiple names by
repeating the SWITCH keyword, but you can not specify the same name more
than once. The names cannot be longer than 8 bytes in EBCDIC representation.
SYSIBM is not allowed as a schema_name or new_schema_name. OWNER FROM
and SCHEMA SWITCH are mutually exclusive. You cannot specify both clauses in
the same CATMAINT UPDATE statement.
Changing the ownership of objects from an authorization ID to a role
You can change the ownership of objects from an authorization ID to a role.
To change the ownership of objects from an authorization ID to a role:
|
|
|
|
|
Run CATMAINT OWNER FROM owner_name TO ROLE.

You must be running under a trusted context with a role to run this utility. The
current role will become the owner. Privileges held on the object will be transferred
from the original owner to the role. The original user can be the grantor or grantee,
and the original owner does not have any privileges to the object after the utility
Chapter 7. CATMAINT
57
completes. You can change multiple object owners by specifying multiple

owner_name, but you can not specify the same name more than once. If the
owner_name does not own any objects, it is ignored. SYSIBM is not allowed as an
owner_name.
Ownership of roles is changed like other objects. However, if the associated trusted
context role is owned by the owner_name, the ownership of the role will not be
changed because a role cannot be owned by itself.
OWNER FROM and SCHEMA SWITCH are mutually exclusive. You cannot specify
both clauses in the same CATMAINT UPDATE statement.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Changing the catalog name used by storage groups or index spaces

and table spaces
|
|
You can change the catalog name used by storage groups or index spaces and table
spaces.
|
|
To change the catalog name that is used by storage groups or index spaces and
table spaces:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Run the CATMAINT VCAT SWITCH utility. The VCAT SWITCH option is similar
to the ALTER TABLESPACE USING VCAT statement for changing the catalog
name. You need to move the data for the affected indexes or table spaces to the
data set on the new catalog in a separate step. You can change multiple names by
repeating the SWITCH keyword, but you cannot specify the same name more than
once. The names cannot be longer than 8 bytes in EBCDIC representation. The
VCAT SWITCH option has no effect on the system indexes and table spaces in
DSNDB06/DSNDB01 because the catalog name is maintained in the parameter.
|
|
Identifying invalidated plans and packages after the owner, creator, or

schema name of an object is renamed
|
|
|
When the schema name of an object is changed, any plans or packages that are
dependent on the object are invalidated. Automatic rebind occurs when the
invalidated plan or package is executed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Rebind might not be successful if the object is referenced in the application

explicitly with the original schema name. In this case, you need to modify the
application. The following queries identify the plans or packaged that will be
invalidated:
SELECT
FROM
WHERE
ORDER
DISTINCT DNAME
SYSIBM.SYSPLANDEP
BCREATOR IN (schema_name1, schema_name2...)
BY DNAME;
SELECT
FROM
WHERE
ORDER
DISTINCT COLLID, NAME

SYSIBM.SYSPACKDEP, SYSIBM.SYSPACKAGE
BQUALIFIER IN (schema_name1, schema_name2...)
BY COLLID, NAME;
Termination or restart of CATMAINT

You can terminate CATMAINT by using the TERM UTILITY command, but the
termination can leave some indexes in REBUILD-pending status.
58
CATMAINT cannot be restarted. If you attempt to restart CATMAINT, you receive

message DSNU191I, which states that the utility cannot be restarted. You must
terminate the job with the TERM UTILITY command, and rerun CATMAINT from
the beginning.
Chapter 7. CATMAINT
59
60
Chapter 8. CHECK DATA

The CHECK DATA utility checks table spaces for violations of referential and table
check constraints, and reports information about violations that it detects. CHECK
DATA checks for consistency between a base table space and the corresponding
LOB or XML table spaces.
|
|
CHECK DATA does not check LOB table spaces. The utility does not check
informational referential constraints.
|
|
|
Run CHECK DATA after a conditional restart or a point-in-time recovery on all

table spaces where parent and dependent tables might not be synchronized or
where base tables and auxiliary tables might not be synchronized.
Restriction: Do not run CHECK DATA on encrypted data. Because CHECK DATA
does not decrypt the data, the utility might produce unpredictable results.
Output
|
|
|
|
|
|
CHECK DATA SHRLEVEL REFERENCE optionally copies rows and optionally

deletes those rows that violate referential or table check constraints. CHECK DATA
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE copies each row that violates one or more constraints to
an exception table. If a row violates two or more constraints, CHECK DATA
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE copies the row only once. For SHRLEVEL CHANGE,
CHECK DATA generates REPAIR statements that you can run to delete the rows.
|
|
If the utility finds any violation of constraints, CHECK DATA SHRLEVEL

REFERENCE puts the table space that it is checking in the CHECK-pending status.
|
|
|
CHECK DATA SHRLEVEL REFERENCE resets CHECK-pending status if it finds

no errors or if all rows that contain violations were copied to exception tables and
deleted.
|
|
CHECK DATA SHRLEVEL CHANGE operates on shadow copies of the table space
and generates the corresponding REPAIR statements.
To execute this utility, you must use
following authorities:
v STATS privilege for the database
v DBADM, DBCTRL, or DBMAINT
which the utility operates is in an
on the implicitly created database
v SYSCTRL or SYSADM authority
a privilege set that includes one of the
authority for the database. If the object on

implicitly created database, DBADM authority
or DSNDB04 is required.
An ID with installation SYSOPR authority can also execute CHECK DATA.

However, you cannot use SYSOPR authority to execute CHECK DATA on table
space SYSDBASE in database DSNDB06 or on any object except SYSUTILX in
database DSNDB01.
|
|
If you are using SHRLEVEL CHANGE, the batch user ID that invokes COPY with
the CONCURRENT option must provide the necessary authority to execute the
61
DFDSS COPY command. DFDSS will create a shadow data set with the authority
of the utility batch address space. The submitter should have an RACF ALTER
authority, or its equivalent, for the shadow data set.
|
|
|
If you specify the DELETE option, the privilege set must include the DELETE
privilege on the tables that are being checked. If you specify the FOR EXCEPTION
option, the privilege set must include the INSERT privilege on any exception table
that is used.If you specify the AUXERROR INVALIDATE option, the privilege set
must include the UPDATE privilege on the base tables that contain LOB columns.
Execution phases of CHECK DATA

Phase Description
UTILINIT
CHECKXML
Performs XML structure checking for all XML table spaces specified by
INCLUDE XML TABLESPACES.
SCANTAB
Extracts foreign keys; uses an index if the index contains the same columns
or a superset of the columns in the foreign key; otherwise scans the table
|
|
SORT Sorts foreign keys if they are not extracted from the foreign key index
CHECKDAT
Looks in primary indexes for foreign key parents, and issues messages to
report detected errors
REPORTCK
Copies error rows into exception tables, and delete them from source table
if DELETE YES is specified
UTILTERM
Performs cleanup
Syntax and options of the CHECK DATA control statement

The CHECK DATA utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
You can create a control statement with the ISPF/PDF edit function. After creating
it, save it in a sequential or partitioned data set. When you create the JCL for
running the job, use the SYSIN DD statement to specify the name of the data set
that contains the utility control statement.
62
Syntax diagram
|
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
table-space-spec
CHECK DATA

PART
integer
SHRLEVEL CHANGE
CLONE
(1)
SCOPE PENDING
AUXERROR REPORT
SCOPE
AUXERROR INVALIDATE
drain-spec

AUXONLY
ALL
REFONLY
LOBERROR REPORT
XMLERROR REPORT
LOBERROR INVALIDATE
XMLERROR INVALIDATE
DELETE NO

LOG
YES
LOG
NO
DELETE YES
FOR
EXCEPTION IN
table-name1 USE
table-name2
EXCEPTIONS 0
ERRDDN SYSERR
WORKDDN SYSUT1 ,
SYSUT2
EXCEPTIONS integer
ERRDDN ddname
WORKDDN
, ddname2
, SYSUT2

ddname1
ddname1
SYSUT1
,
ddname2

PUNCHDDN
SYSPUNCH
ddname
SORTDEVT device-type
SORTNUM
integer
Notes:
|
|
If you specify AUXERROR and LOBERROR or XMLERROR, the options for the keywords
(REPORT and INVALIDATE) must match.
table-space-spec:
TABLESPACE
table-space-name
database-name.
63
drain-spec:
DRAIN_WAIT
integer
RETRY integer
RETRY_DELAY
integer
Option descriptions
DATA
Indicates that you want the utility to check referential and table check
constraints. CHECK DATA does not check informational referential constraints.
TABLESPACE database-name.table-space-name
Specifies the table space to which the data belongs. You can specify only base
table spaces, not LOB table spaces or XML table spaces.
|
|
database-name is the name of the database and is optional. The default value is
DSNDB04.
table-space-name is the name of the table space.
PART integer
Identifies which partition to check for constraint violations.
integer is the number of the partition and must be in the range from 1 to the
number of partitions that are defined for the table space. The maximum is
4096.
|
|
|
|
|
|
CLONE
Indicates that CHECK DATA is to check the clone table in the specified table
space. Because clone tables cannot have referential constraints, the utility
checks only constraints for inconsistencies between the clone table data and the
corresponding LOB data. If you do not specify CLONE, CHECK DATA
operates against only the base table.
|
|
|
SHRLEVEL
Indicates the type of access that is to be allowed for the index, table space, or
partition that is to be checked during CHECK DATA processing.
|
|
|
REFERENCE
Specifies that applications can read from but cannot write to the index,
table space, or partition that is to be checked.
|
|
|
CHANGE
Specifies that applications can read from and write to the index, table
space, or partition that is to be checked.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you specify SHRLEVEL CHANGE, DB2 performs the following actions:

v Drains all writers and forces the buffers to disk for the specified object
and all of its indexes
|
|
|
DFSMSdss uses FlashCopy Version 2 if available. Otherwise, DFSMSdss

might take a long time to copy the object, and the time during which the
data and indexes have read-only access might increase.
v Invokes DFSMSdss to copy the specified object and all of its indexes to
shadow data sets
v Enables read-write access for the specified object and all of its indexes
v Runs CHECK INDEX on the shadow data sets
64
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
DRAIN_WAIT
Specifies the number of seconds that CHECK DATA is to wait when draining
the table space or index. The specified time is the aggregate time for objects
that are to be checked. This value overrides the values that are specified by the
IRLMRWT and UTIMOUT subsystem parameters.
integer can be any integer from 0 to 1800. If you do not specify DRAIN_WAIT
or specify a value of 0, CHECK DATA uses the value of the lock timeout
subsystem parameter IRLMRWT.
RETRY integer
Specifies the maximum number of retries that CHECK DATA is to attempt.
|
|
integer can be any integer from 0 to 255. If you do not specify RETRY, CHECK
DATA uses the value of the utility multiplier system parameter UTIMOUT.
|
|
|
Specifying RETRY can increase processing costs and result in multiple or

extended periods during which the specified index, table space, or partition is
in read-only access.
|
|
|
RETRY_DELAY integer
Specifies the minimum duration, in seconds, between retries. integer can be any
integer from 1 to 1800.
|
|
|
|
If you do not specify RETRY_DELAY, CHECK DATA uses the smaller of the
following two values:
v DRAIN_WAIT value RETRY value
v DRAIN_WAIT value 10
SCOPE
Limits the scope of the rows in the table space that are to be checked.
PENDING
Indicates that the only rows that are to be checked are those that are in
table spaces, partitions, or tables that are in CHECK-pending status.
If you specify this option for a table space that is not in CHECK-pending
status, the CHECK DATA utility does not check the table space and does
not issue an error message.
|
|
|
|
AUXONLY
Indicates that only the LOB column and the XML column check are to be
performed for table spaces that have tables with LOB columns or XML
columns. The referential integrity and constraint checks are not performed.
|
|
|
|
ALL
Indicates that all dependent tables in the specified table spaces are to be
checked. The referential integrity check, constraint check, and LOB check
are performed.
|
|
|
REFONLY
Same as the ALL option, except that the LOB column check and the XML
column check are not performed.
|
|
|
AUXERROR
Specifies the action that CHECK DATA is to perform when it finds a LOB or
XML column check error.
|
|
|
|
REPORT
A LOB or XML column check error is reported with a warning message.
The base table space is set to the auxiliary CHECK-pending (ACHKP)
status. .
65
|
|
|
|
|
|
INVALIDATE
A LOB or XML column check error is reported with a warning message.
The base table LOB or XML column is set to an invalid status. A LOB or
XML column with invalid status that is now correct is set valid. This action
is also reported with a message. The base table space is set to the auxiliary
warning (AUXW) status if any LOB column remains in invalid status.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Before using CHECK DATA to check a LOB or XML column:

1. Run CHECK LOB to ensure the validity of the LOB table space.
2. Run REBUILD INDEX or CHECK INDEX on the index on the auxiliary
table to ensure its validity.
3. Run REBUILD INDEX or CHECK INDEX on the NODE ID index on the
XML table space to ensure its validity.
LOBERROR
Specifies the action that CHECK DATA is to perform when it finds a LOB
column check error. LOBERROR should not be specified if AUXERROR is
specified. If both are specified, the keywords must match. LOBERROR is
ignored for SCOPE XMLONLY since LOB checking is not being performed.
|
|
|
|
|
REPORT
A LOB column check error is reported with a warning message. The base
table space is set to the auxiliary CHECK-pending (ACHKP) status.
|
|
|
If AUXERROR is not specified, the default value is REPORT.
INVALIDATE
A LOB column check error is reported with a warning message. The base
table LOB column is set to an invalid status. A LOB column with invalid
status that is now correct is set valid. The base table space is set to the
auxiliary warning (AUXW) status if any LOB column remains in invalid
status.
|
|
|
|
|
|
XMLERROR
Specifies the action that CHECK DATA is to perform when it finds an XML
column check error. XMLERROR should not be specified if AUXERROR is
specified. If both are specified, the keywords must match. XMLERROR is
ignored for SCOPE XMLONLY since LOB checking is not being performed.
|
|
|
|
|
REPORT
An XML column check error is reported with a warning message. The base
table space is set to the auxiliary CHECK-pending (ACHKP) status.
|
|
|
If AUXERROR is not specified, the default value is REPORT.
INVALIDATE
An XML column check error is reported with a warning message. The base
table XML column is set to an invalid status. An XML column with invalid
status that is now correct is set valid. The base table space is set to the
auxiliary warning (AUXW) status if any LOB column remains in invalid
status.
|
|
|
|
|
|
FOR EXCEPTION
Indicates that any row that is in violation of referential or table check
constraints is to be copied to an exception table. Although this keyword does
not apply to the checking of LOB or XML columns, rows with LOB or XML
columns are moved to the exception tables. If you specify AUXONLY for LOB
and XML checking only, the FOR EXCEPTION option is ignored.
|
|
|
|
|
66
If any row violates more than one constraint, that row appears no more than
once in the exception table.
|
This option is ignored when SHRLEVEL CHANGE is specified.

IN table-name1
Specifies the table (in the table space that is specified on the TABLESPACE
keyword) from which rows are to be copied.
table-name1 is the name of the table. Enclose the table name in quotation
marks if the name contains a blank.
USE table-name2
Specifies the exception table into which error rows are to be copied.
table-name2 is the name of the exception table and must be a base table; it
cannot be a view, synonym, or alias. Enclose the table name in quotation
DELETE
Indicates whether rows that are in violation of referential or table check
constraints are to be deleted from the table space. You can use this option only
if you specify the FOR EXCEPTION keyword.
|
|
|
NO
Indicates that error rows are to remain in the table space. Primary errors in
dependent tables are copied to exception tables.
If DELETE NO and SHRLEVEL REFERENCE are specified, and constraint
violations are detected, CHECK DATA places the table space in the
CHECK-pending status.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
YES
If you specify SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, error rows are to be deleted from
the table space. If you specify the FOR EXCEPTION keyword, deleted
rows from both dependent and descendent tables are placed into exception
tables.
|
|
|
|
If you specify SHRLEVEL CHANGE, REPAIR LOCATE DELETE

statements are written to PUNCHDDN for rows that are to be deleted from
the table space.If you delete rows from a table space that is not logged, the
table space is marked informational COPY-pending.
LOG
Specifies the logging action that is to be taken when records are deleted.
YES
Logs all records that are deleted during the REPORTCK PHASE.
If the table space has the NOT LOGGED attribute, LOG YES is ignored.
|
NO
|
|
|
|
|
|
Does not log any records that are deleted during the REPORTCK phase. If
any rows are deleted, CHECK DATA places the table space in the
COPY-pending status, and it places any indexes that were defined with the
COPY YES attribute in the informational COPY-pending status. If rows are
deleted from a table space that is not logged, the table space is marked
informational COPY-pending.
67
Attention: Use the LOG NO option with caution because its use limits
your ability to recover data by using the log. For example, if you issue the
CHECK DATA DELETE YES LOG NO utility control statement at
particular log RBA, you can recover data that exists on the log before that
point in time or after the point on the log at which the utility execution
completes.
EXCEPTIONS integer
Specifies the maximum number of exceptions, which are reported by messages
only. CHECK DATA terminates in the CHECKDATA phase when it reaches the
specified number of exceptions; if termination occurs, the error rows are not
written to the EXCEPTION table.
Only records that contain primary referential integrity errors or table check
constraint violations are applied toward the exception limit. The number of
records that contain secondary errors is not limited.
integer is the maximum number of exceptions. The default value is 0, which
indicates no limit on the number of exceptions.
This keyword does not apply to LOB table spaces or base table spaces that
contain XML columns.
|
|
ERRDDN ddname
Specifies a DD statement for an error processing data set.
ddname is either a DD name or a TEMPLATE name specification from a
previous TEMPLATE control statement. If utility processing detects that the
specified name is both a DD name in the current job step and a TEMPLATE
name, the utility uses the DD name. The default value is SYSERR.
WORKDDN (ddname1,ddname2)
Specifies the DD statements for the temporary work file for sort input and the
temporary work file for sort output. A temporary work file for sort input and
output is required.
You can use the WORKDDN keyword to specify either a DD name or a
TEMPLATE name specification from a previous TEMPLATE control statement.
If utility processing detects that the specified name is both a DD name in the
current job step and a TEMPLATE name, WORKDDN uses the DD name.
ddname1 is the DD name of the temporary work file for sort input. The default
is SYSUT1.
ddname2 is the DD name of the temporary work file for sort output. The
default is SORTOUT.
PUNCHDDN ddname
Specifies the DD statement for a data set that is to receive the REPAIR utility
control statements that CHECK DATA SHRLEVEL CHANGE generates.
|
|
|
|
ddname is the DD name.
The default value is SYSPUNCH.
|
|
|
|
The PUNCHDDN keyword specifies either a DD name or a TEMPLATE name

specification from a previous TEMPLATE control statement. If utility
processing detects that the specified name is both a name in the current job
step and a TEMPLATE name, the utility uses the DD name.
Specifies the device type for temporary data sets that are to be dynamically
allocated by DFSORT. You can specify any disk device type that is acceptable
|
|
68
|
|
to the DYNALLOC parameter of the SORT or OPTION control statement for

DFSORT, as described in DFSORT Application Programming: Guide.
|
|
|
Do not use a TEMPLATE specification to dynamically allocate sort work data

sets. The presence of the SORTDEVT keyword controls dynamic allocation of
these data sets.
|
|
|
device-type is the device type. If you omit SORTDEVT and a sort is required,
you must provide the DD statements that the sort program requires for the
temporary data sets.
SORTNUM integer
Specifies the number of temporary data sets that are to be dynamically
allocated by the sort program.
integer is the number of temporary data sets that can range from 2 to 255.
If you omit SORTDEVT, SORTNUM is ignored. If you use SORTDEVT and
omit SORTNUM, no value is passed to DFSORT; DFSORT uses its own default.
|
|
|
|
You need at least two sort work data sets for each sort. The SORTNUM value
applies to each sort invocation in the utility.
Important: The SORTNUM keyword will not be considered if ZPARM
UTSORTAL is set to YES and IGNSORTN is set to YES.
Related reference
Before running CHECK DATA

Certain activities might be required before you run the CHECK DATA utility,
For a table with no LOB columns

Before running CHECK DATA, you should run CHECK INDEX on primary key
indexes and foreign key indexes to ensure that the indexes that CHECK DATA
uses are valid. This action is especially important before using CHECK DATA with
the DELETE YES or PART options.
For a table with LOB columns

If you plan to run CHECK DATA on a base table space that contains at least one
LOB column, complete the following steps prior to running CHECK DATA:
1. Run CHECK LOB on the LOB table space.
2. Run CHECK INDEX on the index on the auxiliary table to ensure the validity
of the LOB table space and the index on the auxiliary table.
3. Run CHECK INDEX on the indexes on the base table space.
The relationship between a base table with a LOB column and the LOB table space
is shown in the following figure. The LOB column in the base table points to the
auxiliary index on the LOB table space, as illustrated in the figure.
69
Figure 8. Relationship between a base table with a LOB column and the LOB table space
If the LOB table space is in either the CHECK-pending or RECOVER-pending

status, or if the index on the auxiliary table is in REBUILD-pending status, CHECK
DATA issues an error message and fails.
Complete all LOB column definitions. You must complete all LOB column
definitions for a base table before running CHECK DATA. A LOB column
definition is not complete until the LOB table space, auxiliary table, and index on
the auxiliary table have been created. If any LOB column definition is not
complete, CHECK DATA fails and issues error message DSNU075E.
For an XML table space

Before running CHECK DATA, run CHECK INDEX on the node ID index of each
XML column. If you need to determine the XML objects, query the SYSXMLRELS
catalog table.
|
|
|
Data sets that CHECK DATA uses

The CHECK DATA utility uses a number of data sets during its operation.
The following table lists the data sets that CHECK DATA uses. The table lists the
DD name that is used to identify the data set, a description of the data set, and an
indication of whether it is required. Include statements in your JCL for each
required data set and any optional data sets that you want to use.
Table 7. Data sets that CHECK DATA uses
70
Data set
Description
Required?
SYSIN

control statement.
Yes
SYSPRINT
An output data set for messages.
Yes
Work data sets
Two temporary data sets for sort input and

sort output. Specify the DD names by using
the WORKDDN option of the utility control
statement. The default ddname for sort input
is SYSUT1. The default ddname for sort
output is SORTOUT.
Yes
Table 7. Data sets that CHECK DATA uses (continued)
|
|
Data set
Description
Required?
Error data set
An output data set that collects information Yes

about violations that are encountered during
the CHECKDAT phase for referential
constraints or the SCANTAB phase for check
constraints. Specify the DD name by using
the ERRDDN parameter of the utility control
statement. The default ddname is SYSERR.
UTPRINT
A data set that contains messages from

DFSORT (usually, SYSOUT or DUMMY).
Yes
The following objects are named in the utility control statement and do not require
DD statements in the JCL:
Table space
Object that is to be checked. (If you want to check only one partition of a
table space, use the PART option in the control statement.)
Exception table
Table that stores rows that violate any referential constraints. For each table
in a table space that is checked, specify the name of an exception table in
the utility control statement. Any row that violates a referential constraint
is copied to the exception table.
|
|
|
|
|
|
DB2 utilities uses DFSORT to perform sorts. Sort work data sets cannot span
volumes. Smaller volumes require more sort work data sets to sort the same
amount of data; therefore, large volume sizes can reduce the number of needed
sort work data sets. It is recommended that at least 1.2 times the amount of data to
be sorted be provided in sort work data sets on disk. For more information about
DFSORT, see DFSORT Application Programming: Guide.
Defining work data sets

Three sequential data sets are required during execution of CHECK DATA. Two
work data sets and one error data set are described by DD statements in the
WORKDDN and ERRDDN options.
To define work data sets:
1. Find the approximate size, in bytes, of the WORKDDN data set:
Option
Description
If a table space has a LOB column
Count a total of 70 bytes for the LOB

column and multiply the sum by the
number of keys and LOB columns that are
checked.
If a table space does not have a LOB

column
Add 18 to the length of the longest foreign

key.
For nonpadded indexes, the length of the
longest foreign key is the maximum possible
length of the key with all varying-length
columns in the key padded to their
maximum length, plus 2 bytes for each
varying-length column.
71
2. Create the ERRDDN data set so that it is large enough to accommodate one
error entry (length=60 bytes) per violation that CHECK DATA detects.
|
|
|
|
|
Shadow data sets
|
|
|
|
If a table space, partition, or index resides in DB2-managed data sets and shadow
data sets do not already exist when you execute CHECK DATA, DB2 creates the
shadow data sets. At the end of CHECK DATA processing, the DB2-managed
shadow data sets are deleted.
|
|
|
If you do not want the shadow data sets to be allocated in the same storage class
as the production data sets, set the UTIL_TEMP_STORCLAS system parameter to
specify the storage class for the shadow data sets.
Shadow data set names
Each shadow data set must have the following name:
catname.DSNDBx.dbname.psname.y000z.Lnnn
In the preceding name, the variables have the following meanings:
|
|
variable
meaning
|
|
catname
|
|
dbname
|
|
psname
I or J
1 or 2
|
|
|
|
|
|
Lnnn
Partition identifier. Use one of the following values:

v A001 through A999 for partitions 1 through 999
|
|
|
|
|
|
To determine the names of existing data sets, execute one of the following
queries against the SYSTABLEPART or SYSINDEXPART catalog tables:
When you execute the CHECK DATA utility with the SHRLEVEL CHANGE
option, the utility uses shadow data sets. For user-managed data sets, you must
preallocate the shadow data sets before you execute CHECK DATA SHRLEVEL
CHANGE.
The VSAM catalog name or alias

C or D
Database name
Table space name or index name
v B000 through B999 for partitions 1000 through 1999

v C000 through C999 for partitions 2000 through 2999
v D000 through D999 for partitions 3000 through 3999
v E000 through E996 for partitions 4000 through 4096
SELECT DBNAME, TSNAME, IPREFIX

FROM SYSIBM.SYSTABLEPART
WHERE DBNAME = 'dbname'
AND TSNAME = 'psname';
72
|
|
|
|
|
|
SELECT DBNAME, IXNAME, IPREFIX

FROM SYSIBM.SYSINDEXES X, SYSIBM.SYSINDEXPART Y
WHERE X.NAME = Y.IXNAME
AND X.CREATOR = Y.IXCREATOR
AND X.DBNAME = 'dbname'
AND X.INDEXSPACE = 'psname';
|
|
|
For a partitioned table space, DB2 returns rows from which you select the row for
the partitions that you want to check.
Defining shadow data sets
|
|
|
|
Consider the following actions when you preallocate the data sets:
v Allocate the shadow data sets according to the rules for user-managed data sets.
|
|
|
|
v Define the shadow data sets as LINEAR.

v Use SHAREOPTIONS(3,3).
v Define the shadow data sets as EA-enabled if the original table space or index
space is EA-enabled.
|
|
v Allocate the shadow data sets on the volumes that are defined in the storage
group for the original table space or index space.
|
|
If you specify a secondary space quantity, DB2 does not use it. Instead, DB2 uses
the SECQTY value for the table space or index space.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Recommendation: Use the MODEL option, which causes the new shadow data set
to be created like the original data set. This method is shown in the following
example:
Creating shadow data sets for indexes
DB2 treats preallocated shadow data sets as DB2-managed data sets.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When you preallocate shadow data sets for indexes, create the data sets as follows:
v Create shadow data sets for the partition of the table space and the
corresponding partition in each partitioning index and data-partitioned
secondary index.
v Create a shadow data set for logical partitions of nonpartitioned secondary
indexes.
|
|
Use the same naming scheme for these index data sets as you use for other data
sets that are associated with the base index, except use J0001 instead of I0001.
DEFINE CLUSTER +
(NAME('catname.DSNDBC.dbname.psname.x0001.L001') +
MODEL('catname.DSNDBC.dbname.psname.y0001.L001')) +
DATA +
(NAME('catname.DSNDBD.dbname.psname.x0001.L001') +
MODEL('catname.DSNDBD.dbname.psname.y0001.L001'))
73
Estimating the size of shadow data sets
|
|
|
If you have not changed the value of FREEPAGE or PCTFREE, the amount of
required space for a shadow data set is comparable to the amount of required
space for the original data set.
Concurrency and compatibility for CHECK DATA

The CHECK DATA utility has certain concurrency and compatibility characteristics
associated with it.
DB2 treats individual data and index partitions as distinct target objects. Utilities
that operate on different partitions of the same table space or index space are
compatible.
Claims and drains

The following table shows which claim classes CHECK DATA claims and drains
and any restrictive status that the utility sets on the target object. The legend for
these claim classes is located at the bottom of the table.
Table 8. Claim classes of CHECK DATA operations
Target objects
CHECK DATA CHECK DATA

CHECK DATA CHECK DATA PART DELETE PART DELETE
DELETE NO
DELETE YES
NO
YES
Table space or partition DW/UTRO
DA/UTUT
DW/UTRO
DA/UTUT
Partitioning index or
index partition
DW/UTRO
DA/UTUT
DW/UTRO
DA/UTUT
Secondary index
DW/UTRO
DA/UTUT
none
DR
Logical partition of
index
none
none
DW/UTRO
DA/UTUT
Primary index
DW/UTRO
DW/UTRO
DW/UTRO
DW/UTRO
none
RI dependent and
descendent table spaces
and indexes
DA/UTUT
none
DA/UTUT
RI exception table
spaces and indexes
(FOR EXCEPTION
only)
DA/UTUT
DA/UTUT
DA/UTUT
DA/UTUT
Legend:
v DA: Drain all claim classes, no concurrent SQL access
v DR: Drain the repeatable read class, no concurrent access for SQL repeatable readers
v DW: Drain the write claim class, concurrent access for SQL readers
v UTUT: Utility restrictive state, exclusive control
v UTRO: Utility restrictive state, read-only access allowed
v none: Object not affected by this utility
v RI: Referential Integrity
The following table shows claim classes on a LOB table space and an index on the
auxiliary table.
74
Table 9. Claim classes of CHECK DATA operations on a LOB table space and index on the
auxiliary table
Target objects
CHECK DATA DELETE

NO
CHECK DATA DELETE

YES
LOB table space
DW/UTRO
DA/UTUT
Index on the auxiliary table
DW/UTRO
DA/UTUT
Legend:
The following table shows claim classes of XML objects.
Table 10. Claim classes of XML objects
|
|
Target objects
CHECK DATA DELETE

NO
CHECK DATA DELETE

YES
XML table space
DW/UTRO
DA/UTUT
document ID and node ID indexes
DW/UTRO
DA/UTUT
XML index
DW/UTRO
DA/UTUT
|
|
|
|
|
|
Legend:
When you specify CHECK DATA AUXERROR INVALIDATE, a drain-all is

performed on the base table space, and the base table space is set UTUT.
Compatibility
The following utilities are compatible with CHECK DATA and can run
concurrently on the same target object:
v DIAGNOSE
v MERGECOPY
v MODIFY
v REPORT
v STOSPACE
v UNLOAD (when CHECK DATA DELETE NO)
SQL operations and other online utilities are incompatible.
To run on DSNDB01.SYSUTILX, CHECK DATA must be the only utility in the job
step and the only utility that is running in the DB2 subsystem.
The index on the auxiliary table for each LOB column inherits the same
compatibility and concurrency attributes of a primary index.
75
Create exception tables
|
|
|
|
|
An exception table is a user-created table that duplicates the definition of a

dependent table. The CHECK DATA utility checks the dependent table, which
consists of at least n columns, where n is the number of columns in the dependent
table. The CHECK DATA utility copies the deleted rows from the dependent table
to the exception table.
|
|
|
|
The following table describes the contents of an exception table. This table lists the
columns, a description of the column content, whether or not the column is
required, the data type and length of the column value, and whether or not the
column has the NULL attribute.
| Table 11. Contents of exception tables

|
| Column
Description
| 1 to n
|
|
|
|
Data type and

length
NULL attribute
Corresponds to columns in the table Yes

that is being checked. These
columns hold data from table rows
that violate referential or table check
constraints.
The same as the

corresponding
columns in the
table that is being
checked.
The same as the

corresponding
columns in the
table that is being
checked.
| n+1
|
|
|
|
|
Identifies the RIDs of the invalid

rows of the table that is being
checked.
No
Anything
CHAR(4);
CHAR(5)1 for
table spaces that
are defined with
LARGE or DSSIZE
options
| n+2
|
Indicates the starting time of the

CHECK DATA utility.
No
TIMESTAMP
Anything
| n+2
|
Additional columns that the

CHECK DATA utility does not use.
No
Anything
Anything
Required?
| Note:
| 1. You can use CHAR(5) for any type of table space, but you must use it for table spaces that are defined with the
|
LARGE or DSSIZE options.
|
|
|
|
If you delete rows by using the CHECK DATA utility with SCOPE ALL, you must
create exception tables for all tables that are named in the table spaces and for all
their descendents. All descendents of any row are deleted.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When creating or using exception tables, be aware of the following guidelines:

v The exception tables should not have any unique indexes or referential or table
check constraints that might cause errors when CHECK DATA inserts rows into
them.
v You can create a new exception table before you run CHECK DATA, or you can
use an existing exception table. The exception table can contain rows from
multiple invocations of CHECK DATA.
v If column n+2 is of type TIMESTAMP, CHECK DATA records the starting time.
Otherwise, it does not use column n+2.
v You must have DELETE authorization on the dependent table that is being
checked.
v You must have INSERT authorization on the exception table.
v Column names in the exception table can have any name.
76
|
|
|
v Any change to the structure of the dependent table (such as a dropped column)
is not automatically recorded in the exception table. You must make that change
in the exception table.
|
|
Related information
CREATE TABLE (DB2 for z/OS SQL Reference)
Exception processing for tables with auxiliary columns

If you use exception tables, the exception table for the base table must have a
similar auxiliary column and an auxiliary table space for each auxiliary column.
|
|
|
If an exception is found, DB2 moves the base table row with its auxiliary column
to the exception table. If you specify DELETE YES, DB2 deletes the base table row
and the auxiliary column.
An auxiliary table cannot be an exception table. A LOB column check error is not
included in the exception count. A row with only a LOB column check error does
not participate in exception processing.
Specifying the scope of CHECK DATA

Running CHECK DATA with SCOPE PENDING is normally sufficient. DB2 records
which data rows must be checked to ensure the referential integrity of the table
space.
Whenever the scope information is in doubt, run the utility with the SCOPE ALL
option. The scope information is recorded in the DB2 catalog. The scope
information can become indoubt whenever you start the target table space with
ACCESS(FORCE), or when the catalog is recovered to a point in time.
If you want to check only the tables with LOB columns, specify the AUXONLY
option. If you want to check all dependent tables in the specified table spaces
except tables with LOB columns, specify the REFONLY option.
How violations are identified

CHECK DATA issues a message for every row that contains a referential or table
check constraint violation.
The violation is identified by:
v The RID of the row
v The name of the table that contains the row
v The name of the constraint that is being violated
The following figure shows an example of messages that CHECK DATA issues.
77
DSNU0501
DSNUGUTC - CHECK DATA TABLESPACE DBJM1203.TLJM1203

TABLESPACE DBJM1203.TPJM1204
FOR EXCEPTION IN TLJM1203.TBJM1203 USE ADMF001.EXCPT3
IN TPJM1204.TBJM1204 USE ADMF001.EXCPT4 DELETE YES
DSNU7271 = DSNUKINP - TABLESPACE 'DBJM1203.TLJM1203' IS NOT CHECK PENDING
DSNU7301
DSNU0421
DSNUKDST - CHECKING TABLE TPJM1204.TBJM1204

DSNUGSOR - SORT PHASE STATISTICS NUMBER OF RECORDS=4
ELAPSED TIME=00:00:00
DSN0733l
DSNUKERK - ROW (RID=X'000000020B') HAS NO PARENT FOR
TPJM1204.TBJM1204.TABFK
DSN0733l
DSNUKERK - ROW (RID=X'0010000201') HAS NO PARENT FOR
DSN0733l
DSNUKERK - ROW (RID=X'002000020B') HAS NO PARENT FOR
DSN0733l
DSNUKERK - ROW (RID=X'0030000201') HAS NO PARENT FOR
DSNU739l
DSNUKDAT - CHECK TABLE TPJM1204.TBJM1204 COMPLETE, ELAPSED
TIME=00:00:00
DSNU741l = DSNUKRDY - 4 ROWS DELETED FROM TABLE TPJM1204.TBJM1204
DSNU568l = DSNUGSRX - INDEX TPJM1204.IPJM1204 IS IN INFORMATIONAL COPY PENDING
DSNU568l = DSNUGSRX - INDEX TPJM1204.IXJM1204 IS IN INFORMATIONAL COPY PENDING
DSNU7491
DSNUK001 - CHECK DATA COMPLETE,ELAPSED TIME=00:00:02
DSNU010l
DSNUGBAC - UTILITY EXECUTION COMPLETE, HIGHEST RETURN CODE=4
Figure 9. Example of messages that CHECK DATA issues
Detect and correct constraint violations

To avoid problems, you should run CHECK DATA with DELETE NO to detect any
violations before you attempt to correct the errors.
If required, use DELETE YES after you analyze the output and understand the
errors.
You can automatically delete rows that violate referential or table check constraints
by specifying CHECK DATA with DELETE YES. However, you should be aware of
the following possible problems:
v The violation might be created by a non-referential integrity error. For example,
the indexes on a table might be inconsistent with the data in a table.
v Deleting a row might cause a cascade of secondary deletes in dependent tables.
The cascade of deletes might be especially inconvenient within referential
integrity cycles.
v The error might be in the parent table.
CHECK DATA uses the primary key index and all indexes that exactly match a
foreign key. Therefore, before running CHECK DATA, ensure that the indexes are
consistent with the data by using the CHECK INDEX utility.
Resetting CHECK-pending status

You can reset CHECK-pending status using the CHECK DATA utility.
To remove CHECK-pending status:
v Use the DELETE NO option if no tables contain rows that violate referential or
table check constraints.
78
v Use the DELETE YES option to remove all rows that violate referential or table
check constraints.
If you run CHECK DATA with the DELETE NO option and referential or table
check constraint violations are found, the table space or partition is placed in
LOB column errors

If you run CHECK DATA on a base table space that contains at least one LOB
column, you might receive an error on the LOB column.
If you specify CHECK DATA AUXERROR REPORT, AUXERROR INVALIDATE,
LOBERROR REPORT, or LOBERROR INVALIDATE and a LOB column check error
is detected, DB2 issues a message that identifies the table, row, column, and type
of error. Any additional actions depend on the option that you specify for the
AUXERROR or LOBERROR parameter:
When you specify the AUXERROR REPORT or LOBERROR REPORT option
DB2 sets the base table space to the auxiliary CHECK-pending (ACHKP)
status. If CHECK DATA encounters only invalid LOB columns and no
other LOB column errors, the base table space is set to the auxiliary
warning (AUXW) status.
When you specify the AUXERROR INVALIDATE or LOBERROR INVALIDATE
option DB2 sets the base table LOB columns that are in error to an invalid status.
DB2 resets the invalid status of LOB columns that have been corrected. If
any invalid LOB columns remain in the base table, DB2 sets the base table
space to auxiliary warning (AUXW) status. You can use SQL to update a
LOB column that is in the AUXW status; however, any other attempt to
access the column results in a -904 SQL return code.
If you run CHECK DATA AUXERROR REPORT or INVALIDATE on a base table
space that contains at least one LOB column, the following errors might be
reported:
Orphan LOBs
An orphan LOB column is a LOB that is found in the LOB table space but that is
not referenced by the base table space. If an orphan error is the only type of error
reported by CHECK DATA, the base table is considered correct.
An orphan can result from the following situations:
v You recover the base table space to a point in time prior to the insertion of the
base table row.
v You recover the base table space to a point in time prior to the definition of the
LOB column.
v You recover the LOB table space to a point in time prior to the deletion of a base
table row.
v A base record ROWID is incorrect, which results in an orphan LOB column error
message and a missing LOB column error message. The missing LOB column
error message identifies the ROWID, VERSION and row in error. The missing
LOB column is handled depending on the value that you specify for the
AUXERROR or LOBERROR parameter.
79
Missing LOBs
A missing LOB column is a LOB that is referenced by the base table space but that
is not in the LOB table space. A missing LOB can result from the following
situations:
v You recover the LOB table space to a point in time prior to the first insertion of
the LOB into the base table.
v You recover the LOB table space to a point in time when the LOB column is null
or has a zero length
Out-of-synch LOBs
An out-of-synch LOB error is a LOB that is found in both the base table and the
LOB table space, but the LOB in the LOB table space is at a different level. A LOB
column is also out-of-synch if the base table is null or has a zero length, but the
LOB is found in the LOB table space. An out-of-synch LOB can occur anytime you
recover the LOB table space or the base table space to a prior point in time.
Invalid LOBs
An invalid LOB is an uncorrected LOB column error that is found by a previous
execution of CHECK DATA AUXERROR INVALIDATE.
Related reference
Appendix C, Advisory or restrictive states, on page 925
Resetting auxiliary CHECK-pending status

If a table space has tables with LOB or XML columns and the table space is
recovered to a point in time, RECOVER TABLESPACE sets the auxiliary
CHECK-pending (ACHKP) status on the table space. You can remove the auxiliary
CHECK-pending status if DB2 does not find any inconsistencies.
Use one of the following actions to reset auxiliary CHECK-pending status:
v Use the SCOPE(ALL) option to check all dependent tables in the specified table
space. The checks include referential integrity constraints, table check
constraints, and the existence of LOB and XML columns.
v Use the SCOPE(PENDING) option to check table spaces or partitions with
CHKP status. The checks include referential integrity constraints, table check
constraints, and the existence of LOB and XML columns.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
v Use the SCOPE(AUXONLY) option to check for LOB and XML columns.
If you specified the AUXERROR(INVALIDATE), LOBERROR(INVALIDATE) or
XMLERROR(INVALIDATE) option and DB2 finds inconsistencies, it places the
table space in AUXW status.
Related reference
Termination and restart of CHECK DATA

You can terminate and restart the CHECK DATA utility.
When you terminate CHECK DATA, table spaces remain in the same
CHECK-pending status as they were at the time the utility was terminated. The
CHECKDAT phase places the table space in the CHECK-pending status when
80
CHECK DATA detects an error; at the end of the phase, CHECK DATA resets the
CHECK-pending status if it detects no errors. The REPORTCK phase resets the
CHECK-pending status if you specify the DELETE YES option.
You can restart a CHECK DATA utility job, but it starts from the beginning again.
Related concepts
Restart of an online utility on page 36
Sample CHECK DATA control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own CHECK
DATA control statements.
Example 1: Copying violations into exception tables

The control statement specifies that the CHECK DATA utility is to check for and
delete any rows that violate referential and table check constraints in table spaces
DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D and DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E. CHECK DATA copies any rows
that violate these constraints into the exception tables that are specified in the FOR
EXCEPTION clause. For example, CHECK DATA is to copy the violations in table
DSN8810.DEPT into table DSN8810.EDEPT.
//STEP1
//
//
//SYSUT1
//
//SYSERR
//
//SORTOUT
//
//SYSIN
CHECK DATA
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='IUIQU1UQ.CHK1',
UTPROC='',
SYSTEM='DSN'
DD DSN=IUIQU1UQ.CHK3.STEP1.SYSUT1,DISP=(MOD,DELETE,CATLG),
UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(8000,(200,20),,,ROUND)
DD DSN=IUIQU1UQ.CHK3.SYSERR,DISP=(MOD,DELETE,CATLG),
DD DSN=IUIQU1UQ.CHK3.STEP1.SORTOUT,DISP=(MOD,DELETE,CATLG),
DD *
TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D
TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E
FOR EXCEPTION IN DSN8910.DEPT
USE DSN8910.EDEPT
IN DSN8910.EMP
USE DSN8910.EEMP
IN DSN8910.PROJ
USE DSN8910.EPROJ
IN DSN8910.PROJACT
USE DSN8910.EPROJACT
IN DSN8910.EMPPROJACT USE DSN8910.EEPA
DELETE YES
//*
Example 2: Creating an exception table for the project activity

table
PSPI
You can create an exception table for the project activity table by using the
following SQL statements:
EXEC SQL
CREATE TABLE EPROJACT
LIKE DSN8910.PROJACT
IN DATABASE DSN8D91A
ENDEXEC
EXEC SQL
ALTER TABLE EPROJACT
ADD RID CHAR(4)
ENDEXEC
81
EXEC SQL
ALTER TABLE EPROJACT
ADD TIME TIMESTAMP NOT NULL WITH DEFAULT
ENDEXEC
The first statement requires the SELECT privilege on table DSN8910.PROJACT and
the privileges that are usually required to create a table.
Table EPROJACT has the same structure as table DSN8910.PROJACT, but it can
have two extra columns. The columns in EPROJACT are:
v Its first five columns mimic the columns of the project activity table; they have
exactly the same names and descriptions. Although the column names are the
same, they do not need to be. However, the rest of the column attributes for the
initial columns must be same as those of the table that is being checked.
v The next column, which is added by ALTER TABLE, is optional; CHECK DATA
uses it as an identifier. The name RID is an arbitrary choice; if the table
already has a column with that name, use a different name. The column
description, CHAR(4), is required.
v The final timestamp column is also optional. If you define the timestamp
column, a row identifier (RID) column must precede this column. You might
define a permanent exception table for each table that is subject to referential or
table check constraints. You can define it once and use it to hold invalid rows
that CHECK DATA detects. The TIME column allows you to identify rows that
were added by the most recent run of the utility.
Eventually, you correct the data in the exception tables, perhaps with an SQL
UPDATE statement, and transfer the corrections to the original tables by using
statements that are similar to those in the following example:
INSERT INTO DSN8910.PROJACT
SELECT PROJNO, ACTNO, ACSTAFF, ACSTDATE, ACENDATE
FROM EPROJACT
WHERE TIME > CURRENT TIMESTAMP - 1 DAY;
PSPI
Example 3: Running CHECK DATA on a table space with LOBs

Assume that table space DBIQUQ01.TPIQU01 contains LOB columns. In the
following control statement, the SCOPE ALL option indicates that CHECK DATA is
to check all rows in all dependent tables in table space DBIQUQ01.TPIQU01 for
the following violations:
v Violations of referential constraints
v Violations of table check constraints
v Inconsistencies between the base table space and the corresponding LOB table
space.
The AUXERROR INVALIDATE option indicates that if the CHECK DATA utility
finds a LOB column error in this table space, it is to perform the following actions:
v Issues a warning message
v Sets the base table LOB column to an invalid status
v Sets the base table to auxiliary warning (AUXW) status
//STEP11
//
//
//SYSUT1
//
82
UTPROC='',
SYSTEM='SSTR'
//SORTOUT DD DSN=IUIQU1UQ.CHK2.STEP5.SORTOUT,DISP=(MOD,DELETE,CATLG),
//
//SYSERR
//
//SYSIN
DD *
CHECK DATA TABLESPACE DBIQUQ01.TPIQUQ01 SCOPE ALL
AUXERROR INVALIDATE
/*
Example 4: Specifying the maximum number of exceptions

The control statement specifies that the CHECK DATA utility is to check all rows
in partition number 254 in table space DBNC0216.TPNC0216. The EXCEPTIONS 1
option indicates that the utility is to terminate when it finds one exception. Any
exceptions are to be reported by messages only.
//CKDATA
//
//
//SYSREC
//
//SYSERR
//
//SYSUT1
//
//SORTOUT
//
//
//SYSIN
CHECK
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='L450TST3.CHECK',
UTPROC='',
SYSTEM='SSTR'
DD DSN=L450TST3.CHECK.STEP1.SYSREC,DISP=(MOD,DELETE,CATLG),
DD DSN=L450TST3.CHECK.STEP1.SYSERR,DISP=(MOD,DELETE,CATLG),
DD DSN=L450TST3.CHECK.STEP1.SYSUT1,DISP=(MOD,DELETE,CATLG),
DD DSN=L450TST3.CHECK.STEP1.SORTOUT,
DISP=(MOD,DELETE,CATLG),UNIT=SYSDA,
SPACE=(4000,(20,20),,,ROUND)
DD *
DATA TABLESPACE DBNC0216.TPNC0216 PART 254
SCOPE ALL EXCEPTIONS 1
/*
Example 5: Running CHECK DATA on a clone table

|
|
The control statement specifies that the CHECK DATA utility is to check the clone
table in the specified table space.
CHECK DATA TABLESPACE DBNI0101.TSNI010P CLONE SCOPE ALL
ERRDDN SYSERR
Example 6: Running CHECK DATA SHRLEVEL CHANGE

|
|
The control statement specifies that the CHECK DATA utility is to specifies that
applications can read from and write to the table space that is to be checked.
CHECK DATA TABLESPACE DBNI0101.TSNI010P SHRLEVEL CHANGE
Example 7: Checking several table spaces

To check several table spaces, you can specify more than one table space in a
CHECK DATA control statement. This technique is useful for checking a complete
set of referentially related table spaces. The following example shows a CHECK
DATA control statement that lists more than one table space.
CHECK DATA
TABLESPACE DBJM1203.TLJM1203
TABLESPACE DBJM1203.TPJM1204
FOR EXCEPTION IN TLJM1203.TBJM1203 USE ADMF001.EXCPT3
IN TPJM1204.TMBJM1204 USE ADMF001.EXCPT4
DELETE YES
83
84
Chapter 9. CHECK INDEX

The CHECK INDEX online utility tests whether indexes are consistent with the
data that they index, and issues warning messages when it finds an inconsistency.
Run the CHECK INDEX utility after a conditional restart or a point-in-time
recovery on all table spaces whose indexes might not be consistent with the data.
Also run CHECK INDEX before running CHECK DATA, especially if you specify
DELETE YES. Running CHECK INDEX before CHECK DATA ensures that the
indexes that CHECK DATA uses are valid. When checking an auxiliary table index,
CHECK INDEX verifies that each LOB is represented by an index entry, and that
an index entry exists for every LOB.
Important: Inaccurate statistics for tables, table spaces, or indexes can result in a
sort failure during CHECK INDEX.
|
|
Running CHECK INDEX when the index has a VARBINARY

column
|
|
|
|
If you run CHECK INDEX against the index with the following characteristics,
CHECK INDEX fails:
v The index was created on a VARBINARY column or a column with a distinct

type that is based on a VARBINARY data type.
v The index column has the DESC attribute.
|
|
To fix the problem, alter the column data type to BINARY, and then rebuild the
index.
Output
CHECK INDEX generates several messages that show whether the indexes are
consistent with the data.
For unique indexes, any two null values are treated as equal values, unless the
index was created with the UNIQUE WHERE NOT NULL clause. In that case, if
the key is a single column, it can contain any number of null values, and CHECK
INDEX does not issue an error message.
CHECK INDEX issues an error message if it finds two or more null values and the
unique index was not created with the UNIQUE WHERE NOT NULL clause.

85
An ID with installation SYSOPR authority can also execute CHECK INDEX, but
only on a table space in the DSNDB01 or DSNDB06 databases.
DFDSS ADRSSU command. DFDSS will create a shadow data set with the
authority of the utility batch address space. The submitter should have an RACF
ALTER authority, or its equivalent, for the shadow data set.
|
|
|
|
|
Execution phases of CHECK INDEX

Phase Description
UTILINIT
UNLOAD
Unloads index entries
SORT Sorts unloaded index entries
CHECKIDX
Scans data to validate index entries
UTILTERM
Performs cleanup
Syntax and options of the CHECK INDEX control statement

The CHECK INDEX utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
Syntax diagram
CHECK INDEX
LIST listdef-name
( index-name
)
PART integer
( ALL ) TABLESPACE
database-name.

CLONE
table-space-name
PART
integer
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
DRAIN_WAIT IRLMRWT value
RETRY
UTIMOUT value
SHRLEVEL CHANGE
DRAIN_WAIT integer
RETRY
integer
WORKDDN SYSUT1

RETRY_DELAY
86
integer
WORKDDN ddname
SORTDEVT
device-type
SORTNUM
integer
Option descriptions
INDEX
Indicates that you are checking for index consistency.
LIST listdef-name
Specifies the name of a previously defined LISTDEF list name. The list should
contain only index spaces. Do not specify the name of an index or of a table
space. DB2 groups indexes by their related table space and executes CHECK
INDEX once per table space. CHECK INDEX allows one LIST keyword for
each control statement in CHECK INDEX. This utility will only process clone
data if the CLONE keyword is specified. The use of CLONED YES on the
LISTDEF statement is not sufficient.
(index-name, ...)
Specifies the indexes that are to be checked. All indexes must belong to tables
in the same table space. If you omit this option, you must use the (ALL)
TABLESPACE option. Then CHECK INDEX checks all indexes on all tables in
the table space that you specify.
index-name is the name of an index, in the form creator-id.name. If you omit the
qualifier creator-id., the user identifier for the utility job is used. If you use a list
of names, separate items in the list by commas. Parentheses are required
around a name or list of names. Enclose the index name in quotation marks if
the name contains a blank.
PART integer
Identifies a physical partition of a partitioned index or a logical partition of a
nonpartitioned index that is to be checked for consistency. If you specify an
index on a nonpartitioned table space, an error occurs.
4096.
If the PART keyword is not specified, CHECK INDEX tests the entire target
index for consistency.
(ALL)
Specifies that all indexes in the specified table space that are referenced by the
table space are to be checked.
Specifies the table space from which all indexes are to be checked. If an explicit
list of index names is not specified, all indexes on all tables in the specified
table space are checked.
Do not specify TABLESPACE with an explicit list of index names.
database-name is the name of the database that the table space belongs to. The
default value is DSNDB04.
table-space-name is the name of the table space from which all indexes are
checked.
|
|
|
|
CLONE
Indicates that CHECK INDEX is to check only the specified indexes that are on
clone tables. This utility will only process clone data if the CLONE keyword is
specified. The use of CLONED YES on the LISTDEF statement is not sufficient.
SHRLEVEL
partition that is to be checked during CHECK INDEX processing.
87
REFERENCE
If you specify SHRLEVEL REFERENCE or use this value as the default,
DB2 unloads the index entries, sorts the index entries, and scans the data
to validate the index entries.
CHANGE
shadow data sets
DRAIN_WAIT integer
Specifies the number of seconds that CHECK INDEX is to wait when draining
the table space or index. The specified time is the aggregate time for objects
that are to be checked. This value overrides the values that are specified by the
or specify a value of 0, CHECK INDEX uses the value of the lock timeout
RETRY integer
Specifies the maximum number of retries that CHECK INDEX is to attempt.
integer can be any integer from 0 to 255. Specifying a value other than 0 can
increase processing costs and result in multiple or extended periods during
which the specified index, table space, or partition is in read-only access.
If you do not specify RETRY, CHECK INDEX uses the value of the utility
multiplier subsystem parameter UTIMOUT.
RETRY_DELAY integer
If you do not specify RETRY_DELAY, CHECK INDEX uses the smaller of the
WORKDDN ddname
Specifies a DD statement for a temporary work file.
You can use the WORKDDN keyword to specify either a DD name or a
current job step and a TEMPLATE name, the utility uses the DD name.
88
ddname is the DD name. The default value is SYSUT1.

|
|
|
|
DFSORT.
|
|
A TEMPLATE specification does not dynamically allocate sort work data sets.
The SORTDEVT keyword controls dynamic allocation of these data sets.
|
|
|
device-type is the device type. If you omit SORTDEVT and a sort is required,
you must provide the DD statements that the sort program requires for the
temporary data sets.
SORTNUM integer
|
|
|
|
|
applies to each sort invocation in the utility. For example, if three indexes,
SORTKEYS is specified, there are no constraints that limit parallelism, and
SORTNUM is specified as 8, a total of 24 sort work data sets are allocated for a
job.
|
|
|
|
|
Each sort work data set consumes both above-the-line and below-the-line
virtual storage, so if you specify a value for SORTNUM that is too high, the
utility might decrease the degree of parallelism due to virtual storage
constraints, and possibly decreasing the degree down to one, meaning no
parallelism.
|
|

Related reference
Data sets that CHECK INDEX uses

The CHECK INDEX utility uses a number of data sets during its operation.
The following table lists the data sets that CHECK INDEX uses. The table lists the
Table 12. Data sets that CHECK INDEX uses
Data set
Description
Required?
SYSIN

control statement.
Yes
SYSPRINT
Yes
89
Table 12. Data sets that CHECK INDEX uses (continued)
|
|
Data set
Description
Required?
Work data set
A temporary data set for collecting index

Yes
key values that are to be checked. Specify its
DD name by using the WORKDDN option
in the utility control statement. The default
DD name is SYSUT1.
UTPRINT

Yes
The following object is named in the utility control statement and does not require
a DD statement in the JCL:
Index space
Object that is to be checked. (If you want to check only one partition of an
index, use the PART option in the control statement.)
Defining the work data set for CHECK INDEX

A single sequential data set, which is described by the DD statement in the
WORKDDN option, is required during execution of CHECK INDEX.
To find the approximate size in bytes of the WORKDDN data set:
1. For each table, multiply the number of records in the table by the number of
indexes on the table that need to be checked.
2. Add the products that you obtain in step 1.
3. Add 8 to the length of the longest key. For nonpadded indexes, the length of
the longest key is the maximum possible length of the key with all
varying-length columns in the key padded to their maximum length, plus 2
bytes for each varying-length column.
4. Multiply the sum from step 2 by the sum from step 3.
Another method of estimating the size of the WORKDDN data set is to obtain the
high-used relative byte address (RBA) for each index from a VSAM catalog listing.
Then add the RBAs.
Shadow data sets

When you execute the CHECK INDEX utility with the SHRLEVEL CHANGE
option, the utility uses shadow data sets. For user-managed data sets, you must
preallocate the shadow data sets before you execute CHECK INDEX SHRLEVEL
CHANGE.
data sets do not already exist when you execute CHECK INDEX, DB2 creates the
shadow data sets. At the end of CHECK INDEX processing, the DB2-managed
|
|
|
90

|
variable
meaning
catname
x
C or D
dbname
Database name
psname
I or J
1 or 2
Lnnn

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

v Allocate base or clone objects
91
example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
DEFINE CLUSTER +
(NAME('catname.DSNDBC.dbname.psname.x000z.L001') +
MODEL('catname.DSNDBC.dbname.psname.y000z.L001')) +
DATA
+
(NAME('catname.DSNDBD.dbname.psname.x000z.L001') +
MODEL('catname.DSNDBD.dbname.psname.y000z.L001') )

secondary index.
indexes.

Concurrency and compatibility for CHECK INDEX

The CHECK INDEX utility has certain concurrency and compatibility
characteristics associated with it.
compatible.
Claims and drains

The following table shows which claim classes CHECK INDEX claims and drains
and any restrictive state that the utility sets on the target object.
92
|
|
|
|
|
Table 13. Claim classes of CHECK INDEX operations
Target
CHECK
INDEX
SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE
CHECK
INDEX PART
SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE
CHECK
INDEX
SHRLEVEL
CHANGE
CHECK
INDEX PART
SHRLEVEL
CHANGE
Table space or partition
DW/UTRO
DW/UTRO
DW/UTRW
DW/UTRW
|
|
Partitioning index or index

partition
DW/UTRO
DW/UTRO
DW/UTRW
DW/UTRW
Secondary index1
DW/UTRO
none
DW/UTRW
DW/UTRW
|
|
Data-partitioned secondary
index or index partition2
DW/UTRO
DW/UTRO
DW/UTRW
DW/UTRW
Logical partition of an index none
DW/UTRO
DW/UTRW
DW/UTRW
|
|
|
|
|
Legend:
v UTRO: Utility restrictive state, read only-access allowed
v UTRW: Utility restrictive state, read and write access allowed
v none: Object not affected by this utility
|
|
|
|
|
Note:
1. Includes document ID indexes and node ID indexes over non-partitioned XML table
spaces and XML indexes.
2. Includes document ID indexes and node ID indexes over partitioned XML table spaces.
CHECK INDEX does not set a utility restrictive state if the target object is
DSNDB01.SYSUTILX.
|
|
|
|
|
CHECK INDEX of an XML index cannot run if REBUILD INDEX, REORG INDEX,
or RECOVER is being run on that index because CHECK INDEX needs access to
the node ID index. CHECK INDEX SHRLEVEL CHANGE cannot run two jobs
concurrently for two different indexes that are in the same table space or partition
because the snapshot shadow will have a conflicting name for the table space.
Compatibility
The following table shows which utilities can run concurrently with CHECK
INDEX on the same target object. The first column lists the other utility and the
second column lists whether or not that utility is compatible with CHECK INDEX.
The target object can be a table space, an index space, or an index partition. If
compatibility depends on particular options of a utility, that information is also
documented in the table.
Table 14. Compatibility of CHECK INDEX SHRLEVEL REFERENCE with other utilities
Action
Compatible with
CHECK INDEX?
CHECK DATA
No
CHECK INDEX.
Yes
CHECK LOB
Yes
COPY INDEXSPACE
Yes
COPY TABLESPACE
Yes
DIAGNOSE
Yes
LOAD
No
93
Table 14. Compatibility of CHECK INDEX SHRLEVEL REFERENCE with other

utilities (continued)
Action
Compatible with
CHECK INDEX?
MERGECOPY
Yes
MODIFY
Yes
QUIESCE
Yes
REBUILD INDEX
No
RECOVER INDEX
No
RECOVER TABLESPACE
No
REORG INDEX
No
REORG TABLESPACE UNLOAD CONTINUE or PAUSE
No
REORG TABLESPACE UNLOAD ONLY or EXTERNAL
Yes
REPAIR DELETE or REPLACE
No
REPAIR DUMP or VERIFY
Yes
REPORT
Yes
RUNSTATS
Yes
STOSPACE
Yes
UNLOAD
Yes
To run on SYSIBM.DSNLUX01 or SYSIBM.DSNLUX02, CHECK INDEX must be

the only utility within the job step.
Single logical partitions

You can run CHECK INDEX on a single logical partition of a secondary index.
However, what CHECK INDEX can detect is limited.
v CHECK INDEX does not detect duplicate unique keys in different logical
partitions. For example, logical partition 1 might have the following keys:
A
Logical partition 2 might have the following keys:

M
In this example, the keys are unique within each logical partition, but both
logical partitions contain the key, T; so for the index as a whole, the keys are not
unique. CHECK INDEX does not detect the duplicates.
v CHECK INDEX does not detect keys that are out of sequence between different
logical partitions. For example, the following keys are out of sequence:
1
10
12
If keys 1, 5, 9, and 12 belong to logical partition 1 and keys 7, 8, and 10 belong

to logical partition 2, the keys within each partition are in sequence, but the keys
for the index, as a whole, are out of sequence, as shown in the following
example:
LP 1
12 LP 2
10
When checking a single logical partition, CHECK INDEX does not detect this
out-of-sequence condition.
94
Indexes in parallel
If you specify more than one index to check, CHECK INDEX checks the indexes in
parallel unless constrained by available memory or sort work files. Checking
indexes in parallel reduces the elapsed time for a CHECK INDEX job by sorting
the index keys and checking multiple indexes in parallel, rather than sequentially.
The following figure shows the flow of a CHECK INDEX job with a parallel index
check for a nonpartitioned table space or a single partition of a partitioned table
space.
Table
space
Indexes
Snapshot copy
Table
space
Unload
SW01WKnn
Sort
Sort
Sort
SW02WKnn
Check
Check
Check
Indexes
SW03WKnn
Figure 10. Parallel index check for a nonpartitioned table space or a single partition of a
partitioned table space
check for all partitioning indexes on a partitioned table space.
95
Table
space
parts
Index
parts
Snapshot copy
Table
space
parts
Unload
Unload
Unload
SW01WKnn
Sort
Sort
Sort
SW02WKnn
Check
Check
Check
Index
parts
SW03WKnn
Figure 11. Parallel index check for all partitioning indexes on a partitioned table space
check for a partitioned table space with a single nonpartitioned secondary index.
96
Table
space
parts
Index
Snapshot copy
Table
space
parts
Unload
Unload
Unload
Sort
Sort
Sort
SW01WKnn
SW02WKnn
Merge
Check
Index
SW03WKnn
Figure 12. Parallel index check for a partitioned table space with a single nonpartitioned
secondary index
check for all indexes on a partitioned table space. Each unload task pipes keys to
each sort task, sorting the keys and piping them back to the check tasks.
97
Table
space
parts
Indexes
Snapshot copy
Table
space
parts
Unload
Unload
Unload
Sort
Sort
Sort
SW01WKnn
SW02WKnn
Check
Check
Check
Indexes
SW03WKnn
Figure 13. Parallel index check for all indexes on a partitioned table space
Reviewing CHECK INDEX output

CHECK INDEX indicates whether a table space and its indexes are inconsistent,
but it does not correct any such inconsistencies. If CHECK INDEX detects
inconsistencies, you should analyze the output to determine the problem and then
correct the inconsistency.
To identify the inconsistency:
1. Examine the error messages that CHECK INDEX issues.
2. Verify the point in time for each object that is recovered. Use output from
REPORT RECOVERY to ensure that the table space and indexes are recovered
to the same point in time. If you specify TOCOPY, TOLASTCOPY, or
TOLASTFULLCOPY, ensure that the point in time is a SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
copy.
3. If the table space is correct, run the REBUILD INDEX utility to rebuild the
indexes.
4. If the index is correct, determine a consistent point in time for the table space,
and run the RECOVER utility on the table space. Run CHECK INDEX again to
verify consistency.
5. If neither the table space nor its indexes are correct, determine a point in time
to which to recover both the table space and indexes, and then rerun the
RECOVER utility job, including the table space and its indexes all in the same
list.
98
Termination or restart of CHECK INDEX

You can terminate and restart the CHECK INDEX utility.
You can terminate CHECK INDEX in any phase without any integrity exposure.
You can restart a CHECK INDEX utility job, but it starts from the beginning again.
Related concepts
Correcting XML data after running CHECK INDEX

After you run the CHECK INDEX utility, you might need to correct XML data.
To correct XML data:
Based on the CHECK INDEX output, perform one of the following actions:
Problem
Action
Problem with a document ID index
1. Confirm that the base table space is at

the correct level.
2. Rebuild the index.
Problem with an XML table space for a

node ID index or an XML index and the
index is correct
Run REPAIR LOCATE RID DELETE to

remove the orphan row.
Problem with an XML table space for a

node ID index or an XML index and the
index is incorrect
Run REBUILD INDEX or RECOVER INDEX

to rebuild the index.
Problem with an XML index over an XML

table space
Run REBUILD INDEX to rebuild the index.

Restriction: Do not run REPAIR LOCATE
RID DELETE to remove orphan rows unless
the node ID index does not represent the
same row and the base table space does not
use the document ID index.
Sample CHECK INDEX control statements

INDEX control statements.
Example 1: Checking all indexes

The control statement specifies that the CHECK INDEX utility is to check all
indexes in sample table space DSN8D81A.DSN8S81E.
//STEP1
//
//
//SYSUT1
//
//SYSERR
//
//SORTOUT
UTPROC='',
SYSTEM='DSN'
DD DSN=IUIQU1UQ.CHK3.STEP1.SORTOUT,DISP=(MOD,DELETE,CATLG),
99
//
//SYSIN
DD *
CHECK INDEX (ALL) TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E
//*
Example 2: Checking one index

The following control statement specifies that the CHECK INDEX utility is to
check the project-number index (DSN8910.XPROJ1) on the sample project table.
SORTDEVT SYSDA specifies that SYSDA is the device type for temporary data sets
that are to be dynamically allocated by DFSORT.
CHECK INDEX (DSN8910.XPROJ1)
SORTDEVT SYSDA
Example 3: Checking more than one index

check the indexes DSN8910.XEMPRAC1 and DSN8910.XEMPRAC2 on the
employee-to-project-activity sample table.
CHECK INDEX NAME (DSN8910.XEMPRAC1, DSN8910.XEMPRAC2)
Example 4: Checking partitions of all indexes

In the following control statement, table space DB0S0301.TP0S0301 has one
partitioned index (ADMF001.IP0S0301), one data-partitioned secondary index
(ADMF001.ID0S0302), and one nonpartitioned secondary index
(ADMF001.IX0S0303). The (ALL) option indicates that all three indexes on the table
space are to be checked. PART 3 indicates that CHECK INDEX is to check the third
physical partition of any partitioned indexes and the third logical partition of any
nonpartitioned indexes.
CHECK INDEX(ALL) TABLESPACE DBOS0301.TPOS0301 PART 3 SORTDEVT SYSDA
In this case, CHECK INDEX checks the third physical partition of

ADMF001.IP0S0301, the third physical partition of ADMF001.ID0S0302, and the
third logical partition of ADMF001.IX0S0303, as indicated by the following output.
DSNU050I
DSNU700I=
DSNU700I=
DSNU701I=
DSNU705I
DSNU717I=
DSNU717I=
DSNU717I=
DSNU720I
DSNU010I
DSNUGUTCDSNUKGETDSNUKGETDSNUKGETDSNUK001DSNUKTERDSNUKTERDSNUKTERDSNUK001DSNUGBAC-
CHECK INDEX(ALL) TABLESPACE DBOS0301.TPOS0301 PART 3 SORTDEVT SYSDA

10 INDEX ENTRIES UNLOADED FROM INDEX='ADMF001.IPOS0301' PARTITION=3
10 INDEX ENTRIES UNLOADED FROM INDEX='ADMF001.IDOS0302' PARTITION=3
10 INDEX ENTRIES UNLOADED FROM 'ADMF001.IXOS0303'
UNLOAD PHASE COMPLETE - ELAPSED TIME=00:00:00
10 ENTRIES CHECKED FOR INDEX 'ADMF001.IPOS0301' PARTITION=3
10 ENTRIES CHECKED FOR INDEX 'ADMF001.IDOS0302' PARTITION=3
10 ENTRIES CHECKED FOR INDEX 'ADMF001.IXOS0303' PARTITION=3
CHECKIDX PHASE COMPLETE, ELAPSED TIME=00:00:00
UTILITY EXECUTION COMPLETE, HIGHEST RETURN CODE=0
Figure 14. CHECK INDEX output from a job that checks the third partition of all indexes.
Example 5: Checking indexes in a list

The LISTDEF control statement defines a list of indexes called CHKIDXB_LIST. The
CHECK INDEX control statement specifies that CHECK INDEX is to check all
indexes that are included in the CHKIDXB_LIST list. WORKDDN SYSUT1 specifies
that SYSUT1 is the DD name of the temporary work file for sort input; SYSUT1 is
the default. SORTDEVT SYSDA specifies that SYSDA is the device type for
temporary data sets that are to be dynamically allocated by DFSORT. SORTNUM 4
100
specifies that four of these data sets are to be dynamically allocated.

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
//CHKIDXB EXEC PGM=DSNUTILB,REGION=4096K,PARM='SSTR,CHKINDX1'

//UTPRINT DD SYSOUT=A
//DSNTRACE DD SYSOUT=A
//SYSUT1
DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(5,2)),VOL=SER=SCR03
//SYSOUT
//SORTLIB DD DISP=SHR,DSN=SYS1.SORTLIB
//SORTOUT DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(5,2)),VOL=SER=SCR03
//SYSERR
//SYSIN
DD *
LISTDEF CHKIDXB_LIST INCLUDE INDEXSPACE DBOT55*.* ALL
CHECK INDEX LIST CHKIDXB_LIST
WORKDDN SYSUT1
SORTDEVT SYSDA
SORTNUM 4
/*
Figure 15. Example of checking indexes in a list
Example 6: Checking all specified indexes on clone tables

|
|
check all specified indexes that are on clone tables.
CHECK INDEX (ALL) TABLESPACE DBLOB01.TSLOBC4 CLONE
101
102
Chapter 10. CHECK LOB

You can run the CHECK LOB online utility on a LOB table space to identify any
structural defects in the LOB table space and any invalid LOB values.
The CHECK LOB utility is useful in a variety of circumstances:
v Run the utility on a LOB table space that is in CHECK-pending (CHKP) status
to identify structural defects. If none are found, the CHECK LOB utility turns
the CHKP status off.
v Run the utility on a LOB table space that is in auxiliary-warning (AUXW) status
to identify invalid LOBs. If none exist, the CHECK LOB utility turns AUXW
status off.
v Run the utility after a conditional restart or a point-in-time recovery on all table
spaces where LOB table spaces might not be synchronized.
v Run the utility before you run the CHECK DATA utility on a table space that
contains at least one LOB column.
Output
|
|
|
|
After successful execution, CHECK LOB SHRLEVEL CHANGE does not set or
reset the CHECK-pending (CHKP) and auxiliary-warning (AUXW) statuses.
CHECK LOB SHRLEVEL CHANGE does not reset the CHECK-pending (CHKP)
and auxiliary-warning (AUXW) statuses.
To execute this utility, you must use a privilege set that includes one of the
v DBADM, DBCTRL, or DBMAINT authority for the database. If the object on
which the utility operates is in an implicitly created database, DBADM authority
on the implicitly created database or DSNDB04 is required.
An ID with installation SYSOPR authority can also execute CHECK LOB.
|
|
|
|
|
DFDSS ADRSSU command. DFDSS will create a shadow data set with the
authority of the utility batch address space. The submitter should have a RACF
ALTER authority, or its equivalent, for the shadow data set.
Execution phases of CHECK LOB

The CHECK LOB utility operates in these phases:
Phase Description
UTILINIT
CHECKLOB
Scans all active pages of the LOB table space; generates up to four records
per LOB page; passes records to the SORTIN phase
103
SORTIN
Passes CHECKLOB phase records to SORT
SORT Sorts the records from the CHECKLOB phase
SORTOUT
Passes sorted records to the REPRTLOB phase
REPRTLOB
Examines records that are produced by the CHECKLOB phase; issues error
messages
UTILTERM
Performs cleanup
Syntax and options of the CHECK LOB control statement

The CHECK LOB utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
Syntax diagram
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
CHECK LOB
lob-table-space-spec
drain-spec
SHRLEVEL CHANGE
EXCEPTIONS 0

EXCEPTIONS
integer
PUNCHDDN
SYSPUNCH
ddname
SORTDEVT
device-type

SORTNUM
integer
lob-table-space-spec:
TABLESPACE
lob-table-space-name
database-name.
drain-spec:
104

CLONE
RETRY
UTIMOUT value
DRAIN_WAIT integer
RETRY
integer

RETRY_DELAY
integer
Option descriptions
LOB
Indicates that you are checking a LOB table space for defects.
TABLESPACE database-name.lob-table-space-name
Specifies the table space to which the data belongs.
database-name is the name of the database and is optional.
The default value is DSNDB04.
lob-table-space-name is the name of the LOB table space.
|
|
|
SHRLEVEL
partition that is to be checked during CHECK LOB processing.
|
|
|
REFERENCE
|
|
|
CHANGE
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

shadow data sets
|
|
|

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
DRAIN_WAIT
Specifies the number of seconds that CHECK LOB is to wait when draining the
table space or index. The specified time is the aggregate time for objects that
are to be checked. This value overrides the values that are specified by the
or specify a value of 0, CHECK LOB uses the value of the lock timeout
RETRY integer
Specifies the maximum number of retries that CHECK LOB is to attempt.
integer can be any integer from 0 to 255. If you do not specify RETRY, CHECK
LOB uses the value of the utility multiplier system parameter UTIMOUT.
105

|
|
|
|
|
|
RETRY_DELAY integer
|
|
|
|
If you do not specify RETRY_DELAY, CHECK LOB uses the smaller of the
EXCEPTIONS integer
Specifies the maximum number of exceptions, which are reported by messages
only. CHECK LOB terminates in the CHECKLOB phase when it reaches the
specified number of exceptions.
All defects that are reported by messages are applied to the exception count.
integer is the maximum number of exceptions.
The default value is 0, which indicates no limit on the number of exceptions.
PUNCHDDN ddname
Specifies the DD statement for a data set that is to receive the REPAIR utility
control statements that CHECK LOB SHRLEVEL REFERENCE generates. The
REPAIR statements generated deletes the LOBs reported in error messages
from the LOB table space. CHECK DATA should then be run against the base
table space to set the deleted LOB columns in the base records to invalid.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

processing detects that the specified name is both a name in the current job
allocated by DFSORT.
device-type is the device type and can be any disk device type that is acceptable
DFSORT, as described in DFSORT Application Programming: Guide.
|
|
|
If you omit SORTDEVT and a sort is required, you must provide the DD
statements that the sort program requires for the temporary data sets.
SORTNUM integer
Indicates the number of temporary data sets that are to be dynamically
omit SORTNUM, no value is passed to DFSORT, which then uses its own
default. You need at least two sort work data sets for each sort.
106
|
|
|
|
|

CLONE
Indicates that CHECK LOB is to check the LOB space data for only the clone
table, not the LOB data for the base table.
Before running CHECK LOB

Certain activities might be required before you run the CHECK LOB utility,
You must first recover a LOB table space that is in RECOVER-pending status
before running CHECK LOB.
Beginning in Version 8, the CHECK LOB utility does not require SYSUT1 and
SORTOUT data sets. Work records are written to and processed from an
asynchronous SORT phase. The WORKDDN keyword, which provided the DD
names of the SYSUT1 and SORTOUT data sets in earlier versions of DB2, is not
needed and is ignored. You do not need to modify existing control statements to
remove the WORKDDN keyword.
Data sets that CHECK LOB uses

The CHECK LOB utility uses a number of data sets during its operation.
The following table lists the data sets that CHECK LOB uses. The table lists the
Table 15. Data sets that CHECK LOB uses
|
|
Data set
Description
Required?
SYSIN
An input data that contains the utility

control statement.
Yes
SYSPRINT
Yes
UTPRINT

Yes
Table space
Object that is to be checked.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
DB2 utilities use DFSORT to perform sorts. Sort work data sets cannot span
sort work data sets. When you allocate sort work data sets on disk, the
recommended amount of space to allow provides at least 1.2 times the amount of
data that is to be sorted. For |more information about DFSORT, see DFSORT
Application Programming: Guide.
107
|
|
|
|
Shadow data sets
|
|
|
|
data sets do not already exist when you execute CHECK LOB, DB2 creates the
shadow data sets. At the end of CHECK LOB processing, the DB2-managed
|
|
|
If you have not changed the value of FREEPAGE or PCTFREE on the CREATE
TABLESPACE statement, the amount of required space for a shadow data set is
comparable to the amount of required space for the original data set.
|
|
|
|
|
variable
meaning
|
|
catname
|
|
dbname
|
|
psname
I or J
1 or 2
|
|
|
|
Lnnn

When you execute the CHECK LOB utility with the SHRLEVEL CHANGE option,
the utility uses shadow data sets. For user-managed data sets, you must preallocate
the shadow data sets before you execute CHECK LOB SHRLEVEL CHANGE.

C or D
Database name

|
|

|
|
|
|
|
|

108
|
|
|
|
|
|

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
secondary index.
|
|
DEFINE CLUSTER +
(NAME('catname.DSNDBC.dbname.psname.x000z.L001') +
MODEL('catname.DSNDBC.dbname.psname.y000z.L001')) +
DATA +
(NAME('catname.DSNDBD.dbname.psname.x000z.L001') +
MODEL('catname.DSNDBD.dbname.psname.y000z.L001') )

indexes.
Concurrency and compatibility for CHECK LOB

The CHECK LOB utility has certain concurrency and compatibility characteristics
associated with it.
109
compatible.
Claims and drains

The following table shows which claim classes CHECK LOB claims and drains and
any restrictive state that the utility sets on the target object.
Table 16. Claim classes for CHECK LOB operations on a LOB table space and index on the
auxiliary table
Target objects
CHECK LOB
SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE
CHECK LOB
SHRLEVEL CHANGE
LOB table space
DW/UTRO
CR/UTRW
Index on the auxiliary table
DW/UTRO
CR/UTRW
Legend:
v CR: Claim the read claim class
v UTRW: Utility restrictive state, read and write access allowed
|
|
Compatibility
Any SQL operation or other online utility that attempts to update the same LOB
table space is incompatible.
How CHECK LOB identifies violations

You can find and resolve violations by reviewing messages that the CHECK LOB
utility issues.
CHECK LOB issues message DSNU743I whenever it finds a LOB value that is
invalid. The violation is identified by the row ID and version number of the LOB.
You can resolve LOB violations by using the UPDATE or DELETE SQL statements
to update the LOB column or delete the row that is associated with the LOB. (Use
the row ID from message DSNU743I.)
Contact IBM Software Support for assistance with diagnosing and resolving the
problem.
Related reference
UPDATE (DB2 SQL Reference)
DELETE (DB2 SQL Reference)
Resetting CHECK-pending status for a LOB table space

If you run CHECK LOB SHRLEVEL REFERENCE and LOB table space errors are
found, the table space is placed in CHECK-pending status.
To remove CHECK-pending status:
1. Correct any defects that are found in the LOB table space by using the REPAIR
utility.
110
Attention: Use the REPAIR utility with care because improper use can further
damage the data. If necessary, contact IBM Software Support for guidance on
using the REPAIR utility.
2. Run CHECK LOB again, or run the REPAIR utility to reset CHECK-pending or
auxiliary-warning status.
Resolving media failure

Some media failures leave LOB pages in the logical page list (LPL), which requires
action.
To resolve media failure:
Run CHECK LOB on a LOB table space. The pages that were in the LPL are
removed from the list so that they are available.
Termination or restart of CHECK LOB

You can terminate and restart the CHECK LOB utility.
If you terminate CHECK LOB during the CHECKLOB phase, LOB table spaces
remain in CHECK-pending status. During normal execution, the CHECKLOB
phase places the LOB table space in CHECK-pending status; at the end of the
phase, the CHECK-pending status is reset if no errors are detected.
You can restart a CHECK LOB utility job, but it starts from the beginning again.
Related concepts
Sample CHECK LOB control statements

LOB control statements.
Example 1: Checking a LOB table space

The following control statement specifies that the CHECK LOB utility is to check
LOB table space DBIQUG01.TLIQUG02 for structural defects or invalid LOB
values. The EXCEPTIONS 3 option indicates that the CHECK LOB utility is to
terminate when it finds three exceptions. The SORTDEVT and SORTNUM options
provide information about temporary data sets that are to be dynamically allocated
by DFSORT. SORTDEVT SYSDA specifies that the device type is SYSDA, and
SORTNUM 4 indicates that four temporary data sets are to be dynamically
//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='IUIQU2UG.CHECKL',
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='DSN'
//SYSIN
DD *
CHECK LOB TABLESPACE DBIQUG01.TLIQUG02
EXCEPTIONS 3 SORTDEVT SYSDA
SORTNUM 4
111
Example 2: Checking the LOB space data for a clone table
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
the LOB space data for only the clone table, not the LOB data for the base table.
The EXCEPTIONS 0 option indicates that there is no limit on the number of
exceptions. The SORTDEVT and SORTNUM options provide information about
temporary data sets that are to be dynamically allocated by DFSORT. SORTDEVT
SYSDA specifies that the device type is SYSDA, and SORTNUM 10 indicates that
ten temporary data sets are to be dynamically allocated by the sort program.
Example 3: Checking the LOB table space data
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
the LOB table space data with the SHRLEVEL CHANGE option, which specifies
that the application can read from and write to the table space that is to be
checked.
CHECK LOB TABLESPACE DBLOB01.TSLOBB1

EXCEPTIONS 0
SORTDEVT SYSDA
SORTNUM 10
CLONE
//STEP2 EXEC DSNUPROC,

// UTPROC='',SYSTEM='SSTR',
// UID='CHKLOB12.STEP2'
//*SYSPUNCH DD DN=PUNCHS,DISP=(NEW,DELETE,DELETE),UNITE=SYSDA,
//*
SPACE=(CYL,(1,1)),VOL=SER=SCR03
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
//UTPRINT DD DUMMY
//SYSIN DD *
CHECK LOB TABLESPACE
DABA12.TSL12
SHRLEVEL CHANGE
EXCEPTIONS 5
/*
112
Chapter 11. COPY

The COPY online utility creates up to four image copies of any of the following
objects: table space, table space partition, data set of a linear table space, index
space, or index space partition.
The two types of image copies are:
1. A full image copy, which is a copy of all pages in a table space, partition, data
set, or index space.
2. An incremental image copy, which is a copy only of those data pages that have
been modified since the last use of the COPY utility and system pages.
The RECOVER utility uses these copies when recovering a table space or index
space to the most recent time or to a previous time. Copies can also be used by the
MERGECOPY, RECOVER, COPYTOCOPY, and UNLOAD utilities.
You can copy a list of objects in parallel to improve performance. Specifying a list
of objects along with the SHRLEVEL REFERENCE option creates a single recovery
point for that list of objects. Specifying the PARALLEL keyword allows you to
copy a list of objects in parallel, rather than serially.
To calculate the number of threads you need when you specify the PARALLEL
keyword, use the formula (n * 2 + 1), where n is the number of objects that are to
be processed in parallel, regardless of the total number of objects in the list. If you
do not use the PARALLEL keyword, n is one and COPY uses three threads for a
single-object COPY job.
Output
Output from the COPY utility consists of:
v Up to four sequential data sets containing the image copy.
v Rows in the SYSIBM.SYSCOPY catalog table that describe the image copy data
sets that are available to the RECOVER utility. Your installation is responsible for
ensuring that these data sets are available if the RECOVER utility requests them.
v If you specify the CHANGELIMIT option, a report on the change status of the
table space.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The COPY-pending status is set off for table spaces if the copy was a full image
copy. However, DB2 does not reset the COPY-pending status if you copy a single
piece of a multi-piece linear data set. If you copy a single table space partition,
DB2 resets the COPY-pending status only for the copied partition and not for the
whole table space. DB2 resets the informational COPY-pending (ICOPY) status
after you copy an index space or index. The COPY utility will reset
ICOPY-pending status for not logged table spaces.
v IMAGCOPY privilege for the database
113

An ID with installation SYSOPR authority can also execute COPY, but only on a
table space in the DSNDB01 or DSNDB06 database.
The batch user ID that invokes COPY with the CONCURRENT option must
provide the necessary authority to execute the DFDSS DUMP command.
Execution phases of COPY

The COPY utility operates in these phases:
Phase Description
UTILINIT
REPORT
Reports for CHANGELIMIT option
COPY Copies
UTILTERM
Performs cleanup
Related concepts
Using inline copy with REORG TABLESPACE on page 507
Related tasks
Using inline COPY with LOAD on page 271
Syntax and options of the COPY control statement

The COPY utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the function
that the utility job performs.
114
Syntax diagram
(1)
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
SCOPE ALL
SHRLEVEL CHANGE
SCOPE PENDING
copy-spec
COPY

(2)
CLONE
concurrent-spec
(3)
filterddn-spec
Notes:
1
Use the copy-spec if you do not want to use the CONCURRENT option.
Use the concurrent-spec if you want to use the CONCURRENT option, but not the FILTERDDN
option.
Use the filterddn spec if you want to use the CONCURRENT and FILTERDDN options.
copy-spec:
FULL
LIST
listdef-name
YES
data-set-spec
FULL NO
changelimit-spec
FULL
table-space-spec
index-name-spec
YES
DSNUM
ALL
data-set-spec
FULL NO
changelimit-spec
(1)
DSNUM
integer
(2)
SYSTEMPAGES
YES
SYSTEMPAGES
NO

CHECKPAGE
PARALLEL
(num-objects)
TAPEUNITS
num-tape-units
Notes:
Not valid for nonpartioning indexes.
CHECKPAGE is the default for table spaces.
concurrent-spec:
LIST listdef-name
data-set-spec
DSNUM
CONCURRENT
ALL
table-space-spec
index-name-spec
data-set-spec
(1)
DSNUM
integer
Notes:
1
Chapter 11. COPY
115
filterddn-spec:
LIST listdef-name
data-set spec FILTERDDN (ddname) CONCURRENT

DSNUM
ALL
DSNUM
integer
table-space-spec
index-name-spec
(1)
Notes:
1
data-set-spec:
(1)
COPYDDN(
ddname1
)
,ddname2

RECOVERYDDN(
ddname3
,ddname2
)
,ddname4
,ddname4
RECOVERYDDN(
ddname3
)
,ddname4
,ddname4
Notes:
1
COPYDDN SYSCOPY is the default for the primary copy, but this default can only be used for
one object in the list.
changelimit-spec:
CHANGELIMIT

(ANY)
(percent_value1
REPORTONLY
)
,percent_value2
table-space-spec:
TABLESPACE
table-space-name
database-name.
index-name-spec:
116
(1)
INDEXSPACE
INDEX
index-space-name
database-name.
index-name
creator-id.
Notes:
1
INDEXSPACE is the preferred specification.
Option descriptions
LIST listdef-name
Specifies the name of a previously defined LISTDEF list name. LIST specifies
one LIST keyword for each COPY control statement. Do not specify LIST with
either the INDEX or the TABLESPACE keyword. DB2 invokes COPY once for
the entire list. This utility will only process clone data if the CLONE keyword
is specified. The use of CLONED YES on the LISTDEF statement is not
sufficient.
Specifies the table space (and, optionally, the database it belongs to) that is to
be copied.
database-name is the name of the database that the table space belongs to. The
default value is DSNDB04.
table-space-name is the name of the table space to be copied.
Specify the DSNDB01.SYSUTILX, DSNDB06.SYSCOPY, or
DSNDB01.SYSLGRNX table space by itself in a single COPY statement.
Alternatively, specify the DSNDB01.SYSUTILX, DSNDB06.SYSCOPY, or
DSNDB01.SYSLGRNX table space with indexes over the table space that were
defined with the COPY YES attribute.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CLONE
Indicates that COPY is to copy only clone table or index data. This utility will
only process clone data if the CLONE keyword is specified. The use of
CLONED YES on the LISTDEF statement is not sufficient.
If the utility is processing a table space and CLONE is specified, the utility will
only process clone table data. If the utility is processing an index and CLONE
is specified, the utility will only process indexes over clone tables. If you use
the LIST keyword to specify a list of objects, COPY processes only those
objects in the list that contain clone tables or indexes on clone tables. COPY
ignores other objects in the list.
INDEXSPACE database-name.index-space-name
Specifies the qualified name of the index space that is to be copied; the name is
obtained from the SYSIBM.SYSINDEXES table. The specified index space must
be defined with the COPY YES attribute.
database-name Optionally specifies the name of the database that the index
space belongs to. The default value is DSNDB04.
index-space-name specifies the name of the index space that is to be copied.
INDEX creator-id.index-name
Specifies the index that is to be copied. Enclose the index name in quotation
Chapter 11. COPY
117
creator-id optionally specifies the creator of the index. The default value is the
user identifier for the utility.
index-name specifies the name of the index that is to be copied.
COPYDDN (ddname1,ddname2)
Specifies a DD name or a TEMPLATE name for the primary (ddname1) and
backup (ddname2) copy data sets for the image copy at the local site.
You can use the COPYDDN keyword to specify either a DD name or a
current job step and a TEMPLATE name, the utility uses the DD name. For
more information about TEMPLATE specifications, see Chapter 31,
TEMPLATE, on page 641.
ddname is the DD name. The default value is SYSCOPY for the primary copy.
You can use the default for only one object in the list. The first object in the list
that does not have COPYDDN specified uses the default. Any other objects in
the list that do not have COPYDDN specified cause an error.
If you use the CHANGELIMIT REPORTONLY option, you can use a DD
DUMMY statement when you specify the SYSCOPY output data set. This card
prevents a data set from being allocated and opened.
Recommendation: Catalog all of your image copy data sets.
You cannot have duplicate image copy data sets. If the DD statement identifies
a noncataloged data set with the same name, volume serial, and file sequence
number as one that is already recorded in the SYSIBM.SYSCOPY catalog table,
the COPY utility issues a message and does not make an image copy. If COPY
identifies a cataloged data set with only the same name, it does not make an
image copy. For cataloged image copy data sets, CATLG must be specified for
the normal termination disposition in the DD statement, as shown in the
following example:
DISP=(MOD,CATLG,CATLG)
The DSVOLSER field of the SYSCOPY entry is blank.

If you use the CONCURRENT and FILTERDDN options, ensure that the size
of the copy data set is large enough to include all of the objects in the list.
RECOVERYDDN (ddname3,ddname4)
Specifies a DD name or a template name for the primary (ddname3) and
backup (ddname4) copy data sets for the image copy at the recovery site.
You can use the RECOVERYDDN keyword to specify either a DD name or a
template name. If utility processing detects that the specified name is both a
DD name in the current job step and a template name, the utility THE uses the
DD name.
ddname3 and ddname4 are DD names.
You cannot have duplicate image copy data sets.
If you use the CONCURRENT and FILTERDDN options, ensure that the size
of the copy data set is large enough to include all of the objects in the list.
FULL
Specifies that COPY is to make either a full or an incremental image copy.
118
YES
Specifies a full image copy. Making a full image copy resets the
COPY-pending status for the table space or index, or for the partition if
you specify DSNUM.
NO
Specifies only an incremental image copy. Only changes since the last
image copy are to be copied. NO is not valid for indexes.
Incremental image copies are not allowed in the following situations:
v The last full image copy of the table space was taken with the
CONCURRENT option.
v No full image copies exist for the table space or data set that is being
copied.
v After a successful LOAD or REORG operation, unless an inline copy
was made during the LOAD or REORG job.
v You specify one of the following table spaces: DSNDB01.DBD01,
DSNDB01.SYSUTILX, or DSNDB06.SYSCOPY.
v A previous COPY was terminated with the -TERM UTIL command, so
the most recent SYSIBM.SYSCOPY record for the object contains ICTYPE
= T.
For incremental image copies of partitioned table spaces, COPY includes
the header page for each partition that has changed pages.
COPY automatically takes a full image copy of a table space if you specify
FULL NO when an incremental image copy is not allowed.
CHANGELIMIT
Specifies the limit of changed pages in the table space, partition, or data set at
which an incremental or full image copy is to be taken.
|
|
|
ANY
Specifies that COPY is to take a full image copy if any pages have changed
since the last image copy.
percent_value1
Specifies the first value in the CHANGELIMIT range. percent_value1 must
be an integer or decimal value from 0.0 to 100.0. You do not need to
specify leading zeroes, and the decimal point is not required when
specifying a whole integer. Specify a maximum of one decimal place for a
decimal value. For example, you can specify .5. If you specify this value,
COPY takes an incremental image copy if more than one half of one
percent of the pages have changed.
percent_value2
Specifies the second value in the CHANGELIMIT range. percent_value2
must be an integer or decimal value from 0.0 to 100.0. You do not need to
specify leading zeroes, and the decimal point is not required when
specifying a whole integer. Specify a maximum of one decimal place for a
decimal value (for example, .5).
COPY CHANGELIMIT accepts percentage values in any order. For example,
you can specify (10,1) or (1,10).
If only one percentage value is specified, COPY CHANGELIMIT:
v Creates an incremental image copy if the percentage of changed pages is
greater than 0 and less than percent_value1.
Chapter 11. COPY
119
v Creates a full image copy if the percentage of changed pages is greater than
or equal to percent_value1, or if CHANGELIMIT(0) is specified.
v Does not create an image copy if no pages have changed, unless
CHANGELIMIT(0) is specified.
v Always creates a full image copy, even when no pages have been updated
since the last image copy, if CHANGELIMIT(0) is specified.
|
|
|
|
|
|
v Creates a full image copy if CHANGELIMIT(100) is specified and all pages

have been changed since the last image copy.
v Creates an incremental image copy if CHANGELIMIT(100) is specified and
some but not all pages have been changed since the last image copy.
If two percentage values are specified, COPY CHANGELIMIT:
v Creates an incremental image copy if the percentage of changed pages is
greater than the lowest specified value and less than the highest specified
value.
v Creates a full image copy if the percentage of changed pages is equal to or
greater than the highest specified value.
v Does not create an image copy if the percentage of changed pages is less
than or equal to the lowest specified value.
v If both values are equal, creates a full image copy if the percentage of
changed pages is equal to or greater than the specified value.
The default values are (1,10).
You cannot use the CHANGELIMIT option for a table space or partition that is
defined with TRACKMOD NO. If you change the TRACKMOD option from
NO to YES, you must take an image copy before you can use the
CHANGELIMIT option. For nonpartitioned table spaces, you must copy the
entire table space to allow future CHANGELIMIT requests.
REPORTONLY
Specifies that image copy information is to be displayed. If you specify the
REPORTONLY option, only image copy information is displayed. Image copies
are not taken in this case; they are only recommended.
DSNUM
For a table space, identifies a partition or data set within the table space to be
copied; or it copies the entire table space. For an index space, DSNUM
identifies a partition to be copied, or it copies the entire index space. This
option can specify a partition of a data-partitioned secondary index if the index
is copy-enabled.
If a data set of a nonpartitioned table space is in the COPY-pending status, you
must copy the entire table space.
ALL
Indicates that the entire table space or index space is to be copied. You
must use ALL for a nonpartitioned secondary index.
integer
Is the number of a partition or data set that is to be copied.
An integer value is not valid for nonpartitioned secondary indexes.
For a partitioned table space or index space, the integer is its partition
number. The maximum is 4096.
120
For a nonpartitioned table space, find the integer at the end of the data
set name as it is cataloged in the ICF catalog. The data set name has the
following format:
|
catname.DSNDBx.dbname.spacename.y000Z.Annn
In this format:
catname
Is the ICF catalog name or alias.
x
Is C (for VSAM clusters) or D (for VSAM data components).
dbname
Is the database name.
spacename
Is the table space or index space name.
Is I or J, which indicates the data set name used by REORG with

FASTSWITCH.
Is 1 or 2.
nnn
Is the data set integer.
If COPY takes an image copy of data sets (rather than on table spaces),
RECOVER, MERGECOPY, or COPYTOCOPY must use the copies on a data set
level. For a nonpartitioned table space, if COPY takes image copies on data
sets and you run MODIFY RECOVERY with DSNUM ALL, the table space is
placed in COPY-pending status if a full image copy of the entire table space
does not exist.
PARALLEL
Specifies the maximum number of objects in the list that are to be processed in
parallel. The utility processes the list of objects in parallel for image copies
being written to or from different disk or tape devices. If you specify
TAPEUNITS with PARALLEL, you control the number of tape drives that are
dynamically allocated for the copy. If you omit PARALLEL, the list is not
processed in parallel.
Restriction: Do not specify the PARALLEL keyword if one or more of the
output data sets are defined with DD statements that specify UNIT=AFF to
refer to the same device as a previous DD statement. This usage is not
supported with the PARALLEL keyword and could result in an abend. Instead,
consider using templates to define your data sets.
(num-objects)
Specifies the number of objects in the list that are to be processed in
parallel. You can adjust this value to a smaller value if COPY encounters
storage constraints.
If you specify 0 or do not specify a value for num-objects, COPY determines
the optimal number of objects to process in parallel.
TAPEUNITS
Specifies the maximum number of tape drives that the utility dynamically
allocates for the list of objects to be processed in parallel. TAPEUNITS applies
only to tape drives that are dynamically allocated through the TEMPLATE
keyword. It does not apply to JCL allocated tape drives. The total number of
tape drives allocated for the COPY request is the sum of the JCL allocated tape
drives plus the number of tape drives determined as follows:
Chapter 11. COPY
121
v the value that is specified for TAPEUNITS

v The value determined by the COPY utility if you omit the TAPEUNITS
keyword
If you omit this keyword, the utility determines the number of tape drives to
dynamically allocate for the copy function.
(num-tape-units)
Specifies the number of tape drives to allocate. If you specify 0 or do not
specify the TAPEUNITS keyword, COPY determines the maximum number
of tape drives to be dynamically allocated for the function. COPY
TAPEUNITS has a max value of 32767.
CHECKPAGE
Indicates that each page in the table space or index space is to be checked for
validity. The validity checking operates on one page at a time and does not
include any cross-page checking. If it finds an error, COPY issues a message
that describes the type of error. If more than one error exists in a given page,
only the first error is identified. COPY continues checking the remaining pages
in the table space or index space after it finds an error. CHECKPAGE is the
default for table spaces. CHECKPAGE is not the default for indexes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: Use of the CHECKPAGE option for indexes can result in greatly
increased processor usage.
|
|
SYSTEMPAGES
Specifies whether the COPY utility puts system pages at the beginning of the
image copy data set.
Although the system pages are located at the beginning of many image copies,
this placement is not guaranteed. In many cases, the system pages are not
included. For example, incremental copies do not include system pages.
YES
Ensures that any header, dictionary, and version system pages are copied
at the beginning of the image copy data set. The version system pages can
be copied twice.
Selecting YES ensures that the image copy contains the necessary system
pages for subsequent UNLOAD utility jobs to correctly format and unload
all data rows.
NO
Does not ensure that the dictionary and version system pages are copied at
the beginning of the image copy data set. The COPY utility copies the
pages in the current order, including the header pages.
CONCURRENT
Specifies that DFSMSdss concurrent copy is to make the full image copy. The
image copy is recorded in the SYSIBM.SYSCOPY catalog table with ICTYPE=F
and STYPE=C or STYPE=J.
If the SYSPRINT DD statement points to a data set, you must use a DSSPRINT
DD statement.
When you specify SHRLEVEL(REFERENCE), an ICTYPE=Q record is placed
into the SYSIBM.SYSCOPY catalog table after the object has been quiesced. If
COPY fails, this record remains in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY. When COPY is
successful, this ICTYPE=Q record is replaced with the ICTYPE=F record.
If the page size in the table space matches the control interval for the
associated data set, you can use either the SHRLEVEL CHANGE option or the
122
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE option with the CONCURRENT option. If the page

size does not match the control interval, you must use the SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE option for table spaces with a 8-KB, 16-KB, or 32-KB page size.
When you do not specify FILTERDDN, the DFSMSdss dump statement cannot
include more than 255 data sets. When you request a concurrent copy on an
object that exceeds this limitation, DB2 dynamically allocates a temporary filter
data set for you.
FILTERDDN ddname
Specifies the optional DD statement for the filter data set that COPY is to use
with the CONCURRENT option. COPY uses this data set to automatically
build a list of table spaces that are to be copied by DFSMSdss with one
DFSMSdss DUMP statement.
You can use the FILTERDDN keyword to specify either a DD name or a
current job step and a TEMPLATE name, the utility uses the DD name.
If you specify FILTERDDN, the SYSCOPY records for all objects in the list have
the same data set name.
SHRLEVEL
Indicates whether other programs can access or update the table space or index
while COPY is running.
REFERENCE
Allows read-only access by other programs.
CHANGE
Allows other programs to change the table space or index space.
When you specify SHRLEVEL CHANGE, uncommitted data might be
copied.
Recommendation: Do not use image copies that are made with
SHRLEVEL CHANGE when you run RECOVER TOCOPY.
|
|
SHRLEVEL CHANGE is not allowed for a table space that is defined as

NOT LOGGED.
SHRLEVEL CHANGE is not allowed when you use DFSMSdss concurrent
copy for table spaces that have a page size that is greater than 4 KB and
does not match the control interval size. If the page size in the table space
matches the control interval size for the associated data set, you can use
either the SHRLEVEL CHANGE option or the SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
option.
If you are copying a list and you specify the SHRLEVEL CHANGE option,
you can specify OPTIONS EVENT(ITEMERROR,SKIP) so that each object
in the list is placed in UTRW status and the read claim class is held only
while the object is being copied.
|
|
|
|
The read claim class is briefly obtained for each object during the
UTILINIT phase to determine the object size if LIMIT is specified on the
COPYDDN or RECOVERYDDN template. This applies only if OPTIONS
EVENT(ITEMERROR,SKIP) is specified.
Chapter 11. COPY
123
If you do not specify OPTIONS EVENT(ITEMERROR,SKIP), all of the

objects in the list are placed in UTRW status and the read claim class is
held on all objects for the entire duration of the COPY.
SCOPE
Indicates the scope of the copy for the specified objects.
|
|
|
|
ALL
Indicates that you want to copy all of the specified objects.
PENDING
Indicates that you want to copy only those objects in COPY-pending or
informational COPY-pending status. When the DSNUM ALL option is
specified for partitioned objects, and one or more of the partitions are in
COPY-pending or informational COPY-pending status, a copy will be taken
of the entire table space or index space.
|
|
|
|
|
For partitioned objects, if you only want the partitions in COPY-pending

status or informational COPY-pending status to be copied, then a list of
partitions should be specified. This is done by invoking COPY on a
LISTDEF list built with the PARTLEVEL option. An output image copy
data set will be created for each partition that is in COPY-pending or
informational COPY-pending status.
Related reference
|
|
|
|
|
|
Before running COPY

Certain activities might be required before you run the COPY utility, depending on
your situation.
Before running COPY, check that the table spaces and index spaces that you want
to copy are not in any restricted states.
Data sets that COPY uses

The COPY utility uses a number of data sets during its operation.
The following table lists the data sets that COPY uses. The table lists the DD name
that is used to identify the data set, a description of the data set, and an indication
of whether it is required. Include statements in your JCL for each required data set
and any optional data sets that you want to use.
Table 17. Data sets that COPY uses
124
Data set
Description
Required?
SYSIN

control statement.
Yes
SYSPRINT
Yes
DSSPRINT
Output data set for messages when making

concurrent copies.
No1
Table 17. Data sets that COPY uses (continued)

Data set
Description
Required?
Filter
No2
A single data set that DB2 uses when you
specify the FILTERDDN option in the utility
control statement. This data set contains a
list of VSAM data set names that DB2
builds, and is used during COPY when you
specify the CONCURRENT and
FILTERDDN options.
Copies
From one to four output data sets that

Yes
contain the resulting image copy data sets.
Specify their DD names with the COPYDDN
and RECOVERYDDN options of the utility
control statement. The default is one copy to
be written to the data set described by the
SYSCOPY DD statement.
Note:
1. Required if you specify CONCURRENT and the SYSPRINT DD statement points to a
data set.
2. Required if you specify the FILTERDDN option.
Table space or index space
Object that is to be copied. (If you want to copy only certain data sets in a
table space, you must use the DSNUM option in the control statement.)
DB2 catalog objects
Objects in the catalog that COPY accesses. The utility records each copy in
the DB2 catalog table SYSIBM.SYSCOPY.
Output data set size

Image copies are written to sequential non-VSAM data sets.
Recommendation: Use a template for the image copy data set by specifying a
TEMPLATE statement without the SPACE keyword. When you omit this keyword,
the utility calculates the appropriate size of the data set for you.
Alternatively, you can find the approximate size of the image copy data set for a
table space, in bytes, by either executing COPY with the CHANGELIMIT
REPORTONLY option, or using the following procedure:
1. Find the high-allocated page number, either from the NACTIVEF column of
SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACE after running the RUNSTATS utility, or from
information in the VSAM catalog data set.
2. Multiply the high-allocated page number by the page size.
Filter data set size

Recommendation: Use a template for the filter data set by specifying a
TEMPLATE statement without the SPACE keyword. When you omit this keyword,
the utility calculates the appropriate size of the data set for you.
Chapter 11. COPY
125
Alternatively, you can determine the approximate size of the filter data set size that
is required, in bytes, by using the following formula, where n = the number of
specified objects in the COPY control statement:
(240 + (80 * n))
JCL parameters
You can specify a block size for the output by using the BLKSIZE parameter on the
DD statement for the output data set. Valid block sizes are multiples of 4096 bytes.
You can increase the buffer using the BUFNO parameter; for example, you might
specify BUFNO=30, which creates 30 buffers.
Cataloging image copies

To catalog your image copy data sets, use the DISP=(MOD,CATLG,CATLG)
parameter in the DD statement or TEMPLATE that is named by the COPYDDN
option. After the image copy is taken, the DSVOLSER column of the row that is
inserted into SYSIBM.SYSCOPY contains blanks.
Duplicate image copy data sets are not allowed. If a cataloged data set is already
recorded in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY with the same name as the new image copy data
set, the COPY utility issues a message and does not make the copy.
When RECOVER locates the SYSCOPY entry, it uses the operating system catalog
to allocate the required data set. If you have uncataloged the data set, the
allocation fails. In that case, the recovery can still go forward; RECOVER searches
for a previous image copy. But even if it finds one, RECOVER must use
correspondingly more of the log during recovery.
Recommendation: Keep the ICF catalog consistent with the information about
existing image copy data sets in the SYSIBM.SYSCOPY catalog table.
Related concepts
Data sets that online utilities use on page 13
Concurrency and compatibility for COPY

The COPY utility has certain concurrency and compatibility characteristics
associated with it.
compatible.
Restricted states
Do not copy a table space that is in any of the following states:
v CHECK-pending
v RECOVER-pending
v REFRESH-pending
v Logical error range
v Group buffer pool RECOVER-pending
v Stopped
v STOP-pending
Do not copy an index space that is in any of the following states:
v CHECK-pending
126
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
REBUILD-pending
RECOVER-pending
REFRESH pending
Logical error range
Group buffer pool RECOVER-pending
Stopped
STOP-pending
If a table space is in COPY-pending status, or a table space or index is in

informational COPY-pending status, you can reset the status only by taking a full
image copy of the entire table space, all partitions of the partitioned table space, or
the index space. When you make an image copy of a partition, the COPY-pending
status of the partition is reset. If a nonpartitioned table space is in COPY-pending
status, you can reset the status only by taking a full image copy of the entire table
space, and not of each data set.
Claims and drains

The following table shows which claim classes COPY claims and drains and any
restrictive status that the utility sets on the target object.
Table 18. Claim classes of COPY operations
Target
SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE
SHRLEVEL
CHANGE
Table space, index space, or partition
DW UTRO
CR UTRW1
Legend:
v DW - Drain the write claim class - concurrent access for SQL readers
v CR - Claim the read claim class
v UTRO - Utility restrictive state, read-only access allowed
v UTRW - Utility restrictive state, read-write access allowed
Note:
1. If the target object is a segmented table space, SHRLEVEL CHANGE does not allow you
to concurrently execute an SQL DELETE without the WHERE clause.
COPY does not set a utility restrictive state if the target object is
DSNDB01.SYSUTILX.
Compatibility
The following table documents which utilities can run concurrently with COPY on
the same target object. The target object can be a table space, an index space, or a
partition of a table space or index space. If compatibility depends on particular
options of a utility, that information is also documented in the table.
Table 19. Compatibility of COPY with other utilities
Action
COPY
INDEXSPACE
SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE
COPY
INDEXSPACE
SHRLEVEL
CHANGE
COPY
TABLESPACE
SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE1
COPY
TABLESPACE
SHRLEVEL
CHANGE
BACKUP SYSTEM
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CHECK DATA
Yes
Yes
No
No
CHECK INDEX
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CHECK LOB
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Chapter 11. COPY
127
Table 19. Compatibility of COPY with other utilities (continued)
Action
COPY
INDEXSPACE
SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE
COPY
INDEXSPACE
SHRLEVEL
CHANGE
COPY
TABLESPACE
SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE1
COPY
TABLESPACE
SHRLEVEL
CHANGE
COPY INDEXSPACE
No
No
Yes
Yes
COPY TABLESPACE
Yes
Yes
No
No
COPYTOCOPY
No
No
No
No
DIAGNOSE
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LOAD
No
No
No
No
MERGECOPY
No
No
No
No
MODIFY
No
No
No
No
QUIESCE
Yes
No
Yes
No
REBUILD INDEX
No
No
Yes
Yes
RECOVER INDEX
No
No
Yes
Yes
RECOVER TABLESPACE
Yes
Yes
No
No
REORG INDEX
No
No
Yes
Yes
REORG TABLESPACE
UNLOAD CONTINUE or
PAUSE
No
No
No
No
REORG TABLESPACE
UNLOAD ONLY or
EXTERNAL
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
REPAIR LOCATE by KEY,

RID, or PAGE DUMP or
VERIFY
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
REPAIR LOCATE by KEY

or RID DELETE or
REPLACE
No
No
No
No
REPAIR LOCATE INDEX

PAGE REPLACE
No
No
Yes
No
REPAIR LOCATE
TABLESPACE PAGE
REPLACE
Yes
Yes
No
No
REPORT
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
RESTORE SYSTEM
No
No
No
No
RUNSTATS INDEX
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
RUNSTATS TABLESPACE
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
STOSPACE
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
UNLOAD
Note:
1. If CONCURRENT option is used, contention might be encountered when other utilities

are run on the same object at the same time.
To run on DSNDB01.SYSUTILX, COPY must be the only utility in the job step.
Also, if SHRLEVEL REFERENCE is specified, the COPY job of
DSNDB01.SYSUTILX must be the only utility running in the Sysplex.
128
COPY on SYSUTILX is an exclusive job; such a job can interrupt another job
between job steps, possibly causing the interrupted job to time out.
Related concepts
Monitoring utilities with the DISPLAY UTILITY command on page 33
Related reference
Full image copies

You can make a full image copy of a table space, table space partition, data set of a
linear table space, index space, and index space partition.
The following statement specifies that the COPY utility is to make a full image
copy of the DSN8S91E table space in database DSN8D91A:
COPY TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E
The COPY utility writes pages from the table space or index space to the output
data sets. The JCL for the utility job must include DD statements or have a
template specification for the data sets. If the object consists of multiple data sets
and all are copied in one run, the copies reside in one physical sequential output
data set.
Image copies should be made either by entire page set or by partition, but not by
both.
Recommendations:
v Take a full image copy after any of the following operations:
CREATE or LOAD operations for a new object that is populated.
REORG operation for an existing object.

LOAD RESUME of an existing object.
LOGGED operation of a table space.
v Copy the indexes over a table space whenever a full copy of the table space is
taken. More frequent index copies decrease the number of log records that need
to be applied during recovery. At a minimum, you should copy an index when
it is placed in informational COPY-pending (ICOPY) status.
If you create an inline copy during LOAD or REORG, you do not need to execute
a separate COPY job for the table space. If you do not create an inline copy, and if
the LOG option is NO, the COPY-pending status is set for the table space. You
must then make a full image copy for any subsequent recovery of the data. An
incremental image copy is not allowed in this case. If the LOG option is YES, the
COPY-pending status is not set. However, your next image copy must be a full
image copy. Again, an incremental image copy is not allowed.
The COPY utility automatically takes a full image copy of a table space if you
attempt to take an incremental image copy when it is not allowed.
|
|
|
If a table space changes after an image copy is taken and before the table space is
altered from NOT LOGGED to LOGGED, the table space is marked
COPY-pending, and a full image copy must be taken.
The catalog table SYSIBM.SYSCOPY and the directory tables SYSIBM.SYSUTILX
and SYSIBM.SYSLGRNX record information from the COPY utility. Copying the
Chapter 11. COPY
129
catalog table or the directories can lock out separate COPY jobs that are running
simultaneously; therefore, defer copying the catalog table or directories until the
other copy jobs have completed if possible. However, if you must copy other
objects while another COPY job processes catalog tables or directories, specify
SHRLEVEL (CHANGE) for the copies of the catalog and directory tables.
Related reference
Incremental image copies

An incremental image copy is a copy of the pages that have been changed since
the last full or incremental image copy.
You cannot take an incremental image copy of an index space. You can make an
incremental image copy of a table space if the following conditions are true:
v A full image copy of the table space exists.
v The COPY-pending status is not on for that table space.
v The last copy was taken without the CONCURRENT option.
Copy by partition or data set

You can make an incremental image copy by partition or data set (specified by
DSNUM) in the following situations:
v A full image copy of the table space exists.
v A full image copy of the same partition or data set exists and the COPY-pending
status is not on for the table space or partition.
In addition, the full image copy must have been made after the most recent use of
CREATE, REORG or LOAD, or it must be an inline copy that was made during the
most recent use of LOAD or REORG.
Sample control statement

To specify an incremental image copy, use FULL NO on the COPY statement, as in
the following example:
FULL NO
SHRLEVEL CHANGE
Performance advantage
An incremental image copy generally does not require a complete scan of the table
space, with two exceptions:
v The table space is defined with the TRACKMOD NO option.
v You are taking the first copy after you altered a table space to TRACKMOD YES.
Space maps in each table space indicate, for each page, regardless of whether it has
changed since the last image copy. Therefore, making an incremental copy can be
significantly faster than making a full copy if the table space is defined with the
TRACKMOD YES option. Incremental image copies of a table space that is defined
with TRACKMOD NO still saves space, although the performance advantage is
smaller.
Restriction: You cannot make incremental copies of DSNDB01.DBD01,
DSNDB01.SYSUTILX, or DSNDB06.SYSCOPY in the catalog. For those objects,
COPY always makes a full image copy and places the SYSCOPY record in the log.
130
Multiple image copies

In a single COPY job, you can create up to four exact copies of a table space, table
space partition, data set of a linear table space, index space, or index space
partition.
Two copies can be made for use on the local DB2 system (installed with the option
LOCALSITE), and two more for offsite recovery (on any system that is installed
with the option RECOVERYSITE). All copies are identical, and all are produced at
the same time from one invocation of COPY. Alternatively you can use
COPYTOCOPY to create the needed image copies.
The ICBACKUP column in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY specifies whether the image copy
data set is for the local or recovery system, and whether the image copy data set is
for the primary copied data set or for the backup copied data set. The ICUNIT
column in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY specifies whether the image copy data set is on tape
or disk.
Remote-site recovery
For remote site recovery, DB2 assumes that the system and application libraries
and the DB2 catalog and directory are identical at the local site and recovery site.
You can regularly transport copies of archive logs and database data sets to a safe
location to keep current data for remote-site recovery current. This information can
be kept on tape until needed.
Naming the data sets for the copies

The COPYDDN option of COPY names the output data sets that receive copies for
local use. The RECOVERYDDN option names the output data sets that receive
copies that are intended for remote-site recovery. The options have the following
formats:
The DD names for the primary output data sets are ddname1 and ddname3. The
ddnames for the backup output data sets are ddname2 and ddname4.
Sample control statement

The following statement makes four full image copies of the table space DSN8S91E
in database DSN8D91A. The statement uses LOCALDD1 and LOCALDD2 as DD
names for the primary and backup copies that are used on the local system and
RECOVDD1 and RECOVDD2 as DD names for the primary and backup copies for
remote-site recovery:
COPYDDN (LOCALDD1,LOCALDD2)
RECOVERYDDN (RECOVDD1,RECOVDD2)
You do not need to make copies for local use and for remote-site recovery at the
same time. COPY allows you to use either the COPYDDN or the RECOVERYDDN
option without the other. If you make copies for local use more often than copies
for remote-site recovery, a remote-site recovery could be performed with an older
copy, and more of the log, than a local recovery; hence, the recovery would take
longer. However, in your plans for remote-site recovery, that difference might be
acceptable. You can also use MERGECOPY RECOVERYDDN to create recovery-site
Chapter 11. COPY
131
full image copies, and merge local incremental copies into new recovery-site full
copies.
Conditions for making multiple incremental image copies

DB2 cannot make incremental image copies if any of the following conditions is
true:
v The incremental image copy is requested only for a site other than the current
site (the local site from which the request is made).
v Incremental image copies are requested for both sites, but the most recent full
image copy was made for only one site.
v Incremental image copies are requested for both sites and the most recent full
image copies were made for both sites, but between the most recent full image
copy and current request, incremental image copies were made for the current
site only.
If you attempt to make incremental image copies under any of these conditions,
COPY terminates with return code 8, does not take the image copy or update the
SYSIBM.SYSCOPY table, and issues the following message:
DSNU404I csect-name
LOCAL SITE AND RECOVERY SITE INCREMENTAL
IMAGE COPIES ARE NOT SYNCHRONIZED
To proceed, and still keep the two sets of data synchronized, take another full
image copy of the table space for both sites, or change your request to make an
incremental image copy only for the site at which you are working.
DB2 cannot make an incremental image copy if the object that is being copied is an
index or index space.
Maintaining copy consistency

Make full image copies for both the local and recovery sites:
v If a table space is in COPY-pending status
v After a LOAD or REORG procedure that did not create an inline copy
v If an index is in the informational COPY-pending status
v If a table space is in informational COPY-pending status
This action helps to ensure correct recovery for both local and recovery sites. If the
requested full image copy is for one site only, but the history shows that copies
were made previously for both sites, COPY continues to process the image copy
and issues the following warning message:
DSNU406I
FULL IMAGE COPY SHOULD BE TAKEN FOR BOTH LOCAL SITE AND
RECOVERY SITE.
The COPY-pending status of a table space is not changed for the other site when
you make multiple image copies at the current site for that other site. For example,
if a table space is in COPY-pending status at the current site, and you make copies
from there for the other site only, the COPY-pending status is still on when you
bring up the system at that other site.
132
Related reference
Chapter 12, COPYTOCOPY, on page 155
Copying a list of objects

Within a single COPY control statement, the COPY utility allows you to process a
list that contains any of the following objects: table space, table space partition,
data set of a linear table space, index space, and index space partition.
|
|
|
Specifying objects in a list is useful for copying a complete set of referentially

related table spaces before running QUIESCE. Consider the following information
when taking an image copy for a list of objects:
v DB2 copies table spaces and index spaces in the list one at a time, in the
specified order, unless you invoke parallelism by specifying the PARALLEL
keyword.
v Each table space in the list with a CHANGELIMIT specification has a REPORT
phase, so the phase switches between REPORT and COPY while processing the
list.
v If processing completes successfully, any COPY-pending or informational
COPY-pending status on the table spaces and informational COPY-pending
status on the indexes are reset.
v If you use COPY with the SHRLEVEL(REFERENCE) option:
DB2 drains the write claim class on each table space and index in the
UTILINIT phase, which is held for the duration of utility processing.
Utility processing inserts SYSCOPY rows for all of the objects in the list at the
same time, after all of the objects have been copied.
All objects in the list have identical RBA or LRSN values for the START_RBA
column for the SYSCOPY rows: the START_RBA is set to the current LRSN at
the end of the COPY phase.
v If you use COPY with the SHRLEVEL(CHANGE) option:
If you specify OPTIONS EVENT(ITEMERROR,SKIP), each object in the list is
placed in UTRW status and the read claim class is held only while the object
is being copied. If you do not specify OPTIONS EVENT(ITEMERROR,SKIP),
all of the objects in the list are placed in UTRW status and the read claim
class is held on all objects for the entire duration of the COPY.
Utility processing inserts a SYSCOPY row for each object in the list when the
copy of each object is complete.
Objects in the list have different LRSN values for the START_RBA column for
the SYSCOPY rows; the START_RBA value is set to the current RBA or LRSN
at the start of copy processing for that object.
When you specify the PARALLEL keyword, DB2 supports parallelism for image
copies on disk or tape devices. You can control the number of tape devices to
allocate for the copy function by using TAPEUNITS with the PARALLEL keyword.
If you use JCL statements to define tape devices, the JCL controls the allocation of
the devices.
When you explicitly specify objects with the PARALLEL keyword, the objects are
not necessarily processed in the specified order. Objects that are to be written to
tape and whose file sequence numbers have been specified in the JCL are
processed in the specified order. If templates are used, you cannot specify file
sequence numbers. In the absence of overriding JCL specifications, DB2 determines
Chapter 11. COPY
133
the placement and, thus, the order of processing for such objects. When only
templates are used, objects are processed according to their size, with the largest
objects processed first.
Both the PARALLEL and TAPEUNITS keywords act as constraints on the
processing of the COPY utility. The PARALLEL keyword constrains the amount of
parallelism by restricting the maximum number of objects that can be processed
simultaneously. The TAPEUNITS keyword constrains the number of tape drives
that can be dynamically allocated for the COPY command. The TAPEUNITS
keyword can constrain the amount of parallelism if an object requires a number of
tapes such that the number of remaining tapes is insufficient to service another
object.
To calculate the number of threads that you need when you specify the PARALLEL
keyword, use the formula (n * 2 + 1), where n is the number of objects that are to
be processed in parallel, regardless of the total number of objects in the list. If you
do not use the PARALLEL keyword, n is 1 and COPY uses three threads for a
single-object COPY job.
|
|
|
|
|
COPY SCOPE PENDING indicates that you want to copy only those objects in
COPY-pending or informational COPY-pending status. When the DSNUM ALL
option is specified for partitioned objects, and one or more of the partitions are in
COPY-pending or informational COPY-pending status, a copy will be taken of the
entire table space or index space.
|
|
|
|
|
For partitioned objects, if you only want the partitions in COPY-pending status or
informational COPY-pending status to be copied, then a list of partitions should be
specified. It is recommended that you do this by invoking COPY on a LISTDEF list
built with the PARTLEVEL option. An output image copy data set will be created
for each partition that is in COPY-pending or informational COPY-pending status.
|
|
|
|
The LIMIT option on the TEMPLATE statement allows you to switch templates for
output copy data sets. Template switching is most commonly needed to direct
small data sets to DASD and large data sets to TAPE. This allows you to switch to
templates that differ in the UNIT, DSNs, or HSM classes.
The following table spaces cannot be included in a list of table spaces. You must
specify each one as a single object:
v DSNDB01.SYSUTILX
v DSNDB06.SYSCOPY
v DSNDB01.SYSLGRNX
The only exceptions to this restriction are the indexes over these table spaces that
were defined with the COPY YES attribute. You can specify such indexes along
with the appropriate table space.
Related reference
Using more than one COPY statement

You can use more than one control statement for COPY in one DB2 utility job step.
After each COPY statement executes successfully:
v A row that refers to each image copy is recorded in the SYSIBM.SYSCOPY table.
134
v The image copy data sets are valid and available for RECOVER, MERGECOPY,
COPYTOCOPY, and UNLOAD.
If a job step that contains more than one COPY statement abends, do not use
TERM UTILITY. Restart the job from the last commit point by using RESTART
instead. Terminating COPY by using TERM UTILITY in this case creates
inconsistencies between the ICF catalog and DB2 catalogs.
Copying segmented table spaces

COPY distinguishes between segmented and nonsegmented table spaces. If you
specify a segmented table space, COPY locates empty and unformatted data pages
in the table space and does not copy them.
Copying partitions or data sets in separate jobs

You can copy partitions or data sets in separate jobs.
You should use the PARALLEL option to copy partitions in the same COPY
execution in parallel. If you have a partitioned table space or partitioning index,
you can copy the partitions independently in separate simultaneous jobs. This can
reduce the time it takes to create an image copy of the total table space.
If a nonpartitioned table space consists of more than one data set, you can copy
several or all of the data sets independently in separate jobs. To do so, run
simultaneous COPY jobs (one job for each data set) and specify SHRLEVEL
CHANGE on each job.
However, creating copies simultaneously does not provide you with a consistent
recovery point unless you subsequently run a QUIESCE for the table space.
|
Copying partition-by-growth table spaces
|
|
|
An image copy at the table space level with SHRLEVEL(CHANGE) contains new
partitions added by SQL INSERTS after the image copy began. The newly added
partitions are recoverable via the DB2 logs.
|
|
|
|
When you make an image copy of a partition-by-growth table space, the partition
is empty as a result of REORG, SQL delete operations, or recovery to a prior point
in time. The empty partition has a header page and space map pages or system
pages. The COPY utility still copies the empty partition.
Copying an XML table space
|
|
|
Both full and incremental image copies are supported for an XML table space, as
well as SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, SHRLEVEL CHANGE, and the CONCURRENT
options.
|
|
COPY without the CONCURRENT option does not copy empty or unformatted
data pages of an XML table space.
|
|
|
|
If you copy a LOB table space that has a base table space with the NOT LOGGED
attribute, copy the base table space and the LOB table space together so that a
RECOVER TOLASTCOPY of the entire set results in consistent data across the base
table space and all of the associated LOB table spaces.
Chapter 11. COPY
135
|
|
|
|
|
To copy an XML table space with a base table space that has the NOT LOGGED
attribute, all associated XML table spaces must also have the NOT LOGGED
attribute. The XML table space acquires this NOT LOGGED attribute by being
linked to the logging attribute of its associated base table space. You cannot
independently alter the logging attribute of an XML table space.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the LOG column of the SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACE record for an XML table space
has the value of X, the logging attributes of the XML table space and its base
table space are linked, and that the logging attribute of both table spaces is NOT
LOGGED. To break the link, alter the logging attribute of the base table space back
to LOGGED, and the logging attribute of both table spaces are changed back to
LOGGED.
Copying indexes
|
|
|
If you copy a COPY YES index of a table space that has the NOT LOGGED
attribute, copy the indexes and table spaces together to ensure that the indexes and
the table space have the same recoverable point.
|
|
|
|
|
An index should be image copied after an ALTER INDEX REGENERATE. You

should copy the index after it has been rebuilt for these types of ALTER
statements:
v alter to padded
v alter to not padded
v alter add of a key column
|
|
v alter of a numeric data type key column
|
|
Any new partitions added by SQL INSERT are not contained in the image copy,
but the newly added partitions are recoverable by the DB2 logs.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When the index has the COMPRESS YES attribute, concurrent copies of indexes are
compressed because DFSMSdss is invoked to copy the VSAM linear data sets
(LDS) for the index. Image copies of indexes are not compressed because the index
pages are copied from the DB2 buffer pool. When image copies are taken without
the concurrent option, you can choose to compress the image copies by using
access method compression via DFSMS or by using IDRC if the image copies
reside on tape.
Using DFSMSdss concurrent copy

You might be able to gain improved availability by using the concurrent copy
function of the DFSMSdss component of the Data Facility Storage Management
Subsystem (DFSMS). You can subsequently run the DB2 RECOVER utility to
restore those image copies and apply the necessary log records to them to
complete recovery.
The CONCURRENT option of COPY invokes DFSMSdss concurrent copy. The
COPY utility records the resulting DFSMSdss concurrent copies in the catalog table
SYSIBM.SYSCOPY with ICTYPE=F and STYPE=C or STYPE=J. STYPE=C indicates
that the concurrent copy was taken of the I instance of the table space (which
means that the instance qualifier in the name of the corresponding data set begins
with the letter I). STYPE=J indicates that the concurrent copy was taken of the J
instance of the table space (which means that the instance qualifier in the name of
the corresponding data set begins with the letter J ).
136
To obtain a consistent offline backup copy outside of DB2:

1. Start the DB2 objects that are being backed up for read-only access by issuing
the following command:
-START DATABASE(database-name) SPACENAM(
tablespace-name) ACCESS(RO)
Allowing read-only access is necessary to ensure that no updates to data occur

during this procedure.
2. Run QUIESCE with the WRITE(YES) option to quiesce all DB2 objects that are
being backed up.
3. Back up the DB2 data sets after the QUIESCE utility completes successfully.
4. Issue the following command to allow transactions to access the data:
-START DATABASE(database-name) SPACENAM(tablespace-name)
If you use the CONCURRENT option:

v You must supply either a COPYDDN DD name, a RECOVERYDDN DD name,
or both.
v You can set the disposition to DISP=(MOD,CATLG,CATLG) if you specify the
new data set for the image copy on a scratch volume (a specific volume serial
number is not specified). You must set the disposition to
DISP=(NEW,CATLG,CATLG) if you specify a specific volume serial number for
the new image copy data set.
v If you are restarting COPY, specify DISP=(MOD,CATLG,CATLG) or
DISP=(NEW,CATLG,CATLG) for the COPYDDN and RECOVERYDDN data sets.
The DFSMSdss DUMP command does not support appending to an existing
data set. Therefore, the COPY utility converts any DISP=MOD data sets to
DISP=OLD before invoking DFSMSdss.
v If the SYSPRINT DD statement points to a data set, you must use a DSSPRINT
DD statement.
v If the page size in the table space matches the control interval for the associated
data set, you can use either the SHRLEVEL CHANGE option or the SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE option. If the page size does not match the control interval, you
must use the SHRLEVEL REFERENCE option for table spaces with a 8-KB,
16-KB, or 32-KB page size.
Restrictions on using DFSMSdss concurrent copy

You cannot use a copy that is made with DFSMSdss concurrent copy with the
PAGE or ERRORRANGE options of the RECOVER utility. If you specify PAGE or
ERROR RANGE, RECOVER bypasses any concurrent copy records when searching
the SYSIBM.SYSCOPY table for a recovery point.
You can use the CONCURRENT option with SHRLEVEL CHANGE on a table
space if the page size in the table space matches the control interval for the
associated data set.
Also, you cannot run the following DB2 stand-alone utilities on copies that are
made by DFSMSdss concurrent copy:
DSN1COMP
DSN1COPY
DSN1PRNT
You cannot execute the CONCURRENT option from the DB2I Utilities panel or
from the DSNU TSO CLIST command.
Chapter 11. COPY
137
Requirements for using DFSMSdss concurrent copy

DFSMSdss concurrent copy is enabled by specific hardware. Contact IBM or the
vendor for your specific storage product to verify whether your controller or
storage server supports the concurrent copy function.
Table space availability

If you specify COPY SHRLEVEL REFERENCE with the CONCURRENT option,
and if you want to copy all of the data sets for a list of table spaces to the same
dump data set, specify FILTERDDN in your COPY statement to improve table
space availability. If you do not specify FILTERDDN, COPY might force DFSMSdss
to process the list of table spaces sequentially, which might limit the availability of
some of the table spaces that are being copied.
Related concepts
How DB2 restarts with lists on page 41
Specifying conditional image copies

Use the CHANGELIMIT option of the COPY utility to specify conditional image
copies. You can use it to get a report of image copy information about a table
space, or you can let DB2 decide whether to take an image copy based on this
information.
You cannot use the CHANGELIMIT option for a table space or partition that is
defined with TRACKMOD NO. If you change the TRACKMOD option from NO to
YES, you must take an image copy before you can use the CHANGELIMIT option.
When you change the TRACKMOD option from NO to YES for a linear table
space, you must take a full image copy by using DSNUM ALL before you can
copy using the CHANGELIMIT option.
Obtaining image copy information about a table space

When you specify COPY CHANGELIMIT REPORTONLY, COPY reports image
copy information for the table space and recommends the type of copy, if any, to
take. The report includes:
v The total number of pages in the table space. This value is the number of pages
that are to be copied if a full image copy is taken.
v The number of empty pages, if the table space is segmented.
v The number of changed pages. This value is the number of pages that are to be
copied if an incremental image copy is taken.
v The percentage of changed pages.
v The type of image copy that is recommended.
Adding conditional code to your COPY job

You can add conditional code to your jobs so that an incremental or full image
copy, or some other step, is performed depending on how much the table space
has changed. For example, you can add a conditional MERGECOPY step to create
a new full image copy if your COPY job took an incremental copy. COPY
CHANGELIMIT uses the following return codes to indicate the degree that a table
space or list of table spaces has changed:
1 (informational)
If no CHANGELIMIT was met.
138
2 (informational)
If the percentage of changed pages is greater than the low CHANGELIMIT
and less than the high CHANGELIMIT value.
3 (informational)
If the percentage of changed pages is greater than or equal to the high
CHANGELIMIT value.
If you specify multiple COPY control statements in one job step, that job step
reports the highest return code from all of the imbedded statements. Basically, the
statement with the highest percentage of changed pages determines the return
code and the recommended action for the entire list of COPY control statements
that are contained in the subsequent job step.
Using conditional copy with generation data groups (GDGs)

When you use generation data groups (GDGs) and need to make an incremental
image copy, take the following steps to prevent creating an empty image copy:
1. Include in your job a first step in which you run COPY with CHANGELIMIT
REPORTONLY. Set the SYSCOPY DD statement to DD DUMMY so that no
output data set is allocated. If you specify REPORTONLY and use a template,
DB2 does not dynamically allocate the data set.
2. Add a conditional JCL statement to examine the return code from the COPY
CHANGELIMIT REPORTONLY step.
3. Add a second COPY step without CHANGELIMIT REPORTONLY to copy the
table space or table space list based on the return code from the second step.
Preparing for recovery

Read the following information pertaining to recovery, if you are taking
incremental copies, if you have recently run REORG or LOAD, or if you plan to
recover a LOB table space.
Using incremental copies

The RECOVER TABLESPACE utility merges all incremental image copies since the
last full image copy, and it must have all the image copies available at the same
time. If this requirement is likely to strain your system resourcesfor example, by
demanding more tape units than are availableconsider regularly merging
multiple image copies into one copy.
Even if you do not periodically merge multiple image copies into one copy when
you do not have enough tape units, RECOVER TABLESPACE can still attempt to
recover the object. RECOVER dynamically allocates the full image copy and
attempts to dynamically allocate all the incremental image copy data sets. If every
incremental copy can be allocated, recovery proceeds to merge pages to table
spaces and apply the log. If a point is reached where RECOVER TABLESPACE
cannot allocate an incremental copy, the log RBA of the last successfully allocated
data set is noted. Attempts to allocate incremental copies cease, and the merge
proceeds using only the allocated data sets. The log is applied from the noted RBA,
and the incremental image copies that were not allocated are simply ignored.
After running LOAD or REORG

Recommendation: Create primary and backup image copies after specifying a
LOAD or REORG operation with LOG NO when an inline copy is not created.
Chapter 11. COPY
139
Create these copies, so that if the primary image copy is not available, fallback
recovery using the secondary image copy is possible.
Creating a point of recovery

If you use COPY SHRLEVEL REFERENCE to copy a list of objects that contains all
referentially related structures, you do not need to QUIESCE these objects in order
to create a consistent point of recovery because the objects will be recovered with
transactional consistency (the objects will only contain data that has been
committed). However, recovering objects to a quiesce point will be faster because
no work has to be backed out. Also, you may still want to establish quiesce points
for related sets of objects if there is a need to plan for point-in-time recovery for
the entire set.
For LOB data, you should quiesce and copy both the base table space and the LOB
table space at the same time to establish a recovery point of consistency, called a
recovery point. Be aware that QUIESCE does not create a recovery point for a LOB
table space that contains LOBs that are defined with LOG NO.
Setting and clearing the informational COPY-pending status

For an index that was defined with the COPY YES attribute the following utilities
can place the index in the informational COPY-pending (ICOPY) status:
v REORG INDEX
v REORG TABLESPACE LOG YES or NO
v LOAD TABLE LOG YES or NO
v REBUILD INDEX
After the utility processing completes, take a full image copy of the index space so
that the RECOVER utility can recover the index space. If you need to recover an
index of which you did not take a full image copy, use the REBUILD INDEX
utility to rebuild the index from data in the table space.
Table spaces with the NOT LOGGED attribute that have been updated since the
last full copy will be in informational COPY-pending status. To copy the table
spaces that have been updated, run the COPY utility with the SCOPE PENDING
option.
|
|
|
|
Improving performance
Certain activities can improve COPY performance.
You can merge a full image copy and subsequent incremental image copies into a
new full copy by running the MERGECOPY utility. After reorganizing a table
space, the first image copy must be a full image copy.
Do not base the decision of whether to run a full image copy or an incremental
image copy on the number of rows that are updated since the last image copy was
taken. Instead, base your decision on the percentage of pages that contain at least
one updated record (not the number of updated records). Regardless of the size of
the table, if more than 50% of the pages contain updated records, use full image
copy (this saves the cost of a subsequent MERGECOPY). To find the percentage of
changed pages, you can execute COPY with the CHANGELIMIT REPORTONLY
option. Alternatively, you can execute COPY CHANGELIMIT to allow COPY to
determine whether a full image copy or incremental copy is required.
140
Using DB2 data compression for table spaces can improve COPY performance
because COPY does not decompress data. The performance improvement is
proportional to the amount of compression.
Copying table spaces with mixed volume IDs

You cannot copy a table space or index space that uses a storage group that is
defined with mixed specific and non-specific volume IDs by using CREATE
STOGROUP or ALTER STOGROUP. If you specify such a table space or index
space, the job terminates and you receive error message DSNU419I.
Defining generation data groups

Use generation data groups to hold image copies, because their use automates the
allocation of data set names and the deletion of the oldest data set.
When you define the generation data group:
v You can specify that the oldest data set is automatically deleted when the
maximum number of data sets is reached. If you do that, make the maximum
number large enough to support all recovery requirements. When data sets are
deleted, use the MODIFY utility to delete the corresponding rows in
SYSIBM.SYSCOPY.
v Make the limit number of generation data sets equal to the number of copies
that you want to keep. Use NOEMPTY to avoid deleting all the data sets from
the integrated catalog facility catalog when the limit is reached.
Attention: Do not take incremental image copies when using generation data
groups unless data pages have changed. When you use generation data groups,
taking an incremental image copy when no data pages have changed causes the
following results:
v The new image copy data set is empty.
v No SYSCOPY record is inserted for the new image copy data set.
v Your oldest image copy is deleted.
Recommendation: Use templates when using generation data groups.
Related concepts
Specifying conditional image copies on page 138
Using DB2 with DFSMS products

You can use DB2 with DFSMS products.
If image copy data sets are managed by HSM or SMS, all data sets are cataloged.
If you plan to use SMS, catalog all image copies. Never maintain cataloged and
uncataloged image copies that have the same name.
Image copies on tape

Do not combine a full image copy and incremental image copies for the same table
space on one tape volume. If you do, the RECOVER TABLESPACE utility cannot
allocate the incremental image copies.
Chapter 11. COPY
141
Termination of COPY
You can terminate the COPY utility.
An active or stopped COPY job may be terminated with the TERM UTILITY
command. However, if you issue TERM UTILITY while COPY is in the active or
stopped state, DB2 inserts an ICTYPE=T record in the SYSIBM.SYSCOPY catalog
table for each object that COPY had started processing, but not yet completed.
(Exception: If the COPY utility is already in the UTILTERM phase, the image copy
is considered completed.) For copies that are made with SHRLEVEL REFERENCE,
some objects in the list might not have an ICTYPE=T record. For SHRLEVEL
CHANGE, some objects might have a valid ICTYPE=F, I, or T record, or no record
at all. The COPY utility does not allow you to take an incremental image copy if
an ICTYPE=T record exists. You must make a full image copy.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Implications of DISP on the DD statement

The result of terminating a COPY job that uses the parameter
DISP=(MOD,CATLG,CATLG) varies as follows:
v If only one COPY control statement exists, no row is written to
SYSIBM.SYSCOPY, but an image copy data set has been created and is cataloged
in the ICF catalog. You should delete that image copy data set.
v If several COPY control statements are in one COPY job step, a row for each
successfully completed copy is written to SYSIBM.SYSCOPY. However, all the
image copy data sets have been created and cataloged. You should delete all
image copy data sets that are not recorded in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY.
Restart of COPY
You can restart the COPY utility.
Recommendation: Use restart current when possible, because it:
v Is valid for full image copies and incremental copies
v Is valid for a single job step with several COPY control statements
v Is valid for a list of objects
v Requires a minimum of re-processing
v Keeps the DB2 catalog and the integrated catalog facility catalog synchronized
If you do not use the TERM UTILITY command, you can restart a COPY job.
COPY jobs with the CONCURRENT option restart from the beginning, and other
COPY jobs restart from the last commit point. You cannot use RESTART(PHASE)
for any COPY job. If you are restarting a COPY job with uncataloged output data
sets, you must specify the appropriate volumes for the job in the JCL or on the
TEMPLATE utility statement. Doing so could impact your ability to use implicit
restart.
If the recommended procedure is not followed an ABEND 413-1C may occur
during restart of the COPY.
|
|
Restarting with a new data set

If you define a new output data set for a current restart, complete the following
actions before restarting the COPY job:
1. Copy the failed COPY output to the new data set.
142
2. Delete the old data set.

3. Rename the new data set to use the old data set name.
Restarting COPY after an out-of-space condition

You can also restart COPY from the last commit point after receiving an
out-of-space condition.
Related concepts
Related tasks
Restarting after the output data set is full on page 40
Sample COPY control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own COPY
control statements.
In some cases, you might run a COPY utility job more than once. To avoid
duplicate image copy data sets, a DSN qualifier is used in the following examples.
Example 1: Making a full image copy

The following control statement specifies that the COPY utility is to make a full
image copy of table space DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E. The copy is to be written to the
data set that is defined by the SYSCOPY DD statement in the JCL; SYSCOPY is the
default.
//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='IUJMU111.COPYTS',
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='DSN'
//SYSCOPY DD DSN=COPY001F.IFDY01,UNIT=SYSDA,VOL=SER=CPY01I,
//
SPACE=(CYL,(15,1)),DISP=(NEW,CATLG,CATLG)
//SYSIN DD *
/*
Instead of defining the data sets in the JCL, you can use templates. In the
following example, the preceding job is modified to use a template. In this
example, the name of the template is LOCALDDN. The LOCALDDN template is
identified in the COPY statement by the COPYDDN option.
//STEP1
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='DSN'
//SYSIN DD *
TEMPLATE LOCALDDN UNIT SYSDA DSN(COPY001F.IFDY01)
SPACE(15,1) CYL DISP(NEW,CATLG,CATLG)
COPY TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81E COPYDDN(LOCALDDN)
/*
Recommendation: When possible, use templates to allocate data sets.
Example 2: Making full image copies for local site and recovery
site
The following COPY control statement specifies that COPY is to make primary and
backup full image copies of table space DSN8D91P.DSN8S91C at both the local site
and the recovery site. The COPYDDN option specifies the output data sets for the
Chapter 11. COPY
143
local site, and the RECOVERYDDN option specifies the output data sets for the
recovery site. The PARALLEL option indicates that up to 2 objects are to be
processed in parallel.
The OPTIONS statement at the beginning indicates that if COPY encounters any
errors (return code 8) while making the requested copies, DB2 ignores that
particular item. COPY skips that item and moves on to the next item. For example,
if DB2 encounters an error copying the specified data set to the COPY1 data set,
DB2 ignores the error and tries to copy the table space to the COPY2 data set.
OPTIONS EVENT(ITEMERROR,SKIP)
COPY TABLESPACE DSN8D81P.DSN8S81C
COPYDDN(COPY1,COPY2)
RECOVERYDDN(COPY3,COPY4)
PARALLEL(2)
Example 3: Making full image copies of a list of objects

The control statement below specifies that COPY is to make local and recovery full
image copies (both primary and backup) of the following objects:
v Table space DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D, and its indexes:
DSN8910.XDEPT1
DSN8910.XDEPT2
DSN8910.XDEPT3
v Table space DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E, and its indexes:
DSN8710.XEMP1
DSN8710.XEMP2
These copies are to be written to the data sets that are identified by the COPYDDN
and RECOVERYDDN options for each object. The COPYDDN option specifies the
data sets for the copies at the local site, and the RECOVERYDDN option specifies
the data sets for the copies at the recovery site. The first parameter of each of these
options specifies the data set for the primary copy, and the second parameter
specifies the data set for the backup copy. For example, the primary copy of table
space DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D at the recovery site is to be written to the data set
that is identified by the COPY3 DD statement.
PARALLEL(4) indicates that up to four of these objects can be processed in
parallel. As the COPY job of an object completes, the next object in the list begins
processing in parallel until all of the objects have been processed.
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE specifies that no updates are allowed during the COPY
job. This option is the default and is recommended to ensure the integrity of the
data in the image copy.
//STEP1
//
//
//COPY1
//
//COPY2
//
//COPY3
//
//COPY4
//
//COPY5
//
//COPY6
144
DD
DD
DD
DD
DD
DD
UTPROC='',
SYSTEM='DSN'
DSN=C81A.S20001.D2003142.T155241.LP,
DSN=C81A.S20001.D2003142.T155241.LB,
DSN=C81A.S20001.D2003142.T155241.RP,
DSN=C81A.S20001.D2003142.T155241.RB,
DSN=C81A.S20002.D2003142.T155241.LP,
DSN=C81A.S20002.D2003142.T155241.LB,
//
//COPY7 DD DSN=C81A.S20002.D2003142.T155241.RP,
//
//COPY8 DD DSN=C81A.S20002.D2003142.T155241.RB,
//
//COPY1 DD DSN=C81A.S20001.D2003142.T155241.LP,
//
//COPY2 DD DSN=C81A.S20001.D2003142.T155241.LB,
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//SYSIN DD *
COPY
COPYDDN (COPY1,COPY2)
RECOVERYDDN (COPY3,COPY4)
INDEX DSN8910.XDEPT1
Chapter 11. COPY
145
INDEX DSN8910.XEMP1
INDEX DSN8910.XEMP2
PARALLEL(4)
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
/*
Figure 16. Example of making full image copies of multiple objects
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can also write this COPY job so that it uses lists and templates, as shown
below. In this example, the name of the template is T1. Note that this TEMPLATE
statement does not contain any space specifications for the dynamically allocated
data sets. Instead, DB2 determines the space requirements. The T1 template is
identified in the COPY statement by the COPYDDN and RECOVERYDDN options.
The name of the list is COPYLIST. This list is identified in the COPY control
statement by the LIST option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
//STEP1
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='DSN'
//SYSIN DD *
TEMPLATE T2 UNIT(SYSDA) SPACE CYL
DSN(T2.&SN..T&TI..COPY&IC.&LOCREM.)
LIMIT(5 MB,T2)
LISTDEF COPYLIST
INCLUDE TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D
INCLUDE INDEX DSN8810.XDEPT1
INCLUDE TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81E
INCLUDE INDEX DSN8810.XEMP1
COPY LIST COPYLIST COPYDDN(T1,T1)
RECOVERYDDN(T1,T1)
PARALLEL(4) SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
/*
Figure 17. Example of using a list and template to make full image copies of multiple objects
Example 4: Using template switching

The following TEMPLATE control statement assumes that tables space SMALL.TS
occupies 10 cylinders and table space LARGE.TS occupies 100 cylinders. Both
COPY statements use the SMALLTP template which specifies a limit of 20
cylinders. Table space SMALL.TS is smaller than this limit so no switching is
|
|
|
|
146
|
|
|
|
performed. The output data set for table space SMALL.TS will be allocated on
UNIT=SYSALLDA. Table space LARGE.TS is larger than this limit so the template
is switched to the LARGETP template. The output data set for table space
LARGE.TS will be allocated on UNIT=TAPE.
TEMPLATE LARGETP DSN &DB..&TS..D&DA..T&TI. UNIT=TAPE
TEMPLATE SMALLTP DSN &DB..&TS..D&DA..T&TI. UNIT=SYSALLDA LIMIT( 20 CYL, LARGETP )
COPY TABLESPACE SMALL.TS COPYDDN( SMALLTP )
COPY TABLESPACE LARGE.TS COPYDDN( SMALLTP )
Note that the DSN option of the TEMPLATE statement identifies the names of the
data sets to which the copies are to be written.
Each of the preceding COPY jobs create a point of consistency for the table spaces
and their indexes. You can subsequently use the RECOVER utility with the
TOLOGPOINT option to recover all of these objects.
Example 5: Making full image copies of a list of objects in

parallel on tape
The following COPY control statement specifies that COPY is to make image
copies of the specified table spaces and their associated index spaces in parallel
and stack the copies on different tape devices.
The PARALLEL 2 option specifies that up to two objects can be processed in
parallel. The TAPEUNITS 2 option specifies that up to two tape devices can be
dynamically allocated at one time. The COPYDDN option for each object specifies
the data set that is to be used for the local image copy. In this example, all of these
data sets are dynamically allocated and defined by templates. For example, table
space DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D is copied into a data set that is defined by the A1
template.
The TEMPLATE utility control statements define the templates A1 and A2.
//COPY2A
//SYSIN
EXEC DSNUPROC,SYSTEM=DSN
DD *
TEMPLATE A1 DSN(&DB..&SP..COPY1) UNIT CART STACK YES
TEMPLATE A2 DSN(&DB..&SP..COPY2) UNIT CART STACK YES
COPY PARALLEL 2 TAPEUNITS 2
TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D COPYDDN(A1)
INDEXSPACE DSN8810.XDEPT COPYDDN(A1)
TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81E COPYDDN(A2)
INDEXSPACE DSN8810.YDEPT COPYDDN(A2)
Although use of templates is recommended, you can also define the output data
sets by coding JCL DD statements, as in the following example. This COPY control
statement also specifies a list of objects to be processed in parallel, but in this case,
the data sets are defined by DD statements. In each DD statement, notice the
parameters for the VOLUME option. These values show that the data sets are
defined on three different tape devices as follows:
v The first tape device contains data sets that are defined by DD statements DD1
and DD4. (For DD4, the VOLUME option has a value of *.DD1 for the REF
parameter.)
v A second tape device contains data sets that are defined by DD statements DD2
and DD3. (For DD3, the VOLUME option has a value of *.DD3 for the REF
parameter.)
v A third tape device contains the data set that is defined by DD statement DD5.
Chapter 11. COPY
147
The following table spaces are to be processed in parallel on two different tape
devices:
v DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D on the device that is defined by the DD1 DD statement
and the device that is defined by the DD5 DD statement
v DSN8D81A.DSN8S81E on the device that is defined by the DD2 DD statement
Copying of the following tables spaces must wait until processing has completed
for DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D and DSN8D81A.DSN8S81E:
v DSN8D81A.DSN8S81F on the device that is defined by the DD2 DD statement
after DSN8D81A.DSN8S81E completes processing
v DSN8D81A.DSN8S81G on the device that is defined by the DD1 DD statement
after DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D completes processing
//COPY1A
//DD1 DD DSN=DB1.TS1.CLP,
//
DISP=(NEW,CATLG,CATLG),
//
UNIT=TAPE,LABEL=(1,SL),
//
VOLUME=(,RETAIN)
//
//
//
VOLUME=(,RETAIN)
//DD3 DD DSN=DB3.TS3.CLB.BACKUP,
//
//
//
VOLUME=(,RETAIN,REF=*.DD2)
//
//
//
VOLUME=(,RETAIN,REF=*.DD1)
//
//
//
VOLUME=(,RETAIN)
TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D COPYDDN(DD1,DD5)
TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81E COPYDDN(DD2)
TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81F COPYDDN(DD3)
TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81G COPYDDN(DD4)
Figure 18. Example of making full image copies of a list of objects in parallel on tape
Example 6: Using both JCL-defined and template-defined data

sets to copy a list of objects on tape
This example uses both JCL DD statements and utility templates to define four
data sets for the image copies. The JCL defines two data sets (DB1.TS1.CLP and
DB2.TS2.CLB.BACKUP), and the TEMPLATE utility control statements define two
data sets that are to be dynamically allocated (&DB..&SP..COPY1 and
&DB..&SP..COPY2).
The COPYDDN options in the COPY control statement specify the data sets that
are to be used for the local primary and backup image copies of the specified table
spaces. For example, the primary copy of table space DSN8D81A.DSN8S71D is to
be written to the data set that is defined by the DD1 DD statement (DB1.TS1.CLP),
and the primary copy of table space DSN8D81A.DSN8S71E is to be written to the
data set that is defined by the A1 template (&DB..&SP..COPY1).
148
Four tape devices are allocated for this COPY job: the JCL allocates two tape
drives, and the TAPEUNITS 2 option in the COPY statement indicates that two
tape devices are to be dynamically allocated. Note that the TAPEUNITS option
applies only to those tape devices that are dynamically allocated by the
TEMPLATE statement.
Recommendation: Although this example shows how to use both templates and
DD statements, use only templates, if possible.
//COPY1D
//
DISP=(,CATLG),
//
UNIT=3490,LABEL=(1,SL)
//
VOLUME=(,RETAIN)
//
DISP=(,CATLG),
//
UNIT=3490,LABEL=(2,SL)
//
VOLUME=(,RETAIN)
//SYSIN
DD *
TEMPLATE A1 DSN(&DB..&SN..COPY1) UNIT CART STACK YES
TEMPLATE A2 DSN(&DB..&SN..COPY2) UNIT CART STACK YES
TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D COPYDDN(DD1,DD2)
TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81E COPYDDN(A1,A2)
Figure 19. Example of using both JCL-defined and template-defined data sets to copy a list
of objects on a tape
Example 7: Using LISTDEF to define a list of objects to copy in

parallel to tape
The following example uses the LISTDEF utility to define a list of objects to be
copied in parallel to different tape sources. The COPY control statement specifies
that the table spaces that are included in the PAYROLL list are to copied. (The
PAYROLL list is defined by the LISTDEF control statement.) The TEMPLATE
control statements define two output data sets, one for the local primary copy
(&DB..&COPY..LOCAL) and one for the recovery primary copy
(&DB..&COPY..REMOTE).
//COPY3A
//SYSIN
DD *
LISTDEF PAYROLL INCLUDE TABLESPACES TABLESPACE DBPAYROLL.*
INCLUDE BOTH
TEMPLATE LOCAL DSN(&DB..&COPY..LOCAL) (+1) UNIT CART STACK YES
TEMPLATE REMOTE DSN(&DB..&COPY..REMOTE) (+1) UNIT CART STACK YES
COPY LIST PAYROLL PARALLEL(10) TAPEUNITS(8)
COPYDDN(LOCAL) RECOVERYDDN(REMOTE)
In the preceding example, the utility determines the number of tape streams to use
by dividing the value for TAPEUNITS (8) by the number of output data sets (2) for
a total of 4 in this example. For each tape stream, the utility attaches one subtask.
The list of objects is sorted by size and processed in descending order. The first
subtask to finish processes the next object in the list. In this example, the
PARALLEL(10) option limits the number of objects to be processed in parallel to 10
and attaches four subtasks. Each subtask copies the objects in the list in parallel to
two tape drives, one for the primary and one for the recovery output data sets.
Chapter 11. COPY
149
Example 8: Making incremental copies with updates allowed

The FULL NO option in the following COPY control statement specifies that COPY
is to make incremental image copies of any specified objects. In this case, the
objects to be copied are those objects that are included in the NAME1 list, as
indicated by the LIST option. The preceding LISTDEF utility control statement
defines the NAME1 list to include index space DSN8D81A.XEMP1 and table space
DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D. Although one of the objects to be copied is an index space
and COPY does not take incremental image copies of index spaces, the job does
not fail; COPY takes a full image copy of the index space instead. However, if a
COPY FULL NO statement identifies only an index that is not part of a list, the
COPY job fails.
All specified copies (local primary and backup copies and remote primary and
backup copies) are written to data sets that are dynamically allocated according to
the specifications of the COPYDS template. This template is defined in the
preceding TEMPLATE utility control statement.
The SHRLEVEL CHANGE option in the following COPY control statement
specifies that updates can be made during the COPY job.
TEMPLATE COPYDS DSN &US.2.&SN..&LR.&PB..D&DATE.
LISTDEF NAME1 INCLUDE INDEXSPACE DSN8D81A.XEMP1
INCLUDE TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D
COPY LIST NAME1 COPYDDN(COPYDS, COPYDS) RECOVERYDDN(COPYDS,COPYDS)
FULL NO SHRLEVEL CHANGE
Example 9: Making a conditional image copy

The CHANGELIMIT(5) option in the following control statement specifies the
following conditions for making an image copy of table space
DSN8D81P.DSN8S81C:
v Take a full image copy of the table space if the percentage of changed pages is
equal to or greater than 5%.
v Take an incremental image copy of the table space if the percentage of changed
pages is greater than 0 and less than 5%.
v Do not take an image copy if no pages have changed.
COPY TABLESPACE DSN8D91P.DSN8S91C CHANGELIMIT(5)
Example 10: Reporting image copy information for a table space

The REPORTONLY option in the following control statement specifies that image
copy information is to be displayed only; no image copies are to be made. The
CHANGELIMIT(10,40) option specifies that the following information is to be
displayed:
v Recommendation that a full image copy be made if the percentage of changed
pages is equal to or greater than 40%.
v Recommendation that an incremental image copy be made if the percentage of
changed pages is greater than 10% and less than 40%.
v Recommendation that no image copy be made if the percentage of changed
pages is 10% or less.
COPY TABLESPACE DSN8D91P.DSN8S91C CHANGELIMIT(10,40) REPORTONLY
150
Example 11: Invoking DFSMSdss concurrent copy

The CONCURRENT option in the following COPY control statement specifies that
DFSMSdss concurrent copy is to make a full image copy of the objects in the
COPYLIST list (table space DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D and table space
DSN8D81A.DSN8S81P). The COPYDDN option indicates that the copy is to be
written to the data set that is defined by the SYSCOPY1 template. The DSSPRINT
DD statement specifies the data set for message output.
//COPY
//SYSPRINT
//
//DSSPRINT
//
//SYSIN
TEMPLATE
DD DSN=COPY1.PRINT1,DISP=(NEW,CATLG,CATLG),
SPACE=(4000,(20,20),,,ROUND),UNIT=SYSDA,VOL=SER=DB2CC5
DD DSN=COPY1.PRINT2,DISP=(NEW,CATLG,CATLG),
SPACE=(4000,(20,20),,,ROUND),UNIT=SYSDA,VOL=SER=DB2CC5
DD *
SYSCOPY1 DSN &DB..&TS..COPY&IC.&LR.&PB..D&DATE..T&TIME.
UNIT(SYSDA) DISP (MOD,CATLG,CATLG)
LISTDEF COPYLIST INCLUDE TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D
INCLUDE TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81P
COPY LIST COPYLIST
COPYDDN (SYSCOPY1)
CONCURRENT
Figure 20. Example of invoking DFSMSdss concurrent copy with the COPY utility
Example 12: Invoking DFSMSdss concurrent copy and using a

filter data set
The control statement specifies that DFSMSdss concurrent copy is to make full
image copies of the objects in the TSLIST list (table spaces TS1, TS2, and TS3). The
FILTERDDN option specifies that COPY is to use the filter data set that is defined
by the FILT template. All output is sent to the SYSCOPY data set, as indicated by
the COPYDDN(SYSCOPY) option. SYSCOPY is the default. This data set is defined
in the preceding TEMPLATE control statement.
LISTDEF TSLIST
INCLUDE TABLESPACE TS1
TEMPLATE SYSCOPY DSN &DB..&TS..COPY&IC.&LR.&PB..D&DATE..T&TIME.
UNIT(SYSDA) DISP (MOD,CATLG,CATLG)
TEMPLATE FILT DSN FILT.TEST1.&SN..D&DATE.
UNIT(SYSDA) DISP (MOD,CATLG,DELETE)
COPY LIST TSLIST
FILTERDDN(FILT)
COPYDDN(SYSCOPY)
CONCURRENT
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
Figure 21. Example of invoking DFSMSdss concurrent copy with the COPY utility and using a
filter data set
Example 13: Copying LOB table spaces together with related

objects
Assume that table space TPIQUD01 is a base table space and that table spaces
TLIQUDA1, TLIQUDA2, TLIQUDA3, and TLIQUDA4 are LOB table spaces. The
control statement specifies that COPY is to take the following actions:
v Take a full image copy of each specified table space if the percentage of changed
pages is equal to or greater than the highest decimal percentage value for the
Chapter 11. COPY
151
CHANGELIMIT option for that table space. For example, if the percentage of
changed pages for table space TPIQUD01 is equal to or greater than 6.7%, COPY
is to take a full image copy.
v Take an incremental image copy of each specified table space if the percentage of
changed pages falls in the range between the specified decimal percentage
values for the CHANGELIMIT option for that table space. For example, if the
percentage of changed pages for table space TLIQUDA1 is greater than 7.9% and
less than 25.3%, COPY is to take an incremental image copy.
v Do not take an image copy of each specified table space if the percentage of
changed pages is equal to or less than the lowest decimal percentage value for
the CHANGELIMIT option for that table space. For example, if the percentage of
changed pages for table space TLIQUDA2 is equal to or less than 2.2%, COPY is
not to take an incremental image copy.
v Take full image copies of index spaces IPIQUD01, IXIQUD02, IUIQUD03,
IXIQUDA1, IXIQUDA2, IXIQUDA3, and IXIQUDA4.
COPY
TABLESPACE DBIQUD01.TPIQUD01
COPYDDN(COPYTB1)
TABLESPACE DBIQUD01.TLIQUDA1
COPYDDN(COPYTA1)
COPYDDN(COPYTA2)
COPYDDN(COPYTA3)
COPYDDN(COPYTA4)
INDEXSPACE DBIQUD01.IPIQUD01
COPYDDN(COPYIX1)
INDEXSPACE DBIQUD01.IXIQUD02
COPYDDN(COPYIX2)
INDEXSPACE DBIQUD01.IUIQUD03
COPYDDN(COPYIX3)
INDEXSPACE DBIQUD01.IXIQUDA1
COPYDDN(COPYIXA1)
COPYDDN(COPYIXA2)
COPYDDN(COPYIXA3)
COPYDDN(COPYIXA4)
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
DSNUM ALL CHANGELIMIT(3.3,6.7)

DSNUM ALL
DSNUM ALL
DSNUM ALL
DSNUM ALL
DSNUM ALL
DSNUM ALL
DSNUM ALL
Figure 22. Example of copying LOB table spaces together with related objects
Example 14: Using GDGs to make a full image copy

The following control statement specifies that the COPY utility is to make a full
image copy of table space DBLT2501.TPLT2501. The local copies are to be written
to data sets that are dynamically allocated according to the COPYTEM1 template.
The remote copies are to be written to data sets that are dynamically allocated
according to the COPYTEM2 template. For both of these templates, the DSN
option indicates the name of generation data group JULTU225 and the generation
number of +1. (If a GDG base does not already exist, DB2 creates one.) Both of
these output data sets are to be modeled after the JULTU255.MODEL data set (as
indicated by the MODELDCB option in the TEMPLATE statements).
//***********************************************************
//* COMMENT: MAKE A FULL IMAGE COPY OF THE TABLESPACE.
//*
USE A TEMPLATE FOR THE GDG.
//***********************************************************
152
//STEP2
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='JULTU225.COPY',
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='SSTR'
//SYSIN
DD *
TEMPLATE COPYTEM1
UNIT SYSDA
DSN 'JULTU225.GDG.LOCAL.&PB.(+1)'
MODELDCB JULTU225.MODEL
TEMPLATE COPYTEM2
UNIT SYSDA
DSN 'JULTU225.GDG.REMOTE.&PB.(+1)'
COPY TABLESPACE DBLT2501.TPLT2501
FULL YES
COPYDDN (COPYTEM1,COPYTEM1)
RECOVERYDDN (COPYTEM2,COPYTEM2)
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
Example 15: Copying clone table data

|
|
The following control statement indicates that COPY is to copy only clone table
data in the specified table spaces or indexes.
COPY SHRLEVEL REFERENCE CLONE
TABLESPACE DBIQUD01.TPIQUD01
COPYDDN(COPYTB1)
COPYDDN(COPYTA1)
COPYDDN(COPYTA2)
COPYDDN(COPYTA3)
COPYDDN(COPYTA4)
INDEXSPACE DBIQUD01.IPIQUD01
COPYDDN(COPYIX1)

DSNUM ALL
Example 16: Copying updated table space data

|
|
|
The following control statement indicates that COPY is to copy only the objects
that have been updated. SCOPE PENDING indicates that you want to copy only
those objects in COPY-pending or informational COPY-pending status.
COPY SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
TABLESPACE DBIQUD01.TPIQUD01 DSNUM
COPYDDN(COPYTB1)
TABLESPACE DBIQUD01.TLIQUDA1 DSNUM
COPYDDN(COPYTA1)
COPYDDN(COPYTA2)
COPYDDN(COPYTA3)
COPYDDN(COPYTA4)
INDEXSPACE DBIQUD01.IPIQUD01 DSNUM
COPYDDN(COPYIX1)PARALLEL(4)
SCOPE PENDING
/*
ALL CHANGELIMIT(3.3,6.7)
ALL
Chapter 11. COPY
153
154

The COPYTOCOPY utility makes image copies from an image copy that was taken
by the COPY utility, including inline copies that the REORG or LOAD utilities
make.
Starting with either the local primary or recovery-site primary copy,
COPYTOCOPY can make up to three copies of one or more of the following types
of copies:
v Local primary
v Local backup
v Recovery site primary
v Recovery site backup
You cannot run COPYTOCOPY on concurrent copies.
The RECOVER utility uses the copies when recovering a table space or index space
to the most recent time or to a previous time. These copies can also be used by
MERGECOPY, UNLOAD, and possibly a subsequent COPYTOCOPY execution.
Output
Output from the COPYTOCOPY utility consists of:
v Up to three sequential data sets that contain the image copy. If the copy base is a
FlashCopy, four sequential copies can be made.
v Rows in the SYSIBM.SYSCOPY catalog table that describe the image copy data
sets that are available to the RECOVER utility. Your installations responsible for
ensuring that these data sets are available if the RECOVER utility requests them.
The entries for SYSCOPY columns remain the same as the original entries in the
SYSCOPY row when the COPY utility recorded them. The COPYTOCOPY job
inserts values in the columns DSNAME, GROUP_MEMBER, JOBNAME, AUTHID,
DSVOLSER, and DEVTYPE.
Restriction: COPYTOCOPY does not support the following catalog and directory
objects:
v DSNDB01.SYSUTILX, and its indexes
v DSNDB01.DBD01, and its indexes
v DSNDB06.SYSCOPY, and its indexes
An image copy from a COPY job with the CONCURRENT option cannot be
processed by COPYTOCOPY.
COPYTOCOPY does not check the recoverability of an object.
155

An ID with installation SYSOPR authority can also execute COPYTOCOPY, but
only on a table space in the DSNDB01 or DSNDB06 database.
Execution phases of COPYTOCOPY

The COPYTOCOPY utility operates in these phases:
Phase Description
UTILINIT
CPY2CPY
Copies an image copy
UTILTERM
Performs cleanup
Syntax and options of the COPYTOCOPY control statement

The COPYTOCOPY utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
Syntax diagram
COPYTOCOPY
LIST listdef-name
from-copy-spec
data-set-spec

CLONE
ts-num-spec
index-name-spec
from-copy-spec
data-set-spec
ts-num-spec:
DSNUM ALL
TABLESPACE
table-space-name
database-name.
index-name-spec:
156

DSNUM
integer
(1)
DSNUM ALL
INDEXSPACE
INDEX
index-space-name
database-name.
index-name
creator-id.
(2)
DSNUM
integer
Notes:
1
INDEXSPACE is the preferred specification.
Not valid for nonpartitioning indexes.
from-copy-spec:
FROMLASTCOPY

FROMLASTFULLCOPY
(1)
FROMLASTINCRCOPY
(2)
FROMCOPY
dsn
FROMVOLUME
CATALOG
volser
FROMSEQNO
Notes:
1
Not valid with the INDEXSPACE or INDEX keyword.
Not valid with the LIST keyword.
data-set-spec:
(1)
COPYDDN(
(2)
ddname1
)
,ddname2

RECOVERYDDN(
ddname3
,ddname2
)
,ddname4
,ddname4
RECOVERYDDN(
ddname3
)
,ddname4
,ddname4
Notes:
1
Use this option if you want to make a local site primary copy from one of the recovery site
copies.
You can specify up to three DD names for both the COPYDDN and RECOVERYDDN options
combined.
157
Option descriptions
LIST listdef-name
Specifies the name of a previously defined LISTDEF list name. The utility
allows one LIST keyword for each COPYTOCOPY control statement. Do not
specify LIST with either the INDEX or TABLESPACE keywords. DB2 invokes
COPYTOCOPY once for the entire list. This utility will only process clone data
if the CLONE keyword is specified. The use of CLONED YES on the LISTDEF
statement is not sufficient.
TABLESPACE
Specifies the table space (and, optionally, the database it belongs to) that is to
be copied. database-name is the name of the database that the table space
belongs to. The default value is DSNDB04.
table-space-name is the name of the table space to be copied.
Specifies the qualified name of the index space that is to be copied; the name is
obtained from the SYSIBM.SYSINDEXES table. Define the index space with the
COPY YES attribute.
database-name optionally specifies the name of the database that the index space
belongs to. The default value is DSNDB04.
index-space-name specifies the name of the index space that is to be copied.
Specifies the index that is to be copied. Enclose the index name in quotation
creator-id optionally specifies the creator of the index. The default value is the
user identifier for the utility.
index-name specifies the name of the index that is to be copied.
DSNUM
Identifies a partition or data set, within the table space or the index space, that
is to be copied. The keyword ALL specifies that the entire table space or index
space is to be copied.
You cannot specify DSNUM for nonpartitioned indexes.
ALL
Specifies that the entire table space or index space is to be copied. You
must use ALL for a nonpartitioned secondary index.
integer
Is the number of a partition or data set that is to be copied.
An integer value is not valid for nonpartitioned secondary indexes.
For a partitioned table space or index space, the integer is its partition
number. The maximum is 4096.
set name as cataloged in the VSAM catalog. The data set name has the
following format:
|
catname.DSNDBx.dbname.spacename.y000Z.Annn
In this format:
catname
Is the VSAM catalog name or alias.
158
Is C or D.
dbname
spacename
Is the table space or index space name.
Is I or J.
Is 1 or 2.
nnn
Specifying or using the default of DSNUM(ALL) causes COPYTOCOPY to look

for an input image copy that was taken at the entire table space or index space
level.
FROMLASTCOPY
Specifies the most recent image copy that was taken for the table space or
index space that is to be the input to the COPYTOCOPY utility. This could be a
full image copy or incremental copy that is retrieved from SYSIBM.SYSCOPY.
FROMLASTFULLCOPY
Specifies the most recent full image copy that was taken for the object, which
is to be the input to the COPYTOCOPY job.
FROMLASTINCRCOPY
Specifies the most recent incremental image copy that was taken for the object
that is to be the input to COPYTOCOPY job.
FROMLASTINCRCOPY is not valid with the INDEXSPACE or INDEX
keyword. If FROMLASTINCRCOPY is specified for an INDEXSPACE or
INDEX, COPYTOCOPY uses the last full copy that was taken, if one is
available.
FROMCOPY dsn
Specifies a particular image copy data set (dsn) as the input to the
COPYTOCOPY job. This option is not valid for LIST.
If the image copy data set is a generation data set, then supply a fully
qualified data set name, including the absolute generation and version number.
If the image copy data set is not a generation data set and more than one
image copy data set have the same data set name, use the FROMVOLUME
option to identify the data set exactly.
FROMVOLUME
Identifies the image copy data set.
CATALOG
Identifies the data set as cataloged. Use this option only for an image copy
that was created as a cataloged data set. (Its volume serial is not recorded
in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY.)
COPYTOCOPY refers to the SYSIBM.SYSCOPY catalog table during
execution. If you use FROMVOLUME CATALOG, the data set must be
cataloged. If you remove the data set from the catalog after creating it, you
must catalog the data set again to make it consistent with the record that
appears in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY for this copy.
vol-ser
Identifies the data set by an alphanumeric volume serial identifier of its
first volume. Use this option only for an image copy that was created as a
159
noncataloged data set. Specify the first vol-ser in the SYSCOPY record to
locate a data set that is stored on multiple tape volumes.If an individual
volume serial number contains leading zeros, it must be enclosed in single
quotation marks.
FROMSEQNO n
Identifies the image copy data set by its file sequence number. n is the file
sequence number.
Specifies a DD name (ddname) or a TEMPLATE name for the primary (ddname1)
and backup (ddname2) copied data sets for the image copy at the local site. If
ddname2 is specified by itself, COPYTOCOPY expects the local site primary
image copy to exist. If it does not exist, error message DSNU1401 is issued and
the process for the object is terminated.
Recommendation: Catalog all of your image copy data sets.
You cannot have duplicate image copy data sets. If the DD statement identifies
a noncataloged data set with the same name, volume serial, and file sequence
number as one that is already recorded in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY, COPYTOCOPY
issues a message and no copy is made. If the DD statement identifies a
cataloged data set with only the same name, no copy is made. For cataloged
image copy data sets, you must specify CATLG for the normal termination
disposition in the DD statement; for example, DISP=(MOD,CATLG,CATLG).
The DSVOLSER field of the SYSCOPY entry is blank.
When the image copy data set is going to a tape volume, specify VOL=SER
parameter in the DD statement.
The COPYDDN keyword specifies either a DD name or a TEMPLATE name
processing detects that the specified name is both a DD name in the current job
Specifies a DD name (ddname) or a TEMPLATE name for the primary (ddname3)
and backup (ddname4) copied data sets for the image copy at the recovery site.
If ddname4 is specified by itself, COPYTOCOPY expects the recovery site
primary image copy to exist. If this image copy does not exist, error message
DSNU1401 is issued and the process for the object is terminated.
You cannot have duplicate image copy data sets. The same rules apply for
RECOVERYDDN as for COPYDDN.
The RECOVERYDDN keyword specifies either a DD name or a TEMPLATE
name specification from a previous TEMPLATE control statement. If utility
CLONE
Indicates that COPYTOCOPY is to process only image copy data sets that were
taken against clone tables or indexes on clone tables. This utility will only
process clone data if the CLONE keyword is specified. The use of CLONED
YES on the LISTDEF statement is not sufficient.
|
|
|
|
|
160
Related reference
Data sets that COPYTOCOPY uses

The COPYTOCOPY utility uses a number of data sets during its operation.
The following table describes the data sets that COPYTOCOPY uses. The table lists
the DD name that is used to identify the data set, a description of the data set, and
an indication of whether it is required. Include statements in your JCL for each
Table 20. Data sets that COPYTOCOPY uses
Data set
Description
Required?
SYSIN

control statement.
Yes
SYSPRINT
Yes
Output copies
Yes
From one to three output data sets that
contain the resulting image copy data sets.
Specify their DD names with the COPYDDN
and RECOVERYDDN options of the utility
control statement.
Table space or Index space
Object that is to be copied. (If you want to copy only certain partitions in a
partitioned table space, use the DSNUM option in the control statement.)
DB2 catalog objects
Objects in the catalog that COPYTOCOPY accesses. The utility records each
copy in the DB2 catalog table SYSIBM.SYSCOPY.
Input image copy data set
This information is accessed through the DB2 catalog. COPYTOCOPY
retains all tape mounts for you. You do not need to code JCL statements to
retain tape mounts. If the image copy data sets that are used by
COPYTOCOPY reside on the same tape, you do not need to remove the
tape.
Output data set size

Image copies are written to sequential non-VSAM data sets.
Recommendation: Use a template for the image copy data set for a table space by
specifying a TEMPLATE statement without the SPACE keyword. When you omit
this keyword, the utility calculates the appropriate size of the data set for you.
Alternatively, you can find the approximate size, in bytes, of the image copy data
set for a table space by using the following procedure:
1. Find the high-allocated page number from the COPYPAGESF column of
SYSIBM.SYSCOPY or from information in the VSAM catalog data set.
2. Multiply the high-allocated page number by the page size.
161
Another option is to look at the size of the input image copy.

JCL parameters: You can specify a block size for the output by using the BLKSIZE
parameter on the DD statement for the output data set. Valid block sizes are
multiples of 4096 bytes. It is recommended that the BLKSIZE parameter be
omitted. The TAPEBLKSZLIM parameter of the DEVSUPxx member of
SYS1.PARMLIB controls the block size limit for tapes. See the z/OS MVS
Initialization and Tuning Guide for more details.
Cataloging image copies

To catalog your image copy data sets, use the DISP=(NEW,CATLG,CATLG)
parameter in the DD statement or TEMPLATE that is named by the COPYDDN or
RECOVERYDDN option. After the image copy is taken, the DSVOLSER column of
the row that is inserted into SYSIBM.SYSCOPY contains blanks.
Duplicate image copy data sets are not allowed. If a cataloged data set is already
recorded in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY with the same name as the new image copy data
set, a message is issued and the copy is not made.
When RECOVER locates the entry in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY, it uses the ICF catalog to
allocate the required data set. If you have uncataloged the data set, the allocation
fails. In that case, the recovery can still go forward; RECOVER searches for a
previous image copy. But even if RECOVER finds one, it must use correspondingly
more of the log to recover. You are responsible for keeping the z/OS catalog
consistent with SYSIBM.SYSCOPY with regard to existing image copy data sets.
Concurrency and compatibility for COPYTOCOPY

The COPYTOCOPY utility has certain concurrency and compatibility characteristics
associated with it.
compatible.
Claims
The following table shows which claim classes COPYTOCOPY claims on the target
object.
Table 21. Claim classes of COPYTOCOPY operations.
Target
COPYTOCOPY
Table space or partition, or index space or partition
UTRW
Legend:
v UTRW - Utility restrictive state - read-write access allowed
Compatibility
The following table documents which utilities can run concurrently with
COPYTOCOPY on the same target object. The target object can be a table space, an
index space, or a partition of a table space or index space. If compatibility depends
on particular options of a utility, that information is also documented in the table.
162
Table 22. Compatibility of COPYTOCOPY with other utilities

Action
Compatible with
COPYTOCOPY?
CHECK DATA
Yes
CHECK INDEX
Yes
CHECK LOB
Yes
COPY
No
DIAGNOSE
Yes
LOAD
No
MERGECOPY
No
MODIFY
No
QUIESCE
Yes
REBUILD INDEX
Yes
RECOVER
No
REORG INDEX
No
REORG TABLESPACE
No
REPAIR
Yes
REPORT
Yes
RUNSTATS INDEX
Yes
RUNSTATS TABLESPACE
Yes
STOSPACE
Yes
UNLOAD
Yes
Full or incremental image copies with COPYTOCOPY

You can copy a full image copy or an incremental image copy by using
FROMLASTCOPY keyword.
If you do not specify FROMLASTCOPY, it will be used by default, as shown in the
following example. In this example, the COPYTOCOPY control statement specifies
that the utility is to make a backup copy of the most recent full image copy or an
incremental image copy of the table space DSN8S91E in database DSN8D91A:
COPYTOCOPY TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E
COPYDDN(,DDNNAME2)
The COPYTOCOPY utility makes a copy from an existing image copy and writes
pages from the image copy to the output data sets. The JCL for the utility job must
include DD statements or a template for the output data sets. If the object consists
of multiple data sets and all are copied in one job, the copies reside in one physical
sequential output data set.
Incremental image copies with COPYTOCOPY

An incremental image copy is a copy of the pages that have changed since the last
full or incremental image copy.
To make a copy of an incremental image copy, use the keyword
FROMLASTINCRCOPY.
163
The following example control statement specifies that COPYTOCOPY is to make a

local site backup image copy, a recovery site primary image copy, and a recovery
site backup image copy from an incremental image copy.
COPYTOCOPY TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E
FROMLASTINCRCOPY
COPYDDN(,COPY2)
Using more than one COPYTOCOPY statement

You can use more than one control statement for COPYTOCOPY in one DB2 utility
job step.
After each COPYTOCOPY statement executes successfully:
v A row referring to the image copy is recorded in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY table.
v The image copy data set is valid and available for RECOVER, MERGECOPY,
COPYTOCOPY, and UNLOAD.
If a job step that contains more than one COPYTOCOPY statement abnormally
terminates, do not use TERM UTILITY. Restart the job from the last commit point
by using RESTART instead. Terminating COPYTOCOPY in this case might cause
inconsistencies between the ICF catalog and DB2 catalogs if generation data sets
are used.
Copying an inline copy made by REORG with a range of partitions

COPYTOCOPY does not support a range of partitions within a partitioned table
space. Specify individual DSNUM(n). From the inline copy, COPYTOCOPY copies
only the specified partition into the output image copy data set.
Copying from a specific image copy

You can specify a particular image copy that is to be used as input to
COPYTOCOPY by using FROMCOPY.
The following control statement specifies that COPYTOCOPY is to make three
copies of the table space TPA9031C in database DBA90301 from the image copy
data set DH109003.COPY1.STEP1.COPY3:
COPYTOCOPY TABLESPACE DBA90301.TPA9031C
FROMCOPY DH109003.COPY1.STEP1.COPY3
COPYDDN(,COPY2)
If you specify the FROMCOPY keyword and the specified data set is not found in
SYSIBM.SYSCOPY, COPYTOCOPY issues message DSNU1401I. Processing for the
object then terminates.
Using TEMPLATE with COPYTOCOPY

Template data set name substitution variables resolve as usual. COPYTOCOPY
does not use the template values of the original COPY utility execution.
Updating SYSCOPY records

The image copies COPYTOCOPY made are registered in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY for
later use by the RECOVER utility. Other utilities can use these copies, too.
164
Columns that are inserted by COPYTOCOPY are the same as those of the original
entries in SYSCOPY row when the COPY utility recorded them. Except for
columns GROUP_MEMBER, JOBNAME, AUTHID, DSNAME, DEVTYPE, and
DSVOLSER, the columns are those of the COPYTOCOPY job. When
COPYTOCOPY is invoked at the partition level (DSNUM n) and the input data set
is an inline copy that was created by the REORG of a range of partitions,
COPYTOCOPY inserts zeros in the HIGHDSNUM and LOWDSNUM columns of
the SYSCOPY record.
How to determine which input copy to use

Certain information will help you determine which input copy to use.
If the FROMCOPY keyword is not specified, the COPYTOCOPY utility uses the
following search order to determine the input data set for the utility:
v If you run the utility at the local site, the search order is the local site primary
copy, the local site backup copy, the recovery site primary copy, and the recovery
site backup copy.
v If you run the utility at the recovery site, the search order is the recovery site
primary copy, the recovery site backup copy, the local site primary copy, and the
local site backup copy.
If the input data set cannot be allocated or opened, COPYTOCOPY attempts to use
the next image copy data set, with the same START_RBA value in SYSCOPY
column, in the preceding search order.
If you use the FROMCOPY keyword, only the specified data set is used as the
input to the COPYTOCOPY job.
Defining generation data groups

Use generation data groups to hold image copies, because their use automates the
allocation of data set names and the deletion of the oldest data set.
v Use generation data groups to hold image copies because their use automates
the allocation of data set names and the deletion of the oldest data set.
v Use templates when using generation data groups.
When you define the generation data group:
v You can specify that the oldest data set is to be automatically deleted when the
maximum number of data sets is reached. If you do that, make the maximum
number large enough to accommodate all recovery requirements. When data sets
are deleted, use the MODIFY utility to delete the corresponding rows in
SYSIBM.SYSCOPY.
v Make the limit number of generation data sets equal to the number of copies
that you want to keep. Use NOEMPTY to avoid deleting all the data sets from
the integrated catalog facility catalog when the limit is reached.
Using DB2 with DFSMS products

You can use DB2 with DFSMS products.
If image copy data sets are managed by HSM or SMS, all data sets are cataloged.
165
If you plan to use SMS, catalog all image copies. Never maintain cataloged and
uncataloged image copies that have the same name.
Image copies on tape

Do not combine a full image copy and incremental image copies for the same table
space on one tape volume. If you do, the RECOVER TABLESPACE utility cannot
allocate the incremental image copies.
Copying a LOB table space

You can make both full and incremental image copies of a LOB table space.
Copying a list of objects from tape

COPYTOCOPY determines the number of tape drives to use for the function.
If you use JCL to define tape drives, the JCL allocates tape drives for those
definitions. If you use TEMPLATES to allocate tape drives for the output data sets,
the utility dynamically allocates the tape drives according to the following
algorithm:
v One tape drive if the input data set resides on tape.
v A tape drive for each template with STACK YES that references tape.
v Three tape drives, one for each of the local and remote output image copies, in
case non-stacked templates reference tape.
Thus, COPYTOCOPY allocates a minimum of three tape drives. The utility
allocates four tape drives if the input data set resides on tape, and more tape
drives if you specified tape templates with STACK YES.
If input data sets to be copied are stacked on tape and output data sets are defined
by a template, the utility sorts the list of objects by the file sequence numbers
(FSN) of the input data sets and processes the objects serially.
Image copies of compressed indexes are copied in uncompressed format, so if you
perform COPYTOCOPY using those image copies as input, it will result in
uncompressed image copies.
|
|
|
For example, image copies of the following table spaces with their FSNs are
stacked on TAPE1:
v DB2.TS1 FSN=1
v DB2.TS2 FSN=2
v DB2.TS3 FSN=3
v DB2.TS4 FSN=4
In the following statements, COPYTOCOPY uses a template for the output data
set:
//COPYTOCOPY EXEC DSNUPROC,SYSTEM=V71A
//SYSIN
DD *
TEMPLATE A1 &DB..&SP..COPY1 TAPE UNIT CART STACK YES
COPYTOCOPY
TABLESPACE DB1.TS4
LASTFULL
RECOVERYDDN(A1)
TABLESPACE DB1.TS1
LASTFULL
166
RECOVERYDDN(A1)
TABLESPACE DB1.TS2
LASTFULL
RECOVERYDDN(A1)
TABLESPACE DB1.TS3
LASTFULL
RECOVERYDDN(A1)
As a result, the utility sorts the objects by FSN and processes them in the following
order:
v DB1.TS1
v DB1.TS2
v DB1.TS3
v DB1.TS4
If the output data sets are defined by JCL, the utility gives stacking preference to
the output data sets over input data sets. If the input data sets are not stacked, the
utility sorts the objects by size in descending order.
Termination or restart of COPYTOCOPY

You can terminate or restart the COPYTOCOPY utility.
Termination of COPYTOCOPY
You can use the TERM UTILITY command to terminate a COPYTOCOPY job
Restart of a COPYTOCOPY job

If you do not use the TERM UTILITY command, you can restart a COPYTOCOPY
job. COPYTOCOPY jobs restart from the last commit point. You cannot use
RESTART(PHASE) for any COPYTOCOPY job. If you are restarting a
COPYTOCOPY job with uncataloged output data sets, you must specify the
appropriate volumes for the job in the JCL or on the TEMPLATE utility statement.
Doing so could impact your ability to use implicit restart.
To prepare for restarting a COPYTOCOPY job, specify
DISP=(MOD,CATLG,CATLG) on your DD statements.
Restart of COPYTOCOPY after an out-of-space condition

You can restart COPYTOCOPY from the last commit point after receiving an
Related concepts
Related tasks
Sample COPYTOCOPY control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own
COPYTOCOPY control statements.
167
Example 1: Making a local backup copy

The following control statement specifies that the COPYTOCOPY utility is to make
a local backup copy of the most recent full image copy or incremental image copy,
whichever is most recent. The COPYDDN option specifies that the data set for the
local site backup image copy is defined by the COPY2 DD statement. Because no
data set is specified for the local site primary image copy, which is usually the first
parameter of the COPYDDN option, COPYTOCOPY expects this copy to already
exist. If it does not exist, DB2 issues an error message and terminates the job.
//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='DH109001.COPY1',
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='DSN'
//COPY2
DD DSN=DH109001.C2C01.STEP2.COPY2,DISP=(MOD,CATLG,CATLG),
//
SPACE=(1000,(20,20),,,ROUND)
//SYSIN
DD *
COPYTOCOPY TABLESPACE DBA90101.TLA9011A COPYDDN(,COPY2)
//
Example 2: Copying the most recent copy

The following control statement specifies that COPYTOCOPY is to make a local
site backup copy, a recovery site primary copy, and a recovery site backup copy of
table space DBA90102.TPA9012C. The COPYDDN and RECOVERYDDN options
also indicate the data sets to which these copies should be written. For example,
the recovery site primary copy is to be written to the COPY3 data set. The
FROMLASTCOPY option specifies that the most recent full image copy or
incremental image copy is to be used as the input copy data set. This option is the
default and is therefore not required.
FROMLASTCOPY COPYDDN(,COPY2)
Example 3: Copying the most recent full image copy

The following control statement specifies that COPYTOCOPY is to make primary
and backup copies at the recovery site of table space DBA90201.TPA9021C. The
FROMLASTFULLCOPY option specifies that the most recent full image copy is to
be used as the input copy data set.
FROMLASTFULLCOPY
Example 4: Specifying a copy data set for input

site backup copy, a recovery site primary copy, and a recovery site backup copy
from data set DH109003.COPY1.STEP1.COPY3. This input data set is specified by
the FROMCOPY option. The output data sets (COPY2, COPY3, and COPY4) are
specified by the COPYDDN and RECOVERYDDN options.
COPYDDN(,COPY2)
Example 5: Identifying a cataloged image copy data set

site backup copy from a cataloged data set that is named
168
DH109003.COPY1.STEP1.COPY4. This data set is identified by the FROMCOPY

and FROMVOLUME options. The FROMCOPY option specifies the input data set
name, and the FROMVOLUME CATALOG option indicates that the input data set
is cataloged. Use the FROMVOLUME option to distinguish a data set from other
data sets that have the same name.
COPYTOCOPY TABLESPACE DBA90302.TLA9032A
FROMVOLUME CATALOG
COPYDDN(,COPY2)
Example 6: Identifying an uncataloged image copy data set

The control statement specifies that COPYTOCOPY is to make a local site backup
copy, a recovery site primary copy, and a recovery site backup copy from an
uncataloged data set, JUKQU2BP.COPY1.STEP1.TP01. The FROMCOPY option
identifies this input data set name, and the FROMVOLUME option identifies the
volume (SCR03) for the input data set. Use the FROMVOLUME option to
distinguish a data set from other data sets that have the same name. The
COPYDDN option identifies the data set for the local site backup copy. This data
set is to be dynamically allocated according to the specifications of the C2C1_T1
template, which is defined in one of the preceding TEMPLATE control statements.
The RECOVERYDDN option identifies the data sets for the recovery site copies.
These data sets are to be dynamically allocated according to the specifications of
the C2C1_T2 and C2C1_T3 templates, which are defined in the preceding
TEMPLATE control statements.
//STEP1
//
//
//SYSIN
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='JUKQU2BP.C2C1',
UTPROC='',
SYSTEM='SSTR'
DD *
TEMPLATE C2C1_T1
DSN(JUKQU2BP.C2C1.LB.&SN.)
DISP(NEW,CATLG,CATLG)
UNIT(SYSDA)
TEMPLATE C2C1_T2
DSN(JUKQU2BP.C2C1.RP.&SN.)
UNIT(SYSDA)
TEMPLATE C2C1_T3
DSN(JUKQU2BP.C2C1.RB.&SN.)
UNIT(SYSDA)
COPYTOCOPY TABLESPACE DBKQBP01.TPKQBP01
FROMCOPY JUKQU2BP.COPY1.STEP1.TP01
FROMVOLUME SCR03
COPYDDN(,C2C1_T1)
RECOVERYDDN(C2C1_T2,C2C1_T3)
/*
Figure 23. Example of identifying an uncataloged image copy data set
Example 7: Processing a list of objects

The following control statement specifies that COPYTOCOPY is to make local site
backup copies of the three partitions of table space DBA90402.TPA9042C that are
specified by the DSNUM option (partitions 2, 3, and 4). COPYTOCOPY uses the
169
following input copy data sets, as indicated by the FROMLASTFULLCOPY,

FROMLASTCOPY, and FROMLASTINCRCOPY options:
v The most recent full image copy for partition 2
v The most recent full image copy or incremental image copy, whichever is most
recent, for partition 3
v The most recent incremental image copy for partition 4
The COPYDDN option for each partition indicates the output data sets (COPY2,
COPY3, and COPY4).
COPYTOCOPY
TABLESPACE DBA90402.TPA9042C DSNUM 2
FROMLASTFULLCOPY COPYDDN(,COPY2)
FROMLASTCOPY COPYDDN(,COPY3)
FROMLASTINCRCOPY COPYDDN(,COPY4)
Example 8: Using LISTDEF and TEMPLATE switching

The following COPYTOCOPY control statement specifies that the utility is to copy
the list of objects that are included in the CPY1 list, which is defined by the
LISTDEF control statement. The copies are to be written to the data sets that are
defined by the T3 template, which is defined in the TEMPLATE control statement.
Additionally, T3 template has defined the LIMIT keyword, that is to switch from
T3 template to T4 template if the output data set size is bigger than the specified
limit value 5 MB. This template defines the naming convention for the output data
sets that are to be dynamically allocated.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The OPTIONS PREVIEW statement before the LISTDEF statement is used to force
the CPY1 list contents to be included in the output. For long lists, using this
statement is not recommended, because it might cause the output to be too long.
The OPTIONS OFF statement ends the PREVIEW mode processing, so that the
following TEMPLATE and COPYTOCOPY jobs run normally.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OPTIONS PREVIEW
LISTDEF CPY1 INCLUDE TABLESPACES TABLESPACE DBA906*.T*A906*
INCLUDE INDEXSPACES COPY YES INDEXSPACE ADMF001.I?A906*
OPTIONS OFF
TEMPLATE T4 UNIT(3B0)
LIMIT(5 MB,T4)
COPYTOCOPY LIST CPY1 COPYDDN(T3,T3)
Example 8: Using LISTDEF and TEMPLATE with the CLONE

option
The following COPYTOCOPY control statement specifies that the utility is to copy
the list of objects that are included in the C2C1_LIST list, which is defined by the
LISTDEF control statement. The CLONE option indicates that COPYTOCOPY is to
process only image copy data sets that were taken against clone objects.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
LISTDEF C2C1_LIST
INCLUDE
INCLUDE
INCLUDE
INCLUDE
INCLUDE
INCLUDE
170
TABLESPACES
INDEXSPACES
INDEXSPACES
TABLESPACES
INDEXSPACES
INDEXSPACES
TABLESPACE
INDEXSPACE
INDEXSPACE
TABLESPACE
INDEXSPACE
INDEXSPACE
DBKQBS01.TPKQBS01
DBKQBS01.IPKQBS11
DBKQBS01.IXKQBS12
DBKQBS02.TSKQBS02
DBKQBS02.IXKQBS21
DBKQBS02.IXKQBS22
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
TEMPLATE C2C1_T1
DSN(JUKQU2BS.C2C1.LB.&SN.)
UNIT(SYSDA)
TEMPLATE C2C1_T2
DSN(JUKQU2BS.C2C1.RP.&SN.)
UNIT(SYSDA)
TEMPLATE C2C1_T3
DSN(JUKQU2BS.C2C1.RB.&SN.)
UNIT(SYSDA)
COPYTOCOPY LIST C2C1_LIST
FROMLASTFULLCOPY
COPYDDN(,C2C1_T1)
RECOVERYDDN(C2C1_T2,C2C1_T3)
CLONE
171
172
Chapter 13. DIAGNOSE

The DIAGNOSE online utility generates information that is useful in diagnosing
problems. Use this utility only under the direction of IBM Software Support.
Interpreting output
One intended use of this utility is to aid in determining and correcting system
problems. When diagnosing DB2 problems, you might need to refer to licensed
documentation to interpret output from this utility.
To execute this utility for options which access relational data, you must use a
privilege set that includes one of the following authorizations:
v REPAIR privilege for the database
v DBADM or DBCTRL authority for the database. If the object on which the utility
operates is in an implicitly created database, DBADM authority on the implicitly
created database or DSNDB04 is required.
An ID with installation SYSOPR authority can execute the DIAGNOSE utility on a
An ID with installation SYSADM authority can execute the DIAGNOSE utility
with the WAIT statement option on any table space.
Syntax and options of the DIAGNOSE control statement

The DIAGNOSE utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
Syntax diagram
DIAGNOSE
diagnose statement
END
diagnose statement:
173

,
ALLDUMPS
,
TYPE( integer
)
( Xabend-code
)

NODUMPS
,
( Xabend-code
)

display statement
wait statement
abend statement
display statement:
DISPLAY
OBD
table-space-name
database-name .

ALL
TABLES
INDEXES
SYSUTIL
MEPL
AVAILABLE
DBET
DATABASE database-name
TABLESPACE
database-name.
INDEX index-name
CLONE
table-space-name
CLONE
wait statement:
WAIT
MESSAGE message-id

INSTANCE integer
TRACEID
Xtrace-id
integer
INSTANCE
integer
abend statement:
ABEND
MESSAGE
message-id

INSTANCE integer
TRACEID
174
Xtrace-id
integer
INSTANCE
integer
NODUMP
Option descriptions
TYPE(integer, ...)
Specifies one or more types of diagnose that you want to perform.
integer is the number of types of diagnoses. The maximum number of types is
32. IBM Software Support defines the types as needed to diagnose problems
with IBM utilities.
ALLDUMPS(Xabend-code, ...)
Forces a dump to be taken in response to any utility abend code.
Xabend-code is a member of a list of abend codes to which the scope of
ALLDUMPS is limited.
abend-code is a hexadecimal value.
NODUMPS(Xabend-code, ...)
Suppresses the dump for any utility abend code.
Xabend-code is a member of a list of abend codes to which the scope of
NODUMPS is limited.
abend-code is a hexadecimal value.
DISPLAY
Formats the specified database items using SYSPRINT.
OBD database-name.table-space-name
Formats the object descriptor (OBD) of the table space.
database-name is the name of the database in which the table space belongs.
table-space-name is the name of the table space whose OBD is to be
formatted.
ALL
Formats all OBDs of the table space. The OBD of any object that is
associated with the table space is also formatted.
TABLES
Formats the OBDs of all tables in the specified table spaces.
INDEXES
Formats the OBDs of all indexes in the specified table spaces.
SYSUTIL
Formats every record from SYSIBM.SYSUTIL. This directory table stores
information about all utility jobs.
MEPL
Dumps the module entry point lists (MEPLs) to SYSPRINT.
|
|
|
|
AVAILABLE
Displays the utilities that are installed on this subsystem in both bitmap
and readable format. The presence or absence of the utility products
5655-N97 (IBM DB2 Utilities Suite for z/OS) affects the results of this
display. See message DSNU862I for the output of this display.
DBET
Dumps the contents of a database exception table (DBET) to SYSPRINT.
Dumps the DBET entry that is associated with the specified database.
database-name is the name of the database.
175
Dumps the DBET entry that is associated with the specified table
space.
database-name is the name of the database.
table-space-name is the name of the table space.
INDEX creator-name.index-name
Dumps the DBET entry that is associated with the specified index.
creator-name is the ID of the creator of the index.
index-name is the name of the index.
Enclose the index name in quotation marks if the name contains a
blank.
CLONE
Indicates that DIAGNOSE is to display information for only the specified
objects that are clone tables, table spaces that contain clone tables, indexes
on clone tables, or index spaces that contain indexes on clone tables.
|
|
|
|
WAIT
Suspends utility execution when it encounters the specified utility message or
utility trace ID. DIAGNOSE issues a message to the console and utility
execution does not resume until the operator replies to that message, the utility
job times out, or the utility job is canceled. This waiting period allows events
to be synchronized while you are diagnosing concurrency problems. The utility
waits for the operator to reply to the message, allowing the opportunity to
time or synchronize events.
If neither the utility message nor the trace ID are encountered, processing
continues.
ABEND
Forces an abend during utility execution if the specified utility message or
utility trace ID is issued.
If neither the utility message nor the trace ID are encountered, processing
continues.
NODUMP
Suppresses the dump that is generated by an abend of DIAGNOSE.
MESSAGE message-id
Specifies a DSNUxxx or DSNUxxxx message that causes a wait or an abend to
occur when that message is issued.
message-id is the message, in the form of Uxxx or Uxxxx.
INSTANCE integer
Specifies that a wait or an abend is to occur when the MESSAGE option
message has been encountered a specified number of times. If INSTANCE
is not specified, a wait or abend occurs each time that the message is
encountered.
integer is the number of times that a message is to be encountered before a
wait or an abend occurs.
TRACEID trace-id
Specifies a trace ID that causes a wait or an abend to occur when the ID is
encountered. You can find valid trace IDs can be found in data set
prefix.SDSNSAMP(DSNWEIDS).
176
trace-id is a trace ID that is associated with the utility trace (RMID21). You can
specify trace-id in either decimal (integer) or hexadecimal (Xtrace-id) format.
INSTANCE integer
Specifies that a wait or an abend is to occur when the TRACEID option
has been encountered a specified number of times. If INSTANCE is not
specified, a wait or abend occurs each time that the trace ID is
encountered.
integer is the number of times that a trace ID is to be encountered before a
wait or an abend occurs.
END
Ends DIAGNOSE processing.
Data sets that DIAGNOSE uses

The DIAGNOSE utility uses a number of data sets during its operation.
The following table lists the data sets that DIAGNOSE uses. The table lists the DD
name that is used to identify the data set, a description of the data set, and an
required data set.
Table 23. Data sets that DIAGNOSE uses
Data set
Description
Required?
SYSIN

control statement.
Yes
SYSPRINT
Yes
Database
Database about which DIAGNOSE is to gather diagnosis information.
Table space
Table space about which DIAGNOSE is to gather diagnosis information.
Index space
Index about which DIAGNOSE is to gather diagnosis information.
Concurrency and compatibility for DIAGNOSE

The DIAGNOSE utility has certain concurrency and compatibility characteristics
associated with it.
DIAGNOSE can run concurrently on the same target object with any SQL
operation or utility, except a utility that is running on DSNDB01.SYSUTILX.
Forcing a utility abend

You can force a utility abend by specifying either a message or a trace IFCID in the
To perform this task, specify the options and values for this task in your utility
control statement.
177
DIAGNOSE can force a utility to abend when a specific message is issued. To force
an abend when unique-index or referential-constraint violations are detected, you
must specify the message that is issued when the error is encountered. Specify this
message by using the MESSAGE option of the ABEND statement.
Instead of using a message, you can force an abend by using the TRACEID option
of the ABEND statement to specify a trace IFCID that is associated with the utility
to force an abend.
Use the INSTANCE keyword to specify the number of times that the specified
message or trace record is to be generated before the utility abends.
Termination or restart of DIAGNOSE

You can terminate and restart the DIAGNOSE utility.
You can terminate a DIAGNOSE utility job by using the TERM UTILITY command
if you submitted the job or have SYSOPR, SYSCTRL, or SYSADM authority.
You can restart a DIAGNOSE utility job, but it starts from the beginning again.
Related concepts
Sample DIAGNOSE control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own DIAGNOSE
control statements.
Example 1: Displaying DB2 MEPLs

The following DIAGNOSE utility control statement specifies that the DB2 MEPLs
are to be displayed. You can use the output from this statement to find the service
level of a specific DB2 module. The output lists each module, the most recent PTF
or APAR that was applied to the module, and the date that the PTF or APAR was
installed.
DIAGNOSE
DISPLAY MEPL
Example 2: Forcing a dump

The following control statement forces a dump if an abend occurs with either of
the following reason codes: X00E40322 or X00E40323.
DIAGNOSE
ALLDUMPS(X'00E40322',X'00E40323')
The following control statement forces a dump for any utility abend that occurs
during the execution of the specified COPY job. The DIAGNOSE END option ends
DIAGNOSE processing.
DIAGNOSE
ALLDUMPS
COPY TABLESPACE DSNDB06.SYSDBASE
DIAGNOSE END
178
Example 3: Performing a diagnosis of a specific type

The control statement in this example specifies that you want to perform a
diagnosis of type 66. Run this job under the direction of IBM Software Support to
diagnose problems with utility parallelism.
//STEP3
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='JUOSU226.REBUI',
//
UTPROC='',SYSTEM='SSTR'
//SYSIN
DD *
DIAGNOSE TYPE(66)
REBUILD INDEX (IDOS0302, IDOS0304, IPOS0301)
SORTDEVT SYSDA SORTNUM 3
DIAGNOSE END
/*
Figure 24. Example of diagnosing type 66
Example 4: Forcing a utility abend

The control statement in this example forces an abend of the specified COPY job
when one instance of message DSNU400 is issued. The NODUMP option indicates
that the DIAGNOSE utility is not to generate a dump in this situation.
//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='IUJMU116.COPY1',
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='DSN'
//SYSCOPY1 DD DSN=IUJMU116.COPY.STEP1.SYSCOPY1,DISP=(NEW,CATLG,CATLG),
//
//SYSIN
DD *
DIAGNOSE ABEND MESSAGE U400
INSTANCE 1
NODUMP
COPYDDN SYSCOPY1
DIAGNOSE END
//*
The following control statement forces an abend of the specified LOAD job when message
DSNU311 is issued for the fifth time. The NODUMP option indicates that the DIAGNOSE
utility is not to generate a dump in this situation.
DIAGNOSE
ABEND MESSAGE U311 INSTANCE 5 NODUMP
LOAD DATA RESUME NO
INTO TABLE TABLE1
(NAME POSITION(1) CHAR(20))
DIAGNOSE END
Figure 25. Example of forcing an abend of the COPY utility
Example 5: Suspending utility execution

The control statement in this example indicates that the specified COPYTOCOPY
job is to be suspended when it encounters 51 occurrences of the trace ID X2E6F.
179
//STEP2
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='DH109012.C2C01',
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='SSTR'
//COPY2
//
//COPY3
//
//COPY4
//
//SYSIN
DD *
DIAGNOSE WAIT TRACEID X'2E6F' INSTANCE 51
COPYTOCOPY TABLESPACE DBA91201.TPA91201 DSNUM 1
FROMLASTFULLCOPY COPYDDN(,COPY2)
DIAGNOSE END
/*
Figure 26. Example of suspending utility execution
Example 6: Displaying only CLONE data

The control statement indicates that the DIAGNOSE utility is to be display
information for only the specified objects that are table clones, table spaces that
contain clone tables, indexes on clone tables, or index spaces that contain indexes
on clone tables.
|
|
|
|
DIAGNOSE DISPLAY DBET

DATABASE DBNI0501
CLONE
180
Chapter 14. EXEC SQL

The EXEC SQL utility control statement declares cursors or executes dynamic SQL
statements. You can use this utility as part of the DB2 cross-loader function of the
LOAD utility.
The cross-loader function enables you to use a single LOAD job to transfer data
from one location to another location or from one table to another table at the
same location. You can use either a local server or any DRDA-compliant remote
server as a data input source for populating your tables. Your input can even come
from other sources besides DB2 for z/OS; you can use IBM Information Integrator
Federation feature for access to data from sources as diverse as Oracle and Sybase,
as well as the entire DB2 family of database servers.
Output
The EXEC SQL control statement produces a result table when you specify a
cursor.
The EXEC SQL statement itself requires no privileges to execute. The authorization
rules that are defined for the dynamic preparation of the SQL statement specified
by EXECUTE IMMEDIATE apply.
Execution phases of EXEC SQL

The EXEC SQL control statement executes entirely in the EXEC phase. You can
restart the EXEC phase if necessary.
Related tasks
Loading data by using the cross-loader function on page 270
Related information
Statements (DB2 SQL Reference)
Syntax and options of the EXEC SQL control statement

The EXEC SQL utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
|
|
|
|
|
Utility control statements submitted in UNICODE, including EXEC SQL, are

translated into EBCDIC before processing; however, character string constants are
not translated. Character string constants are left in the character set in which the
were specified. In some cases, it may be necessary to use hexadecimal string
constants in order to achieve the desired behavior.
181
Syntax diagram
EXEC
SQL
declare-cursor-spec
non-select dynamic SQL statement
ENDEXEC
declare-cursor-spec:
DECLARE
cursor-name CURSOR FOR
select-statement
Option descriptions
cursor-name
Specifies the cursor name. The name must not identify a cursor that is already
declared within the same input stream. When using the DB2 cross-loader
function to load data from a remote server, you must identify the cursor with a
three-part name. Cursor names that are specified with the EXEC SQL utility
cannot be longer than eight characters.
select-statement
Specifies the result table for the cursor. This statement can be any valid SQL
SELECT statement, including joins, unions, conversions, aggregations, special
registers, and user-defined functions. The result table cannot include XML
columns.
|
|
|
|
non-select dynamic SQL statement

Specifies a dynamic SQL statement that is to be used as input to EXECUTE
IMMEDIATE. You can specify the following dynamic SQL statements in a
utility statement:
ALTER
COMMENT ON
COMMIT
CREATE
DELETE
DROP
EXPLAIN
GRANT
INSERT
LABEL ON
LOCK TABLE
RENAME
REVOKE
ROLLBACK
SET CURRENT DECFLOAT ROUNDING MODE
SET CURRENT DEGREE
SET CURRENT LOCALE LC_CTYPE
SET CURRENT OPTIMIZATION HINT
SET PATH
SET CURRENT PRECISION
SET CURRENT RULES
SET CURRENT SQLID
182
UPDATE
Each SQL statement runs as a separate thread. When the utility executes the
SQL statement, the specified statement string is parsed and checked for errors.
If the SQL statement is invalid, EXEC SQL does not execute the statement and
reports the error condition. If the SQL statement is valid, but an error occurs
during execution, EXEC SQL reports that error condition. When an error
occurs, the utility terminates.
Related reference
select-statement (DB2 SQL Reference)
Concurrency and compatibility for EXEC SQL

The EXEC SQL utility has certain concurrency and compatibility characteristics
associated with it.
You can use the EXEC SQL control statement with any utility that allows
concurrent SQL access on a table space. Other databases are not affected.
Termination or restart of EXEC SQL

You can terminate and restart the EXEC SQL utility.
You can terminate an EXEC SQL utility job by using the TERM UTILITY command
You can restart an EXEC SQL utility job, but it starts from the beginning again. If
you are restarting this utility as part of a larger job in which EXEC SQL completed
successfully, but a later utility failed, do not change the EXEC SQL utility control
statement, if possible. If you must change the EXEC SQL utility control statement,
use caution; any changes can cause the restart processing to fail.
Related concepts
Sample EXEC SQL control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own EXEC SQL
control statements.
PSPI
Example 1: Creating a table

The following control statement specifies that DB2 is to create table MYEMP with
the same rows and columns as sample table EMP.
EXEC SQL
CREATE TABLE MYEMP LIKE DSN8810.EMP CCSID EBCDIC
ENDEXEC
This type of statement can be used to create a mapping table.
Example 2: Inserting rows into a table

The following control statement specifies that DB2 is to insert all rows from sample
table EMP into table MYEMP.
Chapter 14. EXEC SQL
183
EXEC SQL
INSERT INTO MYEMP SELECT * FROM DSN8810.EMP
ENDEXEC
Example 3: Declaring a cursor

The following control statement declares C1 as the cursor for a query that is to
return all rows from table DSN8810.EMP.
EXEC SQL
DECLARE C1 CURSOR FOR SELECT * FROM DSN8810.EMP
ENDEXEC
You can use a declared cursor with the DB2 cross-loader function to load data from
a local server or from any DRDA-compliant remote server as part of the DB2
cross-loader function.
PSPI
Related reference
Sample REORG TABLESPACE control statements on page 521
184
Chapter 15. LISTDEF

The LISTDEF utility enables you to group database objects into reusable lists. You
can then specify these lists in other utility control statements to indicate that the
utility is to process all of the items in the list.
You can use LISTDEF to standardize object lists and the utility control statements
that refer to them. This standardization reduces the need to customize or alter
utility job streams.
If you do not use lists and you want to run a utility on multiple objects, you must
run the utility multiple times or specify an itemized list of objects in the utility
control statement.
Output
Output from the LISTDEF control statement consists of a list with a name.
To execute the LISTDEF utility, you must have SELECT authority on
SYSIBM.SYSINDEXES, SYSIBM.SYSTABLES, and SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACE.
Additionally, you must have the authority to execute the utility that is used to
process the list, as currently documented in the Authorization required topic for
each utility.
|
|
|
If you do not have authorization to execute the utility on one or more of the items
in the list, the utility will stop on the first authorization error. To skip items in the
list that return an error, use the OPTIONS (ITEMERROR, SKIP) control statement.
Execution phases of LISTDEF

The LISTDEF control statement executes entirely within the UTILINIT phase.
Syntax and options of the LISTDEF control statement

The LISTDEF utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
185
Syntax diagram
LISTDEF
list-name
|

INCLUDE
EXCLUDE
LIST referenced-list
initial-object-spec
(1)

CLONED
type-spec
YES
NO
RI
ALL
BASE
LOB
XML
Notes:
1
You must specify type-spec if you specify DATABASE.
type-spec:
TABLESPACES
INDEXSPACES

COPY
NO
YES
initial-object-spec:
table-space-spec
index-space-spec
table-spec
index-spec

PARTLEVEL
(n)
table-space-spec:
TABLESPACE
table-space-name
database-name.
index-space-spec:
186
INDEXSPACE
index-space-name
database-name.
table-spec:
TABLE
table-name
creator-id.
index-spec:
INDEX
index-name
creator-id.
Option descriptions
LISTDEF list-name
Defines a list of DB2 objects and assigns a name to the list. The list name
makes the list available for subsequent execution as the object of a utility
control statement or as an element of another LISTDEF statement.
list-name is the name (up to 18 alphanumeric characters in length) of the
defined list.
You can put LISTDEF statements either in a separate LISTDEF library data set
or before a DB2 utility control statement that refers to the list-name.
INCLUDE
Specifies that the list of objects that results from the expression that follows is
to be added to the list. You must first specify an INCLUDE clause. You can
then specify subsequent INCLUDE or EXCLUDE clauses in any order to add
to or delete clauses from the existing list.
EXCLUDE
Specifies, after the initial INCLUDE clause, that the list of objects that results
from the expression that follows is to be excluded from the list if the objects
are in the list. If the objects are not in the list, they are ignored, and DB2
proceeds to the next INCLUDE or EXCLUDE clause.
TABLESPACES
Specifies that the INCLUDE or EXCLUDE object expression is to create a list of
related table spaces.
TABLESPACES is the default type for lists that use a table space or a table for
the initial search. For more information about specifying these objects, see the
descriptions of the TABLESPACE and TABLE options.
No default type value exists for lists that use other lists for the initial search.
The list that is referred to by the LIST option is used unless you specify
TABLESPACES or INDEXSPACES. Likewise, no type default value exists for
lists that use databases for the initial search. If you specify the DATABASE
Chapter 15. LISTDEF
187
option, you must specify INDEXSPACES or TABLESPACES. For more

information about specifying lists and databases, see the descriptions of the
LIST and DATABASE options.
The result of the TABLESPACES keyword varies depending on the type of
object that you specify in the INCLUDE or EXCLUDE clause. These results are
shown in The following table.
Table 24. Result of the TABLESPACES keyword based on the object type that is specified in
the INCLUDE or EXCLUDE clause.
Object type specified in
INCLUDE or EXCLUDE
clause
Result of the TABLESPACES keyword
DATABASE
Returns all table spaces that are contained within the database
TABLESPACE
Returns the specified table space
TABLE
Returns the table space that contains the table
INDEXSPACE
Returns the table space that contains the related table
INDEX
Returns the table space that contains the related table
LIST of table spaces
Returns the table spaces from the expanded referenced list
LIST of index spaces
Returns the related table spaces for the index spaces in the
expanded referenced list
LIST of table spaces and

index spaces
Returns the table spaces from the expanded referenced list and
the related table spaces for the index spaces in the same list
INDEXSPACES
Specifies that the INCLUDE or EXCLUDE object expression is to create a list of
related index spaces.
INDEXSPACES is the default type for lists that use an index space or an index
for the initial search. For more information about specifying these objects, see
the descriptions of the INDEXSPACE and INDEX options.
No default type value exists for lists that use other lists for the initial search.
The list that is referred to by the LIST option is used unless you specify
TABLESPACES or INDEXSPACES. Likewise, no type default value exists for
lists that use databases for the initial search. If you specify the DATABASE
option, you must specify INDEXSPACES or TABLESPACES. For more
information about specifying lists and databases, see the descriptions of the
LIST and DATABASE options.
The result of the INDEXSPACES keyword varies depending on the type of
object that you specify in the INCLUDE or EXCLUDE clause. These results are
shown in The following table.
Table 25. Result of the INDEXSPACES keyword based on the object type that is specified in
the INCLUDE or EXCLUDE clause.
188

INCLUDE or EXCLUDE
clause
Result of the INDEXSPACES keyword
DATABASE
Returns all index spaces that are contained within the database
TABLESPACE
Returns all index spaces for indexes over all tables in the table
space
TABLE
Returns all index spaces for indexes over the table
INDEXSPACE
Returns the specified index space.
Table 25. Result of the INDEXSPACES keyword based on the object type that is specified in
the INCLUDE or EXCLUDE clause. (continued)
INCLUDE or EXCLUDE
clause
Result of the INDEXSPACES keyword
INDEX
Returns the index space that contains the index
LIST of table spaces
Returns the related index spaces for the table spaces in the
expanded referenced list
LIST of index spaces
Returns the index spaces from the expanded referenced list
LIST of table spaces and

index spaces
Returns the index spaces from the expanded referenced list and
the related index spaces for the table spaces in the same list
COPY
Specifies whether indexes that were defined with or altered to COPY YES or
COPY NO attributes are to be included or excluded in this portion of the list.
If you omit COPY, all index spaces that satisfy the INCLUDE or EXCLUDE
expression, regardless of their COPY attribute, are included or excluded in this
portion of the list. If specified, this keyword must immediately follow the
INDEXSPACES keyword. If you specify this keyword elsewhere, it is
interpreted as the start of the COPY utility control statement.
YES
Specifies that only index spaces that were defined with or altered to COPY
YES are to be included in this portion of the list. Use INCLUDE with
COPY YES to develop a list of index spaces that the COPY utility can
process.
NO
Specifies that only index spaces that were defined with or altered to COPY
NO are to be included in this portion of the list. Use EXCLUDE with
COPY NO to remove indexes that the COPY utility cannot process from a
larger list.
LIST referenced-list
Specifies the name of a previously defined object list that is to be expanded
and used for the initial search for the object.
referenced-list is the name of the list. You must explicitly specify this name. You
cannot specify pattern-matching characters (%,*, ?, and _) for lists.
No default type value exists for lists that are developed from the LIST option.
The list is expanded as defined, and it is then modified by subsequent
keywords, if any.
You can specify a type-spec of TABLESPACES to create a list of only table
spaces. If the list to be processed contains index spaces, the TABLESPACES
keyword creates a list that includes related table spaces.
You can specify a type-spec of INDEXSPACES to create a list of only index
spaces. If the list to be processed contains table spaces, the INDEXSPACES
keyword creates a list that includes related index spaces.
You can use the LIST keyword to make aggregate lists of lists, to exclude entire
lists from other lists, and to develop lists of objects that are related to other
lists.
Specifies the database that is to be used for the initial search for the object.
Chapter 15. LISTDEF
189
You can specify the database-name explicitly or as a pattern-matched name.

DATABASE * and DATABASE % are not supported.
If you specify DATABASE, you must also specify either TABLESPACES or
INDEXSPACES as the list type. Depending on the list type that you specify,
DB2 includes all table spaces or index spaces in database-name that satisfy the
pattern-matching expression in the list.
You cannot specify DSNDB01, DSNDB06, DSNDB07, or user-defined work file
databases in a LISTDEF.
Use caution when you specify an implicit DATABASE name. Authorization to
access objects that are within an implicit database is not uniform. Use the
OPTIONS EVENT (ITEMERROR, SKIP) control statement to continue
processing when authorization errors occur.
|
|
|
|
Specifies the table space that is to be used for the initial search for the object.
If you specify TABLESPACE, the default list type is TABLESPACES. All table
spaces that satisfy the pattern-matching expression are included in the list
unless the list is modified by other keywords. TABLESPACE *.* and TABLESPACE
%.% are not supported.
database-name specifies the name of the database to which the table space
belongs. The default value is DSNDB04.
table-space-name specifies the name of the table space.
You can explicitly specify or use pattern-matching characters to specify
database-name, table-space-name, or both.
You cannot include any objects in DSNDB07 or any user-defined work file
databases in a LISTDEF. Pattern matching is not supported for DSNDB01 and
DSNDB06 objects.
Specifies the index space that is to be used for the initial search for the object.
If you specify INDEXSPACE, the default list type is INDEXSPACES. All index
spaces that satisfy the pattern-matching expression are included in the list
unless the index spaces are excluded by other LISTDEF options. INDEXSPACE
*.* and INDEXSPACE %.% are not supported.
database-name specifies the name of the database to which the index space
belongs. The default value is DSNDB04.
index-space-name specifies the name of the index space.
database-name, index-space-name, or both.
You cannot include any objects in DSNDB07 or any user-defined work file
databases in a LISTDEF. Pattern-matching is not supported for DSNDB01 and
DSNDB06 objects.
TABLE creator-id.table-name
Specifies the table that is to be used for the initial search for the object.
If you specify TABLE, the default list type is TABLESPACES. All table spaces
that contain tables that satisfy the pattern-matching expression are included in
the list unless the list is modified by other keywords. TABLE *.* and TABLE %.%
are not supported.
190
|
|
creator-id specifies the qualifier creator ID for the table. The default value is the
user identifier for the utility. table-name specifies the name of the table. If you
specify a table name with CLONED, the CLONED keyword is ignored.
creator-id,table-name, or both. However, the underscore pattern-matching
character is ignored in a table name.
Pattern-matching is not supported for catalog and directory objects. In a
LISTDEF statement, you must include catalog and directory objects by their
fully qualified names.
Enclose the table name in quotation marks if the name contains a blank.
Specifies the index that is to be used for the initial search for the object.
If you specify INDEX, the default list type is INDEXSPACES. All index spaces
that contain indexes that satisfy the pattern-matching expression are included
in the list unless the list is modified by other keywords. INDEX *.* and INDEX
%.% are not supported.
creator-id specifies the qualifier creator ID for the index. The default value is
the user identifier for the utility.
index-name specifies the name of the index.
Enclose the index name in quotation marks if the name contains a blank.
creator-id, index-name, or both. However, the underscore pattern-matching
character is ignored in an index name.
Pattern-matching is not supported for catalog and directory objects. In a
LISTDEF statement, you must include catalog and directory objects by their
fully qualified names.
PARTLEVEL
Specifies the partition granularity for partitioned table spaces, partitioning
indexes, and data-partitioned secondary indexes that are to be contained in the
list. You cannot specify the PARTLEVEL keyword with the RI keyword.
(n) n is the integer partition number where n >= 0.
If you specify PARTLEVEL 0, the resulting list contains one entry for each
nonpartitioned object.
If you specify PARTLEVEL with a nonzero operand, the resulting list
contains one entry for the specified partition for partitioned objects and
one entry for each nonpartitioned object.
If you specify PARTLEVEL without (n), the resulting list contains one entry
for each partition in the partitioned object and one entry for each
nonpartitioned object.
An INCLUDE with the PARTLEVEL keyword can be removed from the list
only by an EXCLUDE with PARTLEVEL.
|
|
|
|
|
|
For Partition By Growth objects, the PARTLEVEL keyword will result in an

entry for each partition that exists when the LISTDEF list is evaluated.
Partitions that are added after the list is evaluated will not be in the list. If a
partition is added during long-running job steps in which the list is reused, the
partitions that were added during the job step will not be in the list and will
not be processed. If a utility job that uses a PARTLEVEL list is restarted, the
Chapter 15. LISTDEF
191
original list is saved during the original execution for a later restart, and the
list will not include the added partitions.
|
|
CLONED
Use the CLONED keyword to have LISTDEF perform a final filtering of the
INCLUDE or EXCLUDE clause contents based on the existence or absence of
clone data. This operation is performed last, after processing all other
keywords on the INCLUDE or EXCLUDE clause.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CLONED YES specifies that only tablespaces and indexspaces that contain
cloned objects are to be returned in the INCLUDE or EXCLUDE clause.
CLONED NO specifies that only tablespaces and indexspaces that do not
contain cloned objects are to be returned in the INCLUDE or EXCLUDE clause.
Omit the CLONED keyword if the existence of clone data is not a factor.
|
|
|
|
|
The use of CLONED YES or CLONED NO only impacts the contents of the
list. It does not determine if clone or base data is later processed by the utility
using the list. Only the presence or absence of the CLONE keyword on
individual utility control statements determines if clone or base data is
processed.
RI Specifies that all objects that are referentially related to the object expression
(PRIMARY KEY <--> FOREIGN KEY) are to be included in the list. DB2
processes all referential relationships repeatedly until the entire referential set
is developed. You cannot specify RI with PARTLEVEL(n).
LOB indicator keywords: Use one of three LOB indicator keywords to direct
LISTDEF processing to follow auxiliary relationships to include related LOB objects
in the list. The auxiliary relationship can be followed in either direction. LOB
objects include the LOB table spaces, auxiliary tables, indexes on auxiliary tables,
and their containing index spaces.
Incomplete LOB definitions cause seemingly related LOB objects to not be found.
The auxiliary relationship does not exist until you create the AUX TABLE with the
STORES keyword.
No default LOB indicator keyword exists. If you do not specify BASE, LOB, or
ALL, DB2 does not follow the auxiliary relationships and does not filter LOB from
base objects in the enumerated list.
ALL
Specifies that BASE, LOB, and XML objects are to be included in the list.
Auxiliary relationships are to be followed from all objects that result from the
initial object lookup, and BASE, LOB, and XML objects are to remain in the
final enumerated list. CLONED objects are not included.
|
|
|
|
BASE
Specifies that only base table spaces (non-LOB) and index spaces are to be
included in this element of the list.
If the result of the initial search for the object is a base object, auxiliary
relationships are not followed. If the result of the initial search for the object is
a LOB object, the auxiliary relationship is applied to the base table space or
index space, and only those objects become part of the resulting list.
LOB
Specifies that only LOB table spaces and related index spaces that contain
indexes on auxiliary tables are to be included in this element of the list.
192
If the result of the initial search for the object is a LOB object, auxiliary
relationships are not followed. If the result of the initial search for the object is
a base object, the auxiliary relationship is applied to the LOB table space or
index space, and only those objects become part of the resulting list.
|
|
XML
Specifies that only XML objects are to be included in this element of the list.
Concurrency and compatibility for LISTDEF

The LISTDEF utility has certain concurrency and compatibility characteristics
associated with it.
LISTDEF is a control statement that is used to set up an environment for another
utility to follow. The LISTDEF list is stored until it is referenced by a specific
utility. When referenced by an utility, the list expands. At that time, the
concurrency and compatibility restrictions of that utility apply, with the additional
restriction that the catalog tables that are necessary to expand the list must be
available for read-only access.
List processing limitations

Although DB2 does not limit the number of objects that a list can contain, be
aware that if your list is too large, the utility might fail with an error or abend in
either DB2 or another program. These errors or abends can be caused by storage
limitations, limitations of the operating system, or other restrictions imposed by
either DB2 or non-DB2 programs. Whether such a failure occurs depends on many
factors including, but not limited to the following items:
v The amount of available storage in both the utility batch and DBM1 address
spaces
v The utility that is running.
v The type and number of other utilities that are running at the same time.
v The specific combination of keywords and operands of all the utilities that are
running
Recommendation: If you receive a failure that you suspect is caused by running a
utility on a list that is too large, divide your list into smaller lists and run the
utility or utilities in separate job steps on the smaller lists until they run
successfully.
Creating the LISTDEF control statement

The LISTDEF control statement defines a list of objects and assigns a name to the
list.
You must include the following elements in the control statement:
v The name of the list.
v An INCLUDE clause, optionally followed by additional INCLUDE or EXCLUDE
clauses to either include or exclude objects from the list.
Chapter 15. LISTDEF
193
Related concepts
Including objects in a list
Including objects in a list

Use the INCLUDE and EXCLUDE clauses to specify the objects that are to be
included in the list. Each INCLUDE clause adds objects to the list. Each EXCLUDE
clause removes objects from the list. You must first specify an INCLUDE clause.
You can then specify subsequent INCLUDE or EXCLUDE clauses in any order to
add to or delete objects from the existing list.
DB2 constructs the list, one clause at a time, by adding objects to or removing
objects from the list. If an EXCLUDE clause attempts to remove an object that is
not yet in the list, DB2 ignores the EXCLUDE clause of that object and proceeds to
the next INCLUDE or EXCLUDE clause. Be aware that a subsequent INCLUDE
can return a previously excluded object to the list.
You must specify either INCLUDE or EXCLUDE. No default specification exists.
Specifying objects to include or exclude

Each INCLUDE or EXCLUDE clause identifies specific objects to add to or remove
from the list.
You must include the following elements in each INCLUDE or EXCLUDE clause:
v The object that is to be used in the initial catalog lookup for each INCLUDE or
EXCLUDE clause. The search for objects can begin with databases, table spaces,
index spaces, tables, indexes, or other lists. You can explicitly specify the names
of these objects or, with the exception of other lists, use a pattern matching
expression. The resulting list contains only table spaces, only index spaces, or
both.
v The type of objects that the list contains, either TABLESPACES or
INDEXSPACES. You must explicitly specify the list type only when you specify
a database as the initial object by using the keyword DATABASE. Otherwise,
LISTDEF uses the default list type values shown in the following table. These
values depend on the type of object that you specified for the INCLUDE or
EXCLUDE clause.
Table 26. Default list type values that LISTDEF uses.
Specified object
Default list type value
TABLESPACE
TABLESPACES
TABLE
TABLESPACES
INDEXSPACE
INDEXSPACES
INDEX
INDEXSPACES
LIST
Existing type value of the list
For example, the following INCLUDE clause specifies that table space
DBLT0301.TLLT031A is to be added to the LIST:
INCLUDE TABLESPACE DBLT0301.TLLT031A
194
In the preceding example, table space DBLT0301.TLLT031A is specified as the

object that LISTDEF is to use for the initial catalog lookup. By default, the list type
value for a TABLESPACE object is TABLESPACES. Therefore, the list includes only
table space DBLT0301.TLLT031A.
The following example INCLUDE clause is similar to the preceding example,
except that it includes the INDEXSPACES keyword:
INCLUDE INDEXSPACES TABLESPACE DBLT0301.TLLT031A
In this example, the clause specifies that all index spaces over all tables in table
space DBLT0301.TLLT031A are to be added to the list.
|
|
Optionally, you can add related objects to the list by specifying keywords that
indicate a relationship, such as referentially related objects or auxiliary related
objects. Valid specifications include the following keywords:
v BASE (non-LOB and non-XML objects)
v LOB (LOB objects)
v XML (XML objects)
v ALL (BASE, LOB, and XML objects)
v TABLESPACES (related table spaces)
v INDEXSPACES (related index spaces)
v RI (related by referential constraints, including informational referential
constraints)
The preceding keywords perform two functions: they determine which objects are
related, and they then filter the contents of the list. The behavior of these keywords
varies depending on the type of object that you specify. For example, if your initial
object is a LOB object, the LOB keyword is ignored. If, however, the initial object is
not a LOB object, the LOB keyword determines which LOB objects are related, and
DB2 excludes non-LOB objects from the list.
DB2 processes each INCLUDE and EXCLUDE clause in the following order:
1. Perform the initial search for the object that is based on the specified
pattern-matching expression, including PARTLEVEL specification, if specified.
|
|
2. Add or remove related objects and filter the list elements based on the specified
list type, either TABLESPACES or INDEXSPACES (COPY YES or COPY NO).
3. Add or remove related objects depending on the presence or absence of the RI,
BASE, LOB, XML, and ALL keywords.
For example, to generate a list of all table spaces in the ACCOUNT database but
exclude all LOB table spaces, you can specify the following LISTDEF statement:
LISTDEF ACCNT INCLUDE TABLESPACES DATABASE ACCOUNT BASE
In the preceding example, the name of the list is ACCNT. The TABLESPACES
keyword indicates that the list is to include table spaces that are associated with
the specified object. In this case, the table spaces to be included are those table
spaces in database ACCOUNT. Finally, the BASE keyword limits the objects to only
base table spaces.
If you want a list of only LOB index spaces in the ACCOUNT database, you can
specify the following LISTDEF statement:
LISTDEF ACLOBIX INCLUDE INDEXSPACES DATABASE ACCOUNT LOB
In the preceding example, the INDEXSPACES and LOB keywords indicate that the
INCLUDE clause is to add only LOB index spaces to the ACLOBIX list.
Chapter 15. LISTDEF
195
Restriction: Utilities do not support SYSUTILX-related objects inside a LISTDEF

specification. You cannot specify the following objects in a LISTDEF:
v TABLESPACE DSNDB01.SYSUTILX
v TABLE SYSIBM.SYSUTILX
v TABLE SYSIBM.SYSUTIL
v INDEXSPACE DSNDB01.DSNLUX01
v INDEXSPACE DSNDB01.DSNLUX02
v INDEX SYSIBM.DSNLUX01
v INDEX SYSIBM.DSNLUX02
Using pattern matching expressions

You can use four special pattern-matching characters (%, *, _,?) to define generic
object names in a LISTDEF statement. These characters are similar to those
characters that are used in the SQL LIKE predicate. Utilities that reference a list
access the DB2 catalog at execution time and dynamically expand each generic
object name into an equivalent enumerated list. A utility processes this enumerated
list either sequentially or in parallel, depending on the utility function and the
parameters that you specify.
Restrictions: DB2 does not support all-inclusive lists (such as DATABASE * or
TABLESPACE *.*).
Pattern-matching of DB2 catalog and directory objects (DSNDB06 and DSNDB01) is
not supported. Catalog and directory objects must be included in a LISTDEF by
their full table space or index space name. Even if catalog and directory objects
match a LISTDEF pattern matching expression, they are not included in the list. To
process those objects, you must use syntax from releases prior to Version 7.
Specify pattern-matching object names by using the pattern-matching characters
that are shown in the following table. This table lists the pattern-matching
character, the equivalent SQL symbol, and any additional information.
Table 27. LISTDEF pattern-matching characters
LISTDEF
patternmatching
character
Equivalent
symbol used in
SQL LIKE
predicates
Usage notes
Percent sign (%)
Percent sign (%)
Performs the same function.
Question mark
(?)
Underscore (_)
Use the question mark (?) instead of underscore (_) as

a pattern-matching character in table and index
names. The underscore character (_) in table and index
names represents a single occurrence of itself.
Asterisk (*)
Percent sign (%)
Performs the same function.
Underscore (_)
Underscore (_)
Use the underscore (_) as an alternative to the

question mark (?) for database, table space, and index
space names.
Including catalog and directory objects

If you specify DB2 directory objects (DSNDB01) and DB2 catalog objects
(DSNDB06) in object lists, you must specify the fully qualified table space or index
196
space names for those objects. Pattern-matching is not supported for catalog or
directory objects. DB2 issues error messages for any catalog or directory objects
that are invalid for a utility.
Although DB2 catalog and directory objects can appear in LISTDEF lists, these
objects might be invalid for a utility and result in an error message.
The following valid INCLUDE clauses contain catalog and directory objects:
v
INCLUDE TABLESPACE DSNDB06.SYSDBASE
v
INCLUDE TABLESPACES TABLESPACE DSNDB06.SYSDBASE
v
INCLUDE INDEXSPACE DSNDB06.DSNDXX01
v
INCLUDE INDEXSPACES INDEXSPACE DSNDB06.DSNDXX01
Restriction: If you specify a catalog or directory object in a LISTDEF control

statement, you cannot specify the following keywords:
v DATABASE
v TABLE
v INDEX
v BASE
v LOB
v ALL
v Databases DSNDB01, DSNDB06, and DSNDB07
v Table or indexes with a creator id of SYSIBM
These keywords require DB2 to access the catalog, which can cause problems when
you specify a catalog or directory object.
All LISTDEF lists automatically exclude work file databases, which consist of
DSNDB07 objects and user-defined work file objects, because DB2 utilities do not
process these objects.
Previewing the contents of a list

You can preview the objects that are to be included in a list by using the PREVIEW
function.
When you run a utility using the PREVIEW function, DB2 expands any LISTDEF
control statements into the equivalent enumerated list, prints it to SYSPRINT, and
stops execution.
Specify PREVIEW in one of two ways, either as a JCL parameter or on the
OPTIONS PREVIEW control statement.
Creating LISTDEF libraries

You can create a library of LISTDEF control statements by using a DD statement to
name LISTDEF data sets.
For example, assume that data sets ADMF001.DB.LIST1 and ADMF001.DB.LIST2
each contain several LISTDEF statements. For any utility jobs that reference these
LISTDEF statements, you can include the following DD statement in the JCL:
Chapter 15. LISTDEF
197
//LISTDSN DD DSN=ADMF001.DB.LIST1,DISP=SHR
//
DD DSN=ADMF001.DB.LIST2,DISP=SHR
This DD statement defines a LISTDEF library. The statement gives a name

(LISTDSN) to a group of data sets that contain LISTDEF statements, in this case
ADMF001.DB.LIST1 and ADMF001.DB.LIST2. Defining such a library enables you
to subsequently refer to the LISTDEF statements in that library by using the
OPTIONS LISTDEFDD control statement.
Any data sets that are identified as part of a LISTDEF library must contain only
LISTDEF statements.
In the utility job that references those LISTDEF statements, include an OPTIONS
statement before the utility statement. In the OPTIONS statement, specify the DD
name of the LISTDEF library as LISTDEFDD ddname.
DB2 uses this LISTDEF library for any subsequent utility control statements, until
either the end of input or until you specify another OPTIONS LISTDEFDD ddname.
The default DD name for the LISTDEF definition library is SYSLISTD.
When DB2 encounters a reference to a list, DB2 first searches SYSIN. If DB2 does
not find the definition of the referenced list, DB2 searches the specified LISTDEF
library.
Using lists in other utility jobs

You can reference lists in other utility jobs.
Placing the LISTDEF control statement

Specify LISTDEF control statements in the SYSIN DD statement prior to the utility
control statement that references it, or in one or more LISTDEF library data sets.
Any LISTDEF statement that is defined within the SYSIN DD statement overrides
another LISTDEF definition of the same name found in a LISTDEF library data set.
Referencing the list in another utility control statement

To use a list that has been defined with the LISTDEF control statement as the
target object for a specific utility, specify the list name, prefixed by the LIST
keyword. For example, you could QUIESCE all objects in a list by specifying the
following control statement:
QUIESCE LIST X
In general, utilities processes the objects in the list in the order in which they are
specified. However, some utilities alter the list order for optimal processing as
follows:
v CHECK INDEX, REBUILD INDEX, and RUNSTATS INDEX process all index
spaces that are related to a given table space at one time, regardless of list order.
v UNLOAD processes all specified partitions of a given table space at one time
regardless of list order.
The LIST keyword is supported by the utilities that are listed in the following
table. When possible, utility processing optimizes the order of list processing as
indicated in the table.
198
Table 28. How specific utilities process lists

Utility
Order of list processing
CHECK INDEX
Items are grouped by related table space.
COPY
Items are processed in the specified order on a single call to COPY;

the PARALLEL keyword is supported.
COPYTOCOPY
Items are processed in the specified order on a single call to

COPYTOCOPY.
MERGECOPY
Items are processed in the specified order.
MODIFY
RECOVERY
MODIFY
STATISTICS
QUIESCE
All items are processed in the specified order on a single call to

QUIESCE.
REBUILD
RECOVER
Items are processed in the specified order on a single call to

RECOVER.
REORG
REPORT
RUNSTATS INDEX
RUNSTATS
TABLESPACE
UNLOAD
Items at the partition level are grouped by table space.
Some utilities such as COPY and RECOVER, can process a LIST without a
specified object type. Object types are determined from the list contents. Other
utilities, such as REPORT, RUNSTATS, and REORG INDEX, must know the object
type that is to be processed before processing can begin. These utilities require that
you specify an object type in addition to the LIST keyword (for example: REPORT
RECOVERY TABLESPACE LIST, RUNSTATS INDEX LIST, and REORG INDEX
LIST). See the syntax diagrams for an individual utility for details.
Related tasks
Creating LISTDEF libraries on page 197
Using the TEMPLATE utility with LISTDEF

Together, the LISTDEF and TEMPLATE utilities enable faster development of
utility job streams, and require fewer modifications when the underlying list of
database objects change.
Many utilities require output data sets. In those cases, you should use the
TEMPLATE control statement to specify the naming convention and, optionally, the
allocation parameters for each type of output data set. Templates, like lists, can be
reused if the naming convention is robust enough to prevent duplicate data set
names from being allocated.
In some cases you can use traditional JCL DD statements with LISTDEF lists, but
this method is usually not practical unless you are processing small lists one object
at a time.
Chapter 15. LISTDEF
199
Related reference
Using the OPTIONS utility with LISTDEF

You can use the OPTIONS utility with LISTDEF.
Use the following three functions of the OPTIONS utility in conjunction with the
LISTDEF utility when needed:
OPTIONS PREVIEW
Enables you to preview the list contents before actual processing.
OPTIONS ITEMERROR
Enables you to alter the handling of errors that might occur during list
processing.
OPTIONS LISTDEFDD
Enables you to identify a LISTDEF library. The default value is LISTDEFDD.
Related tasks
Creating LISTDEF libraries on page 197
Termination or restart of LISTDEF

You can terminate and restart the LISTDEF utility.
You can terminate a LISTDEF utility job by using the TERM UTILITY command if
you submitted the job or have SYSOPR, SYSCTRL, or SYSADM authority.
You can restart a LISTDEF utility job, but it starts from the beginning again. Use
caution when changing LISTDEF lists prior to a restart. When DB2 restarts list
processing, it uses a saved copy of the list. Modifying the LISTDEF list that is
referred to by the stopped utility has no effect. Only control statements that follow
the stopped utility are affected.
Related concepts
Sample LISTDEF control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own LISTDEF
control statements.
Example 1: Defining a list of objects

The following control statement defines a list that includes the following objects:
v Table space DBLT0301.TLLT031A
v Index space DBLT0301.IXlT031A
v Table space DBLT0301.IPLT031C
v Table space that contains ADMF001.TBLT032A_1
The name of the list is NAME1. This list can be referenced by any subsequent
utility statements.
LISTDEF NAME1 INCLUDE
INCLUDE
INCLUDE
INCLUDE
200
TABLESPACE DBLT0301.TLLT031A
INDEXSPACE DBLT0301.IXLT031A
TABLESPACE DBLT0301.TPLT031C
TABLE ADMF001.TBLT032A_1
Example 2: Defining a list of all objects in a database

The following control statement defines a list (EXAMPLE2) that includes all table
spaces and all index spaces in the PAYROLL database.
LISTDEF EXAMPLE2 INCLUDE TABLESPACES DATABASE PAYROLL
INCLUDE INDEXSPACES DATABASE PAYROLL
Example 3: Using pattern-matching characters

The following control statement defines a list (PAYROLL) that includes the
following objects:
v All table spaces in the PAYROLL database, except for any table spaces whose
names begin with TEMP.
v All index spaces in the PAYROLL database that end with IX, except for those
index spaces that begin with TMPIX.
The subsequent COPY utility control statement processes this list.
LISTDEF PAYROLL INCLUDE
EXCLUDE
INCLUDE
EXCLUDE
COPY LIST PAYROLL ...
TABLESPACE
TABLESPACE
INDEXSPACE
INDEXSPACE
PAYROLL.*
PAYROLL.TEMP*
PAYROLL.*IX
PAYROLL.TMPIX*
Example 4: Defining a list of partitions and nonpartitioned table

spaces
The following control statement defines a list (EXAMPLE4) that includes one entry
for each partition of the qualifying partitioned table spaces and one entry for each
qualifying nonpartitioned table space. The table spaces must satisfy the PAY*.*
name pattern.
LISTDEF EXAMPLE4 INCLUDE TABLESPACE PAY*.* PARTLEVEL
Assume that three table spaces qualify. Of these table spaces, two are partitioned
table spaces (PAY2.DEPTA and PAY2.DEPTF) that each have three partitions and
one is a nonpartitioned table space (PAY1.COMP). In this case, the EXAMPLE4 list
includes the following items:
v PAY2.DEPTA partition 1
v PAY2.DEPTF partition 1
v PAY1.COMP
If you specified PARTLEVEL(2) instead of PARTLEVEL, the EXAMPLE4 list
includes the following items:
v PAY1.COMP
If you specified PARTLEVEL(0) instead of PARTLEVEL, the EXAMPLE4 list
includes only PAY1.COMP.
Chapter 15. LISTDEF
201
Example 5: Defining a list of COPY YES indexes

The following control statement defines a list (EXAMPLE5) that includes related
index spaces from the referenced list (EXAMPLE4) that have been defined or
altered to COPY YES.
LISTDEF EXAMPLE5 INCLUDE LIST EXAMPLE4 INDEXSPACES COPY YES
Example 6: Defining a list that includes all table space partitions

except for one
The following control statement defines a list (EXAMPLE6) that includes all
partitions of table space X, except for partition 12. The INCLUDE clause adds an
entry for each partition, and the EXCLUDE clause removes the entry for partition
12.
LISTDEF EXAMPLE6 INCLUDE TABLESPACE X PARTLEVEL
EXCLUDE TABLESPACE X PARTLEVEL(12)
Note that if the PARTLEVEL keyword is not specified in both clauses, as in the
following two sample statements, the INCLUDE and EXCLUDE items do not
intersect. For example, in the following statement, table space X is included is
included in the list in its entirety, not at the partition level. Therefore, partition 12
cannot be excluded.
LISTDEF EXAMPLE6 INCLUDE TABLESPACE X
EXCLUDE TABLESPACE X PARTLEVEL(12)
In the following sample statement, the list includes only partition 12 of table space
X, so table space X in its entirety can not be excluded.
LISTDEF EXAMPLE6 INCLUDE TABLESPACE X PARTLEVEL(12)
EXCLUDE TABLESPACE X
Example 7: Defining a LISTDEF library and using a list in a

QUIESCE job
In this example, the first two LISTDEF control statements define the NAME1 and
NAME2 lists. The NAME1 list is stored in a sequential data set
(JULTU103.TCASE.DATA2), and the NAME2 list is stored in a member of a
partitioned data set (JULTU103.TCASE.DATA3(MEM1)). These output data sets are
identified by the SYSUT2 DD statements (in the JCL for the CREATE1 and
CREATE2 jobs).
The LISTLIB DD statement (in the JCL for the QUIESCE job) defines a LISTDEF
library. When you define a LISTDEF library, you give a name to a group of data
sets that contain LISTDEF statements. In this case, the library is to include the
following data sets:
v The sequential data set JULTU103.TCASE.DATA2 (which includes the NAME1
list)
v The MEM1 member of the partitioned data set JULTU103.TCASE.DATA3 (which
includes the NAME2 list).
Defining such a library enables you to subsequently refer to a group of LISTDEF
statements with a single reference.
The OPTIONS utility control statement in this example specifies that the library
that is identified by the LISTLIB DD statement is to be used as the default
LISTDEF definition library. This declaration means that for any referenced lists,
202
DB2 is to first search SYSIN for the list definition. If DB2 does not find the list
definition in SYSIN, it is to search any data sets that are included in the LISTLIB
LISTDEF library.
The last LISTDEF statement defines the NAME3 list. This list includes all objects in
the NAME1 and NAME2 lists, except for three table spaces (TSLT032B, TSLT031B,
TSLT032C). Because the NAME1 and NAME2 lists are not included in SYSIN, DB2
searches the default LISTDEF library (LISTLIB) to find them.
Finally, the QUIESCE utility control statement specifies this list of objects (NAME3)
for which DB2 is to establish a quiesce point.
//CREATE1 JOB 'USER=NAME',CLASS=A,...
//*-----------------------------------------------------//* Create an input data set.
//*-----------------------------------------------------//LOAD1
EXEC PGM=IEBGENER
//SYSPRINT DD DUMMY
//SYSIN
DD DUMMY
//SYSUT2
DD DSN=JULTU103.TCASE.DATA2,
//
//
UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(4000,(20,20),,,ROUND),
//
DCB=(RECFM=FB,LRECL=80,BLKSIZE=2400)
//SYSUT1
DD *
LISTDEF NAME1 INCLUDE TABLESPACE DBLT0301.TLLT031A
INCLUDE TABLESPACE DBLT0301.TSLT031B
/*
//CREATE2 JOB 'USER=NAME',CLASS=A,...
//*-----------------------------------------------------//* Create an input data set.
//*-----------------------------------------------------//CRECNTL EXEC PGM=IEFBR14
//CNTL
DD DSN=JULTU103.TCASE.DATA3,UNIT=SYSDA,
//
VOL=SER=SCR03,
//
SPACE=(TRK,(2,2,2)),DCB=(DSORG=PO,
//
LRECL=80,RECFM=FB,BLKSIZE=4560),
//
DISP=(NEW,CATLG,CATLG)
/*
//*-----------------------------------------------------//* Create member of input data set.
//*-----------------------------------------------------//FILLCNTL EXEC PGM=IEBUPDTE
//SYSUT1
DD DSN=JULTU103.TCASE.DATA3,DISP=OLD
//SYSUT2
DD DSN=JULTU103.TCASE.DATA3,DISP=OLD
//SYSIN DD DATA
./ ADD NAME=MEM1
LISTDEF NAME2 INCLUDE TABLESPACE DBLT0302.TLLT032A
INCLUDE TABLESPACE DBLT0302.TSLT032B
INCLUDE TABLESPACE DBLT0302.TPLT032C
./ ENDUP
/*
//QUIESCE JOB 'USER=NAME',CLASS=A,...
//*******************************************************
//* QUIESCE LISTDEF DD LILSTDEF data sets
//*******************************************************
//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='JULTU103.QUIESC2',
//
//LISTLIB DD DSN=JULTU103.TCASE.DATA2,DISP=SHR
//
DD DSN=JULTU103.TCASE.DATA3(MEM1),DISP=SHR
//SYSIN
DD *
OPTIONS LISTDEFDD LISTLIB
LISTDEF NAME3 INCLUDE LIST NAME1
INCLUDE LIST NAME2
Chapter 15. LISTDEF
203
EXCLUDE TABLESPACE DBLT0302.TSLT032B

EXCLUDE TABLESPACE DBLT0301.TSLT031B
EXCLUDE TABLESPACE DBLT0302.TPLT032C
QUIESCE LIST NAME3
/*
Figure 27. Example of building a LISTDEF library and then running the QUIESCE utility
Example 8: Defining a list that includes related objects

The following LISTDEF control statement defines a list (EXAMPLE8) that includes
table space DBLT0101.TPLT011C and all objects that are referentially related to it.
Only base table spaces are included in the list. The subsequent RECOVER utility
control statement specifies that all objects in the EXAMPLE8 list are to be
recovered.
//STEP2
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='JULTU101.RECOVE5',
//
//SYSIN
DD *
LISTDEF EXAMPLE8 INCLUDE TABLESPACE DBLT0101.TPLT011C RI BASE
RECOVER LIST EXAMPLE8
/*
Example 9: Defining a list of cloned data

The following control statement indicates that the INCLUDE expression is to
return only the names of clone tables, table spaces that contain clone tables,
indexes on clone tables, or index spaces that contain indexes on clone tables.
|
|
|
LISTDEF REORG_TBSP INCLUDE TABLESPACE DB42240*.T*

CLONED YES
EXCLUDE TABLESPACE DB42240*.TL4224L*
EXCLUDE TABLESPACE DB42240*.TL4224B*
EXCLUDE TABLESPACE DB42240*.TL4224C*
EXCLUDE TABLESPACE DB42240*.TL4224D*
EXCLUDE TABLESPACE DB42240*.TL4224E*
EXCLUDE TABLESPACE DB42240*.TL4224F*
EXCLUDE TABLESPACE DB422401.TSHR5702
204
Chapter 16. LOAD

Use LOAD to load one or more tables of a table space. The LOAD utility loads
records into the tables and builds or extends any indexes that are defined on them.
If the table space already contains data, you can choose whether you want to add
the new data to the existing data or replace the existing data.
The loaded data is processed by any edit or validation routine that is associated
with the table, and any field procedure that is associated with any column of the
table. The LOAD utility ignores and does not enforce informational referential
constraints.
Output
LOAD DATA generates one or more of the following forms of output:
v A loaded table space or partition.
v A discard file of rejected records.
v A summary report of errors that were encountered during processing; this report
is generated only if you specify ENFORCE CONSTRAINTS or if the LOAD
involves unique indexes.
following authorizations:
v Ownership of the table
v LOAD privilege for the database
v STATS privilege for the database is required if STATISTICS keyword is specified
LOAD operates on a table space level, so you must have authority for all tables in
the table space when you perform LOAD.
To run LOAD STATISTICS, the privilege set must include STATS authority on the
database. To run LOAD STATISTICS REPORT YES, the privilege set must also
include the SELECT privilege on the tables required.
If you use RACF access control with multilevel security and LOAD is to process a
table space that contains a table that has multilevel security with row-level
granularity, you must be identified to RACF and have an accessible valid security
label. You must also meet the following authorization requirements:
v To replace an entire table space with LOAD REPLACE, you must have the
write-down privilege unless write-down rules are not in effect.
v You must have the write-down privilege to specify values for the security label
columns, unless write-down rules are not in effect. If these rules are in effect and
you do not have write-down privilege, DB2 assigns your security label as the
value for the security label column for the rows that you are loading.
205
Execution phases of LOAD

The LOAD utility operates in the phases that are listed in the following table.
Table 29. LOAD phases of execution
Phase
Description
UTILINIT
Performs initialization.
RELOAD
Loads record types and writes temporary file records for indexes and foreign
keys. RELOAD makes one pass through the sequential input data set. Check
constraints are checked for each row. Internal commits provide commit points
at which to restart in case operation should halt in this phase.
RELOAD creates inline copies if you specified the COPYDDN or
RECOVERYDDN keywords.
A subtask is started at the beginning of the RELOAD phase to sort the keys.
The sort subtask initializes and waits for the main RELOAD phase to pass its
keys to SORT. RELOAD loads the data, extracts the keys, and passes them in
memory for sorting. At the end of the RELOAD phase, the last key is passed
to SORT, and record sorting completes.
Note that load partition parallelism starts subtasks. PREFORMAT for table
spaces occurs at the end of the RELOAD phase.
SORT
Sorts temporary file records before creating indexes or validating referential

constraints, if indexes or foreign keys exist. The SORT phase is skipped if all
the following conditions apply for the data that is processed during the
RELOAD phase:
v Each table has no more than one key.
v All keys are the same type (index key only, indexed foreign key, or foreign
key only).
v The data that is being loaded or reloaded is in key order (if a key exists). If
the key is an index key only and the index is a data-partitioned secondary
index, the data is considered to be in order if the data is grouped by
partition and ordered within partition by key value. If the key in question
is an indexed foreign key and the index is a data-partitioned secondary
index, the data is never considered to be in order.
v The data that is being loaded or reloaded is grouped by table, and each
input record is loaded into one table only.
SORT passes the sorted keys in memory to the BUILD phase, which builds
the indexes.
206
BUILD
Creates indexes from temporary file records for all indexes that are defined on
the loaded tables. Build also detects duplicate keys. PREFORMAT for indexes
occurs at the end of the BUILD phase.
SORTBLD
Performs all activities that normally occur in both the SORT and BUILD
phases, if you specify a parallel index build.
INDEXVAL
Corrects unique index violations or index evaluation errors from the

information in SYSERR, if any exist.
ENFORCE
Checks referential constraints, except informational referential constraints, and

corrects violations. Information about violations of referential constraints is
stored in SYSERR.
DISCARD
Copies records that cause errors from the input data set to the discard data
set.
REPORT
Generates a summary report, if you specified ENFORCE CONSTRAINT or if

load index validation is performed. The report is sent to SYSPRINT.
UTILTERM
Performs cleanup.
Related information
Syntax and options of the LOAD control statement

The LOAD utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the function
that the utility job performs.
Chapter 16. LOAD
207
Syntax diagram
DATA
INDDN
SYSREC
LOAD

PREFORMAT
INDDN ddname
INCURSOR cursor-name
COPYDICTIONARY
1
integer
(1)
RESUME
NO
SHRLEVEL NONE

REPLACE
copy-spec
statistics-spec
SHRLEVEL NONE
RESUME
YES
SHRLEVEL CHANGE
(2)
LOG
YES
LOG
NO
SORTKEYS 0
workddn-spec

KEEPDICTIONARY
REUSE

SORTKEYS NO
SORTKEYS integer
NOCOPYPEND
FLOAT(S390)
EBCDIC
FLOAT(IEEE)
ASCII
UNICODE
format-spec

,
NOSUBS
CCSID( integer
ENFORCE
CONSTRAINTS
ERRDDN
SYSERR
MAPDDN
SYSMAP
DISCARDDN SYSDISC
ENFORCE
NO
ERRDDN
ddname
MAPDDN
ddname
DISCARDDN

ddname
DISCARDS 0
DISCARDS integer
SORTDEVT
CONTINUEIF(start
)=
device-type
SORTNUM
integer

:end
Xbyte-string
character-string
DECFLOAT_ROUNDMODE
ROUND_CEILING
ROUND_DOWN
ROUND_FLOOR
ROUND_HALF_DOWN
ROUND_HALF_EVEN
ROUND_HALF_UP
ROUND_UP
INTO-TABLE-spec
IDENTITYOVERRIDE
Notes:
|
|
The value specified in the INTO TABLE for RESUME or REPLACE overrides the default value
for LOAD RESUME.
The default is 0 if the input is on tape, a cursor, a PDS member or for SYSREC DD *. For
sequential data sets, LOAD computes the default based upon the input data set size.
208
workddn-spec:
WORKDDN(SYSUT1,SORTOUT)

WORKDDN
(ddname1,ddname2)
,SORTOUT
(ddname1
)
SYSUT1
(
,ddname2)
copy-spec:

(SYSCOPY)
RECOVERYDDN(ddname3
COPYDDN
)
,ddname4
(ddname1
)
,ddname2
(,ddname2)
statistics-spec:
TABLE
ALL
STATISTICS

SAMPLE
integer
COLUMN
TABLE
table-name
SAMPLE
integer
,
COLUMN
INDEX
ALL
ALL
( column-name
REPORT
NO
UPDATE
REPORT
YES
UPDATE
ALL
correlation-stats-spec
,
INDEX
( index-name
ACCESSPATH
SPACE
NONE

HISTORY
ALL
ACCESSPATH
SPACE
NONE
FORCEROLLUP
YES
NO
correlation-stats-spec:
Chapter 16. LOAD
209
FREQVAL
NUMCOLS
COUNT
10

KEYCARD
FREQVAL
NUMCOLS
integer
COUNT
integer
format-spec:

FORMAT
UNLOAD
SQL/DS
COLDEL
CHARDEL
DECPT
COLDEL
coldel
CHARDEL
chardel
DECPT
decpt
DELIMITED
INTO-TABLE-spec:
For the syntax diagram and the option descriptions of the into-table specification,
see INTO-TABLE-spec on page 226.
Option descriptions
DATA
Specifies that data is to be loaded. This keyword is optional and is used for
clarity only.
INDDN ddname
Specifies the data definition (DD) statement or template that identifies the
input data set for the partition. The record format for the input data set must
be fixed-length or variable-length. The data set must be readable by the basic
sequential access method (BSAM).
The ddname is the name of the input data set.
The default value is SYSREC.
Specifies the cursor for the input data set. You must declare the cursor before it
is used by the LOAD utility. Use the EXEC SQL utility control statement to
define the cursor. You cannot load data into the same table on which you
defined the cursor. You cannot load data into a table that is a parent in a RI
relationship with the dependent table on which the cursor is defined.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The specified cursor can be used with the DB2 family cross-loader function,
which enables you to load data from any DRDA-compliant remote server. For
more information about using the cross-loader function, see Loading data by
using the cross-loader function on page 270.
|
|
cursor-name is the cursor name. Cursor names that are specified with the
LOAD utility cannot be longer than eight characters.
|
|
|
|
You cannot use the INCURSOR option with the following options:
v SHRLEVEL CHANGE
v NOSUBS
v FORMAT UNLOAD
210
|
|
|
v FORMAT SQL/DS
v CONTINUEIF
v WHEN
|
|
In addition, you cannot specify field specifications or use discard processing

with the INCURSOR option.
PREFORMAT
Specifies that the remaining pages are preformatted up to the high-allocated
RBA in the table space and index spaces that are associated with the table that
is specified in table-name. The preformatting occurs after the data has been
loaded and the indexes are built.
PREFORMAT can operate on an entire table space and its index spaces, or on a
partition of a partitioned table space and on the corresponding partitions of
partitioned indexes, if any exist. Specifying LOAD PREFORMAT (rather than
PART integer PREFORMAT) tells LOAD to serialize at the table space level,
which can inhibit concurrent processing of separate partitions. If you want to
serialize at the partition level, specify PART integer PREFORMAT.
The PREFORMAT keyword does not apply to auxiliary table spaces.

COPYDICTIONARY integer
Allows the LOAD utility to copy an existing compression dictionary from the
specified partition to other partitions on a partitioned table space. LOAD
copies the current compression dictionary from the specified partition and uses
it for compressing the input data for the partitions being replaced. This option
provides a method to copy a compression dictionary to an empty partition that
normally wouldnt have a compression dictionary built.
The COPYDICTIONARY keyword is only compatible on partitioned and range
partitioned table spaces using the RESUME NO option at the table space level
with PART integer REPLACE statements, where the partition being copied is
not the same as the partition(s) being replaced. LOAD PART integer RESUME
is not supported with the COPYDICTIONARY keyword. Neither is LOAD
RESUME YES COPYDICTIONARY.
The COPYDICTIONARY keyword is incompatible with the
KEEPDICTIONARY keyword at the table space or partition level and the
REPLACE keyword at the table space level.
This keyword will only copy the compression dictionary to partitions being
replaced that has the COMPRESS YES attribute. The partition being copied
requires a valid dictionary must exist.
You can specify any valid partition number that is not being replaced for the
partitioned table space. The default value is 1.
RESUME
Indicates whether records are to be loaded into an empty or non-empty table
space. For nonsegmented table spaces, space is not reused for rows that have
been marked as deleted or for rows of dropped tables.
Important: Specifying LOAD RESUME (rather than PART integer RESUME)
tells LOAD to serialize on the entire table space, which can inhibit concurrent
processing of separate partitions. If you want to process other partitions
concurrently, specify PART integer RESUME.
NO
Loads records into an empty table space. If the table space is not empty,
Chapter 16. LOAD
211
and you have not used REPLACE, a message is issued and the utility job
step terminates with a job step condition code of 8.
For nonsegmented table spaces that contain deleted rows or rows of
dropped tables, using the REPLACE keyword provides increased efficiency.
The default value is NO, unless you override it with PART integer
RESUME YES.
YES
Loads records into a non-empty table space. If the table space is empty, a
warning message is issued, but the table space is loaded. Loading begins at
the current end of data in the table space. Space is not reused for rows that
are marked as deleted or for rows of dropped tables.
LOAD RESUME SHRLEVEL CHANGE activates the before triggers and after
triggers for each row that is loaded.
SHRLEVEL
Specifies the extent to which applications can concurrently access the table
space or partition during the LOAD utility job. The following parameter values
are listed in order of increasing extent of allowed concurrent access.
NONE
Specifies that applications have no concurrent access to the table space or
partition.
CHANGE
Specifies that applications can concurrently read from and write to the
table space or partition into which LOAD is loading data. If you specify
SHRLEVEL CHANGE, you cannot specify the following parameters:
INCURSOR, RESUME NO, REPLACE, KEEPDICTIONARY, LOG NO,
ENFORCE NO, STATISTICS, COPYDDN, RECOVERYDDN, MAPDDN,
PREFORMAT, REUSE, or PART integer REPLACE.
For a partition-directed LOAD, if you specify SHRLEVEL CHANGE, only
RESUME YES can be specified or inherited from the LOAD statement.
LOAD SHRLEVEL CHANGE does not perform the SORT, BUILD,
SORTBLD, INDEXVAL, ENFORCE, or REPORT phases, and the
compatibility and concurrency considerations differ.
A LOAD SHRLEVEL CHANGE job functions like a mass INSERT. Whereas
a regular LOAD job drains the entire table space, LOAD SHRLEVEL
CHANGE functions like an INSERT statement and uses claims when
accessing an object.
Normally, a LOAD RESUME YES job loads the records at the end of the
already existing records. However, for a LOAD RESUME YES job with the
SHRLEVEL CHANGE option, the utility tries to insert the new records in
available free space as close to the clustering order as possible. This LOAD
job does not create any additional free pages. If you insert a lot of records,
these records are likely to be stored out of clustering order. In this case,
you should run the REORG TABLESPACE utility after loading the records.
|
|
When an identity column exists in the table being loaded, performance can
be improved by specifying the CACHE attribute for the identity column.
|
|
Lock escalation will be disabled on XML table spaces for LOAD

SHRLEVEL CHANGE.
212
Recommendation: If you have loaded a lot of records, run RUNSTATS

SHRLEVEL CHANGE UPDATE SPACE and then a conditional REORG.
Log records that DB2 creates during LOAD SHRLEVEL CHANGE can be
used by DB2 DataPropagator, if the tables that are being loaded are
defined with DATA CAPTURE CHANGES.
Note that before and after row triggers are activated for SHRLEVEL
CHANGE but not for SHRLEVEL NONE. Statement triggers for each row
are also activated for SHRLEVEL CHANGE but not for SHRLEVEL NONE.
REPLACE
Indicates whether the table space and all its indexes need to be reset to empty
before records are loaded. With this option, the newly loaded rows replace all
existing rows of all tables in the table space, not just those of the table that you
are loading. ForDB2 STOGROUP-defined data sets, the data set is deleted and
redefined with this option, unless you also specified the REUSE option. You
must have LOAD authority for all tables in the table space where you perform
LOAD REPLACE. If you attempt a LOAD REPLACE without this authority,
you get an error message.
You cannot use REPLACE with the PART integer REPLACE option of INTO
TABLE; you must either replace an entire table space by using the REPLACE
option or replace a single partition by using the PART integer REPLACE option
of INTO TABLE.
Specifying LOAD REPLACE (rather than PART integer REPLACE) tells LOAD
to serialize at the table space level. If you want to serialize at the partition
level, specify PART integer REPLACE. See the information about specifying
REPLACE at the partition level under the keyword descriptions for INTO
TABLE.
Specifies the DD statements for the primary (ddname1) and backup (ddname2)
copy data sets for the image copy.
The default value is SYSCOPY for the primary copy. No default exists for the
backup copy.
The COPYDDN keyword can be specified only with REPLACE. A full image
copy data set (SHRLEVEL REFERENCE) is created for the table or partitions
that are specified when LOAD executes. The table space or partition for which
an image copy is produced is not placed in COPY-pending status.
Image copies that are taken during LOAD REPLACE are not recommended for
use with RECOVER TOCOPY because these image copies might contain
unique index violations, referential constraint violations, or index evaluation
errors.
|
|
When using COPYDDN for XML data, an inline copy is taken only of the base
table space, not the XML table space.
Using COPYDDN when loading a table with LOB columns does not create a
copy of any index, LOB table space, or XML table space. You must perform
these tasks separately.
Chapter 16. LOAD
213
RECOVERYDDN ddname3,ddname4
copy data sets for the image copy at the recovery site.
RECOVERYDDN and COPYDDN.
STATISTICS
Specifies the gathering of statistics for a table space, index, or both; the
statistics are stored in the DB2 catalog.
|
|
|
|
If you specify the STATISTICS keyword with no other statistics-spec or

correlation-stats-spec options, DB2 gathers only table space statistics. Statistics
are collected on a base table space, but not on a LOB table space or XML table
space.
Restrictions:
v If you specify STATISTICS for encrypted data, DB2 might not provide useful
statistics on this data.
v You cannot specify STATISTICS if the named table is a table clone.
TABLE
Specifies the table for which column information is to be gathered. All tables
must belong to the table space that is specified in the TABLESPACE option.
(ALL)
Specifies that information is to be gathered for all columns of all tables in
the table space.
(table-name)
Specifies the tables for which column information is to be gathered. If you
omit the qualifier, the user identifier for the utility job is used. Enclose the
table name in quotation marks if the name contains a blank.
If you specify more than one table, you must repeat the TABLE option.
Multiple TABLE options must be specified entirely before or after any
INDEX keyword that may also be specified. For example, the INDEX
keyword may not be specified between any two TABLE keywords.
SAMPLE integer
Indicates the percentage of rows that LOAD is to sample when collecting
non-indexed column statistics. You can specify any value from 1 through 100.
The default value is 25.
COLUMN
Specifies the columns for which column information is to be gathered.
You can specify this option only if you specify the particular tables for which
statistics are to be gathered (TABLE (table-name)). If you specify particular
tables and do not specify the COLUMN option, the default, COLUMN(ALL), is
used. If you do not specify a particular table when using the TABLE option,
you cannot specify the COLUMN option; however, COLUMN(ALL) is
assumed.
214
(ALL)
Specifies that statistics are to be gathered for all columns in the table.
(column-name, ...)
Specifies the columns for which statistics are to be gathered.
You can specify a list of column names; the maximum is 10. If you specify
more than one column, separate each name with a comma.
INDEX
Specifies indexes for which information is to be gathered. Column information
is gathered for the first column of the index. All the indexes must be associated
with the same table space, which must be the table space that is specified in
the TABLESPACE option.
(ALL)
Specifies that the column information is to be gathered for all indexes that
are defined on tables in the table space.
(index-name)
Specifies the indexes for which information is to be gathered. Enclose the
index name in quotation marks if the name contains a blank.
KEYCARD
Requests the collection of all distinct values in all of the 1 to n key column
combinations for the specified indexes. n is the number of columns in the
index.
FREQVAL
Controls the collection of frequent-value statistics. If you specify FREQVAL, it
must be followed by two additional keywords:
NUMCOLS
Indicates the number of key columns that are to be concatenated together
when collecting frequent values from the specified index. Specifying 3
means that frequent values are to be collected on the concatenation of the
first three key columns. The default value is 1, which means that DB2
collects frequent values on the first key column of the index.
COUNT
Indicates the number of frequent values that are to be collected. Specifying
15 means that DB2 collects 15 frequent values from the specified key
columns. The default value is 10.
REPORT
Indicates whether a set of messages is to be generated to report the collected
statistics.
NO
Indicates that the set of messages is not sent to SYSPRINT as output.
YES
Indicates that the set of messages is sent to SYSPRINT as output. The
generated messages are dependent on the combination of keywords (such
as TABLESPACE, INDEX, TABLE, and COLUMN) that are specified with
the RUNSTATS utility. However, these messages are not dependent on the
specification of the UPDATE option. REPORT YES always generates a
report of SPACE and ACCESSPATH statistics.
UPDATE
Indicates whether the collected statistics are to be inserted into the catalog
Chapter 16. LOAD
215
tables. UPDATE also allows you to select statistics that are used for access path
selection or statistics that are used by database administrators.
ALL
Indicates that all collected statistics are to be updated in the catalog.
ACCESSPATH
Indicates that updates are to be made only to the catalog table columns
that provide statistics that are used for access path selection.
SPACE
Indicates that updates are to be made only to the catalog table columns
that provide statistics to help database administrators assess the status of a
particular table space or index.
NONE
Indicates that no catalog tables are to be updated with the collected
statistics. This option is valid only when REPORT YES is specified.
HISTORY
Records all catalog table inserts or updates to the catalog history tables.
The default is supplied by the value that is specified in STATISTICS HISTORY
on panel DSNTIPO.
ALL
Indicates that all collected statistics are to be updated in the catalog history
tables.
ACCESSPATH
Indicates that updates are to be made only to the catalog history table
columns that provide statistics that are used for access path selection.
SPACE
Indicates that only space-related catalog statistics are to be updated in
catalog history tables.
NONE
Indicates that no catalog history tables are to be updated with the collected
statistics.
FORCEROLLUP
Specifies whether aggregation or rollup of statistics is to take place when
RUNSTATS is executed even if some parts are empty. This keyword enables
the optimizer to select the best access path.
YES
Indicates that forced aggregation or rollup processing is to be done, even
though some parts might not contain data.
NO
Indicates that aggregation or rollup is to be done only if data is available
for all parts.
If data is not available for all parts, DSNU623I message is issued if the
installation value for STATISTICS ROLLUP on panel DSNTIPO is set to
NO.
KEEPDICTIONARY
Prevents the LOAD utility from building a new compression dictionary. LOAD
retains the current compression dictionary and uses it for compressing the
input data. This option eliminates the cost that is associated with building a
new dictionary.
216
|
|
|
|
The KEEPDICTIONARY keyword is ignored for XML table spaces. If you

specify REPLACE, any existing dictionary for the XML table space or partition
is deleted. If you do not specify REPLACE, any existing dictionary for the
XML table space or partition is saved.
|
|
DB2 ignores the KEEPDICTIONARY option if the REORG utility changes the
table space from basic row format to reordered row format.
This keyword is valid only if the table space that is being loaded has the
COMPRESS YES attribute.
If the table space or partition is empty, DB2 performs one of these actions:
v DB2 builds a dictionary if a compression dictionary does not exist.
v DB2 keeps the dictionary if a compression dictionary exists.
If RESUME NO and REPLACE are specified when the table space or partition
is not empty, DB2 performs the same actions as it does when the table space or
partition is empty.
If the table space or partition is not empty and RESUME YES is specified, DB2
performs one of these actions:
v DB2 does not build a dictionary if a compression dictionary does not exist.
v DB2 keeps the dictionary if a compression dictionary exists.
|
|
Note: You must use KEEPDICTIONARY to ensure that the compression

dictionary is maintained.
REUSE
Specifies (when used with REPLACE) that LOAD is to logically reset and reuse
DB2-managed data sets without deleting and redefining them. If you do not
specify REUSE, DB2 deletes and redefines DB2-managed data sets to reset
them.
REUSE must be accompanied by REPLACE to do the logical reset for all data
sets. However, if you specify REUSE for the table space and REPLACE only at
the partition level, only the replaced partitions are logically reset.
If a data set has multiple extents, the extents are not released if you specify the
REUSE parameter.
LOG
Indicates whether logging is to occur during the RELOAD phase of the load
process.
|
|
|
YES
Specifies normal logging during the load process. All records that are
loaded are logged. If the table space has the NOT LOGGED attribute, DB2
does the LOAD with no logging.
NO
|
|
|
|
|
|
Specifies no logging of data during the load process. If the table space has
the LOGGED attribute, the NO option sets the COPY-pending restriction
against the table space or partition that the loaded table resides in. No
table or partition in the table space can be updated by SQL until the
restriction is removed. For ways to remove the restriction, see Resetting
COPY-pending status on page 288.
|
|
If you load a single partition of a partitioned table space and the table
space has a secondary index, some logging might occur during the build
Chapter 16. LOAD
217
|
|
|
phase as DB2 logs any changes to the index structure. This logging allows
recoverability of the secondary index in case an abend occurs, and it also
allows concurrency.
|
|
|
|
|
DB2 treats table spaces that were created as NOT LOGGED as if you
specified LOG NO. If you specify LOG NO without specifying COPYDDN,
the base table space is placed in COPY-pending status. If XML columns are
nullable and not loaded, only the base table space is placed in
COPY-pending status.
|
|
|
A LOB table space affects logging while DB2 loads a LOB column
regardless of whether the LOB table space was defined with LOG YES or
LOG NO.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NOCOPYPEND
Specifies that LOAD is not to set the table space in the COPY-pending
status, even though LOG NO was specified. A NOCOPYPEND
specification does not turn on or change any informational
COPY-pending (ICOPY) status for indexes. A NOCOPYPEND
specification will not turn off any COPY-pending status that was set
prior to the LOAD. Normal completion of a LOAD LOG NO
NOCOPYPEND job returns a 0 code if no other errors or warnings
exist.
|
|
|
|
DB2 ignores a NOCOPYPEND specification if you also specified

COPYDDN to make a local-site inline image copy during the LOAD. If
the table space has the NOT LOGGED attribute, NOCOPYPEND is
ignored.
|
|
|
|
|
Attention: Specify the NOCOPYPEND option only if the data in the

table space can be easily re-created by another LOAD job if the data is
lost. If you do not take an image copy following the LOAD, you
cannot recover the table space by using the RECOVER utility, and you
might lose data.
WORKDDN (ddname1,ddname2)
Specifies the DD statements for the temporary work file for sort input and sort
output. Temporary work files for sort input and output are required if the
LOAD involves tables with indexes.
ddname1 is the DD name for the temporary work file for sort input. The
default value is SYSUT1.
ddname2 is the DD name for the temporary work file for sort output. The
default value is SORTOUT.
The WORKDDN keyword specifies either a DD name or a TEMPLATE name
step and a TEMPLATE name, the utility uses the DD name. For more
information about TEMPLATE specifications, see Chapter 31, TEMPLATE, on
page 641.
SORTKEYS
Specifies that index keys are to be sorted in parallel during the SORTBLD
phase to improve performance.
integer
Specifies an integer to provide an estimate of the number of index keys that
|
|
218
are to be sorted. Integer must be a positive integer between 0 and

562 949 953 421 311. The default value is 0 if any of the following
conditions are true:
v The target table has no index and SHRLEVEL is NONE.
v The target table has one index.
v The input is on tape, a cursor, a PDS member, or for SYSREC DD *.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO
Indicates that the SORTKEYS default is to be turned off.
For sequential data sets, LOAD computes an estimate based upon the input
data set size.
For more information about sorting keys, see Improved performance with
SORTKEYS on page 273 and Building indexes in parallel for LOAD on page
278.
FORMAT
Identifies the format of the input record. If you use FORMAT UNLOAD or
FORMAT SQL/DS, it uniquely determines the format of the input, and no field
specifications are allowed in an INTO TABLE option.
If you omit FORMAT, the format of the input data is determined by the rules
for field specifications.If you specify FORMAT DELIMITED, the format of the
input data is determined by the rules that are described in Appendix G,
Delimited file format, on page 1011.
UNLOAD
Specifies that the input record format is compatible with the DB2 unload
format. (The DB2 unload format is the result of REORG with the UNLOAD
ONLY option.)
Input records that were unloaded by the REORG utility are loaded into the
tables from which they were unloaded, if an INTO TABLE option specifies
each table. Do not add columns or change column definitions of tables
between the time you run REORG UNLOAD ONLY and LOAD FORMAT
UNLOAD.
Any WHEN clause on the LOAD FORMAT UNLOAD statement is
ignored; DB2 reloads the records into the same tables from which they
were unloaded. Not allowing a WHEN clause with the FORMAT
UNLOAD clause ensures that the input records are loaded into the proper
tables. Input records that cannot be loaded are discarded.
If the DCB RECFM parameter is specified on the DD statement for the
input data set, and the data set format has not been modified since the
REORG UNLOAD (ONLY) operation, the record format must be variable
(RECFM=V).
SQL/DS
Specifies that the input record format is compatible with the SQL/DS
unload format. The data type of a column in the table that is to be loaded
must be the same as the data type of the corresponding column in the
SQL/DS table.
If the SQL/DS input contains rows for more than one table, the WHEN
clause of the INTO TABLE option indicates which input records are to be
loaded into which DB2 table.
LOAD cannot load SQL/DS strings that are longer than the DB2 limit.
Chapter 16. LOAD
219
SQL/DS data that has been unloaded to disk under DB2 Server for VSE &
VM resides in a simulated z/OS-type data set with a record format of VBS.
Consider this format when transferring the data to another system that is
to be loaded into a DB2 table (for example, the DB2 Server for VSE & VM.
FILEDEF must define it as a z/OS-type data set). Processing the data set as
a standard CMS file puts the SQL/DS record type field at the wrong offset
within the records; LOAD is unable to recognize them as valid SQL/DS
input.
DELIMITED
Specifies that the input data file is in a delimited format. When data is in a
delimited format, all fields in the input data set are character strings or
external numeric values. In addition, each column in a delimited file is
separated from the next column by a column delimiter character.
For each of the delimiter types that you can specify, you must ensure that
the delimiter character is specified in the code page of the source data. The
delimiter character can be specified as either a character or hexadecimal
constant. For example, to specify # as the delimiter, you can specify either
COLDEL # or COLDEL X23. If the utility statement is coded in a
character type that is different from the input file, such as a utility
statement that is coded in EBCDIC and input data that is in Unicode, you
should specify the delimiter character in the utility statement as a
hexadecimal constant, or the result can be unpredictable.
You cannot specify the same character for more than one type of delimiter
(COLDEL, CHARDEL, and DECPT). For more information about delimiter
restrictions, see Loading delimited files on page 263.
Unicode input data for FORMAT DELIMITED must be UTF-8, CCSID 1208.
If you specify the FORMAT DELIMITED option, you cannot use any of the
following options:
v CONTINUEIF
v INCURSOR
v Multiple INTO TABLE statements
v WHEN
Also, LOAD ignores any specified POSITION statements within the LOAD
For more information about using delimited output and delimiter
restrictions, see Loading delimited files on page 263. For more
information about delimited files see Appendix G, Delimited file format,
on page 1011.
COLDEL coldel
Specifies the column delimiter that is used in the input file. The
default value is a comma (,). For ASCII and UTF-8 data this is X2C,
and for EBCDIC data it is a X6B.
CHARDEL chardel
Specifies the character string delimiter that is used in the input file.
The default value is a double quotation mark (). For ASCII and UTF-8
data this is X22, and for EBCDIC data it is X3F.
To delimit character strings that contain the character string delimiter,
repeat the character string delimiter where it is used in the character
string. LOAD interprets any pair of character delimiters that are found
between the enclosing character delimiters as a single character. For
example, the phrase what a nice warm day is interpreted as what
220
a nice warm day. The LOAD utility recognizes these character

delimiter pairs for only CHAR, VARCHAR, and CLOB fields.
Character string delimiters are required only when the string contains
the CHARDEL character. However, you can put the character string
delimiters around other character strings. Data that has been unloaded
in delimited format by the UNLOAD utility includes character string
delimiters around all character strings.
DECPTdecpt
Specifies the decimal point character that is used in the input file. The
default value is a period (.).
The default decimal point character is a period in a delimited file,
X2E in an ASCII or Unicode UTF-8 file.
|
|
|
|
Note: If you use DSNHDECP, ensure that the specified decimal value is
the same as the decimal value that is used in the input data. You must
specify the decimal value to match the decimal value that is used in the
input data.
FLOAT
Specifies that LOAD is to expect the designated format for floating point
numbers.
(S390)
Specifies that LOAD is to expect that floating point numbers are provided
in System/390 hexadecimal floating point (HFP) format. (S390) is the
format that DB2 stores floating point numbers in. It is also the default
value if you do not explicitly specify the FLOAT keyword.
(IEEE)
Specifies that LOAD is to expect that floating point numbers are provided
in IEEE binary floating point (BFP) format.
When you specify FLOAT(IEEE), DB2 converts the BFP data to HFP format
as the data is being loaded into the DB2 table. If a conversion error occurs
while DB2 is converting from BFP to HFP, DB2 places the record in the
discard file.
FLOAT(IEEE) is mutually exclusive with any specification of the FORMAT
keyword. If you specify both FLOAT(IEEE) and FORMAT, DB2 issues
message DSNU070I.
BFP format is sometimes called IEEE floating point.
EBCDIC
Specifies that the input data file is EBCDIC.
ASCII
Specifies that the input data file is ASCII. Numeric, date, time, and timestamp
internal formats are not affected by the ASCII option.
UNICODE
Specifies that the input data file is Unicode. The UNICODE option does not
affect the numeric internal formats.
CCSID
Specifies up to three coded character set identifiers (CCSIDs) for the input file.
The first value specifies the CCSID for SBCS data that is found in the input
file, the second value specifies the CCSID for mixed DBCS data, and the third
value specifies the CCSID for DBCS data. If any of these values is specified as
Chapter 16. LOAD
221
0 or omitted, the CCSID of the corresponding data type in the input file is
assumed to be the same as the installation default CCSID. If the input data is
EBCDIC, the omitted CCSIDs are assumed to be the EBCDIC CCSIDs that are
specified at installation, and if the input data is ASCII, the omitted CCSIDs are
assumed to be the ASCII CCSIDs that are specified at installation. If the
CCSIDs of the input data file do not match the CCSIDs of the table that is
being loaded, the input data is converted to the table CCSIDs before being
loaded.
integer is any valid CCSID specification.
If the input data is Unicode, the default CCSID values are the Unicode CCSIDs
that are specified at system installation.
NOSUBS
Specifies that LOAD is not to accept substitution characters in a string.
Place a substitution character in a string when that string is being converted
from ASCII to EBCDIC, or when the string is being converted from one CCSID
to another. For example, this substitution occurs when a character (sometimes
referred to as a code point) that exists in the source CCSID (code page) does
not exist in the target CCSID (code page).
When you specify the NOSUBS option and the LOAD utility determines that a
substitution character has been placed in a string as a result of a conversion, it
performs one of the following actions:
v If discard processing is active: DB2 issues message DSNU310I and places
the record in the discard file.
v If discard processing is not active: DB2 issues message DSNU334I, and the
utility abnormally terminates.
ENFORCE
Specifies whether LOAD is to enforce check constraints and referential
constraints, except informational referential constraints, which are not enforced.
CONSTRAINTS
Indicates that constraints are to be enforced. If LOAD detects a violation, it
deletes the errant row and issues a message to identify it. If you specify
this option and referential constraints exist, sort input and sort output data
sets must be defined.
NO
Indicates that constraints are not to be enforced. This option places the
target table space in the CHECK-pending status if at least one referential
constraint or check constraint is defined for the table.
ERRDDN ddname
Specifies the DD statement for a work data set that is being used during error
processing. Information about errors that are encountered during processing is
stored in this data set. A SYSERR data set is required if you request discard
processing.
The default value is SYSERR.
The ERRDDN keyword specifies either a DD name or a TEMPLATE name
222
page 641.
MAPDDN ddname
Specifies the DD statement for a work data set that is to be used during error
processing. The work data set is used to correlate the identifier of a table row
with the input record that caused an error. A SYSMAP data set is required if
you specify ENFORCE CONSTRAINTS and the tables have a referential
relationship, or if you request discard processing when loading one or more
tables that contain unique indexes or extended indexes.
The default value is SYSMAP.
The MAPDDN keyword specifies either a DD name or a TEMPLATE name
page 641.
DISCARDDN ddname
Specifies the DD statement for a discard data set that is to hold copies of
records that are not loaded (for example, if they contain conversion errors). The
discard data set also holds copies of records that are loaded and then removed
(because of unique index errors, referential or check constraint violations, or
index evaluation errors). Flag input records for discarding during RELOAD,
INDEXVAL, and ENFORCE phases. However, the discard data set is not
written until the DISCARD phase when the flagged records are copied from
the input data set to the discard data set. The discard data set must be a
sequential data set that can be written to by BSAM, with the same record
format, record length, and block size as the input data set.
The default value is SYSDISC.
If you omit the DISCARDDN option, the utility application program saves
discarded records only if a SYSDISC DD statement is in the JCL input.
|
|
The DISCARDDN keyword is not supported if you use a BatchPipes file as an

input to LOAD, using INDDN name for TEMPLATE SUBSYS.
|
|
|
|
The DISCARDDN keyword specifies either a DD name or a TEMPLATE name

DISCARDS integer
Specifies the maximum number of source records that are to be written on the
discard data set. integer can range from 0 to 2147483647. If the discard
maximum is reached, LOAD abnormally terminates, the discard data set is
empty, and you cannot see which records were discarded. You can either
restart the job with a larger limit, or terminate the utility.
DISCARDS 0 specifies that you do not want to set a maximum value. The
entire input data set can be discarded.
Chapter 16. LOAD
223
to the DYNALLOC parameter of the SORT or OPTION options for DFSORT.
|
|
|
|
|
If you omit SORTDEVT and a sort is required, you must provide the DD
statements that the sort application program needs for the temporary data sets.
|
|
SORTNUM integer
allocated by the sort application program.
omit SORTNUM, no value is passed to DFSORT. In this case, DFSORT uses its
own default.
|
|
|
|
|
applies to each sort invocation in the utility. For example, if three indexes,
SORTKEYS is specified, there are no constraints that limit parallelism, and
SORTNUM is specified as 8, a total of 24 sort work data sets are allocated for a
job.
|
|
|
|
|
Each sort work data set consumes both above-the-line and below-the-line
virtual storage, so if you specify a value for SORTNUM that is too high, the
utility might decrease the degree of parallelism due to virtual storage
constraints, and possibly decreasing the degree down to one, meaning no
parallelism.
|
|

CONTINUEIF
Indicates that you want to be able to treat each input record as a portion of a
larger record. After CONTINUEIF, write a condition in one of the following
forms:
(start:end) = X'byte-string'
(start:end) = 'character-string'
If the condition is true in any record, the next record is concatenated with it
before loading takes place. You can concatenate any number of records into a
larger record, up to a maximum size of 32767 bytes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Character-string constants should be specified in LOAD utility control

statements in the character set that matches the input data record. Specify
EBCDIC constants in the LOAD control statement if your data is in EBCDIC
and specify UNICODE constants if your data is in UNICODE. You may also
code the CONTINUEIF condition using the hexadecimal form. For example,
use (1:1)=X'31' rather than (1:1)='1'.
|
|
|
|
(start:end)
Specifies column numbers in the input record; the first column of the
record is column 1. The two numbers tell the starting and ending columns
of a continuation field in the input record.
224
|
|
|
Other field position specifications (such as those for WHEN, POSITION, or

NULLIF) refer to the field position within the final assembled load record,
not within the input record.
|
|
The continuation field is removed from the input record and is not part of
the final load record.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you omit :end, DB2 assumes that the length of the continuation field is
the length of the byte string or character string. If you use :end, and the
length of the resulting continuation field is not the same as the length of
the byte string or character string, the shorter string is padded. Character
strings are padded with blanks. Hexadecimal strings are padded with
zeros.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Xbyte-string
Specifies a string of hexadecimal characters. This byte-string value in the
continuation field indicates that the next input record is a continuation of
the current load record. Records with this byte-string value are
concatenated until the value in the continuation field changes. For
example, the following CONTINUEIF specification indicates that for any
input records that have a value of XFFin column 72, LOAD is to
concatenate that record with the next input record.
|
|
|
|
|
|
character-string
Specifies a string of characters that has the same effect as Xbyte-string. For
example, the following CONTINUEIF specification indicates that for any
input records that have the string CC in columns 99 and 100, LOAD is to
concatenate that record with the next input record.
CONTINUEIF (72) = X'FF'
CONTINUEIF (99:100) = 'CC'
|
|
|
DECFLOAT_ROUNDMODE
Specifies the rounding mode to use when DECFLOATs are manipulated. The
following rounding modes are supported:
|
|
|
|
ROUND_CEILING
Round toward +infinity. The discarded digits are removed if they are all
zero or if the sign is negative. Otherwise, the result coefficient should be
incremented by 1 (rounded up).
|
|
ROUND_DOWN
Round toward 0 (truncation). The discarded digits are ignored.
|
|
|
|
ROUND_FLOOR
Round toward -infinity. The discarded digits are removed if they are all
zero or positive. Otherwise, the sign is negative and the result coefficient
should be incremented by 1 (rounded up).
|
|
|
|
ROUND_HALF_DOWN
Round to the nearest number. If equidistant, round down. If the discarded
digits are greater than 0.5, the result coefficient should be incremented by 1
(rounded up). The discarded digits are ignored if they are 0.5 or less.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
ROUND_HALF_EVEN
Round to the nearest number. If equidistant, round so that the final digit is
even. If the discarded digits are greater than .05, the result coefficient
should be incremented by 1 (rounded up). The discarded digits are ignored
if they are less than 0.5. If the result coefficient is .05 and the rightmost
digit is even, the result coefficient is not altered. If the result coefficient is
.05 and the rightmost digit is odd, the result coefficient should be
Chapter 16. LOAD
225
|
|
|
|
ROUND_HALF_UP
Round to nearest. If equidistant, round up. If the discarded digits are
greater than or equal to 0.5, the result coefficient should be incremented by
1 (rounded up). Otherwise the discarded digits are ignored.
|
|
|
|
ROUND_UP
Round away from 0. If all of the discarded digits are 0, the result is
unchanged. Otherwise, the result coefficient should be incremented by 1
(rounded up).
|
|
If you do not specify DECFLOAT_ROUNDMODE, the LOAD statement uses

the DFPDEFDM value in DSNHDECP as the default value.
IDENTITYOVERRIDE
Allows unloaded data to be reloaded into a GENERATED ALWAYS identity
column of the same table using LOAD REPLACE or LOAD RESUME. When
this option is used and input field specifications are coded, the identity column
must be specified and NULLIF or DEFAULTIF is not allowed.
|
|
|
|
Specifying this option will allow LOAD INTO TABLE PART when the identity
column is part of the partitioning index.
|
|
INTO-TABLE-spec
The INTO-TABLE-spec control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
function that the utility job performs. More than one table or partition for each
table space can be loaded with a single invocation of the LOAD utility. At least one
INTO TABLE statement is required for each table that is to be loaded. Each INTO
TABLE statement:
v Identifies the table that is to be loaded
v Describes fields within the input record
v Defines the format of the input data set
All tables that are specified by INTO TABLE statements must belong to the same
table space.
If the data is already in UNLOAD or SQL/DS format, and FORMAT UNLOAD or
FORMAT SQL/DS is used on the LOAD statement, no field specifications are
allowed.
INTO-TABLE-spec:
226
IGNOREFIELDS NO
INTO
TABLE table-name

IGNOREFIELDS YES

PART integer
INDDN
SYSREC
INDDN
ddname
resume-spec
PREFORMAT
INCURSOR
DISCARDDN
cursor-name
ddname

WHEN
SQL/DS=table-name
field selection criterion
,
( field specification
resume-spec:
(1)
RESUME
NO

KEEPDICTIONARY
REPLACE
REUSE
RESUME
copy-spec
YES
Notes:
|
|
The value specified in the INTO TABLE for RESUME or REPLACE overrides the default value
for LOAD RESUME.
field selection criterion:
field-name
(start
:end
=
)
Xbyte-string
character-string
Ggraphic-string
Ngraphic-string
field specification:
Chapter 16. LOAD
227
field-name

POSITION(start
CHAR
:end
BIT (length) strip-spec

MIXEDstrip-spec
BLOBF
PRESERVE WHITESPACE
CLOBF
MIXED
PRESERVE WHITESPACE
DBCLOBF
PRESERVE WHITESPACE
VARCHAR
strip-spec
BIT
MIXED
BLOBF
PRESERVE WHITESPACE
CLOBF
MIXED
PRESERVE WHITESPACE
DBCLOBF
PRESERVE WHITESPACE
strip-spec
EXTERNAL
(length)
VARGRAPHIC strip-spec
SMALLINT
INTEGER
EXTERNAL
(length)
BIGINT
BINARY
strip-spec
(length)
VARBINARY
strip-spec
BINARY VARYING
decimal-spec
FLOAT
EXTERNAL
(length)
DATE EXTERNAL
(length)
TIME EXTERNAL
(length)
TIMESTAMP EXTERNAL
(length)
ROWID
BLOB
CLOB
MIXED
DBCLOB
(34)
DECFLOAT
(16)
EXTERNAL
(length)
XML
PRESERVE WHITESPACE
GRAPHIC

NULLIF field selection criterion
DEFAULTIF field selection criterion
strip spec:

BOTH
TRUNCATE
STRIP
TRAILING
LEADING
(1)
strip-char
Xstrip-char
Notes:
|
|
228
If you specify GRAPHIC, BINARY, VARBINARY, or VARGRAPHIC, you cannot specify

strip-char. You can specify only Xstrip-char.
decimal spec:
PACKED
DECIMAL

ZONED
EXTERNAL
,0
(length
)
,scale
Option descriptions for INTO TABLE

table-name
Specifies the name of the table that is to be loaded. The table must be LOAD
described in the catalog and must not be a catalog table or a
system-maintained materialized query table.
|
|
|
If the table name is not qualified by a schema name, the authorization ID of

the invoker of the utility job step is used as the schema qualifier of the table
name. Enclose the table name in quotation marks if the name contains a blank.
Data from every LOAD record in the data set is loaded into the specified table
unless:
v A WHEN clause is used, and the data does not match the field selection
criterion.
v The FORMAT UNLOAD option is used on the LOAD statement, and the
data comes from a table that is not specified in an INTO TABLE statement.
v A certain partition is specified, and the data does not belong to that
partition.
v Data conversion errors occur.
v Any errors occur that are not generated by data conversion.
IGNOREFIELDS
Indicates whether LOAD is to skip fields in the input data set that do not
correspond to columns in the target table. Examples of fields that do not
correspond to table columns are the DSN_NULL_IND_nnnnn, DSN_ROWID,
DSN_IDENTITY, and DSN_RCTIMESTAMP fields that are generated by the
REORG utility.
NO
Specifies that the LOAD process is not to skip any fields.
YES
Specifies that LOAD is to skip fields in the input data set that do not
correspond to columns in the target table.
Specifying YES can be useful if each input record contains a variable-length
field, followed by some variable-length data that you do not want to load
and then some data that you want to load. Because of the variable-length
field, you cannot use the POSITION keyword to skip over the
variable-length data that you do not want to load. By specifying
IGNOREFIELDS, you can give a field specification for the variable-length
data that you do not want to load; and by giving it a name that is not one
of the table column names, LOAD skips the field without loading it.
Chapter 16. LOAD
229
Use this option with care, because it also causes fields to be skipped if you
intend to load a column but have misspelled the name.
|
|
|
PART integer
Specifies that data is to be loaded into a partition of a partitioned table space.
This option is valid only for partitioned table spaces, not including
partition-by-growth table spaces.
|
|
|
|
integer is the number of the partition into which records are to be loaded. The
same partition number cannot be specified more than once if partition
parallelism has been requested. Any data that is outside the range of the
specified partition is not loaded. The maximum is 4096.
|
|
|
|
|
LOAD INTO PART integer is not allowed if:

v An identity column is part of the partitioning index, unless
IDENTITYOVERRIDE is specified for the identity column GENERATED
ALWAYS
v A row ID is part of the partitioning index
v The table space is partitioned by growth
PREFORMAT
Specifies that the remaining pages are to be preformatted up to the
high-allocated RBA in the partition and its corresponding partitioning index
space. The preformatting occurs after the data is loaded and the indexes are
built.
RESUME
Specifies whether records are to be loaded into an empty or non-empty
partition. For nonsegmented table spaces, space is not reused for rows that
have been marked as deleted or by rows of dropped tables is not reused. If the
RESUME option is specified at the table space level, the RESUME option is not
allowed in the PART clause.
If you want the RESUME option to apply to the entire table space, use the
LOAD RESUME option. If you want the RESUME option to apply to a
particular partition, specify it by using PART integer RESUME.
NO
Loads records into an empty partition. If the partition is not empty, and
you have not used REPLACE, a message is issued, and the utility job step
terminates with a job step condition code of 8.
For nonsegmented table spaces that contains deleted rows or rows of
dropped tables, using the REPLACE keyword provides increased efficiency.
YES
Loads records into a non-empty partition. If the partition is empty, a
warning message is issued, but the partition is loaded.
REPLACE
Indicates that you want to replace only the contents of the partition that is
cited by the PART option, rather than the entire table space.
You cannot use LOAD REPLACE with the PART integer REPLACE option of
INTO TABLE. If you specify the REPLACE option, you must either replace an
entire table space, using LOAD REPLACE, or a single partition, using the
PART integer REPLACE option of INTO TABLE. You can, however, use PART
integer REPLACE with LOAD RESUME YES.
REUSE
Specifies, when used with the REPLACE option, that LOAD should logically
230
reset and reuse DB2-managed data sets without deleting and redefining them.
If you do not specify REUSE, DB2 deletes and redefines DB2-managed data
sets to reset them.
If you specify REUSE with REPLACE on the PART specification (and not for
LOAD at the table space level), only the specified partitions are logically reset.
If you specify REUSE for the table space and REPLACE for the partition, data
sets for the replaced parts are logically reset.
KEEPDICTIONARY
Specifies that the LOAD utility is not to build a new dictionary. LOAD retains
the current dictionary and uses it for compressing the input data. This option
eliminates the cost that is associated with building a new dictionary.
This keyword is valid only if a dictionary exists and the partition that is being
loaded has the COMPRESS YES attribute.
If the partition has the COMPRESS YES attribute, but no dictionary exists, one
is built and an error message is issued.
INDDN ddname
Specifies the data definition (DD) statement or template that identifies the
input data set for the partition. The record format for the input data set must
be fixed or variable. The data set must be readable by the basic sequential
access method (BSAM).
The ddname is the name of the input data set.
The default value is SYSREC. INDDN can be a template name.
When loading LOB data using file reference variables, this input data set
should include the names of the files that contain the LOB column values.
Each file can be either a sequential file, PDS member, PDSE member, or
separate HFS file.
If you specify INDDN, with or without DISCARDDN, in one INTO TABLE
PART specification and you supply more than one INTO TABLE PART clause,
you must specify INDDN in all INTO TABLE PART specifications.
Specifying INDDN at the partition level and supplying multiple PART clauses,
each with their own INDDN, enables load partition parallelism, which can
significantly improve performance. Loading all partitions in a single job with
load partition parallelism is recommended instead of concurrent separate jobs
whenever one or more nonpartitioned secondary indexes are on the table
space.
The field specifications apply separately to each input file. Therefore, if
multiple INTO TABLE PART INDDN clauses are used, field specifications are
required on each one.
DISCARDDN ddname
Specifies the DD statement for a discard data set for the partition. The discard
data set holds copies of records that are not loaded (for example, if they
contain conversion errors). The discard data set also holds copies of records
that were loaded and then removed (due to unique index errors, or referential
or check constraint violations).
Flag input records for discarding during the RELOAD, INDEXVAL, and
ENFORCE phases. However, the utility does not write the discard data set
until the DISCARD phase when the utility copies the flagged records from the
input data set to the discard data set.
Chapter 16. LOAD
231
The discard data set must be a sequential data set, and it must be
write-accessible by BSAM, with the same record format, record length, and
block size as the input data set.
The ddname is the name of the discard data set. DISCARDDN can be a
template name.
If you omit the DISCARDDN option, LOAD does not save discarded records.
Specifies the cursor for the input data set. You must declare the cursor before it
is used by the LOAD utility. Use the EXEC SQL utility control statement to
define the cursor. You cannot load data into the same table on which you
defined the cursor.
The specified cursor can be used as part of the DB2 family cross loader
function, which enables you to load data from any DRDA-compliant remote
server. For more information about using the cross loader function, see
Loading data by using the cross-loader function on page 270.
cursor-name is the cursor name. Cursor names that are specified with the
LOAD utility cannot be longer than eight characters.
You cannot use the INCURSOR option with the following options:
v SHRLEVEL CHANGE
v NOSUBS
v FORMAT UNLOAD
v FORMAT SQL/DS
v CONTINUEIF
v WHEN.
In addition, you cannot specify field specifications with the INCURSOR option.
WHEN
Indicates which records in the input data set are to be loaded. If no WHEN
clause is specified (and if FORMAT UNLOAD was not used in the LOAD
statement), all records in the input data set are loaded into the specified tables
or partitions. (Data that is beyond the range of the specified partition is not
loaded.)
The option following WHEN describes a condition; input records that satisfy
the condition are loaded. Input records that do not satisfy any WHEN clause
of any INTO TABLE statement are written to the discard data set, if one is
being used.
|
|
|
|
|
|

code the WHEN condition using the hexadecimal form. For example, use
(1:1)=X'31' rather than (1:1)='1'.
|
|
|
SQL/DS=table-name
Is valid only when the FORMAT SQL/DS option is used on the LOAD
statement.
table-name is the name of a table that has been unloaded into the unload
data set. The table name after INTO TABLE tells which DB2 table the
SQL/DS table is loaded into. Enclose the table name in quotation marks if
the name contains a blank.
|
|
|
|
232
|
|
If no WHEN clause is specified, input records from every SQL/DS table

are loaded into the table that is specified after INTO TABLE.
|
|
|
|
field-selection-criterion
Describes a field and a character constant. Only those records in which the
field contains the specified constant are to be loaded into the table that is
specified after INTO TABLE.
|
|
|
|
A field in a selection criterion must:

v Contain a character or graphic string. No data type conversions are
performed when the contents of the field in the input record are
compared to a string constant.
|
|
|
|
v Start at the same byte offset in each assembled input record. If any
record contains varying-length strings, which are stored with length
fields, that precede the selection field, they must be padded so that the
start of the selection field is always at the same offset.
|
|
|
|
The field and the constant do not need to be the same length. If they are
not, the shorter of the two is padded before a comparison is made.
Character and graphic strings are padded with blanks. Hexadecimal strings
are padded with zeros.
|
|
|
|
field-name
Specifies the name of a field that is defined by a field-specification. If
field-name is used, the start and end positions of the field are given by
the POSITION option of the field specification.
|
|
|
|
(start:end)
Identifies column numbers in the assembled load record; the first
column of the record is column 1. The two numbers indicate the
starting and ending columns of a selection field in the load record.
|
|
If :end is not used, the field is assumed to have the same length as the
constant.
|
|
|
|
|
Xbyte-string
Identifies the constant as a string of hexadecimal characters. For
example, the following WHEN clause specifies that a record is to be
loaded if it has the value XFFFF in columns 33 through 34.
|
|
|
|
|
character-string
Identifies the constant as a string of characters. For example, the
following WHEN clause specifies that a record is to be loaded if the
field DEPTNO has the value D11.
|
|
|
|
|
Ggraphic-string
Identifies the constant as a string of double-byte characters. For
example, the following WHEN clause specifies that a record is to be
loaded if it has the specified value in columns 33 through 36.
WHEN (33:34) = X'FFFF'
WHEN DEPTNO = 'D11'
WHEN (33:36) = G'<**>'
|
|
In this example, < is the shift-out character,* is a double-byte character,

and > is the shift-in character.
|
|
If the first or last byte of the input data is a shift-out character, it is

ignored in the comparison. Specify G as an uppercase character.
Chapter 16. LOAD
233
Ngraphic-string
Identifies the constant as a string of double-byte characters. N and G
are synonymous for specifying graphic string constants. Specify N as
an uppercase character.
|
|
|
|
(field-specification, ...)
Describes the location, format, and null value identifier of the data that is to be
loaded.
If no field specifications are used:
v The fields in the input records are assumed to be in the same order as in the
DB2 table.
v The formats are set by the FORMAT option on the LOAD statement, if that
option is used.
v Fixed strings in the input are assumed to be of fixed maximum length.
VARCHAR and VARGRAPHIC fields must contain a valid 2-byte binary
length field preceding the data; no intervening gaps are allowed between the
VARCHAR or VARGRAPHIC fields and the field that follows.
v BINARY fields are assumed to be of fixed maximum length.
|
|
|
v VARBINARY fields must contain a valid 2-byte binary length field preceding
the data.
v ROWID fields are varying length, and must contain a valid 2-byte binary
length field preceding the data; no intervening gaps are allowed between
ROWID fields and the fields that follow.
v LOB fields are varying length, and require a valid 4-byte binary length field
preceding the data; no intervening gaps are allowed between them and the
LOB fields that follow.
v Numeric data is assumed to be in the appropriate internal DB2 number
representation.
v The NULLIF or DEFAULTIF options cannot be used.
If any field specification is used for an input table, a field specification must
exist for each field of the table that does not have a default value. Any field in
the table with no corresponding field specification is loaded with its default
value.
If any column in the output table does not have a field specification and is
defined as NOT NULL, with no default, the utility job step is terminated.
Identity columns or row change timestamp columns can appear in the field
specification only if you defined them with the GENERATED BY DEFAULT
attribute.
|
|
|
field-name
Specifies the name of a field, which can be a name of your choice. If the field
is to be loaded, the name must be the name of a column in the table that is
named after INTO TABLE unless IGNOREFIELDS is specified. You can use the
field name as a vehicle to specify the range of incoming data. See Example 4:
Loading data of different data types for an example of loading selected records
into an empty table space.
The starting location of the field is given by the POSITION option. If
POSITION is not used, the starting location is one column after the end of the
previous field.
LOAD determines the length of the field in one of the following ways, in the
order listed:
234
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. If the field has data type VARCHAR, VARGRAPHIC, VARBINARY,

ROWID, or XML the length is assumed to be contained in a 2-byte binary
field that precedes the data. For VARCHAR, VARBINARY, and XML fields,
the length is in bytes; for VARGRAPHIC fields, the length field identifies
the number of double-byte characters.
If the field has data type CLOB, BLOB, or DBCLOB, the length is assumed
to be contained in a 4-byte binary field that precedes the data. For BLOB
and CLOB fields, the length is in bytes; for DBCLOB fields, the length field
identifies the number of double-byte characters.
2. If :end is used in the POSITION option, the length is calculated from start
and end. In that case, any length attribute after the CHAR, GRAPHIC,
INTEGER, DECIMAL, FLOAT, or DECFLOAT specifications is ignored.
3. The length attribute on the CHAR, GRAPHIC, INTEGER, DECIMAL,
FLOAT, or DECFLOAT specifications is used as the length.
4. The length is taken from the DB2 field description in the table definition, or
it is assigned a default value according to the data type. For DATE and
TIME fields, the length is defined during installation. For variable-length
fields, the length is defined from the column in the DB2 table definition,
excluding the null indicator byte, if it is present. The following table shows
the default length, in bytes, for each data type.
Table 30. Default length of each data type (in bytes)
Data type
Default length in bytes
BIGINT
BINARY
Length that is used in column definition
BLOB
Varying
CHARACTER
CLOB
Varying
DATE
10 (or installation default)
DBCLOB
Varying
DECFLOAT(16)
DECFLOAT(34)
16
|
|
|
DECIMAL EXTERNAL
Decimal precision for output columns that are

decimal, otherwise the length that is used in column
definition
DECIMAL PACKED
|
|
|
DECIMAL ZONED
Decimal precision for output columns that are

decimal, otherwise the length that is used in column
definition
FLOAT (single precision)
FLOAT (double precision)
|
|
GRAPHIC
2 multiplied by (length that is used in column

definition)
INTEGER
MIXED
Mixed DBCS data
ROWID
Varying
SMALLINT
TIME
8 (or installation default)
Chapter 16. LOAD
235
Table 30. Default length of each data type (in bytes) (continued)
Data type
Default length in bytes
TIMESTAMP
26
VARBINARY
Varying
VARCHAR
Varying
VARGRAPHIC
Varying
|
|
XML
Varying
If a data type is not given for a field, its data type is assumed to be the same
as that of the column into which it is loaded, as given in the DB2 table
definition.
POSITION(start:end)
Indicates where a field is in the assembled load record.
start and end are the locations of the first and last columns of the field; the first
column of the record is column 1. The option can be omitted.
Column locations can be specified as:
v An integer n, meaning an actual column number
v *, meaning one column after the end of the previous field
v *+n, where n is an integer, meaning n columns after the location that is
specified by *
Do not enclose the entire POSITION option specification in parentheses;
enclose only the start:end description in parentheses. Valid and invalid
specifications are shown in the following table.
Table 31. Example of valid and invalid POSITION specifications
Valid
Invalid
POSITION (10:20)
(POSITION (10:20))
Data types in a field specification: The data type of the field can be specified by
any of the keywords that follow. Except for graphic fields, length is the length in
bytes of the input field.
All numbers that are designated EXTERNAL are in the same format in the input
records.
CHAR(length)
Specifies a fixed-length character string. If you do not specifylength, the length
of the string is determined from the POSITION specification. If you do not
specifylength or POSITION, LOAD uses the default length for CHAR, which is
determined from the length of the column in the table. You can also specify
CHARACTER and CHARACTER(length).
When you specify CHAR as the type for the file name for CLOBF, BLOBF, or
DBCLOBF, you must also provide the length so that the LOAD utility can
determine the correct file name. Otherwise message DSNU338I will be issued
for an invalid column specification.
|
|
|
|
BIT
Specifies that the input field contains BIT data. If BIT is specified, LOAD
bypasses any CCSID conversions for the input data. If the target column
has the BIT data type attribute, LOAD bypasses any code page translation
for the input data.
236
MIXED
Specifies that the input field contains mixed SBCS and DBCS data. If
MIXED is specified, any required CCSID conversions use the mixed CCSID
for the input data. If MIXED is not specified, any such conversions use the
SBCS CCSID for the input data.
|
|
|
BLOBF
Indicates that the input field contains the name of a BLOB file which is
going to be loaded to a specified BLOB/XML column.
|
|
|
CLOBF
Indicates that the input field contains the name of a CLOB file which is
going to be loaded to a specified CLOB/XML column.
|
|
|
DBCLOBF
Indicates that the input field contains the name of a DBCLOBF file which
is going to be loaded to a specified DBCLOB/XML column.
PRESERVE WHITESPACE
Specifies that the white space in the XML column is preserved. The default
is not to preserve the white space.
STRIP
Specifies that LOAD is to remove zeros (the default) or the specified
characters from the beginning, the end, or both ends of the data. LOAD
pads the CHAR field, so that it fills the rest of the column.
LOAD applies the strip operation before performing any character code
conversion or padding.
The effect of the STRIP option is the same as the SQL STRIP scalar
function.
BOTH
Indicates that LOAD is to remove occurrences of blank or the specified
strip character from the beginning and end of the data.
TRAILING
strip character from the end of the data.
LEADING
strip character from the beginning of the data.
strip-char
Specifies a single-byte or double-byte character that LOAD is to strip
from the data.
Specify this character value in EBCDIC. Depending on the input
encoding scheme, LOAD applies SBCS CCSID conversion to the
strip-char value before it is used in the strip operation.
If the subtype of the column to be loaded is BIT or you want to specify
a strip-char value in an encoding scheme other than EBCDIC, use the
hexadecimal form (Xstrip-char). LOAD does not perform any CCSID
conversion if the hexadecimal form is used.
Xstrip-char
Specifies in hexadecimal form a single-byte or double-byte character
that LOAD is to strip from the data. For single-byte characters, specify
this value in the form Xhh, where hh is two hexadecimal characters.
Chapter 16. LOAD
237
For double-byte characters, specify this value in the form Xhhhh,

where hhhh is four hexadecimal characters.
Use the hexadecimal form to specify a character in an encoding scheme
other than EBCDIC. When you specify the character value in
hexadecimal form, LOAD does not perform any CCSID conversion.
If you specify a strip character in the hexadecimal format, you must
specify the character in the input encoding scheme.
TRUNCATE
Indicates that LOAD is to truncate the input character string from the right
if the string does not fit in the target column. LOAD performs the
truncation operation after any CCSID translation.
If the input data is BIT data, LOAD truncates the data at a byte boundary.
If the input data is SBCS or MIXED data, LOAD truncates the data at a
character boundary. (Double-byte characters are not split.) If a MIXED field
is truncated to fit a column, the truncated string can be shorter than the
specified column size. In this case, blanks in the output CCSID are padded
to the right. If MIXED data is in EBCDIC, truncation preserves the SO
(shift-out) and SI (shift-in) characters around a DBCS string.
VARCHAR
Specifies a character field of varying length. The length in bytes must be
specified in a 2-byte binary field preceding the data. (The length does not
include the 2-byte field itself.) The length field must start in the column that is
specified as start in the POSITION option. If :end is used, it is ignored.
BIT
Specifies that the input field contains BIT data. If BIT is specified, LOAD
bypasses any CCSID conversions for the input data. If the target column
has the BIT data type attribute, LOAD bypasses any code page translation
for the input data.
MIXED
Specifies that the input field contains mixed DBCS data. If MIXED is
specified, any required CCSID conversions use the mixed CCSID for the
input data. If MIXED is not specified, any such conversions use the SBCS
CCSID for the input data.
|
|
|
BLOBF
Indicates that the input field contains the name of a BLOB file which is
going to be loaded to a specified BLOB/XML column.
|
|
|
CLOBF
Indicates that the input field contains the name of a CLOB file which is
going to be loaded to a specified CLOB/XML column.
|
|
|
DBCLOBF
Indicates that the input field contains the name of a DBCLOBF file which
is going to be loaded to a specified DBCLOB/XML column.
PRESERVE WHITESPACE
Specifies that the white space in the XML column is preserved. The default
is not to preserve the white space.
STRIP
adjusts the VARCHAR length field to the length of the stripped data.
238
function.
BOTH
TRAILING
LEADING
strip-char
Specifies a single-byte or double-byte character that LOAD is to strip
from the data.
Specify this character value in EBCDIC. Depending on the input
encoding scheme, LOAD applies SBCS CCSID conversion to the
strip-charvalue before it is used in the strip operation.
If the subtype of the column to be loaded is BIT or you want to specify
a strip-char value in an encoding scheme other than EBCDIC, use the
hexadecimal form (Xstrip-char). LOAD does not perform any CCSID
conversion if the hexadecimal form is used.
Xstrip-char
Specifies in hexadecimal form a single-byte or double-byte character
For double-byte characters, specify this value in the form Xhhhh,
where hhhh is four hexadecimal characters.
Use the hexadecimal form to specify a character in an encoding scheme
other than EBCDIC. When you specify the character value in
hexadecimal form, LOAD does not perform any CCSID conversion.
If you specify a strip character in the hexadecimal format, you must
specify the character in the input encoding scheme.
TRUNCATE
If the input data is BIT data, LOAD truncates the data at a byte boundary.
If the input data is character type data, LOAD truncates the data at a
character boundary. If a mixed-character type data is truncated to fit a
column of fixed size, the truncated string can be shorter than the specified
column size. In this case, blanks in the output CCSID are padded to the
right.
GRAPHIC(length)
Specifies a fixed-length graphic type. You can specify both start and end for the
field specification.
If you use GRAPHIC, the input data must not contain shift characters. start
and end must indicate the starting and ending positions of the data itself.
Chapter 16. LOAD
239
length is the number of double-byte characters. The length of the field in bytes
is twice the value of length. If you do not specify length, the number of
double-byte characters is determined from the POSITION specification. If you
do not specify length or POSITION, LOAD uses the default length for
GRAPHIC, which is determined from the length of the column in the table.
For example, let *** represent three double-byte characters. Then, to describe
***, specify either POS(1:6) GRAPHIC or POS(1) GRAPHIC(3). A GRAPHIC field
that is described in this way cannot be specified in a field selection criterion.
STRIP
characters from the beginning, the end, or both ends of the data.
function.
BOTH
TRAILING
LEADING
Xstrip-char
Specifies the hexadecimal form of the double-byte character that LOAD
is to strip from the data. Specify this value in the form Xhhhh, where
hhhh is four hexadecimal characters.
You must specify the character in the input encoding scheme.
TRUNCATE
LOAD truncates the data at a character boundary. Double-byte characters
are not split.
GRAPHIC EXTERNAL(length)
Specifies a fixed-length field of the graphic type with the external format. You
can specify both start and end for the field specification.
If you use GRAPHIC EXTERNAL, the input data must contain a shift-out
character in the starting position, and a shift-in character in the ending
position. Other than the shift characters, this field must have an even number
of bytes. The first byte of any pair must not be a shift character.
length is the number of double-byte characters. length for GRAPHIC
EXTERNAL does not include the number of bytes that are represented by shift
characters. The length of the field in bytes is twice the value of length. If you
do not specify length, the number of double-byte characters is determined from
the POSITION specification. If you do not specify length or POSITION, LOAD
uses the default length for GRAPHIC, which is determined from the length of
the column in the table.
240
For example, let *** represent three double-byte characters, and let < and >
represent shift-out and shift-in characters. Then, to describe <***>, specify
either POS(1:8) GRAPHIC EXTERNAL or POS(1) GRAPHIC EXTERNAL(3).
STRIP
characters from the beginning, the end, or both ends of the data.
function.
BOTH
TRAILING
LEADING
Xstrip-char
TRUNCATE
are not split.
VARGRAPHIC
Identifies a graphic field of varying length. The length, in double-byte
characters, must be specified in a 2-byte binary field preceding the data. (The
length does not include the 2-byte field itself.) The length field must start in
the column that is specified as start in the POSITION option. :end, if used, is
ignored.
VARGRAPHIC input data must not contain shift characters.
STRIP
adjusts the VARGRAPHIC length field to the length of the stripped data
(the number of DBCS characters).
function.
Chapter 16. LOAD
241
BOTH
TRAILING
LEADING
Xstrip-char
TRUNCATE
are not split.
SMALLINT
Specifies a 2-byte binary number. Negative numbers are in twos complement
notation.
INTEGER
Specifies a 4-byte binary number. Negative numbers are in twos complement
notation. You can also specify INT.
INTEGER EXTERNAL(length)
A string of characters that represent a number. The format is that of an SQL
numeric constant. If you do not specify length, the length of the string is
determined from the POSITION specification. If you do not specify length or
POSITION, LOAD uses the default length for INTEGER, which is 4 bytes. You
can also specify INT EXTERNAL.
|
|
|
BIGINT
Specifies an 8-byte binary number. Negative numbers are in twos complement
notation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
BINARY(length)
Specifies a fixed-length binary string. If you do not specify length, the length of
the string is determined from the POSITION specification. If you do not
specify length or POSITION, LOAD uses the default length for BINARY, which
is determined from the length of the column in the table. The default for
Xstrip-char is hexadecimal zero (X00). No data conversion is applied to the
field.
|
|
|
|
STRIP
Specifies that LOAD is to remove binary zeros (the default) or the specified
Xstrip-char from the beginning, the end, or both ends of the data. LOAD
pads the BINARY field, so that it fills the rest of the column.
function.
|
|
242
|
|
|
BOTH
Indicates that LOAD is to remove occurrences of binary zeros or the
specified strip character from the beginning and end of the data.
|
|
|
TRAILING
|
|
|
LEADING
|
|
|
|
Xstrip-char
Specifies, in hexadecimal form, a single-byte or double-byte character
|
|
|
TRUNCATE
if the string does not fit in the target column.
LOAD truncates the data at a character boundary.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
VARBINARY
Specifies a varying length binary string. The length in bytes must be specified
in a 2-byte binary field preceding the data (the length does not include the
2-byte field itself). The length field must start in the column that is specified as
start in the POSITION option. If :end is used, it is ignored. The default for
Xstrip-char is hexadecimal zero (X00). No data conversion is applied to the
field.
|
|
|
|
STRIP
Specifies that LOAD is to remove binary zeros (the default) or the specified
pads the VARBINARY field, so that it fills the rest of the column.
|
|
function.
|
|
|
BOTH
specified strip character from the beginning and end of the data.
|
|
|
TRAILING
specified strip character from the end of the data.
|
|
|
LEADING
specified strip character from the beginning of the data.
|
|
|
|
Xstrip-char
Specifies, in hexadecimal form, a single-byte character that LOAD is to
strip from the data. For single-byte characters, specify this value in the
form Xhh, where hh is two hexadecimal characters.
|
|
|
TRUNCATE
if the string does not fit in the target column.
LOAD truncates the data at a character boundary.
Chapter 16. LOAD
243
DECIMAL PACKED
Specifies a number of the form ddd...ds, where d is a decimal digit that is
represented by four bits, and s is a 4-bit sign value. The plus sign (+) is
represented by A, C, E, or F, and the minus sign (-) is represented by B or D.
The maximum number of ds is the same as the maximum number of digits
that are allowed in the SQL definition. You can also specify DECIMAL, DEC,
or DEC PACKED.
DECIMAL ZONED
Specifies a number in the form znznzn...z/sn, where z, n, and s have the
following values:
n
A decimal digit represented by the right 4 bits of a byte (called the
numeric bits)
z
That digits zone, represented by the left 4 bits
s
The right-most byte of the decimal operand; s can be treated as a zone
or as the sign value for that digit
The plus sign (+) is represented by A, C, E, or F, and the minus sign (-) is
represented by B or D. The maximum number of zns is the same as the
maximum number of digits that are allowed in the SQL definition. You can
also specify DEC ZONED.
DECIMAL EXTERNAL(length,scale)
Specifies a string of characters that represent a number. The format is that of
an SQL numeric constant.
length
Overall length of the input field, in bytes. If you do not specify length, the
length of the input field is determined from the POSITION specification. If
you do not specify length or POSITION, LOAD uses the default length for
DECIMAL EXTERNAL, which is determined by using decimal precision.
scale
Specifies the number of digits to the right of the decimal point. scale must
be an integer greater than or equal to 0, and it can be greater than length.
If scale is greater than length, or if the number of provided digits is less than
the specified scale, the input number is padded on the left with zeros until the
decimal point position is reached. If scale is greater than the target scale, the
source scale locates the implied decimal position. All fractional digits greater
than the target scale are truncated. If scale is specified and the target column
has a data type of small integer or integer, the decimal portion of the input
number is ignored. If a decimal point is present, its position overrides the field
specification of scale.
FLOAT(length)
Specifies either a 64-bit floating-point number or a 32-bit floating-point
number. If length is between 1 and 21 inclusive, the number is 32 bits in the
s390 (HFP) format:
Bit 0
Represents a sign (0 for plus and 1 for minus)
Bits 1-7
Represent an exponent
Bits 8-31
Represent a mantissa
244
If length is between 1 and 24 inclusive, the number is 32 bits in the IEEE (BFP)
format:
Bit 0
Bits 1-8
Bits 9-31
Represent a mantissa
If length is not specified, or is between 22 and 53 inclusive, the number is 64
bits in the s390 (HFP) format:
Bit 0
Bits 1-7
Bits 8-63
Represent a mantissa.
If length is not specified, or is between 25 and 53 inclusive, the number is 64
bits in the IEEE (BFP) format:
Bit 0
Represents a sign (0 for plus, and 1 for minus)
Bits 1-11
Bits 12-63
Represent a mantissa.
You can also specify REAL for single-precision floating-point numbers and
DOUBLE PRECISION for double-precision floating-point numbers.
FLOAT EXTERNAL(length)
Specifies a string of characters that represent a number. The format is that of
an SQL floating-point constant.
A specification of FLOAT(IEEE) or FLOAT(S390) does not apply for this format
(string of characters) of floating-point numbers.
If you do not specify length, the length of the string is determined from the
POSITION specification. If you do not specify length or POSITION, LOAD uses
the default length for FLOAT, which is 4 bytes for single precision and 8 bytes
for double precision.
DATE EXTERNAL(length)
Specifies a character string representation of a date. The length, if unspecified,
is the specified length on the LOCAL DATA LENGTH install option, or, if none
was provided, the default is 10 bytes. If you specify a length, it must be within
the range of 8 to 254 bytes.
Dates can be in any of the following formats. You can omit leading zeros for
month and day. You can include trailing blanks, but no leading blanks are
allowed.
v dd.mm.yyyy
v mm/dd/yyyy
v yyyy-mm-dd
v Any local format that your site defined at the time DB2 was installed
TIME EXTERNAL(length)
Specifies a character string representation of a time. The length, if unspecified,
Chapter 16. LOAD
245
is the specified length on the LOCAL TIME LENGTH install option, or, if none
was provided, the default is 8 bytes. If you specify a length, it must be within
the range of 4 to 254 bytes.
Times can be in any of the following formats:
v hh.mm.ss
v hh:mm AM
v hh:mm PM
v hh:mm:ss
v Any local format that your site defined at the time DB2 was installed
You can omit the mm portion of the hh:mm AM and hh:mm PM formats if mm is
equal to 00. For example, 5 PM is a valid time, and can be used instead of 5:00
PM.
TIMESTAMP EXTERNAL(length)
Specifies a character string representation of a time. The default for length is 26
bytes. If you specify a length, it must be within the range of 19 to 26 bytes.
Timestamps can be in any of the following formats. Note that nnnnnn
represents the number of fractional seconds, and can be from 0 to 6 digits. You
can omit leading zeros from the month, day, or hour parts of the timestamp;
you can omit trailing zeros from the fractional seconds part of the timestamp.
v yyyy-mm-dd-hh.mm.ss
v yyyy-mm-dd-hh.mm.ss.nnnnnn
v yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss.nnnnnn
ROWID
Specifies a row ID. The input data must be a valid value for a row ID; DB2
does not perform any conversions.
A field specification for a row ID column is not allowed if the row ID column
was created with the GENERATED ALWAYS option.
If the row ID column is part of the partitioning key, LOAD INTO TABLE PART
is not allowed; specify LOAD INTO TABLE instead.
BLOB
Specifies a BLOB field. You must specify the length in bytes in a 4-byte binary
field that precedes the data. (The length does not include the 4-byte field
itself.) The length field must start in the column that is specified as start in the
POSITION option. If :end is used, it is ignored.
CLOB
Specifies a CLOB field. You must specify the length in bytes in a 4-byte binary
field that precedes the data. (The length does not include the 4-byte field
itself.) The length field must start in the column that is specified as start in the
POSITION option. If :end is used, it is ignored.
MIXED
Specifies that the input field contains mixed SBCS and DBCS data. If
MIXED is specified, any required CCSID conversions use the mixed CCSID
for the input data; if MIXED is not specified, any such conversions use the
SBCS CCSID for the input data.
DBCLOB
Specifies a DBCLOB field. You must specify the length in double-byte
characters in a 4-byte binary field that precedes the data. (The length does not
include the 4-byte field itself.) The length field must start in the column that is
specified as start in the POSITION option. If :end is used, it is ignored.
246
|
|
|
|
|
|
DECFLOAT (length)
Specifies either a 128-bit decimal floating-point number or a 64-bit decimal
floating-point number. The value of the length must be either 16 or 34. If the
length is 16, the number is in 64 bit decimal floating-point number format. If
the length is 34, the number is in 128 bit decimal floating-point format. If the
length is not specified, the number is in 128 bit decimal floating-point format.
|
|
|
|
|
DECFLOAT EXTERNAL (length)

Specifies a string of characters that represent a number. The format is an SQL
numeric constant. If you do not specify a length, the length of the string is
determined from the POSITION specification. If you do not specify a length or
POSITION, LOAD uses the default length for DECFLOAT.
|
|
|
|
|
XML
Specifies the input field type is XML. Field type XML can only be loaded to a
XML column. Specify XML when loading the XML value directly from the
input record. If the format of the input record is in nondelimited, you must
specify a 2 byte length field precedes the actual data value.
|
|
|
PRESERVE WHITESPACE
Specifies that the white space in the XML column is preserved. The default is
not to preserve the white space.
DEFAULTIF field-selection-criterion
Describes a condition that causes the DB2 column to be loaded with its default
value. You can write the field-selection-criterion with the same options as
described under field-selection-criterion. If the contents of the DEFAULTIF field
match the provided character constant, the field that is specified in
field-specification is loaded with its default value.
If the DEFAULTIF field is defined by the name of a VARCHAR or
VARGRAPHIC field, DB2 takes the length of the field from the 2-byte binary
field that appears before the data portion of the VARCHAR or VARGRAPHIC
field.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

code the DEFAULTIF condition using the hexadecimal form. For example, if
the input data is in EBCDIC and the control statement is in UTF-8, use
(1:1)=X'31' in the condition rather than (1:1)='1'.
You can use the DEFAULTIF attribute with the ROWID keyword. If the
condition is met, the column is loaded with a value that DB2 generates.
You cannot specify the DEFAULTIF option for XML columns.

NULLIF field-selection-criterion
Describes a condition that causes the DB2 column to be loaded with NULL.
You can write the field-selection-criterion with the same options as described
under field-selection-criterion. If the contents of the NULLIF field match the
provided character constant, the field that is specified in field-specification is
loaded with NULL.
If the NULLIF field is defined by the name of a VARCHAR or VARGRAPHIC
field, DB2 takes the length of the field from the 2-byte binary field that appears
before the data portion of the VARCHAR or VARGRAPHIC field.
To load a null value into a BLOBF, CLOBF, or DBCLOBF field, use a null input
file name.
Chapter 16. LOAD
247

code the NULLIF condition using the hexadecimal form. For example, if the
input data is in EBCDIC and the control statement is in UTF-8, use
(1:1)=X'31' in the condition rather than (1:1)='1'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The fact that a field in the output table is loaded with NULL does not change
the format or function of the corresponding field in the input record. The input
field can still be used in a field selection criterion. For example, assume that a
LOAD statement has the following field specification:
(FIELD1 POSITION(*) CHAR(4)
FIELD2 POSITION(*) CHAR(3) NULLIF(FIELD1='SKIP')
FIELD3 POSITION(*) CHAR(5))
Assume also that LOAD is to process the following source record:

SKIP
FLD03
In this example, the record is loaded as follows:

FIELD1
Has the value SKIP.
FIELD2
Is NULL (not as in the source record).
FIELD3
Has the value FLD03.
You cannot use the NULLIF parameter with the ROWID keyword because row
ID columns cannot be null.
Field selection criterion
Describes a condition that causes the DB2 column to be loaded with NULL or
with its default value.
Related reference
STRIP (DB2 SQL Reference)
Related information
Constants (DB2 SQL Reference)
Before running LOAD

Certain activities might be required before you run the LOAD utility, depending on
your situation.
You cannot run the LOAD utility on the DSNDB01 or DSNDB06 databases, except
to add rows to the following catalog tables:
v SYSSTRINGS
v MODESELECT
v LUMODES
v LULIST
v USERNAMES
v LUNAMES
v LOCATIONS
v IPNAMES
248
|
|
If you are using LOAD for a partition-by-growth table space, you can load data
only at the table space level, not at the partition level.
Preprocessing input data

No sorting of the data rows occurs during LOAD processing. Rows are loaded in
the physical sequence in which they are found.
Recommendation: Sort your input records in clustering sequence before loading
the data.
You should also:
v Ensure that no duplicate keys exist for unique indexes.
v Correct check constraint violations and referential constraint violations in the
input data set.
v Ensure that any input data that is provided for a security label column is a valid
security label. Security label columns are defined with the AS SECURITY LABEL
clause. These columns are used for multilevel security with row-level
granularity.
When loading data into a segmented table space, sort your data by table to ensure
that the data is loaded in the best physical organization.
Loading data by using a cursor

Before you can load data by using a cursor, you need to bind the DSNUT910
package at each location from which you plan to load data. A local package for
DSNUT910 is bound by installation job DSNTIJSG when you install or migrate to a
new version of DB2 for z/OS.
The following example statement binds the DSNUT910 package at a remote
location:
BIND PACKAGE(location.DSNUT910) MEMBER(DSNUGSQL) ACTION(REPLACE) ISOLATION(CS) ENCODING(EBCDIC) VALIDATE(BIND) CURRENTDATA(NO) LIBRARY('prefix.SDSNDBRM')
Related information
Data sets that LOAD uses

The LOAD utility uses a number of data sets during its operation.
The following table lists the data sets that LOAD uses. The table lists the DD name
that is used to identify the data set, a description of the data set, and an indication
of whether it is required. Include statements in your JCL for each required data set,
and any optional data sets that you want to use. Alternatively, you can use the
TEMPLATE utility to dynamically allocate some of these data sets.
Table 32. Data sets that LOAD uses
Data set
Description
Required?
SYSIN

control statement.
Yes
SYSPRINT
Yes
Chapter 16. LOAD
249
Table 32. Data sets that LOAD uses (continued)
|
|
250
Data set
Description
Required?
STPRIN01

This data set is used when statistics are
collected on at least one data-partitioned
secondary index.
No1
Input data set
The input data set that contains the data

that is to be loaded. Specify its template or
DD name with the INDDN option of the
utility control statement. The default name
is SYSREC. It must be a sequential data set
that is readable by BSAM.
Yes2
Sort data sets
Two temporary work data sets for sort input Yes3, 4

and sort output. Specify their DD or
template names with the WORKDDN option
of the utility control statement. The default
DD name for sort input is SYSUT1. The
default DD name for sort output is
SORTOUT.
Mapping data set
Work data set for mapping the identifier of

a table row back to the input record that
caused an error. Specify its template or DD
name with the MAPDDN option of the
utility control statement. The default DD
name is SYSMAP.
Yes3, 5
UTPRINT
Contains messages from DFSORT (usually,

SYSOUT or DUMMY).
Yes
Discard data set
A work data set that contains copies of

records that are not loaded. It must be a
sequential data set that is readable by
BSAM. Specify its DD or template name
with the DISCARDDN option of the utility
control statement. The default DD name is
SYSDISC.
Yes
Error data set
Work data set for error processing. Specify

its DD or template name with the ERRDDN
option of the utility control statement. The
default DD or template name is SYSERR.
Yes
Copy data sets
One to four output data sets that contain

image copy data sets. Specify their DD or
template names with the COPYDDN and
RECOVERYDDN options of the utility
control statement.
No8
Sort work data sets
Temporary data sets for sort input and

output when sorting keys. If index build
parallelism is used, the DD names have the
form SWnnWKmm. If index build
parallelism is not used, the DD names have
the form SORTWKnn.
Yes9, 11
Sort work data sets

output when collecting inline statistics on at
least one data-partitioned secondary index.
The DD names have the form ST01WKnn.
No1, 10, 11
Table 32. Data sets that LOAD uses (continued)

Data set
|
|
|
Description
Required?
Note:
1. Required when collecting inline statistics on at least one data-partitioned secondary
index.
2. As an alternative to specifying an input data set, you can specify a cursor with the
INCURSOR option.
3. Required if referential constraints exist and ENFORCE(CONSTRAINTS) is specified
(This option is the default).
4. Used for tables with indexes.
5. Required for discard processing when loading one or more tables that have unique
indexes.
6. Required if a sort is done.
7. If you omit the DD statement for this data set, LOAD creates the data set with the
same record format, record length, and block size as the input data set.
8. Required for inline copies.
9. Required if any indexes are to be built or if a sort is required for processing errors.
10. If the DYNALLOC parm of the SORT program is not turned on, you need to allocate
the data set. Otherwise, DFSORT dynamically allocates the temporary data set.
11. It is recommended that you use dynamic allocation by specifying SORTDEVT in the
utility statement because dynamic allocation reduces the maintenance required of the
utility job JCL.
Table
Table that is to be loaded. (If you want to load only one partition of a
table, you must use the PART option in the control statement.)
Defining work data sets

Use the formulas and instructions in The following table to calculate the size of
work data sets for LOAD. Each row in the table lists the DD name that is used to
identify the data set and either formulas or instructions that you should use to
determine the size of the data set. The key for the formulas is located at the
bottom of the table.
Table 33. Size of work data sets for LOAD jobs
Work data set
Size
SORTOUT
max(f,e)
2 (maximum record length numcols (count + 2) number of
indexes)
ST01WKnn
SYSDISC
Same size as input data set
SYSERR
SYSMAP
v Simple table space for discard processing:

m
v Partitioned or segmented table space without discard processing:
max(m,e)
Chapter 16. LOAD
251
Table 33. Size of work data sets for LOAD jobs (continued)
Work data set
Size
SYSUT1
v Simple table space:

max(k,e)
v Partitioned or segmented table space:
max(k,e,m)
If you specify an estimate of the number of keys with the SORTKEYS
option:
max(f,e) for a simple table space
max(f,e,m) for a partitioned or segmented table space
Note:
variable
meaning
k
Key calculation
Foreign key calculation
Map calculation
Error calculation
max()
Maximum value of the specified calculations
numcols Number of key columns to concatenate when you collect frequent values from the
specified index
count
Number of frequent values that DB2 is to collect
maximum record length

Maximum record length of the SYSCOLDISTSTATS record that is processed when
collecting frequency statistics (You can obtain this value from the RECLENGTH
column in SYSTABLES.)
v Calculating the key: k

If a mix of data-partitioned secondary indexes and nonpartitioned indexes exists
on the table that is being loaded or a foreign key exists that is exactly indexed
by a data-partitioned secondary index, use this formula:
max(longest index key + 15, longest foreign key + 15) * (number of extracted keys).
Otherwise, use this formula:
max(longest index key + 13, longest foreign key + 13) * (number of extracted keys).
For nonpadded indexes, the length of the longest key means the maximum
possible length of a key with all varying-length columns padded to their
maximum lengths, plus 2 bytes for each varying-length column.
v Calculating the number of extracted keys:
1. Count 1 for each index.
2. Count 1 for each foreign key that is not exactly indexed (that is, where
foreign key and index definitions do not correspond identically).
3. For each foreign key that is exactly indexed (that is, where foreign key and
index definitions correspond identically):
a. Count 0 for the first relationship in which the foreign key participates if
the index is not a data-partitioned secondary index. Count 1 if the index
is a data-partitioned secondary index.
b. Count 1 for subsequent relationships in which the foreign key participates
(if any).
4. Multiply count by the number of rows that are to be loaded.
252
v Calculating the foreign key: f

If a mix of data-partitioned secondary indexes and nonpartitioned indexes exists
on the table that is being loaded or a foreign key exists that is exactly indexed
by a data-partitioned secondary index, use this formula:
max(longest foreign key + 15) * (number of extracted keys)
Otherwise, use this formula:
max(longest foreign key + 13) * (number of extracted keys)
v Calculating the map: m
The data set must be large enough to accommodate one map entry (length = 21
bytes) per table row that is produced by the LOAD job.
v Calculating the error: e
The data set must be large enough to accommodate one error entry (length =
560 bytes) per defect that is detected by LOAD (for example, conversion errors,
unique index violations, violations of referential constraints).
v Calculating the number of possible defects:
For discard processing, if the discard limit is specified, the number of possible
defects is equal to the discard limit.
If the discard limit is the maximum, calculate the number of possible defects
by using the following formula:
number of input records +
(number of unique indexes * number of extracted keys) +
(number of relationships * number of extracted foreign keys)
For nondiscard processing, the data set is not required.

Allocating twice the space that is used by the input data sets is usually adequate
for the sort work data sets. Two or three large SORTWKnn data sets are preferable
to several small ones.
|
|
|
|
|
|
DB2 utilities uses DFSORT to perform sorts. Sort work data sets cannot span
sort work data sets. It is recommended that at least 1.2 times the amount of data to
be sorted be provided in sort work data sets on disk. For more information about
DFSORT, see DFSORT Application Programming: Guide.
Concurrency and compatibility for LOAD

The LOAD utility has certain concurrency and compatibility characteristics
associated with it.
DB2 treats Individual data and index partitions as distinct target objects. Utilities
compatible.
For nonpartitioned secondary indexes, LOAD PART:
v Drains only the logical partition
v Does not set the page set REBUILD-pending status (PSRBD)
v Does not consider PCTFREE or FREEPAGE attributes when inserting keys
Claims and drains

The following table shows which claim classes LOAD drains and the restrictive
states the utility sets.
Chapter 16. LOAD
253
Table 34. Claim classes of LOAD operations

LOAD
SHRLEVEL
NONE
LOAD PART
SHRLEVEL
NONE
LOAD
SHRLEVEL
CHANGE
LOAD PART
SHRLEVEL
CHANGE
Table space, index, or

physical partition of a table
space or index space
DA/UTUT
DA/UTUT
CW/UTRW
CW/UTRW
Nonpartitioned secondary
index1
DA/UTUT
DR
CW/UTRW
CW/UTRW
Data-partitioned secondary
index2
DA/UTUT
DA/UTUT
CW/UTRW
CW/UTRW
Index logical partition3
None
DA/UTUT
None
CW/UTRW
Primary index (with

ENFORCE option only)
DW/UTRO
DW/UTRO
CR/UTRW
CR/UTRW
RI dependents
CHKP (NO)
CHKP (NO)
CHKP (NO)
CHKP (NO)
Target
Legend:
v CHKP (NO): Concurrently running applications do not see CHECK-pending status after
commit.
v CR: Claim the read claim class.
v CW: Claim the write claim class.
v DA: Drain all claim classes, no concurrent SQL access.
v DR: Drain the repeatable read class, no concurrent access for SQL repeatable readers.
v DW: Drain the write claim class, concurrent access for SQL readers.
v UTUT: Utility restrictive state, exclusive control.
v UTRO: Utility restrictive state, read-only access allowed.
v UTRW: Utility restrictive state, read-write access allowed.
v None: Object is not affected by this utility.
v RI: Referential integrity
Note:
|
|
|
|
1. Includes the document ID indexes and node ID indexes over non-partitioned XML table
3. Includes logical partitions of an XML index over partitioned table spaces.
Compatibility
The following table shows whether or not utilities are compatible with LOAD and
can run concurrently on the same target object. The target object can be a table
space, an index space, or a partition of a table space or index space.
Table 35. Compatibility of LOAD with other utilities
254
Action
LOAD SHRLEVEL
NONE
LOAD SHRLEVEL
CHANGE
BACKUP SYSTEM
YES
YES
CHECK DATA DELETE NO
No
No
CHECK DATA DELETE YES
No
No
CHECK INDEX
No
No
CHECK LOB
No
No
COPY INDEXSPACE SHRLEVEL

CHANGE
No
Yes
Table 35. Compatibility of LOAD with other utilities (continued)

LOAD SHRLEVEL
NONE
LOAD SHRLEVEL
CHANGE
COPY INDEXSPACE SHRLEVEL

REFERENCE
No
No
COPY TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL

CHANGE
No
Yes
COPY TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL

REFERENCE
No
No
COPYTOCOPY
No
Yes
DIAGNOSE
Yes
Yes
LOAD SHRLEVEL CHANGE
No
Yes
LOAD SHRLEVEL NONE
No
No
MERGECOPY
No
Yes
MODIFY RECOVERY
No
Yes
MODIFY STATISTICS
No
Yes
QUIESCE
No
No
REBUILD INDEX
No
No
RECOVER (no options)
No
No
RECOVER ERROR RANGE
No
No
RECOVER TOCOPY or TORBA
No
No
REORG INDEX
No
No
REORG TABLESPACE UNLOAD

CONTINUE or PAUSE
No
No

ONLY or EXTERNAL
No
No
No
No
REPAIR LOCATE KEY or RID

DELETE or REPLACE
No
No
REPAIR LOCATE TABLESPACE

PAGE REPLACE
No
No
REPORT
Yes
No
RESTORE SYSTEM
No
No
RUNSTATS INDEX SHRLEVEL

CHANGE
No
Yes

REFERENCE
No
No
RUNSTATS TABLESPACE
SHRLEVEL CHANGE
No
Yes
RUNSTATS TABLESPACE
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
No
No
STOSPACE
Yes
Yes
UNLOAD
No
Yes
Action
SQL operations and other online utilities on the same target partition are
incompatible.
Chapter 16. LOAD
255
When to use SORTKEYS NO

The SORTKEYS value determines when you can restart a LOAD job on a table
space that has LOB columns.
v The default value for SORTKEYS is SORTKEYS 0. If you plan to load a table that
has LOB columns using LOAD RESUME YES SHRLEVEL NONE, and you
might need to restart the LOAD job with RESTART(CURRENT), you must
specify SORTKEYS NO.
v The point at which you can restart LOAD REPLACE SHRLEVEL NONE on a
table that has no LOB columns depends on whether you specify SORTKEYS NO:
If you specify SORTKEYS NO, you can restart with RESTART(CURRENT).
If you do not specify SORTKEYS NO, you can restart only with
RESTART(PHASE)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Loading variable-length data

You can load variable-length data using the LOAD utility.
To load variable-length data, put a 2-byte binary length field before each field of
variable-length data. The value in that field depends on the data type of the
column into which you load the data. Use:
v The number of single-byte characters if the data type is VARCHAR
v The number of double-byte characters if the data type is VARGRAPHIC
For example, assume that you have a variable-length column that contains
X42C142C142C2, which might be interpreted as either six single-byte characters or
three double-byte characters. With the two-byte length field, use:
v X0006X42C142C142C2 to signify six single-byte characters in a VARCHAR
column
v X0003X42C142C142C2 to signify three double-byte characters in a
VARGRAPHIC column
How LOAD orders loaded records

The LOAD utility loads records into a table space in the order in which they
appear in the input stream. It does not sort the input stream, and it does not insert
records in sequence with existing records, even if a clustering index exists.
To achieve clustering when loading an empty table or replacing data, sort the input
stream. When adding data to a clustered table, consider reorganizing the table after
running LOAD.
Because rows with duplicate key values for unique indexes fail to be loaded, any
records that are dependent on such rows either:
v Fail to be loaded because they would cause referential integrity violations (if you
specify ENFORCE CONSTRAINTS)
v Are loaded without regard to referential integrity violations (if you specify
ENFORCE NO)
As a result, violations of referential integrity might occur. Such violations can be
detected by LOAD (without the ENFORCE(NO) option) or by CHECK DATA.
256
Replacing data with LOAD

You can use LOAD REPLACE to replace data in a table space that has one or more
tables. You can replace all the data in a table space (by using the REPLACE
option), or you can load new records into a table space without destroying the
rows that are already there (by using the RESUME option).
DB2 processes data sets depending on the options you set for the LOAD utility. If
you run LOAD REPLACE without the REUSE option, data sets that are not
user-managed are deleted before the LOAD utility runs. The LOAD utility defines
a new data set with a control interval that matches the page size.
When you run LOAD REPLACE on a table space or partition that is in basic row
format, LOAD REPLACE converts the table space or partition to the reordered row
format. If the clause EDITPROC or VALIDPROC is used in a table space or
partition, the table space or partition remains in basic format after the LOAD
REPLACE. Replacing data with LOAD applies only in new-function mode.
If an object is in REORG-pending status, you can perform a LOAD REPLACE of
the entire table space, which resets REORG-pending status. You can also perform a
LOAD PART REPLACE or RESUME of any partitions that are not in
REORG-pending status. In this situation, no other LOAD operations are allowed. If
an object is in advisory REORG-pending status (AREO*), you can perform a LOAD
REPLACE of the entire table space, which resets advisory REORG-pending status.
If an object is in REBUILD-pending status, you can perform a LOAD REPLACE of
the entire table space, which resets REBUILD-pending status. You can also perform
a LOAD PART REPLACE or RESUME of any partitions. If these partitions are in
REBUILD-pending status, a LOAD PART REPLACE or RESUME resets that status.
If an object is in advisory REBUILD-pending status, you can perform a LOAD
REPLACE of the entire table space, which resets advisory REBUILD-pending
status. If a user-defined table space is in refresh-pending (REFP) status, you can
replace the data by using LOAD REPLACE.
Using LOAD REPLACE with LOG YES

The LOAD REPLACE or PART REPLACE with LOG YES option logs only the reset
and not each deleted row. If you need to see what rows are being deleted, use the
SQL DELETE statement.
Replacing one table in a single-table table space:

The following control statement specifies that LOAD is to replace one table in a
single-table table space:
LOAD DATA
REPLACE
INTO TABLE
( DEPTNO
DEPTNAME
MGRNO
ADMRDEPT
LOCATION
ENFORCE NO
DSN8910.DEPT
POSITION (1)
POSITION (5)
POSITION (37)
POSITION (44)
POSITION (48)
CHAR(3),
VARCHAR,
CHAR(6),
CHAR(3),
CHAR(16) )
Figure 28. Example of using LOAD to replace one table in a single-table table space
Chapter 16. LOAD
257
Replacing one table in a multiple-table table space

When using LOAD REPLACE on a multiple-table table space, you must be careful
because LOAD works on an entire table space at a time. Thus, to replace all rows
in a multiple-table table space, you must work with one table at a time, by using
the RESUME YES option on all but the first table. For example, if you have two
tables in a table space, you need to do the following steps:
1. Use LOAD REPLACE on the first table as shown in the following control
statement. This option removes data from the table space and replaces just the
data for the first table.
LOAD DATA CONTINUEIF(72:72)='X'
REPLACE
INTO DSN8910.TOPTVAL
( MAJSYS
POSITION (2)
CHAR(1),
ACTION
POSITION (4)
CHAR(1),
OBJECT
POSITION (6)
CHAR(2),
SRCHCRIT POSITION (9)
CHAR(2),
SCRTYPE
POSITION (12)
CHAR(1),
HEADTXT
POSITION (80)
CHAR(50),
SELTXT
POSITION (159) CHAR(50),
INFOTXT
HELPTXT
PFKTXT
DSPINDEX POSITION (475) CHAR(2) )
Figure 29. Example of using LOAD REPLACE on the first table in a multiple-table table
space
2. Use LOAD with RESUME YES on the second table as shown in the control
statement in the following example. This option adds the records for the second
table without destroying the data in the first table.
RESUME YES
INTO DSN8910.TDSPTXT
( DSPINDEX POSITION (2)
CHAR(2),
LINENO
POSITION (6)
CHAR(2),
DSPLINE
POSITION (80)
CHAR(79) )
Figure 30. Example of using LOAD with RESUME YES on the second table in a
multiple-table table space
If you need to replace just one table in a multiple-table table space, you need to
delete all the rows in the table, and then use LOAD with RESUME YES. For
example, assume that you want to replace all the data in DSN8910.TDSPTXT
without changing any data in DSN8910.TOPTVAL. To do this, follow these steps:
1. Delete all the rows from DSN8910.TDSPTXT by using the following SQL
DELETE statement:
EXEC SQL
DELETE FROM DSN8910.TDSPTXT
ENDEXEC
Tip: The mass delete works most quickly on a segmented table space.
2. Use the LOAD job that is shown in the following figure to replace the rows in
that table.
258

RESUME YES
INTO DSN8910.TDSPTXT
( DSPINDEX POSITION (2)
CHAR(2),
LINENO
POSITION (6)
CHAR(2),
DSPLINE
POSITION (80)
CHAR(79) )
Figure 31. Example of using LOAD with RESUME YES to replace one table in a
multiple-table table space
Related reference
Using LOAD for tables with identity columns, ROWID columns, or row
change timestamp columns
When you run the UNLOAD utility or the REORG utility with the UNLOAD
EXTERNAL or DISCARD options, DB2 generates a LOAD statement that you can
use to load the unloaded data into any table that has a compatible format.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the source table has a ROWID column that is defined with GENERATED
ALWAYS, the generated LOAD statement contains a dummy field named
DSN_ROWID for the ROWID column. If the source table has an identity column
that is defined with GENERATED ALWAYS, the generated LOAD statement
contains a dummy field named DSN_IDENTITY for the identity column. If the
source table has a row change timestamp column that is defined with
GENERATED ALWAYS, the generated LOAD statement contains a dummy field
named DSN_RCTIMESTAMP for the row change timestamp column. The keyword
IGNOREFIELDS in the LOAD statement causes DB2 to skip the DSN_ROWID,
DSN_IDENTITY, or DSN_RCTIMESTAMP field when it loads the data into a table.
Using the combination of IGNOREFIELDS and the dummy fields, you can load the
unloaded data into a compatible table that has GENERATED ALWAYS columns.
|
|
|
|
|
To include the data from the ROWID, identity, or row change timestamp column
when you load the unloaded data into a table, define the ROWID, identity, or row
change timestamp column with GENERATED BY DEFAULT. To use the generated
LOAD statement, remove the IGNOREFIELDS keyword and change the dummy
field names to the corresponding column names in the target table.
|
|
To load the unloaded data into a compatible table that has identity columns that
are defined as GENERATED ALWAYS, use one of the following techniques:
v Using the combination of IGNOREFIELDS and the dummy DSN_IDENTITY
field, load will generate the identity column data.
v To load the unloaded identity column data, add the IDENTITYOVERRIDE
keyword to the LOAD control statement. Change the dummy field name,
DSN_IDENTITY, to the corresponding identity column name in the target table.
v To load the unloaded data into a compatible table that has identity columns or
ROWID columns that are defined as GENERATED BY DEFAULT, remove the
IGNOREFIELDS keyword and change the dummy field names to the
corresponding column names in the target table.
v To load the unloaded data into a compatible table that has ROWID columns that
are defined as GENERATED ALWAYS, using the combination of
IGNOREFIELDS and the dummy DSN_ROWID field, load will generate the
ROWID column data.
Chapter 16. LOAD
259
Adding more data to a table or partition

You might want to add data to a table, rather than replace it.
The RESUME keyword specifies whether data is to be loaded into an empty or a
non-empty table space. RESUME NO loads records into an empty table space.
RESUME YES loads records into a non-empty table space.
If RESUME NO is specified and the target table is not empty, no data is loaded.
If RESUME YES is specified and the target table is empty, data is loaded.
LOAD always adds rows to the end of the existing rows, but index entries are
placed in key sequence.
Deleting all the data in a table space

You can delete all the data in a table space.
Specifying LOAD REPLACE without loading any records is an efficient way of
clearing a table space. LOAD REPLACE is efficient for the following reasons:
v LOAD REPLACE LOG NO does not log any rows.
v LOAD REPLACE redefines the table space.
v LOAD REPLACE retains all views and privileges that are associated with a table
space or table.
v LOG YES can be used to make the LOAD REPLACE recoverable.
To delete all the data in a table space, specify the input data set in the JCL as DD
DUMMY. LOAD REPLACE replaces all tables in the table space.
Loading partitions
If you use the PART clause of the INTO TABLE option, only the specified
partitions of a partitioned table are loaded. If you omit PART, the entire table is
loaded.
You can specify the REPLACE and RESUME options separately by partition. The
control statement in the following example specifies that DB2 is to load data into
the first and second partitions of the employee table. Records with 0 in column 1
replace the contents of partition 1; records with 1 in column 1 are added to
partition 2; all other records are ignored. (The following example control statement,
which is simplified to illustrate the point, does not list field specifications for all
columns of the table.)
260

INTO TABLE DSN8910.EMP PART 1 REPLACE WHEN (1) = '0'
( EMPNO
POSITION (1:6) CHAR(6),
FIRSTNME POSITION (7:18) CHAR(12),
.
.
.
)
INTO TABLE DSN8910.EMP PART 2 RESUME YES WHEN (1) = '1'
( EMPNO
POSITION (1:6) CHAR(6),
FIRSTNME POSITION (7:18) CHAR(12),
.
.
.
)
Figure 32. Example LOAD control statement for loading partitions
To load columns in an order that is different than the order of the columns in the
CREATE TABLE statement, you must code field specifications for each INTO
TABLE statement.
The following example assumes that your data is in separate input data sets. That
data is already sorted by partition, so you do not need to use the WHEN clause of
INTO TABLE. Placing the RESUME YES option before the PART option inhibits
concurrent partition processing while the utility is running.
LOAD DATA INDDN EMPLDS1 CONTINUEIF(72:72)='X'
RESUME YES
INTO TABLE DSN8910.EMP REPLACE PART 1
LOAD DATA INDDN EMPLDS2 CONTINUEIF(72:72)='X'
RESUME YES
INTO TABLE DSN8910.EMP REPLACE PART 2
The following example allows partitioning independence when more than one
partition is loaded concurrently.
LOAD DATA INDDN SYSREC LOG NO
INTO TABLE DSN8910.EMP PART 2 REPLACE
When index-based partitioning is used, LOAD INTO PART integer is not allowed if
an identity column is part of the partitioning index. When table-based partitioning
is used, LOAD INTO PART integer is not allowed if an identity column is used in a
partitioning clause of the CREATE TABLE or ALTER TABLE statement. If
IDENTITYOVERRIDE is used, these operations are allowed.
To invoke partition parallelism, specify a PART clause with INDDN or INCURSOR
and optionally DISCARDDN keywords for each partition in your utility control
statement. This partition parallelism reduces the elapsed time that is required for
loading large amounts of data into partitioned table spaces. Loading partition
parallelism requires a separate input data set for each partition.
Consequences of DEFINE NO
If a partitioned table space is created with DEFINE NO, all partitions are also
implicitly defined with DEFINE NO. The first data row that is inserted by the
LOAD utility defines all data sets in the partitioned table space. If this process
takes a long time, expect timeouts on the DBD.
Coding your LOAD job with SHRLEVEL CHANGE and using partition parallelism
is equivalent to concurrent, independent insert jobs. For example, in a large
partitioned table space that is created with DEFINE NO, the LOAD utility starts
Chapter 16. LOAD
261
three tasks. The first task tries to insert the first row, which causes an update to the
DBD. The other two tasks time out while they wait to access the DBD. The first
task holds the lock on the DBD while the data sets are defined for the table space.
Restriction: You cannot load data at the partition level of a partition-by-growth
table space.
|
Partition-by-growth table spaces
|
|
|
|
|
|
When you load a partition-by-growth table space, you can load data only at the
table space level and not at the partition level. If you need additional partitions
during the LOAD process and the maximum number of partitions for the table
space is not yet reached, the LOAD utility will trigger the process to add
additional partitions. If the maximum number of partitions is reached, the LOAD
utility fails.
|
|
Restriction: You cannot use parallelism for LOAD processing for

|
|
Loading data containing XML columns
|
|
You can load data containing XML columns with one of two methods.
v The XML column can be loaded from the input record when the total input
record length is less than 32K. XML column value can be placed in the INPUT
record with or without any other any other loading column values. The input
record can be in delimited or non-delimited format. For a non-delimited format,
the XML column is treated like a variable character with a 2-byte length
preceding the XML value. For a delimited format there are no length bytes
present.
v The XML column can be loaded from a separate file whether the XML column
length is less than 32K or not.
|
|
To load data into a base table that has XML columns:

1. Create input data sets to ensure that you use the appropriate format:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
v If you use delimited format, specify XML data in the input data set as
delimited character strings, separated by the column delimiter.
v If you do not use delimited format, specify the XML input field length in a
2-byte binary field preceding the data.
2. Create a LOAD utility control statement.
v To load XML directly from input record, specify XML as the input field type.
XML is the only acceptable field type and data type conversion is not
supported. Do not specify DEFAULTIF.
v To load XML from a file, specify CHAR or VARCHAR along with either
BLOBF, CLOBF or DBCLOBF to indicate that the input column contains a
filename from which a BLOBF, CLOBF or DBCLOBF is to be loaded to the
XML column.
3. Submit the utility control statement.
|
|
|
When you load XML documents into a table, and the XML value cannot be cast to
the type that you specified when you created the index, the value is ignored
without any warnings or errors, and the document is inserted into the table.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
262
|
|
|
|
When you insert XML documents into a table with XML indexes that are of type
DECFLOAT, the values might be rounded when they are inserted. If the index is
unique, the rounding might cause duplicates even if the original values are not
exactly the same.
|
|
|
DB2 does not compress an XML table space during the LOAD process. If the XML
table space is defined with COMPRESS YES, the XML table space is compressed
during REORG.
Loading delimited files

You can load a delimited file by using the FORMAT DELIMITED option. A
delimited file contains cell values that are separated by delimiters. Delimiters are
predefined characters that separate data. The column delimiter separates one
column value from the next. Character string delimiters identify the beginning and
end of a single cell value and are required only if the cell value contains the
column delimiter.
Recommendation: If a delimited file is to be transferred to or from an operating
system other than z/OS or between DB2 for z/OS systems that use different
EBCDIC or ASCII CCSIDs, use Unicode as the encoding scheme for the delimited
file. Using Unicode avoids possible CCSID translation problems.
You are responsible for ensuring that the data in the file does not include the
chosen delimiters. If the delimiters are part of the files data, unexpected errors can
occur.
Restrictions: The following restrictions apply to the use of delimiters:
v You cannot specify the same character for more than one type of delimiter
(COLDEL, CHARDEL, and DECPT).
v You cannot specify a character constant for a delimiter if the utility control
statement is not coded in the same encoding scheme as the input file. For
example, the utility control statement is coded in Unicode, and the input data is
coded in EBCDIC.
v You should use the hexadecimal representation for non-default delimiters if the
utility control statement is coded in a different encoding scheme than the input
file. For example, the utility control statement is coded in Unicode, and the input
file is coded in EBCDIC. In this case, if you do not use the hexadecimal
representation for the non-default delimiters, the results can be unpredictable.
v You do not need to specify the POSITION keyword when you specify the
DELIMITED option. The utility ignores the POSITION keyword when you also
specify DELIMITED. The utility overrides field data type specifications
according to the specifications of the delimited format. (For example, length
values for CHAR, VARCHAR, GRAPHIC, VARGRAPHIC, CLOB, DBCLOB, and
BLOB data are the delimited lengths of each field in the input data set, and the
utility expects all numeric types in external format.)
v You cannot specify a binary 0 (zero) for any delimiter.
v You cannot specify the default decimal point as a string character delimiter
(CHARDEL) or a column string delimiter (COLDEL).
v You cannot specify shift-in and shift-out characters for EBCDIC MBCS data.
|
|
v You cannot specify the pipe character ( | ) for DBCS data.

v You cannot specify the semicolon character (x5E) as a delimiter character for
COlDEL.
Chapter 16. LOAD
263
The following table lists the default hexadecimal values for the delimiter characters
based on encoding scheme.
Table 36. Default delimiter values for different encoding schemes
Character
EBCDIC SBCS
EBCDIC
DBCS/MBCS
ASCII/Unicode
SBCS
ASCII/Unicode
MBCS
Character string
delimiter
X7F
X7F
X22
X22
Decimal point
character
X4B
X4B
X2E
X2E
Column
delimiter
X6B
X6B
X2C
X2C
In most EBCDIC code pages, the hexadecimal values that are specified in the
previous table are a double quotation mark() for the character string delimiter, a
period(.) for the decimal point character, and a comma(,) for the column delimiter.
The following table lists the maximum allowable hexadecimal values for any
delimiter character based on the encoding scheme.
Table 37. Maximum delimiter values for different encoding schemes
Encoding scheme
Maximum allowable value
EBCDIC SBCS
None
EBCDIC DBCS/MBCS
X3F
ASCII/Unicode SBCS
None
ASCII/Unicode MBCS
X7F
The following table identifies the acceptable data type forms for the delimited file
format that the LOAD and UNLOAD utilities use.
Table 38. Acceptable data type forms for delimited files.
Acceptable form for loading
a delimited file
Data type
CHAR, VARCHAR
A delimited or non-delimited Character data that is

character string
enclosed by character
delimiters. For VARCHAR,
length bytes do not precede
the data in the string.
GRAPHIC (any type)
A delimited or non-delimited Data that is unloaded as a

character stream
delimited character string.
For VARGRAPHIC, length
bytes do not precede the data
in the string.
INTEGER (any type)
DECIMAL (any type)
264
Form that is created by

unloading a delimited file
A stream of characters that

represents a number in
EXTERNAL format
Numeric data in external

format.
A character string that

EXTERNAL format
A string of characters that

represents a number.
Table 38. Acceptable data type forms for delimited files. (continued)
Data type
FLOAT

a delimited file

A representation of a number A string of characters that

in the range -7.2E + 75 to
7.2E + 75 in EXTERNAL
floating-point notation.
format
BLOB, CLOB

character string
delimiters. Length bytes do
not precede the data in the
string.
DBCLOB

character string
string.
DATE
A delimited or non-delimited Character string

character string that contains representation of a date.
a date value in EXTERNAL
format
TIME

character string that contains representation of a time.
a time value in EXTERNAL
format
TIMESTAMP

character string that contains representation of a
timestamp.
a timestamp value in
EXTERNAL format
Note:
1. Field specifications of INTEGER or SMALLINT are treated as INTEGER EXTERNAL.
2. Field specifications of DECIMAL, DECIMAL PACKED, or DECIMAL ZONED are treated
as DECIMAL EXTERNAL.
3. Field specifications of FLOAT, REAL, or DOUBLE are treated as FLOAT EXTERNAL.
Related concepts
Unloading delimited files on page 710
Related reference
Appendix G, Delimited file format, on page 1011
Loading data with referential constraints

LOAD does not load a table with an incomplete definition; if the table has a
primary key, the unique index on that key must exist. If any table that is to be
loaded has an incomplete definition, the LOAD job terminates.
LOAD requires access to the primary indexes on the parent tables of any loaded
tables. For simple, segmented, and partitioned table spaces, it drains all writers
from the parent tables primary indexes. Other users cannot make changes to the
parent tables that result in an update to their own primary indexes. Concurrent
inserts and deletes on the parent tables are blocked, but updates are allowed for
columns that are not defined as part of the primary index.
Chapter 16. LOAD
265
By default, LOAD enforces referential constraints, except informational referential

constraints, which LOAD ignores. By enforcing referential constraints, LOAD
provides you with several possibilities for error:
v Records that are to be loaded might have duplicate values of a primary key.
v Records that are to be loaded might have invalid foreign-key values, which are
not values of the primary key of the corresponding parent table.
v The loaded table might lack primary key values that are values of foreign keys
in dependent tables.
The next few paragraphs describe how DB2 signals each of those errors and the
means it provides for correcting them.
Duplicate values of a primary key

A primary index must be a unique index and must exist if the table definition is
complete. Therefore, when you load a parent table, you build at least its primary
index. You need an error data set, and probably also a map data set and a discard
data set.
Invalid foreign key values:

A dependent table has the constraint that the values of its foreign keys must be
values of the primary keys of corresponding parent tables. By default, LOAD
enforces that constraint in much the same way as it enforces the uniqueness of key
values in a unique index. First, it loads all records to the table. Subsequently,
LOAD checks the validity of the records with respect to the constraints, identifies
any invalid record by an error message, and deletes the record from the table. You
can choose to copy this record to a discard data set. Again you need at least an
error data set, and probably also a map data set and a discard data set.
If a record fails to load because it violates a referential constraint, any of its
dependent records in the same job also fail. For example, suppose that the sample
project table and project activity tables belong to the same table space, that you
load them both in the same job, and that some input record for the project table
has an invalid department number. Then, that record fails to be loaded and does
not appear in the loaded table; the summary report identifies it as causing a
primary error.
However the project table has a primary key, the project number. In this case, the
record that is rejected by LOAD defines a project number, and any row in the
project activity table that refers to the rejected number is also rejected. The
summary report identifies those as causing secondary errors. If you use a discard
data set, records for both types of errors are copied to it.
Missing primary key values

The deletion of invalid records does not cascade to other dependent tables that are
already in place. Suppose now that the project and project activity tables exist in
separate table spaces, and that they are both currently populated and possess
referential integrity. In addition, suppose that the data in the project table is now to
be replaced (using LOAD REPLACE) and that the replacement data for some
department was inadvertently not supplied in the input data. Rows that reference
that department number might already exist in the project activity table. LOAD,
266
therefore, automatically places the table space that contains the project activity
table (and all table spaces that contain dependent tables of any table that is being
replaced) into CHECK-pending status.
The CHECK-pending status indicates that the referential integrity of the table
space is in doubt; it might contain rows that violate a referential constraint. DB2
places severe restrictions on the use of a table space in CHECK-pending status;
typically, you run the CHECK DATA utility to reset this status.
Consequences of ENFORCE NO
If you use the ENFORCE NO option, you tell LOAD not to enforce referential
constraints. Sometimes you have good reasons for doing that, but the result is that
the loaded table space might violate the constraints. Hence, LOAD places the
loaded table space in CHECK-pending status. If you use REPLACE, all table spaces
that contain any dependent tables of the tables that were loaded are also placed in
CHECK-pending status. You must reset the status of each table before you can use
any of the table spaces.
Related concepts
Resetting the CHECK-pending status on page 289
Correcting referential constraint violations

The referential integrity checking in LOAD can delete only incorrect dependent
rows, which were input to LOAD. Deletion is not always the best strategy for
correcting referential integrity violations.
For example, the violations might occur because parent rows do not exist. In this
case, correcting the parent tables is better than deleting the dependent rows. In this
case, ENFORCE NO is more appropriate than ENFORCE CONSTRAINTS. After
you correct the parent table, you can use CHECK DATA to reset the
LOAD ENFORCE CONSTRAINTS is not equivalent to CHECK DATA. LOAD
ENFORCE CONSTRAINTS deletes any rows that cause referential constraint
violations. CHECK DATA detects violations and optionally deletes such rows.
CHECK DATA checks a complete referential structure, although LOAD checks only
the rows that are being loaded.
When loading referential structures with ENFORCE CONSTRAINTS, you should
load tables before dependent tables.
Compressing data
You can use LOAD with the REPLACE, RESUME NO, or RESUME YES options to
build a compression dictionary. The RESUME NO option requires the table space
to be empty and RESUME YES will only build a dictionary if the table space is
empty.
|
|
|
|
|
|
LOAD RESUME YES or NO will build compression dictionaries for empty table
spaces, except for linear/simple table spaces. LOAD REPLACE must be used on
linear/simple table spaces in order to build new compression dictionaries. If your
table space, or a partition in a partitioned table space, is defined with COMPRESS
YES, the dictionary is created while records are loaded. After the dictionary is
completely built, the rest of the data is compressed as it is loaded.
Chapter 16. LOAD
267
For Partition-by-growth table spaces, the utility only builds one dictionary and the
same dictionary page is populated through all partitions. For XML table spaces
that are defined with COMPRESS YES, compression does not occur until the first
REORG.
The data is not compressed until the dictionary is built. You must use LOAD
REPLACE or RESUME NO to build the dictionary, except for linear/simple table
spaces where LOAD REPLACE must be used to build new compression
dictionaries. To save processing costs, and initial LOAD doe not go back to
compress the records that were used to build the dictionary.
|
|
|
|
|
The number of records that are required to build a dictionary is dependent on the
frequency of patterns in the data. For large data sets, the number of rows that are
required to build the dictionary is a small percentage of the total number of rows
that are to be compressed. For the best compression results, build a new dictionary
whenever you load the data.
However, in some circumstances, you might want to compress data by using an
existing dictionary. If you are satisfied with the compression that you are getting
with an existing dictionary, you can keep that dictionary by using the
KEEPDICTIONARY option of LOAD or REORG. For both LOAD and REORG, this
method also saves you the processing overhead of building the dictionary. LOAD
RESUME on a linear/simple table space will always keep the existing dictionary if
one exists. In order to build new dictionaries for a linear/simple table space,
LOAD REPLACE or REORG is required.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Consider using KEEPDICTIONARY if the last dictionary was built by REORG; the
REORG utilitys sampling method can yield more representative dictionaries than
LOAD and can thus mean better compression. REORG with KEEPDICTIONARY is
efficient because the data is not decompressed in the process.
However, REORG with KEEPDICTIONARY does not generate a compression
report. You need to use RUNSTATS to update the catalog statistics and then query
the catalog columns yourself.
Use KEEPDICTIONARY if you want to try to compress all the records during
LOAD, and if you know that the data has not changed much in content since the
last dictionary was built. An example of LOAD with the KEEPDICTIONARY
option is shown in the following figure.
LOAD DATA
REPLACE KEEPDICTIONARY
INTO TABLE DSN8910.DEPT
( DEPTNO
POSITION (1)
DEPTNAME POSITION (5)
MGRNO
POSITION (37)
ADMRDEPT POSITION (44)
LOCATION POSITION (48)
ENFORCE NO
CHAR(3),
VARCHAR,
CHAR(6),
CHAR(3),
CHAR(16) )
Figure 33. Example of LOAD with the KEEPDICTIONARY option
You can also specify KEEPDICTIONARY for specific partitions of a partitioned

table space. In this case, each partition has its own dictionary.
You and use the COPYDICTIONARY option to compress a dictionary from an
existing partition when you load data into another, empty partition. If you perform
a LOAD of a table space, and specify the COPYDICTIONARY option and a
268
dummy input data set, you can then use INSERT to insert data into partitions
other than the partition that is specified in COPYDICTIONARY. The data that is
inserted is compressed.
Related reference
Chapter 25, REORG TABLESPACE, on page 449
Chapter 29, RUNSTATS, on page 593
Loading data from DL/I

To convert data in IMS DL/I databases from a hierarchic structure to a relational
structure so that it can be loaded into DB2 tables, you can use the DataRefresher
and IMS DataPropagator (IMS DPROP) licensed programs.
You can use DataRefresher to create source-to-target mappings and to create DB2
databases. After your databases are created and the mappings are set, you can use
IMS DPROP to propagate any changes.
IMS DPROP runs as a z/OS application and can extract data from VSAM and
physical sequential access method (SAM) files, as well from DL/I databases. Using
IMS DPROP, you do not need to extract all the data in a database or data set. You
use a statement such as an SQL subselect to indicate which fields to extract and
which conditions, if any, the source records or segments must meet.
With JCL models that you edit, you can have IMS DPROP produce the statements
for a DB2 LOAD utility job. If you have more than one DB2 subsystem, you can
name the one that is to receive the output. IMS DPROP can generate LOAD control
statements in the job to relate fields in the extracted data to target columns in DB2
tables.
You have the following choices for how IMS DPROP writes the extracted data:
v 80-byte records, which are included in the generated job stream
v A separate physical sequential data set (which can be dynamically allocated by
IMS DPROP), with a logical record length that is long enough to accommodate
any row of the extracted data
In the first case, the LOAD control statements that are generated by IMS DPROP
include the CONTINUEIF option to describe the extracted data to DB2 LOAD.
In the second case, you can have IMS DPROP name the data set that contains the
extracted data in the SYSREC DD statement in the LOAD job. (In that case, IMS
DPROP makes no provision for transmitting the extracted data across a network.)
Normally, you do not need to edit the job statements that are produced by IMS
DPROP. However, in some cases you might need to edit; for example, if you want
to load character data into a DB2 column with INTEGER data type, you need to
edit the job statements. (DB2 LOAD does not consider CHAR and INTEGER data
to be compatible.)
IMS DPROP is a versatile tool that contains more control, formatting, and output
options than are described here. For more information about this tool, see IMS
DataPropagator: An Introduction.
Chapter 16. LOAD
269
Loading data by using the cross-loader function

The LOAD utility can directly load the output of a dynamic SQL SELECT
statement into a table. The dynamic SQL statement can be executed on data at a
local server or at any DRDA-compliant remote server. This functionality is called
the DB2 family cross-loader function.
This function enables you to use a single LOAD job to transfer data from one
location to another location or from one table to another table at the same location.
Your input for this cross-loader function can come from other sources besides DB2
for z/OS; you can use IBM Information Integrator Federation feature for access to
data from sources as diverse as Oracle and Sybase, as well as the entire DB2 family
of database servers.
|
To use the cross-loader function:

1. Declare a cursor by using the EXEC SQL utility. Within the cursor definition,
specify a SELECT statement that identifies the result table that you want to use
as the input data for the LOAD job. The result table cannot include XML
columns. The column names in the SELECT statement must be identical to the
column names in the table that is being loaded. You can use the AS clause in
the SELECT list to change the column names that are returned by the SELECT
statement so that they match the column names in the target table. The
columns in the SELECT list do not need to be in the same order as the columns
in the target table. Also, the SELECT statement needs to refer to any remote
tables by their three-part name.
2. Specify the cursor name with the INCURSOR option in the LOAD statement.
You cannot load the input data into the same table on which you defined the
cursor. You can, however, use the same cursor to load multiple tables.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When you submit the LOAD job, DB2 parses the SELECT statement in the cursor
definition and checks for errors. If the statement is invalid, the LOAD utility issues
an error message and identifies the condition that prevented the execution. If the
statement syntax is valid but an error occurs during execution, the LOAD utility
also issues an error message. The utility terminates when it encounters an error. If
you specify a data-change-table-reference in the from-clause of the cursor, the
changes to the source might be committed even though the load fails.
If no errors occur, the utility loads the result table that is identified by the cursor
into the specified target table according to the following rules:
v LOAD matches the columns in the input data to columns in the target table by
name, not by sequence.
v If the number of columns in the cursor is less than the number of columns in the
table that is being loaded, DB2 loads the missing columns with their default
values. If the missing columns are defined as NOT NULL without defaults, the
LOAD job fails.
v If a source column is defined as NULLABLE and the corresponding target
column is defined as NOT NULL without defaults, the LOAD job fails.
|
|
v If you specify IGNOREFIELDS YES, LOAD skips any columns in the input data
that do not exist in the target table.
v If the data types in the target table do not match the data types in the cursor,
DB2 tries to convert the data as much as possible. If the conversion fails, the
LOAD job fails. You might be able to avoid these conversion errors by using
SQL conversion functions in the SELECT statement of the cursor declaration.
270
v If the encoding scheme of the input data is different than the encoding scheme
of the target table, DB2 converts the encoding schemes automatically.
v The sum of the lengths of all of the columns cannot exceed 1 GB.
v If the SELECT statement in the cursor definition specifies a table with at least
one LOB column and a ROWID that was created with the GENERATED
ALWAYS clause with a unique index on it, you cannot specify this ROWID
column in the SELECT list of the cursor.
v If the SELECT statement in the cursor definition specifies a table with a row
change timestamp column that was created with the GENERATED ALWAYS
clause, you cannot specify this row change timestamp column in the SELECT list
of the cursor.
Also, although you do not need to specify casting functions for any distinct types
in the input data or target table, you might need to add casting functions to any
additional WHERE clauses in the SQL.
Related concepts
Before running LOAD on page 248
Related reference
Sample LOAD control statements on page 293
Using inline COPY with LOAD

You can create a full image copy data set (SHRLEVEL REFERENCE) during LOAD
execution. The new copy is an inline copy. The advantage to using an inline copy
is that the table space is not left in COPY-pending status regardless of which LOG
option was specified for the utility. Thus, data availability is increased.
To create an inline copy, use the COPYDDN and RECOVERYDDN keywords. You
can specify up to two primary and two secondary copies. Inline copies are
produced during the RELOAD phase of LOAD processing.
The SYSCOPY record that is produced by an inline copy contains ICTYPE=F and
SHRLEVEL=R. The STYPE column contains an R if the image copy was produced
by LOAD REPLACE LOG(YES). It contains an S if the image copy was produced
by LOAD REPLACE LOG(NO). The data set that is produced by the inline copy is
logically equivalent to a full image copy with SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, but the
data within the data set differs in the following ways:
v Data pages might be out of sequence and some might be repeated. If pages are
repeated, the last one is always the correct copy.
v Space map pages are out of sequence and might be repeated.
v If the compression dictionary is rebuilt with LOAD, the set of dictionary pages
occurs twice in the data set, with the second set being the correct one.
The total number of duplicate pages is small, with a negligible effect on the
required space for the data set.
You must specify LOAD REPLACE. If you specify RESUME YES or RESUME NO
but not REPLACE, an error message is issued and LOAD terminates.
Chapter 16. LOAD
271
Improving LOAD performance

You might be able to improve the performance of the LOAD utility, depending on
your situation.
To improve LOAD utility performance, you can take the following actions:
v Use one LOAD DATA statement when loading multiple tables in the same table
space. Follow the LOAD statement with multiple INTO TABLE WHEN clauses.
v Run LOAD concurrently against separate partitions of a partitioned table space.
Alternatively, specify the INDDN and DISCARDDN keywords in your utility
JCL to invoke partition parallelism. This specification reduces the elapsed time
required for loading large amounts of data into partitioned table spaces.
Recommendation: Use load partition parallelism to load all partitions in a
single job when one or more nonpartitioned secondary indexes exists. If the only
indexes are the partitioned indexes, using multiple concurrent jobs against
separate partitions is better.
v Preprocess the input data.
v Load numeric data in its internal representation.
v Avoid data conversion, such as from integer to decimal or from decimal to
floating-point.
v When you specify LOAD REPLACE, specify LOG NO with COPYDDN or
RECOVERYDDN to create an inline copy.
v Sort the data in cluster order to avoid needing to reorganize it after loading.
v If you are using 3990 caching, and you have the secondary indexes on RAMAC ,
consider specifying YES on the UTILITY CACHE OPTION field of installation
panel DSNTIPE. This allows DB2 to use sequential prestaging when reading
data from RAMAC for the following utilities:
LOAD PART integer RESUME
REORG TABLESPACE PART
For these utilities, prefetch reads remain in the cache longer, thus possibly
improving performance of subsequent writes.
The optimum order for presenting data to LOAD is as follows:
v If you are loading a single table that has, at most, one foreign key or one index
key, sort the data in key sequence. (An index over a foreign key is allowed.) If
the key is an index key, sort the data in either ascending or descending order,
depending on how the index was defined. If the key is a foreign key, sort the
data in ascending order. Null key values are treated as high values.
v If you are loading more than one table, choose one of the following methods:
Load each table separately. Using this method, you can follow the rules listed
in the preceding bullet for loading single tables.
Use the WHEN clause under each INTO TABLE option on your LOAD
statement to group your input data by table.
Within each table, sort the data in key sequence.
272
Related concepts
Before running LOAD on page 248
Improving performance for parallel processing

Taking advantage of any new parallelism feature without allocating additional
resources or tuning your system can lead to significant performance degradation.
To benefit from parallel operations when using LOAD SHRLEVEL CHANGE or
parallel inserts, especially when secondary indexes are used, you can take the
following actions:
v Use a larger buffer pool to improve the buffer-pool hit ratio.
v Define a higher deferred-write threshold to reduce the number of pages that are
written to disk, which reduces the I/O time and contention.
v Define a larger checkpoint interval to reduce the number of pages that are
written to disk, which reduces the I/O time and contention.
v Use ESS Parallel Access Volume (PAV) to support multiple concurrent I/Os to
the same volume that contains secondary index data sets.
v Use secondary index pieces to support multiple concurrent secondary index
I/Os.
Improved performance with SORTKEYS

The SORTKEYS keyword improves performance of the index key sort. The
SORTKEYS keyword is the default if one of the following conditions is true:
SHRLEVEL is not NONE or SHRLEVEL is NONE, and the target table has one or
more indexes.
Advantages of the SORTKEYS option: With SORTKEYS, index keys are passed in
memory rather than written to work files. Avoiding this I/O to the work files
improves LOAD performance.
You also reduce disk space requirements for the SYSUT1 and SORTOUT data sets,
especially if you provide an estimate of the number of keys to sort.
The SORTKEYS option reduces the elapsed time from the start of the RELOAD
phase to the end of the BUILD phase.
You can reduce the elapsed time of a LOAD job for a table space or partition with
more than one defined index by specifying the parameters to invoke a parallel
index build.
Estimating the number of keys: You can specify an estimate of the number of keys
for the job to sort. If the estimate is omitted or specified as 0, LOAD writes the
extracted keys to the work data set, which reduces the performance improvement
of using SORTKEYS.
To estimate the number of keys to sort:
1. Count 1 for each index.
2. Count 1 for each foreign key where foreign key and index definitions are not
identical.
3. For each foreign key where foreign key and index definitions are identical:
a. Count 0 for the first relationship in which the foreign key participates.
Chapter 16. LOAD
273
b. Count 1 for subsequent relationships in which the foreign key participates

(if any).
4. Multiply the count by the number of rows to be loaded.
If more than one table is being loaded, repeat the preceding steps for each table,
and sum the results.
Related concepts
Building indexes in parallel for LOAD on page 278
Improving performance with LOAD or REORG PREFORMAT

DB2 preformatting sometimes causes delay, which can affect the performance or
execution time consistency of high INSERT applications or LOAD jobs with
RESUME YES SHRLEVEL CHANGE. These LOAD jobs are also referred to as
online LOAD jobs. When these delays occur and when you can predict the table
size for a business processing cycle, consider the LOAD PREFORMAT or REORG
PREFORMAT technique. This technique is of value only when DB2 preformatting
causes a measurable delay with processing or causes inconsistent application
elapsed times for INSERT or online LOAD jobs.
Recommendation: Assess performance before and after using LOAD or REORG
PREFORMAT to quantify its value in your environment.
Considerations for using PREFORMAT

PREFORMAT is a technique that is used to eliminate the need for DB2 to
preformat new pages in a table space during execution time. This technique might
eliminate execution time delays but adds setup time prior to the applications
execution. LOAD or REORG PREFORMAT primes a new table space and prepares
it for INSERT or online LOAD processing. When the preformatted space is utilized
and DB2 needs to extend the table space, normal data set extending and
preformatting occurs.
Preformatting for online LOAD or INSERT processing can be desirable for
high-insert tables that receive a predictable amount of data because all the required
space can be pre-allocated prior to the applications execution. This benefit also
applies to the case of a table that acts as a repository for work items that come into
a system and that are subsequently used to feed a backend task that processes the
work items.
Preformatting of a table space that contains a table that is used for query
processing can cause table space scans to read additional empty pages, extending
the elapsed time for these queries. LOAD or REORG PREFORMAT is not
recommended for tables that have a high ratio of reads to inserts if the reads result
in table space scans.
Preformatting boundaries
You can manage your own data sets or have DB2 manage the data sets. For
user-managed data sets, DB2 does not delete and reallocate them during utility
processing. The size of the data set does not shrink back to the original data set
allocation size but either remains the same or increases in size if additional space
or data is added. This characteristic has implications when LOAD or REORG
PREFORMAT is used because of the preformatting that is done for all free pages
between the high-used RBA (or page) to the high-allocated RBA. This
preformatting includes secondary extents that have been allocated.
274
For DB2-managed data sets, DB2 deletes and reallocates them if you specify
REPLACE on the LOAD or REORG job. This results in the data sets being re-sized
to their original allocation size. They remain that size if the data that is being
reloaded does not fill the primary allocation and forces a secondary allocation. This
means the LOAD or REORG PREFORMAT option with DB2-managed data causes
at least the full primary allocation amount of a data set to be preformatted after
the reload of data into the table space.
For both user-managed and DB2-managed data sets, if the data set goes into
secondary extents during utility processing, the high-allocated RBA becomes the
end of the secondary extent, and that becomes the high value for preformatting.
Preformatting performance considerations

LOAD or REORG PREFORMAT can eliminate dynamic preformatting delays when
inserting into a new table space. The cost of this execution time improvement is an
increase in the LOAD or REORG time due to the additional required processing to
preformat all pages between the data that is loaded or reorganized and the
high-allocated RBA. The additional LOAD or REORG time that is required
depends on the amount of disk space that is being preformatted.
Table space scans can also be elongated because empty preformatted pages are
read. Use the LOAD or REORG PREFORMAT option for table spaces that start out
empty and are filled through high insert activity before any query access is
performed against the table space. Mixing inserts and nonindexed queries against a
preformatted table space might have a negative impact on the query performance
without providing a compensating improvement in the insert performance. You
will see the best results where a high ratio of inserts to read operations exists.
Converting input data

The LOAD utility converts data between compatible data types. The source type is
used for user-defined distinct types.
The tables shown below identify the compatibility of data types for assignments
and comparisons. Y indicates that the data types are compatible. N indicates that
the data types are not compatible. D indicates the defaults that are used when you
do not specify the input data type in a field specification of the INTO TABLE
statement.
The following table shows the compatibility of numeric data types.
Table 39. Compatibility of converting numeric data types.
Input data types
SMALLINT
BIGINT
INTEGER
DECIMAL
FLOAT
DECFLOAT
BIGINT
INTEGER
DECIMAL
FLOAT
DECFLOAT
SMALLINT
Output data types
The following table shows the compatibility of character data types.
Chapter 16. LOAD
275
Table 40. Compatibility of converting character data types.

Input data types
|
|
|
|
Output data types

BLOB
CHAR
VARCHAR
CLOB
GRAPHIC
VARGRAPHIC
DBCLOB
ROWID
BINARY
VARBINARY
Y
CHAR
Y1
Y1
Y1
CHAR MIXED
Y1
Y1
Y1
VARCHAR
Y1
Y1
Y1
VARCHAR
MIXED
Y1
Y1
Y1
GRAPHIC
Y1
Y1
Y1
VAR-GRAPHIC
Y1
Y1
Y1
ROWID
BINARY
VAR-BINARY
Note:
1. Conversion applies when either the input data or the target table is Unicode.
The following table shows the compatibility of time data types.

Table 41. Compatibility of converting time data types.
Input data types
Output data types

DATE
TIME
TIMESTAMP
DATE EXTERNAL
TIME EXTERNAL
TIMESTAMP EXTERNAL
Input fields with data types CHAR, CHAR MIXED, CLOB, DBCLOB, VARCHAR,
VARCHAR MIXED, GRAPHIC, GRAPHIC EXTERNAL, and VARGRAPHIC are
converted from the CCSIDs of the input file to the CCSIDs of the table space when
they do not match. For example:
v You specify the ASCII or UNICODE option for the input data, and the table
space is EBCDIC.
v You specify the EBCDIC or UNICODE option, and the table space is ASCII.
v You specify the ASCII or EBCDIC option, and the table space is Unicode.
v The CCSID option is specified, and the CCSIDs of the input data are not the
same as the CCSIDs of the table space.
CLOB, BLOB, and DBCLOB input field types cannot be converted to any other
field type.
Conversion errors cause LOAD:
v To abend, if no discard data set is provided or if the discard limit is exceeded.
v To map the input record for subsequent discarding and continue (if a discard
data set is provided)
Truncation of the decimal part of numeric data is not considered a conversion
error.
Specifying input fields

You can specify input fields in the LOAD utility control statement.
When you specify input fields, take one of these actions:
276
|
|
v Specify the length of VARCHAR, BLOB, CLOB, DBCLOB, ROWID, and

VARBINARY data in the input file.
v Explicitly define all input field specifications.
v Use DECIMAL EXTERNAL(length,scale) in full.
v Specify decimal points explicitly in the input file.
Specifying the TRUNCATE and STRIP options

You can load certain fields that are longer than the length of target column by
truncating the data. DB2 truncates the data only when you explicitly specify the
TRUNCATE option.
|
|
|
|
|
You can specify TRUNCATE with the CHAR, VARCHAR, GRAPHIC,

VARGRAPHIC, BINARY, and VARBINARY data type options. LOAD first applies
any CCSID conversion, and then truncates the data. The TRUNCATE option of the
LOAD utility truncates string data, and it has a different purpose than the SQL
TRUNCATE scalar function.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can also remove a specified character from the beginning, end, or both ends of
the data by specifying the STRIP option. This option is valid only with the CHAR,
VARCHAR, GRAPHIC, VARGRAPHIC, BINARY, and VARBINARY data type
options. If you specify both the TRUNCATE and STRIP options, LOAD performs
the strip operation first. For example, if you specify both TRUNCATE and STRIP
for a field that is to be loaded into a VARCHAR(5) column, LOAD alters the
character strings as shown in the following table. In this table, an underscore
represents a character that is to be stripped.
Table 42. Results of specifying both TRUNCATE and STRIP for data that is to be loaded into
a VARCHAR(5) column.
Specified STRIP
option
Input string
String after strip

operation
String that is loaded
STRIP BOTH
'_ABCDEFG_'
'ABCDEFG'
'ABCDE'
STRIP LEADING
'_ABC_'
'ABC_'
'ABC_'
STRIP TRAILING
'_ABC_DEF_'
'_ABC_DEF'
'_ABC_'
How LOAD builds indexes while loading data

LOAD builds all the indexes that are defined for any table that is being loaded.
At the same time the indexes are being built, LOAD checks for duplicate values of
any unique index key. If LOAD finds any duplicate values, none of the
corresponding rows are loaded. Error messages identify the input records that
produce duplicates; optionally, the records are copied to a discard data set. At the
end of the job, a summary report lists all errors that are found.
For unique indexes, any two null values are assumed to be equal, unless the index
was created with the UNIQUE WHERE NOT NULL clause. In that case, if the key
is a single column, it can contain any number of null values, although its other
values must be unique.
Neither the loaded table nor its indexes contain any of the records that might have
produced an error. Using the error messages, you can identify faulty input records,
Chapter 16. LOAD
277
correct them, and load them again. If you use a discard data set, you can correct
the records there and add them to the table with LOAD RESUME.
Building indexes in parallel for LOAD

Parallel index build reduces the elapsed time for a LOAD job by sorting the index
keys and rebuilding multiple indexes in parallel, rather than sequentially.
Optimally, a pair of subtasks process each index; one subtask sorts extracted keys
while the other subtask builds the index. LOAD begins building each index as
soon as the corresponding sort produces its first sorted record.
LOAD uses parallel index build if all of the following conditions are true:
v More than one index needs to be built.
v The LOAD utility statement specifies a non-zero estimate of the number of keys
on the SORTKEYS option.
You can either allow the utility to dynamically allocate the data sets that the SORT
phase needs, or provide the necessary data sets yourself. Select one of the
following methods to allocate sort work and message data sets:
Method 1: LOAD determines the optimal number of sort work and message data
sets.
1. Specify the SORTDEVT keyword in the utility statement.
2. Allow dynamic allocation of sort work data sets by not supplying SORTWKnn
DD statements in the LOAD utility JCL.
3. Allocate UTPRINT to SYSOUT.
Method 2: You control allocation of sort work data sets, while LOAD allocates
message data sets.
1. Provide DD statements with DD names in the form SWnnWKmm.
Method 3: You have the most control over rebuild processing; you must specify
both sort work and message data sets.
2. Provide DD statements with DD names in the form UTPRINnn.
Using this method does not eliminate the requirement for a UTPRINT DD card.
Data sets used

If you select Method 2 or 3 in the preceding information, use the following
information to define the necessary data sets.
Each sort subtask must have its own group of sort work data sets and its own
print message data set. Possible reasons to allocate data sets in the utility job JCL
rather than using dynamic allocation are:
v To control the size and placement of the data sets
v To minimize device contention
v To optimally utilize free disk space
v To limit the number of utility subtasks that are used to build indexes
278
The DD names SWnnWKmm define the sort work data sets that are used during
utility processing. nn identifies the subtask pair, and mm identifies one or more
data sets that are to be used by that subtask pair. For example:
SW01WK01
The first sort work data set that is used by the subtask as it builds the first
index.
SW01WK02
The second sort work data set that is used by the subtask as it builds the
first index.
SW02WK01
The first sort work data set that is used by the subtask as it builds the
second index.
SW02WK02
The second sort work data set that is used by the subtask as it builds the
second index.
The DD names UTPRINnn define the sort work message data sets that are used by
the utility subtask pairs. nn identifies the subtask pair.
Determining the number of sort subtasks

The maximum number of utility subtask pairs that are started for parallel index
build is equal to the number of indexes that are to be built.
LOAD determines the number of subtask pairs according to the following
guidelines:
v The number of subtask pairs equals the number of sort work data set groups
that are allocated.
v The number of subtask pairs equals the number of message data sets that are
allocated.
v If you allocate both sort work and message data set groups, the number of
subtask pairs equals the smallest number of data sets that are allocated.
Allocation of sort subtasks

The LOAD utility attempts to assign one sort subtask pair for each index that is to
be built. If the LOAD utility cannot start enough subtasks to build one index per
subtask pair, it allocates any excess indexes across the pairs (in the order that the
indexes were created), so that one or more subtask pairs might build more than
one index.
During parallel index build processing, LOAD assigns all foreign keys to the first
utility subtask pair. Remaining indexes are then distributed among the remaining
subtask pairs according to the creation date of the index. If a table space does not
participate in any relationships, LOAD distributes all indexes among the subtask
pairs according to the index creation date, assigning the first created index to the
first subtask pair.
Refer to the following table for conceptual information about subtask pairing when
the number of indexes (seven indexes) exceeds the available number of subtask
pairs (five subtask pairs).
Chapter 16. LOAD
279
Table 43. LOAD subtask pairing for a relational table space

Subtask pair
Assigned index
SW01WKmm
Foreign keys, fifth created index
SW02WKmm
First created index, sixth created index
SW03WKmm
Second created index, seventh created index
SW04WKmm
Third created index
SW05WKmm
Fourth created index
Estimating the sort work file size

If you choose to provide the data sets, you need to know the size and number of
keys in all of the indexes that are being processed by the subtask in order to
calculate each sort work file size. After you determine which indexes are assigned
to which subtask pairs, use one of the following formulas to calculate the required
space:
v If the indexes being processed include a mixture of data-partitioned secondary
indexes and nonpartitioned indexes, use the following formula: 2 * (longest index
key + 15) * (number of extracted keys)
v Otherwise, if only one type of index is being built, use the following formula: 2 *
(longest index key + 13) * (number of extracted keys)
longest index key
The length of the longest key that is to be processed by the subtask. For
the first subtask pair for LOAD, compare the length of the longest key and
the length of the longest foreign key, and use the larger value. For
nonpadded indexes, longest index key means the maximum possible
length of a key with all varying-length columns, padded to their maximum
lengths, plus 2 bytes for each varying-length column.
number of extracted keys
The number of keys from all indexes that are to be sorted and that the
subtask is to process.
Related concepts
Parallel index building for REORG TABLESPACE on page 509
Related tasks
Improved performance with SORTKEYS on page 273
How LOAD leaves free space

When loading into a nonsegmented table space, LOAD leaves one free page after
reaching the FREEPAGE limit, regardless of whether the loaded records belong to
the same or different tables.
When loading into a segmented table space, LOAD leaves free pages, and free
space on each page, in accordance with the current values of the FREEPAGE and
PCTFREE parameters. (You can set those values with the CREATE TABLESPACE,
ALTER TABLESPACE, CREATE INDEX, or ALTER INDEX statements.) LOAD
leaves one free page after reaching the FREEPAGE limit for each table in the table
space.
For XML table spaces, FREEPAGE and PCTFREE are not processed until the first
REORG.
|
|
280
Loading with RECOVER-pending, REBUILD-pending, or

REORG-pending status
You cannot load records by specifying RESUME YES if any partition of a table
space is in the RECOVER-pending status. In addition, you cannot load records if
any index on the table that is being loaded is in the REBUILD-pending status.
|
|
|
|
|
If you are replacing a partition, these preceding restrictions are relaxed; the
partition that is being replaced can be in the RECOVER-pending status, and its
corresponding index partition can be in the REBUILD-pending status. However, all
secondary indexes must not be in the page set REBUILD-pending status and
KEEPDICTIONARY must not have been specified on active compressed partitions.
The one RECOVER-pending restrictive status has the following description:
RECP RECOVER-pending status is set on a table space or partition. If a single
logical partition is in RECP status, the partition is treated as RECP status
for SQL access. A single logical partition in RECP status does not restrict
utility access to other logical partitions that are not in RECP status. RECP
status is reset by recovering only the single logical partition.
The four REBUILD-pending restrictive states have the following descriptions:
RBDP REBUILD-pending status is set on a physical or logical index partition. The
individual physical or logical partition is inaccessible and must be rebuilt
by using the REBUILD INDEX utility, or recovered by using the RECOVER
utility.
PSRBD
Page set REBUILD-pending is set on nonpartitioned secondary indexes.
Partitioned indexes, including data-partitioned secondary indexes, are
never placed in a page set REBUILD-pending status. The entire index
space is inaccessible until you rebuild it with the REBUILD utility, or
recover it with the RECOVER utility.
RBDP*
REBUILD-pending star status is set only on logical partitions of
nonpartitioning indexes. The entire index is inaccessible, but it is made
available again when the affected partitions are rebuilt by using the
REBUILD INDEX utility, or recovered by using the RECOVER utility.
The one REORG-pending restrictive status has the following description:
REORP
REORG-pending status indicates that a table space or partition needs to be
reorganized.
Related concepts
Resetting the REBUILD-pending status on page 372
Exit procedures
Any field procedure that is associated with a column of a table that is being loaded
is executed to encode the data before it is loaded. The field procedures for all
columns are executed before any edit or validation procedure for the row.
Chapter 16. LOAD
281
Any field specification that describes the data is checked before a field procedure is
executed. That is, the field specification must describe the data as it appears in the
input record.
Loading ROWID columns

Columns that are defined as ROWID can be designated as input fields; refer to the
LOAD field specification syntax diagram. LOAD PART is not allowed if the
ROWID column is part of the partitioning key. In this situation, DB2 issues error
message DSNU256I.
Columns that are defined as ROWID can be designated as GENERATED BY
DEFAULT or GENERATED ALWAYS. With GENERATED ALWAYS, DB2 always
generates a row ID.
ROWID generated by default

The LOAD utility can set from input data columns that are defined as ROWID
GENERATED BY DEFAULT. The input field must be specified as a ROWID. No
conversions are allowed. The input data for a ROWID column must be a unique,
valid value for a row ID. If the value of the row is not unique, a duplicate key
violation occurs. If such an error occurs, the load fails. In this case, you need to
discard the duplicate value and re-run the LOAD job with a new unique value, or
allow DB2 to generate the value of the row ID.
You can use the DEFAULTIF attribute with the ROWID keyword. If the condition
is met, the column is loaded with a value that is generated by DB2. You cannot use
the NULLIF attribute with the ROWID keyword because row ID columns cannot
be null.
Row change timestamp generated always

The row change timestamp column that is defined as GENERATED ALWAYS
cannot be included in the field specification list unless you specify IGNOREFIELDS
YES, because DB2 generates the timestamp value for this column.
|
|
|
Loading a LOB column

LOB columns are treated by the LOAD utility as varying-length data. The length
value for a LOB column must be 4 bytes.
You can load LOB values in one of the following ways:
v Load the LOB value directly from the input data set: Use this method only
when the sum of the lengths of all of the columns to be loaded, including the
LOB column, does not exceed 32 KB. To load a LOB value directly from the
input data set:
1. In the input data set, include the LOB value preceded by a 2-byte binary
field that contains the length of the LOB.
2. Specify CLOB, BLOB, or DBCLOB in the field specification portion of the
LOAD statement. These options indicate that the field in the input data set is
a LOB value. For example, to load a CLOB into the RESUME column, specify
something like RESUME POSITION(7) CLOB. This specification indicates that
position 7 of the input data set contains the length of the CLOB followed by
the CLOB value that is to be loaded into the RESUME column.
282
v Load the LOB value from a file that is listed in the input data set: When you
load a LOB value from a file, the LOB value can be greater than 32 KB. To load
a LOB value from a file:
1. In the input data set, specify the names of the files that contain the LOB
values. Each file can be either a PDS, PDSE, or an HFS file.
2. Specify either BLOBF, CLOBF, or DBCLOBF in the field specification portion
of the LOAD statement. For example, to load a LOB into the RESUME
column of a table, specify something like RESUME POSITION(7) VARCHAR CLOBF.
This specification indicates that position 7 of the input data set contains the
name of a file from which a varying-length CLOB is to be loaded into the
RESUME column.
v Load data from another table: To transfer data from one location to another
location or from one table to another table at the same location, use a cursor.
This method of loading data is called the cross-loader function.
When you use the cross-loader function, the LOB value can be greater than 32
KB. For this method, DB2 uses a separate buffer for LOB data and therefore
stores only 8 bytes per LOB column. The sum of the lengths of the non-LOB
columns plus the sum of 8 bytes per LOB column cannot exceed 32 KB.
Related tasks
Loading data by using the cross-loader function on page 270
LOAD LOG on a LOB table space

A LOB table space that was defined with LOG YES or LOG NO affects logging
during the load of a LOB column.
The following table shows the logging output and LOB table space effect, if any.
Table 44. LOAD LOG and REORG LOG impact for a LOB table space
LOAD LOG/ REORG LOB table space LOG
LOG keyword
attribute
What is logged
LOB table space

status after utility
completes
LOG YES
LOG YES
Control information and LOB data
No pending status
LOG YES
LOG NO
Control information
No pending status
LOG NO
LOG YES
Nothing
COPY-Pending1
LOG NO
LOG NO
Nothing
COPY-Pending1
Note:
1. REORG LOG NO of a LOB table space requires SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, which requires that an inline copy be
taken during the REORG. This means that you never set COPY-pending for REORG of LOB table spaces under
any circumstances
Loading an XML column
|
|
XML columns are treated by the LOAD utility as varying-length data. The length
value for an XML column must be 2 bytes.
|
|
|
|
|
You can load XML values in one of the following ways:

v Load the XML value directly from the input data set: Use this method only
when the sum of the lengths of all of the columns to be loaded, including the
XML column, does not exceed 32 KB. To load an XML value directly from the
input data set:
Chapter 16. LOAD
283
1. In the input data set, include the XML value preceded by a 2-byte binary
field that contains the length of the XML column.
2. When loading directly from an input record, you must specify XML as the
input field type. This is the only acceptable input field type for loading XML
column from input record. For example, to load a data into the RESUME
column which is XML, specify something like RESUME POSITION(7) XML. This
specification indicates that position 7 of the input data set contains the length
of the XML followed by the XML value that is to be loaded into the
RESUME column.
v Load the XML value from a file that is listed in the input data set: When you
load an XML value from a file, the XML value can be greater than 32 KB. To
load an XML value from a file:
1. In the input data set, specify the name of the file that contains the value to
be loaded to the XML column. The file name can be a PDS, PDSE or a HFS
file.
2. Specify either BLOBF, CLOBF, or DBCLOBF in the field specification portion
of the LOAD statement. For example, to load a CLOB file into an XML
column RESUME, specify something like RESUME POSITION(7) VARCHAR CLOBF.
This specification indicates that position 7 of the input data set contains the
name of a file from which a varying-length CLOB is to be loaded into the
RESUME column.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
LOAD LOG on an XML table space

An XML table space that was defined with LOG YES or LOG NO affects logging
during the load of an XML column. The following table shows the logging output
and XML table space effect, if any.
|
|
|
| Table 45. LOAD LOG impact for an XML table space

|
XML table space
|
| LOAD LOG keyword LOG attribute
What is logged
XML table space

completes
| LOG YES
LOG YES
Data
No pending status
| LOG YES
LOG NO
Nothing
No pending status
| LOG NO
LOG YES
Nothing
COPY-Pending
| LOG NO
|
LOG NO
Nothing
ICOPY-Pending
|
|
Running LOAD RESUME YES SHRLEVEL CHANGE without logging
You can run LOAD RESUME YES SHRLEVEL CHANGE without logging.
|
|
|
|
|
To
1.
2.
3.
4.
|
|
|
You cannot restart LOAD against a NOT LOGGED table space. If the load fails,
terminate the load job, recover the data from a prior image copy, and rerun the
LOAD job.
284
run LOAD RESUME YES SHRLEVEL CHANGE without logging:

Alter the table space to NOT LOGGED.
Run the online LOAD RESUME.
Alter the table space back to LOGGED.
Take an image copy of the table space.
Collecting inline statistics while loading a table

If you do not specify LOAD RESUME YES, you can use the STATISTICS keyword
to gather inline statistics. Using the STATISTICS keyword eliminates the need to
run RUNSTATS after loading a table space. However, if you perform a LOAD
PART operation, you should run RUNSTATS INDEX on the nonpartitioned
secondary indexes to update the catalog data about these indexes.
Use either the STATISTICS option or the RUNSTATS utility to collect statistics so
that the DB2 catalog statistics contain information about the newly loaded data.
Recording these new statistics enables DB2 to select SQL paths with accurate
information. Then rebind any application plans that depend on the loaded tables to
update the path selection of any embedded SQL statements.
|
|
If you perform a LOAD operation on a base table that contains an XML column,
DB2 does not collect inline statistics for the related XML table space or its indexes.
Collecting inline statistics for discarded rows: If you specify the DISCARDDN
and STATISTICS options and a row is found with check constraint errors or
conversion errors, the row is not loaded into the table and DB2 does not collect
inline statistics on it. However, the LOAD utility collects inline statistics prior to
discarding rows that have unique index violations or referential integrity
violations. In these cases, if the number of discarded rows is large enough to make
the statistics significantly inaccurate, run the RUNSTATS utility separately on the
table to gather the most accurate statistics.
Collecting inline statistics for data partitioned secondary indexes: To collect
inline statistics on data partitioned secondary indexes, you must allocate sort work
data sets.
Related reference
Data sets that LOAD uses on page 249
Inline COPY for a base table space

If you take an inline image copy of a table that has LOB columns, DB2 makes a
copy of the base table space, but does not copy the LOB table spaces.
Termination of LOAD
You can terminate a LOAD utility job.
If you terminate LOAD by using the TERM UTILITY command during the reload
phase, the records are not erased. The table space remains in RECOVER-pending
status, and indexes remain in the REBUILD-pending status.
If you terminate LOAD by using the TERM UTILITY command during the sort or
build phases, the indexes that are not yet built remain in the REBUILD-pending
status.
If you terminate a LOAD SHRLEVEL CHANGE, uncommitted records are rolled
back, but committed records remain in the table. The table space is not in
RECOVER-pending status, and the indexes are not in REBUILD-pending status.
If the LOAD job terminates during the RELOAD, SORT, BUILD, or SORTBLD
phases, both RESTART and RESTART(PHASE) phases restart from the beginning of
Chapter 16. LOAD
285
the RELOAD phase. However, restart of LOAD RESUME YES or LOAD PART
RESUME YES in the BUILD or SORTBLD phase results in message DSNU257I.
The following table lists the LOAD phases and their effects on any pending states
when the utility is terminated in a particular phase.
Table 46. LOAD phases and their effects on pending states when terminated.
Phase
Effect on pending status
Reload
v
v
v
v
Build
v Resets REBUILD-pending status for non unique indexes.
Indexval
v Resets REBUILD-pending status for unique indexes.
Enforce
v Resets CHECK-pending status for table space.
Places
Places
Places
Places
table space in RECOVER-pending status, then resets the status.

indexes in REBUILD-pending status.
table space in COPY-pending status.
table space in CHECK-pending status.
Restart of LOAD
You can restart a LOAD utility job.
You can restart LOAD at its last commit point (RESTART(CURRENT)) or at the
beginning of the phase during which operation ceased (RESTART(PHASE)). LOAD
output messages identify the completed phases; use the DISPLAY command to
identify the specific phase during which operation stopped.
By default, DB2 uses RESTART(CURRENT), except if LOAD is restarting during
the UTILINIT phase or the UTILTERM phase. In both of these situations, DB2 uses
RESTART(PHASE) by default. You can override the default RESTART values by
using the RESTART parameter.
The following restrictions apply to restarting LOAD jobs:
v If LOAD abnormally terminates or a system failure occurs while LOAD is in the
UTILTERM phase, you must restart with RESTART(PHASE).
v If you restart a LOAD job for a table that has LOB columns that specified the
RESUME YES option and SORTKEYS NO specified on the stopped job, you
must use RESTART(CURRENT).
v If you use RESTART(PHASE) to restart a LOAD job that specified RESUME NO,
the LOB table spaces and indexes on auxiliary tables are reset.
v For a table that has LOB columns, you cannot restart a LOAD job that uses the
INCURSOR option.
v If you restart a LOAD job that uses the STATISTICS keyword, inline statistics
collection does not occur. To update catalog statistics, run the RUNSTATS utility
after the restarted LOAD job completes.
v If you are using a BatchPipes file, you cannot restart the LOAD utility. If the
application that populates the BatchPipes file terminates, you need to terminate
the job where LOAD is executing. If the LOAD utility was invoked from a
stored procedure, you also need to terminate the WLM application environment
of the LOAD utility that reads the BatchPipes file. After you terminate the job,
terminate the LOAD utility using the DB2 TERM UTILITY command, and then
you can resubmit the LOAD job.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
286
The following table provides information about restarting LOAD, depending on

the phase that LOAD was in when the job stopped. The TYPE column
distinguishes between the effects of specifying RESTART or RESTART(PHASE).
Additional phase restrictions are explained in the notes.
Table 47. LOAD restart information
Phase
Type of
RESTART
RELOAD
SORT
BUILD
SORTBLD
INDEXVAL
ENFORCE
DISCARD
REPORT
Required data sets
Notes
CURRENT
SYSREC and SYSUT1 SYSMAP

and SYSERR
1, 2, 10
PHASE
SYSREC
3, 10
CURRENT
SYSUT1
4, 10
PHASE
SYSUT1
10
CURRENT
SORTOUT
4, 5, 10
PHASE
SORTOUT
5, 10
CURRENT
SYSUT1 and SORTOUT
5, 6, 10
PHASE
SYSUT1 and SORTOUT
5, 6, 10
CURRENT
SYSERR or SYSUT1
PHASE
SYSERR or SYSUT1
CURRENT
SORTOUT and SYSUT1
PHASE
SORTOUT and SYSUT1
CURRENT
SYSMAP and SYSERR SORTOUT

and SYSUT1
7, 8
PHASE
SYSMAP and SYSERR SORTOUT

and SYSUT1
7, 8
CURRENT
SYSERR or SORTOUT SYSMAP

and SYSERR
7, 9
PHASE
SYSERR or SORTOUT SYSMAP

and SYSERR
7, 9
Note:
1. SYSMAP and SYSERR data sets might not be required for all load jobs.
2. If the SYSERR data set is not required and has not been provided, LOAD uses SYSUT1
as a work data set to contain error information.
3. You must not restart during the RELOAD phase if you specified SYSREC DD *.This
statement prevents internal commits from being taken, and RESTART performs like
RESTART(PHASE), except with no data back out. Also, you must not restart if your
SYSREC input consists of multiple, concatenated data sets.
4. The utility can be restarted with either RESTART or RESTART(PHASE). However,
because this phase does not take checkpoints, RESTART is always re-executed from the
beginning of the phase.
5. A LOAD RESUME YES job cannot be restarted in the BUILD or SORTBLD phase.
6. Use RESTART or RESTART(PHASE) to restart at the beginning of the RELOAD phase.
7. This utility can be restarted with either RESTART or RESTART(PHASE).However, the
utility can be re-executed from the last internal checkpoint. This is dependent on the
data sets that are used and whether any input data sets have been rewritten.
8. The SYSUT1 data set is required if the target table space is segmented or partitioned.
9. If report is required and this is a load without discard processing, SYSMAP is required
to complete the report phase.
10. Any job that finished abnormally in the RELOAD, SORT, BUILD, or SORTBUILD phase
restarts from the beginning of the RELOAD phase.
Chapter 16. LOAD
287
You can restart LOAD at its last commit point or at the beginning of the phase
during which operation ceased. LOAD output messages identify the completed
phases; use the DISPLAY command to identify the specific phase during which
operation stopped.
Related concepts
Related tasks
After running LOAD

You can perform certain activities after you run the LOAD utility.
Copying the loaded table space or partition

If you use LOG YES, consider taking a full image copy of the loaded table space or
partition to reduce the processing time of subsequent recovery operations. If you
also specify RESUME NO or REPLACE, indicating that this is the first load into
the table space, taking two or more full image copies is recommended to enable
recovery.
Alternatively, take primary and backup inline copies when you do a LOAD
REPLACE; full table space or partition image copies that are taken after the LOAD
completes are not necessary. However, you might need to take images copies of
indexes.
Resetting COPY-pending status

If you load with LOG NO and do not take an inline copy, LOAD places a table
space in the COPY-pending status. Immediately after that operation, DB2 cannot
recover the table space (although you can, by loading it again).
Prepare for recovery, and turn off the restriction, by making a full image copy
using SHRLEVEL REFERENCE. (If you end the copy job before it is finished, the
table space is still in COPY-pending status.)
You can also remove the restriction by using one of these operations:
v LOAD REPLACE LOG YES
v LOAD REPLACE LOG NO with an inline copy
v REORG LOG YES
v REORG LOG NO with an inline copy
v REPAIR SET with NOCOPYPEND
If you use LOG YES and do not make an image copy of the table space,
subsequent recovery operations are possible but take longer than if you had made
an image copy.
A table space that is in COPY-pending status can be read without restriction;
however, it cannot be updated.
Resetting REBUILD-pending status

LOAD sets index spaces to REBUILD-pending status when a REBUILD job ends
before the INDEXVAL phase is complete.
288
LOAD places all the index spaces for a table space in the REBUILD-pending status
if you end the job (by using the TERM UTILITY command) before it completes the
INDEXVAL phase. DB2 places the table space in RECOVER-pending status if you
end the job before the job completes the RELOAD phase.
Resetting the RECOVER-pending status depends on when the utility terminated:
v If the data is intact and you have a full image copy of the affected indexes, you
can recover the indexes using the RECOVER INDEX utility. Run the DISPLAY
DATABASE command and examine the output. Data is intact when the output
indicates that the indexes are in REBUILD-pending status and the table space is
not in RECOVER-pending status. If you do not have an image copy available,
you must rebuild the entire index by using the REBUILD INDEX utility.
However, for partitioning indexes and for secondary indexes that are in
REBUILD-pending (RBDP) status, you can use the PART option of REBUILD
INDEX to rebuild separate partitions of the index.
v If the data is not intact, you can either load the table again or recover it to a
prior point of consistency. Run the DISPLAY DATABASE command and examine
the output. The recovery puts the table space into COPY-pending status and
places all indexes in REBUILD-pending status.
Resetting the CHECK-pending status

LOAD places a table space in the CHECK-pending status if its referential integrity
is in doubt or its check constraints are violated. The intent of the restriction is to
encourage the use of the CHECK DATA utility, which locates invalid data and,
optionally, removes it.
If CHECK DATA removes the invalid data, the remaining data satisfies all check
and referential constraints and the CHECK-pending restriction is lifted.
Although CHECK DATA is usually preferred, you can also reset the
CHECK-pending status by using any of the following operations:
v Drop tables that contain invalid rows.
v Replace the data in the table space, by using LOAD REPLACE and enforcing
check and referential constraints.
v Recover all members of the table space that were set to a prior quiesce point.
v Use REPAIR SET with NOCHECKPEND.
Running CHECK DATA after LOAD REPLACE

Suppose that you choose to replace the contents of the project table by using
LOAD REPLACE. While doing that, you let LOAD enforce its referential and table
check constraints, so that the project table contains only valid records at the end of
the job; it is not in the CHECK-pending status. However, its dependent, the project
activity table, is placed in CHECK-pending status: some of its rows might have
project numbers that are no longer present in the project table. (If the project table
had any other dependents, they also would be in CHECK-pending status.)
You want to run CHECK DATA against the table space that contains the project
activity table to reset the status. First, review the review the description of DELETE
YES and exception tables. Then, when you run the utility, ensure the availability of
all table spaces that contain either parent tables or dependent tables of any table in
the table spaces that are being checked.
Chapter 16. LOAD
289
DELETE YES
This option deletes invalid records and resets the status, but it is not the
default. Use DELETE NO, the default, to find out quickly how large your
problem is; you can choose to correct it by reloading, rather than correcting
the current situation.
Exception tables
With DELETE YES, you do not use a discard data set to receive copies of
the invalid records; instead, you use another DB2 table called an exception
table. This topic assumes that you already have an exception table
available for every table that is subject to referential or table check
constraints.
If you use DELETE YES, you must name an exception table for every
descendent of every table in every table space that is being checked.
Deletes that are caused by CHECK DATA are not subject to any of the SQL
delete rules; they cascade without restraint to the lowest-level descendent.
If table Y is the exception table for table X, name it with the following
clause in the CHECK DATA statement:
FOR EXCEPTION IN X USE Y
Error and sort data sets

The options ERRDDN, WORKDDN, SORTDEVT, and SORTNUM work in CHECK
DATA just as they do in LOAD. That is, you need an error data set, and you can
name work data sets for sort and merge processing or let DB2 allocate them
dynamically.
Example:
In the following example, CHECK DATA is to be run against the table space that
contains the project activity table. Assume that the exception tables
DSN8910.EPROJACT and DSN8910.EEPA exist.
CHECK DATA TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.PROJACT
DELETE YES
FOR EXCEPTION IN DSN8910.PROJACT USE DSN8910.EPROJACT
SORTDEVT SYSDA
SORTNUM 4
If the statement does not name error or work data sets, the JCL for the job must
contain DD statements similar to the following DD statements:
//SYSERR
DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(4000,(20,20),,,ROUND)
//SYSUT1
//SORTOUT DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(4000,(20,20),,,ROUND)
//UTPRINT DD SYSOUT=A
Running CHECK DATA after LOAD RESUME

Suppose now that you want to add records to both the project and project activity
tables by using LOAD RESUME. Furthermore, you want to run both jobs at the
same time, which you can do because the tables belong to separate table spaces.
The only new consideration is that you must load the project activity table by
using ENFORCE NO because you cannot assume that the parent project table is
already fully loaded.
When the two jobs are complete, what table spaces are in CHECK-pending status?
290
v If you enforced constraints when loading the project table, the table space is not
in CHECK-pending status.
v Because you did not enforce constraints on the project activity table, the table
space is in CHECK-pending status.
v Because you used LOAD RESUME (not LOAD REPLACE) when loading the
project activity table, its dependents (the employee-to-project-activity table) are
not in CHECK-pending status. That is, the operation might not delete any
parent rows from the project table, and therefore might not violate the referential
integrity of its dependent. However if you delete records from PROJACT when
checking, you still need an exception table for EMPPROJACT.
Therefore you should check the data in the project activity table.
DB2 records the identifier of the first row of the table that might violate referential
or table check constraints. For partitioned table spaces, that identifier is in
SYSIBM.SYSTABLEPART; for nonpartitioned table spaces, that identifier is in
SYSIBM.SYSTABLES. The SCOPE PENDING option speeds the checking by
confining it to just the rows that might be in error.
Example:
In the following example, CHECK DATA is to be run against the table space that
contains the project activity table after LOAD RESUME:
CHECK DATA TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.PROJACT
SCOPE PENDING
DELETE YES
FOR EXCEPTION IN DSN8910.PROJACT USE DSN8910.EPROJACT
SORTDEVT SYSDA
SORTNUM 4
As before, the JCL for the job needs DD statements to define the error and sort
data sets.
Related reference
Create exception tables on page 76
Running CHECK INDEX after loading a table that has indexes

The CHECK INDEX utility tests whether an index is consistent with the data it
indexes and issues error messages if it finds an inconsistency.
If you have any reason to doubt the accuracy of an index (for example, if the result
of an SQL SELECT COUNT statement is inconsistent with RUNSTATS output), run
CHECK INDEX. You might also want to run CHECK INDEX after any LOAD
operation that shows some abnormal condition in its execution, or even run it
periodically to verify the accuracy of important indexes.
To rebuild an index that is inconsistent with its data, use the REBUILD INDEX
utility.
Recovering a failed LOAD job

To facilitate recovery in case of failure, DB2 inserts the SYSCOPY record at the
beginning of the RELOAD phase if LOG YES is specified in the LOAD control
statement.
Chapter 16. LOAD
291
As a result, you can recover the data to a point in time before the LOAD by using
RECOVER TORBA.
Reorganization of an auxiliary index after LOAD

Indexes on the auxiliary tables are not built during the BUILD phase. Instead, LOB
values are inserted (not loaded) into auxiliary tables during the RELOAD phase as
each row is loaded into the base table, and each index on the auxiliary table is
updated as part of the insert operation.
Because the LOAD utility inserts keys into an auxiliary index, free space within the
index might be consumed and index page splits might occur. Consider
reorganizing an index on the auxiliary table after LOAD completes to introduce
free space into the index for future inserts and loads.
Effects of running LOAD

The effects of running LOAD can be different, depending on your situation.
This topic contains information about the effects of running the LOAD utility.
The effect of LOAD on index version numbers

DB2 stores the range of used index version numbers in the OLDEST_VERSION
and CURRENT_VERSION columns of the following catalog tables:
v SYSIBM.SYSINDEXES
v SYSIBM.SYSINDEXPART
The OLDEST_VERSION column contains the oldest used version number, and the
CURRENT_VERSION column contains the current version number.
When you run LOAD with the REPLACE option, the utility updates this range of
used version numbers for indexes that are defined with the COPY NO attribute.
LOAD REPLACE sets the OLDEST_VERSION column to the current version
number, which indicates that only one version is active; DB2 can then reuse all of
the other version numbers.
Recycling of version numbers is required when all of the version numbers are
being used. All version numbers are being used when one of the following
situations is true:
v The value in the CURRENT_VERSION column is one less than the value in the
OLDEST_VERSION column.
v The value in the CURRENT_VERSION column is 15, and the value in the
OLDEST_VERSION column is 0 or 1.
You can also run REBUILD INDEX, REORG INDEX, or REORG TABLESPACE to
recycle version numbers for indexes that are defined with the COPY NO attribute.
To recycle version numbers for indexes that are defined with the COPY YES
attribute or for table spaces, run MODIFY RECOVERY.
The effect of LOAD REPLACE on the control interval

When you run a LOAD job with the REPLACE option but without the REUSE
option and the data set that contains the data is DB2-managed, DB2 deletes this
data set before the LOAD and redefines a new data set with a control interval that
matches the page size.
292
The effect of LOAD on NOT LOGGED table spaces

The following table shows the effect of LOAD on NOT LOGGED table spaces.
Table 48. LOAD parameters
LOAD REORG LOG
keyword
Table space logging

attribute
Table space type
What is logged
Table space status

after utility
completes
LOG YES
NOT LOGGED
Non-LOB
LOG YES changes to

LOG NO
No pending status or
ICOPY-pending1
LOG YES
NOT LOGGED
LOB
control information
No pending status
LOG NO
NOT LOGGED
Non-LOB
nothing
ICOPY-pending1
LOG NO
NOT LOGGED
LOB
nothing
No pending status
Note:
1. The table space is set to ICOPY-pending status if the records are discarded and no pending status if the records
are not discarded.
Related information
Table space versions (DB2 Administration Guide)
Sample LOAD control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own LOAD
control statements.
Example 1: Specifying field positions

The control statement specifies that the LOAD utility is to load the records from
the data set that is defined by the SYSREC DD statement into table
DSN8810.DEPT. SYSREC is the default input data set.
Each POSITION clause specifies the location of a field in the input record. In this
example, LOAD accepts the input that is shown in Figure 35 on page 294 and
interprets it as follows:
v The first 3 bytes of each record are loaded into the DEPTNO column of the
table.
v The next 36 bytes, including trailing blanks, are loaded into the DEPTNAME
column.
If this input column were defined as VARCHAR(36), the input data would need
to contain a 2-byte binary length field preceding the data. This binary field
would begin at position 4.
v The next three fields are loaded into columns that are defined as CHAR(6),
CHAR(3), and CHAR(16).
The RESUME YES clause specifies that the table space does not need to be empty;
new records are added to the end of the table.
Chapter 16. LOAD
293
LOAD DATA
RESUME YES
(DEPTNO
POSITION (1:3)
CHAR(3),
DEPTNAME POSITION (4:39)
CHAR(36),
MGRNO
POSITION (40:45)
CHAR(6),
ADMRDEPT POSITION (46:48)
CHAR(3),
LOCATION POSITION (49:64)
CHAR(16))
Figure 34. Example of a LOAD statement that specifies field positions
Figure 35. shows the input to the preceding LOAD job.

A00SPIFFY COMPUTER SERVICE DIV.
B01PLANNING
C01INFORMATION CENTER
D01DEVELOPMENT CENTER
000010A00USIBMSTODB21
A00USIBMSTODB21
Figure 35. Records in an input data set for LOAD
The following table shows the result of executing the statement SELECT * FROM
DSN8910.DEPT after the preceding input records are loaded.
Table 49. Data that is loaded into a table
DEPTNO
DEPTNAME
A00
SPIFFY
000010
COMPUTER
SERVICE DIV.
PLANNING
000020
INFORMATION 000030
CENTER
DEVELOPMENT
CENTER
B01
C01
D01
MGRNO
ADMRDEPT
LOCATION
A00
USIBMSTODB21
A00
A00
USIBMSTODB21
USIBMSTODB21
A00
USIBMSTODB21
Example 2: Replacing data in a given partition

The following control statement specifies that data from the data set that is defined
by the SYSREC DD statement is to be loaded into the first partition of table
DSN8810.DEPT. The default input data set is SYSREC. The REPLACE option
indicates that the input data is to replace only the specified partition. If the
REPLACE option was specified before the PART option, REPLACE would indicate
that entire table space is to be replaced, and the data is to be loaded into the
specified partition. Note that the keyword DATA does not need to be specified.
LOAD
INTO TABLE DSN8910.DEPT PART 1 REPLACE
Example 3: Loading selected records into multiple tables

The control statement in specifies that the LOAD utility is to load certain data from
the EMPLDS input data set into tables DSN8910.EMP, SMITH.EMPEMPL, and
DSN8810.DEPT. The input data set is identified by the INDDN option. The WHEN
clauses indicate which records are to be loaded into each table. For the EMP and
DEPT tables, the utility is to load only records that begin with the string LKA. For
the EMPEMPL table, the utility is to load only records that begin with the string
ABC. The RESUME YES option indicates that the table space does not need to be
empty for the LOAD job to proceed. The new rows are added to the end of the
tables. This example assumes that the first two tables being loaded have exactly
the same forma, and that the input data matches that format; therefore, no field
294
specifications are needed for those two INTO TABLE clauses. The third table has a
different format, so field specifications are required and are supplied in the
example.
The POSITION clauses specify the location of the fields in the input data for the
DEPT table. For each source record that is to be loaded into the DEPT table:
v The characters in positions 7 through 9 are loaded into the DEPTNO column.
v The characters in positions 10 through 35 are loaded into the DEPTNAME
column.
v The characters in positions 36 through 41 are loaded into the MGRNO column.
v The characters in positions 42 through 44 are loaded into the ADMRDEPT
column.
LOAD DATA INDDN EMPLDS
RESUME YES
INTO TABLE DSN8910.EMP
WHEN (1:3)='LKA'
INTO TABLE SMITH.EMPEMPL
WHEN (1:3)='ABC'
WHEN (1:3)='LKA'
(DEPTNO POSITION (7:9) CHAR,
DEPTNAME POSITION (10:35) CHAR,
MGRNO POSITION (36:41) CHAR,
ADMRDEPT POSITION (42:44) CHAR)
Figure 36. Example LOAD statement that loads selected records into multiple tables
Example 4: Loading data of different data types

The control statement specifies that LOAD is to load data from the SYSRECPJ
input data set into table DSN8910.PROJ. The input data set is identified by the
INDDN option. Assume that the table space that contains table DSN8910.PROJ is
currently empty.
For each input record, data is loaded into the specified columns (that is, PROJNO,
PROJNAME, DEPTNO, and so on) to form a table row. Any other PROJ columns
that are not specified in the LOAD control statement are set to the default value.
The POSITION clauses define the starting positions of the fields in the input data
set. The ending positions of the fields in the input data set are implicitly defined
either by the length specification of the data type (CHAR length) or the length
specification of the external numeric data type (LENGTH).
The numeric data that is represented in SQL constant format (EXTERNAL format)
is converted to the correct internal format by the LOAD process and placed in the
indicated column names. The two dates (PRSTDATE and PRENDATE) are
assumed to be represented by eight digits and two separator characters, as in the
USA format (for example, 11/15/2006). The length of the date fields is given as 10
explicitly, although in many cases, the default is the same value.
Chapter 16. LOAD
295
LOAD DATA INDDN(SYSRECPJ)

INTO TABLE DSN8910.PROJ
(PROJNO
POSITION (1)
PROJNAME POSITION (8)
DEPTNO
POSITION (31)
RESPEMP POSITION (35)
PRSTAFF POSITION (42)
PRSTDATE POSITION (48)
PRENDATE POSITION (59)
MAJPROJ POSITION (70)
CHAR(6),
CHAR(22),
CHAR(3),
CHAR(6),
DECIMAL EXTERNAL(5),
DATE EXTERNAL(10),
DATE EXTERNAL(10),
CHAR(6))
Figure 37. Example of loading data of different data types
Example 5: Loading data in delimited file format

The control statement specifies that data in delimited format is to be loaded into
the specified columns (FILENO, DATE1, TIME1, and TIMESTMP) in table
TBQB0103. The FORMAT DELIMITED option indicates that the data is in
delimited format. The data is to be loaded from the SYSREC data set, which is the
default.
The COLDEL option indicates that the column delimiter is a comma (,). The
CHARDEL option indicates that the character string delimiter is a double
quotation mark (). The DECPT option indicates that the decimal point character is
a period (.). You are not required to explicitly specify these particular characters,
because they are all defaults.
//*
//STEP3
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='JUQBU101.LOAD2',TIME=1440,
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='SSTR'
//SYSERR DD DSN=JUQBU101.LOAD2.STEP3.SYSERR,
//
//
SPACE=(4096,(20,20),,,ROUND)
//SYSDISC DD DSN=JUQBU101.LOAD2.STEP3.SYSDISC,
//
//
SPACE=(4096,(20,20),,,ROUND)
//SYSMAP DD DSN=JUQBU101.LOAD2.STEP3.SYSMAP,
//
//
SPACE=(4096,(20,20),,,ROUND)
//SYSUT1 DD DSN=JUQBU101.LOAD2.STEP3.SYSUT1,
//
//
SPACE=(4096,(20,20),,,ROUND)
//UTPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
//SORTOUT DD DSN=JUQBU101.LOAD2.STEP3.SORTOUT,
//
//
SPACE=(4096,(20,20),,,ROUND)
//SYSIN
DD *
LOAD DATA
FORMAT DELIMITED COLDEL ',' CHARDEL '"' DECPT '.'
INTO TABLE TBQB0103
(FILENO
CHAR,
DATE1
DATE EXTERNAL,
TIME1
TIME EXTERNAL,
TIMESTMP TIMESTAMP EXTERNAL)
/*
//SYSREC DD *
"001", 2000-02-16, 00.00.00, 2000-02-16-00.00.00.0000
"002", 2001-04-17, 06.30.00, 2001-04-17-06.30.00.2000
"003", 2002-06-18, 12.30.59, 2002-06-18-12.30.59.4000
"004", 1991-08-19, 18.59.30, 1991-08-19-18.59.30.8000
"005", 2000-12-20, 24.00.00, 2000-12-20-24.00.00.0000
/*
296
Figure 38. Example of loading data in delimited file format
Example 6: Concatenating multiple input records

The control statement specifies that data from the SYSRECOV input data set is to
be loaded into table DSN8910.TOPTVAL. The input data set is identified by the
INDDN option. The table space that contains the TOPTVAL table is currently
empty.
Some of the data that is to be loaded into a single row spans more than one input
record. In this situation, an X in column 72 indicates that the input record contains
fields that are to be loaded into the same row as the fields in the next input record.
In the LOAD control statement, CONTINUEIF(72:72)='X' indicates that LOAD is to
concatenate any input records that have an X in column 72 with the next record
before loading the data.
For each assembled input record (that is, after the concatenation), fields are loaded
into the DSN8910.TOPTVAL table columns (that is, MAJSYS, ACTION, OBJECT ...,
DSPINDEX) to form a table row. Any columns that are not specified in the LOAD
control statement are set to the default value.
The POSITION clauses define the starting positions of the fields in the assembled
input records. Starting positions are numbered from the first column of the
internally assembled input record, not from the start of the input records in the
sequential data set. The ending positions of the fields are implicitly defined by the
length specification of the data type (CHAR length).
No conversions are required to load the input character strings into their
designated columns, which are also defined to be fixed-length character strings.
However, because columns INFOTXT, HELPTXT, and PFKTXT are defined as 79
characters in length and the strings that are being loaded are 71 characters in
length, those strings are padded with blanks as they are loaded.
LOAD DATA INDDN(SYSRECOV) CONTINUEIF(72:72)='X'
INTO TABLE DSN8910.TOPTVAL
(MAJSYS
POSITION
(2) CHAR(1),
ACTION
POSITION
(4) CHAR(1),
OBJECT
POSITION
(6) CHAR(2),
SRCHCRIT POSITION
(9) CHAR(2),
SCRTYPE POSITION (12) CHAR(1),
HEADTXT POSITION (80) CHAR(50),
SELTXT
INFOTXT POSITION (238) CHAR(71),
HELPTXT POSITION (317) CHAR(71),
PFKTXT
DSPINDEX POSITION (475) CHAR(2))
Figure 39. Example of concatenating multiple input records before loading the data
Example 7: Loading null values

The control statement specifies that data from the SYSRECST data set is to be
loaded into the specified columns in table SYSIBM.SYSSTRINGS. The input data
set is identified by the INDDN option. The NULLIF option for the ERRORBYTE
and SUBBYTE columns specifies that if the input field contains a blank, LOAD is
to place a null value in the indicated column for that particular row. The
DEFAULTIF option for the TRANSTAB column indicates that the utility is to load
the default value for this column if the input field value is GG. The CONTINUEIF
Chapter 16. LOAD
297
option indicates that LOAD is to concatenate any input records that have an X in
column 80 with the next record before loading the data.
LOAD DATA INDDN(SYSRECST) CONTINUEIF(80:80)='X' RESUME(YES)
INTO TABLE SYSIBM.SYSSTRINGS
(INCCSID POSITION( 1) INTEGER EXTERNAL(5),
OUTCCSID POSITION( 7) INTEGER EXTERNAL(5),
TRANSTYPE POSITION( 13) CHAR(2),
ERRORBYTE POSITION( 16) CHAR(1) NULLIF(ERRORBYTE=' '),
SUBBYTE POSITION( 18) CHAR(1) NULLIF(SUBBYTE=' '),
TRANSPROC POSITION( 20) CHAR(8),
IBMREQD POSITION( 29) CHAR(1),
TRANSTAB POSITION( 31) CHAR(256) DEFAULTIF(TRANSTYPE='GG'))
Figure 40. Example of loading null values
Example 8: Enforcing referential constraints when loading data

The control statement specifies that data from the SYSREC input data set is to be
loaded into table DSN8910.PROJ. The default input data set is SYSREC. The table
space that contains the PROJ table is not empty. RESUME YES indicates that the
records are to be added to the end of the table.
The ENFORCE CONSTRAINTS option indicates that LOAD is to enforce
referential constraints on the data that is being added. This option is also the
default. All violations are reported in the output. All records causing these
violations are not loaded and placed in the SYSDISC data set, which is the default
data set for discarded records.
The CONTINUEIF option indicates that before loading the data LOAD is to
concatenate any input records that have an X in column 72 with the next record.
LOAD DATA INDDN(SYSREC) CONTINUEIF(72:72)='X'
RESUME YES
ENFORCE CONSTRAINTS
INTO TABLE DSN8910.PROJ
(PROJNO POSITION (1) CHAR (6),
PROJNAME POSITION (8) VARCHAR,
DEPTNO POSITION (33) CHAR (3),
RESPEMP POSITION (37) CHAR (6),
PRSTAFF POSITION (44) DECIMAL EXTERNAL (5),
PRSTDATE POSITION (50) DATE EXTERNAL,
PRENDATE POSITION (61) DATE EXTERNAL,
MAJPROJ POSITION (80) CHAR (6) NULLIF(MAJPROJ='
'))
Figure 41. Example of enforcing referential constraints when loading data
Example 9: Loading data without enforcing referential

constraints
The control statement specifies that data from the SYSRECAC input data set is to
be loaded into table DSN8810.ACT. The INDDN option identifies the input data
set.
ENFORCE NO indicates that the LOAD utility is not to enforce referential
constraints and places the table in CHECK-pending status. Use this option if you
are loading data into several tables that are related in such a way that the
referential constraints cannot be checked until all tables are loaded. For example, a
column in table A depends on a column in table B; a column in table B depends on
a column in table C; and a column in table C depends on a column in table A.
298
The POSITION clauses define the starting positions of the fields in the input data
set. The ending positions of the fields in the input data set are implicitly defined
by the length specification of the data type (CHAR length). In this case, the
characters in positions 1 through 3 are loaded into the ACTNO column, the
characters in positions 5 through 10 are loaded into the ACTKWD column, and the
characters in position 13 onward are loaded into the ACTDESC column. Because
the ACTDESC column is of type VARCHAR, the input data needs to contain a
2-byte binary field that contains the length of the character field. This binary field
begins at position 13.
//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='IUIQU2UB.LOAD',
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='DSN'
//SYSRECAC
DD DSN=IUIQU2UB.LOAD.DATA,DISP=SHR,VOL=SER=SCR03,
//
//SYSUT1
DD DSN=IUIQU2UB.LOAD.STEP1.SYSUT1,
//
//
//SORTOUT DD DSN=IUIQU2UB.LOAD.STEP1.SORTOUT,
//
//
//SYSIN
DD *
LOAD DATA INDDN(SYSRECAC) RESUME YES
INTO TABLE DSN8910.ACT
(ACTNO
POSITION(1) INTEGER EXTERNAL(3),
ACTKWD
POSITION(5) CHAR(6),
ACTDESC POSITION(13) VARCHAR)
ENFORCE NO
//*
Figure 42. Example of loading data without enforcing referential constraints
Example 10: Loading data by using a parallel index build

The control statement specifies that data from the SYSREC input data set is to be
loaded into table DSN8810.DEPT. Assume that 22 000 rows need to be loaded into
table DSN8910.DEPT, which has three indexes. In this example, the SORTKEYS
option is used to improve performance by forcing a parallel index build. The
SORTKEYS option specifies 66 000 as an estimate of the number keys to sort in
parallel during the SORTBLD phase. (This estimate was computed by using the
calculation that is described in Improved performance with SORTKEYS on page
273.) Because more than one index needs to be built, LOAD builds the indexes in
parallel.
The SORTDEVT and SORTNUM keywords specify that DFSORT is to dynamically
allocate the required data sets. If sufficient virtual storage resources are available,
one utility subtask pair is started to build each index. This example does not
require UTPRINnn DD statements because it uses DSNUPROC to invoke utility
processing, which includes a DD statement that allocates UTPRINT to SYSOUT.
The CONTINUEIF option indicates that, before loading the data, LOAD is to
concatenate any input records that have a plus sign (+) in column 79 and a plus
sign (+) in column 80 with the next record.
Chapter 16. LOAD
299
//SAMPJOB JOB ...

//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='SAMPJOB.LOAD',UTPROC='',SYSTEM='DSN'
//SORTOUT DD DSN=SAMPJOB.LOAD.STEP1.SORTOUT,DISP=(MOD,DELETE,CATLG),
//
UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(10,20),,,ROUND)
//SYSUT1
DD DSN=SAMPJOB.LOAD.STEP1.SYSUT1,DISP=(MOD,DELETE,CATLG),
//
//SYSERR
DD DSN=SAMPJOB.LOAD.STEP1.SYSERR,DISP=(MOD,DELETE,CATLG),
//
//
//SYSMAP
DD DSN=SAMPJOB.LOAD.STEP1.SYSMAP,DISP=(MOD,DELETE,CATLG),
//
//
//SYSREC
DSN=SAMPJOB.TEMP.DATA,DISP=SHR,UNIT=SYSDA
//SYSIN
DD *
LOAD DATA REPLACE INDDN SYSREC CONTINUEIF(79:80)='++'
SORTKEYS 66000 SORTDEVT SYSDA SORTNUM 3
/*
Figure 43. Example of loading data by using a parallel index build
Example 11: Creating inline copies

The control statement specifies that the LOAD utility is to load data from the
SYSREC data set into the specified columns of table ADMF001.TB0S3902.
COPYDDN(COPYT1) indicates that LOAD is to create inline copies and write the
primary image copy to the data set that is defined by the COPYT1 template. This
template is defined in one of the preceding TEMPLATE control statements. To
create an inline copy, you must also specify the REPLACE option, which indicates
that any data in the table space is to be replaced.
CONTINUEIF(79:80)='++' indicates that, before loading the data, LOAD is to
concatenate any input records that have a plus sign (+) in column 79 and a plus
sign (+) in column 80 with the next record.
The ERRDDN(ERRDDN) and MAPDDN(MAP) options indicate that information
about errors is to be written to the data sets that are defined by the ERRDDN and
MAP templates. DISCARDDN(DISCARD) specifies that discarded records (those
that violate referential constraints) are to be written to the data set that is defined
by the DISCARD template. WORKDDN(UT1,OUT) specifies the temporary work
files for sort input and output; LOAD is to use the data set that is defined by the
UT1 template for sort input and the data set that is defined by the OUT template
for sort output.
//STEP1
//
//
//SYSREC
//
//SYSIN
TEMPLATE
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='JUOSU339.LOAD1',TIME=1440,
UTPROC='',
SYSTEM='SSTR'
DD DSN=CUST.FM.CINT135.DATA,DISP=SHR,VOL=SER=FORDMD,
DD *
ERRDDN UNIT(SYSDA)
DSN(JUOSU339.T&TI..&ST..ERRDDN)
SPACE(50,10) TRK
TEMPLATE UT1
UNIT(SYSDA)
DSN(JUOSU339.T&TI..&ST..SYSUT1)
SPACE(50,10) TRK
TEMPLATE OUT
UNIT(SYSDA)
DSN(JUOSU339.T&TI..&ST..SYSOUT)
SPACE(50,10) TRK
TEMPLATE MAP
UNIT(SYSDA)
DSN(JUOSU339.T&TI..&ST..SYSMAP)
SPACE(50,10) TRK
300
TEMPLATE DISCARD UNIT(SYSDA)

DSN(JUOSU339.T&TI..&ST..DISCARD)
SPACE(50,10) TRK
TEMPLATE COPYT1
UNIT(SYSDA)
DSN(JUOSU339.COPY1.STEP1.&SN..COPY&LR.&PB.)
DISP(MOD,CATLG,CATLG)
SPACE(60,30) TRK
LOAD DATA INDDN SYSREC REPLACE
CONTINUEIF(79:80)='++'
COPYDDN(COPYT1)
ERRDDN(ERRDDN)
WORKDDN(UT1,OUT)
MAPDDN(MAP)
DISCARDDN(DISCARD)
INTO TABLE
ADMF001.TBOS3902
( ID_PARTITION
POSITION(1)
CHAR(1),
CD_PLANT
POSITION(2)
CHAR(5),
NO_PART_BASE
POSITION(7)
CHAR(9),
NO_PART_PREFIX
NO_PART_SUFFIX
NO_PART_CONTROL
POSITION(31)
CHAR(3),
DT_TRANS_EFFECTIVE POSITION(34)
DATE EXTERNAL(10),
CD_INV_TRANSACTION POSITION(44)
CHAR(3),
TS_PROCESS
POSITION(47)
TIMESTAMP EXTERNAL(26),
QT_INV_TRANSACTION POSITION(73)
INTEGER,
CD_UNIT_MEAS_USAGE POSITION(77)
CHAR(2),
CD_USER_ID
POSITION(79)
CHAR(7),
NO_DEPT
POSITION(86)
CHAR(4),
NO_WORK_CENTER
POSITION(90)
CHAR(6))
/*
Figure 44. Example of creating inline copies
Example 12: Collecting statistics

This example is similar to the previous example, except that the STATISTICS
option and other related options have been added so that during the LOAD job,
DB2 also gathers statistics for the table space. Gathering these statistics eliminates
the need to run the RUNSTATS utility after completing the LOAD operation.
The TABLE, COLUMN, and INDEX options specify that information is to be
gathered for columns QT_INV_TRANSACTION, NO_DEPT, NO_PART_PREFIX,
DT_TRANS_EFFECTIVE and index ID0S3902 for table TB0S3902. SAMPLE 53
indicates that LOAD is to sample 53% of the rows when gathering non-indexed
column statistics. For the index, the KEYCARD option specifies that all of the
distinct values in all of the key column combinations are to be collected. FREQVAL
NUMCOLS 4 COUNT 20 indicates that 20 frequent values are to be collected on
the concatenation of the first four key columns.
REPORT YES indicates that the statistics are to be sent to SYSPRINT as output.
UPDATE ALL and HISTORY ALL indicate that all collected statistics are to be
updated in the catalog and catalog history tables.
//STEP1
//
//
//SYSREC
//
//SYSIN
TEMPLATE
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='JUOSU339.LOAD1',TIME=1440,
UTPROC='',
SYSTEM='SSTR'
DD DSN=CUST.FM.CINT135.DATA,DISP=SHR,VOL=SER=FORDMD,
DD *
ERRDDN UNIT(SYSDA)
Chapter 16. LOAD
301
DSN(JUOSU339.T&TI..&ST..ERRDDN)
SPACE(50,10) TRK
TEMPLATE UT1
UNIT(SYSDA)
DSN(JUOSU339.T&TI..&ST..SYSUT1)
SPACE(50,10) TRK
TEMPLATE OUT
UNIT(SYSDA)
DSN(JUOSU339.T&TI..&ST..SYSOUT)
SPACE(50,10) TRK
TEMPLATE MAP
UNIT(SYSDA)
DSN(JUOSU339.T&TI..&ST..SYSMAP)
SPACE(50,10) TRK
TEMPLATE DISCARD UNIT(SYSDA)
DSN(JUOSU339.T&TI..&ST..DISCARD)
SPACE(50,10) TRK
TEMPLATE COPYT1
UNIT(SYSDA)
DSN(JUOSU339.COPY1.STEP1.&SN..COPY&LR.&PB.)
DISP(MOD,CATLG,CATLG)
SPACE(60,30) TRK
LOAD DATA INDDN SYSREC REPLACE
CONTINUEIF(79:80)='++'
COPYDDN(COPYT1)
STATISTICS
TABLE (TBOS3902) SAMPLE 53
COLUMN (QT_INV_TRANSACTION,
NO_DEPT,
NO_PART_PREFIX,
DT_TRANS_EFFECTIVE)
INDEX (IDOS3902 KEYCARD
FREQVAL NUMCOLS 4 COUNT 20)
REPORT YES UPDATE ALL HISTORY ALL
ERRDDN(ERRDDN)
WORKDDN(UT1,OUT)
MAPDDN(MAP)
DISCARDDN(DISCARD)
INTO TABLE
ADMF001.TBOS3902
( ID_PARTITION
POSITION(1)
CHAR(1),
CD_PLANT
POSITION(2)
CHAR(5),
NO_PART_BASE
POSITION(7)
CHAR(9),
NO_PART_PREFIX
NO_PART_SUFFIX
NO_PART_CONTROL
POSITION(31)
CHAR(3),
DT_TRANS_EFFECTIVE POSITION(34)
DATE EXTERNAL(10),
CD_INV_TRANSACTION POSITION(44)
CHAR(3),
TS_PROCESS
POSITION(47)
TIMESTAMP EXTERNAL(26),
QT_INV_TRANSACTION POSITION(73)
INTEGER,
CD_UNIT_MEAS_USAGE POSITION(77)
CHAR(2),
CD_USER_ID
POSITION(79)
CHAR(7),
NO_DEPT
POSITION(86)
CHAR(4),
NO_WORK_CENTER
POSITION(90)
CHAR(6))
/*
Figure 45. Example of collecting statistics
Example 13: Loading Unicode data

The following control statement specifies that Unicode data from the REC1 input
data set is to be loaded into table ADMF001.TBMG0301. The UNICODE option
specifies the type of input data. Only data that satisfies the condition that is
specified in the WHEN clause is to be loaded. The CCSID option specifies the
302
three coded character set identifiers for the input file: one for SBCS data, one for
mixed data, and one for DBCS data. LOG YES indicates that logging is to occur
during the LOAD job.
LOAD DATA INDDN REC1
LOG YES REPLACE
UNICODE CCSID(00367,01208,01200)
INTO TABLE "ADMF001 "."TBMG0301"
WHEN(00004:00005 = X'0003')
Example 14: Loading data from multiple input data sets by using
partition parallelism
The LOAD control statement in this example contains a series of INTO TABLE
statements that specify which data is to be loaded into which partitions of table
DBA01.TBLX3303. For each INTO TABLE statement:
v Data is to be loaded into the partition that is identified by the PART option. For
example, the first INTO TABLE statement specifies that data is to be loaded into
the first partition of table DBA01.TBLX3303.
v Data is to be loaded from the data set that is identified by the INDDN option.
For example, the data from the PART1 data set is to be loaded into the first
partition.
v Any discarded rows are to be written to the data set that is specified by the
DISCARDDN option. For example, rows that are discarded during the loading
of data from the PART1 data set are written to the DISC1 data set.
v The data is loaded into the specified columns (EMPNO, LASTNAME, and
SALARY).
LOAD uses partition parallelism to load the data into these partitions.
The TEMPLATE utility control statement defines the data set naming convention
for the data set that is to be dynamically allocated during the following LOAD job.
The name of the template is ERR3. The ERRDDN option in the LOAD statement
specifies that any errors are to be written to the data set that is defined by this
ERR3 template.
Chapter 16. LOAD
303
TEMPLATE ERR3
DSN &UT..&JO..&ST..ERR3&MO.&DAY.
UNIT SYSDA DISP(NEW,CATLG,CATLG)
LOAD DATA
REPLACE
ERRDDN ERR3
INTO TABLE DBA01.TBLX3303
PART 1
INDDN PART1
DISCARDDN DISC1
(EMPNO
POSITION(1)
CHAR(6),
LASTNAME
POSITION(8)
VARCHAR(15),
SALARY
POSITION(25)
DECIMAL(9,2))
.
.
.
INTO TABLE DBA01.TBLX3303
PART 5
INDDN PART5
DISCARDDN DISC5
(EMPNO
POSITION(1)
CHAR(6),
LASTNAME
POSITION(8)
VARCHAR(15),
SALARY
POSITION(25)
DECIMAL(9,2))
/*
Figure 46. Example of loading data from individual data sets
Example 15: Loading data from another table in the same system
by using a declared cursor
The following LOAD control statement specifies that all rows that are identified by
cursor C1 are to be loaded into table MYEMP. The INCURSOR option is used to
specify cursor C1, which is defined in the EXEC SQL utility control statement.
Cursor C1 points to the rows that are returned by executing the statement SELECT
* FROM DSN8810.EMP. In this example, the column names in table DSN8810.EMP
are the same as the column names in table MYEMP. Note that the cursor cannot be
defined on the same table into which DB2 is to load the data.
EXEC SQL
DECLARE C1 CURSOR FOR SELECT * FROM DSN8810.EMP
ENDEXEC
LOAD DATA
INCURSOR(C1)
REPLACE
INTO TABLE MYEMP
STATISTICS
Example 16: Loading data partitions in parallel from a remote

site by using a declared cursor
The LOAD control statement in this example specifies that for each specified
partition of table MYEMPP, the rows that are identified by the specified cursor are
to be loaded. In each INTO TABLE statement, the PART option specifies the
partition number, and the INCURSOR option specifies the cursor. For example, the
rows that are identified by cursor C1 are to be loaded into the first partition. The
data for each partition is loaded in parallel.
Each cursor is defined in a separate EXEC SQL utility control statement and points
to the rows that are returned by executing the specified SELECT statement. These
SELECT statement are being executed on a table at a remote server, so the
three-part name is used to identify the table. In this example, the column names in
table CHICAGO.DSN8810.EMP are the same as the column names in table
304
MYEMPP.
EXEC SQL
DECLARE C1 CURSOR FOR SELECT * FROM CHICAGO.DSN8810.EMP
WHERE EMPNO <= '099999'
ENDEXEC
EXEC SQL
WHERE EMPNO > '099999' AND EMPNO <= '199999'
ENDEXEC
EXEC SQL
ENDEXEC
EXEC SQL
ENDEXEC
LOAD DATA
INTO TABLE MYEMPP PART 1 REPLACE INCURSOR(C1)
Figure 47. Example of loading data partitions in parallel using a declared cursor
Example 17: Loading LOB data from a file

The LOAD control statement in this example specifies that data from
000130DSN!10.SDSNIVPD(DSN8R130) is to be loaded into the
MY_EMP_PHOTO_RESUME table. The characters in positions 1 through 6 are
loaded into the EMPNO column, and the characters starting from position 7 are to
be loaded into the RESUME column. CLOBF indicates that the characters in
position 7 are the name of a file from which a CLOB is to be loaded.
REPLACE indicates that the new data will replace any existing data. Although no
logging is to be done, as indicated by the LOG NO option, the table space is not to
be set in CHECK-pending state, because NOCOPYPEND is specified.
SORTKEYS 1 indicates that one index key is to be sorted.
//*****************************************************************
//*
LOAD LOB from file
//*****************************************************************
//LOADIT
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='LOADIT',TIME=1440,
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='DSN'
//SYSREC
DD*
000130DSN!10.SDSNIVPD(DSN8R130)
//SYSUT1
DD DSN=SYSADM.LOAD.SYSUT1,DISP=(MOD,DELETE,CATLG),
//
//SORTOUT DD DSN=SYSADM.LOAD.SORTOUT,DISP=(MOD,DELETE,CATLG),
//
//SYSIN
DD *
LOAD DATA
REPLACE LOG NO NOCOPYPEND
SORTKEYS 1
INTO TABLE MY_EMP_PHOTO_RESUME
(EMPNO
POSITION(1:6) CHAR(6),
RESUME
POSITION(7:31)
CHAR CLOBF)
Figure 48. Example of loading LOB data from a file
Chapter 16. LOAD
305
306
Chapter 17. MERGECOPY

The MERGECOPY online utility merges image copies that the COPY utility
produces, image copies that the COPYTOCOPY utility produces, or inline copies
that the LOAD or REORG utilities produce.
The utility can merge several incremental copies of a table space to make one
incremental copy. It can also merge incremental copies with a full image copy to
make a new full image copy. You cannot run MERGECOPY on concurrent copies.
MERGECOPY operates on the image copy data sets of a table space, and not on
the table space itself.
Output
Output from the MERGECOPY utility consists of one of the following types of
copies:
v A new single incremental image copy
v A new full image copy
You can create the new image copy for the local or recovery site.
Restrictions:
v MERGECOPY cannot merge image copies into a single incremental image copy
for the other site, that is:
At local sites, you cannot use RECOVERYDDN with NEWCOPY NO.
At recovery sites, you cannot use COPYDDN with NEWCOPY NO.
v When none of the keywords NEWCOPY, COPYDDN, or RECOVERYDDN is
specified, the default, NEWCOPY NO COPYDDN(SYSCOPY), is valid for the
local site only.
v You cannot run MERGECOPY on concurrent copies.
v You cannot run the MERGECOPY utility on the DSNDB01.DBD01,
DSNDB01.SYSUTILX, or DSNDB06.SYSCOPY table spaces because you cannot
make incremental copies of those table spaces.
An ID with installation SYSOPR authority can also execute MERGECOPY, but only
on a table space in the DSNDB01 or DSNDB06 database.
Execution phases of MERGECOPY

The MERGECOPY utility operates in these phases:
307
Phase Description
UTILINIT
MERGECOP
Merges incremental copies
UTILTERM
Performs cleanup
Syntax and options of the MERGECOPY control statement

The MERGECOPY utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
running the job, you can use the SYSIN DD statement to specify the name of the
data set that contains the utility control statement.
Syntax diagram
MERGECOPY
LIST
listdef-name
TABLESPACE
SYSUT1
WORKDDN
ddname
ALL
DSNUM
integer
CLONE
table-space-name
database-name.
WORKDDN
DSNUM

NEWCOPY
NO
COPYDDN
SYSCOPY

COPYDDN(ddname1
NEWCOPY
,ddname2
COPYDDN(,ddname2)
RECOVERYDDN(ddname3
,ddname4
COPYDDN SYSCOPY
COPYDDN(ddname1
RECOVERYDDN(ddname3
YES
)
,ddname2
)
,ddname4
COPYDDN(,ddname2)
Option descriptions
LIST listdef-name
Specifies the name of a previously defined LISTDEF list name that contains
only table spaces. You can specify one LIST keyword per MERGECOPY control
statement. Do not specify LIST with the TABLESPACE keyword. MERGECOPY
is invoked once for each table space in the list. This utility will only process
clone data if the CLONE keyword is specified. The use of CLONED YES on
the LISTDEF statement is not sufficient.
Specifies the table space that is to be copied, and, optionally, the database to
which it belongs.
308
database-name
The name of the database that the table space belongs to. The default
value is DSNDB04.
table-space-name
The name of the table space whose incremental image copies are to be
merged.
You cannot run the MERGECOPY utility on the DSNDB01.DBD01,
DSNDB01.SYSUTILX, or DSNDB06.SYSCOPY table spaces because you cannot
make incremental copies of those table spaces. Because MERGECOPY does not
directly access the table space whose copies it is merging, it does not interfere
with concurrent access to that table space.
DSNUM
Identifies the table space or a partition or data set within the table space that is
to be merged. DSNUM is optional.
ALL
Merges the entire table space.
integer
Is the number of a partition or data set that is to be merged. The maximum
is 4096.
For a partitioned table space, the integer is its partition number.
For a nonpartitioned table space, find the integer at the end of the data set
name as cataloged in the VSAM catalog. The data set name has the
following format, where y is either I or J, z is either 1 or 2, and nnn is the
data set integer:
|
catname.DSNDBx.dbname.tsname.y000z.Annn
You cannot specify DSNUM and LIST in the same MERGECOPY control
statement. Use PARTLEVEL on the LISTDEF instead. If image copies were
taken by data set (rather than by table space), MERGECOPY must use the
copies by data set.
|
|
|
|
|
CLONE
Indicates that MERGECOPY is to process only image copy data sets that were
taken against clone objects. This utility will only process clone data if the
CLONE keyword is specified. The use of CLONED YES on the LISTDEF
WORKDDN ddname
Specifies a DD statement for a temporary data set or template, which is to be
used for intermediate merged output. WORKDDN is optional.
ddname is the DD name. The default value is SYSUT1.
Use the WORKDDN option if you are not able to allocate enough data sets to
execute MERGECOPY; in that case, a temporary data set is used to hold
intermediate output. If you omit the WORKDDN option, you might find that
only some of the image copy data sets are merged. When MERGECOPY has
ended, a message is issued that tells the number of data sets that exist and the
number of data sets that have been merged. To continue the merge, repeat
MERGECOPY with a new output data set.
NEWCOPY
Specifies whether incremental image copies are to be merged with the full
image copy. NEWCOPY is optional.
309
NO
Merges incremental image copies into a single incremental image copy but
does not merge them with the full image copy.
YES
Merges all incremental image copies with the full image copy to form a
new full image copy.
Specifies the DD statements for the output image copy data sets at the local
site. ddname1 is the primary output image copy data set. ddname2 is the backup
output image copy data set. COPYDDN is optional.
The default value is COPYDDN(SYSCOPY), where SYSCOPY identifies the
primary data set.
Specifies the DD statements for the output image copy data sets at the
recovery site. You can have a maximum of two output data sets; the outputs
are identical. ddname3 is the primary output image copy data set. ddname4 is
the backup output image copy data set. RECOVERYDDN is optional. No
default value exists for RECOVERYDDN.
Related reference
Data sets that MERGECOPY uses

The MERGECOPY utility uses a number of data sets during its operation.
The following table lists the data sets that MERGECOPY uses. The table lists the
Table 50. Data sets that MERGECOPY uses
310
Data set
Description
Required?
SYSIN

control statement.
Yes
SYSPRINT
Yes
Image copy data set
Image copy data set that contains the

resulting image copy. Specify its DD name
with the COPYDDN option of the utility
control statement. The default DD name is
SYSCOPY.
Yes
Table 50. Data sets that MERGECOPY uses (continued)

Data set
Description
Required?
Work data set
A temporary data set that is used for

intermediate merged output. Specify its DD
name with the WORKDDN option of the
name is SYSUT1.
Yes
Input data sets
Image copy data sets that you can

preallocate. You define the DD names.
No
Table space
Object whose copies are to be merged.
Data sets
The input data sets for the merge operation are dynamically allocated. To merge
incremental copies, allocate in the JCL a work data set (WORKDDN) and up to
two new copy data sets (COPYDDN) for the utility job. You can allocate the data
sets to tape or disk. If you allocate them to tape, you need an additional tape drive
for each data set.
With the COPYDDN option of MERGECOPY, you can specify the DD names for
the output data sets. The option has the format COPYDDN (ddname1,ddname2), where
ddname1 is the DD name for the primary output data set in the system that
currently runs DB2, and ddname2 is the DD name for the backup output data set in
the system that currently runs DB2. The default for ddname1 is SYSCOPY.
The RECOVERYDDN option of MERGECOPY lets you specify the output image
copy data sets at the recovery site. The option has the format RECOVERYDDN
(ddname3, ddname4), where ddname3 is the DD name for the primary output image
copy data set at the recovery site, and ddname4 is the DD name for the backup
output data set at the recovery site.
Defining the work data set

The work data set should be at least equal in size to the largest input image copy
data set that is being merged. Use the same DCB attributes that are used for the
image copy data sets.
Concurrency and compatibility for MERGECOPY

The MERGECOPY utility has certain concurrency and compatibility characteristics
associated with it.
compatible.
The following table shows the restrictive state that the utility sets on the target
object.
311
Table 51. Claim classes of MERGECOPY operations.

Target
MERGECOPY
UTRW
Legend:
UTRW - Utility restrictive state - read-write access allowed.
MERGECOPY can run concurrently on the same target object with any utility
except the following utilities:
v COPY TABLESPACE
v LOAD
v MERGECOPY
v MODIFY
v RECOVER
v REORG TABLESPACE
v UNLOAD (only when from the same image copy data set)
The target object can be a table space or partition.
Full or incremental image copy

Use the NEWCOPY parameter if the new copy that MERGECOPY creates is to be
an incremental image copy or a full image copy.
In general, creating a new full image copy is recommended. The reasons for this
recommendation are as follows:
v A new full image copy creates a new recovery point.
v The additional time that it takes to create a new full image copy does not have
any adverse effect on the access to the table space. The only concurrency
implication is the access to SYSIBM.SYSCOPY.
v The range of log records that are to be applied by RECOVER is the same for
both the new full image copy and the merged incremental image copy.
v Assuming that the copies are on tape, only one tape drive is required for image
copies during a RECOVER.
If NEWCOPY is YES, the utility inserts an entry for the new full image copy into
the SYSIBM.SYSCOPY catalog table.
If NEWCOPY is NO, the utility:
v Replaces the SYSCOPY records of the incremental image copies that were
merged with an entry for the new incremental image copy
v Deletes all SYSCOPY records of the incremental image copies that have been
merged.
In either case, if any of the input data sets might not be allocated, or you did not
specify a temporary work data set (WORKDDN), the utility performs a partial
merge.
For large table spaces, consider using MERGECOPY to create full image copies.
Use MERGECOPY NEWCOPY YES immediately after each incremental image
copy. When you use this option, dates become a valid criterion for deletion of
312
image copy data sets and archive logs. A minimum number of tape drives are
allocated for MERGECOPY and RECOVER execution.
How to determine which input copy MERGECOPY uses

MERGECOPY will choose the input image copies that match the current site.
If MERGECOPY is executing at the local site, then the local site image copies will
be chosen as the input to be merged. If MERGECOPY is executing at the recovery
site, then the recovery site image copies will be chosen as the input to be merged.
Merging online copies

If you merge an online copy with incremental copies, the result is a full inline
copy. The data set is logically equivalent to a full image copy, but the data within
the data set differs in some respects
Related tasks
Using inline COPY with LOAD on page 271
Using MERGECOPY with individual data sets

Use MERGECOPY on copies of an entire table space, on individual data sets, or on
partitions. However, MERGECOPY can only merge incremental copies of the same
type. That is, you cannot merge incremental copies of an entire table space with
incremental copies of individual data sets to form new incremental copies.
The attempt to mix the two types of incremental copies results in the following
messages:
DSNU460I DSNUBCLO - IMAGE COPIES INCONSISTENT.
MERGECOPY REQUEST REJECTED
DSNU010I DSNUGBAC - UTILITY EXECUTION COMPLETE,
HIGHEST RETURN CODE=4
With the NEWCOPY YES option, however, you can merge a full image copy of a
table space with incremental copies of the table space and of individual data sets
to make a new full image copy of the table space.
If the image copy data sets that you want to merge reside tape, refer to How the
RECOVER utility retains tape mounts on page 413 for general information about
specifying the appropriate parameters on the DD statements.
Using MERGECOPY or COPY

COPY and MERGECOPY can create a full image copy. COPY is required after a
LOAD or REORG with LOG NO unless an inline copy is created. However, in
other cases an incremental image copy followed by MERGECOPY is a valid
alternative.
Avoiding MERGECOPY LOG RBA inconsistencies

MERGECOPY does not use information that was logged between the time of the
most recent image copy and the time when MERGECOPY was run. Therefore, you
cannot safely delete all log records made before running MERGECOPY. (You can
safely delete all log records if you run MODIFY RECOVERY and specify the date
when MERGECOPY was run as the value of DATE.)
313
To delete all log information that is included in a copy that MERGECOPY make
1. Find the record of the copy in the catalog table SYSIBM.SYSCOPY by selecting
database name, table space name, and date (columns DBNAME, TSNAME, and
ICDATE).
2. Column START_RBA contains the RBA of the last image copy that
MERGECOPY used. Find the record of the image copy that has the same value
of START_RBA.
3. In that record, find the date in column ICDATE. You can use MODIFY
RECOVERY to delete all copies and log records for the table space that were
made before that date.
RECOVER uses the LOG RBA of image copies to determine the starting point in
the log that is needed for recovery. Normally, a timestamp directly corresponds to
a LOG RBA. Because of this, and because MODIFY uses dates to clean up recovery
history, you might decide to use dates to delete old archive log tapes. This decision
might cause a problem if you use MERGECOPY. MERGECOPY inserts the LOG
RBA of the last incremental image copy into the SYSCOPY row that is created for
the new image copy. The date that is recorded in the ICDATE column of SYSCOPY
row is the date that MERGECOPY was executed.
Creating image copies in a JES3 environment

Ensure that sufficient units are available to mount the required image copies. In a
JES3 environment, if the number of image copies that are to be restored exceeds
the number of available online and offline units, and if the MERGECOPY job
successfully allocates all available units, the job waits for more units to become
available.
Terminating or restart of MERGECOPY

You can terminate and restart the MERGECOPY utility.
You can terminate the a MERGECOPY utility job using the TERM UTILITY
command.
You can restart MERGECOPY but by default, MERGECOPY restarts at the
beginning of the current phase. You can also restart MERGECOPY from the last
commit point after receiving an out-of-space condition.
Related concepts
Related tasks
Sample MERGECOPY control statements

MERGECOPY control statements.
Example 1: Creating a merged incremental copy

The control statement in this example specifies that the MERGECOPY utility is to
merge incremental image copies from table space DSN8S91C into a single
incremental image copy. The NEWCOPY NO option indicates that these
314
incremental copies are not to be merged with the full image copy. The COPYDDN
option specifies that the output image copies are to be written to the data sets that
are defined by the COPY1 and COPY2 DD statements.
//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='IUJMU107.MERGE1',
//
UTPROC='',SYSTEM='DSN'
//COPY1 DD DSN=IUJMU107.MERGE1.STEP1.COPY1,DISP=(MOD,CATLG,CATLG),
//
//
//SYSUT1
DD DSN=IUJMU107.MERGE1.STEP1.SYSUT1,DISP=(MOD,DELETE,CATLG),
//
//SYSIN
DD *
MERGECOPY TABLESPACE DSN8D91P.DSN8S91C
COPYDDN
(COPY1,COPY2)
NEWCOPY NO
Figure 49. Example of creating a merged incremental copy
Example 2: Creating merged incremental copies and using

template switching
Each MERGECOPY control statement in this example specifies that MERGECOPY
is to merge incremental image copies from the specified table space into a single
incremental image copy for that table space. For each control statement, the
COPYDDN option specifies that the output image copies are to be written to data
sets that are defined by the T1 template. The T1 template has specified the LIMIT
option. This means that the output image copies are to be written to DASD, if the
output image copy size is less than 5 MB. If the limit is exceeded, template
switching from template T1 to template T5 takes place and the output image
copies are to be written to TAPE. This template is defined in the TEMPLATE utility
control statement.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
//STEP1
//
//
//SYSUT1
//
//SYSIN
TEMPLATE
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='JULTU224.MERGE',
UTPROC='',
SYSTEM='SSTR'
DD DSN=JULTU224.MERGE.STEP1.SYSUT1,DISP=(MOD,DELETE,CATLG),
DD *
T1 UNIT(SYSDA) SPACE CYL
LIMIT(5 MB,T5)
TEMPLATE T5 UNIT(3BO)
MERGECOPY TABLESPACE DBLT2401.TPLT2401 DSNUM ALL NEWCOPY NO
COPYDDN(T1)
MERGECOPY TABLESPACE DBLT2401.TLLT24A1 DSNUM ALL NEWCOPY NO
COPYDDN(T1)
COPYDDN(T1)
COPYDDN(T1)
COPYDDN(T1)
Figure 50. Example of using templates
Example 3: Creating a merged full image copy

The control statement in this example specifies that MERGECOPY is to merge all
incremental image copies with the full image copy from table space DSN8S91C to
315
create a new full image copy.

//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='IUJMU107.MERGE2',
//
//
//
//SYSUT1
DD DSN=IUJMU107.MERGE2.STEP1.SYSUT1,DISP=(MOD,DELETE,CATLG),
//
//SYSIN
DD *
MERGECOPY TABLESPACE DSN8D91P.DSN8S91C
COPYDDN
(COPY1,COPY2)
NEWCOPY YES
Figure 51. Example of creating a merged full image copy
Example 4: Using MERGECOPY with CLONE keyword

The following control statement specifies that MERGECOPY is to process only
image copy data sets that were taken against clone objects.
|
|
MERGECOPY TABLESPACE DBIQUD01.TPIQUD01 DSNUM ALL CLONE NEWCOPY YES

COPYDDN(COPYTB1)
Related reference
316
Chapter 18. MODIFY RECOVERY

The MODIFY utility with the RECOVERY option deletes records from the
SYSIBM.SYSCOPY catalog table, related log records from the SYSIBM.SYSLGRNX
directory table, and entries from the DBD, and recycles DB2 version numbers for
reuse. You can remove records that were written before a specific date, you can
remove records of a specific age, or you can ensure that a specified number of
records is retained. You can delete records for an entire table space, partition, or
data set.
You should run MODIFY regularly to remove outdated information from
SYSIBM.SYSCOPY and SYSIBM.SYSLGRNX. These tables, and particularly
SYSIBM.SYSLGRNX, can become very large and take up a considerable amount of
space. By deleting outdated information from these tables, you can help improve
performance for processes that access data from these tables.
The MODIFY RECOVERY utility automatically removes the SYSCOPY and
SYSLGRNX recovery records that meet the specified criteria for all indexes on the
table space that were defined with the COPY YES attribute.
Output
|
|
|
MODIFY RECOVERY inserts a SYSIBM.SYSCOPY row with ICTYPE=M and

STYPE=R to record the RBA or LRSN of the most recent SYSCOPY or SYSLGRNX
record deleted.
For each full and incremental SYSCOPY record that is deleted from
SYSIBM.SYSCOPY, the utility returns a message identifying the name of the copy
data set.
If MODIFY RECOVERY deletes at least one SYSCOPY record and the target table
space or partition is not recoverable, the target object is placed in COPY-pending
status.
For table spaces and indexes that are defined with COPY YES, the MODIFY
RECOVERY utility updates the OLDEST_VERSION column of the following
catalog tables:
v SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACE
v SYSIBM.SYSTABLEPART
v SYSIBM.SYSINDEXES
v IMAGCOPY privilege for the database to run MODIFY RECOVERY
v DBADM, authority
317
An ID with installation SYSOPR authority can also execute MODIFY RECOVERY,

but only on a table space in the DSNDB01 or DSNDB06 database.
SYSIBM.SYSCOPY or SYSIBM.SYSLGRNX does not contain records for
DSNDB06.SYSCOPY, DSNDB01.SYSUTILX, or DSNDB01.DBD01. You can run
MODIFY RECOVERY on these table spaces, but you receive message DSNU573I,
indicating that no SYSCOPY records could be found. No SYSCOPY or SYSLGRNX
records are deleted.
Execution phases of MODIFY RECOVERY

The MODIFY RECOVERY phase operates in these phases:
UTILINIT
MODIFY
Deletes records
UTILTERM
Performs cleanup
Syntax and options of the MODIFY RECOVERY control statement

The MODIFY RECOVERY utility control statement, with its multiple options,
defines the function that the utility job performs.
Syntax diagram
DSNUM ALL
MODIFY RECOVERY
LIST listdef-name
TABLESPACE
database-name.

table-space-name
DSNUM
integer
DELETE

AGE
CLONE
RETAIN
integer
(*)
DATE integer
(*)
LAST ( integer )
LOGLIMIT
GDGLIMIT
LAST ( integer
LOGLIMIT
Option descriptions
LIST listdef-name
318
only table spaces. You can specify one LIST keyword per MODIFY RECOVERY
control statement. Do not specify LIST with the TABLESPACE keyword.
MODIFY is invoked once for each table space in the list. This utility will only
Specifies the database and the table space for which records are to be deleted.
database-name
Specifies the name of the database to which the table space belongs.
database-name is optional.
table-space-name
Specifies the name of the table space.
DSNUM integer
Identifies a single partition or data set of the table space for which records are
to be deleted; ALL deletes records for the entire data set and table space.
integer is the number of a partition or data set.
The default value is ALL.
For a partitioned table space, integer is its partition number. The maximum is
4096.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For a nonpartitioned table space, use the data set integer at the end of the data
set name as cataloged in the VSAM catalog. If image copies are taken by
partition or data set and you specify DSNUM ALL, the table space is placed in
COPY-pending status if a full image copy of the entire table space does not
exist. The data set name has the following format, where y is either I or J, z is
either a 1 or 2, and nnn is the data set integer.
|
|
|
|
|
If you specify DSNUM n, MODIFY RECOVERY does not delete any SYSCOPY
records for the partitions that have an RBA greater than that of the earliest
point to which the entire table space could be recovered. That point might
indicate a full image copy, a LOAD operation with LOG YES or a REORG
operation with LOG YES.
If you specify DSNUM n for a partitioned table space, MODIFY RECOVERY

deletes SYSCOPY records for all partitioned index spaces as well as for the
partition and updates the version numbers in the SYSIBM.SYSINDEXES
catalog table. However, DB2 does not perform these functions for the
nonpartitioned indexes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
CLONE
Indicates that MODIFY RECOVERY is to delete SYSCOPY records and
SYSLGRNX records for only clone objects. If CLONE is not specified, only
records for the base objects are deleted. This utility will only process clone data
if the CLONE keyword is specified. The use of CLONED YES on the LISTDEF
DELETE
Indicates that records are to be deleted. See the DSNUM description for
restrictions on deleting partition statistics.
AGE integer
Deletes all SYSCOPY and SYSLGRNX records that are older than a
319
|
|
specified number of days. SYSLGRNX records that meet the age deletion
criteria specified will be deleted even if no SYSCOPY records are deleted.
|
|
integer is the number of days, and can range from 0 to 32767. Records that
are created today are of age 0 and cannot be deleted by this option.
(*) deletes all records, regardless of their age.

DATE integer
Deletes all SYSCOPY and SYSLGRNX records that are written before a
specified date. SYSLGRNX records that meet the date deletion criteria
specified will be deleted even if no SYSCOPY records are deleted.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
integer can be in eight- or six-character format. You must specify a year

(yyyy or yy), month (mm), and day (dd) in the form yyyymmdd or yymmdd.
DB2 checks the system clock and converts six-character dates to the most
recent, previous eight-character equivalent.
(*) deletes all records, regardless of the date on which they were written.
RETAIN
Indicates that records are to be retained. Older records are deleted.
|
|
|
|
|
To determine a cleanup date, RETAIN checks only records in

SYSIBM.SYSCOPY with ICTYPE=F (full copy), ICBACKUP=blank (LOCALSITE
primary copy), and DSNUM as stated for the specified table space.
|
|
|
|
RETAIN works internally with a date, not a complete timestamp. As a result,

more copies might be kept than are specified by RETAIN. For example, if the
most recent five copies have been taken on the same day, and RETAIN LAST
(2) is specified, then all five copies remain in SYSCOPY.
|
|
LAST (integer)
Specifies the number of recent records to retain in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY.
|
|
|
|
|
|
LOGLIMIT
Queries the BSDS to determine the oldest archive log timestamp and
deletes records older than this timestamp, if the most recent record in
SYSIBM.SYSCOPY refers to a non-GDS. For data sharing, DB2 queries the
BSDS of all data sharing members to determine the overall oldest log
timestamp.
|
|
|
|
GDGLIMIT
Retrieves the GDG limit if the most recent record in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY
refers to a GDS (Generation data set). As many recent records (referring to
the same GDG) as specified in the GDG limit will be retained.
|
|
|
LAST (integer)
Specifies the number of recent records to retain in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY if
the most recent record in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY refers to a non-GDS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
LOGLIMIT
Queries the BSDS to determine the oldest archive log timestamp if the
most recent record in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY refers to a non-GDS. For data
sharing, DB2 queries the BSDS of all data sharing members to
determine the overall oldest log timestamp, and deletes records older
than this timestamp.
320
|
|
|
|
|
Related reference
Before running MODIFY RECOVERY
|
|
Certain activities might be required before you run the MODIFY RECOVERY
utility, depending on your situation.
|
|
Recommendations for printing SYSCOPY records with REPORT

RECOVERY
|
|
|
If you use MODIFY RECOVERY to delete SYSCOPY records, use the REPORT
utility to view all SYSCOPY records for the object at the specified site to avoid
deleting the wrong records.
Removing RECOVER-pending status
|
|
You cannot run MODIFY RECOVERY on a table space that is in

RECOVER-pending status.
Improving performance of MODIFY RECOVERY:
|
|
|
To improve performance of MODIFY RECOVERY and reduce contention on

SYSLGRNX, it is recommended that you run the REORG TABLESPACE utility on
DSNDB01.SYSLGRNX on a regular basis.
Related reference
Chapter 23, RECOVER, on page 377
Data sets that MODIFY RECOVERY uses

The MODIFY RECOVERY utility uses a number of data sets during its operation.
The following table lists the data sets that MODIFY RECOVERY uses. The table
lists the DD name that is used to identify the data set, a description of the data set,
and an indication of whether it is required. Include statements in your JCL for each
Table 52. Data sets that MODIFY RECOVERY uses
Data set
Description
Required?
SYSIN

control statement.
Yes
SYSPRINT
Yes
Table space
Object for which records are to be deleted.
Concurrency and compatibility for MODIFY RECOVERY

The MODIFY RECOVERY utility has certain concurrency and compatibility
321
compatible.
object.
Table 53. Claim classes of MODIFY RECOVERY operations.
Target
MODIFY RECOVERY
UTRW
Legend:
UTRW - Utility restrictive state - Read-write access allowed.
MODIFY RECOVERY can run concurrently on the same target object with any
utility except the following utilities:
v COPY TABLESPACE
v LOAD
v MERGECOPY
v MODIFY RECOVERY
v RECOVER TABLESPACE
v REORG TABLESPACE
The target object can be a table space or partition.
How MODIFY RECOVERY deletes rows

You can use the MODIFY RECOVERY utility to delete SYSLGRNX and SYSCOPY
rows for a single partition or the entire table space, SYSLGRNX rows when there
are no SYSCOPY rows, recovery rows for indexes, and all image copy entries.
SYSLGRNX and SYSCOPY rows for a single partition or the

entire table space
Use the DSNUM option to specify whether SYSLGRNX and SYSCOPY rows should
be deleted for a single partition or the entire table space. The DSNUM value that
you should use (ALL or integer) depends on the type of image copies that exist for
the table space.
Use the following guidelines to determine whether to use DSNUM ALL or
DSNUM integer:
v If image copies exist at only the partition level, use DSNUM integer.
v If image copies exist at only the data set level for a nonpartitioned table space,
use DSNUM ALL. If DSNUM integer is used, SYSLGRNX records are not
deleted.
v If image copies exist at only the table space or index space level, use DSNUM
ALL.
v If image copies exist at both the partition level and the table space or index
space level, use DSNUM ALL.
Restriction: In this case, if you use DSNUM integer, MODIFY RECOVERY does
not delete any SYSCOPY or SYSLGRNX records that are newer than the oldest
recoverable point at the table space or index space level.
322
v If image copies exist at both the data set level and the table space level for a
nonpartitioned table space, use DSNUM ALL.
Restriction: In this case, if you use DSNUM integer, MODIFY RECOVERY does
not delete any SYSCOPY or SYSLGRNX records that are newer than the oldest
recoverable point at the table space level.
The preceding guidelines pertain to all image copies, regardless of how they were
created, including those copies that were created by COPY, COPYTOCOPY, LOAD,
REORG or MERGECOPY.
|
|
|
If MODIFY RECOVERY deleted SYSCOPY or SYSLGRNX rows, it will insert a

SYSCOPY record with ICTYPE=M, STYPE=R, and START_RBA equal to the
START_RBA of the most recent SYSCOPY or SYSLGRNX row deleted.
SYSLGRNX rows when there are no SYSCOPY rows

Use the AGE or DATE options when you want to delete SYSLGRNX rows and
there are no SYSCOPY rows that meet the deletion criteria. The SYSLGRNX rows
will be deleted based on the AGE or DATE specified. The RECOVER utility will
use this information to determine whether it has all of the necessary information
for the recovery of objects.
Recovery rows for indexes

When you perform MODIFY RECOVERY on a table space, utility processing
deletes SYSCOPY and SYSLGRNX rows that meet the AGE and DATE criteria for
related indexes that were defined with COPY YES.
All image copy entries

MODIFY RECOVERY allows you to delete all image copy entries for a table space
or data set. In this case, MODIFY RECOVERY:
v Issues message DSNU572I.
v Sets the COPY-pending restrictive status.
v Issues return code 4.
How MODIFY RECOVERY deletes SYSOBDS entries

MODIFY RECOVERY removes entries for an object from the SYSOBDS catalog
table when the last image copy that contains version 0 data rows or keys is
deleted.
Reclaiming space in the DBD

You can reclaim space in the DBD using the MODIFY RECOVERY utility.
To
1.
2.
3.
4.
reclaim space in the DBD when you drop a table:

Commit the drop.
Run the REORG utility.
Run the COPY utility to make a full image copy of the table space.
Run MODIFY RECOVERY with the DELETE or RETAIN option to delete all
previous image copies.
323
Improving REORG performance after adding a column

After you add a column to a table space, the next REORG of the table space
creates default values for the added column by converting all of the fields in each
row to the external DB2 format during the UNLOAD phase and then converting
them to the internal DB2 format during the RELOAD phase. Subsequently, each
REORG job for the table space repeats this processing in the UNLOAD and
RELOAD phases.
To
1.
2.
3.
avoid repeating the compression cycle with each REORG:

Run the REORG utility on the table space.
Run the COPY utility to make a full image copy of the table space.
Run MODIFY RECOVERY with the DELETE or RETAIN option to delete all
previous image copies. MODIFY RECOVERY changes the status of the column
that is added after using the ALTER command only if SYSCOPY rows need to
be deleted.
Termination or restart of MODIFY RECOVERY

You can terminate and restart the MODIFY RECOVERY utility.
You can use the TERM UTILITY command to terminate MODIFY RECOVERY in
any phase without any integrity exposure.
You can restart a MODIFY RECOVERY utility job, but it starts from the beginning
again.
Related concepts
The effect of MODIFY RECOVERY on version numbers

When you run MODIFY RECOVERY, the utility updates this range of used version
numbers for table spaces and for indexes that are defined with the COPY YES
attribute. MODIFY RECOVERY updates the OLDEST_VERSION column of the
appropriate catalog table or tables with the version number of the oldest version
that has not yet been applied to the entire object. DB2 can reuse any version
numbers that are not in the range that is set by the values in the
OLDEST_VERSION and CURRENT_VERSION columns.
DB2 stores the range of used version numbers in the OLDEST_VERSION and
CURRENT_VERSION columns of one or more of the following catalog tables,
depending on the object:
v SYSIBM.SYSTABLEPART
v SYSIBM.SYSINDEXES
situations is true:
324
v The value in the CURRENT_VERSION column is 255 for table spaces or 15 for
indexes, and the value in the OLDEST_VERSION column is 0 or 1.
To recycle version numbers for indexes that are defined with the COPY NO
attribute, run LOAD REPLACE, REBUILD INDEX, REORG INDEX, or REORG
TABLESPACE.
Related information
Sample MODIFY RECOVERY control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own MODIFY
RECOVERY control statements.
Example 1: Deleting SYSCOPY and SYSLGRNX records that are

over a certain age
The following control statement specifies that the MODIFY RECOVERY utility is to
delete all SYSCOPY and SYSLGRNX records that are older than 90 days for table
space DSN8D81A.DSN8S81E.
//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='IUIQU2UD.MODRCV1',
//
//SYSIN
DD *
MODIFY RECOVERY TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E DELETE AGE(90)
/*
Example 2: Deleting SYSCOPY and SYSLGRNX records that are

older than a certain date
The following control statement specifies that MODIFY RECOVERY is to delete all
SYSCOPY and SYSLGRNX records that were written before 10 September 2002.
MODIFY RECOVERY TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D DELETE DATE(20020910)
Example 3: Deleting SYSCOPY records for partitions

The following control statements specifies that MODIFY RECOVERY is to delete
the following SYSCOPY records for table space TU5AP053:
v Any records in partition 2 that are older than 5 days
v Any records in partition 3 that were written before 9 October 2006
//STEP2
EXEC
//SYSIN DD *
DSNUPROC,UID='FUN5U053.STEP2',UTPROC='',SYSTEM='SSTR'
MODIFY RECOVERY TABLESPACE TU5AP053

DSNUM 2
DELETE AGE(5)
MODIFY RECOVERY TABLESPACE TU5AP053
DSNUM 3
DELETE DATE(061009)
/*
Figure 52. Example MODIFY RECOVERY statements that delete SYSCOPY records for
partitions
325
Example 4: Deleting all SYSCOPY records for objects in a list

and viewing the results
In the following example job, the LISTDEF utility control statements define three
lists (L1, L2, L3). The first group of REPORT utility control statements then specify
that the utility is to report recovery information for the objects in these lists. Next,
the MODIFY RECOVERY control statement specifies that the utility is to delete all
SYSCOPY records for the objects in the L1 list. Finally, the second group of
REPORT control statements specify that the utility is to report the recovery
information for the same three lists. In this second report, no information will be
reported for the objects in the L1 list because all of the SYSCOPY records have
been deleted.
//STEP4
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='JULTU224.RCV1',
//
//SYSIN
DD *
LISTDEF L1 INCLUDE TABLESPACE DBLT2401.T*
LISTDEF L2 INCLUDE INDEXSPACE DBLT2401.I*
LISTDEF L3 INCLUDE INDEX IXLT2402
REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE LIST L1
REPORT RECOVERY INDEXSPACE LIST L2
REPORT RECOVERY INDEX LIST L3
MODIFY RECOVERY LIST L1
DELETE DATE(*)
REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE LIST L1
REPORT RECOVERY INDEXSPACE LIST L2
REPORT RECOVERY INDEX LIST L3
/*
Figure 53. Example MODIFY RECOVERY statement that deletes all SYSCOPY records
Example 5: Deleting SYSCOPY and SYSLGRNX records for clone

objects
The following control statement specifies that MODIFY RECOVERY is to delete
SYSCOPY records and SYSLGRNX records for only clone objects.
|
|
MODIFY RECOVERY TABLESPACE DBKQBL01.TPKQBL01

CLONE
DELETE AGE(*)
Example 6: Retaining SYSCOPY and SYSLGRNX records of a

GDG
The following control statement specifies that MODIFY RECOVERY is to retain as
much recent records in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY as defined in the GDG limit.
|
|
MODIFY RECOVERY TABLESPACE DBKQBL01.TPKQBL01 RETAIN GDGLIMIT
Example 7: Retaining SYSCOPY and SYSLGRNX records

The following control statement specifies that MODIFY RECOVERY is to retain 4
recent records in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY.
|
|
MODIFY RECOVERY TABLESPACE DBKQBL01.TPKQBL01 RETAIN
Related reference
Chapter 27, REPORT, on page 563
326
LAST (4)
Chapter 19. MODIFY STATISTICS

The online MODIFY STATISTICS utility deletes unwanted statistics history records
from the corresponding catalog tables. You can remove statistics history records
that were written before a specific date, or you can remove records of a specific
age. You can delete records for an entire table space, index space, or index.
Run MODIFY STATISTICS regularly to clear outdated information from the
statistics history catalog tables. By deleting outdated information from those tables,
you can improve performance for processes that access data from those tables.
|
|
Restriction: MODIFY STATISTICS does not delete statistics history records for
clone tables because statistics are not collected for these tables.
Output
|
|
MODIFY STATISTICS deletes rows from the following catalog tables:

v SYSIBM.SYSCOLDIST_HIST
v SYSIBM.SYSCOLUMNS_HIST
v SYSIBM.SYSINDEXES_HIST
v SYSIBM.SYSINDEXPART_HIST
v SYSIBM.SYSINDEXSTATS_HIST
v SYSIBM.SYSLOBSTATS_HIST
v SYSIBM.SYSTABLEPART_HIST
v SYSIBM.SYSTABSTATS_HIST
v SYSIBM.SYSTABLES_HIST
v SYSKEYTARGETS_HIST
v SYSKEYTGTDIST_HIST
v STATS privilege for the database to run MODIFY STATISTICS.
v SYSCTRL or SYSADM authority.
A user ID with installation SYSOPR authority can also execute MODIFY
STATISTICS, but only on a table space in the DSNDB01 or DSNDB06 database.
Execution phases of MODIFY STATISTICS

The MODIFY STATISTICS utility operates in these phases:
Phase Description
UTILINIT
MODIFYS
Deletes records
327
UTILTERM
Performs cleanup
Syntax and options of the MODIFY STATISTICS control statement

The MODIFY STATISTICS utility control statement, with its multiple options,
Syntax diagram
MODIFY STATISTICS
DELETE
ALL
ACCESSPATH
SPACE
LIST listdef-name
TABLESPACE
table-space-name
database-name.
INDEXSPACE
index-space-name
database-name.
INDEX
index-name
creator-id.
AGE
(integer)
(*)
DATE
(integer)
(*)
Option descriptions
LIST listdef-name
Specifies the name of a previously defined LISTDEF list name. You cannot
repeat the LIST keyword or specify it with TABLESPACE, INDEXSPACE, or
INDEX.
The list can contain index spaces, table spaces, or both. MODIFY STATISTICS
is invoked once for each object in the list.
Specifies the database and the table space for which catalog history records are
to be deleted.
database-name
database-name is optional.
table-space-name
Specifies the name of the table space for which statistics are to be deleted.
Specifies the qualified name of the index space for which catalog history
information is to be deleted. The utility lists the name in the
SYSIBM.SYSINDEXES table.
328
database-name
Optionally specifies the name of the database to which the index space
belongs.
index-space-name
Specifies the name of the index space for which the statistics are to be
deleted.
Specifies the index for which catalog history information is to be deleted.
creator-id
Optionally specifies the creator of the index.
index-name
Specifies the name of the index for which the statistics are to be deleted.
DELETE
Indicates that records are to be deleted.
ALL
Deletes all statistics history rows that are related to the specified object
from all catalog history tables.
Rows from the following history tables are deleted only when you specify
DELETE ALL:
v SYSTABLES_HIST
v SYSTABSTATS_HIST
v SYSINDEXES_HIST
v SYSINDEXSTATS_HIST
|
v SYSKEYTARGETS_HIST
ACCESSPATH
Deletes all access-path statistics history rows that are related to the
specified object from the following history tables:
v SYSIBM.SYSCOLDIST_HIST
v SYSIBM.SYSCOLUMNS_HIST
v SYSKEYTGTDIST_HIST
SPACE
Deletes all space-tuning statistics history rows that are related to the
specified object from the following history tables:
v SYSIBM.SYSINDEXPART_HIST
v SYSIBM.SYSTABLEPART_HIST
v SYSIBM.SYSLOBSTATS_HIST
AGE (integer)
Deletes all statistics history rows that are related to the specified object and
that are older than a specified number of days.
(integer)
Specifies the number of days in a range from 0 to 32 767. This option
cannot delete records that are created today (age 0).
(*) Deletes all records, regardless of their age.
329
DATE (integer)
Deletes all statistics history rows that were written before a specified date.
(integer)
Specifies the date in an eight-character format. Specify a year (yyyy), month
(mm), and day (dd) in the form yyyymmdd.
(* )
Deletes all records, regardless of the date on which they were written.
Data sets that MODIFY STATISTICS uses

The MODIFY STATISTICS utility uses a number of data sets during its operation.
The following table lists the data sets that MODIFY STATISTICS uses. The table
lists the DD name that is used to identify the data set, a description of the data set,
and an indication of whether it is required. Include statements in your JCL for each
Table 54. Data sets that MODIFY STATISTICS uses
Data set
Description
Required?
SYSIN

control statement
Yes
SYSPRINT
Output data set for messages
Yes
Table space or index space
Object for which records are to be deleted.
Concurrency and compatibility for MODIFY STATISTICS

The MODIFY STATISTICS utility has certain concurrency and compatibility
compatible.
object.
Table 55. Claim classes of MODIFY STATISTICS operations.
Target
MODIFY STATISTICS
Table space, index, or index space
UTRW
Legend:
UTRW - Utility restrictive state - read-write access allowed.
330
Deciding which statistics history rows to delete

After analyzing trends by using the relevant historical catalog information and
possibly taking actions based on this information, consider deleting all or part of
the statistics history catalog rows.
Deleting outdated information from the statistics history catalog tables can
improve performance for processes that access data from those tables. You also
make available the space in the catalog. Then, the next time you update the
relevant statistics by using RUNSTATS TABLESPACE, REBUILD INDEX, or
REORG INDEX, DB2 repopulates the statistics history catalog tables with more
recent historical data. Examining this data lets you determine the efficacy of any
adjustments that you made as a result of your previous analysis.
Be aware that when you manually insert, update, or delete catalog information,
DB2 does not store the historical information for those operations in the historical
catalog tables.
Deleting specific statistics history rows

MODIFY STATISTICS lets you delete some or all statistics history rows for a table
space, an index space, or an index.
You can choose to delete only the statistics rows that relate to access path selection
by specifying the ACCESSPATH option. Alternatively, you can delete the rows that
relate to space statistics by using the SPACE option. To delete rows in all statistics
history catalog tables, including the SYSIBM.SYSTABLES_HIST catalog table, you
must specify the DELETE ALL option in the utility control statement.
To delete statistics from the RUNSTATS history tables, you can either use the
MODIFY STATISTICS utility or issue SQL DELETE statements. The MODIFY
STATISTICS utility simplifies the purging of old statistics without requiring you to
write the SQL DELETE statements. You can also delete rows that meet the age and
date criteria by specifying the corresponding keywords (AGE and DATE) for a
particular object.
To avoid time outs when you delete historical statistics with MODIFY STATISTICS,
you should increase the LOCKMAX parameter for DSNDB06.SYSHIST with ALTER
TABLESPACE.
Termination or restart of MODIFY STATISTICS

You can terminate and restart the MODIFY STATISTICS utility.
You can use the TERM UTILITY command to terminate the MODIFY STATISTICS
utility in any phase.
You can restart a MODIFY STATISTICS utility job, but it starts from the beginning
again.
331
Related concepts
Sample MODIFY STATISTICS control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own MODIFY
STATISTICS control statements.
Example 1: Deleting SYSIBM.SYSTABLES_HIST records by age

The following control statement specifies that the MODIFY STATISTICS utility is
delete all statistics history records for table space DSN8D81A.DSN8S81E that are
older than 60 days.
//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='IUIQU2UD.MODSTAT1',
//
//SYSIN
DD *
MODIFY STATISTICS TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E
DELETE ALL
AGE 60
/*
Example 2: Deleting access path records for all objects in a list

The following MODIFY STATISTICS control statement specifies that the utility is to
delete access-path statistics history rows that were created before 17 April 2000 for
objects in the specified list. The list, M1, is defined in the preceding LISTDEF
control statement and includes table spaces DB0E1501.TL0E1501 and
DSN8D81A.DSN8S81E.
//STEP9
//
//
//SYSPRINT
//SYSIN
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='JUOEU115.MDFYL9',
UTPROC='',
SYSTEM='SSTR'
DD SYSOUT=*
DD *
LISTDEF M1 INCLUDE TABLESPACE DBOE1501.TLOE1501

MODIFY STATISTICS LIST M1
DELETE ACCESSPATH DATE(20000417)
/*
Figure 54. MODIFY STATISTICS control statement that specifies that access path history
records are to be deleted
Example 3: Deleting space-tuning statistics records for an index

by age
The following control statement specifies that MODIFY STATISTICS is to delete
space-tuning statistics records for index ADMF001.IXOE15S1 that are older than
one day.
332
//STEP9
//
//
//SYSPRINT
//SYSIN
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='JUOEU115.MOFYS9',
UTPROC='',
SYSTEM='SSTR'
DD SYSOUT=*
DD *
MODIFY STATISTICS INDEX ADMF001.IXOE15S1

DELETE SPACE AGE 1
/*
Figure 55. MODIFY STATISTICS control statement that specifies that space-tuning statistics
Example 4: Deleting all statistics history records for an index

space
The following control statement specifies that MODIFY STATISTICS is to delete all
statistics history records for index space DBOE1501.IUOE1501. Note that the
deleted records are not limited by date because (*) is specified.
//STEP8
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='JUOEU115.MDFYL8',
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='SSTR'
//SYSIN
DD *
MODIFY STATISTICS INDEXSPACE DBOE1501.IUOE1501
DELETE ALL DATE (*)
/*
Figure 56. MODIFY STATISTICS control statement that specifies that all statistics history
333
334
Chapter 20. OPTIONS

The online OPTIONS utility control statement specifies processing options that are
applicable across many utility executions in a job step
By specifying various options, you can:
v Preview utility control statements
v Preview LISTDEF or TEMPLATE definitions
v
v
v
v
Override library names for LISTDEF lists or TEMPLATE definitions

Specify how to handle errors during list processing
Alter the return code for warning messages
Restore all default options
You can repeat an OPTIONS control statement within the SYSIN DD statement. If
you repeat the control statement, it entirely replaces any prior OPTIONS control
statement.
Output
The OPTIONS control statement sets the specified processing options for the
duration of the job step, or until replaced by another OPTIONS control statement
within the same job step.
The OPTIONS control statement performs setup for subsequent control statements.
The OPTIONS statement itself requires no privileges to execute.
Execution phases of OPTIONS

The OPTIONS control statement executes entirely in the UTILINIT phase, in which
it performs setup for the subsequent utility.
Syntax and options of the OPTIONS control statement

The OPTIONS utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
335
Syntax diagram
OPTIONS

PREVIEW
LISTDEFDD
OFF
KEY key-value
ddname
TEMPLATEDD
ddname
FILSZ
integer
event-spec
event-spec:
ITEMERROR,HALT
WARNING,RC4
EVENT (
)
ITEMERROR,SKIP
WARNING,RC0
WARNING,RC8
Option descriptions
PREVIEW
Specifies that the utility control statements that follow are to run in PREVIEW
mode. The utility checks for syntax errors in all utility control statements, but
normal utility execution does not take place. If the syntax is valid, the utility
expands all LISTDEF lists and TEMPLATE DSNs that appear in SYSIN and
prints results to the SYSPRINT data set.
PREVIEW evaluates and expands all LISTDEF statements into an actual list of
table spaces or index spaces. It evaluates TEMPLATE DSNs and uses variable
substitution for actual data set names when possible. It also expands lists from
the SYSLISTD DD and TEMPLATE DSNs from the SYSTEMPL DD that a
utility invocation references.
A definitive preview of TEMPLATE DSN values is not always possible.
Substitution values for some variables, such as &DATE., &TIME., &SEQ. and
&PART., can change at execution time. In some cases, PREVIEW generates
approximate data set names. The OPTIONS utility substitutes unknown
character variables with the character string UNKNOWN and unknown
integer variables with zeroes.
Instead of OPTIONS PREVIEW, you can use a JCL PARM to activate preview
processing. Although the two functions are identical, use JCL PARM to
preview an existing set of utility control statements. Use the OPTION
PREVIEW control statement when you invoke DB2 utilities through a stored
procedure.
The JCL PARM is specified as the third JCL PARM of DSNUTILB and on the
UTPROC variable of DSNUPROC, as shown in the following JCL:
//STEP1
//
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='JULTU106.RECOVE1',
UTPROC='PREVIEW',SYSTEM='SSTR'
The PARM value PREVIEW causes the utility control statements in that job
step to be processed for preview only. The LISTDEF and TEMPLATE control
statements are expanded, but the utility does not execute.
OPTIONS PREVIEW is identical to the PREVIEW JCL parameter, except that
you can specify a subsequent OPTIONS statement to turn off the preview for
336
OPTIONS PREVIEW. Absence of the PREVIEW keyword in the OPTION

control statement turns off preview processing, but it does not override the
PREVIEW JCL parameter, which, if specified, remains in effect for the entire
job step.
LISTDEFDD ddname
Specifies the ddname of the LISTDEF definition library. A LISTDEF library is a
data set that contains only LISTDEF utility control statements. This data set is
processed only when a referenced LIST is not found in SYSIN.
The default value is SYSLISTD.
TEMPLATEDD ddname
Specifies the ddname of the TEMPLATE definition library. A TEMPLATE library
is a data set that contains only TEMPLATE utility control statements. This data
set is processed only when a referenced name does not exist in the job step as
a DD name and is not found in SYSIN as a TEMPLATE name.
The default value is SYSTEMPL.
|
|
|
|
|
FILSZ integer
Specifies a file size in megabytes and overrides the DFSORT file size when sort
work data sets are allocated by the utility with system parameter UTSORTAL
set to YES. Only use this keyword under the direction of IBM Software
Support.
EVENT
Specifies one or more pairs of utility processing events and the matching action
for the event. Not all actions are valid for all events.
|
|
The parentheses and commas in the EVENT operand are currently optional but
they may be required in a future release.
ITEMERROR
Specifies how utility processing is to handle errors during list processing.
Specifically, this keyword indicates the effect on processing in response to
return code 8. By default, utility processing stops (HALT). The ITEMERROR
event does not include abnormal terminations (abends).
Note that for the QUIESCE utility, the indexes for the table spaces in the list, if
any, are considered as list items for the purposes of the ITEMERROR event.
ITEMERROR affects how errors are handled on both the table spaces and the
indexes.
HALT
Specifies that the utility is to stop after the event.
SKIP
Ignores the event and skips the list item. Processing continues with the
next item in the list.
SKIP applies only during the processing of a valid list. SKIP does not
apply if a utility detects that a list is not valid for the utility that is
invoked. In that case, the list is rejected with an error message and the
processing of the list is not initiated.
If any of the items in a list is skipped, the utility produces a return code of
8, which terminates the job step. The following code shows an OPTIONS
statement with the SKIP option:
OPTIONS EVENT (ITEMERROR, SKIP)
COPY LISTA
COPY LISTB
Chapter 20. OPTIONS
337
If LISTA contains ten objects and one object produces a return code 8
during the COPY, the other nine objects in the list are copied successfully.
The job step ends with a return code 8 and COPY LISTB is not executed.
WARNING
Specifies a response to the return code message event.
Use WARNING to alter the return code for warning messages. You can alter
the return code from message DSNU010I with this option. If you alter the
message return code, message DSNU1024I is issued to document the new
return code.
Action choices are as follows:
RC0
Lowers the final return code of a single utility invocation that ends in a
return code 4 to a return code of 0. Use RC0 to force a return code of 0 for
warning messages.
Use this option only when return code 4 is expected, is acceptable, and
other mechanisms are in place to validate the results of a utility execution.
RC4
Specifies that return codes for warning messages are to remain unchanged.
Use RC4 to override a previous OPTIONS WARNING specification in the
same job step.
RC8
Raises the final return code of a single utility invocation that ends in a
return code 4 to a return code of 8. Use RC8 to force a return code of 8 for
warning messages. The return code of 8 causes the job step to terminate
and subsequent utility control statements are not executed.
OFF
Specifies that all default options are to be restored. OPTIONS OFF does not
override the PREVIEW JCL parameter, which, if specified, remains in effect for
the entire job step. You cannot specify any other OPTIONS keywords with
OPTIONS OFF.
OPTIONS OFF is equivalent to OPTIONS LISTDEFDD SYSLISTD
TEMPLATEDD SYSTEMPL EVENT (ITEMERROR, HALT, WARNING, RC4).
KEY
Specifies an option that you should use only when you are instructed by IBM
Software Support. OPTIONS KEY is followed by a single operand that IBM
Software Support provides when needed.
Concurrency and compatibility for OPTIONS

The OPTIONS utility has certain concurrency and compatibility characteristics
associated with it.
OPTIONS is a utility control statement that you can use to set up an environment
for another utility to follow. The OPTIONS statement is stored until a specific
utility references the statement. When referenced by another utility, the list is
expanded. At that time, the concurrency and compatibility restrictions of that
utility apply, with the additional restriction that the catalog tables that are
necessary to expand the list must be available for read-only access.
338
Executing statements in preview mode

You can execute utility control statement in preview mode and the utility checks
for syntax errors in all utility control statements, but normal utility execution does
not take place.
To execute utility control statements in preview mode:
Specify the PREVIEW option in the OPTIONS control statement. Control
statements are previewed for use with LISTDEF lists and TEMPLATE definitions
but the specified options are not actually executed.
Related reference
Syntax and options of the RUNSTATS control statement on page 594
Specifying LISTDEF and TEMPLATE libraries

You can override the names of the optional library data sets.
To specify LISTDEF and TEMPLATE libraries:
Specify the LISTDEFDD option and the TEMPLATEDD option in the OPTIONS
control statement to override the names of the optional library data sets.
Overriding standard utility processing behavior

You can alter settings for warning return codes and error handling during list
processing.
To override standard utility processing behavior:
Specify the EVENT option in the OPTIONS control statement.
Termination or restart of OPTIONS

You can terminate and restart the OPTIONS utility.
You can terminate an OPTIONS utility job by using the TERM UTILITY command
You can restart an OPTIONS utility job, but it starts from the beginning again. If
you are restarting this utility as part of a larger job in which OPTIONS completed
successfully, but a later utility failed, do not change the OPTIONS utility control
statement, if possible. If you must change the OPTIONS utility control statement,
use caution; any changes can cause the restart processing to fail. For example, if
you specify a valid OPTIONS statement in the initial invocation, and then on
restart, specify OPTIONS PREVIEW, the job fails.
Related concepts
Sample OPTIONS control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own OPTIONS
control statements.
Chapter 20. OPTIONS
339
Example 1: Checking control statement syntax and previewing

lists and TEMPLATE data set names
The following OPTIONS utility control statement specifies that the subsequent
utility control statements are to run in PREVIEW mode. In PREVIEW mode, DB2
checks for syntax errors in all utility control statements, but normal utility
execution does not take place. If the syntax is valid, DB2 expands the CPYLIST list
and the data set names in the COPYLOC and COPYREM TEMPLATE utility
control statements and prints these results to the SYSPRINT data set.
OPTIONS PREVIEW
TEMPLATE COPYLOC UNIT(SYSDA)
DSN(&DB..&TS..D&JDATE..&STEPNAME..COPY&IC.&LOCREM.&PB.)
DISP(NEW,CATLG,CATLG) SPACE(200,20) TRK
VOLUMES(SCR03)
TEMPLATE COPYREM UNIT(SYSDA)
DSN(&DB..&TS..&UT..T&TIME..COPY&IC.&LOCREM.&PB.)
DISP(NEW,CATLG,CATLG) SPACE(100,10) TRK
LISTDEF CPYLIST INCLUDE TABLESPACES DATABASE DBLT0701
COPY LIST CPYLIST FULL YES
COPYDDN(COPYLOC,COPYLOC)
RECOVERYDDN(COPYREM,COPYREM)
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
Figure 57. Example OPTIONS statement for checking syntax and previewing lists and
templates.
Example 2: Specifying LISTDEF and TEMPLATE definition

libraries
In the following example, the OPTIONS control statements specify the DD names
of the LISTDEF definition libraries and the TEMPLATE definition libraries.
The first OPTIONS statement specifies that the LISTDEF definition library is
identified by the V1LIST DD statement and the TEMPLATE definition library is
identified by the V1TEMPL DD statement. These definition libraries apply to the
subsequent COPY utility control statement. Therefore, if DB2 does not find the
PAYTBSP list in SYSIN, it searches the V1LIST library, and if DB2 does not find the
PAYTEMP1 template in SYSIN, it searches the V1TEMP library.
The second OPTIONS statement is similar to the first, but it identifies different
libraries and applies to the second COPY control statement. This second COPY
control statement looks similar to the first COPY job. However, this statement
processes a different list and uses a different template. Whereas the first COPY job
uses the PAYTBSP list from the V1LIST library, the second COPY job uses the
PAYTBSP list from the V2LIST library. Also, the first COPY job uses the PAYTEMP1
template from the V1TEMPL library, the second COPY job uses the PAYTEMP1
template from the V2TEMPL library.
OPTIONS LISTDEFDD V1LIST TEMPLATEDD V1TEMPL
COPY LIST PAYTBSP COPYDDN(PAYTEMP1,PAYTEMP1)
OPTIONS LISTDEFDD V2LIST TEMPLATEDD V2TEMPL
COPY LIST PAYTBSP COPYDDN(PAYTEMP1,PAYTEMP1)
Example 3: Forcing a return code 0

In the following example, the first OPTIONS control statement forces a return code
of 0 for the subsequent MODIFY RECOVERY utility control statement. Ordinarily,
this statement ends with a return code of 4 because it specifies that DB2 is to
340
delete all SYSCOPY and SYSLGRNX records for table space A.B. The second
OPTIONS control statement restores the default options, so that no return codes
will be overridden for the second MODIFY RECOVERY control statement.
OPTIONS EVENT(WARNING,RC0)
MODIFY RECOVERY TABLESPACE A.B DELETE AGE(*)
OPTIONS OFF
MODIFY RECOVERY TABLESPACE C.D DELETE AGE(30)
Example 4: Checking syntax and skipping errors while

processing list objects
In the following control statement, the first OPTIONS utility control statement
specifies that the subsequent utility control statements are to run in PREVIEW
mode. In PREVIEW mode, DB2 checks for syntax errors in all utility control
statements, but normal utility execution does not take place. If the syntax is valid,
DB2 expands the three lists (LIST1_LISTDEF, LIST2_LISTDEF, and LIST3_LISTDEF)
and prints these results to the SYSPRINT data set.
The second OPTIONS control statement specifies how DB2 is to handle return
codes of 8 in any subsequent utility statements that process a valid list. If
processing of a list item produces return code 8, DB2 skips that item, and
continues to process the rest of the items in the list, but DB2 does not process the
next utility control statement. Instead, the job ends with return code 8.
OPTIONS PREVIEW
LISTDEF COPY1_LISTDEF
INCLUDE TABLESPACES TABLESPACE DSNDB01.SPT01
INCLUDE TABLESPACES TABLESPACE DSNDB06.SYSDBASE
INCLUDE TABLESPACES TABLESPACE DSNDB06.SYSDBAUT
INCLUDE TABLESPACES TABLESPACE DSNDB06.SYSGPAUT
INCLUDE TABLESPACES TABLESPACE DSNDB06.SYSGROUP
INCLUDE TABLESPACES TABLESPACE DBA91302.T?A9132*
INCLUDE TABLESPACES TABLESPACE DBA91303.TLA9133A
INCLUDE TABLESPACES TABLESPACE DBA91303.TSA9133B
INCLUDE TABLESPACES TABLESPACE DBA91303.TPA9133C
INCLUDE TABLESPACES TABLESPACE DBA91304.TLA9134A
INCLUDE TABLESPACES TABLESPACE DSNDB06.SYSUSER
INCLUDE TABLESPACES TABLESPACE DSNDB06.SYSVIEWS
INCLUDE TABLESPACES TABLESPACE DSNDB06.SYSSTATS
INCLUDE TABLESPACES TABLESPACE DSNDB06.SYSDDF
INCLUDE TABLESPACES TABLESPACE DSNDB06.SYSOBJ
INCLUDE TABLESPACES TABLESPACE DBA91304.TSA9134B
INCLUDE TABLESPACES TABLESPACE DSNDB06.SYSHIST
INCLUDE TABLESPACES TABLESPACE DSNDB06.SYSGRTNS
INCLUDE TABLESPACES TABLESPACE DSNDB06.SYSJAVA
INCLUDE TABLESPACES TABLESPACE DBA91304.TPA9134C
OPTIONS EVENT(ITEMERROR,SKIP)
TEMPLATE TMP1 UNIT(SYSDA) DISP(MOD,CATLG,CATLG)
VOLUMES(SCR03)
DSN(DH109013.&TS..COPY&ICTYPE.&LOCREM.&PRIBAC.)
COPY LIST COPY1_LISTDEF SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
COPYDDN (TMP1)
RECOVERYDDN (TMP1)
FULL YES
COPYDDN (TMP1,TMP1)
FULL YES
COPYDDN (TMP1,TMP1)
RECOVERYDDN (TMP1,TMP1)
FULL YES
Chapter 20. OPTIONS
341
Figure 58. Example OPTIONS statements for checking syntax and skipping errors
342
Chapter 21. QUIESCE

The online QUIESCE utility establishes a quiesce point for a table space, partition,
table space set, or list of table spaces and table space sets.
Output
A quiesce point is the current log RBA or log record sequence number (LRSN).
QUIESCE then records the quiesce point in the SYSIBM.SYSCOPY catalog table.
With RECOVER to a prior point-in-time with consistency, a quiesce point is no
longer essential when planning for point-in-time recoveries since the objects will be
recovered with transactional consistency (the objects will only contain data that has
been committed). However, recovering objects to a quiesce point will be faster
because no work has to be backed out. Also, you may still want to establish
quiesce points for related sets of objects if there is a need to plan for a
point-in-time recovery for the entire set.
You can recover a table space to its quiesce point by using the RECOVER
TABLESPACE utility.
With the WRITE(YES) option, QUIESCE writes changed pages for the table spaces
and their indexes from the DB2 buffer pool to disk. The catalog table SYSCOPY
records the current RBA and the timestamp of the quiesce point. A row with
ICTYPE=Q is inserted into SYSIBM.SYSCOPY for each table space that is
quiesced. DB2 also inserts a SYSCOPY row with ICTYPE=Q for any indexes
(defined with the COPY YES attribute) over a table space that is being quiesced.
(Table spaces DSNDB06.SYSCOPY, DSNDB01.DBD01, and DSNDB01.SYSUTILX are
an exception; their information is written to the log.)
An ID with installation SYSOPR authority can also execute QUIESCE, but only on
a table space in the DSNDB01 or DSNDB06 database.
You can specify DSNDB01.SYSUTILX, but you cannot include it in a list with other
table spaces to be quiesced. Recover to current of the catalog/directory table spaces
is preferred and recommended. However, if a point-in-time recovery of the
catalog/directory table spaces is desired, a separate quiesce of DSNDB06.SYSCOPY
is required after a quiesce of the other catalog/directory table spaces.
Execution phases of QUIESCE

The QUIESCE utility operates in these phases:
Phase Description
343
UTILINIT
Initialization and setup
QUIESCE
Determining the quiesce point and updating the catalog
UTILTERM
Cleanup
Syntax and options of the QUIESCE control statement

The QUIESCE utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
Syntax diagram
QUIESCE
LIST listdef-name
TABLESPACE
database-name.
TABLESPACESET
TABLESPACE
table-space-name
PART integer
table-space-name
database-name.
WRITE YES

CLONE
WRITE NO
Option descriptions
LIST listdef-name
only table spaces. The utility allows one LIST keyword for each QUIESCE
control statement. Do not specify LIST with the TABLESPACE or
TABLESPACESET keyword. QUIESCE is invoked once for the entire list. For
the QUIESCE utility, the related index spaces are considered to be list items for
the purposes of OPTIONS ITEMERROR processing. You can alter the utility
behavior during processing of related indexes with the OPTIONS ITEMERROR
statement. This utility will only process clone data if the CLONE keyword is
For QUIESCE TABLESPACE, specifies the table space that is to be quiesced.
For QUIESCE TABLESPACESET, specifies a table space in the table space set
that is to be quiesced. For QUIESCE TABLESPACESET, the TABLESPACE
keyword is optional.
344
database-name
Optionally specifies the name of the database to which the table space
belongs.
table-space-name
Specifies the name of the table space that is to be quiesced. You can specify
DSNDB01.SYSUTILX, but do not include that name in a list with other
table spaces that are to be quiesced. If a point-in-time recovery is planned
for the catalog and directory, DSNDB06.SYSCOPY must be quiesced
separately after all other catalog and directory table spaces.
PART integer
Identifies a partition that is to be quiesced.
4096.
TABLESPACESET
Indicates that all of the referentially related table spaces in the table space set
are to be quiesced. For the purposes of the QUIESCE utility, a table space set is
one of these:
v A group of table spaces that have a referential relationship
v A base table space with all of its LOB table spaces
v A base table space with all of its XML table spaces
|
|
|
|
CLONE
Indicates that QUIESCE is to create a quiesce point for only the specified clone
table space. This utility will only process clone data if the CLONE keyword is
WRITE
Specifies whether the changed pages from the table spaces and index spaces
are to be written to disk.
YES
Establishes a quiesce point and writes the changed pages from the table
spaces and index spaces to disk.
NO
Establishes a quiesce point but does not write the changed pages from the
table spaces and index spaces to disk.
|
|
QUIESCE is not performed on table spaces with the NOT LOGGED

attribute.
Before running QUIESCE

Certain activities might be required before you run the QUIESCE utility, depending
on your situation.
You cannot run QUIESCE on a table space that is in COPY-pending,
CHECK-pending, RECOVER-pending, or auxiliary CHECK-pending status.
Chapter 21. QUIESCE
345
Related concepts
Resetting COPY-pending status on page 288
Resetting REBUILD-pending status on page 288
Related tasks
Resetting CHECK-pending status on page 78
Related reference
Data sets that QUIESCE uses

The QUIESCE utility uses a number of data sets during its operation.
The following table lists the data sets that QUIESCE uses. The table lists the DD
Table 56. Data sets that QUIESCE uses
Data set
Description
Required?
SYSIN

control statement.
Yes
SYSPRINT
Yes
Table space
Object that is to be quiesced. (If you want to quiesce only one partition of
a table space, you must use the PART option in the control statement.)
Concurrency and compatibility for QUIESCE

The QUIESCE utility has certain concurrency and compatibility characteristics
associated with it.
compatible.
Claims
The following table shows which claim classes QUIESCE drains and any restrictive
Table 57. Claim classes of QUIESCE operations.
Target
WRITE YES
WRITE NO
DW/UTRO
DW/UTRO
Partitioning index, data-partitioned

secondary index, or partition
DW/UTRO
Nonpartitioned secondary index
DW/UTRO
Legend:
v DW - Drain the write claim class - concurrent access for SQL readers
v UTRO - Utility restrictive state - read-only access allowed
346
Compatibility
The following table shows which utilities can run concurrently with QUIESCE on
options of a utility, that information is also documented in the table. QUIESCE
does not set a utility restrictive state if the target object is DSNDB01.SYSUTILX.
Table 58. Compatibility of QUIESCE with other utilities
Action
Compatible with
QUIESCE?
Yes
No
CHECK INDEX
Yes
CHECK LOB
Yes
COPY INDEXSPACE SHRLEVEL CHANGE
No
COPY INDEXSPACE SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
Yes
COPY TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL CHANGE
No
COPY TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
Yes
DIAGNOSE
Yes
LOAD
No
MERGECOPY
Yes
MODIFY
Yes
QUIESCE
Yes
REBUILD INDEX
No
RECOVER INDEX
No
RECOVER TABLESPACE
No
REORG INDEX
No
No
REORG TABLESPACE UNLOAD ONLY or EXTERNAL
Yes
No
Yes
REPORT
Yes
RUNSTATS
Yes
STOSPACE
Yes
UNLOAD
Yes
To run the QUIESCE utility on DSNDB01.SYSUTILX, ensure that QUIESCE is the

only utility in the job step.
QUIESCE on SYSUTILX is an exclusive job; such a job can interrupt another job
between job steps, possibly causing the interrupted job to time out.
Chapter 21. QUIESCE
347
Using QUIESCE on catalog and directory objects

To plan for point in time recoveries using QUIESCE, you can quiesce
DSNDB01.SYSUTILX, but DSNDB01.SYSUTILX must be the only table space in the
QUIESCE control statement.
If a point-in-time recovery is planned for the catalog and directory, a separate
QUIESCE control statement for DSNDB06.SYSCOPY is required after you quiesce
the other catalog and directory table spaces. A separate QUIESCE of
DSNDB06.SYSCOPY is needed after the QUIESCE of other objects to ensure that a
subsequent point-in-time recovery of DSNDB06.SYSCOPY recovers all of the
QUIESCE SYSCOPY records for the other catalog and directory objects.
Common quiesce points

You can use the QUIESCE utility with the TABLESPACESET option to obtain a
common quiesce point for related table spaces.
With RECOVER to a prior point-in-time with consistency, a quiesce point is no
longer essential when planning for point-in-time recoveries because the objects will
be recovered with transactional consistency (the objects will only contain data that
has been committed). However, recovering objects to a quiesce point will be faster
because no work has to be backed out. Also, you may still want to establish
quiesce points for related sets of objects if there is a need to plan for point-in-time
recovery for the entire set. For the purposes of the QUIESCE utility, a table space
set is:
v A group of table spaces that have a referential relationship
v A base table space with all of its LOB table spaces
If you use QUIESCE TABLESPACE instead and do not include every member, you
might encounter problems when you run RECOVER on the table spaces in the
structure. RECOVER checks if a complete table space set is recovered to a single
point in time. If the complete table space set is not recovered to a single point in
time, RECOVER places all dependent table spaces into CHECK-pending status.
You should QUIESCE and RECOVER the LOB table spaces to the same point in
time as the associated base table space. A group of table spaces that have a
referential relationship should all be quiesced to the same point in time.
When you use QUIESCE WRITE YES on a table space, the utility inserts a
SYSCOPY row that specifies ICTYPE=Q for each related index that is defined
with COPY=YES in order to record the quiesce point.
Specifying a list of table spaces and table space sets

You can specify as many objects in your QUIESCE job as can be allowed by
available memory in the batch address space and in the DB2 DBM1 address space.
Be aware of the following considerations when you specify a list of objects to
quiesce:
v Each table space set is expanded into a list of table spaces that have a referential
relationship, into a list that contains a base table space with all of its LOB table
spaces, or into a list that contains a base table space with all of its XML table
spaces.
|
|
|
|
348
v If you specify a list of table spaces or table space sets to quiesce and duplicate a
table space, utility processing continues, and the table space is quiesced only
once. QUIESCE issues return code 4 and warning message DSNU533I to alert
you of the duplication.
v If you specify the same table space twice in a list, using PART n in one
specification, and PART m for the other specification, each partition is quiesced
once.
Running QUIESCE on a table space in pending status

When you run QUIESCE on a table space in a pending status, the output will
contain various messages.
If you run QUIESCE on a table space in COPY-pending, CHECK-pending, or
RECOVER-pending status, it terminates with messages that are similar to those
messages shown in the following figure.
DSNU000I
DSNU050I
DSNUGUTC - OUTPUT START FOR UTILITY, UTILID = R92341Q

DSNUGUTC - QUIESCE TABLESPACE UTQPD22A.UTQPS22D
TABLESPACE UTQPD22A.UTQPS22E
TABLESPACE UTQPD22A.EMPPROJA
DSNU471I % DSNUQUIA COPY PENDING ON TABLESPACE UTQPD22A.EMPPROJA PROHIBITS
PROCESSING
DSNU012I DSNUGBAC - UTILITY EXECUTION TERMINATED, HIGHEST RETURN CODE=8
Figure 59. Termination messages when you run QUIESCE on a table space with pending
restrictions
When you run QUIESCE on a table space or index space that is in COPY-pending,
CHECK-pending, or RECOVER-pending status, you might also receive one or
more of the messages that are shown in the following figure.
DSNU202I
DSNU203I
DSNU204I
DSNU208I
DSNU209I
DSNU210I
DSNU211I
DSNU214I
DSNU215I
DSNU471I
DSNU568I
csect RECOVER PENDING ON TABLESPACE... PROHIBITS PROCESSING

csect RECOVER PENDING ON INDEX ... PROHIBITS PROCESSING
csect PAGESET REBUILD PENDING ON INDEX ... PROHIBITS PROCESSING
csect
GROUP BUFFER POOL RECOVER PENDING ON INDEX ... PROHIBITS PROCESSING
csect RESTART PENDING ON ... PROHIBITS PROCESSING
csect INFORMATIONAL COPY PENDING ON INDEX ... PROHIBITS PROCESSING
csect CHECK PENDING ON ... PROHIBITS PROCESSING
csect REBUILD PENDING ON INDEX ... PROHIBITS PROCESSING
csect REFRESH PENDING ON ... PROHIBITS PROCESSING
csect COPY PENDING ON TABLESPACE ... PROHIBITS PROCESSING
csect INDEX ... IS IN INFORMATIONAL COPY PENDING
Figure 60. Messages for pending restrictions on QUIESCE
Determining why the write to disk fails

Several conditions can cause the write to disk to fail.
QUIESCE attempts to write pages of each table space to disk. If any of the
following conditions is encountered, the write to disk fails:
v The table space has a write error range.
v The table space has deferred restart pending.
v An I/O error occurs.
If any of the preceding conditions is true, QUIESCE terminates with a return code
of 4 and issues a DSNU473I warning message.
Chapter 21. QUIESCE
349
Termination and restart of QUIESCE

You can terminate and restart the QUIESCE utility.
If you use TERM UTILITY to terminate QUIESCE when it is active, QUIESCE
releases the drain locks on table spaces. If QUIESCE is stopped, the drain locks
have already been released.
You can restart a QUIESCE utility job, but it starts from the beginning again.
QUIESCE specifies whether the changed pages from the table spaces and index
spaces are to be written to disk. The default option, YES establishes a quiesce point
and writes the changed pages from the table spaces and index spaces to disk. The
NO option establishes a quiesce point, but does not write the changed pages from
the table spaces and index spaces to disk. QUIESCE is not performed on table
spaces with the NOT LOGGED attribute.
Related concepts
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sample QUIESCE control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own QUIESCE
control statements.
Example 1: Establishing a quiesce point for three table spaces

The following control statement specifies that the QUIESCE utility is to establish a
quiesce point for table spaces DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D, DSN8D81A.DSN8S81E, and
DSN8D81A.DSN8S81P.
//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='IUIQU2UD.QUIESC2',
//
//SYSIN
DD *
QUIESCE TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D
TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91P
//*
The following example shows the output that the preceding command produces.
DSNU000I
DSNU1044I
DSNU050I
DSNU477I
DSNU477I
DSNU477I
DSNU474I
DSNU475I
DSNU010I
=
=
=
=
DSNUGUTC - OUTPUT START FOR UTILITY, UTILID = TEMP

DSNUGTIS - PROCESSING SYSIN AS EBCDIC
DSNUGUTC - QUIESCE TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D
TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81P
DSNUQUIA - QUIESCE SUCCESSFUL FOR TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D
DSNUQUIA - QUIESCE SUCCESSFUL FOR TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81E
DSNUQUIA - QUIESCE SUCCESSFUL FOR TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81P
DSNUQUIA - QUIESCE AT RBA 000004E43B78 AND AT LRSN 000004E43B78
DSNUQUIB - QUIESCE UTILITY COMPLETE, ELAPSED TIME= 00:00:02
Figure 61. Example output from a QUIESCE job that establishes a quiesce point for three
table spaces
Example 2: Establishing a quiesce point for a list of objects

In the following example, the QUIESCE control statement uses a list to specify that
the QUIESCE utility is to establish a quiesce point for the same table spaces as in
example 1. The list is defined in the LISTDEF utility control statement.
350
//STEP1
//
//SYSIN
DD *
//DSNUPROC.SYSIN
DD *
LISTDEF QUIESCELIST INCLUDE TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D
QUIESCE LIST QUIESCELIST
//*
DSNU000I
DSNUGUTC - OUTPUT START FOR UTILITY, UTILID = TEMP
DSNU1044I
DSNU050I
DSNUGUTC - LISTDEF QUIESCELIST INCLUDE TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D
DSNU1035I
DSNUILDR - LISTDEF STATEMENT PROCESSED SUCCESSFULLY
0DSNU050I
DSNUGUTC - QUIESCE LIST QUIESCELIST
DSNU477I = DSNUQUIA - QUIESCE SUCCESSFUL FOR TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D
DSNU477I = DSNUQUIA - QUIESCE SUCCESSFUL FOR TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81E
DSNU477I = DSNUQUIA - QUIESCE SUCCESSFUL FOR TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81P
DSNU474I = DSNUQUIA - QUIESCE AT RBA 000004E56419 AND AT LRSN 000004E56419
DSNU475I
DSNUQUIB - QUIESCE UTILITY COMPLETE, ELAPSED TIME= 00:00:00
DSNU010I
Figure 62. Example output from a QUIESCE job that establishes a quiesce point for a list of
objects
Example 3: Establishing a quiesce point for a table space set.

The following control statement specifies that QUIESCE is to establish a quiesce
point for the indicated table space set. In this example, the table space set includes
table space DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D and all table spaces that are referentially related
to it. Run REPORT TABLESPACESET to obtain a list of table spaces that are
referentially related.
QUIESCE TABLESPACESET TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D
DSNU000I
DSNU050I
DSNU477I
DSNU477I
DSNU477I
DSNU477I
DSNU477I
DSNU477I
DSNU477I
DSNU477I
DSNU474I
DSNU475I
DSNU010I
DSNUGUTC
DSNUGUTC
DSNUQUIA
DSNUQUIA
DSNUQUIA
DSNUQUIA
DSNUQUIA
DSNUQUIA
DSNUQUIA
DSNUQUIA
DSNUQUIA
DSNUQUIB
DSNUGBAC
OUTPUT START FOR UTILITY, UTILID = TSLQ.STEP1

QUIESCE TABLESPACESET TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D
QUIESCE SUCCESSFUL FOR TABLESPACESET DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D
QUIESCE SUCCESSFUL FOR TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D
QUIESCE SUCCESSFUL FOR TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E
QUIESCE SUCCESSFUL FOR TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.PROJ
QUIESCE SUCCESSFUL FOR TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.ACT
QUIESCE SUCCESSFUL FOR TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.PROJACT
QUIESCE SUCCESSFUL FOR TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.EMPPROJA
QUIESCE AT RBA 000000052708 AND AT LRSN 000000052708
QUIESCE UTILITY COMPLETE, ELAPSED TIME= 00:00:25
Figure 63. Example output from a QUIESCE job that establishes a quiesce point for a table
space set
Example 4: Establishing a quiesce point without writing the

changed pages to disk
In the following example, the control statement specifies that the QUIESCE utility
is to establish a quiesce point for table space DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D, without
writing the changed pages to disk. (The default is to write the changed pages to
Chapter 21. QUIESCE
351
disk.) In this example, a quiesce point is established for COPY YES indexes, but
not for COPY NO indexes. Note that QUIESCE jobs with the WRITE YES option,
which is the default, process both COPY YES indexes and COPY NO indexes. For
both QUIESCE WRITE YES jobs and QUIESCE WRITE NO jobs, the utility inserts
a row in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY for each COPY YES index.
//STEP1
//
//SYSIN
DD *
//DSNUPROC.SYSIN
DD *
QUIESCE TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D WRITE NO
//*
The preceding command produces the output that is shown in the following
example. Notice that the COPY YES index EMPNOI is placed in informational
COPY-pending (ICOPY) status:
DSNU000I
DSNU1044I
DSNU050I
DSNU477I
DSNU477I
DSNU474I
DSNU568I
DSNU475I
DSNU010I
=
=
=
=
DSNUGUTC
DSNUGTIS
DSNUGUTC
DSNUQUIA
DSNUQUIA
DSNUQUIA
DSNUGSRX
DSNUQUIB
DSNUGBAC
OUTPUT START FOR UTILITY, UTILID = TEMP

PROCESSING SYSIN AS EBCDIC
QUIESCE TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D WRITE NO
QUIESCE SUCCESSFUL FOR INDEXSPACE DSN8D81A.EMPNOI
QUIESCE AT RBA 000004E892A3 AND AT LRSN 000004E892A3
INDEX ADMF001.EMPNOI IS IN INFORMATIONAL COPY PENDING
QUIESCE UTILITY COMPLETE, ELAPSED TIME= 00:00:00
Figure 64. Example output from a QUIESCE job that establishes a quiesce point, without
writing the changed pages to disk.
Example 5: Establishing a quiesce point for a list of objects

The following control statement specifies that the QUIESCE utility is to establish a
quiesce point for the specified clone table space and its indexes, and write the
changes to disk.
|
|
|
QUIESCE TABLESPACE DBJM0901.TPJM0901 WRITE YES CLONE
352
Chapter 22. REBUILD INDEX

The REBUILD INDEX utility reconstructs indexes or index partitions from the table
that they reference.
Restriction: REBUILD INDEX SHRLEVEL CHANGE should only be used to fix a
broken or restricted index, or to build an index after DEFER. You should not use
the REBUILD INDEX SHRLEVEL CHANGE utility to move an index to different
volumes; instead you should use the online REORG utility. REBUILD INDEX
SHRLEVEL CHANGE on a unique index will not allow the INSERT option, the
DELETE option, or updates that affect the unique index.
v RECOVERDB privilege for the database
v STATS privilege for the database is required if the STATISTICS keyword is
specified.
To run REBUILD INDEX STATISTICS REPORT YES, you must use a privilege set
that includes the SELECT privilege on the catalog tables.
Execution phases of REBUILD INDEX

The REBUILD INDEX utility operates in the following phases:
Phase Description
UTILINIT
Performs initialization and setup.
UNLOAD
Unloads index entries.
SORT Sorts unloaded index entries.
BUILD
Builds indexes.
SORTBLD
Sorts and builds a table space for parallel index build processing.
UTILTERM
Performs cleanup.
Syntax and options of the REBUILD INDEX control statement

The REBUILD INDEX utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines
353
Syntax diagram
REBUILD
,
(1)
INDEX
creatorid.index-name
)
PART
integer
(ALL) table-space-spec
LIST listdef-name
,
INDEXSPACE
index-space-name
database-name.
(ALL) table-space-spec
PART
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
integer
SCOPE ALL
drain-spec

SHRLEVEL CHANGE
change-spec

SCOPE PENDING
CLONE
REUSE

SORTDEVT
device-type
SORTNUM integer
stats-spec
Notes:
|
All listed indexes must reside in the same table space.
table-space-spec:
TABLESPACE
table-space-name
database-name.

PART
integer
change-spec:
MAXRO
integer
LONGLOG CONTINUE
DELAY
1200
LONGLOG TERM
LONGLOG DRAIN
DELAY
integer

MAXRO DEFER
354
drain-spec:
RETRY
UTIMOUT value
DRAIN_WAIT integer
RETRY
integer

RETRY_DELAY
integer
stats-spec:
REPORT NO
STATISTICS
UPDATE ALL
REPORT YES

UPDATE
ACCESSPATH
SPACE
NONE

HISTORY
ALL
ACCESSPATH
SPACE
NONE
FORCEROLLUP
YES
NO
FREQVAL NUMCOLS 1
COUNT 10

KEYCARD
FREQVAL NUMCOLS
integer
COUNT
integer
Option descriptions
Indicates the qualified name of the index to be rebuilt. Use the form
creator-id.index-name to specify the name.
creator-id
Specifies the creator of the index. This qualifier is optional. If you omit the
qualifier creator-id, DB2 uses the user identifier for the utility job.
index-name
Specifies the qualified name of the index that is to be rebuilt. For an index,
you can specify either an index name or an index space name. Enclose the
To rebuild multiple indexes, separate each index name with a comma. All
listed indexes must reside in the same table space. If more than one index is
listed and the TABLESPACE keyword is not specified, DB2 locates the first
355
valid index name that is cited and determines the table space in which that
index resides. That table space is used as the target table space for all other
valid index names that are listed.
Specifies the qualified name of the index space that is obtained from the
database-name
Specifies the name of the database that is associated with the index. This
qualifier is optional.
index-space-name
Specifies the qualified name of the index space to copy. For an index, you
can specify either an index name or an index space name.
If you specify more than one index space, they must all be defined on the
same table space.
For an index, you can specify either an index name or an index space name.
(ALL)
Specifies that all indexes in the table space that is referred to by the
TABLESPACE keyword are to be rebuilt. If you specify ALL, only indexes on
the base table are included.
|
|
|
|
Specifies the table space from which all indexes are to be rebuilt.
database-name
Identifies the database to which the table space belongs.
table-space-name
Identifies the table space from which all indexes are to be rebuilt.
PART integer
Specifies the physical partition of a partitioning index or a data-partitioned
secondary index in a partitioned table that is to be rebuilt. When the target of
the REBUILD operation is a nonpartitioned secondary index, the utility
reconstructs logical partitions. If any of the following situations are true for a
nonpartitioned index, you cannot rebuild individual logical partitions:
v the index was created with DEFER YES
v the index must be completely rebuilt (This situation is likely in a disaster
recovery scenario)
v the index is in page set REBUILD-pending (PSRBD) status
For these cases, you must rebuild the entire index.
number of partitions that are defined for the table space. The maximum value
is 4096.
You cannot specify PART with the LIST keyword. Use LISTDEF PARTLEVEL
instead.
LIST listdef-name
allows one LIST keyword for each REBUILD INDEX control statement. The list
must contain either all index spaces or all table spaces. For a table space list,
356
REBUILD is invoked once per table space. For an index space list, DB2 groups
indexes by their related table space and executes the rebuild once per table
space. This utility will only process clone data if the CLONE keyword is
specified. The use of CLONED YES on the LISTDEF utility control statement is
not sufficient.
|
|
|
SHRLEVEL
partition that is to be checked during REBUILD INDEX processing.
|
|
|
|
REFERENCE
Specifies that applications can read from but cannot write to the table
space or partition that REBUILD accesses. Applications cannot read or
write from the index REBUILD is building.
|
|
|
|
CHANGE
Specifies that applications can read from and write to the table space or
partition. The index is placed in RBDP and can be avoided by dynamic
SQL. CHANGE is invalid for indexes over XML tables.
|
|
Do not specify SHRLEVEL CHANGE for an index on a NOT LOGGED

table space.
Restriction:
v SHRLEVEL CHANGE is not well suited for unique indexes and
concurrent DML because the index is placed in RBDP while being built.
Inserts and updates of the index will fail with a resource unavailable
(-904) because uniqueness checking cannot be done while the index is in
RBDP.
v SHRLEVEL CHANGE is not allowed on not logged tables, XML indexes,
or spatial indexes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
MAXRO
Specifies the maximum amount of time for the last iteration of log processing.
During that iteration, applications have read-only access.
|
|
The actual execution time of the last iteration might exceed the specified value
for MAXRO.
|
|
|
|
|
|
integer
integer is the number of seconds. Specifying a small positive value reduces
the length of the period of read-only access, but it might increase the
elapsed time for REBUILD INDEX to complete. If you specify a huge
positive value, the second iteration of log processing is probably the last
iteration.
|
|
The default value is the value of the lock timeout system parameter
IRLMRWT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
LONGLOG
Specifies the action that DB2 is to perform, after sending a message to the
console, if the number of records that the next iteration of logging is to process
is not sufficiently lower than the number that the previous iterations processed.
This situation means that the reading of the log by the REBUILD INDEX utility
is not being done at the same time as the writing of the application log.
|
|
CONTINUE
Specifies that until the time on the JOB statement expires, DB2 is to
357
|
|
|
continue performing reorganization, including iterations of log processing,

if the estimated time to perform an iteration exceeds the time that is
specified for MAXRO.
|
|
|
TERM
Specifies that DB2 is to terminate the reorganization after the delay that is
specified by the DELAY parameter.
|
|
|
|
DRAIN
Specifies that DB2 is to drain the write claim class after the delay that is
specified by the DELAY parameter. This action forces the final iteration of
log processing to occur.
DELAY integer
Specifies the minimun integer between the time that REBUILD send the
LONGLOG message to the console and the time that REBUILD performs the
action the LONGLOG parameter specifies.
|
|
|
|
|
The integer specifies the number of seconds.

DRAIN_WAIT
Specifies the number of seconds that REBUILD INDEX is to wait when
draining the table space or index. The specified time is the aggregate time for
objects that are to be checked. This value overrides the values that are specified
by the IRLMRWT and UTIMOUT subsystem parameters.
|
|
|
|
|
or specify a value of 0, the utility uses the value of the lock timeout subsystem
parameter IRLMRWT.
|
|
|
|
|
RETRY integer
Specifies the maximum number of retries that REBUILD INDEX is to attempt.
|
|
|
integer can be any integer from 0 to 255. If you do not specify RETRY,
REBUILD INDEX uses the value of the utility multiplier system parameter
UTIMOUT.
|
|
|

RETRY_DELAY integer
|
|
|
If you do not specify RETRY_DELAY, REBUILD INDEX uses the

DRAIN_WAIT value RETRY value.
|
|
CLONE
Indicates that REBUILD INDEX is to reconstruct only the specified indexes that
are on clone tables. This utility will only process clone data if the CLONE
keyword is specified. The use of CLONED YES on the LISTDEF statement is
not sufficient. If you specify CLONE, you cannot specify STATISTICS. Statistics
are not collected for clone objects.
|
|
|
|
|
|
SCOPE
Indicates the scope of the rebuild organization of the specified index or
indexes.
ALL
Indicates that you want the specified index or indexes to be rebuilt.
358
PENDING
Indicates that you want the specified index or indexes with one or more
partitions in REBUILD-pending (RBDP), REBUILD-pending star (RBDP*),
page set REBUILD-pending (PSRBD), RECOVER-pending (RECP), or
advisory REORG-pending (AREO*) state to be rebuilt.
REUSE
Specifies that REBUILD should logically reset and reuse DB2-managed data
sets without deleting and redefining them. If you do not specify REUSE, DB2
deletes and redefines DB2-managed data sets to reset them.
If you are rebuilding the index because of a media failure, do not specify
REUSE.
If a data set has multiple extents, the extents are not released if you use the
REUSE parameter.
allocated by DFSORT. For device-type, you can specify any disk device that is
valid on the DYNALLOC parameter of the SORT or OPTION options for
DFSORT. For more information about these options, see DFSORT Application
Programming: Guide.
|
device-type is the device type.

SORTNUM integer
allocated by the sort program. If you omit SORTDEVT, SORTNUM is ignored.
If you use SORTDEVT and omit SORTNUM, no value is passed to DFSORT;
DFSORT uses its own default.
|
|
|
|
|
applies to each sort invocation in the utility. For example, if there are three
indexes, SORTKEYS is specified, there are no constraints limiting parallelism,
and SORTNUM is specified as 8, then a total of 24 sort work data sets will be
allocated for a job.
|
|
|
|
Each sort work data set consumes both above the line and below the line
virtual storage, so if you specify too high a value for SORTNUM, the utility
may decrease the degree of parallelism due to virtual storage constraints, and
possibly decreasing the degree down to one, meaning no parallelism.
|
|

STATISTICS
Specifies that index statistics are to be collected.
If you specify the STATISTICS and UPDATE options, statistics are stored in the
DB2 catalog. You cannot collect inline statistics for indexes on the catalog and
directory tables.
Restriction:
359
v You cannot specify STATISTICS for a clone index.
REPORT
Indicates whether a set of messages to report the collected statistics is to be
generated.
NO
Indicates that the set of messages is not to be sent as output to SYSPRINT.
YES
Indicates that the set of messages is to be sent as output to SYSPRINT. The
as TABLESPACE, INDEX, TABLE, and COLUMN) that you specify with
KEYCARD
Specifies that all of the distinct values in all of the 1 to n key column
combinations for the specified indexes are to be collected. n is the number of
columns in the index.
FREQVAL
Controls the collection of frequent-value statistics. If you specify FREQVAL, it
must be followed by two additional keywords:
NUMCOLS
Indicates the number of key columns that are to be concatenated when
collecting frequent values from the specified index. If you specify 3, the
utility collects frequent values on the concatenation of the first three key
columns.
The default value is 1, which means that DB2 is to collect frequent values
only on the first key column of the index.
COUNT
Indicates the number of frequent values that are to be collected. If you
specify 15, the utility collects 15 frequent values from the specified key
columns.
UPDATE
ALL
ACCESSPATH
Indicates that the only catalog table columns that are to be updated are
those that provide statistics that are used for access path selection.
SPACE
Indicates that the only catalog table columns that are to be updated are
those that provide statistics to help the database administrator assess the
status of a particular table space or index.
NONE
Indicates that catalog tables are not to be updated with the collected
360
HISTORY
Records all catalog table inserts or updates to the catalog history tables.
The default is supplied by the value that is specified in STATISTICS HISTORY
on panel DSNTIPO.
ALL
tables.
ACCESSPATH
Indicates that the only catalog history table columns that are to be updated
are those that provide statistics that are used for access path selection.
SPACE
NONE
Indicates that catalog history tables are not to be updated with the
collected statistics.
FORCEROLLUP
Specifies whether aggregation or rollup of statistics is to take place when you
execute RUNSTATS even if some indexes or index partitions are empty. This
keyword enables the optimizer to select the best access path.
The following options are available for the FORCEROLLUP keyword:
YES
though some indexes or index partitions might not contain data.
NO
for all indexes or index partitions.
If data is not available, the utility issues DSNU623I message if you have set the
installation value for STATISTICS ROLLUP on panel DSNTIPO to NO.
Before running REBUILD INDEX

Certain activities might be required before you run the REBUILD INDEX utility,
Because the data that DB2 needs to build an index is in the table space on which
the index is based, you do not need image copies of indexes. To rebuild the index,
you do not need to recover the table space, unless it is also damaged. You do not
need to rebuild an index merely because you have recovered the table space on
which it is based.
If you recover a table space to a prior point in time and do not recover all the
indexes to the same point in time, you must rebuild all of the indexes.
Some logging might occur if both of the following conditions are true:
v The index is a nonpartitioning index.
v The index is being concurrently accessed either by SQL on a different partition
of the same table space or by a utility that is run on a different partition of the
same table space.
361
|
|
Running REBUILD INDEX when the index has a VARBINARY

column.
|
|
|
|
|
If you run REBUILD INDEX against an index with the following characteristics,
REBUILD INDEX fails:
|
|
To fix the problem, alter the column data type to BINARY, and then run REBUILD
INDEX.
Data sets that REBUILD INDEX uses

The REBUILD INDEX utility uses a number of data sets during its operation.
The following table lists the data sets that REBUILD INDEX uses. The table lists
Table 59. Data sets that REBUILD INDEX uses
|
|
Data set
Description
Required?
SYSIN

control statement.
Yes
SYSPRINT
Yes
STPRIN01

secondary index.
No
Work data sets

output when sorting keys If index build
parallelism is used, the DD names have the
form SWnnWKmm. If index build
parallelism is not used, the DD names have
the form SORTWKnn.
Yes
Sort work data sets

No1, 2, 3
UTPRINT

Yes
Note:
index.
2. If the DYNALLOC parm of the SORT program is not turned on, you need to allocate the
data set. Otherwise, DFSORT dynamically allocates the temporary data set.
utility job JCL.
|
|
|
362
Table space
Object whose indexes are to be rebuilt.
Calculating the size of the sort work data sets

To calculate the approximate size (in bytes) of the SORTWKnn data set, use the
following formula:
2 x (longest index key + c) x (number of extracted keys)
longest index key
The length of the longest index key that is to be processed by the subtask.
If the index is of varying length, the longest key is the maximum possible
length of a key with all varying-length columns that are padded to their
maximum length, plus 2 bytes for each varying-length column in the
index. For example, if an index with 3 columns (A, B, and C) has length
values of CHAR(8) for A, VARCHAR(128) for B, and VARCHAR(50) for C,
the longest key is calculated as follows:
8 + 128 + 50 + 2 + 2 = 190
A value as follows:
v 10 if the indexes that are being rebuilt are a mix of data-partitioned
secondary indexes and nonpartitioned indexes
v 8 if the indexes that are being rebuilt are partitioned, or if none of them
are data-partitioned secondary indexes.
number of keys
The number of keys from all indexes that the subtask sorts and processes.
Using two or three large SORTWKnn data sets are preferable to several small ones.

To calculate the approximate size (in bytes) of the ST01WKnn data set, use the
following formula:
2 (maximum record length numcols (count + 2) number of indexes)
The variables in the preceding formula have the following values:
Maximum record length of the SYSCOLDISTSTATS record that is processed
when collecting frequency statistics (You can obtain this value from the
RECLENGTH column in SYSTABLES.)
numcols
Number of key columns to concatenate when you collect frequent values
from the specified index.
count
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Number of frequent values that DB2 is to collect.
data that is to be sorted. For more information about DFSORT, see DFSORT
363
Concurrency and compatibility for REBUILD INDEX

The REBUILD INDEX utility has certain concurrency and compatibility
compatible.
REBUILD INDEX SHRLEVEL CHANGE jobs cannot be run to rebuild indexes on
the same table space concurrently. As an alternative, REBUILD INDEX can build
indexes in parallel by specifying multiple indexes in a single utility statement.
Concurrency for rebuilding indexes in different table space is still allowed, as is the
concurrency in rebuilding different partitions of an index in a partitioned table
space.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Restriction: REBUILD INDEX SHRLEVEL CHANGE should only be used to fix a

broken or restricted index, or to build an index after DEFER. You should not use
the REBUILD INDEX SHRLEVEL CHANGE utility to move an index to different
volumes; instead you should use the online REORG utility. REBUILD INDEX
SHRLEVEL CHANGE on a unique index will not allow the INSERT option, the
DELETE option, or updates that affect the unique index.
Claims
The following table shows which claim classes REBUILD INDEX drains and any
restrictive state that the utility sets on the target object.
|
|
|
|
|
Table 60. Claim classes of REBUILD INDEX operations.
Target
REBUILD
INDEX
SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE
REBUILD
INDEX PART
SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE
REBUILD
INDEX
SHRLEVEL
CHANGE
DW/UTRO
DW/UTRO
CR/UTRW
|
|
|
Partitioning index, data-partitioned DA/UTUT

secondary index, or physical
partition1
DA/UTUT
CR/UTRW
Nonpartitioned secondary index2
DA/UTUT
DR
CR/UTRW
N/A
DA/UTUT
CR/UTRW
Logical partition of an index
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Legend:
v CR - Claim the read claim class
v DA - Drain all claim classes; no concurrent SQL access
v DW - Drain the write claim class; concurrent access for SQL readers
v DR - Drains the repeatable-read claim class
v N/A - Not applicable
v UTUT - Utility restrictive state; exclusive control
v UTRO - Utility restrictive state; read-only access allowed
v UTRW - Utility restrictive state; read and write access allowed
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note:
1. Includes document ID indexes and node ID indexes over partitioned XML table spaces
2. Includes document ID indexes and node ID indexes over nonpartitioned XML table
spaces and XML indexes
3. Includes logical partitions of an XML index over partitioned XML table spaces
364
Compatibility
The following table shows which utilities can run concurrently with REBUILD
INDEX on the same target object. The target object can be an index space or a
partition of an index space. If compatibility depends on particular options of a
utility, that information is also shown. REBUILD INDEX does not set a utility
restrictive state if the target object is DSNDB01.SYSUTILX.
Table 61. Compatibility of REBUILD INDEX with other utilities
Action
REBUILD INDEX
CHECK DATA
No
CHECK INDEX
No
CHECK LOB
Yes
COPY INDEX
No
COPY TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL CHANGE
No
COPY TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
Yes
DIAGNOSE
Yes
LOAD
No
MERGECOPY
Yes
MODIFY
Yes
QUIESCE
No
REBUILD INDEX
No
RECOVER INDEX
No
RECOVER TABLESPACE
No
REORG INDEX
No
No
REORG TABLESPACE UNLOAD ONLY or EXTERNAL with

cluster index
No
REORG TABLESPACE UNLOAD ONLY or EXTERNAL without

cluster index
Yes
REPAIR LOCATE by KEY
No
REPAIR LOCATE by RID DELETE or REPLACE
No
REPAIR LOCATE by RID DUMP or VERIFY
Yes
REPAIR LOCATE INDEX PAGE DUMP or VERIFY
No
REPAIR LOCATE TABLESPACE or INDEX PAGE REPLACE
No
REPAIR LOCATE TABLESPACE PAGE DUMP or VERIFY
Yes
REPORT
Yes
RUNSTATS INDEX
No
RUNSTATS TABLESPACE
Yes
STOSPACE
Yes
UNLOAD
Yes
To run REBUILD INDEX on SYSIBM.DSNLUX01 or SYSIBM.DSNLUX02, ensure

that REBUILD INDEX is the only utility in the job step and the only utility that is
running in the DB2 subsystem. Unloading a base table that has LOB columns is
not compatible with REBUILD INDEX.
365
Access with REBUILD INDEX SHRLEVEL

You can specify the level of access that you have to your data by using the
SHRLEVEL option.
Before target indexes are built, they are first drained (DRAIN ALL), then placed in
RBDP. The indexes are shown in UTRW states.
For rebuilding an index or a partition of an index, the SHRLEVEL option lets you
choose the data access level that you have during the rebuild:
Log processing with SHRLEVEL CHANGE

When you specify SHRLEVEL CHANGE, DB2 processes the log. This step executes
iteratively. The first iteration processes the log records that accumulated during the
previous iteration. The iterations continue until one of these conditions is met:
v DB2 estimates that the time to perform the log processing in the next iteration
will be less than or equal to the time that is specified by MAXRO. If this
condition is met, the next iteration is the last.
v The number of log records that the next iteration will process is not sufficiently
lower than the number of log records that were processed in the previous
iteration. If this condition is met but the first two conditions are not, DB2 sends
message DSNU377I to the console. DB2 continues log processing for the length
of time that is specified by DELAY and then performs the action specified by
LONGLOG.
Operator actions
LONGLOG specifies the action that DB2 is to perform if log processing is not
occurring quickly enough. If the operator does not respond to the console message
DSNU377I, the LONGLOG option automatically goes into effect. You can take one
of the following actions:
v Execute the TERM UTILITY command to terminate the rebuild process.
DB2 does not take the action specified in the LONGLOG phrase if any one of these
events occurs before the delay expires:
v A TERM UTILITY command is issued.
v DB2 estimates that the time to perform the next iteration is likely to be less than
or equal to the time specified on the MAXRO keyword.
v REBUILD terminates for any reason (including the deadline).
Rebuilding index partitions

The REBUILD INDEX utility can rebuild one or more partitions of a partitioned
index by extracting the keys from the data rows of the table on which they are
based.
When you specify the PART option, one or more partitions from a partitioning
index or a data-partitioned secondary index can be rebuilt. However, for
nonpartitioned indexes, you cannot rebuild individual logical partitions in certain
situations.
If any of the following situations are true for a nonpartitioned index, you cannot
rebuild individual logical partitions:
366
v the index was created with DEFER YES

v the index must be completely rebuilt (This situation is likely in a disaster
recovery scenario)
v the index is in page set REBUILD-pending (PSRBD) status
For these cases, you must rebuild the entire index.
|
|
|
Rebuilding indexes on partition-by-growth table spaces

The REBUILD INDEX Utility might reset more partitions than it repopulates. Any
excess partitions will be empty after the REBUILD process.
Improving performance when rebuilding index partitions

Certain activities can improve performance when rebuilding index partitions.
If you use the PART option to rebuild only a single partition of an index, the
utility does not need to scan the entire table space.
To rebuild several indexes (including data-partitioned secondary indexes) at the
same time and reduce recovery time, use parallel index rebuild, or submit multiple
index jobs.
When rebuilding nonpartitioned secondary indexes and partitions of partitioned
indexes, this type of parallel processing on the same table space decreases the size
of the sort data set, as well as the total time that is required to sort all the keys.
When you run the REBUILD INDEX utility concurrently on separate partitions of a
partitioned index (either partitioning or secondary), the sum of the processor time
is approximately the time for a single REBUILD INDEX job to run against the
entire index. For partitioning indexes, the elapsed time for running concurrent
REBUILD INDEX jobs is a fraction of the elapsed time for running a single
REBUILD INDEX job against an entire index.
When to use SHRLEVEL CHANGE:

|
|
|
Schedule REBUILD with SHRLEVEL CHANGE when the rate of writing is low
and transactions are short. Avoid scheduling REBUILD with SHRLEVEL CHANGE
when low-tolerance applications are executing.
When to use DRAIN_WAIT:
|
|
|
|
|
The DRAIN_WAIT option provides improved control over the time online
REBUILD waits for drains. Also, because the DRAIN_WAIT is the aggregate time
that online REBUILD is to wait to perform a drain on a table space and associated
indexes, the length of drains is more predictable than it is when each partition and
index has its own individual waiting-time limit.
|
|
|
|
|
By specifying a short delay time (less than the system timeout value, IRLMRWT),
you can reduce the impact on applications by reducing time-outs. You can use the
RETRY option to give the online REBUILD INDEX utility chances to complete
successfully. If you do not want to use RETRY processing, you can still use
DRAIN_WAIT to set a specific and more consistent limit on the length of drains.
367
|
|
|
RETRY allows an online REBUILD that is unable to drain the objects that it
requires to try again after a set period (RETRY_DELAY). Objects will remain in
their original state if the drain fails in the LOG phase.
|
|
|
Because application SQL statements can queue behind any unsuccessful drain that
the online REBUILD has tried, define a reasonable delay before you retry to allow
this work to complete; the default is lock timeout subsystem parameter IRLMRWT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When the default DRAIN WRITERS is used with SHRLEVEL CHANGE and
RETRY, multiple read-only log iterations can occur. Because online REBUILD can
have to do more work when RETRY is specified, multiple or extended periods of
restricted access might occur. Applications that run with REBUILD must perform
frequent commits. During the interval between retries, the utility is still active;
consequently, other utility activity against the table space and indexes is restricted.
|
|
Recommendation: Run online REBUILD during light periods of activity on the

table space or index.
Related concepts
Rebuilding multiple indexes
Rebuilding multiple indexes

When you process both node ID indexes and XML indexes together, they are
processed sequentially. First the node ID index is processed and then the XML
index.
Building indexes in parallel

Parallel index build reduces the elapsed time for a REBUILD INDEX job by sorting
the index keys and rebuilding multiple indexes or index partitions in parallel,
rather than sequentially. Optimally, a pair of subtasks processes each index; one
subtask sorts extracted keys, while the other subtask builds the index. REBUILD
INDEX begins building each index as soon as the corresponding sort generates its
first sorted record. If you specify STATISTICS, a third subtask collects the sorted
keys and updates the catalog table in parallel.
The subtasks that are used for the parallel REBUILD INDEX processing use DB2
connections. If you receive message DSNU397I that indicates that the REBUILD
INDEX utility is constrained, increase the number of concurrent connections by
using the MAX BATCH CONNECT parameter on panel DSNTIPE.
The greatest elapsed processing-time improvements result from parallel rebuilding
for:
v Multiple indexes on a table space
v A partitioning index or a data-partitioned secondary index on all partitions of a
v A nonpartitioned secondary index on a partitioned table space
The following figure shows the flow of a REBUILD INDEX job with a parallel
index build. The same flow applies whether you rebuild a data-partitioned
secondary index or a partitioning index. DB2 starts multiple subtasks to unload the
entire partitioned table space. Subtasks then sort index keys and build the
partitioning index in parallel. If you specify STATISTICS, additional subtasks
collect the sorted keys and update the catalog table in parallel, eliminating the
368
need for a second scan of the index by a separate RUNSTATS job.
Figure 65. How a partitioning index is rebuilt during a parallel index build
The following figure shows the flow of a REBUILD INDEX job with a parallel
index build. DB2 starts multiple subtasks to unload all partitions of a partitioned
table space and to sort index keys in parallel. The keys are then merged and
passed to the build subtask, which builds the nonpartitioned secondary index. If
you specify STATISTICS, a separate subtask collects the sorted keys and updates
the catalog table.
Figure 66. How a nonpartitioned secondary index is rebuilt during a parallel index build
When parallel index build is used:

REBUILD INDEX always sorts the index keys and builds them in parallel
for partitioned table spaces unless constrained by available memory, sort
work files, or UTPRINnn file allocations.
Sort work data sets for parallel index build:
You can either allow the utility to dynamically allocate the data sets that
SORT needs, or provide the necessary data sets yourself. Select one of the
following methods to allocate sort work data sets and message data sets:
369
Method 1:
REBUILD INDEX determines the optimal number of sort work
data sets and message data sets.
2. Allow dynamic allocation of sort work data sets by not
supplying SORTWKnn DD statements in the REBUILD INDEX
utility JCL.
Method 2:
You control allocation of sort work data sets, and REBUILD INDEX
allocates message data sets.
1. Provide DD statements with DD names in the form
SWnnWKmm.
Method 3:
You have the most control over rebuild processing; you must
specify both sort work data sets and message data sets.
1. Provide DD statements with DD names in the form
SWnnWKmm.
Data sets that are used

If you select Method 2 or 3, define the necessary data sets by using the following
information.
print message data set. In addition, you need to allocate the merge message data
set when you build a single nonpartitioned secondary index on a partitioned table
space.
Possible reasons to allocate data sets in the utility job JCL rather than using
dynamic allocation are to:
v Control the size and placement of the data sets
v Minimize device contention
v Optimally utilize free disk space
v Limit the number of utility subtasks that are used to build indexes
The DD names SWnnWKmm define the sort work data sets that are used during
SW01WK01
Is the first sort work data set that is used by the subtask that builds the
first index.
SW01WK02
Is the second sort work data set that is used by the subtask that builds the
first index.
SW02WK01
second index.
370
SW02WK02
second index.
The DD names UTPRINnn define the sort work message data sets that are used by
If you allocate the UTPRINT DD statement to SYSOUT in the job statement, the
sort message data sets and the merge message data set, if required, are
dynamically allocated. If you want the sort message data sets, merge message data
sets, or both, allocated to a disk or tape data set rather than to SYSOUT, you must
supply the UTPRINnn or the UTMERG01 DD statements (or both) in the utility
JCL. If you do not allocate the UTPRINT DD statement to SYSOUT, and you do
not supply a UTMERG01 DD statement in the job statement, partitions are not
unloaded in parallel.
Determining the number of sort subtasks

The maximum number of utility subtasks that are started for parallel index build
equals:
v For a simple table space, segmented table space, or simple partition of a
partitioned table space, the number of indexes that are to be built
v For a single index that is being built on a partitioned table space, the number of
partitions that are to be unloaded
REBUILD INDEX determines the number of subtasks according to the following
guidelines:
v The number of subtasks equals the number of allocated sort work data set
groups.
v The number of subtasks equals the number of allocated message data sets.
v If you allocate both sort work data sets and message data set groups, the
number of subtasks equals the smallest number of allocated data sets.

REBUILD INDEX attempts to assign one sort subtask for each index that is to be
built. If REBUILD INDEX cannot start enough subtasks to build one index per
subtask, it allocates any excess indexes across the pairs (in the order that the
indexes were created), so that one or more subtasks might build more than one
index.

keys that are present in all of the indexes or index partitions that are being
processed by the subtask in order to calculate each sort work file size. When you
determine which indexes or index partitions are assigned to which subtask pairs,
use the following formula to calculate the required space.
371
numcols
count
Overriding dynamic DFSORT allocation

DB2 estimates how many rows are to be sorted and passes this information to
DFSORT on the parameter FILSZ. DFSORT then dynamically allocates the
necessary sort work space.
If the table space contains rows with VARCHAR columns, DB2 might not be able
to accurately estimate the number of rows. If the estimated number of rows is too
high and the sort work space is not available or if the estimated number of rows is
too low, DFSORT might fail and cause an abend.
Recommendation: Run RUNSTATS UPDATE SPACE before the REBUILD INDEX
utility so that DB2 calculates a more accurate estimate.
You can override this dynamic allocation of sort work space in two ways:
v Allocate the sort work data sets with SORTWKnn DD statements in your JCL.
v Override the DB2 row estimate in FILSZ using control statements that are
passed to DFSORT. However, using control statements overrides size estimates
that are passed to DFSORT in all invocations of DFSORT in the job step,
including any sorts that are done in any other utility that is executed in the
same step. The result might be reduced sort efficiency or an abend due to an
Resetting the REBUILD-pending status

REBUILD-pending status (which appears as RBDP in the output from the DISPLAY
command) means that the physical or logical index partition, nonpartitioned
secondary index, or logical partition of a nonpartitioned secondary index is in
REBUILD-pending status.
The variations of REBUILD-pending status are as follows:
RBDP The physical or logical index partition is in the REBUILD-pending status.
The individual physical or logical index partition is inaccessible. Reset the
RBDP status by rebuilding the single affected partition. If multiple
partitions are in RBDP status, you can rebuild either the entire index or all
affected partitions.
RBDP*
The logical partition of the nonpartitioned secondary index is in the
REBUILD-pending status. The entire nonpartitioned secondary index is
inaccessible. Reset RBDP* status by rebuilding only the affected logical
partitions.
PSRBD
The nonpartitioned secondary index space is in the REBUILD-pending
status. The entire index space is inaccessible. Rebuild the object with the
REBUILD INDEX utility. This state only applies to nonpartitioned
secondary indexes.
372
You can reset the REBUILD-pending status for an index with any of these
operations:
v REBUILD INDEX
v REORG TABLESPACE SORTDATA
v REPAIR SET INDEX with NORBDPEND
v START DATABASE command with ACCESS FORCE
Attention: Use the START DATABASE command with ACCESS FORCE only as a
means of last resort.
Rebuilding critical catalog indexes

In certain situations, you might need to rebuild critical catalog indexes.
If an ID with a granted authority tries to rebuild indexes in the catalog or
directory, and if the DSNDB06.SYSDBASE or DSNDB06.SYSUSER table space is
unavailable, you receive the following message:
DSNT501I, RESOURCE UNAVAILABLE
You must either make these table spaces available, or run the RECOVER
TABLESPACE utility on the catalog or directory, using an authorization ID with the
installation SYSADM or installation SYSOPR authority.
Recoverability of a rebuilt index

When you successfully rebuild an index that was defined with COPY YES, utility
processing inserts a SYSCOPY row with ICTYPE=B for each rebuilt index. Rebuilt
indexes are also placed in informational COPY-pending status, which indicates that
you should make a copy of the index.
Recommendation: Make a full image copy of the index to create a recovery point;
this action also resets the ICOPY status.
Termination or restart of REBUILD INDEX

You can terminate and restart the REBUILD INDEX utility.
You can terminate REBUILD INDEX by using the TERM UTILITY command. If
you terminate a REBUILD INDEX job, the index space is placed in the
REBUILD-pending status and is unavailable until it is successfully rebuilt.
By default, DB2 uses RESTART(PHASE) when restarting REBUILD INDEX jobs.
The job starts again from the beginning.
If you restart a job that uses the STATISTICS keyword, inline statistics collection
does not occur. To update catalog statistics, run the RUNSTATS utility after the
restarted REBUILD INDEX job completes.
Related concepts
The effect of REBUILD INDEX on index version numbers

and CURRENT_VERSION columns of the SYSIBM.SYSINDEXES and
SYSIBM.SYSINDEXPART catalog tables.
373
When you run REBUILD INDEX, the utility updates this range of used version
numbers for indexes that are defined with the COPY NO attribute. REBUILD
INDEX sets the OLDEST_VERSION column to the current version number, which
indicates that only one version is active; DB2 can then reuse all of the other
version numbers.
situations is true:
OLDEST_VERSION column
v The value in the CURRENT_VERSION column is 15, and the value in the
You can also run LOAD REPLACE, REORG INDEX, or REORG TABLESPACE to
Related information
Sample REBUILD INDEX control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own REBUILD
Example 1: Rebuilding an index

The following control statement specifies that the REBUILD INDEX utility is to
rebuild the DSN8910.XDEPT1 index.
//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='IUIQU2UT.RBLD1',TIME=1440,
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='DSN'
//SYSREC
DD DSN=IUIQU2UT.RBLD1.STEP1.SYSREC,DISP=(MOD,DELETE,CATLG),
//
//SYSIN
DD *
REBUILD INDEX (DSN8910.XDEPT1)
/*
Example 2: Rebuilding index partitions

The following control statement specifies that REBUILD INDEX is to rebuild
partitions 2 and 3 of the DSN8910.XEMP1 index. The partition numbers are
indicated by the PART option.
REBUILD INDEX (DSN8910.XEMP1 PART 2, DSN8910.XEMP1 PART 3)
Example 3: Rebuilding multiple partitions of a partitioning or

secondary index
The following control statement specifies that REBUILD INDEX is to rebuild
partitions 2 and 3 of the DSN8910.XEMP1 index. The partition numbers are
374
indicated by the PART option. The SORTDEVT and SORTNUM keywords indicate
that the utility is to use dynamic data set and message set allocation. Parallelism is
used by default.
If sufficient virtual storage resources are available, DB2 starts one pair of utility
sort subtasks for each partition. This example does not require UTPRINnn DD
statements because it uses DSNUPROC to invoke utility processing. DSNUPROC
includes a DD statement that allocates UTPRINT to SYSOUT.
//SAMPJOB JOB ...
//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='SAMPJOB.RBINDEX',UTPROC='',SYSTEM='DSN'
//SYSIN
DD *
REBUILD INDEX (DSN8910.XEMP1 PART 2, DSN8910.XEMP1 PART 3)
SORTDEVT SYSWK
SORTNUM 4
/*
Example 4: Rebuilding all partitions of a partitioning index

The control statement specifies that REBUILD INDEX is to rebuild all index
partitions of the DSN8910.XEMP1 partitioning index. Parallelism is used by
default. For this example, REBUILD INDEX allocates sort work data sets in two
groups, which limits the number of utility subtask pairs to two. This example does
not require UTPRINnn DD statements because it uses DSNUPROC to invoke utility
processing. DSNUPROC includes a DD statement that allocates UTPRINT to
SYSOUT.
//SAMPJOB JOB ...
//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='SAMPJOB.RCVINDEX',UTPROC='',SYSTEM='DSN'
//* First group of sort work data sets for parallel index rebuild
//SW01WK01 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(10,20),,,ROUND)
//* Second group of sort work data sets for parallel index rebuild
//SYSIN
DD *
REBUILD INDEX (DSN8910.XEMP1)
/*
Figure 67. Example REBUILD INDEX statement
Example 5: Rebuilding all indexes of a table space

The following control statement specifies that REBUILD INDEX is to rebuild all
indexes for table space DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E. The SORTDEVT and SORTNUM
keywords indicate that the utility is to use dynamic data set and message set
allocation. Parallelism is used by default.
If sufficient virtual storage resources are available, DB2 starts one utility sort
subtask to build the partitioning index and another utility sort subtask to build the
nonpartitioning index. This example does not require UTPRINnn DD statements
because it uses DSNUPROC to invoke utility processing. DSNUPROC includes a
DD statement that allocates UTPRINT to SYSOUT.
//SAMPJOB JOB ...
//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='SAMPJOB.RCVINDEX',UTPROC='',SYSTEM='DSN'
//SYSIN
DD *
375
REBUILD INDEX (ALL) TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E

SORTDEVT SYSWK
SORTNUM 4
/*
Example 6: Rebuilding indexes only if they are in a restrictive

state and gathering inline statistics
The control statement in this example specifies that REBUILD INDEX is to rebuild
partition 9 of index ID0S482D if it is in REBUILD-pending (RBDP),
RECOVER-pending (RECP), or advisory REORG-pending (AREO*) state. This
condition that the index be in a certain restrictive state is indicated by the SCOPE
PENDING option. The STATISTICS FORCEROLLUP YES option indicates that the
utility is to collect inline statistics on the index partition that it is rebuilding and to
force aggregation of those statistics.
//STEP6
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='JUOSU248.CHK6',
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='SSTR'
//SYSREC
DD DSN=JUOSU248.CHKIXPX.STEP6.SYSREC,
//
//
//SYSCOPY DD DSN=JUOSU248.CHKIXPX.STEP6.SYSCOPY,
//
//
//SORTOUT DD DSN=JUOSU248.CHKIXPX.STEP6.SORTOUT,
//
//
//SYSIN
DD *
REBUILD INDEX (IDOS482D PART 9)
STATISTICS FORCEROLLUP YES
SCOPE PENDING
/*
Figure 68. Example REBUILD INDEX statement with STATISTICS option
Example 7: Rebuilding indexes that are on clone tables
|
|
|
|
The following control statement specifies that REBUILD INDEX is to reconstruct

only the specified indexes that are on clone tables.
Example 8: Rebuilding indexes with SHRLEVEL CHANGE.
|
|
|
|
The following control statement specifies that during the rebuild, applications can
read from and write to ADMF001.IUKQAI01.
REBUILD INDEX (ADMF001.IUKQAI01)

CLONE
REBUILD INDEX (ADMF001.IUKQAI01)

SHRLEVEL CHANGE
376
Chapter 23. RECOVER

The online RECOVER utility recovers data to the current state or to a previous
point in time by restoring a copy and then applying log records.
The largest unit of data recovery is the table space or index space; the smallest is
the page. You can recover a single object or a list of objects. The RECOVER utility
recovers an entire table space, index space, a partition or data set, pages within an
error range, or a single page. You can recover data from sequential image copies of
an object, a FlashCopy image copy, a system-level backup, or the log. Point-in-time
recovery with consistency automatically detects the uncommitted transactions
running at the recover point in time and will roll back their changes on the
recovered objects. So after recover, objects will be left in their transactionally
consistent state.
Output
Output from RECOVER consists of recovered data (a table space, index, partition
or data set, error range, or page within a table space).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you specify the TOCOPY, TOLASTCOPY, or TOLASTFULLCOPY option to

recover data to a point in time, RECOVER puts any associated index spaces in
REBUILD-pending status. If you specify the TOLOGPOINT or TORBA option to
recover data to a point in time, RECOVER can put any associated index spaces in
REBUILD-pending status only if the indexes are not recovered in the same
RECOVER statement as their corresponding table space. You must run REBUILD
INDEX to remove the REBUILD-pending status from the index space.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you use the RECOVER utility to recover a point-in-time object that is part of a
referentially related table space set, a base table space and LOB table space set, or a
base table space and XML table space set, you must ensure that you recover the
entire set of table spaces. If you do not include every member of the set, or if you
do not recover the entire set to the same point in time, RECOVER sets the
Auxiliary CHECK-pending status on for all dependent table spaces, base table
spaces, or LOB table spaces in the set.
Recommendation: If you use the RECOVER utility to recover data to an image
copy by specifying TOCOPY, TOLASTCOPY, or TOLASTFULLCOPY, specify a
copy that was made with the SHRLEVEL REFERENCE option.
An ID with installation SYSOPR authority can also execute RECOVER, but only on
a table space in the DSNDB01 or DSNDB06 database.
377
Restrictions on running RECOVER

v RECOVER cannot recover a table space or index space that is defined to use a
storage group that is defined with mixed specific and nonspecific volume IDs. If
you specify such a table space or index space, the job terminates and you receive
error message DSNU419I.
v RECOVER cannot recover an index has been altered to PADDED or NOT
PADDED. Instead, you should rebuild the index.
v If a table space or partition in reordered row format is recovered to a point in
time when the table space or partition was in basic row format, then the table
space or partition will revert to basic row format. Similarly, if a table space or
partition in basic row format is recovered to a point in time when the table
space or partition was in reordered row format, then the table space or partition
will revert to reordered row format.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
v You cannot run RECOVER on a table space or index space on which mixed
specific and non-specific volume IDs were defined with CREATE STOGROUP or
ALTER STOGROUP.
Execution phases of RECOVER

The RECOVER utility operates in these phases:
Phase Description
UTILINIT
RESTORE
Locates and merges any appropriate image copies and restores the table
space to a backup level; processes a list of objects in parallel if you specify
the PARALLEL keyword.
RESTORER
If you specify the PARALLEL keyword, reads and merges the image
copies.
RESTOREW
If you specify the PARALLEL keyword, writes the pages to the object.
LOGAPPLY
Applies any outstanding log changes to the object that is restored from the
previous phase or step. If a recover job fails in the middle of the
LOGAPPLY phase, it can be restarted from last commit point.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
LOGCSR
Analyzes log records and constructs information about inflight, indoubt,
inabort, and postponed abort units of recovery. This phase is executed if
either the TORBA and TOLOGPOINT option has been specified. If a
recover job fails in the middle of the LOGCSR phase, it can be restarted
from the beginning of the LOGCSR phase. For those DB2 members that
have finished the LOGCSR phase before the RECOVER job failure, they
will go through the LOGCSR phase again.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
LOGUNDO
Rolls back any uncommitted changes that the active units of recovery
made to the recovered objects. This phase is executed if either the TORBA
and TOLOGPOINT option has been specified. If you need to restart the
recover job after it enters into the LOGUNDO phase, objects that were not
changed by URs that were active during the recover to point in time will
be marked as finished and no need for further processing.
378
UTILTERM
Performs cleanup.
Syntax and options of the RECOVER control statement

The RECOVER utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
Syntax diagram
RECOVER
LIST listdef-name
list-options-spec

CLONE
DSNUM ALL
object
(1)
DSNUM integer
DSNUM ALL
object
recover-options-spec
(1)
DSNUM integer
object PAGE page-number
CONTINUE
LOGRANGES YES

LOCALSITE
RECOVERYSITE
(2)
LOGRANGES NO
Notes:
1
Not valid for nonpartitioning indexes.
Use the LOGRANGES NO option only at the direction of IBM Software Support. This option can
cause the LOGAPPLY phase to run much longer and, in some cases, apply log records that
should not be applied.
object:
TABLESPACE
table-space-name
database-name.
INDEXSPACE
INDEX
index-space-name
database-name.
index-name
creator-id.
Chapter 23. RECOVER
379
list-options-spec:

TORBA Xbyte-string
TOLOGPOINT Xbyte-string
non-LOGONLY-options-spec
LOGONLY
non-LOGONLY-options-spec:

REUSE
CURRENTCOPYONLY

PARALLEL
(num-objects)
TAPEUNITS (
num-tape-units
)

RESTOREBEFORE Xbyte-string
FROMDUMP
DUMPCLASS (dcl)
recover-options-spec:
TOCOPY data-set

TOVOLUME
CATALOG
vol-ser
REUSE
CURRENTCOPYONLY
TOSEQNO integer
TOLASTCOPY
REUSE
CURRENTCOPYONLY
TOLASTFULLCOPY
REUSE
CURRENTCOPYONLY
ERROR RANGE
Option descriptions
You can specify a list of objects by repeating the TABLESPACE, INDEX, or
INDEXSPACE keywords. If you use a list of objects, the valid keywords are:
DSNUM, TORBA, TOLOGPOINT, LOGONLY, PARALLEL, and either LOCALSITE
or RECOVERYSITE.
The options TOCOPY, TOLASTCOPY, TOLASTFULLCOPY, TORBA and
TOLOGPOINT are all referred to as point-in-time recovery options.
LIST listdef-name
allows one LIST keyword for each control statement of RECOVER. The list can
contain a mixture of table spaces and index spaces. RECOVER is invoked once
for the entire list.
This utility will only process clone data if the CLONE keyword is specified.
The use of CLONED YES on the LISTDEF statement is not sufficient.
380
Specifies the table space (and optionally, the database to which it belongs) that
is to be recovered.
You can specify a list of table spaces by repeating the TABLESPACE keyword.
You can recover an individual catalog or directory table space in a list with its
IBM-defined indexes. You cannot recover multiple catalog or directory table
spaces in a list.
database-name
Is the name of the database to which the table space belongs.
table-space-name
Is the name of the table space that is to be recovered.
Specifies the index space that is to be recovered.
database-name
Specifies the name of the database to which the index space belongs.
index-space-name
Specifies the name of the index space that is to be recovered.
Specifies the index in the index space that is to be recovered. The RECOVER
utility can recover only indexes that were defined with the COPY YES attribute
and subsequently copied.
creator-id
The default value is the user identifier for the utility.
index-name
Specifies the name of the index in the index space that is to be recovered.
DSNUM
Identifies a partition within a partitioned table space or a partitioned index, or
identifies a data set within a nonpartitioned table space that is to be recovered.
You cannot specify a single data set of a nonpartitioned index or a logical
partition of a nonpartitioned index. Alternatively, the option can recover the
ALL
Specifies that the entire table space or index space is to be recovered.
integer
Specifies the number of the partition or data set that is to be recovered.
The maximum value is 4096.
Specifying DSNUM is not valid for nonpartitioning indexes.
For a partitioned table space or index space:
The integer is its partition number.
For a nonpartitioned table space:
Find the integer at the end of the data set name. The data set name has
the following format:
Chapter 23. RECOVER
381
catname
x
Is C or D.
dbname
tsname Is the table space name.
Is I or J.
Is 1 or 2.
nnn
PAGE page-number
Specifies a particular page that is to be recovered. You cannot specify this
option if you are recovering from a concurrent copy.
page-number is the number of the page, in either decimal or hexadecimal
notation. For example, both 999 and X3E7 represent the same page. PAGE is
invalid with the LIST specification.
CONTINUE
Specifies that the recovery process is to continue. Use this option only if an
error causes RECOVER to terminate during reconstruction of a page. In
this case, the page is marked as broken. After you repair the page, you
can use the CONTINUE option to recover the page, starting from the point
of failure in the recovery log.
TORBA Xbyte-string
Specifies, in a non-data-sharing environment, a point on the log to which
RECOVER is to recover. Specify an RBA value.
In a data sharing environment, use TORBA only when you want to recover to
a point before the originating member joined the data sharing group. If you
specify an RBA after this point, the recovery fails.
For a NOT LOGGED table space, the value must be a recoverable point.
Using TORBA terminates the recovery process with the last log record whose
relative byte address (RBA) is not greater than byte-string, which is a string of
up to 12 hexadecimal characters. If byte-string is the RBA of the first byte of a
log record, that record is included in the recovery.
Uncommitted work by units of recovery that are active at the specified RBA
will be backed out by RECOVER, leaving each object in a consistent state.
|
|
TOLOGPOINT Xbyte-string
Specifies a point on the log to which RECOVER is to recover. Specify either an
RBA or an LRSN value.
The LRSN is a string of 12 hexadecimal characters and is reported by the
DSN1LOGP utility.
|
For a NOT LOGGED table space, the value must be a recoverable point.
|
|
|
Uncommitted work by units of recovery that are active at the specified LRSN
or RBA will be backed out by RECOVER, leaving each object in a consistent
state.
REUSE
Specifies that RECOVER is to logically reset and reuse DB2-managed data sets
382
without deleting and redefining them. If you do not specify REUSE, DB2
deletes and redefines DB2-managed data sets to reset them.
If you are recovering an object because of a media failure, do not specify
REUSE.
REUSE parameter.
CURRENTCOPYONLY
Specifies that RECOVER is to improve the performance of restoring concurrent
copies (copies that were made by the COPY utility with the CONCURRENT
option) by using only the most recent primary copy for each object in the list.
When you specify CURRENTCOPYONLY for a concurrent copy, RECOVER
builds a DFSMSdss RESTORE command for each group of objects that is
associated with a concurrent copy data set name. If the RESTORE fails,
RECOVER does not automatically use the next most recent copy or the backup
copy, and the object fails. If you specify DSNUM ALL with
CURRENTCOPYONLY and one partition fails during the restore process, the
entire utility job on that object fails.
If you specify CURRENTCOPYONLY and the most recent primary copy of the
object to be recovered is not a concurrent copy, DB2 ignores this keyword.
|
|
For objects in the recovery list whose recovery base is a system-backup, the
default is CURRENTCOPYONLY.
PARALLEL
|
|
|
|
Specifies the maximum number of objects in the list that are to be restored in
parallel from image copies on disk or tape. RECOVER attempts to retain tape
mounts for tapes that contain stacked image copies when the PARALLEL
keyword is specified. In addition, to maximize performance, RECOVER
determines the order in which objects are to be restored. PARALLEL also
specifies the maximum number of objects in the list that are to be restored in
parallel from system-level backups that have been dumped to tape. The
processing may be limited by DFSMShsm.
If you specify TAPEUNITS with PARALLEL, you control the number of tape
drives that are dynamically allocated for the recovery function. The
TAPEUNITS keyword applies only to tape drives that are dynamically
allocated. The TAPEUNITS keyword does not apply to JCL-allocated tape
drives. The total number of tape drives that are allocated for the RECOVER job
is the sum of the JCL-allocated tape drives, and the number of tape drives,
which is determined as follows:
v The specified value for TAPEUNITS.
v The value that is determined by the RECOVER utility if you omit the
TAPEUNITS keyword. The number of tape drives that RECOVER attempts
to allocate is determined by the object in the list that requires the most tape
drives.
If you specify PARALLEL, you cannot specify TOCOPY, TOLASTCOPY, or
TOLASTFULLCOPY.
(num-objects)
Specifies the number of objects in the list that are to be processed in
parallel. If storage constraints are encountered, you can adjust this value to
a smaller value.
Chapter 23. RECOVER
383
If you specify 0 or do not specify TAPEUNITS keyword, RECOVER

determines the optimal number of objects to process in parallel.
TAPEUNITS
Specifies the number of tape drives that the utility should dynamically allocate
for the list of objects that are to be processed in parallel. If you omit this
keyword, the utility determines the number of tape drives to allocate for the
recovery function.
The TAPEUNITS option does not apply to recovery from system-level backups.
In this case, DFSMShsm determines the number of tape drives that are used
for the recovery.
|
|
|
(num-tape-units)
Specifies the number of tape drives to allocate. If you specify 0 or do not
specify a value for num-tape-units, RECOVER determines the maximum
number of tape units to use at one time. RECOVER TAPEUNITS has a max
value of 32767.
FROMDUMP
Specifies that only dumps of the database copy pool are used for the restore of
the data sets.
|
|
|
|
|
DUMPCLASS (dcl)
Indicates the DFSMShsm dump class to use to restore the data sets.
|
|
|
|
The FROMDUMP and DUMPCLASS options that you specify for the
RECOVER utility override the RESTORE/RECOVER FROM DUMP and
DUMPCLASS NAME install options that you specify on installation panel
DSNTIP6.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
RESTOREBEFORE Xbyte-string
Specifies that RECOVER is to search for an image copy, concurrent copy, or
system-level backup (if yes has been specified for SYSTEM-LEVEL BACKUPS
on install panel DSNTIP6) with an RBA or LRSN value earlier than the
specified Xbyte-string value to use in the RESTORE phase. To avoid specific
image copies, concurrent copies, or system-level backups with matching or
more recent RBA or LRSN values in START_RBA, the RECOVER utility applies
the log records and restores the object to its current state or the specified
TORBA or TOLOGPOINT value. The RESTOREBEFORE value is compared
with the RBA or LRSN value in the START_RBA column in the
SYSIBM.SYSCOPY record for those copies. For system-level backups, the
RESTOREBEFORE value is compared with the data complete LRSN.
If you specify a TORBA or TOLOGPOINT value with the RESTOREBEFORE
option, the RBA or LRSN value for RESTOREBEFORE must be lower than the
specified TORBA OR TOLOGPOINT value. If you specify RESTOREBEFORE,
you cannot specify TOCOPY, TOLASTCOPY, or TOLASTFULLCOPY.
|
|
|
|
LOGONLY
Specifies that the target objects are to be recovered from their existing data sets
by applying only log records to the data sets. DB2 applies all log records that
were written after a point that is recorded in the data set itself.
To recover an index space by using RECOVER LOGONLY, you must define the
index space with the COPY YES attribute.
Use the LOGONLY option when the data sets of the target objects have already
been restored to a point of consistency by another process offline, such as
DFSMSdss concurrent copy.
384
|
|
LOGONLY is not allowed on a table space or index space with the NOT
LOGGED attribute.
TOCOPY data-set
Specifies the particular image copy data set that DB2 is to use as a source for
recovery.
data-set is the name of the data set.
If the data set is a full image copy, it is the only data set that is used in the
recovery. If it is an incremental image copy, RECOVER also uses the previous
full image copy and any intervening incremental image copies.
If you specify the data set as the local backup copy, DB2 first tries to allocate
the local primary copy. If the local primary copy is unavailable, DB2 uses the
local backup copy.
If you use TOCOPY or TORBA to recover a single data set of a nonpartitioned
table space, DB2 issues message DSNU520I to warn that the table space can
become inconsistent following the RECOVER job. This point-in-time recovery
can cause compressed data to exist without a dictionary or can even overwrite
the data set that contains the current dictionary.
If you use TOCOPY with a particular partition or data set (identified with
DSNUM), the image copy must be for the same partition or data set, or for the
whole table space or index space. If you use TOCOPY with DSNUM ALL, the
image copy must be for DSNUM ALL. You cannot specify TOCOPY with a
LIST specification.
If the image copy data set is a z/OS generation data set, supply a fully
qualified data set name, including the absolute generation and version number.
If the image copy data set is not a generation data set and more than one
image copy data set with the same data set name exists, use one of the
following options to identify the data set exactly:
TOVOLUME
Identifies the image copy data set.
CATALOG
Indicates that the data set is cataloged. Use this option only for an image
copy that was created as a cataloged data set. (Its volume serial is not
recorded in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY.)
RECOVER refers to the SYSIBM.SYSCOPY catalog table during execution.
If you use TOVOLUME CATALOG, the data set must be cataloged. If you
remove the data set from the catalog after creating it, you must catalog the
data set again to make it consistent with the record for this copy that
appears in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY.
vol-ser
noncataloged data set. Specify the first vol-ser in the SYSCOPY record to
locate a data set that is stored on multiple tape volumes.
TOSEQNO integer
Identifies the image copy data set by its file sequence number. integer is
the file sequence number.
TOLASTCOPY
Specifies that RECOVER is to restore the object to the last image copy that was
taken. If the last image copy is a full image copy, it is restored to the object. If
Chapter 23. RECOVER
385
the last image copy is an incremental image copy, the most recent full copy
along with any incremental copies are restored to the object.
TOLASTFULLCOPY
Specifies that the RECOVER utility is to restore the object to the last full image
copy that was taken. Any incremental image copies that were taken after the
full image copy are not restored to the object.
ERROR RANGE
Specifies that all pages within the range of reported I/O errors are to be
recovered. Recovering an error range is useful when the range is small, relative
to the object that contains it; otherwise, recovering the entire object is
preferred. You cannot specify this option if you are recovering from a
concurrent copy.
In some situations, recovery using the ERROR RANGE option is not possible,
such as when a sufficient quantity of alternate tracks cannot be obtained for all
bad records within the error range. You can use the IBM Device Support
Facility, ICKDSF service utility to determine whether this situation exists. In
such a situation, redefine the error data set at a different location on the
volume or on a different volume, and then run the RECOVER utility without
the ERROR RANGE option.
You cannot specify ERROR RANGE with a LIST specification.
CLONE
Indicates that RECOVER is to recover only clone table data in the specified
table spaces, index spaces or indexes that contain indexes on clone tables. This
utility will only process clone data if the CLONE keyword is specified. The use
of CLONED YES on the LISTDEF statement is not sufficient.
|
|
|
|
|
LOCALSITE
Specifies that RECOVER is to use image copies from the local site. If you
specify neither LOCALSITE or RECOVERYSITE, RECOVER uses image copies
from the current site of invocation. (The current site is identified on the
installation panel DSNTIPO under SITE TYPE and in the macro DSN6SPRM
under SITETYP.)
RECOVERYSITE
Specifies that RECOVER is to use image copies from the recovery site. If you
specify neither LOCALSITE or RECOVERYSITE, RECOVER uses image copies
from the current site of invocation. (The current site is identified on the
installation panel DSNTIPO under SITE TYPE and in the macro DSN6SPRM
under SITETYP.)
LOGRANGES YES
Specifies that RECOVER should use SYSLGRNX information for the
LOGAPPLY phase. This option is the default.
LOGRANGES NO
Specifies that RECOVER should not use SYSLGRNX information for the
LOGAPPLY phase. Use this option only under the direction of IBM Software
Support.
This option can cause RECOVER to run much longer. In a data sharing
environment this option can result in the merging of all logs from all members
that were created since the last image copy.
This option can also cause RECOVER to apply logs that should not be applied.
For example, assume that you take an image copy of a table space and then
run REORG LOG YES on the same table space. Assume also that the REORG
386
utility abends and you then issue the TERM UTILITY command for the
REORG job. The SYSLGRNX records that are associated with the REORG job
are deleted, so a RECOVER job with the LOGRANGES YES option (the
default) skips the log records from the REORG job. However, if you run
RECOVER LOGRANGES NO, the utility applies these log records.
Before running RECOVER

Certain activities might be required before you run the RECOVER utility,
If the table space or index space to be recovered is associated with a storage group,
DB2 deletes and redefines the necessary data sets. If the STOGROUP has been
altered to remove the volume on which the table space or index space is located,
RECOVER places the data set on another volume of the storage group.
Recovering data and indexes

|
|
|
|
|
|
You do not always need to recover both the data and indexes. If you recover the
table space or index space to a current RBA or LRSN, any referentially related
objects do not need to be recovered. If you plan to recover a damaged object to a
point in time, use a consistent point in time for all of its referentially related
objects, including related LOB and XML table spaces, for optimal performance. You
must rebuild the indexes from the data if one of the following conditions is true:
v The table space is recovered to a point in time.
v An index is damaged.
v An index is in REBUILD-pending status.
v No image copy of the index is available.
If you need to recover both the data and the indexes, and no image copies of the
indexes are available:
1. Use RECOVER TABLESPACE to recover the data.
2. Run REBUILD INDEX on any related indexes to rebuild them from the data.
If you have image copies of both the table spaces and the indexes, you can recover
both sets of objects in the same RECOVER utility statement. The objects are
recovered from the image copies and logs.
Data sets that RECOVER uses

The RECOVER utility uses a number of data sets during its operation.
The following table lists the data sets that RECOVER uses. The table lists the DD
Table 62. Data sets that RECOVER uses
Data set
Description
Required?
SYSIN

control statement.
Yes
SYSPRINT
Yes
auth-id.job-name.HSM
A temporary data set that is automatically

Yes
allocated by the utility and deleted when the
utility completes
Chapter 23. RECOVER
387
Table space, index space, or index
Object that is to be recovered. If you want to recover less than an entire
table space:
v Use the DSNUM option to recover a partition or data set.
v Use the PAGE option to recover a single page.
v Use the ERROR RANGE option to recover a range of pages with I/O
errors.
Image copy data set

Copy that RECOVER is to restore. DB2 accesses this information through
the DB2 catalog.
|
|
System-level backups
The RECOVER utility chooses the most recent backup (an image copy, a
concurrent copy, or a system-level backup) to restore based on the recovery
point for the table spaces or indexes (with the COPY YES attribute) being
recovered. The RESTORE SYSTEM utility uses the most recent system-level
backup of the database copy pool that DB2 took prior to the SYSPITR log
truncation point.
Related concepts
|
|
|
|
|
|
Before running RESTORE SYSTEM on page 587

How the RECOVER utility retains tape mounts on page 413
Related tasks
Using a system-level backup on page 390
Concurrency and compatibility for RECOVER

The RECOVER utility has certain concurrency and compatibility characteristics
associated with it.
compatible. However, if a nonpartitioned secondary index exists on a partitioned
table space, utilities that operate on different partitions of a table space can be
incompatible because of contention on the nonpartitioned secondary index.
The following table shows which claim classes RECOVER claims and drains and
Claims
Table 63. Claim classes of RECOVER operations.
RECOVER (no
option)
RECOVER
TORBA or
TOCOPY
RECOVER
PART TORBA
or TOCOPY
RECOVER
ERRORRANGE
Table space or
partition
DA/UTUT
DA/UTUT
DA/UTUT
DA/UTUT
CW/UTRW1
Partitioning index,
data-partitioned
secondary index, or
physical partition2
DA/UTUT
DA/UTUT
DA/UTUT
DA/UTUT
CW/UTRW1
Target
388
Table 63. Claim classes of RECOVER operations. (continued)

RECOVER (no
option)
RECOVER
TORBA or
TOCOPY
RECOVER
PART TORBA
or TOCOPY
RECOVER
ERRORRANGE
Nonpartitioned
secondary index3
DA/UTUT
DA/UTUT
DA/UTUT
DA/UTUT
CW/UTRW1
RI dependents
none
CHKP (YES)
CHKP (YES)
none
Target
Legend:
v CHKP (YES): Concurrently running applications enter CHECK-pending after commit
v CW: Claim the write claim class
v DR: Drain the repeatable read class, no concurrent access for SQL repeatable readers
v RI: Referential integrity
v UTRW: Utility restrictive state, read-write access allowed
v none: Object is not affected by this utility
Note:
1. During the UTILINIT phase, the claim and restrictive states change from DA/UTUT to
CW/UTRW.
|
|
|
2. Includes document ID indexes and node ID indexes over nonpartitioned XML table
RECOVER does not set a utility restrictive state if the target object is
DSNDB01.SYSUTILX.
Compatibility
The following table shows which utilities can run concurrently with RECOVER on
options of a utility, that information is also documented in the table.
Table 64. Compatibility of RECOVER with other utilities
Action
Compatible with
Compatible with RECOVER
RECOVER (no
TOCOPY or
option)?
TORBA?
Compatible with
RECOVER
ERRORRANGE?
CHECK DATA
No
No
No
CHECK INDEX
No
No
No
CHECK LOB
No
No
No
COPY INDEXSPACE
No
No
No
COPY TABLESPACE
No
No
No
DIAGNOSE
Yes
Yes
Yes
LOAD
No
No
No
MERGECOPY
No
No
No
MODIFY
No
No
No
QUIESCE
No
No
No
REBUILD INDEX
No
No
No
REORG INDEX
Yes
No
Yes
Chapter 23. RECOVER
389
Table 64. Compatibility of RECOVER with other utilities (continued)
Action
Compatible with
Compatible with RECOVER
RECOVER (no
TOCOPY or
option)?
TORBA?
Compatible with
RECOVER
ERRORRANGE?
REORG TABLESPACE
No
No
No
REPAIR LOCATE INDEX
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
REPORT
Yes
Yes
Yes
RUNSTATS INDEX
No
No
No
RUNSTATS TABLESPACE
No
No
No
STOSPACE
Yes
Yes
Yes
UNLOAD
No
No
No
To run on DSNDB01.SYSUTILX, RECOVER must be the only utility in the job step
and the only utility running in the DB2 subsystem.
RECOVER on any catalog or directory table space is an exclusive job; such a job
can interrupt another job between job steps, possibly causing the interrupted job to
time out.
Using a system-level backup

If you take system-level backups with the BACKUP SYSTEM utility, you might
want the RECOVER utility to use a system-level backup of the database copy pool
as a recovery base.
To use a system-level backup:
Specify YES for the SYSTEM_LEVEL_BACKUPS installation option on install panel
DSNTIP6.
The RECOVER utility chooses the most recent backup (an image copy, a concurrent
copy, or a system-level backup) to restore based on the recovery point for the table
spaces or indexes (with the COPY YES attribute) being recovered.
The RECOVER utility invokes DFSMShsm to restore the data sets for the object
from the system-level backup of the database copy pool.
|
How to determine which system-level backups DB2 recovers
DB2 recovers different system level backups, depending on your situation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To determine which system-level backups will be recovered:

v If you specify YES in the RESTORE/RECOVER FROM DUMP field on
installation panel DSNTIP6 or you specify the FROMDUMP option in the
RECOVER utility statement, DB2 uses only the dumps on tape of the database
copy pool.
v If you specify a dump class name in the DUMP CLASS NAME field on
installation panel DSNTIP6 or you specify the DUMPCLASS option in the
RECOVER utility statement, DB2 uses dumps on tape of the database copy pool
to restore the data sets from the DFSMshsm dump class.
390
|
|
|
|
v If you do not specify a dump class name in the DUMP CLASS NAME field on
installation panel DSNTIP6, or you do not specify the DUMPCLASS option in
the RECOVER utility statement, RESTORE SYSTEM issues the DFSMShsm LIST
COPYPOOL command and uses the first dump class listed in the output.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If FROMDUMP was not specified on the RECOVER utility statement or on install

panel DSNTIP6, the system-level backup on disk is used. If the system-level
backup does not reside on disk, then error message DSNU1525I (NO FLASHCOPY
FOR THE SYSTEM-LEVEL BACKUP EXISTS) is issued with RC8. If FROMDUMP
was specified either on the RECOVER utility statement or on install panel
DSNTIP6, then the dumped copy of the system-level backup on tape is used.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Determining the recovery base

Review the REPORT RECOVERY output to determine whether the objects to be
recovered have image copies, concurrent copies, or a utility log yes event. If you
take system-level backups and YES was specified for SYSTEM_LEVEL_BACKUPS
on install panel DSNTIP6, look at this information in conjunction with your
system-level backup information in the BSDS to determine the recovery base.
|
|
Determining whether the system-level backups reside on disk or tape
|
|
|
|
Restoring data sets for objects in the database copy pool to be recovered from a
system-level backup on disk occurs virtually instantaneously. Restoring data sets
for objects to be recovered from a system-level backup on tape volumes takes
much longer.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To determine whether the system-level backups of the database copy pool reside
on the disk or tape:
1. Run the DFSMShsm LIST COPYPOOL command with the ALLVOLS option.
2. Run the DSNJU004 utility output. For data sharing, run the DSNJU004 utility
output on each member.
3. Review the output from the DFSMShsm LIST COPYPOOL command with the
ALLVOLS option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the system-level backup chosen as the recovery base for the database copy pool
no longer resides on DASD and the FROMDUMP option has not been specified,
then the recovery of the object will fail. You can then specify the RECOVER
FROMDUMP option, or specify it on install panel DSNTIP6, to direct the utility to
use the system-level backup that was dumped to tape. The RECOVER
RESTOREBEFORE option can also be used to direct the utility to use a recovery
base prior to the system-level backup.
4. Review the DB2 system-level backup information in the DSNJU004 utility

output.
Recovering a table space

Each table space that is involved is unavailable for most other applications until
recovery is complete. If you make image copies by table space, you can recover the
entire table space, or you can recover a data set or partition from the table space. If
you make image copies separately by partition or data set, you must recover the
partitions or data sets by running separate RECOVER operations.
The following RECOVER statement specifies that the utility is to recover table
space DSN8S91D in database DSN8D91A:
Chapter 23. RECOVER
391
RECOVER TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D
To recover multiple table spaces, create a list of table spaces that are to be
recovered; repeat the TABLESPACE keyword before each specified table space. The
following RECOVER statement specifies that the utility is to recover partition 2 of
the partitioned table space DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E, and recover the table space
DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D to the quiesce point (RBA X000007425468).
RECOVER TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E DSNUM 2
TORBA X'000007425468'
The following example shows the RECOVER statement for recovering four data
sets in database DSN8D91A, table space DSN8S91E:
RECOVER PARALLEL (4)
TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E DSNUM 1
Each of the 4 partitions will be restored in parallel. You can also schedule the
recovery of these data sets to run in four separate jobs.
If a table space or data set is in the COPY-pending status, recovering it might not
be possible.
Related concepts
Resetting COPY-pending status on page 288
Recovering a list of objects

You can recover table spaces, table space partitions, pieces of a linear table space,
index spaces, index space partitions, and indexes.
When you recover an object to a prior point in time, you should recover a set of
referentially related table spaces together to avoid putting any of the table spaces
in CHECK-pending status. Use REPORT TABLESPACESET to obtain a table space
listing.
Objects to be restored from a system-level backup will be restored by the main task
for the RECOVER Utility by invoking DFSMShsm.
Each object can have a different base from which to recover: system-level backup,
image copy, or concurrent copy.
|
|
RECOVER does not place dependent table spaces that are related by informational
referential constraints into CHECK-pending status.
The RECOVER utility merges incremental copies serially and dynamically. As a
result, recovery of a table space list with numerous incremental copies can be
time-consuming and operator-intensive.
If referential integrity violations are not an issue, you can run a separate job to
recover each table space.
When you specify the PARALLEL keyword, DB2 supports parallelism during the
RESTORE phase and performs recovery as follows:
392
v During initialization and setup (the UTILINIT recover phase), the utility locates
the full and incremental copy information for each object in the list from
SYSIBM.SYSCOPY.
|
|
|
|
|
|
v The utility sorts the list of objects for recovery into lists to be processed in
parallel according to the number of tape volumes, file sequence numbers, and
sizes of each image copy.
v The number of objects that can be restored in parallel depends on the maximum
number of available tape devices and on how many tape devices the utility
requires for the incremental and full image copy data sets. You can control the
number of objects that are to be processed in parallel on the PARALLEL
keyword. You can control the number of dynamically allocated tape drives on
the TAPEUNITS keyword, which is specified with the PARALLEL keyword.
v If an object in the list requires a DB2 concurrent copy, the utility sorts the object
in its own list and processes the list in the main task, while the objects in the
other sorted lists are restored in parallel. If the concurrent copies that are to be
restored are on tape volumes, the utility uses one tape device and counts it
toward the maximum value that is specified for TAPEUNITS.
v If objects in the list require a system-level backup that has been dumped to tape
as its recovery base (that is, the FROMDUMP option has been specified), the
DB2 RECOVER Utility will invoke DFSMShsm to restore the data sets for the
objects in parallel, with the degree of parallelism being capped by the maximum
number of tasks that can be started by the RECOVER. DFSMShsm will restore
the data sets in parallel based on its install options.
Recovering a data set or partition

You can use the RECOVER utility to recover individual partitions and data sets.
The phases for data set recovery are the same as for table space recovery.
If image copies are taken at the data set level, RECOVER must be performed at the
data set level. To recover the whole table space, you must recover all the data sets
individually in one or more RECOVER steps. If recovery is attempted at the table
space level, DB2 returns an error message.
Alternatively, if image copies are taken at the table space, index, or index space
level, you can recover individual data sets by using the DSNUM parameter.
RECOVER does not support recovery of the following types of indexes:
v A single data set for nonpartitioned secondary indexes
v A logical partition of a nonpartitioned secondary index
Recovering with incremental copies

The RECOVER utility merges all incremental image copies that were taken since
the last full image copy.
The utility must have all the image copies available at the same time. If this
requirement is likely to strain your system resources, for example, by demanding
more tape units than are available, consider running MERGECOPY regularly to
merge image copies into one copy.
Even if you do not periodically merge multiple image copies into one copy when
you do not have enough tape units, the utility can still perform. RECOVER
dynamically allocates the full image copy and attempts to dynamically allocate all
the incremental image copy data sets. If RECOVER successfully allocates every
Chapter 23. RECOVER
393
incremental copy, recovery proceeds to merge pages to table spaces and apply the
log. If a point is reached where an incremental copy cannot be allocated,
RECOVER notes the log RBA or LRSN of the last successfully allocated data set.
Attempts to allocate incremental copies cease, and the merge proceeds using only
the allocated data sets. The log is applied from the noted RBA or LRSN, and the
incremental image copies that were not allocated are ignored.
Recovering a page
Using RECOVER PAGE enables you to recover data on a page that is damaged. In
some situations, you can determine (usually from an error message) which page of
an object has been damaged. You can use the PAGE option to recover a single
page. You can use the CONTINUE option to continue recovering a page that was
damaged during the LOGAPPLY phase of a RECOVER operation.
Recovering a page by using PAGE and CONTINUE:

Suppose that you start RECOVER for table space TSPACE1. During processing,
message DSNI012I informs you of a problem that damages page number 5.
RECOVER completes, but the damaged page, number 5, is in a stopped state and
is not recovered. When RECOVER ends, message DSNU501I informs you that page
5 is damaged.
To repair the damaged page:
1. Use the DUMP option of the REPAIR utility to view the contents of the
damaged page. Determine what change should have been made by the
applicable log record, and apply it by using the REPLACE option of REPAIR.
Use the RESET option to turn off the inconsistent-data indicator.
Attention: Be extremely careful when using the REPAIR utility to replace
data. Using REPAIR to change data to invalid values can produce unpredictable
results, particularly when you change page header information. Improper use
of REPAIR can result in damaged data, or in some cases, system failure.
2. Resubmit the RECOVER utility job by specifying TABLESPACE(TSPACE1)
PAGE(5) CONTINUE. The RECOVER utility finishes recovering the damaged
page by applying the log records that remain after the one that caused the
problem.
If more than one page is damaged during RECOVER, perform the preceding steps
for each damaged page.
Recovering an error range

By using the ERROR RANGE option of RECOVER, you can repair pages with
reported I/O errors. DB2 maintains a page error range for I/O errors for each data
set; pages within the range cannot be accessed. The DISPLAY DATABASE
command displays the range.
When recovering an error range, RECOVER:
1. Locates, allocates, and applies image copies.
2. Applies changes from the log.
The following RECOVER statement specifies that the utility is to recover any
current error range problems for table space TS1:
RECOVER TABLESPACE DB1.TS1 ERROR RANGE
394
Recovering an error range is useful when the range is small, relative to the object
containing it; otherwise, recovering the entire object is preferable.
Message DSNU086I indicates that I/O errors were detected on a table space and
that you need to recover it. Before you attempt to use the ERROR RANGE option
of RECOVER, you should run the ICKDSF service utility to correct the disk error.
If an I/O error is detected during RECOVER processing, DB2 issues message
DSNU538I to identify the affected target tracks are involved. The message provides
enough information to run ICKDSF correctly.
In some situations, which are announced by error messages, recovery of only an
error range is not possible. In such a situation, recovering the entire object is
preferable.
During the recovery of the entire table space or index space, DB2 might still
encounter I/O errors that indicate DB2 is still using a bad volume. For
user-defined data sets, you should use Access Method Services to delete the data
sets and redefine them with the same name on a new volume. If you use DB2
storage groups, you can remove the bad volume from the storage group by using
ALTER STOGROUP. If you use DFSMS storage groups, you should also remove
the bad volume from the DFSMS storage group.
|
|
Effect on RECOVER of the NOT LOGGED or LOGGED table space

attributes
You can recover NOT LOGGED table spaces to any recoverable point.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Recoverable points are established when you do one of the following:

v Alter a table space from LOGGED to NOT LOGGED. If a base table space is
altered to NOT LOGGED and its associated LOB table spaces already have the
NOT LOGGED attribute, the ALTER to NOT LOGGED is not a recoverable
point.
v Take an image copy from a NOT LOGGED table space.
v When a table has the NOT LOGGED attribute, and an ALTER TABLE with the
ADD PARTITION clause is executed.
v When insertion of data into a partition-by-growth table space causes DB2 to add
a new partition.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To recover a set of objects with LOB relationships, you should run RECOVER with
the TOLOGPOINT option to identify a common recoverable point for all objects.
For a non-LOB table space, or a LOB table space with a base table space that has
the NOT LOGGED attribute, the logging attribute of the table space must meet
these following conditions:
v For recovery to the current point in time, the current value of the logging
attribute of the object must match the logging attribute at the most current
recoverable point.
v For recovery to a prior point in time, the current value of the logging attribute
of the object must match the logging attribute at the time that is specified by
TOLOGPOINT, TORBA, TOCOPY, TOLASTCOPY, or TOLASTFULLCOPY
Recovering with a data set copy that is not made by DB2

You can restore a data set to a point of consistency by using a data set copy that
was not made by the COPY utility.
Chapter 23. RECOVER
395
After recovery to the point of consistency, if you choose to continue and recover to
the current point in time, you do not want RECOVER to begin processing by
restoring the data set from a DB2 image copy. Therefore, use the LOGONLY option
of RECOVER, which causes RECOVER to skip the RESTORE phase and apply the
log records only, starting from the first log record that was written after the data
set was backed up.
Because the data sets are restored offline without DB2 involvement, RECOVER
LOGONLY checks that the data set identifiers match those that are in the DB2
catalog. If the identifiers do not match, message DSNU548I is issued, and the job
terminates with return code 8.
You can use the LOGONLY option on a list of objects.
To ensure that no other transactions can access DB2 objects between the time that
you restore a data set and the time that you run RECOVER LOGONLY, follow
these steps:
1. Stop the DB2 objects that are being recovered by issuing the following
command:
-STOP DATABASE(database-name) SPACENAM(space-name)
2. Restore all DB2 data sets that are being recovered.

3. Start the DB2 objects that are being recovered by issuing the following
command:
-START DATABASE(database-name) SPACENAM(space-name) ACCESS(UT)
4. Run the RECOVER utility without the TORBA or TOLOGPOINT parameters

and with the LOGONLY parameter to recover the DB2 data sets to the current
point in time and to perform forward recovery using DB2 logs. If you want to
recover the DB2 data sets to a prior point in time, run the RECOVER utility
with either TORBA or TOLOGPOINT, and with the LOGONLY parameters.
5. If you did not recover related indexes in the same RECOVER control statement,
rebuild all indexes on the recovered object.
6. Issue the following command to allow access to the recovered object if the
recovery completes successfully:
-START DATABASE(database-name) SPACENAM(space-name) ACCESS(RW)
With the LOGONLY option, when recovering a single piece of a multi-piece linear
page set, RECOVER opens the first piece of the page set. If the data set is migrated
by DFSMShsm, the data set is recalled by DFSMShsm. Without LOGONLY, no data
set recall is requested.
Backing up a single piece of a multi-piece linear page set is not recommended.
This action can cause a data integrity problem if the backup is used to restore the
data set at a later time.
Recovering catalog and directory objects

You can recover catalog and directory objects.
If you are recovering any subset of the objects in the following list, start with the
object that appears first, and continue in the order of the list. For example, if you
need to recover SYSLGRNX, SYSUTILX, and SYSUSR, recover first SYSUTILX, then
SYSLGRNX, and then SYSUSR. You do not need to recover all of the objects; only
recover those objects that require recovery. If you copy your catalog or directory
396
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
indexes, use the RECOVER utility to recover your indexes. Otherwise, use the
REBUILD INDEX utility to rebuild those indexes.
1. DSNDB01.SYSUTILX.
2. All indexes on SYSUTILX.
3. DSNDB01.DBD01.
4. DSNDB06.SYSCOPY.
5. All indexes on SYSIBM.SYSCOPY. If no user-defined indexes that are
stogroup-managed are defined on SYSIBM.SYSCOPY, execute the following
utility statement to rebuild IBM-defined and any user-defined indexes on
SYSIBM.SYSCOPY:
REBUILD INDEX (ALL) TABLESPACE DSNDB06.SYSCOPY
If user-defined indexes that are stogroup-managed are defined on

SYSIBM.SYSCOPY, rebuild the IBM-defined indexes by name (REBUILD
INDEX (SYSIBM.index-name-1, SYSIBM.index-name-2, . . .,
SYSIBM.index-name-n)) and then rebuild the user-defined indexes in a
subsequent step.
6. DSNDB01.SYSLGRNX.
7. All indexes on SYSLGRNX.
8. DSNDB06.SYSALTER.
9. All indexes on SYSALTER.
10. DSNDB06.SYSDBAUT.
11. All indexes on SYSDBAUT. If no user-defined indexes that are
stogroup-managed are defined on SYSDBAUT, execute the following utility
statement to rebuild IBM-defined and any user-defined indexes on
SYSDBAUT:
REBUILD INDEX (ALL) TABLESPACE DSNDB06.SYSDBAUT
If user-defined indexes that are stogroup-managed are defined on SYSDBAUT,

rebuild the IBM-defined indexes individually and then rebuild the
user-defined indexes in a subsequent step.
12. DSNDB06.SYSUSER.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
13. DSNDB06.SYSDBASE.
14. All indexes on SYSDBASE and SYSUSER. If no user-defined indexes that are
stogroup-managed are defined on SYSDBASE or SYSUSER, execute the
following utility statement to rebuild IBM-defined and any user-defined
indexes on SYSDBASE and SYSUSER:
REBUILD INDEX (ALL) TABLESPACE DSNDB06.SYSxxxx
If user-defined indexes that are stogroup managed are defined on SYSDBASE

and SYSUSER, rebuild the IBM-defined indexes by name (REBUILD INDEX
(SYSIBM.index-name-1, SYSIBM.index-name-2, . . ., SYSIBM.index-name-n)),
and then rebuild the user-defined indexes in a subsequent step.
15. Other catalog and directory table spaces and their IBM-defined indexes. The
remaining catalog table spaces, in database DSNDB06, are SYSGROUP,
SYSGPAUT, SYSOBJ, SYSPLAN, SYSPKAGE, SYSSEQ, SYSSEQ2, SYSSTATS,
SYSSTR, SYSVIEWS, SYSDDF, SYSHIST, SYSGRTNS, SYSJAVA, SYSJAUXA,
SYSJAUXB, SYSEBCDC, SYSXML, SYSTARG, SYSPLUXA, SYSROLES,
SYSCONTX, and SYSRTSTS. In conversion mode, the index of SYSRTSTS have
not been created yet, so it is not necessary to rebuild them. If the REBUILD
INDEX or RECOVER utilities are executed on this index in conversion mode,
message DSNU0551 (INDEX NOT FOUND) will be issued. The index on
Chapter 23. RECOVER
397
|
|
|
SYSALTER is created during CATENFM START processing. The index should

be rebuilt or recovered in enabling-new-function mode and new-function
mode.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The two remaining directory table spaces are DSNDB01.SCT02, which has
index SYSIBM.DSNSCT02, and DSNDB01.SPT01, which has indexes
SYSIBM.DSNSPT01 and SYSIBM.DSNSPT02. If a point in time recovery is
performed, the DSNDB06.SYSOBJ tablespace, its lob tablespace
DSNDB06.SYSPLUXA, and the auxiliary index has to be recovered in one list;
otherwise, DSNDB06.SYSOBJ will be in ACHKP.
All user-defined indexes on the catalog that have not been rebuilt or recovered
yet.
System utility table spaces, such as DB2 QMF.
If used, real-time statistics objects, the object and application registration
tables, and the resource limit specification tables.
User table spaces.
16.
17.
18.
19.
For all catalog and directory table spaces, you can list the IBM-defined indexes that
have the COPY YES attribute in the same RECOVER utility statement.
The catalog and directory objects that are listed in step 15 in the preceding list can
be grouped together for recovery. You can specify them as a list of objects in a
single RECOVER utility statement. When you specify all of these objects in one
statement, the utility needs to make only one pass of the log for all objects during
the LOGAPPLY phase and can use parallelism when restoring the image copies in
the RESTORE phase. Thus, these objects are recovered faster.
Recovery of the items on the list can be done concurrently or included in the same
job step. However, some restrictions apply:
1. When you recover the following table spaces or indexes, the job step in which
the RECOVER statement appears must not contain any other utility statements.
No other utilities can run while the RECOVER utility is running.
v DSNDB01.SYSUTILX
v All indexes on SYSUTILX
v DSNDB01.DBD01
2. When you recover the following table spaces, no other utilities can run while
the RECOVER utility is running. Other utility statements can exist in the same
job step.
v DSNDB06.SYSCOPY
v DSNDB01.SYSLGRNX
v DSNDB06.SYSDBAUT
v DSNDB06.SYSUSER
v DSNDB06.SYSDBASE
If the logging environment requires adding or restoring active logs, restoring
archive logs, or performing any action that affects the log inventory in the BSDS,
you should recover the BSDS before catalog and directory objects. To copy active
log data sets, use the Access Method Services REPRO function. For information
about the JCL for the Access Method Services REPRO function, see one of the
following publications:
v DFSMS/MVS: Access Method Services for the Integrated Catalog
v z/OS DFSMS Access Method Services for Catalogs
398
Why the order is important:

To recover one object, RECOVER must obtain information about it from some
other object. The following table lists the objects from which RECOVER must
obtain information.
Table 65. Objects that the RECOVER utility accesses
Object name
Reason for access by RECOVER
DSNDB01.SYSUTILX
Utility restart information. The object is not

accessed when it is recovered; RECOVER for
this object is not restartable, and no other
commands can be in the same job step.
SYSCOPY information for SYSUTILX is
obtained from the log.
DSNDB01.DBD01
Descriptors for the catalog database

(DSNDB06), the work file database
(DSNDB07), and user databases. RECOVER
for this object is not restartable, and no other
commands can be in the same job step.
SYSCOPY information for DBD01 is obtained
from the log.
DSNDB06.SYSCOPY
Locations of image copy data sets. SYSCOPY

information for SYSCOPY itself is obtained
from the log.
DSNDB01.SYSLGRNX
The RBA or LRSN of the first log record after

the most recent copy.
DSNDB06.SYSDBAUT, DSNDB06.SYSUSER
Verification that the authorization ID is

authorized to run RECOVER.
DSNDB06.SYSDBASE
Information about table spaces that are to be

recovered.
You can use REPORT RECOVERY to obtain SYSCOPY information for

DSNDB01.SYSUTILX, DSNDB01.DBD01, and DSNDB06.SYSCOPY.
Planning for point-in-time recovery for the catalog, directory, and

all user objects
When you recover the DB2 catalog, directory, and all user objects, consider the
entire catalog and directory, including all table spaces and index spaces, as one
logical unit. Recover all objects in the catalog, directory, and all user objects to the
same point of consistency. If a point-in-time recovery of the catalog, directory, and
all user objects is planned, a separate quiesce of the DSNDB06.SYSCOPY table
space is required after a quiesce of the other catalog and directory table spaces.
You should be aware of some special considerations when you are recovering
catalog, directory, and all user objects to a point in time in which the DB2
subsystem was in a different mode. For example, if your DB2 subsystem is
currently in new-function mode, and you need to recover to a point in time in
which the subsystem was in conversion mode.
Recommendation: Before you recover the DB2 catalog, directory, and all user
objects to a prior point in time, shut down the DB2 system cleanly and then restart
the system in access(maint) mode. Recover the catalog and directory objects to the
Chapter 23. RECOVER
399
current state. You can use sample queries and documentation, which are provided
in DSNTESQ in the SDSNSAMP sample library, to check the consistency of the
catalog.
Indexes are rebuilt by REBUILD INDEX. If the only items you have recovered are
table spaces in the catalog or directory, you might need to rebuild their indexes.
Use the CHECK INDEX utility to determine whether an index is inconsistent with
the data it indexes. You can use the RECOVER utility to recover catalog and
directory indexes if the index was defined with the COPY YES attribute and if you
have a full index image copy.
You must recover the catalog and directory before recovering user table spaces.
Be aware that the following table spaces, along with their associated indexes, do
not have entries in SYSIBM.SYSLGRNX, even if they were defined with COPY
YES:
v DSNDB01.SYSUTILX
v DSNDB01.DBD01
v DSNDB01.SYSLGRNX
v DSNDB06.SYSCOPY
v DSNDB06.SYSGROUP
v DSNDB01.SCT02
v DSNDB01.SPT01
These objects are assumed to be open from the point of their last image copy, so
the RECOVER utility processes the log from that point forward.
Point-in-time recovery
Full recovery of the catalog and directory table spaces and indexes is strongly
recommended. However, if you need to plan for point-in-time recovery of the
catalog and directory, here is a way to create a point of consistency:
1. Quiesce all catalog and directory table spaces in a list, except for
DSNDB06.SYSCOPY and DSNDB01.SYSUTILX.
2. Quiesce DSNDB06.SYSCOPY.
Recommendation: Quiesce DSNDB06.SYSCOPY in a separate utility statement;
when you recover DSNDB06.SYSCOPY to its own quiesce point, it contains the
ICTYPE = Q (quiesce) SYSCOPY records for the other catalog and directory
table spaces.
3. Quiesce DSNDB01.SYSUTILX in a separate job step.
If you need to recover to a point in time, recover DSNDB06.SYSCOPY and
DSNDB01.SYSUTILX to their own quiesce points, and recover other catalog and
directory table spaces to their common quiesce point. The catalog and directory
objects must be recovered in a particular order, as described in the previous table.
Recovering critical catalog table spaces:

An ID with a granted authority receives message DSNT500I RESOURCE UNAVAILABLE
while trying to recover a table space in the catalog or directory if table space
DSNDB06.SYSDBASE or DSNDB06.SYSUSER is unavailable. If you receive this
message, you must either make these table spaces available, or run the RECOVER
utility on the catalog or directory by using an authorization ID that has the
installation SYSADM or installation SYSOPR authority.
400
Related information
Management of the bootstrap data set (DB2 Administration Guide)
Reinitializing DSNDB01.SYSUTILX
You need to reinitialize the DSNDB01.SYSUTILX directory table space if you
cannot successfully execute the -DIS UTIL and -TERM UTIL commands, because
DSNDB01.SYSUTILX is damaged and you cannot recover DSNDB01.SYSUTILX,
because errors occur in the LOGAPPLY phase.
Because DSNDB01.SYSUTILX contains information about active and outstanding
utilities, the process of reinitializing this table space involves determining which
objects have a utility in progress and resolving any pending states to make the
object available for access.
If DSNDB01.SYSUTILX must be reinitialized, use the following procedure with
caution:
1. Issue the -DIS DB(*) SPACENAM(*) RESTRICT command and analyze the
output. Write down the following items:
v All of the objects with a utility in progress (The objects in UTUT, UTRO, or
UTRW status have utilities in progress.)
v Any pending states for these objects (RECP, CHKP, and COPY are examples
of pending states.
2. Edit the following installation jobs so that they contain only the commands that
pertain to DSNDB01.SYSUTILX:
a. DSNTIJDEDelete VSAM LDS for DSNDB01.SYSUTILX.
b. DSNTIJINDefine VSAM LDS for DSNDB01.SYSUTILX and tailor the
AMS DEFINE command to fit the needs of your DB2 system.
3.
4.
5.
6.
c. DSNTIJIDInitialize DSNDB01.SYSUTILX.
Run the three edited installation jobs in the order listed.
Issue the -START DB(dbname) ACCESS(UT) command for each database that
has objects with a utility in progress.
Issue the -START DB(dbname)SPACENAM(spname) ACCESS(FORCE) command
on each object with a utility in progress. This action clears all utilities that are
in progress or in pending states. (Any pending states are cleared, but you still
need to resolve the pending states as directed in the next step.)
Resolve the pending states for each object by running the appropriate utility.
For example, if an object was in the RECP status, run the RECOVER utility.
7. Issue -START DB(dbname) ACCESS(RW) for each database.

Related reference
|
Recovering a table space that contains LOB or XML data
|
|
The RECOVER utility can set the auxiliary warning status for a LOB table space or
XML table space if it finds at least one invalid LOB or XML column.
|
|
|
|
|
DB2 marks a LOB or XML column invalid if all of the following conditions are
true:
v The LOB table space or XML table space was defined with the LOG(NO)
attribute.
v The LOB table space or XML table space was recovered.
Chapter 23. RECOVER
401
v The LOB or XML was updated since the last image copy.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The status of an object that is related to a LOB or XML table space can change due
to a recovery operation, depending on the type of recovery that is performed. If all
of the following objects for all LOB or XML columns are recovered in a single
RECOVER utility statement to the present point in time, no pending status exists:
v Base table space
v Index on the auxiliary table
v LOB table space
v XML table space
|
|
|
Refer to the following table for information about the status of a base table space,
index on the auxiliary table, LOB table space, or XML table space that was
recovered without its related objects.
| Table 66. Object status after being recovered without its related objects
|
|
| Object
|
|
|
Recovery type
Base table space Base index

status
space status
LOB or XML
table space
status
Index on a LOB
or XML table
Base table space
Current RBA or LRSN
None
None
None
None
Base table space
Prior point-in-time
AUX-CHECKpending1
REBUILD
pending
None
None
| Base index space Current RBA or LRSN
None
None
None
None
| Base index space Prior point-in-time

|
None
CHECKpending1
None
None
| Index on a LOB
| or XML table
Current RBA or LRSN
None
None
None
None
| Index a LOB or
| XML table
Prior point-in-time
None
None
None
CHECK pending
| LOB or XML
| table space
|
TOCOPY,
TOLASTCOPY,
TOLASTFULLCOPY
AUX-CHECKpending1
None
None
REBUILD
pending
| LOB or XML
| table space
TORBA or
TOLOGPOINT
AUX-CHECKpending1
None
Auxiliary
warning
REBUILD
pending
| Notes:
| 1. For LOB table spaces defined with LOG NO, the update event is logged, even though the data change is not. If
such a log record is applied to the LOB table space and a LOB is consequently marked invalid, the LOB or XML
|
table space is set to auxiliary warning status.
|
|
Related reference
|
|
|
Recovering a table space that contains clone objects
|
|
|
The recovery guidelines and considerations for a cloned table space or cloned
index are the same as for a base table space or base index except in the
point-in-time recovery case.
|
|
|
|
|
For an object currently involved in cloning, or one that was previously involved in
cloning, a point-in-time recovery cannot be done to a time the precedes the most
recent EXCHANGE statement. The time of the most recent EXCHANGE for a table
space can be determined by querying SYSIBM.COPY for the table space to be
recovered where ICTYPE = A and STYPE = E.
402
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When an EXCHANGE is done, two rows will be written to SYSIBM.SYSCOPY for

the table space being processed: one for the base object and one for the clone
object. These rows are differentiated by the SYSCOPY.INSTANCE column value:
one will have INSTANCE=1 and the other INSTANCE=2. These SYSIBM.SYSCOPY
rows do not indicate base or clone. The SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACE catalog table
contains an INSTANCE column that indicates the instance number of the current
base objects. The SYSTABLESPACE.INSTANCE column value can be used to
determine which SYSIBM.SYSCOPY row is for a base object and which is for a
clone object.
Point-in-time recovery
A recovery operation that is done with one of the point in time recovery options is
known as a point-in-time recovery. You can recover objects to any RBA or LRSN
using TORBA or TOLOGPOINT unless the objects are currently, or were
previously, involved with cloning.
|
|
|
With TORBA or TOLOGPOINT, the RBA or LRSN does not have to be a consistent
point in time. The RECOVER utility automatically handles any uncommitted units
of work and the data is left in a consistent state.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
An explicit point of consistency is a quiesce point or a set of image copies that

were taken with SHRLEVEL REFERENCE. Recovering to a point-in-time with
consistency is available only in NFM. Recoveries to a consistent point in time will
be the most efficient because there will be no uncommitted units of work to back
out. You do not need to take a full image copy after recovering to a point in time,
except in the case of fallback recovery. DB2 records the RBAs or LRSNs that are
associated with the point-in-time recovery in the SYSIBM.SYSCOPY catalog table to
allow future recover operations to skip the unwanted range of log records. You can
recover objects to any RBA or LRSN; the RBA or LRSN does not have to be a
consistent point in time. The RECOVER utility automatically handles any
uncommitted units of work and the data is left in a consistent state.
Because a point-in-time recovery of only the table space leaves data in a consistent
state and indexes in an inconsistent state, you must rebuild all indexes by using
REBUILD INDEX.
If you use a point-in-time recovery option to recover a single data set of a
nonpartitioned table space, DB2 issues message DSNU520I to warn that the table
space can become inconsistent following the RECOVER job. This point-in-time
recovery can cause compressed data to exist without a dictionary or can even
overwrite the data set that contains the current dictionary.
|
|
|
|
If you use the point-in-time recovery option to recover a partition-by-growth table

space that has an image copy with fewer partitions than the current table space,
any excess partitions (partitions that are currently defined but not in the image
copy) will be empty after the RECOVER processing.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If a table space or partition in reordered row format is recovered to a point in time

when the table space or partition was in basic row format, the table space or
partition will revert to basic row format. Similarly, if a table space or partition in
basic row format is recovered to a point in time when the table space or partition
was in reordered row format, the table space or partition will revert to reordered
row format.
Chapter 23. RECOVER
403
After recovering a set of table spaces to a point in time, you can use CHECK
DATA to check for inconsistencies. The auxiliary CHECK-pending status (ACHKP)
is set when the CHECK DATA utility detects an inconsistency between a base table
space with defined LOB or XML columns and a LOB or XML table space.
|
|
|
|
You can also use point-in-time recovery and the point-in-time recovery options to
recover all user-defined table spaces and indexes that are in refresh-pending status
(REFP).
Recovery considerations after rebalancing partitions with

REORG
Image copies that were taken prior to resetting the REORG-pending status of any
partition of a partitioned table space are not usable for recovering to a current RBA
or LRSN. Avoid performing a point-in-time recovery for a partitioned table space
to a point in time that is after the REORG-pending status was set, but before a
rebalancing REORG was performed. To determine an appropriate point in time:
1. Run REPORT RECOVERY.
2. Select an image copy for which the recovery point is a point after the
rebalancing REORG was performed.
If you run the REORG utility to turn off a REORG-pending status, and then
recover to a point in time before that REORG job, DB2 sets restrictive statuses on
all partitions that you specified in the REORG job, as follows:
v Sets REORG-pending (and possibly CHECK-pending) on for the data partitions
v Sets REBUILD-pending on for the associated index partitions
v Sets REBUILD-pending on for the associated logical partitions of nonpartitioned
secondary indexes
Recommendation: To create a new consistent recovery point, take one of these
actions immediately following an ALTER INDEX or TABLE operation that changes
partition boundaries:
v Run REORG with COPYDDN and SHRLEVEL NONE specified.
v Take a full image copy immediately after REORG completes.
Using offline copies to recover after rebalancing partitions

To recover data after a REORG job redistributes the data among partitions, use
RECOVER LOGONLY. If you perform a point-in-time recovery, you must keep the
offline copies synchronized with the SYSCOPY records. Therefore, do not use the
MODIFY RECOVERY utility to delete any SYSCOPY records with an ICTYPE
column value of A because these records might be needed during the recovery.
Delete these SYSCOPY records only when you are sure that you no longer need to
use the offline copies that were taken before the REORG that performed the
rebalancing.
Actions that can affect recovery status

When you perform the following actions before you recover a table space, the
recovery status is affected as described:
v If you alter a table to rotate partitions:
You can recover the partition to the current time.
404
You can recover the partition to a point in time after the alter. The utility can
use a recovery base, (for example, a full image copy, a REORG LOG YES
operation, or a LOAD REPLACE LOG YES operation) that occurred prior to
the alter.
You cannot recover the partition to a point in time prior to the alter; the
recover fails with MSGDSNU556I and RC8.
v If you change partition boundaries with ALTER or REORG REBALANCE:
You can recover the partition to the current time if a recovery base (for
example, a full image copy, a REORG LOG YES operation, or a LOAD
REPLACE LOG YES operation) exists.
You can recover the partition to a point in time after the alter.
You can recover the partitions that are affected by the boundary change to a
point in time prior to the alter; RECOVER sets REORG-pending status on the
affected partitions and you must reorganize the table space or range of
partitions. All affected partitions must be in the recovery list of a single
RECOVER statement.
v If you alter a table to add a partition:
You can recover the partition to the current time.
You can recover the partition to a point in time after the alter.
You can recover the partition to a point in time prior to the alter; RECOVER
resets the partition to be empty.
When you perform the following actions before you recover an index to a prior
point in time or to the current time, the recovery status is affected as described:
v If you alter the data type of a column to a numeric data type, you cannot
recover the index until you take a full image copy of the index. However, the
index can be rebuilt.
v If you alter an index to NOT PADDED or PADDED , you cannot recover the
index until you take a full image copy of the index. However, the index can be
rebuilt.
Planning for point-in-time recovery

|
|
|
Recovering to a point in time that is a point of consistency (QUIESCE or

SHRLEVEL REFERENCE set) is desirable because there will be no uncommitted
work to back out.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When making copies of a single object, use SHRLEVEL REFERENCE to establish

consistent points for TOCOPY, TOLASTCOPY, or TOLASTFULLCOPY recovery.
Copies that are made with SHRLEVEL CHANGE do not copy data at a single
instant because changes can occur as the copy is made. A subsequent RECOVER
TOCOPY operation can produce inconsistent data. Instead use RECOVER with the
TOLOGPOINT option to identify a point after the SHRLEVEL CHANGE copy and
any uncommitted units of work will be backed out.
When copying a list of objects, use SHRLEVEL REFERENCE. If a subsequent
recovery to a point in time is necessary, you can use a single RECOVER utility
statement to list all of the objects, along with TOLOGPOINT to identify the
common RBA or LRSN value. If you use SHRLEVEL CHANGE to copy a list of
objects, you should follow it with a QUIESCE of the objects.
To improve the performance of the recovery, take a full image copy of the table
space or set of table spaces, and then quiesce them by using the QUIESCE utility.
This action enables RECOVER TORBA or TOLOGPOINT to recover the table
spaces to the quiesce point with minimal use of the log.
Chapter 23. RECOVER
405
Authorization: Restrict use of the point-in-time recovery options to personnel with

a thorough knowledge of the DB2 recovery environment.
Restrictions:
v RECOVER cannot recover an index or index space to a point in time prior to an
ALTER INDEX REGENERATE. The index should be rebuilt by using the
REBUILD INDEX utility.
v RECOVER cannot recover to a point in time after ALTER TABLE ADD
COLUMN and before ALTERCOLUMN DROP DEFAULT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
v RECOVER cannot recover a piece of a linear table space to a point in time when
the table space was in basic row format and is now in reordered row format, or
when the table space was in reordered row format and is now in basic row
format. Instead, the entire table space must be recovered.
v RECOVER cannot recover a point-in-time RECOVER INDEX if the recovery
point precedes the first ALTER INDEX, in Version 8 new-function mode, that
created a new index version.
v RECOVER cannot use system-level backups as a recovery base unless
DFSMShsm is at z/OS 1.8 or higher.
|
|
|
|
|
Ensuring consistency
You can use RECOVER TORBA, RECOVER TOLOGPOINT, and RECOVER
TOCOPY to recover one of the following single objects:
v Partition of a partitioned table space
v Partition of a partitioning index space
v Data set of a simple table space
For any of the previously listed objects, restore all data sets to the same level;
otherwise, the data becomes inconsistent.
If possible, specify a table space and all of its indexes (or a set of table spaces and
all related indexes) in the same RECOVER utility statement, and specify
TOLOGPOINT or TORBA to identify a QUIESCE point. This action avoids placing
indexes in the CHECK-pending or REBUILD-pending status. If the TOLOGPOINT
is not a common QUIESCE point for all objects, use the following procedure:
1. RECOVER table spaces to the value for TOLOGPOINT (either an RBA or
LRSN).
2. Use concurrent REBUILD INDEX jobs to recover the indexes over each table
space.
This procedure ensures that the table spaces and indexes are synchronized, and it
eliminates the need to run the CHECK INDEX utility.
|
|
|
|
If you cannot specify TOLOGPOINT or TORBA to identify a QUIESCE point, you

can specify any point in time, and DB2 will leave the data in a consistent state. The
RECOVER utility automatically handles any uncommitted units of work and leaves
the data in a consistent state when TORBA or TOLOGPOINT is specified.
|
|
|
|
|
When using RECOVER with the TORBA or TOLOGPOINT option, ensure that all
of the objects that are changed by the active units of recovery at the recovery point
are recovered to the same point-in-time so that they are synchronized:
v DB2 rolls back changes made to units of recovery that are inflight, inabort,
postponed abort, or indoubt during the recovery point-in-time.
406
|
|
|
v DB2 does not roll back changes made to units of recovery that are INCOMMIT
during the recovery point-in-time.
v DB2 rolls back only changes to objects in the RECOVER statement.
Resetting CHECK-pending status

Point-in-time recovery can cause table spaces to be placed in CHECK-pending
status if they have table check constraints or referential constraints defined on
them. When recovering tables that are involved in a referential constraint, you
should recover all the table spaces that are involved in a constraint.
RECOVER does not place dependent table spaces that are related by informational
referential constraints into CHECK-pending status.
|
|
|
|
The TORBA and TOLOGPOINT options set the CHECK-pending status for table
spaces when you perform any of the following actions:
v Recover all members of a set of table spaces that are to be recovered to the same
point in time, but referential constraints were defined for a dependent table after
that point in time. Table spaces that contain those dependent tables are placed in
v Recover table spaces with defined LOB or XML columns without recovering
their LOB or XML table spaces.
To avoid setting CHECK-pending status, you must perform both of the following
steps:
v Recover all dependent objects to the same point in time.
If you do not recover each table space to the same quiesce point, and if any of
the table spaces are part of a referential integrity structure, the following actions
occur:
All dependent table spaces that are recovered are placed in CHECK-pending
status with the scope of the whole table space.
All dependent table spaces of the recovered table spaces are placed in
CHECK-pending status with the scope of the specific dependent tables.
|
|
|
|
v Do not add table check constraints or referential constraints after the point in
time to which you want to recover.
If you recover each table space of a table space set to the same point in time, but
referential constraints were defined after the same point in time, the
CHECK-pending status is set for the table space that contains the table with the
referential constraint.
The TORBA and TOLOGPOINT options set the CHECK-pending status for indexes
when you recover one or more of the indexes to a previous point in time, but you
do not recover the related table space in the same RECOVER statement.
|
|
|
|
|
You can turn off CHECK-pending status for an index by using the TORBA and
TOLOGPOINT options. Recover indexes along with the related table space to the
same point in time (preferably a quiesce point) or SHRLEVEL REFERENCE point.
RECOVER processing resets the CHECK-pending status for all indexes in the same
RECOVER statement.
Compressed data
Use caution when recovering a portion of a table space or partition (for example,
one data set) to a prior point in time. If the data set that is being recovered has
Chapter 23. RECOVER
407
been compressed with a different dictionary, you can no longer read the data.
Related concepts
Resetting the REBUILD-pending status on page 372
How the RECOVER utility performs fallback recovery on page 412
Related tasks
Reviewing CHECK INDEX output on page 98
Related reference
REBUILD-pending status on page 929
REORG-pending status on page 931
Related information
Compressing your data (DB2 Performance Monitoring and Tuning Guide)
Recovery of data to a prior point of consistency (DB2 Administration Guide)
Avoiding specific image copy data sets

You might accidentally lose an image copy, or you might want to avoid a specific
image copy data set. Because the corresponding row is still present in
SYSIBM.SYSCOPY, RECOVER always attempts to allocate the data set.
Use the RESTOREBEFORE option and specify the RBA or LRSN of the image copy,
concurrent copy, or system-level backup that you want to avoid, and RECOVER
will search for an older recovery base. The RECOVER utility then applies log
records to restore the object to its current state or the specified TORBA or
TOLOGPOINT value.
|
|
|
|
|
Image copy on tape

If the image copy is on tape, messages IEF233D and IEF455D request the tape for
RECOVER, as shown in the following example:
IEF233D M BAB,COPY
,,R92341QJ,DSNUPROC,
OR RESPOND TO IEF455D MESSAGE
*42 IEF455D MOUNT COPY
ON BAB FOR R92341QJ,DSNUPROC OR REPLY 'NO'
R 42,NO
IEF234E K BAB,COPY
,PVT,R92341QJ,DSNUPROC
By replying NO, you can initiate the fallback to the previous image copy.
RECOVER responds with messages DSNU030I and DSNU508I, as shown in the
following example:
DSNU030I
DSNU508I
csect-name - UNABLE TO ALLOCATE R92341Q.UTQPS001.FCOPY010

RC=4, CODE=X'04840000'
csect-name - IN FALLBACK PROCESSING TO PRIOR FULL IMAGE COPY
Reason code X0484 means that the request was denied by the operator.
Image copy on disk:

If the image copy is on disk, you can delete or rename the image copy data set
before RECOVER starts executing. RECOVER issues messages DSNU030I and
DSNU508I, as shown in the following example:
DSNU030I
DSNU508I
408
csect-name - UNABLE TO ALLOCATE R92341Q.UTQPS001.FCOPY010,

RC=4, CODE=X'17080000'
csect-name - IN FALLBACK PROCESSING TO PRIOR FULL IMAGE COPY
Reason code X1708 means that the ICF catalog entry cannot be found.
Improving RECOVER performance

Certain activities might improve the performance of the RECOVER utility.
To improve recovery time, consider enabling the Fast Log Apply function on the
DB2 subsystem.
|
|
|
To improve recovery time, consider recovering to a quiesce point or SHRLEVEL

REFERENCE copy instead of recovering to any point in time. The following factors
impact performance when you recover to a non quiesce point:
v The duration of the units of recovery that were active at the recovery point.
v The number of DB2 members that have active units of recovery to roll back.
Use MERGECOPY to merge your table space image copies before recovering the
table space. If you do not merge your image copies, RECOVER automatically
merges them. If RECOVER cannot allocate all the incremental image copy data sets
when it merges the image copies, RECOVER uses the log instead.
Include a list of table spaces and indexes in your RECOVER utility statement to
apply logs in a single scan of the logs.
If you use RECOVER TOCOPY for full image copies, you can improve
performance by using data compression. The improvement is proportional to the
degree of compression.
Consider specifying the PARALLEL keyword to restore image copies from disk or
tape to a list of objects in parallel.
If you are recovering concurrent copies, consider specifying the
CURRENTCOPYONLY option to improve performance. When you specify this
option, RECOVER can issue one DFSMSdss RESTORE command for multiple
objects. The utility issues one RESTORE command for each group of objects that is
associated with the concurrent copy data set. If you do not use the
CURRENTCOPYONLY keyword, RECOVER issues one RESTORE command for
each object.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you are recovering an object from a system-level backup, RECOVER invokes

DFSMShsm, which controls parallelism. If the system-level backup resides on disk,
the RECOVER utility passes the object to DFSMShsm before processing the objects
to be restored from image copies or concurrent copies. If the system-level backup
resides on tape, the RECOVER utility processes the objects to be restored from
system-level backups, image copies, and concurrent copies at the same time.
Related information
LOG APPLY STORAGE (DB2 Installation Guide)
Optimizing the LOGAPPLY phase

The time that is required to recover a table space depends also on the time that is
required to read and apply log data. You can take several steps to optimize the
process. If possible, DB2 reads the required log records from the active log to
provide the best performance.
Chapter 23. RECOVER
409
Any log records that are not found in the active logs are read from the archive log
data sets, which are dynamically allocated to satisfy the requests. The type of
storage that is used for archive log data sets is a significant factor in the
performance. Consider the following actions to improve performance:
v RECOVER a list of objects in one utility statement to take only a single pass of
the log.
v Keep archive logs on disk to provide the best possible performance.
v Control archive logs data sets by using DFSMShsm to provide the next best
performance. DB2 optimizes recall of the data sets. After the data set is recalled,
DB2 reads it from disk.
v If the archive log must be read from tape, DB2 optimizes access by means of
ready-to-process and look-ahead mount requests. DB2 also permits delaying the
deallocation of a tape drive if subsequent RECOVER jobs require the same
archive log tape. Those methods are described in more detail in the subsequent
paragraphs.
The BSDS contains information about which log data sets to use and where they
reside. You must keep the BSDS information current. If the archive log data sets
are cataloged, the ICF catalog indicates where to allocate the required data set.
DFSMShsm data sets

The recall of the first DFSMShsm archive log data set starts automatically when the
LOGAPPLY phase starts. When the recall is complete and the first log record is
read, the recall for the next archive log data set starts. This process is known as
look-ahead recalling. Its purpose is to recall the next data set while it reads the
preceding one.
When a recall is complete, the data set is available to all RECOVER jobs that
require it. Reading proceeds in parallel.
Non-DFSMShsm tape data sets

DB2 reports on the console all tape volumes that are required for the entire job.
The report distinguishes two types of volumes:
v Any volume that is not marked with an asterisk (*) is required for the for the
job to complete. Obtain these volumes from the tape library as soon as possible.
v Any volume that is marked with an asterisk (*) contains data that is also
contained in one of the active log data sets. The volume might or might not be
required.
As tapes are mounted and read, DB2 makes two types of mount requests:
v Ready-to-process: The current job needs this tape immediately. As soon as the tape
is loaded, DB2 allocates and opens it.
v Look-ahead: This is the next tape volume that is required by the current job.
Responding to this request enables DB2 to allocate and open the data set before
it is needed, thus reducing overall elapsed time for the job.
You can dynamically change the maximum number of input tape units that are
used to read the archive log by specifying the COUNT option of the SET
ARCHIVE command. For example, use the following command to assign 10 tape
units to your DB2 subsystem:
-SET ARCHIVE COUNT (10)
410
The DISPLAY ARCHIVE READ command shows the currently mounted tape
volumes and their statuses.
Delayed deallocation
DB2 can delay deallocating the tape units used to read the archive logs. This is
useful when several RECOVER utility statements run in parallel. By delaying
deallocation, DB2 can re-read the same volume on the same tape unit for different
RECOVER jobs, without taking time to allocate it again.
You can dynamically change the amount of time that DB2 delays deallocation by
using the TIME option of the SET ARCHIVE command. For example, to specify a
60 minute delay, issue the following command:
-SET ARCHIVE TIME(60)
In a data sharing environment, you might want to specify zero (0) to avoid having
one member hold onto a data set that another member needs for recovery.
Performance summary
1. Achieve the best performance by allocating archive logs on disk.
2. Consider staging cataloged tape data sets to disk before allocation by the log
read process.
3. If the data sets are read from tape, set both the COUNT and the TIME values
to the maximum allowable values within the system constraints.
Recovering image copies in a JES3 environment

You can recover image copies in a JES3 environment.
To recover image copies in a JES3 environment:
Ensure that sufficient units are available to mount the required image copies. In a
JES3 environment, if the number of image copies that need to be restored exceeds
the number of available online and offline units, and the RECOVER job
successfully allocates all available units, the job waits for more units to become
available.
Resetting RECOVER-pending or REBUILD pending status

Several possible operations on a table space can place the table space in the
RECOVER-pending status and the index space in REBUILD-pending status.
You can turn off the status in several ways:
v Recover the table space, index space, or partition.
v Use REBUILD INDEX to rebuild the index space from existing data.
v Use the LOAD utility, with the REPLACE option, on the table space or partition.
v Use the REPAIR utility, with the NORCVRPEND option, on the table space,
index space, or partition. Be aware that the REPAIR utility does not fix the data
inconsistency in the table space or index.
v Rebuild indexes, run REORG TABLESPACE SORTDATA for table spaces and
indexes.
Chapter 23. RECOVER
411
How the RECOVER utility allocates incremental image copies

RECOVER attempts to dynamically allocate all required incremental image copy
data sets.
If any of the incremental image copies are missing, RECOVER performs the
following actions:
v Identifies the first incremental image copy that is missing
v Uses the incremental image copies up to the missing incremental image copy
v Doesnt use the remaining incremental image copy data sets
v Applies additional log records to compensate for any incremental image copies
that were not used
For example, if the incremental image copies are on tape and an adequate number
of tape drives are not available, RECOVER does not use the remaining incremental
image copy data sets.
How the RECOVER utility performs fallback recovery

If the RECOVER utility cannot use the latest primary copy data set as a starting
point for recovery, it attempts to use the backup copy data set, if one is available.
If neither image copy is usable, RECOVER attempts to fall back to a previous
recovery point. If the previous recovery point is a full image copy, the RECOVER
utility uses the full image copy, any incremental image copies, and the log to
recover. If a previous REORG LOG YES or LOAD REPLACE LOG YES was done,
RECOVER attempts to recover from the log and applies any changes that occurred
between the two image copies. If good full image copies are not available, and no
previous REORG LOG YES or LOAD REPLACE LOG YES jobs were run, the
RECOVER utility terminates. The RECOVER utility will not fall back to a
system-level backup.
If one of the following actions occurs, the index remains untouched, and utility
processing terminates with return code 8:
v RECOVER processes an index for which no full copy exists.
v The copy cannot be used because of utility activity that occurred on the index or
on its underlying table space,
If you always make multiple image copies, RECOVER should seldom fall back to
an earlier point. Instead, RECOVER relies on the backup copy data set if the
primary copy data set is unusable.
In a JES3 environment, you can do a fallback recovery by issuing a JES3 cancel,s
command at the time the allocation mount message is issued. This action might be
necessary if a volume is not available or if the given volume is not desired.
RECOVER does not perform parallel processing for objects that are in backup or
fallback recovery. Instead, the utility performs non-parallel image copy allocation
processing of the objects. RECOVER defers the processing of objects that require
backup or fallback processing until all other objects are recovered, at which time
the utility processes the objects one at a time.
412
Related concepts
Preparing for recovery on page 139
How the RECOVER utility retains tape mounts

The RECOVER utility can automatically retain the tape volumes for the input
image copies when a list of objects is being recovered.
For input image copies (for the objects being recovered) that are stacked on one or
more tape volumes, you do not need to code JCL DD statements to retain the tape
volumes on the tape drive. Instead, you can use the PARALLEL and TAPEUNITS
keywords. The PARALLEL keyword directs the RECOVER utility to process the
objects in parallel. The objects will be sorted based on how the input image copies
are stacked on tape to maximize efficiency during the RESTORE phase by retaining
the tape volumes on the tape drive and by restoring the input image copies in the
right order (by ascending file sequence numbers). The TAPEUNITS keyword will
limit the number of tape units (or drives) that the RECOVER utility will use
during the RESTORE phase. In special cases, RECOVER cannot retain all of the
tape volumes, so the tape volumes may be demounted and deallocated even if the
PARALLEL and TAPEUNITS keywords are specified.
Avoiding damaged media

When a media error is detected, DB2 prints a message that indicates the extent of
the damage. If an entire volume is bad and storage groups are being used, you
must remove the bad volume first; otherwise, the RECOVER utility might re-access
the damaged media.
|
|
|
To avoid damaged media:

1. Use ALTER STOGROUP to remove the bad volume and add another volume. If
your data sets are managed by DFSMS storage group, then you need to also
remove the bad volume from the DFSMS storage group.
2. Run the RECOVER utility for all objects on that volume.
If the RECOVER utility cannot complete because of severe errors that are caused
by the damaged media, you might need to use Access Method Services (IDCAMS)
with the NOSCRATCH option to delete the cluster for the table space or index. If
the table space or index is defined by using STOGROUP, the RECOVER utility
automatically redefines the cluster. For user-defined table spaces or indexes, you
must redefine the cluster before invoking the RECOVER utility.
Termination or restart of RECOVER

You can terminate and restart the RECOVER utility.
Termination
Terminating a RECOVER job with the TERM UTILITY command leaves the table
space that is being recovered in RECOVER-pending status, and the index space
that is being recovered in the REBUILD-pending status. If you recover a table
space to a previous point in time, its indexes are left in the REBUILD-pending
status. The data or index is unavailable until the object is successfully recovered or
rebuilt. If the utility fails in the LOGAPPLY, LOGCSR, or LOGUNDO phases, fix
the problem that caused the job to stop and restart the job rather than terminate
the job. For the rest of objects in the recover job, the RECOVER utility restores the
Chapter 23. RECOVER
413
original image copy and repeats the LOGAPPLY, LOGCSR, and LOGUNDO
process again for this subset of objects. All the objects being recovered in one
recover job will be available to the application at the end of the RECOVER utility,
even if some of the objects do not have any active URs operating on them and
therefore no rollback is needed for these objects.
Restart
You can restart RECOVER from the last commit point (RESTART(CURRENT)) or
the beginning of the phase (RESTART(PHASE)). By default, DB2 uses
RESTART(CURRENT).
If you attempt to recover multiple objects by using a single RECOVER statement
and the utility fails in:
v The RESTORE phase: All objects in the process of being restored are placed in
the RECOVER-pending or REBUILD-pending status. The status of the remaining
objects is unchanged.
v The LOGAPPLY phase: All objects that are specified in the RECOVER statement
are placed in the RECOVER-pending or REBUILD-pending status.
In both cases, you must identify and fix the causes of the failure before performing
a current restart.
|
|
If RECOVER fails in the LOGCSR phase and you restart the utility, the utility
restart behavior is RESTART(PHASE).
|
|
|
|
If RECOVER fails in the LOGUNDO phase and you restart the utility, the utility
repeats the RESTORE, LOGAPPLY, LOGCSR, and LOGUNDO phases for only
those objects that had active units of recovery that needed to be handled and that
did not complete undo processing prior to the failure.
Related concepts
Effects of running RECOVER

When you run RECOVER without the REUSE option and the data set that contains
that data is DB2managed, DB2 deletes this data set before the RECOVER and
redefines a new data set with a control interval that matches the page size.
Sample RECOVER control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own RECOVER
control statements.
Example 1: Recovering a table space

The following control statement specifies that the RECOVER utility is to recover
table space DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D to the current point in time.
RECOVER TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D
Example 2: Recovering a table space partition

the second partition of table space DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D. The partition number is
indicated by the DSNUM option.
414
RECOVER TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D DSNUM 2
Example 3: Recovering a table space partition to the last image

copy that was taken
the first partition of table space DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D to the last image copy that
was taken. If the last image copy that was taken is a full image copy, this full
image copy is restored. If the last image copy that was taken is an incremental
image copy, the most recent full image copy, along with any incremental image
copies, are restored.
RECOVER TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D DSNUM 1 TOLASTCOPY
Example 4: Recovering table spaces to a point in time

the second partition of table space DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E and all of table space
DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D to the indicated quiesce point (LRSN X00000551BE7D).
The quiesce point is indicated by the TOLOGPOINT option. Note that the value
for this option can be either an LRSN or an RBA.
RECOVER TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E DSNUM 2
TOLOGPOINT X'00000551BE7D'
Example 5: Recovering an index to the last full image copy that

was taken without deleting and redefining the data sets
index ADMF001.IADH082P to the last full image copy. The REUSE option specifies
that DB2 is to logically reset and reuse DB2-managed data sets without deleting
and redefining them.
RECOVER INDEX
ADMF001.IADH082P REUSE TOLASTFULLCOPY
Example 6: Recovering from concurrent copies

The RECOVER utility control statement specifies that the utility is to recover all of
the objects that are included in the RCVR4_LIST. This list is defined by the
preceding LISTDEF utility control statement. Because the most recent primary copy
for all of these objects is a concurrent copy, the CURRENTCOPYONLY option is
used in the RECOVER statement to improve the performance of restoring these
concurrent copies. The LOCALSITE option indicates that RECOVER is to use
image copies at the local site.
Chapter 23. RECOVER
415
//STEP1
//
//
//UTPRINT
//SYSUT1
//
//
//SORTOUT
//
//
//SYSIN
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='JUOLU210.RCVR4',
UTPROC='',
SYSTEM='SSTR'
DD SYSOUT=*
DD DSN=JUOLU210.RCVR4.STEP1.SYSUT1,
DD DSN=JUOLU210.RCVR4.STEP1.SORTOUT,
DD *
LISTDEF RCVR4_LIST
INCLUDE TABLESPACES
INCLUDE TABLESPACES
INCLUDE TABLESPACES
INCLUDE TABLESPACES
INCLUDE TABLESPACES
INCLUDE INDEXSPACES
INCLUDE INDEXSPACES
INCLUDE INDEXSPACES
TABLESPACE
TABLESPACE
TABLESPACE
TABLESPACE
TABLESPACE
INDEXSPACE
INDEXSPACE
INDEXSPACE
DBOL1002.TSOL1002
DBOL1003.TPOL1003
DBOL1003.TPOL1003
DBOL1003.TPOL1004
DBOL1003.TPOL1004
DBOL1003.IPOL1051
DBOL1003.IPOL1061
DBOL1003.IXOL1062
PARTLEVEL
PARTLEVEL
PARTLEVEL
PARTLEVEL
PARTLEVEL
PARTLEVEL
3
6
5
9
22
10
RECOVER LIST RCVR4_LIST

LOCALSITE
CURRENTCOPYONLY
/*
Figure 69. Example RECOVER control statement with the CURRENTCOPYONLY option
Example 7: Recovering a list of objects on different tape devices

in parallel
The control statement specifies that the RECOVER utility is to recover the list of
table spaces. Full image copies and incremental image copies of the eight table
spaces are stacked on four different tape volumes. The utility sorts the list of
objects and, if possible, recovers two objects at a time in parallel. This number of
objects is specified by the PARALLEL option. The TAPEUNITS option specifies that
up to four tape drives are to be dynamically allocated.
//RECOVER
EXEC DSNUPROC,SYSTEM='DSN'
//SYSIN
DD *
RECOVER PARALLEL(2) TAPEUNITS(4)
TABLESPACE DB1.TS8
TABLESPACE DB1.TS7
TABLESPACE DB1.TS6
TABLESPACE DB1.TS5
TABLESPACE DB1.TS4
TABLESPACE DB1.TS3
TABLESPACE DB1.TS2
TABLESPACE DB1.TS1
Figure 70. Example RECOVER control statement for a list of objects on tape
Example 8: Recovering a list of objects to a point in time

The following RECOVER control statement specifies that the RECOVER utility is to
recover the specified list of objects to a common point in time (LRSN
X00000551BE7D). The LISTDEF control statement defines which objects are to be
included in the list. These objects are logically consistent after successful
completion of this RECOVER job. The PARALLEL option indicates that RECOVER
is to restore four objects at a time in parallel. If any of the image copies are on tape
(either stacked or not stacked), RECOVER determines the number of tape drives to
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
416
|
|
|
use to optimize the process. Note that any uncommitted work for all of the objects
at the specified RBA have been backed out by the recover to point in time with
consistency.
LISTDEF RCVRLIST INCLUDE TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D
RECOVER LIST RCVRLIST TOLOGPOINT X'00000551BE7D' PARALLEL(4)
Example 9: Recovering clone table data

only clone table data in DBA90601.TLX9061A and recover the data to the last
image copy that was taken. The REUSE option specifies that RECOVER is to
logically reset and reuse DB2-managed data sets without deleting and redefining
them.
RECOVER TABLESPACE DBA90601.TLX9061A REUSE TOLASTCOPY
CLONE
Example 10: Recovering an image copy
|
|
|
|
|
|
The following control statement specifies that the RECOVER utility is to search for
an image copy with an RBA or LRSN value earlier than the specified
X00000551BE7D value to use in the RESTORE phase. Only specified dumps of the
database copy pool are used for the restore of the data sets.
RECOVER LIST RCVRLIST RESTOREBEFORE X'00000551BE7D' PARALLEL(4)
FROMDUMP DUMPCLASS(dcname)
Chapter 23. RECOVER
417
418

The online REORG INDEX utility reorganizes an index space to improve access
performance and reclaim fragmented space. You can specify the degree of access to
your data during reorganization, and you can collect inline statistics by using the
STATISTICS keyword.
You can determine when to run REORG INDEX by using the LEAFDISTLIMIT
catalog query option. If you specify the REPORTONLY option, REORG INDEX
produces a report that indicates whether a REORG is recommended; in this case, a
REORG is not performed. These options are not available for indexes on the
directory.
Output
The following list summarizes REORG INDEX output:
REORG specified
Results
REORG INDEX
Reorganizes the entire index (all parts if partitioning).
REORG INDEX PART n
Reorganizes PART n of a partitioning index or of a data-partitioned
secondary index
v REORG privilege for the database
v SYSCTRL authority
v SYSADM authority
To execute this utility on an index space in the catalog or directory, you must use a
privilege set that includes one of the following authorities:
v REORG privilege for the DSNDB06 (catalog) database
v DBADM or DBCTRL authority for the DSNDB06 (catalog) database.
v Installation SYSOPR authority
v SYSCTRL authority
v SYSADM or Installation SYSADM authority
v STATS privilege for the database is required if STATISTICS keyword is specified.
While trying to reorganize an index space in the catalog or directory, a user with
authority other than installation SYSADM or installation SYSOPR might receive the
following message:
DSNT500I "resource unavailable"
This message is issued when the DSNDB06.SYSDBAUT or DSNDB06.SYSUSER

catalog table space or one of the indexes is unavailable. If this problem occurs, run
419
the REORG INDEX utility again, using an authorization ID with the installation
SYSADM or installation SYSOPR authority.
An ID with installation SYSOPR authority can also execute REORG INDEX, but
only on an index in the DSNDB06 database.
To run REORG INDEX STATISTICS REPORT YES, ensure that the privilege set
includes the SELECT privilege on the catalog tables and on the tables for which
statistics are to be gathered.
Execution phases of REORG INDEX

The REORG INDEX utility operates in these phases:
Phase Description
UTILINIT
UNLOAD
Unloads index space and writes keys to a sequential data set.
BUILD
Builds indexes. Updates index statistics.
LOG
Processes log iteratively. Used only if you specify SHRLEVEL CHANGE.
SWITCH
Switches access between original and new copy of index space or partition.
Used only if you specify SHRLEVEL REFERENCE or CHANGE.
UTILTERM
Performs cleanup. For DB2-managed data sets and either SHRLEVEL
CHANGE or SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, the utility deletes the original copy
of the table space or index space.
Syntax and options of the REORG INDEX control statement

The REORG INDEX utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
420
Syntax diagram
REORG
INDEX LIST listdef-name

index-name-spec

REUSE
CLONE
SHRLEVEL NONE

FASTSWITCH YES
SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE
deadline-spec
CHANGE
deadline-spec
drain-spec
drain-spec
change-spec
FASTSWITCH NO
UNLOAD CONTINUE

(1)
LEAFDISTLIMIT
integer
REPORTONLY
UNLOAD
PAUSE
ONLY
(2)
stats-spec
WORKDDN (SYSUT1)

WORKDDN (ddname)
PREFORMAT
Notes:
1
You cannot use UNLOAD PAUSE with the LIST option.
You cannot specify any options in stats-spec with the UNLOAD ONLY option.
index-name-spec:
INDEX
index-name
creator-id.
INDEXSPACE
index-space-name
database-name.

PART
integer
deadline-spec:
DEADLINE NONE

DEADLINE
timestamp
labeled-duration-expression
drain-spec:
421
(1)
(2)
(3)

DRAIN_WAIT
integer
RETRY integer
RETRY_DELAY
integer
Notes:
|
The default for DRAIN_WAIT is the value of the IRLMRWT subsystem parameter.
The default for RETRY is the value of the UTIMOUT subsystem parameter.
|
|
The default for RETRY_DELAY is the smaller of the following two values: DRAIN_WAIT value
RETRY value, DRAIN_WAIT value 10
change-spec:
DRAIN WRITERS
LONGLOG CONTINUE
DELAY 1200
DRAIN ALL
LONGLOG
DELAY

(1)
MAXRO
integer
DEFER
TERM
DRAIN
integer
TIMEOUT TERM

TIMEOUT ABEND
Notes:
1
The default for MAXRO is the RETRY_DELAY default value.
labeled-duration-expression:
CURRENT_DATE
CURRENT_TIMESTAMP
stats-spec:
422
+
-
constant
YEAR
YEARS
MONTH
MONTHS
DAY
DAYS
HOUR
HOURS
MINUTE
MINUTES
SECOND
SECONDS
MICROSECOND
MICROSECONDS
REPORT NO
UPDATE ALL
STATISTICS

REPORT YES
UPDATE
ACCESSPATH
SPACE
NONE

HISTORY
ALL
ACCESSPATH
SPACE
NONE
FORCEROLLUP
YES
NO
FREQVAL NUMCOLS 1
COUNT 10

KEYCARD
SORTDEVT
FREQVAL NUMCOLS
integer
COUNT
device-type
integer

SORTNUM
integer
Option descriptions
Specifies an index that is to be reorganized.
creator-id. specifies the creator of the index and is optional. If you omit the
qualifier creator id, DB2 uses the user identifier for the utility job. index-name is
the qualified name of the index to copy. For an index, you can specify either an
index name or an index space name. Enclose the index name in quotation
Specifies the qualified name of the index space that is obtained from the
database-name specifies the name of the database that is associated with the
index and is optional.
index-space-name specifies the qualified name of the index space that is to be
reorganized; the name is obtained from the SYSIBM.SYSINDEXES table.
LIST listdef-name
Specifies the name of a previously defined LISTDEF list name. The INDEX
keyword is required to differentiate this REORG INDEX LIST from REORG
TABLESPACE LIST. The utility allows one LIST keyword for each control
statement of REORG INDEX. The list must not contain any table spaces.
REORG INDEX is invoked once for each item in the list. This utility will only
423
Do not specify STATISTICS INDEX index-name with REORG INDEX LIST. If
you want to collect inline statistics for a list of indexes, just specify
STATISTICS.
You cannot specify DSNUM and PART with LIST on any utility.
PART integer
Identifies a partition that is to be reorganized. You can reorganize a single
partition of a partitioning index. You cannot specify PART with LIST. integer
must be in the range from 1 to the number of partitions that are defined for
the partitioning index. The maximum value is 4096.
integer designates a single partition.
If you omit the PART keyword, the entire index is reorganized.
REUSE
When used with SHRLEVEL NONE, specifies that REORG is to logically reset
and reuse DB2-managed data sets without deleting and redefining them. If you
do not specify REUSE and SHRLEVEL NONE, DB2 deletes and redefines
DB2-managed data sets to reset them.
If a data set has multiple extents and you use the REUSE parameter, the
extents are not released.
If you specify SHRLEVEL REFERENCE or CHANGE with REUSE, REUSE
does not apply
CLONE
Indicates that REORG INDEX is to reorganize only the specified index spaces
and indexes that are defined on clone tables. This utility will only process
clone data if the CLONE keyword is specified. The use of CLONED YES on
the LISTDEF statement is not sufficient.
|
|
|
|
|
SHRLEVEL
Specifies the method for performing the reorganization. The parameter
following SHRLEVEL indicates the type of access that is to be allowed during
the RELOAD phase of REORG.
NONE
Specifies that reorganization is to operate by unloading from the area that
is being reorganized (while applications can read but cannot write to the
area), building into that area (while applications have no access), and then
allowing read-write access again.
If you specify NONE (explicitly or by default), you cannot specify the
following parameters:
v MAXRO
v LONGLOG
v DELAY
v DEADLINE
v DRAIN_WAIT
v RETRY
v RETRY_DELAY
REFERENCE
Specifies that reorganization is to operate as follows:
424
v Unload from the area that is being reorganized while applications can
read but cannot write to the area.
v Build into a shadow copy of that area while applications can read but
cannot write to the original copy.
v Switch the future access of the applications from the original copy to the
shadow copy by exchanging the names of the data sets, and then
If you specify REFERENCE, you cannot specify the following parameters:
v UNLOAD (Reorganization with REFERENCE always performs
UNLOAD CONTINUE.)
v MAXRO
v LONGLOG
v DELAY
CHANGE
v Unload from the area that is being reorganized while applications can
read and write to the area.
v Build into a shadow copy of that area while applications can read and
write to the original copy.
v Apply the log of the original copy to the shadow copy while
applications can read and usually write to the original copy.
v Switch the future access of the applications from the original copy to the
shadow copy by exchanging the names of the data sets, and then
If you specify CHANGE, you cannot specify the UNLOAD parameter.
Reorganization with CHANGE always performs UNLOAD CONTINUE.
|
|
SHRLEVEL CHANGE cannot be specified if the table space has the NOT
LOGGED attribute.
DEADLINE
Specifies the deadline for the SWITCH phase to begin. If DB2 estimates that
the SWITCH phase does not begin by the deadline, DB2 issues the messages
that the DISPLAY UTILITY command issues and then terminates
reorganization.
NONE
Specifies that no deadline exists by which the switch phase of log
processing must begin.
timestamp
Specifies the deadline for the switch phase of log processing to begin. This
deadline must not have already occurred when REORG is executed.
|
|
|
Calculates the deadline for the switch phase of log processing to begin. The
calculation is based on either CURRENT TIMESTAMP or CURRENT
DATE. You can add or subtract one or more constant values to specify the
deadline. This deadline must not have already occurred when REORG is
executed. CURRENT TIMESTAMP and CURRENT DATE are evaluated
once, when the REORG statement is first processed. If a list of objects is
specified, the same value will be in effect for all objects in the list.
425
CURRENT_DATE
Specifies that the deadline is to be calculated based on the CURRENT
DATE.
CURRENT_TIMESTAMP
TIMESTAMP.
constant
Indicates a unit of time and is followed by one of the seven duration
keywords: YEARS, MONTHS, DAYS, HOURS, MINUTES, SECONDS,
or MICROSECONDS. The singular form of these words is also
acceptable: YEAR, MONTH, DAY, HOUR, MINUTE, SECOND,
MICROSECOND.
If REORG SHRLEVEL REFERENCE or SHRLEVEL CHANGE terminates
because of a DEADLINE specification, DB2 issues message DSNU374I with
reason code 2 but does not set a restrictive status.
DRAIN_WAIT integer
Specifies the number of seconds that the utility waits when draining for SQL
statements (inserts, updates, deletes, and selects). The specified time is the
aggregate time for all partitions of the index that is to be reorganized. This
value overrides the values specified by IRLMRWT and UTIMOUT, for these
SQL statements only. For operations like commands, the IRLMRWT and
UTIMOUT values are used. Valid values for integer are from 0 to 1800. If the
keyword is omitted or if a value of 0 is specified, the utility uses the value of
the lock timeout system parameter IRLMRWT.
RETRY integer
Specifies the maximum number of retries that REORG is to attempt. Valid
values for integer are from 0 to 255.
Specifying RETRY can lead to increased processing costs and can result in
multiple or extended periods of read-only access.
The default value is the value of the UTIMOUT subsystem parameter.
RETRY_DELAY integer
Specifies the minimum duration, in seconds, between retries. Valid values
for integer are from 1 to 1800.
If you do not specify RETRY_DELAY, REORG INDEX uses the smaller of
the following two values:
|
|
|
|

MAXRO integer
During that iteration, applications have read-only access.
The actual execution time of the last iteration might exceed the specified
MAXRO value.
The ALTER UTILITY command can change the value of MAXRO.
The default value is the RETRY_DELAY default value.
integer
426
elapsed time for REORG to complete. If you specify a huge positive value,
the second iteration of log processing is probably the last iteration.
The default value is 300 seconds.
DEFER
Specifies that the iterations of log processing with read-write access can
continue indefinitely. REORG never begins the final iteration with
read-only access, unless you change the MAXRO value by using the
ALTER UTILITY command.
If you specify DEFER, you should also specify LONGLOG CONTINUE.
If you specify DEFER, and DB2 determines that the actual time for an
iteration and the estimated time for the next iteration are both less than 5
seconds, DB2 adds a 5-second pause to the next iteration. This pause
reduces consumption of processor time. The first time this situation occurs
for a given execution of REORG, DB2 sends message DSNU362I to the
console. The message states that the number of log records that must be
processed is small and that the pause occurs. To change the MAXRO value
and thus cause REORG to finish, execute the ALTER UTILITY command.
DB2 adds the pause whenever the situation occurs; however, DB2 sends
the message only if 30 minutes have elapsed since the last message was
sent for a given execution of REORG.
DRAIN
Specifies drain behavior at the end of the log phase after the MAXRO
threshold is reached and when the last iteration of the log is to be applied.
WRITERS
Specifies the current default action, in which DB2 drains only the writers
during the log phase after the MAXRO threshold is reached and
subsequently issues DRAIN ALL on entering the switch phase.
ALL
Specifies that DB2 is to drain all readers and writers during the log phase,
after the MAXRO threshold is reached.
Consider specifying DRAIN ALL if the following conditions are both true:
v SQL update activity is high during the log phase.
v The default behavior results in a large number of -911 SQL error
messages.
LONGLOG
console, if the number of records that the next iteration of log process is to
process is not sufficiently lower than the number that the previous iterations
processed. This situation means that REORG INDEX is not reading the
application log quickly enough to keep pace with the writing of the application
log.
CONTINUE
specified with MAXRO.
A value of DEFER for MAXRO and a value of CONTINUE for LONGLOG
together mean that REORG INDEX is to continue allowing access to the
original copy of the area that is being reorganized and does not switch to
427
the shadow copy. The user can execute the ALTER UTILITY command
with a large value for MAXRO when the switching is desired.
TERM
Specifies that DB2 is to terminate reorganization after the delay specified
by the DELAY parameter.
DRAIN
log processing to occur.
DELAY integer
Specifies the minimum interval between the time that REORG sends the
LONGLOG message to the console and the time REORG that performs the
action that is specified by the LONGLOG parameter.
integer is the number of seconds.
TIMEOUT
Specifies the action that is to be taken if the REORG INDEX utility gets a
time-out condition while trying to drain objects in either the log or switch
phases.
TERM
Indicates that DB2 is to behave as follows if you specify the TERM option
and a time out condition occurs:
1. DB2 issues an implicit TERM UTILITY command, causing the utility to
end with a return code 8.
2. DB2 issues the DSNU590I and DSNU170I messages.
3. DB2 leaves the objects in a RW state.
ABEND
Indicates that if a time-out condition occurs, DB2 is to leave the objects in a
UTRO or UTUT state.
FASTSWITCH
Specifies which switch methodology is to be used for a given reorganization.
|
|
|
|
|
YES
Enables the SWITCH phase to use the FASTSWITCH methodology. This
option is not allowed for the catalog (DSNDB06) or directory (DSNDB01).
|
|
NO
Causes the SWITCH phase to use IDCAMS RENAME.
LEAFDISTLIMIT integer
Specifies that the value for integer is to be compared to the LEAFDIST value
for the specified partitions of the specified index in SYSIBM.SYSINDEXPART. If
any LEAFDIST value exceeds the specified LEAFDISTLIMIT value, REORG is
performed or, if you specify REPORTONLY, recommended.
REPORTONLY
Specifies that REORG is only to be recommended, not performed. REORG
produces a report with one of the following return codes:
1
No limit met; no REORG performed or recommended.
2
REORG performed or recommended.
428
UNLOAD
Specifies whether the utility job is to continue processing or terminate after the
data is unloaded.
CONTINUE
Specifies that, after the data has been unloaded, the utility is to continue
processing.
PAUSE
Specifies that, after the data has been unloaded, processing is to end. The
utility stops and the RELOAD status is stored in SYSIBM.SYSUTIL so that
processing can be restarted with RELOAD RESTART(PHASE).
This option is useful if you want to redefine data sets during
reorganization. For example, with a user-defined data set, you can:
v Run REORG with the UNLOAD PAUSE option.
v Redefine the data set using Access Method Services.
v Restart REORG by resubmitting the previous job and specifying
RESTART(PHASE).
If no records are unloaded during an UNLOAD PAUSE, when REORG is
restarted, the RELOAD and BUILD phases are bypassed.
You cannot use UNLOAD PAUSE if you specify the LIST option.
ONLY
Specifies that, after the data has been unloaded, the utility job ends and the
status in SYSIBM.SYSUTIL that corresponds to this utility ID is removed.
STATISTICS
Specifies that statistics for the index are to be collected; the statistics are either
reported or stored in the DB2 catalog. You cannot collect inline statistics for
indexes on the catalog and directory tables.
Restrictions:
information on this data.
v You cannot specify STATISTICS for clone objects.
REPORT
Indicates whether a set of messages is to be generated to report the collected
statistics.
NO
YES
KEYCARD
Indicates that all of the distinct values in all of the 1 to n key column
429
FREQVAL
Specifies that frequent value statistics are to be collected. If you specify
FREQVAL, you must also specify NUMCOLS and COUNT.
NUMCOLS
Indicates the number of key columns to concatenate together when you
collect frequent values from the specified index. Specifying 3 means that
DB2 is to collect frequent values on the concatenation of the first three key
columns.
The default value is 1, which means DB2 is to collect frequent values on
the first key column of the index.
COUNT
Indicates the number of frequent values that are to be collected. Specifying
15 means that DB2 is to collect 15 frequent values from the specified key
columns.
allocated by DFSORT. For device-type, specify any disk device that is valid on
the DYNALLOC parameter of the SORT or OPTION options for DFSORT. See
DFSORT Application Programming: Guide for more information.
|
|
|
|
SORTNUM integer
allocated when collecting statistics for a data-partitioned secondary index. If
you omit SORTDEVT, SORTNUM is ignored. If you use SORTDEVT and omit
SORTNUM, no value is passed to DFSORT; DFSORT uses its own default.
|
|
REORG INDEX does not sort index keys. Only one sort can be performed, and
that is if inline statistics are being collected for a DPSI.
|
|

UPDATE
ALL
ACCESSPATH
Indicates that only the catalog table columns that provide statistics that are
used for access path selection are to be updated.
SPACE
Indicates that only the catalog table columns that provide statistics to help
the database administrator to assess the status of a particular table space or
index are to be updated.
NONE
Indicates that catalog tables are not to be updated with the collected
430
HISTORY
Indicates that all catalog table inserts or updates to the catalog history tables
are to be recorded.
The default is supplied by the specified value in STATISTICS HISTORY on
panel DSNTIPO.
ALL
tables.
ACCESSPATH
Indicates that only the catalog history table columns that provide statistics
SPACE
NONE
Indicates that catalog history tables are not to be updated with the
FORCEROLLUP
Specifies whether aggregation or rollup of statistics are to take place when
RUNSTATS is executed even when some parts are empty. This option enables
the optimizer to select the best access path.
YES
though some parts might not contain data.
NO
for all parts.
If data is not available for all parts and if the installation value for STATISTICS
ROLLUP on panel DSNTIPO is set to NO, DSNU623I message is issued.
WORKDDN(ddname)
ddname specifies the DD statement for the unload data set.
ddname
Is the DD name of the temporary work file for build input.
The default value is SYSUT1.
The WORKDDN keyword specifies either a DD name or a TEMPLATE
name from a previous TEMPLATE control statement. If utility processing
detects that the specified name is both a DD name in the current job step
and a TEMPLATE name, the utility uses DD name.
Even though WORKDDN is an optional keyword, a DD statement for the
unload output data set is required in the JCL. If you do not specify
WORKDDN, or if you specify it without ddname, the JCL must have a DD
statement with the name SYSUT1. If ddname is given, you must provide a DD
statement or TEMPLATE that matches the DD name.
PREFORMAT
Specifies that the remaining pages are to be preformatted up to the
high-allocated RBA in the index space. The preformatting occurs after the
index is built.
431
PREFORMAT can operate on an entire index space, or on a partition of a

partitioned index space.
PREFORMAT is ignored if you specify UNLOAD ONLY.
Related concepts
Improving performance with LOAD or REORG PREFORMAT on page 274
Related reference
Before running REORG INDEX

Certain activities might be required before you run the REORG INDEX utility,
Region size
The recommended minimum region size is 4096 KB.
Restart-pending status and SHRLEVEL CHANGE

If you specify SHRLEVEL CHANGE, REORG drains the write claim class near the
end of REORG processing. In a data sharing environment, if a data sharing
member fails and that member has restart-pending status for a target page set, the
drain can fail. You must postpone running REORG with SHRLEVEL CHANGE
until all restart-pending statuses have been removed. You can use the DISPLAY
GROUP command to determine whether a members status is FAILED. You can
use the DISPLAY DATABASE command with the LOCKS option to determine if
locks are held.
Data sharing considerations for REORG

You must not execute REORG on an object if another DB2 subsystem holds
retained locks on the object or has long-running noncommitting applications that
use the object. You can use the DISPLAY GROUP command to determine whether
a members status is FAILED. You can use the DISPLAY DATABASE command
with the LOCKS option to determine if locks are held.
Fallback recovery considerations

Successful REORG INDEX processing inserts a SYSCOPY row with ICTYPE=W
for an index that was defined with COPY YES. REORG also places a reorganized
index in informational COPY-pending status. You should take a full image copy of
the index after the REORG job completes to create a valid point of recovery.
RECOVER-pending and REBUILD-pending status

You cannot reorganize an index if any partition of the index is in the
RECOVER-pending status or in the REBUILD-pending status. Similarly, you cannot
reorganize a single index partition if it is in the RECOVER-pending status or in the
REBUILD-pending status.
The RECOVER-pending restrictive state is:
RECP The index space or partition is in a RECOVER-pending status. A single
432
logical partition in RECP does not restrict access to other logical partitions
that are not in RECP. You can reset RECP by recovering only the single
logical partition.
The REBUILD-pending restrictive states are:
individual physical or logical partition is inaccessible; you must rebuild the
object using the REBUILD INDEX utility.
PSRBD
Page set REBUILD-pending (PSRBD) is set for nonpartitioning indexes. The
entire index space is inaccessible; you must rebuild the object by using the
RBDP*
A REBUILD-pending status is set only on logical partitions of
available again when you rebuild the affected partitions by using the
CHECK-pending status
You cannot reorganize an index when the data is in the CHECK-pending status.
|
|
Running REORG INDEX when the index has a VARBINARY

column
|
|
|
|
|
If you run REORG INDEX against an index with the following characteristics,
REORG INDEX fails:
|
|
To fix the problem, alter the column data type to BINARY, and then rebuild the
index.
Related reference
Chapter 8, CHECK DATA, on page 61
RECOVER-pending status on page 930
Data sets that REORG INDEX uses

The REORG INDEX utility uses a number of data sets during its operation.
The following table lists the data sets that REORG uses. The table lists the DD
Table 67. Data sets that REORG INDEX uses
Data set
Description
Required?
SYSIN
Input data set that contain the utility control Yes

statement.
SYSPRINT
Yes
433
Table 67. Data sets that REORG INDEX uses (continued)
|
|
Data set
Description
Required?
STPRIN01

secondary index.
No
Work data set
A temporary data set for unload output and Yes

build input. Specify the DD or template
name with the WORKDDN option of the
name is SYSUT1.
Sort work data sets

No1, 2, 3
UTPRINT

Yes
Note:
index.
utility job JCL.
|
|
|
Index Object to be reorganized.
Calculating the size of the work data sets

When reorganizing an index space, you need a non-DB2 sequential work data set.
That data set is identified by the DD statement that is named in the WORKDDN
option. During the UNLOAD phase, the index keys and the data pointers are
unloaded to the work data set. This data set is used to build the index. It is
required only during the execution of REORG.
Use the following formula to calculate the approximate size (in bytes) of the
WORKDDN data set SYSUT1:
size = number of keys x (key length + 8)
where
number of keys = #tablerows

following formula:
434

numcols
count
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Changing data set definitions

If the index space is defined by storage groups, space allocation is handled by DB2
and data set definitions cannot be altered during the reorganization process. DB2
deletes and redefines the necessary data sets to reorganize the object.
For REORG with SHRLEVEL REFERENCE or CHANGE, you can use the ALTER
STOGROUP command to change the characteristics of a DB2-managed data set.
You can effectively change the characteristics of a user-managed data set by
specifying the desired new characteristics when creating the shadow data set. In
particular, placing the original and shadow data sets on different disk volumes
might reduce contention and thus improve the performance of REORG and the
performance of applications during REORG execution.
Shadow data sets

When you execute the REORG INDEX utility with SHRLEVEL REFERENCE or
SHRLEVEL CHANGE, the utility uses shadow data sets.
For user-managed data sets, you must preallocate the shadow data sets before you
execute REORG INDEX with SHRLEVEL REFERENCE or SHRLEVEL CHANGE. If
an index or partitioned index resides in DB2-managed data sets and shadow data
sets do not already exist when you execute REORG INDEX, DB2 creates the
shadow data sets. At the end of REORG processing, the DB2-managed shadow
data sets are deleted. You can create the shadows ahead of time for DB2-managed
data sets.

|
variable
meaning
catname
435
C or D
dbname
Database name
psname
I or J
1 or 2
Lnnn

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|


example:
DEFINE CLUSTER +
DATA
+
MODEL('catname.DSNDBD.dbname.psname.y0001.L001') )
436

secondary index.
indexes.

If you do not change the value of FREEPAGE or PCTFREE, the amount of space
that is required for a shadow data set is approximately comparable to the amount
of space that is required for the original data set.
Concurrency and compatibility for REORG INDEX

The REORG INDEX utility has certain concurrency and compatibility
DB2 treats individual index partitions as distinct target objects. Utilities that
operate on different partitions of the same index space are compatible.
Claims
The following table shows which claim classes REORG INDEX drains and any
restrictive state the utility sets on the target object. The target is an index or index
partition.
Table 68. Claim classes of REORG INDEX operations
Phase
REORG INDEX
SHRLEVEL NONE
REORG INDEX
SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE
REORG INDEX
SHRLEVEL CHANGE
UNLOAD
DW/UTRO
DW/UTRO
CR/UTRW
BUILD
DA/UTUT
none
none
Last iteration of
LOG
n/a
DA/UTUT
SWITCH
n/a
DA/UTUT
DW/UTRO
DA/UTUT
Legend:
v UTRO: Utility restrictive state, read only access allowed.
v none: Any claim, drain, or restrictive state for this object does not change in this phase.
Note:
1. Applicable if you specified DRAIN ALL.
437
Compatibility
The following table shows which utilities can run concurrently with REORG
INDEX on the same target object. The target object can be an index space or a
partition. If compatibility depends on particular options of a utility, that is also
shown. REORG INDEX does not set a utility restrictive state if the target object is
an index on DSNDB01.SYSUTILX.
Table 69. Compatibility of REORG INDEX with other utilities
438
Action
REORG INDEX SHRLEVEL

NONE, REFERENCE, or CHANGE
CHECK DATA
No
CHECK INDEX
No
CHECK LOB
Yes
COPY INDEXSPACE
No
COPY TABLESPACE
Yes
DIAGNOSE
Yes
LOAD
No
MERGECOPY
Yes
MODIFY
Yes
QUIESCE
No
REBUILD INDEX
No
RECOVER INDEX
No
RECOVER INDEXSPACE
No
RECOVER TABLESPACE (with no options)
Yes
RECOVER TABLESPACE ERROR RANGE
Yes
RECOVER TABLESPACE TOCOPY or TORBA
No
REORG INDEX SHRLEVEL NONE, REFERENCE, or

CHANGE
No
REORG TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL NONE UNLOAD

CONTINUE or PAUSE, REORG SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE, or REORG SHRLEVEL CHANGE
No

ONLY or EXTERNAL with cluster index
No

ONLY or EXTERNAL without cluster index
Yes
REPAIR LOCATE INDEX PAGE REPLACE
No
REPAIR LOCATE KEY
No
REPAIR LOCATE RID DELETE
No
REPAIR LOCATE RID DUMP, VERIFY, or REPLACE
Yes
REPAIR LOCATE TABLESPACE PAGE REPLACE
Yes
REPORT
Yes
RUNSTATS INDEX
No
RUNSTATS TABLESPACE
Yes
STOSPACE
Yes
UNLOAD
Yes
To run on SYSIBM.DSNLUX01 or SYSIBM.DSNLUX02, REORG INDEX must be the

only utility in the job step and the only utility that is running in the DB2
subsystem.
Determining when an index requires reorganization

You might need to do some analysis to determine if an index requires
reorganization.
To determine when an index requires reorganization:

1. Issue the following SQL statement to identify user-created indexes and DB2
catalog indexes that you should consider reorganizing with the REORG INDEX
utility:
EXEC SQL
SELECT IXNAME, IXCREATOR
FROM SYSIBM.SYSINDEXPART
WHERE LEAFDIST > 200
ENDEXEC
2. Issue the following SQL statement to determine the average distance

(multiplied by 100) between successive leaf pages during sequential access of
the ZZZ index.
EXEC SQL
SELECT LEAFDIST
WHERE IXCREATOR = 'index_creator_name'
AND IXNAME = 'index_name'
ENDEXEC
Be aware that using a LEAFDIST value of more than 200 as an indicator of a

disorganized index is merely a rough guideline for general cases. This guidance
is not absolute. In some cases, 200 is an acceptable value for LEAFDIST. For
example, with FREEPAGE 0 and index page splitting, the LEAFDIST value can
climb sharply. In this case, a LEAFDIST value that exceeds 200 can be
acceptable.
An increase in the LEAFDIST value over time probably indicates that the index
needs to be reorganized. The optimal value of the LEAFDIST catalog column is
zero. However, immediately after you run the REORG and RUNSTATS utilities,
LEAFDIST might be greater than zero as a result of empty pages for
FREEPAGE and non-leaf pages.
Using the LEAFDISTLIMIT and REPORTONLY options to determine

when reorganization is needed
You can determine when to run REORG for indexes by using the LEAFDISTLIMIT
and REPORTONLY options.
To determine when reorganization is needed:
439
1. Run the REORG INDEX utility and specify the LEAFDISTLIMIT option and the
REPORTONLY option. REORG produces a report with one of the following
return codes; but a REORG is not performed.
1
No limit met; no REORG performed or recommended.
2
REORG performed or recommended.
2. Optional: Alternatively, information from the SYSINDEXPART catalog table can
tell you which indexes qualify for reorganization.
Access with REORG INDEX SHRLEVEL

SHRLEVEL option.
For reorganizing an index or a partition of an index, the SHRLEVEL option lets
you choose the level of access that you have to your data during reorganization:
v REORG with SHRLEVEL NONE, the default, reloads the reorganized data into
the original area that is being reorganized. Applications have read-only access
during unloading and no access during reloading. SHRLEVEL NONE is the only
access level that resets REORG-pending status.
v REORG with SHRLEVEL REFERENCE reloads the reorganized data into a new
(shadow) copy of the area that is being reorganized. Near the end of
reorganization, DB2 switches applications future access from the original to the
shadow copy. For SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, applications have read-only access
during unloading and reloading, and a brief period of no access during
switching.
v REORG with SHRLEVEL CHANGE reloads the reorganized data into a shadow
copy of the area that is being reorganized. Applications can read from and write
to the original area, and DB2 records the writing in the log. DB2 then reads the
log and applies it to the shadow copy to bring the shadow copy up to date. This
step executes iteratively, with each iteration processing a sequence of log records.
Near the end of reorganization, DB2 switches applications future access from
the original to the shadow copy. Applications have read-write access during
unloading and reloading, a brief period of read-only access during the last
iteration of log processing, and a brief period of no access during switching.
Log processing with SHRLEVEL CHANGE

When you specify SHRLEVEL CHANGE, DB2 processes the log to update the
shadow copy. This step executes iteratively. The first iteration processes the log
records that accumulated during the previous iteration. The iterations continue
until one of these conditions is met:
will be less than or equal to the time that is specified by MAXRO. If this
condition is met, the next iteration is the last.
v DB2 estimates that the switch phase will not start by the deadline specified by
DEADLINE. If this condition is met, DB2 terminates reorganization.
v The number of log records that the next iteration will process is not sufficiently
iteration. If this condition is met but the first two conditions are not, DB2 sends
message DSNU377I to the console. DB2 continues log processing for the length
of time that is specified by DELAY and then performs the action specified by
LONGLOG.
440
Operator actions
LONGLOG specifies the action that DB2 is to perform if log processing is not
occurring quickly enough. If the operator does not respond to the console message
DSNU377I, the LONGLOG option automatically goes into effect. You can take one
of the following actions:
v Execute the START DATABASE(db) SPACENAM(ts)... ACCESS(RO) command
and the QUIESCE utility to drain the write claim class. DB2 performs the last
iteration, if MAXRO is not DEFER. After the QUIESCE, you should also execute
the ALTER UTILITY command, even if you do not change any REORG
parameters.
v Execute the START DATABASE(db) SPACENAM(ts)... ACCESS(RO) command
and the QUIESCE utility to drain the write claim class. Then, after
reorganization has made some progress, execute the START DATABASE(db)
SPACENAM(ts)... ACCESS(RW) command. This action increases the likelihood
that log processing can improve. After the QUIESCE, you should also execute
the ALTER UTILITY command, even if you do not change any REORG
parameters.
v Execute the ALTER UTILITY command to change the value of MAXRO.
Changing it to a huge positive value, such as 9999999, causes the next iteration
to be the last iteration.
v Execute the ALTER UTILITY command to change the value of LONGLOG.
v Execute the TERM UTILITY command to terminate reorganization.
v Adjust the amount of buffer space that is allocated to reorganization and to
applications. This adjustment can increase the likelihood that log processing
improve after adjusting the space, you should also execute the ALTER UTILITY
command, even if you do not change any REORG parameters.
v Adjust the scheduling priorities of reorganization and applications. This
adjustment can increase the likelihood that log processing improve. After
adjusting the priorities, you should also execute the ALTER UTILITY command,
even if you do not change any REORG parameters.
v An ALTER UTILITY command is issued.
v REORG terminates for any reason (including the deadline).
Temporarily interrupting REORG

You can temporarily pause REORG.
If you specify UNLOAD PAUSE, REORG pauses after unloading the index space
into the work data set. The job completes with return code 4. You can restart
REORG by using the phase restart or current restart. The REORG statement must
not be altered.
The SYSIBM.SYSUTIL record for the REORG INDEX utility remains in stopped
status until REORG is restarted or terminated.
441
While REORG is interrupted by PAUSE, you can re-define the table space
attributes for user defined table spaces. PAUSE is not required for
STOGROUP-defined table spaces. Attribute changes are done automatically by a
REORG following an ALTER INDEX.
Improving performance
You can improve the performance of the REORG INDEX utility by taking certain
actions.
Recommendation: Run online REORG during light periods of activity on the table
space or index.
To improve REORG performance,
v Run REORG concurrently on separate partitions of a partitioned index space.
The processor time for running REORG INDEX on partitions of a partitioned
index is approximately the same as the time for running a single REORG index
job. The elapsed time is a fraction of the time for running a single REORG job
on the entire index.
v Schedule REORG with SHRLEVEL CHANGE when the rate of writing is low
and transactions are short. Avoid scheduling REORG with SHRLEVEL CHANGE
when low-tolerance applications are executing.
v Run REORG with DRAIN_WAIT.
The DRAIN_WAIT option provides improved control over the time online
REORG waits for drains. Also, because the DRAIN_WAIT is the aggregate time
that online REORG is to wait to perform a drain on a table space and associated
indexes, the length of drains is more predictable than it is when each partition
and index has its own individual waiting-time limit.
By specifying a short delay time (less than the system timeout value,
IRLMRWT), you can reduce the impact on applications by reducing time-outs.
You can use the RETRY option to give the online REORG INDEX utility chances
to complete successfully. If you do not want to use RETRY processing, you can
still use DRAIN_WAIT to set a specific and more consistent limit on the length
of drains.
RETRY allows an online REORG that is unable to drain the objects it requires to
try again after a set period (RETRY_DELAY). If the drain fails in the SWITCH
phase, the objects remain in their original state (read-only mode for SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE or read-write mode for SHRLEVEL CHANGE). Likewise, objects
will remain in their original state if the drain fails in the LOG phase.
Because application SQL statements can queue behind any unsuccessful drain
that the online REORG has tried, define a reasonable delay before you retry to
allow this work to complete; the default is 5 minutes.
When the default DRAIN WRITERS is used with SHRLEVEL CHANGE and
RETRY, multiple read-only log iterations can occur. Because online REORG can
have to do more work when RETRY is specified, multiple or extended periods of
restricted access might occur. Applications that run with REORG must perform
frequent commits. During the interval between retries, the utility is still active;
consequently, other utility activity against the table space and indexes is
restricted.
Termination of REORG INDEX

You can terminate the REORG INDEX utility.
442
If you terminate REORG with the TERM UTILITY command during the UNLOAD
phase, objects have not yet been changed, and you can rerun the job.
If you terminate REORG with the TERM UTILITY command during the build
phase, the behavior depends on the SHRLEVEL option:
v For SHRLEVEL NONE, the index is left in RECOVER-pending status. After you
recover the index, rerun the REORG job.
v For SHRLEVEL REFERENCE or CHANGE, the index keys are reloaded into a
shadow index, so the original index has not been affected by REORG. You can
rerun the job.
If you terminate REORG with the TERM UTILITY command during the log phase,
the index keys are reloaded into a shadow index, so the original index has not
been affected by REORG. You can rerun the job.
If you terminate REORG with the TERM UTILITY command during the switch
phase, all data sets that were renamed to their shadow counterparts are renamed
back, so the objects are left in their original state. You can rerun the job. If a
problem occurs in renaming to the original data sets, the objects are left in
RECOVER-pending status. You must recover the index.
The REORG-pending status is not reset until the UTILTERM execution phase. If the
REORG INDEX utility abnormally terminates or is terminated, the objects are left
in RECOVER-pending status.
The following table lists any restrictive states that are set based on the phase in
which REORG INDEX terminated.
Table 70. Restrictive states set based on the phase in which REORG INDEX terminated
Phase
Effect on restrictive status
UNLOAD
No effect.
BUILD
Sets REBUILD-pending (RBDP) status at the beginning of the build

phase, and resets RBDP at the end of the phase. SHRLEVEL NONE
places an index that was defined with the COPY YES attribute in
RECOVER pending (RECP) status.
LOG
No effect.
SWITCH
Under certain conditions, if TERM UTILITY is issued, it must complete

successfully; otherwise, objects might be placed in RECP status or RBDP
status. For SHRLEVEL REFERENCE or CHANGE, sets the RECP status
if the index was defined with the COPY YES attribute at the beginning
of the switch phase, and resets RECP at the end of the phase. If the
index was defined with COPY NO, this phase sets the index in RBDP
status at the beginning of the phase, and resets RBDP at the end of the
phase.
Related reference
Restart of REORG INDEX

You can restart the REORG INDEX utility.
443
If you restart REORG in the outlined phase, it re-executes from the beginning of
the phase. DB2 always uses RESTART(PHASE) by default unless you restart the
job in the UNLOAD phase. In this case, DB2 uses RESTART(CURRENT) by
default.
If REORG abnormally terminates or a system failure occurs while it is in the
UTILTERM phase, you must restart the job with RESTART(PHASE).
The following table provides information about restarting REORG INDEX. For
each phase of REORG and for each type of REORG INDEX (with SHRLEVEL
NONE, with SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, and with SHRLEVEL CHANGE), the table
indicates the types of restart that are allowed (CURRENT and PHASE). None
indicates that no restart is allowed. The Data sets required column lists the data
sets that must exist to perform the specified type of restart in the specified phase.
Table 71. REORG INDEX utility restart information
Phase
Type of restart
allowed for
SHRLEVEL NONE
Type of restart
allowed for
SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE
Type of restart
allowed for
SHRLEVEL
CHANGE
UNLOAD
CURRENT, PHASE
CURRENT, PHASE None
SYSUT1
BUILD
CURRENT, PHASE
CURRENT, PHASE None
SYSUT1
LOG
Phase does not occur Phase does not

occur
SWITCH
Phase does not occur CURRENT, PHASE CURRENT, PHASE
None
Data sets required
Notes
None
originals and shadows
Note:
1. You can restart the utility with either RESTART or RESTART(PHASE). However, because this phase does not take
checkpoints, RESTART always re-executes from the beginning of the phase.
If you restart a REORG STATISTICS job that was stopped in the BUILD phase by
using RESTART CURRENT, inline statistics collection does not occur. To update
catalog statistics, run the RUNSTATS utility after the restarted job completes.
Restarting a REORG STATISTICS job with RESTART(PHASE) is conditional after
executing UNLOAD PAUSE. To determine if catalog table statistics are to be
updated when you restart a REORG STATISTICS job, see the following table. This
table lists whether or not statistics are updated based on the execution phase and
whether the job is restarted with RESTART(CURRENT) or RESTART(PHASE).
Table 72. Whether statistics are updated when REORG INDEX STATISTICS jobs are restarted in certain phases
Phase
RESTART CURRENT
RESTART PHASE
UTILINIT
No
Yes
UNLOAD
No
Yes
BUILD
No
Yes
Related concepts
Related tasks
Review of REORG INDEX output

The output from REORG INDEX consists of a reorganized index or index partition.
444
The following table summarizes the results of REORG INDEX based upon what
you specified.
Table 73. Summary of the results of REORG INDEX
Specification
Results
REORG INDEX
Entire index (all partitions of a partitioned index)
REORG INDEX PART n
Part n of partitioned index
When reorganizing an index, REORG leaves free pages and free space on each
page in accordance with the current values of the FREEPAGE and PCTFREE
parameters. (You can set those values by using the CREATE INDEX or ALTER
INDEX statement.) REORG leaves one free page after reaching the FREEPAGE
limit for each table in the index space.
Catalog updates: REORG INDEX updates SYSINDEXPART OLDEST_VERSION
and SYSINDEXES OLDEST_VERSION (if applicable).
Effect of REORG INDEX on index version numbers

and CURRENT_VERSION columns of the SYSIBM.SYSINDEXES and
SYSIBM.SYSINDEXPART catalog tables.
When you run REORG INDEX, the utility updates this range of used version
numbers for indexes that are defined with the COPY NO attribute. REORG INDEX
sets the OLDEST_VERSION column to the current version number, which indicates
that only one version is active; DB2 can then reuse all of the other version
numbers.
situations is true:
v The value in the CURRENT_VERSION column is 15 and the value in the
You can also run LOAD REPLACE, REBUILD INDEX, or REORG TABLESPACE to
Related information
Sample REORG INDEX control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own REORG
445
Example 1: Reorganizing an index

The following control statement specifies that the REORG INDEX utility is to
reorganize index XMSGTXT1. The UNLOAD PAUSE option indicates that after the
data has been unloaded, the utility is to stop. Processing can be restarted in the
RELOAD phase. This option is useful if you want to redefine data sets during
reorganization.
REORG INDEX DSN8910.XMSGTXT1
UNLOAD PAUSE
Example 2: Collecting inline statistics while reorganizing an

index.
The following control statement specifies that REORG INDEX is to collect statistics
for index XEMPL1 while reorganizing that index. The SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
option indicates that during this processing, only read access is allowed on the
areas that are being reorganized.
REORG INDEX DSN8910.XEMPL1
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE STATISTICS
Example 3: Updating access path statistics in the catalog and

catalog history tables while reorganizing an index
The following control statement specifies that while reorganizing index IU0E0801,
REORG INDEX is to also collect statistics, collect all of the distinct values in the
key column combinations, and update access path statistics in the catalog and
catalog history tables. The utility is also to send any output, including space and
access path statistics, to SYSPRINT.
REORG INDEX IUOE0801
STATISTICS
KEYCARD
REPORT YES
UPDATE ACCESSPATH
HISTORY ACCESSPATH
Example 4: Reorganizing a list of indexes

In the following control statement, the OPTIONS utility control statement specifies
that the subsequent TEMPLATE and LISTDEF utility control statements are to run
in PREVIEW mode. If the syntax of these statements is correct, DB2 expands the
REORG_INDX list and the data set names in the SREC, SUT1, and SOUT templates
and prints these results to the SYSPRINT data set. The second OPTIONS control
statement turns off the PREVIEW mode, and the subsequent REORG INDEX job
runs normally.
The REORG INDEX statement specifies that the utility is to reorganize the indexes
that are included in the REORG_INDX list. The SHRLEVEL CHANGE option
indicates that during this processing, read and write access is allowed on the areas
that are being reorganized, with the exception of a 100-second period during the
last iteration of log processing. During this time, which is specified by the MAXRO
option, applications have read-only access. The WORKDDN option indicates that
REORG INDEX is to use the data set that is defined by the SUT1 template. If the
SWITCH phase does not begin by the deadline that is specified on the DEADLINE
option, processing terminates.
446
//STEP2
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='HUHRU257.REORGI',TIME=1440,
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='SSTR',DB2LEV=DB2A
//SYSIN
DD *
OPTIONS PREVIEW
TEMPLATE SREC
UNIT(SYSDA) DISP(NEW,CATLG,CATLG)
DSN(HUHRU257.REORG.&ST..SREC)
TEMPLATE SUT1
UNIT(SYSDA) DISP(NEW,DELETE,CATLG)
DSN(HUHRU257.REORG.&ST..SUT1)
TEMPLATE SOUT
UNIT(SYSDA) DISP(NEW,DELETE,CATLG)
DSN(HUHRU257.REORG.&ST..SOUT)
LISTDEF REORG_INDX INCLUDE INDEX ADMF001.IPHR5701
INCLUDE INDEX ADMF001.IXHR570*
OPTIONS OFF
REORG INDEX LIST REORG_INDX
PREFORMAT
SHRLEVEL CHANGE
DEADLINE 2010-2-4-23.10.12
MAXRO 100
WORKDDN (SUT1)
/*
Figure 71. Example statements for job that reorganizes a list of indexes
Example 5: Reorganizing clone indexes

|
|
|
|
The following control statement specifies that REORG INDEX is to reorganize only
the specified index spaces that contain indexes on clone tables. The SHRLEVEL
CHANGE option indicates that during this processing, applications can read and
write to the area.
REORG INDEX ADMF001.IPJM0901 SHRLEVEL CHANGE CLONE
447
448
Chapter 25. REORG TABLESPACE

The online REORG TABLESPACE utility reorganizes a table space to improve
access performance and to reclaim fragmented space. In addition, the utility can
reorganize a single partition or range of partitions of a partitioned table space.
You can specify the degree of access to your data during reorganization, and you
can collect inline statistics by using the STATISTICS keyword. If you specify
REORG TABLESPACE UNLOAD EXTERNAL, the data is unloaded in a format
that is acceptable to the LOAD utility of any DB2 subsystem. You can also delete
rows during the REORG job by specifying the DISCARD option.
You can determine when to run REORG for non-LOB table spaces by using the
OFFPOSLIMIT or INDREFLIMIT catalog query options. If you specify the
REPORTONLY option, REORG produces a report that indicates whether a REORG
is recommended without actually performing the REORG. These options are not
applicable and are disregarded if the target object is a directory table space.
Run the REORG TABLESPACE utility on a LOB table space to help increase the
effectiveness of prefetch. For a LOB table space, REORG TABLESPACE performs
these actions:
v Removes imbedded free space
v Attempts to make LOB pages contiguous
If you specify SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, a REORG of a LOB table space will make
LOB pages continuous, remove imbedded free space, and reclaim physical space if
applicable.
Do not execute REORG on an object if another DB2 holds retained locks on the
object or has long-running noncommitting applications that use the object. You can
use the DISPLAY GROUP command to determine whether a members status is
failed. You can use the DISPLAY DATABASE command with the LOCKS option to
determine if locks are held.
Output
If the table space or partition has the COMPRESS YES attribute, the data is
compressed when it is reloaded. If you specify the KEEPDICTIONARY option of
REORG, the current dictionary is used; otherwise a new dictionary is built.
You can execute the REORG TABLESPACE utility on the table spaces in the DB2
catalog database (DSNDB06) and on some table spaces in the directory database
(DSNDB01). It cannot be executed on any table space in the DSNDB07 database.
The following table summaries the results of REORG TABLESPACE according to
the type of REORG specified.
Table 74. Summary of REORG TABLESPACE output
Type of REORG specified
Results
REORG TABLESPACE
Reorganizes all data and all indexes.
REORG TABLESPACE PART n
Reorganizes data for PART n of the table space and

PART n of all partitioned indexes.
449
Table 74. Summary of REORG TABLESPACE output (continued)

Type of REORG specified
Results
REORG TABLESPACE PART n:m
Reorganizes data for PART n through PART m of the

table space and PART n through PART m of all
partitioned indexes.
Note: When SCOPE PENDING is also specified, the REORG TABLESPACE utility
reorganizes the specified table space only if it is in REORG-pending or advisory
REORG-pending status. For a partitioned table space, REORG TABLESPACE SCOPE
PENDING reorganizes only the partitions that are in REORG-pending or advisory
REORG-pending status.
To execute this utility on a user table space, you must use a privilege set that
includes one of the following authorities:
v REORG privilege for the database
v SYSCTRL authority
v SYSADM authority
To execute this utility on a table space in the catalog or directory, you must use a
privilege set that includes one of the following authorities:
v REORG privilege for the DSNDB06 (catalog) database
v DBADM or DBCTRL authority for the DSNDB06 (catalog) database
v Installation SYSOPR authority
v SYSCTRL authority
v SYSADM or Installation SYSADM authority
v STATS privilege for the database is required if STATISTICS keyword is specified.
If you specify REORG TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL CHANGE , you must create a
mapping table. You must use a privilege set that includes DELETE, INSERT, and
UPDATE privileges on the mapping table.
To run REORG TABLESPACE STATISTICS REPORT YES, you must use a privilege
set that includes the SELECT privilege on the catalog tables and tables for which
statistics are to be gathered.
An authority other than installation SYSADM or installation SYSOPR can receive
message DSNT500I resource unavailable, while trying to reorganize a table space
in the catalog or directory. This message can be issued when the
DSNDB06.SYSDBAUT or DSNDB06.SYSUSER catalog table space or one of the
indexes is unavailable. If this problem occurs, run the REORG TABLESPACE utility
again using an authorization ID with the installation SYSADM or installation
SYSOPR authority.
If you use RACF access control with multilevel security and REORG TABLESPACE
is to process a table space that contains a table that has multilevel security with
row-level granularity, you must be identified to RACF and have an accessible valid
security label. You must also meet the following authorization requirements: .
450
v For REORG statements that include the UNLOAD EXTERNAL option, each row
is unloaded only if your security label dominates the data security label. If your
security label does not dominate the data security label, the row is not unloaded,
but DB2 does not issue an error message.
v For REORG statements that include the DISCARD option, qualifying rows are
discarded only if one of the following situations is true:
Write-down rules are in effect, you have write-down privilege, and your
security label dominates the datas security label.
Write-down rules are not in effect and your security label dominates the
datas security label.
Your security label is equivalent to the data security label.
Execution phases of REORG TABLESPACE

The REORG TABLESPACE utility operates in these phases:
Phase Description
UTILINIT
|
|
|
|
UNLOAD
Unloads the table space and sorts data if a clustering index exists and the
utility job includes either the SORTDATA or SHRLEVEL CHANGE options.
If you specify NOSYSREC, the utility passes rows in memory to the
RELOAD phase; otherwise, it writes them to a sequential data set. If PART
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE or PART SHRLEVEL CHANGE is specified,
during UNLOAD one or more subtasks unload nonpartitioned indexes and
build shadow nonpartitioned indexes.
RELOAD
Reloads data from the sequential data set into the table space and creates
full image copies if you specify COPYDDN, RECOVERYDDN, SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE, or SHRLEVEL CHANGE. A subtask sorts the index keys.
The utility also updates table and table space statistics.
SORT Sorts index keys. The sorted keys are passed in memory to the BUILD
phase.
BUILD
Builds indexes and updates index statistics.
SORTBLD
If parallel index build occurs, all activities that normally occur in both the
SORT and BUILD phases occur in the SORTBLD phase instead.
|
|
|
LOG
Processes the log iteratively and appends changed pages to the full image
copies. This phase occurs only if you specify SHRLEVEL CHANGE or
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE PART x.
SWITCH
Switches access to shadow copy of table space or partition. This phase
occurs only if you specify SHRLEVEL REFERENCE or CHANGE.
UTILTERM
Performs cleanup.
451
Execution phases of REORG TABLESPACE on a LOB table

space
The REORG TABLESPACE utility operates in these phases when you run it on a
LOB table space:
Phase Description
UTILINIT
REORGLOB
For SHRLEVEL NONE, the utility rebuilds the LOB table space in place.
The utility does not unload or reload LOBs. The LOB table space is set to
RECOVER-pending status at the start of processing; this status is reset
when the REORGLOB phase completes. If the REORGLOB phase fails, the
LOB table space remains in RECOVER-pending status.
|
|
|
|
|
|
For SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, the utility unloads LOBs to a shadow data

set. RECOVER-pending is not set on the LOB table space. Any error during
this phase will leave the original data set intact.
|
|
|
SWITCH
Switches access to shadow copy of table space or partition.
|
|
UTILTERM
Performs cleanup.
You cannot restart REORG TABLESPACE on a LOB table space in the REORGLOB
phase. Before executing REORG TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL NONE on a LOB table
space that is defined with LOG NO, you should take a full image copy to ensure
recoverability. For SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, an inline image copy is required to
ensure recoverability.
Syntax and options of the REORG TABLESPACE control statement

The REORG TABLESPACE utility control statement, with its multiple options,
The following options are not valid with LOB table spaces.
v OFFPOSLIMITinteger
|
|
|
|
|
v UNLOAD
v STATISTICS
v SAMPLEinteger
v PART
v INDREFLIMIT
|
|
452
Syntax diagram
REORG
TABLESPACE
LIST
listdef-name

table-space-name
database-name.
CLONE
PART
SCOPE ALL
LOG
YES
LOG
NO
integer
integer1:integer2
SORTDATA
YES
NO
copy-spec

REUSE
SCOPE PENDING
REBALANCE
NOSYSREC
SHRLEVEL NONE

FASTSWITCH YES
SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE
deadline-spec
CHANGE
deadline-spec
drain-spec
drain-spec
table-change-spec
FASTSWITCH NO

10
10
OFFPOSLIMIT
INDREFLIMIT
integer
UNLOAD
integer
REPORTONLY
CONTINUE
PUNCHDDN
SYSPUNCH
PUNCHDDN
ddname

(1)
KEEPDICTIONARY
statistics-spec
UNLOAD PAUSE
UNLOAD ONLY
UNLOAD EXTERNAL
NOPAD
DISCARDDN
FROM-TABLE-spec
SYSDISC

DISCARDDN ddname
reorg tablespace options

DISCARD
FROM-TABLE-spec
NOPAD
Notes:
1
You cannot use UNLOAD PAUSE with the LIST option.
copy-spec:
453
(1)
COPYDDN(SYSCOPY)

COPYDDN(
ddname1
RECOVERYDDN(ddname3
,ddname2
)
,ddname4
,ddname2
Notes:
1
COPYDDN(SYSCOPY) is not the default if you specify SHRLEVEL NONE and no partitions are
in REORG-pending status.
deadline-spec:
DEADLINE NONE

DEADLINE
timestamp
drain-spec:
(1)
(2)
(3)

DRAIN_WAIT
integer
RETRY integer
RETRY_DELAY
integer
(4)
MAXRO
DRAIN WRITERS
LONGLOG CONTINUE
DELAY 1200
DRAIN ALL
LONGLOG
DELAY

MAXRO
integer
DEFER
TERM
DRAIN
integer
TIMEOUT TERM

TIMEOUT ABEND
Notes:
|
The default for DRAIN_WAIT is the value of the IRLMRWT subsystem parameter.
The default for RETRY is the value of the UTIMOUT subsystem parameter.
|
|
The default for RETRY_DELAY is the smaller of the following two values: DRAIN_WAIT value
RETRY value, DRAIN_WAIT value 10
The default for MAXRO is the RETRY_DELAY default value.
table-change-spec:
454
MAPPINGTABLE table-name
CURRENT_DATE
CURRENT_TIMESTAMP
+
-
constant
YEAR
YEARS
MONTH
MONTHS
DAY
DAYS
HOUR
HOURS
MINUTE
MINUTES
SECOND
SECONDS
MICROSECOND
MICROSECONDS
statistics-spec:
STATISTICS
TABLE (
ALL
)

SAMPLE integer
COLUMN ALL
TABLE (
table-name )
SAMPLE integer
,
COLUMN ( column-name
INDEX (
ALL
REPORT NO
,
INDEX (
index-name
REPORT YES
UPDATE ALL

UPDATE
ACCESSPATH
SPACE
NONE
HISTORY
ALL
ACCESSPATH
SPACE
NONE
FORCEROLLUP
YES
NO
455
FREQVAL NUMCOLS 1
COUNT 10

KEYCARD
FREQVAL NUMCOLS
integer
COUNT
integer
FROM-TABLE-spec:
FROM
TABLE
table-name

WHEN
selection-condition-spec
selection-condition-spec:
predicate
selection condition

AND
OR
predicate
selection condition
predicate:
basic predicate
BETWEEN predicate
IN predicate
LIKE predicate
NULL predicate
basic predicate:
456
(1)
=
<>
>
<
>=
<=
column-name
constant
Notes:
1
The following forms of the comparison operators are also supported in basic and quantified
predicates: !=, !<, and !>. For details, see comparison operators.
BETWEEN predicate:
column-name
BETWEEN
constant
NOT
AND
constant
IN predicate:
,
IN ( constant
column-name
NOT
LIKE predicate:
column-name
LIKE string-constant
NOT

ESCAPE
string-constant
NULL predicate:
column-name IS
NULL
NOT
reorg tablespace options:
457
UNLDDN SYSREC

UNLDDN
ddname
SORTNUM
integer
PREFORMAT
Option descriptions
Specifies the table space (and, optionally, the database to which it belongs) that
is to be reorganized.
If you reorganize a table space, its indexes are also reorganized.
database-name
Is the name of the database to which the table space belongs. The name
cannot be DSNDB07.
table-space-name
Is the name of the table space that is to be reorganized. The name cannot
be SYSUTILX if the specified database name is DSNDB01.
LIST listdef-name
allows one LIST keyword for each control statement of REORG TABLESPACE.
The list must contain only table spaces.
Do not specify FROM TABLE, STATISTICS TABLE table-name, or STATISTICS
INDEX index-name with REORG TABLESPACE LIST. If you want to collect
inline statistics for a list of table spaces, specify STATISTICS TABLE (ALL). If
you want to collect inline statistics for a list of indexes, specify STATISTICS
INDEX (ALL). Do not specify PART with LIST.
REORG TABLESPACE is invoked once for each item in the list. This utility will
only process clone data if the CLONE keyword is specified. The use of
CLONED YES on the LISTDEF statement is not sufficient.
CLONE
Indicates that REORG TABLESPACE is to reorganize only clone tables from the
specified table spaces. This utility will only process clone data if the CLONE
not sufficient. Base tables in the specified table spaces are not reorganized. If
you specify CLONE, you cannot specify STATISTICS. Statistics are not
collected for clone tables.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
REUSE
When used with SHRLEVEL NONE, specifies that REORG is to logically reset
and reuse DB2-managed data sets without deleting and redefining them. If you
do not specify REUSE and SHRLEVEL NONE, DB2 deletes and redefines
DB2-managed data sets to reset them.
REUSE parameter.
REUSE does not apply if you also specify SHRLEVEL REFERENCE or
CHANGE.
SCOPE
Indicates the scope of the reorganization of the specified table space or of one
or more specified partitions.
458
ALL
Indicates that you want the specified table space or one or more partitions
to be reorganized. The default is ALL.
PENDING
Indicates that you want the specified table space or one or more partitions
to be reorganized only if they are in REORG-pending (REORP or AREO*)
status.
PART integer
PART integer1:integer2
Identifies a partition range that is to be reorganized. You can reorganize a
single partition of a partitioned table space, or a range of partitions within a
partitioned table space. integer must be in the range from 1 to the number of
partitions that are defined for the table space or partitioning index. The
maximum is 4096.
integer
Designates a single partition.
integer1:integer2
Designates a range of existing table space partitions from integer1 through
integer2.integer2 must be greater than integer1.
If you omit the PART keyword, the entire table space is reorganized.
If you specify the PART keyword for a LOB table space, DB2 issues an error
message, and utility processing terminates with return code 8.
If you specify a partition range and the high or low partitions in the list are in
a REORG-pending state, the adjacent partition that is outside the specified
range must not be in REORG-pending state; otherwise, the utility terminates
with an error.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Restriction: You cannot run concurrent REORG TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL

CHANGE PART integer on the same table space. Instead of submitting
multiple jobs, you can merge the jobs into one job and specify a range using
REORG TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL CHANGE PART integer1:integer2, or
specify REORG TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL CHANGE SCOPE PENDING if
multiple partitions are in a REORG-pending state.
REBALANCE
Specifies that REORG TABLESPACE is to set new partition boundaries so that
rows are evenly distributed across the reorganized partitions. If the columns
that are used in defining the partition boundaries have many duplicate values
within the data rows, even balancing is not always possible. Specify
REBALANCE for more than one partition; if you specify a single partition for
rebalancing, REORG TABLESPACE ignores the specification.
You can specify REBALANCE with SHRLEVEL NONE or SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE. REBALANCE cannot be specified with SHRLEVEL CHANGE or
SCOPE PENDING.
Do not specify REBALANCE for:
|
|
|
|
v
v
v
v
Partitioned table spaces with LOB columns

Partition-by-growth table spaces
Base tables with XML columns
XML table spaces
459
When you specify REBALANCE, you must create an inline copy by

performing one of the following actions:
v Provide a SYSCOPY DD statement in the JCL.
v Use the TEMPLATE utility to dynamically allocate the SYSCOPY data set.
v Specify a DD name with the COPYDDN option in the REORG control
statement and specify either a corresponding DD statement or TEMPLATE
statement.
Restriction: REBALANCE cannot be specified for an object that is involved in
a clone relationship. Since the base and clone tables share catalog information,
this can change the partition boundaries of the target table.
|
|
|
At completion, DB2 invalidates plans, packages, and the dynamic cache.

LOG
Specifies whether records are to be logged during the RELOAD phase of
REORG. If the records are not logged, the table space is recoverable only after
an image copy is taken. If you specify COPYDDN, FCCOPYDDN,
RECOVERYDDN, SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, or SHRLEVEL CHANGE, an
image copy is taken during REORG execution.
YES
Specifies that log records are to be taken during the RELOAD phase. This
option is not allowed for any table space in DSNDB01 or DSNDB06, or if
the SHRLEVEL REFERENCE or CHANGE options are used.
If you specify SHRLEVEL NONE (explicitly or by default), the default
value is YES.
|
|
LOG YES is required for LOB REORG SHRLEVEL NONE. LOG NO is

required for LOB REORG SHRLEVEL REFERENCE.
|
|
If the table space has the NOT LOGGED attribute, and SHRLEVEL NONE
is specified, DB2 does the LOAD with LOG NO.
NO
|
|
|
Specifies that records are not to be logged. This option puts the table space
in COPY-pending status if REORG is executed at the remote site, and
RECOVERYDDN is not specified.
|
|
You must specify LOG NO for REORG of a LOB table space if you specify
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE.
SORTDATA
YES
Specifies that the data is to be unloaded by a table space scan, and sorted
in clustering order.
The default value is SORTDATA YES unless you specify UNLOAD ONLY
or UNLOAD EXTERNAL. If you specify one of these options, the default
is SORTDATA NO.
NO
Specifies that the data is to be unloaded in the order of the clustering
index. SORTDATA NO cannot be specified with SHRLEVEL CHANGE.
Specify SORTDATA NO if one of the following conditions is true:
v The data is in or near perfect clustering order, and the REORG utility is
used to reclaim space from dropped tables.
460
v The data is very large, and an insufficient amount of disk space is

available for sorting.
NOSYSREC
Specifies that the output of sorting (if a clustering index exists) is the input to
reloading, without the REORG TABLESPACE utility using an unload data set.
You can specify this option only if the REORG TABLESPACE job includes
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE or SHRLEVEL NONE, and only if you do not specify
UNLOAD PAUSE or UNLOAD ONLY.
copy data sets for the image copy.
ddname1 and ddname2 are the DD names.
The default value is SYSCOPY for the primary copy. A full image copy data
set is created when REORG executes. This copy is called an inline copy. The
name of the data set is listed as a row in the SYSIBM.SYSCOPY catalog table
with ICTYPE=R (as it is for the COPY SHRLEVEL REFERENCE option). The
table space does not remain in COPY-pending status regardless of which LOG
option you specify.
If you specify SHRLEVEL NONE (explicitly or by default) for REORG, and
COPYDDN is not specified, an image copy is not created at the local site.
COPYDDN(SYSCOPY) is assumed, and a DD statement for SYSCOPY is
required if either of the following conditions are true:
v You specify REORG SHRLEVEL REFERENCE or CHANGE, and you do not
specify COPYDDN.
v A table space or partition is in REORG-pending (REORP) status.
v You specify REBALANCE.
|
REORG can take inline copies of XML table spaces.

copy data sets for the image copy at the recovery site.
ddname3 and ddname4are the DD names.
RECOVERYDDN as for COPYDDN.
|
|
REORG SHRLEVEL REFERENCE of a LOB table space supports inline copies,

but REORG SHRLEVEL NONE does not.
SHRLEVEL
Specifies the method that is to be used for the reorganization. The parameter
following SHRLEVEL indicates the type of access that is to be allowed during
the RELOAD phase of REORG.
461
NONE
v Unloading from the area that is being reorganized (while applications
can read but cannot write to the area)
v Reloading into that area (while applications have no access), and then
allowing read-write access again
If you specify NONE (explicitly or by default), you cannot specify the
following parameters:
v MAPPINGTABLE
v MAXRO
v LONGLOG
v DELAY
v DEADLINE
v DRAIN_WAIT
v RETRY
v RETRY_DELAY
REFERENCE
v Unloading from the area that is being reorganized (while applications
can read but cannot write to the area)
v Reloading into a shadow copy of that area (while applications can read
but cannot write to the original copy)
v Switching the future access of an application from the original copy to
the shadow copy by exchanging the names of the data sets, and then
If you specify REFERENCE for a LOB table space, you must take an inline
copy during the reorganization.
|
|
To determine which data sets are required when you execute REORG
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE.
If you specify REFERENCE, you cannot specify the following parameters:
v LOG. Reorganization with REFERENCE always creates an image copy
and always refrains from logging records during reloading.
v UNLOAD. Reorganization with REFERENCE always performs
UNLOAD CONTINUE.
v MAPPINGTABLE.
Restriction: You cannot specify SHRLEVEL REFERENCE when REORG
TABLESPACE with PART is run on a NOT LOGGED table space on which
nonpartitioned indexes are defined.
CHANGE
v By unloading from the area that is being reorganized (while applications
can read and write to the area)
v Reloading into a shadow copy of that area (while applications have
read-write access to the original copy of the area)
v Applying the log of the original copy to the shadow copy (while
applications can read and usually write to the original copy)
462
v Switching the future access of an application from the original copy to

the shadow copy by exchanging the names of the data sets, and then
To determine which data sets are required when you execute REORG
SHRLEVEL CHANGE.
If you specify CHANGE, you cannot specify the following parameters:
v LOG. Reorganization with CHANGE always creates an image copy and
always refrains from logging records during reloading.
v UNLOAD. Reorganization with CHANGE always performs UNLOAD
CONTINUE.
If you specify CHANGE, you must create a mapping table and specify the
name of the mapping table with the MAPPINGTABLE option.
|
|
Restrictions:
v You cannot specify SHRLEVEL CHANGE for a LOB table space, catalog,
or directory table space with links.
v You cannot specify SHRLEVEL CHANGE if the table space has the NOT
LOGGED attribute.
DEADLINE
Specifies the deadline for the SWITCH phase to begin. If DB2 estimates that
the SWITCH phase will not begin by the deadline, DB2 issues the messages
that the DISPLAY UTILITY command would issue and then terminates the
reorganization.
If REORG SHRLEVEL REFERENCE or SHRLEVEL CHANGE terminates
because of a DEADLINE specification, DB2 issues message DSNU374I with
reason code 2 but does not set a restrictive status.
NONE
Specifies that a deadline by which the SWITCH phase of log processing
must begin does not exist.
timestamp
Specifies the deadline for the SWITCH phase of log processing to begin.
This deadline must not have already occurred when REORG is executed.
|
|
|
Calculates the deadline for the SWITCH phase of log processing to begin.
The calculation is based on either CURRENT TIMESTAMP or CURRENT
DATE. You can add or subtract one or more constant value to specify the
deadline. This deadline must not have already occurred when REORG is
executed. CURRENT TIMESTAMP and CURRENT DATE are evaluated
once, when the REORG statement is first processed. If a list of objects is
specified, the same value will be in effect for all objects in the list.
CURRENT_DATE
DATE.
CURRENT_TIMESTAMP
TIMESTAMP.
constant
Indicates a unit of time and is followed by one of the seven duration
keywords: YEARS, MONTHS, DAYS, HOURS, MINUTES, SECONDS,
463
or MICROSECONDS. The singular form of these words is also

acceptable: YEAR, MONTH, DAY, HOUR, MINUTE, SECOND,
MICROSECOND.
DRAIN_WAIT integer
Specifies the number of seconds that the utility waits when draining the table
space or index. The specified time is the aggregate time for objects that are to
be reorganized. This value overrides the values that are specified by IRLMRWT
and UTIMOUT. Valid values for integer are from 0 to 1800. If the keyword is
omitted or if a value of 0 is specified, the utility uses the value of the lock
timeout system parameter IRLMRWT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
RETRY integer
Specifies the maximum number of retries that REORG is to attempt. Valid
values for integer are from 0 to 255.
Specifying RETRY can lead to increased processing costs and can result in
multiple or extended periods of read-only access. For example, when you
specify RETRY and SHRLEVEL CHANGE, the size of the copy that is taken by
REORG might increase.
The default value is the value of the UTIMOUT subsystem parameter.
RETRY_DELAY integer
Specifies the minimum duration, in seconds, between retries. Valid values
for integer are from 1 to 1800.
|
|
If you do not specify RETRY_DELAY, REORG TABLESPACE uses the

smaller of the following two values:
|
|
|
|

MAPPINGTABLE table-name
Specifies the name of the mapping table that REORG TABLESPACE is to use to
map between the RIDs of data records in the original copy of the area and the
corresponding RIDs in the shadow copy. This parameter is required if you
specify SHRLEVEL CHANGE, and you must create a mapping table and an
index for it before running REORG TABLESPACE. Enclose the table name in
quotation marks if the name contains a blank.
MAXRO integer
During that iteration, applications have read-only access. MAXRO is a log
phase parameter. If MAXRO is specified when a log phase is not needed, an
error message is issued.
|
|
|
The actual execution time of the last iteration might exceed the specified value
for MAXRO.
The ALTER UTILITY command can change the value of MAXRO.
The default value is the RETRY_DELAY default value.
integer
elapsed time for REORG to complete. If you specify a huge positive value,
the second iteration of log processing is probably the last iteration.
DEFER
Specifies that the iterations of log processing with read-write access can
464
continue indefinitely. REORG never begins the final iteration with

read-only access, unless you change the MAXRO value with ALTER
UTILITY.
If you specify DEFER, you should also specify LONGLOG CONTINUE.
If you specify DEFER, and DB2 determines that the actual time for an
iteration and the estimated time for the next iteration are both less than 5
seconds, DB2 adds a 5 second pause to the next iteration. This pause
reduces consumption of processor time. The first time this situation occurs
for a given execution of REORG, DB2 sends message DSNU362I to the
console. The message states that the number of log records that must be
processed is small and that the pause occurs. To change the MAXRO value
and thus cause REORG to finish, execute the ALTER UTILITY command.
DB2 adds the pause whenever the situation occurs; however, DB2 sends
the message only if 30 minutes have elapsed since the last message was
sent for a given execution of REORG.
|
|
DRAIN
Specifies drain behavior at the end of the log phase after the MAXRO
threshold is reached and when the last iteration of the log is to be applied.
DRAIN is a log phase parameter. If DRAIN is specified when a log phase is
not needed, an error message is issued.
WRITERS
Specifies the current default action, in which DB2 drains only the writers
during the log phase after the MAXRO threshold is reached and
subsequently issues DRAIN ALL on entering the switch phase.
ALL
Specifies that DB2 is to drain all readers and writers during the log phase,
after the MAXRO threshold is reached.
Consider specifying DRAIN ALL if the following conditions are both true:
v SQL update activity is high during the log phase.
v The default behavior results in a large number of -911 SQL error codes.
|
|
LONGLOG
console, if the number of records that the next iteration of logging is to process
is not sufficiently lower than the number that the previous iterations processed.
This situation means that the reading of the log by the REORG TABLESPACE
utility is not being done at the same time as the writing of the application
log.LONGLOG is a log phase parameter. If LONGLOG is specified when a log
phase is not needed, an error message is issued.
CONTINUE
specified for MAXRO.
A value of DEFER for MAXRO and a value of CONTINUE for LONGLOG
together mean that REORG is to continue allowing access to the original
copy of the area that is being reorganized and does not switch to the
shadow copy. The user can execute the ALTER UTILITY command with a
large value for MAXRO to initiate switching.
465
TERM
Specifies that DB2 is to terminate the reorganization after the delay that is
specified by the DELAY parameter.
DRAIN
log processing to occur. DRAIN is a log phase parameter. If DRAIN is
specified when a log phase is not needed, an error message is issued.
|
|
DELAY integer
Specifies the minimum interval between the time that REORG sends the
LONGLOG message to the console and the time that REORG performs the
action that is specified by the LONGLOG parameter. DELAY is a log phase
parameter. If DELAY is specified when a log phase is not needed, an error
message is issued.
|
|
|
integer is the number of seconds.

TIMEOUT
Specifies the action that is to be taken if the REORG utility gets a time-out
condition while trying to drain objects in either the log or switch phases.
TERM
Indicates that DB2 is to behave as follows if you specify the TERM option
and a time-out condition occurs:
1. DB2 issues an implicit TERM UTILITY command, causing the utility to
end with a return code 8.
2. DB2 issues the DSNU590I and DSNU170I messages.
3. DB2 leaves the objects in a read-write state.
ABEND
Indicates that, if a time-out condition occurs, DB2 is to leave the objects in
a UTRO or UTUT state.
FASTSWITCH
Specifies which switch methodology is to be used for a given reorganization.
|
|
|
|
|
YES
Enables the SWITCH phase to use the FASTSWITCH methodology. This
option is not allowed for the catalog (DSNDB06) or directory (DSNDB01).
|
|
NO
Causes the SWITCH phase to use IDCAMS RENAME.
OFFPOSLIMIT integer
Indicates that the specified value is to be compared to the value that DB2
calculates for the explicit clustering indexes of every table in the specified
partitions that are in SYSIBM.SYSINDEXPART. The calculation is computed as
follows:
(NEAROFFPOSF + FAROFFPOSF) 100 / CARDF
Alternatively, DB2 checks the values in SYSINDEXPART for a single

nonpartitioned table space, or for each partition if you specified an entire
partitioned table space as the target object. If at least one calculated value
exceeds the OFFPOSLIMIT value, REORG is performed or recommended. This
option is valid for non-LOB table spaces only.
integer is the value that is to be compared and can range from 0 to 65535.
466

INDREFLIMIT integer
Indicates that the specified value is to be compared to the value that DB2
calculates for the specified partitions in SYSIBM.SYSTABLEPART for the
specified table space. The calculation is computed as follows:
(NEARINDREF + FARINDREF) 100 / CARDF
Alternatively, DB2 checks the values in SYSTABLEPART for a single

nonpartitioned table space, or for each partition if you specified an entire
partitioned table space as the target object. If at least one calculated value
exceeds the calculated value exceeds the INDREFLIMIT value, REORG is
performed or recommended. This option is valid for non-LOB table spaces
only.
integer is the value that is to be compared and can range from 0 to 65535.
REPORTONLY
Specifies that REORG is only to be recommended, not performed. REORG
produces a report with one of the following return codes:
1
No limit met; no REORG is to be performed or recommended.
2
REORG is to be performed or recommended.
UNLOAD
Specifies whether the utility job is to continue processing or end after the data
is unloaded. Unless you specify UNLOAD EXTERNAL, data can be reloaded
only into the same table and table space (as defined in the DB2 catalog) on the
same subsystem. (This does not preclude VSAM redefinition during UNLOAD
PAUSE.)
You must specify UNLOAD ONLY for the data set to be in a format that is
compatible with the FORMAT UNLOAD option of LOAD. However, with
LOAD, you can load the data only into the same object from which it is
unloaded.
This option is valid for non-LOB table spaces only.
You must specify UNLOAD EXTERNAL for the data set to be in a format that
is usable by LOAD without the FORMAT UNLOAD option. With UNLOAD
EXTERNAL, you can load the data into any table with compatible columns in
any table space on any DB2 subsystem.
CONTINUE
Specifies that, after the data has been unloaded, the utility is to continue
processing. An edit routine can be called to decode a previously encoded
data row if an index key requires extraction from that row.
If you specify DISCARD, rows are decompressed and edit routines are
decoded. If you also specify DISCARD to a file, rows are decoded by field
procedure, and the following columns are converted to DB2 external
format:
v SMALLINT
v INTEGER
v FLOAT
v DECIMAL
v TIME
v TIMESTAMP
467
Otherwise, edit routines or field procedures are bypassed on both the

UNLOAD and RELOAD phases for table spaces. Validation procedures are
not invoked during either phase.
PAUSE
Specifies that, after the data has been unloaded, processing is to end. The
utility stops and the RELOAD status is stored in SYSIBM.SYSUTIL so that
processing can be restarted with RELOAD RESTART(PHASE).
This option is useful if you want to redefine data sets during
reorganization. For example, with a user-defined data set, you can:
v Run REORG with the UNLOAD PAUSE option.
v Redefine the data set by using Access Method Services.
v Restart REORG by resubmitting the previous job and specifying
RESTART(PHASE).
However, you cannot use UNLOAD PAUSE if you specify the LIST option.
ONLY
Specifies that, after the data has been unloaded, the utility job ends and the
status that corresponds to this utility ID is removed from
SYSIBM.SYSUTIL.
If you specify UNLOAD ONLY with REORG TABLESPACE, any edit
routine or field procedure is executed during record retrieval in the unload
phase.
This option is not allowed for any table space in DSNDB01 or DSNDB06.
The DISCARD and WHEN options are not allowed with UNLOAD ONLY.
EXTERNAL
Specifies that, after the data has been unloaded, the utility job is to end
and the status that corresponds to this utility ID is removed.
The UNLOAD utility has more functions. If you specify UNLOAD
EXTERNAL with REORG TABLESPACE, rows are decompressed, edit
routines are decoded, field procedures are decoded, and SMALLINT,
INTEGER, FLOAT, DECIMAL, DATE, TIME, and TIMESTAMP columns
are converted to DB2 external format. Validation procedures are not
invoked.
|
Do not specify the EXTERNAL keyword for:
|
|
|
v Table spaces in DSNDB01 or DSNDB06

v Base tables with XML columns
v XML table spaces
The DISCARD option is not allowed with UNLOAD EXTERNAL.
NOPAD
Specifies that the variable-length columns in the unloaded or discarded records
are to occupy the actual data length without additional padding. The unloaded
records can have varying lengths. If you do not specify NOPAD, default
REORG processing pads variable-length columns in the unloaded or discarded
records to their maximum length; the unloaded or discarded records have
equal lengths for each table.
You can specify the NOPAD option only with UNLOAD EXTERNAL or with
UNLOAD DISCARD.
468
Although the LOAD utility processes records with variable-length columns that
were unloaded or discarded with the NOPAD option, these records cannot be
processed by applications that process only fields that are in fixed positions.
For the generated LOAD statement to provide a NULLIF condition for fields
that are not in a fixed position, DB2 generates an input field definition with a
name in the form of DSN_NULL_IND_nnnnn, where nnnnn is the number of
the associated column.
For example, the LOAD statement that is generated for the EMP sample table
looks similar to the LOAD statement that is in the following figure:
LOAD DATA INDDN SYSREC
LOG NO RESUME YES
EBCDIC CCSID(00500,00000,00000)
INTO TABLE "DSN8910 "."EMP
"
WHEN(00004:00005 = X'0012')
( "EMPNO
" POSITION(00007:00012) CHAR(006)
, "FIRSTNME
" POSITION(00013)
VARCHAR
, "MIDINIT
" POSITION(*)
CHAR(001)
, "LASTNAME
" POSITION(*)
VARCHAR
, DSN_NULL_IND_00005 POSITION(*)
CHAR(1)
, "WORKDEPT
" POSITION(*)
CHAR(003)
NULLIF(DSN_NULL_IND_00005)=X'FF'
CHAR(1)
, "PHONENO
" POSITION(*)
CHAR(004)
CHAR(1)
, "HIREDATE
" POSITION(*)
DATE EXTERNAL
CHAR(1)
, "JOB
" POSITION(*)
CHAR(008)
CHAR(1)
, "EDLEVEL
" POSITION(*)
SMALLINT
CHAR(1)
, "SEX
" POSITION(*)
CHAR(001)
CHAR(1)
, "BIRTHDATE
" POSITION(*)
DATE EXTERNAL
CHAR(1)
, "SALARY
" POSITION(*)
DECIMAL
CHAR(1)
, "BONUS
" POSITION(*)
DECIMAL
CHAR(1)
, "COMM
" POSITION(*)
DECIMAL
)
Figure 72. Sample LOAD statement generated by REORG TABLESPACE with the NOPAD
keyword
|
|
FROM TABLE
Specifies the tables that are to be reorganized. The table space that is specified
in REORG TABLESPACE can store more than one table. All tables that are
specified by FROM TABLE statements must be unique. All tables are unloaded
for UNLOAD EXTERNAL, and all tables might be subject to DISCARD. If you
specify UNLOAD EXTERNAL and want to limit which tables and rows are
469
unloaded, specify FROM TABLE with the WHEN option. If you specify
DISCARD, you must qualify the rows that you want to discard by specifying
FROM TABLE with the WHEN option.
Do not specify FROM TABLE with REORG TABLESPACE LIST.
table-name
Specifies the name of the table that is to be qualified by the following
WHEN clause. The table must be described in the catalog and must not be
a catalog table. If the table name is not qualified by a schema name, the
authorization ID of the person who invokes the utility job step is used as
the schema qualifier of the table name. Enclose the table name in quotation
|
|
|
|
|
|
WHEN
Indicates which records in the table space are to be unloaded (for UNLOAD
EXTERNAL) or discarded (for DISCARD). If you do not specify a WHEN
clause for a table in the table space, all of the records are unloaded (for
UNLOAD EXTERNAL), or none of the records is discarded (for DISCARD).
The option following WHEN describes the conditions for UNLOAD or
DISCARD of records from a table and must be enclosed in parentheses.
selection condition
Specifies a condition that is true, false, or unknown about a specific row.
When the condition is true, the row qualifies for UNLOAD or DISCARD.
When the condition is false or unknown, the row does not qualify.
A selection condition consists of at least one predicate and any logical
operators (AND, OR, NOT). The result of a selection condition is derived by
applying the specified logical operators to the result of each specified
predicate. If logical operators are not specified, the result of the selection
condition is the result of the specified predicate.
Selection conditions within parentheses are evaluated first. If the order of
evaluation is not specified by parentheses, AND is applied before OR.
If the control statement is in the same encoding scheme as the input data,
you can code character constants in the control statement. Otherwise, if the
control statement is not in the same encoding scheme as the input data,
you must code the condition with hexadecimal constants. If the target table
is ASCII, any character constants must be specified in hexadecimal. For
example, if the table space is in EBCDIC and the control statement is in
UTF-8, use (1:1)=XF1 in the condition rather than (1:1)=1.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Restriction: REORG TABLESPACE cannot filter rows that contain

encrypted data.
predicate
A predicate specifies a condition that is true, false, or unknown about a
given row or group.
basic predicate
Specifies the comparison of a column with a constant. If the value of
the column is null, the result of the predicate is unknown. Otherwise,
the result of the predicate is true or false.
Predicate
Is true if and only if
470
column-name = constant
The column is equal to the constant or labeled duration
expression.
column-name < > constant
The column is not equal to the constant or labeled duration
expression.
column-name > constant
The column is greater than the constant or labeled duration
expression.
column-name < constant
The column is less than the constant or labeled duration
expression.
column-name > = constant
The column is greater than or equal to the constant or labeled
duration expression.
column-name < = constant
The column is less than or equal to the constant or labeled
Comparison operators: The following forms of the comparison
operators are also supported in basic and quantified predicates: !=, !<,
and !>, where ! means not. In addition, in code pages 437, 819, and
850, the forms =, <, and > are supported. All these product-specific
forms of the comparison operators are intended only to support
existing REORG statements that use these operators and are not
recommended for use in new REORG statements.
A not sign (), or the character that must be used in its place in certain
countries, can cause parsing errors in statements that are passed from
one DBMS to another. The problem occurs if the statement undergoes
character conversion with certain combinations of source and target
CCSIDs. To avoid this problem, substitute an equivalent operator for
any operator that includes a not sign. For example, substitute < > for
=, <= for >, and >= for <.
BETWEEN predicate
Indicates whether a given value lies between two other given values
that are specified in ascending order. Each of the predicates two forms
(BETWEEN and NOT BETWEEN) has an equivalent search condition,
as shown in the following table. If relevant, the table also shows any
equivalent predicates.
Table 75. BETWEEN predicates and their equivalent search conditions
Predicate
Equivalent predicate
Equivalent search condition
column BETWEEN value1

AND value2
None
(column >= value1 AND

column <= value2)
column NOT BETWEEN

value1 AND value2
NOT(column BETWEEN value1 (column < value1 OR column >

AND value2)
value2)
Note: The values can be constants or labeled duration expressions.
For example, the following predicate is true for any row when salary is
greater than or equal to 10 000 and less than or equal to 20 000:
SALARY BETWEEN 10000 AND 20000
471
Specifies an expression that begins with the following special register
values:
v CURRENT DATE (CURRENT_DATE is acceptable.)
v CURRENT TIMESTAMP (CURRENT_TIMESTAMP is acceptable.)
Optionally, the expression contains the arithmetic operations of
addition or subtraction, expressed by a number followed by one of the
seven duration keywords:
v YEARS (or YEAR)
v MONTHS (or MONTH)
v DAYS (or DAY)
v HOURS (or HOUR)
v MINUTES (or MINUTE)
v SECONDS (or SECOND)
v MICROSECONDS (or MICROSECOND)
Utilities evaluate a labeled-duration-expression as a timestamp and
implicitly perform a conversion to a date if the comparison is with a
date column.
Incrementing and decrementing CURRENT DATE: The result of
adding a duration to a date, or of subtracting a duration from a date, is
itself a date. (For the purposes of this operation, a month denotes the
equivalent of a calendar page. Adding months to a date, then, is like
turning the pages of a calendar, starting with the page on which the
date appears.) The result must fall between the dates January 1, 0001
and December 31, 9999 inclusive.
The following table describes the effects of adding and subtracting
years, months, days, and other dates.
Table 76. Effects of adding durations to and subtracting durations from CURRENT DATE
Value that is added or
subtracted
Years
Months
Effect
Adding or subtracting a duration of years affects only the year
portion of the date. The month is unchanged, as is the day unless
the result would be February 29 of a non-leap-year. In this case,
the day portion of the result is set to 28.
Adding or subtracting a duration of months affects only months
and, if necessary, years. The day portion of the date is unchanged
unless that day does not exist in the resulting month. (September
31, for example). In this case the day is set to the last day of the
month.
Adding a month to a date gives the same day one month later
unless that day does not exist in the later month. In that case, the
day in the result is set to the last day of the later month. For
example, January 28 plus one month gives February 28; one
month added to January 29, 30, or 31 results in either February 28
or, for a leap year, February 29. If one or more months is added
to a given date and then the same number of months is
subtracted from the result, the final date is not necessarily the
same as the original date.
472
Table 76. Effects of adding durations to and subtracting durations from CURRENT
DATE (continued)
Value that is added or
subtracted
Effect
Days
Adding or subtracting a duration of days affects the day portion

of the date, and potentially the month and year.
Dates
When a positive date duration is added to a date, or a negative

date duration is subtracted from a date, the date is incremented
by the specified number of years, months, and days.
When a positive date duration is subtracted from a date, or a
negative date duration is added to a date, the date is
decremented by the specified number of days, months, and years.
The order in which labeled date durations are added to and subtracted
from dates can affect the results. When you add labeled date durations
to a date, specify them in the order of YEARS + MONTHS + DAYS.
When you subtract labeled date durations from a date, specify them in
the order of DAYS - MONTHS - YEARS. For example, to add one year
and one day to a date, specify the following code:
CURRENT DATE + 1 YEAR + 1 DAY
To subtract one year, one month, and one day from a date, specify the
following code:
CURRENT DATE - 1 DAY - 1 MONTH - 1 YEAR
Incrementing and decrementing timestamps: The result of adding a

duration to a timestamp, or of subtracting a duration from a
timestamp, is itself a timestamp. Date and time arithmetic is performed
as previously defined, except that an overflow or underflow of hours is
carried into the date part of the result, which must be within the range
of valid dates. For example, if the current date is January 15 and the
current time is 20:00, CURRENT_TIMESTAMP+8 HOURS yields January 16,
04:00. Likewise, CURRENT_TIMESTAMP-22 HOURS yields January 14, 22:00.
IN predicate
Specifies that a value is to be compared with a set of values. In the IN
predicate, the second operand is a set of one or more values that are
specified by constants. Each of the predicates two forms (IN and NOT
IN) has an equivalent search condition, as shown in the following
table.
Table 77. IN predicates and their equivalent search conditions
Predicate
value1 IN (value1, value2,..., valuen)
(value1 = value2 OR ... OR value1 = valuen)
value1 NOT IN (value1, value2,..., valuen)
value1 = value2 AND ... AND value1 = valuen)
For example, the following predicate is true for any row with an
employee in department D11, B01, or C01:
WORKDEPT IN ('D11', 'B01', 'C01')
LIKE predicate
Qualifies strings that have a certain pattern. Specify the pattern by
using a string in which the underscore and percent sign characters can
473
be used as wildcard characters. The underscore character (_) represents

a single, arbitrary character. The percent sign (%) represents a string of
zero or more arbitrary characters.
In this description, let x denote the column that is to be tested and y
denote the pattern in the string constant.
The following rules apply to predicates of the form x LIKE y.... If
NOT is specified, the result is reversed.
v When x or y is null, the result of the predicate is unknown.
v When y is empty and x is not empty, the result of the predicate is
false.
v When x is empty and y is not empty, the result of the predicate is
false unless y consists only of one or more percent signs.
v When x and y are both empty, the result of the predicate is true.
v When x and y are both not null, the result of the predicate is true if
x matches the pattern in y and false if x does not match the pattern
in y.
The pattern string and the string that is to be tested must be of the
same type; that is, both x and y must be character strings, or both x
and y must be graphic strings. When x and y are graphic strings, a
character is a DBCS character. When x and y are character strings and
x is not mixed data, a character is an SBCS character, and y is
interpreted as SBCS data regardless of is subtype.
Within the pattern, a percent sign (%) or underscore character (_) can
represent the literal occurrence of a percent sign or underscore
character. To have a literal meaning, each character must be preceded
by an escape character.
The ESCAPE clause designates a single character. You can use that
character, and only that character, multiple times within the pattern as
an escape character. When the ESCAPE clause is omitted, no character
serves as an escape character and percent signs and underscores in the
pattern can only be used to represent arbitrary characters; they cannot
represent their literal occurrences.
The following rules apply to the use of the ESCAPE clause:
v The ESCAPE clause cannot be used if x is mixed data.
v If x is a character string, the data type of the string constant must be
character string. If x is a graphic string, the data type of the string
constant must be graphic string. In both cases, the length of the
string constant must be 1.
v The pattern must not contain the escape character except when
followed by the escape character, %, or _. For example, if + is the
escape character, any occurrences of + other than ++, +_, or +%
in the pattern is an error.
When that pattern does not include escape characters, a simple
description of its meaning is:
v The underscore character (_) represents a single, arbitrary character.
v The percent sign (%) represents a string of zero or more arbitrary
characters.
v Any other character represents a single occurrence of itself.
Strings and patterns:
474
The string y is interpreted as a sequence of the minimum number of

substring specifiers, such that each character of y is part of exactly one
substring specifier. A substring specifier is an underscore, a percent
sign, or any non-empty sequence of characters other than an
underscore or percent sign.
The string x matches the pattern y if a partitioning of x into substrings
exists, such that:
v A substring of x is a sequence of zero or more contiguous characters,
and each character of x is part of exactly one substring.
v If the nth substring specifier is an underscore, the nth substring of x
is any single character.
v If the nth substring specifier is a percent sign, the nth substring of x
is any sequence of zero or more characters.
v If the nth substring specifier is neither an underscore nor a percent
sign, the nth substring of x is equal to that substring specifier and
has the same length as that substring specifier.
v The number of substrings of x is the same as the number of
substring specifiers.
When escape characters are present in the pattern string, an
underscore, percent sign, or escape character represents a single
occurrence of itself if and only if it is preceded by an odd number of
successive escape characters.
Mixed-data patterns:
If x is mixed data, the pattern is assumed to be mixed data, and its
special characters are interpreted as follows:
v A single-byte underscore refers to one single-byte character; a
double-byte underscore refers to one double-byte character.
v A percent sign, either single-byte or double-byte, refers to any
number of characters of any type, either single-byte or double-byte.
v Redundant shift bytes in x or y are ignored.
NULL predicate
Specifies a test for null values.
If the value of the column is null, the result is true. If the value is not
null, the result is false. If NOT is specified, the result is reversed.
KEEPDICTIONARY
Prevents REORG TABLESPACE from building a new compression dictionary
when unloading the rows. The efficiency of REORG increases with the
KEEPDICTIONARY option for the following reasons:
v The processing cost of building the compression dictionary is eliminated.
v Existing compressed rows do not need to be compressed again.
v Existing compressed rows do not need to be expanded, unless indexes
require it or SORTDATA is used.
Possible reasons for not specifying KEEPDICTIONARY are:
v If the data has changed significantly since the last dictionary was built,
rebuilding the dictionary might save a significant amount of space.
v If the current dictionary was built using the LOAD utility, building it using
REORG might produce a better compression dictionary.
475
v If the data is being converted from basic row format to reordered row
format, REORG will build a new dictionary for the new format. DB2 ignores
the KEEPDICTIONARY option if the REORG utility changes the table space
from basic row format to reordered row format.
|
|
|
|
KEEPDICTIONARY is valid only if a compression dictionary exists and the

table space or partition that is being reorganized has the COMPRESS YES
attribute. If a dictionary does not exist, one is built, a warning message is
issued, and all the records are compressed.
Messages DSNU234I and DSNU244I, which show compression statistics, are
not issued when you specify REORG UNLOAD CONTINUE
KEEPDICTIONARY or REORG UNLOAD PAUSE KEEPDICTIONARY.
REORG ignores the KEEPDICTIONARY option if a partition that is being
reorganized is in REORG-pending status.
Note: You must use KEEPDICTIONARY to ensure that the compression
dictionary is maintained.
|
|
STATISTICS
Specifies that statistics for the table space or associated index, or both, are to be
gathered; the statistics are reported or stored in the DB2 catalog. If statistics are
collected with the default options, only the statistics for the table space are
updated.
If you specify a table space partition or a range of partitions along with the
STATISTICS keyword, DB2 collects statistics only for the specified table space
partitions. This option is valid for non-LOB table spaces only.
|
|
If you specify a base table space with the STATISTICS keyword, DB2 does not
gather statistics for the related XML table space or its indexes.
Restrictions:
v You cannot specify STATISTICS if you specify the CLONE keyword.
TABLE
Specifies the table for which column information is to be gathered. All tables
Do not specify STATISTICS TABLE table-name with REORG TABLESPACE LIST.
Instead, specify STATISTICS TABLE (ALL).
(ALL)
Specifies that information is to be gathered for all columns of all tables in
the table space.
(table-name)
Specifies the tables for which column information is to be gathered. If you
omit the qualifier, the user identifier for the utility job is used. Enclose the
table name in quotation marks if the name contains a blank.
476
SAMPLE integer
Indicates the percentage of rows to be sampled when collecting non-indexed
column statistics. You can specify any value from 1 through 100.
The default value is 25. The SAMPLE option is not allowed for LOB table
spaces.
COLUMN
Specifies columns for which column information is to be gathered.
You can specify this option only if you specify a particular table for which
statistics are to be gathered (TABLE (table-name)). If you specify particular
tables and do not specify the COLUMN option, the default, COLUMN(ALL), is
used. If you do not specify a particular table when using the TABLE option,
you cannot specify the COLUMN option; however, COLUMN(ALL) is
assumed.
(ALL)
Specifies that statistics are to be gathered for all columns in the table.
(column-name, ...)
Specifies the columns for which statistics are to be gathered.
You can specify a list of column names; the maximum is 10. If you specify
more than one column, separate each name with a comma.
INDEX
Specifies indexes for which information is to be gathered. Column information
is gathered for the first column of the index. All the indexes must be associated
with the same table space, which must be the table space that is specified in
the TABLESPACE option.
Do not specify STATISTICS INDEX index-name with REORG TABLESPACE
LIST. Instead, specify STATISTICS INDEX (ALL).
(ALL)
Specifies that the column information is to be gathered for all indexes that
are defined on tables that are contained in the table space.
(index-name)
Specifies the indexes for which information is to be gathered. Enclose the
KEYCARD
Indicates that all of the distinct values in all of the 1 to n key column
FREQVAL
Specifies that frequent-value statistics are to be collected. If you specify
FREQVAL, you must also specify NUMCOLS and COUNT.
NUMCOLS
Indicates the number of key columns to concatenate together when you
collect frequent values from the specified index. Specifying 3 means that
DB2 is to collect frequent values on the concatenation of the first three key
columns.
The default value is 1, which means DB2 is to collect frequent values on
the first key column of the index.
477
COUNT
Indicates the number of frequent values that are to be collected. For
example, specifying 15 means that DB2 is to collect 15 frequent values from
the specified key columns.
REPORT
Specifies whether a set of messages is to be generated to report the collected
statistics.
NO
YES
UPDATE
ALL
ACCESSPATH
Indicates that only the catalog table columns that provide statistics that are
SPACE
Indicates that only the catalog table columns that provide statistics to help
database administrators assess the status of a particular table space or
index are to be updated.
NONE
HISTORY
Specifies that all catalog table inserts or updates to the catalog history tables
are to be recorded.
The default value is whatever value is specified in the STATISTICS HISTORY
field on panel DSNTIPO.
ALL
tables.
ACCESSPATH
Indicates that only the catalog history table columns that provide statistics
that are used for access path selection are to be updated.
SPACE
478
NONE
statistics.
FORCEROLLUP
Specifies whether aggregation or rollup of statistics is to take place when
RUNSTATS is executed even if statistics have not been gathered on some
partitions; for example, partitions have not had any data loaded. Aggregate
statistics are used by the optimizer to select the best access path.
YES
though some partitions might not contain data.
NO
for all partitions.
If data is not available for all partitions, DSNU623I message is issued if the
installation value for STATISTICS ROLLUP on panel DSNTIPO is set to NO.
PUNCHDDN ddname
Specifies the DD statement for a data set that is to receive the LOAD utility
control statements that are generated by REORG TABLESPACE UNLOAD
EXTERNAL or REORG TABLESPACE DISCARD FROM TABLE ... WHEN.
PUNCHDDN is required if the limit key of the last partition of a partitioned
table space has been reduced.
DISCARDDN ddname
Specifies the DD statement for a discard data set, which contains copies of
records that meet the DISCARD FROM TABLE ... WHEN specification.
If you omit the DISCARDDN option, the utility saves discarded records only if
a SYSDISC DD statement is in the JCL input.
The default value is SYSDISC.
The DISCARDDN keyword specifies either a DD name or a TEMPLATE name
UNLDDN ddname
Specifies the name of the unload data set.
ddname is the DD name of the unload data set.
The UNLDDN keyword specifies either a DD name or a TEMPLATE name
479
device-type is the device type; it can be any disk device that is acceptable to the
DYNALLOC parameter of the SORT or OPTION control statement for
DFSORT.
|
|
|
If you omit SORTDEVT and require a sort of the index keys, you must provide
the DD statements that the sort program needs for the temporary data sets.
SORTDEVT is ignored for the catalog and directory table spaces that are listed
in Reorganizing the catalog and directory on page 502.
SORTDEVT cannot be used for LOB table spaces.
The utility does not allow a TEMPLATE specification to dynamically allocate
sort work data sets. The SORTDEVT keyword controls dynamic allocation of
these data sets.
SORTNUM integer
allocated for all sorts that REORG performs.
omit SORTNUM, no value is passed to DFSORT. DFSORT uses its own default.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
virtual storage,so if you specify too high a value for SORTNUM, the utility
|
|

SORTNUM is ignored for the catalog and directory table spaces listed in
Reorganizing the catalog and directory on page 502.
PREFORMAT
Specifies that the remaining pages are to be preformatted up to the high RBA
in the table space and index spaces that are associated with the table that is
specified in FROM TABLE table-name option. The preformatting occurs after the
data is loaded and the indexes are built.
PREFORMAT can operate on an entire table space and its index spaces, or on a
partition of a partitioned table space and its corresponding partitioning index
space.
PREFORMAT is ignored if you specify UNLOAD ONLY or UNLOAD
EXTERNAL.
DISCARD
Specifies that records that meet the specified WHEN conditions are to be
480
discarded during REORG TABLESPACE UNLOAD CONTINUE or UNLOAD

PAUSE. If you specify DISCARDDN or a SYSDISC DD statement in the JCL,
discarded records are saved in the associated data set.
You can specify any SHRLEVEL option with DISCARD; however, if you
specify SHRLEVEL CHANGE, modifications that are made during the
reorganization to data rows that match the discard criteria are not permitted.
In this case, REORG TABLESPACE terminates with an error.
If you specify DISCARD, rows are decompressed and edit routines are
decoded. If you also specify DISCARD to a file, rows are decoded by field
procedure, and the following columns are converted to DB2 external format:
v SMALLINT
v INTEGER
v FLOAT
v DECIMAL
v TIME
v TIMESTAMP
Otherwise, edit routines or field procedures are bypassed on both the
UNLOAD and RELOAD phases for table spaces. Validation procedures are not
invoked during either phase.
Do not specify DISCARD with the UNLOAD EXTERNAL or UNLOAD ONLY
option.
|
|
You cannot specify DISCARD for a base table with XML columns or for an
XML table space.
Related reference
Related information
Compressing your data (DB2 Performance Monitoring and Tuning Guide)
Before running REORG TABLESPACE

Certain activities might be required before you run the REORG TABLESPACE
utility, depending on your situation.
Catalog and directory table spaces

Before running REORG on a catalog or directory table space, you must take an
image copy. Be aware that for the DSNDB06.SYSCOPY catalog table space, and the
DSNDB01.DBD01, and DSNDB01. SYSUTILX directory table spaces, REORG scans
logs to verify that an image copy is available. If the scan of the logs does not find
an image copy, DB2 requests archive logs.
Region size
|
|
|
The recommended minimum region size is 4096 KB. Region sizes greater than 32
MB enable increased parallelism for index builds. Data unload and reload
parallelism can also benefit from a greater region size value.
Mapping table and SHRLEVEL CHANGE

Before running REORG TABLESPACE with SHRLEVEL CHANGE, you must create
a mapping table and index for it. The table space that contains the mapping table
481
must be segmented and cannot be the table space to be reorganized. To create the
mapping table, use a CREATE TABLESPACE statement similar to the following
statement:
CREATE TABLESPACE table-space-name SEGSIZE integer
The number of rows in the mapping table should not exceed 110% of the number
of rows in the table space or partition that is to be reorganized. The mapping table
must have only the columns and the index that are created by the following SQL
statements:
CREATE TABLE table-name1
(TYPE
CHAR(1) NOT NULL,
SOURCE_RID CHAR(5) NOT NULL,
TARGET_XRID CHAR(9) NOT NULL,
LRSN
CHAR(6) NOT NULL);
CREATE UNIQUE INDEX index-name1 ON table-name1
(SOURCE_RID ASC, TYPE, TARGET_XRID, LRSN);
The REORG utility removes all rows from the mapping table when the utility
completes.
You must specify the TARGET_XRID column as CHAR(9), even though the RIDs
are 5 bytes long.
You must have DELETE, INSERT, and UPDATE authorization on the mapping
table.
You can run more than one REORG SHRLEVEL CHANGE job concurrently on
separate table spaces. You can also run also run more than one REORG SHRLEVEL
CHANGE job concurrently on different partitions of the same table space, but only
if the table space does not have any NPIs. When you run concurrently with other
jobs, each REORG job must have a separate mapping table. The mapping tables do
not need to reside in separate table spaces. If only one mapping table exists, the
REORG jobs must be scheduled to run serially. If more than one REORG job tries
to access the same mapping table at the same time, one of the REORG jobs fails.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Recommendation: Consider the following approach to ensure that multiple

REORG jobs do not attempt to use the same mapping table concurrently. Assign
the same name to the mapping table and the utility ID. Because utility IDs must be
unique, this naming decision ensures that the mapping tables are not used by two
REORG jobs that run concurrently.
Restart-pending status and SHRLEVEL CHANGE

If you specify SHRLEVEL CHANGE, REORG drains the write claim class near the
end of REORG processing. In a data sharing environment, if a data sharing
member fails and that member has restart-pending status for a target page set, the
drain can fail. You must postpone running REORG with SHRLEVEL CHANGE
until all restart-pending statuses are removed. You can use the DISPLAY GROUP
command to determine whether a members status is failed. You can use the
DISPLAY DATABASE command with the LOCKS option to determine if locks are
held.
RECOVER-pending and REBUILD-pending status

You cannot reorganize a table space if any partition or range of partitions of the
partitioned table space is in the RECOVER-pending status. Similarly, you cannot
reorganize a single table space partition if any of the following conditions are true:
482
v The partition is in the RECOVER-pending status.

v The corresponding partitioning index is in the REBUILD-pending or
RECOVER-pending status, and the data is unloaded by the cluster index
method.
v The specified partition or partitions are a subset of a range of partitions that are
in REORG-pending status; you must reorganize the entire range to reset the
restrictive status.
The only RECOVER-pending restrictive state is:
RECP The table space, index space, or partition of a table space or index space is
in a RECOVER-pending status. A single logical partition in RECP does not
restrict access to other logical partitions that are not in RECP. You can reset
RECP by recovering only the single logical partition.
The three REBUILD-pending restrictive states are:
individual physical or logical partition is inaccessible and must be rebuilt
by using the REBUILD INDEX utility.
PSRBD
Page set REBUILD-pending status is set for nonpartitioning indexes. The
entire index space is inaccessible and must be rebuilt by using the
REBUILD utility.
RBDP*
A REBUILD-pending status that is set only on logical partitions of
available again when the affected partitions are rebuilt by using the
If a table space is in both REORG-pending and CHECK-pending status (or
auxiliary CHECK-pending status), run REORG first, and then run CHECK DATA
to clear the respective states. Otherwise, if a table space is not in REORG-pending
status, you cannot reorganize a table space or range of partitions if the table space
or any partition in the range is in CHECK-pending status until the
CHECK-pending status is removed.
You must allocate a discard data set (SYSDISC) or specify the DISCARDDN option
if the last partition of the table space is in REORG-pending status.
Fallback recovery considerations

If RECOVER cannot use the latest image copy or copies as a starting point for the
recovery, it attempts to use previous copies; if that attempt fails, RECOVER
restores the data from the log.
However, if you use REORG SHRLEVEL NONE LOG NO, RECOVER cannot
restore data from the log past the point at which the object was last reorganized
successfully. Therefore, you must take an image copy after running REORG with
LOG NO to establish a level of fallback recovery.
483
Recommendation:
Immediately following an ALTER INDEX operation that modifies key values,
create a new recovery point by taking one of the following actions:
v Run REORG and specify COPYDDN and SHRLEVEL NONE.
v Take a full image copy immediately after REORG completes.
If you performed a REORG to reset REORG-pending status (REORP), you should
also take an inline image copy or run the COPY utility. Image copies that are taken
prior to resetting the REORG-pending status cannot be used for recovery to the
current RBA or LRSN.
Successful REORG LOG NO processing inserts a row into SYSIBM.SYSCOPY with
ICTYPE=W for each index that was defined with COPY YES. REORG also places a
reorganized index in informational COPY-pending (ICOPY) status. You should take
a full image copy of the index after the REORG job completes to create a valid
point of recovery.
Restrictions when running REORG TABLESPACE on encrypted

data
If you plan to run REORG TABLESPACE on encrypted data, do not use the WHEN
statement to filter encrypted fields; REORG TABLESPACE cannot filter rows that
contain encrypted data
Restriction for partitions with the COMPRESS YES attribute

when using REBALANCE
Do not run REORG REBALANCE on a partitioned table space where a subset of
partitions have the COMPRESS YES attribute and the remaining partitions have
the COMPRESS NO attribute.
Restriction when using REBALANCE and duplicate partitioning

key values exist
A REORG REBALANCE might distribute rows among the partitions that are being
rebalanced in such a way that one or more partitions do not have any rows. This
situation occurs when many rows with duplicate partitioning key values exist, and
not enough unique values exist to enable REORG to distribute them over all of the
partitions.
|
Restriction for unload parallelism when using REBALANCE
If you specify REORG REBALANCE, you cannot use unload parallelism.
Restriction when physical partition numbers do not match

logical partition numbers
A REORG REBALANCE might not be possible if the logical and physical partition
numbers for the specified table space do not match. This situation can be created
by a series of ALTER ROTATEs and ALTER ADD PARTs.
For example, assume that you create a table space with three partitions. The
following table shows the mapping that exists between the physical and logical
partition numbers.
484
Table 78. Mapping of physical and logical partition numbers when a table space with three
partitions is created.
Logical partition number
Physical partition number
Then, assume that you request the following series of actions:

1. ALTER ROTATE FIRST TO LAST
The new mapping of partition numbers is shown in the following table.
Table 79. Mapping of physical and logical partition numbers after ALTER ROTATE FIRST TO
LAST.
2. ALTER ADD PART

Table 80. Mapping of physical and logical partition numbers after ALTER ADD PART.
3. ALTER ROTATE FIRST TO LAST

Table 81. Mapping of physical and logical partition numbers after second ALTER ROTATE
FIRST TO LAST.
Assume that you then try to execute a REORG TABLESPACE REBALANCE PART
1:2. This statement requests a reorganization and rebalancing of physical partitions
1 and 2. Note that physical partition 1 is logical partition 2, and physical partition
2 is logical partition 4. Thus, the utility is processing logical partitions 2 and 4. If
during the course of rebalancing, the utility needs to move keys from logical
partition 2 to logical partition 3, the job fails, because logical partition 3 is not
within the specified physical partition range.
485
|
|
Reorganizing a table space with an index that has a VARBINARY

column
|
|
|
|
|
If you run REORG against a table space, and that table space includes a table that
has an index with the following characteristics, REORG fails:
|
|
To fix the problem, drop the index, or alter the column data type to BINARY, and
then rebuild the index
Related reference
CHECK-pending status on page 927
RECOVER-pending status on page 930
Related information
Job DSNTEJ1 (DB2 Installation Guide)
Data sets that REORG TABLESPACE uses

The REORG TABLESPACE utility uses a number of data sets during its operation.
The following table describes the data sets that REORG TABLESPACE uses. The
data set, and an indication of whether it is required. Include statements in your
JCL for each required data set, and any optional data sets that you want to use.
|
Table 82. Data sets that REORG TABLESPACE uses
Data set
Description
Required?
|
|
SYSIN

control statement.
Yes
SYSUT1
A temporary data set for sort input.
No
SYSPRINT
Yes
|
|
|
|
|
STPRIN01

secondary index.
No1
|
|
|
SYSDISC
Data set that contains discarded records

from REORG DISCARD. The default DD
name is SYSDISC.
No2
|
|
|
|
|
|
SYSPUNCH
Data set that contains a LOAD statement

that is generated by REORG, which loads
records that REORG DISCARD or REORG
UNLOAD EXTERNAL wrote to the
DISCARD or UNLOAD data sets. The
default DD name is SYSPUNCH.
No3
|
|
UTPRINT

Yes
486
Table 82. Data sets that REORG TABLESPACE uses (continued)
Data set
Description
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Unload data set
Yes4
Data set that contains the unloaded data
that is to be reloaded during the RELOAD
phase. Specify its DD or template name with
the UNLDDN option or with the RECDSN
field on the DB2I Utilities panel. The data
set must be a sequential data set that is
readable by BSAM. The default DD name is
SYSREC.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Required?
The unload data set must be large enough to

contain all the unloaded records from all the
tables in the target table space.If at least one
table in the table space does not have an
index, REORG cannot use the SORTDATA
method with SHRLEVEL CHANGE. As a
result, you must unload the data in the
SYSREC data set.
|
|
|
|
|
Copies
From one to four output data sets that are to No5

contain the image copies. Specify their DD
or template names with the COPYDDN and
RECOVERYDDN options of the utility
control statement.
|
|
|
Work data sets

output. The DD names have the form
DATAWKnn.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Work data sets

Yes7
output when sorting keys, or for sorting
data when SORTDATA is specified but
NOSYSREC is not. If index build parallelism
is used, the DD names have the form
SWnnWKmm. If index build parallelism is
not used, the DD names have the form
SORTWKnn
|
|
|
|
Sort work data sets

No1, 8
|
|
Sort work data sets
Temporary data sets for unload parallelism.

The DD names have the form DAnnWKmm.
Yes9
|
|
Print data sets
Data sets for unload parallelism. The DD

names have the form DTPRINnn.
Yes9, 10
No6
487
Table 82. Data sets that REORG TABLESPACE uses (continued)
Data set
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note:
index.
2. Required if you specify DISCARDDN
3. Required you specify PUNCHDDN
4. Required unless NOSYSREC or SHRLEVEL CHANGE is specified.
5. Required if a partition is in REORG-pending status or REBALANCE, COPYDDN,
RECOVERYDDN, SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, or SHRLEVEL CHANGE is specified.
6. Required if NOSYSREC or SHRLEVEL CHANGE is specified, but SORTDEVT is not
specified.
7. Required if any indexes exist and SORTDEVT is not specified.
8. If the DYNALLOC parm of the SORT program is not turned on, you need to allocate
the data set. Otherwise, DFSORT dynamically allocates the temporary data set.
9. If you specify the SORTDEVT keyword, the data sets are dynamically allocated. It is
recommended that you use dynamic allocation by specifying SORTDEVT in the utility
statement because dynamic allocation reduces the maintenance required of the utility
job JCL.
10. If UTPRINT is allocated to SYSOUT, the data sets are dynamically allocated.
Description
Required?
Table space
Object that is to be reorganized.
Calculating the size of the unload data set

The required size for the unload data set varies depending on the options that you
use for REORG.
1. If you use REORG with UNLOAD PAUSE or CONTINUE and you specify
KEEPDICTIONARY (assuming that a compression dictionary already exists),
the size of the unload data set, in bytes, is the VSAM high-allocated RBA for
the table space. You can obtain the high-allocated RBA from the associated
VSAM catalog.
For SHRLEVEL CHANGE, also add the result of the following calculation (in
bytes) to the VSAM high-used RBA:
number of records * 11
2. If you use REORG with UNLOAD ONLY, UNLOAD PAUSE, or CONTINUE

and you do not specify KEEPDICTIONARY, you can calculate the size of the
unload data set, in bytes, by using the following formula:
maximum row length * number of rows
The maximum row length is the row length, including the 6-byte record prefix,
plus the length of the longest clustering key. If multiple tables exist in the table
space, use the following formula to determine the maximum row length:
|
|
Sum over all tables ((row length + (2 * number of VARBIN

columns)) * number of rows)
For SHRLEVEL CHANGE, also add the result of the following formula to the
preceding result:
(21 * ((NEARINDREF + FARINDREF) * 1.1))
In the preceding formula:
488
NEARINDREF
Is the value that is obtained from the NEARINDREF column of the
SYSIBM.SYSTABLEPART catalog table. The accuracy of the data set size
calculation depends on recent information in the SYSTABLEPART
catalog table.
FARINDREF
Is the value that is obtained from the FARINDREF column of the
SYSIBM.SYSTABLEPART catalog table.
3. If you have variable-length fields, the calculation in step 2 on page 488 might
result in excessive space. Use the average uncompressed row length, multiplied
by the number of rows.
4. If you use REORG with UNLOAD PAUSE or CONTINUE with the DISCARD
option, and the table has variable length fields, use the maximum row length in
the calculation. The DISCARD option without the NOPAD option pads the
variable length fields.
For certain table spaces in the catalog and directory, the unload data set for the
table spaces have a different format. The calculation for the size of this data set is
as follows:
data set size in bytes = (28 + longrow) * numrows
In the preceding formula:

longrow
Is the length of the longest row in the table space.
numrows
Is the number of rows in the data set.
The length of the row is calculated as follows:
Sum of column lengths + 4 bytes for each link
The length of the column is calculated as follows:

Maximum length of the column + 1 (if nullable) + 2 (if varying length)

Allocating twice the space that is used by the unload data sets is usually adequate
for the sort work data sets. For compressed data, double again the amount of space
that is allocated for the sort work data sets if you use either of the following
REORG options:
v UNLOAD PAUSE without KEEPDICTIONARY
v UNLOAD CONTINUE without KEEPDICTIONARY
Using two or three large SORTWKnn data sets is preferable to using several small
ones. If adequate space is not available, you cannot run REORG.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
489
Specifying a destination for DFSORT messages

The REORG utility job step must contain a UTPRINT DD statement that defines a
destination for messages that are issued by DFSORT during the SORT phase of
REORG. DB2I, the %DSNU CLIST command, and the DSNUPROC procedure use
the following default DD statement:
//UTPRINT DD
SYSOUT=A
Calculating the size of the statistics sort work data sets:

following formula:
numcols
count
Related concepts
Reorganizing the catalog and directory on page 502
Shadow data sets

When you execute the REORG utility with SHRLEVEL REFERENCE or SHRLEVEL
CHANGE, the utility uses shadow data sets.
For user-managed data sets, you must preallocate the shadow data sets before you
execute REORG with SHRLEVEL REFERENCE or SHRLEVEL CHANGE. If a table
space, partition, or index resides in DB2-managed data sets and shadow data sets
do not already exist when you execute REORG, DB2 creates the shadow data sets.
At the end of REORG processing, the DB2-managed shadow data sets are deleted.


variable
meaning
catname
x
C or D
dbname
Database name
490
psname
I or J
1 or 2
Lnnn

v
v
v
v
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
B000 through B999 for partitions 1000 through 1999

C000 through C999 for partitions 2000 through 2999
D000 through D999 for partitions 3000 through 3999
E000 through E996 for partitions 4000 through 4096
|
the partitions that you want to reorganize.
For example, assume that you have a ten-partition table space and you want to
determine a naming convention for the data set in order to successfully execute the
REORG utility with the SHRLEVEL CHANGE PART 2:6 options. The following
queries of the DB2 catalog tables SYSTABLEPART and SYSINDEXPART provide
the required information:
SELECT DBNAME, TSNAME, PARTITION, IPREFIX FROM SYSIBM.SYSTABLEPART
WHERE DBNAME = 'DBDV0701' AND TSNAME = 'TPDV0701'
ORDER BY PARTITION;
SELECT IXNAME, PARTITION, IPREFIX FROM SYSIBM.SYSINDEXPART
WHERE IXNAME = 'IXDV0701
ORDER BY PARTITION;
The preceding queries produce the information that is shown in the following
table.
The following table shows the results from the first query.
Table 83. Query results from the first preceding query
DBNAME
TSNAME
PARTITION
IPREFIX
DBDV0701
TPDV0701
DBDV0701
TPDV0701
DBDV0701
TPDV0701
DBDV0701
TPDV0701
491
Table 83. Query results from the first preceding query (continued)
DBNAME
TSNAME
PARTITION
IPREFIX
DBDV0701
TPDV0701
DBDV0701
TPDV0701
DBDV0701
TPDV0701
DBDV0701
TPDV0701
DBDV0701
TPDV0701
DBDV0701
TPDV0701
10
The following table shows the results from the second query.
Table 84. Query results from the second preceding query
IXNAME
PARTITION
IPREFIX
IXDV0701
10
IXDV0701
IXDV0701
IXDV0701
IXDV0701
IXDV0701
IXDV0701
IXDV0701
IXDV0701
IXDV0701
To execute REORG SHRLEVEL CHANGE PART 2:6, you need to preallocate the
following shadow objects. The naming convention for these objects use information
from the query results that are shown in the previous tables.
vcatnam.DSNDBC.DBDV0701.TPDV0701.J0001.A002
vcatnam.DSNDBC.DBDV0701.TPDV0701.I0001.A003
vcatnam.DSNDBC.DBDV0701.TPDV0701.J0001.A004
vcatnam.DSNDBC.DBDV0701.IXDV0701.J0001.A002
vcatnam.DSNDBC.DBDV0701.IXDV0701.I0001.A003
vcatnam.DSNDBC.DBDV0701.IXDV0701.J0001.A004

492
example:
DEFINE CLUSTER +
DATA
+
MODEL('catname.DSNDBD.dbname.psname.y0001.L001') )
Creating shadow data sets for indexes:
When you preallocate data sets for indexes, create the shadow data sets as follows:
secondary index.
v Create a shadow data set for each nonpartitioned secondary index.
sets that are associated with the base index, except use J0001 instead of I0001. For
more information about this naming scheme, see the information about the shadow
data set naming convention at the beginning of this topic.

|
|
|
Preallocating shadow data sets for REORG PART

By creating the shadow data sets before executing REORG PART, even for
DB2-managed data sets, you prevent possible over-allocation of the disk space
during REORG processing. When reorganizing a partition, you must create the
shadow data sets for the partition of the table space and for the partition of the
partitioning index. In addition, before executing REORG PART with SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE or SHRLEVEL CHANGE on partition mmm of a partitioned table
space, you must create a shadow data set for each nonpartitioning index that
resides in user-defined data sets. Each shadow data set is to be used for a copy of
the index and must be as large as the entire original nonpartitioned index. The
name for this shadow data set has the form
catname.DSNDBx.dbname.psname.y0mmm.Annn.
Concurrency and compatibility for REORG TABLESPACE

The REORG TABLESPACE utility has certain concurrency and compatibility
|
|
|
|
DB2 treats individual data and index partitions, and individual logical partitions of
nonpartitioning indexes as distinct target objects. Utilities that operate on different
partitions of the same table space or index space are compatible. However, REORG
SHRLEVEL CHANGE or REFERENCE on a partition or range of partitions rebuild
493
|
|
|
entire nonpartitioned indexes; therefore, two REORG SHRLEVEL CHANGE or

REFERENCE PART jobs on different partitions of the same table space are not
compatible.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Restriction: You cannot run concurrent REORG TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL

CHANGE PART integer on the same table space. Instead of submitting multiple
jobs, you can merge the jobs into one job and specify a range using REORG
TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL CHANGE PART integer1:integer2, or specify REORG
TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL CHANGE SCOPE PENDING if multiple partitions are
in a REORG-pending state.
This information includes a series of tables that show which claim classes REORG
drains and any restrictive state that the utility sets on the target object.
For nonpartitioned indexes, if you specify SHRLEVEL NONE, REORG PART:
v Drains only the logical partition (and the repeatable read class for the entire
index)
v Does not set the page set REBUILD-pending status (PSRCP)

v Does not use PCTFREE or FREEPAGE attributes when inserting keys
Claims
For SHRLEVEL NONE, the following table shows which claim classes REORG
drains and any restrictive state that the utility sets on the target object. For each
column, the table indicates the claim or drain that is acquired and the restrictive
state that is set in the corresponding phase. UNLOAD CONTINUE and UNLOAD
PAUSE, unlike UNLOAD ONLY, include the RELOAD phase and thus include the
drains and restrictive states of that phase.
Table 85. Claim classes of REORG TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL NONE operations
UNLOAD phase of
REORG
Target
RELOAD phase of
REORG if UNLOAD
CONTINUE or
PAUSE
UNLOAD phase of
REORG PART
RELOAD phase of
REORG PART if
UNLOAD
CONTINUE or
PAUSE
Table space, partition, DW/UTRO

or a range of
partitions of a table
space
DA/UTUT
DW/UTRO
DA/UTUT
DW/UTRO
DA/UTUT
DW/UTRO
DA/UTUT
Nonpartitioned index2 DW/UTRO
DA/UTUT
None
DR
None
nonpartitioning index3
None
DW/UTRO
DA/UTUT
Partitioning index,
data-partitioned
secondary index, or
partition of either
type of index1
494
Table 85. Claim classes of REORG TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL NONE operations (continued)
Target
UNLOAD phase of
REORG
RELOAD phase of
REORG if UNLOAD
CONTINUE or
PAUSE
UNLOAD phase of
REORG PART
RELOAD phase of
REORG PART if
UNLOAD
CONTINUE or
PAUSE
Legend:
v None: Any claim, drain, or restrictive state for this object does not change in this phase.
Note:
|
|
|
2. Includes document ID indexes and node ID indexes over nonpartitioned XML table spaces and XML indexes.
3. Includes logical partitions of an XML index over partitioned XML table spaces.
For SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, the following table shows which claim classes
REORG drains and any restrictive state that the utility sets on the target object. For
each column, the table indicates the claim or drain that is acquired and the
restrictive state that is set in the corresponding phase.
Table 86. Claim classes of REORG TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL REFERENCE operations
UNLOAD phase of
REORG
SWITCH phase of
REORG
UNLOAD phase of
REORG PART
SWITCH phase of
REORG PART
Table space or
partition of table
space
DW/UTRO
DA/UTUT
DW/UTRO
DA/UTUT
Partitioning index,
data-partitioned
secondary index, or
partition of either1
DW/UTRO
DA/UTUT
DW/UTRO
DA/UTUT
DW/UTRO
DA/UTUT
CR/UTRW
DA/UTUT
None
DW/UTRO
DA/UTUT
Target
| Nonpartitioned
secondary index2
None
Legend:
v DDR: Dedrain the read claim class, concurrent SQL access.
Note:
| 1. Includes document ID indexes and node ID indexes over partitioned XML table spaces.
| 2. Includes document ID indexes and node ID indexes over nonpartitioned XML table spaces and XML indexes.
| 3. Includes logical partitions of an XML index over partitioned XML table spaces.
495
For REORG of an entire table space with SHRLEVEL CHANGE, the following
table shows which claim classes REORG drains and any restrictive state that the
utility sets on the target object.
Table 87. Claim classes of REORG TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL CHANGE operations
Target
Last iteration of LOG

phase
SWITCH phase
CR/UTRW
DW/UTRO
DA/UTUT
CR/UTRW
DW/UTRO
DA/UTUT
UNLOAD phase
Table space
Index
Legend:
v DA: Claim all claim classes, no concurrent SQL access.
For REORG of a partition with SHRLEVEL CHANGE, the following table shows
which claim classes REORG drains and any restrictive state that the utility sets on
the target object.
Table 88. Claim classes of REORG TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL CHANGE operations on a partition
Target
UNLOAD phase
Partition of table space
CR/UTRW
Last iteration of LOG

phase
DW/UTRO or DA/UTUT
DA/UTUT
DA/UTUT
Partition of partitioning
index1
CR/UTRW
DW/UTRO or DA/UTUT
Nonpartitioning index2
None
None
CR/UTRW
SWITCH phase
4
DW/UTRO or DA/UTUT
DR
4
DA/UTUT
Legend:
v DDR: Dedrain the read claim class, no concurrent access for SQL repeatable readers.
Note:
|
|
|
|
2. Includes document ID indexes and node ID indexes over nonpartitioned XML table spaces and XML indexes.
3. Includes logical partitions of an XML index over partitioned XML table spaces.
4. DA/UTUT applies if you specify DRAIN ALL.
Compatibility
The following table shows which utilities can run concurrently with REORG on the
same target object. The target object can be a table space, an index space, or a
options of a utility, that information is also shown.
496
Table 89. Compatibility of REORG TABLESPACE with other utilities
Action
REORG SHRLEVEL
NONE UNLOAD
CONTINUE or PAUSE,
REORG SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE, or
REORG SHRLEVEL
CHANGE
REORG SHRLEVEL
REORG SHRLEVEL
NONE UNLOAD ONLY NONE UNLOAD ONLY
without clustering index with clustering index
CATMAINT
No
No
No
CHECK DATA
No
No
No
CHECK INDEX
No
Yes
Yes
CHECK LOB
No
No
No
COPY INDEXSPACE
No
Yes
Yes
COPY TABLESPACE
No
Yes
Yes
DIAGNOSE
Yes
Yes
Yes
LOAD
No
No
No
MERGECOPY
No
No
No
MODIFY
No
No
No
QUIESCE
No
Yes
Yes
REBUILD INDEX
No
Yes
No
RECOVER INDEX
No
Yes
No
RECOVER INDEXSPACE
No
No
No
RECOVER TABLESPACE
No
No
No
REORG INDEX
No
Yes
No
REORG TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL

NONE UNLOAD CONTINUE or
PAUSE, REORG SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE, or REORG SHRLEVEL
CHANGE
No
No
No
REORG TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL

NONE UNLOAD ONLY or
EXTERNAL
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes

DELETE or REPLACE
No
No
No
REPAIR LOCATE INDEX PAGE

REPLACE
No
Yes
No

PAGE REPLACE
No
No
No
REPORT
Yes
Yes
Yes
RUNSTATS
No
Yes
Yes
STOSPACE
No
Yes
Yes
UNLOAD
No
Yes
Yes
The following table shows which DB2 operations can be affected when
reorganizing catalog table spaces.
497
Table 90. DB2 operations that are affected by reorganizing catalog table spaces
Catalog table space
Actions that might not run concurrently
Any table space except SYSCOPY and

SYSSTR
CREATE, ALTER, and DROP statements
SYSCOPY, SYSDBASE, SYSDBAUT,

SYSSTATS, SYSUSER, SYSHIST
Utilities
SYSDBASE, SYSDBAUT, SYSGPAUT,

SYSPKAGE, SYSPLAN, SYSUSER
GRANT and REVOKE statements
SYSDBAUT, SYSDBASE, SYSGPAUT,

BIND and FREE commands
SYSPKAGE, SYSPLAN, SYSSTATS, SYSUSER,
SYSVIEWS
SYSPKAGE, SYSPLAN
Plan or package execution
Determining when an object requires reorganization

You might need to do some analysis to determine if an object requires
reorganization.
Recommendation: Run RUNSTATS if the statistics are not current. If you have an
object that should also be reorganized, run REORG with STATISTICS and take
inline copies. If you run REORG PART and nonpartitioning indexes exist,
subsequently run RUNSTATS for each nonpartitioning index.
To determine when an object requires reorganization:
v Run the REORG TABLESPACE utility and specify the OFFPOSLIMIT and
INDREFLIMIT catalog query options with the REPORTONLY option. REORG
produces a report with one of the following return codes; but a REORG is not
performed.
1
No limit met; no REORG is performed or recommended.
2
REORG is performed or recommended.
v Alternatively, use the SYSTABLEPART and SYSINDEXPART catalog tables to
find which table spaces and indexes qualify for reorganization. The information
in these catalog tables can also be used to determine when the DB2 catalog table
spaces require reorganization. For catalog table spaces SYSDBASE, SYSVIEWS,
and SYSPLAN, you should not use the value for columns FAROFFPOSF and
NEAROFFPOSF of SYSINDEXPART to determine whether to reorganize.
Information from the SYSTABLEPART catalog table can also tell you how well
disk space is being used. If you want to find the number of varying-length rows
that were relocated to other pages because of an update, run RUNSTATS, and
then issue the following statement:
SELECT CARD, NEARINDREF, FARINDREF
WHERE DBNAME = 'XXX'
AND TSNAME = 'YYY';
v Reorganize table spaces or partitions that are in REORG-pending status. Use the
DISPLAY DATABASE RESTRICT command to display those table spaces and
partitions that require reorganization.
v A large number (relative to previous values that you have received) for
FARINDREF indicates that I/O activity on the table space is high. If you find
that this number increases over a period of time, you probably need to
498
reorganize the table space to improve performance, and increase PCTFREE or

FREEPAGE for the table space with the ALTER TABLESPACE statement.
The following statement returns the percentage of unused space in
nonsegmented table space YYY. In nonsegmented table spaces, the space that is
used by dropped tables is not reclaimed until you reorganize the table space.
SELECT PERCDROP
WHERE DBNAME = 'XXX'
AND TSNAME = 'YYY';
Issue the following statement to determine whether the rows of a table are
stored in the same order as the entries of its clustering index:
SELECT NEAROFFPOSF, FAROFFPOSF
WHERE IXCREATOR = 'index_creator_name'
AND IXNAME = 'index_name';
v Several indicators are available to signal a time for reorganizing table spaces. A
large value for FAROFFPOSF might indicate that clustering is deteriorating. In
this case, reorganize the table space to improve query performance.
A large value for NEAROFFPOSF might indicate also that reorganization might
improve performance. However, in general NEAROFFPOSF is not as critical a
factor as FAROFFPOSF.
FAROFFPOSF and NEAROFFPOSF do not have query performance
considerations for the following DB2 catalog tables:
DSNDB06.SYSDBASE
DSNDB06.SYSDBAUT
DSNDB06.SYSGROUP
DSNDB06.SYSPLAN
DSNDB06.SYSVIEWS
For any table, the REORG utility repositions rows into the sequence of the key of
the clustering index that is defined on that table.
For nonclustering indexes, the statistical information that is recorded by
RUNSTATS in SYSINDEXES and SYSINDEXPART might appear even worse after
the clustering index is used to reorganize the data. This applies only to the
CLUSTERING and CLUSTERED columns in SYSINDEXES and to the
NEAROFFPOS and FAROFFPOS columns in SYSINDEXPART.
Access with REORG TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL

SHRLEVEL option.
For reorganizing a table space, or a partition of a table space, the SHRLEVEL
option lets you choose the level of access that you have to your data during
reorganization.
v REORG with SHRLEVEL NONE, the default, reloads the reorganized data into
the original area that is being reorganized. Applications have read-only access
during unloading and no access during reloading. For data-partitioned
secondary indexes, the option rebuilds the index parts during the BUILD phase.
(Rebuilding these indexes does not create contention between parallel REORG
499
PART jobs.) For nonpartitioned secondary indexes, the option corrects the
indexes. Using REORG SHRLEVEL NONE is the only access level that resets
REORG-pending status.
v REORG with SHRLEVEL REFERENCE reloads the reorganized data into a new
(shadow) copy of the area that is being reorganized. Near the end of
reorganization, DB2 switches the future access of the application from the
original data to the shadow copy. For SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, applications
have read-only access during unloading and reloading, and a brief period of no
access during switching.
v REORG with SHRLEVEL CHANGE reloads the reorganized data into a shadow
copy of the area that is being reorganized. For REORG TABLESPACE
SHRLEVEL CHANGE, a mapping table correlates RIDs in the original copy of
the table space or partition with RIDs in the shadow copy. Applications can read
from and write to the original area, and DB2 records the writing in the log. DB2
then reads the log and applies it to the shadow copy to bring the shadow copy
up to date. This step executes iteratively, with each iteration processing a
sequence of log records. Near the end of reorganization, DB2 switches the future
access of the application from the original data to the shadow copy. Applications
have read-write access during unloading and reloading, a brief period of
read-only access during the last iteration of log processing, and a brief period of
no access during switching.
Log processing with SHRLEVEL REFERENCE PART for

nonpartitioned indexes or SHRLEVEL CHANGE:
When you specify SHRLEVEL REFERENCE PART for nonpartitioned indexes or
SHRLEVEL CHANGE, DB2 processes the log to update the shadow copy. This step
executes iteratively. The first iteration processes the log records that accumulated
during the previous iteration. The iterations continue until one of these conditions
is met:
will be less than or equal to the time that is specified for MAXRO. If this
condition is met, the next iteration is the last iteration.
v DB2 estimates that the SWITCH phase will not start by the deadline that is
specified for DEADLINE. If this condition is met, DB2 terminates reorganization.
v The number of log records that the next iteration is to process is not sufficiently
iteration. If this condition is met but the first two conditions are not met, DB2
sends message DSNU377I to the console. DB2 continues log processing for the
length of time that is specified for DELAY and then performs the action that is
specified for LONGLOG.
Operator actions
LONGLOG specifies the action that DB2 performs if the pace of processing log
records between iterations is slow. If no action is taken after message DSNU377I is
sent to the console, the LONGLOG option automatically goes into effect. Some
examples of possible actions that you can take:
v Execute the START DATABASE(database) SPACENAM(tablespace) ... ACCESS(RO)
command and the QUIESCE utility to drain the write claim class. DB2 performs
the last iteration, if MAXRO is not DEFER. After the QUIESCE, you should also
execute the ALTER UTILITY command, even if you do not change any REORG
parameters.
500
v Execute the START DATABASE(database) SPACENAM(tablespace) ... ACCESS(RO)

command and the QUIESCE utility to drain the write claim class. Then, after
reorganization makes some progress, execute the START DATABASE(database)
SPACENAM(tablespace) ... ACCESS(RW) command. This increases the likelihood
that processing of log records between iterations can continue at an acceptable
rate. After the QUIESCE, you should also execute the ALTER UTILITY
command, even if you do not change any REORG parameters.
v Execute the ALTER UTILITY command to change the value of MAXRO.
Changing it to a huge positive value, such as 9999999, causes the next iteration
to be the last iteration.
v Execute the ALTER UTILITY command to change the value of LONGLOG.
v Execute the TERM UTILITY command to terminate reorganization.
v Adjust the amount of buffer space that is allocated to reorganization and to
applications. This adjustment can increase the likelihood that processing of log
records between iterations can continue at an acceptable rate. After adjusting the
space, you should also execute the ALTER UTILITY command, even if you do
not change any REORG parameters.
v Adjust the scheduling priorities of reorganization and applications. This
adjustment can increase the likelihood that processing of log records between
iterations can continue at an acceptable rate. After adjusting the priorities, you
should also execute the ALTER UTILITY command, even if you do not change
any REORG parameters.
v An ALTER UTILITY command is issued.
v REORG terminates for any reason (including the deadline).
Related concepts
Before running REORG TABLESPACE on page 481
Omitting the output data set

For REORG TABLESPACE, you can use the NOSYSREC option to omit the unload
data set.
To omit the output data set:
Specify the NOSYSREC option in the REORG TABLSPACE utility control statement
and do not specify the UNLOAD PAUSE or UNLOAD ONLY options. This option
provides a performance advantage. However, you should be aware of the
following facts:
v For REORG TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL CHANGE, REORG omits the unload data
set, even if you do not specify NOSYSREC.
v For REORG TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, if you do not use the
NOSYSREC option and an error occurs during reloading, you can restart at the
RELOAD phase of REORG by using the contents of the unload data set.
However, if the REORG job includes both SORTDATA and NOSYSREC, you
must restart at the UNLOAD phase.
501
v For REORG TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL NONE with NOSYSREC, if an error

occurs during reloading, you must execute the RECOVER TABLESPACE utility,
starting from the most recent image copy. Therefore, if you specify NOSYSREC
with SHRLEVEL NONE, you must create an image copy before starting REORG
TABLESPACE.
Unloading without reloading

REORG can unload data without continuing and without creating a
SYSIBM.SYSUTIL record after the job ends.
If you specify UNLOAD ONLY, REORG unloads data from the table space and
then ends. You can reload the data at a later date with the LOAD utility, specifying
FORMAT UNLOAD.
Between unloading and reloading, you can add a validation routine to a table.
During reloading, all the rows are checked by the validation procedure.
Do not use REORG UNLOAD ONLY to propagate data. When you specify the
UNLOAD ONLY option, REORG unloads only the data that physically resides in
the base table space; LOB and XML columns are not unloaded. For purposes of
data propagation, you should use UNLOAD or REORG UNLOAD EXTERNAL
instead.
Reclaiming space from dropped tables

Reorganization omits tables that were previously dropped, reclaiming the space
that they acquired. For partition-by-growth table spaces, you cannot use REORG to
reclaim the space.
Related tasks
Reclaiming space in the DBD on page 323
Reorganizing the catalog and directory

You can run REORG TABLESPACE on the table spaces in the catalog database
(DSNDB06) and on the SCT02, SPT01, DBD01, and SYSLGRNX table spaces in the
directory database (DSNDB01).
Attention:
You must take a full image copy before and after reorganizing any catalog or
directory object. Otherwise, you cannot recover any catalog of directory objects
without the full image copies. When you reorganize the DSNDB06.SYSCOPY table
space with the LOG NO option and omit the COPYDDN option, DB2 places the
table space in COPY-pending status. Take a full image copy of the table space to
remove the COPY-pending status before continuing to reorganize the catalog or
directory table spaces.
Running REORG LOG NO COPYDDN avoids the COPY-pending status, because
an inline copy is taken during the REORG.
The FASTSWITCH YES option is ignored for catalog and directory objects.
Recommendation: Use SHRLEVEL REFERENCE when reorganizing the catalog.
502
When to run REORG on the catalog and directory

You do not need to run REORG TABLESPACE on the catalog and directory table
spaces as often as you do on user table spaces. RUNSTATS collects statistics about
user table spaces which you use to determine if a REORG is necessary. You can use
the same statistics to determine if a REORG is needed for catalog table spaces. The
only difference is the information in the columns NEAROFFPOSF and
FAROFFPOSF in table SYSINDEXPART. The values in these columns can be double
the recommended value for user table spaces before a reorganization is needed if
the table space is DSNDB06.SYSDBASE, DSNDB06.SYSVIEWS,
DSNDB06.SYSPLAN, DSNDB06.SYSGROUP, or DSNDB06.SYSDBAUT.
Reorganize the whole catalog before a catalog migration or once every couple of
years. Reorganizing the catalog is useful for reducing the size of the catalog table
spaces. To improve query performance, reorganize the indexes on the catalog
tables.
When statistical information indicates that DSNDB06.SYSDBASE,
DSNDB06.SYSPLAN, or DSNDB06.SYSPKAGE requires reorganization, you should
also reorganize the corresponding directory table space. These catalog table spaces
and their corresponding directory table spaces are listed in the following table.
Table 91. Catalog table spaces and their corresponding directory table spaces
Catalog table space
Directory table space
DSNDB06.SYSDBASE
DSNDB01.DBD01
DSNDB06.SYSPLAN
DSNDB01.SCT02
DSNDB06.SYSPKAGE
DSNDB01.SPT01
Associated directory table spaces

When certain catalog table spaces are reorganized, you should also reorganize the
associated directory table space. The associated directory table spaces are listed in
the previous table.
Limitations for reorganizing the catalog and directory

|
|
|
|
|
v You cannot reorganize DSNDB01.SYSUTILX.

v If SHRLEVEL NONE is specified, the UNLOAD ONLY or UNLOAD
EXTERNAL and LOG YES options are not allowed for catalog and directory
table spaces. However, LOG YES is required if SHRLEVEL NONE is specified
for the catalog LOB table spaces. If SHRLEVEL REFERENCE is specified, LOG
NO must be specified.
v The SORTDEVT and SORTNUM options are ignored for the following catalog
and directory table spaces:
DSNDB06.SYSDBASE
DSNDB06.SYSDBAUT
DSNDB06.SYSGROUP
DSNDB06.SYSPLAN
DSNDB06.SYSVIEWS
DSNDB01.DBD01
The COPYDDN and RECOVERYDDN options are valid for the preceding
catalog and directory tables if SHRLEVEL REFERENCE is also specified.
v REORG TABLESPACE with SHRLEVEL CHANGE cannot operate on the
following catalog and directory table spaces:
503
DSNDB06.SYSDBASE
DSNDB06.SYSDBAUT
DSNDB06.SYSGROUP
DSNDB06.SYSPLAN
DSNDB06.SYSVIEWS
DSNDB01.DBD01
v REORG TABLESPACE with STATISTICS cannot collect inline statistics on the

following catalog and directory table spaces:
DSNDB06.SYSDBASE
DSNDB06.SYSDBAUT
DSNDB06.SYSGROUP
DSNDB06.SYSPLAN
DSNDB06.SYSVIEWS
DSBDB06.SYSSTATS
DSNDB06.SYSHIST
DSNDB01.DBD01
Phases for reorganizing the catalog and directory

REORG TABLESPACE processes certain catalog and directory table spaces
differently from other table spaces; it does not execute the BUILD and SORT
phases for the following table spaces:
v DSNDB06.SYSDBASE
v DSNDB06.SYSDBAUT
v DSNDB06.SYSGROUP
v DSNDB06.SYSPLAN
v DSNDB06.SYSVIEWS
v DSNDB01.DBD01
For these table spaces, REORG TABLESPACE reloads the indexes (in addition to
the table space) during the RELOAD phase, rather than storing the index keys in a
work data set for sorting.
For all other catalog and directory table spaces, DB2 uses index build parallelism.
Changing data set definitions

If the table space is defined by storage groups, DB2 allocates space, and you
cannot alter data set definitions during the reorganization process. DB2 deletes and
redefines the necessary data sets to reorganize the object.
For REORG with SHRLEVEL REFERENCE or CHANGE, you can use the ALTER
STOGROUP command to change the characteristics of a DB2-managed data set. To
change the characteristics of a user-managed data set, specify the desired new
characteristics when you create the shadow data set. For example, placing the
original and shadow data sets on different disk volumes might reduce contention
and thus improve the performance of REORG and the performance of applications
during REORG execution.
Related reference
Shadow data sets on page 490
Temporarily interrupting REORG

You can temporarily pause REORG TABLESPACE.
504
If you specify UNLOAD PAUSE, REORG pauses after unloading the table space
into the unload data set. You cannot use NOSYSREC and PAUSE. The job
completes with return code 4. You can restart REORG by using the phase restart or
current restart. Do not alter the REORG statement.
The REORG utility remains in stopped status until REORG is restarted or
terminated.
While REORG is interrupted by PAUSE, you can redefine the table space attributes
for user-defined table spaces. PAUSE is not required for STOGROUP-defined table
spaces. Attribute changes are done automatically by a REORG following an ALTER
TABLESPACE.
Building a compression dictionary

The REORG utility builds the compression dictionary during the UNLOAD
process. This dictionary is then used during the RELOAD phase to compress the
data
To build a compression dictionary:
Specify the KEEPDICTIONARY option to save the cost of rebuilding the dictionary
if you are satisfied with the current compression ratio.
Overriding dynamic DFSORT and SORTDATA allocation

If your REORG job includes the SORTDATA option, DB2 estimates how many
rows are to be sorted and passes this information to DFSORT on the parameter
FILSZ. DFSORT then dynamically allocates the necessary sort work space.
If the table space contains rows with VARCHAR columns, DB2 might not be able
to accurately estimate the number of rows. If the estimated number of rows is too
high and the sort work space is not available or if the estimated number of rows is
too low, DFSORT might fail and cause an abend.
Recommendation: Run RUNSTATS UPDATE SPACE before the REORG so that
DB2 calculates a more accurate estimate.
You can override this dynamic allocation of sort work space in two ways:
v Allocate the sort work data sets with SORTWKnn DD statements in your JCL.
v Override the DB2 row estimate in FILSZ using control statements that are
passed to DFSORT. However, using control statements overrides size estimates
that are passed to DFSORT in all invocations of DFSORT in the job step,
including sorting keys to build indexes, and any sorts that are done in any other
utility that is executed in the same step. The result might be reduced sort
efficiency or an abend due to an out-of-space condition.
Rebalancing partitions by using REORG

You can rebalance partitions by using the REORG TABLESPACE utility.
You can use the following methods to rebalance partitions:
v Use ALTER INDEX to modify the limit keys for partition boundaries before you
use REORG TABLESPACE.
v Use ALTER TABLE ALTER PARTITION before you use REORG TABLESPACE.
505
v Use REBALANCE on the REORG TABLESPACE utility.

Restriction: You cannot use the REBALANCE option with the SCOPE
PENDING option.
If you use ALTER INDEX to modify the limit keys for partition boundaries, you
must subsequently use REORG TABLESPACE to redistribute data in the
partitioned table spaces based on the new key values and to reset the
REORG-pending status. The following example specifies options that help
maximize performance while performing the necessary rebalancing reorganization:
REORG TABLESPACE DSN8S91E PART 2:3
NOSYSREC COPYDDN SYSCOPY STATISTICS TABLE INDEX(ALL)
You can reorganize a range of partitions, even if the partitions are not in
REORG-pending status. If you specify the STATISTICS keyword, REORG collects
data about the specified range of partitions.
If you perform a REORG on partitions that are in the REORG-pending status, be
aware that:
v You must specify SHRLEVEL NONE if the object is in REORG-pending status.
Otherwise, REORG terminates and issues message DSNU273I and return code 8.
v REORG ignores the KEEPDICTIONARY option for any partition that is in
REORG-pending status; REORG automatically rebuilds the dictionaries for the
affected partitions. However, if you specify a range of partitions that includes
some partitions that are not in REORG-pending restrictive status, REORG honors
the KEEPDICTIONARY option for those nonrestricted partitions.
v If any partition is in REORG-pending status when REORG executes, DB2 writes
a SYSCOPY record with STYPE=A for each partition that is specified on the
REORG job.
v If you take an inline image copy of a range of partitions, DB2 writes one
SYSCOPY record with ICTYPE=F for each partition, and each record has the
same data set name.
v Specify the DISCARDDN and PUNCHDDN data sets for a table space that is
defined as LARGE or DSSIZE, but has had the limit key for the last partition of
the table space reduced by a subsequent ALTER INDEX statement. Otherwise,
REORG terminates and issues message DSNU035I and return code 8.
You cannot reorganize a subset of a range of partitions that are in REORG-pending
status; you must reorganize the entire range to reset the restrictive status.
Rebalancing partitions when the clustering index does not match

the partitioning key
For a table that has a clustering index that does not match the partitioning key,
you must run REORG TABLESPACE twice so that data is rebalanced and all rows
are in clustering order. The first utility execution rebalances the data and the
second utility execution sorts the data.
For example, assume you have a table space that was created with the following
SQL:
-----------------------------------------SQL to create a table and index with
separate columns for partitioning
and clustering
------------------------------------------
506
CREATE TABLESPACE TS IN DB
USING STOGROUP SG
NUMPARTS 4 BUFFERPOOL BP0;
CREATE TABLE TB (C01 CHAR(5) NOT NULL,
C02 CHAR(5) NOT NULL,
C03 CHAR(5) NOT NULL)
IN DB.TS
PARTITION BY (C01)
(PART 1 VALUES ('00001'),
PART 2 VALUES ('00002'),
PART 3 VALUES ('00003'),
PART 4 VALUES ('00004'));
CREATE INDEX IX ON TB(C02) CLUSTER;
To rebalance the data across the four partitions, use the following REORG
TABLESPACE control statement:
REORG TABLESPACE DB.TS REBALANCE
After the preceding utility job completes, the table space is placed in AREO* status
to indicate that a subsequent reorganization is recommended to ensure that the
rows are in clustering order. For this subsequent reorganization, use the following
REORG TABLESPACE control statement:
REORG TABLESPACE DB.TS
How to unload and reload partitions in parallel
|
|
The REORG utility attempts to unload and reload partitions in parallel in some
situations and does not attempt to unload and reload in other situations.
|
|
|
|
|
|
REORG attempts to unload and reload table space partitions in parallel in the
following situations:
v If you specify the NOSYSREC keyword.
v If the NOSYSREC keyword is defaulted like it is for SHRLEVEL CHANGE
v If you specify the UNLDDN keyword with a template name, where the
templates data set name pattern includes a partition number.
|
|
|
REORG does not attempt to unload and reload table space partitions in parallel in
the following situations:
v If the DATAWKnn DD statements are coded in the JCL.
|
|
v If you do not specify the SORTDEVT keyword.

v If the UTPRINT data set is not allocated to SYSOUT.
|
|
v If you specify the REBALANCE keyword.

v If rows might move from one partition to another.
Using inline copy with REORG TABLESPACE

You can create a full image copy data set (SHRLEVEL REFERENCE) during
REORG TABLESPACE execution.
The new copy is an inline copy. The advantage to using an inline copy is that the
table space is not left in COPY-pending status, regardless of which LOG option is
specified for the utility. Thus, data availability is increased. You must take an inline
copy when you specify the REBALANCE option.
507
To create an inline copy, use the COPYDDN and RECOVERYDDN keywords. You
can specify up to two primary copies and two secondary copies. Inline copies are
produced during the RELOAD phase of REORG processing.
The SYSCOPY record that is produced by an inline copy contains ICTYPE=F,
SHRLEVEL=R. The STYPE column contains an X if the image copy was produced
by REORG TABLESPACE LOG(YES), and a W if the image copy was produced by
REORG TABLESPACE LOG(NO). The data set that is produced by the inline copy
is logically equivalent to a full image copy with SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, but the
data within the data set differs in some respects:
v Data pages might be out of sequence and some might be repeated. If pages are
repeated, the last one is always the correct copy.
v Space map pages are out of sequence and might be repeated
The total number of duplicate pages is small, with a negligible effect on the
amount of space that is required for the data set. One exception to this guideline is
the case of running REORG SHRLEVEL CHANGE, in which the number of
duplicate pages varies with the number of records that are applied during the LOG
phase.
Improving REORG TABLESPACE performance

You can improve the performance of the REORG TABLESPACE utility by taking
certain actions.
Recommendation: Run online REORG during light periods of activity on the table
space or index.
To improve REORG TABLESPACE performance,
v Run REORG concurrently on separate partitions of a partitioned table space if
no nonpartitioned indexes exist. When you run REORG on partitions of a
partitioned table space, the sum of each jobs processor usage is greater than for
a single REORG job on the entire table space. However, the elapsed time of
reorganizing the entire table in parallel can be significantly less than it would be
for a single REORG job.
v Use parallel index build for table spaces or partitions that have more than one
defined index.
v Specify NOSYSREC on your REORG statement.
v If you are not using NOSYSREC, use an UNLDDN template to enable unload
parallelism.
v If you are using 3990 caching, and you have the nonpartitioning indexes on
RAMAC, consider specifying YES on the UTILITY CACHE OPTION field of
installation panel DSNTIPE.
This option allows DB2 to use sequential prestaging when reading data from
RAMAC for the following utilities:
LOAD PART integer RESUME
REORG TABLESPACE PART
For LOAD PART and REORG TABLESPACE PART utility jobs, prefetch reads
remain in the cache longer, which can lead to possible improvements in the
performance of subsequent writes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Use inline copy and inline statistics instead of running separate COPY and
RUNSTATS utilities.
508
v Schedule REORG with SHRLEVEL CHANGE when the rate of writing is low
and transactions are short. Avoid scheduling REORG with SHRLEVEL CHANGE
when critical applications are executing.
Under certain circumstances, the log records that REORG SHRLEVEL CHANGE
uses contain additional information, as if DATA CAPTURE CHANGES were
used. Generation of the additional information can slow applications and
increase consumption of log space. The additional information is generated for
all the tables in the table space if at least one table satisfies all these conditions:
The table has undergone ALTER TABLE ADD column.
The table does not use DATA CAPTURE CHANGES.
One of these conditions is true:
- The area that is being reorganized uses data compression.
- The area is a partitioned table space, and at least one partition uses data
compression.
v Run REORG with DRAIN_WAIT.
The DRAIN_WAIT option gives you greater control over the time that online
REORG is to wait for drains. Also because the DRAIN_WAIT is the aggregate
time that online REORG is to wait to perform a drain on a table space and
associated indexes, the length of drains is more predictable than if each partition
and index has its own individual waiting time limit.
By specifying a short delay time (less than the system timeout value,
IRLMRWT), you can reduce the impact on applications by reducing time-outs.
You can use the RETRY option to give the online REORG more chances to
complete successfully. If you do not want to use RETRY processing, you can still
use DRAIN_WAIT to set a specific and more consistent limit on the length of
drains.
RETRY allows an online REORG that is unable to drain the objects that it
requires so that DB2 can try again after a set period (RETRY_DELAY). During
the RETRY_DELAY period, all the objects are available for read-write access in
the case of SHRLEVEL CHANGE. For SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, the objects
remain with the access that existed prior to the attempted drain (that is if the
drain fails in the UNLOAD phase the object remains in read-write access; if the
drain fails in the SWITCH phase, objects remain in read-only access).
Because application SQL statements can queue behind any unsuccessful drain
that the online REORG has tried, define a reasonable delay before you retry to
allow this work to complete; the default is 5 minutes.
When you specify DRAIN WRITERS (the default) with SHRLEVEL CHANGE
and RETRY, multiple read-only log iterations can occur. Generally, online
REORG might need to do more work when RETRY is specified, and this might
result in multiple or extended periods of restricted access. Applications that run
alongside online REORG need to perform frequent commits. During the interval
between retries, the utility is still active, and consequently other utility activity
against the table space and indexes is restricted.
Parallel index building for REORG TABLESPACE

Parallel index building reduces the elapsed time for a REORG TABLESPACE job by
sorting the index keys and rebuilding multiple indexes in parallel, rather than
sequentially. Optimally, a pair of subtasks processes each index; one subtlest sorts
extracted keys, while the other subtlest builds the index. REORG TABLESPACE
begins building each index as soon as the corresponding sort emits its first sorted
record.
509
The following figure shows the flow of a REORG TABLESPACE job that uses a
parallel index build. DB2 starts multiple subtasks to sort index keys and build
indexes in parallel. If you specify STATISTICS, additional subtasks collect the
sorted keys and update the catalog table in parallel, eliminating the need for a
second scan of the index by a separate RUNSTATS job.
Figure 73. How indexes are built during a parallel index build
REORG TABLESPACE uses parallel index build if more than one index needs to be
built (including the mapping index for SHRLEVEL CHANGE). You can either let
the utility dynamically allocate the data sets that SORT needs for this parallel
index build or provide the necessary data sets yourself.
Select one of the following methods to allocate sort work and message data sets:
Method 1:
REORG TABLESPACE determines the optimal number of sort work data sets and
message data sets.
2. Allow dynamic allocation of sort work data sets by not supplying SORTWKnn
DD statements in the REORG TABLESPACE utility JCL.
Method 2:
Control allocation of sort work data sets, while REORG TABLESPACE allocates
message data sets.
Method 3:
Exercise the most control over rebuild processing; specify both sort work data sets
and message data sets.
510
Data sets used

If you select Method 2 or 3 in the preceding information, define the necessary data
sets by using the following information.
print message data set. Possible reasons to allocate data sets in the utility job JCL
rather than using dynamic allocation are:
v To control the size and placement of the data sets
v To minimize device contention
v To optimally utilize free disk space
v To limit the number of utility subtasks that are used to build indexes
The DD name SWnnWKmm defines the sort work data sets that are used during
SW01WK01
first index.
SW01WK02
first index.
SW02WK01
second index.
SW02WK02
second index.
The DD name UTPRINnn defines the sort work message data sets that are used by
Number of sort subtasks

The maximum number of utility subtask pairs that are started for parallel index
build is equal to the number of indexes that need to be built.
REORG TABLESPACE determines the number of subtask pairs according to the
following guidelines:
v The number of subtask pairs equals the number of allocated sort work data set
groups.
v The number of subtask pairs equals the number of allocated message data sets.
v If you allocate both sort work data sets and message data set groups, the
number of subtask pairs equals the smallest number of allocated data sets.

REORG TABLESPACE attempts to assign one sort subtask pair for each index that
is to be built. If REORG TABLESPACE cannot start enough subtasks to build one
index per subtask pair, it allocates any excess indexes across the pairs; therefore
one or more subtask pairs might build more than one index.
511
During parallel index build processing, REORG distributes all indexes among the
subtask pairs according to the index creation date, assigning the first created index
to the first subtask pair. For SHRLEVEL CHANGE, the mapping index is assigned
last.

keys that are present in all of the indexes that are being processed by the subtask
in order to calculate each sort work file size. After you determine which indexes
are assigned to which subtask pairs, use the following formula to calculate the
required space:
2 * (longest index key + c) * (number of extracted keys)
longest key
The length of the longest index key that is to be processed by the subtask.
If the index is of varying length, the longest key is the maximum possible
length of a key with all varying-length columns that are padded to their
maximum length, plus 2 bytes for each varying-length column in the
index. For example, if an index with three columns (A, B, and C) has
length values of CHAR(8) for A, VARCHAR(128) for B, and VARCHAR(50)
for C, the longest key is calculated as follows:
8 + 128 + 50 + 2 + 2 = 190
For SHRLEVEL CHANGE, the mapping index key length is 21.

c
A value as follows:
v 10 if the indexes that are rebuilt are a mix of data-partitioned secondary
indexes and nonpartitioned indexes
v 8 if all indexes are partitioned or none of them are data-partitioned
secondary indexes.
number of extracted keys

The number of keys from all indexes that need to be sorted and that are to
be processed by the subtask.
Do not count keys that belong to partitioning indexes should not be counted in the
sort work data set size calculation. The space estimation formula might indicate
that 0 bytes are required (because the only index that is processed by a task set is
the partitioning index). In this case, if you allocate your own sort work data set
groups, you still need to allocate sort work data sets for this task set, but you can
use a minimal allocation, such as 1 track.
Related concepts
Improving performance with LOAD or REORG PREFORMAT on page 274
Methods of unloading data

DB2 unloads data by table space scan with sort, table space scan, or clustering
index.
DB2 unloads data by one of three methods:
v Table space scan with sort: If at least one table space has an index, DB2 uses a
table space scan with a sort.
v Table space scan: DB2 uses a table space scan for simple table spaces that contain
more than one table, or that contain one table but do not have an index.
512
v Clustering index: DB2 uses this option for simple table spaces that contain one
table and have an index, and for tables in a segmented table space that have an
index.
Encountering an error in the RELOAD phase

Failure during the RELOAD phase (after the data is unloaded and data sets are
deleted, but before the data is reloaded) results in an unusable table space.
If the error is on the table space data:
v If you have defined data sets, you can allocate new data sets.
v If STOGROUP has defined data sets, you can alter the new table space to change
the primary and secondary quantities.
v If you allocate new data sets, alter the table space, or add volumes to the storage
group, restart the REORG job at the beginning of the phase. Otherwise, you can
restart either at the last commit point or at the beginning of the phase.
If the error is on the unloaded data, or if you used the NOSYSREC option,
terminate REORG by using the TERM UTILITY command. Then recover the table
space, using RECOVER, and run the REORG job again.
Reorganization of partitioned table spaces

If you reorganize a single partition or a range of partitions, all indexes of the table
space are affected. Depending on how disorganized the nonpartitioning indexes
are, you might want to reorganize them, as well.
Related tasks
Determining when an index requires reorganization on page 439
Reorganization of partition-by-growth table spaces

|
|
|
When you reorganize an entire partition-by-growth table space that does not
contain LOB columns, the REORG TABLESPACE utility condenses the data into
the minimum number of required partitions.
|
|
|
|
|
Because the REORG TABLESPACE utility cannot reclaim physical space, the excess
partition will be empty. If the data needs additional space, the REORG
TABLESPACE utility triggers the process to add additional partitions if the
maximum number of partitions has not been reached. If the maximum number of
partitions has been reached, the REORG TABLESPACE utility fails.
|
|
|
|
|
If you specify REORG TABLESPACE PART for a partition-by-growth table space,

the utility will fail if the data does not fit back into its partition because of the
change in the free space parameter during the REORG. To prevent the utility from
failing, run REORG TABLESPACE on the entire table space or modify the free
space parameter to fit the data rows into the partition.
To ensure that the REORG utility is able to condense the data into the minimum
number of required partitions, parallelism for the REORG utility does not apply to
|
|
|
If the partition-by-growth table space contains LOB columns, the REORG

TABLESPACE utility minimizes partitions by eliminating existing holes, but does
not move the data from one partition to another.
513
When you reorganize a partition-by-growth table space at the partition level, the
REORG TABLESPACE utility minimizes partitions by eliminating existing holes.
If there is a compression dictionary, the compression dictionary is copied to all
partitions even if the partition is empty.
|
|
Reorganization of segmented table spaces

The REORG TABLESPACE utility reorganizes segmented table spaces.
If the target table space is segmented, REORG unloads and reloads by table.
If an index exists on a table in a segmented table space, that table is unloaded in
clustering sequence. If NO index exists, the table is unloaded in physical row and
segment order.
For segmented table spaces, REORG does not normally need to reclaim space from
dropped tables. Space that is freed by dropping tables in a segmented table space
is immediately available if the table space can be accessed when DROP TABLE is
executed. If the table space cannot be accessed when DROP TABLE is executed (for
example, the disk device is offline), DB2 removes the table from the catalog, but
does not delete all table rows. In this case, the space for the dropped table is not
available until REORG reclaims it.
After you run REORG, the segments for each table are contiguous.
Counting records loaded during RELOAD phase

At the end of the RELOAD phase, REORG compares the number of records that
were actually loaded to the number of records that were unloaded.
If the counts do not match, the resulting actions depend on the UNLOAD option
that you specified on the original job:
v If you specify UNLOAD PAUSE, REORG sets return code 4 and continues
processing the job.
v If you specify UNLOAD CONTINUE, DB2 issues an error message and
abnormally terminates the job. The table space or partition remains in
Reorganization of a LOB table space

Reorganizing a LOB table space is a separate task from reorganizing the base table
space.
For SHRLEVEL NONE, REORG does not unload LOBs, and it does not reclaim
physical space. A LOB table space that is defined with LOG YES or LOG NO
affects logging during the reorganization of a LOB column. The following table
shows the logging output and LOB table space effect, if any. SYSIBM.SYSCOPY is
not updated.
Table 92. LOAD LOG and REORG LOG impact for a LOB table space
LOG keyword
attribute
What is logged
LOB table space

completes
LOG YES
No pending status
514
LOG YES
Control information and LOB data
Table 92. LOAD LOG and REORG LOG impact for a LOB table space (continued)
LOG keyword
attribute
What is logged
LOB table space

completes
LOG YES
LOG NO
Control information
No pending status
LOG NO
LOG YES
Nothing
COPY-Pending1
LOG NO
LOG NO
Nothing
COPY-Pending1
Note:
1. REORG LOG NO of a LOB table space requires SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, which requires that an inline copy be
taken during the REORG. This means that you never set COPY-pending for REORG of LOB table spaces under
any circumstances
|
|
|
For SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, LOBs are unloaded to a shadow data set and
physical space is reclaimed. If you specify SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, LOG NO and
an inline image copy are required and no updates are logged during the REORG.
Termination of REORG TABLESPACE

You can terminate the REORG TABLESPACE utility.
If you terminate REORG TABLESPACE with the TERM UTILITY command during
the UNLOAD phase, objects have not yet been changed, and you can rerun the
job.
If you terminate REORG TABLESPACE with the TERM UTILITY command during
the RELOAD phase, the behavior depends on the SHRLEVEL option:
v For SHRLEVEL NONE, the data records are not erased. The table space and
indexes remain in RECOVER-pending status. After you recover the table space,
rerun the REORG job.
v For SHRLEVEL REFERENCE or CHANGE, the data records are reloaded into
shadow objects, so the original objects have not been affected by REORG. You
can rerun the job.
If you terminate REORG with the TERM UTILITY command during the SORT,
BUILD, or LOG phases, the behavior depends on the SHRLEVEL option:
v For SHRLEVEL NONE, the indexes that are not yet built remain in
RECOVER-pending status. You can run REORG with the SORTDATA option, or
you can run REBUILD INDEX to rebuild those indexes.
v For SHRLEVEL REFERENCE or CHANGE, the records are reloaded into shadow
objects, so the original objects have not been affected by REORG. You can rerun
the job.
If you terminate a stopped REORG utility with the TERM UTILITY command
during the SWITCH phase, the following conditions apply:
v All data sets that were renamed to their shadow counterparts are renamed to
their original names, so that the objects remain in their original state, and you
can rerun the job.
v If a problem occurs in renaming the data sets to the original names, the objects
remain in RECOVER-pending status, and you cannot rerun the job.
If the SWITCH phase does not complete, the image copy that REORG created is
not available for use by the RECOVER utility. If you terminate an active REORG
515
utility during the SWITCH phase with the TERM UTILITY command, during the
rename process, the renaming occurs, and the SWITCH phase completes. The
image copy that REORG created is available for use by the RECOVER utility.
The REORG-pending status is not reset until the UTILTERM execution phase. If the
REORG utility abnormally terminates or is terminated, the objects remain in
REORG-pending status and RECOVER-pending status, depending on the phase in
which the failure occurred.
The following table lists the restrictive states that REORG TABLESPACE sets
according to the phase in which the utility terminated.
Table 93. Restrictive states that REORG TABLESPACE sets.
Phase
Effect on restrictive status
UNLOAD
No effect.
RELOAD
SHRLEVEL NONE:
v Places table space in RECOVER-pending status at the beginning of the
phase and resets the status at the end of the phase.
v Places indexes in RECOVER-pending status.
v Places the table space in COPY-pending status. If COPYDDN is
specified and SORTKEYS is ignored, the COPY-pending status is reset
at the end of the phase. SORTKEYS is ignored for several catalog and
directory table spaces
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE or CHANGE has no effect.
SORT
No effect.
BUILD
SHRLEVEL NONE resets RECOVER-pending status for indexes and, if

the utility job includes both COPYDDN and SORTKEYS, resets
COPY-pending status for table spaces at the end of the phase.
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE or CHANGE has no effect.
SORTBLD
No effect during the sort portion of the SORTBLD phase. During the
build portion of the SORTBLD phase, the effect is the same as for the
BUILD phase.
LOG
No effect.
SWITCH
No effect. Under certain conditions, if TERM UTILITY is issued, it must

complete successfully; otherwise, objects might be placed in
Recovering a failed REORG job

If you terminate REORG SHRLEVEL NONE in the RELOAD phase, all SYSLGRNX
records associated with the reorganization are deleted. Use the RECOVER
TABLESPACE utility to recover to the current point in time. This action recovers
the table space to its state before the failed reorganization.
516
Related concepts
Reorganizing the catalog and directory on page 502
Related reference
Restart of REORG TABLESPACE

You can restart the REORG TABLESPACE utility.
|
|
|
By default, DB2 uses RESTART(CURRENT) when restarting REORG TABLESPACE

jobs, with the following exceptions:
v Jobs that are restarted in the SORT, BUILD, or SWITCH phase use
RESTART(PHASE) by default.
v Jobs with the SORTKEYS option that are restarted in the RELOAD, SORT,
BUILD, or SORTBLD phase always restart from the beginning of the RELOAD
phase.
v Jobs with the SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, NOSYSREC, and SORTDATA options
use RESTART(PHASE) to restart at the beginning of the UNLOAD phase.
v Jobs with unload parallelism for REORG TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL NONE use
RESTART(PHASE) to restart at the beginning of the UNLOAD and RELOAD
phases.
v Jobs that reorganize the following catalog or directory table spaces use
RESTART(PHASE):
DSNDB06.SYSDBASE
DSNDB06.SYSDBAUT
DSNDB06.SYSGROUP
DSNDB06.SYSPLAN
DSNDB06.SYSVIEWS
DSNDB01.DBD01
If you restart a REORG job of one or more of the catalog or directory table spaces
in the preceding list, you cannot use RESTART(CURRENT).
If you restart REORG in the UTILINIT phase, it re-executes from the beginning of
the phase. If REORG abnormally terminates or system failure occurs while it is in
the UTILTERM phase, you must restart the job with RESTART(PHASE).
The following table provides information about restarting REORG TABLESPACE,
depending on the phase that REORG was in when the job stopped. For each phase
of REORG and for each type of REORG TABLESPACE (with SHRLEVEL NONE,
with SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, and with SHRLEVEL CHANGE), the following
table indicates the types of restarts that are allowed (CURRENT and PHASE). A
value of None indicates that no restart is allowed. The Data Sets Required
column lists the data sets that must exist to perform the specified type of restart in
the specified phase.
517
Table 94. REORG TABLESPACE utility restart information for SHRLEVEL NONE, REFERENCE, and CHANGE
Type of
restart
allowed for
SHRLEVEL
NONE
Type of
restart
allowed for
SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE
Type of
restart
allowed for
SHRLEVEL
CHANGE
Required data sets
UNLOAD
CURRENT,
PHASE
CURRENT,
PHASE6
None
SYSREC
RELOAD
CURRENT,
PHASE
CURRENT,
PHASE6
None
SYSREC
1, 2
SORT
CURRENT,
PHASE
CURRENT,
PHASE6
None
None
2, 3
BUILD
CURRENT,
PHASE
CURRENT,
PHASE6
None
None
2, 3, 4
SORTBLD
CURRENT,
PHASE
CURRENT,
PHASE6
None
None
LOG
Phase does
not occur
Phase does
not occur6
None
None
SWITCH
Phase does
not occur
CURRENT,
PHASE
CURRENT,
PHASE
Originals and shadows
Phase
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Notes
3, 5
Note:
1. For None, if you specify NOSYSREC, restart is not possible, and you must execute the RECOVER TABLESPACE
utility for the table space or partition. For REFERENCE, if the REORG job includes both SORTDATA and
NOSYSREC, RESTART or RESTART(PHASE) restarts at the beginning of the UNLOAD phase.
2. If you specify SHRLEVEL NONE or SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, and the job includes the SORTKEYS option, use
RESTART or RESTART(PHASE) to restart at the beginning of the RELOAD phase.
3. You can restart the utility with RESTART or RESTART(PHASE). However, because this phase does not take
checkpoints, RESTART restarts from the beginning of the phase.
4. If you specify the PART option with REORG TABLESPACE, you cannot restart the utility at the beginning of the
BUILD phase if any nonpartitioning index is in a page set REBUILD-pending (PSRBD) status.
5. If you specify REORG TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL REFERENCE PART with one or more nonpartitioned indexes,
restart is allowed only in the SWITCH phase.
6. For REORG TABLESPACE with SHRLEVEL REFERENCE and PART, if a nonpartitioned index is defined on the
table space, REORG TABLESPACE cannot be restarted before the SWITCH phase.
If you restart a REORG STATISTICS job by using RESTART CURRENT, inline

statistics are not collected. To update catalog statistics, run the RUNSTATS utility
after the restarted job completes. Restarting a REORG STATISTICS job with
RESTART(PHASE) is conditional after executing UNLOAD PAUSE. To determine if
catalog table statistics are going to be updated, see the following table. This table
shows whether or not statistics are updated for REORG STATISTICS jobs according
to the phase in which the job terminated and the restart value that was used.
Table 95. Statistics collection for REORG TABLESPACE utility phase restart
518
Phase
CURRENT
PHASE
UTILINIT
NO
YES
UNLOAD
NO
YES
RELOAD
NO
YES
SORT
NO
NO
BUILD
NO
YES
SORTBLD
NO
YES
Related tasks
Chapter 3, Invoking DB2 online utilities, on page 13
Review of REORG TABLESPACE output

The output from REORG TABLESPACE consists of a reorganized table space,
partition, or a range of partitions.
The following table summarizes the effect of REORG on a table space partition and
on the corresponding index partition.
Table 96. Summary of the results of REORG TABLESPACE according to the type of
specification.
Specification
Results
REORG TABLESPACE All data + entire partitioning index + all nonpartitioning indexes
REORG TABLESPACE Data for PART n + PART n of the partitioning index + index entries
PART n
for PART n in all nonpartitioning indexes
REORG TABLESPACE
Data for PART n1 through n2 + PART n1 through n2 of the
PART n1:n2
partitioning index + index entries for those partitions in all
nonpartitioning indexes
REORG TABLESPACE Specified table space or partitions that are in REORG-pending
SCOPE PENDING
status.
|
|
|
|
REORG SHRLEVEL
CHANGE PART and
SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE PART
Unloads and builds entire NPIs, so that the NPI is largely

reorganized even though only a part of the data is actually
reorganized.
When reorganizing a segmented table space, REORG leaves free pages and free
space on each page in accordance with the current values of the FREEPAGE and
PCTFREE parameters. (You can set those values by using the CREATE
TABLESPACE, ALTER TABLESPACE, CREATE INDEX, or ALTER INDEX
statements). REORG leaves one free page after reaching the FREEPAGE limit for
each table in the table space. When reorganizing a nonsegmented table space,
REORG leaves one free page after reaching the FREEPAGE limit, regardless of
whether the loaded records belong to the same or different tables.
After running REORG TABLESPACE

Certain activities might be required after you run the REORG TABLESPACE utility,
After a reorganization is complete, perform the following actions:
v If you have used LOG YES, consider taking an image copy of the reorganized
table space or partition to:
Provide a full image copy for recovery. This action prevents the need to
process the log records that are written during reorganization.
Permit making incremental image copies later.
You might not need to take an image copy of a table space for which all the
following statements are true:
The table space is relatively small.
The table space is used only in read-only applications.
519
The table space can be easily loaded again in the event of failure.
v If you use COPYDDN, SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, or SHRLEVEL CHANGE, and
the object that you are reorganizing is not a catalog or directory table space for
which COPYDDN is ignored, you do not need to take an image copy.
v Use the RUNSTATS utility on the table space and its indexes if inline statistics
were not collected, so that the DB2 catalog statistics take into account the newly
reorganized data, and SQL paths can be selected with accurate information. You
need to run RUNSTATS on nonpartitioning indexes only if you reorganized a
subset of the partitions.
v If you use REORG TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL CHANGE, you can drop the
mapping table and its index.
v If you use SHRLEVEL REFERENCE or CHANGE, and a table space, partition, or
index resides in user-managed data sets, you can delete the user-managed
shadow data sets.
v If you specify DISCARD on a REORG of a table that is involved in a referential
integrity set, you need to run CHECK DATA for any affected referentially
related objects that were placed in CHECK-pending status.
Related reference
Chapter 11, COPY, on page 113
Effects of running REORG TABLESPACE

Running the REORG TABLESPACE utility can have effects on index version
numbers and the version of the data, control intervals, row formats, and NOT
LOGGED table spaces.
The effect of REORG TABLESPACE on index version numbers

and the version of the data
DB2 stores the range of used version numbers in the OLDEST_VERSION and
CURRENT_VERSION columns of one or more of the following catalog tables,
depending on the object:
v SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPART
v SYSIBM.SYSINDEXES
When you run REORG TABLESPACE, the utility sets all of the rows in the table or
partition to the current object version. The utility also updates the range of used
version numbers for indexes that are defined with the COPY NO attribute. REORG
TABLESPACE sets the OLDEST_VERSION column equal to the
CURRENT_VERSION column in the appropriate catalog column. These updated
values indicate that only one version is active. DB2 can then reuse all of the other
version numbers.
situations is true:
520
v The value in the CURRENT_VERSION column is 255 for table spaces or 15 for
indexes, and the value in the OLDEST_VERSION column is 0 or 1.
You can also run LOAD REPLACE, REBUILD INDEX, or REORG INDEX to
The effect of REORG TABLESPACE on the control interval

When you run REORG TABLESPACE without the REUSE option and the data set
that contains that data is DB2managed, DB2 deletes this data set before the
REORG and redefines a new data set with a control interval that matches the page
size.
The effect of REORG TABLESPACE on row format

When you run REORG on a table space or partition that is in basic row format,
REORG converts that table space or partition to reordered row format. If there is a
table in the table space with an EDITPROC or VALIDPROC, the table space or
partition remains in basic row format after the REORG. These conversions can only
be performed in new function mode.
|
|
|
|
|
If you run REORG on a catalog or directory table space, the catalog or directory
table space remains in basic row format.
The effect of REORG on NOT LOGGED table spaces

The following table shows the effect of REORG on NOT LOGGED table spaces.
Table 97. REORG parameters
LOAD REORG LOG
keyword
Table space logging

attribute
Table space type
What is logged
Table space status

after utility
completes
LOG YES
NOT LOGGED
Non-LOB
LOG YES changes to

LOG NO
ICOPY-pending1
LOG YES
NOT LOGGED
LOB
control information
No pending status
LOG NO
NOT LOGGED
Non-LOB
nothing
ICOPY-pending1
LOG NO
NOT LOGGED
LOB
nothing
No pending status
Note:
1. The table space is set to ICOPY-pending status if the records are discarded and no pending status is the records
are not discarded.
Sample REORG TABLESPACE control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own REORG
TABLESPACE control statements.
Example 1: Reorganizing a table space.

The following control statement specifies that the REORG TABLESPACE utility is
to reorganize table space DSN8S91D in database DSN8D91A.
521
REORG TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D
Example 2: Reorganizing a table space and specifying the

unload data set
The following control statement specifies that REORG TABLESPACE is to
reorganize table space DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D. The DD name for the unload data
set is UNLD, as specified by the UNLDDN option.
//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='IUJLU101.REORG',
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='DSN'
//UNLD
DD DSN=IUJLU101.REORG.STEP1.UNLD,DISP=(MOD,DELETE,CATLG),
//
//SORTWK01 DD DSN=IUJLU101.REORG.STEP1.SORTWK01,DISP=(MOD,DELETE,CATLG),
//
//SORTWK02 DD DSN=IUJLU101.REORG.STEP1.SORTWK02,DISP=(MOD,DELETE,CATLG),
//
//SYSIN
DD *
REORG TABLESPACE (DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D)
UNLDDN (UNLD)
//*
Figure 74. Example REORG TABLESPACE control statement with the UNLDDN option
Example 3: Reorganizing a table space partition

reorganize partition 3 of table space DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E. The SORTDEVT option
indicates the device type for the temporary data sets that are to be dynamically
REORG TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E
PART 3
SORTDEVT SYSDA
Example 4: Reorganizing a table and using parallel index build

reorganize table space DSNDB04.DSN8S81D and to use a parallel index build to
rebuild the indexes. The indexes are built in parallel, because more than one index
needs to be built and the job allocates the data sets that DFSORT needs. Note that
you no longer need to specify SORTKEYS; it is the default.
The job allocates the sort work data sets in two groups, which limits the number of
pairs of utility subtasks to two. This example does not require UTPRINnn DD
statements because it uses DSNUPROC to invoke utility processing. DSNUPROC
includes a DD statement that allocates UTPRINT to SYSOUT.
LOG NO specifies that records are not to be logged during the RELOAD phase.
This option puts the table space in COPY-pending status.
522
//SAMPJOB JOB ...

//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='SAMPJOB.REORG',UTPROC='',SYSTEM='DSN'
//SYSREC
DD DSN=SAMPJOB.REORG.STEP1.SYSREC,DISP=(NEW,DELETE,CATLG),
//
//* First group of sort work data sets for parallel index build
//* Second group of sort work data sets for parallel index build
//* Sort work data sets for use by SORTDATA
//SORTWK01 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(10,20),,,ROUND)
//SYSIN
DD *
REORG TABLESPACE DSNDB04.DSN8S91D LOG NO
/*
Figure 75. Example REORG TABLESPACE control statement with LOG NO option
Example 5: Reorganizing a table while allowing read-write

access
reorganize table space DSNDB04.DSN8S81E and to use a parallel index build to
rebuild the indexes. DFSORT dynamically allocates sort work data sets. This
example does not require UTPRINnn DD statements because it uses DSNUPROC
to invoke utility processing. DSNUPROC includes a DD statement that allocates
UTPRINT to SYSOUT. The SORTDEVT option indicates the device type for the
temporary data sets that are to be dynamically allocated by DFSORT. The
SHRLEVEL CHANGE option specifies that while the table is being reorganized,
users have read-write access. The name of the mapping table is DSN8MAP. This
table is used to map the RIDs of data records in the original copy of the area to the
corresponding RIDs in the shadow copy.
//SAMPJOB JOB ...
//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='SAMPJOB.REORG',UTPROC='',SYSTEM='DSN'
//SYSCOPY DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(10,20),,,ROUND),
//
DSN=SAMPJOB,COPY,DISP=(NEW,CATLG,CATLG)
//SYSIN
DD *
REORG TABLESPACE DSNDB04.DSN8S91E LOG NO SORTDEVT SYSDA SORTNUM 4
SHRLEVEL CHANGE MAPPINGTABLE DSN8MAP
/*
Example 6: Specifying a deadline for the SWITCH phase while

reorganizing a table
reorganize table space DSN8D81A.DSN8S91D. The DEADLINE option indicates
that the deadline for start of the SWITCH phase is eight hours from the start of the
REORG job. The COPYDDN and RECOVERYDDN options indicate that the utility
is to take an image copy of the table space. DB2 is to write the primary image
copy at the local site to a data set that is defined by the MYCOPY1 DD statement
and to write the primary image copy at the recovery site to a data set that is
defined by the MYCOPY2 DD statement. SHRLEVEL REFERENCE indicates that
access is restricted during reorganization.
REORG TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D COPYDDN(MYCOPY1)
RECOVERYDDN(MYCOPY2) SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
DEADLINE CURRENT TIMESTAMP + 8 HOURS
523
Example 7: Setting a deadline for a REORG TABLESPACE job

reorganize table space DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D. The DEADLINE option indicates
that the deadline for the start of the SWITCH phase is eight hours from the start of
the REORG job. The name of the mapping table is DSN8810.MAP_TBL. The
maximum desired amount of time for the log processing in the read-only (last)
iteration of log processing is 240 seconds, as indicated by the MAXRO option. If
DB2 is not reading the log quickly enough after the applications write to the log,
DB2 drains the write claim class after sending the LONGLOG message to the
operator. That draining takes place at least 900 seconds after the LONGLOG
message is sent, as indicated by the DELAY option. DB2 is also to take inline
image copies for the local site and recovery site, as indicated by the COPYDDN
and RECOVERYDDN options.
REORG TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D COPYDDN(MYCOPY1)
RECOVERYDDN(MYCOPY2) SHRLEVEL CHANGE
DEADLINE CURRENT TIMESTAMP + 8 HOURS
MAPPINGTABLE DSN8910.MAP_TBL MAXRO 240 LONGLOG DRAIN DELAY 900
Example 8: Reorganizing a range of table space partitions

reorganize partitions 3 through 5 of table space DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E. The
SORTDEVT option indicates the device type for the temporary data sets that are to
be dynamically allocated by DFSORT. The SHRLEVEL NONE option indicates that
while the data is being unloaded, applications can read but cant write. While the
data is being reloaded, applications can have read-write access. SHRLEVEL NONE
is the default. The COPYDDN option indicates that the utility is to take an image
copy of the table space and to write the primary image copy to the data set that is
defined by the SYSCOPY DD statement.
PART 3:5
SORTDEVT SYSDA
SHRLEVEL NONE
COPYDDN SYSCOPY
Example 9: Reorganizing a partition and updating the statistics

reorganize partition 3 of table space DSN8D91A. DSN8S91E. The STATISTICS
option indicates that the utility is also to update statistics in the catalog for that
partition. Note that the STATISTICS option is not valid for LOB table spaces.
STATISTICS PART 3
Example 10: Reorganizing a table space and reporting table

space and index statistics
reorganize table space DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E. The SORTDATA option indicates
that the data is to be unloaded and sorted in clustering order. This option is the
default and does not need to be specified. The STATISTICS, TABLE, INDEX, and
REPORT YES options indicate that the utility is also to report catalog statistics for
all tables in the table space and for all indexes that are defined on those tables. The
KEYCARD, FREQVAL, NUMCOLS, and COUNT options indicate that DB2 is to
524
collect 10 frequent values on the first key column of the index. UPDATE NONE
indicates that the catalog tables are not to be updated. This option requires that
REPORT YES also be specified.
REORG TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E SORTDATA STATISTICS
TABLE
INDEX(ALL) KEYCARD FREQVAL NUMCOLS 1
COUNT 10 REPORT YES UPDATE NONE
Example 11: Determining whether a table space should be

reorganized
The following control statement specifies that REORG TABLESPACE is to report if
the OFFPOSLIMIT and INDREFLIMIT values for partition 11 of table space
DBHR5201.TPHR5201 exceed the specified values (11 for OFFPOSLIMIT and 15 for
INDREFLIMIT).
//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='HUHRU252.REORG2',TIME=1440,
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='DSN'
//SYSREC
DD DSN=HUHRU252.REORG2.STEP1.SYSREC,DISP=(MOD,DELETE,CATLG),
//
//SYSCOPY DD DSN=HUHRU252.REORG2.STEP1.SYSCOPY,DISP=(MOD,CATLG,CATLG),
//
//
SPACE=(4000,(20,20),,,ROUND)
//SYSIN
DD *
REORG TABLESPACE DBHR5201.TPHR5201 PART 11
NOSYSREC
REPORTONLY
SHRLEVEL CHANGE MAPPINGTABLE ADMF001.MAP1
COPYDDN (SYSCOPY)
OFFPOSLIMIT 11 INDREFLIMIT 15
/*
Figure 76. Example REORG TABLESPACE statement with REPORTONLY, OFFPOSLIMIT,
and INDREFLIMIT options
On successful completion, DB2 returns output that is similar to the output in the
following sample output. This sample output shows that the limits have been met.
DSNU000I
DSNUGUTC - OUTPUT START FOR UTILITY, UTILID = HUHRU252.REORG2
DSNU1044I DSNUGTIS - PROCESSING SYSIN AS EBCDIC
DSNU050I
DSNUGUTC - REORG TABLESPACE DBHR5201.TPHR5201 PART 11 NOSYSREC REPORTONLY SHRLEVEL CHANGE
MAPPINGTABLE ADMF001.MAP1 COPYDDN(SYSCOPY) OFFPOSLIMIT 11 INDREFLIMIT 15
DSNU286I = DSNURLIM - REORG TABLESPACE DBHR5201.TPHR5201 OFFPOSLIMIT SYSINDEXPART ROWS
* CREATOR.IXNAME : ADMF001.IPHR5201
CREATOR.TBNAME : ADMF001.TBHR5201
PART:
1 CARDF: 6.758E+03
FAROFFPOSF:
2.892E+03
NEAROFFPOSF: 8.18E+02
STATSTIME: 2003-04-11
13.32.06
DSNU287I = DSNURLIM - REORG TABLESPACE DBHR5201.TPHR5201 INDREFLIMIT SYSTABLEPART ROWS
DBNAME .TSNAME
PART
CARD FARINDREF NEARINDREF
STATSTIME
DBHR5201.TPHR5201
1
6758
0
0 2003-04-11-13.32.06
DSNU289I
DSNU010I
= DSNURLIM - REORG LIMITS HAVE BEEN MET

Figure 77. Sample output showing that REORG limits have been met
Example 12: Conditionally reorganizing a table space

In the following example, the RUNSTATS utility control statement specifies that
the utility is to update space statistics in the catalog for table space
DBHR5201.TPHR5201. This RUNSTATS job ensures that the space statistics for this
table space are current. The subsequent REORG TABLESPACE control statement
525
specifies that if any of the values for OFFPOSLIMIT or INDREFLIMIT exceed 9,

the utility is to reorganize the table space.
//******************************************************************
//* COMMENT: UPDATE STATISTICS
//******************************************************************
//STEP1
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='DSN'
//SYSREC
//
//
SPACE=(4000,(20,20),,,ROUND)
//SYSIN
DD *
RUNSTATS TABLESPACE DBHR5201.TPHR5201
UPDATE SPACE
/*
//******************************************************************
//* COMMENT: REORG THE TABLESPACE
//******************************************************************
//STEP2
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='DSN'
//SYSREC
//
//SYSCOPY1 DD DSN=HUHRU252.REORG1.STEP1.SYSCOPY1,
//
DISP=(MOD,CATLG,CATLG),UNIT=SYSDA,
//
SPACE=(4000,(20,20),,,ROUND)
//SYSIN
DD *
REORG TABLESPACE DBHR5201.TPHR5201
SHRLEVEL CHANGE MAPPINGTABLE MAP1
COPYDDN(SYSCOPY1)
/*
Figure 78. Example of conditionally reorganizing a table
On successful completion, DB2 returns output for the REORG TABLESPACE job
that is similar to the output in the following sample output.
DSNU050I
DSNUGUTC - REORG TABLESPACE DBHR5201.TPHR5201 SHRLEVEL CHANGE MAPPINGTABLE
MAP1 COPYDDN(SYSCOPY1)
DSNU286I = DSNURLIM - REORG TABLESPACE DBHR5201.TPHR5201 OFFPOSLIMIT SYSINDEXPART ROWS
PART: 1 CARDF: 3.6E+01
FAROFFPOSF:
0.0E0
STATSTIME: 2002-05-28-16.22.18
CREATOR.IXNAME : ADMF001.IPHR5201
FAROFFPOSF:
0.0E0
NEAROFFPOSF: 0.0E0
STATSTIME: 2002-05-28-16.22.18
...
FAROFFPOSF:
2.892E+03
STATSTIME: 2002-05-28-16.22.18
DSNU287I = DSNURLIM - REORG TABLESPACE DBHR5201.TPHR5201 INDREFLIMIT SYSTABLEPART ROWS
DBNAME .TSNAME
PART
CARD FARINDREF NEARINDREF
STATSTIME
DBHR5201.TPHR5201
1
36
0
0 2002-05-28-16.22.18
DBHR5201.TPHR5201
2
5
0
0 2002-05-28-16.22.18
DBHR5201.TPHR5201
3
54
0
0 2002-05-28-16.22.18
DBHR5201.TPHR5201
4
30
0
0 2002-05-28-16.22.18
DBHR5201.TPHR5201
5
21
0
0 2002-05-28-16.22.18
DBHR5201.TPHR5201
6
5
0
0 2002-05-28-16.22.18
DBHR5201.TPHR5201
7
4
0
0 2002-05-28-16.22.18
DBHR5201.TPHR5201
8
35
0
0 2002-05-28-16.22.18
DBHR5201.TPHR5201
9
25
0
0 2002-05-28-16.22.18
526
DBHR5201.TPHR5201
10
1
0
0 2002-05-28-16.22.18
DBHR5201.TPHR5201
11
6758
0
0 2002-05-28-16.22.18
DSNU289I = DSNURLIM - REORG LIMITS HAVE BEEN MET
DSNU290I = DSNURLIM - REORG WILL BE PERFORMED
DSNU252I
DSNUGSRT - UNLOAD PHASE STATISTICS - NUMBER OF RECORDS UNLOADED=6985 FOR
TABLESPACE DBHR5201.TPHR5201
DSNU250I
DSNUGSRT - UNLOAD PHASE COMPLETE, ELAPSED TIME=00:00:01
DSNU304I = DSNURWT - (RE)LOAD PHASE STATISTICS - NUMBER OF RECORDS=6985 FOR TABLE
ADMF001.TBHR5201
DSNU302I
DSNURILD - (RE)LOAD PHASE STATISTICS - NUMBER OF INPUT RECORDS PROCESSED=6985
DSNU300I
DSNURILD - (RE)LOAD PHASE COMPLETE, ELAPSED TIME=00:00:29
DSNU042I
DSNUGSOR - SORT PHASE STATISTICS NUMBER OF RECORDS=34925
DSNU348I
DSNU348I
...
DSNU349I
DSNU258I
DSNU259I
DSNU386I
RECORDS =
DSNU385I
DSNU400I
DSNU387I
DSNU428I
= DSNURBXA - BUILD PHASE STATISTICS - NUMBER OF KEYS=36 FOR INDEX ADMF001.IPHR5201 PART 1
= DSNURBXA - BUILD PHASE STATISTICS - NUMBER OF KEYS=5 FOR INDEX ADMF001.IPHR5201 PART 2
= DSNURBXA
DSNURBXD
DSNURBXD
DSNURLGD
194
DSNURLGD
DSNURBID
BUILD PHASE STATISTICS - NUMBER OF KEYS=6985 FOR INDEX ADMF001.IUHR5210

BUILD PHASE STATISTICS - NUMBER OF INDEXES=5
BUILD PHASE COMPLETE, ELAPSED TIME=00:00:18
LOG PHASE STATISTICS. NUMBER OF ITERATIONS = 1, NUMBER OF LOG
- LOG PHASE COMPLETE, ELAPSED TIME = 00:01:10

- COPY PROCESSED FOR TABLESPACE DBHR5201.TPHR5201
NUMBER OF PAGES=1073
AVERAGE PERCENT FREE SPACE PER PAGE = 14.72
PERCENT OF CHANGED PAGES =100.00
DSNURSWT - SWITCH PHASE COMPLETE, ELAPSED TIME = 00:01:05
DSNURSWT - DB2 IMAGE COPY SUCCESSFUL FOR TABLESPACE DBHR5201.TPHR5201
Figure 79. Sample REORG output for conditional REORG
Example 13: Reorganizing a table space after waiting for SQL

statements to complete.
reorganize the table space in the REORG_TBSP list, which is defined in the
preceding LISTDEF utility control statement. Before reorganizing the table space,
REORG TABLESPACE is to wait for 30 seconds for SQL statements to finish
adding or changing data. This interval is indicated by the DRAIN_WAIT option. If
the SQL statements do not finish, the utility is to retry up to four times, as
indicated by the RETRY option. The utility is to wait 10 seconds between retries, as
indicated by the RETRY_DELAY option.
The TEMPLATE utility control statements define the data set characteristics for the
data sets that are to be dynamically allocated during the REORG TABLESPACE
job. The OPTIONS utility control statement indicates that the TEMPLATE
statements and LISTDEF statement are to run in PREVIEW mode.
527
//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='HUHRU257.REORG',TIME=1440,
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='DSN'
//SYSIN
DD *
OPTIONS PREVIEW
TEMPLATE CPYTMP UNIT(SYSDA)
DSN(HUHRU257.REORG.T&TI..SYSCOPY1)
TEMPLATE SREC
DSN(HUHRU257.REORG.&ST..SREC)
TEMPLATE SDISC
DSN(HUHRU257.REORG.&ST..SDISC)
TEMPLATE SPUNCH
DSN(HUHRU257.REORG.&ST..SPUNCH)
LISTDEF REORG_TBSP INCLUDE TABLESPACE DBHR5701.TPHR5701
OPTIONS OFF
REORG TABLESPACE LIST REORG_TBSP
DRAIN_WAIT 30
RETRY 4
RETRY_DELAY 10
STATISTICS
TABLE (ALL) SAMPLE 60
INDEX (ALL KEYCARD FREQVAL NUMCOLS 2 COUNT 15)
SHRLEVEL CHANGE MAPPINGTABLE MAP5702
LONGLOG DRAIN MAXRO DEFER DELAY 30
COPYDDN (CPYTMP)
PUNCHDDN SPUNCH
DISCARDDN SDISC
UNLDDN SREC
Figure 80. Example of reorganizing a table space by using DRAIN WAIT, RETRY, and
RETRY_DELAY
On successful completion, DB2 returns output similar to the output in the

following sample output.
DSNU000I
DSNU1044I
DSNU050I
DSNU1000I
DSNU1035I
DSNU050I
DSNU1035I
DSNU050I
DSNU1035I
DSNU050I
DSNU1035I
DSNU050I
DSNU1035I
DSNU050I
DSNU1035I
DSNU1020I =
DSNU1021I =
DSNU1022I =
DSNU1023I =
DSNU1010I
DSNUGUTC - OUTPUT START FOR UTILITY, UTILID = HUHRU257.REORG

DSNUGUTC - OPTIONS PREVIEW
DSNUGUTC - PROCESSING CONTROL STATEMENTS IN PREVIEW MODE
DSNUILDR - OPTIONS STATEMENT PROCESSED SUCCESSFULLY
DSNUGUTC - TEMPLATE CPYTMP UNIT(SYSDA) DSN(HUHRU257.REORG.STEP1.SYSCOPY1)
DSNUJTDR - TEMPLATE STATEMENT PROCESSED SUCCESSFULLY
DSNUGUTC - TEMPLATE SREC UNIT(SYSDA) DISP(NEW,CATLG,CATLG) DSN(HUHRU257.REORG.&ST..SREC)
DSNUGUTC - TEMPLATE SDISC UNIT(SYSDA) DISP(NEW,CATLG,CATLG) DSN(HUHRU257.REORG.&ST..SDISC)
DSNUGUTC - TEMPLATE SPUNCH UNIT(SYSDA) DISP(NEW,CATLG,CATLG) DSN(HUHRU257.REORG.&ST..SPUNCH)
DSNUGUTC - LISTDEF REORG_TBSP INCLUDE TABLESPACE DBHR5701.TPHR5701
DSNUILDR - LISTDEF STATEMENT PROCESSED SUCCESSFULLY
DSNUILSA - EXPANDING LISTDEF REORG_TBSP
DSNUILSA PROCESSING INCLUDE CLAUSE TABLESPACE DBHR5701.TPHR5701
DSNUILSA - CLAUSE IDENTIFIES 1 OBJECTS
DSNUILSA - LISTDEF REORG_TBSP CONTAINS 1 OBJECTS
DSNUGPVV - LISTDEF REORG_TBSP EXPANDS TO THE FOLLOWING OBJECTS:
LISTDEF REORG_TBSP -- 00000001 OBJECTS
INCLUDE TABLESPACE DBHR5701.TPHR5701
DSNUGUTC - OPTIONS OFF
DSNUILDR - OPTIONS STATEMENT PROCESSED SUCCESSFULLY
DSNUGUTC - REORG TABLESPACE LIST REORG_TBSP DRAIN_WAIT 30 RETRY 4 RETRY_DELAY 10 STATISTICS
DSNU050I
DSNU1035I
DSNU050I
TABLE(ALL)
SAMPLE 60 INDEX(ALL KEYCARD FREQVAL NUMCOLS 2 COUNT 15) SHRLEVEL CHANGE MAPPINGTABLE MAP5702 LONGLOG DRAIN
MAXRO
DEFER DELAY 30 COPYDDN(CPYTMP) SORTDEVT SYSDA SORTNUM 8 PUNCHDDN SPUNCH DISCARDDN
528
SDISC UNLDDN SREC

DSNU1033I DSNUGULM - PROCESSING LIST ITEM: TABLESPACE DBHR5701.TPHR5701
DSNU1038I DSNUGDYN - DATA SET ALLOCATED. TEMPLATE=CPYTMP
DDNAME=SYS00001
DSN=HUHRU257.REORG.STEP1.SYSCOPY1
DSNU252I
DSNUGSRT - UNLOAD PHASE STATISTICS - NUMBER OF RECORDS UNLOADED=331 FOR TABLESPACE DBHR
DSNU250I
DSNUGSRT - UNLOAD PHASE COMPLETE, ELAPSED TIME=00:00:00
DSNU395I
DSNURPIB - INDEXES WILL BE BUILT IN PARALLEL, NUMBER OF TASKS = 9
DSNU397I
DSNURPIB - NUMBER OF TASKS CONSTRAINED BY VIRTUAL STORAGE
DSNU610I = DSNUSUTP SYSTABLEPART CATALOG UPDATE FOR DBHR5701.TPHR5701 SUCCESSFUL
DSNU610I = DSNUSUPT SYSTABSTATS CATALOG UPDATE FOR ADMF001.TBHR5701 SUCCESSFUL
DSNU610I = DSNUSUPC SYSCOLSTATS CATALOG UPDATE FOR ADMF001.TBHR5701 SUCCESSFUL
DSNU610I = DSNUSUTB SYSTABLES CATALOG UPDATE FOR ADMF001.TBHR5701 SUCCESSFUL
DSNU610I = DSNUSUCO SYSCOLUMNS CATALOG UPDATE FOR ADMF001.TBHR5701 SUCCESSFUL
DSNU610I = DSNUSUTS SYSTABLESPACE CATALOG UPDATE FOR DBHR5701.TPHR5701 SUCCESSFUL
DSNU620I = DSNURDRT - RUNSTATS CATALOG TIMESTAMP = 2002-08-05-16.25.20.438798
DSNU304I = DSNURWT - (RE)LOAD PHASE STATISTICS - NUMBER OF RECORDS=331 FOR TABLE ADMF001.TBHR5701
DSNU302I
DSNURILD - (RE)LOAD PHASE STATISTICS - NUMBER OF INPUT RECORDS PROCESSED=331
DSNU300I
DSNURILD - (RE)LOAD PHASE COMPLETE, ELAPSED TIME=00:00:14
DSNU394I = DSNURBXA - SORTBLD PHASE STATISTICS - NUMBER OF KEYS=331 FOR INDEX ADMF001.IXHR5703
DSNU610I = DSNUSUIP SYSINDEXPART CATALOG UPDATE FOR ADMF001.IXHR5702 SUCCESSFUL
DSNU610I = DSNUSUIX SYSINDEXES CATALOG UPDATE FOR ADMF001.IXHR5702 SUCCESSFUL
DSNU610I = DSNUSUCD SYSCOLDIST CATALOG UPDATE FOR ADMF001.IXHR5702 SUCCESSFUL
DSNU620I = DSNURDRI - RUNSTATS CATALOG TIMESTAMP = 2002-08-05-16.25.21.292235
DSNU393I = DSNURBXA - SORTBLD PHASE STATISTICS - NUMBER OF KEYS=331 FOR INDEX ADMF001.IPHR5701
DSNU394I = DSNURBXA - SORTBLD PHASE STATISTICS - NUMBER OF KEYS=331 FOR INDEX ADMF001.IPHR5701
DSNU610I = DSNUSUIP SYSINDEXPART CATALOG UPDATE FOR ADMF001.IPHR5701 SUCCESSFUL
DSNU610I = DSNUSUPI SYSINDEXSTATS CATALOG UPDATE FOR ADMF001.IPHR5701 SUCCESSFUL
DSNU610I = DSNUSUPD SYSCOLDISTSTATS CATALOG UPDATE FOR ADMF001.IPHR5701 SUCCESSFUL
DSNU610I = DSNUSUPC SYSCOLSTATS CATALOG UPDATE FOR ADMF001.TBHR5701 SUCCESSFUL
DSNU610I = DSNUSUIX SYSINDEXES CATALOG UPDATE FOR ADMF001.IPHR5701 SUCCESSFUL
DSNU610I = DSNUSUCD SYSCOLDIST CATALOG UPDATE FOR ADMF001.IPHR5701 SUCCESSFUL
DSNU391I
DSNURPTB - SORTBLD PHASE STATISTICS. NUMBER OF INDEXES = 7
DSNU392I
DSNURPTB - SORTBLD PHASE COMPLETE, ELAPSED TIME = 00:00:04
DSNU377I = DSNURLOG - IN REORG WITH SHRLEVEL CHANGE, THE LOG IS
BECOMING LONG, MEMBER=
, UTILID=HUHRU257.REORG
...
DSNU1122I = DSNURLOG - JOB T3161108 PERFORMING REORG
WITH UTILID HUHRU257.REORG UNABLE TO DRAIN DBHR5701.TPHR5701.
PART 11
529
RETRY 1 OF 4 WILL BE ATTEMPTED IN 10 SECONDS

DSNU1122I = DSNURLOG - JOB T3161108 PERFORMING REORG
WITH UTILID HUHRU257.REORG UNABLE TO DRAIN DBHR5701.TPHR5701.
RETRY 2 OF 4 WILL BE ATTEMPTED IN 10 SECONDS
DSNU386I
DSNURLGD - LOG PHASE STATISTICS. NUMBER OF ITERATIONS = 32, NUMBER OF LOG RECORDS = 2288
DSNU385I
DSNURLGD - LOG PHASE COMPLETE, ELAPSED TIME = 00:03:43
DSNU400I
DSNURBID - COPY PROCESSED FOR TABLESPACE DBHR5701.TPHR5701
NUMBER OF PAGES=377
AVERAGE PERCENT FREE SPACE PER PAGE = 5.42
PERCENT OF CHANGED PAGES =100.00
DSNU387I
DSNURSWT - SWITCH PHASE COMPLETE, ELAPSED TIME = 00:00:02
DSNU428I
DSNURSWT - DB2 IMAGE COPY SUCCESSFUL FOR TABLESPACE DBHR5701.TPHR5701
DSNU010I
Figure 81. Sample output of REORG TABLESPACE job with DRAIN WAIT, RETRY, and RETRY_DELAY options
Example 14: Using a mapping table

In the following example, a mapping table and mapping table index are created.
Then, a REORG TABLESPACE job uses the mapping table, and finally the mapping
table is dropped. Some parts of this job use the EXEC SQL utility to execute
dynamic SQL statements.
The first EXEC SQL control statement contains the SQL statements that create a
mapping table that is named MYMAPPING_TABLE. The second EXEC SQL control
statement contains the SQL statements that create mapping index
MYMAPPING_INDEX on the table MYMAPPING_TABLE.
The REORG TABLESPACE control statement then specifies that the REORG
TABLESPACE utility is to reorganize table space DSN8D81P.DSN8S81C and to use
mapping table MYMAPPING_TABLE.
Finally, the third EXEC SQL statement contains the SQL statements that drop
MYMAPPING_TABLE.
EXEC SQL
CREATE TABLE MYMAPPING_TABLE
(TYPE
CHAR( 01 ) NOT NULL,
SOURCE_RID
CHAR( 05 ) NOT NULL,
TARGET_XRID CHAR( 09 ) NOT NULL,
LRSN
CHAR( 06 ) NOT NULL)
IN DSN8D81P.DSN8S81Q
CCSID EBCDIC
ENDEXEC
EXEC SQL
CREATE UNIQUE INDEX MYMAPPING_INDEX
ON MYMAPPING_TABLE
(SOURCE_RID ASC,
TYPE,
TARGET_XRID,
LRSN)
USING STOGROUP DSN8G710
PRIQTY 120 SECQTY 20
ERASE NO
BUFFERPOOL BP0
CLOSE NO
ENDEXEC
REORG TABLESPACE DSN8D81P.DSN8S81C
COPYDDN(COPYDDN)
SHRLEVEL CHANGE
DEADLINE CURRENT_TIMESTAMP+8 HOURS
530
MAPPINGTABLE MYMAPPING_TABLE
MAXRO 240 LONGLOG DRAIN DELAY 900
STATISTICS TABLE(ALL)
INDEX(ALL)
EXEC SQL
DROP TABLE MYMAPPING_TABLE
ENDEXEC
Example 15: Discarding records from one table while

reorganizing a table space
reorganize table space DSN8D51A.DSN8S51E. During reorganization, records in
table DSN8510.EMP are discarded if they have the value D11 in the WORKDEPT
field. This discard criteria is specified in the WHEN clause that follows the
DISCARD option. Because a SYSDISC DD statement is included in the JCL, any
discarded rows are to be written to the data set that is identified by this DD
statement.
The COPYDDN option specifies that during the REORG, DB2 is also to take an
inline copy of the table space. This image copy is to be written to the data set that
is identified by the SYSCOPY DD statement.
//REORGDIS EXEC DSNUPROC,TIME=1440,
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='DSN',UID='REORGDIS.EMP'
//SYSREC
DD DISP=(NEW,CATLG,CATLG),
//
DSN=SYSADM.REORGDIS.SYSREC,
//
UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(TRK,(15,15))
//SYSDISC DD DISP=(NEW,CATLG,CATLG),
//
DSN=SYSADM.REORGDIS.SYSDISC,
//
//SYSPUNCH DD DISP=(NEW,CATLG,CATLG),
//
DSN=SYSADM.REORGDIS.SYSPUNCH,
//
//SYSCOPY DD DISP=(NEW,CATLG,CATLG),
//
UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(TRK,(30,30)),
//
DSN=SYSADM.DSN8D51A.DSN8S51E.COPY
//SYSIN
DD *
REORG TABLESPACE
DSN8D81A.DSN8S81E
DISCARD
FROM TABLE DSN8810.EMP
WHEN (WORKDEPT = 'D11')
SHRLEVEL NONE COPYDDN SYSCOPY
Figure 82. Example REORG statement that specifies discard criteria
Example 16: Discarding records from multiple tables while

reorganizing a table space
reorganize table space DBKC0501.TLKC0501. During reorganization, the following
records are discarded:
v Records in table TBKC0501 that have a value in the QT_INV_TRANSACTION
column that is less than or equal to 700, and a value in the NO_DEPT column
that is equal to X33303230.
531
v Records in table TBKC0502 that have a value in the NO_WORK_CENTER

column that is equal to either X333031303120 or X333032303620.
This discard criteria is specified with the DISCARD option. Any discarded rows
are to be written to the SYSDISC data set, as specified by the DISCARDDN option.
//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='IUKCU105.REORG2',
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='SSTR'
//SYSDISC DD DSN=IUKCU105.REORG2.STEP1.SYSDISC,
//
DISP=(MOD,CATLG,CATLG),
//
//
//SYSREC
DD DSN=IUKCU105.REORG2.STEP1.SYSREC,
//
//
//SYSCOPY DD DSN=IUKCU105.REORG2.STEP1.SYSCOPY,
//
//
//LOADSTMT DD DSN=IUKCU105.REORG2.STEP1.SYSPUNCH,
//
//
//
//SYSIN
DD *
REORG TABLESPACE DBKC0501.TLKC0501 SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
PUNCHDDN LOADSTMT DISCARDDN SYSDISC
UNLOAD CONTINUE
DISCARD
FROM TABLE TBKC0501
WHEN (QT_INV_TRANSACTION <= 700 AND
NO_DEPT = X'33303230')
FROM TABLE TBKC0502
WHEN (NO_WORK_CENTER = X'333031303120' OR
NO_WORK_CENTER = X'333032303620')
/*
Figure 83. Example REORG statement that specifies discard criteria for several tables
Example 17: Reorganizing only those partitions that are in

reorganize only those partitions of table space DBKQAA01.TPKQAA01 that are in
the range from 2 to 10 and are in REORG-pending status.
532
//STEP1
//
//SYSREC
//
//
//SYSCOPY
//
//
//SYSUT1
//
//
//SORTOUT
//
//
//SYSIN
REORG
/*
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='JUKQU1AA.REORG6',
DD DSN=JUKQU1AA.REORG6.STEP1.SYSREC,
DD DSN=JUKQU1AA.REORG6.STEP1.SYSCOPY,
DD DSN=JUKQU1AA.REORG6.STEP1.SYSUT1,
DD DSN=JUKQU1AA.REORG6.STEP1.SORTOUT,
SPACE=(4000,(20,20),,,ROUND)
DD *
TABLESPACE DBKQAA01.TPKQAA01 SCOPE PENDING PART 2:10
Figure 84. Example REORG TABLESPACE statement with SCOPE PENDING
Example 18: Reorganizing only clone tables

|
|
The REORG TABLESPACE control statement indicates that REORG TABLESPACE

is to reorganize only clone tables from the specified table spaces.
REORG TABLESPACE DBKQBS01.TPKQBS01 CLONE
Related reference
DROP (DB2 SQL Reference)
CREATE TABLE (DB2 SQL Reference)
CREATE INDEX (DB2 SQL Reference)
533
534
Chapter 26. REPAIR

The online REPAIR utility repairs data. The data can be your own data or data that
you would not normally access, such as space map pages and index entries.
You use REPAIR to replace invalid data with valid data. Be extremely careful when
using REPAIR. Improper use can damage the data even further.
You can use the REPAIR utility to:
v Test database definitions (DBDs)
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Repair DBDs
Reset a pending status on a table space or index
Verify the contents of data areas in table spaces and indexes
Replace the contents of data areas in table spaces and indexes
Delete a single row from a table space
Produce a hexadecimal dump of an area in a table space or index
Delete an entire LOB from a LOB table space
Dump LOB pages
v Rebuild object descriptors (OBDs) for a LOB table space

v Manage version numbers
Output
The output from the REPAIR utility can consist of one or more modified pages in
the specified DB2 table space or index and a dump of the contents.
v REPAIR privilege for the database
An ID with installation SYSOPR authority can also execute REPAIR, but only on a
To execute REPAIR with the DBD option, you must use a privilege set that
includes SYSADM, SYSCTRL, or installation SYSOPR authority.
REPAIR should be used only by a person that is knowledgeable in DB2 and your
data. Grant REPAIR authorization only to the appropriate people.
Execution phases of REPAIR

The phases for REPAIR are:
Phase Description
535
UTILINIT
REPAIR
Repairs data
UTILTERM
Performs cleanup
Syntax and options of the REPAIR control statement

The REPAIR utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
REPAIR syntax diagram
REPAIR

CLONE
OBJECT
LOG
YES
LOG
NO
set statement
locate block
dbd-statement
level-id statement
versions statement
level-id statement:
LEVELID
TABLESPACE
table-space-name
database-name.
index-name-spec

PART
integer
versions statement:
VERSIONS
TABLESPACE
database-name.
index-name-spec
index-name-spec:
536
table-space-name

INDEX
index-name
creator-id.
INDEXSPACE
index-space-name
database-name.
REPAIR option descriptions

OBJECT
Indicates that an object is to be repaired. This keyword is optional.
LOG
Indicates whether the changes that REPAIR makes are to be logged. If the
changes are to be logged, they are applied again if the data is recovered.
YES
Indicates that the changes are to be logged.
REPAIR LOG YES cannot override the LOG NO attribute of a table space.
NO
Indicates that the changes are not to be logged. You cannot use this option
with a DELETE statement.
REPAIR LOG NO can override the LOG YES attribute of a table space.
LEVELID
Indicates that the level identifier of the named table space, table space
partition, index, or index space partition is to be reset to a new identifier. Use
LEVELID to accept the use of a down-level data set. You cannot specify
multiple LEVELID keywords in the same REPAIR control statement.
You cannot use LEVELID with a table space, table space partition, index, or
index space partition that has outstanding indoubt log records or pages in the
logical page list (LPL).
Attention: Accepting the use of a down-level data set might cause data
inconsistencies. Problems with inconsistent data that result from resetting the
level identifier are the responsibility of the user.
Specifies the table space (and, optionally, the database to which it belongs)
whose level identifier is to be reset (if you specify LEVELID) or whose version
identifier is to be updated (if you specify VERSIONS).
database-name
table-space-name
INDEX
Specifies the index whose level identifier is to be reset (if you specify
LEVELID) or whose version identifier is to be updated (if you specify
VERSIONS).
creator-id.
Specifies the creator of the index. Specifying this qualifier is optional.
Chapter 26. REPAIR
537
index-name
Specifies the name of the index. Enclose the index name in quotation
You can specify either INDEX or INDEXSPACE to identify an index. To specify
multiple indexes, repeat the keyword.
INDEXSPACE
Specifies the index space for the index whose level identifier is to be reset (if
you specify LEVELID) or whose version identifier is to be updated (if you
specify VERSIONS). You can obtain the index space name for an index from
the SYSIBM.SYSINDEXES catalog table. The index space name must be
qualified.
database-name.
Specifies the name of the database to which the index space belongs.
index-space-name
Specifies the name of the index space.
You can specify either INDEX or INDEXSPACE to identify an index. To specify
multiple indexes, repeat the keyword.
PART
Identifies a partition of the table space or index (including a partition of a
data-partitioned secondary index).
integer is the number of the partition and must be in the range from one to the
number of partitions that are defined for the object. The maximum is 4096.
VERSIONS
Updates the version information in the catalog and directory for the specified
table space or index with the version information from the system pages of the
object. Use REPAIR VERSIONS in the following situations:
v When you run the DSN1COPY utility with the OBIDXLAT option to move
objects from one system to another. For more information about this process,
see Updating version information when moving objects to another
subsystem on page 557.
v Run REPAIR VERSIONS only when moving objects.
For more information about version number management, see Part 2 of DB2
Administration Guide.
|
|
|
|
|
|
CLONE
Indicates that REPAIR is to process only the specified objects that are table
spaces that contain clone tables, indexes on clone tables, or index spaces that
contain indexes on clone tables. If you specify CLONE, you cannot specify
VERSIONS because clone tables do not have versions. Clones cannot be
created for tables with active versions.
|
|
|
|
If you specify SET with CLONE, the status is changed for only the specified
table spaces and their indexes. The CLONE keyword applies to all SET
statements and LOCATE statements within the same REPAIR utility control
statement.
SET statement syntax

The SET TABLESPACE statement resets the COPY-pending, RECOVER-pending,
CHECK-pending, auxiliary warning (AUXW), auxiliary CHECK-pending
(ACHKP), and advisory REORG-pending (AREO* and AREOR) statuses for a table
538
space or data set. The SET INDEX statement resets the informational
COPY-pending (ICOPY), RECOVER-pending, REBUILD-pending, CHECK-pending,
and advisory REORG-pending (AREO* and AREOR) statuses for an index.
The SET TABLESPACE statement resets the COPY-pending, RECOVER-pending,
CHECK-pending, auxiliary warning (AUXW), and auxiliary CHECK-pending
(ACHKP) statuses for a table space or data set. The SET INDEX statement resets
the informational COPY-pending (ICOPY), RECOVER-pending, REBUILD-pending,
or CHECK-pending status for an index.
set statement:
SET
table-space-spec
INDEX
NOCOPYPEND
NORCVRPEND
NOCHECKPEND
NOAUXWARN
NOAUXCHKP
NOAREORPENDSTAR
(index-name

PART
integer
NOCOPYPEND
NORCVRPEND
( ALL )
NORBDPEND
NOCHECKPEND
NOAREORPENDSTAR
INDEXSPACE (
index-space-name
database-name.
PART integer
( ALL )
table-space-spec
PART integer
table-space-spec
table-space-spec:
TABLESPACE
table-space-name
database-name.
SET statement option descriptions

SET TABLESPACE database-name.table-space-name
whose pending status is to be reset.
database-name
table-space-name
SET INDEX
Specifies the index whose RECOVER-pending, CHECK-pending,
REBUILD-pending, or informational COPY-pending status is to be reset.
Chapter 26. REPAIR
539
(index-name)
Specifies the index that is to be processed. Enclose the index name in
(ALL)
Specifies that all indexes in the table space will be processed.
The keyword INDEXES is accepted following a table-space-spec and causes all
indexes to be processed. You can also repair all indexes by specifying
INDEX(ALL) followed by a table-space-spec.
SET INDEXSPACE
Specifies the index space for the index whose RECOVER-pending,
CHECK-pending, REBUILD-pending, or informational COPY-pending status is
to be reset.
(database-name.index-space-name)
Specifies the index space that is to be processed.
(ALL)
Specifies that all indexes in the table space will be processed.
PART integer
Specifies a particular partition whose COPY-pending, or RECOVER-pending
status is to be reset. If you do not specify PART, REPAIR resets the pending
status of the entire table space or index.
integer is the number of the partition and must be in the range from one to the
number of partitions that are defined for the
You can specify PART for NOCHECKPEND on a table space, and for
NORCVRPEND on indexes.
The PART keyword is not valid for a LOB table space or an index on the
auxiliary table.
NOCOPYPEND
Specifies that the COPY-pending status of the specified table space, or the
informational COPY-pending (ICOPY) status of the specified index is to be
reset.
NORCVRPEND
Specifies that the RECOVER-pending (RECP) status of the specified table space
or index is to be reset.
NORBDPEND
Specifies that the REBUILD-pending (RBDP) status, the page set
REBUILD-pending status (PSRBDP), or the RBDP* status of the specified index
is to be reset.
NOCHECKPEND
Specifies that the CHECK-pending (CHKP) status of the specified table space
or index is to be reset.
NOAUXWARN
Specifies that the auxiliary warning (AUXW) status of the specified table space
is to be reset. The specified table space must be a base table space or a LOB
table space.
|
|
|
NOAUXCHKP
Specifies that the auxiliary CHECK-pending (ACHKP) status of the specified
table space is to be reset. The specified table space must be a base table space.
540
NOAREORPENDSTAR
Resets the advisory REORG-pending (AREO*) status of the specified table
space or index.
LOCATE block syntax

A LOCATE block is a set of statements, each with its own options, that begins with
a LOCATE statement and ends with the next LOCATE or SET statement, or with
the end of the job. You can include more than one LOCATE block in a REPAIR
utility statement.
In any LOCATE block, you can use VERIFY, REPLACE, or DUMP as often as you
like; you can use DELETE only once.
locate block:
|
LOCATE
table-space-spec
table-options spec
INDEX index-name
index-options-spec
INDEXSPACE index-space-name
index-options-spec
table-space-spec
ROWID
Xbyte-string
VERSION
verify statement
replace statement
SHRLEVEL CHANGE
delete statement
dump statement
Xbyte-string
delete statement
dump statement
table-space-spec:
TABLESPACE
table-space-name
database-name.
table-options-spec:
byte-string
PAGE integer
PART integer
RID X byte-string
KEY literal INDEX index-name
PAGE X
index-options-spec:
PAGE X
PART
byte-string
PAGE integer
integer
Chapter 26. REPAIR
541
LOCATE TABLESPACE statement option descriptions

The LOCATE TABLESPACE statement locates data that is to be repaired within a
table space.
One LOCATE statement is required for each unit of data that is to be repaired.
Several LOCATE statements can appear after each REPAIR statement.
If a REPAIR statement is followed by more than one LOCATE statement, all
processing that is caused by VERIFY, REPLACE, and DUMP statements is
committed before the next LOCATE statement is processed.
Specifies the table space (and, optionally, the database to which it belongs) in
which data is to be located for repair.
database-name
Is the name of the database to which the table space belongs and is
optional.
table-space-name
Is the name of the table space that contains the data that you want to
repair.
PAGE
Specifies the relative page number within the table space, partitioned table
space, or index that is to be operated on. The first page, in either case, is 0
(zero).
integer
integer is a decimal number from one to six digits in length.
Xbyte-string
Specifies that the data of interest is an entire page. The specified offsets in
byte-string and in subsequent statements are relative to the beginning of the
page. The first byte of the page is at offset 0.
byte-string is a hexadecimal value from one to eight characters in length.
You do not need to enter leading zeros. Enclose the byte-string between
apostrophes, and precede it with X.
PART integer
Specifies the partition that contains the page that is to be located. Part is valid
only for partitioned table spaces.
integer is the number of the partition.
RID Xbyte-string
Specifies that the data that is to be located is a single row. The specified offsets
in byte-string and in subsequent statements are relative to the beginning of the
row. The first byte of the stored row prefix is at offset 0.
byte-string can be a hexadecimal value from one to eight characters in length.
You do not need to enter leading zeros. Enclose the byte string between
apostrophes, and precede it with an X.
KEY literal
Specifies that the data that is to be located is a single row, identified by literal.
The specified offsets in subsequent statements are relative to the beginning of
the row. The first byte of the stored row prefix is at offset 0.
542
literal is any SQL constant that can be compared with the key values of the
named index.
Character constants that are specified within the LOCATE KEY option cannot
be specified as ASCII or Unicode character strings. No conversion of the values
is performed. To use this option when the table space is ASCII or Unicode, you
should specify the values as hexadecimal constants.
If more than one row has the value literal in the key column, REPAIR returns a
list of record identifiers (RIDs) for records with that key value, but does not
perform any other operations (verify, replace, delete, or dump) until the next
LOCATE TABLESPACE statement is encountered. To repair the proper data,
write a LOCATE TABLESPACE statement that selects the desired row, using
the RID option, the PAGE option, or a different KEY and INDEX option. Then
execute REPAIR again.
|
|
|
SHRLEVEL
partition that is to be repaired during REPAIR processing.
|
|
If you do not specify SHRLEVEL and you do specify DUMP or VERIFY,

applications can read but not write the area.
|
|
If you do not specify SHRLEVEL and you do specify DELETE or REPLACE,

applications cannot read or write the area.
|
|
|
CHANGE
Specifies that applications can read and write during the VERIFY,
REPLACE, DELETE, and DUMP operation.
ROWID Xbyte-string
Specifies that the data that is to be located is a LOB in a LOB table space.
byte-string is the row ID that identifies the LOB column.
Use the ROWID keyword to repair an orphaned LOB row. You can find the
ROWID in the output from the CHECK LOB utility. If you specify the ROWID
keyword, the specified table space must be a LOB table space.
VERSION Xbyte-string
Specifies that the data that is to be located is a LOB in a LOB table space.
byte-string is the version number that identifies the version of the LOB column.
Use the VERSION keyword to repair an orphaned LOB column. You can find
the VERSION number in the output of the CHECK LOB utility or an
out-of-synch LOB that is reported by the CHECK DATA utility. If you specify
the VERSION keyword, the specified table space must be a LOB table space.
LOCATE INDEX statement and LOCATE INDEXSPACE statement

option descriptions
The LOCATE INDEX (or INDEXSPACE) statement locates data that is to be
repaired within an index. You can specify indexes by either their index name or
their index space name.
One LOCATE statement is required for each unit of data that is to be repaired.
Multiple LOCATE statements can appear after each REPAIR statement.
If a REPAIR statement is followed by multiple LOCATE statements, all processing
that is caused by VERIFY, REPLACE, and DUMP statements is committed before
the next LOCATE statement is processed.
Chapter 26. REPAIR
543
INDEX index-name
Specifies a particular index that is to be used to find the row that contains the
key. When you are locating an index by key, the index that you specify must
be a single-column index.
index-name is the qualified or unqualified name of the index. If you omit the
qualifier creator ID, the user identifier for the utility job is used. Enclose the
INDEXSPACE index-space-name
Specifies the index space for a particular index that is to be used to find the
row that contains the key. Look in the SYSIBM.SYSINDEXES catalog table to
find the index space name for an index. When you are locating an index by
key, the index that you specify must be a single-column index.
index-space-name is the qualified name of the index space, in the form
database-name.index-space-name.
PAGE integer
Specifies the relative page number within the index space that is to be
operated on. The first page is 0 (zero).
integer
integer is a decimal number from one to six digits in length.
Xbyte-string
Specifies that the data of interest is an entire page. The specified offsets in
byte-string and in subsequent statements are relative to the beginning of the
page. The first byte of the page is at offset 0.
byte-string is a hexadecimal value from one to eight characters in length.
You do not need to enter leading zeros. Enclose the byte-string between
apostrophes, and precede it with X.
PART integer
Specifies the partition number of the partitioning index that contains the page
that is to be located. The PART keyword is valid only for indexes of
partitioned table spaces.
integer is the number of the partitioning index.
VERIFY statement syntax

The VERIFY statement tests whether a particular data area contains a specified
value. Depending on the outcome of this test, the REPAIR utility performs the
following actions:
v If the data area does contain the value, subsequent operations in the same
LOCATE block are allowed to proceed.
v If any data area does not contain its specified value, all subsequent operations in
the same LOCATE block are inhibited.
verify statement:
544
OFFSET 0
VERIFY
DATA
OFFSET
integer
Xbyte-string
Xbyte-string
character-string
VERIFY statement option descriptions

OFFSET
Locates the data that is to be tested by a relative byte address (RBA) within the
row or page.
integer
Identifies the offset as an integer.
The default value is 0, the first byte of the area that is identified by the
previous LOCATE statement.
Xbyte-string
Identifies the offset as one to four hexadecimal characters. You do not need
to enter leading zeros. Enclose the byte string between apostrophes, and
precede it with X.
DATA
Specifies what data must be present at the current location before a change is
made.
Character constants that are specified within the VERIFY DATA option cannot
Xbyte-string
Specifies an even number, from 2 to 32, of hexadecimal characters that
must be present. You do not need to enter leading zeros. Enclose the byte
string between apostrophes, and precede it with X.
character-string
Specifies any character string that must be present.
REPLACE statement syntax

The REPLACE statement replaces data at a particular location. The statement is
contained within a LOCATE block. If any VERIFY statement within that block
finds a data area that does not contain its specified data, the REPLACE operation
is inhibited.
replace statement:
REPLACE
RESET
OFFSET 0

DATA
OFFSET
integer
Xbyte-string
Xbyte-string
character-string
Chapter 26. REPAIR
545
REPLACE statement option descriptions

RESET
Specifies that the inconsistent data indicator is to be reset. A page for which
this indicator is on is considered in error, and the indicator must be reset
before you can access the page. Numbers of pages with inconsistent data are
reported at the time that they are encountered.
The option also resets the PGCOMB flag bit in the first byte of the page to
agree with the bit code in the last byte of the page.
OFFSET
Indicates where data is to be replaced by a relative byte address (RBA) within
the row or page. Only one OFFSET and one DATA specification are acted on
for each REPLACE statement.
integer
Specifies the offset as an integer.
The default value is 0, the first byte of the area that is identified by the
previous LOCATE statement.
Xbyte-string
Specifies the offset as one to four hexadecimal characters. You do not need
precede it with X.
DATA
Specifies the new data that is to be entered. Only one OFFSET and one DATA
specification are acted on for each REPLACE statement.
Character constants that are specified within the VERIFY DATA option cannot
Xbyte-string
Specifies an even number, from two to thirty-two, of hexadecimal
characters that are to replace the current data. You do not need to enter
leading zeros. Enclose the byte string between apostrophes, and precede it
with X.
character-string
Specifies any character string that is to replace the current data.
DELETE statement syntax and description

The DELETE statement deletes a single row of data that has been located by a RID
or KEY option. The statement is contained within a LOCATE block. If any VERIFY
statement within that block finds a data area that does not contain its specified
data, the DELETE operation is inhibited.
The DELETE statement operates without regard for referential constraints. If you
delete a parent row, its dependent rows remain unchanged in the table space.
However, in the DB2 catalog and directory table spaces, where links are used to
reference other tables in the catalog, deleting a parent row causes all child rows to
be deleted, as well. Moreover, deleting a child row in the DB2 catalog tables also
updates its predecessor and successor pointer to reflect the deletion of this row.
Therefore, if the child row has incorrect pointers, the DELETE might lead to an
unexpected result.
546
In any LOCATE block, you can include no more than one DELETE option.
If you have coded any of the following options, you cannot use DELETE:
v The LOG NO option on the REPAIR statement
v A LOCATE INDEX statement to begin the LOCATE block
v The PAGE option on the LOCATE TABLESPACE statement in the same LOCATE
block
v A REPLACE statement for the same row of data
When you specify LOCATE ROWID for a LOB table space, the LOB that is
specified by ROWID is deleted with its index entry. All pages that are occupied by
the LOB are converted to free space. The DELETE statement does not remove any
reference to the deleted LOB from the base table space.
delete statement:
DELETE
DUMP statement syntax

The DUMP statement produces a hexadecimal dump of data that is identified by
offset and length. DUMP statements have no effect on VERIFY or REPLACE
operations.
When you specify LOCATE ROWID for a LOB table space, one or more map or
data pages of the LOB are dumped. The DUMP statement dumps all of the LOB
column pages if you do not specify either the MAP or DATA keyword.
dump statement:
OFFSET 0
DUMP

OFFSET
integer
Xbyte-string
LENGTH
Xbyte-string
integer
PAGES
Xbyte-string
integer
*
MAP
pages
DATA
pages
DUMP statement option descriptions

OFFSET
Optionally, locates the data that is to be dumped by a relative byte address
(RBA) within the row or page.
integer
Specifies the offset as an integer.
The default value is 0, the first byte of the row or page.
Chapter 26. REPAIR
547
Xbyte-string
Specifies the offset as one to four hexadecimal characters. You do not need
precede it with X.
LENGTH
Optionally, specifies the number of bytes of data that are to be dumped. If you
omit both LENGTH and PAGE, the dump begins at the specified OFFSET and
continues to the end of the row or page.
If you specify a number of bytes (with LENGTH) and a number of pages (with
PAGE), the dump contains the same relative bytes from each page. That is,
from each page you see the same number of bytes, beginning at the same
offset.
Xbyte-string
Specifies one to four hexadecimal characters. You do not need to enter
with X.
integer
Specifies the length as an integer.
PAGES
Optionally, specifies a number of pages that are to be dumped. You can use
this option only if you used PAGE in the preceding LOCATE TABLESPACE
control statement.
Xbyte-string
Specifies one to four hexadecimal characters. You do not need to enter
with X.
integer
Specifies the number of pages as an integer.
*
Specifies that all pages from the starting point to the end of the table space
or partition are to be dumped.
MAP pages
Specifies that only the LOB map pages are to be dumped.
pages specifies the number of LOB map pages that are to be dumped. If you do
not specify pages, all LOB map pages of the LOB that is specified by ROWID
and version are dumped.
DATA pages
Specifies that only the LOB data pages are to be dumped.
pages specifies the number of LOB data pages that are to be dumped. If you do
not specify pages, all LOB data pages of the LOB that is specified by ROWID
and version are dumped.
DBD statement syntax

The DBD statement allows you to:
v Compare the database definition (DBD) in the DB2 catalog with its definition in
the DB2 directory
v Rebuild a database definition in the directory by using the information including
LOB information in the DB2 catalog
548
v Drop an inconsistent database definition from the DB2 catalog and the DB2
directory
The REPAIR utility assumes that the links in table spaces DSNDB01.DBD01,
DSNDB06.SYSDBAUT, and DSNDB06.SYSDBASE are intact. Before executing
REPAIR with the DBD statement, run the DSN1CHKR utility on these table spaces
to ensure that the links are not broken.
|
|
The database on which REPAIR DBD REBUILD is run must be started for access
by utilities only. DB2 performs this step automatically.
|
|
|
|
|
You can use REPAIR DBD on declared temporary tables, which must be created in
a database that is defined with the AS TEMP clause. No other DB2 utilities can be
used on a declared temporary table, its indexes, or its table spaces. When REPAIR
DBD REBUILD is running, an S-lock is acquired for the appropriate catalog tables.
If the S-lock fails, REPAIR DBD fails.
dbd statement:
DBD
DROP DATABASE database-name DBID Xdbid

TEST
DIAGNOSE
OUTDDN
REBUILD

ddname
DBD statement option descriptions

DROP
Specifies that the named database is to be dropped from both the DB2 catalog
and the DB2 directory. When you specify this option, DB2 also drops databases
that contain tables that have been created with RESTRICT ON DROP. Use this
keyword if the SQL DROP DATABASE statement fails because the description
of the database is not in both the DB2 catalog and the DB2 directory. If you
cannot use the ALTER command to remove the with RESTRICT ON DROP
option on tables in a database that is badly damaged and you need to drop the
database, you can use this keyword to drop the database.
Attention: Use the DROP option with extreme care. Using DROP can cause
additional damage to your data. For more assistance, you can contact IBM
Software Support.
Specifies the target database.
database-name is the name of the target database, which cannot be DSNDB01
(the DB2 directory) or DSNDB06 (the DB2 catalog).
If you use TEST, DIAGNOSE, or REBUILD, database-name cannot be DSNDB07
(the work file database).
If you use DROP, database-name cannot be DSNDB04 (the default database).
DBID Xdbid
Specifies the database descriptor identifier for the target database.
dbid is the database descriptor identifier.
Chapter 26. REPAIR
549
TEST
Specifies that a DBD is to be built from information in the DB2 catalog, and is
to be compared with the DBD in the DB2 directory. If you specify TEST, DB2
reports significant differences between the two DBDs.
If the condition code is 0, the DBD in the DB2 directory is consistent with the
information in the DB2 catalog.
If the condition code is not 0, then the information in the DB2 catalog and the
DBD in the DB2 directory might be inconsistent. Run REPAIR DBD with the
DIAGNOSE option to gather information that is necessary for resolving any
possible inconsistency.
DIAGNOSE
Specifies that information that is necessary for resolving an inconsistent
database definition is to be generated. Like the TEST option, DIAGNOSE
builds a DBD that is based on the information in the DB2 catalog and
compares it with the DBD in the DB2 directory. In addition, DB2 reports any
differences between the two DBDs, and produces hexadecimal dumps of the
inconsistent DBDs.
If the condition code is 0, the information in the DB2 catalog and the DBD in
the DB2 directory is consistent.
If the condition code is 8, the information in the DB2 catalog and the DBD in
the DB2 directory might be inconsistent.
For further assistance in resolving any inconsistencies, you can contact IBM
Software Support.
REBUILD
Specifies that the DBD that is associated with the specified database is to be
rebuilt from the information in the DB2 catalog.
Attention: Use the REBUILD option with extreme care, as you can cause
more damage to your data. For more assistance, you can contact IBM Software
Support.
OUTDDN ddname
Specifies the DD statement for an optional output data set. This data set
contains copies of the DB2 catalog records that are used to rebuild the DBD.
ddname is the name of the DD statement.
Before running REPAIR

Certain activities might be required before you run the REPAIR utility, depending
on your situation.
Attention: Be extremely careful when using the REPAIR utility to replace data.
Changing data to invalid values by using REPLACE might produce unpredictable
results, particularly when changing page header information. Improper use of
REPAIR can result in damaged data, or in some cases, system failure.
Making a copy of the table space

Before starting to use REPAIR to change data, ensure that you have a copy (full
image copy or DSN1COPY generated copy) of the affected table space to enable
fallback.
550
Restoring damaged indexes

Because REPAIR can access index data only by referring to a page and an offset
within the page, identifying and correcting a problem can be difficult. Use
REBUILD INDEX or RECOVER INDEX to restore damaged index data.
Running REPAIR on encrypted data

Do not run REPAIR on encrypted data. REPAIR does not decrypt the data. The
utility reads the data in its encrypted form and then manipulates the data without
decrypting it.
Data sets that REPAIR uses

The REPAIR utility uses a number of data sets during its operation.
The following table lists the data sets that REPAIR uses. The table lists the DD
Table 98. Data sets that REPAIR uses
Data set
Data set
Required?
SYSIN

control statement.
Yes
SYSPRINT
Yes
Optional output data set
Data set that contains copies of the DB2

catalog records that are used to rebuild the
DBD. You define the DD name.
No
Table space or index
Object that is to be repaired.
Calculating output data set size

Use the following formula to estimate the size of the output data set:
SPACE = (4096,(n,n))
In this formula, n = the total number of DB2 catalog records that relate to the
database on which REPAIR DBD is being executed.
You can calculate an estimate for n by summing the results of SELECT COUNT(*)
from all of the catalog tables in the SYSDBASE table space, where the name of the
database that is associated with the record matches the database on which REPAIR
DBD is being executed.
Concurrency and compatibility for REPAIR

The REPAIR utility has certain concurrency and compatibility characteristics
associated with it.
Chapter 26. REPAIR
551
compatible.
Claims
The following table shows which claim classes REPAIR drains and any restrictive
Table 99. Claim classes of REPAIR operations
Table space or
partition
Index or partition
Action
REPAIR LOCATE KEY DUMP or VERIFY
DW/UTRO
DW/UTRO
REPAIR LOCATE KEY DELETE or

REPLACE
DA/UTUT
DA/UTUT
REPAIR LOCATE RID DUMP or VERIFY
DW/UTRO
None
REPAIR LOCATE RID DELETE
DA/UTUT
DA/UTUT
REPAIR LOCATE RID REPLACE
DA/UTUT
None
REPAIR LOCATE TABLESPACE DUMP or

VERIFY
DW/UTRO
None
REPAIR LOCATE TABLESPACE REPLACE
DA/UTUT
None
REPAIR LOCATE INDEX PAGE DUMP or

VERIFY
None
DW/UTRO
REPAIR LOCATE INDEX PAGE DELETE
None
DA/UTUT
Legend:
v DA - Drain all claim classes - no concurrent SQL access.
v DW - Drain the write claim class - concurrent access for SQL readers.
v UTUT - Utility restrictive state - exclusive control.
v UTRO - Utility restrictive state - read-only access allowed.
v None - Object is not affected by this utility.
REPAIR does not set a utility restrictive state if the target object is
DSNDB01.SYSUTILX.
Compatibility
The following tables show which utilities can run concurrently with REPAIR on the
same target object. The target object can be a table space, an index space, or a
options of a utility, that information is also shown in the table.
The following table shows which utilities can run concurrently with REPAIR
LOCATE by KEY or RID.
Table 100. Utility compatibility with REPAIR, LOCATE by KEY or RID
Utility
552
DUMP or VERIFY
DELETE or REPLACE
CHECK DATA
No
No
CHECK INDEX
Yes
No
CHECK LOB
Yes
No
COPY INDEXSPACE
Yes
No
COPY TABLESPACE
Yes
No
Table 100. Utility compatibility with REPAIR, LOCATE by KEY or RID (continued)
Utility
DUMP or VERIFY
DELETE or REPLACE
DIAGNOSE
Yes
Yes
LOAD
No
No
MERGECOPY
Yes
Yes
MODIFY
Yes
Yes
QUIESCE
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
REBUILD INDEX
RECOVER INDEX
RECOVER TABLESPACE
No
No
No
No

CONTINUE or PAUSE
No
No

ONLY or EXTERNAL
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
REPORT
Yes
Yes

CHANGE
Yes
Yes

REFERENCE
Yes
No
RUNSTATS TABLESPACE
Yes
No
STOSPACE
Yes
Yes
UNLOAD
Yes
No
REORG INDEX
Notes:
1. REORG INDEX is compatible with LOCATE by RID, DUMP, VERIFY, or REPLACE.
2. RECOVER INDEX is compatible with LOCATE by RID, DUMP, or VERIFY.
3. REPAIR LOCATE INDEX PAGE REPLACE is compatible with LOCATE by RID or
REPLACE.
The following table shows which utilities can run concurrently with REPAIR
LOCATE by PAGE.
Table 101. Utility compatibility with REPAIR, LOCATE by PAGE
Utility or action
TABLESPACE
DUMP or VERIFY
TABLESPACE
REPLACE
INDEX DUMP or
VERIFY
INDEX REPLACE
SQL read
Yes
No
Yes
No
SQL write
No
No
No
No
CHECK DATA
No
No
No
No
CHECK INDEX
Yes
No
Yes
No
CHECK LOB
Yes
No
Yes
No
COPY INDEXSPACE
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
COPY TABLESPACE
Yes
No
Yes
No
DIAGNOSE
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Chapter 26. REPAIR
553
Table 101. Utility compatibility with REPAIR, LOCATE by PAGE (continued)

Utility or action
TABLESPACE
DUMP or VERIFY
TABLESPACE
REPLACE
INDEX DUMP or
VERIFY
INDEX REPLACE
LOAD
No
No
No
No
MERGECOPY
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
MODIFY
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
QUIESCE
Yes
No
Yes
No
REBUILD INDEX
Yes
No
No
N/A
RECOVER INDEX
Yes
No
No
No
RECOVER TABLESPACE
(with no option)
No
No
Yes
Yes
RECOVER TABLESPACE
ERROR RANGE
No
No
Yes
Yes
RECOVER TABLESPACE
TOCOPY or TORBA
No
No
No
No
REORG INDEX
Yes
Yes
No
No
REORG TABLESPACE
UNLOAD CONTINUE or
PAUSE
No
No
No
No
REORG TABLESPACE
UNLOAD ONLY or
EXTERNAL
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
REPAIR DELETE or
REPLACE
No
No
No
No
REPAIR DUMP or VERIFY1
Yes
No
Yes
No
REPORT
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
RUNSTATS INDEX
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
RUNSTATS TABLESPACE
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
STOSPACE
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
UNLOAD
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Note:
1. REPAIR LOCATE INDEX PAGE REPLACE is compatible with LOCATE TABLESPACE PAGE.
Resetting table space status

In most cases, resetting the COPY-pending restriction by taking a full image copy
is preferable to using REPAIR. This is because RECOVER cannot be executed
successfully until an image copy has been made.
Resetting the RECOVER-pending status by running RECOVER or LOAD is
preferable to using REPAIR. This is because RECOVER uses DB2-controlled
recovery information, whereas REPAIR SET TABLESPACE or INDEX resets the
RECOVER-pending status without considering the recoverability of the table space.
Recoverability issues include the availability of image copies, of rows in
SYSIBM.SYSCOPY, and of log data sets.
Verifying and possibly correcting referential integrity constraints by running
CHECK DATA are recommended. CHECK DATA performs a complete check of all
554
referential integrity constraints of the table space set, whereas with REPAIR, you
are responsible for checking all the referential integrity constraints violations.
To reset the CHECK-pending status for a LOB table space:
1. Run the CHECK DATA utility again with the AUXERROR INVALIDATE
keywords specified.
2. Update the invalid LOBs.
To reset the auxiliary warning (AUXW) status for a LOB table space:
1. Update or correct the invalid LOB columns, then
2. Run the CHECK LOB utility with the AUXERROR INVALIDATE option if
invalid LOB columns were corrected.
Resetting index space status

Running COPY INDEXSPACE to reset the informational COPY-pending status is
preferable to using the REPAIR utility to reset the status.
Consider using the REBUILD INDEX or RECOVER INDEX utility on an index that
is in REBUILD-pending status, rather than running REPAIR SET INDEX
NORBDPEND. RECOVER uses DB2-controlled recovery information, whereas
REPAIR SET INDEX resets the REBUILD-pending status without considering the
recoverability of the index. Recoverability issues include the availability of image
copies, of rows in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY, and of log data sets.
Repairing a damaged page

You can use the REPAIR utility to repair a damaged page.
To repair a damaged page:
1. Execute REPAIR with the LOG YES option and the DUMP control statement,
specifying the pages that you suspect are damaged. Verify that the dump you
receive contains the desired pages.
2. If you know which page is damaged and you can see how to resolve the error,
repair the page and reset the inconsistent data indicator. Run REPAIR with
the REPLACE RESET DATA control statement. Document your actions in case
you need to undo anything later.
3. If you determine that the page is not really damaged, but merely has the
inconsistent data indicator on, reset the indicator by running REPAIR with
the REPLACE RESET control statement.
Using the DBD statement

You can use REPAIR DBD on declared temporary tables, which must be created in
a database that is defined with the AS TEMP clause. No other DB2 utilities can be
used on a declared temporary table, its indexes, or its table spaces.
|
|
When REPAIR DBD REBUILD is running, an S-lock is acquired for the appropriate
catalog tables. If the S-lock fails, REPAIR DBD fails.
To use the DBD statement:
1. Run the DSN1CHKR utility on the DSNDB01.DBD01, DSNDB06.SYSDBAUT,
and DSNDB06.SYSDBASE table spaces.
Chapter 26. REPAIR
555
2. Run REPAIR DBD with the TEST option to determine if the information in the
DB2 catalog is consistent with the DBD in the DB2 directory. REPAIR DBD
TEST obtains environment information, such as the character that is used for
the decimal point, from the DSNHDECP module for the subsystem.
3. If inconsistencies exist (condition code is not 0), use the DIAGNOSE option
with the OUTDDN keyword to produce diagnostic information. Contact IBM
Software Support for assistance in analyzing this information. REPAIR DBD
DIAGNOSE obtains environment information, such as the character that is used
for the decimal point, from the DSNHDECP module for the subsystem.
4. If IBM Software Support instructs you to do so, replace the existing DBD with
the REBUILD option. Do not use this option if you suspect that information in
the catalog is causing the inconsistency. REBUILD uses information in the
catalog to rebuild the DBD; if the catalog is incorrect, the rebuilt DBD cannot be
correct.
DB2 reads each table space in the database during the REBUILD process to
gather information. If the data sets for the table spaces do not exist or are not
accessible to DB2, the REBUILD abnormally terminates.
REPAIR DBD REBUILD obtains environment information, such as the character
that is used for the decimal point, from the DSNHDECP module for the
subsystem.
5. If you suspect an inconsistency in the DBD of the work file database, run
REPAIR DBD DROP or DROP DATABASE (SQL), and then recreate it. If you
receive errors when you drop the work file database, contact IBM Software
Support for assistance.
6. If the database is started for utility-only access, issue the STOP DATABASE
(database-name) and then issue the START DATABASE (database-name)
ACCESS(RW) command to allow full access to the database. You need to
complete this step if you ran REPAIR DBD REBUILD. DB2 starts the database
for utility-only access when you execute this utility.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When you run REPAIR DBD REBUILD on a database, all trigger packages that
are associated with tables in the database are invalidated. After you run
REPAIR DBD REBUILD, you need to rebind those trigger packages. The DB2
release on which you rebind the trigger packages must be the same as the DB2
release on which you run REPAIR DBD REBUILD.
Locating rows by key

If you use LOCATE TABLESPACE KEY, a number of rows might satisfy the
condition. In this case, REPAIR returns only the RIDs of the rows and does not
perform any VERIFY, REPLACE, DELETE, or DUMP actions which might be coded
in that LOCATE block.
You can use the RID option of LOCATE TABLESPACE to identify a specific row.
Examples of the messages that are issued are shown in the following example:
DSNU658I
DSNU660I
DSNU660I
DSNU660I
DSNU660I
DSNU650I
DSNU012I
556
DSNUCBRL
DSNUCBRL
DSNUCBRL
DSNUCBRL
DSNUCBRL
DSNUCBRP
DSNUGBAC
MULTIPLE RECORDS FOUND WITH SPECIFIED KEY

POSSIBLE RID - X00000100B'
POSSIBLE RID - X000000C18'
POSSIBLE RID - X000000916'
POSSIBLE RID - X000000513'
DUMP
UTILITY EXECUTION TERMINATED,
HIGHEST RETURN CODE=8
Multiple-column indexes
The KEY option supports only single-column indexes. The following message is
issued if you try to locate a row by using a multiple-column index.
DSNUCBRK - INDEX USED HAS MULTIPLE-FIELD KEY
Using VERIFY with REPLACE and DELETE operations

If any data area does not contain the value that is required by a VERIFY statement,
all REPLACE and DELETE operations in the same locate block are inhibited.
VERIFY and REPLACE statements that follow the next LOCATE statement are not
affected.
Repairing critical catalog table spaces and indexes

An ID with a granted authority receives message DSNT5001 RESOURCE UNAVAILABLE,
while trying to repair a table space or index in the catalog or directory if table
space DSNDB06.SYSDBASE or DSNDB06.SYSUSER is unavailable.
If you get this message, you must either make these table spaces available or run
the REPAIR utility on the catalog or directory by using an authorization ID with
the installation SYSADM or installation SYSOPR authority.
Updating version information when moving objects to another

subsystem
When you move objects that contain system pages from one subsystem to another
subsystem, the version information on the target subsystem must match the
version information on the source subsystem. If the version information does not
match, you cannot access the data on the target subsystem.
To move objects to another subsystem and ensure that the version information
matches:
1. Ensure that the object definitions on the source and target subsystems are the
same. For a table space, each table must have the same number of columns,
and each column must be the same data type.
|
|
Recommendation: Use the same ALTER TABLE statement on both the source
and target objects.
2. If you are copying indexes that have not been altered in Version 8, check the
SYSIBM.SYSINDEXES catalog table on both subsystems to ensure that the value
in both the CURRENT_VERSION column and the OLDEST_VERSION column
is 0.
3. If the object has been altered since its creation and has never been reorganized,
run the REORG utility on the object. You can determine if an object has been
altered but not reorganized by checking the values of the OLDEST_VERSION
and CURRENT_VERSION columns in SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACE or
SYSIBM.SYSINDEXES. If OLDEST_VERSION is 0 and CURRENT_VERSION is
greater than 0, run REORG. If you do not own the REORG utility, ensure that
you do can insert after the last ALTER to force the creation of a system page.
4. Ensure that enough version numbers are available. For a table space, the
combined active number of versions for the object on both the source and
target subsystems must be less than 255. For an index, the combined active
Chapter 26. REPAIR
557
number of versions must be less than 16. Use the following guidelines to
calculate the active number of versions for the object on both the source and
target subsystems:
v If the value in the CURRENT_VERSION column is less than the value in the
OLDEST_VERSION column, add the maximum number of versions (255 for
a table space or 16 for an index) to the value in the CURRENT_VERSION
column.
v Use the following formula to calculate the number of active versions:
number of active_versions =
MAX(target.CURRENT_VERSION,source.CURRENT_VERSION)
- MIN(target.OLDEST_VERSION,source.OLDEST_VERSION) + 1
If the number of active versions is too high, you must reduce the number of
active versions by running REORG on both the source and target objects. Then,
use the COPY utility to take a copy, and run MODIFY RECOVERY to recycle
the version numbers.
5. Run the DSN1COPY utility with the OBIDXLAT option. On the control
statement, specify the proper mapping of table database object identifiers
(OBIDs) for the table space or index from the source to the target subsystem.
6. Run REPAIR VERSIONS on the object on the target subsystem. For table
spaces, the utility updates the following columns:
v OLDEST_VERSION and CURRENT_VERSION in SYSTABLEPART
v VERSION in SYSTABLES
v OLDEST_VERSION and CURRENT_VERSION in SYSTABLESPACE
For indexes, the utility updates OLDEST_VERSION and CURRENT_VERSION

in SYSINDEXES. DB2 uses the following formulas to update these columns in
both SYSTABLEPART and SYSINDEXES:
CURRENT_VERSION =
OLDEST_VERSION =
MAX(target.CURRENT_VERSION,source.CURRENT_VERSION)
MIN(target.OLDEST_VERSION,source.OLDEST_VERSION)
Related information
Termination or restart of REPAIR

You can terminate the REPAIR utility, but you cannot restart the REPAIR utility.
You can terminate a REPAIR job with the TERM UTILITY command.
REPAIR cannot be restarted. If you attempt to restart REPAIR, you receive message
DSNU191I, which states that the utility cannot be restarted. You must terminate the
job with the TERM UTILITY command, and rerun REPAIR from the beginning.
Related information
-TERM UTILITY (DB2) (DB2 Command Reference)
Review of REPAIR output

The output from the REPAIR utility can consist of one or more modified pages in
the specified DB2 table space or index, and a dump of the contents.
Error messages
At each LOCATE statement, the last data page and the new page that are being
located are checked for a few common errors, and messages are issued.
558
Data checks
Although REPAIR enables you to manipulate both user and DB2 data by bypassing
SQL, it does perform some checking of data. For example, if REPAIR tries to write
a page with the wrong page number, DB2 abnormally terminates with a 04E code
and reason code C200B0. If the page is broken because the broken page bit is on or
the incomplete page flag is set, REPAIR issues the following message:
DSNU670I + DSNUCBRP - PAGE X'000004' IS A BROKEN PAGE
After running REPAIR

Certain activities might be required after you run the REPAIR utility, depending on
your situation.
You are responsible for violations of referential constraints that are a result of
running REPAIR. These violations cause the target table space to be placed in the
Related reference
Chapter 8, CHECK DATA, on page 61
Sample REPAIR control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own REPAIR
control statements.
Example 1: Replacing damaged data and verifying replacement

The following control statement specifies that the REPAIR utility is to perform the
following actions:
v Repair the specified page of table space DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D, as indicated by
the LOCATE clause.
v Verify that, at the specified offset (50), the damaged data (0A00) is found, as
indicated by the VERIFY clause.
v Replace the damaged data with the desired data (0D11), as indicated by the
REPLACE clause.
v Initiate a dump beginning at offset 50, for 4 bytes, as indicated by the DUMP
clause. You can use the generated dump to verify the replacement.
//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='IUIQU1UH',UTPROC='',SYSTEM='DSN'
//SYSIN DD *
REPAIR OBJECT
LOCATE TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D PAGE X'02'
VERIFY OFFSET 50 DATA X'0A00'
REPLACE OFFSET 50 DATA X'0D11'
DUMP OFFSET 50 LENGTH 4
Example 2: Removing a nonindexed row that is found by REORG

When reorganizing table space DSNDB04.TS1, assume that you received the
following message:
Chapter 26. REPAIR
559
DSNU3401 DSNURBXA - ERROR LOADING INDEX, DUPLICATE KEY

INDEX = EMPINDEX
TABLE = EMP
RID OF INDEXED ROW = X'0000000201'
RID OF NONINDEXED ROW = X'0000000503'
To resolve this error condition, submit the following control statement, which
specifies that REPAIR is to delete the nonindexed row and log the change. (The
LOG keyword is not required; the change is logged by default.) The RID option
identifies the row that REPAIR is to delete.
REPAIR
LOCATE TABLESPACE DSNDB04.TS1 RID (X'0000000503')
DELETE
Example 3: Reporting whether catalog and directory DBDs differ

The following control statement specifies that REPAIR is to compare the DBD for
DSN8D2AP in the catalog with the DBD for DSN8D2AP in the directory.
REPAIR DBD TEST DATABASE DSN8D2AP
If the condition code is 0, the DBDs are consistent. If the condition code is not 0,
the DBDs might be inconsistent. In this case, run REPAIR DBD with the
DIAGNOSE option, as shown in example 4, to find out more detailed information
about any inconsistencies.
Example 4: Reporting differences between catalog and directory

DBDs
The following control statement specifies that the REPAIR utility is to report
information about the inconsistencies between the catalog and directory DBDs for
DSN8D2AP. Run this job after you run a REPAIR job with the TEST option (as
shown in example 3), and the condition code is not 0. In this example, SYSREC is
the output data set, as indicated by the OUTDDN option.
REPAIR DBD DIAGNOSE DATABASE DSN8D2AP OUTDDN SYSREC
Example 5: Repairing a table space with an orphan row

After running DSN1CHKR on table space SYSDBASE, assume that you receive the
following message:
DSN1812I ORPHAN ID = 20 ID ENTRY = 0190 FOUND IN
PAGE = 0000000024
From a DSN1PRNT of page X0000000024 and X0000002541, you identify that

RID X0000002420 has a forward pointer of X0000002521.
Repair the table space by taking the following actions:
1. Submit the following control statement, which specifies that REPAIR is to set
the orphans backward pointer to zeros:
REPAIR OBJECT LOG YES
LOCATE TABLESPACE DSNDB06.SYSDBASE RID X'0000002420'
VERIFY OFFSET X'0A' DATA X'0000002422'
REPLACE OFFSET X'0A' DATA X'0000000000'
Setting the pointer to zeros prevents the next step from updating link pointers
while deleting the orphan. Updating the link pointers can cause DB2 to
abnormally terminate if the orphans pointers are incorrect.
560
2. Submit the following control statement, which deletes the orphan:

REPAIR OBJECT LOG YES
LOCATE TABLESPACE DSNDB06.SYSDBASE RID X'00002420'
VERIFY OFFSET X'06' DATA X'00002521'
DELETE
Example 6: Resetting restrictive states

The control statement in this example specifies that the REPAIR utility is to reset
the following restrictive states for the indicated objects:
v For all indexes on table spaces DBNI1601.TSNI1601 and DBNI1601.TSNI1602,
reset RBDP, PSRBDP, or RBDP* status.
v For partition 1 of table space DBNI1601.TSNI1601 and partition 4 of table space
DBNI1601.TSNI1602, reset ACHKP status.
v For partitions 1 and 4 of table space DBNI1601.TSNI1601, reset CHKP status.
//STEP3
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='JUNIU116.RECV1',
//
//SYSIN
DD *
REPAIR OBJECT
SET INDEX (ALL) TABLESPACE DBNI1601.TSNI1601 NORBDPEND
SET INDEX (ALL) TABLESPACE DBNI1601.TSNI1602 NORBDPEND
SET TABLESPACE DBNI1601.TSNI1601 PART 1 NOAUXCHKP
SET TABLESPACE DBNI1601.TSNI1602 PART 4 NOAUXCHKP
SET TABLESPACE DBNI1601.TSNI1602 PART 1 NOCHECKPEND
SET TABLESPACE DBNI1601.TSNI1602 PART 4 NOCHECKPEND
/*
Figure 85. REPAIR SET example control statement
Example 7: Updating version information

The control statement in this example specifies that REPAIR is to update the
version information in the catalog and directory for table spaces TLKQAST1,
TSKQAST2, and TPKQAST3.
//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='JUKQU3AS.REPAIR',TIME=1440,
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='SSTR'
//SYSIN
DD *
REPAIR VERSIONS TABLESPACE DBKQAST1.TLKQAST1
REPAIR VERSIONS TABLESPACE DBKQAST2.TSKQAST2
REPAIR VERSIONS TABLESPACE DBKQAST3.TPKQAST3
Figure 86. REPAIR VERSIONS example control statement
Example 8: Repairing a table space with clones

|
|
|
|
The control statement specifies that REPAIR is to reset the auxiliary

CHECK-pending (ACHKP) status of the specified table space and process only the
specified objects that are table spaces that contain clone tables, indexes on clone
tables, or index spaces that contain indexes on clone tables.
REPAIR
SET TABLESPACE DBKQDB01.TPKQDB01
NOAUXCHKP CLONE
Chapter 26. REPAIR
561
562
Chapter 27. REPORT

The REPORT utility provides information about table spaces, tables, and indexes.
Use REPORT TABLESPACESET to find the names of all the table spaces and tables
in a referential structure, including LOB table spaces. The REPORT utility also
provides information about the LOB table spaces that are associated with a base
table space. Use REPORT RECOVERY to find information that is necessary for
recovering a table space, index, or a table space and all of its indexes.
Output
The output from REPORT TABLESPACESET consists of the names of all table
spaces in the table space set that you specify. It also lists all tables in the table
spaces and all tables that are dependent on those tables.
The output from REPORT RECOVERY consists of the recovery history from the
SYSIBM.SYSCOPY catalog table, log ranges from the SYSIBM.SYSLGRNX directory
table, and volume serial numbers where archive log data sets from the BSDS
reside. In addition, REPORT RECOVERY output includes information about any
indexes on the table space that are in the informational COPY-pending status
because this information affects the recoverability of an index.
|
|
|
If REPORT TABLESPACESET or REPORT RECOVERY is specified and the base

objects have been cloned, information for both base and clone objects will be
displayed in the output.
In a data sharing environment, the REPORT output provides:
v The RBA of when DB2 was migrated to Version 9.1
v The high and low RBA values of the migrated member
v A list of any SYSLGRNX records from the time before data sharing was enabled
that cannot be used to recover to any point in time after data sharing was
enabled
v For SYSCOPY, the member from which the image copy was deleted
Authorization required:
An ID with DBCTRL or DBADM authority over database DSNDB06 can run the
REPORT utility on any table space in DSNDB01 (the directory) or DSNDB06 (the
catalog), as can any ID with installation SYSOPR, SYSCTRL, or SYSADM authority.
Execution phases of REPORT

The REPORT utility operates in these phases:
563
Phase Description
UTILINIT
REPORT
Collects information
UTILTERM
Performs cleanup
Related concepts
Preparing for recovery on page 139
Syntax and options of the REPORT control statement

The REPORT utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
Syntax diagram
REPORT
RECOVERY
INDEX NONE
TABLESPACE
LIST listdef-name
table-space-name-spec
index-list-spec
TABLESPACESET
table-space-name-spec
TABLESPACE

INDEX ALL
info options
SHOWDSNS
index-list-spec:
INDEXSPACE
INDEX
index-space-name
database-name.
LIST listdef-name
index-name
creator-id.
LIST listdef-name
info options:
564
DSNUM ALL

DSNUM
integer
CURRENT
SUMMARY
LOCALSITE
RECOVERYSITE
ARCHLOG 1

ARCHLOG
2
ALL
table-space-name-spec:
table-space-name
database-name.
Option descriptions
RECOVERY
Indicates that recovery information for the specified table space or index is to
be reported.
For REPORT RECOVERY, specifies the table space (and, optionally, the
database to which it belongs) that is being reported.
For REPORT TABLESPACESET, specifies a table space (and, optionally, the
database to which it belongs) in the table space set.
database-name
Optionally specifies the database to which the table space belongs.
table-space-name
Specifies the table space.
LISTlistdef-name
allows one LIST keyword for each control statement of REPORT. The list
must contain only table spaces. Do not specify LIST with the
TABLESPACE...table-space-name specification. The TABLESPACE keyword is
required in order to validate the contents of the list. REPORT RECOVERY
TABLESPACE is invoked once per item in the list.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
SHOWDSNS
Specifies that the VSAM data set names for each table space or index space
are to be included in the TABLESPACESET report. Data set names for base
objects are shown in the section titled TABLESPACE SET REPORT. Data set
names for CLONE objects are shown in the section titled CLONE
TABLESPACE SET REPORT. The later report is only prepared if the base
objects have been cloned.
Specifies the index space that is being reported.
database-name
Optionally specifies the database to which the index space belongs.
Chapter 27. REPORT
565
index-space-name
Specifies the index space name for the index that is being reported.
LIST listdef-name
must contain only index spaces. Do not specify LIST with the
INDEXSPACE index-space-name specification. The INDEXSPACE keyword is
required in order to validate the contents of the list. REPORT RECOVERY
INDEXSPACE is invoked once for each item in the list.
Specifies the index in the index space that is being reported.
creator-id
index-name
Specifies the index name that is to be reported. Enclose the index name in
LIST listdef-name
must contain only index spaces. Do not specify LIST with the
INDEX...index-name specification. The INDEX keyword is required in order
to validate the contents of the list. REPORT RECOVERY INDEX is invoked
once for each item in the list.
The following REPORT keywords are optional:
INDEX NONE
Specifies that recovery information for index spaces that are associated
with the specified table space is not to be reported.
INDEX ALL
Specifies that recovery information for index spaces that are associated
with the specified table space is to be reported.
DSNUM
Identifies a partition or data set for which information is to be reported.
Alternatively, DSNUM specifies that information is to be reported for the
ALL
Specifies that information is to be reported for the entire table space or
index space.
integer
Is the number of a partition or data set for which information is to be
reported. The maximum is 4096.
For a partitioned table space or partitioned index space, the integer is
its partition number.
set name, as cataloged in the VSAM catalog. The data set name has the
following format:
catname.DSNDBx.dbname.tsname.y0001.Annn
In this format:
566
catname
x
Is C or D.
dbname
tsname Is the table space name.
y
Is I or J.
nnn
CURRENT
Specifies that only the SYSCOPY entries that were written after the last
recovery point of the table space are to be reported. The last recovery point
is the last full image copy, LOAD REPLACE LOG YES image copy, or
REORG LOG YES image copy. If you specify DSNUM ALL, the last
recovery point is a full image copy that was taken for the entire table space
or index space. However, if you specify the CURRENT option, but the last
recovery point does not exist on the active log, DB2 prompts you to mount
archive tapes until this point is found.
CURRENT also reports only the SYSLGRNX rows and archive log volumes
that were created after the last incremental image copy entry. If no
incremental image copies were created, only the SYSLGRNX rows and
archive log volumes that were created after the last recovery point are
reported.
If you do not specify CURRENT or if no last recovery point exists, all
SYSCOPY and SYSLGRNX entries for that table space or index space are
reported, including those on archive logs. If you do not specify CURRENT,
the entries that were written after the last recovery point are marked with
an asterisk (*) in the report.
SUMMARY
Specifies that only a summary of volume serial numbers is to be reported.
It reports the following volume serial numbers:
v Where the archive log data sets from the BSDS reside
v Where the image copy data sets from SYSCOPY reside
If you do not specify SUMMARY, recovery information is reported, in
addition to the summary of volume serial numbers.
LOCALSITE
Specifies that all SYSCOPY records that were copied from a local site
system are to be reported.
RECOVERYSITE
Specifies that all SYSCOPY records that were copied from the recovery site
system are to be reported.
ARCHLOG
Specifies which archive log data sets are to be reported.
1
Reports archive log data set 1 only.
Reports archive log data set 2 only.
ALL
Reports both archive log data sets 1 and 2.
Chapter 27. REPORT
567
TABLESPACESET
Indicates that the names of all table spaces in the table space set, as well as
the names of all indexes on tables in the table space set, are to be reported.
Related reference
Data sets that REPORT uses

The REPORT utility uses a number of data sets during its operation.
The following table lists the data sets that REPORT uses. The table lists the DD
Table 102. Data sets that REPORT uses
Data set
Description
Required?
SYSIN

control statement.
Yes
SYSPRINT
Yes
Table space
Object that is to be reported.
Concurrency and compatibility for REPORT

The REPORT utility has certain concurrency and compatibility characteristics
associated with it.
REPORT does not set a utility restrictive state on the target table space or partition.
REPORT can run concurrently on the same target object with any utility or SQL
operation.
How REPORT recovers information

You can use the REPORT utility when planning for recovery. REPORT provides
information that is necessary for recovering a table space.
You can request report information for LOCALSITE, RECOVERYSITE, or both.
REPORT RECOVERY displays:
v Recovery information from the SYSIBM.SYSCOPY catalog table, including
QUIESCE, COPY, LOAD, REORG, RECOVER TOCOPY, and RECOVER TORBA
(or TOLOGPOINT) history. REPORT RECOVERY output also indicates the
device type and whether this is the primary or backup copy for LOCALSITE or
RECOVERYSITE.
v Log ranges of the table space from the SYSIBM.SYSLGRNX directory.
v Archive log data sets ARCHLOG1, ARCHLOG2, or both from the bootstrap data
set.
568
You can use REPORT TABLESPACESET to find the names of all members of a
table space set.
You can also use REPORT to obtain recovery information about the catalog and
directory. When doing so, use the CURRENT option to avoid unnecessary
mounting of archive tapes.
REPORT uses asterisks to denote any non-COPY entries that it finds in the
SYSIBM.SYSCOPY catalog table. For example, an entry that is added by the
QUIESCE utility is marked with asterisks in the REPORT output.
Recommendation: For image copies of partitioned table spaces that are taken with
the DSNUM ALL option, run REPORT RECOVERY DSNUM ALL. If you run
REPORT RECOVERY DSNUM ALL CURRENT, DB2 reports additional historical
information that dates back to the last full image copy that was taken for the entire
table space.
The REPORT RECOVERY utility output indicates whether any image copies are
unusable; image copies that were taken prior to REORG or LOAD events that reset
REORG-pending status are marked as unusable. In the REPORT RECOVERY
output, look at the IC TYPE and STYPE fields to help you determine which image
copies are unusable.
For example, in the sample REPORT RECOVERY output in the following figure,
the value in the first IC TYPE field, *R*, indicates that a LOAD REPLACE LOG
YES operation occurred. The value in the second IC TYPE field, <F> indicates that
a full image copy was taken.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
DSNU582I ) 271 15:02:09.92 DSNUPPCP - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DBKQAA01.TPKQAA01 SYSCOPY ROWS
TIMESTAMP = 2006-09-28-15.00.07.773906, IC TYPE = *C*, SHR LVL = , DSNUM
= 0000,
START LRSN =000037940EEC
DEV TYPE =
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= L, FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0000,
HIGH DSNUM = 0000,
OLDEST VERSION = 0000,
LOGICAL PART = 0000,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME =
,
AUTHID =
,
COPYPAGESF = -1.0E+00
NPAGESF = -1.0E+00
,
CPAGESF = -1.0E+00
DSNAME
= DBKQAA01.TPKQAA01
, MEMBER NAME =
,
INSTANCE = 01, RELCREATED = M
TIMESTAMP = 2006-09-28-15.00.36.940517, IC TYPE = *R*, SHR LVL = , DSNUM
= 0000,
START LRSN =000037A07DAC
DEV TYPE =
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= , FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0000,
HIGH DSNUM = 0000,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME = TJI11004,
AUTHID =
ADMF001 ,
NPAGESF = -1.0E+00
,
CPAGESF = -1.0E+00
DSNAME
= DBKQAA01.TPKQAA01
, MEMBER NAME =
,
Figure 87. Sample REPORT RECOVERY output before table space placed in REORG-pending status
After this image copy was taken, assume that an event occurred that put the table
space in REORG-pending status. The following figure shows the next several rows
of REPORT RECOVERY output for the same table space. The value in the first
ICTYPE field, *X* indicates that a REORG LOG YES event occurred. In the same
SYSCOPY record, the value in the STYPE field, A, indicates that this REORG job
reset the REORG-pending status. Any image copies that are taken before this status
Chapter 27. REPORT
569
was reset are unusable. (Thus, the full image copy in the REPORT output in the
previous figure is unusable.) The next record contains an F in the IC TYPE field
and an X in the STYPE field, which indicates that a full image copy was taken
during the REORG job. This image copy is usable.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
TIMESTAMP = 2006-09-28-15.02.03.978248, IC TYPE = *X*, SHR LVL = , DSNUM

= 0000,
START LRSN =000037B8F661
DEV TYPE =
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= A, FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0001,
HIGH DSNUM = 0026,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME = TJI11006,
AUTHID =
ADMF001 ,
NPAGESF = -1.0E+00
,
CPAGESF = -1.0E+00
DSNAME
= DBKQAA01.TPKQAA01
, MEMBER NAME =
,
TIMESTAMP = 2006-09-28-15.02.09.789597, IC TYPE = F, SHR LVL = R, DSNUM
=
START LRSN =000037CD653E
DEV TYPE = 3390
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= X,, FILE SEQ
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0001,
HIGH DSNUM = 0026,
LOGICAL PART =
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME = TJI11006,
AUTHID =
ADMF001 ,
COPYPAGESF = 1.89E+02
NPAGESF = 1.64E+02
,
CPAGESF = 1.64E+02
DSNAME
= JUKQU1AA.REORG1.STEP1.SYSCOPY
, MEMBER NAME =
DS VOLSER = SCR03 ,
0000,
= 0000,
0000,
Figure 88. Sample REPORT RECOVERY output after REORG-pending status is reset
Related reference
SYSIBM.SYSCOPY table (DB2 SQL Reference)
Running REPORT on the catalog and directory

REPORT RECOVERY shows the image copies for those table spaces that are not
included in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY: DSNDB01.SYSUTILX, DSNDB01.DBD01, and
DSNDB06.SYSCOPY.
When you execute REPORT RECOVERY on DSNDB01.DBD01,
DSNDB01.SYSUTILX, or DSNDB06.SYSCOPY, specify the CURRENT option to
avoid unnecessarily mounting archive tapes. If you do not specify CURRENT, DB2
searches for and reports all SYSCOPY records in the log, including those on
archive tapes. However, if the CURRENT option is specified and the last recovery
point does not exist on the active log, DB2 prompts you to mount archive tapes
until this point is found.
You can use REPORT TABLESPACESET on the DB2 catalog and directory table
spaces.
Terminating or restarting REPORT

You can terminate and restart the REPORT utility.
You can terminate a REPORT utility job with the TERM UTILITY command if you
have submitted the job or have SYSOPR, SYSCTRL, or SYSADM authority.
You can restart a REPORT utility job, but it starts from the beginning again.
570
Related concepts
Review of REPORT output

spaces in the table space set that you specify and the output from REPORT
RECOVERY displays all information about the image copy data sets and archive
log data set that might be required during the recovery.
REPORT TABLESPACESET output

spaces in the table space set that you specify. It also identifies all tables in the table
spaces, and identifies all tables that are dependent on those tables, including LOB
and XML table spaces.
For example, the statement REPORT TABLESPACESET TABLESPACE
DSN8D81A.DSN8S81D generates the output that is shown in the following figure.
For the purposes of this example, an XML column has been added to the sample
table DSN8910.DEPT
DSNU000I
DSNU1044I
DSNU050I
DSNU587I )
270
270
270
270
14:18:14.71
14:18:14.91
14:18:14.92
14:18:14.94
DSNUGUTC
DSNUGTIS
DSNUGUTC
DSNUPSET
OUTPUT START FOR UTILITY, UTILID = REP94

PROCESSING SYSIN AS EBCDIC
REPORT TABLESPACESET TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D
REPORT TABLESPACE SET WITH TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D
TABLESPACE SET REPORT:

TABLESPACE
TABLE
INDEXSPACE
INDEX
INDEXSPACE
INDEX
INDEXSPACE
INDEX
INDEXSPACE
INDEX
DEP TABLE
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D
DSN8910.DEPT
DSN8D91A.XDEPT1
DSN8910.XDEPT11
DSN8D91A.XDEPT2
DSN8910.XDEPT22
DSN8D91A.XDEPT3
DSN8910.XDEPT33
DSN8D91A.IRDOCIDD
DSN8910.I_DOCIDDEPT
DSN8910.DEPT
DSN8910.EMP
DSN8910.PROJ
TABLESPACE
TABLE
INDEXSPACE
INDEX
INDEXSPACE
INDEX
DEP TABLE
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E
DSN8910.EMP
DSN8D91A.XEMP1
DSN8910.XEMP11
DSN8D91A.XEMP2
DSN8910.XEMP22
DSN8910.DEPT
DSN8910.EMPPROJACT
DSN8910.PROJ
TABLESPACE
TABLE
INDEXSPACE
INDEX
INDEXSPACE
INDEX
DEP TABLE
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
DSN8D91A.DSN8S91P
DSN8910.ACT
DSN8D91A.XACT1
DSN8910.XACT11
DSN8D91A.XACT2
DSN8910.XACT22
DSN8910.PROJACT
TABLE
INDEXSPACE
: DSN8910.EMPPROJACT
: DSN8D91A.XEMPPROJ
Chapter 27. REPORT
571
INDEX
INDEXSPACE
INDEX
: DSN8910.XEMPPROJACT1
: DSN8D91A.XEMP1AQJ
: DSN8910.XEMPPROJACT2
TABLE
INDEXSPACE
INDEX
INDEXSPACE
INDEX
DEP TABLE
:
:
:
:
:
:
DSN8910.PROJ
DSN8D91A.XPROJ1
DSN8910.XPROJ11
DSN8D91A.XPROJ2
DSN8910.XPROJ22
DSN8910.PROJ
DSN8910.PROJACT
TABLE
INDEXSPACE
INDEX
DEP TABLE
:
:
:
:
DSN8910.PROJACT
DSN8D91A.XPROJAC1
DSN8910.XPROJAC11
DSN8910.EMPPROJACT
XML TABLESPACE SET REPORT:

TABLESPACE
: DSN8D91A.DSN8S91D
BASE TABLE
:
COLUMN
:
XML TABLESPACE
:
XML TABLE
:
XML NODEID INDEXSPACE:
XML NODEID INDEX
:
DSNU580I
DSNU010I
DSN8910.DEPT
XML1
DSN8D91A.XDEP0000
DSN8910.XDEPT
DSN8D91A.IRNODEID
DSN8910.I_NODEIDXDEPT
270 14:18:14.94 DSNUPORT - REPORT UTILITY COMPLETE - ELAPSED TIME=00:00:00

270 14:18:14.97 DSNUGBAC - UTILITY EXECUTION COMPLETE, HIGHEST RETURN CODE=0
Figure 89. Example of REPORT TABLESPACESET output
REPORT RECOVERY output

REPORT RECOVERY displays all information about the image copy data sets and
archive log data set that might be required during the recovery.
If the DSVOLSER column of SYSIBM.SYSCOPY is blank, REPORT RECOVERY
does not display volume serial numbers for image copy data sets.
The report contains three sections, which include the following types of
information:
v Recovery history from the SYSIBM.SYSCOPY catalog table.
v Log ranges from SYSIBM.SYSLGRNX.
v Volume serial numbers where archive log data sets from the BSDS reside.
If REPORT has no data to display for one or more of these topics, the
corresponding sections of the report contain the following message:
DSNU588I - NO DATA TO BE REPORTED
The following figure shows a sample of REPORT RECOVERY output in a data

sharing environment.
| DSNU050I
277 11:56:29.12
| DSNU581I ) 277 11:56:29.13
| DSNU593I ) 277 11:56:29.14
MINIMUM
RBA:
|
MAXIMUM
RBA:
|
572
DSNUGUTC - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DBUV0101.TPUV0101

DSNUPREC - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DBUV0101.TPUV0101
DSNUPREC - REPORT RECOVERY ENVIRONMENT RECORD:
000000000000
FFFFFFFFFFFF
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
MIGRATING RBA: 000000000000

DSNU582I ) 277 11:56:29.14 DSNUPPCP - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DBUV0101.TPUV0101 SYSCOPY ROWS
= 0000,
START LRSN =0000374F6154
DEV TYPE =
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= L, FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0000,
HIGH DSNUM = 0000,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME =
,
AUTHID =
,
NPAGESF = -1.0E+00
,
CPAGESF = -1.0E+00
DSNAME
= DBUV0101.TPUV0101
, MEMBER NAME =
,
TIMESTAMP = 2006-10-04-11.55.49.489595, IC TYPE = *R*, SHR LVL = , DSNUM
= 0000,
START LRSN =00003763616B
DEV TYPE =
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= , FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0000,
HIGH DSNUM = 0000,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE = RRF
JOBNAME = TJJ11008,
AUTHID =
ADMF001 ,
NPAGESF = -1.0E+00
,
CPAGESF = -1.0E+00
DSNAME
= DBUV0101.TPUV0101
, MEMBER NAME =
,
TIMESTAMP = 2006-10-04-11.56.24.997616, IC TYPE = F , SHR LVL = R, DSNUM
= 0000,
START LRSN =000037775646
DEV TYPE = 3390
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= , FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0001,
HIGH DSNUM = 0016,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME = TJJ11011,
AUTHID =
ADMF001 ,
NPAGESF = 1.49E+02
,
CPAGESF = 1.33E+02
DSNAME
= KUUVT101.COPY.STEP1.SYSCOPY1
, MEMBER NAME =
,
DSNU586I
DSNU588I
) 277 11:56:29.14 DSNUPSUM - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DBUV0101.TPUV0101 SUMMARY

) 277 11:56:29.14 DSNUPSUM - NO DATA TO BE REPORTED
/DSNU583I
) 277 11:56:29.14 DSNUPPLR - SYSLGRNX ROWS FROM REPORT RECOVERY

FOR TABLESPACE DBUV0101.TPUV0101
UCDATE
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
UCTIME
11541904
11541916
11541929
11541940
11541952
11541964
11541975
11541987
11541998
11542010
11542022
11542035
11542046
11542059
11542074
11542087
11542199
11542201
11542202
11542202
11542203
11542205
11542205
11542206
11542207
11542209
START RBA
0000374F86EC
0000374FB0E1
0000374FDACA
000037500483
000037502E23
00003750582E
0000375081E7
00003750AB87
00003750D540
00003750FEE0
0000375128A2
00003751525B
000037517BFB
00003751A674
00003751D02D
00003751FA0B
00003752B0F9
00003752B4C1
00003752B84D
00003752BBD9
00003752BF65
00003752C31E
00003752C6AA
00003752CA36
00003752CDC2
00003752D1A4
STOP RBA
00003752195A
00003752195A
00003752195A
00003752195A
00003752195A
00003752195A
00003752195A
00003752195A
00003752195A
00003752195A
00003752195A
00003752195A
00003752195A
00003752195A
00003752195A
00003752195A
0000375C2734
0000375C275E
0000375C27D2
0000375C2846
0000375C28BA
0000375C292E
0000375C29A2
0000375C2A16
0000375C2A8A
0000375C2AFE
START LRSN
BF8110CF0ADF
BF8110CF26BE
BF8110CF4606
BF8110CF6209
BF8110CF7F04
BF8110CF9AFD
BF8110CFB7D6
BF8110CFD3C4
BF8110CFEFD4
BF8110D00D2F
BF8110D02A7E
BF8110D04860
BF8110D06558
BF8110D083D9
BF8110D0A7D6
BF8110D0C759
BF8110D1D925
BF8110D1DDFD
BF8110D1E02B
BF8110D1E252
BF8110D1E495
BF8110D1E75F
BF8110D1E9C9
BF8110D1EC01
BF8110D1EE6B
BF8110D1F14C
STOP LRSN
BF8110D0EB95
BF8110D0EC6F
BF8110D0ECEE
BF8110D0ED64
BF8110D0EE47
BF8110D0EED8
BF8110D0EF51
BF8110D0EFCC
BF8110D0F052
BF8110D0F0D6
BF8110D0F157
BF8110D0F204
BF8110D0F350
BF8110D0F413
BF8110D0F4DF
BF8110D0F567
BF8110F9EE17
BF8110F9EF2E
BF8110F9EFC8
BF8110F9F050
BF8110F9F0DB
BF8110F9F160
BF8110F9F1E2
BF8110F9F27D
BF8110F9F2FF
BF8110F9F390
PARTITION
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
MEMBER ID
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
Chapter 27. REPORT
573
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
11542210
11542211
11542212
11542213
11542214
11542215
11555014
11555015
11555017
11555022
11555025
11555027
11555028
11555031
11555032
11555033
11555035
11555036
11555037
11555039
11555041
11555042
11555264
11555266
11555270
11555273
11555276
11555279
11555282
11555285
11555287
00003752D530
00003752D8BC
00003752DC48
00003752E000
00003752E38C
00003752E718
000037641512
0000376434E7
00003764A0F2
00003764C7F9
00003764E702
00003765060B
000037652514
00003765441D
000037656326
00003765822F
00003765A138
00003765C041
00003765E033
000037660033
000037662033
000037664033
00003767877D
00003767C8C1
000037682610
0000376856B9
00003768D63D
0000376936AB
00003769A5DE
00003769F6C1
0000376A3819
0000375C2B72
0000375C2BE6
0000375C2C5A
0000375C2CCE
0000375C2D42
0000375C2DB6
000037666079
0000376661A7
000037666303
00003766645F
0000376665BB
000037666717
000037666873
0000376669CF
000037666B2B
000037666C87
000037666DE3
000037666F3F
0000376670E8
000037667244
0000376673A0
0000376674FC
0000376FB01E
0000376FB452
0000376FB6C6
0000376FB93A
0000376FBBAE
0000376FBE22
0000376FC10C
0000376FC380
0000376FC5F4
BF8110D1F3C8
BF8110D1F65D
BF8110D1F8B9
BF8110D1FB35
BF8110D1FE1E
BF8110D20107
BF811125EB99
BF811125EDEB
BF811125F276
BF811125FD5C
BF8111260503
BF81112609DA
BF8111260DA8
BF8111261384
BF81112616B4
BF81112619C9
BF8111261D27
BF811126207C
BF8111262398
BF811126281F
BF8111262BA7
BF8111262F1D
BF8111284DEB
BF8111285307
BF8111285B65
BF8111286213
BF8111286AB6
BF81112870D0
BF8111287812
BF811128800C
BF8111288438
BF8110F9F469
BF8110F9F4ED
BF8110F9F58E
BF8110F9F64A
BF8110F9F6DF
BF8110F9F7A1
BF8111266663
BF8111266709
BF8111266796
BF811126682C
BF81112668A9
BF8111266922
BF81112669F5
BF8111266A77
BF8111266B08
BF8111266BA3
BF8111266C63
BF8111266CE5
BF8111266D5F
BF8111266DD6
BF8111266E50
BF8111266F25
BF8111357B9B
BF811135809D
BF811135868A
BF8111358C26
BF8111359150
BF811135970F
BF8111359D87
BF811135A49D
BF811135AA33
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
100406
11555288
11555291
11560588
11560591
11560594
11560597
11560599
0000376A88FC
0000376B1487
0000376BB087
0000376C2F10
0000376C9EB8
0000376D0CE6
0000376D4ED1
0000376FC868
0000376FCADC
0000376FCD50
0000376FD000
0000376FD274
0000376FD4E8
0000376FD75C
BF811128887F
BF8111288E59
BF811134ED6F
BF811134F463
BF811134FC1B
BF8111350379
BF81113507F8
BF811135AF57
BF811135B50D
BF811135B990
BF811135BFE2
BF811135C5E9
BF811135CB34
BF811135CF65
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
DSNU584I ) 277 11:56:29.14 DSNUPPBS - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DBUV0101.TPUV0101 ARCHLOG1

BSDS VOLUMES
DSNU588I ) 277 11:56:29.14 DSNUPPBS - NO DATA TO BE REPORTED
DSNU586I
DSNU588I
DSNU589I
DSNU580I
) 277 11:56:29.14 DSNUPSUM - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DBUV0101.TPUV0101 SUMMARY

) 277 11:56:29.14 DSNUPREC - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DBUV0101.TPUV0101 COMPLETE
Figure 90. Example of REPORT RECOVERY in a data sharing environment
The following figure shows sample output for the statement REPORT RECOVERY
TABLESPACE ARCHLOG. Under message DSNU584I, the archive log entries after
the last recovery point are marked with an asterisk (*). If you code the CURRENT
option, the output from message DSNU584I would include only the archive logs
after the last recovery point and the asterisk (*) would not be included in the
report.
DSNU000I
DSNUGUTC - OUTPUT START FOR UTILITY, UTILID = D7058005.RCVR3
DSNU050I
DSNUGUTC - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DB580501.TS580501 ARCHLOG ALL
DSNU581I = DSNUPREC - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DB580501.TS580501
DSNU593I = DSNUPREC - REPORT RECOVERY ENVIRONMENT RECORD:
'
MINIMUM
RBA: 000000000000
574
'
MAXIMUM
RBA: FFFFFFFFFFFF
'
DSNU582I = DSNUPPCP - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DB580501.TS580501 SYSCOPY ROWS
TIMESTAMP = 2002-09-17-10.03.16.784238, IC TYPE = *Q*, SHR LVL = , DSNUM
= 0000,
START LRSN =00001E58E60D
DEV TYPE =
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= W, FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0000,
HIGH DSNUM = 0000,
LOGICAL PART = 3648 ,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME = T3951105,
AUTHID =
ADMF001 ,
NPAGESF = -1.0E+00
,
CPAGESF = -1.0E+00
DSNAME
= DB580501.TS580501
,
MEMBER NAME =
TIMESTAMP = 2002-09-17-10.03.22.937931, IC TYPE = *Z*, SHR LVL = , DSNUM
= 0000,
START LRSN =00001E5956A3
DEV TYPE =
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= , FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0000,
HIGH DSNUM = 0000,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME = T3951105,
AUTHID =
ADMF001 ,
NPAGESF = -1.0E+00
,
CPAGESF = -1.0E+00
DSNAME
= DB580501.TS580501
,
MEMBER NAME =
= 0000,
START LRSN =00001E5A7B9D
DEV TYPE =
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= W, FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0000,
HIGH DSNUM = 0000,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME = T3951106,
AUTHID =
ADMF001 ,
NPAGESF = -1.0E+00
,
CPAGESF = -1.0E+00
DSNAME
= DB580501.TS580501
,
MEMBER NAME =
= 0000,
START LRSN =00001E5ADC6E
DEV TYPE =
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= , FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0000,
HIGH DSNUM = 0000,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME = T3951106,
AUTHID =
ADMF001 ,
NPAGESF = -1.0E+00
,
CPAGESF = -1.0E+00
DSNAME
= DB580501.TS580501
,
MEMBER NAME =
= 0000,
START LRSN =00001E624A3C
DEV TYPE =
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= W, FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0000,
HIGH DSNUM = 0000,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME = T3951106,
AUTHID =
ADMF001 ,
NPAGESF = -1.0E+00
,
CPAGESF = -1.0E+00
DSNAME
= DB580501.TS580501
,
MEMBER NAME =
DSNU586I = DSNUPSUM - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DB580501.TS580501 SUMMARY
DSNU588I = DSNUPSUM - NO DATA TO BE REPORTED
DSNU583I
UCDATE
091702
091702
091702
091702
= DSNUPPLR
UCTIME
10025977
10030124
10032302
10035391
- SYSLGRNX ROWS FROM REPORT RECOVERY FOR TABLESPACE DB580501.TS580501

START RBA
STOP RBA
START LRSN
STOP LRSN
PARTITION
00001E4FD319
00001E4FEB91
00001E4FD319
00001E4FEB91
0000
00001E505B93
00001E58BC23
00001E505B93
00001E58BC23
0000
00001E59A637
00001E5A5258
00001E59A637
00001E5A5258
0000
00001E5B26AB
00001E6222F3
00001E5B26AB
00001E6222F3
0000
DSNU584I
= DSNUPPBS - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DB580501.TS580501 ARCHLOG1 BSDS VOLUMES
MEMBER ID
0000
0000
0000
0000
Chapter 27. REPORT
*
*
*
*
575
START TIME
END TIME
START RBA
END RBA
UNIT VOLSER
DATA SET NAME
20022601702454 20022601704156 00001E48B000 00001E629FFF SYSDA SCR03 DSNC810.ARCHLOG1.A0000005
DSNU584I = DSNUPPBS - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DB580501.TS580501 ARCHLOG2 BSDS VOLUMES
DSNU588I = DSNUPPBS - NO DATA TO BE REPORTED
DSNU586I = DSNUPSUM - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DB580501.TS580501 SUMMARY
ARCHLOG1 BSDS VOLSER(S)
SCR03 *
DSNU589I = DSNUPREC - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DB580501.TS580501 COMPLETE
DSNU580I
DSNUPORT - REPORT UTILITY COMPLETE - ELAPSED TIME=00:00:00
DSNU010I
DSNU000I
DSNUGUTC - OUTPUT START FOR UTILITY, UTILID = D7058005.RCVR3
DSNU050I
DSNUGUTC - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DB580501.TS580501 CURRENT
DSNU581I = DSNUPREC - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DB580501.TS580501
DSNU585I = DSNUPREC - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DB580501.TS580501 CURRENT
DSNU593I = DSNUPREC - REPORT RECOVERY ENVIRONMENT RECORD:
'
MINIMUM
RBA: 000000000000
'
MAXIMUM
RBA: FFFFFFFFFFFF
'
DSNU582I = DSNUPPCP - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DB580501.TS580501 SYSCOPY ROWS
= 0000,
START LRSN =00001E58E60D
DEV TYPE =
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= W, FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0000,
HIGH DSNUM = 0000,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME = T3951105,
AUTHID =
ADMF001 ,
NPAGESF = -1.0E+00
,
CPAGESF = -1.0E+00
DSNAME
= DB580501.TS580501
,
MEMBER NAME =
,
= 0000,
START LRSN =00001E5956A3
DEV TYPE =
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= , FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0000,
HIGH DSNUM = 0000,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME = T3951105,
AUTHID =
ADMF001 ,
NPAGESF = -1.0E+00
,
CPAGESF = -1.0E+00
DSNAME
= DB580501.TS580501
,
MEMBER NAME =
,
...
= 0000,
START LRSN =00001E624A3C
DEV TYPE =
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= W, FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0000,
HIGH DSNUM = 0000,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME = T3951106,
AUTHID =
ADMF001 ,
NPAGESF = -1.0E+00
,
CPAGESF = -1.0E+00
DSNAME
= DB580501.TS580501
,
MEMBER NAME =
,
DSNU586I
DSNU588I
= DSNUPSUM - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DB580501.TS580501 SUMMARY

= DSNUPSUM - NO DATA TO BE REPORTED
DSNU583I
UCDATE
091702
091702
091702
091702
= DSNUPPLR
UCTIME
10025977
10030124
10032302
10035391
- SYSLGRNX ROWS FROM REPORT RECOVERY FOR TABLESPACE DB580501.TS580501

START RBA
STOP RBA
START LRSN
STOP LRSN
PARTITION
00001E4FD319
00001E4FEB91
00001E4FD319
00001E4FEB91
0000
00001E505B93
00001E58BC23
00001E505B93
00001E58BC23
0000
00001E59A637
00001E5A5258
00001E59A637
00001E5A5258
0000
00001E5B26AB
00001E6222F3
00001E5B26AB
00001E6222F3
0000
MEMBER ID
0000
0000
0000
0000
DSNU584I = DSNUPPBS - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DB580501.TS580501 ARCHLOG1 BSDS VOLUMES

START TIME
END TIME
START RBA
END RBA
UNIT VOLSER
DATA SET NAME
20022601702454 20022601704156 00001E48B000 00001E629FFF SYSDA SCR03 DSNC810.ARCHLOG1.A0000005
576
DSNU586I
DSNU589I
DSNU580I
= DSNUPSUM - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DB580501.TS580501 SUMMARY

ARCHLOG1 BSDS VOLSER(S)
SCR03
= DSNUPREC - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DB580501.TS580501 COMPLETE
DSNUPORT - REPORT UTILITY COMPLETE - ELAPSED TIME=00:00:00
Figure 91. Example of REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE ARCHLOG
Related reference
SYSIBM.SYSCOPY table (DB2 SQL Reference)
Sample REPORT control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own REPORT
control statements.
Example 1: Reporting recovery information for a table space

The following control statement specifies that the REPORT utility is to provide
recovery information for table space DSN8D81A.DSN8S81E.
//REORG EXEC DSNUPROC,SYSTEM=V91A,UID='REP97'
//SYSIN
DD *
REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E
/*
The preceding statement produces output similar to the following output :

DSNU000I
270 13:00:51.35 DSNUGUTC - OUTPUT START FOR UTILITY, UTILID = REP97
DSNU1044I 270 13:00:51.58 DSNUGTIS - PROCESSING SYSIN AS EBCDIC
DSNU050I
270 13:00:51.60 DSNUGUTC - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E
DSNU581I ) 270 13:00:51.60 DSNUPREC - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E
DSNU593I ) 270 13:00:51.61 DSNUPREC - REPORT RECOVERY ENVIRONMENT RECORD:
MINIMUM
RBA: 000000000000
MAXIMUM
RBA: FFFFFFFFFFFF
DSNU582I ) 270 13:00:51.61 DSNUPPCP - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E SYSCOPY ROWS
= 0000,
START LRSN =00003697A903
DEV TYPE =
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= L, FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0000,
HIGH DSNUM = 0000,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME =
,
AUTHID =
,
NPAGESF = -1.0E+00
,
CPAGESF = -1.0E+00
DSNAME
= DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E
, MEMBER NAME =
,
= 0004,
START LRSN =000036C8EA3E
DEV TYPE =
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= , FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0000,
HIGH DSNUM = 0000,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME = DSNTEJ1 ,
AUTHID =
SYSADM ,
NPAGESF = -1.0E+00
,
CPAGESF = -1.0E+00
DSNAME
= DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E
, MEMBER NAME =
,
= 0001,
DEV TYPE =
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= , FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
Chapter 27. REPORT
577
LOW DSNUM = 0000,

HIGH DSNUM = 0000,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME = DSNTEJ1 ,
AUTHID =
SYSADM ,
NPAGESF = -1.0E+00
,
CPAGESF = -1.0E+00
DSNAME
= DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E
, MEMBER NAME =
,
= 0002,
DEV TYPE =
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= , FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0000,
HIGH DSNUM = 0000,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME = DSNTEJ1 ,
AUTHID =
SYSADM ,
NPAGESF = -1.0E+00
,
CPAGESF = -1.0E+00
DSNAME
= DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E
, MEMBER NAME =
,
= 0003,
DEV TYPE =
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= , FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0000,
HIGH DSNUM = 0000,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME = DSNTEJ1 ,
AUTHID =
SYSADM ,
NPAGESF = -1.0E+00
,
CPAGESF = -1.0E+00
DSNAME
= DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E
, MEMBER NAME =
,
. . .
DSNU586I
DSNU588I
) 270 13:00:51.61 DSNUPSUM - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E SUMMARY

DSNU583I
UCDATE
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
) 270 13:00:51.61 DSNUPPLR

UCTIME
START RBA
11405634
00003697B82E
11405670
00003697E223
11405707
000036980BC3
11405732
000036983674
11410155
0000369E31B6
11410156
0000369E3ABB
11410156
0000369E3E51
11410159
0000369E4224
11413835
000036C98000
11413845
000036CA937C
11413861
000036CC1F1B
11422002
000036FC9A0B
11422074
000036FCEB37
11422688
00003701A7B0
11423828
000037091000
11424418
0000370DC5B7
11424419
0000370DE4FC
11424421
0000370E0405
11424427
0000370E230E
11424428
0000370E4254
11424782
0000370F3DF8
11424787
0000370F41BA
11424791
0000370F44E6
11424794
0000370F4812
11424798
0000370F4B3E
11424871
000037111E5F
11424880
000037112516
11424886
000037112B66
11424893
0000371131D0
11424898
000037113820
DSNU584I
) 270 13:00:51.61 DSNUPPBS - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E ARCHLOG1 BSDS VOLUMES
578
- SYSLGRNX ROWS FROM REPORT RECOVERY FOR TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E

STOP RBA
START LRSN
STOP LRSN
PARTITION
MEMBER ID
0000369855C3
BF7840C34BF3
BF7840C44D81
0001
0000
0000369855C3
BF7840C3A2F9
BF7840C44E27
0002
0000
0000369855C3
BF7840C3FF60
BF7840C44E92
0003
0000
0000369855C3
BF7840C43C57
BF7840C44F03
0004
0000
000036ADE99C
BF7840C8436A
BF7840D832E3
0001
0000
000036A03DB6
BF7840C84546
BF7840D83495
0002
0000
000036A0E15C
BF7840C84683
BF7840D8359B
0003
0000
000036A5F932
BF7840C84CAA
BF7840D83704
0004
0000
000036D0B672
BF7840EB5CF9
BF7840EBF7A3
0001
0000
000036D0B9B6
BF7840EB7562
BF7840EC0150
0002
0000
000036D0BC2A
BF7840EB9B43
BF7840EC0983
0004
0000
000036FCBA50
BF7841131913
BF7841131F84
0003
0000
000036FD2000
BF784113C93E
BF784113E333
0003
0000
000037029A20
BF784119A438
BF78411B9857
0003
0000
0000370930BF
BF784124848C
BF7841248A06
0005
0000
0000370E625D
BF78412A23C8
BF78412A5DC6
0001
0000
0000370E63B9
BF78412A2786
BF78412A6101
0002
0000
0000370E6515
BF78412A2A82
BF78412A6191
0003
0000
0000370E6671
BF78412A39CD
BF78412A6210
0004
0000
0000370E74C2
BF78412A3CFD
BF78412A630C
0005
0000
0000371086F8
BF78412D9C67
BF78412DFDE7
0001
0000
0000371089A8
BF78412DA8F9
BF78412E02FB
0002
0000
000037108C1C
BF78412DB256
BF78412E0B57
0003
0000
000037108E90
BF78412DBAC1
BF78412E106B
0004
0000
00003710919C
BF78412DC398
BF78412E14AE
0005
0000
00003711222E
BF78412E7581
BF78412E7A75
0001
0000
00003711287E
BF78412E8CD5
BF78412E910F
0002
0000
000037112ECE
BF78412E9A46
BF78412E9EF3
0003
0000
000037113538
BF78412EAAFB
BF78412EAF6F
0004
0000
000037113B88
BF78412EB8A5
BF78412EC1C4
0005
0000
DSNU588I
) 270 13:00:51.61 DSNUPPBS - NO DATA TO BE REPORTED
DSNU586I
DSNU588I
DSNU589I

) 270 13:00:51.61 DSNUPREC - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E COMPLETE
DSNU580I
DSNU010I

Figure 92. Example output for REPORT RECOVERY
Example 2: Reporting table spaces with LOB columns

The following control statement specifies that REPORT is to provide a list of all
table spaces related to TABLESPACE DSN8D91L.DSN8S91B which contains a table
with three LOB columns. The output includes a separate section titled LOB
TABLESPACE SET REPORT showing a list of related LOB table spaces and their
tables, indexes, and index spaces. The base table and column to which each LOB
object is related is also shown.
REPORT TABLESPACESET TABLESPACE DSN8D91L.DSN8S91B
The preceding statement produces output similar to the following output:

DSNU000I
DSNU1044I
DSNU050I
DSNU587I )
277
277
277
277
11:19:09.40
11:19:09.59
11:19:09.59
11:19:09.62
DSNUGUTC
DSNUGTIS
DSNUGUTC
DSNUPSET
- OUTPUT START FOR UTILITY, UTILID = REP98

- PROCESSING SYSIN AS EBCDIC
- REPORT TABLESPACESET TABLESPACE DSN8D91L.DSN8S91B
- REPORT TABLESPACE SET WITH TABLESPACE DSN8D91L.DSN8S91B

TABLESPACE
TABLE
INDEXSPACE
INDEX
:
:
:
:
DSN8D91L.DSN8S91B
DSN8910.EMP_PHOTO_RESUME
DSN8D91L.XEMPRPHO
DSN8910.XEMP_PHOTO_RESUME
LOB TABLESPACE SET REPORT:

TABLESPACE
: DSN8D91L.DSN8S91B
BASE TABLE
COLUMN
LOB TABLESPACE
AUX TABLE
AUX INDEXSPACE
AUX INDEX
COLUMN
LOB TABLESPACE
AUX TABLE
AUX INDEXSPACE
AUX INDEX
COLUMN
LOB TABLESPACE
AUX TABLE
AUX INDEXSPACE
AUX INDEX
DSNU580I
DSNU010I
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
DSN8910.EMP_PHOTO_RESUME
PSEG_PHOTO
DSN8D91L.DSN8S91L
DSN8910.AUX_PSEG_PHOTO
DSN8D91L.XAUXRPSE
DSN8910.XAUX_PSEG_PHOTO
BMP_PHOTO
DSN8D91L.DSN8S91M
DSN8910.AUX_BMP_PHOTO
DSN8D91L.XAUXRBMP
DSN8910.XAUX_BMP_PHOTO
RESUME
DSN8D91L.DSN8S91N
DSN8910.AUX_EMP_RESUME
DSN8D91L.XAUXREMP
DSN8910.XAUX_EMP_RESUME

Chapter 27. REPORT
579
Figure 93. Example output for REPORT TABLESPACESET
Example 3: Reporting recovery information for a partition of a

The following control statement specifies that REPORT is to provide recovery
information for partition 4 of table space DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E. The partition
number is indicated by the DSNUM option.
REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E DSNUM 4

DSNU000I
DSNU050I
271 18:15:27.55 DSNUGUTC - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E DSNUM 4
DSNU581I ) 271 18:15:27.62 DSNUPREC - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E
MINIMUM
RBA: 000000000000
MAXIMUM
RBA: FFFFFFFFFFFF
DSNU582I ) 271 18:15:27.66 DSNUPPCP - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E SYSCOPY ROWS
= 0000,
START LRSN =00003697A903
DEV TYPE =
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= L, FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0000,
HIGH DSNUM = 0000,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME =
,
AUTHID =
,
NPAGESF = -1.0E+00
,
CPAGESF = -1.0E+00
DSNAME
= DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E
, MEMBER NAME =
,
= 0004,
DEV TYPE =
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= , FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0000,
HIGH DSNUM = 0000,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME = DSNTEJ1 ,
AUTHID =
SYSADM ,
NPAGESF = -1.0E+00
,
CPAGESF = -1.0E+00
DSNAME
= DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E
, MEMBER NAME =
,
= 0000,
START LRSN =000036E2BA9E
DEV TYPE =
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= W, FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0000,
HIGH DSNUM = 0000,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME = DSNTEJ1 ,
AUTHID =
SYSADM ,
NPAGESF = -1.0E+00
,
CPAGESF = -1.0E+00
DSNAME
= DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E
, MEMBER NAME =
,
TIMESTAMP = 2006-09-27-11.41.53.524797, IC TYPE = *F*, SHR LVL = R, DSNUM
= 0000,
START LRSN =000036E883E4
DEV TYPE = 3390
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= , FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0001,
HIGH DSNUM = 0004,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME = DSNTEJ1 ,
AUTHID =
SYSADM ,
NPAGESF = 6.7E+01
,
CPAGESF = 5.7E+01
DSNAME
= DB2V91A.SYSCOPY.DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E
, MEMBER NAME =
,
580

= 0000,
START LRSN =000036EA809A
DEV TYPE =
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= W, FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0000,
HIGH DSNUM = 0000,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME = DSNTEJ1 ,
AUTHID =
SYSADM ,
NPAGESF = -1.0E+00
,
CPAGESF = -1.0E+00
DSNAME
= DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E
, MEMBER NAME =
,
TIMESTAMP = 2006-09-27-11.42.48.167991, IC TYPE = *X*, SHR LVL = , DSNUM
= 0000,
START LRSN =0000370CA39B
DEV TYPE =
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= A, FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0001,
HIGH DSNUM = 0005,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME = DSNTEJ1 ,
AUTHID =
SYSADM ,
NPAGESF = -1.0E+00
,
CPAGESF = -1.0E+00
DSNAME
= DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E
, MEMBER NAME =
,
= 0000,
START LRSN =000037113E08
DEV TYPE = 3390
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= X, FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0001,
HIGH DSNUM = 0005,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME = DSNTEJ1 ,
AUTHID =
SYSADM ,
NPAGESF = 1.6E+01
,
CPAGESF = 1.6E+01
DSNAME
= DB2V91A.DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E.REORGCPY
, MEMBER NAME =
,
DSNU586I
DSNU588I

DSNU583I
UCDATE
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
092706
) 271 18:15:27.66 DSNUPPLR

UCTIME
START RBA
11405732
000036983674
11410159
0000369E4224
11413861
000036CC1F1B
11424427
0000370E230E
11424794
0000370F4812
11424893
0000371131D0
DSNU584I
DSNU588I
) 271 18:15:27.66 DSNUPPBS - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E ARCHLOG1 BSDS VOLUMES
DSNU586I
DSNU588I
DSNU589I

) 271 18:15:27.66 DSNUPREC - REPORT RECOVERY TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E COMPLETE
DSNU580I
DSNU010I
- SYSLGRNX ROWS FROM REPORT RECOVERY FOR TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E

STOP RBA
START LRSN
STOP LRSN
PARTITION
MEMBER ID
0000369855C3
BF7840C43C57
BF7840C44F03
0004
0000
000036A5F932
BF7840C84CAA
BF7840D83704
0004
0000
000036D0BC2A
BF7840EB9B43
BF7840EC0983
0004
0000
0000370E6671
BF78412A39CD
BF78412A6210
0004
0000
000037108E90
BF78412DBAC1
BF78412E106B
0004
0000
000037113538
BF78412EAAFB
BF78412EAF6F
0004
0000

Figure 94. Example output for REPORT RECOVERY DSNUM
Example 4: Reporting recovery information for an index

The control statement specifies that REPORT is to provide recovery information for
index DSN8810.XDEPT1.
Chapter 27. REPORT
581
//REP101 EXEC DSNUPROC,SYSTEM=V91A,UID='REP101'

//SYSIN
DD *
REPORT RECOVERY INDEX DSN8910.XDEPT1
/*
Figure 95. Example REPORT RECOVERY statement for an index

DSNU000I
DSNU050I
270 13:51:09.04 DSNUGUTC - REPORT RECOVERY INDEX DSN8910.XDEPT1
DSNU581I ) 270 13:51:09.05 DSNUPREC - REPORT RECOVERY INDEX DSN8910.XDEPT1
MINIMUM
RBA: 000000000000
MAXIMUM
RBA: FFFFFFFFFFFF
DSNU582I ) 270 13:51:09.05 DSNUPPCP - REPORT RECOVERY INDEX DSN8910.XDEPT1
SYSCOPY ROWS
= 0000,
START LRSN =00003726ADE3
DEV TYPE = 3390
,
IC BACK =
,
STYPE
= , FILE SEQ = 0000,
PIT LRSN = 000000000000
LOW DSNUM = 0001,
HIGH DSNUM = 0001,
LOGGED = Y,
TTYPE =
JOBNAME = REP101 ,
AUTHID =
SYSADM ,
NPAGESF = 5.0E+00
,
CPAGESF = 0.0E0
DSNAME
= DSN8D91A.XDEPT1.D2006270.T205030
, MEMBER NAME =
,
DSNU586I
DSNU588I
) 270 13:51:09.05 DSNUPSUM - REPORT RECOVERY INDEX DSN8910.XDEPT1

DSNU583I
DSNU588I
) 270 13:51:09.05 DSNUPPLR - SYSLGRNX ROWS FROM REPORT RECOVERY FOR INDEX DSN8910.XDEPT1
) 270 13:51:09.05 DSNUPPLR - NO DATA TO BE REPORTED
DSNU584I
DSNU588I
) 270 13:51:09.05 DSNUPPBS - REPORT RECOVERY INDEX DSN8910.XDEPT1

ARCHLOG1 BSDS VOLUMES
DSNU586I
DSNU588I
DSNU589I
) 270 13:51:09.05 DSNUPSUM - REPORT RECOVERY INDEX DSN8910.XDEPT1

) 270 13:51:09.05 DSNUPREC - REPORT RECOVERY INDEX DSN8910.XDEPT1
SUMMARY
DSNU580I
DSNU010I
SUMMARY
COMPLETE

Figure 96. Example output for REPORT RECOVERY INDEX
Example 5: Reporting table space set information with XML

columns
The following control statement specifies that REPORT TABLESPACESET is to
show all data base objects related to the base table space. In this example, the base
table includes two XML columns. The report shows the data base objects which
were implicitly created to store data for the XML columns.
|
|
|
|
Figure 97. Example output for REPORT TABLESPACESET

TABLESPACE
TABLE
INDEXSPACE
INDEX
582
:
:
:
:
DBKQAN01.TPKQAN01
ADMF001.TBKQAN01
DBKQAN01.IPKQAN11
ADMF001.IPKQAN111
INDEXSPACE
INDEX
INDEXSPACE
INDEX
:
:
:
:
DBKQAN01.IRDOCIDT
ADMF001.I_DOCIDTBKQAN01
DBKQAN01.IXKQAN12
ADMF001.IXKQAN122
XML TABLESPACE SET REPORT:

TABLESPACE
: DBKQAN01.TPKQAN01
BASE TABLE
:
COLUMN
:
XML TABLESPACE
:
XML TABLE
:
XML NODEID INDEX
:
XML INDEXSPACE
:
XML INDEX
:
COLUMN
:
XML TABLESPACE
:
XML TABLE
:
XML NODEID INDEX
:
XML INDEXSPACE
:
XML INDEX
:
ADMF001.TBKQAN01
XML1
DBKQAN01.XTBK0000
ADMF001.XTBKQAN01
DBKQAN01.IRNODEID
ADMF001.I_NODEIDXTBKQAN01
DBKQAN01.XVIXLC11
ADMF001.XVIXLC11
XML2
DBKQAN01.XTBK0001
ADMF001.XTBKQAN01000
DBKQAN01.IRNO1MH2
ADMF001.I_NODEIDXTBKQAN01000
DBKQAN01.XVIXLC12
ADMF001.XVIXLC12
Example 6: Reporting recovery information for a table space

|
|
The following control statement specifies that the REPORT utility is to provide
recovery information for table space DSN8D81A.DSN8S81E.
REPORT TABLESPACESET TABLESPACE DBKQBG01.TPKQBG01 SHOWDSNS
Chapter 27. REPORT
583
584

The RESTORE SYSTEM utility invokes z/OS DFSMShsm (Version 1 Release 7 or
above) to recover a DB2 subsystem or a data sharing group to a previous point in
time. To perform the recovery, the utility uses data that is copied by the BACKUP
SYSTEM utility. All data sets that you want to recover must be SMS-managed data
sets.
The RESTORE SYSTEM utility can be run from any member in a data sharing
group, even one that is normally quiesced when any backups are taken. Any
member in the data sharing group that is active at or beyond the log truncation
point must be restarted, and its logs are truncated to the SYSPITR LRSN point. You
can specify the SYSPITR LRSN point in the CRESTART control statement of the
DSNJU003 (Change Log Inventory) utility. Any data sharing group member that is
normally quiesced at the time the backups are taken and is not active at or beyond
the log truncation point does not need to be restarted.
|
|
To be able to use system-level backups that have been dumped to tape, the level of
DFSMShsm must be V1R8 or higher.
By default, RESTORE SYSTEM recovers the data from the database copy pool
during the RESTORE phase and then applies logs to the point in time at which the
existing logs were truncated during the LOGAPPLY phase. The RESTORE utility
never restores logs from the log copy pool.
Restriction: RESTORE SYSTEM does not restore logs; the utility only applies the
logs. If you specified BACKUP SYSTEM FULL to create copies of both the data
and the logs, you can restore the logs by another method.
Output:
Output for RESTORE SYSTEM is the recovered copy of the data volume or
volumes.
To run this utility, you must use a privilege set that includes SYSADM authority.
Execution phases of RESTORE SYSTEM

The RESTORE SYSTEM utility operates in the following phases:
Phase Description
UTILINIT
RESTORE
Locates and restores the volume copies if the LOGONLY option is not
specified
LOGAPPLY
Applies the outstanding log changes to the database
585
UTILTERM
Performs cleanup
Related reference
Chapter 5, BACKUP SYSTEM, on page 43
Related information
Syntax and options of the RESTORE SYSTEM control statement

The RESTORE SYSTEM utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines
When you specify RESTORE SYSTEM, you can specify only the following
statements in the same step:
v DIAGNOSE
v OPTIONS PREVIEW
v OPTIONS OFF
v OPTIONS KEY
v OPTIONS EVENT WARNING
In addition, RESTORE SYSTEM must be the last statement in SYSIN.
Syntax diagram
RESTORE SYSTEM

LOGONLY
FROMDUMP
TAPEUNITS
DUMPCLASS
dcl
RSA
key-label
(num-tape-units)
Option descriptions
LOGONLY
Specifies that the database volumes have already been restored, so the
RESTORE phase is skipped. Use this option when the database volumes have
already been restored outside of DB2. If the subsystem is at a tracker site, you
must specify the LOGONLY option.
FROMDUMP
Indicates that you want to dump only the database copy pool to tape during
the restore.
|
|
|
|
|
DUMPCLASS (dcl)
Indicates what DFSMShsm dump class to use for the restore.
|
|
RSA (key-label)
Specifies that the key-label in the utility control statement will be passed to
586
|
|
|
DFSMShsm in order to override the key-label that would normally be used

to read dump tapes. The key-label can be up to 64 characters and must
start with an alphabetic or national bank character.
|
|
|
|
The FROMDUMP and DUMPCLASS options that you specify for the RESTORE
SYSTEMS utility override the RESTORE/RECOVER FROM DUMP and
DUMPCLASS NAME install options that you specify on installation panel
DSNTIP6.
|
|
|
|
TAPEUNITS
Specifies the limit on the number of table drives that the utility should
dynamically allocate during the restore of the database copy pool from dumps
on tape.
|
|
|
The default is the option that you specified on the installation panel DSNTIP6.
If no default is specified, then the RESTORE SYSTEM utility will try to use all
of the tape drives in your system.
|
|
|
|
|
(num-tape-units)
Specifies the maximum number of tape drives to allocate. If you specify
zero, or you do not specify a value, the utility determines the optimal
number of tape units to use. RESTORE SYSTEM TAPEUNITS has a max
value of 255.
Related information
Recovering from disasters by using a tracker site (DB2 Administration Guide)
Before running RESTORE SYSTEM

Certain activities might be required before you run the RESTORE SYSTEM utility,
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Complete the following steps prior to running RESTORE SYSTEM:

1. Stop DB2. If data sharing, stop all DB2 members in the group.
2. Run DSNJU003 (Change Log Inventory) to create a DB2 conditional restart
record with the CRESTART SYSPITR option. Specify the log truncation point
with the SYSPITR option that corresponds to the point in time to which the
system is to be recovered. For data sharing, specify an LRSN value. For non
data sharing, specify an RBA value.
3. Start DB2. When the DB2 restart processing for the conditional restart with the
SYSPITR option completes, DB2 enters system RECOVER-pending andaccess
maintenance mode. During system RECOVER-pending mode, you can run only
the RESTORE SYSTEM utility.
4. Ensure that the ICF catalogs for the DB2 data are not active and are not
allocated. The ICF catalog for the data must be on a separate volume that the
ICF catalog for the logs. The command to unallocate the catalog is F
CATALOG,UNALLOCATE(catalog-name).
How to determine which system-level backups DB2 restores

The RESTORE SYSTEM utility uses the most recent system-level backup of the
database copy pool that DB2 took prior to the SYSPITR log truncation point.
|
|
To determine whether the system level backup will be restored from disk or from
tape:
v If FROMDUMP was not specified and the system-level backup resides on disk,
DB2 uses it for the restore.
587
v If you specify YES in the RESTORE/RECOVER FROM DUMP field on

installation panel DSNTIP6 or you specify the FROMDUMP option in the
RESTORE utility statement, restore uses only the dumps on tape of the database
copy pool.
v If you specify a dump class name on the DUMP CLASS NAME field on
installation panel DSNTIP6 or you specify the DUMPCLASS option in the
RESTORE utility statement, DB2 restores the database copy pool from the
DFSMshsm dump class.
v If you do not specify a dump class name in the DUMP CLASS NAME field on
installation panel DSNTIP6 or you do not specify the DUMPCLASS option in
the RESTORE utility statement, RESTORE SYSTEM issues the DFSMShsm LIST
COPYPOOL command and uses the first dump class listed in the output.
The RESTORE SYSTEM utility invokes DFSMSdss to restore the database copy
pool volumes from a system-level backup on tape.
|
|
How to determine if RESTORE SYSTEM uses parallelism when

restoring from tapes
Parallelism occurs if the dumps of the volumes in the database copy pool reside on
different tape volumes. The degree of parallelism is limited by:
v The TAPEUNITS option, which limits the number of tape units that the utility
can allocate.
v The number of distinct tape volumes that the dump resides on.
Determining whether the system-level backups reside on disk or

tape
Restoring each volume in the database copy pool from a fast replication copy on
the disk occurs virtually instantaneously. Restoring the database copy pool from
dumps on tape volumes takes much longer.
To determine whether the system-level backups of the database copy pool reside
on the disk or tape:
1. Run the DFSMShsm LIST COPYPOOL command with the ALLVOLS option.
2. Run the DSNJU004 utility output. For data sharing, run the DSNJU004 utility
output on each member.
3. Review the output from the DFSMShsm LIST COPYPOOL command with the
ALLVOLS option.
4. Review the DB2 system-level backup information in the DSNJU004 utility
output.
If the system-level backup chosen as the recovery base for the database copy pool
no longer resides on DASD and the FROMDUMP option has not been specified,
then the RESTORE SYSTEM utility will fail. You can then specify the RESTORE
SYSTEM FROMDUMP option, or specify it on install panel DSNTIP6, to direct the
utility to use the system-level backup that was dumped to tape.
|
|
|
|
|
Data sets that RESTORE SYSTEM uses

The RESTORE SYSTEM utility uses a number of data sets during its operation.
The following table lists the data sets that RESTORE SYSTEM uses. The table lists
588

required data set.
Table 103. Data sets that RESTORE SYSTEM uses
Data set
Description
Required?
SYSIN

control statement
Yes
SYSPRINT
Yes
auth-id.job-name.HSM
A temporary data set that is automatically

Yes
allocated by the utility and deleted when the
utility completes
Concurrency and compatibility for RESTORE SYSTEM

The RESTORE SYSTEM utility has certain concurrency and compatibility
While RESTORE SYSTEM is running, no other utilities can run.
Restoring data in a data sharing environment

Ensure that all data sharing members that were active at the SYSPITR log
truncation point (or restarted after this point) have been restarted with the same
SYSPITR LRSN value. You can stop the other members of the data group (with
MODE(QUIESCE)) after the SYSPITR restart.
Using DISPLAY UTILITY with RESTORE SYSTEM

You can use the DISPLAY UTILITY command with RESTORE SYSTEM.
To use the DISPLAY UTILITY command for RESTORE SYSTEM on a data sharing
group, you must issue the command from the member on which the RESTORE
SYSTEM utility is invoked.
Termination and restart of RESTORE SYSTEM

You can terminate and restart the RESTORE SYSTEM utility.
You cannot terminate RESTORE SYSTEM by using the TERM UTILITY command.
You can restart RESTORE SYSTEM at the beginning of a phase or at the current
system checkpoint. A current system checkpoint occurs during the LOGAPPLY
phase after log records are processed. By default, RESTORE SYSTEM restarts at the
current system checkpoint.
When you restart RESTORE SYSTEM for a data sharing group, the member on
which the restart is issued must be the same member on which the original
RESTORE SYSTEM was issued.
589
Related concepts
|
Effects of running RESTORE SYSTEM

If RESTORE SYSTEM determines that a NOT LOGGED table space was updated
after the point at which the system level copy was taken, the table space or
partition is marked RECOVER-pending.
|
|
|
|
After running RESTORE SYSTEM

Certain activities might be required after you run the RESTORE SYSTEM utility,
Complete the following steps after running RESTORE SYSTEM:
1. Stop and start each DB2 subsystem or member to remove it from access
maintenance mode.
2. Use the DISPLAY UTIL command to see if any utilities are running. If other
utilities are running, use the TERM UTIL command to end them.
3. Use the RECOVER utility to recover all objects in RECOVER-pending (RECP)
or REBUILD-pending (RBDP) status, or use the REBUILD INDEX utility to
rebuild objects. If a CREATE TABLESPACE, CREATE INDEX, or data set
extension has failed, you can also recover or rebuild any objects in the logical
page list (LPL).
Sample RESTORE SYSTEM control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own RESTORE
SYSTEM control statements.
RESTORE SYSTEM uses data that is copied by the BACKUP SYSTEM utility.
Example 1: Recovering a backup system

The following control statement specifies that the RESTORE SYSTEM utility is to
recover a DB2 subsystem or a data sharing group to a previous point in time by
restoring volume copies and applying any outstanding log changes.
//STEP1
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='DSN'
//SYSIN
DD *
RESTORE SYSTEM
/*
Example 2: Recovering a backup system after the database

volumes have already been restored
The LOGONLY keyword in the following control statement indicates that
RESTORE SYSTEM is to apply any outstanding log changes to the database. The
utility is not to restore the volume copies. In this example, the database volumes
have already been restored outside of DB2. Note that RESTORE SYSTEM applies
log changes; it never restores the log copy pool.
590
//STEP1
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='DSN'
//SYSIN
DD *
RESTORE SYSTEM LOGONLY
/*
Example 3: Recovering a dump on tape of the database copy

pool
|
|
|
The following control statement specifies that the RESTORE SYSTEM utility is to
only consider dumps on tape of the database copy pool for restore. During the
restore, the utility will dynamically allocate a maximum of 4 tape units.
//*
//*
//
//
SPACE=(16384,(20,20),,,ROUND),
//
UNIT=SYSDA
//DSNUPROC.SYSIN
DD *
RESTORE SYSTEM FROMDUMP TAPEUNITS 4
//
Related information
591
592
Chapter 29. RUNSTATS

The RUNSTATS utility gathers summary information about the characteristics of
data in table spaces, indexes, and partitions. DB2 records these statistics in the DB2
catalog and uses them to select access paths to data during the bind process. You
can use these statistics to evaluate the database design and determine when table
spaces or indexes must be reorganized. To obtain the updated statistics, you can
query the catalog tables.
The two formats for the RUNSTATS utility are RUNSTATS TABLESPACE and
RUNSTATS INDEX. RUNSTATS TABLESPACE gathers statistics on a table space
and, optionally, on tables, indexes or columns; RUNSTATS INDEX gathers statistics
only on indexes. RUNSTATS does not collect statistics for clone tables or index
spaces.
RUNSTATS can collect statistics on any single column or set of columns.
RUNSTATS collects the following two types of distribution statistics:
Frequency
The percentage of rows in the table that contain a value for a column or
combination of values for a set of columns.
Cardinality
The number of distinct values in the column or set of columns.
When you run RUNSTATS TABLESPACE, you can use the COLGROUP option to
collect frequency and cardinality statistics on any column group. You can also
collect frequency and cardinality statistics on any single column. When you run
RUNSTATS INDEX, you can collect frequency statistics on the leading column of
an index and multi-column frequency and cardinality statistics on the leading
concatenated columns of an index.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When you run RUNSTATS TABLESPACE, you can use the HISTOGRAM option,
with the COLGROUP option, to indicate that histogram statistics are to be
gathered for the specified group of columns. RUNSTATS TABLESPACE will ignore
HISTOGRAM when processing XML table spaces and indexes. When you run
RUNSTATS INDEX, histogram statistics can only be collected on the prefix
columns with the same order. Key columns with a mixed order are not allowed for
histogram statistics. RUNSTATS INDEX will ignore HISTOGRAM when processing
XML NODEID or VALUES indexes.
Output
RUNSTATS updates the DB2 catalog with table space or index space statistics,
prints a report, or both.

593

An ID with installation SYSOPR authority can also execute the RUNSTATS utility,
but only on a table space in the DSNDB06 database.
To use RUNSTATS with the REPORT YES option, you must have the SELECT
privilege on the reported tables. RUNSTATS does not report values from tables
that the user is not authorized to see.
To gather statistics on a LOB table space, you must have SYSADM or DBADM
authority for the LOB table space.
Execution phases of RUNSTATS

The RUNSTATS utility operates in the following phases:
Phase Description
UTILINIT
RUNSTATS
Scans table space or index and updates catalog.
If you specify COLGROUP, RUNSTATS also performs a subtask that sorts
one or more column groups data. If you specify FREQVAL with
COLGROUP or are collecting frequency statistics for data-partitioned
secondary indexes, RUNSTATS also performs a subtask that sorts the
partition-level frequency data.
UTILTERM
Performs cleanup
Syntax and options of the RUNSTATS control statement

The RUNSTATS utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
594
RUNSTATS TABLESPACE syntax diagram
RUNSTATS TABLESPACE
LIST
listdef-name

table-space-name
database-name.
FORCEROLLUP NO
PART integer
FORCEROLLUP YES

(1)
ALL
TABLE
sample-spec
TABLE
(1)
(table-name)
sample-spec
column-spec
colgroup-spec
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE

(
ALL
SHRLEVEL CHANGE
INDEX
,
( index-name
PART integer
(2)
REPORT NO
UPDATE ALL
HISTORY NONE
REPORT YES
UPDATE
HISTORY

ACCESSPATH
SPACE
NONE
ALL
ACCESSPATH
SPACE

SORTNUM integer
Notes:
1
The TABLE keyword is not valid for a LOB table space.
You can change the default HISTORY value by modifying the STATISTICS HISTORY subsystem
parameter. By default, this value is NONE.
sample-spec:
SAMPLE
25
integer
column-spec:
595
COLUMN (
ALL

,
COLUMN (
column-name
colgroup-spec:
,
COLGROUP (
column-name
colgroup-stats-spec
colgroup-stats-spec:

MOST
FREQVAL COUNT
NUMQUANTILES 100
integer
HISTOGRAM
BOTH
LEAST
NUMQUANTILES
integer
|
FREQVAL NUMCOLS 1
COUNT 10
MOST

MOST
KEYCARD
FREQVAL NUMCOLS
integer
COUNT
integer
BOTH
LEAST
NUMCOLS 1
NUMQUANTILES 100
HISTOGRAM
NUMQUANTILES 100
NUMCOLS integer
NUMQUANTILES
integer
RUNSTATS TABLESPACE option descriptions

Specifies the table space (and, optionally, the database to which it belongs) on
which table space and table statistics are to be gathered. This keyword must
not identify a table space in DSNDB01 or DSNDB07.
596
LIST listdef-name
Specifies the name of a previously defined LISTDEF list name. You can
specify one LIST keyword for each RUNSTATS control statement. When
you specify this keyword with RUNSTATS TABLESPACE, the list must
contain only table spaces. Do not specify LIST with keywords from the
TABLE...(table-name) specification. Instead, specify LIST with TABLE (ALL).
Likewise, do not specify LIST with keywords from the
INDEX...(index-name) specification. You cannot specify index names with a
list. Use INDEX(ALL) instead.
If you specify LIST, you cannot specify the PART option. Instead, use the
PARTLEVEL option on the LISTDEF statement. The TABLESPACE
keyword is required in order to validate the contents of the list.
RUNSTATS TABLESPACE is invoked once for each item in the list.
database-name
Identifies the name of the database to which the table space belongs.
table-space-name
Identifies the name of the table space on which statistics are to be
gathered.
If the table space that is specified by the TABLESPACE keyword is a LOB table
space, you can specify only the following additional keywords: SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE or CHANGE, REPORT YES or NO, and UPDATE ALL or NONE.
PART integer
Identifies a table space partition on which statistics are to be collected.
4096.
You cannot specify PART with LIST.
TABLE
Specifies the table on which column statistics are to be gathered. All tables
You cannot specify the TABLE option for a LOB table space.
(ALL)
Specifies that column statistics are to be gathered on all columns of all
tables in the table space.
(table-name)
Specifies the tables on which column statistics are to be gathered. If you
omit the qualifier, RUNSTATS uses the user identifier for the utility job as
the qualifier. Enclose the table name in quotation marks if the name
contains a blank.
SAMPLE integer
Indicates the percentage of rows that RUNSTATS is to sample when collecting
statistics on non-indexed columns. You can specify any value from 1 through
100.
597

You cannot specify SAMPLE for LOB table spaces.
COLUMN
Specifies columns on which column statistics are to be gathered.
You can specify this option only if you specify a particular table on which
statistics are to be gathered. (Use the TABLE (table-name) option to specify a
particular table.) If you specify particular tables and do not specify the
COLUMN option, RUNSTATS uses the default, COLUMN(ALL). If you do not
specify a particular table when using the TABLE option, you cannot specify the
COLUMN option; however, in this case, COLUMN(ALL) is assumed.
(ALL)
Specifies that statistics are to be gathered on all columns in the table.
The COLUMN (ALL) option is not allowed for LOB table spaces.
(column-name, ...)
Specifies the columns on which statistics are to be gathered. You can
specify a list of column names. If you specify more than one column,
separate each name with a comma.
The more columns that you specify, the longer the job takes to complete.
COLGROUP (column-name, ...)
Indicates that the specified set of columns are to be treated as a group. This
option enables RUNSTATS to collect a cardinality value on the specified
column group. RUNSTATS TABLESPACE will ignore COLGROUP when
processing XML table spaces and indexes.
|
|
When you specify the COLGROUP keyword, RUNSTATS collects correlation

statistics for the specified column group. If you want RUNSTATS to also collect
distribution statistics, specify the FREQVAL option with COLGROUP.
(column-name, ...) specifies the names of the columns that are part of the
column group.
To specify more than one column group, repeat the COLGROUP option.
Restriction: The length of the COLGROUP value can not exceed the maximum
length of the COLVALUE column in the SYSIBM.SYSCOLDIST catalog table.
|
|
FREQVAL
Indicates, when specified with the COLGROUP option, that frequency statistics
are also to be gathered for the specified group of columns. (COLGROUP
indicates that cardinality statistics are to be gathered.) One group of statistics is
gathered for each column. You must specify COUNT integer with COLGROUP
FREQVAL. RUNSTATS TABLESPACE will ignore FREQVAL
MOST/LEAST/BOTH when processing XML table spaces and indexes.
COUNT integer
Indicates the number of frequently occurring values to be collected from
the specified column group. For example, COUNT 20 means that DB2
collects 20 frequently occurring values from the column group. You must
specify a value for integer; no default value is assumed.
Be careful when specifying a high value for COUNT. Specifying a value of
1000 or more can increase the prepare time for some SQL statements.
598
MOST
Indicates that the utility is to collect the most frequently occurring values
for the specified set of columns when COLGROUP is specified.
BOTH
Indicates that the utility is to collect the most and the least frequently
occurring values for the specified set of columns when COLGROUP is
specified.
LEAST
Indicates that the utility is to collect the least frequently occurring values
for the specified set of columns when COLGROUP is specified.
|
|
|
|
|
|
HISTOGRAM
Indicates, when specified with the COLGROUP option, that histogram statistics
are to be gathered for the specified group of columns. RUNSTATS
TABLESPACE will ignore HISTOGRAM when processing XML table spaces
and indexes.
NUMQUANTILES integer
|
|
|
|
|
Indicates how many quantiles that the utility is to collect. The integer value
must be equal to or greater than one. The number of quantiles that you
specify should never exceed the total number of distinct values in the
column or the column group. The maximum number of quantiles allowed
is 100.
|
|
|
When the NUMQUANTILES keyword is omitted, NUMQUANTILES takes

a default value of 100. Based on the number of records in the table, the
number of quantiles is readjusted down to an optimal number.
INDEX
Specifies indexes on which statistics are to be gathered. RUNSTATS gathers
column statistics for the first column of the index, and possibly additional
index columns depending on the options that you specify. All the indexes must
be associated with the same table space, which must be the table space that is
specified in the TABLESPACE option.
INDEX can be used on auxiliary tables to gather statistics on an index.
(ALL)
Specifies that column statistics are to be gathered for all indexes that are
defined on tables that are contained in the table space.
(index-name, ...)
Specifies the indexes for which statistics are to be gathered. You can specify
a list of index names. If you specify more than one index, separate each
name with a comma. Enclose the index name in quotation marks if the
name contains a blank.
PART integer
Identifies an index partition on which statistics are to be collected.
KEYCARD
Collects all of the distinct values in all of the 1 to n intermediate key column
combinations for the specified indexes. n is the number of columns in the
index. For example, suppose that you have an index defined on three columns:
A, B, and C. If you specify KEYCARD, RUNSTATS collects cardinality statistics
for the intermediate column set A and B.
599
FREQVAL
Controls, when specified with the INDEX option, the collection of
frequent-value statistics. If you specify FREQVAL with INDEX, this keyword
must be followed by the NUMCOLS and COUNT keywords.
|
|
|
|
NUMCOLS integer
Indicates the number of columns in the index for which RUNSTATS is to
collect frequently occurring values. integer can be a number between 1 and
the number of indexed columns. If you specify a number greater than the
number of indexed columns, RUNSTATS uses the number of columns in
the index.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For example, suppose that you have an index defined on three columns: A,
B, and C. If you specify NUMCOLS 1, DB2 collects frequently occurring
values for column A. If you specify NUMCOLS 2, DB2 collects frequently
occurring values for the column set A and B. If you specify NUMCOLS 3,
DB2 collects frequently occurring values for the column set A, B, and C.
|
|
The default value is 1, which means that RUNSTATS is to collect

frequently occurring values on the first key column of the index.
COUNT integer
Indicates the number of frequently occurring values that are to be collected
from the specified key columns. For example, specifying 15 means that
RUNSTATS is to collect 15 frequently occurring values from the specified
key columns.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
HISTOGRAM
Indicates, when specified with the INDEX option, that histogram statistics are
to be gathered for the specified key columns. Histogram statistics can only be
collected on the prefix columns with the same order. Key columns for
histogram statistics with a mixed order are not allowed.
|
|
When RUNSTATS collects histogram statistics for partition table spaces, it will
aggregate them into SYSCOLDIST.
|
|
|
|
specify should never exceed the total number of distinct values in the key
columns specified. The maximum number of quantiles allowed is 100.
|
|
|

a default value of 100. Based on the number of keys in the index, the
SHRLEVEL
Indicates whether other programs that access the table space while RUNSTATS
is running must use read-only access or can change the table space.
CHANGE
Allows other programs to change the table space or index. With
SHRLEVEL CHANGE, RUNSTATS might collect statistics on uncommitted
data.
REFERENCE
Allows only read-only access by other programs.
600
REPORT
Specifies whether RUNSTATS is to generate a set of messages that report the
NO
Indicates that RUNSTATS is not to generate the set of messages.
YES
messages that RUNSTATS generates are dependent on the combination of
keywords in the utility control statement. However, these messages are not
dependent on the value of the UPDATE option. REPORT YES always
generates a report of space and access path statistics.
UPDATE
Indicates which collected statistics are to be inserted into the catalog tables.
ALL
ACCESSPATH
Indicates that DB2 is to update the catalog with only those statistics that
are used for access path selection.
SPACE
Indicates that DB2 is to update the catalog with only space-related
statistics.
NONE
statistics.
Executing RUNSTATS always invalidates the dynamic cache; however,
when you specify UPDATE NONE REPORT NO, RUNSTATS invalidates
statements in the dynamic statement cache without collecting statistics,
updating catalogs tables, or generating reports.
HISTORY
Indicates which statistics are to be recorded in the catalog history tables. The
value that you specify for HISTORY does not depend on the value that you
specify for UPDATE.
The default is the value of the STATISTICS HISTORY subsystem parameter on
the DSNTIPO installation panel. By default, this parameter value is NONE.
ALL
tables.
ACCESSPATH
Indicates that DB2 is to update the catalog history tables with only those
statistics that are used for access path selection.
SPACE
Indicates that DB2 is to update the catalog history tables with only
space-related statistics.
NONE
statistics.
601
SORTDEVT
Specifies the device type that DFSORT uses to dynamically allocate the sort
work data sets that are required.
|
|
|
|
|
|
device-type
Specifies any device type that is acceptable for the DYNALLOC parameter
of the SORT or OPTIONS option of DFSORT. For information about valid
device types, see DFSORT Application Programming: Guide.
|
|
|
|
If you omit SORTDEVT, a sort is required, and you have not provided the DD
statements that the SORT program requires for the temporary data sets,
SORTDEVT will default to SYSALLDA and the temporary data sets will be
dynamically allocated.
|
|
If you specify SORTDEVT and omit SORTNUM, no value is passed to

DFSORT; DFSORT uses its own default.
SORTNUM
Specifies the number of required sort work data sets that DFSORT is to
allocate.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

FORCEROLLUP
Specifies whether aggregation or rollup of statistics is to occur even if statistics
have not been gathered on some partitions. This option enables the optimizer
to select the best access path.
YES
NO
for all partitions.
If the value for STATISTICS ROLLUP on panel DSNTIPO is NO and data is
not available for all partitions, DB2 issues message DSNU623I.
602
RUNSTATS INDEX syntax diagram
RUNSTATS INDEX
LIST
listdef-name
,
( index-name
(
ALL
)
PART integer
TABLESPACE
tablespace-name
database-name.
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
REPORT NO
UPDATE ALL
SHRLEVEL CHANGE
REPORT YES
UPDATE

ACCESSPATH
SPACE
NONE
(1)
HISTORY NONE
FORCEROLLUP NO
HISTORY
FORCEROLLUP YES

SORTNUM
integer
ALL
ACCESSPATH
SPACE
Notes:
1
You can change the default HISTORY value by modifying the STATISTICS HISTORY subsystem
parameter. By default, this value is NONE.
|
FREQVAL NUMCOLS 1
COUNT 10
MOST

MOST
KEYCARD
FREQVAL NUMCOLS
integer
COUNT
integer
BOTH
LEAST
NUMCOLS 1
NUMQUANTILES 100
HISTOGRAM
NUMQUANTILES 100
NUMCOLS integer
NUMQUANTILES
integer
603
RUNSTATS INDEX option descriptions

INDEX
Specifies the indexes on which statistics are to be gathered. Column statistics
are gathered on the first column of the index. All of the indexes must be
associated with the same table space.
LIST listdef-name
Specifies the name of a previously defined LISTDEF list name. You can specify
one LIST keyword for each RUNSTATS control statement. When you specify
LIST with RUNSTATS INDEX, the list must contain only index spaces. Do not
specify LIST with keywords from the INDEX...(index-name) specification; except
for the correlation-stats-spec.
RUNSTATS groups indexes by their related table space. RUNSTATS INDEX is
invoked once per table space. The INDEX keyword is required in order to
validate the contents of the LIST.
(index-name, ...)
Specifies the indexes on which statistics are to be gathered. You can specify a
list of index names. If you specify more than one index, separate each name
with a comma. Enclose the index name in quotation marks if the name
contains a blank.
PART integer
Identifies the index partition on which statistics are to be collected.
(ALL)
Specifies that statistics are to be gathered on all indexes that are defined on all
tables in the specified table space.
TABLESPACE
Identifies the table space and, optionally, the database to which it belongs, for
which index statistics are to be gathered.
database-name
The name of the database to which the table space belongs.
tablespace-name
The name of the table space for which index statistics are to be gathered.
KEYCARD
Collects all of the distinct values in all of the 1 to n key column combinations
for the specified indexes. n is the number of columns in the index. For
example, suppose that you have an index defined on three columns: A, B, and
C. If you specify KEYCARD, RUNSTATS collects cardinality statistics for
column A, column set A and B, and column set A, B, and C. RUNSTATS
INDEX will ignore KEYCARD when processing XML NODEID or VALUES
indexes.
FREQVAL
Controls, when specified with the INDEX option, the collection of
frequent-value statistics. If you specify FREQVAL with INDEX, this keyword
must be followed by the NUMCOLS and COUNT keywords. RUNSTATS
INDEX will ignore FREQVAL MOST/LEAST/BOTH when processing XML
NODEID or VALUES indexes.
|
|
|
NUMCOLS integer
Indicates the number of columns in the index for which RUNSTATS is to
604
collect frequently occurring values. integer can be a number between 1 and

the number of indexed columns. If you specify a number greater than the
number of indexed columns, RUNSTATS uses the number of columns in
the index.
For example, suppose that you have an index defined on three columns: A,
B, and C. If you specify NUMCOLS 1, DB2 collects frequently occurring
values for column A. If you specify NUMCOLS 2, DB2 collects frequently
occurring values for the column set A and B. If you specify NUMCOLS 3,
DB2 collects frequently occurring values for the column set A, B, and C.
The default value is 1, which means that RUNSTATS is to collect
frequently occurring values on the first key column of the index.
COUNT integer
Indicates the number of frequently occurring values that are to be collected
from the specified key columns. For example, specifying 15 means that
RUNSTATS is to collect 15 frequently occurring values from the specified
key columns.
The default is 10.
|
|
|
|
MOST
Indicates that the utility is to collect the most frequently occurring values
for the specified set of key columns when FREQVAL NUMCOLS COUNT
MOST keywords are specified.
|
|
|
|
LEAST
Indicates that the utility is to collect the least frequently occurring values
for the specified set of key columns when FREQVAL NUMCOLS COUNT
LEAST keywords are specified.
|
|
|
|
BOTH
Indicates that the utility is to collect the most and the least frequently
occurring values for the specified set of key columns when FREQVAL
NUMCOLS COUNT BOTH keywords are specified.
|
|
|
|
|
HISTOGRAM
Indicates, when specified with the INDEX option, that histogram statistics are
to be gathered for the specified key columns. Histogram statistics can only be
collected on the prefix columns with the same order. Key columns for
histogram statistics with a mixed order are not allowed.
|
|
|
When RUNSTATS collects histogram statistics for partitioned indexes, it will

aggregate them into SYSCOLDIST. RUNSTATS INDEX will ignore the
HISTOGRAM keyword when processing XML NODEID or VALUES indexes.
|
|
|
|
|
specify should never exceed the total number of distinct values in the
specified key columns. The maximum number of quantiles is 100.
|
|
|

a default value of 100. Based on the number of keys in the index, the
SHRLEVEL
Indicates whether other programs that access the table space while RUNSTATS
is running must use read-only access or can change the table space.
605
REFERENCE
Allows only read-only access by other programs.
CHANGE
Allows other programs to change the table space or index. With
SHRLEVEL CHANGE, RUNSTATS might collect statistics on uncommitted
data.
REPORT
Specifies whether RUNSTATS is to generate a set of messages that report the
NO
Indicates that RUNSTATS is not to generate the set of messages.
YES
messages that RUNSTATS generates are dependent on the combination of
keywords in the utility control statement. However, these messages are not
dependent on the value of the UPDATE option. REPORT YES always
generates a report of space and access path statistics.
UPDATE
Indicates which collected statistics are to be inserted into the catalog tables.
ALL
ACCESSPATH
Indicates that DB2 is to update the catalog with only those statistics that
are used for access path selection.
SPACE
Indicates that DB2 is to update the catalog with only space-related
statistics.
NONE
statistics.
Executing RUNSTATS always invalidates the dynamic cache; however,
when you specify UPDATE NONE REPORT NO, RUNSTATS invalidates
statements in the dynamic statement cache without collecting statistics,
updating catalogs tables, or generating reports.
SORTDEVT
Specifies the device type that DFSORT uses to dynamically allocate the sort
work data sets that are required.
device-type
Specifies any disk device type that is acceptable for the DYNALLOC
parameter of the SORT or OPTIONS option of DFSORT.
|
|
|
If you omit SORTDEVT, a sort is required, and you have not provided the DD
statements that the SORT program requires for the temporary data sets,
SORTDEVT will default to SYSALLDA and the temporary data sets will be
dynamically allocated.
If you specify SORTDEVT and omit SORTNUM, no value is passed to
DFSORT; DFSORT uses its own default.
606
SORTNUM
Specifies the number of required sort work data sets that DFSORT is to
allocate.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
HISTORY
Indicates which statistics are to be recorded in the catalog history tables. The
value that you specify for HISTORY does not depend on the value that you
specify for UPDATE.
The default is the value of the STATISTICS HISTORY subsystem parameter on
the DSNTIPO installation panel. By default, this parameter value is NONE.
ALL
tables.
ACCESSPATH
Indicates that DB2 is to update the catalog history tables with only those
statistics that are used for access path selection.
SPACE
Indicates that DB2 is to update the catalog history tables with only
space-related statistics.
NONE
statistics.
FORCEROLLUP
Specifies whether aggregation or rollup of statistics is to occur even if statistics
have not been gathered on some partitions. This option enables the optimizer
to select the best access path.
YES
NO
for all partitions.
If the value for STATISTICS ROLLUP on panel DSNTIPO is NO and data is
not available for all partitions, DB2 issues message DSNU623I.
607
Related reference
Before running RUNSTATS

Certain activities might be required before you run the RUNSTATS utility,
You can use SQL to manually update the catalog columns that RUNSTATS
updates. Use caution when running RUNSTATS after any user has manually
updated the statistic columns in the catalog. RUNSTATS replaces any values that
the user changed.
Restriction: RUNSTATS might not provide useful statistics on encrypted data.
Data sets that RUNSTATS uses

The RUNSTATS utility uses a number of data sets during its operation.
The following table lists the data sets that RUNSTATS uses. The table lists the DD
Table 104. Data sets that RUNSTATS uses
608
Data set
Description
Required?
SYSIN

control statement.
Yes
SYSPRINT
Yes
RNPRIN01

This data set is used when distribution
statistics are collected for column groups.
No1
STPRIN01

This data set is used when frequency
statistics are collected on DPSIs or when
TABLESPACE TABLE COLGROUP
FREQVAL is specified
Yes1, 2, 4
Sort work data sets

output when collecting statistics on at least
one data-partitioned secondary index. This
data set is used when the COLGROUP
option is specified or the COLGROUP and
FREQVAL options are specified. The DD
names have the form ST01WKnn.
No2, 3
Sort work data sets

No1, 3
output when collecting distribution statistics
for column groups. The DD names have the
form STATWK01.
sort work data sets

output when collecting frequency statistics.
The DD names have the form SORTWK01
and ST02WKnn.
No3
Table 104. Data sets that RUNSTATS uses (continued)

Data set
|
|
|
|
Description
Required?
Note:
1. Required when collecting distribution statistics for column groups.
2. Required when collecting statistics on at least one data-partitioned secondary index.
4. Required when the COLGROUP with FREQVAL options are specified.
utility job JCL.
Table space or index
Object that is to be scanned.

Depending on the type of statistics that RUNSTATS collects, the utility uses the
ST01WKnn data sets, the SORTWK01 data set, both types of data sets, or neither.
The ST01WKnn data sets are used when collecting statistics on at least one
data-partitioned secondary index. To calculate the approximate size (in bytes) of
the ST01WKnn data set, use the following formula:
numcols
count
Number of frequent values that RUNSTATS is to collect.
The SORTWK01 data set is used when collecting distribution statistics. To calculate
the approximate size (in bytes) of the SORTWK01 data set, use the following
formula:
(longest_record_length + prefix) sum from 1 to N (#colgroupsn #rows - n)
N
Number of tables for which distribution statistics are collected
#colgroupsn
Number of column groups that are specified for the nth table
#rows
Number of rows for the nth table
609
|
|
|
The ST02WKnn data sets are used when collecting frequency statistics on at least
one COLGROUP. To calculate the approximate size (in bytes) of the ST02WKnn
data set, use the following formula:
2 (maximum record length (count + 2) number of parts)

count
Number of frequent values that RUNSTATS is to collect.
data that is to be sorted.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Concurrency and compatibility for RUNSTATS

The RUNSTATS utility has certain concurrency and compatibility characteristics
associated with it.
operating on different partitions of the same table space or index space are
compatible.
Claims
The following table shows which claim classes RUNSTATS claims and drains and
Table 105. Claim classes of RUNSTATS operations
RUNSTATS
TABLESPACE
SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE
RUNSTATS
TABLESPACE
SHRLEVEL
CHANGE
RUNSTATS
INDEX
SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE
RUNSTATS
INDEX
SHRLEVEL
CHANGE
Table space or
partition
DW/UTRO
CR/UTRW1
None
None
Index or
partition
None
None
DW/UTRO
CR/UTRW
Target
Legend:
v DW - Drain the write claim class - concurrent access for SQL readers.
v CR - Claim the read claim class.
v UTRO - Utility restrictive state - read-only access allowed.
v UTRW - Utility restrictive state - read-write access allowed.
v None - Object is not affected by this utility.
Note:
1. If the target object is a segmented table space, SHRLEVEL CHANGE does not allow you
to concurrently execute an SQL searched DELETE without the WHERE clause.
610
Compatibility
The following table shows which utilities can run concurrently with RUNSTATS on
options of a utility, that information is also shown in the table.
Table 106. Compatibility of RUNSTATS with other utilities
|
|
Utility
RUNSTATS
TABLESPACE
SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE
RUNSTATS
TABLESPACE
SHRLEVEL
CHANGE
RUNSTATS
INDEX
SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE
RUNSTATS
INDEX
SHRLEVEL
CHANGE
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
CHECK INDEX
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CHECK LOB
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPY INDEXSPACE
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPY TABLESPACE
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
DIAGNOSE
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LOAD
No
No
No
No
LOAD SHRLEVEL CHANGE
No
Yes
No
Yes
MERGECOPY
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
MODIFY RECOVERY
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
QUIESCE
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
REBUILD INDEX
Yes
Yes
No
No
RECOVER ERROR RANGE
No
No
Yes
Yes
RECOVER INDEX
Yes
Yes
No
No
RECOVER INDEX TOCOPY or

TOLOGPOINT
No
No
No
No
RECOVER TABLESPACE (no

options)
No
No
Yes
Yes
RECOVER TABLESPACE TOCOPY

or TORBA
No
No
No
No
REORG INDEX
Yes
Yes
No
No

CONTINUE or PAUSE
No
No
No
No

ONLY or EXTERNAL
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
REPAIR LOCATE INDEX PAGE

REPLACE
Yes
Yes
No
No

DELETE or REPLACE
No
No
No
Yes

PAGE REPLACE
No
No
Yes
Yes
REPORT
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
RUNSTATS
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
611
Table 106. Compatibility of RUNSTATS with other utilities (continued)
Utility
RUNSTATS
TABLESPACE
SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE
RUNSTATS
TABLESPACE
SHRLEVEL
CHANGE
RUNSTATS
INDEX
SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE
RUNSTATS
INDEX
SHRLEVEL
CHANGE
STOSPACE
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
UNLOAD
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
When to use RUNSTATS

DB2 uses the statistics that RUNSTATS generates to determine access paths to data.
If no statistics are available, DB2 makes fixed default assumptions.
To ensure the effectiveness of the paths selected, run RUNSTATS at the following
times:
v After a table is loaded
v After an index is physically created
v After a table space is reorganized if inline statistics were not collected
v After running extensive updates, deletions, or insertions in a table space
v After running any of the following utilities without collecting inline statistics:
RECOVER TABLESPACE, REBUILD INDEX, or REORG INDEX
v Before running REORG with the OFFPOSLIMIT, INDREFLIMIT, or
LEAFDISTLIMIT options
v After running the ALTER TABLE ROTATE PARTITION statement run
RUNSTATS with REORG .
|
|
You should recollect frequency statistics when either of the following situations is
true:
v The distribution of the data changes
v The values over which the data is distributed change
Determining when to gather statistics and what statistics to gather depends on a
number of factors. The preceding information is only a guideline. You should
determine your own statistic collection strategy.
One common situation in which old statistics can affect query performance is when
a table has columns that contain data or ranges that are constantly changing (for
example, dates and timestamps). These types of columns can result in old values in
the HIGH2KEY and LOW2KEY columns in the catalog. You should periodically
collect column statistics on these changing columns so that the values in
HIGH2KEY and LOW2KEY accurately reflect the true range of data, and range
predicates can obtain accurate filter factors.
Assessing table space status

Changes to a table space can also change its space requirements and performance.
You can use RUNSTATS to update the table space statistics and then assess the
current status of the table space and decide whether to reorganize or redesign the
table space.
612
Collecting distribution statistics for column groups

When RUNSTATS collects distribution statistics for columns groups, the utility
invokes DFSORT or a similar product to sort the distribution statistics. This sort
requires its own work data set. You can let this data set be dynamically allocated
through the SORT program, or you can allocate the data set through a DD
statement in the job JCL. The DD name is STATWK01.
If you need to control the size or placement of the data sets, use the JCL
statements to allocate STATWK01.
To collect distribution statistics for column groups:
v To let the work data set be dynamically allocated, remove the STATWK01 DD
statements from the job and allocate the UTPRINT statement to SYSOUT.
v To let the SORT program dynamically allocate this data set, specify the
SORTDEV option in the RUNSTATS utility control statement.
Related reference
Data sets that RUNSTATS uses on page 608
Updating statistics for a partitioned table space

You can run RUNSTATS on one or more single partitions of one or more table
spaces or indexes (including data-partitioned secondary indexes). When you run
the utility on a single partition of an object, RUNSTATS uses the resulting
partition-level statistics to update the aggregate statistics for the entire object.
Running RUNSTATS on the DB2 catalog

You can run RUNSTATS on the DB2 catalog to gather index space and table space
statistics for various catalog tables. DB2 uses the collected statistics on the catalog
to determine the access path for user queries of the catalog.
The following sample shows part of the output from a RUNSTATS job on a catalog
table space and its indexes:
DSNU000I
DSNUGUTC DSNU050I
DSNUGUTC DSNU610I # DSNUSUTP DSNU610I # DSNUSUTS DSNU610I # DSNUSUTB -
OUTPUT START FOR UTILITY, UTILID = DSNTEX

RUNSTATS TABLESPACE DSNDB06.SYSDBASE INDEX(ALL)
SYSTABLEPART CATALOG UPDATE FOR DSNDB06.SYSDBASE SUCCESSFUL
SYSTABLESPACE CATALOG UPDATE FOR DSNDB06.SYSDBASE SUCCESSFUL
SYSTABLES CATALOG UPDATE FOR SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACE SUCCESSFUL
DSNU610I
DSNU610I
DSNU610I
DSNU610I
DSNU610I
#
#
#
#
#
DSNUSUTB
DSNUSUIX
DSNUSUIP
DSNUSUCO
DSNUSUFL
SYSTABLES CATALOG UPDATE FOR SYSIBM.SYSSYNONYMS SUCCESSFUL

SYSINDEXES CATALOG UPDATE FOR SYSIBM.DSNDSX01 SUCCESSFUL
SYSINDEXPART CATALOG UPDATE FOR SYSIBM.DSNDSX01 SUCCESSFUL
SYSCOLUMNS CATALOG UPDATE FOR SYSIBM.DSNDSX01 SUCCESSFUL
SYSFIELDS CATALOG UPDATE FOR SYSIBM.DSNDSX01 SUCCESSFUL
DSNU610I
DSNU610I
DSNU610I
DSNU610I
DSNU010I
#
#
#
#
DSNUSUIX
DSNUSUIP
DSNUSUCO
DSNUSUFL
DSNUGBAC
SYSINDEXES CATALOG UPDATE FOR SYSIBM.DSNDYX01 SUCCESSFUL

SYSINDEXPART CATALOG UPDATE FOR SYSIBM.DSNDYX01 SUCCESSFUL
SYSCOLUMN CATALOG UPDATE FOR SYSIBM.DSNDYX01 SUCCESSFUL
SYSFIELDS CATALOG UPDATE FOR SYSIBM.DSNDYX01 SUCCESSFUL
Figure 98. Example RUNSTATS output from a job on a catalog table space
Improving RUNSTATS performance

Certain activities might improve the performance of the RUNSTATS utility.
613
You can improve the performance of RUNSTATS on table spaces that are defined
with the LARGE option by specifying the SAMPLE option, which reduces the
number of rows that are scanned for statistics.
Consider running several RUNSTATS jobs concurrently against different partitions
of a partitioned table space or index rather than running a single RUNSTATS job
on the entire table space or index. The sum of the processor time for the
concurrent jobs is roughly equivalent to the processor time for running the single
RUNSTATS job. However, the total elapsed time for the concurrent jobs can be
significantly less than when you run RUNSTATS on an entire table space or index.
Run RUNSTATS on only the columns or column groups that might be used as
search conditions in a WHERE clause of queries. Use the COLGROUP option to
identify the column groups. Collecting additional statistics on groups of columns
that are used as predicates improves the accuracy of the filter factor estimate and
leads to improved query performance. Collecting statistics on all columns of a table
is costly and might not be necessary.
In some cases, you can avoid running RUNSTATS by specifying the STATISTICS
keyword in LOAD, REBUILD INDEX, or REORG utility statements. When you
specify STATISTICS in one of these utility statements, DB2 updates the catalog
with table space or index space statistics for the objects on which the utility is run.
However, you cannot collect column group statistics with the STATISTICS
keyword. You can collect column group statistics only by running the RUNSTATS
utility. If you restart a LOAD or REBUILD INDEX job that uses the STATISTICS
keyword, DB2 does not collect inline statistics. For these cases, you need to run the
RUNSTATS utility after the restarted utility job completes.
Related concepts
Restart of REORG TABLESPACE on page 517
Collecting frequency statistics for data-partitioned secondary indexes

When RUNSTATS collects frequency statistics on at least one data-partitioned
secondary index, the utility invokes DFSORT or a similar product to sort the
statistics. This sort requires temporary sort work data sets. You can let these data
sets be dynamically allocated through the SORT program, or you can allocate the
data sets through DD statements in the job JCL. The DD name is ST01WKnn.
If you need to control the size or placement of the data sets, use the JCL
statements to allocate ST01WKnn.
To collect frequency statistics for data-partitioned secondary indexes:
v To let the sort work data sets be dynamically allocated, remove the ST01WKnn
DD statements from the job and allocate the UTPRINT statement to SYSOUT.
v To let the SORT program dynamically allocate these data sets, specify the
SORTDEV option in the RUNSTATS utility control statement to specify the
device type for the temporary data sets. Optionally, you can also use the
SORTNUM option to specify the number of temporary data sets to use.
614
Related reference
Data sets that RUNSTATS uses on page 608
Invalidating statements in the dynamic statement cache

DB2 invalidates statements in the dynamic statement cache when you run
RUNSTATS on objects to which those statements refer.
In a data sharing environment, the relevant statements are also invalidated in the
cache of other members in the group. DB2 invalidates the cached statements to
ensure that the next invocations of those statements are fully prepared and that
they use the latest access path changes.
To invalidate statements in the dynamic statement cache without collecting
statistics by:
Specify the options UPDATE NONE and REPORT NO in the RUNSTATS utility
control statement.
Collecting statistics history

You can collect statistics history with the RUNSTATS utility.
To collect statistics history:
Specify the HISTORY option in the RUNSTATS utility control statement. When you
specify HISTORY with a value other than NONE, RUNSTATS updates the catalog
history tables with the access path statistics, space statistics, or both, depending on
the parameter that you specify with HISTORY. The HISTORY option does not
update the main catalog statistics that DB2 uses to select access paths. You can use
the HISTORY option to monitor how statistics change over time without updating
the main catalog statistics that DB2 uses to select access paths.
Collecting statistics on LOB table spaces

You can specify that RUNSTATS is to collect space statistics on a LOB table space
so that you can determine when the LOB table space should be reorganized. No
statistics on the LOB table space affect access path selection.
Termination or restart of RUNSTATS

You can terminate and restart the RUNSTATS utility.
You can terminate RUNSTATS with the TERM UTILITY command.
You can restart a RUNSTATS utility job, but it starts from the beginning again.
Related concepts
Review of RUNSTATS output

RUNSTATS alters tables and columns in the catalog tables. When you specify
REPORT YES, RUNSTATS also generates a report of statistics that are gathered
during processing.
615
RUNSTATS sets the following columns to -1 for table spaces that are defined as
LARGE:
v CARD in SYSTABLES
v CARD in SYSINDEXPART
v FAROFFPOS in SYSINDEXPART
v NEAROFFPOS in SYSINDEXPART
v FIRSTKEYCARD in SYSINDEXES
v FULLKEYCARD in SYSINDEXES
Index statistics and table space statistics

The following table shows the catalog tables that RUNSTATS updates depending
on the value of the UPDATE option, the value of the HISTORY option, and the
source of the statistics (table space, partition, index or LOB table space).
Table 107. Catalog tables that RUNSTATS updates
Catalog table that RUNSTATS
updates
Keyword
UPDATE option
HISTORY option
TABLESPACE
UPDATE ALL
HISTORY ALL 4
SYSTABLESPACE
SYSTABLEPART1
SYSTABLEPART_HIST1
SYSTABLES1
SYSTABLES_HIST1
SYSTABSTATS1,2
SYSTABSTATS_HIST1,2
SYSLOBSTATS3
SYSLOBSTATS_HIST3
TABLESPACE
UPDATE ALL
HISTORY ACCESSPATH
SYSTABLESPACE
SYSTABLES1
SYSTABLES_HIST1
SYSTABSTATS1,2
SYSTABSTATS_HIST1,2
TABLESPACE
UPDATE ALL
HISTORY SPACE
SYSTABLEPART1
SYSTABLEPART_HIST1
SYSLOBSTATS3
SYSLOBSTATS_HIST3
TABLESPACE
UPDATE ACCESSPATH2
HISTORY ALL 4
SYSTABLESPACE
SYSTABLES
SYSTABLES_HIST
SYSTABSTATS2
SYSTABSTATS_HIST2
TABLESPACE
UPDATE ACCESSPATH2
HISTORY ACCESSPATH
SYSTABLESPACE
SYSTABLES
SYSTABLES_HIST
SYSTABSTATS2
SYSTABSTATS_HIST2
TABLESPACE
UPDATE ACCESSPATH2
HISTORY SPACE
none
TABLESPACE
UPDATE SPACE
TABLESPACE
UPDATE SPACE2
616
HISTORY ALL
HISTORY ACCESSPATH
SYSTABLEPART
SYSTABLEPART_HIST
SYSLOBSTATS3
SYSLOBSTATS_HIST3
SYSTABLES
SYSTABLES_HIST
none
Table 107. Catalog tables that RUNSTATS updates (continued)

updates
Keyword
UPDATE option
HISTORY option
TABLESPACE
UPDATE SPACE2
HISTORY SPACE
SYSTABLEPART
SYSTABLEPART_HIST
SYSLOBSTATS3
SYSLOBSTATS_HIST3
SYSTABLES SYSTABLES_HIST
TABLE
UPDATE ALL
HISTORY ALL 4
SYSCOLUMNS
SYSCOLSTATS2
TABLE
UPDATE ALL
HISTORY ACCESSPATH
SYSCOLUMNS
SYSCOLSTATS2
TABLE
UPDATE ALL
HISTORY SPACE
none
SYSCOLUMNS
SYSCOLSTATS2
TABLE
UPDATE ACCESSPATH
HISTORY ALL
TABLE
UPDATE ACCESSPATH
HISTORY ACCESSPATH
SYSCOLUMNS
SYSCOLSTATS2
TABLE
UPDATE ACCESSPATH
HISTORY SPACE
none
SYSCOLUMNS
SYSCOLUMNS_HIST
SYSCOLDIST
SYSCOLDIST_HIST
SYSCOLDISTSTATS2
SYSCOLSTATS2
SYSINDEXES
SYSINDEXES _HIST
SYSINDEXPART
SYSINDEXPART_HIST
SYSINDEXSTATS2
INDEX
UPDATE ALL
HISTORY ALL
INDEX
UPDATE ALL
HISTORY ACCESSPATH
SYSCOLUMNS
SYSCOLUMNS_HIST
SYSCOLDIST
SYSCOLDIST_HIST
SYSCOLDISTSTATS2
SYSCOLSTATS2
SYSINDEXPART
SYSINDEXPART_HIST
SYSINDEXSTATS2
INDEX
UPDATE ALL
HISTORY SPACE
SYSINDEXES
SYSINDEXES_HIST
INDEX
UPDATE ACCESSPATH
HISTORY ALL 4
SYSCOLUMNS
SYSCOLUMNS_HIST
SYSCOLDIST
SYSCOLDIST_HIST
SYSCOLDISTSTATS2
SYSCOLSTATS
SYSINDEXES
SYSINDEXES _HIST
SYSINDEXSTATS2
617

updates
Keyword
UPDATE option
HISTORY option
INDEX
UPDATE ACCESSPATH
HISTORY ACCESSPATH
SYSCOLUMNS
SYSCOLUMNS_HIST
SYSCOLDIST
SYSCOLDIST_HIST
SYSCOLDISTSTATS2
SYSCOLSTATS
SYSINDEXES
SYSINDEXES _HIST
SYSINDEXSTATS2
INDEX
UPDATE ACCESSPATH
HISTORY SPACE
SYSINDEXES
SYSINDEXES_HIST
INDEX
UPDATE SPACE
HISTORY ALL 4
SYSINDEXPART
SYSINDEXPART_HIST
SYSINDEXES5
SYSINDEXES_HIST5
INDEX
UPDATE SPACE
HISTORY ACCESSPATH
none
INDEX
UPDATE SPACE
HISTORY SPACE
SYSINDEXPART
SYSINDEXES5
| INDEX6
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UPDATE ALL
HISTORY ALL4
SYSKEYTARGETS
SYSKEYTARGETS_HIST
SYSKEYTARGETSTATS2
SYSKEYTGTDISTSTATS2
SYSINDEXPART
SYSINDEXPART_HIST
SYSINDEXSTATS2
SYSINDEXSTATS_HIST2
SYSINDEXES
SYSINDEXES_HIST
SYSKEYTGTDIST
SYSKEYTGTDIST_HIST
| INDEX6
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UPDATE ALL
HISTORY ACCESSPATH
SYSKEYTARGETS
SYSKEYTARGETS_HIST
SYSKEYTARGETSTATS2
SYSKEYTGTDISTSTATS2
SYSINDEXPART
SYSINDEXSTATS2
SYSINDEXSTATS_HIST2
SYSINDEXES
SYSINDEXES_HIST
SYSKEYTGTDIST
SYSKEYTGTDIST_HIST
| INDEX6
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UPDATE ALL
HISTORY SPACE
SYSKEYTARGETS
SYSKEYTARGETSTATS2
SYSKEYTGTDISTSTATS2
SYSINDEXPART
SYSINDEXPART_HIST
SYSINDEXSTATS2
SYSINDEXES
SYSINDEXES_HIST
SYSKEYTGTDIST
618

updates
Keyword
UPDATE option
HISTORY option
INDEX6
UPDATE ACCESSPATH
HISTORY ALL4
SYSKEYTARGETS
SYSKEYTARGETS_HIST
SYSKEYTARGETSTATS2
SYSKEYTGTDISTSTATS2
SYSINDEXPART
SYSINDEXSTATS2
SYSINDEXSTATS_HIST2
SYSINDEXES
SYSINDEXES_HIST
SYSKEYTGTDIST
SYSKEYTGTDIST_HIST
| INDEX6
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UPDATE ACCESSPATH
HISTORY ACCESSPATH
SYSKEYTARGETS
SYSKEYTARGETS_HIST
SYSKEYTARGETSTATS2
SYSKEYTGTDISTSTATS2
SYSINDEXPART
SYSINDEXSTATS2
SYSINDEXSTATS_HIST2
SYSINDEXES
SYSINDEXES_HIST
SYSKEYTGTDIST
SYSKEYTGTDIST_HIST
| INDEX6
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
UPDATE ACCESSPATH
HISTORY SPACE
SYSKEYTARGETS
SYSKEYTARGETSTATS2
SYSKEYTGTDISTSTATS2
SYSINDEXPART
SYSINDEXPART_HIST
SYSINDEXSTATS2
SYSINDEXES
SYSINDEXES_HIST
SYSKEYTGTDIST
| INDEX6
|
|
|
|
|
UPDATE SPACE
HISTORY ALL4
SYSKEYTARGETS_HIST
SYSINDEXPART
SYSINDEXSTATS_HIST2
SYSINDEXES
SYSINDEXES_HIST
SYSKEYTGTDIST_HIST
| INDEX6
|
|
UPDATE SPACE
HISTORY ACCESSPATH
SYSINDEXPART
SYSINDEXES
SYSINDEXES_HIST
INDEX6
UPDATE SPACE
HISTORY SPACE
SYSINDEXPART
SYSINDEXPART_HIST
SYSINDEXES
SYSINDEXES_HIST
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
619

Keyword
UPDATE option
HISTORY option

updates
Note:
1. Not applicable if the specified table space is a LOB table space.
2. Only updated for partitioned objects. When you run RUNSTATS against single partitions of an object, RUNSTATS
uses the partition-level statistics to update the aggregate statistics for the entire object. These partition-level
statistics are contained in the following catalog tables:
v SYSCOLSTATS
v SYSCOLDISTSTATS
v SYSTABSTATS
v SYSINDEXSTATS
3. Applicable only when the specified table space is a LOB table space.
4. When HISTORY NONE is specified, none of the catalog history tables are updated.
5. Only the SPACEF and STATSTIME columns are updated.
| 6. Applicable only when the target object is an index on expression.
Access path statistics

The catalog table columns that are listed in the following tables are used by DB2 to
select access paths to data during the bind process. These columns are updated by
RUNSTATS with the UPDATE ACCESSPATH or UPDATE ALL options.
These tables do not describe information about LOB columns because DB2 does
not use those statistics for access path selection.
A value in the Use column indicates whether information about the DB2 catalog
column is General-use Programming Interface and Associated Guidance
Information (G) or Product-sensitive Programming Interface and Associated
Guidance Information (S), as defined in Programming interface information.
The following table lists the columns in SYSTABLES that DB2 uses to select access
paths. These columns are updated by RUNSTATS with the UPDATE ACCESSPATH
or UPDATE ALL options unless the statistics in the SYSTABSTATS table have been
manually updated to -1. In this case, the columns in SYSTABLES are not updated
after RUNSTATS PART UPDATE ALL is run.
Table 108. SYSTABLES catalog columns that DB2 uses to select access paths
SYSTABLES column
name
Column description
CARDF
Total number of rows in the table.
NPAGES
Total number of pages on which rows of this table are

included.
NPAGESF
Total number of pages that are used by the table.
PCTROWCOMP
Percentage of rows compressed within the total

number of active rows in the table.
Use
The following table lists the columns in SYSTABSTATS that DB2 uses to select
access paths. These columns are updated by RUNSTATS with the UPDATE
ACCESSPATH or UPDATE ALL options.
620
Table 109. SYSTABSTATS catalog columns that DB2 uses to select access paths
SYSTABSTATS
column name
Column description
CARDF
Total number of rows in the partition.
NPAGES
Total number of pages on which rows of this partition

are included.
Use
The following table lists the columns in SYSCOLUMNS that DB2 uses to select
Table 110. SYSCOLUMNS catalog columns that DB2 uses to select access paths
SYSCOLUMNS
column name
Column description
Use
COLCARDF
Estimated number of distinct values for the column.

For an indicator column, this value is the number of
LOBs that are not null and whose lengths are greater
than zero. The value is -1 if statistics have not been
gathered. The value is -2 for columns of an auxiliary
table, XML column indicator, NODEID column, and
XML table.
HIGH2KEY
Second highest value of the column. Blank if statistics

have not been gathered or if the column is an indicator
column, NODEID column, or a column of an auxiliary
table or XML table. If the column has a non-character
data type, the data might not be printable. This column
can be updated.
LOW2KEY
Second lowest value of the column. Blank if statistics

have not been gathered or if the column is an indicator
column, NODEID column, or a column of an auxiliary
table or XML table. If the column has a non-character
data type, the data might not be printable. This column
can be updated.
The following table lists the columns in SYSCOLDIST that DB2 uses to select
Table 111. SYSTCOLDIST catalog columns that DB2 uses to select access paths
SYSCOLDIST
column name
Column description
Use
CARDF
The number of distinct values for the column group.

This number is valid only for cardinality key column
statistics. (A C in the TYPE column indicates that
cardinality statistics were gathered.)
COLGROUPCOLNO
Identifies the set of columns that are associated with

the key column statistics.
COLVALUE
Actual index column value that is being counted for

distribution index statistics.
FREQUENCYF
Percentage of rows, multiplied by 100, that contain the

values that are specified in COLVALUE.
HIGHVALUE
The high bound column value.
621
Table 111. SYSTCOLDIST catalog columns that DB2 uses to select access paths (continued)
SYSCOLDIST
column name
Column description
LOWVALUE
The low bound column value.
NUMCOLUMNS
The number of columns that are associated with the

key column statistics.
Use
The following table lists the columns in SYSTABLESPACE that DB2 uses to select
Table 112. SYSTABLESPACE catalog columns that DB2 uses to select access paths
SYSTABLESPACE
Column name
NACTIVE or
NACTIVEF
Column description
Use
Number of active pages in the table space; shows the

number of pages that are accessed if a record cursor is
used to scan the entire file. The value is -1 if statistics
have not been gathered.
The following table lists the columns in SYSINDEXES that DB2 uses to select
Table 113. SYSINDEXES catalog columns that DB2 uses to select access paths
SYSINDEXES
column name
Column description
Use
CLUSTERRATIOF
A number between 0 and 1 that, when multiplied by

100, gives the percentage of rows that are in clustering
order. For example, a value of 1 indicates that all rows
are in clustering order. A value of .87825 indicates that
87.825% of the rows are in clustering order.
CLUSTERING
Indicates whether CLUSTER was specified when the

index was created.
DATAREPEATFACTORF
Number of data pages touched following index key

order.
FIRSTKEYCARDF
Number of distinct values of the first key column.
FULLKEYCARDF
Number of distinct values of the full key.
NLEAF
Number of leaf pages in the index.
NLEVELS
Number of levels in the index tree.
The following table lists the columns in SYSKEYTARGETS that DB2 uses to select
622
Table 114. SYSKEYTARGETS catalog columns that DB2 uses to select access paths
|
|
SYSKEYTARGETS
column name
|
|
|
|
|
CARDF
Number of distinct values for the key-target. The value

is -2 if the index is a node ID index or an XML index.
For an XML Value index the statistic is collected for the
2nd key target (DOCID column). For all other key
targets of the value index, the value of -2 is set.
HIGH2KEY
Second highest key value. This is an updatable column.
|
|
LOW2KEY
Second lowest key value. This is an updatable column.
Column description
Use
The following table lists the columns in SYSKEYTGTDIST that DB2 uses to select
|
Table 115. SYSKEYTGTDIST catalog columns that DB2 uses to select access paths
|
|
SYSKEYTGTDIST
column name
Column description
KEYSEQ
Numeric position of the key-targeted in the index.
|
|
|
KEYVALUE
Contains the data of a frequently occurring value. If

the value has a non-character data type, the data may
not be printable.
|
|
|
|
CARDF
For TYPE=C, this is the number of distinct values for

the key group. For TYPE=H, this is the number of
distinct values for the key group in a quantile
indicated by QUANTILENO.
|
|
|
|
|
|
FREQUENCYF
For TYPE=F or N, this is the percentage of entries

in the index with the value specified in the
KEYVALUE when the number is multiplied by 100.
For TYPE=H, this is the percentage of entries in the
index that fall in the quantile indicated by
QUANTILENO.
|
|
LOWVALUE
For TYPE=H, this is the low bound for the quantile

|
|
|
HIGHVALUE
For TYPE=H, this is the high bound for the quantile

Use
Related information
Statistics used for access path selection (DB2 Performance Monitoring and Tuning
Guide)
DB2 catalog tables (DB2 SQL Reference)
Space statistics (columns for tuning information)

The catalog table columns that are listed in the following tables are updated by
RUNSTATS with the UPDATE SPACE or UPDATE ALL options. The information
in these columns helps database administrators assess the status of a particular
table space or index.
A value in the Use column indicates whether information about the DB2 catalog
column is General-use Programming Interface and Associated Guidance
Information (G) or Product-sensitive Programming Interface and Associated
Guidance Information (S), as defined in Programming interface information.
623
The following table lists the columns in SYSTABLESPACE that are updated by
RUNSTATS with the UPDATE SPACE or UPDATE ALL options
Table 116. SYSTABLESPACE catalog columns that are updated by RUNSTATS with the
UPDATE SPACE or UPDATE ALL options.
SYSTABLESPACE
column name
Column description
AVGROWLEN
Average length of rows for the tables in the table space.
Use
G
The following table lists the columns in SYSTABLES that are updated by
RUNSTATS with the UPDATE SPACE or UPDATE ALL options.
Table 117. SYSTABLES catalog columns that are updated by RUNSTATS with the UPDATE
SPACE or UPDATE ALL options
SYSTABLES column
name
Column description
AVGROWLEN
Use
G
The following table lists the columns in SYSTABLES_HIST that are updated by
Table 118. SYSTABLES_HIST catalog columns that are updated by RUNSTATS with the
UPDATE SPACE or UPDATE ALL options
SYSTABLES_HIST
column name
Column description
AVGROWLEN
Use
G
The following table lists the columns in SYSTABLEPART that are updated by
Table 119. SYSTABLEPART catalog columns that are updated by RUNSTATS with the
SYSTABLEPART
column name
Column description
AVGROWLEN
Average length of rows for the tables in the table

space.
CARDF
Total number of rows in the table space or partition,

or number of LOBs in the table space if the table
space is a LOB table space. The value is -1 if statistics
have not been gathered.
DSNUM
Number of data sets.
EXTENTS
Number of data set extents.
NEARINDREF
Number of rows that are relocated near their original

page.
For more information about NEARINDREF, see the

description of FARINDREF.
624
Use
UPDATE SPACE or UPDATE ALL options (continued)
SYSTABLEPART
column name
FARINDREF
Column description
Use
Number of rows that are relocated far from their

original page.
If an update operation increases the length of a

record by more than the amount of available space in
the page in which it is stored, the record is moved to
another page. Until the table space is reorganized, the
record requires an additional page reference when it
is accessed. The sum of NEARINDREF and
FARINDREF is the total number of such records.
For nonsegmented table spaces, a page is considered
near the present page if the two page numbers
differ by 16 or fewer; otherwise, it is far from the
present page.
For segmented table spaces, a page is considered
near the present page if the two page numbers
differ by (SEGSIZE * 2) or less. Otherwise, it is far
from its original page.
A record that is relocated near its original page tends
to be accessed more quickly than one that is relocated
far from its original page.
PAGESAVE
Percentage of pages that are saved in the table space

or partition as a result of using data compression. For
example, a value of 25 indicates a savings of 25%, so
that the required pages are only 75% of what would
be required without data compression. The value is 0
if no savings from using data compression are likely,
or if statistics have not been gathered. The value can
be negative if using data compression causes an
increase in the number of pages in the data set.
This calculation includes the overhead bytes for each

row, the required bytes for the dictionary, and the
required bytes for the current FREEPAGE and
PCTFREE specification for the table space and
partition.
This calculation is based on an average row length,
and the result varies depending on the actual lengths
of the rows.
PERCACTIVE
Percentage of space that is occupied by rows of data

from active tables. The value is -1 if statistics have
not been gathered. The value is -2 if the table space is
a LOB table space.
This value is influenced by the PCTFREE and the

FREEPAGE parameters on the CREATE
TABLESPACE statement and by unused segments of
segmented table spaces.
625
SYSTABLEPART
column name
PERCDROP
Column description
Use
For nonsegmented table spaces, the percentage of

space that is occupied by rows of data from dropped
tables. For segmented table spaces, this value is zero.
After reorganization, this value is always zero.
Space that is occupied by dropped tables is reclaimed

by reorganization. Hence, this figure is one indicator
of when a table space should be reorganized.
SPACE
The number of kilobytes of space that is currently

allocated for all extents. A value of -1 indicates that
the data set is defined with the DEFINE NO
attribute, and the first insert operation has not
occurred.
SPACEF
The number of kilobytes of disk storage.
PQTY
(user-managed)
The primary space allocation in 4-KB blocks for the

data set.
SQTY
(user-managed)
The secondary space allocation in 4-KB blocks for the

data set, in small integer format.
SECQTYI
(user-managed)

data set, in integer format.
The following table lists the columns in SYSTABLEPART_HIST that are updated by
Table 120. SYSTABLEPART_HIST that are updated by RUNSTATS with the UPDATE SPACE
or UPDATE ALL options
SYSTABLEPART_HIST
column name
AVGROWLEN
Column description
Use
Average length of rows for the tables in the table

space.
The following table lists the columns in SYSINDEXES that are updated by
Table 121. SYSINDEXES catalog columns that are updated by RUNSTATS with the UPDATE
SPACE or UPDATE ALL options
SYSINDEXES
column name
AVGKEYLEN
Column description
Average length of keys within the index. The value is
-1 if statistics have not been gathered.
Use
G
The following table lists the columns in SYSINDEXES_HIST that are updated by
626
Table 122. SYSINDEXES_HIST catalog columns that are updated by RUNSTATS with the
SYSINDEXES_HIST
column name
AVGKEYLEN
Column description
Use
Average length of keys within the index. The

value is -1 if statistics have not been gathered.
The following table lists the columns in SYSINDEXPART that are updated by
Table 123. SYSINDEXPART catalog columns that are updated by RUNSTATS with the
SYSINDEXPART
column name
Column description
Use
AVGKEYLEN
Average length of keys within the index. The value is

-1 if statistics have not been gathered.
CARDF
Number of rows that the index or partition refers to.
DSNUM
Number of data sets.
EXTENTS
Number of data set extents.
FAROFFPOSF
Number of times that accessing a different, far-off

page would be necessary when accessing all the data
records in index order.
Each time that DB2 accesses a far-off page, accessing

the next record in index order would probably
require I/O activity.
far-off from the present page if the two page
numbers differ by 16 or more. For segmented table
spaces, a page is considered far-off from the present
page if the two page numbers differ by SEGSIZE * 2
or more.
Together, NEAROFFPOSF and FAROFFPOSF indicate
how well the index follows the cluster pattern of the
table space. For a clustering index, NEAROFFPOSF
and FAROFFPOSF approach a value of 0 as
clustering improves. A reorganization should bring
them nearer their optimal values; however, if a
nonzero FREEPAGE value is specified on the
CREATE TABLESPACE statement, the
NEAROFFPOSF after reorganization reflects the table
on which the index is defined. Do not expect optimal
values for nonclustering indexes. The value is -1 if
statistics have not been gathered. The value is -2 if
the index is a node ID index or an XML index. The
column is not applicable for an index on an auxiliary
table.
LEAFNEAR
Number of leaf pages that are located physically near

previous leaf pages for successive active leaf pages.
LEAFFAR
Number of leaf pages that are located physically far

away from previous leaf pages for successive active
leaf pages that are accessed in an index scan.
627
SYSINDEXPART
column name
Column description
NEAROFFPOSF
Number of times that accessing a different, near-off

page would be necessary when accessing all the data
records in index order.
Use
S
Each time that DB2 accesses a near-off page,

accessing the next record in index order would
probably require I/O activity. For more information
about NEAROFFPOSF, see the description of
FAROFFPOSF.
NEAROFFPOSF is incremented if the current indexed
row is not on the same or next data page of the
previous indexed row, and if the distance between
the two data pages does not qualify for
FAROFFPOSF.
near-off from the present page if the difference
between the two page numbers is greater than or
equal to 2, and less than 16. For segmented table
spaces, a page is considered near-off from the present
page if the difference between the two page numbers
is greater than or equal to 2, and less than SEGSIZE *
2. A nonzero value in the NEAROFFPOSF field after
a REORG might be attributed to the number of space
map pages that are contained in the segmented table
space. The value is -2 if the index is a node ID index
or an XML index. Not applicable for an index on an
auxiliary table.
LEAFDIST
100 times the average distance in page IDs between

successive leaf pages during a sequential access of
the index.
This value indicates how well an index is organized.

The value is at its lowest immediately after the index
has been reorganized. Changes increase the value;
and you can reduce it again by reorganizing the
index, either explicitly or as part of a general table
space reorganization. The value is -1 if statistics have
not been gathered. The value is -2 if the index is a
node ID index or an XML index.
628
PSEUDO_DEL_
ENTRIES
Number of pseudo-deleted keys. Pseudo-deleted keys

are keys that are marked for deletion, but the data
still resides in the index space, and the space can be
reused. The space can be reclaimed by running
REORG INDEX.
SPACE
The number of kilobytes of space that is currently

allocated for all extents. A value of -1 indicates that
the data set is defined with the DEFINE NO
attribute, and the first insert operation has not
occurred.
SPACEF
The number of kilobytes of disk storage.
PQTY
(user-managed)
The primary space allocation in 4-KB blocks for the

data set.
SYSINDEXPART
column name
Column description
Use
SQTY
(user-managed)

data set, in small integer format.
SECQTYI
(user-managed)

data set, in integer format.
The following table lists the columns in SYSINDEXPART_HIST that are updated by
Table 124. SYSINDEXPART_HIST catalog columns that are updated by RUNSTATS with the
SYSINDEXPART_HIST
column name
AVGKEYLEN
Column description
Use
Average length of keys within the index. The

value is -1 if statistics have not been
gathered.
The following table lists the columns in SYSLOBSTATS that are updated by
Table 125. SYSLOBSTATS catalog columns that are updated by RUNSTATS with the
SYSLOBSTATS
column name
Column description
AVGSIZE
The average size of a LOB in the LOB table space.
FREESPACE
The number of kilobytes of available space in the

LOB table space, up to the highest used RBA.
ORGRATIO
The percentage of organization in the LOB table

space. A value of 100 indicates perfect organization of
the LOB table space. A value of 1 indicates that the
LOB table space is disorganized.
Use
A value of 0.00 indicates that the LOB table space is

totally disorganized. An empty LOB table space has
an ORGRATIO value of 100.00.
After running RUNSTATS

Certain activities might be required after you run the RUNSTATS utility,
After running RUNSTATS with the UPDATE ACCESSPATH option, the UPDATE
SPACE option, or the UPDATE ALL option, rebind any application plans that use
the tables or indexes so that they use the new statistics.
Sample RUNSTATS control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own RUNSTATS
control statements.
629
Example 1: Updating catalog statistics for a table space while

allowing changes
The following control statement specifies that the RUNSTATS utility is to update
the catalog with statistics for table space DSN8D81A.DSN8S91E and all of its
associated tables and indexes. When updating the table statistics, RUNSTATS is to
sample 25% of the rows. The SHRLEVEL change option indicates that DB2 is to
permit other processes to make changes while this utility is executing.
//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='IUJQU225.RUNSTA',TIME=1440,
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='DSN'
//SYSIN
DD *
RUNSTATS TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E
TABLE(ALL) SAMPLE 25
INDEX(ALL)
SHRLEVEL CHANGE
Example 2: Updating index statistics

The following control statement specifies that RUNSTATS is to update the catalog
statistics for index DSN8810.XEMPL1.
RUNSTATS INDEX (DSN8910.XEMPL1)
Example 3: Updating index statistics while prohibiting updates

statistics for indexes XEMPL1 and XEMPL2. DB2 does not permit other processes
to change the table space that is associated with XEMPL1 and XEMPL2 (table
space DSN8S91E) while this utility is executing. This restricted access is the default
behavior.
RUNSTATS INDEX (DSN8910.XEMPL1,DSN8910.XEMPL2)
Example 4: Updating statistics for columns in several tables

statistics for the following columns in table space DSN8D91P.DSN8S91C:
v All columns in the TCONA and TOPTVAL tables
v The LINENO and DSPLINE columns in the TDSPTXT table
RUNSTATS TABLESPACE(DSN8D91P.DSN8S91C)
TABLE (TCONA)
TABLE (TOPTVAL) COLUMN(ALL)
TABLE (TDSPTXT) COLUMN(LINENO,DSPLINE)
Example 5: Updating all statistics for a table space

The following control statement specifies that RUNSTATS is to update all catalog
statistics (table space, tables, columns, and indexes) for table space
DSN8D81P.DSN8S81C.
RUNSTATS TABLESPACE(DSN8D91P.DSN8S91C) TABLE INDEX
Example 6: Updating statistics that are used for access path

selection and generating a report
with only the statistics that are collected for access path selection. The utility is to
report all statistics for the table space and route the report to SYSPRINT.
630

REPORT YES
UPDATE ACCESSPATH
Example 7: Updating all statistics and generating a report

with all statistics (access path and space) for table space DSN8D81A.DSN8S81E.
The utility is also to report the collected statistics and route the report to
SYSPRINT.
REPORT YES
UPDATE ALL
Example 8: Reporting statistics without updating the catalog

The following control statement specifies that RUNSTATS is to collect statistics for
table space DSN8D81A.DSN8S81E and route the report to SYSPRINT. The utility is
not to update the catalog with the collected statistics.
REPORT YES
UPDATE NONE
Example 9: Updating statistics for a partition

The following control statement specifies that RUNSTATS is to update the statistics
for the first partition of table space DSN8D81A.DSN8S81E and the first partition of
the DSN8810.XEMP1 index.
RUNSTATS TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S91E PART 1 INDEX(DSN8910.XEMP1 PART 1)
Example 10: Updating catalog and history tables and reporting

all statistics
tables and history catalog tables with all statistics for table space
DB0E0101.TL0E0101 (including related indexes and columns). The utility is to
report the collected statistics and route the statistics to SYSPRINT.
RUNSTATS TABLESPACE DBOE0101.TLOE0101
INDEX
TABLE
REPORT YES
UPDATE ALL
HISTORY ALL
Example 11: Updating statistics on frequently occurring values

Assume that the SYSADM.IXNP1 index is defined on four columns: NP1, NP2,
NP3, and NP4. The following control statement specifies that RUNSTATS is to
update the statistics for index SYSADM.IXNPI.
The KEYCARD option indicates that the utility is to collect cardinality statistics for
column NP1, column set NP1 and NP2, and column set NP1, NP2, and NP3, and
column set NP1, NP2, NP3, and NP4. The FREQVAL option and its associated
parameters indicate that RUNSTATS is also to collect the 5 most frequently
occurring values on column NP1 (the first key column of the index), and the 10
631
most frequently occurring values on the column set NP1 and NP2 (the first two
key columns of the index). The utility is to report the collected statistics and route
the statistics to SYSPRINT.
RUNSTATS INDEX (SYSADM.IXNPI)
KEYCARD
FREQVAL NUMCOLS 1 COUNT 5
FREQVAL NUMCOLS 2 COUNT 10
REPORT YES
Example 12: Updating distribution statistics for a group of

specified columns in a table
The following control statement specifies that RUNSTATS is to update statistics for
the columns EMPLEVEL, EMPGRADE, and EMPSALARY in table DSN8810.DEPT
(in table space DSN8D81A.DSN8S81E). The statement uses the COLGROUP
keyword to group these columns. RUNSTATS is to collect the cardinality of this
column group and store the cardinality in the SYSCOLDIST catalog table.
TABLE(DSN8810.DEPT)
COLGROUP (EMPLEVEL,EMPGRADE,EMPSALARY)
Example 13: Updating distribution statistics for specific columns

and retrieving the most frequently occurring values
the columns EMPLEVEL, EMPGRADE, and EMPSALARY in table DSN8810.DEPT.
The FREQVAL and COUNT options indicate that RUNSTATS is to collect the 10
most frequently occurring values for each column. The values are to be stored in
the SYSCOLDIST and SYSCOLDISTSTATS catalog tables.
TABLE(DSN8810.DEPT)
COLGROUP(EMPLEVEL,EMPGRADE,EMPSALARY) FREQVAL COUNT 10

in a table and retrieving the least frequently occurring values
least frequently occurring values for each column. The values are to be stored in
the SYSCOLDIST and SYSCOLDISTSTATS catalog tables.
TABLE(DSN8810.DEPT)
COLGROUP(EMPLEVEL,EMPGRADE,EMPSALARY) FREQVAL COUNT 15 LEAST

in a table space and retrieving the most and least frequently
occurring values
most frequently occurring values for each column and the 10 least frequently
occurring values for each column. The values are to be stored in the SYSCOLDIST
and SYSCOLDISTSTATS catalog tables.
632

TABLE(DSN8810.DEPT)
COLGROUP(EMPLEVEL,EMPGRADE,EMPSALARY) FREQVAL COUNT 10 BOTH
Example 16: Updating statistics for an index and retrieving the

most and least frequently occurring values
The following control statement specifies that RUNSTATS is to collect the 10 most
frequently occurring values and the 10 least frequently occurring values for the
first key column of index ADMF001.IXMA0101. The KEYCARD option indicates
that the utility is also to collect all the distinct values in all the key column
combinations. A set of messages is sent to SYSPRINT and all collected statistics are
updated in the catalog.
RUNSTATS INDEX(ADMF001.IXMA0101)
KEYCARD
FREQVAL NUMCOLS 1 COUNT 10 BOTH
REPORT YES UPDATE ALL
Example 17: Invalidating statements in the dynamic statement

cache for a table space without generating report statistics.
The following control statement specifies that RUNSTATS is to invalidate
statements in the dynamic statement cache for table space DSN8D81A.DSN8S81E.
However, RUNSTATS is not to collect or report statistics or update the catalog.
REPORT NO
UPDATE NONE
Example 18: RUNSTATS HISTOGRAM job statement.

|
|
|
The following control statement specifies that RUNSTATS is to gather histogram

statistics for the specified key columns. Histogram statistics can only be collected
on the prefix columns with the same order.
RUNSTATS TABLESPACE RVTDB01.RVTTS01
INDEX ALL
HISTOGRAM NUMCOLS 2
NUMQUANTILES 5
SHRLEVEL(CHANGE)
UPDATE ALL
REPORT YES
633
634
Chapter 30. STOSPACE

The STOSPACE utility updates DB2 catalog columns that indicate how much space
is allocated for storage groups and related table spaces and indexes.
For user-defined spaces, STOSPACE does not record any statistics.
Output
The output from STOSPACE consists of updated values in the columns and tables
in the following list. In each case, an amount of space is given in kilobytes (KB). If
the value is too large to fit in the SPACE column, the SPACEF column is updated.
v SPACE in SYSIBM.SYSINDEXES shows the amount of space that is allocated to
indexes. If the index is not defined using STOGROUP, or if STOSPACE has not
been executed, the value is zero.
v SPACE in SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACE shows the amount of space that is allocated
to table spaces. If the table space is not defined using STOGROUP, or if
STOSPACE has not been executed, the value is zero.
v SPACE in SYSIBM.SYSINDEXPART shows the amount of space that is allocated
to index partitions. If the partition is not defined using STOGROUP, or if
v SPACE in SYSIBM.SYSTABLEPART shows the amount of space that is allocated
to table partitions. If the partition is not defined using STOGROUP, or if
v SPACE in SYSIBM.SYSSTOGROUP shows the amount of space that is allocated
to storage groups.
v STATSTIME in SYSIBM.SYSSTOGROUP shows the timestamp for the time at
which STOSPACE was last executed.
v STOSPACE privilege
Execution phases of STOSPACE

The STOSPACE utility operates in these phases:
Phase Description
UTILINIT
STOSPACE
Gathers space information and updates catalog
UTILTERM
Performs cleanup
635
Syntax and options of the STOSPACE control statement

The STOSPACE utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
Syntax diagram
,
STOSPACE STOGROUP(
stogroup-name
Option descriptions
STOGROUP
Identifies the storage groups that are to be processed.
(stogroup-name, ...)
Specifies the name of a storage group. You can use a list of from one to 255
storage group names. Separate items in the list by commas, and enclose
them in parentheses.
*
Indicates that all storage groups are to be processed.
Data sets that STOSPACE uses

The STOSPACE utility uses a number of data sets during its operation.
The following table lists the data sets that STOSPACE uses. The table lists the DD
Table 126. Data sets that STOSPACE uses
Data set
Description
Required?
SYSIN

control statement.
Yes
SYSPRINT
Yes
Storage group
Object that is to be reported.
636
Concurrency and compatibility for STOSPACE

The STOSPACE utility has certain concurrency and compatibility characteristics
associated with it.
STOSPACE does not set a utility restrictive state on the target object.
STOSPACE can run concurrently with any utility on the same target object.
However, because STOSPACE updates the catalog, concurrent STOSPACE utility
jobs or other concurrent applications that update the catalog might cause timeouts
and deadlocks.
You can use the STOSPACE utility on storage groups that have objects within
temporary databases.
How STOSPACE ensures availability of objects it STOSPACE requires

For each specified storage group, STOSPACE looks at the
SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACE and SYSIBM.SYSINDEXES catalog tables to determine
which objects belong to that storage group.
For each object, the amount of allocated space is determined from an appropriate
VSAM catalog. Hence the table spaces and indexes do not need to be available to
DB2 when STOSPACE is running; only the DB2 catalog and appropriate VSAM
catalogs are required. However, to gain access to the VSAM catalog, the utility
must have available to it the database definition (DBD) for the objects that are
involved. This access requires that the appropriate database, table spaces, and
index spaces not be in the stopped state.
Obtaining statistical information with STOSPACE

When DB2 storage groups are used in the creation of table spaces and indexes,
DB2 defines the data sets for them. The STOSPACE utility permits a site to monitor
the disk space that is allocated for the storage group.
The following table lists statistical information that the STOSPACE utility records
and that is useful for making space allocation decisions.
Table 127. DB2 catalog data that STOSPACE collects
Catalog table
Column name
Column description
SYSTABLESPACE
SPACEF
Number of kilobytes of storage that are

allocated to the table space
SYSTABLEPART
SPACEF

allocated to the table space partition
SYSINDEXES
SPACEF

allocated to the index
SYSINDEXPART
SPACEF

allocated to the index partition
SYSSTOGROUP
SPACEF

allocated to the storage group
SYSSTOGROUP
STATSTIME
Time when STOSPACE was last run on a

particular storage group
637
STOSPACE does not accumulate information for more than one storage group. If a
partitioned table space or index space has partitions in more than one storage
group, the information in the catalog about that space comes from only the group
for which STOSPACE was run.
When you run the STOSPACE utility, the SPACEF column of the catalog represents
the high-allocated RBA of the VSAM linear data set. Use the value in the SPACEF
column to project space requirements for table spaces, table space partitions, index
spaces, and index space partitions over time. Use the output from the Access
Method Services LISTCAT command to determine which table spaces and index
spaces have allocated secondary extents. When you find these, increase the
primary quantity value for the data set, and run the REORG utility.
v For information about space utilization in the DSN8S91E table space in the
DSN8D91A database:
1. Run the STOSPACE utility
2. Execute the following SQL statement: PSPI
EXEC SQL
SELECT SPACE
FROM SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACE
WHERE NAME = 'DSN8S91E
AND DBNAME = 'DSN8D91A'
ENDEXEC
PSPI
Alternatively, you can use TSO to look at data set and pack descriptions.
v To update SYSIBM.SYSSTOGROUP for storage group DSN8G910, as well as
SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACE and SYSIBM.SYSINDEXES, for every table space and
index that belongs to DSN8G910, use the following utility control statement:
STOSPACE STOGROUP DSN8G910
Analysis of the values in a SPACE or SPACEF column

The value in a SPACE or SPACEF column represents total allocated space, not only
the space that is allocated on the current list of volumes in the storage groups. (If
the value is too large to fit in the SPACE column, the SPACEF column is used.)
You can delete volumes from a storage group even though space on those volumes
is still allocated to DB2 table spaces or indexes. Deletion of a volume from a
storage group prevents future allocations; it does not withdraw a current
allocation.
Terminate or restart of STOSPACE

You can terminate and restart the STOSPACE utility.
You can terminate a STOSPACE utility job with the TERM UTILITY command if
you have submitted the job or have SYSOPR, SYSCTRL, or SYSADM authority.
You can restart a STOSPACE utility job, but it starts from the beginning again.
638
Related concepts
Sample STOSPACE control statement

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own STOSPACE
control statements.
Example 1: Updating catalog SPACE columns for a particular

storage group
The following control statement specifies that the STOSPACE utility is to update
the catalog SPACE or SPACEF columns for storage group DSN8G910 and any
related table spaces and indexes.
//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='FUAUU330.STOSPCE',
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='DSN'
//SYSIN
DD *
STOSPACE STOGROUP DSN8G910
//*
Example 2: Specifying a storage group name that contains

spaces
If the name of the storage group that you want STOSPACE to process contains
spaces, enclose the entire storage group name in single quotation marks.
Parentheses are optional. The following statements are correct ways to specify a
storage group with the name THIS IS STOGROUP.1.ON.E:
STOSPACE STOGROUP('THIS IS STOGROUP.1.ONE')
STOSPACE STOGROUP 'THIS IS STOGROUP.1.ONE'
Example 3: Updating catalog SPACE columns for all storage

groups
the catalog SPACE or SPACEF columns for all storage groups.
STOSPACE STOGROUP *
Example 4: Updating catalog SPACE columns for several storage

groups
the catalog SPACE or SPACEF columns for storage groups DSN8G910 and
DSN8G81U.
STOSPACE STOGROUP(DSN8G810, DSN8G81U)
639
640
Chapter 31. TEMPLATE

The TEMPLATE utility control statement lets you allocate data sets, without using
JCL DD statements, during the processing of a LISTDEF list. In its simplest form,
the TEMPLATE control statement defines the data set naming convention. You can
also write TEMPLATE control statements so that they contain allocation parameters
that define data set size, location, and attributes.
Templates enable you to standardize data set names across the DB2 subsystem and
to easily identify the data set type when you use variables in the data set name.
The TEMPLATE control statement uses the z/OS DYNALLOC macro (SVC 99) to
perform data set allocation. Therefore, the facility is constrained by the limitations
of this macro and by the subset of DYNALLOC that is supported by TEMPLATE.
See z/OS MVS Programming: Authorized Assembler Services Guide for more
details.
Output
The TEMPLATE control statement generates a dynamic allocation template with an
assigned name for later reference.
No privileges are required to execute this control statement. When a TEMPLATE is
referenced by a specific utility, privileges are checked at that time.
Execution phases of TEMPLATE

The TEMPLATE control statement executes entirely in the UTILINIT phase, which
performs setup for the subsequent utility.
Syntax and options of the TEMPLATE control statement

The TEMPLATE utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
641
Syntax diagram
TEMPLATE
template-name DSN
name-expression

common-options

disk-options
tape-options
SUBSYS name LRECL
int
RECFM
F
FB
V
VB
name-expression:
.
(1)

qualifier-expression

(parenthetical-expression)
Notes:
1
The entire name-expression represents one character string and cannot contain any blanks.
qualifier-expression:

character-expression

(2)
&variable
.
(1)
(start
)
,length
Notes:
1
If you use substring notation, the entire DSN operand must be enclosed in single quotation
marks. For example, the DSN operand 'P&PA(4,2).' uses substring notation, so it is enclosed in
single quotation marks.
The &PA. variable cannot be used more than once.
common-options:
642
UNIT
SYSALLDA
UNIT
name
BUFNO 30

BUFNO
MODELDCB dsname
integer
DATACLAS
name

MGMTCLAS
name
STORCLAS name
RETPD integer
EXPDL date
,
VOLUMES ( volser
GDGLIMIT 99

VOLCNT
integer
GDGLIMIT
UNCNT integer
integer

DISP
NEW
OLD
SHR
MOD
DELETE
KEEP
CATLG
UNCATLG
DELETE
KEEP
CATLG
UNCATLG
LIMIT(n
CYL
GB
MB
,new_template)
disk-options:
SPACE CYL
PCTPRIME 100

SPACE
(primary,secondary)
CYL
TRK
MB
PCTPRIME
integer
MAXPRIME
integer
NBRSECND 10

NBRSECND
integer
DIR integer
DSNTYPE
LIBRARY
PDS
HFS
NULL
tape-options:
STACK NO
TRTCH NONE
STACK YES
TRTCH

COMP
NOCOMP
Option descriptions
TEMPLATE template-name
Defines a data set allocation template and assigns to the template a name,
643
template-name, for subsequent reference on a DB2 utility control statement. The

template-name can have up to eight alphanumeric characters and must begin
with an alphabetic character.
The template-name is followed by keywords that control the allocation of tape
and disk data sets. A single TEMPLATE statement cannot have both disk
options and tape options. The UNIT keyword specifies a generic unit name
that is defined on your system. This value is used to determine if a disk or
tape data set is being allocated. All other keywords specified on the
TEMPLATE control statement must be consistent with the specified unit type.
DSN name-expression
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Specifies the template for the z/OS data set name. You can specify the data set
name, name-expression, by using symbolic variables, non-variable alphanumeric,
or national characters, or any combination of these characters. The resulting
name must adhere to the z/OS data set naming rules, including those rules
about name length, valid characters, name structure and qualifier length. You
must specify a DSN expression that is unique for each data set allocated by the
utility and to each invocation of the utility.
|
|
|
|
Data set names consists of a series of qualifiers, qualifier-expression, that are

separated by a period (.) and an optional parenthetical expression. No
imbedded blanks are allowed. A partitioned data set (PDS) cannot be defined
by TEMPLATE for use as an input data set.
If the DSN name operand contains any special characters, it must be enclosed
in single quotation marks. For example, in the following TEMPLATE
statement, the DSN operand contains the parentheses special character, so the
entire operand is enclosed in single quotation marks:
TEMPLATE X DSN 'A.GDG.VERSION(+1)'
Parentheses around the DSN name operand are optional. They are used in the
following DSN specification:
DSN(&DB..&TS..D&DATE.)
character-expression
Specifies the data set name or part of the data set name by using non-variable
alphanumeric or national characters.
parenthetical-expression
Specifies part of the data set name by using non-variable alphanumeric or
national characters that are enclosed in parentheses. For example, the
expressions Q1.Q2.Q3(member) and Q1.Q2.Q3(+1) use valid parenthetical
expressions. No variable substitution is performed within the parenthetical
expression.
|
|
|
|
|
|
&variable.
Specifies the data set name or part of the data set name by using symbolic
variables. See the following tables for a list of variables that can be used.
Each symbolic variable is substituted with its related value at execution time to
form a specific data set name. When used in a DSN expression, substitution
variables begin with an ampersand sign (&) and end with a period (.), as in
the following example:
DSN &DB..&TS..D&JDATE..COPY&ICTYPE.
Using numeric variables alone generates an invalid data set qualifier for all
numeric-type variables (all date or time-type variables, and others, such as
644
&SEQ. or &PART.). These variables must be preceded by character constants to

form valid DSN qualifiers. The following examples are valid specifications:
P&PART.
D&DATE.
Some substitution variables are invalid if you use TEMPLATE with an

incompatible utility. For example, ICTYPE is not meaningful if the TEMPLATE
statement is used with LOAD SYSDISC. Other variables assume default values
when their values are not known. For example, &PART. becomes 00000 for
non-partitioned objects.
You can also use substring notation for data set name variables. This notation
can help you keep the data set name from exceeding the 44 character
maximum. If you use substring notation, the entire DSN operand must be
enclosed in single quotation marks. To specify a substring, use the form
&variable(start). or &variable(start,length).
start
Specifies the substrings starting byte location within the current variable
base value at the time of execution. start must be an integer from 1 to 128.
length
Specifies the length of the substring. If you specify start but do not specify
length, length, by default, is the number of characters from the start
character to the last character of the variable value at the time of execution.
For example, given a five-digit base value, &PART(4). specifies the fourth
and fifth digits of the value. length must be an integer that does not cause
the substring to extend beyond the end of the base value.
The following table contains a list of JOB variables and their descriptions.
Table 128. JOB variables
Variable
Description
&JOBNAME. or &JO.
The z/OS job name.
&STEPNAME. or &ST.
The z/OS step name. This variable might be needed if data

set names from two different job steps conflict.
&USERID. or &US.
The user ID of the person that is running the utility. The

value is 1 to 8 characters long.
&UTILID. or &UT.
The utility ID truncated to eight characters and checked for

invalid DSN characters.
&SSID. or &SS.
Subsystem ID (non-data sharing) or group attach name (data

sharing).
The following table contains a list of UTILITY variables and their descriptions.
Table 129. UTILITY variables
Variable
Description
&ICTYPE. or &IC.
Single-character image copy type. This variable is valid only

for image copy templates. The substitution is governed by
whether a full image copy (F), an incremental image copy
(I), or a CHANGELIMIT image copy (C) is specified by the
user.
645
Table 129. UTILITY variables (continued)

Variable
Description
&UTILNAME. or &UN.
Special values are assigned to some utilities: CHECKD for

CHECK DATA, CHECKI for CHECK INDEX, CHECKL for
CHECK LOB, REORGI for REORG INDEX, and REORGT for
REORG TABLESPACE. Utility names that are longer than
eight characters are truncated to eight characters.
&SEQ. or &SQ.
Sequence number of the list item in the list.
&LOCREM. or &LR.
Indicator of whether ddname is for the local site (COPYDDN)

or the recovery site (RECOVERYDDN). Single character L is
used when the utility defines a COPYDDN ddname. The
single character R is used when the utility defines a
RECOVERYDDN ddname. You can replicate the SYSCOPY
ICBACKUP column information by using both the
&LOCREM. and &PRIBAC. variables. This variable is valid
only for image copy templates.
&PRIBAC. or &PB.
Indicator of whether ddname is for the primary (ddname1) or

backup (ddname2) copy data set. Single character P is used
when the utility defines a ddname1. The single character B is
used when the utility defines a ddname2. You can replicate
the SYSCOPY ICBACKUP column information by using both
the &LOCREM. and &PRIBAC. variables. This variable is
valid only for image copy templates.
The following table contains a list of OBJECT variables and their descriptions.
Table 130. OBJECT variables
Variable
Description
&LIST. or &LI.
The name of the list that is defined by using the LISTDEF

control statement and that is referenced on the same control
statement as this TEMPLATE. This variable is used with
COPY FILTERDDN templates. All objects in the list are
copied to one data set, which makes &TS. and &IS.
meaningless.
&DB.
Database name.
&TS.
&IS.
&SN.
Table space name.

1
Index space name.
&PART. or &PA.
Space name (table space or index space).

2
Five-digit partition number, padded with leading zeros.
Note:
1. When you specify the &TS., &IS., or &SN. variables in a template that is used by an
UNLOAD statement with BLOBF, CLOBF, or DBCLOBF, DB2 substitutes the name of the
table space that stores the LOB column value, not the base table space name. This
substitution enables DB2 to generate unique data set names for each LOB column with
partitioned table spaces.
2. Use the &PA. variable when processing LISTDEF lists with the PARTLEVEL keyword or
data-partitioned secondary indexes. Otherwise, DB2 could generate duplicate data set
names.
The following table contains a list of DATE and TIME variables. and their
descriptions.
646
Table 131. DATE and TIME variables

Variable
Description
&DATE. or &DT.
YYYYDDD
&TIME. or &TI.
HHMMSS
&JDATE. or &JU.
YYYYDDD
&YEAR. or &YE.
YYYY portion of &DATE.
&MONTH. or &MO.
MM
&DAY. or &DA.
DD
&JDAY. or &JD.
DDD portion of &DATE.
&HOUR. or &HO.
HH portion of &TIME.
&MINUTE. or &MI.
MM portion of &TIME.
&SECOND. or &SC.
SS portion of &TIME.
&UNIQ. or &UQ.
Unique eight characters that DB2 derives from the system

clock at the time of allocation. This set of characters begins
with an alphabetical character and is followed by seven
alphabetical or numeric characters.
Note: All date and time values are set by using the STCK instruction, and they reflect the
date and time value in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). With the exception of the &UNIQ. and
&UQ. variables, DATE and TIME values are captured in the UTILINIT phase of each utility
and remain constant until the utility terminates. &UNIQ. and &UQ. are assigned a unique
value for each allocation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
SUBSYS name
Specifies the MVS BATCHPIPES SUBSYSTEM name. The SUBSYS operand
must be a valid BATCHPIPES SUBSYSTEM name and must not exceed eight
characters in length. When SUBSYS is specified, LRECL and RECFM are
required. When SUBSYS is specified, TEMPLATE keywords that are not
compatible with SUBSYS (such as UNIT) are ignored.
|
|
|
Restriction: When using BATCHPIPES, TEMPLATE with the SUBSYS

keyword, the utility cannot be restarted and the LOAD DISCARDDN keyword
is not supported.
|
|
|
LRECL int
Specifies the record length of the MVS BATCHPIPES SUBSYSTEM file. There is
no default value and this option is required when SUBSYS is specified.
|
|
|
|
RECFM
Specifies the record format of the MVS BATCHPIPES SUBSYSTEM file. The
valid values are F, FB, V, or VB. There is no default value and this option is
required when SUBSYS is specified.
UNIT
Specifies the device-number, device-type (generic), or group-name for the data
set. All other TEMPLATE keywords are validated based on the specified type
of unit (disk or tape).
The default value is SYSALLDA.
MODELDCB dsname
Specifies the name of the data set on which the template is based. DCB
information is read from this model data set.
647
BUFNO integer
Specifies the number of BSAM buffers. The specified value must be in the
range from 0 to 99.
DATACLAS name
Specifies the SMS data class. The name value must be a valid SMS data class
and must not exceed eight characters in length.
The data set is cataloged if DATACLAS is specified. If this option is omitted,
no DATACLAS is specified to SMS.
MGMTCLAS name
Specifies the SMS management class. The name value must be a valid SMS
management class and must not exceed eight characters in length.
The data set is cataloged if MGMTCLAS is specified. If this option is omitted,
no MGMTCLAS is specified to SMS.
STORCLAS name
Specifies the SMS storage class. The name value must be a valid SMS storage
class and must not exceed eight characters in length.
The data set is cataloged if STORCLAS is specified. If this option is omitted, no
STORCLAS is specified to SMS.
RETPD integer
Specifies the retention period in days for the data set. The integer value must
be in the range from 0 to 9999.
If DATACLAS, MGMTCLAS, or STORCLAS is specified, the class definition
might control the retention. RETPD cannot be specified with EXPDL.
|
|
EXPDL date
Specifies the expiration date for the data set, in the form YYYYDDD, where
YYYY is the four-digit year, and DDD is the three-digit Julian day. The date
value must be enclosed by single quotation marks.
If DATACLAS, MGMTCLAS, or STORCLAS is specified, the class definition
might control the retention. EXPDL cannot be specified with RETPD.
|
|
VOLUMES (vol1,vol2,...)
Specifies a list of volume serial numbers for this allocation. If the data set is
not cataloged the list is truncated, if necessary, when it is stored in
SYSIBM.SYSCOPY. The specified number of volumes cannot exceed the
specified or default value of VOLCNT.
The first volume must contain enough space for the primary space allocation.
If an individual volume serial-number contains leading zeros, it must be
enclosed in single quotation marks.
VOLCNT (integer)
Specifies the maximum number of volumes that an output data set might
require. The specified value must be between 0 and 255.
The default value for tape templates is 95. For disk templates, the utility does
not set a default value. Operating system defaults apply.
UNCNT integer
Specifies the number of devices that are to be allocated. The specified value
must in the range from 0 to 59.
648
If UNIT specifies a specific device number, the value of UNCNT must either be
1 or be omitted.
GDGLIMIT (integer)
Specifies the number of entries that are to be created in a GDG base if a GDG
DSN is specified and the base does not already exist. If a GDG base does not
already exist and you do not want to define one, specify a GDGLIMIT of zero
(0).
The default value is 99. The integer value must be in the range from 0 to 255.
DISP integer
Specifies the data set disposition by using three positional parameters: status,
normal-termination, and abnormal-termination. All three parameters must be
specified.
status
Standard z/OS values are allowed: NEW, OLD, SHR, MOD.
normal-termination
Standard z/OS values are allowed: DELETE, KEEP, CATLG, UNCATLG.
abnormal-termination
Standard z/OS values are allowed: DELETE, KEEP, CATLG, UNCATLG.
Default values for DISP vary, depending on the utility and the data set that is
being allocated. Defaults for restarted utilities also differ from default values
for new utility executions. Default values are shown in the following tables.
The following table shows the data dispositions for dynamically allocated data
sets for new utility executions.
Note: It is possible that output from utilities that use piped data would not be
dynamically allocated for new utility executions.
|
|
Table 132. Data dispositions for dynamically allocated data sets for new utility executions
ddname
CHECK
DATA
CHECK
INDEX or
CHECK LOB COPY
COPYTOCOPY
REORG
TABLESPACE
UNLOAD
SYSREC
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
SYSDISC
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
SYSPUNCH
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
SYSCOPY
Ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
Ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
SYSCOPY2
Ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
Ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
Ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
Ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
Ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
NEW
DELETE
CATLG
Ignored
Ignored
NEW
DELETE
CATLG
Ignored
NEW
DELETE
CATLG
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
NEW
DELETE
CATLG
Ignored
MERGECOPY
REBUILD
INDEX
REORG
INDEX
OLD
KEEP
KEEP
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
SYSRCPY1
Ignored
Ignored
SYSRCPY2
Ignored
SYSUT1
NEW
DELETE
CATLG
LOAD
649
Table 132. Data dispositions for dynamically allocated data sets for new utility executions (continued)
CHECK
DATA
ddname
CHECK
INDEX or
CHECK LOB COPY
COPYTOCOPY
LOAD
MERGECOPY
REBUILD
INDEX
REORG
INDEX
REORG
TABLESPACE
UNLOAD
SORTOUT
NEW
DELETE
CATLG
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
NEW
DELETE
CATLG
Ignored
Ignored
NEW
DELETE
CATLG
NEW
DELETE
CATLG
Ignored
SYSMAP
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
SYSERR
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
FILTERDDS
Ignored
Ignored
NEW
DELETE
DELETE
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
The following table shows data dispositions for dynamically allocated data sets
on RESTART.
Table 133. Data dispositions for dynamically allocated data sets on RESTART
ddname
CHECK
DATA
CHECK
INDEX or
CHECK LOB
COPY
COPYTOCOPY
SYSREC
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
SYSDISC
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
SYSPUNCH
Ignored
Ignored
SYSCOPY
Ignored
SYSCOPY2
REORG
TABLESPACE
MERGECOPY
REBUILD
INDEX
REORG
INDEX
OLD
KEEP
KEEP
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
MOD CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
MOD CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
Ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
Ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
SYSRCPY1
Ignored
Ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
Ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
SYSRCPY2
Ignored
Ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
Ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
SYSUT1
MOD
DELETE
CATLG
MOD
DELETE
CATLG
Ignored
Ignored
MOD
DELETE
CATLG
Ignored
MOD
DELETE
CATLG
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
MOD
DELETE
CATLG
Ignored
SORTOUT
MOD
DELETE
CATLG
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
MOD
DELETE
CATLG
Ignored
Ignored
MOD
DELETE
CATLG
MOD
DELETE
CATLG
Ignored
SYSMAP
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
SYSERR
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
FILTERDDS
Ignored
Ignored
NEW
DELETE
DELETE
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
LOAD
UNLOAD
LIMIT
Specifies template switching.
|
|
|
|
650
Specifies the maximum primary allocation quantity that is permitted using

this TEMPLATE.
|
|
CYL
Cylinders
|
|
GB
|
|
MB
|
|
|
new_template
Specifies a character string that specifies the name of a TEMPLATE to use
if the size limit is exceeded.
|
|
|
|
|
|
DB2 supports the LIMIT keyword only on TEMPLATE control statements

reference by COPYDDN or RECOVERYDDN keywords on the following
utilities:
v COPY FULL YES|NO
v COPY CONCURRENT
v COPYTOCOPY
v MERGECOPY
|
|
v LOAD
v REORG
|
|
Restriction:
v You cannot switch to a DD card.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
v The template control statement that LIMIT references must exist in SYSIN or
SYSTEMPL and it cannot refer to itself.
v Switching can only be performed a single time per allocation. Multiple
switching cannot take place.
v The utility PREVIEW function ignores the LIMIT keyword, only the original
TEMPLATE control statement is previewed. The LIMIT keyword is ignored
for new templates.
Gigabytes
Megabytes
|
|
|
|
|
SPACE (primary,secondary)
Specifies the z/OS disk space allocation parameters in the range from 1 to
1677215. If you specify (primary,secondary) value, these values are used instead
of the DB2-calculated values. When specifying primary and secondary
quantities, you must either specify both values or omit both values.
Use the MAXPRIME option to set an upper limit on the primary quantity.
|
|
|
|
|
|
CYL
Specifies that allocation quantities, if present, are to be expressed in
cylinders and that allocation is to occur in cylinders. If SPACE CYL is
specified, without (primary, secondary), the DB2-calculated quantities are
allocated in cylinders by using 3390 quantities for byte conversion. If TRK
and MB are omitted, CYL is the default.
|
|
|
|
TRK
Specifies that allocation quantities, if present, are to be expressed in tracks
and that allocation is to occur in tracks. If SPACE TRK is specified, without
(primary,secondary), the DB2-calculated quantities are allocated in tracks by
using 3390 quantities for byte conversion.
MB
|
|
Specifies that allocation quantities, if present, are to be expressed in

megabytes, and that allocation is to occur in records. One megabyte is
651
1 048 576 bytes. If MB is specified, the (primarysecondary) quantities

specified, or the DB2-calculated quantities, might be allocated in tracks or
cylinders. Datasets with a primary or secondary allocation quantity greater
than 20 MB are allocated in cylinders. Smaller data sets are allocated in
tracks. The 3390 device capacities are used for TRK or CYL conversion.
|
|
|
|
|
PCTPRIME integer
Specifies the percentage of the estimated required space that is to be obtained
as the primary quantity.
Use the MAXPRIME option to set the upper limit of this value for large
objects.
MAXPRIME integer
Specifies the maximum allowable primary space allocation, expressed in
cylinders (CYL). This value constrains the primary space value and the
PCTPRIME calculation, as well as the size of each secondary allocation.
NBRSECND integer
Specifies the division of secondary space allocations. After the primary space is
allocated, an amount of space equal to the estimated required space is divided
into the specified number of secondary allocations. The integer value must be
in the range from 1 to 10.
DIR integer
Specifies the number of 256-byte records that are to be allocated for the
directory of a new partitioned data set. You must specify this operand if you
are allocating a new partitioned data set.
If the template is being used in a UNLOAD statement with BLOBF, CLOBF, or
DBCLOBF and you specify a DSNTYPE of LIBRARY or PDS, but do not
specify DIR, DB2 calculates the number of 256-byte records to allocate by
dividing the estimated number of records by 20.
DSNTYPE
Specifies the type of data set to be allocated.
LIBRARY
Specifies that a partitioned data set extended (PDSE) is to be allocated.
PDS
Specifies that a partitioned data set (PDS) is to be allocated.
HFS
Specifies that a hierarchical file system (HFS) file is to be allocated.
NULL
Specifies a null file. Use this value for a template with UNLOAD CLOBF,
BLOBF, or DBCLOBF to unload a null LOB value. In this case, the unload
data set contains a null file name.
If you omit DSNTYPE, the type of data set is determined by other data set
attributes, the data class for the data set, or an installation default.
STACK
Specifies whether output data sets are to be stacked contiguously on the same
tape volumes.
652
NO
Specifies that output data sets are not to be stacked contiguously on tape.
YES
Specifies that similar output data sets are to be stacked as successive files
on one logical tape volume, where a logical tape volume can consist of a
multi-volume aggregate. Within one utility execution, output data sets are
stacked on a logical tape volume of the same usage type. For example,
local primary image copies are stacked separately from local backup image
copies.
Restriction: Do not use the STACK YES option for concurrent copies
(copies that are made by the COPY utility with the CONCURRENT
option).
To preserve parallel processing, parallel tasks are written to different tape
volumes. The specific volume to which the data set is written can vary,
depending on the number of output data sets that are being produced, the
number of parallel processes that are requested, and the number of tape
units that are available to the job step.
The data sets and utilities for which the STACK YES option are supported
are listed in the following table. Yes indicates that the specified utility
supports tape stacking for the specified data set. No indicates that the
specified utility does not support tape stacking for the specified data set.
Ignored indicates that the specified data set does not apply to the
specified utility.
Table 134. Supported data sets for tape stacking
ddname
CHECK
DATA
CHECK
INDEX or
CHECK
LOB
SYSREC
Ignored
Ignored
SYSDISC
Ignored
SYSPUNCH
Ignored
SYSCOPY
LOAD
MERGECOPY
REBUILD
INDEX
REORG
INDEX
REORG
TABLESPACE
UNLOAD
No
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Yes
Yes
Ignored
No
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Yes
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Ignored
Ignored
Yes
Ignored
Ignored
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Ignored
Ignored
Yes
Ignored
Ignored
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Ignored
Ignored
Yes
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Ignored
Ignored
Yes
Ignored
SYSUT1
No
No
Ignored
Ignored
No
Ignored
No
No
No
Ignored
SORTOUT
No
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
No
Ignored
Ignored
No
No
Ignored
SYSMAP
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
No
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
SYSERR
No
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
No
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
FILTERDDS
Ignored
Ignored
No
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
COPY
COPYTOCOPY
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
SYSCOPY2
Ignored
SYSRCPY1
Ignored
SYSRCPY2
TRTCH
Specifies the track recording technique for magnetic tape drives that have
improved data recording capability.
NONE
Specifies that the TRTCH specification is to be eliminated from dynamic
allocation.
COMP
Specifies that data is to be written in compacted format.
NOCOMP
Specifies that data is to be written in standard format.
653
Before running TEMPLATE

Some DB2 utilities produce data sets during execution. These data sets are
referenced in utility control statements by a set of DD name keywords and are
specified in detail in the corresponding JCL. As an alternative to using JCL to
specify the data sets, you can use the TEMPLATE utility control statement to
dynamically allocate utility data sets.
Options of the TEMPLATE utility allow you to specify the following information:
v The data set naming convention
v DFSMS parameters
v Disk or tape allocation parameters
You can specify a template in the SYSIN data set, immediately preceding the utility
control statement that references it, or in one or more TEMPLATE libraries.
A TEMPLATE library is a data set that contains only TEMPLATE utility control
statements. You can specify a TEMPLATE data set DD name by using the
TEMPLATEDD option of the OPTIONS utility control statement. This specification
applies to all subsequent utility control statements until the end of input or until
DB2 encounters a new OPTIONS TEMPLATEDD(ddname) specification.
Any template that is defined within SYSIN overrides another template definition of
the same name in a TEMPLATE data set.
TEMPLATE utility control statements enable you to standardize data set allocation
and the utility control statements that reference those data sets, which reduces the
need to customize and alter utility job streams.
Concurrency and compatibility for TEMPLATE

The TEMPLATE utility has certain concurrency and compatibility characteristics
associated with it.
TEMPLATE is a control statement that is used to set up an environment for
another utility to follow. The template is stored until it is referenced by a specific
utility. The list is expanded when it is referenced by another utility. At that time,
the concurrency and compatibility restrictions of that utility apply, and the catalog
tables that are necessary to expand the list must be available for read-only access.
Key TEMPLATE operations

Like both LISTDEF and OPTIONS utility control statements, a TEMPLATE control
statement performs a setup operation in preparation for use by another utility.
When the control statement is processed, the information is saved under the
template name for the duration of the job step. You can reference it as though it
were an output data set DD name by substituting the template name for the DD
name on most utility control statements.
If a DD name and a TEMPLATE name conflict, the DD statement is used for
allocation, and the TEMPLATE is ignored. Minimally, a TEMPLATE statement
consists of a name (similar to a DD name) and a data set naming convention. If
nothing else is specified, DB2 calculates the required data set size and uses default
data set attributes that are appropriate to the data set that is being created. DB2
then allocates a disk data set with these defaults.
654
The required TEMPLATE statement might look something like the following
TEMPLATE statement:
TEMPLATE tmp1 DSN(DB2.&TS..D&JDATE..COPY&ICTYPE.&LOCREM.&PRIBAC.)
VOLUMES(vol1,vol2,vol3)
LISTDEF payroll INCLUDE TABLESPACE PAYROLL.*
INCLUDE INDEXSPACE PAYROLL.*IX
EXCLUDE TABLESPACE PAYROLL.TEMP*
EXCLUDE INDEXSPACE PAYROLL.TMPIX*
COPY LIST payroll COPYDDN(tmp1,tmp1) RECOVERYDDN(tmp1,tmp1)
Database administrators can check utility control statements without executing

them by using the PREVIEW function. In PREVIEW mode, DB2 expands all
TEMPLATE data set names in the SYSIN DD, in addition to any data set name
from the TEMPLATE DD that are referenced on a utility control statement. DB2
then prints the information to the SYSPRINT data set and halts execution. You can
specify PREVIEW in one of two ways, either as a JCL PARM or on the OPTIONS
PREVIEW utility control statement.
Creating data set names

The data set naming convention that is specified on the DSN option of each
TEMPLATE statement must be appropriate for the data set that is being created
and coordinated with the other templates and DD statements in the same job step.
The data set name must be both unique and meaningful.
DB2 does not check that the data set names are unique until the execution of the
utility that references the template. Ensure that the data set names are unique
when you define the data set naming convention on the TEMPLATE control
statement.
Follow these guidelines when developing template names:
v Use a combination of static characters, national characters, and the provided
variable names to form valid z/OS data set qualifiers. Normal z/OS rules apply.
Variables that produce numeric values must be preceded by either a static
character or a character variable. All qualifiers must start with an alphabetic
character. The qualifiers must consist of a maximum of eight characters and a
maximum of 44 characters for the entire data set name. To help comply with this
44 character limit, you can use variable substring notation.
v Use the two-character form of the DSN variables to save space.
v Use two consecutive periods following all variables that precede the last
qualifier (one to terminate the variable, followed by a second static period to
separate the qualifiers), as in the following example:
&DB..&TS.
v Use &DB. and &TS. to relate the data set to a database object.
v Use &PART. when executing PARTLEVEL lists. Preceed the variable with a static
character or a character variable to form a valid qualifier.
v Use &JO. and &ST. to eliminate conflicts with other jobs or job steps.
v Use &SS., &US., &UT., and &UN. if you have a need to know the subsystem,
member, user, utility ID, or name of the utility that produced the data set.
v Use &DATE. and &TIME. or the shorter substring variations to guarantee
uniqueness. Preceed the variable with a static character or a character variable to
form a valid qualifier.
655
v Use &IC., &LR., and &PB. to identify image copy data sets. For example, the
following template name would make a meaningful seven-character data set
qualifier:
COPY&IC.&LR.&PB.
Related reference
Syntax and options of the TEMPLATE control statement on page 641
Controlling data set size

You can also use the TEMPLATE syntax to specify disk space parameters. If you
do not specify the SPACE keyword, DB2 estimates the size of the data set based on
formulas that vary according to the utility and the data set.
DB2 usually estimates the size of a data set based on the size of other existing data
sets; however, if any of the required data sets are on tape, DB2 is unable to
estimate the size. When DB2 is able to calculate size, it calculates the maximum
size. This action can result in overly large data sets. DB2 always allocates data set
size with the RLSE (release) option so that unused space is released on
deallocation. However in some cases, the calculated size of required data sets is too
large for the DYNALLOC interface to handle. In this case, DB2 issues error
message DSNU1034I, you must allocate the data set by a DD statement. If the
object is part of a LISTDEF list, you might need to remove it from the list and
process it individually.
Database administrators can check utility control statements without executing
them by using the PREVIEW function. In PREVIEW mode, DB2 expands all
TEMPLATE data set names in the SYSIN DD, in addition to any data set name
from the TEMPLATE DD that are referenced on a utility control statement. DB2
then prints the information to the SYSPRINT data set and halts execution. You can
specify PREVIEW in one of two ways, either as a JCL PARM or on the OPTIONS
PREVIEW utility control statement.
Default space calculations

PCTPRIME, MAXPRIME, and NBRSECND options are provided to let you manage
how DB2 allocates the required space for the data set.
You can use these three keywords, in combination, to constrain and quantify the
allocation extents.
PCTPRIME
100% of the required space estimated by DB2 is allocated as a PRIMARY
quantity. If this amount of space is typically not available on a single
volume, decrease PCTPRIME.
MAXPRIME
If you want an upper limit based on size, not on percentage, use
MAXPRIME.
NBRSECND
After the restrictions on the PRIMARY quantity have been applied, a
SECONDARY quantity equal to the estimated required space is divided
into the specified number of secondary extents.
If you omit the SPACE option quantities, current data set space estimation
formulas that are shown in the Data sets that utility uses topics for each online
utility are implemented as default values for disk data sets.
656
Recommendation: Run the RUNSTATS utility with the UPDATE SPACE or

UPDATE ALL option before you run any of the following utilities to improve the
accuracy of the default space estimation:
v
v
v
v
v
v
CHECK DATA
CHECK INDEX
CHECK LOB
REBUILD INDEX
REORG INDEX
REORG TABLESPACE
Working with TAPE

The STACK keyword supports tape processing in two forms. The first form,
STACK NO, supports traditional, single-file processing. The data set is written, and
the tape is rewound and repositioned or even remounted. The second form,
STACK YES, lets successive files be written on a single logical tape without
repositioning or remounting.
Important considerations for STACK YES processing include:
v You can stack only like files on the same tape. For example, one tape might
contain local primary image copies whereas another tape might contain remote
primary image copies. The file types cannot be mixed.
v DB2 stacks files only within a single utility invocation. When that utility ends,
the stack is terminated (meaning that the tape is rewound and unloaded). To
allow stacking, use a LISTDEF list to force multiple objects to be processed
under a single utility invocation.
v Parallel processing can complicate stacking. To prevent conflicts between parallel
processes, use a single process to write a file to a given stack.
Working with GDGs

TEMPLATE DSN operands support both GDG absolute version references and
relative references. DB2 detects the absence of a GDG base and creates it, with a
limit of 99 entries, by default.
Use the keyword GDGLIMIT to alter this value or prohibit this action. If you use
the PREVIEW function on the OPTIONS utility control statement, DB2 displays the
GDG relative version references. GDG names are restricted to 35 characters.
A model data set, as defined in the MODELDCB option, might be required to
allocate GDG data sets in your environment.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Template switching
Template switching is most commonly used to direct small data sets to disk and
large data sets to tape, but it can also be used to switch to templates that differ in
DSNs or in HSN classes. The decision to switch is made based on the estimated
output data set size, which may differ from the actual final size of the output data
set. This difference is particularly true for incremental image copies that are
estimated at 10% of the space required for a full image copy.
657
Termination or restart of TEMPLATE

You can terminate and restart a TEMPLATE utility job.
You can terminate a TEMPLATE utility job by using the TERM UTILITY command
You can restart a TEMPLATE utility job, but it starts from the beginning again. If
you are restarting this utility as part of a larger job in which TEMPLATE
completed successfully, but a later utility failed, do not change the TEMPLATE
utility control statement, if possible. If you must change the TEMPLATE utility
control statement, use caution; any changes can cause the restart processing to fail.
For example, if you change the template name of a temporary work data set that
was opened in an earlier phase and closed but is to be used later, the job fails.
Related concepts
Sample TEMPLATE control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own TEMPLATE
control statements.
Example 1: Specifying a basic template for an image copy on

disk
The following TEMPLATE utility control statement defines a basic template that
can be used to allocate an image copy data set. The name of the template is
COPYDS. Any subsequent COPY jobs that specify this template for dynamically
allocated data sets use the data set naming convention that is defined by the DSN
option.
TEMPLATE COPYDS DSN &DB..&TS..COPY&IC.&LR.&PB..D&DATE..T&TIME.
Example 2: Using variable substring notation to specify data set

names
The following control statement defines template CP2. Variable substring notation
is used in the DSN option to define the data set naming convention.
Assume that in the year 2003 you make a full image copy of partition 00004 of
table space DSN8S81D. Assume that you specify the template CP2 for the data set
for the local primary copy. DB2 gives the following name to the image copy data
set: DH173001.DSN8S81D.Y03.COPYLP.P004
Notice that every variable in the DSN option begins with an ampersand (&) and
ends with a period (.). These ampersands and periods are not included in the data
set name. Only periods that do not signal the end of a variable are included in the
data set name.
TEMPLATE CP2 DSN 'DH173001.&SN..Y&YEAR(3)..COPY&LR.&PB..P&PART(3,3).'
UNIT(SYSDA)
Example 3: Using COPY with TEMPLATE with variable substring

notation
The following TEMPLATE utility control statement defines template SYSCOPY.
Variable substring notation is used in the DSN option to define the data set
658
naming convention. The subsequent COPY utility control statement specifies that
DB2 is to make a local primary copy of the first partition of table space
DSN8D81A.DSN8S81E. COPY is to write this image copy to a data set that is
dynamically allocated according to the SYSCOPY template. In this case, the
resulting data set name is DSN8D81A.DSN8S81E.P001
TEMPLATE SYSCOPY DSN '&DB..&TS..P&PA(3).'
COPY TABLESPACE DSN8D81A.DSN8S81E DSNUM 1 COPYDDN(SYSCOPY)
Notice that you can change the part variable in the DSN operand from P&PA(3). to
P&PA(3,3). The resulting data set name is the same, because the length value of 3
is implied in the first specification.
Example 4: Specifying a template for tape data sets with an

expiration date
The following control statement defines the TAPEDS template. Any data sets that
are defined with this template are to be allocated on device number 3590-1, as
indicated by the UNIT option, and are to expire on 1 January 2100, as indicated by
the EXPDL option. The DSN option indicates that these data set names are to have
the following three parts: database name, table space name, and date.
TEMPLATE TAPEDS DSN(&DB..&TS..D&DATE.)
UNIT 3590-1 EXPDL '2100001'
Example 5: Specifying a disk template that gives space

allocation parameters.
The following control statement defines the DISK template. Any data sets that are
defined with this template are to have 100 cylinders of primary disk space and 10
cylinders of secondary disk space, as indicated by the SPACE and CYL options.
The DSN option indicates that the data set names are to have the following three
parts: database name, table space name, and time.
TEMPLATE DISK DSN &DB..&TS..T&TIME.
SPACE(100,10) CYL
Example 6: Specifying a disk template that uses a default size

with constraints
The following control statement defines the DISK template. Because the SPACE
option does not specify quantities for primary and secondary space allocation, DB2
calculates these values with the following constraint: the maximum allowable
primary space allocation is 1000 cylinders. This constraint is indicated by the
MAXPRIME option. The DSN option indicates that the data set names are to have
the following three parts: database name, table space name, and time.
TEMPLATE DISK DSN(&DB..&TS..T&TIME.)
SPACE CYL MAXPRIME 1000
Example 7: Using TEMPLATE with LISTDEF and COPY

In the following example, the LISTDEF utility control statement defines the CPY1
list. The TEMPLATE control statement then defines the TMP1 template. The COPY
utility control statement then specifies that DB2 is to make local copies of the
objects in the CPY1 list. DB2 is to write these copies to data sets that are
dynamically allocated according to the characteristics that are defined in the TMP1
template.
659
LISTDEF CPY1 INCLUDE TABLESPACES TABLESPACE DBA906*.T*A906*

INCLUDE INDEXSPACES COPY YES INDEXSPACE ADMF001.I?A906*
TEMPLATE TMP1 UNIT SYSDA
DSN (DH109006.&STEPNAME..&SN..T&TIME.)
DISP (MOD,CATLG,CATLG)
COPY LIST CPY1 COPYDDN (TMP1) PARALLEL (2) SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
Parentheses for the DSN name-expression are optional.
Example 8: Use TEMPLATE to create a GDG data set

In this example, the TEMPLATE control statement defines the COPYTEMP
template. The COPY utility control statement specifies that DB2 is to write a local
image copy of the table space DBLT2501.TPLT2501 to a data set that is dynamically
allocated according to the characteristics that are defined in the COPYTEMP
template. According to the COPYTEMP template, this data set is to be named
JULTU225.GDG(+1) (as indicated by the DSN option) and is to have six entries
created in the GDG base (as indicated by the GDGLIMIT option). The control block
information is to be the same as that in the JULTU225.MODEL data set, as
indicated by the MODELDCB option.
//************************************************************
//* COMMENT:
Define a model data set.
*
//************************************************************
//STEP1
EXEC
PGM=IEFBR14
//SYSCOPX DD DSN=JULTU225.MODEL,DISP=(NEW,CATLG,CATLG),
//
UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(4000,(20,20)),VOL=SER=SCR03,
//
DCB=(RECFM=FB,BLKSIZE=4000,LRECL=100)
//***********************************************************
//* COMMENT: GDGLIMIT(6)
//***********************************************************
//STEP2
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='JULTU225.GDG',
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='SSTR'
//SYSIN
DD *
TEMPLATE COPYTEMP
UNIT SYSDA
DSN 'JULTU225.GDG(+1)'
GDGLIMIT(6)
FULL YES
COPYDDN (COPYTEMP)
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
/*
Figure 99. Example TEMPLATE and COPY statements for writing a local copy to a data set
that is dynamically allocated according to the characteristics of the template.
Example 9: Using a template to copy a GDG data set to tape

In this example, the OPTIONS utility control statement causes the subsequent
TEMPLATE statement to run in PREVIEW mode. In this mode, DB2 checks the
syntax of the TEMPLATE statement. If DB2 determines that the syntax is valid, it
expands the data set names. The OPTIONS OFF statement ends PREVIEW mode
processing. The subsequent COPY utility control statement executes normally. The
COPY statement specifies that DB2 is to write a local image copy of the table space
DBLT4301.TPLT4301 to a data set that is dynamically allocated according to the
characteristics that are defined in the COPYTEMP template. According to the
COPYTEMP template, this data set is to be named JULTU243.GDG(+1) (as
indicated by the DSN option) and is to be stacked on the tape volume 99543 (as
indicated by the UNIT, STACK, and VOLUMES options). The data set dispositions
660
are specified by the DISP option. The GDGLIMIT option specifies that 50 entries
are to be created in a GDG base.
/*
//*************************************************
//* COMMENT: COPY GDG DATA SET TO TAPE
//*************************************************
//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='JULTU243.GDG',
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='SSTR'
//SYSIN
DD *
OPTIONS PREVIEW
TEMPLATE COPYTEMP
UNIT TAPE
DSN 'JULTU243.GDG(+1)'
VOLUMES (99543)
GDGLIMIT(50)
STACK YES
OPTIONS OFF
FULL YES
COPYDDN (COPYTEMP)
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
/*
Figure 100. Example job that uses OPTIONS, TEMPLATE, and COPY statements to copy a
GDG data set to tape.
Example 10: Creating a template that can be used for unloading

LOB objects
The TEMPLATE control statement in this example defines a template called
LOBFRV. The subsequent UNLOAD statement specifies that each CLOB in the
RESUME column is to be unloaded to files that are dynamically allocated
according to the characteristics defined for the LOBFRV template. In this case,
those files are to be partitioned data sets, as specified by the DSNTYPE option.
Each data set is to have the name UNLODTEST.database-name.LOB-table-spacename.RESUME, as specified by the DSN option. The names of each CLOB PDS is
written to the unload data set. By default, the unload data set is defined by the
SYSREC DD statement or template.
TEMPLATE LOBFRV DSN 'UNLDTEST.&DB..&TS..RESUME'
DSNTYPE(PDS) UNIT(SYSDA)
UNLOAD DATA
FROM TABLE DSN8910.EMP_PHOTO_RESUME
(EMPNO CHAR(6),
RESUME VARCHAR(255) CLOBF LOBFRV)
SHRLEVEL CHANGE
Figure 101. Example job that creates a template that can be used for unloading LOB objects.
Example 11: Using template switching.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The following TEMPLATE control statement assumes that tables space SMALL.TS
occupies 10 cylinders and table space LARGE.TS occupies 100 cylinders. Both
COPY statements use the SMALLTP template which specifies a limit of 20
cylinders. Table space SMALL.TS is smaller than this limit so no switching is
performed. The output data set for table space SMALL.TS will be allocated on
UNIT=SYSALLDA. Table space LARGE.TS is larger than this limit so the template
661
is switched to the LARGETP template. The output data set for table space
LARGE.TS will be allocated on UNIT=TAPE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
TEMPLATE LARGETP DSN &DB..&TS..D&DA..T&TI. UNIT=TAPE

TEMPLATE SMALLTP DSN &DB..&TS..D&DA..T&TI. UNIT=SYSALLDA LIMIT( 20 CYL, LARGETP )
COPY TABLESPACE SMALL.TS COPYDDN( SMALLTP )
COPY TABLESPACE LARGE.TS COPYDDN( SMALLTP )
662
Chapter 32. UNLOAD

The online UNLOAD utility unloads data from one or more source objects to one
or more BSAM sequential data sets in external formats. The source can be DB2
table spaces or DB2 image copy data sets. The source cannot be a concurrent copy.
UNLOAD must be run on the system where the definitions of the table space and
the table exists.
UNLOAD is an enhancement of the REORG UNLOAD EXTERNAL function. With
UNLOAD, you can unload rows from an entire table space or select specific
partitions or tables to unload. You can also select columns by using the field
specification list. If a table space is partitioned, you can unload all of the selected
partitions into a single data set, or you can unload each partition in parallel into
physically distinct data sets.
The output records that the UNLOAD utility writes are compatible as input to the
LOAD utility; as a result, you can reload the original table or different tables.
Output
UNLOAD generates an unloaded table space or partition.
|
|
|
v Ownership of the tables
v SELECT privilege on the tables
v DBADM authority for the database. If the object on which the utility operates is
in an implicitly created database, DBADM authority on DSNDB04 or the
implicitly created database is sufficient.
v SYSADM authority
v SYSCTRL authority (catalog tables only)
If you use RACF access control with multilevel security and UNLOAD is to
process a table space that contains a table that has multilevel security with
row-level granularity, you must be identified to RACF and have an accessible valid
security label. Each row is unloaded only if your security label dominates the data
security label. If your security label does not dominate the data security label, the
row is not unloaded, but DB2 does not issue an error message.
Execution phases of UNLOAD

The UNLOAD utility operates in these phases:
Phase Description
UTILINIT
Performs initialization.
UNLOAD
Unloads records to sequential data sets. One pass through the input data
set is made. If UNLOAD is processing a table space or partition, DB2 takes
663
internal commits. These commits provide commit points at which the

utility can be restarted in case operation should halt in this phase.
UTILTERM
Performs cleanup.
Related information
Syntax and options of the UNLOAD control statement

The UNLOAD utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
Syntax diagram
UNLOAD
DATA
from-table-spec

from-table-spec
source-spec

from-table-spec
LIST listdef-name
unload-spec

CLONE
source-spec:
664
TABLESPACE
tablespace-name
database-name.

PART
integer
int1 :
int2

FROMCOPY
data-set-name
FROMVOLUME
CATALOG
vol-ser
(1)
FROMSEQNO
FROMCOPYDDN ddname
Notes:
1
The FROMSEQNO option is required if you are unloading an image copy from a tape data set
that is not cataloged.
unload-spec:
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
665
PUNCHDDN SYSPUNCH
UNLDDN SYSREC
PUNCHDDN
UNLDDN

ddname
template-name
ddname
template-name
EBCDIC
ASCII
UNICODE

,
NOSUBS
CCSID( integer
NOPAD
FLOAT S390

COLDEL ,
CHARDEL
DECPT
COLDEL coldel
CHARDEL chardel
DECPT
decpt
FLOAT IEEE
DELIMITED
SHRLEVEL CHANGE ISOLATION CS

SKIP LOCKED DATA
MAXERR 1

MAXERR
SHRLEVEL
integer
CHANGE ISOLATION UR
REFERENCE

DECFLOAT_ROUNDMODE
ROUND_CEILING
ROUND_DOWN
ROUND_FLOOR
ROUND_HALF_DOWN
ROUND_HALF_EVEN
ROUND_HALF_UP
ROUND_UP
FROM-TABLE-spec:
Option descriptions
DATA
Identifies the data that is to be selected for unloading with table-name in the
from-table-spec. The DATA keyword is mutually exclusive with TABLESPACE,
PART, and LIST keywords.
When you specify the DATA keyword, or you omit either the TABLESPACE or
the LIST keyword, you must also specify at least one FROM TABLE clause.
TABLESPACE
from which the data is to be unloaded.
database-name
The name of the database to which the table space belongs. The name
cannot be DSNDB01 or DSNDB07.
666
tablespace-name
The name of the table space from which the data is to be unloaded. The
specified table space must not be a LOB or XML table space.
PART
Identifies a partition or a range of partitions from which the data is to be
unloaded. This keyword applies only if the specified table space is
partitioned. You cannot specify PART with LIST. The maximum is 4096.
integer
Designates a single partition. integer must identify an existing partition
number within the table space.
int1:int2
Designates a range of partitions from int1 to int2. int1 must be a
positive integer that is less than the highest partition number within
the table space. int2 must be an integer that is greater than int1 and
less than or equal to the highest partition number.
If no PART keyword is specified in an UNLOAD control statement, the
data from the entire table space is unloaded into a single unload data set.
FROMCOPY data-set-name
Indicates that data is to be unloaded from an image copy data set. When you
specify FROMCOPY, the UNLOAD utility processes only the specified image
copy data set. Alternatively, you can use the FROMCOPYDDN keyword where
multiple image copy data sets can be concatenated under a single DD name.
|
You cannot unload LOB data or XML data from copies.

data-set-name
Specifies the name of a single image copy data set.
The image copy data set that you specify on the FROMCOPY keyword
must be created by one of the following utilities:
v COPY
v COPYTOCOPY
v LOAD inline image copy
v MERGECOPY
v REORG TABLESPACE inline image copy
v DSN1COPY
If the specified image copy data set is a full image copy, either compressed
or uncompressed records can be unloaded.
If the default of SYSTEMPAGES was used for the incremental image copy,
either compressed or uncompressed records can be unloaded.
If the specified image copy data set is an incremental image copy or a copy
of a partition or partitions, you can unload compressed records only when
the same data set contains the dictionary pages for decompression. If an
image copy data set contains a compressed row and a dictionary is not
available, DB2 issues an error message.
When you specify FROMCOPY or FROMCOPYDDN, you can also specify
selection criteria with either PART, FROM TABLE, or both, to qualify tables
and rows that are to be unloaded.
FROMVOLUME
Identifies the volume where the image copy data set resides.
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
667
CATALOG
Indicates that the data set is cataloged. Use this option only for an image
copy that was created as a cataloged data set (which means that its volume
serial is not recorded in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY).
vol-ser
non-cataloged data set. To specify a data set that is stored on multiple tape
volumes, identify the first vol-ser in the SYSCOPY record.
FROMSEQNO n
Identifies the image copy data set by its file sequence number. The
FROMSEQNO option is required if you are unloading an image copy
from a tape data set that is not cataloged.
n
Specifies the file sequence number.
FROMCOPYDDN ddname
Indicates that data is to be unloaded from one or more image copy data sets
that are associated with the specified ddname. Multiple image copy data sets
(primarily for the copy of pieces) can be concatenated under a single DD
name.
ddname
Identifies a DD name with which one or more image copy data sets are
associated.
LIST listdef-name
Identifies the name of a list of objects that are defined by a LISTDEF utility
control statement. The list can include table spaces, index spaces, databases, a
tables, an index, and partitions. The list cannot include index spaces, LOB table
spaces, and directory objects. You cannot use the LIST option to specify image
copy data sets.
When you specify the LIST option, the referenced LISTDEF identifies:
v The table spaces from which the data is to be unloaded. You can use the
pattern-matching feature of LISTDEF.
v The partitions (if a table space is partitioned) from which the data is to be
unloaded (defined by the INCLUDE, EXCLUDE, and PARTLEVEL keywords
in the LISTDEF statement).
The UNLOAD utility associates a single table space with one output data set,
except when partition-parallelism is activated. When you use the LIST option
with a LISTDEF that represents multiple table spaces, you must also define a
data set TEMPLATE that corresponds to all of the table spaces and specify the
template-name in the UNLDDN option.
If you want to generate the LOAD statements, you must define another
TEMPLATE for the PUNCHDDN data set that is similar to UNLDDN. DB2
then generates a LOAD statement for each table space. This utility will only
PUNCHDDN
Specifies the DD name for a data set or a template name that defines one or
more data set names that are to receive the LOAD utility control statements
that the UNLOAD utility generates.
ddname
Specifies the DD name.
668

template-name
Identifies the name of a data set template that is defined by a TEMPLATE
If the specified name is defined both as a DD name (in the JCL) and as a
template name (in a TEMPLATE statement), it is treated as the DD name.
When you run the UNLOAD utility for multiple table spaces and you want to
generate corresponding LOAD statements, you must have multiple output data
sets that correspond to the table spaces so that DB2 retains all of the generated
LOAD statements. In this case, you must specify an appropriate template name
to PUNCHDDN. If you omit the PUNCHDDN specification, the LOAD
statements are not generated.
If the partition variable (&PART. or &PA.) is included in a TEMPLATE for
PUNCHDDN, DB2 replaces the &PART. or &PA variable with the lowest
partition number in the list of partitions to be unloaded. The partition number
is in the form nnnnn.
UNLDDN
Specifies the DD name for a data set or a template name that defines one or
more data set names into which the data is to be unloaded.
ddname
Specifies the DD name.
template-name
Identifies the name of a data set template that is defined by a TEMPLATE
If the specified name is defined both as a DD name (in the JCL) and as a
template name (in a TEMPLATE statement), it is treated as the DD name.
When you run the UNLOAD utility for a partitioned table space, the selected
partitions are unloaded in parallel if the following conditions are true:
1. You specify a template name for UNLDDN.
2. The template data set name contains the partition as a variable (&PART. or
&PA.) without substring notation. This template name is expanded into
multiple data sets that correspond to the selected partitions.
3. The TEMPLATE control statement does not contain all of the following
options:
v STACK(YES)
v UNIT(TAPE)
v An UNCNT value that is less than or equal to one.
If conditions 1 and 2 are true, but condition 3 is false, partition parallelism is
not activated and all output data sets are stacked on one tape.
Similarly, when you run the UNLOAD utility for multiple table spaces, the
output records are placed in data sets that correspond to the respective table
spaces. Therefore the output data sets must be physically distinctive, and you
must specify an appropriate template name to UNLDDN. If you omit the
UNLDDN specification, the SYSREC DD name is not used, and an error
occurs.
If the partition variable (&PART. or &PA.) is included in the TEMPLATE DSN
statement when partition parallelism is not applicable (when the source is a
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
669
non-partitioned table space or an image copy), the variable is replaced by

00000 in the actual data set name. In this case, warning message DSNU1252I
is issued, and the UNLOAD utility issues return code 4.
EBCDIC
Specifies that all output data of the character type is to be in EBCDIC. If a
different encoding scheme is used for the source data, the data (except for bit
strings) is converted into EBCDIC.
If you do not specify EBCDIC, ASCII, UNICODE, or CCSID, the encoding
scheme of the source data is preserved.
See the description of the CCSID option for this utility.
ASCII
Specifies that all output data of the character type is to be in ASCII. If a
different encoding scheme is used for the source data, the data (except for bit
strings) is converted into ASCII.
See the description of the CCSID option for this utility.
UNICODE
Specifies that all output data of the character type (except for bit strings) is to
be in Unicode. If a different encoding scheme is used for the source data, the
data is converted into Unicode.
See the description of the CCSID option of this utility.
CCSID(integer1,integer2,integer3)
Specifies up to three coded character set identifiers (CCSIDs) that are to be
used for the data of character type in the output records, including data that is
unloaded in the external character formats.
integer1 specifies the CCSID for SBCS data. integer2 specifies the CCSID for
mixed data. integer3 specifies the CCSID for DBCS data. This option is not
applied to data with a subtype of BIT.
If you specify both FORMAT DELIMITED and UNICODE, all output data is in
CCSID 1208, UTF-8; any other specified CCSID is ignored.
The following specifications are also valid:
CCSID(integer1)
Indicates that only an SBCS CCSID is specified.
CCSID(integer1,integer2)
Indicates that an SBCS CCSID and a mixed CCSID are specified.
integer
Specifies either a valid CCSID or 0.
If you specify a value of 0 for one of the arguments or omit a value, the
encoding scheme that is specified by EBCDIC, ASCII, or UNICODE is assumed
for the corresponding data type (SBCS, MIXED, or DBCS). If you do not
specify EBCDIC, ASCII, or UNICODE:
v If the source data is of character type, the original encoding scheme is
preserved.
670
v For character strings that are converted from numeric, date, time, or
timestamp data, the default encoding scheme of the table is used. For more
information, see the CCSID option of the CREATE TABLE statement in
|
|
|
If you do specify EBCDIC, ASCI, or UNICODE, the CCSIDs specified for SBCS,
DBCS, and MIXED should be valid CCSIDs for the specified encoding scheme
or 0.
When a CCSID conversion is requested, CCSID character substitutions can
occur in the output string. Use the NOSUBS option to prevent possible
character substitutions during CCSID conversion.
NOSUBS
Specifies that CCSID code substitution is not to be performed during unload
processing.
When a string is converted from one CCSID to another (including EBCDIC,
ASCII, and Unicode), a substitution character is sometimes placed in the
output string. For example, this substitution occurs when a character (referred
to as a code point) that exists in the source CCSID does not exist in the target
CCSID. You can use the NOSUBS keyword to prevent the UNLOAD utility
from allowing this substitution.
If you specify the NOSUBS keyword and character substitution is attempted
while data is being unloaded, this action is treated as a conversion error. The
record with the error is not unloaded, and the process continues until the total
error count reaches the number that is specified by MAXERR.
|
|
NOPAD
Specifies that the variable-length columns in the unloaded records are to
occupy the actual data length without additional padding. As a result, the
unloaded or discarded records might have varying lengths. NOPAD is the
default for XML columns.
When you do not specify NOPAD:
v Default UNLOAD processing pads variable-length columns in the unloaded
records to their maximum length, and the unloaded records have the same
length for each table.
v The padded data fields are preceded by the length fields that indicate the
size of the actual data without the padding.
v When the output records are reloaded with the LOAD utility, padded data
fields are treated as varying-length data.
If you specify DELIMITED, the NOPAD option is the default for
variable-length columns. For fixed-length columns, the normal padding rules
apply.
Although LOAD processes records with variable-length columns that are
unloaded or discarded by using the NOPAD option, these records cannot be
processed by applications that process only fields in fixed positions. For
example, the LOAD statement that is generated for the EMP sample table
would look similar to the LOAD statement in Figure 72 on page 469.
DELIMITED
Specifies that the output data file is in a delimited format. When data is in a
delimited format, all fields in the output data set are character strings or
external numeric values. In addition, each column in a delimited file is
separated from the next column by a column delimiter character.
For each of the delimiter types that you can specify, you must ensure that the
delimiter character is specified in the code page of the target data. The
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
671
delimiter character can be specified as either a character or hex constant. For

example, to specify # as the delimiter, you can specify either COLDEL # or
COLDEL X23. If the utility statement is coded in a character type that is
different from the output file, such as a utility statement that is coded in
EBCDIC and output data that is in Unicode, specify the delimiter character in
the utility statement as a hex constant, or the result is unpredictable.
You cannot specify the same character for more than one type of delimiter
If you specify the FORMAT DELIMITED option, you cannot specify HEADER
CONST or use any of the multiple FROM TABLE statements. Also, UNLOAD
ignores any specified POSITION statements within the UNLOAD utility
control statement.
For delimited output, UNLOAD does not add trailing padded blanks to
variable-length columns, even if you do not specify the NOPAD option. For
fixed-length columns, the normal padding rules apply. For example, if a
VARCHAR(10) field contains ABC, UNLOAD DELIMITED unloads the field as
ABC. However, for a CHAR(10) field that contains ABC, UNLOAD DELIMITED
unloads it as ABC
. For information about using delimited output and
delimiter restrictions, see Unloading delimited files on page 710. For more
information about delimited files see Appendix G, Delimited file format, on
page 1011.
COLDEL
Specifies the column delimiter that is used in the output file. The default is
a comma (,). For ASCII and UTF-8 data this is X2C, and for EBCDIC data
it is a X6B.
CHAR DEL
Specifies the character string delimiter that is used in the output file. The
default is a double quotation mark (). For ASCII and UTF-8 data this is
X22, and for EBCDIC data it is X7F.
The UNLOAD utility adds the CHARDEL character before and after every
character string. To delimit character strings that contain the character
string delimiter, the UNLOAD utility repeats the character string delimiter
where it used in the character string. The LOAD utility then interprets any
pair of character delimiters that are found between the enclosing character
delimiters as a single character. For example, the phrase what a nice
warm day is unloaded as what a nice warm day, and LOAD
interprets it as what a nice warm day. The UNLOAD utility recognizes
these character pairs for only CHAR, VARCHAR, and CLOB fields.
DECPT
Specifies the decimal point character that is used in the output file. The
default is a period (.).
The default decimal point character is a period in a delimited file, X2E in
an ASCII data file, and X4B in an EBCDIC data file.
FLOAT
Specifies the output format of the numeric floating-point data. This option
applies to the binary output format only.
S390
Indicates that the binary floating point data is written to the output records
in the S/390 internal format (also known as the hexadecimal floating
point, or HFP).
672
IEEE
Indicates that the binary floating-point data is written to the output records
in the IEEE format (also known as the binary floating point, or BFP).
MAXERR integer
Specifies the maximum number of records in error that are to be allowed; the
unloading process terminates when this value is reached.
integer
Specifies the number of records in error that are allowed. When the error
count reaches this number, the UNLOAD utility issues message DSNU1219
and terminates with return code 8.
The default value is 1, which indicates that UNLOAD stops when the first
error is encountered. If you specify 0 or any negative number, execution
continues regardless of the number of records that are in error.
If multiple table spaces are being processed, the number of records in error is
counted for each table space. If the LIST option is used, you can add OPTION
utility control statement (EVENT option with ITEMERROR) before the
UNLOAD statement to specify that the table space in error is to be skipped
and the subsequent table spaces are to be processed.
SHRLEVEL
Specifies whether other processes can access or update the table space or
partitions while the data is being unloaded.
UNLOAD ignores the SHRLEVEL specification when the source object is an
image copy data set.
The default value is SHRLEVEL CHANGE ISOLATION CS.
CHANGE
Specifies that rows can be read, inserted, updated, and deleted from the
table space or partition while the data is being unloaded.
ISOLATION
Specifies the isolation level with SHRLEVEL CHANGE.
CS
Indicates that the UNLOAD utility is to read rows in cursor
stability mode. With CS, the UNLOAD utility assumes
CURRENTDATA(NO).
UR
Indicates that uncommitted rows, if they exist, are to be unloaded.
The unload operation is performed with minimal interference from
the other DB2 operations that are applied to the objects from which
the data is being unloaded.
|
|
|
|
SKIP LOCKED DATA

Specifies that the UNLOAD utility is to skip rows on which incompatible
locks are held by other transactions. This option applies to row level or
page level lock.
REFERENCE
Specifies that during the unload operation, rows of the tables can be read,
but cannot be inserted, updated, nor deleted by other DB2 threads.
When you specify SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, the UNLOAD utility drains
writers on the table space from which the data is to be unloaded. When
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
673
data is unloaded from multiple partitions, the drain lock is obtained for all
of the selected partitions in the UTILINIT phase.
|
|
|
DECFLOAT_ROUNDMODE
Specifies the rounding mode to be used when DECFLOATs are manipulated.
The following rounding modes are supported:
|
|
|
|
ROUND_CEILING
Round toward +infinity. The discarded digits are removed if they are all
zero or if the sign is negative. Otherwise, the result coefficient should be
|
|
ROUND_DOWN
Round toward 0 (truncation). The discarded digits are ignored.
|
|
|
|
ROUND_FLOOR
Round toward -infinity. The discarded digits are removed if they are all
zero or positive. Otherwise, the sign is negative and the result coefficient
should be incremented by 1 (rounded up).
|
|
|
|
ROUND_HALF_DOWN
Round to the nearest number. If equidistant, round down. If the discarded
digits are greater than 0.5, the result coefficient should be incremented by 1
(rounded up). The discarded digits are ignored if they are 0.5 or less.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
ROUND_HALF_EVEN
Round to the nearest number. If equidistant, round so that the final digit is
even. If the discarded digits are greater than .05, the result coefficient
should be incremented by 1 (rounded up). The discarded digits are ignored
if they are less than 0.5. If the result coefficient is .05 and the rightmost
digit is even, the result coefficient is not altered. If the result coefficient is
.05 and the rightmost digit is odd, the result coefficient should be
|
|
|
|
ROUND_HALF_UP
Round to nearest. If equidistant, round up. If the discarded digits are
greater than or equal to 0.5, the result coefficient should be incremented by
1 (rounded up). Otherwise the discarded digits are ignored.
|
|
|
|
ROUND_UP
Round away from 0. If all of the discarded digits are 0, the result is
unchanged. Otherwise, the result coefficient should be incremented by 1
(rounded up).
|
|
|
If the user does not specify DECFLOAT_ROUNDMODE, the default value of

the DECFLOAT_ROUNDMODE option is DECFLOAT ROUNDING MODE
from the DECP.
|
|
|
|
|
|
CLONE
Indicates that UNLOAD is to unload data from only clone tables in the
specified table spaces. This utility will only process clone data if the CLONE
not sufficient. If you specify the name of the clone table in the FROM TABLE
clause, you do not need to specify the CLONE keyword.
FROM-TABLE-spec
More than one table or partition for each table space can be unloaded with a single
invocation of the UNLOAD utility. One FROM TABLE statement for each table that
is to be unloaded is required to identify:
674
v A table name from which the rows are to be unloaded

v A field to identify the table that is associated with the rows that are to be
unloaded from the table by using the HEADER option
v Sampling options for the table rows
v A list of field specifications for the table that is to be used to select columns that
are to be unloaded
v Selection conditions, specified in the WHEN clause, that are to be used to
qualify rows that are to be unloaded from the table
All tables that are specified by FROM TABLE statements must belong to the same
table space. If rows from specific tables are to be unloaded, a FROM TABLE clause
must be specified for each source table. If you do not specify a FROM TABLE
clause for a table space, all the rows of the table space are unloaded.
Use a list of field specifications to specify the following characteristics:
v Column selection. Specifies the column names of a table that is to be unloaded.
If a list of field specifications is given, only the listed columns are unloaded.
v Column ordering. Specifies the order of fields that are to be placed in the output
records. If a list of field specifications is given, data of the listed columns is
unloaded in the order of listed column names.
v Output field attributes and format. Specifies the data type, length, and format of
the data in the output records.
If you omit a list of field specifications, all columns of the source table are
unloaded in the defined column order for the table. The default output field types
that correspond to the data types of the columns are used.
In a FROM TABLE clause, you can use parentheses in only two situations: to
enclose the entire field selection list, and in a WHEN selection clause. This usage
avoids potential conflict between the keywords and field-names that are used in
the field selection list. A valid sample of a FROM TABLE clause specification
follows:
UNLOAD ...
FROM TABLE tablename SAMPLE x (c1,c2) WHEN (c3>0)
You cannot specify FROM TABLE if the LIST option is already specified.
FROM-TABLE-spec
HEADER OBID
FROM
TABLE table-name

HEADER
NONE
CONST
SAMPLE
decimal
string
Xhex-string

LIMIT
integer
,
( field-specification
WHEN
(selection-condition)
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
675
field-specification:
POSITION(*)
field-name

POSITION(start)
CHAR
(length)
TRUNCATE
strip-spec
DBCLOBF
CLOBF
BLOBF
template-name
VARCHAR
(length)
strip-spec
DBCLOBF
CLOBF
BLOBF
template-name
GRAPHIC
EXTERNAL
(length)
strip-spec
VARGRAPHIC
TRUNCATE
(length)
SMALLINT
INTEGER
EXTERNAL
(length)
BIGINT
BINARY
(length)
VARBINARY
BINARY VARYING
strip-spec
PACKED
DECIMAL
ZONED
EXTERNAL
TRUNCATE
,0
(length
)
,scale
FLOAT
EXTERNAL
DOUBLE
REAL
DATE EXTERNAL
(length)
(length)
TIME
EXTERNAL
(length)
TIMESTAMP EXTERNAL
(length)
CONSTANT
string
Xhex-string
ROWID
BLOB
(length)
TRUNCATE
CLOB
(length)
TRUNCATE
DBCLOB
(length)
TRUNCATE
decfloat-spec
XML
676
strip spec:

BOTH
TRUNCATE
STRIP
TRAILING
LEADING
(1)
strip-char
Xstrip-char
Notes:
|
|
If you specify VARGRAPHIC, BINARY, or VARBINARY, you cannot specify strip-char. You can
specify only Xstrip-char.
decfloat spec:
(34)
DECFLOAT

(16)
EXTERNAL
(length)
selection condition:
predicate
AND
OR

predicate
predicate:
basic predicate
BETWEEN predicate
IN predicate
LIKE predicate
NULL predicate
basic predicate:
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
677
column-name
=
<>
>
<
>=
<=
constant
BETWEEN predicate:
column-name
BETWEEN
constant
NOT
AND
constant
IN predicate:
,
IN ( constant
column-name
NOT
LIKE predicate:
column-name
LIKE string-constant
NOT

ESCAPE
string-constant
NULL predicate:
column-name
IS
NULL
NOT
678

CURRENT_DATE
CURRENT_TIMESTAMP
+
-
constant
YEAR
YEARS
MONTH
MONTHS
DAY
DAYS
HOUR
HOURS
MINUTE
MINUTES
SECOND
SECONDS
MICROSECOND
MICROSECONDS
Option descriptions for FROM TABLE

table-name
Identifies a DB2 table from which the rows are to be unloaded and to which
the options in the FROM TABLE clause are to be applied.
|
|
|
If the table name is not qualified by a schema name, the authorization ID of

the invoker of the utility job step is used as the schema qualifier of the table
name. Enclose the table name in quotation marks if the name contains a blank.
HEADER
Specifies a constant header field, at the beginning of the output records, that
can be used to associate an output record with the table from which it was
unloaded.
If you specify a header field, it is used as the field selection criterion of the
WHEN clause (a part of the INTO-TABLE specification) in the LOAD
statement that is generated.
OBID
Specifies that the object identifier (OBID) for the table (a 2-byte binary
value) is to be placed in the first 2 bytes of the output records that are
unloaded from the table.
If you omit the HEADER option, HEADER OBID is the default, except for
delimited files.
With HEADER OBID, the first 2 bytes of the output record cannot be used
by the unloaded data. For example, consider the following UNLOAD
statement:
UNLOAD ...
FROM TABLE table-name HEADER OBID ...
The preceding UNLOAD statement generates a LOAD statement that is

similar to the following example:
LOAD ...
INTO TABLE table-name WHEN (1:2)=X'hh' ...
In this example, Xhh is the hexadecimal notation of the OBID of table

table-name.
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
679
NONE
Indicates that no record header field is to be created. HEADER NONE is
the default value for a delimited file.
If HEADER NONE is specified in a FROM TABLE clause, the
corresponding INTO TABLE clause in the generated LOAD statement does
not have a WHEN specification. Therefore, if rows from multiple tables are
unloaded and HEADER NONE is specified in one or more FROM TABLE
clauses, rows that are unloaded from those tables are not able to be
reloaded until you edit the generated LOAD statement. If you use the
generated statement directly with the LOAD utility, the results might be
unpredictable.
CONST
Specifies that a constant string is to be used as the record header. The
given string operand determines the length of the header field. The string
value must be enclosed by a pair of single quote characters.
For example, consider the following UNLOAD statement:
UNLOAD ...
FROM TABLE table-name HEADER CONST 'abc' ...
The preceding UNLOAD statement generates a LOAD statement that is

similar to the following example:
LOAD ...
INTO TABLE table-name WHEN (1:3)='abc' ...
In this example, the given string is assumed to be in SBCS EBCDIC format.

The output string of the HEADER field is in the specified or the default
encoding scheme. If the encoding scheme that is used for output is not
EBCDIC, the SBCS CCSID conversion is applied to the given string before
it is placed in the output records. If the output SBCS encoding scheme is
not EBCDIC, the WHEN condition in the generated LOAD statement
contains a hexadecimal string.
You can also use the hexadecimal form, Xhex-string, to represent a string
constant. If you want to specify a CONST string value in an encoding
scheme other than SBCS EBCDIC, use the hexadecimal form. No CCSID
conversion is performed if the hexadecimal form is used.
SAMPLE decimal
Indicates that only sampled rows of the table are to be unloaded. If selection
conditions are specified by a WHEN clause within the same FROM TABLE
clause, sampling is applied to the rows that are qualified by the WHEN
selection conditions.
decimal
Specifies the percentage of the rows that are to be sampled in the decimal
format. The precision is ddd.dddd, and the valid range is 0 <= decimal <=
100.
If the number of rows to which the sampling is to be applied is N:
v decimal N / 100 rows are unloaded. (The fraction might be rounded to
the nearest whole number.)
v If decimal > 0 and N > 0, at least one row is unloaded.
v If decimal = 100, all rows from the table are unloaded.
v If the given decimal = 0 or N = 0, no row is unloaded from the table.
680
The sampling is applied for each individual table. If the rows from multiple
tables are unloaded with sampling enabled, the referential integrity between
the tables might be lost.
LIMIT integer
Specifies the maximum number of rows that are to be unloaded from a table. If
the number of unloaded rows reaches the specified limit, message DSNU1201
is issued for the table, and no more rows are unloaded from the table. The
process continues to unload qualified rows from the other tables.
When partition parallelism is activated, the LIMIT option is applied to each
partition instead of to the entire table.
integer
Indicates the maximum number of rows that are to be unloaded from a
table. If the specified number is less than or equal to zero, no row is
unloaded from the table.
Like the SAMPLE option, if multiple tables are unloaded with the LIMIT
option, the referential integrity between the tables might be lost.
field-name
Identifies a column name that must exist in the source table.
POSITION(start)
Specifies the field position in the output record. You can specify
the position parameter as follows:
*
An asterisk, indicating that the field starts at the first byte after the last
position of the previous field.
start
A positive integer that indicates the start column of the data field.
The default value is POSITION(*).

The first column (byte position) of an output record corresponds to
POSITION(1). If you specify HEADER NONE in the FROM TABLE clause, the
item that is specified by the HEADER option is placed at the beginning of all
the records that are unloaded from the table. You must account for the space
for the record header:
v HEADER OBID (the default case): 2 bytes from position 1.
v HEADER CONST string or Xhex-string case: The length of the given string
from position 1.
If the source table column can be null, the utility places a NULL indicator byte
at the beginning of the data field in the output record. For BLOBF, CLOBF, or
DBCLOBF columns, null values are indicated by a byte at the beginning of the
file name. The start parameter (or *) points to the position of the NULL
indicator byte. In the generated LOAD statement, start is shifted by 1 byte to
the right (as start+1) so that, in the LOAD statement, the start parameter of the
POSITION option points to the next byte past the NULL indicator byte.
For a varying-length field, a length field precedes the actual data field (after
the NULL indicator byte, if applicable). For BLOBF, CLOBF, or DBCLOBF
columns, the length of the file name is indicated by two bytes at the beginning
of the file name. If the value cannot be null, the start parameter (or *) points to
the first byte of the length field. The size of the length field is either 4 bytes
(BLOB, CLOB, or DBCLOB) or 2 bytes (VARCHAR or VARGRAPHIC).
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
681
When you explicitly specify the output field positions by using start
parameters (or using the * format) of the POSITION option, you must consider
the following items as a part of the output field:
v For a field whose value can be null, a space for the NULL indicator byte
v For varying-length data, a space for the length field (either 2 bytes or 4
bytes)
Layout of output fields on page 708 illustrates the field layout in conjunction
with the POSITION option, NULL indicator byte, the length field for a
varying-length field, the length parameter, and the actual data length.
The POSITION option is useful when the output fields must be placed at
desired positions in the output records. The use of the POSITION parameters,
however, can restrict the size of the output data fields. Use care when explicitly
specifying start parameters for nullable and varying-length fields. The
TRUNCATE option might be required, if applicable, to fit a data item in a
shorter space in an output record.
If you omit the POSITION option for the first field, the field starts from
position 1 if HEADER NONE is specified. Otherwise, the field starts from the
next byte position past the record header field. If POSITION is omitted for a
subsequent field, the field is placed next to the last position of the previous
field without any gap.
If NOPAD is specified and POSITION parameters are given for certain fields,
the effect of the NOPAD option might be lost because the fields with start
parameters (other than the default *) always start at the fixed positions in the
output records.
The POSITION option is ignored for delimited output files.
CHAR
Indicates that the output field is a character type with fixed length. You can
use CHARACTER in place of CHAR. If the source table column can be null, a
NULL indicator byte is placed at the beginning of the output field for a
non-delimited output file.
If you specify the EBCDIC, ASCII, UNICODE, or CCSID options, the output
data that corresponds to the specified option, is encoded in the CCSID,
depending on the subtype of the source data (SBCS or MIXED). If the subtype
is BIT, no conversion is applied.
(length)
Specifies the size of the output data in bytes.
|
|
If followed by BLOBF, CLOBF, or DBCLOBF, the length specifies the size of

the expanded template name in bytes.
|
|
|
|
If the length parameter is omitted, the default is the maximum length that
is defined on the source table column or the length in bytes of the
expanded template name if BLOBF, CLOBF, or DBCLOBF follows the
CHAR keyword. When the length parameter is specified:
v If the length is less than the size of the table column, the data is
truncated to the length if the TRUNCATE keyword is present; otherwise,
a conversion error occurs.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
v For the case where BLOBF, CLOBF, or DBCLOBF immediately follows,

an error will occur if the length is less than the size of the expanded
template name.
v If the length is larger than the size of the table column, the output field is
padded by the default pad characters to the specified length.
682
|
|
|
BLOBF
Specifies that the output field is to contain the name of the file to which
the BLOB or XML is to be unloaded without CCSID conversion.
|
|
|
CLOBF
the CLOB or XML is to be unloaded with any required CCSID conversion.
|
|
|
|
DBCLOBF
the DBCLOBF or XML is to be unloaded with any required CCSID
conversion.
TRUNCATE
Indicates that a character string (encoded for output) is to be truncated
from the right, if the data does not fit in the available space for the field in
the output record. Truncation occurs at the character boundary. See
Specifying TRUNCATE and STRIP options for output data on page 713
for the truncation rules that are used in the UNLOAD utility. Without
TRUNCATE, an error occurs when the output field size is too small for the
data.
VARCHAR
Specifies that the output field type is character of varying length. A 2-byte
binary field indicating the length of data in bytes is prepended to the data
field. If the table column can be null, a NULL indicator byte is placed before
this length field for a non-delimited output file.
data is encoded in the CCSID corresponding to the specified option, depending
on the subtype of the source data (SBCS or MIXED). If the subtype is BIT, no
conversion is applied.
(length)
Specifies the maximum length of the actual data field in bytes. If you also
specify NOPAD, it indicates the maximum allowable space for the data in
the output records; otherwise, the space of the specified length is reserved
for the data.
|
|
|
If followed by BLOBF, CLOBF, or DBCLOBF, length specifies the size of the

expanded template name in bytes. If the length is less than the size of the
expanded template name an error will occur.
If the length parameter is omitted, the default is the smaller of 255 and the
maximum length that is defined on the source table column.
|
|
|
|
|
|
BLOBF
the BLOB or XML is to be unloaded without CCSID conversion.
BINARYXML Specifies that the XML document is to be unloaded using file
reference variables in binary XML format. This option is only supported
when unloading an XML column.
|
|
|
CLOBF
the CLOB or XML is to be unloaded with any required CCSID conversion.
|
|
|
|
DBCLOBF
the DBCLOBF or XML is to be unloaded with any required CCSID
conversion.
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
683
STRIP
Specifies that UNLOAD is to remove binary zeroes (the default) or the
specified string from the beginning, the end, or both ends of the data.
UNLOAD adjusts the VARCHAR length field (for the output field) to the
length of the stripped data.
|
|
|
|
The STRIP option is applicable if the subtype of the source data is BIT. In
this case, no CCSID conversion is performed on the specified strip
character (even if it is given in the form strip-char).
function.
BOTH
Indicates that UNLOAD is to remove occurrences of blank or the
specified strip character from the beginning and end of the data. The
default is BOTH.
TRAILING
LEADING
strip-char
Specifies a single-byte character that is to be stripped. Specify this
character value in EBCDIC. Depending on the output encoding
scheme, UNLOAD applies SBCS CCSID conversion to the strip-char
value before it is used in the strip operation. If you want to specify a
strip-char value in an encoding scheme other than EBCDIC, use the
hexadecimal form. UNLOAD does not perform CCSID conversion if
the hexadecimal form is used.
Xstrip-char
Specifies a single-byte character that is to be stripped. It can be
specified in the hexadecimal form, Xhex-string, where hex-string is two
hexadecimal characters that represent a single SBCS character. If the
strip-char operand is omitted, the default is the blank character, which
is coded as follows:
v X40, for the EBCDIC-encoded output case
v X20 for the ASCII-encoded output case
v X20 the Unicode-encoded output case
The strip operation is applied after the character code conversion, if
the output character encoding scheme is different from the one that is
defined on the source data. Therefore, if a strip character is specified in
the hexadecimal format, you must specify the character in the encoding
scheme that is used for output.
TRUNCATE
Indicates that a character string (encoded for output) is to be truncated
from the right, if the data does not fit in the available space for the field in
the output records. Truncation occurs at a character boundary. See
for the truncation rules that are used in the UNLOAD utility. Without
data.
684
GRAPHIC
Specifies that the output field is of the fixed-length graphic type. If the table
column can be null, a NULL indicator byte is placed before the actual data
field for any non-delimited output file.
If the output is in EBCDIC, the shift-in and shift-out characters are not
included at the beginning and at the end of the data.
(length)
Specifies the number of DBCS characters (the size of the output data in
bytes is twice the given length). If the given length is larger than the source
data length, the output field is padded with the default pad character.
TRUNCATE
Indicates that a graphic character string (encoded for output) is to be
truncated from the right, if the data does not fit in the available space for
the field in the output records. Truncation occurs at a character (DBCS)
boundary. Without TRUNCATE, an error occurs when the output field size
is too small for the data.
GRAPHIC EXTERNAL
Specifies that the data is to be written in the output records as a fixed-length
field of the graphic type with the external format; that is, the shift-out (SO)
character is placed at the starting position, and the shift-in (SI) character is
placed at the ending position. The byte count of the output field is always an
even number.
GRAPHIC EXTERNAL is supported only in the EBCDIC output mode (by
default or when the EBCDIC keyword is specified).
If the start parameter of the POSITION option is used to specify the output
column position, it points to the (inserted) shift-out character at the beginning
of the field. The shift-in character is placed at the next byte position past the
last double-byte character of the data.
(length)
Specifies a number of DBCS characters, excluding the shift characters (as in
the graphic type column definition that is used in a CREATE TABLE
statement) nor the NULL indicator byte if the source column can be null. If
the length parameter is omitted, the default output field size is the length
that is defined on the corresponding table column, plus two bytes
(shift-out and shift-in characters).
If the specified length is larger than the size of the data, the field is padded
on the right with the default DBCS padding character.
TRUNCATE
Indicates that a graphic character string is to be truncated from the right
by the DBCS characters, if the data does not fit in the available space for
the field in the output records. Without TRUNCATE, an error occurs when
the output field size is too small for the data. An error can also occur with
the TRUNCATE option if the available space is less than 4 bytes (4 bytes is
the minimum size for a GRAPHIC EXTERNAL field; shift-out character,
one DBCS, and shift-in character); or fewer than 5 bytes if the field is can
be null (the 4 bytes plus the NULL indicator byte).
VARGRAPHIC
Specifies that the output field is to be of the varying-length graphic type. A
2-byte binary length field is prepended to the actual data field. If the table
column can be null, a NULL indicator byte is placed before this length field for
any non-delimited output file.
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
685
(length)
Specifies the maximum length of the actual data field in the number of
DBCS characters. If you also specify NOPAD, it indicates the maximum
allowable space for the data in the output records; otherwise, the space of
the specified length is reserved for the data.
If the length parameter is omitted, the default is the smaller of 127 and the
maximum defined length of the source table column.
STRIP
Indicates that UNLOAD is to remove binary zeroes (the default) or the
specified string from the unloaded data. UNLOAD adjusts the
VARGRAPHIC length field (for the output field) to the length of the
stripped data (the number of DBCS characters).
|
|
|
|
function.
BOTH
specified strip character from the beginning and end of the data. The
default is BOTH.
TRAILING
LEADING
Xstrip-char
Specifies a DBCS character that is to be stripped in the hexadecimal
format, Xhhhh, where hhhh is four hexadecimal characters that
represent a DBCS character. If this operand is omitted, the default is a
DBCS blank in the output encoding scheme (for example, X4040 for
the EBCDIC-encoded output or X8140 for CCSID 301).
The strip operation is applied after the character code conversion, if
the output character encoding scheme is different from the one that is
defined on the source data. Therefore, if you specify a strip character, it
must be in the encoding scheme that is used for the output.
TRUNCATE
Indicates that a graphic character string (encoded for output) is to be
the field in the output records. Truncation occurs at a DBCS character
boundary. Without TRUNCATE, an error occurs when the output field size
is too small for the data.
SMALLINT
Specifies that the output field is a 2-byte binary integer (a negative number is
in twos complement notation). To use the external format, specify INTEGER
EXTERNAL.
If the source data type is INTEGER, DECIMAL, FLOAT, BIGINT, or
DECFLOAT (either 4-byte or 8-byte format), an error occurs when the data is
greater than 32 767 or less than -32 768.
|
|
|
A SMALLINT output field requires 2 bytes, and the length option is not
available.
686
INTEGER
Specifies that the output field is a 4-byte binary integer (a negative number is
in twos complement notation).
|
|
|
If the original data type is DECIMAL, FLOAT, BIGINT, or DECFLOAT (either

4-byte or 8-byte format), an error occurs when the original data is greater than
2 147 483 647 or less than -2 147 483 648.
An INTEGER output field requires 4 bytes, and the length option is not
available.
INTEGER EXTERNAL
Specifies that the output field is to contain a character string that represents an
integer number.
|
|
|
|
(length)
Indicates the size of the output data in bytes, including a space for the sign
character. When the length is given and the character notation does not fit
in the space, an error occurs. The default is 20 characters (including a
space for the sign).
If the value is negative, a minus sign precedes the numeric digits. If the output
field size is larger than the length of the data, the output data is left justified
and blanks are padded on the right.
|
|
|
|
If the source data type is DECIMAL, FLOAT (either 4-byte or 8-byte format), or
DECFLOAT (either 8-byte or 16-byte format), an error occurs when the original
data is greater than 9 223 372 036 854 775 807 or less than
-9 223 372 036 854 775 808.
|
|
|
|
BIGINT
Specifies that the output field is an 8-byte binary integer (a negative number is
in twos complement notation). To use the external format, specify INTEGER
EXTERNAL.
|
|
|
If the original data type is DECIMAL, FLOAT, or DECFLOAT (either 4-byte or

8-byte format), an error occurs when the original data is greater than
9 223 372 036 854 775 807 or less than -9 223 372 036 854 775 808.
|
|
|
|
|
|
BINARY(length)
Indicates that the output field is a binary string type with a fixed length. If the
source table column can be null, a NULL indicator byte is placed at the
beginning of the output field for a nondelimited output file. No data
conversion is applied to the field. The default for Xstrip-char is hexadecimal
zero (X00).
|
|
|
|
|
TRUNCATE
Indicates that the output binary string (encoded for output) is to be
the field in the output records. Without TRUNCATE, an error occurs when
the output field size is too small for the data.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
VARBINARY
Indicates that the output field is a binary string type with varying length. A
2-byte binary field indicating the length of data in bytes is prepended to the
data field. If the table column can be null, a NULL indicator byte is placed
before the length field for a non-delimited output file. No data conversion is
applied to the field. The default for Xstrip-char is hexadecimal zero (X00).
STRIP
Specifies that UNLOAD is to remove binary zeroes (the default) or the
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
687
|
|
|
specified string from the beginning, the end, or both ends of the data.
UNLOAD adjusts the VARBINARY length field (for the output field) to the
length of the stripped data.
|
|
|
|
BOTH
Indicates that UNLOAD is to remove occurrences of binary zeroes or
the specified strip character from the beginning and end of the data.
The default is BOTH.
|
|
|
TRAILING
the specified strip character from the end of the data.
|
|
|
LEADING
the specified strip character from the beginning of the data.
|
|
|
|
Xstrip-char
Specifies a single-byte character that is to be stripped. It can be
specified only in the hexadecimal form, Xhex-string, where hex-string
is two hexadecimal characters that represent a single SBCS character.
|
|
|
|
|
TRUNCATE
Indicates that a binary string (encoded for output) is to be truncated from
the right, if the data does not fit in the available space for the field in the
output records. Without TRUNCATE, an error occurs when the output
field size is too small for the data.
DECIMAL
Specifies that the output data is a number that is represented by the indicated
decimal format (either PACKED, ZONED, or EXTERNAL). If you specify the
keyword DECIMAL by itself, packed-decimal format is assumed.
PACKED
Specifies that the output data is a number that is represented by the
packed-decimal format. You can use DEC or DEC PACKED as an
abbreviated form of the keyword.
The packed-decimal representation of a number is of the form ddd...ds,
where d is a decimal digit that is represented by 4 bits, and s is a 4-bit sign
character (hexadecimal A, C, E, or F for a positive number, and
hexadecimal B or D for a negative number).
length
Specifies the number of digits (not including the sign digit) that are to
be placed in the output field. The length must be between 1 and 31. If
the length is odd, the size of the output data field is (length+1) / 2
bytes; if even, (length / 2)+1 byte.
If the source data type is DECIMAL and the length parameter is
omitted, the default length is determined by the column attribute
defined on the table. Otherwise, the default length is 31 digits (16
bytes).
scale
Specifies the number of digits to the right of the decimal point. (Note
that, in this case, a decimal point is not included in the output field.)
The number must be an integer that is greater than or equal to zero
and less than or equal to the length.
688
The default depends on the column attribute that is defined on the

table. If the source data type is DECIMAL, the defined scale value is
the default value; otherwise, the default value is 0.
If you specify the output field size as less than the length of the data, an
error occurs. If the specified field size is greater than the length of data,
X0 is padded on the left.
ZONED
Specifies that the output data is a number that is represented by the
zoned-decimal format. You can use DEC ZONED as an abbreviated form
of the keyword.
The zoned-decimal representation of a number is of the form znznzn...z/sn,
where n denotes a 4 bit decimal digit (called the numeric bits); z is the
digits zone (left 4 bits of a byte); s is the right-most operand that can be a
zone (z) or can be a sign value (hexadecimal A, C, E, or F for a positive
number, and hexadecimal B or D for a negative number).
length
Specifies the number of bytes (that is the number of decimal digits)
that are placed in the output field. The length must be between 1 and
31.
omitted, the default length is determined by the column attribute that
is defined on the table. Otherwise, the default length is 31 bytes.
scale
Specifies the number of digits to the right of the decimal point. (Note
that, in this case, a decimal point is not included in the output field.)
The number must be an integer greater than or equal to zero and less
than or equal to the length.
The default depends on the column attribute that is defined on the
table. If the source data type is DECIMAL, the defined scale value is
the default value; otherwise, the default value is 0.
If you specify the output field size as less than the length of the data, an
error occurs. If the specified field size is greater than the length of data,
XF0 is padded on the left.
EXTERNAL
Specifies that the output data is a character string that represents a number
in the form of dd...d.ddd...d, where d is a numeric character 0-9. (The plus
sign for a positive value is omitted.)
length
Specifies the overall length of the output data (the number of
characters including a sign, and a decimal point if scale is specified).
omitted, the default length is determined by the column attribute that
is defined on the table. Otherwise, the default length is 33 (31 numeric
digits, plus a sign and a decimal point). The minimum value of length
is 3 to accommodate the sign, one digit, and the decimal point.
scale
Specifies the number of digits to the right of the decimal point. The
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
689
number must be an integer that is greater than or equal to zero and

less than or equal to length - 2 (to allow for the sign character and the
decimal point).
omitted, the default scale is determined by the column attribute that is
defined on the table. Otherwise, the default value is 0.
An error occurs if the character representation of a value does not fit in
the given or default field size (precision). If the source data type is
floating point and a data item is too small for the precision that is
defined by scale, the value of zero (not an error) is returned.
FLOAT(length)
Specifies that the output data is a binary floating-point number (32-bit or
single-precision FLOAT if the length is between one and 21 inclusive; 64-bit or
double-precision FLOAT if the length is between 22 and 53 inclusive). If the
length parameter is omitted, the 64-bit format is assumed (output field size is 8
bytes). Note that the length parameter for the FLOAT type does not represent
the field size in bytes.
The format of the binary floating-point output is controlled by the global
FLOAT option. The default is S/390 format (Hexadecimal Floating Point or
HFP). If you specify FLOAT(IEEE), all the binary floating-point output is in
IEEE format (Binary Floating Point or BFP). When you specify FLOAT(IEEE)
and the source data type DOUBLE is unloaded as REAL, an error occurs if the
source data cannot be expressed by the IEEE (BFP) 32-bit notation.
EXTERNAL(length)
Specifies that the output data is a number that is represented by a
character string in floating-point notation, d.ddd...dddEnn, where d is a
numeric character (0-9) for the significant digits; nn after the character E,
and the sign consists of two numeric characters for the exponent.
(length)
Specifies the total field length in bytes, including the first sign
character, the decimal point, the E character, the second sign character,
and the two-digit exponent. If the number of characters in the result is
less than the specified or the default length, the result is padded to the
right with blanks. The length, if specified, must be greater than or
equal to 8.
The default output field size is 14 if the source data type is the 32-bit
FLOAT; otherwise, the default is 24.
A FLOAT EXTERNAL output field requires a space of at least seven
characters in the output record to accommodate the minimal floating point
notation. Otherwise, an error occurs.
DOUBLE
Specifies that the output data is in 64-bit floating point notation. If DOUBLE is
used, the length parameter must not be specified.
REAL
Specifies that the output data is in 32-bit floating point notation. If REAL is
used, the length parameter must not be specified.
DATE EXTERNAL
Specifies that the output field is for a character string representation of a date.
The output format of date depends on the DB2 installation.
690
(length)
Specifies the size of the data field in bytes in the output record. A DATE
EXTERNAL field requires a space of at least 10 characters. If the space is
not available, an error occurs. If the specified length is larger than the size
of the data, blanks are padded on the right.
TIME EXTERNAL
Specifies that the output field is for a character string representation of a time.
The output format of time depends on the DB2 installation.
(length)
Specifies the size of the data field in bytes in the output record. A TIME
EXTERNAL field requires a space of at least eight characters. If the space is
not available, a conversion error occurs. If the specified length is larger than
the size of the data, blanks are padded on the right.
TIMESTAMP EXTERNAL
Specifies that the output field is for a character string representation of a
timestamp.
(length)
Specifies the size of the data field in bytes in the output record. A
TIMESTAMP EXTERNAL field requires a space of at least 19 characters. If
the space is not available, an error occurs. The length parameter, if
specified, determines the output format of the TIMESTAMP. If the specified
length is larger than the size of the data, the field is padded on the right
with the default padding character.
CONSTANT
Specifies that the output records are to have an extra field containing a
constant value. The field name that is associated with the CONSTANT
keyword must not coincide with a table column name (the field name is for
clarification purposes only). A CONSTANT field always has a fixed length that
is equal to the length of the given string.
string
Specifies the character string that is to be inserted in the output records at
the specified or default position. A string is the required operand of the
CONSTANT option. If the given string is in the form string, it is assumed
to be an EBCDIC SBCS string. However, the output string for a
CONSTANT field is in the specified or default encoding scheme. (That is, if
the encoding scheme used for output is not EBCDIC, the SBCS CCSID
conversion is applied to the given string before it is placed in output
records.)
Xhex-string
Specifies the character string in hexadecimal form, Xhex-string, that is to
be inserted in the output records at the specified or default position. If you
want to specify a CONSTANT string value in an encoding scheme other
than SBCS EBCDIC, use the hexadecimal form. No CCSID conversion is
performed if the hexadecimal form is used.
For a CONSTANT field, no other field selection list options should be
specified.
If a CONSTANT field is inserted, it will not be included in the generated
LOAD statement (the LOAD statement is generated so that the CONSTANT
field is skipped).
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
691
If you specify both FORMAT DELIMITED and CONSTANT, the generated

LOAD statement is not usable.
ROWID
Specifies that the output data is of type ROWID. The field type ROWID can be
specified if and only if the column that is to be unloaded is of type ROWID.
The keyword is provided for consistency purposes.
ROWID fields have varying length and a 2-byte binary length field is
prepended to the actual data field.
For the ROWID type, no data conversion nor truncation is applied. If the
output field size is too small to unload ROWID data, an error occurs.
If the source is an image copy and a ROWID column is selected, and if the
page set header page is missing in the specified data set, the UNLOAD utility
terminates with the error message DSNU1228I. This situation can occur when
the source is an image copy data set of DSNUM that is greater than one for a
nonpartitioned table space that is defined on multiple data sets.
BLOB
Indicates that the column is to be unloaded as a binary large object (BLOB). No
data conversion is applied to the field.
When you specify the BLOB field type, a 4-byte binary length field is placed in
the output record prior to the actual data field. If the source table column can
be null, a NULL indicator byte is placed before the length field.
(length)
Specifies the maximum length of the actual data field in bytes. If you
for the data.
The default is the maximum length that is defined on the source table
column.
TRUNCATE
Indicates that a BLOB string is to be truncated from the right, if the data
does not fit in the available space for the field in the output record. For
BLOB data, truncation occurs at a byte boundary. Without TRUNCATE, an
error occurs when the output field size is too small for the data.
CLOB
Indicates that the column is to be unloaded as a character large object (CLOB).
When you specify the CLOB field type, a 4-byte binary length field is placed in
data is encoded in the CCSID corresponding to the specified option, depending
on the subtype of the source data (SBCS or MIXED). No conversion is applied
if the subtype is BIT.
(length)
Specifies the maximum length of the actual data field in bytes. If you
for the data.
column.
692
TRUNCATE
Indicates that a CLOB string (encoded for output) is to be truncated from
output record. For CLOB data, truncation occurs at a character boundary.
See Specifying TRUNCATE and STRIP options for output data on page
713 for the truncation rules that are used in the UNLOAD utility. Without
data.
DBCLOB
Indicates that the column is to be unloaded as a double-byte character large
object (DBCLOB).
If you specify the DBCLOB field type, a 4-byte binary length field is placed in
data is encoded in the CCSID corresponding to the specified option; DBCS
CCSID is used.
(length)
Specifies the maximum length of the actual data field in the number of
DBCS characters. If you specify NOPAD, it indicates the maximum
allowable space for the data in the output records; otherwise, the space of
the specified length is reserved for the data.
column.
TRUNCATE
Indicates that a DBCS string (encoded for output) is to be truncated from
output record. For a DBCLOB data, truncation occurs at a character (DBCS)
boundary. See Specifying TRUNCATE and STRIP options for output data
on page 713 for the truncation rules that are used in the UNLOAD utility.
Without TRUNCATE, an error occurs when the output field size is too
small for the data.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
DECFLOAT (length)
Specifies either a 128-bit decimal floating-point number or a 64-bit decimal
floating-point number. The value of the length must be either 16 or 34. If the
length is 16, the number is in 64 bit decimal floating-point number format. If
the length is 34, the number is in 128 bit decimal floating-point format. The
default length is determined by the column attribute defined on the table.
Otherwise, the default length is 34 (16 bytes).
|
|
|
DECFLOAT EXTERNAL
Specifies a string of characters that represent a number. The format is an SQL
numeric constant.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(length)
Specifies the total field length in bytes. This length includes the first sign
character, the decimal point, the E character, the second sign character, and
the exponent if in the string. If the number of characters in the result is
less than the specified or the default length, the result is padded to the
right with blanks. The character representation of a value must fit in the
given or default field size.
The default output field size is 23 if the source data type is the
DECFLOAT(16). Otherwise, the default is 42.
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
693
XML
Specifies that an XML column is being unloaded directly to the output record.
|
|
WHEN
Indicates which records in the table space are to be unloaded. If no WHEN
clause is specified for a table in the table space, all of the records are unloaded.
The option following WHEN describes the conditions for unloading records
from a table.
Data in the table can be in EBCDIC, ASCII, or Unicode. If the target table is in
Unicode and the character constants are specified in the utility control
statement as EBCDIC, the UNLOAD utility converts these constants to
Unicode. To use a constant when the target table is ASCII, specify the
hexadecimal form of the constant (instead of the character string form) in the
condition for the WHEN clause.
selection condition
Specifies a condition that is true, false, or unknown about a given row. When
the condition is true, the row qualifies for UNLOAD. When the condition is
false or unknown, the row does not qualify.
The result of a selection condition is derived by application of the specified
logical operators (AND and OR) to the result of each specified predicate. If
logical operators are not specified, the result of the selection condition is the
result of the specified predicate.
Selection conditions within parentheses are evaluated first. If the order of
evaluation is not specified by parentheses, AND is applied before OR.
If the control statement is in the same encoding scheme as the input data, you
can code character constants in the control statement. Otherwise, if the control
statement is not in the same encoding scheme as the input data, you must code
the condition with hexadecimal constants. For example, if the table space is in
EBCDIC and the control statement is in UTF-8, use (1:1) = X31 in the
condition rather than (1:1) = 1.
Restriction: UNLOAD cannot filter rows that contain encrypted data.
predicate
Specifies a condition that is true, false, or unknown about a row.
A DECFLOAT column or DECFLOAT constant cannot be specified in the
predicate.
|
|
basic predicate
Specifies the comparison of a column with a constant. If the value of the
column is null, the result of the predicate is unknown. Otherwise, the
result of the predicate is true or false.
column = constant
The column is equal to the constant or labeled duration expression.
column < > constant
The column is not equal to the constant or labeled duration
expression.
column > constant
The column is greater than the constant or labeled duration
expression.
694
column < constant

The column is less than the constant or labeled duration
expression.
column > = constant
The column is greater than or equal to the constant or labeled
column < = constant
The column is less than or equal to the constant or labeled
Note: The following alternative comparison operators are available:
!= or = for not equal.
!> or > for not greater than.
!< or < for not less than.
The symbol representing not is supported for compatibility purposes.
Use ! where possible.
BETWEEN predicate
Indicates whether a given value lies between two other given values that
are specified in ascending order. The values can be constants or labeled
duration expressions. Each of the predicates two forms (BETWEEN and
NOT BETWEEN) has an equivalent search condition, as shown in the
following table. When relevant, the table also shows any equivalent
predicates.
Table 135. BETWEEN predicates and their equivalent search conditions
Predicate
Equivalent predicate
column BETWEEN value1

AND value2
None
(column >= value1 AND

column <= value2)
column NOT BETWEEN value1 NOT(column BETWEEN

AND value2
value1 AND value2)
(column < value1 OR column >

value2)
For example, the following predicate is true for any row when salary is
greater than or equal 10000 and less than or equal to 20000:
SALARY BETWEEN 10000 AND 20000
IN predicate
Specifies that a value is to be compared with a set of values. In the IN
predicate, the second operand is a set of one or more values that are
specified by constants. Each of the predicates two forms (IN and NOT IN)
has an equivalent search condition, as shown in the following table.
Table 136. IN predicates and their equivalent search conditions
Predicate
value1 IN (value1, value2,..., valuen)
(value1 = value2 OR ... OR value1 = valuen)
value1 NOT IN (value1, value2,..., valuen)
value1 = value2 AND ... AND value1 = valuen)
For example, the following predicate is true for any row whose employee
is in department D11, B01, or C01:
WORKDEPT IN ('D11', 'B01', 'C01')
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
695
LIKE predicate
Specifies the qualification of strings that have a certain pattern.
Within the pattern, a percent sign or underscore can have a special
meaning, or it can represent the literal occurrence of a percent sign or
underscore. To have its literal meaning, it must be preceded by an escape
character. If it is not preceded by an escape character, it has its special
meaning. The underscore character (_) represents a single, arbitrary
character. The percent sign (%) represents a string of zero or more arbitrary
characters.
The ESCAPE clause designates a single character. That character, and only
that character, can be used multiple times within the pattern as an escape
character. When the ESCAPE clause is omitted, no character serves as an
escape character, so that percent signs and underscores in the pattern
always have their special meanings.
The following rules apply to the use of the ESCAPE clause:
v The ESCAPE clause cannot be used if x is mixed data.
v If x is a character string, the data type of the string constant must be
character string. If x is a graphic string, the data type of the string
constant must be graphic string. In both cases, the length of the string
constant must be 1.
v The pattern must not contain the escape character except when followed
by the escape character, % or _. For example, if + is the escape
character, any occurrence of + other than ++, +_, or +% in the
pattern is an error.
When the pattern does not include escape characters, a simple description
of its meaning is:
v The underscore sign (_) represents a single arbitrary character.
v The percent sign (%) represents a string of zero or more arbitrary
characters.
v Any other character represents a single occurrence of itself.
Let x denote the column that is to be tested and y the pattern in the string
constant. The following rules apply to predicates of the form x LIKE y....
If NOT is specified, the result is reversed.
v When x and y are both neither empty nor null, the result of the
predicate is true if x matches the pattern in y and false if x does not
match the pattern in y.
v When x or y is null, the result of the predicate is unknown.
v When y is empty and x is not empty, the result of the predicate is false.
v When x is empty and y is not empty, the result of the predicate is false
unless y consists only of one or more percent signs.
v When x and y are both empty, the result of the predicate is true.
The pattern string and the string that is to be tested must be of the same
type. That is, both x and y must be character strings, or both x and y must
be graphic strings. When x and y are graphic strings, a character is a DBCS
character. When x and y are character strings and x is not mixed data, a
character is an SBCS character and y is interpreted as SBCS data regardless
of its subtype.
Strings and patterns
696
The string y is interpreted as a sequence of the minimum number of

substring specifiers such that each character of y is part of exactly one
substring specifier. A substring specifier is an underscore, a percent sign, or
any non-empty sequence of characters other than an underscore or percent
sign.
The string x matches the pattern y if a partitioning of x into substrings
exists, such that:
v A substring of x is a sequence of zero or more contiguous characters,
and each character of x is part of exactly one substring.
v If the nth substring specifier is an underscore, the nth substring of x is
any single character.
v If the nth substring specifier is a percent sign, the nth substring of x is
any sequence of zero or more characters.
v If the nth substring specifier is neither an underscore nor a percent sign,
the nth substring of x is equal to that substring specifier and has the
same length as that substring specifier.
v The number of substrings of x is the same as the number of substring
specifiers.
When escape characters are present in the pattern string, an underscore,
percent sign, or escape character represents a single occurrence of itself if
and only if it is preceded by an odd number of successive escape
characters.
Mixed data patterns: If x is mixed data, the pattern is assumed to be
mixed data, and its special characters are interpreted as follows:
v A single-byte underscore refers to one single-byte character; a
double-byte underscore refers to one double-byte character.
v A percent sign, either single-byte or double-byte, refers to any number of
characters of any type, either single-byte or double-byte.
v Redundant shift bytes in x or y are ignored.
NULL predicate
Specifies a test for null values.
If the value of the column is null, the result is true. If the value is not null,
the result is false. If NOT is specified, the result is reversed. (That is, if the
value is null, the result is false, and if the value is not null, the result is
true.)
labeled duration expression
Specifies an expression that begins with special register CURRENT DATE
or special register CURRENT TIMESTAMP (the forms CURRENT_DATE
and CURRENT_TIMESTAMP are also acceptable). This special register can
be followed by arithmetic operations of addition or subtraction. These
operations are expressed by using numbers that are followed by one of the
seven duration keywords: YEARS, MONTHS, DAYS, HOURS, MINUTES,
SECONDS, or MICROSECONDS. (The singular form of these keywords is
also acceptable: YEAR, MONTH, DAY, HOUR, MINUTE, SECOND, and
MICROSECOND.)
Utilities always evaluate a labeled duration expression as a timestamp and
implicitly convert to a date if the comparison is with a date column.
Incrementing and decrementing CURRENT DATE: The result of adding a
duration to a date, or of subtracting a duration from a date, is itself a date.
(For the purposes of this operation, a month denotes the equivalent of a
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
697
calendar page. Adding months to a date, then, is like turning the pages of
a calendar, starting with the page on which the date appears.) The result
must fall between the dates January 1, 0001 and December 31, 9999
inclusive. If a duration of years is added or subtracted, only the year
portion of the date is affected. The month is unchanged, as is the day,
unless the result would be February 29 of a non-leap-year. In this situation,
the day portion of the result is set to 28.
Similarly, if a duration of months is added or subtracted, only months and,
if necessary, years are affected. The day portion of the date is unchanged
unless the result would be invalid (September 31, for example). In this case
the day is set to the last day of the month.
Adding or subtracting a duration of days affects the day portion of the
date, and potentially the month and year.
Date durations, whether positive or negative, can also be added to and
subtracted from dates. As with labeled durations, the result is a valid date.
When a positive date duration is added to a date, or a negative date
duration is subtracted from a date, the date is incremented by the specified
number of years, months, and days.
When a positive date duration is subtracted from a date, or a negative date
duration is added to a date, the date is decremented by the specified
number of days, months, and years.
Adding a month to a date gives the same day one month later, unless that
day does not exist in the later month. In that case, the day in the result is
set to the last day of the later month. For example, January 28 plus one
month gives February 28; one month added to January 29, 30, or 31 results
in either February 28 or, for a leap year, February 29. If one or more
months is added to a given date and then the same number of months is
subtracted from the result, the final date is not necessarily the same as the
original date.
The order in which labeled date durations are added to and subtracted
from dates can affect the results. When you add labeled date durations to a
date, specify them in the order of YEARS + MONTHS + DAYS. When you
subtract labeled date durations from a date, specify them in the order of
DAYS - MONTHS - YEARS. For example, to add one year and one day to
a date, specify the following code:
CURRENT DATE + 1 YEAR + 1 DAY
To subtract one year, one month, and one day from a date, specify the
following code:
CURRENT DATE - 1 DAY - 1 MONTH - 1 YEAR
Incrementing and decrementing timestamps: The result of adding a duration to

a timestamp, or of subtracting a duration from a timestamp, is itself a
timestamp. Date and time arithmetic is performed as previously defined,
except that an overflow or underflow of hours is carried into the date part
of the result, which must be within the range of valid dates.
698
Related reference
CREATE TABLE (DB2 SQL Reference)
Before running UNLOAD

Certain activities might be required before you run the UNLOAD utility,
If you plan to run UNLOAD on encrypted data, do not use the WHEN statement
to filter encrypted fields; UNLOAD cannot filter rows that contain encrypted data
|
|
Loading data into a table with an index that has a VARBINARY

column
|
|
|
|
|
If the table into which you are loading data has an index with these characteristics,
LOAD fails:
|
|
To fix the problem, drop the index, or alter the column data type to BINARY, and
then rebuild the index.
Data sets that UNLOAD uses

The UNLOAD utility uses a number of data sets during its operation.
The following table lists the data sets that UNLOAD uses. The table lists the DD
Table 137. Data sets that UNLOAD uses
Data set
Description
Required?
SYSIN

control statement.
Yes
SYSPRINT
Yes
SYSPUNCH
One or more work data sets that contain the No1

generated LOAD statements for
subsequently reloading the data. The default
DD name is PUNCHDDN.
Unload data set
One or more work data sets that contain the Yes

unloaded table rows. The default DD name
is SYSREC.
Note:
1. Required if you request that UNLOAD generate LOAD statements by specifying
PUNCHDDN in the utility control statement.
Table space
Table space that is to be unloaded. (If you want to unload only one
partition of a table space, you must specify the PART option in the control
statement.)
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
699
Concurrency and compatibility for UNLOAD

The UNLOAD utility has certain concurrency and compatibility characteristics
associated with it.
DB2 treats Individual data partitions as distinct source objects. Utilities that operate
on different partitions of the same table space are compatible.
Claims and drains:

The following table shows which claim classes UNLOAD drains and the restrictive
states that the utility sets.
Table 138. Claim classes of UNLOAD operations
Target
UNLOAD
UNLOAD PART
Table space or physical partition of a table

space with SHRLEVEL REFERENCE
DW/UTRO
DW/UTRO
Table space or physical partition of a table

space with SHRLEVEL CHANGE
CR/UTRW
CR/UTRW
Image copy*
CR/UTRW
CR/UTRW
Legend:
v CR: Claim read, concurrent access for SQL writers and readers
v UTRW: Utility restrictive state; read-write access allowed
Note: * If the target object is an image copy, the UNLOAD utility applies CR/UTRW to the
corresponding table space or physical partitions to prevent the table space from being
dropped while data is being unloaded from the image copy, even though the UNLOAD
utility does not access the data in the table space.
Compatibility
The compatibility of the UNLOAD utility and the other utilities on the same target
objects are shown in the following table. If the SHRLEVEL REFERENCE option is
specified, only SQL read operations are allowed on the same target objects;
otherwise SQL INSERT, DELETE, and UPDATE are also allowed. If the target
object is an image copy, INSERT, DELETE, and UPDATE are always allowed on
the corresponding table space. In any case, DROP or ALTER cannot be applied to
the target object while the UNLOAD utility is running.
Table 139. Compatibility of UNLOAD with other utilities
UNLOAD
SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE
UNLOAD
SHRLEVEL
CHANGE
FROM IMAGE
COPY
CHECK DATA
DELETE NO
Yes
Yes
Yes
CHECK DATA
DELETE YES
No
No
Yes
CHECK INDEX
Yes
Yes
Yes
CHECK LOB
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPY INDEXSPACE
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPY TABLESPACE
Yes
Yes
Yes*
Action
700
Table 139. Compatibility of UNLOAD with other utilities (continued)
Action
UNLOAD
SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE
UNLOAD
SHRLEVEL
CHANGE
FROM IMAGE
COPY
DIAGNOSE
Yes
Yes
Yes
LOAD SHRLEVEL
CHANGE
No
Yes
Yes
LOAD SHRLEVEL
NONE
No
No
Yes
MERGECOPY
Yes
Yes
No
MODIFY RECOVERY Yes
Yes
No
MODIFY STATISTICS Yes
Yes
Yes
QUIESCE
Yes
Yes
Yes
REBUILD INDEX
Yes
Yes
Yes
RECOVER (no
options)
No
No
Yes
RECOVER ERROR
RANGE
No
No
Yes
RECOVER TOCOPY
or TORBA
No
No
Yes
REORG INDEX
Yes
Yes
Yes
REORG
TABLESPACE
UNLOAD
CONTINUE or
PAUSE
No
No
Yes
REORG
TABLESPACE
UNLOAD ONLY or
EXTERNAL
Yes
Yes
Yes
REPAIR DUMP or
VERIFY
Yes
Yes
Yes
REPAIR LOCATE
INDEX PAGE
REPLACE
Yes
Yes
Yes
REPAIR LOCATE
KEY or RID DELETE
or REPLACE
No
No
Yes
REPAIR LOCATE
TABLESPACE PAGE
REPLACE
No
No
Yes
REPORT
Yes
Yes
Yes
RUNSTATS INDEX
Yes
Yes
Yes
RUNSTATS
TABLESPACE
Yes
Yes
Yes
STOSPACE
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note: If the same data set is used as the output from the COPY utility and as the input data
set of the UNLOAD utility, unexpected results can occur.
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
701
Unloading partitions
You can unload partitions in one of two ways.
If the source table space is partitioned, use one of the following mutually exclusive
methods to select the partitions to unload:
v Use the LIST keyword with a LISTDEF that contains PARTLEVEL specifications.
Partitions can be either included or excluded by the use of the INCLUDE and
the EXCLUDE features of LISTDEF.
v Specify the PART keyword to select a single partition or a range of partitions.
With either method, the unloaded data can be stored in a single data set for all
selected partitions or in one data set for each selected partition. If you want to
unload to a single output data set, specify a DD name to UNLDDN. If you want to
unload into multiple output data sets, specify a template name that is associated
with the partitions. You can process multiple partitions in parallel if the
TEMPLATE definition contains the partition as a variable, for example &PA.
You cannot specify multiple output data sets with the FROMCOPY or the
FROMCOPYDDN option.
|
Unloading XML data
You can unload XML data in one of two ways.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XML columns can be unloaded with either of the following methods:

v The XML column can be unloaded to the output records when the total output
record length is less than 32K. XML column value can be placed in the OUTPUT
record with or without any other unloading column values. The output record
can be in delimited or non-delimited format. For a non-delimited format, the
XML column is handled like a variable character with a 2-byte length preceding
the XML value. For a delimited format there are no length bytes present.
v The XML column can be unloaded to a separate file whether the XML column
length is less than 32K or not.
To unload XML data directly to output record:
|
|
|
|
|
Specify XML as the output field type. If the output is a non-delimited format, a
2-byte length will precede the value of the XML. For delimited output, no length
field is present. XML is the only acceptable field type when unloading the XML
directly to the output record. No data type conversion applies and you cannot
specify FROMCOPY.
To unload XML data to a separate file:
|
|
|
|
Create an UNLOAD utility control statement.

v Specify BLOBF, CLOBF or DBCLOBF to indicate that the output column contains
a filename which the XML value is to be unloaded. You cannot specify
FROMCOPY.
|
|
|
|
|
v Use the template control statement to create the XML output file and filename. If
data sets are not created and the DSN type is not specified on the template,
UNLOAD will use PDS as the data set type. PDS has a limit of single volume.
The output file uses multiple volumes, so you must specify HFS as the DSN
type. See Data sets that UNLOAD uses on page 699.
702
Selecting tables and rows to unload

If a table space contains multiple tables, you can select specific tables to unload by
using the FROM TABLE specification clauses.
If you specify one or more FROM TABLE clauses for a table space, only the
qualified rows from the specified tables are unloaded. You can specify a maximum
of one FROM TABLE clause per table. If you do not specify at least one FROM
TABLE clause, the rows from all the tables in the table space are unloaded.
Within a FROM TABLE clause, you can specify one or more of the following
criteria:
v Row and column selection criteria by using the field specification list
v Row selection conditions by using the WHEN specification clause
v Row sampling specifications
Attention: When an incremental image copy is taken of a table space, rows might
be updated or moved if the SHRLEVEL CHANGE option is specified. As a result,
data that is unloaded from such a copy might contain duplicates of these rows.
Selecting and ordering columns to unload

Use a field specification list in a FROM TABLE clause to unload specified columns
in the listed order. If you omit a field specification list, all the columns in the row
are unloaded in the order of the columns that are defined on the table.
You can specify a format conversion option for each field in the field specification
list.
If you select a LOB column in a list of field specifications or select a LOB column
by default (by omitting a list of field specifications), LOB data is materialized in
the output. However, you cannot select LOB columns from image copy data sets.
Unloading data from image copy data sets

In addition to unloading data from table spaces and partitions, you can also
unload data from one or more image copy data sets.
If you use the SYSTEMPAGES YES option on the COPY utility, you can use
UNLOAD to process rows of compressed data or image copies from different
versions.
Unload rows from a single image copy data set by specifying the FROMCOPY
option in the UNLOAD control statement. Specify the FROMCOPYDDN option to
unload data from one or more image copy data sets that are associated with the
specified DD name. Use an image copy that contains the page set header page
when you are unloading a ROWID column; otherwise the unload fails.
The source image copy data set must have been created by one of the following
utilities:
v COPY
v COPYTOCOPY
v LOAD inline image copy
v MERGECOPY
v REORG TABLESPACE inline image copy
v DSN1COPY
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
703
UNLOAD accepts full image copies, incremental image copies, and a copy of
pieces as valid input sources.
The UNLOAD utility supports image copy data sets for a single table space. The
table space name must be specified in the TABLESPACE option. The specified table
space must exist when you run the UNLOAD utility. (That is, the table space
cannot have been dropped since the image copy was taken.)
Use the FROMCOPYDDN option to concatenate the copy of table space partitions
under a DD name to form a single input data set image. When you use the
FROMCOPYDDN option, concatenate the data sets in the order of the data set
number; the first data set must be concatenated first. If the data sets are
concatenated in the wrong order or if different generations of image copies are
concatenated, the results might be unpredictable. For example, if the most recent
image copy data sets and older image copies are intermixed, the results might be
unpredictable.
You can use the FROMCOPYDDN option to concatenate a full image copy and
incremental image copies for a table space, a partition, or a piece, but duplicate
rows are also unloaded in this situation. Instead, consider using MERGECOPY to
generate an updated full image copy as the input to the UNLOAD utility.
You can select specific rows and columns to unload just as you would for a table
space. However, you can unload only rows that contain LOB columns when the
LOB columns are not included in a field specification list. If you use an image
copy that does not contain the page set header page when unloading a ROWID
column, the unload fails.
If you use the FROMCOPY or the FROMCOPYDDN option, you can specify only
one output data set.
If an image copy is created by an inline copy operation (LOAD or REORG
TABLESPACE), the image copy can contain duplicate pages. If duplicate pages
exist, the UNLOAD utility issues a warning message, and all the qualified rows in
duplicate pages are unloaded into the output data set.
If you specify a dropped table on the FROM TABLE option, the UNLOAD utility
terminates with return code 4. If you do not specify a FROM TABLE option and if
an image copy contains rows from dropped tables, UNLOAD ignores these rows.
When you specify either a full or incremental copy of partitions of a segmented
table space that consists of multiple data sets in the FROMCOPY option, be careful
when applying a mass delete to a table in the table space before you create the
copy. If a mass delete of a table occurs, the utility unloads deleted rows if the
space map pages that indicate the mass delete are not included in the data set that
corresponds to the specified copy. Where possible, use the FROMCOPYDDN
option to concatenate the copy of table space partitions.
If an image copy contains a table to which ALTER ADD COLUMN was applied
after the image copy was taken, the UNLOAD utility sets the system or
user-specified default value for the added column when the data is unloaded from
such an image copy.
704
Related reference
Chapter 11, COPY, on page 113
Converting data with the UNLOAD utility

You can convert one data type to another compatible data type by using the
UNLOAD utility. The source type is used for user-defined distinct types.
For example, you can convert columns of a numeric type (SMALLINT, INTEGER,
FLOAT, DOUBLE, REAL, and DECIMAL) from the DB2 internal format to the
S/390 or an external format.
When you unload a floating-point type column, you can specify the binary form of
the output to either the S/390 format (hexadecimal floating point, or HFP), or the
IEEE format (binary floating point, or BFP).
You can also convert a varying-length column to a fixed-length output field, with
or without padding characters. In either case, unless you explicitly specify a
fixed-length data type for the field, the data itself is treated as a varying-length
data, and a length field is appended to the data.
For certain data types, you can unload data into fields with a smaller length by
using the TRUNCATE or STRIP options. In this situation, if a character code
conversion is applied, the length of the data in bytes might change due to the code
conversion. The truncation operation is applied after the code conversion.
You can perform character code conversion on a character type field, including
converting numeric columns to the external format and the CLOB type. Be aware
that when you apply a character code conversion for mixed-data fields, the length
of the result string in bytes can be shorter or longer than the length of the source
string. Character type data is always converted if you specify any of the character
code conversion options (EBCDIC, ASCII, UNICODE, or CCSID).
DATE, TIME, or TIMESTAMP column types are always converted into the external
formats based on the DATE, TIME, and TIMESTAMP formats of your installation.
Output field types

An output field can have a different data type from the one that is defined on a
source table column if the data types are compatible. The UNLOAD utility follows
the general DB2 rules and conventions on the data type attributes and the
compatibility among the data types.
If you specify a data type in the UNLOAD control statement, the field type
information is included in the generated LOAD utility statement. For specific data
type compatibility information, refer to the following table. These tables show the
compatibility of the data type of the source column (input data type) with the data
type of the output field (output data type). A Y indicates that the input data type
can be converted to the output data type.
The following table shows the compatibility of converting numeric data types.
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
705
Table 140. Compatibility of converting numeric data types

Output data types
SMALLINT
INTEGER
(external)
BIGINT
DECIMAL
(external)
FLOAT
(external)
DOUBLE or
REAL
FLOAT/REAL
SMALLINT
Y1
Y1
Y1
INTEGER
Y2
Y1
Y1
Y1
Y2
Y2
Y2
N2
Y3
| Input data types
| BIGINT
DECIMAL
FLOAT, DOUBLE, or
REAL
| DECFLOAT
Y2
1, 2
1, 2
Y1, 2
Y2
1, 2
Y1, 2
Y1, 2
Note:
1. Subject to the CCSID conversion, if specified (EXTERNAL case).
2. Potential overflow (conversion error).
| 3. When converting from DECFLOAT(34) to DECFLOAT(16), you might encounter overflow, underflow, subnormal number, or
inexact. However, there will be no conversion error.
|
The following table shows the compatibility of converting character data types.
Table 141. Compatibility of converting character data types
Output data types
| Input data
| types
BLOB
BLOB
CHAR
VARCHAR
1, 2
1, 2
CLOB
GRAPHIC
EXTERGRAPHIC NAL
VARGRAPHIC
DBCLOB
BINARY
VARBINARY
CLOB
DBCLOB
Y1, 2
Y1, 2, 3
Y1, 2
Y1
CHAR
Y1
Y1
Y1, 4
Y1, 4
Y1
Y1, 3
Y1
Y1
1,2
VARCHAR
or
LONG
VARCHAR
GRAPHIC
VARGRAPHIC or
LONG VARGRAPHIC
| BINARY
| VARBINARY
N
N
1, 2
1, 2, 3
Note:
1. Subject to the CCSID conversion, if specified.
2. Results in an error if the field length is too small for the data unless you specify the TRUNCATE option. Note that a LOB has a
4-byte length field; any other varying-length type has a 2-byte length field.
3. Only in the EBCDIC output mode.
4. Not applicable to BIT subtype data.
The following table shows the compatibility of converting time data types.
706
Table 142. Compatibility of converting time data types

Output data types
Input data types
DATE EXTERNAL
TIME EXTERNAL
TIMESTAMP EXTERNAL
DATE
Y1, 2
TIME
Y1
TIMESTAMP
1, 3
1, 3
Y1
Note:
1. Subject to the CCSID conversion, if specified.
2. Zeros in the time portion.
3. DATE or TIME portion of the timestamp.
Related reference
Syntax and options of the UNLOAD control statement on page 664
Related information
Data types (DB2 SQL Reference)
Output field positioning and size

By default, output data is always placed in an output record in the order of the
defined columns over the selected tables. You can choose to specify the order of
the output fields by using a list of field specifications.
Use the POSITION option to specify field position in the output records. You can
also specify the size of the output data field by using the length parameter for a
particular data type. The length parameter must indicate the size of the actual data
field. The start parameter of the POSITION option indicates the starting position of
a field, including the NULL indicator byte (if the field can be null) and the length
field (if the field is varying length).
Using the POSITION parameter, the length parameter, or both can restrict the size
of the data field in the output records. Use care when specifying the POSITION
and length parameters, especially for nullable fields and varying length fields. If a
conflict exists between the length parameter and the size of the field in the output
record that is specified by the POSITION parameters, DB2 issues an error message,
and the UNLOAD utility terminates. If an error occurs, the count of the number of
records in error is incremented. See the description of the MAXERR option of
UNLOAD for more information.
If you specify a length parameter for a varying-length field and you also specify
the NOPAD option, length indicates the maximum length of data that is to be
unloaded. Without the NOPAD option, UNLOAD reserves a space of the given
length instead of the maximum data size.
If you explicitly specify start parameters for certain fields, they must be listed in
ascending order in the field selection list. Unless you specify HEADER NONE for
the table, a fixed-length record header is placed at the beginning of each record for
the table, and the start parameter must not overlap the record header area.
The TRUNCATE option is available for certain output field types. For the output
field types where the TRUNCATE option is not applicable, enough space must be
provided in the output record for each field.
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
707
Related concepts
Layout of output fields
Field specification errors on page 714
Related reference
Syntax and options of the UNLOAD control statement on page 664
Layout of output fields

Output fields have various layouts: fixed-length, nullable fixed-length,
varying-length field, varying-length field without the NOPAD option, nullable
varying-length field with the NOPAD option, and nullable varying-length field
without the NOPAD option
The following figure shows the layout of a fixed-length field that cannot be null.
This diagram shows that the data field begins at a specified position, or at the next
byte position past the end of the previous data field. The data field then continues
for the specified length or the length of the column in the table definition. For
GRAPHIC EXTERNAL data, shift-in and shift-out characters are inserted before
and after the data.
Specified position, or the next byte position
past the end of the previous data field
Default position of the next field
Data field
Length
Specified length, or the length

of the column in the table definition.
For GRAPHIC EXTERNAL (EBCDIC only),
shift-out and shift-in characters are inserted
before and after the data.
Figure 102. Layout of a fixed-length field (NOT NULL)
The following figure shows the layout of a fixed-length field that can be null. This
diagram shows that a null indicator byte is stored before the data field, which
begins at the specified position or at the next byte position past the end of the
previous data field.
Data field
Length
Null indicator byte

of the column in the table definition.
For GRAPHIC EXTERNAL (EBCDIC only),
shift-out and shift-in characters are inserted
before and after the data.
Figure 103. Layout of a nullable fixed-length field
If you are running UNLOAD with the NOPAD option and need to determine the
layout of a varying-length field that cannot be null, see the layout diagram in the
following figure. The length field begins at the specified position or at the next
708
byte position past the end of the previous data field.

Data field
Length
Actual length, up to maximum length
Maximum
length

of the column in the table definition
Length field, which contains the actual data length.

The size of the length field is 4 bytes for LOBs, or
2 bytes for other data types.
Figure 104. Layout of a varying-length field (NOT NULL) with the NOPAD option
For UNLOAD without the NOPAD option, the layout of a varying-length field that
cannot be null is depicted in the following figure.
Data field
Pad
Length
Maximum
length


Figure 105. Layout of a varying-length field (NOT NULL) without the NOPAD option
For UNLOAD with the NOPAD option, the layout of a varying-length field that
can be null is depicted in the following figure. The length field begins at the
specified position or at the next byte position past the end of the previous data
field.
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
709

Data field
Length
Maximum
length


Null indicator byte
Figure 106. Layout of a nullable varying-length field with the NOPAD option
For UNLOAD without the NOPAD option, the layout of a varying-length field that
can be null is depicted in the following figure. The length field begins at the
specified position or at the next byte position past the end of the previous data
field.
Data field
Pad
Length
Maximum
length


Null indicator byte
Figure 107. Layout of a nullable varying-length field without the NOPAD option
Unloading delimited files

You can use the DELIMITED option to specify that UNLOAD is to produce an
output file in delimited format. All fields in the output data set are either in
character string or numeric external format. Each column is separated from the
next by a column delimiter, and character strings are marked by character string
delimiters.
Recommendation: If a delimited file is to be transferred to or from a platform
other than z/OS or between DB2 for z/OS systems that use different EBCDIC or
ASCII CCSIDs, use Unicode as the encoding scheme for the delimited file. Using
Unicode avoids possible CCSID translation problems.
You are responsible for ensuring that the chosen delimiters are not part of the data
in the file. If the delimiters are part of the files data, unexpected errors can occur.
710
Restrictions: The following general restrictions apply to the use of delimiters:

v You cannot specify the same character for more than one type of delimiter
v You can specify a character constant for a delimiter if the utility control
statement is coded in the same encoding scheme as the output file. For example,
the utility control statement is coded in Unicode and the output data is also
coded in Unicode.
v Use the hex representation for non-default delimiters if the utility control
statement is coded in a different encoding scheme than the output file. For
example, the utility control statement is coded in Unicode and the output file is
coded in EBCDIC. In this case, if you do not use the hex representation for the
non-default delimiters, the results can be unpredictable.
v You cannot specify HEADER OBID and ROWID for output fields in delimited
output format. Because a header is not allowed, output must be from a single
table.
v When you specify the DELIMITED option, the utility ignores the POSITION
keyword. The utility overrides field data type specifications according to the
specifications of the delimited format. (For example, length values for CHAR,
VARCHAR, GRAPHIC, VARGRAPHIC, CLOB, DBCLOB, and BLOB data are the
delimited lengths of each field in the output data set, and the utility unloads all
numeric types in external format.)
v You cannot specify a binary 0 (zero) for any delimiter.
v No null byte is present for a delimited output file. A null value is indicated by
the absence of a cell value where one would normally occur. For example, two
successive column delimiters or a missing column at the end of a record indicate
a null value.
v You cannot use the default decimal point as a character string delimiter
(CHARDEL) or a column string delimiter (COLDEL).
v Shift-in and shift-out characters cannot be specified as EBCDIC MBCS delimiters.
v In the DBCS environment, the pipe character ( | ) is not supported.
v If the output is coded in ASCII or Unicode, you cannot specify any of the
following values for any delimiter: X0A, X0D, X2E.
v If the output is coded in EBCDIC, you cannot specify any of the following
values for any delimiter: X15, X0D, X25.
v If the output is coded in EBCDIC DBCS or MBCS, you cannot specify any of the
following values for character string delimiters: X0D, X15, X25, X4B.
The following table lists by encoding scheme the default hex values for the
delimiter characters.
Table 143. Default delimiter values for different encoding schemes
Character
EBCDIC SBCS
EBCDIC
DBCS/MBCS
ASCII/Unicode
SBCS
ASCII/Unicode
MBCS
Character string
delimiter
X7F
X7F
X22
X22
Decimal point
character
X4B
X4B
X2E
X2E
Column
delimiter
X6B
X6B
X2C
X2C
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
711
In most EBCDIC code pages, the hex values in the previous table represent a
double quotation mark() for the character string delimiter, a period(.) for the
decimal point character, and a comma(,) for the column delimiter.
The following table lists by encoding scheme the maximum allowable hex values
for any delimiter character.
Table 144. Maximum delimiter values for different encoding schemes
Encoding scheme
Maximum allowable value
EBCDIC SBCS
None
EBCDIC DBCS/MBCS
X3F
ASCII/Unicode SBCS
None
ASCII/Unicode MBCS
X7F
Table 145. Acceptable data type forms for delimited files
Acceptable form for loading a
delimited file
Form that is created by unloading a

delimited file
CHAR, VARCHAR
A delimited or non-delimited
character string
Character data that is enclosed by

character delimiters. For VARCHAR,
length bytes do not precede the data
in the string.
GRAPHIC (any type)
character stream
Data that is unloaded as a delimited

character string. For VARGRAPHIC,
length bytes do not precede the data
in the string.
INTEGER (any type)
A stream of characters that represents Numeric data in external format.

a number in EXTERNAL format
Decimal (any type)
A character stream that represents a

number in EXTERNAL format
A string of characters that represents

a number.
FLOAT
Representation of a number in the

range -7.2E + 75 to 7.2E + 75in
EXTERNAL format

a number in floating-point notation.
BLOB, CLOB
character string

character delimiters. Length bytes do
not precede the data in the string.
DBCLOB
character string

character delimiters. Length bytes do
not precede the data in the string.
DATE
character string that contains a date
value in EXTERNAL format

a date.
TIME
character string that contains a time
value in EXTERNAL format

a time.
TIMESTAMP
character string that contains a
timestamp value in EXTERNAL
format

a timestamp.
Data type
712
Table 145. Acceptable data type forms for delimited files (continued)
Data type
XML
Acceptable form for loading a

delimited file
Form that is created by unloading a

delimited file
A delimited or non-delimited XML

character string

an XML document.
Related concepts
Loading delimited files on page 263
Related reference
Appendix G, Delimited file format, on page 1011
Specifying TRUNCATE and STRIP options for output data

You can unload certain types of data into output fields that are shorter than the
length of the output data. This data truncation occurs only when you explicitly
specify the TRUNCATE option. Any CCSID conversion is applied first, and then
truncation is applied to encoded data for output.
For bit strings, truncation occurs at a byte boundary. For character type data,
truncation occurs at a character boundary (a multi-byte character is not split). If a
mixed-character type data is truncated in an output field of fixed size, the
truncated string can be shorter than the specified field size. In this case, blanks in
the output CCSID are padded to the right. If the output data is in EBCDIC for a
mixed-character type field, truncation preserves the SO (shift-out) and the SI
(shift-in) characters around a DBCS substring.
The TRUNCATE option of the UNLOAD utility truncates string data, and it has a
different purpose than the SQL TRUNCATE scalar function.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For VARCHAR and VARGRAPHIC, and VARBINARY output fields, in addition to

the TRUNCATE option, the STRIP option is provided to remove the specified
characters, or the leading blanks, the trailing blanks, or both. The strip operation is
applied on the encoded data for output. If both the TRUNCATE and STRIP options
are specified, the truncation operation is applied first, and then strip is applied. For
example, the output for an UNLOAD job in which you specify both the
TRUNCATE and STRIP options for a VARCHAR(5) output field is shown in the
following table. In this table, an underscore represents a character that is to be
stripped. In all cases, the source string is first truncated to '_ABC_' (a five-character
string to fit in the VARCHAR(5) field), and then the strip operation is applied.
Table 146. Results of specifying both the TRUNCATE and STRIP options for UNLOAD
Specified STRIP
option
Source string
Truncated string Output string
Specified
length
STRIP BOTH
'_ABC_DEF'
'_ABC_'
'ABC'
STRIP LEADING
'_ABC_DEF'
'_ABC_'
'ABC_'
STRIP TRAILING
'_ABC_DEF'
'_ABC_'
'_ABC'
Generating LOAD statements

To enable reloading the unloaded data into either the original table or different
tables, a LOAD utility statement is generated and written to the SYSPUNCH DD
name or to the DD name that is specified by PUNCHDDN.
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
713
The generated LOAD statement includes WHEN and INTO TABLE specifications
that identify the table where the rows are to be reloaded, unless the HEADER
NONE option was specified in the UNLOAD control statement. You need to edit
the generated LOAD statement if you intend to load the UNLOAD output data
into different tables than the original ones.
If multiple table spaces are to be unloaded and you want UNLOAD to generate
LOAD statements, you must specify a physically distinct data set for each table
space to PUNCHDDN by using a template that contains the table space as a
variable (&TS.).
If PUNCHDDN is not specified and the SYSPUNCH DD name does not exist, the
LOAD statement is not generated.
Unloading compressed data

You can unload compressed rows from an image copy data set only when the
dictionary for decompression has been retrieved. If a row is compressed and the
dictionary the dictionary pages have not been read when the row is encountered,
the UNLOAD utility ignores this row, issues a warning message, and increments
the error count.
If the error count reaches the limit that is specified by the MAXERR option,
UNLOAD terminates with an error message.
If the image copy data set is an incremental copy or a copy of pieces that does not
contain a dictionary, the FROMCOPYDDN option can be used for a DD name to
concatenate the data set with the corresponding full image copy that contains the
dictionary. If SYSTEMPAGES YES is used, a dictionary will always be available in
the incremental copies or pieces.
Field specification errors

If the UNLOAD utility detects any inconsistency relating to the field specification,
including a problem in data conversion or encoding while unloading a row, DB2
issues an error message.
If the MAXERR option specifies a number that is greater than zero, the UNLOAD
utility continues processing until the total number of the records in error reaches
the specified MAXERR number. DB2 issues one message for each record in error
and does not unload the record.
Termination or restart of UNLOAD

You can terminate and restart an UNLOAD utility job.
If you terminate UNLOAD by using the TERM UTILITY command during the
unload phase, the output records are not erased. The output data set remains
incomplete until you either delete it or restart the utility job.
When the source is one or more table spaces, you can restart the UNLOAD job at
the partition level or at the table space level when data is unloaded from multiple
table spaces by using the LIST option. When you restart a terminated UNLOAD
job, processing begins with the table spaces or partitions that had not yet been
714
completed. For a table space or partitions that were being processed at termination,
UNLOAD resets the output data sets and processes those table space or partitions
again.
When the source is one or more image copy data sets (when FROMCOPY or
FROMCOPYDDN is specified), UNLOAD always starts processing from the
beginning.
Related concepts
Sample UNLOAD control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own UNLOAD
control statements.
Example 1: Unloading all columns of specified rows

The control statement specifies that all columns of rows that meet the following
criteria are to be unloaded from table DSN8810.EMP in table space
DSN8D91A.DSN8S71E:
v The value in the WORKDEPT column is D11.
v The value in the SALARY column is greater than 25 000.
//STEP1
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='SMPLUNLD',UTPROC='',SYSTEM='DSN'
//SYSREC
DD DSN=USERID.SMPLUNLD.SYSREC,
//
//
//SYSPUNCH DD DSN=USERID.SMPLUNLD.SYSPUNCH,
//
//
//SYSIN
DD *
UNLOAD TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S81E
WHEN (WORKDEPT = 'D11' AND SALARY > 25000)
Figure 108. Example of unloading all columns of specified rows
Example 2: Unloading specific columns by using a field

specification list
The following control statement specifies that columns EMPNO, LASTNAME, and
SALARY are to be unloaded, in that order, for all rows that meet the specified
conditions. These conditions are specified in the WHEN clause and are the same as
those conditions in example 1. The SALARY column is to be unloaded as type
DECIMAL EXTERNAL. The NOPAD option indicates that variable-length fields are
to be unloaded without any padding.
UNLOAD TABLESPACE DSN8D91A.DSN8S81E NOPAD
(EMPNO, LASTNAME, SALARY DECIMAL EXTERNAL)
WHEN (WORKDEPT = 'D11' AND SALARY > 25000)
The output from this example might look similar to the following output:
000060@@STERN#
32250.00
000150@@ADAMSON#
25280.00
000200@@BROWN#
27740.00
000220@@LUTZ#
29840.00
200220@@JOHN#
29840.00
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
715
In this output:
v @@ before the last name represents the 2-byte binary field that contains the
length of the VARCHAR field LASTNAME (for example, X0005 for STERN).
v # represents the NULL indicator byte for the nullable SALARY field.
v Because the SALARY column is declared as DECIMAL (9,2) on the table, the
default output length of the SALARY field is 11 (9 digits + sign + decimal point),
not including the NULL indicator byte.
v LASTNAME is unloaded as a variable-length field because the NOPAD option is
specified.
Example 3: Unloading data from an image copy

The FROMCOPY option in the following control statement specifies that data is to
be unloaded from a single image copy data set,
JUKWU111.FCOPY1.STEP1.FCOPY1.
PUNCHDDN SYSPUNCH specifies that the UNLOAD utility is to generate LOAD
utility control statements and write them to the data set that is defined by the
SYSPUNCH DD statement; SYSPUNCH is the default. UNLDDN SYSREC specifies
that the data is to be unloaded to the data set that is defined by the SYSREC DD
statement; SYSREC is the default.
UNLOAD TABLESPACE DBKW1101.TPKW1101
FROMCOPY JUKWU111.FCOPY1.STEP1.FCOPY1
PUNCHDDN SYSPUNCH UNLDDN SYSREC
Example 4: Unloading a sample of rows and specifying a header.

The following control statement specifies that a sample of rows is to be unloaded
from table ADMF001.TBKW1605. Unloading a sample of rows is useful for
building a test system. The SAMPLE option indicates that 75% of the rows are to
be sampled. The HEADER option indicates that the string sample is to be used as
the header field in the output file. The PUNCHDDN option indicates that
UNLOAD is to generate LOAD utility control statements and write them to the
SYSPUNCH data set, which is the default. UNLOAD specifies the header field as a
criterion in the WHEN clause of these LOAD statements.
UNLOAD TABLESPACE DBKW1603.TPKW1603
FROM TABLE ADMF001.TBKW1605
HEADER CONST 'sample'
SAMPLE 75
Example 5: Unloading data from two tables in a segmented table

space
The following control statement specifies that data from table
ADMF001.TBKW1504 and table ADMF001.TBKW1505 is to be unloaded from the
segmented table space DBKW1502.TSKW1502. The PUNCHDDN option indicates
that UNLOAD is to generate LOAD utility control statements and write them to
the SYSPUNCH data set, which is the default. The UNLDDN option specifies that
the data is to be unloaded to the data set that is defined by the SYSREC DD
statement, which is also the default.
UNLOAD TABLESPACE DBKW1502.TSKW1502
716
Example 6: Unloading data in parallel from a partitioned table

space
The UNLOAD control statement specifies that data from table TCRT.TTBL is to be
unloaded to data sets that are defined by the UNLDDS template. These data sets
are to be dynamically allocated and named according to the naming convention
that is defined by the DSN option of the TEMPLATE utility control statement. This
naming convention indicates that a data set is to be allocated for each table space
partition.
Assume that table space TDB1.TSP1, which contains table TCRT.TTBL, has three
partitions. Because the table space is partitioned and each partition is associated
with an output data set that is defined by the UNLDDS template, the UNLOAD
job runs in parallel in a multi-processor environment. The number of parallel tasks
are determined by the number of available processors.
//STEP1
//SYSPUNCH
//
//
//SYSPRINT
//SYSIN
TEMPLATE
DD DSN=USERID.SMPLUNLD.SYSPUNCH,
DD SYSOUT=*
DD *
UNLDDS
DSN &USERID..SMPLUNLD.&TS..P&PART.
UNIT SYSDA DISP (NEW,CATLG,CATLG) SPACE (2,1) CYL
UNLOAD TABLESPACE TDB1.TSP1
UNLDDN UNLDDS
FROM TABLE TCRT.TTBL
Figure 109. Example of unloading data in parallel from a partitioned table space
Assume that the user ID is USERID. This UNLOAD job creates the following three
data sets to store the unloaded data:
v USERID.SMPLUNLD.TSP1.P00001 ... contains rows from partition 1.
Example 7: Using a LISTDEF utility statement to specify

partitions to unload
The UNLOAD control statement specifies that data that is included in the
UNLDLIST list is to be unloaded. UNLDLIST is defined in the LISTDEF utility
control statement and contains partitions one and three of table space TDB1.TSP1.
The LIST option of the UNLOAD statement specifies that the UNLOAD utility is
to use this list.
The data is to be unloaded to data sets that are defined by the UNLDDS template.
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
717
//SAMPJOB
//STEP1
//SYSPUNCH
//
//
//SYSPRINT
//SYSIN
LISTDEF
JOB ...
DD DSN=USERID.SMPLUNLD.SYSPUNCH,
DD SYSOUT=*
DD *
UNLDLIST
INCLUDE TABLESPACE TDB1.TSP1 PARTLEVEL(1)
INCLUDE TABLESPACE TDB1.TSP1 PARTLEVEL(3)
TEMPLATE UNLDDS
DSN &USERID..SMPLUNLD.&TS..P&PART.
UNLOAD LIST UNLDLIST
-- LIST name
UNLDDN UNLDDS
-- TEMPLATE name
Figure 110. Example of using a LISTDEF utility statement to specify partitions to unload
Assume that the user ID is USERID. This UNLOAD job creates the following two
Example 8: Unloading multiple table spaces by using LISTDEF

The UNLOAD control statement specifies that data from multiple table spaces is to
be unloaded. These table spaces are specified in the LISTDEF utility control
statement. Assume that the database TDB1 contains two table spaces that can be
expressed by the pattern-matching string TSP*, (for example, TSP1 and TSP2).
These table spaces are both included in the list named UNLDLIST, which is
defined in the LISTDEF statement. The LIST option of the UNLOAD statement
specifies that the UNLOAD utility is to use this list.
The UNLDDN option specifies that the data is to be unloaded to data sets that are
defined by the UNLDDS template. The PUNCHDDN option specifies that
UNLOAD is to generate LOAD utility control statements and write them to the
data sets that are defined by the PUNCHDS template.
//SAMPJOB
//STEP1
//SYSPRINT
//SYSIN
LISTDEF
JOB ...
DD SYSOUT=*
DD *
UNLDLIST
INCLUDE TABLESPACE TDB1.TSP*
TEMPLATE UNLDDS
DSN &USERID..SMPLUNLD.&TS.
TEMPLATE PUNCHDS DSN &USERID..SMPLPUNC.&TS.
UNLOAD LIST UNLDLIST
PUNCHDDN PUNCHDS
-- TEMPLATE name
UNLDDN
UNLDDS
-- TEMPLATE name
Figure 111. Example of unloading multiple table spaces
Assume that the user ID is USERID. This UNLOAD job creates the following two
v USERID.SMPLUNLD.TSP1 ... contains rows from table space TDB1.TSP1.
v USERID.SMPLUNLD.TSP2 ... contains rows from table space TDB1.TSP2.
718
Example 9: Unloading data into a delimited file.

The control statement specifies that data from the specified columns (RECID,
CHAR7SBCS, CHAR7BIT, VCHAR20, VCHAR20SBCS, VCHAR20BIT) in table
TBQB0501 is to be unloaded into a delimited file. This output format is indicated
by the DELIMITED option. The POSITION(*) option indicates that each field in the
output file is to start at the first byte after the last position of the previous field.
The column delimiter is specified by the COLDEL option as a semicolon (;), the
character string delimiter is specified by the CHARDEL option as a pound sign (#),
and the decimal point character is specified by the DECPT option as an
exclamation point (!).
PUNCHDDN SYSPUNCH specifies that UNLOAD is to generate LOAD utility
control statements and store them in the SYSPUNCH data set, which is the default.
UNLDDN SYSREC indicates that the data is to be unloaded to the SYSREC data
set, which is the default.
The EBCDIC option indicates that all output character data is to be in EBCDIC.
//*
//STEP3
EXEC DSNUPROC,UID='JUQBU105.UNLD1',
//
UTPROC='',
//
SYSTEM='SSTR'
//SYSREC
DD DSN=JUQBU105.UNLD1.STEP3.TBQB0501,DISP=(MOD,DELETE,CATLG),
//
//SYSPUNCH DD DSN=JUQBU105.UNLD1.STEP3.SYSPUNCH
//
DISP=(MOD,CATLG,CATLG)
//
//SYSIN
DD*
UNLOAD TABLESPACE DBQB0501.TSQB0501
DELIMITED CHARDEL '#' COLDEL ';' DECPT '!'
PUNCHDDN SYSPUNCH
UNLDDN SYSREC EBCDIC
FROM TABLE ADMF001.TBQB0501
(RECID
POSITION(*) CHAR,
CHAR7SBCS
POSITION(*) CHAR,
CHAR7SBIT
POSITION(*) CHAR(7),
VCHAR20
POSITION(*) VARCHAR,
VCHAR20SBCS POSITION(*) VARCHAR,
VCHAR20BIT POSITION(*) VARCHAR)
/*
Figure 112. Example of unloading data into a delimited file.
Example 10: Converting character data

For this example, assume that table DSN8810.DEMO_UNICODE contains character
data in Unicode. The UNLOAD control statement specifies that the utility is to
unload the data in this table as EBCDIC data.
UNLOAD
EBCDIC
TABLSPACE DSN8D81E.DSN8S81U
FROM TABLE DSN8810.DEMO_UNICODE
Figure 113. Example of unloading Unicode table data into EBCDIC
Chapter 32. UNLOAD
719
Example 11: Unloading LOB data to a file

The UNLOAD control statement specifies that the utility is to unload data from
table DSN8910.EMP_PHOTO_RESUME into the data set that is identified by the
SYSREC DD statement. Data in the EMPNO field is six bytes of character data, as
indicated by the CHAR(6) option, and is unloaded directly into the SYSREC data
set. Data in the RESUME column is CLOB data as indicated by the CLOBF option.
This CLOB data is to be unloaded to the files identified by the LOBFRV template,
which is defined in the preceding TEMPLATE statement. If these files do not
already exist, DB2 creates them. The names of these files are stored in the SYSREC
data set. The length of the file name to be stored in this data set can be up to 255
bytes as specified by the VARCHAR option.
TEMPLATE LOBFRV DSN 'UNLDTEST.&DB..&TS..RESUME'
DSNTYPE(PDS) UNIT(SYSDA)
UNLOAD DATA
FROM TABLE DSN8910.EMP_PHOTO_RESUME
(EMPNO CHAR(6),
RESUME VARCHAR(255) CLOBF LOBFRV)
SHRLEVEL CHANGE
Figure 114. Example of unloading LOB data into a file
Example 12: Unloading data from clone tables

The UNLOAD control statement specifies that the utility is to unload data from
only clone tables in the specified table spaces. The PUNCHDDN option specifies
that the SYSPUNCH data set is to receive the LOAD utility control statements that
the UNLOAD utility generates.
|
|
|
|
UNLOAD TABLESPACE DBKQRE01.TPKQRE01

FROM TABLE ADMF001.TBKQRE01_CLONE
CLONE
720
Part 3. DB2 stand-alone utilities

The stand-alone utilities run as batch jobs that are independent of DB2. The only
way to run these utilities is to use JCL.
721
722
Chapter 33. Invoking stand-alone utilities

You can create utility control statements and EXEC PARM parameters for invoking
the stand-alone utilities.
Utility control statements and parameters define the function that a utility job
performs. Some stand-alone utilities read the control statements from an input
stream, and others obtain the function definitions from JCL EXEC PARM
parameters.
Creating utility control statements

Create the utility control statements with the ISPF/PDF edit function. After you
create the control statements, save them in a sequential or partitioned data set.
The following utilities read control statements from the input stream file of the
specified DD name:
Utility DD name
DSNJU003 (change log inventory)
SYSIN
DSNJU004 (print log map)
SYSIN (optional)
DSN1LOGP
SYSIN
DSN1SDMP
SDMPIN
Utility control statements are read from the DD name input stream. The statements
in that stream must conform to the following rules:
v The logical record length (LRECL) must be 80 characters. Columns 73 through
80 are ignored.
v The records are concatenated into a single stream before they are parsed. No
concatenation character is necessary.
v The SYSIN stream can contain multiple utility control statements.
Specifying options by using the JCL EXEC PARM parameter

Use the EXEC PARM parameter to specify function options for the following
stand-alone utilities: DSN1CHKR, DSN1COMP, DSN1COPY, and DSN1PRNT.
Ensure that the parameters that you specify obey the following JCL EXEC PARM
parameter specification rules:
v Enclose multiple subparameters in single quotation marks or parentheses and
separate the subparameters with commas, as in the following example:
//name
EXEC PARM='ABC,...,XYZ'
v Do not let the total length exceed 100 characters.

v Do not use blanks within the parameter specification.
723
To
1.
2.
3.
specify the parameter across multiple lines, perform the following actions:
Enclose it in parentheses.
End the first line with a subparameter, followed by a comma.
Continue the subparameters on the next line, beginning before column 17.
The following example shows a parameter that spans multiple lines:

//stepname
EXEC PARM=(ABC,...LMN,
OPQ,...,XYZ)
Effects of invoking stand-alone utilities on tables that have multilevel

security with row-level granularity
If you use RACF access control with multilevel security, you do not need any
additional authorizations to run stand-alone utilities. When processing tables that
have multilevel security with row-level granularity, stand-alone utilities ignore
row-level granularity. They check only for authorization to operate on the table
space; they do not check row-level authorizations.
Related information
724
Chapter 34. DSNJCNVB

The DSNJCNVB conversion utility converts the bootstrap data set (BSDS) so that it
can support up to 10000 archive log volumes and 93 active log data sets per log
copy.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Running DSNJCNVB is mandatory when migrating from Version 8. DB2 Version

9.1 for z/OS will not start if the BSDS is in the old format. DSNJCNVB can be run
any time after a Version 8 system has migrated to new function mode. Prior to
converting the BSDS to the new format, it can manage only 1 000 archive log
volumes and 31 active log data sets per log copy. Converting the BSDS is optional
up until the migration to DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS. DB2 must be stopped when
running DSNJCNVB..
Environment
Execute the DSNJCNVB utility as a batch job only when DB2 is not running.
Your DB2 subsystem must be in new-function mode to convert the BSDS.
The authorization ID of the DSNJCNVB job must have the requisite RACF
authorization.
Prerequisite actions
If you have migrated to a new version of DB2, you need to create a larger BSDS
before converting it. For a new installation, you do not need to create a larger
BSDS. DB2 provides a larger BSDS definition in installation job DSNTIJIN;
however, if you want to convert the BSDS, you must still run DSNJCNVB.
Required and optional data sets

DSNJCNVB recognizes DD statements with the following DD names:
SYSUT1
Specifies the BSDS copy 1 data set that DSNJCNVB is to use as input. This
statement is required.
SYSUT2
Specifies the BSDS copy 2 data set that DSNJCNVB is to use as input. This
statement is optional.
Specify this statement if you are using dual BSDSs and you want to convert
both with a single execution of DSNJCNVB. You can run DSNJCNVB
separately for each copy if desired.
SYSPRINT
Specifies a data set or print spool class for print output. This statement is
required. The logical record length (LRECL) is 125.
725
Running DSNJCNVB
Use the following EXEC statement to execute this utility:
//EXEC
PGM=DSNJCNVB
Sample DSNJCNVB control statement

The following statements specify that DSNJCNVB is to convert the BSDS so that it
can manage up to 10 000 archive log volumes and 93 active log data sets per log
copy. The SYSUT1 and SYSUT2 statements identify the bootstrap data sets. Only
the SYSUT1 statement is required. The SYSUT2 statement is optional. Specify
SYSUT2 only if you are using dual BSDSs and you want to convert both with a
single execution of DSNJCNVB.
//DSNJCNVB
//STEPLIB
//
//SYSUT1
//SYSUT2
//SYSPRINT
EXEC PGM=DSNJCNVB
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=DSNC810.SDSNEXIT
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=DSNC810.SDSNLOAD
DD DISP=OLD,DSN=DSNC810.BSDS01
DD DISP=OLD,DSN=DSNC810.BSDS02
DD SYSOUT=*
DSNJCNVB output
The following example shows sample DSNJCNVB output:
CONVERSION OF BSDS DATA SET - COPY 1, DSN=DSNC810.BSDS01
SYSTEM TIMESTAMP
- DATE=2003.199 LTIME= 9:40:58.74
UTILITY TIMESTAMP - DATE=2003.216 LTIME=14:26:02.21
PREVIOUS HIKEY
- 04000053
NEW HIKEY
- 040002F0
RECORDS ADDED
- 669
DSNJ260I DSNJCNVB BSDS CONVERSION FOR DDNAME=SYSUT1 COMPLETED SUCCESSFULLY
DSNJ200I DSNJCNVB CONVERT BSDS UTILITY PROCESSING COMPLETED SUCCESSFULLY
Related information
Add a second BSDS (DB2 Installation Guide)
726
Chapter 35. DSNJLOGF (preformat active log)

When writing to an active log data set for the first time, DB2 must preformat a
VSAM control area before writing the log records. The DSNJLOGF utility avoids
this delay by preformatting the active log data sets before bringing them online to
DB2.
The following EXEC statement is used to invoke DSNJLOGF:
//stepname EXEC PGM=DSNJLOGF
Environment
Run DSNJLOGF as a z/OS job.
Required data sets

DSNJLOGF recognizes DD statements with the following DD names.
SYSUT1
Defines the newly defined active log data set that is to be preformatted. The
data set must be an empty VSAM linear data set and less than four gigabytes
in size.
SYSPRINT
Defines the print spool class or data set for print output. The logical record
length (LRECL) is 132.
Sample DSNJLOGF control statement

The control statements in the following figure specify that DSNJLOGF is to
preformat the four active log data sets that are identified by the four SYSUT1 DD
statements.
//JOBLIB DD DSN=DSN910.SDSNLOAD,DISP=SHR
//STEP1
EXEC PGM=DSNJLOGF
//SYSUT1
DD DSN=DSNC910.LOGCOPY1.DS01,DISP=SHR
//STEP2
EXEC PGM=DSNJLOGF
//SYSUT1
//STEP3
EXEC PGM=DSNJLOGF
//SYSUT1
//STEP4
EXEC PGM=DSNJLOGF
//SYSUT1
Figure 115. Sample DSNJLOGF control statement
DSNJLOGF output
The following sample shows the DSNJLOGF output for the first data set in the
previous sample control statement shown above.
727
DSNJ991I DSNJLOGF START OF LOG DATASET PREFORMAT FOR JOB LOGFRMT

DSNJ992I DSNJLOGF LOG DATA SET NAME = DSNC910.LOGCOPY1.DS01
DSNJ996I DSNJLOGF LOG PREFORMAT COMPLETED SUCCESSFULLY, 00015000
RECORDS FORMATTED
728
STEP1
Chapter 36. DSNJU003 (change log inventory)

The DSNJU003 stand-alone utility changes the bootstrap data sets (BSDSs).
You can use the utility to:
v Add or delete active or archive log data sets
v Add or delete checkpoint records
v Create a conditional restart control record to control the next start of the DB2
subsystem
v Change the VSAM catalog name entry in the BSDS
v Modify the communication record in the BSDS
v Modify the value for the highest-written log RBA value (relative byte address
within the log) or the highest-offloaded RBA value
Environment
Execute the change log inventory utility only as a batch job when DB2 is not
running. Changing a BSDS for a data-sharing member by using DSNJU003 might
cause a log read request from another data-sharing member to fail. The failure
occurs only if the second member tries to access the changed BSDS before the first
member is started.
The authorization ID of the DSNJU003 job must have the requisite RACF
authorization.

DSNJU003 recognizes DD statements with the following DD names:
SYSUT1
Specifies and allocates the bootstrap data set. This statement is required.
SYSUT2
Specifies and allocates a second copy of the bootstrap data set. This statement
is required if you use dual BSDSs.
Dual BSDSs and DSNJU003: With each execution of DSNJU003, the BSDS
timestamp field is updated with the current system time. If you run DSNJU003
separately for each copy of a dual copy BSDS, the timestamp fields are not
synchronized, and DB2 fails at startup. If you change the contents of the BSDS
copy by running DSNJU003, DB2 issues error message DSNJ122I. Therefore, if
you use DSNJU003 to update dual copy BSDSs, update both BSDSs within a
single execution of DSNJU003.
SYSPRINT
Specifies a data set for print output. This statement is required. The logical
record length (LRECL) is 125.
SYSIN
Specifies the input data set for statements. This statement is required. The
logical record length (LRECL) is 80.
729
Running DSNJU003
Execute the utility with the following statement, which can be included only in a
batch job:
//EXEC
PGM=DSNJU003

The DSNJU003 utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
DSNJU003 uses multiple statements that you submit in separate jobs. The
statements are:
v NEWLOG
v DELETE
v CRESTART
v NEWCAT
v DDF
v CHECKPT
v HIGHRBA
DSNJU003 (change log inventory) syntax diagram

NEWLOG statement
NEWLOG DSNAME=data-set-name
new active log

new archive log

STARTIME=startime,ENDTIME=endtime
new active log:
,COPY1
,COPY2

,STARTRBA=startrba,ENDRBA=endrba
new archive log:
,CATALOG=NO
,COPY1VOL=vol-id
,COPY2VOL=vol-id
,STARTRBA=startrba,ENDRBA=endrba,UNIT=unit-id

STRTLRSN=startlrsn,ENDLRSN=endlrsn
DELETE statement
730

,CATALOG=YES
DELETE
DSNAME=data-set-name

,COPY1VOL=vol-id
,COPY2VOL=vol-id
CCSIDS
CRESTART statement
CRESTART
CREATE
CANCEL
create-spec
create-spec:

,STARTRBA=startrba
,ENDRBA=endrba
,ENDLRSN=endlrsn
,SYSPITR=log-truncation-point
,ENDTIME=log-truncation-timestamp
,SYSPITRT=log-truncation-timestamp
,FORWARD=YES
,CHKPTRBA=chkptrba
,BACKOUT=YES

,FORWARD=NO
,CSRONLY
,BACKOUT=NO
NEWCAT statement
NEWCAT VSAMCAT=catalog-name
DDF statement
|
|
|
DDF
ip-spec
lu-spec
no-spec
ip-spec:
731
,
LOCATION=locname
PORT=port
RESPORT=resport
SECPORT=secport
,
ALIAS= alias-name
:
:
:
alias-port
alias-secport
alias-port-:alias-secport
IPNAME=ipname
,
IPV4=IPV4-address
,GRPIPV4=group-ipv4-addr
IPV6=IPV6-address
,GRPIPV6=group-ipv6-addr
lu-spec:
,

LOCATION=locname
LUNAME=luname
PASSWORD=password
GENERIC=gluname
PORT=port
RESPORT=resport
,
ALIAS= alias-name
:alias-port
no-spec:
NOPASSWD
NGENERIC
NOALIAS
NOIPV4 , NGRPIPV4
NOIPV6 , NGRPIPV6
NGRPIPV4
NGRPIPV6
NOIPNAME
NOLUNAME
732
CHECKPT statement
CHECKPT STARTRBA=startrba
,ENDRBA=endrba ,TIME=time

,ENDLRSN=endlrsn
,CANCEL
HIGHRBA statement
HIGHRBA
STARTRBA=startrba
,TIME=time
,OFFLRBA=offlrba
OFFLRBA=offlrba
Option descriptions
NEWLOG
Declares one of the following data sets:
v A VSAM data set that is available for use as an active log data set.
Use only the keywords DSNAME=, COPY1, and COPY2.
v An active log data set that is replacing one that encountered an I/O error.
Use only the keywords DSNAME=, COPY1, COPY2, STARTRBA=, and
ENDRBA=.
v An archive log data set volume.
Use only the keywords DSNAME=,COPY1VOL=, COPY2VOL=,
STARTRBA=, ENDRBA=, UNIT=, CATALOG=, STRTLRSN=, and
ENDLRSN=.
If you create an archive log data set and add it to the BSDS with this utility,
you can specify a name that DB2 might also generate. DB2 generates archive
log data set names of the form DSNCAT.ARCHLOGx.Annnnnnn where:
DSNCAT and ARCHLOG are parts of the data set prefix that you
specified on installation panels DSNTIPA2 and DSNTIPH.
x is 1 for the first copy of the logs, and 2 is for the second copy.
Annnnnnn represents the series of low-level qualifiers that DB2 generates
for archive log data set names, beginning with A0000001, and
incrementing to A0000002, A0000003, and so forth.
For data sharing, the naming convention is DSNCAT.ARCHLOG1 or
DSNCAT.DSN1.ARCLG1.
If you do specify a name by using the same naming convention as DB2, you
receive a dynamic allocation error when DB2 generates that name. The error
message, DSNJ103I, is issued once. DB2 then increments the low-level
qualifier to generate the next data set name in the series and offloads to it
the next time DB2 archives. (The active log that previously was not
offloaded is offloaded to this data set.)
The newly defined active logs cannot specify a start and end LRSN. When
DB2 starts, it reads the new active log data sets with an RBA range to
determine the LRSN range, and updates the start and end LRSN in the
BSDS for the new log data sets. The start and end LRSN for new active logs
733
that contain active log data are read at DB2 start-up time from the new
active log data sets that are specified in the change log inventory NEWLOG
statements. For new archive logs that are defined with change log inventory,
the user must specify the start and end RBAs. For data sharing, the user
must also specify the start and end LRSNs. DB2 startup does not attempt to
find these values from the new archive log data sets.
DSNAME= data-set-name
Specifies a log data set.
data-set-name can be up to 44 characters long.
COPY1
Makes the data set an active log copy-1 data set.
COPY2
Makes the data set an active log copy-2 data set.
STARTRBA= startrba
Identifies a hexadecimal number of up to 12 characters. If you use fewer than
12 characters, leading zeros are added. startrba must end with 000; otherwise
DB2 returns a DSNJ4381 error message. You can obtain the RBA from messages
or by printing the log map.
On the NEWLOG statement, startrba gives the log RBA of the beginning of the
replacement active log data set or the archive log data set volume that is
specified by DSNAME.
On the CRESTART statement, startrba is the earliest RBA of the log that is to
be used during restart. If you omit STARTRBA, DB2 determines the beginning
of the log range.
On the CHECKPT statement, startrba indicates the start checkpoint log record.
STARTRBA is required when STARTIME is specified.
On the HIGHRBA statement, startrba denotes the log RBA of the
highest-written log record in the active log data sets.
ENDRBA= endrba
endrba is a hexadecimal number of up to 12 characters. If you use fewer than
12 characters, leading zeros are added. endrba must end with 000 or DB2
returns a DSNJ4381 error message.
On the NEWLOG statement, endrba gives the log RBA (relative byte address
within the log) of the end of the replacement active log data set or the archive
log data set volume that is specified by DSNAME.
On the CRESTART statement, endrba is the last RBA of the log that is to be
used during restart, and it is also the starting RBA of the next active log that is
written after restart. Any log information in the bootstrap data set, the active
logs, and the archive logs with an RBA that is greater than endrba is discarded.
If you omit ENDRBA, DB2 determines the end of the log range.
The value of ENDRBA must be a multiple of 4096. (The hexadecimal value
must end in 000.) Also, the value must be greater than or equal to the value of
STARTRBA. If STARTRBA and ENDRBA are equal, the next restart is a cold
start; that is, no log records are processed during restart. The specified RBA
becomes the beginning RBA of the new log.
On the CHECKPT statement, endrba indicates the end checkpoint log record
that corresponds to the start checkpoint log record.
734
COPY1VOL= vol-id
vol-id is the volume serial of the copy-1 archive log data set that is specified
after DSNAME.
COPY2VOL=vol-id
vol-id is the volume serial of the copy-2 archive log data set that is specified
after DSNAME.
UNIT=unit-id
unit-id is the device type of the archive log data set that is named after
DSNAME.
CATALOG
Indicates whether the archive log data set is to be cataloged.
NO
Indicates that the archive log data set is not to be cataloged. All subsequent
allocations of the data set are made using the unit and volume information
that is specified on the statement.
YES
Indicates that the archive log data set is to be cataloged. All subsequent
allocations of the data set are made using the catalog.
DB2 requires that all archive log data sets on disk be cataloged. Select
CATALOG=YES if the archive log data set is on disk.
STRTLRSN= startlrsn
On the NEWLOG statement, startlrsn identifies the LRSN in the log record
header of the first complete log record on the new archive data set. startlrsn is
a hexadecimal number of up to 12 characters. If you use fewer than 12
characters, leading zeros are added. In a data sharing environment, run the
print log map utility to find an archive log data set and start and end RBAs
and LRSNs.
ENDLRSN=endlrsn
endlrsn is a hexadecimal number of up to 12 characters. If you use fewer than
12 characters, leading zeros are added. In a data sharing environment, run the
print log map utility to find an archive log data set and start and end RBAs
and LRSNs.
For the NEWLOG and CHECKPT statements, the ENDLRSN option is valid
only in a data sharing environment. For the CRESTART statement, the
ENDLRSN option is valid in both data sharing and non-data sharing
environments. This option cannot be specified with STARTRBA or ENDRBA.
On the NEWLOG statement, endlrsn is the LRSN in the log record header of
the last log record on the new archive data set.
On the CRESTART statement, in a data sharing environment, endlrsn is an
LRSN value that is to be used as the log truncation point. A valid log
truncation point is any LRSN value for which there exists a log record with an
LRSN that is greater than or equal to the specified LRSN value. Any log
information in the bootstrap data set, the active logs, and the archive logs with
an LRSN greater than endlrsn is discarded. If you omit ENDLRSN, DB2
determines the end of the log range.
In a non-data sharing environment, endlrsn is the RBA value that matches the
start of the last log record that is to be used during restart. Any log
information in the bootstrap data set, the active logs, and the archive logs with
an RBA that is greater than endlrsn is discarded. If the endlrsn RBA value does
735
not match the start of a log record, DB2 restart fails. If you omit ENDLRSN,
DB2 determines the end of the log range.
On the CHECKPT statement, endlrsn is the LRSN of the end checkpoint log
record.
STARTIME=startime
Enables you to record the start time of the RBA in the BSDS. This field is
optional.
startime specifies the start time in the following timestamp format:
yyyydddhhmmsst
In this
yyyy
ddd
hh
mm
ss
t
format:
Indicates
Indicates
Indicates
Indicates
Indicates
Indicates
the year (1989-2099).

the day of the year (0-365; 366 in leap years).
the hour (0-23).
the minutes (0-59).
the seconds (0-59).
tenths of a second.
If fewer than 14 digits are specified for the STARTIME or ENDTIME

parameter, trailing zeros are added.
If STARTIME is specified, the ENDTIME, STARTRBA, and ENDRBA options
must also be specified.
ENDTIME= endtime
Enables you to record the end time of the RBA in the BSDS. This field is
optional.
endtime specifies the end time in the same timestamp format as the STARTIME
option. The ENDTIME value must be greater than or equal to the value of
STARTIME.
DELETE
Deletes either CCSID information or log data set information from the
bootstrap data sets. To delete CCSID information, specify the CCSIDS option.
To delete all information for a specified log data set or volume, specify the
DSNAME option.
CCSIDS
Deletes CCSID information from the BSDS. CCSID information is stored in the
BSDS to ensure that you do not accidentally change the CCSID values.
Use this option under the direction of IBM Software Support when the CCSID
information in the BSDS is incorrect. After you run a DSNJU003 job with the
DELETE CCSIDS option, the CCSID values from DSNHDECP are recorded in
the BSDS the next time DB2 is started.
CRESTART
Controls the next restart of DB2, either by creating a new conditional restart
control record or by canceling the one that is currently active.
CREATE
Creates a new conditional restart control record. When the new record is
created, the previous control record becomes inactive.
SYSPITR=log-truncation-point
Specifies the log RBA (non-data sharing system) or the log LRSN (data sharing
system) that represents the log truncation point for the point-in-time for system
recovery. Before you run the RESTORE SYSTEM utility to recover system data,
|
|
|
736
|
|
|
|
you must use the SYSPITR option of DSNJU003. This option enables you to
create a conditional restart control record to truncate the logs for system
point-in-time recovery. You can also specify a value of FFFFFFFFFFFF to cause
a point-in-time recovery to occur without log truncation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
log-truncation-point specifies the log RBA, log LRSN, or log FFFFFFFFFFFF. In a

non-data sharing environment, log-truncation point is the RBA value that
matches the start of the last log record that is to be used during restart. If the
RBA value does not match the start of a log record, DB2 restart fails. In a data
sharing environment, log-truncation point is an LRSN value that is a valid log
truncation point. A valid log truncation point is any LRSN value for which
there exists a log record with an LRSN that is greater than or equal to the
specified LRSN value. Use the same LRSN value for all members of the data
sharing group that require log truncation.
|
|
You cannot specify any other option with CREATE, SYSPITR. You can run this
option of the utility only after new-function mode is enabled.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
ENDTIME= log-truncation-timestamp
Specifies an end time value that is to be used as the log truncation point. A
valid truncation point is any GMT timestamp for which there exists a log
record with a timestamp that is greater than or equal to the specified
timestamp value. Any log information in the bootstrap data set, the active logs,
and the archive logs with a timestamp greater than the ENDTIME is discarded.
If you do not specify ENDTIME, DB2 determines the end of the log range.
|
|
You cannot specify any other option with CREATE, ENDTIME. You can run
this option of the utility only after new-function mode is enabled.
|
|
|
|
|
|
SYSPITRT= log-truncation-timestamp
Specifies the timestamp value that represents the point-in-time log truncation
point for system recovery. Before you run the RESTORE SYSTEM utility to
recover system data, you must use the SYSPITR or SYSPITRT option of
DSNJU003. The options enable you to create a conditional restart control record
to truncate the logs for system point-in-time recovery.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Log-truncation-timestamp specifies a timestamp value that is to be used as the

log truncation point. A valid log truncation point is any GMT timestamp for
which there exists a log record with a timestamp that is greater than or equal
to the specified timestamp value. Any log information in the bootstrap data
set, the active logs, and the archive logs with a timestamp greater than
SYSPITRT is discarded. If you omit SYSPITRT, DB2 determined the end of the
log range. Use the same timestamp value for all members of the data sharing
group that require log truncation.
|
|
You cannot specify any other option with CREATE, SYSPITRT. You can run this
option of the utility only after new-function mode is enabled.
|
|
Note: The startime keyword specifies the start time in the yyyydddhhmmsst
timestamp format. See the STARTIME option for details about the timestamp.
|
|
|
CANCEL
On the CRESTART statement, deactivates the currently active conditional
restart control record. The record remains in the BSDS as historical information.
No other keyword can be used with CANCEL on the CRESTART statement.
|
|
|
On the CHECKPT statement, deletes the checkpoint queue entry that contains
a starting RBA that matches the parameter that is specified by the STARTRBA
keyword.
737
Attention: This statement can override DB2s efforts to maintain data in a

consistent state. Do not use this statement without understanding the
conditional restart process.
|
|
|
|
|
|
CHKPTRBA= chkptrba
Identifies the log RBA of the start of the checkpoint record that is to be used
during restart.
|
|
|
If you use STARTRBA or ENDRBA, and you do not use CHKPTRBA, the
DSNJU003 utility selects the RBA of an appropriate checkpoint record. If you
do use CHKPTRBA, you override the value that is selected by the utility.
|
|
chkptrba must be in the range that is determined by startrba and endrba or their
default values.
|
|
If possible, do not use CHKPTRBA; let the utility determine the RBA of the
checkpoint record.
|
|
CHKPTRBA=0 overrides any selection by the utility; at restart, DB2 attempts to

use the most recent checkpoint record.
FORWARD=
Indicates whether to use the forward-log-recovery phase of DB2 restart, which
reads the log in a forward direction to recover any units of recovery that were
in one of the following two states when DB2 was last stopped:
v Indoubt (the units of recovery had finished the first phase of commit, but
had not started the second phase)
v In-commit (had started but had not finished the second phase of commit)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
YES
Allows forward-log recovery.
|
|
If you specify a cold start (by using the same value for STARTRBA and
ENDRBA), no recovery processing is performed.
|
|
NO
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Terminates forward-log recovery before log records are processed. When

you specify, FORWARD=NO, DB2 does not go back in the log to the
beginning of any indoubt or in-commit units of recovery to complete
forward recovery for these units. Choose this option if a very old indoubt
unit of recovery exists to avoid a lengthy restart. The in-commit and
indoubt units of recovery are marked as bypassed and complete in the log.
However, any database writes that are pending at the end of the log,
including updates from other units of recovery, are still written out during
the forward phase of restart. Any updates that must be rolled-back, such as
for an inflight or in-abort unit of recovery, are done during the backout
phase of restart.
BACKOUT=
Indicates whether to use the backward-log-recovery phase of DB2 restart,
which rolls back any units of recovery that were in one of the following two
states when DB2 was last stopped:
v Inflight (did not complete the first phase of commit)
v In-abort (had started but not finished an abort)
|
|
|
|
|
|
YES
Allows backward-log recovery.
|
|
If you specify a cold start (by using the same value for STARTRBA and
ENDRBA), no recovery processing is performed.
|
|
738
|
|
NO
Terminates backward-log recovery before log records are processed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
CSRONLY
Performs only the first and second phases of restart processing (log
initialization and current-status rebuild). After these phases, the system status
is displayed, and restart terminates. Some parts of the log initialization are not
performed, including any updating of the log and display of STARTRBA and
ENDRBA information.
|
|
|
|
When DB2 is restarted with this option in effect, the conditional restart control
record is not deactivated. To prevent the control record from remaining active,
use the DSNJU003 utility again with CRESTART CANCEL, or with CRESTART
CREATE to create a new active control record.
|
|
NEWCAT
Changes the VSAM catalog name in the BSDS.
|
|
VSAMCAT= catalog-name
Changes the VSAM catalog name entry in the BSDS.
|
|
catalog-name can be up to eight characters long. The first character must be

alphabetic, and the remaining characters can be alphanumeric.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
DDF
Updates the LOCATION, LUNAME, and other DDF related information values
in the BSDS. If you use this statement to insert new values into the BSDS, you
must include at least the LOCATION and LUNAME in the DDF statement. To
update an existing set of values, you need to include only those values that
you want to change. The DDF record cannot be deleted from the BSDS after it
has been added; it can only be modified.
|
|
LOCATION= location-name
Changes the LOCATION value in the BSDS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
location-name specifies the name of your local DB2 site.

PORT
Identifies the TCP/IP port number that is used by DDF to accept incoming
connection requests. This value must be a decimal number between 0 and
65535, including 65535; zero indicates that DDFs TCP/IP support is to be
deactivated.
|
|
If DB2 is part of a data sharing group, all the members of the DB2 data sharing
group must have the same value for PORT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
RESPORT
Identifies the TCP/IP port number that is used by DDF to accept incoming
DRDA two-phase commit resynchronization requests. This value must be a
decimal number between 0 and 65535, including 65535; zero indicates that
DDFs TCP/IP support is to be deactivated. If RESPORT is non-zero, RESPORT
must not be the same as the value that is supplied on PORT.
|
|
|
For data sharing DB2 systems, RESPORT must be uniquely assigned to each
DB2 member, so that no two DB2 members use the same TCP/IP port for
two-phase commit resynchronization.
|
|
|
|
|
SECPORT
Identifies the TCP/IP port number that is used by DDF to accept inbound
secure DRDA connection requests. This value must be a decimal number
between 0 and 65535, including 65535; zero indicates that DDFs secure
connection support for TCP/IP is deactivated.
739
ALIAS= alias-name :alias-port :alias-secport

Specifies one or more alias names for the location. An alias name is a name
besides the location name that connect processing can accept. Specifying an
alias name does not change the location identifier for a database object.
alias-name specifies from 1 to 16 characters for the location name. alias-name
cannot be one of the valid DSNJU003 keywords.
|
|
:alias-port specifies a TCP/IP port number for the alias that can be used by
DDF to accept distributed requests. This value must be a decimal number
between 1 and 65535, including 65535, and must be different than the values
for the PORT and RESPORT options. Specify a value for alias-port when you
want to identify a subset of data sharing members to which a distributed
request can go.
:alias-secport specifies a secure TCP/IP port number for the alias that can be
used by DDF to accept secure distributed requests using SSL. This value must
be a decimal number between 1 and 65535, including 65535, and must be
different than the values for the SECPORT, PORT, and RESPORT options.
Specify a value for alias-secport when you want to identify a subset of data
sharing members to which a secure distributed request can go. When you
specify a value for alias-secport, the :alias-port value is optional.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can add or replace aliases by respecifying the ALIAS option. The new list
of names replaces the existing list.
IPNAME= ipname
Changed the IPNAME values in the BSDS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
ipname specifies the IPNAME value. The value can be up to 8-bytes in length
and must be an alphanumeric character beginning with an alphabetic character.
When you specify this option, the DDF will activate only its TCP/IP
communications support, regardless of whether or not there is a value for
LUNAME. Only inbound and outbound DRDA protocol communications over
TCP/IP is allowed and there is no attempt to activate SNA/APPC
communications support.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The value specified must be either unique to this DB2 subsystem with an
enterprise, or if the DB2 subsystem is configured to be a member of a data
sharing group, unique to the data sharing group for which this DB2 subsystem
is a member. All members of a data sharing group must be defined with the
same IPNAME value if all the members are to activate only their TCP/IP
communications support. If some members of a data sharing group activate
their SNA/APPC (as well as TCP/IP communications support), then the
IPNAME value chosen for the TCP/IP only members must match the
GENERIC value specified for the members which activate their SNA/APPC as
well as their TCP/IP communications support.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The value given to IPNAME will be used by DB2 as the network-id portion of
a unit-of-work identifier. A unit-of-work identifier has traditionally been made
up of a network-id, a LU name, a 6-byte unique identifier created from a
timestamp, and a 2-byte current commit count value. When running with an
IPNAME value, the LU name portion of the unit-of-work identifier will be
created from a 4-byte character representation of the hexadecimal notation of
the value specified for the TCP/IP resync port (RESPORT). This support for
activating only TCP/IP communications will occur only if the DB2 is running
in V9 New Function Mode.
|
|
Do not confuse IPNAME with a TCP/IP external such as hostname or domain

name. The value you give IPNAME is only used internally by DB2 or in a
740
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
DRDA exchange with another DRDA server. It cannot be referenced by any

TCP/IP external, such as ping. Also, the hostname of the system upon which
the DB2 is running is a poor choice for IPNAME because more than one DB2
could run on the same system, and the IPNAME value given to any DB2 or
DB2 data sharing group must be unique within an enterprise.
IPV4= ipv4-address
Identifies and associates a constant IPv4 IP address with DDF to accept
incoming connection requests to this specific subsystem only. This address
must be entered in dotted decimal form. If an IP address is not specified, DB2
will automatically determine the IP address from TCP/IP.
|
|
|
When DB2 is a member of a data sharing group, it is strongly recommended

that you refer to a dynamic virtual IP address (DVIP). A group IP address,
GRPIPV4, should also be specified.
|
|
|
|
|
IPV6= ipv6-address
Identifies and associates a constant IPv6 IP address with DDF to accept
incoming connection requests to this specific subsystem only. This address
must be entered in colon hexadecimal form. If an IP address is not specified,
DB2 will automatically determine the IP address from TCP/IP.
|
|
|
When DB2 is a member of a data sharing group, it is strongly recommended

that you refer to a dynamic virtual IP address (DVIP). A group IP address,
GRPIPV6, should also be specified.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
GRPIPV4
Identifies and associates a constant IPv4 IP address with the data sharing
group for which this DDF is a member. The IP address is used to accept
incoming connection requests that can be serviced by any member of the data
sharing group. This address must be entered in dotted decimal form. An
associated IPv4 subsystem/member address must also be specified in order to
identify the IP address associated with this specific member of the group. If an
IP address is not specified, DB2 will automatically determine the IP address
from TCP/IP.
It is strongly recommended that you refer to a sysplex distributor owned
distributing dynamic virtual IP address (DVIPA).
GRPIPV6
Identifies and associates a constant IPv6 IP address with the data sharing
group for which this DDF is a member. The IP address is used to accept
incoming connection requests that can be serviced by any member of the data
sharing group. This address must be entered in colon hexadecimal form. An
associated IPv6 subsystem/member address must also be specified in order to
identify the IP address associated to this specific member of the group. If an IP
address is not specified, DB2 will automatically determine the IP address from
TCP/IP.
It is strongly recommended that you refer to a sysplex distributor owned
distributing dynamic virtual IP address (DVIPA).
LUNAME= luname
Changes the LUNAME value in the BSDS.
luname specifies the LUNAME value. The LUNAME in the BSDS must always
contain the value that identifies your local DB2 subsystem to the VTAM
network.
PASSWORD=
The DDF password follows VTAM convention, but DB2 restricts it to one to
741
eight alphanumeric characters. The first character must be either a capital letter
or an alphabetic extender. The remaining characters can consist of
alphanumeric characters and alphabetic extenders.
password
Optionally assigns a password to the distributed data facility
communication record that establishes communications for a distributed
data environment. See VTAM for MVS/ESA Resource Definition Reference for
a description of the PRTCT=password option on the APPL definition
statement that is used to define DB2 to VTAM.
GENERIC= gluname
Replaces the value of the DB2 GENERIC LUNAME subsystem parameter in
the BSDS.
gluname specifies the GENERIC LUNAME value.
NOPASSWD
Removes the archive password protection for all archives that are created after
this operation. It also removes a previously existing password from the DDF
record. No other keyword can be used with NOPASSWD.
NGENERIC
Changes the DB2 GENERIC LUNAME to binary zeros in the BSDS, indicating
that no VTAM generic LU name support is requested.
NOALIAS
Indicates that no alias names exist for the specified location. Any alias names
that were specified in a previous DSNJU003 utility job are removed.
|
|
|
|
NOIPV4
Removes the constant IPv4 address from the BSDS. The NGRPIPV4 keyword
must also be specified to ensure that the associated group address, if any, is
also removed.
|
|
|
|
NOIPV6
Removes the constant IPv6 address from the BSDS. The NGRPIPV6 keyword
must also be specified to ensure that the associated group address, if any, is
also removed.
|
|
NGRPIPV4
Removes the constant data sharing group IPv4 address from the BSDS.
|
|
NGRPIPV6
Removes the constant data sharing group IPv6 address from the BSDS.
|
|
|
NOIPNAME
Removes the IPNAME value from the DDF record. No other keyword can be
used with NOIPNAME.
|
|
|
NOLUNAME
Removes the LUNAME value from the DDF record. No other keyword can be
used with NOLUNAME.
CHECKPT
Allows updating of the checkpoint queue with the start checkpoint and end
checkpoint log records.
consistent state. Do not use the statement without understanding the
conditional restart and checkpoint processing processes.
742
TIME= time
On the CHECKPT statement, specifies the time that the start checkpoint
record was written.
On the HIGHRBA statement, TIME specifies when the log record with the
highest RBA was written to the log.
time specifies the time value. For timestamp format, see the STARTIME option
description.
HIGHRBA
Updates the highest-written log RBA in either the active or archive log data
sets.
consistent state. Do not use the statement without understanding the
conditional restart process.
OFFLRBA= offlrba
Specifies the highest-offloaded RBA in the archive log.
offlrba is a hexadecimal number of up to 12 characters. If you use fewer than 12
characters, leading zeros are added. The value must end with hexadecimal
XFFF.
Related information
Performing conditional restart (DB2 Administration Guide)
Phase 3: Forward log recovery (DB2 Administration Guide)
Member-specific access (DB2 Data Sharing: Planning and Administration)
Making changes for active logs

You can add, delete, record, and enlarge active logs.
Adding: If an active log is in stopped status, it is not reused for output logging;
however, it continues to be used for reading. To add a new active log:
1. Use the Access Method Services DEFINE command to define new active log
data sets.
2. Use DSNJLOGF to preformat the new active log data sets.
Restriction: If you do not preformat these logs with the DSNJLOGF utility,
DB2 needs to preformat them the first time they are used. Otherwise,
performance might be impacted. This restriction applies to empty data sets and
data sets with residual data.
3. Use DSNJU003 to register the new data sets in the BSDS.
For example, specify the following statements:
NEWLOG DSNAME=DSNC910.LOGCOPY1.DS04,COPY1
NEWLOG DSNAME=DSNC910.LOGCOPY2.DS04,COPY2
To copy the contents of an old active log data set to the new one, you can also give
the RBA range and the starting and ending timestamp on the NEWLOG statement.
To archive to disk when the size of your active logs has increased, you might find
it necessary to increase the size of your archive data set primary and secondary
space quantities in DSNZPARM.
743
Deleting: To delete information about an active log data set from the BSDS, you
might specify the following statements:
DELETE DSNAME=DSNC910.LOGCOPY1.DS01
DELETE DSNAME=DSNC910.LOGCOPY2.DS01
Recording: To record information about an existing active log data set in the BSDS,
you might specify the following statement:
NEWLOG DSNAME=DSNC910.LOGCOPY2.DS05,COPY2,STARTIME=19910212205198,
ENDTIME=19910412205200,STARTRBA=43F8000,ENDRBA=65F3FFF
You can insert a record of that information into the BSDS for any of these reasons:
v The data set has been deleted and is needed again.
v You are copying the contents of one active log data set to another data set (copy
1 to copy 2).
v You are recovering the BSDS from a backup copy.
Enlarging: When DB2 is inactive (down), use one of the following procedures.
If you can use the Access Method Services REPRO command, follow these steps:
1. Stop DB2. This step is required because DB2 allocates all active log data sets
when it is active.
2. Use the Access Method Services ALTER command with the NEWNAME option
to rename your active log data sets.
3. Use the Access Method Services DEFINE command to define larger active log
data sets. Refer to installation job DSNTIJIN to see the definitions that create
the original active log data sets.
By reusing the old data set names, you dont need to run the change log
inventory utility to establish new names in the BSDSs. The old data set names
and the correct RBA ranges are already in the BSDSs.
4. Use the Access Method Services REPRO command to copy the old (renamed)
data sets into their respective new data sets.
5. Start DB2.
If you cannot use the Access Method Services REPRO command, follow this
procedure:
1. Ensure that all active log data sets except the current active log data sets have
been archived. Active log data sets that have been archived are marked
REUSABLE in print log map utility (DSNJU004) output.
2. Stop DB2.
3. Rename or delete the reusable active logs. Allocate new, larger active log data
sets with the same names as the old active log data sets.
4. Run the DSNJLOGF utility to preformat the new log data sets.
5. Run the change log inventory utility (DSNJU003) with the DELETE statement
to delete all active logs except the current active logs from the BSDS.
6. Run the change log inventory utility with the NEWLOG statement to add to
the BSDS the active logs that you just deleted. So that the logs are added as
empty, do not specify an RBA range.
7. Start DB2.
8. Issue the ARCHIVE LOG command to cause DB2 to truncate the current active
logs and switch to one of the new sets of active logs.
9. Repeat steps 2 through 7 to enlarge the active logs that were just archived.
744
Although all log data sets do not need to be the same size, from an operational
standpoint using the same size is more consistent and efficient. If the log data sets
are not the same size, tracking your systems logs can be more difficult. Space can
be wasted if you are using dual data sets of different sizes because they fill only to
the size of the smallest, not using the remaining space on the larger one.
If you are archiving to disk and the size of your active logs has increased, you
might need to increase the size of your archive log data sets. However, because of
DFSMS disk management limits, you must specify less than 64 000 tracks for the
primary space quantity. See the PRIMARY QUANTITY and SECONDARY QTY
fields on installation panel DSNTIPA to modify the primary and secondary
allocation space quantities.
Making changes for archive logs

You can add and delete archive logs.
Adding: When the recovery of an object depends on reading an existing archive log
data set, the BSDS must contain information about that data set, so that the
recovery job can find it. To register information about an existing archive log data
set in the BSDS, you might specify the following statement:
NEWLOG DSNAME=DSNC910.ARCHLOG1.D89021.T2205197.A0000015,COPY1VOL=DSNV04,
UNIT=TAPE,STARTRBA=3A190000,ENDRBA=3A1F0FFF,CATALOG=NO
Deleting: To delete an entire archive log data set from one or more volumes, you
might specify the following statement:
DELETE DSNAME=DSNC910.ARCHLOG1.D89021.T2205197.A0000015,COPY1VOL=DSNV04
Creating a conditional restart control record

You can create a conditional restart control record in the BSDS.
To create a new conditional restart control record in the BSDS, you must execute
the change log inventory utility and use the CRESTART control statement. For
example, to truncate the log, to specify the earliest log RBA, and to bypass
backout, use a statement similar to the following statement:
|
CRESTART CREATE,STARTRBA=28000,ENDRBA=58000,BACKOUT=NO
To specify a cold start, make the values of STARTRBA and ENDRBA equal with a
statement similar to the following statement:
CRESTART CREATE,STARTRBA=4A000,ENDRBA=4A000
In most cases when doing a cold start, you should make sure that the STARTRBA
and ENDRBA are set to an RBA value that is greater than the highest used RBA.
|
|
To truncate the DB2 logs via conditional restart by specifying a timestamp rather
than an RBA value, use a statement similar to the following statement:
CRESTART CREATE,ENDTIME=20051402030068
An existing conditional restart control record governs any START DB2 operation
until one of these events occurs:
v A restart operation completes.
v A CRESTART CANCEL statement is issued.
v A new conditional restart control record is created.
745
Deleting log data sets with errors

You can delete log data sets with errors.
If an active log data set has encountered an I/O error, perform the following steps:
1. If you use dual active log data sets, check if the data from the bad active log
data set is saved in the other active log. If it is, you can use the other active
log.
2. If you cannot use the other active log or if the active log is in the STOPPED
status, you must fix the problem manually.
a. Check to see if the data set has been offloaded. For example, check the list
of archive log data sets to see if one has the same RBA range as the active
log data set. This list can be created by using the DSNJU004 (print log map)
utility.
b. If the data set has not been offloaded, copy the data to a new VSAM data
set. If the data set has been offloaded, create a new VSAM data set that is to
be used as an active log data set.
c. Specify DELETE to remove information about the bad data set from the
BSDS.
d. Specify NEWLOG to identify the new data set as the new active log. The
DELETE and NEWLOG operations can be performed by the same job step.
(The DELETE statement precedes the NEWLOG statement in the SYSIN
input data set.)
3. Delete the bad data set, using VSAM Access Method Services.
Use the print log map utility before and after running the change log inventory
utility to ensure correct execution and to document changes.
When using dual active logs, choose a naming convention that distinguishes
primary and secondary active log data set. The naming convention should also
identify the log data sets within the series of primary or secondary active log data
sets. For example, the default naming convention that is established at DB2
installation time is:
prefix.LOGCOPYn.DSmm
In this convention, n=1 for all primary log data sets, n=2 for all secondary log data
sets, and mm is the data set number within each series.
If a naming convention such as the default convention is used, pairs of data sets
with equal mm values are usually used together. For example,
DSNC120.LOGCOPY1.DS02 and DSNC120.LOGCOPY2.DS02 are used together.
However, after you run the change log inventory utility with the DELETE and
NEWLOG statements, the primary and secondary series can become
unsynchronized, even if the NEWLOG data set name that you specify is the same
as the old data set name. To avoid this situation, always do maintenance on both
data sets of a pair in the same change log inventory execution:
v Delete both data sets together.
v Define both data sets together with NEWLOG statements.
The data sets themselves do not require deletion and redefinition.
To ensure consistent results, execute the change log inventory utility on the same
z/OS system on which the DB2 online subsystem executes.
746
If misused, the change log inventory utility can compromise the viability and
integrity of the DB2 subsystem. Only highly skilled people, such as the DB2 system
administrator, should use this utility, and then only after careful consideration.
Before initiating a conditional restart or cold restart, you should consider making
backup copies of all disk volumes that contain any DB2 data sets. This enables a
possible fallback. The backup data sets must be generated when DB2 is not active.
Altering references to NEWLOG and DELETE data sets

You can alter references to NEWLOG and DELETE data sets.
Use the NEWLOG and DELETE statements to add and delete references to data
sets in the BSDS. The log data sets are not changed in any way. If DELETE and
NEWLOG are used for a reference in the BSDS to an active log data set, the
referenced log data set itself does not require alteration.
Defining the high-level qualifier for catalog and directory objects

You can define the high-level qualifier for catalog and directory objects.
Use the NEWCAT statement to define the high-level qualifier that is to be used for
the following objects:
v Catalog table spaces and index spaces
v Directory table spaces and index spaces
At startup, the DB2 system checks that the name that is recorded with NEWCAT in
the BSDS is the high-level qualifier of the DB2 system table spaces that are defined
in the load module for subsystem parameters.
NEWCAT is normally used only at installation time.
When you change the high-level qualifier by using the NEWCAT statement, you
might specify the following statements:
//S2 EXEC PGM=DSNJU003
//SYSUT1
DD DSN=DSNC120.BSDS01,DISP=OLD
//SYSUT2
DD DSN=DSNC120.BSDS02,DISP=OLD
NEWCAT VSAMCAT=DBP1
After you run the change log inventory utility with the NEWCAT statement, the
utility generates output similar to the following output:
NEWCAT VSAMCAT=DBP1
DSNJ210I OLD VASAM CATALOG NAME=DSNC120, NEW CATALOG NAME=DBP1
DSNJ225I NEWCAT OPERATION COMPLETED SUCCESSFULLY
DSNJ200I DSNJU003 CHANGE LOG INVENTORY UTILITY
PROCESSING COMPLETED SUCCESSFULLY
747
Related tasks
Renaming DB2 system data sets
Renaming DB2 system data sets

Occasionally, you might want to rename the DB2 system table spaces
To rename DB2 system data sets:
Stop DB2 in a consistent state.
Create a full system backup so that you can recover from operational errors.
Execute the change log inventory utility with NEWCAT.
Rename the BSDS and all DB2 directory and catalog table spaces and index
spaces with IDCAMS.
5. Reassemble DSNZPARM to redefine the high-level qualifier for the system table
spaces.
6. Update the BSDS name in the DB2 startup procedure.
1.
2.
3.
4.
7. Start DB2.
8. Drop and re-create the work file database.
9. Optionally use the ALTER command for table spaces in DSNDB04 and user
databases.
Renaming DB2 active log data sets

When you rename system data sets, you might also want to rename the log data
sets.
To rename DB2 active log data sets:
1. Stop DB2 in a consistent state.
2. Create a full system backup so that you can recover from operational errors.
3. Delete the reusable active log data sets with IDCAMS, but keep the current
active log.
4. Define a new set of active log data sets with IDCAMS.
5. Execute the change log inventory utility to remove names of deleted active log
data sets and to define the new active log data set names in the BSDS.
6. Start and use DB2 normally.
When the current active log is archived and becomes reusable, you can delete it.
Renaming DB2 archive log data sets

You do not need to rename archive log data sets because old archive logs are
replaced as a part of the normal maintenance cycle and the RECOVER utility
works with archive logs that contain different high-level qualifiers.
To modify the high-level qualifier for archive log data sets, you need to reassemble
DSNZPARM.
Sample DSNJU003 control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own DSNJU003
control statements.
748
Example 1: Adding a new archive log data set

|
|
|
|
|
The following control statement specifies that the DSNJU003 utility is to add the
data set DSNREPAL.A0001187 to the BSDS. The volume serial number for the data
set is DSNV04, as indicated by the COPY1VOL option. The device type is SYSDA,
and the data set is not to be cataloged. The RBA of the beginning of the archive log
data set volume is 3A190000, and the end RBA is 3A1F0FFF.
//STEP5 EXEC PGM=DSNJU003,COND=EVEN
//SYSUT1
DD DSN=DSNCAT.BSDS01,DISP=SHR
//SYSUT2
//SYSIN
DD *
NEWLOG DSNAME=DSNREPAL.A0001187,COPY1VOL=DSNV04,UNIT=SYSDA,
STARTRBA=3A190000,ENDRBA=3A1F0FFF,CATALOG=NO
/*
Example 2: Deleting a data set

The following control statement specifies that DSNJU003 is to delete data set
DSNREPAL.A0001187 from the BSDS. The volume serial number for the data set is
DSNV04, as indicated by the COPY1VOL option.
DELETE DSNAME=DSNREPAL.A0001187,COPY1VOL=DSNV04
Example 3: Creating a new conditional restart control record

The following statement specifies that DSNJU003 is to create a new conditional
restart control record, which controls the next restart of DB2. BACKOUT=NO
indicates that DB2 is not to execute the backward-log-recovery phase when it
restarts. The ENDRBA option indicates that 000000010000 is the last RBA of the log
that is to be used during restart. Any log information in the bootstrap data set, the
active logs, and the archive logs with an RBA that is greater than this RBA is
discarded.
CRESTART CREATE,BACKOUT=NO,ENDRBA=000000010000
Example 4: Adding a communication record to the BSDS

The following control statement specifies that DSNJU003 is to add a new
communication record to the BSDS. The location, LU name, and password values
are all provided.
DDF LOCATION=USIBMSTODB22,LUNAME=STL#M08,PASSWORD=$STL@290
Example 5: Updating a communication record with a secure

TCP/IP port number in the BSDS
|
|
The following control statement specifies that DSNJU003 is to update the

communication record in the BSDS to specify a secure TCP/IP port.
DDF LOCATION=XYZ,SECPORT=448
Example 6: Adding a communication record with an alias to the

BSDS
The following control statement specifies that DSNJU003 is to add a
communication record to the BSDS. The location, alias, LU name, and password
values are all provided.
DDF LOCATION=USIBMSTODB22,ALIAS=STL715A1,STL715A2,LUNAME=STL#M08,PASSWORD=$STL@290
749
Note: The alias is an SQL identifier and should follow the rules of SQL identifiers.
The identifier can not include special characters when you are naming a location
alias.
|
|
|
Example 7: Adding multiple aliases and alias ports to the BSDS

The following control statement specifies five alias names for the communication
record in the BSDS (MYALIAS1, MYALIAS2, MYALIAS3, MYALIAS4, and
MYALIAS5). Only MYALIAS2 and MYALIAS5 support subsets of a data sharing
group. Any alias names that were specified in a previous DSNJU003 utility job are
removed.
DDF ALIAS=MYALIAS1,MYALIAS2:8002,MYALIAS3,MYALIAS4,MYALIAS5:10001
Example 8: Specifying a point in time for system recovery

The following control statement specifies that DSNJU003 is to create a new
conditional restart control record. The SYSPITR option specifies an end RBA value
as the point in time for system recovery for a non-data sharing system. For a data
sharing system, use an end LRSN value instead of an end RBA value. This point in
time is used by the RESTORE SYSTEM utility.
//JOBLIB DD DSN=USER.TESTLIB,DISP=SHR
//
DD DSN=DSN910.SDSNLOAD,DISP=SHR
//STEP01 EXEC PGM=DSNJU003
//SYSUT1 DD DSN=DSNC910.BSDS01,DISP=OLD
//SYSIN DD *
CRESTART CREATE,SYSPITR=04891665D000
/*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To indicate that a SYSPITR restart is to be done without log truncation, specify a

SYSPITR value of all FFs in the DSNJU003 job with the CRESTART parameter.
|
|
|
|
|
|
During the subsequent restart, the user will be asked to confirm the conditional
restart with the following:
//STEP1 EXEC PGM=DSNJU003

//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=
//SYSIN DD
CRESTART CREATE,SYSPITR=FFFFFFFFFFFF
/*
DSNJ256I ) DSNJW6 CONDITIONAL RESTART RECORD INDICATES SYSPITR

RESTART WITH NO LOG TRUNCATION
DSNJ11I ) CONDITIONAL RESTART RECORD 1 CREATED AT 7.214 7:56
WAS FOUND. REPLY Y TO USE, N TO CANCEL
Example 9: Removing aliases from a communication record

The following control statement specifies that no alias names apply. Any alias
names that were specified in a previous DSNJU003 utility job are removed.
DDF NOALIAS
750

The DSNJU004 (print log map) utility lists a variety of information.
The print log map (DSNJU004) utility lists the following information:
v Log data set name, log RBA association, and log LRSN for both copy 1 and copy
2 of all active and archive log data sets
v Active log data sets that are available for new log data
v Status of all conditional restart control records in the bootstrap data set
v Contents of the queue of checkpoint records in the bootstrap data set
v The communication record of the BSDS, if one exists
v Contents of the quiesce history record
v System and utility timestamps
v Contents of the checkpoint queue
v Archive log command history
v BACKUP SYSTEM utility history
v System CCSID information
v System-level backup information
In a data sharing environment, the DSNJU004 utility can list information from any
or all BSDSs of a data sharing group.
Environment
The DSNJU004 program runs as a batch job.
This utility can be executed either when DB2 is running and when it is not
running. However, to ensure consistent results from the utility job, the utility and
the DB2 online subsystem must both be executing under the control of the same
operating system.
The user ID of the DSNJU004 job must have requisite RACF authorization.

DSNJU004 recognizes DD statements with the following DD names:
SYSUT1
Specifies and allocates the bootstrap data set. This statement is required. It
allocates the BSDS. If the BSDS must be shared with a concurrently executing
DB2 online subsystem, use DISP=SHR on the DD statement.
SYSPRINT
Specifies a data set or print spool class for print output. This statement is
required. The logical record length (LRECL) is 125.
SYSIN (optional)
Contains the control statement. If you do not specify the SYSIN DD statement,
BSDS information is printed only from the BSDS data set that is identified by
the SYSUT1 DD statement.
GROUP
Names a single BSDS. DB2 can use this BSDS to find the names of all BSDSs in
751
the group. Ensure that the BSDS name that you specify is not the BSDS of a
member that has been quiesced since before new members joined the group.
This statement is required if the control statement specifies either of these
options:
v MEMBER *
v MEMBER(member-name)
MnnBSDS
Names the BSDS data set of a group member whose information is to be listed.
You must specify one such DD statement for each member. The statements are
required if the control statement specifies MEMBER DDNAME. nn represents a
two-digit number. You must use consecutive two-digit numbers from 01 to the
total number of required members. If a break occurs in the sequence of
numbers, any number after the break is ignored.
Running the DSNJU004 utility

Use the following EXEC statement to execute this utility:
//
EXEC
PGM=DSNJU004
Recommendations
v For dual BSDSs, execute the print log map utility twice, once for each BSDS, to
compare their contents.
v To ensure consistent results for this utility, execute the utility job on the same
z/OS system on which the DB2 online subsystem executes.
v Execute the print log map utility regularly, possibly daily, to keep a record of
recovery log data set usage.
v Use the print log map utility to document changes that are made by the change
log inventory utility.

Using the SYSIN data set allows you to list information from any or all BSDSs of a
data sharing group.
DSNJU004 (print log map) syntax diagram
MEMBER *

MEMBER
DDNAME
,
( member-name
Option descriptions
The following keywords can be used in an optional control statement on the SYSIN
data set:
MEMBER
Specifies which members BSDS information to print.
752
Prints the information from the BSDS of each member in the data sharing
group.
DDNAME
Prints information from only those BSDSs that are pointed to by the
MxxBSDS DD statements.
(member-name)
Prints information for only the named group members.
Sample DSNJU004 control statement

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own DSNJU004
control statements.
The following statement specifies that DSNJU004 is to print information from the
BSDS for each member in the data sharing group:
//PLM
//GROUP
//SYSPRINT
//SYSIN
EXEC PGM=DSNJU004
DD DSN=DBD1.BSDS01,DISP=SHR
DD SYSOUT=*
DD *
MEMBER *
DSNJU004 (print log map) output

The output of DSNJU004 (print log map) utility lists a variety of information.
The following figures show example output from the print log map utility. This
output includes the following information:
v The data set name (DSN) of the BSDS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
v The system date and time (SYSTEM TIMESTAMP), which is set at the time that
the subsystem stops.
v The date and time that the BSDS was last changed by the change log inventory
utility (listed as the UTILITY TIMESTAMP).
v The integrated catalog facility catalog name that is associated with the BSDS.
v The highest-written RBA. The value is updated each time the log buffers are
physically written to disk.
v The highest RBA that was offloaded.
v Log RBA ranges (STARTRBA and ENDRBA) and data set information for active
and archive log data sets. The last active log data set shown is the current active
log.
v Information about each active log data set. This information includes the starting
and ending RBAs within the data set, the date and time the data set was
created, and the data sets name (DSN), and status. You might see consecutive
active or archive log data sets with an end LRSN value that is the same as the
beginning LRSN value of the next data set.
v Information about each archive log data set. This information includes the
starting and ending RBAs within the data set, the date and time the data set was
created, and the data sets name (DSN), unit and volume of storage, and status.
You might see consecutive active or archive log data sets with an end LRSN
value that is the same as the beginning LRSN value of the next data set.
v Conditional restart control records. For a description of these records and the
format of this part of the output from the print log map utility, see DSNJU004
(print log map) output.
753
v The contents of the checkpoint description queue. For a description of this

output, see Figure 120 on page 761.
v Archive log command history. For a description of this output, see Figure 119 on
page 761.
v The distributed data facility (DDF) communication record. This record contains
the DB2-defined location name, any alias names for the location name, and the
VTAM-defined LU name. DB2 uses this information to establish the distributed
database environment.
v The tokens for all BACKUP SYSTEM utility records. The token identifies each
backup version that has been created.
v The RBA or LRSN when the subsystem was converted to enabling-new-function
mode.
The sample print log map utility output in the following figure is for a
non-data-sharing subsystem.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
****************************************************************************************
*
*
* LOG MAP OF THE BSDS DATA SET BELONGING TO MEMBER 'NO NAME ' OF GROUP 'NO NAME '.
*
*
*
****************************************************************************************
DSNJCNVB CONVERSION PROGRAM HAS RUN
DDNAME=SYSUT1
LOG MAP OF BSDS DATA SET COPY 1, DSN=DSNC910.BSDS01
LTIME INDICATES LOCAL TIME, ALL OTHER TIMES ARE GMT.
DATA SHARING MODE IS OFF
SYSTEM TIMESTAMP
- DATE=2007.011 LTIME=18:58:19.11
UTILITY TIMESTAMP - DATE=2007.008 LTIME= 0:19:33.53
VSAM CATALOG NAME=DSNC910
HIGHEST RBA WRITTEN
0000384B7A15 2007.011 06:27:04.4
HIGHEST RBA OFFLOADED
000000000000
RBA WHEN CONVERTED TO V4 000000000000
THIS BSDS HAS MEMBER RECORDS FOR THE FOLLOWING MEMBERS:
HOST MEMBER NAME:
........
MEMBER ID:
0
GROUP NAME:
........
BSDS COPY 1 DATA SET NAME: ............................................
BSDS COPY 2 DATA SET NAME: ............................................
ENFM START RBA/LRSN:
000000000000
**** DISTRIBUTED DATA FACILITY ****
COMMUNICATION RECORD
04:44:04 JANUARY 12, 2007
LOCATION=STLEC1 IPNAME=(NULL) PORT=446 SPORT=NULL RPORT=5001
ALIAS=(NULL)
IPV4=NULL IPV6=NULL
GRPIPV4=NULL GRPIPV6=NULL
LUNAME=SYEC1DB2 PASSWORD=DB2PW1 GENERICLU=(NULL)
ACTIVE LOG COPY 1 DATA SETS
START RBA/TIME
END RBA/TIME
-------------------- -------------------000036C18000
0000375EFFFF
2007.008 21:51:30.7 2007.008 22:07:30.7
0000375F0000
000037FC7FFF
2007.008 22:07:30.7 2007.008 22:13:15.5
000037FC8000
00003899FFFF
2007.008 22:13:15.5 ........ ..........
NO ARCHIVE DATA SETS DEFINED FOR THIS COPY
START RBA/TIME
END RBA/TIME
-------------------- -------------------000036C18000
0000375EFFFF
2007.008 21:51:30.7 2007.008 22:07:30.7
0000375F0000
000037FC7FFF
2007.008 22:07:30.7 2007.008 22:13:15.5
754
DATE
LTIME
-------- ----2005.263 17:36
PASSWORD=(NULL)
2005.263 17:36
PASSWORD=(NULL)
2005.263 17:36
PASSWORD=(NULL)
DATA SET INFORMATION

-------------------DSN=DSNC910.LOGCOPY1.DS03
STATUS=REUSABLE
DSN=DSNC910.LOGCOPY1.DS01
STATUS=REUSABLE
STATUS=REUSABLE ARCHIVE LOG COPY 1 DATA SETS
DATE
LTIME
-------- ----2005.263 17:36
PASSWORD=(NULL)
2005.263 17:36
PASSWORD=(NULL)

STATUS=REUSABLE
STATUS=REUSABLE
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
000037FC8000
00003899FFFF
2005.263 17:36 DSN=DSNC910.LOGCOPY2.DS02
2007.008 22:13:15.5 ........ .......... PASSWORD=(NULL) STATUS=REUSABLE
ARCHIVE LOG COPY 2 DATA SETS
DSNJ401I DSNRJPCR RESTART CONTROL RECORD NOT FOUND
CHECKPOINT QUEUE
04:44:05 JANUARY 12, 2007
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
02:58:33 JANUARY 12, 2007
BEGIN CHECKPOINT RBA
0000384B8090
END CHECKPOINT RBA
0000384BA4C0
END CHECKPOINT STCK
BFFDF5B0AE7C
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
06:26:54 JANUARY 11, 2007
0000384B3F31
END CHECKPOINT RBA
0000384B7A15
END CHECKPOINT STCK
BFFCE26E2478
SHUTDOWN CHECKPOINT
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
04:06:56 JANUARY 11, 2007
0000384AB000
END CHECKPOINT RBA
0000384AD7BE
END CHECKPOINT STCK
BFFCC31B6815
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
20:07:35 JANUARY 10, 2007
000038484198
END CHECKPOINT RBA
00003848761A
END CHECKPOINT STCK
BFFC57F6EC70
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
20:06:49 JANUARY 10, 2007
000038449F2E
END CHECKPOINT RBA
00003844D3C0
END CHECKPOINT STCK
BFFC57CB6CFD
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
19:54:11 JANUARY 10, 2007
0000384098E4
END CHECKPOINT RBA
00003840C0B8
END CHECKPOINT STCK
BFFC54F80848
. . .
000035CBA4FD
END CHECKPOINT RBA
000035CBE608
END CHECKPOINT STCK
BF2025C5621E
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
16:51:36 JULY 19, 2006
000035C3FDAF
END CHECKPOINT RBA
000035C43EC4
END CHECKPOINT STCK
BF2025C50CEA
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
16:51:36 JULY 19, 2006
000035C0D767
END CHECKPOINT RBA
000035C11760
END CHECKPOINT STCK
BF2025C4E1F8
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
16:51:36 JULY 19, 2006
000035BE8240
END CHECKPOINT RBA
000035BEC302
END CHECKPOINT STCK
BF2025C4C7D5
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
16:51:35 JULY 19, 2006
000035BB82AB
END CHECKPOINT RBA
000035BCBB6A
END CHECKPOINT STCK
BF2025C4B137
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
16:48:56 JULY 19, 2006
000035B5EA64
END CHECKPOINT RBA
000035B61BC4
END CHECKPOINT STCK
BF20252C3DE4
DSNJ401I DSNJU104 ARCHIVE LOG COMMAND HISTORY RECORD NOT FOUND
DSNJ401I DSNUPBHR BACKUP SYSTEM UTILITY HISTORY RECORD NOT FOUND
SYSTEM CCSIDS
04:44:05 JANUARY 12, 2007
SYSTEM CCSIDS
-------------------ASCII SBCS
= 1252
ASCII MIXED = 65534
ASCII DBCS
= 65534
EBCDIC SBCS = 37
EBCDIC MBCS = 65534
755
|
EBCDIC DBCS =
UNICODE SBCS =
|
UNICODE MBCS =
|
UNICODE DBCS =
|
| DSNJ200I DSNJU004
|
| ...
65534
367
1208
1200
PRINT LOG UTILITY PROCESSING COMPLETED SUCCESSFULLY
Figure 116. Sample print log map utility output for a non-dating-sharing subsystem
The sample print log map utility output in the following figure is for a member of
a data sharing group.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*****************************************************************************************
*
*
* LOG MAP OF THE BSDS DATA SET BELONGING TO MEMBER 'V91A
' OF GROUP 'DSNCAT '.
*
*
*
*****************************************************************************************
DSNJCNVB CONVERSION PROGRAM HAS RUN
DDNAME=SYSUT1
LOG MAP OF BSDS DATA SET COPY 1, DSN=DSNC910.BSDS01
LTIME INDICATES LOCAL TIME, ALL OTHER TIMES ARE GMT.
DATA SHARING MODE IS ON
SYSTEM TIMESTAMP
- DATE=2006.299 LTIME= 8:58:20.49
UTILITY TIMESTAMP - DATE=2007.012 LTIME=10:00:20.82
VSAM CATALOG NAME=DSNC910
HIGHEST RBA WRITTEN
00002B7458B4 2006.299 15:58:04.9
HIGHEST RBA OFFLOADED
000000000000
RBA WHEN CONVERTED TO V4 00000CF0F0A6
MAX RBA FOR TORBA
00000CF0F0A6
MIN RBA FOR TORBA
000000000000
STCK TO LRSN DELTA
000000000000
THIS BSDS HAS MEMBER RECORDS FOR THE FOLLOWING MEMBERS:
HOST MEMBER NAME:
V91A
MEMBER ID:
1
GROUP NAME:
DSNCAT
BSDS COPY 1 DATA SET NAME: DSNC910.BSDS01
ENFM START RBA/LRSN:
000000000000
MEMBER NAME:
V91B
MEMBER ID:
2
GROUP NAME:
DSNCAT
**** DISTRIBUTED DATA FACILITY ****
COMMUNICATION RECORD
18:05:25 JANUARY 12, 2007
LOCATION=STLEC1 IPNAME=(NULL) PORT=446 SPORT=NULL RPORT=5001
ALIAS=(NULL)
IPV4=NULL IPV6=NULL
GRPIPV4=NULL GRPIPV6=NULL
LUNAME=SYEC1DB2 PASSWORD=DB2PW1 GENERICLU=SYEC1GLU
ACTIVE LOG COPY 1 DATA
START RBA/LRSN/TIME
-------------------000029DB8000
BF215D6C20F3
2006.201 16:05:55.0
00002A790000
BF215E3D8600
2006.201 16:09:34.6
00002B168000
756
SETS
END RBA/LRSN/TIME
-------------------00002A78FFFF
BF215E3D8600
2006.201 16:09:34.6
00002B167FFF
BF2168CB4F59
2006.201 16:56:47.6
00002BB3FFFF
DATE
LTIME
-------- ----2005.263 17:36
PASSWORD=(NULL)

STATUS=REUSABLE
2005.263 17:36 DSN=DSNC910.LOGCOPY1.DS02

PASSWORD=(NULL) STATUS=REUSABLE
2005.263
17:36 DSN=DSNC910.LOGCOPY1.DS03
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
BF2168CB4F59
............
PASSWORD=(NULL) STATUS=REUSABLE
2006.201 16:56:47.6 ........ ..........
START RBA/LRSN/TIME
END RBA/LRSN/TIME
DATE
LTIME
-------------------- -------------------- -------- ----000029DB8000
00002A78FFFF
2005.263 17:36
BF215D6C20F3
BF215E3D8600
PASSWORD=(NULL)
2006.201 16:05:55.0 2006.201 16:09:34.6
00002A790000
00002B167FFF
2005.263 17:36
BF215E3D8600
BF2168CB4F59
PASSWORD=(NULL)
2006.201 16:09:34.6 2006.201 16:56:47.6
00002B168000
00002BB3FFFF
2005.263 17:36
BF2168CB4F59
............
PASSWORD=(NULL)
2006.201 16:56:47.6 ........ ..........
DSNJ401I DSNRJPCR RESTART CONTROL RECORD NOT FOUND
CHECKPOINT QUEUE
18:05:25 JANUARY 12, 2007
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
15:57:53 OCTOBER 26, 2006
00002B742232
END CHECKPOINT RBA
00002B7458B4
END CHECKPOINT LRSN
BF9C9272E481
SHUTDOWN CHECKPOINT
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
15:38:07 OCTOBER 26, 2006
00002B73BEDE
END CHECKPOINT RBA
00002B73E458
END CHECKPOINT LRSN
BF9C8DFC9AE2
END CHECKPOINT LRSN
BF9C8DFC9AE2
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
14:45:29 OCTOBER 26, 2006
00002B72F57E
END CHECKPOINT RBA
00002B731ABA
END CHECKPOINT LRSN
BF9C8238F7F6
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
13:52:34 OCTOBER 26, 2006
00002B722C78
END CHECKPOINT RBA
00002B725152
END CHECKPOINT LRSN
BF9C7664E895
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
12:59:07 OCTOBER 26, 2006
00002B716C2B
END CHECKPOINT RBA
00002B719402
END CHECKPOINT LRSN
BF9C6A7355D2
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
12:05:55 OCTOBER 26, 2006
00002B708488
END CHECKPOINT RBA
00002B70A9B8
END CHECKPOINT LRSN
BF9C5E8E6C30
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
11:13:16 OCTOBER 26, 2006
00002B6FBB22
END CHECKPOINT RBA
00002B6FE0A6
END CHECKPOINT LRSN
BF9C52CA437D
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
10:20:21 OCTOBER 26, 2006
00002B6EF344
END CHECKPOINT RBA
00002B6F180A
END CHECKPOINT LRSN
BF9C46F69881
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
09:26:54 OCTOBER 26, 2006
00002B6E3344
END CHECKPOINT RBA
00002B6E5ABA
END CHECKPOINT LRSN
BF9C3B03EEA6
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
08:34:36 OCTOBER 26, 2006
00002B6D6662
END CHECKPOINT RBA
00002B6D8DC0
END CHECKPOINT LRSN
BF9C2F539652
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
07:40:44 OCTOBER 26, 2006

STATUS=REUSABLE
STATUS=REUSABLE
STATUS=REUSABLE
757
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

END CHECKPOINT RBA
END CHECKPOINT LRSN
00002B6CA000
00002B6CC55A
BF9C23487986
. . .
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
23:40:10 JULY 19, 2006
000029CB7E8B
END CHECKPOINT RBA
000029CBA65C
END CHECKPOINT LRSN
BF208117E71F
DSNJ401I DSNJU104 ARCHIVE LOG COMMAND HISTORY RECORD NOT FOUND
DSNJ401I DSNUPBHR BACKUP SYSTEM UTILITY HISTORY RECORD NOT FOUND
SYSTEM CCSIDS
18:05:25 JANUARY 12, 2007
SYSTEM CCSIDS
-------------------ASCII SBCS
= 1252
ASCII MIXED = 65534
ASCII DBCS
= 65534
EBCDIC SBCS = 37
EBCDIC MBCS = 65534
EBCDIC DBCS = 65534
UNICODE SBCS = 367
UNICODE MBCS = 1208
UNICODE DBCS = 1200
...
Figure 117. Sample print log map utility output for a member of a data sharing group
Timestamps in the BSDS

The output of the print log map utility reveals that many timestamps are recorded
in the BSDS. Those timestamps record the date and time of various system events.
Timestamps in the output column LTIME are in local time. All other timestamps
are in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Figure 116 on page 756 and Figure 117 show example output from the print log
map utility. The following timestamps are included in the header section of the
reports:
System timestamp
Reflects the date and time that the BSDS was last updated. The BSDS can
be updated by several events:
v DB2 startup.
v During log write activities, whenever the write threshold is reached.
Depending on the number of output buffers that you have specified and
the system activity rate, the BSDS might be updated several times a
second, or it might not be updated for several seconds, minutes, or even
hours.
v Due to an error, DB2 might drop into single-BSDS mode from its normal
dual BSDS mode. This action might occur when a request to get, insert,
point to, update, or delete a BSDS record is unsuccessful. When this
error occurs, DB2 updates the timestamp in the remaining BSDS to force
a timestamp mismatch with the disabled BSDS.
758
Utility timestamp
The date and time that the contents of the BSDS were altered by the
change log inventory utility (DSNJU003).
The following timestamps are included in the active and archive log data sets
portion of the reports:
Active log date
The date on which the active log data set was originally allocated on the
DB2 subsystem.
Active log time
The time at which the active log data set was originally allocated on the
DB2 subsystem.
Archive log date
The date of creation (not allocation) of the archive log data set.
Archive log time
The time of creation (not allocation) of the archive log data set.
The following timestamps are included in the conditional restart control record
portion of the report that is shown in Figure 121 on page 762:
Conditional restart control record
The current time and date. This data is reported for information only and
is not kept in the BSDS.
CRCR created
The time and date of creation of the CRCR by the CRESTART option in the
change log inventory utility.
Begin restart
The time and date that the conditional restart was attempted.
End restart
The time and date that the conditional restart ended.
STARTRBA (timestamp)
The time at which the control interval was written.
ENDRBA (timestamp)
The time at which the last control interval was written.
Time of checkpoint
The time and date that are associated with the checkpoint record that was
used during the conditional restart process.
The following timestamps are included in the checkpoint queue and the DDF
communication record sections of the report that is shown in Figure 120 on page
761:
Checkpoint queue
The current time and date. This data is reported for information only and
Time of checkpoint
The time and date that the checkpoint was taken.
DDF communication record (heading)
The current time and date. This data is reported for information only, and
759
Active log data set status

The BSDS records the status of an active log data set as one of the status values
that are listed in the following table. This table lists each status value and its
meaning.
Table 147. Statuses of active log data sets
Status
Meaning
NEW
The data set has been defined but never used by DB2, or the log is truncated at a point
before the data set was created. In either case, the data set starting and ending RBA values
are reset to zero.
REUSABLE
Either the data set is new and has no records, or the data set has been offloaded. In the print
log map output, the start RBA value for the last REUSABLE data set is equal to the start
RBA value of the last archive log data set.
NOT REUSABLE
The data set contains records that have not been offloaded.
STOPPED
The offload processor encountered an error while reading a record, and that record could
not be obtained from the other copy of the active log. Alternatively, an error occurred during
truncation of the data set following a write I/O error.
TRUNCATED
One of these conditions exists:

v An I/O error occurred, and DB2 has stopped writing to this data set. The active log data
set is offloaded, beginning with the starting RBA and continuing up to the last valid
record segment in the truncated active log data set. (The RBA of the last valid record
segment is less than the ending RBA of the active log data set.) Logging is switched to the
next available active log data set and continues uninterrupted.
v The log was truncated by a conditional restart at a point within the data set RBA range.
v The DB2 ARCHIVE LOG command was issued while this data set was the current active
log data set.
The status value for each active log data set is displayed in the print log map
utility output. The sample print log map output in the following figure shows how
the status is displayed.
ACTIVE LOG COPY 1 DATA
START RBA/TIME
-------------------00000316C000
2003.346 16:20:49.6
0000031AC000
2003.346 16:21:23.7
0000031B2000
2003.346 16:21:23.8
SETS
END RBA/TIME
-------------------0000031ABFFF
2003.346 16:21:23.7
0000031B1FFF
2003.346 16:21:23.8
000003535FFF
........ ..........
DATE
LTIME
-------- ----2001.045 14:39
PASSWORD=(NULL)
2001.045 14:39
PASSWORD=(NULL)
2001.045 14:39
PASSWORD=(NULL)

STATUS=TRUNCATED, REUSABLE
STATUS=TRUNCATED, REUSABLE
STATUS=NOTREUSABLE
Figure 118. Portion of print log map utility output that shows active log data set status
Archive log command history

The print log map utility output also displays the archive log command history, as
shown in the following figure.
760
ARCHIVE LOG COMMAND HISTORY

16:36:54 DECEMBER 12, 2003
DATE
TIME
RBA
MODE
------------ ---------- -----------------DEC 12, 2003 16:35:47.8 000004FC89E5
QUIESCE
DEC 12, 2003 16:31:49.5 00000453F379
DEC 12, 2003 16:21:23.8 0000031B1388
DEC 12, 2003 16:21:23.7 0000031AB392
DEC 12, 2003 16:20:49.6 00000316B000
DEC 12, 2003 16:20:49.5 000003167000
WAIT
---YES
TIME
----999
Figure 119. Portion of print log map utility output that shows archive log command history
The values in the TIME column of the ARCHIVE LOG COMMAND HISTORY
section of the report in the previous figure represent the time that the ARCHIVE
LOG command was issued. This time value is saved in the BSDS and is converted
to printable format at the time that the print log map utility is run. Therefore this
value, when printed, can differ from other time values that were recorded
concurrently. Some time values are converted to printable format when they are
recorded, and then they are saved in the BSDS. These printed values remain the
same when the printed report is run.
Reading conditional restart control records

In addition to listing information about log records, the print log map utility lists
information about each conditional restart control record and each checkpoint. A
sample description of a checkpoint record in the queue is shown in the following
figure.
CHECKPOINT QUEUE
15:54:57 FEBRUARY 04, 2003
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
15:54:37 FEBRUARY 04,
0000400000EC
END CHECKPOINT RBA
00004000229A
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
15:53:44 FEBRUARY 04,
00000B39E1EC
END CHECKPOINT RBA
00000B3A80A6
SHUTDOWN CHECKPOINT
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
15:49:40 FEBRUARY 04,
00000B2E33E5
END CHECKPOINT RBA
00000B2E9C88
...
TIME OF CHECKPOINT
21:06:01 FEBRUARY 03,
00000A7AA19C
END CHECKPOINT RBA
00000A82C998
2003
2003
2003
2003
Figure 120. Sample print log map description of checkpoints
A sample description of a conditional restart control record is shown in the

following figure.
761
CRCR IDENTIFIER 0001

USE COUNT
1
RECORD STATUS
CRCR NOT ACTIVE
SUCCESSFUL RESTART
PROCESSING STATUS
COLD START (STARTRBA = ENDRBA)
FORWARD = NO
BACKOUT = NO
STARTRBA
000040000000
ENDRBA
000040000000
ENDLRSN
NOT SPECIFIED
EARLIEST REQUESTED RBA
000000000000
FIRST LOG RECORD RBA
000000000000
ORIGINAL CHECKPOINT RBA
000000000000
NEW CHECKPOINT RBA (CHKPTRBA)
NOT SPECIFIED
CRCR CREATED
15:54:13 FEBRUARY 04, 2003
BEGIN RESTART
15:54:26 FEBRUARY 04, 2003
END RESTART
15:54:37 FEBRUARY 04, 2003
RESTART PROGRESS
STARTED
ENDED
=======
=====
CURRENT STATUS REBUILD
YES
YES
FORWARD RECOVERY PHASE
YES
YES
BACKOUT RECOVERY PHASE
YES
YES
Figure 121. Sample print log map description of a CRCR
An example of system-level backup information is shown in the following figure.
BACKUP SYSTEM UTILITY HISTORY

SUBSYSTEM ID V91A
01:58:35 OCTOBER 15, 2006
START STCK
DATA COMPLETE
DATA
LOG
RBLP
LRSN
---------------- ---------------- ------------ -----------BDCFA6BA37580EEA 0000000000000000 01000023CDD5 01000023CDD5
TOKEN = E5F9F1C1BDCFA6BA37580EEA01000023CDD5
BDCF5D5A579ADAC0 0000000000000000 01000006D090 01000006D090
TOKEN = E5F9F1C1BDCF5D5A579ADAC001000006D090
BDCF468583F48E60 0000000000000000 01000000473C 01000000473C
TOKEN = E5F9F1C1BDCF468583F48E6001000000473C
SYSTEM CCSIDS
DATA/LOG COMPLETE
DATE
LTIME
LOCATION NAME
-------------------- ---------------2006/10/15 18:34:11 STLEC1
2006/10/15
13:05:56
STLEC1
2006/10/15
11:23:49
STLEC1
Figure 122. System-level backup information
An example of system-level backup information as an incremental copy is shown

in the following figure. TYPE applies only to the database copy pool history
entries.
|
|
|
BACKUP SYSTEM UTILITY HISTORY

SUBSYSTEM ID DJ1G
18:30:01 SEPTEMBER 24, 2006
START STCK
DATA COMPLETE
DATA
LOG
RBLP
LRSN
---------------- ---------------- ------------ -----------BA11432778C9156E 0000000000000000 BA1142E6B5BA BA1142E6B5BA
TOKEN = C4D1F1C7BA11432778C9156EBA1142E6B5BA
BA11359200B23C4E 0000000000000000 BA1133661984 BA113392C3CE
TOKEN = C4D1F1C7BA11432778C9156EBA1142E6B5BA
TYPE=I
Figure 123. System-level backup information as an incremental copy
762
Chapter 38. DSN1CHKR

The DSN1CHKR utility verifies the integrity of DB2 directory and catalog table
spaces.
DSN1CHKR scans the specified table space for broken links, broken hash chains,
and records that are not part of any link or chain.
Use DSN1CHKR on a regular basis to promptly detect any damage to the catalog
and directory.
DSN1CHKR is a diagnosis tool; it executes outside the control of DB2. You should
have detailed knowledge of DB2 data structures to make proper use of this service
aid.
Environment
Run the DSN1CHKR program as a z/OS job.
Do not run DSN1CHKR on a table space while it is active under DB2. While
DSN1CHKR runs, do not run other database operations for the database and table
space that are to be checked. Use the STOP DATABASE command for the database
and table space that are to be checked.
This utility does not require authorization. However, if RACF protects any of the
data sets, the authorization ID must also have the necessary RACF authority.
Required data sets

DSN1CHKR uses two data definition (DD) statements. Specify the data set for the
utilitys output with the SYSPRINT DD statement. Specify the first data set piece of
the table space that is to be checked with the SYSUT1 DD statement.
SYSPRINT
Defines the data set that contains output messages from the DSN1CHKR
program and all hexadecimal dump output.
SYSUT1
Defines the input data set. This data set can be a DB2 data set or a copy
that is created by the DSN1COPY utility. Specify disposition of this data set
as DISP=OLD to ensure that it is not in use by DB2. Set the data sets
disposition as DISP=SHR only when the STOP DATABASE command has
stopped the table space you want to check.
Restrictions of running DSN1COPY before DSN1CHKR

DSN1CHKR requires a VSAM data set as input; it cannot check a physical
sequential data set.
DSN1CHKR does not use full image copies that are created with the COPY utility.
If you create a full image copy with SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, you can copy it into
a VSAM data set with DSN1COPY and check it with DSN1CHKR.
763
DSN1CHKR cannot use full image copies that are created with DFSMSdss
concurrent copy. The DFSMSdss data set does not copy to a VSAM data set
because of incompatible formats.
Recommendation: First copy the stopped table space to a temporary data set by
using DSN1COPY. Use the DB2 naming convention for the copied data set. Run
DSN1CHKR on the copy, which frees the actual table space for restart to DB2.
When you run DSN1COPY, use the CHECK option to examine the table space for
page integrity errors. Although DSN1CHKR does check for these errors, running
DSN1COPY with CHECK prevents an unnecessary invocation of DSN1CHKR.
Restrictions of running DSN1CHKR on a valid table space

Run DSN1CHKR only on the following valid table spaces:
v DSNDB01.DBD01
v DSNDB06.SYSDBASE
v DSNDB06.SYSDBAUT
v DSNDB06.SYSGROUP
v DSNDB06.SYSPLAN
v DSNDB06.SYSVIEWS
DSN1CHKR output
problems. When diagnosing DB2, you might need to refer to licensed
Related information
DB2 Diagnosis Guide and Reference
Syntax and options of the DSN1CHKR control statement

The DSN1CHKR utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
764
DSN1CHKR syntax diagram

,
PARM=
DUMP
FORMAT
,
HASH( hexadecimal-constant
,
MAP=
ANCHOR( id,integer
,
RID( integer,hexadecimal-constant
,
HASH( hexadecimal-constant,integer
,
PAGE( integer,hexadecimal-constant
Option descriptions
The following parameters are optional. Specify parameters on the EXEC statement
in any order after the required JCL parameter PARM=. If you specify more than
one parameter, separate them with commas but no blanks. If you do not specify
any parameters, DSN1CHKR scans all table space pages for broken links and for
records that are not part of any link or chain, and prints the appropriate diagnostic
messages.
DUMP
Specifies that printed table space pages, if any, are to be in dump format. If
you specify DUMP, you cannot specify the FORMAT parameter.
FORMAT
Specifies that printed table space pages, if any, are to be formatted on output.
If you specify FORMAT, you cannot specify the DUMP parameter.
HASH(hexadecimal-constant, ...)
Specifies a hash value for a hexadecimal database identifier (DBID) in table
space DBD01. DSN1CHKR returns hash values for each DBID in page form
and in anchor point offset form.
hexadecimal-constant is the hash value for a DBID. The maximum number of
DBIDs is 10.
MAP=
Identifies a record whose pointer is to be followed. DSN1CHKR prints each
record as it follows the pointer. Use this parameter only after you have
determined which chain is broken. You can determine if a chain is broken by
running DSN1CHKR without any parameters, or with only FORMAT or
DUMP.
The options for this parameter help DSN1CHKR locate the record whose
pointer it follows. Each option must point to the beginning of the 6-byte prefix
765
area of a valid record or to the beginning of the hash anchor. If the value that
you specify does not point to one of these, DSN1CHKR issues an error
message and continues with the next pair of values.
ANCHOR(id,integer)
Specifies the anchor point that DSN1CHKR is to map.
id identifies the starting page and anchor point in the form ppppppaa, where
pppppp is the page number, and aa is the anchor point number.
integer determines which pointer to follow while mapping. 0 specifies the
forward pointer; 4 specifies the backward pointer.
The maximum number of pairs is five.
RID(integer, hexadecimal-constant, ...)
Identifies the record or hash anchor from which DSN1CHKR is to start
mapping.
integer is the page and record, in the form pppppprr, where pppppp is the
page number, and rr is the record number. These values are in hexadecimal
format.
hexadecimal-constant specifies the hexadecimal displacement from the
beginning of the record to the pointer in the record from which mapping
starts.
HASH(hexadecimal-constant, integer, ...)
Specifies the value that DSN1CHKR is to hash and map for table space
DBD01.
hexadecimal constant is the database identifier in table space DBD01.
integer determines which pointer to follow while mapping. 0 specifies the
forward pointer; 4 specifies the backward pointer.
PAGE(integer, hexadecimal-constant, ...)
integer specifies the page number on which the record or hash anchor is to
be located.
hexadecimal-constant specifies the offset to the pointer from the beginning of
the page.
When you use the PAGE option, DSN1CHKR follows the forward pointer
while mapping. If a forward pointer does not exist, DSN1CHKR stops
mapping after the first record.
Sample DSN1CHKR control statements

DSN1CHKR control statements.
Example 1: Running DSN1CHKR on a temporary data set

In this sample JCL, STEP1 allocates a temporary data set. The fifth qualifier in the
data set name can be either I0001 or J0001. This example uses I0001. STEP2 stops
database DSNDB06 with the STOP DATABASE command. STEP3 copies the target
table space into the temporary data set
766
(TESTCAT.DSNDBC.TEMPDB.TMPDBASE.I0001.A001) with DSN1COPY. This step

also uses the CHECK option to check the table space for page integrity errors.
After DSN1COPY with the CHECK option ensures that no errors exist, STEP4
restarts the table space for access to DB2. STEP5 runs DSN1CHKR on the
temporary data set.
DSN1CHKR prints the chains, beginning with the pointers on the RID option in
the MAP (maintenance analysis procedure) parameter. In this example, the first
pointer is on page 000002, at an offset of 6 bytes from record 1. The second pointer
is on page 00000B, at an offset of 6 bytes from record 1.
The RIDs in STEP5 are for instruction only.
//YOUR JOBCARD
//*
//JOBCAT DD DSNAME=DSNCAT1.USER.CATALOG,DISP=SHR
//STEP1
EXEC PGM=IDCAMS
//********************************************************************
//*
ALLOCATE A TEMPORARY DATA SET FOR SYSDBASE
*
//********************************************************************
//SYSIN
DD *
DELETE
(TESTCAT.DSNDBC.TEMPDB.TMPDBASE.I0001.A001)
CATALOG(DSNCAT)
DEFINE CLUSTER
( NAME(TESTCAT.DSNDBC.TEMPDB.TMPDBASE.I0001.A001)
NONINDEXED
REUSE
CONTROLINTERVALSIZE(4096)
VOLUMES(XTRA02)
RECORDS(783 783)
RECORDSIZE(4089 4089)
SHAREOPTIONS(3 3) )
DATA
( NAME(TESTCAT.DSNDBD.TEMPDB.TMPDBASE.I0001.A001))
CATALOG(DSNCAT)
/*
//STEP2
EXEC PGM=IKJEFT01,DYNAMNBR=20
//********************************************************************
//*
STOP DSNDB06.SYSDBASE
*
//********************************************************************
//STEPLIB DD DSN=prefix.SDSNLOAD,DISP=SHR
//SYSTSIN DD *
DSN SYSTEM(DSN)
-STOP DB(DSNDB06) SPACENAM(SYSDBASE)
END
/*
//STEP3
EXEC PGM=DSN1COPY,PARM=(CHECK)
//********************************************************************
//*
CHECK SYSDBASE AND RUN DSN1COPY
*
//********************************************************************
//SYSUT1
DD DSN=DSNCAT.DSNDBC.DSNDB06.SYSDBASE.I0001.A001,DISP=SHR
//SYSUT2
DD DSN=TESTCAT.DSNDBC.TEMPDB.TMPDBASE.I0001.A001,DISP=SHR
/*
//STEP4
//********************************************************************
//*
START DSNDB06.SYSDBASE
*
//********************************************************************
767
//SYSTSIN DD *
DSN SYSTEM(DSN)
-START DB(DSNDB06) SPACENAM(SYSDBASE)
END
/*//STEP5
EXEC PGM=DSN1CHKR,PARM='MAP=RID(00000201,06,00000B01,06)',
//
COND=(4,LT)
//********************************************************************
//*
CHECK LINKS OF SYSDBASE
*
//********************************************************************
//SYSUT1
DD DSN=TESTCAT.DSNDBC.TEMPDB.TMPDBASE.I0001.A001,DISP=SHR
/*
Figure 124. Sample JCL for running DSN1CHKR on a temporary data set
Example 2: Running DSN1CHKR on a table space

In this sample JCL, STEP1 stops database DSNDB06 with the STOP DATABASE
command. STEP2 runs DSN1CHKR on the target table space; the output from this
utility job is identical to the output in Example 1. STEP3 restarts the database with
the START DATABASE command.
//YOUR JOBCARD
//*
//STEP1
//********************************************************************
//*
EXAMPLE 2
*
//*
*
//*
STOP DSNDB06.SYSDBASE
*
//********************************************************************
//SYSTSIN DD *
DSN SYSTEM(DSN)
-STOP DB(DSNDB06) SPACENAM(SYSDBASE)
END
/*
//STEP2
EXEC PGM=DSN1CHKR,PARM='MAP=RID(00000201,06,00000B01,06)',
//
COND=(4,LT)
//********************************************************************
//*
CHECK LINKS OF SYSDBASE
*
//********************************************************************
//SYSUT1
DD DSN=DSNCAT.DSNDBD.DSNDB06.SYSDBASE.I0001.A001,DISP=SHR
/*
//STEP3
//********************************************************************
//*
RESTART DSNDB06.SYSDBASE
*
//********************************************************************
//SYSTSIN DD *
DSN SYSTEM(DSN)
-START DB(DSNDB06) SPACENAM(SYSDBASE)
END
/*
768
Figure 125. Sample JCL for running DSN1CHKR on a stopped table space.
769
770
Chapter 39. DSN1COMP

DSN1COMP estimates space savings that are to be achieved by DB2 data
compression in table spaces and indexes.
You can run this utility on the following types of data sets that contain
uncompressed data:
v DB2 full image copy data sets
v VSAM data sets that contain DB2 table spaces
v Sequential data sets that contain DB2 table spaces (for example, DSN1COPY
output)
You cannot run DSN1COMP on concurrent copies.
DSN1COMP does not estimate savings for data sets that contain LOB table spaces.
Environment
Run DSN1COMP as a z/OS job.
You can run DSN1COMP even when the DB2 subsystem is not operational. Before
you use DSN1COMP when the DB2 subsystem is operational, issue the DB2 STOP
DATABASE command. Issuing the STOP DATABASE command ensures that DB2
has not allocated the DB2 data sets.
Do not run DSN1COMP on table spaces in DSNDB01, DSNDB06, or DSNDB07.
DSN1COMP does not require authorization. However, if any of the data sets is
RACF-protected, the authorization ID of the job must have RACF authority.
Required data sets

DSN1COMP uses the following data definition (DD) statements:
SYSPRINT
Defines the data set that contains output messages from DSN1COMP and
all hexadecimal dump output.
SYSUT1
Defines the input data set, which can be a sequential data set or a VSAM
data set.
Specify the disposition for this data set as OLD (DISP=OLD) to ensure that
it is not in use by DB2. Specify the disposition for this data set as SHR
(DISP=SHR) only in circumstances where the DB2 STOP DATABASE
command does not work.
The requested operation takes place only for the specified data set. In the
following situations, you must specify the correct data set.
v The input data set belongs to a linear table space.
v The index space is larger than 2 GB.
v The table space or index space is a partitioned space.
771
If you are running the online REORG utility with FASTSWITCH behavior,
verify the data set name before running the DSN1COMP utility. The
fifth-level qualifier in the data set name alternates between I0001 and
J0001 when using FASTSWITCH. If the table space has cloning, the
fifth-level qualifier can be n0002. You cannot specify FASTSWITCH YES if
the table space has cloning; however, a FASTSWITCH YES REORG might
have been done before the clone was created so you might still have a
mixture of I and J data sets. Specify the correct fifth-level qualifier in the
data set name to successfully execute the DSN1COMP utility. To determine
the correct fifth-level qualifier, query the IPREFIX column of
SYSIBM.SYSTABLEPART for each data partition or the IPREFIX column of
SYSIBM.SYSINDEXPART for each index partition. If the object is not
partitioned, use zero as the value for the PARTITION column in your
query.
|
Recommendation
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Before using DSN1COMP, be sure that you know the page size and data set size
(DSSIZE) for the table space. Use the following query on the DB2 catalog to get the
information you need, in this example for table DEPT:
SELECT T.CREATOR,T.NAME,S.NAME AS TABLESPACE,S.PARTITIONS,S.PGSIZE,
CASE S.DSSIZE
WHEN 0 THEN
CASE WHEN S.TYPE = 'G' THEN 4194304
WHEN S.TYPE = 'O' THEN 4194304
WHEN S.TYPE = 'P' THEN 4194304
WHEN S.TYPE = 'R' THEN 4194304
ELSE
CASE WHEN S.PARTITIONS > 254 THEN
CASE WHEN S.PGSIZE = 4 THEN 4194304
WHEN S.PGSIZE = 8 THEN 8388608
ELSE NULL
END
WHEN S.PARTITIONS > 64 THEN 4194304
ELSE 2097152
END
END
ELSE S.DSSIZE
END
AS DSSIZE
FROM SYSIBM.SYSTABLES T,
SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACE S
WHERE
T.NAME = 'DEPT' AND
T.TSNAME = S.NAME;
Related information
Contents of the log (DB2 Administration Guide)
Syntax and options of the DSN1COMP control statement

The DSN1COMP utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
772
DSN1COMP syntax diagram
DSN1COMP

32K
PAGESIZE (
4K
8K
16K
32K
DSSIZE (
LARGE
integer
NUMPARTS(integer)

FREEPAGE(integer)
PCTFREE(integer)
FULLCOPY
REORG
ROWLIMIT(integer)

MAXROWS(integer)
|
|
|
DSN1COMP

LEAFLIM(integer)
Option descriptions
To run DSN1COMP, specify one or more of the following parameters on the EXEC
statement to run DSN1COMP. If you specify more than one parameter, separate
each parameter by a comma. You can specify parameters in any order.
32K
Specifies that the input data set, SYSUT1, has a 32-KB page size. If you specify
this option and the SYSUT1 data set does not have a 32-KB page size,
DSN1COMP might produce unpredictable results.
The recommended option for performance is PAGESIZE(32K).
PAGESIZE
Specifies the page size of the input data set that is defined by SYSUT1.
Available page size values are 4K, 8K, 16K, or 32K. If you specify an incorrect
page size, DSN1COMP might produce unpredictable results.
If you omit PAGESIZE, DSN1COMP tries to determine the page size from the
input data set. DB2 issues an error message if DSN1COMP cannot determine
the input page size. This might happen if the header page is not in the input
data set, or if the page size field in the header page contains an invalid page
size.
DSSIZE(integer G)
Specifies the data set size, in gigabytes, for the input data set. If you omit
DSSIZE, DB2 assumes that the input data set size is 2 GB.
integer must match the DSSIZE value that was specified when the table space
was defined.
If you omit DSSIZE and the data set is not the assumed default size, the results
from DSN1COMP are unpredictable.
773
LARGE
Specifies that the input data set is a table space that was defined with the
LARGE option. If you specify LARGE, DB2 assumes that the data set has a
4-GB boundary.
The recommended method of specifying a table space defined with LARGE is
DSSIZE(4G).
If you omit the LARGE or DSSIZE(4G) option when it is needed, or if you
specify LARGE for a table space that was not defined with the LARGE option,
the results from DSN1COMP are unpredictable.
NUMPARTS(integer)
Specifies the number of partitions that are associated with the input data set.
Valid specifications range from 1 to 4096. If you omit NUMPARTS or specify it
as 0, DSN1COMP assumes that your input file is not partitioned. If you specify
a number greater than 64, DSN1COMP assumes that the data set is for a
partitioned table space that was defined with the LARGE option, even if the
LARGE keyword is not specified.
DSN1COMP cannot always validate the NUMPARTS parameter. If you specify
it incorrectly, DSN1COMP might produce unpredictable results.
DSN1COMP terminates and issues message DSN1946I when it encounters an
image copy that contains multiple partitions; a compression report is issued for
the first partition.
FREEPAGE(integer)
Specifies how often to leave a page of free space when calculating the
percentage of saved pages. You must specify an integer in the range 0 to 255. If
you specify 0, no pages are included as free space when DSN1COMP reports
the percentage of pages saved. Otherwise, one free page is included after every
n pages, where n is the specified integer.
Specify the same value that you specify for the FREEPAGE option of the SQL
statement CREATE TABLESPACE or ALTER TABLESPACE.
PCTFREE(integer)
Indicates what percentage of each page to leave as free space when calculating
the percentage of pages saved. You must specify an integer in the range 0 to
99. When calculating the savings, DSN1COMP allows for at least n percent of
free space for each page, where n is the specified integer.
Specify the same value that you specify for the PCTFREE option of the SQL
FULLCOPY
Specifies that a DB2 full image copy (not a DFSMSdss concurrent copy) of your
data is to be used as input. Omitting this parameter when the input is a full
image copy can cause error messages or unpredictable results. If this data is
partitioned, also specify the NUMPARTS parameter to identify the number of
partitions.
REORG
Provides an estimate of compression savings that are comparable to the
savings that the REORG utility would achieve. If this keyword is not specified,
the results are similar to the compression savings that the LOAD utility would
achieve.
774
ROWLIMIT(integer)
Specifies the maximum number of rows to evaluate in order to provide the
compression estimate. This option prevents DSN1COMP from examining every
row in the input data set. Valid specifications range from 1 to 99000000.
Use this option to limit the elapsed time and processor time that DSN1COMP
requires. An analysis of the first 5 to 10 MB of a table space provides a fairly
representative sample of the table space for estimating compression savings.
Therefore, specify a ROWLIMIT value that restricts DSN1COMP to the first 5
to 10 MB of the table space. For example, if the row length of the table space is
200 bytes, specifying ROWLIMIT(50000) causes DSN1COMP to analyze
approximately 10 MB of the table space.
MAXROWS(integer)
Specifies the maximum number of rows that DSN1COMP is to consider when
calculating the percentage of pages saved. You must specify an integer in the
range 1 to 255.
Specify the same value that you specify for the MAXROWS option of the SQL
|
|
|
|
|
LEAFLIM(integer)
Specifies how many index leaf pages should be evaluated to determine the
compression estimate. This option prevents DSN1COMP from processing all
index leaf pages in the input data set. Valid specifications range from 1 to
99000000.
|
|
If the LEAFLIM parameter is not specified, the entire index will be scanned
and all leaf pages will be examined.
|
|
In a compressed index, only leaf pages are compressed. All other page types
remain uncompressed.
Before running DSN1COMP

Certain activities might be required before you run the DSN1COMP utility,
If you run DSN1COMP on a segmented table space, you must first query the
SYSTABLEPART catalog table to determine the current instance qualifier, which is
stored in the IPREFIX column. You can then use the current instance qualifier to
code the data set name in the JCL. The following sample shows an example of
such a query.
SELECT DBNAME, TSNAME, PARTITION, IPREFIX
WHERE DBNAME = 'DBMC0731' AND TSNAME = 'TPMC0731'
ORDER BY TSNAME, PARTITION;
The preceding query produces the following result:
775
+-------------------------------------------+
| DBNAME | TSNAME | PARTITION | IPREFIX |
+-------------------------------------------+
1_| DBMC0731 | TPMC0731 |
1 | J
|
2_| DBMC0731 | TPMC0731 |
2 | J
|
3_| DBMC0731 | TPMC0731 |
3 | J
|
4_| DBMC0731 | TPMC0731 |
4 | J
|
5_| DBMC0731 | TPMC0731 |
5 | J
|
+-------------------------------------------+
Figure 126. Result from query on the SYSTABLEPART catalog table to determine the value
in the IPREFIX column
The preceding output provides the current instance qualifier (J), which can be used
to code the data set name in the DSN1COMP JCL as follows.
//STEP1
//SYSUT1
//SYSPRINT
//SYSUDUMP
EXEC PGM=DSN1COMP
DD DSN=vcatname.DSNDBC.DBMC0731.J0001.A001,DISP=SHR
DD AYAOUT=*
DD AYAOUT=*
Estimating compression savings achieved with option REORG

If you run DSN1COMP with the REORG option on small data sets, the resulting
estimates might vary greatly from the estimates that are produced without the
default REORG option. Alternatively, if you run DSN1COMP and specify a small
number (n) for ROWLIMIT, the estimates might vary greatly from the estimates
that are produced without REORG.
DSN1COMP does not try to convert data to the latest version before it compresses
rows and derives a savings estimate.
Without the REORG option, DSN1COMP uses the first n rows to fill the
compression dictionary. DSN1COMP processes the remaining rows to provide the
compression estimate. If the number of rows that are used to build the dictionary
is a significant percentage of the data set rows, little savings result. With the
REORG option, DSN1COMP processes all the rows, including those that are used
to build the dictionary, which results in greater compression.
The DSN1COMP utility determines possible saving estimates at the data set level
for a unique partition only. Therefore, if DSN1COMP is run against an image copy
data set that contains several partitions or against a single partition of
partition-by-growth table spaces (PBGs), the results will be different from what the
REORG utility would produce.
|
|
|
|
|
Free space in compression calculations on table space

The DSN1COMP utilitys compression estimates take into account the PCTFREE
and FREEPAGE options.
If you use different PCTFREE or FREEPAGE values than those that were created
with the input table space, you get a different value for noncmppages.
DSN1COMP reports this value in message DSN1940I, as shown in the example
output in the following figure.
DSN1999I START OF DSN1COMP FOR JOB TST512A
DSN1998I INPUT DSNAME = FUFOU237.TSP32K
DSN1944I DSN1COMP INPUT PARAMETERS
512 DICTIONARY SIZE USED
30 FREEPAGE VALUE USED
45 PCTFREE VALUE USED
776
STEP1
, SEQ
NO ROWLIMIT WAS REQUESTED

ESTIMATE BASED ON DB2 LOAD METHOD
DSN1940I DSN1COMP
1,289
717
44
COMPRESSION REPORT
KB WITHOUT COMPRESSION
KB WITH COMPRESSION
PERCENT OF THE BYTES WOULD BE SAVED
176 ROWS SCANNED TO BUILD DICTIONARY

20,000 ROWS SCANNED TO PROVIDE COMPRESSION ESTIMATE
512 DICTIONARY ENTRIES
1 DICTIONARY PAGES REQUIRED
147 PAGES REQUIRED WITHOUT COMPRESSION
148 PAGES REQUIRED WITH COMPRESSION
0 PERCENT OF THE DB2 DATA PAGES WOULD BE SAVED
*** DETAIL REPORT OF FREQUENCIES AND AVERAGES ***
1 CHILD CHARACTER WAS COMPARED
2 CHILD CHARACTERS WERE COMPARED
TOTAL ALPHABET NODE COMPARISONS
566,764 TIMES
182,026 TIMES
10,300 TIMES
1,129 TIMES
528,139 TIMES
967,361 CHILD COMPARISONS IN THE SIBLING LISTS

760,219 SEARCHES IN THE SIBLING LISTS
1.2 AVERAGE NUMBER OF COMPARISONS PER SEARCH
60 BYTES FOR AVERAGE UNCOMPRESSED ROW LENGTH
39 BYTES FOR AVERAGE COMPRESSED ROW LENGTH
263 IS THE DATABASE ID (DBID)
2 IS THE PAGESET ID (PSID)
Figure 127. Example DSN1COMP output
The effect of running DSN1COMP on a table space with identical rows

If you run DSN1COMP on a table space in which the data is the same for all rows,
message DSN1941I is issued. In this case, DSN1COMP does not compute any
statistics.
Sample DSN1COMP control statements

DSN1COMP control statements.
Example 1: Estimating space savings from data compression for

a full image copy
The following statement specifies that the DSN1COMP utility is to report the
estimated space savings that are to be achieved by compressing the full image
copy that is identified by the SYSUT1 DD statement. In this statement, the DSN
option specifies the data set name of the image copy that is to be used as input.
The fifth qualifier in the data set name can be either I0001 or J0001. This example
uses I0001. Note that because the input is a full image copy, the FULLCOPY option
must be specified.
//jobname JOB acct information
//COMPEST EXEC PGM=DSN1COMP,PARM='FULLCOPY'
777
//SYSABEND DD SYSOUT=A
//SYSUT1
DD DSN=DSNCAT.DSNDBC.DB254A.TS254A.I0001.A001,DISP=SHR
Example 2: Providing intended free space when estimating

space savings
In the following sample statement, STEP1 specifies that DSN1COMP is to report
the estimated space savings that are to be achieved by compressing the data in the
data set that is identified by the SYSUT1 DD statement,
DSNC810.DSNDBD.DB254SP4.TS254SP4.I0001.A00. When calculating these
estimates, DSN1COMP considers the values passed by the PCTFREE and
FREEPAGE options. The PCTFREE value indicates that 20% of each page is to be
left as free space. The FREEPAGE value indicates that every fifth page is to be left
as free space. This value must be the same value that you specified for the
FREEPAGE option of the SQL statement CREATE TABLESPACE or ALTER
TABLESPACE.
STEP2 specifies that DSN1COMP is to report the estimated space savings that are
to achieved by compressing the data in the data set that is identified by the
SYSUT1 DD statement, DSNC810.DSNDBD.DB254SP4.TS254SP4.I0001.A0001. When
providing the compression estimate, DSN1COMP is to evaluate no more than
20 000 rows, as indicated by the ROWLIMIT option. Specifying the maximum
number of rows to evaluate limits the elapsed time and processor time that
DSN1COMP requires.
//DSN1COMP JOB MSGLEVEL=(1,1),CLASS=A,MSGCLASS=A,REGION=3000K,
//
USER=SYSADM,PASSWORD=SYSADM
/*ROUTE PRINT STLXXXX.USERID
//STEP1
EXEC PGM=DSN1COMP,PARM='PCTFREE(20),FREEPAGE(5)'
//SYSDUMP DD SYSOUT=A
//SYSUT1
DD DSN=DSNC910.DSNDBD.DB254SP4.TS254SP4.I0001.A001,DISP=SHR
/*
//STEP2
EXEC PGM=DSN1COMP,PARM='ROWLIMIT(20000)'
//SYSDUMP DD SYSOUT=A
//SYSUT1
DD DSN=DSNC910.DSNDBD.DB254SP4.TS254SP4.I0001.A001,DISP=SHR
/*
//
Figure 128. Example DSN1COMP statements with PCTFREE, FREEPAGE, and ROWLIMIT
options
Example 3: Estimating space savings that are comparable to

what the REORG utility would achieve.
The following statement specifies that DSN1COMP is to report the estimated space
savings that are to be achieved by compressing the data in the data set that is
identified by the SYSUT1 DD statement,
DSNCAT.DSNDBD.DBJT0201.TPJTO201.I0001.A254. This input data set is a table
space that was defined with the LARGE option and has 254 partitions, as indicated
by the DSN1COMP options LARGE and NUMPARTS.
778
The REORG option indicates that DSN1COMP is to provide an estimate of

compression savings that is comparable to the savings that the REORG utility
would achieve, rather than what the LOAD utility would achieve.
When calculating these estimates, DSN1COMP considers the values passed by the
PCTFREE and FREEPAGE options. The PCTFREE value indicates that 30% of each
page is to be left as free space. The FREEPAGE value indicates that every thirtieth
page is to be left as free space. This value must be the same value that you
specified for the FREEPAGE option of the SQL statement CREATE TABLESPACE
or ALTER TABLESPACE. DSN1COMP is to evaluate no more than 20 000 rows, as
indicated by the ROWLIMIT option.
//STEP2 EXEC
//
//
//STEPLIB DD
//
DD
//SYSPRINT DD
//SYSDUMP DD
//SYSABEND DD
//SYSUT1
DD
//SYSUT2
DD
/*
PGM=DSN1COMP,
PARM='LARGE,PCTFREE(30),FREEPAGE(30),NUMPARTS(
254),REORG,ROWLIMIT(1000)'
DSN='USER.TESTLIB',DISP=SHR
DSN='DB2A.SDSNLOAD',DISP=SHR
SYSOUT=A
SYSOUT=A
SYSOUT=A
DSN=DSNCAT.DSNDBD.DBJT0201.TPJT0201.I0001.A254,DISP=SHR
SYSOUT=A
Figure 129. Example DSN1COMP statement with the LARGE, PCTFREE, FREEPAGE,
NUMPARTS, REORG, and ROWLIMIT options.
DSN1COMP output
The output of the DSN1COMP utility lists a variety of information.
Message DSN1941
If you receive this message, use a data set with more rows as input, or specify a
larger ROWLIMIT.
Sample DSN1COMP report

The following figure shows a sample of the output that DSN1COMP generates.
DSN1940I DSN1COMP
301
224
25
1,975
4,665
4,096
81
52
16
110
99
10
COMPRESSION REPORT
KB WITHOUT COMPRESSION
KB WITH COMPRESSION
PERCENT OF THE BYTES WOULD BE SAVED
ROWS SCANNED TO BUILD DICTIONARY
ROWS SCANNED TO PROVIDE COMPRESSION ESTIMATE
DICTIONARY ENTRIES
BYTES FOR AVERAGE UNCOMPRESSED ROW LENGTH
BYTES FOR AVERAGE COMPRESSED ROW LENGTH
DICTIONARY PAGES REQUIRED
PAGES REQUIRED WITHOUT COMPRESSION
PAGES REQUIRED WITH COMPRESSION
PERCENT OF THE DB2 DATA PAGES WOULD BE SAVED
Figure 130. Sample DSN1COMP report
779
Example of DSN1COMP on an index

The following figure shows an example of the output that DSN1COMP on an
index generates.
DSN1999I START OF DSN1COMP FOR JOB DSN1COMP STEP2
DSN1998I INPUT DSNAME = TESTCAT.DSNDBD.DB1COMPR.I1.I0001.A001
, VSAM
DSN1944I DSN1COMP INPUT PARAMETERS

PROCESSING PARMS FOR INDEX DATASET:
NO LEAFLIM WAS REQUESTED
DSN1940I DSN1COMP COMPRESSION REPORT
38 Index Leaf Pages Processed
3,000 Keys Processed
3,000 Rids Processed
401 KB of Key Data Processed
106 KB of Compressed Keys Produced
EVALUATION OF COMPRESSION WITH DIFFERENT INDEX PAGE SIZES:
---------------------------------------------K Page Buffer Size yields a
% Reduction in Index Leaf Page Space
The Resulting Index would have approximately
49 % of the original index's Leaf Page Space
No Bufferpool Space would be unused
---------------------------------------------8
51
---------------------------------------------K Page Buffer Size yields a

% Reduction in Index Leaf Page Space
The Resulting Index would have approximately
26 % of the original index's Leaf Page Space
3 % of Bufferpool Space would be unused to
ensure keys fit into compressed buffers
---------------------------------------------16
74
DSN1994I DSN1COMP COMPLETED SUCCESSFULLY,
Figure 131. Sample DSN1COMP output
780
38
PAGES PROCESSED
Chapter 40. DSN1COPY

The DSN1COPY utility allows you to copy DB2 VSAM data sets.
With the DSN1COPY stand-alone utility, you can copy:
v DB2 VSAM data sets to sequential data sets
v DSN1COPY sequential data sets to DB2 VSAM data sets
v DB2 image copy data sets to DB2 VSAM data sets
v DB2 VSAM data sets to other DB2 VSAM data sets
v DSN1COPY sequential data sets to other sequential data sets
A DB2 VSAM data set is a single piece of a nonpartitioned table space or index, or
a single partition of a partitioned table space or index. The input must be a single
z/OS sequential or VSAM data set. Concatenation of input data sets is not
supported.
Using DSN1COPY, you can also print hexadecimal dumps of DB2 data sets and
databases, check the validity of data or index pages (including dictionary pages for
compressed data), translate database object identifiers (OBIDs) to enable moving
data sets between different systems, and reset to 0 the log RBA that is recorded in
each index page or data page.
You cannot run DSN1COPY on concurrent copies.
|
DSN1COPY can operate on both base and clone objects.

You can use the DSN1COPY utility on LOB table spaces by specifying the LOB
keyword and omitting the SEGMENT and INLCOPY keywords.
Output
Environment
Execute DSN1COPY as a z/OS job when the DB2 subsystem is either active or not
active.
If you execute DSN1COPY when DB2 is active, use the following procedure:
1. Start the table space as read-only by using START DATABASE.
2. Run the QUIESCE utility with the WRITE (YES) option to externalize all data
pages and index pages.
3. Run DSN1COPY with DISP=SHR on the data definition (DD) statement.
4. Start the table space as read-write by using START DATABASE to return to
normal operations.
DSN1COPY does not require authorization. However, if any of the data sets is
781
Restrictions
DSN1COPY does not alter data set structure. For example, DSN1COPY does not
copy a partitioned or segmented table space into a simple table space. The output
data set is a page-for-page copy of the input data set. If the intended use of
DSN1COPY is to move or restore data, ensure that definitions for the source and
target table spaces, tables, and indexes are identical. Otherwise, unpredictable
results can occur.
DSN1COPY cannot copy DB2 recovery log data sets. The format of a DB2 log page
is different from that of a table or index page. If you try to use DSN1COPY to
recover log data sets, DSN1COPY will abnormally terminate.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For a compressed table space, DSN1COPY does not reset the dictionary version for
an inline image copy, or for an incremental image copy that was created with the
SYSTEMPAGES=YES COPY utility option. To reset the dictionary version for an
inline image copy, use the inline image copy as input to DSN1COPY with a VSAM
intermediate data set as output. This intermediate data set can then be used as
input to DSN1COPY RESET to copy the intermediate data set to the real target
data set.
|
|
|
|
For Partition-by-growth table spaces, DSN1COPY can only be used if the number
of active partitions of the source and the target table space are the same, otherwise
you should use the UNLOAD utility to unload the data from the source table
space and the LOAD utility to reload the data into the target table space.
|
|
All the target data sets must exist. You can use Access Method Services to define
them.
|
|
|
|
|
DSN1COPY will issue an error and terminate if it can be clearly verified that the
LOB option is specified, but the data set is not a LOB data set, or that the LOB
option is omitted for a data set that is a LOB data set. To avoid problems, always
specify the LOB option if the input data set SYSUT1 is a LOB table space, and
make sure that the LOB option is not specified for non LOB table spaces.
DSN1COPY cannot copy a source object of 4 GB or greater in size when it is full
unless the target object is EA-enabled. For example, the source is full when it is not
the last piece of a multi-piece non-partitioned object with a DSSIZE of 4 GB or
greater. To avoid VSAM errors and limit each piece to 2 GB so that the target
object has more pieces than the original source:
v Define the target data set as EA-enabled and DSN1COPY can be used, one piece
at a time, to copy the data from the source that is not EA-enabled to the target.
v If it is not possible to define the target data set as EA-enabled:
1. Take a full image copy of the entire source object by running the COPY
utility and specifying DSNUM ALL.
2. Create the target object by specifying DSSIZE 2GB for table spaces and
PIECESIZE 2GB for indexes. See Copying tables from one subsystem to
another on page 797 for more information.
3. Define the partition number data sets (2 GB each) with the IDCAMS
command. Define enough pieces to hold the entire source.
4. Run the DSN1COPY utility with the image copy as the source (SYSUT1), the
target object as SYSUT2, and specify DSSIZE 2G.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
782
|
|
Syntax and options of the DSN1COPY control statement
|
|
The DSN1COPY utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
|
|
DSN1COPY syntax diagram
|
|
DSN1COPY

CHECK
|
|
|
|
32K
PAGESIZE(
4K
8K
16K
32K
FULLCOPY
INCRCOPY
SEGMENT
INLCOPY
LARGE
LOB

DSSIZE ( integer G )
PIECESIZ(integer
K
M
G
NUMPARTS(integer)

(1)
EBCDIC
PRINT
(hexadecimal-constant,hexadecimal-constant)
|
|
ASCII
UNICODE

VALUE(
string
OBIDXLAT
RESET
|
|
Notes:
|
|
|
||
EBCDIC is not necessarily the default if the first page of the input data set is a header page. If
the first page is a header page, DSN1COPY uses the format information in the header page as the
default format.
Option descriptions
|
|
|
To run DSN1COPY, specify one or more of the following parameters on the EXEC
statement. If you specify more than one parameter, separate each parameter by a
comma. You can specify parameters in any order.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CHECK
Checks each page from the SYSUT1 data set for validity. The validity checking
operates on one page at a time and does not include any cross-page checking.
If an error is found, a message is issued describing the type of error, and a
dump of the page is sent to the SYSPRINT data set. If an unexpected page
number is encountered, validity checking continues to the end and a report
will be printed of all unexpected page numbers. If you do not receive any
messages, no errors were found. If more than one error exists in a given page,
the check identifies only the first of the errors. However, the entire page is
dumped. DSN1COPY does not check system pages for validity.
783
32K
|
|
|
|
Specifies that the SYSUT1 data set has a 32-KB page size. If you specify this
option and the SYSUT1 data set does not have a 32-KB page size, DSN1COPY
might produce unpredictable results.
PAGESIZE
page size, DSN1COPY might produce unpredictable results.
|
|
|
|
If you do not specify the page size, DSN1COPY tries to determine the page
size from the input data set if the first page of the input data set is a header
page. DB2 issues an error message if DSN1COPY cannot determine the input
page size. This might happen if the header page is not in the input data set, or
if the page size field in the header page contains an invalid page size.
|
|
|
|
|
FULLCOPY
data is to be used as input. If this data is partitioned, specify NUMPARTS to
identify the total number of partitions. If you specify FULLCOPY without
NUMPARTS, DSN1COPY dtermines the NUMPARTS value from the header
page if possible; otherwise, DSN1COPY assumes that your input file is not
partitioned.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Specify FULLCOPY when using a full image copy as input. Omitting the
parameter can cause error messages or unpredictable results.
|
|
The FULLCOPY parameter requires SYSUT2 (output data set) to be either a

DB2 VSAM data set or a DUMMY data set.
INCRCOPY
Specifies that an incremental image copy of the data is to be used as input.
DSN1COPY with the INCRCOPY parameter updates existing data sets; do not
redefine the existing data sets. INCRCOPY requires that the output data set
(SYSUT2) be a DB2 VSAM data set.
Before you apply an incremental image copy to your data set, you must first
apply a full image copy to the data set by using the FULLCOPY parameter.
Make sure that you apply the full image copy in a separate execution step
because you receive an error message if you specify both the FULLCOPY and
the INCRCOPY parameters in the same step. Then, apply each incremental
image copy in a separate step, starting with the oldest incremental image copy.
Specifying neither FULLCOPY nor INCRCOPY implies that the input is not an
image copy data set. Therefore, only a single output data set is used.
SEGMENT
Specifies that you want to use a segmented table space as input to DSN1COPY.
Pages with all zeros in the table space are copied, but no error messages are
issued. You cannot specify FULLCOPY or INCRCOPY if you specify
SEGMENT.
If you are using DSN1COPY with the OBIDXLAT to copy a DB2 data set to
another DB2 data set, the source and target table spaces must have the same
SEGSIZE attribute.
You cannot specify the SEGMENT option with the LOB parameter.
784
|
|
|
|
INLCOPY
Specifies that the input data is an inline copy data set. The INLCOPY
parameter requires SYSUT2 (output data set) to be either a VSAM data set or a
DUMMY data set.
You cannot specify the INLCOPY option with the LOB parameter.
|
|
|
|
|
DSSIZE(integer G)
Specifies the data set size, in gigabytes. This value has to match with the
DSSIZE of the source table space. If you omit the DSSIZE keyword or the
LARGE keyword, DSN1COPY assumes the appropriate default input data set
size that is listed in the following table.
Table 148. Default input data set sizes
Object
Default input data set size (in GB)
Non-LOB linear table space or index
LOB
|
|
Partitioned table space or index with

NUMPARTS = 1-16
|
|

NUMPARTS = 17-32
|
|

NUMPARTS = 33-64
|
|
|

NUMPARTS >64
|
|
was defined.
|
|
from DSN1COPY are unpredictable.
If you specify DSSIZE, you cannot specify LARGE.

LARGE
LARGE option, or an index on such a table space. If you specify the LARGE
keyword, DB2 assumes that the data set has a 4-GB boundary. The
recommended method of specifying a table space that was defined with the
LARGE option is DSSIZE(4G).
the results from DSN1COPY are unpredictable.
If you specify LARGE, you cannot specify LOB or DSSIZE.
LOB
Specifies that SYSUT1 data set is a LOB table space. Empty pages in the table
space are copied, but no error messages are issued. You cannot specify the
SEGMENT and INLCOPY options with the LOB parameter.
|
|
|
|
|
|
DSN1COPY attempts to determine if the input data set is a LOB data set. If it
can be clearly verified that the LOB option is specified, but the data set is not a
LOB data set, or that the LOB option is omitted for a data set that is a LOB
data set, DSN1COPY issues an error message and terminates. Otherwise, if the
LOB option isnt specified or omitted correctly the results of DSN1COPY are
unpredictable.
785
If you specify LOB, you cannot specify LARGE.

NUMPARTS(integer)
PRINT(hexadecimal-constant,hexadecimal-constant)
Causes the SYSUT1 data set to be printed in hexadecimal format on the
SYSPRINT data set. You can specify the PRINT parameter with or without the
page range specifications (hexadecimal-constant,hexadecimal-constant). If you do
not specify a range, all pages of the SYSUT1 are printed. If you want to limit
the range of pages that are printed, indicate the beginning and ending page. If
you want to print a single page, supply only that page number. In either case,
your range specifications must be from one to eight hexadecimal characters in
length.
The following example shows how you code the PRINT parameter if you want
to begin printing at page X2F0 and stop at page X35C:
PRINT(2F0,35C)
Because the CHECK and RESET options and the copy function run
independently of the PRINT range, these options apply to the entire input file,
regardless of whether a range of pages is being printed.
You can indicate the format of the row data in the PRINT output by specifying
EBCDIC, ASCII, or UNICODE.
EBCDIC
Indicates that the row data in the PRINT output is to be displayed in
EBCDIC. The default value is EBCDIC if the first page of the input data
set is not a header page.
If the first page is a header page, DSN1COPY uses the format information
in the header page as the default format. However, if you specify EBCDIC,
ASCII, or UNICODE, that format overrides the format information in the
header page. The unformatted header page dump is always displayed in
EBCDIC, because most of the fields are in EBCDIC.
ASCII
ASCII. Specify ASCII when printing table spaces that contain ASCII data.
UNICODE
Unicode. Specify UNICODE when printing table spaces that contain
Unicode data.
PIECESIZ(integer)
Specifies the maximum piece size (data set size) for nonpartitioned indexes.
The value that you specify must match the value that was specified when the
786
nonpartitioning index was created or altered. The defaults for PIECESIZ are 2G
(2 GB) for indexes that are backed by non-large table spaces and 4G (4 GB) for
indexes that are backed by table spaces that were defined with the LARGE
option. This option is required if the piece size is not one of the default values.
If PIECESIZ is omitted and the index is backed by a table space that was
defined with the LARGE option, the LARGE option is required for
DSN1COPY.
The subsequent keyword K, M, or G indicates the unit of the value that is
specified in integer.
K
Indicates that the integer value is to be multiplied by 1 KB to specify

the maximum piece size in bytes. integer must be either 256 or 512.
Indicates that the integer value is to be multiplied by 1 MB to specify

the maximum piece size in bytes. integer must be a power of two,
between 1 and 512.
Indicates that the integer value is to be multiplied by 1 GB to specify

the maximum piece size in bytes. integer must be 1, 2, or 4.
Valid values for piece size are:

v 1 MB or 1 GB
v 2 MB or 2 GB
v 4 MB or 4 GB
v 8 MB
v 16 MB
v 32 MB
v 64 MB
v 128 MB
v 256 KB or 256 MB
v 512 KB or 512 MB
VALUE
Causes each page of the SYSUT1 input data set to be scanned for the character
string that you specify in parentheses following the VALUE parameter. Each
page that contains that character string is printed in the SYSPRINT data set.
You can specify the VALUE parameter in conjunction with any of the other
DSN1COPY parameters.
string can consist of 1 to 20 alphanumeric characters.
hexadecimal-constant can consist of 2 to 40 hexadecimal characters. Specify two
apostrophe characters before and after the hexadecimal character string.
If you want to search your input file for the string 12345, your JCL should
look similar to the following JCL:
//STEP1 EXEC PGM=DSN1COPY,PARM='VALUE(12345)'
If you want to search for the equivalent hexadecimal character string, your JCL
should look similar to the following JCL:
//STEP1 EXEC PGM=DSN1COPY,PARM='VALUE(''F1F2F3F4F5'')'
|
|
|
|
|
OBIDXLAT
Specifies that OBID translation must be done before the DB2 data set is copied.
This parameter requires additional input from the SYSXLAT file by using the
DD statements. DSN1COPY can translate only up to 10000 record OBIDs. If
you specify OBIDXLAT, CHECK processing is performed, regardless of
whether you specify the CHECK option.
787
RESET
Causes the log RBAs in each index page or data page and the high-formatted
page number in the header page to be reset to 0. If you specify this option,
CHECK processing is performed, regardless of whether you specify the
CHECK option.
Use RESET when the output file is used to build a DB2 table space that is to
be processed on a DB2 subsystem with a different recovery log than the source
subsystem. Failure to specify RESET in such a case can result in an abend
during subsequent update activity. The abend reason code of 00C200C1
indicates that the specified RBA value is outside the valid range of the
recovery log. A condition code of 0 indicates successful completion.
For a compressed table space, DSN1COPY does not reset the dictionary version
for an inline image copy, or for an incremental image copy that was created
with the SYSTEMPAGES=YES COPY utility option.
|
|
|
If you do not specify RESET when copying a table space from one DB2 system
to another, a down-level ID check might result in abend reason code 00C2010D
when the table space is accessed.
Related information
Recovering from a down-level page set problem (DB2 Administration Guide)
Before running DSN1COPY

Certain activities might be required before you run the DSN1COPY utility,
Attention: Do not use DSN1COPY in place of COPY for both backup and
recovery. Improper use of DSN1COPY can result in unrecoverable damage and loss
of data.
Recommendations
Printing with DSN1PRNT instead of DSN1COPY
If you require only a printed hexadecimal dump of a data set, use
DSN1PRNT rather than DSN1COPY.
Copying a table space with DSN1COPY with row formats
When you use a DSN1COPY of a table space to populate another table
space, the row formats of the two table spaces must match. If the row
formats do not match, the results are unpredictable and could cause
integrity problems.
To determine the source table space and target table space row format, run
the following query against your DB2 catalog:
|
|
SELECT DBNAME, TSNAME, PARTITION, FORMAT

WHERE (DBNAME = 'source-database-name'
AND TSNAME='source-table-space-name')
OR
(DBNAME = 'target-database-name'
AND TSNAME='target-table-space-name')
If the FORMAT column has a value of R, then the table space or partition
is in RRF (reordered row format). If the FORMAT column has a blank
value, then the table space or partition is in BRF (basic row format).
Determining page size and DSSIZE
788
Before using DSN1COPY, ensure that you know the page size and data set
size (DSSIZE) for the page set. Use the following query on the DB2 catalog
to get the information you need in this example for table DEPT:
CASE S.DSSIZE
WHEN 0 THEN
ELSE
ELSE NULL
END
ELSE 2097152
END
END
ELSE S.DSSIZE
END
AS DSSIZE
WHERE
T.NAME = 'DEPT' AND
T.TSNAME = S.NAME;
Figure 132. Example catalog query that returns the page set size and data set size for the
page set.
Using the OBIDXLAT option with DSN1COPY

When you use DSN1COPY with the OBIDXLAT option to move objects
from one system to another system, ensure that the version information on
the target system matches the version information on the source version.
Copying a partition-by-range or partition-by-growth table space
When you use DSN1COPY on a partition-by-range or partition-by-growth
table space, use the SEGMENT and NUMPARTS options to process the
table space. For partition-by-growth table spaces, the NUMPART value
specified should be the MAXPARTITIONS value that the table space was
created with.
Related tasks
Updating version information when moving objects to another subsystem on
page 557
Related information
Data sets that DSN1COPY uses

The DSN1COPY utility uses a number of data sets during its operation.
789
Required data sets

DSN1COPY uses the following data sets:
Input data set
Input to DSN1COPY. The DD name is SYSUT1.
Output data set
Output from DSN1COPY. The DD name is SYSUT2. Optional.
Message data set
Data set for output messages. The DD name is SYSPRINT.
OBIDXLAT data set
Data set that defines the OBID translation values. The DD name is
SYSXLAT.
DSN1COPY uses the following DD statements:
SYSPRINT
Defines the data set that contains output messages from the DSN1COPY
program and all hexadecimal dump output.
SYSUT1
Defines the input data set. This data set can be a sequential data set that is
created by the DSN1COPY or COPY utilities, or a VSAM data set.
Specify the data sets disposition as DISP=OLD to ensure that it is not in
use by DB2. Specify the data sets disposition as DISP=SHR only when the
DB2 STOP DATABASE command does not work.
The requested operation takes place only for the specified data set. If the
input data set is a partitioned table space or index, ensure that you specify
the NUMPARTS parameter and the correct data set. For example, to print a
page range in the second partition of a four-partition table space, specify
NUMPARTS(4) and the data set name of the second data set. This second
data set is in the group of VSAM data sets, and the VSAM data set name
is DSNCAT.DSNDBD.TESTDB.TS01.I0001.A002. The last qualifier (A002)
represents the partition number 2.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If running the online REORG utility with the FASTSWITCH option, verify
the data set name before running the DSN1COPY utility. The fifth-level
qualifier in the data set name alternates between I0001 and J0001 when
using FASTSWITCH. If the table space has cloning or ever had cloning, the
fifth-level qualifier can be I0002 or J0002. You cannot specify FASTSWITCH
YES if the table space has cloning; however, a FASTSWITCH YES REORG
might have been done before the clone was created so you might still have
a mixture of I and J data sets. Specify the correct fifth-level qualifier in
the data set name to successfully execute the DSN1COPY utility. To
determine the correct fifth-level qualifier, query the IPREFIX column of
query.
|
|
|
|
|
|
To determine the instance number to use for a fifth-level qualifier, query

the INSTANCE column of SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACE. The returned value
is the instance number that represents the current base objects. The clone
objects would be represented by the other instance number. If a query of
SYSTABLESPACE.INSTANCE returns a value of 2, then the base objects are
represented by instance number 2 data sets and the clone objects by
790
|
|
instance number 1 data sets. This process can be used to determine the
instance number even if there is no active cloning.
SYSUT2
Defines the output data set. This data set can be a sequential data set, a
VSAM data set, or a DUMMY data set.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If SYSUT1 is an image copy of an entire partitioned table space or an

image copy of all data sets of a multi-piece object and the data should be
copied to a DB2 table space or DB2 index space, SYSUT2 should be the
name of its first data set (of the first partition or of the first piece).
DSN1COPY identifies the appropriate output data set by the page number
and allocates the appropriate data sets. All target data sets must be
defined. To define the data sets for a multi-piece object, create first the
table space or index with DEFINE YES and specify appropriate primary
and secondary quantities. If -1 is specified for primary and/or secondary
quantity DSN1COPY may run out of extents because DB2 defines the first
data set with small primary and/or secondary extents in this case. DB2
then defines the first data set. The subsequent data sets can be defined by
using Access Method Services. See Copying tables from one subsystem to
another on page 797 for more information.
DSN1COPY assumes that the output data sets are empty (that is, the
program adds the blocks) except when you specify INCRCOPY. Before you
run DSN1COPY, define your VSAM output data sets as REUSE. If you
have not defined the data sets, you must redefine all VSAM output data
sets you are restoring by using Access Method Services. Ensure that these
data sets are empty before you run DSN1COPY.
You might want to specify a DUMMY SYSUT2 DD statement if you are
dumping or checking pages.
To enable DB2 to obtain necessary information from the integrated catalog
facility catalog when using VSAM data sets, do not code the unit-serial
parameter and volume-serial parameter.
If running the online REORG utility with the FASTSWITCH option, verify
the data set name before running the DSN1COPY utility. The fifth-level
using FASTSWITCH. Specify the correct fifth-level qualifier in the data set
name to successfully execute the DSN1COPY utility.
SYSXLAT
Defines for translation the DBIDs, OBIDs, data page set identifiers (PSIDs),
or index page set identifiers (ISOBIDs).
If you have dropped a table without a subsequent REORG of the table
space, you must reorganize the source table space before running
DSN1COPY with the OBIDXLAT option. This action removes any
previously dropped records from the table space.
A non-numeric character must separate each record in the SYSXLAT file,
and each record must contain a pair of decimal integers. The first integer
of each record pertains to the source, and the second integer pertains to the
target. The first record in the SYSXLAT file contains the source DBIDs and
the target DBIDs; the values can range from -32767 to 65535. The second
record contains the source and target PSIDs or ISOBIDs; the values can
range from 0 to 32767. All subsequent records in the SYSXLAT data set are
for table OBIDs. For an index, the SYSXLAT data set must contain the
791
index fan set OBID, in addition to the DBID and ISOBID. Sample data in a
SYSXLAT file follows (with an indication of how each record translates
shown in parentheses):
260,280
2,10
3,55
6,56
7,57
(source
(source
(source
(source
(source
DBID 260 translates to target DBID 280)

PSID 2 translates to target PSID 10)
table OBID 3 translates to target table OBID 55)
table OBID 6 translates to target table OBID 57)
table OBID 7 translates to target table OBID 57
To obtain the names, DBIDs, PSIDs, ISOBIDs, and OBIDs, run the
DSNTEP2 sample application on both the source and target systems. The
following SQL statements yield the preceding information.
The example for indexes yields output that is similar to the preceding
example, but with an additional column of data.
For table spaces use the following statements:
SELECT DBID, PSID FROM SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACE
WHERE NAME='tablespace_name'
AND DBNAME='database_name';
SELECT NAME, OBID FROM SYSIBM.SYSTABLES
WHERE TSNAME='tablespace_name'
AND CREATOR='creator_name';
For index spaces use the following statement:

SELECT DBID, ISOBID, OBID FROM SYSIBM.SYSINDEXES
WHERE NAME='index_name'
AND CREATOR='creator_name';
Several examples of using DSN1COPY follow:

v Create a backup copy of a DB2 data set:
SYSUT1: DB2-VSAM
SYSUT2: Sequential data set
v Restore a backup copy of a DB2 data set:
SYSUT1: DSN1COPY sequential data set
SYSUT2: DB2-VSAM
v Move a DB2 data set to another DB2 data set:
SYSUT1: DB2-VSAM
SYSUT2: DB2-VSAM
Parameters: OBIDXLAT, RESET
v Perform validity checking on a DB2 data set:
SYSUT1: DB2-VSAM
SYSUT2: DUMMY
Parameter: CHECK
v Perform validity checking on and print a DB2 data set:
SYSUT1: DB2-VSAM
SYSUT2: DUMMY
Parameters: CHECK, PRINT
v Restore a table space from a nonpartitioned image copy data set or page set:
SYSUT1: DB2 full image copy
SYSUT2: DB2-VSAM
Parameter: FULLCOPY
v Restore a table space from a partitioned image copy data or page set:
SYSUT1: DB2 full image copy
792
SYSUT2: DB2-VSAM
Parameters: FULLCOPY, NUMPARTS(nn)
v Perform RBA RESET on a DB2 data set:
SYSUT1: DB2-VSAM or DSN1COPY sequential data set
SYSUT2: DB2-VSAM
Parameter: RESET
Defining the input data set
The SYSUT1 data set can be any of the following types:

v A DB2 table space data set
v A DB2 index space data set
v A full image copy
v An incremental image copy
v An inline image copy
v A sequential data set that was previously created by DSN1COPY
Define SYSUT1 with DISP=OLD to ensure that DSN1COPY uses it exclusively. If
SYSUT1 is a table space or index space, use the following procedure before using
DSN1COPY:
1. Issue the following command to determine if the object is stopped:
-DISPLAY DATABASE (database_name) SPACENAM(space_name) RESTRICT
2. If DB2 has not stopped the object, issue the following command to stop the
object:
-STOP DATABASE (database_name) SPACENAME(space_name)
DB2 allows input of only one DSN1COPY data set. DB2 does not permit the input
of concatenated data sets. For a table space that consists of multiple data sets,
ensure that you specify the correct data set. For example, if you specify the
CHECK option to validate pages of a partitioned table spaces second partition,
code the second data set of the table space for SYSUT1.
Defining the output data set

The SYSUT2 data set can be any of the following types:
v A sequential data set
v A DB2 table space data set
v A DB2 index space data set
v A DUMMY data set
Specify a DUMMY SYSUT2 DD statement if you are using DSN1COPY to check or
dump a page. The table spaces and index spaces must either be empty or defined
with VSAM REUSE. STOGROUP-defined table spaces and index spaces have the
REUSE attribute, except when you are applying the INCRCOPY option
Naming the output data set

For your output data set to be useful, ensure that it has the same name as the data
set that you are resetting.
|
|
|
|
v Method 1:
1. Use DSN1COPY to copy your existing data set to a sequential data set.
Specify this target data set as SYSUT1 in step 3.
2. If you defined your existing data set without the REUSE parameter, delete
and redefine the data set. Specify your existing data set as SYSUT2 in step 3.
793
3. Run DSN1COPY and specify option RESET.

v Method 2:
1. Use your existing DB2 data set as the SYSUT1 specification, creating a new
VSAM data set for SYSUT2.
2. After completion of the reset operation, delete the data set that you specified
as SYSUT1, and rename the SYSUT2 data set. Give SYSUT2 the name of the
data set that you just deleted.
Adding additional volumes for SYSUT2

When you create a table space or index space by using STOGROUP, the ICF
catalog entry has only one volume in the volume list. If the SYSUT2 data set that
DSN1COPY restores requires more than one volume, use the IDCAMS command,
ALTER ADDVOLUMES, to add additional volume IDs to the integrated catalog
entry. The extension to new volumes uses the primary size on each new volume.
This is the normal VSAM extension process. If you want the data set to use the
secondary size on the candidate volumes, follow these steps:
1. Run DSN1COPY.
2. Run REORG, or make a full image copy and recover the table space.
Performing these steps resets the data set and causes normal extensions through
DB2.
The effect of altering a table before running DSN1COPY

When you use ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN, the table does not change; only the
description of the table changes. You must run REORG on the table space (so that
the data matches its description) before you can run DSN1COPY on the table
space.
Checking for inconsistent data

When critical data is involved, use the CHECK option to prevent the undetected
copying of inconsistent data to the output data set. The CHECK option of
DSN1COPY performs validity checking on one page at a time.
You must run a CHECK utility job on the table space that is involved to ensure
that no inconsistencies exist between data and indexes on that data:
v Before using DSN1COPY to save critical data that is indexed
v After using DSN1COPY to restore critical data that is indexed
The CHECK utility performs validity checking between pages.
The effects of not specifying the OBIDXLAT option

If you use DSN1COPY to load data into a table space or index without specifying
the OBIDXLAT option, be careful not to invalidate embedded DB2 internal
identifiers.
Those OBIDs can become invalid in the following circumstances:
v When you drop and re-create tables after the input data set to DSN1COPY was
created.
v When a difference exists among the following attributes between the target
subsystem and the source subsystem:
794
Table space attributes of BUFFERPOOL or NUMPARTS

Table attributes other than table name, table space name, and database name
The order of the table spaces, indexes, and tables that the user defined or
dropped in the source and target databases
|
|
|
To protect against invalidating the OBIDs, specify the OBIDXLAT parameter for
DSN1COPY. The OBIDXLAT parameter translates OBID, DBID, PSID, or ISOBID
before DSN1COPY copies the data.
Requirements for using an image copy as input to DSN1COPY

If you want to use full image copies or incremental image copies as input to
DSN1COPY, you must produce those image copies by using the COPY utility with
SHRLEVEL REFERENCE.
|
|
|
|
|
Using the FULLCOPY parameter ensures that the data that is contained in your
image copies is consistent. DSN1COPY accepts an index image copy as input when
you specify the FULLCOPY option. If you want to use inline image copies as input
to DSN1COPY, you must produce those image copies by using the REORG utility
or LOAD utility.
Resetting page log RBAs

Use the RESET option to reset the log RBAs that are recorded in a table space or
index space and the high-formatted page number in the header page to 0.
DSN1COPY performs CHECK processing, regardless of whether you explicitly
requested CHECK.
Do not specify the RESET parameter for page sets that are in group buffer pool
RECOVER-pending (GRECP) status.
Copying from an image copy

You can use DSN1COPY to copy from an image copy of a table spaces data sets to
the table spaces data sets.
|
|
Specify the following SYSUT2 data sets:

v If SYSUT1 is an image copy of a single partition, ensure that the SYSUT2 DD
statement refers to the first data set of the table space. DSN1COPY determines
the correct target data set. Code the NUMPARTS(nn) parameter, where nn is the
number of partitions in the entire table space. However, if the partitioned table
space is defined with more than one VCAT name (for example, a unique VCAT
for different partitions), use SYSUT2 as the name of the data set for that
partition.
v If SYSUT1 is an image copy of an entire partitioned table space, ensure that
the SYSUT2 DD statement refers to the first data set of the table space. In this
case, DSN1COPY allocates all of the target data sets. However, you must have
previously defined the target data sets either by creating the partitioned table
space with DEFINE YES or by using Access Method Services. Code the
NUMPARTS parameter as described in the first bullet when the table space is
partitioned. When multiple VCAT names are used for different partitions of a
partitioned table space, DSN1COPY cannot restore the entire table space by
using as input a single full image copy of the table space. In this case, when you
use DSN1COPY, you must restore individual copies of each partition by using
795
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
the name of the data sets for that partition. Code the NUMPARTS(nn) parameter,
where nn is the number of partitions in the entire table space.
If SYSUT1 is an image copy of a single data set of a multiple data set linear
table space, ensure that the SYSUT2 DD statement refers to the actual (not the
first) output data set of the table space. Do not specify NUMPARTS because this
parameter is only for partitioned table spaces.
If SYSUT1 is an image copy of an entire multiple data set linear table space,
ensure that the SYSUT2 DD statement refers to the first data set of the table
space. DSN1COPY allocates all target data sets. However, you must have
previously defined the target data sets by using Access Method Services. If the
source data sets are less than the target data sets it is recommended to either
delete all rows from the target table space or to do a LOAD REPLACE with DD
DUMMY on the target table space first, before running DSN1COPY.
If SYSUT1 is an image copy of a single data set of a multiple data set LOB
table space, ensure that the SYSUT2 DD statement refers to the actual (not the
first) data set of the tablespace. Do not specify NUMPARTS because this
parameter is only for partitioned table spaces.
If SYSUT1 is an image copy of an entire multiple data set LOB table space,
ensure that the SYSUT2 DD statement refers to the first data set of the
tablespace. DSN1COPY allocates all target data sets. However, you must have
previously defined the target data sets by using Access Method Services.
Restoring indexes with DSN1COPY

When a table space is restored using either the TOCOPY option of RECOVER or
the DSN1COPY utility, restore the indexes.
To restore indexes with DSN1COPY, use one of the following ways:
v Use the RECOVER utility, if you have a full image copy available, and the index
was defined with the COPY YES option.
v Use DSN1COPY on the indexes, if a copy is available. If you specified the
OBIDXLAT option for the data, you must also specify the OBIDXLAT option for
the indexes. Also, the indexes must all have been copied at the same time as the
data; otherwise, inconsistencies might exist.
v If you do not have an image copy of the index, use the REBUILD INDEX utility,
which reconstructs the indexes from the data.
Related reference
Chapter 22, REBUILD INDEX, on page 353
Restoring table spaces with DSN1COPY

You can use the DSN1COPY utility to restore table spaces.
You cannot use RECOVER TOCOPY for an image-copy data set that is not
referenced by SYSIBM.SYSCOPY for that table space or data set. An attempt to do
so results in the message "TOCOPY DATASET NOT FOUND".
The MODIFY utility might have removed the row in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY. If the row
has been removed, and if the image copy is a full image copy with SHRLEVEL
REFERENCE, use DSN1COPY to restore the table space or data set.
DSN1COPY can restore the object to an incremental image copy, but it must first
restore the previous full image copy and any intermediate incremental image
796
copies. These actions ensure data integrity. You are responsible for providing the
correct sequence of image copies. DB2 cannot help ensure the proper sequence.
|
|
|
|
|
You can use the DSN1COPY utility to restore a partition or an entire table space
for a partition-by-growth table space. The total number of partitions in a
DSN1COPY might not be consistent with the number of partitions defined on the
current table space. To avoid residual data , delete data in the excess partitions
from the table space before you apply the DSN1COPY utility.
If you use DSN1COPY for point-in-time recovery, the table space is not recoverable
with the RECOVER utility. Because DSN1COPY executed outside of DB2s control,
DB2 is not aware that you recovered to a point in time. Use DSN1COPY to recover
the affected table space after point-in-time recovery. Then perform the following
steps:
1. Remove old image copies by using MODIFY AGE.
2. Create one or more full image copies by using SHRLEVEL REFERENCE.
Printing with DSN1COPY

If you want to print one or more pages without invoking the utilitys copy
function, use DSN1PRNT to avoid unnecessary reading of the input file.
When you use DSN1COPY for printing, you must specify the PRINT parameter.
The requested operation takes place only for the specified data set. If the input
data set belongs to a linear table space or index space that is larger than 2 GB,
specify the correct data set. Alternatively, if it is a partitioned table space or
partitioned index, specify the correct data set. For example, DSN1COPY prints a
page range in the second partition of a four-partition table space. DSN1COPY does
this by specifying NUMPARTS(4) and the data set name of the second data set in
the VSAM group (DSN=...A002).
To print a full image copy data set (rather than recovering a table space), specify a
DUMMY SYSUT2 DD statement, and specify the FULLCOPY parameter.
Copying tables from one subsystem to another

You can copy tables from one subsystem to another. When you copy tables from
one subsystem to another, you must ensure that the version information on the
target subsystem matches the version information on the source subsystem.
Be careful when you copy a table that contains an identity column from one DB2
subsystem to another:
1. Stop the table space on the source subsystem.
2. Issue a SELECT statement to query the SYSIBM.SYSSEQUENCES entry that
corresponds to the identity column for this table on the source subsystem. Add
the INCREMENT value to the MAXASSIGNEDVAL to determine the next value
(nv) for the identity column.
3. Create the table on the target subsystem. On the identity column specification,
specify nv for the START WITH value, and ensure that all of the other identity
column attributes are the same as for the source table.
4. Stop the table space on the target subsystem.
5. Copy the data by using DSN1COPY.
6. Start the table space on the source subsystem for read-write access.
7. Start the table space on the target subsystem for read-write access.
797
Define output data sets for multi-piece linear table spaces.
|
|
|
The following statements specify that DSN1COPY is to copy data into all pieces of
a segmented table space by using a full image copy of another segmented table
space as input.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Restriction: DB2 XML data is condensed by substituting strings by unique IDs.

These unique IDs are stored in the catalog table SYSIBM.SYSXMLSTRINGS and
they are not available in the related XML table space. Therefore its not
recommended to copy XML table spaces from one subsystem to another using
DSN1COPY.
1. Create the target segmented table space by specifying appropriate primary and
secondary quantities.
2. Define data sets for all subsequent pieces, e.g. the data set for the second piece
(DSNCAT.DSNDBC.TESTDB.TS01.I0001.A002). Use the MODEL option, which
causes the new data set to be created like the first data set.
//ALCVSAM EXEC PGM=IDCAMS
//SYSIN
DD *
DEFINE CLUSTER +
(NAME('DSNCAT.DSNDBC.TESTDB.TS01.I0001.A002') +
MODEL('DSNCAT.DSNDBC.TESTDB.TS01.I0001.A001')) +
DATA +
(NAME('DSNCAT.DSNDBD.TESTDB.TS01.I0001.A002') +
MODEL('DSNCAT.DSNDBD.TESTDB.TS01.I0001.A001'))
/*
3. Run DSN1COPY.
//DSN1COPY EXEC PGM=DSN1COPY,
// PARM='FULLCOPY'
//SYSUT1 DD DISP=SHR,DSN=PROD.IMAGE.COPY.DSNUMALL
//SYSUT2 DD DISP=OLD,DSN=DSNCAT.DSNDBD.TESTDB.TS01.I0001.A001
Related tasks
Updating version information when moving objects to another subsystem on
page 557
Sample DSN1COPY control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own DSN1COPY
control statements.
If you run online REORG with FASTSWITCH behavior, the fifth-level qualifier in
the data set name can be either I0001 or J0001. For clone tables, the data set can
also be I0002 or J0002. These examples use I0001.
|
|
|
Example 1: Checking input data set before copying

The following statement specifies that the DSN1COPY utility is to copy the data
set that is identified by the SYSUT1 DD statement to the data set that is identified
by the SYSUT2 DD statement. Before DSN1COPY copies this data, the utility is to
check the validity of the input data set.
//RUNCOPY EXEC PGM=DSN1COPY,PARM='CHECK'
//* COPY VSAM TO SEQUENTIAL AND CHECK PAGES
//STEPLIB DD DSN=PDS CONTAINING DSN1COPY
798
//SYSUT1
DD DSN=DSNCAT.DSNDBC.DSNDB01.SYSUTILX.I0001.A001,DISP=OLD
//SYSUT2
DD DSN=TAPE.DS,UNIT=TAPE,DISP=(NEW,KEEP),VOL=SER=UTLBAK
Example 2: Translating the DB2 internal identifiers

The statement in this example specifies that DSN1COPY is to copy the data set that
is identified by the SYSUT1 DD statement to the data set that is identified by the
SYSUT2 DD statement. The OBIDXLAT option specifies that DSN1COPY is to
translate the OBIDs before the data set is copied. The OBIDs are provided as input
on the SYSXLAT DD statement. Because the OBIDXLAT option is specified,
DSN1COPY also checks the validity of the input data set, even though the CHECK
option is not specified.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
//EXECUTE EXEC
//STEPLIB DD
//SYSPRINT DD
//SYSUT1
DD
//
//SYSUT2
DD
//
//SYSXLAT DD
260,280
2,10
3,55
6,56
7,57
/*
PGM=DSN1COPY,PARM='OBIDXLAT'
DSN=PDS CONTAINING DSN1COPY
SYSOUT=A
DSN=DSNC910.DSNDBC.DSN8D91P.DSN8S91C.I0001.A001,
DISP=OLD
DSN=DSNC910.DSNDBC.DSN8D91P.DSN8S91C.I0001.A001,
DISP=OLD
*
Figure 133. Example DSN1COPY statement with the OBIDXLAT option.
Example 3: Printing a single page of a partitioned table space

The following statement specifies that DSN1COPY is to print page 2002A1 of the
table space in the data set that is identified by the SYSUT1 DD statement. This
table space has eight partitions, as indicated by the NUMPARTS option.
//PRINT EXEC PGM=DSN1COPY,PARM='PRINT(2002A1),NUMPARTS(8)'
//* PRINT A PAGE IN THE THIRD PARTITION OF A TABLE SPACE CONSISTING
//* OF 8 PARTITIONS.
//SYSUT2
DD DUMMY
//SYSUT1
DD DSN=DSNCAT.DSNDBD.MMRDB.PARTEMP1.I0001.A003,DISP=OLD
Example 4: Printing 16 pages of a nonpartitioning index

The following statement specifies that DSN1COPY is to print 16 pages of a
nonpartitioning index in the data set that is identified by the SYSUT1 DD
statement. The pages range from page F0000 to page F000F, as indicated by the
PRINT option. The maximum data set size is 64 MB, as indicated by the PIECESIZ
option.
//PRINT2 EXEC PGM=DSN1COPY,PARM=(PRINT(F0000,F000F),PIECESIZ(64M))
//* PRINT THE FIRST 16 PAGES IN THE 61ST PIECE OF AN NPI WITH PIECE SIZE OF 64M
//SYSUT2
DD DUMMY
//SYSUT1
DD DISP=OLD,DSN=DSNCAT.DSTDBD.MMRDB.NPI1.I0001.A061
799
Example 5: Copying individual partitions of a partitioned table

space
In the example in the following figure, the two job steps specify that DSN1COPY is
to copy partitions 1501 and partition 1502 from image copy data sets into a
partitioned table space. In the two SYSUT2 DD statements, the fifth-level qualifier
in the data set names can differ, because each job step lists an individual partition.
The FULLCOPY option is used in both steps to indicate that the input data set is a
full image copy. The NUMPARTS option indicates that the input data set has 1600
partitions. The RESET option resets to 0 the high-formatted page number in the
header page. Because this option is specified, DSN1COPY checks the validity of the
input data, even though the CHECK option is not specified.
//STEP1
//
//SYSUDUMP
//SYSPRINT
//SYSUT1
//SYSUT2
//STEP2
//
//SYSUDUMP
//SYSPRINT
//SYSUT1
//SYSUT2
EXEC PGM=DSN1COPY,
PARM='NUMPARTS(1600),RESET,FULLCOPY'
DD SYSOUT=A
DD SYSOUT=A
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=PROD.IMAGE.COPY.PART1501
DD DISP=OLD,DSN=DSNCAT.DSNDBD.TESTDB.TS01.I0001.B501
EXEC PGM=DSN1COPY,
DD SYSOUT=A
DD SYSOUT=A
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=PROD.IMAGE.COPY.PART1502
DD DISP=OLD,DSN=DSNCAT.DSNDBD.TESTDB.TS01.J0001.B502
Figure 134. Example DSN1COPY job for partitions
Example 6: Copying all partitions of a partitioned table space

The following statement specifies that DSN1COPY is to copy data into all
partitions of a partitioned table space by using a full image copy of the table space
as input. The input image copy has 16 partitions, as indicated by the NUMPARTS
option. You must ensure that the fifth-level qualifier in the data set name is the
same, either I0001 or J0001, for all partitions of the output table space before
running this type of job stream.
//DSN1COPY
//
//SYSUDUMP
//SYSPRINT
//SYSUT1
//SYSUT2
EXEC PGM=DSN1COPY,
DD SYSOUT=A
DD SYSOUT=A
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=PROD.IMAGE.COPY.DSNUMALL
DD DISP=OLD,DSN=DSNCAT.DSNDBD.TESTDB.TS01.I0001.A001
Example 7: Using DSN1COPY with UTS table spaces

The following statements specify that DSN1COPY is to copy a UTS table space
vsam data set to a sequential data set.
|
|
//******************************************************************
//* COMMENT: RUN DSN1COPY FOR THE TABLESPACE Part 1
//******************************************************************
//STEP1 EXEC PGM=DSN1COPY,
// PARM='SEGMENT,RESET'
//SYSOUT DD SYSOUT=A
//SYSUT1 DD DSN=DSNCAT.DSNDBD.DBKQBG01.TPKQBG01.I0001.A001,DISP=SHR
//SYSUT2 DD DSN=JUKQU2BG.DSN1COPY.D1P1,DISP=(NEW,CATLG,CATLG),
// VOL=SER=SCR03,UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(TRK,(55,1))
/*
//******************************************************************
800
//* COMMENT: RUN DSN1COPY FOR THE TABLESPACE Part 2

//******************************************************************
//STEP2 EXEC PGM=DSN1COPY,
// PARM='SEGMENT,RESET'
//SYSOUT DD SYSOUT=A
//SYSUT1 DD DSN=DSNCAT.DSNDBD.DBKQBG01.TPKQBG01.I0001.A002,DISP=SHR
//SYSUT2 DD DSN=JUKQU2BG.DSN1COPY.D1P2,DISP=(NEW,CATLG,CATLG),
// VOL=SER=SCR03,UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(TRK,(55,1))
/*
801
802
Chapter 41. DSN1LOGP

The DSN1LOGP utility formats the contents of the recovery log for display.
The two recovery log report formats are:
v A detail report of individual log records. This information helps IBM Software
Support personnel analyze the log in detail. (This information does not include a
full description of the detail report.)
v A summary report, which helps you:
Perform a conditional restart
Resolve indoubt threads with a remote site
Detect problems with data propagation
You can specify the range of the log to process and select criteria within the range
to limit the records in the detail report. For example, you can specify:
v One or more units of recovery that are identified by URID
v A single database
By specifying a URID and a database, you can display recovery log records that
correspond to the use of one database by a single unit of recovery.
|
DSN1LOGP can print the log records for both base and clone table objects.
DSN1LOGP cannot read logs that have been compressed by DFSMS. (This
compression requires extended format data sets.)
Environment
DSN1LOGP runs as a batch z/OS job.
DSN1LOGP runs on archive data sets, but not active data sets, when DB2 is
running.
DSN1LOGP does not require authorization. However, if any of the data sets is
Required data sets

When you execute DSN1LOGP, provide the following data definition (DD)
statements:
SYSPRINT
DSN1LOGP writes all error messages, exception conditions, and the detail
report to the SYSPRINT file. The logical record length (LRECL) is 131.
SYSIN
DSN1LOGP specifies keywords in this file. The LRECL must be 80.
Keywords and values must appear in characters 1 through 72. DSN1LOGP
allows specification of as many as 50 control statements for a given job.
DSN1LOGP concatenates all records into a single string.
803
SYSSUMRY
DSN1LOGP writes the formatted output of a summary report to the
SYSSUMRY file. The LRECL is 131.
DSN1LOGP identifies the recovery log by DD statements that are described in the
stand-alone log services.
Identifying log data sets

You must identify to DSN1LOGP the log data sets that are to be processed by
including at least one of the following DD statements.
BSDS The BSDS identifies and provides information about all active log data sets
and archive log data sets that exist in your DB2 subsystem. When you
identify the BSDS to DSN1LOGP, you must provide the beginning and
ending RBAs for the range of the recovery log that you want displayed.
DSN1LOGP then associates the beginning RBA specifications and the
ending RBA specifications with the appropriate data set names.
ACTIVEn
If the BSDS is not available, and if the active log data sets that are involved
have been copied and sent to you, you can specify the set of active log
data sets that are to be processed by DSN1LOGP by specifying one or
more ACTIVE DD statements. If you used the REPRO command of Access
Method Services for copying the active log, you must identify this data set
in an ARCHIVE DD statement.
Each DD statement that you include identifies another active log data set.
If you identify more than one active log data set, you must list the
ACTIVEn DD statements in ascending log RBA sequence. For example,
ACTIVE1 must identify a portion of the log that is less than ACTIVE2, and
ACTIVE2 must identify a portion of the log that is less than ACTIVE3. If
you do not specify this correctly, errors that DSN1LOGP does not detect
can occur.
When you identify active log data sets, you do not need to use the
RBASTART and RBAEND keywords (as you do when you identify the
BSDS). DSN1LOGP scans all active log data sets that the job indicates only
when the data sets are in the correct log RBA sequence.
ARCHIVE
If the BSDS is not available (as previously described under ACTIVEn), you
can specify which archive log data sets are to be processed by specifying
one ARCHIVE DD statement, concatenated with one or more DD
statements.
Each DD statement that you include identifies another archive log data set.
If you identify more than one archive log data set, you must list the DD
statements that correspond to the multiple archive log data sets in
ascending log RBA sequence. If you do not specify this correctly, errors
that DSN1LOGP does not detect can occur.
When you identify archive log data sets, you do not need to use the
RBASTART and RBAEND keywords. DSN1LOGP scans all archive log data
sets that are indicated by the job only when the data sets are in the correct
log RBA sequence.
804
Data sharing requirements

When selecting log records from more than one DB2 subsystem, you must use all
or one of the following DD statements to locate the log data sets:
GROUP
MxxBSDS
MxxARCHV
MxxACTn
|
|
If you use GROUP or MxxBSDSs to locate the log data sets, you must use
LRSNSTART to define the selection range.
Related information
Reading log records with OPEN, GET, and CLOSE (DB2 Administration Guide)
Syntax and options of the DSN1LOGP control statement

The DSN1LOGP utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
DSN1LOGP syntax diagram
RBAEND (
FFFFFFFFFFFF )
DATAONLY (NO)

RBASTART(hex-constant)
RBAEND ( hex-constant
LRSNEND ( FFFFFFFFFFFF )
DATAONLY (YES)
LRSNSTART(hex-constant)
LRSNEND (
hex-constant
SYSCOPY (NO)

SYSCOPY (YES)
DBID(hex-constant)

OBID(hex-constant)

RID(hex-constant)

PAGE(hex-constant)

URID(hex-constant)

LUWID(luwid)

TYPE ( hex-constant )
SUBTYPE ( hex-constant )
value/offset statement
SUMMARY (NO)

SUMMARY (
YES
ONLY
CHECK(DATA)
FILTER
value/offset statement:
805
VALUE/OFFSET

VALUE(hex-constant) OFFSET(hex-constant)
Option descriptions
To execute DSN1LOGP, construct a batch job. The utility name, DSN1LOGP, should
appear on the EXEC statement.
Specify keywords in up to 50 control statements in the SYSIN file. Each control
statement can have up to 72 characters. To specify no keywords, either use a
SYSIN file with no keywords following it, or omit the SYSIN file from the job JCL.
If you specify more than one keyword, separate them by commas. You can specify
the keywords in any order. You can include blanks between keywords, and also
between the keywords and the corresponding values.
RBASTART(hex-constant)
Specifies the hexadecimal log RBA from which to begin reading. If the value
does not match the beginning RBA of one of the log records, DSN1LOGP
begins reading at the beginning RBA of the next record. For any given job,
specify this keyword only once. Alternative spellings: STARTRBA, ST.
hex-constant is a hexadecimal value consisting of 1 to 12 characters (6 bytes);
leading zeros are not required.
DB2 issues a warning if the value is not within the range of log records that is
covered by the input log record information.
|
|
RBAEND(hex-constant)
Specifies the last valid hexadecimal log RBA to extract. If the specified RBA is
in the middle of a log record, DSN1LOGP continues reading the log in an
attempt to return a complete log record.
To read to the last valid RBA in the log, specify RBAEND(FFFFFFFFFFFF). For
any given job, specify this keyword only once. Alternative spellings: ENDRBA,
EN.
hex-constant is a hexadecimal value consisting of 1 to 12 characters (6 bytes);
leading zeros are not required.
The default value is FFFFFFFFFFFF.
|
|
RBAEND can be specified only if RBASTART is specified.

LRSNSTART(hex-constant)
Specifies the log record sequence number (LRSN) from which to begin the log
scan. DSN1LOGP starts its processing on the first log record that contains an
LRSN value that is greater than or equal to the LRSN value that is specified on
LRSNSTART. The default LRSN is the LRSN at the beginning of the data set.
Alternative spellings: STARTLRSN, STRTLRSN, and LRSNSTRT.
For any given job, specify this keyword only once.
You must specify this keyword to search the member BSDSs and to locate the
log data sets from more than one DB2 subsystem. You can specify either the
806
LRSNSTART keyword or the RBASTART keyword to search the BSDS of a

single DB2 subsystem and to locate the log data sets.
|
|
LRSNEND(hex-constant)
Specifies the LRSN value of the last log record that is to be scanned. When
LRSNSTART is specified, the default is XFFFFFFFFFFFF. Otherwise, it is the
end of the data set. Alternative spelling: ENDLRSN.
For any given job, specify this keyword only once.
|
|
DATAONLY
Limits the log records in the detail report to those that represent data changes
(insert, page repair, update space map, and so on).
The default value is DATAONLY(NO).
(YES)
Extracts log records for data changes only. For example, DATAONLY(YES),
together with a DBID and OBID, reads only the log records that modified
data for that DBID and OBID.
(NO)
Extracts all record types.
SYSCOPY
Limits the detail report to SYSCOPY log records.
The default value is SYSCOPY(NO).
(YES)
Includes only SYSCOPY log records in the detail report.
(NO)
Does not limit records to SYSCOPY records only.
DBID(hex-constant)
Specifies a hexadecimal database identifier (DBID). DSN1LOGP extracts only
the records that are associated with that DBID. For any given job, specify this
keyword only once.
hex-constant is a hexadecimal value consisting of one to four characters.
Leading zeros are not required.
The DBID is displayed in many DB2 messages. You can also find the DBID in
the DB2 catalog for a specific object (for example, in the column named DBID
of the SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACE catalog table).
When you select a DBID from a catalog table, the value is displayed in decimal
format. Use the SQL HEX function in a SELECT statement to convert a DBID
to hexadecimal format. The following SQL statements show this use of the
HEX function:
SELECT NAME, DBNAME, HEX(DBID), HEX(PSID)
FROM SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACE
WHERE NAME ='table space name'
SELECT NAME, DBNAME, HEX(DBID), HEX(ISOBID)
FROM SYSIBM.SYSINDEXES
WHERE NAME ='index name'
807
OBID(hex-constant)
Specifies a hexadecimal database object identifier, either a data page set
identifier (PSID) or an index page set identifier (ISOBID). DSN1LOGP extracts
only the records that are associated with that identifier.
hex-constant is a hexadecimal value consisting of one to four characters.
Whenever DB2 makes a change to data, the log record that describes the
change identifies the database by DBID and the table space by page set ID
(PSID). You can find the PSID column in the SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACE catalog
table.
You can also find a column named OBID in the SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACE
catalog table. That column actually contains the OBID of a file descriptor; dont
confuse this with the PSID, which is the information that you must include
when you execute DSN1LOGP.
Whenever DB2 makes a change to an index, the log record that describes the
change identifies the database (by DBID) and the index space (by index space
OBID or ISOBID). You can find the ISOBID for an index space in the column
named ISOBID in the SYSIBM.SYSINDEXES catalog table.
You can also find a column named OBID in the SYSIBM.SYSINDEXES catalog
table. This column actually contains the identifier of a fan set descriptor; dont
confuse this with the ISOBID, which is the information that you must include
when you execute DSN1LOGP.
When you select either the PSID or the ISOBID from a catalog table, the value
is displayed in decimal format. Use the SQL HEX function in your select
statement to convert them to hexadecimal.
For any given DSN1LOGP job, use this keyword only once. If you specify
OBID, you must also specify DBID.
PAGE(hex-constant)
Specifies a hexadecimal page number. When data or an index is changed, a
recovery log record is written to the log, identifying the object identifier and
the page number of the changed data page or index page. Specifying a page
number limits the search to a single page; otherwise, all pages for a given
combination of DBID and OBID are extracted. The log output also contains
page set control log records for the specified DBID and OBID, and system
event log records, unless DATAONLY(YES) is also specified.
hex-constant is a hexadecimal value consisting of a maximum of eight
characters.
You can specify a maximum of 100 PAGE keywords in any given DSN1LOGP
job. You must also specify the DBID and OBID keywords that correspond to
those pages.
The PAGE and RID keywords are mutually exclusive.
RID(hex-constant)
Specifies a record identifier, which is a hexadecimal value consisting of 10
characters, with the first eight characters representing the page number and the
last two characters representing the page ID map entry number. The option
limits the log records that are extracted to those that are associated with that
particular record. The log records that are extracted include not only those that
are directly associated with the RID, such as insert and delete, but also the
808
control records that are associated with the DBID and OBID specifications,
such as page set open, page set close, set write, reset write, page set write, data
set open, and data set close.
You can specify a maximum of 40 RID keywords in any given DSN1LOGP job.
You must also specify the DBID and OBID keywords that correspond to the
specified records.
The PAGE and RID keywords are mutually exclusive.
URID(hex-constant)
Specifies a hexadecimal unit of recovery identifier (URID). Changes to data
and indexes occur in the context of a DB2 unit of recovery, which is identified
on the log by a BEGIN UR record. In the summary DSN1LOGP report, the
URID is listed in the STARTRBA field in message DSN1162I. In the detail
DSN1LOGP report, look for the subtype of BEGIN UR; the URID is listed in
the URID field. Using the log RBA of that record as the URID value limits the
extraction of information from the DB2 log to that unit of recovery.
hex-constant is a hexadecimal value consisting of 1 to 12 characters (6 bytes).
You can specify a maximum of 10 URID keywords in any given DSN1LOGP
job.
LUWID(luwid)
Specifies up to 10 LUWIDs that DSN1LOGP is to include information about in
the summary report.
luwid consists of three parts: an LU network name, an LUW instance number,
and a commit sequence number. If you supply the first two parts, the
summary report includes an entry for each commit that is performed in the
logical unit of work (within the search range). If you supply all three parts, the
summary report includes an entry for only that LUWID.
The LU network name consists of a one- to eight-character network ID, a
period, and a one- to eight-character network LU name. The LUW instance
number consists of a period, followed by 12 hexadecimal characters. The last
element of the LUWID is the commit sequence number of 4 hexadecimal
characters, preceded by a period.
TYPE(hex-constant)
Limits the log records that are extracted to records of a specified type. The
TYPE and SUBTYPE options are mutually exclusive.
hex-constant indicates the type, as follows:
Constant
Description
2
Page set control record
SYSCOPY utility record
10
System event record
20
UR control record
100
Checkpoint record
200
UR-UNDO record
400
UR-REDO record
800
Archive quiesce record

809
1000 to 8000
Assigned by the resource manager
SUBTYPE(hex-constant)
Restricts formatting to a particular subtype of unit of recovery undo and redo
log records (types 200 and 400). The TYPE and SUBTYPE options are mutually
exclusive.
hex-constant indicates the subtype, as follows:
Constant
Description
Update data page
Format page or update space map
Update space map bits
Update to index space map
Update to index page
DBA table update log record
Checkpoint DBA table log record
DBD virtual memory copy
Exclusive lock on page set partition or DBD
Format file page set
Format index page set
Update by repair (first half if 32 KB)
10
Update by repair (second half if 32 KB)
11
Allocate or deallocate a segment entry
12
Undo/redo log record for modified page or redo log record for
formatted page
14
Savepoint
15
Other DB2 component log records that are written for RMID 14
17
Checkpoint record of modified page set
19
Type 2 index update
1A
Type 2 index undo/redo or redo log record
1B
Type 2 index change notification log record
1C
Type 2 index space map update
1D
DBET log record with exception data
1E
DBET log record with LPL/GRECP data
65
Change Data Capture diagnostic log
81
Index dummy compensation log record
82
START DATABASE ACCESS (FORCE) log record
The VALUE and OFFSET options must be used together. You can specify a
maximum of 10 VALUE-OFFSET pairs. The SUBTYPE parameter is required
when using the VALUE and OFFSET options.
810
VALUE(hex-constant)
Specifies a value that must appear in a log record that is to be extracted.
hex-constant is a hexadecimal value consisting of a maximum of 64
characters and must be an even number of characters.
The SUBTYPE keyword must be specified before the VALUE option.
OFFSET(hex-constant)
Specifies an offset from the log record header at which the value that is
specified in the VALUE option must appear.
hex-constant is a hexadecimal value consisting of a maximum of eight
characters.
The SUBTYPE keyword must be specified before specifying the OFFSET
option.
SUMMARY
Summarizes all recovery information within the RBASTART and RBAEND
specifications. You can use summary information to determine what work is
incomplete when DB2 starts. You cannot limit the output of the summary
report with any of the other options, except by using the FILTER option with a
URID or LUWID specification.
The default value is SUMMARY(NO).
(YES)
Generates both a detail and summary report.
(NO)
Generates only a detail report.
(ONLY)
Generates only a summary report.
FILTER
Restricts the summary report to include messages for only the specified URIDs
and LUWIDs. Specify this option only once.
The SUMMARY keyword must be specified before FILTER.
CHECK(DATA)
Specifies that DSN1LOGP is to check the specified range of data pages for
page regression. Any page regression errors are displayed in the detail and
summary reports.
Related concepts
DSN1LOGP output on page 816
Related reference
Sample DSN1LOGP control statements on page 813
|
Determining the PSID for base and clone objects
|
|
You can determine the PSID for base and clone objects by querying the
SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACE catalog table.
To determine the PSID to specify for base or clone objects:

1. Determine the PSID by querying the SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACE catalog table.
The value is displayed in decimal format. Use the SQL HEX function in your
select statement to convert the value to hexadecimal.
|
|
|
811
2. Determine the instance number of the clone or base object. You can determine
the instance number in two ways:
v Look at the TYPE column in the DISPLAY DATABASE command output. The
output indicates the base and clone objects with a B or a C character
respectively along with the data set instance number.
v Look at the DB2 catalog. The SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACE catalog table
INSTANCE column indicates the current instance number of the base table.
3. Determine whether to alter the PSID value or leave the PSID value the same.
For example, if the PSID value of the base or clone is 0009X and the instance
number is 1, specify a PSID value of 0009X to DSN1LOGP. If the PSID of the
base or clone is 0009X and the instance number is 2, specify a PSID value of
8009X to DSN1LOGP.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Reading archive log data sets on tape

If you store your archive logs on tape, DSN1LOGP constructs two files on tape
during the archiving process. The first file is the BSDS, and the second is a dump
of the active log that DSN1LOGP is currently archiving.
If a failure occurs during the time DSN1LOGP is archiving the BSDS, DB2 might
omit the BSDS. In this case, the first file contains the active log.
If you perform archiving on tape, the first letter of the lowest-level qualifier varies
for both the first and second data sets. The first letter of the first data set is B (for
BSDS), and the first letter of the second data set is A (for archive). Hence, the
archive log data set names all end in Axxxxxxx, and the DD statement identifies
each of them as the second data set on the corresponding tape:
LABEL=(2,SL)
When reading archive log data sets on tape (or copies of active log data sets on
tape), add one or more of the following Job Entry Subsystem (JES) statements:
For the JES3 environment:
JES3 environment JCL
Description
//*MAIN SETUP=JOB
Alert the z/OS operator to mount the initial volumes before the job
executes.
//*MAIN HOLD=YES
Place the job in HOLD status until the operator is ready to release the job.
TYPRUN=HOLD
Perform the same function as //*MAIN HOLD=YES. The system places
the JCL on the JOB statement.
For the JES2 environment:
JES2 environment JCL
Description
/*SETUP
Alert the z/OS operator to prepare to mount a specified list of tapes.
812
/*HOLD
Place the job in HOLD status until the operator has located the tapes and
is ready to release the job.
TYPRUN=HOLD
Perform the same function as /*HOLD. The system places the JCL on the
JOB statement.
Alternatively, submit the job to a z/OS initiator that your operations center has
established for exclusive use by jobs that require tape mounts. Specify the initiator
class by using the CLASS parameter on the JOB statement, in both JES2 and JES3
environments.
For additional information on these options, refer to z/OS MVS JCL Users Guide
or z/OS MVS JCL Reference.
Locating table and index identifiers

Use the DSN1PRNT utility to find the DBIDs, PSIDs, ISOBIDs, and OBIDs of the
tables and indexes from the system tables.
Sample DSN1LOGP control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own DSN1LOGP
control statements.
Example 1: Extracting information from the recovery log with an

available BSDS
The following example shows how to extract information from the recovery log
when you have the BSDS available. The extraction starts at the log RBA of
XAF000 and ends at the log RBA of XB3000. The DSN1LOGP utility identifies
the table or index space by the DBID of X10A (266 decimal) and the OBID of
X1F (31 decimal).
//STEP1 EXEC PGM=DSN1LOGP
//STEPLIB DD DSN=PDS containing DSN1LOGP
//BSDS
//SYSIN
DD *
RBASTART (AF000) RBAEND (B3000)
DBID (10A) OBID(1F)
/*
You can think of the DB2 recovery log as a large sequential file. When recovery log
records are written, they are written to the end of the log. A log RBA is the address
of a byte on the log. Because the recovery log is larger than a single data set, the
recovery log is physically stored on many data sets. DB2 records the RBA ranges
and their corresponding data sets in the BSDS. To determine which data set
contains a specific RBA, read the information about the DSNJU004 utility. During
normal DB2 operation, messages are issued that include information about log
RBAs.
813
Example 2: Extracting information from the active log when the

BSDS is not available
The following example shows how to extract the information from the active log
when the BSDS is not available. The extraction includes log records that apply to
the table space or index space that is identified by the DBID of X10A and the
OBID of X1F. The only information that is extracted is information that relates to
page numbers X3B and X8C, as identified by the PAGE options. You can omit
beginning and ending RBA values for ACTIVEn or ARCHIVE DD statements
because the DSN1LOGP search includes all specified ACTIVEn DD statements. The
DD statements ACTIVE1, ACTIVE2, and ACTIVE3 specify the log data sets in
ascending log RBA range. Use the DSNJU004 utility to determine what the log
RBA range is for each active log data set. If the BSDS is not available and you
cannot determine the ascending log RBA order of the data sets, you must run each
log data set individually.
//ACTIVE1 DD DSN=DSNCAT.LOGCOPY1.DS02,DISP=SHR
//SYSIN
DD *
DBID (10A) OBID(1F) PAGE(3B) PAGE(8C)
/*
RBA X'A000' - X'BFFF'

RBA X'C000' - X'EFFF'
RBA X'F000' - X'12FFF'
Example 3: Extracting information from the archive log when the

BSDS is not available
The example in the following figure shows how to extract the information from
archive logs when the BSDS is not available. The extraction includes log records
that apply to a single unit of recovery (whose URID is X61F321). Because the
BEGIN UR is the first record for the unit of recovery and is at X61F321, the
beginning RBA is specified to indicate that it is the first RBA in the range from
which to extract recovery log records. Also, because no ending RBA value is
specified, all specified archive logs are scanned for qualifying log records. The
specification of DBID(4) limits the scan to changes that the specified unit of
recovery made to all table spaces and index spaces in the database whose DBID is
X4.
//ARCHIVE DD DSN=DSNCAT.ARCHLOG1.A0000037,UNIT=TAPE,VOL=SER=T10067,
//
DISP=(OLD,KEEP),LABEL=(2,SL)
//
DD DSN=DSNCAT.ARCHLOG1.A0000039,UNIT=TAPE,VOL=SER=T30897,
//
//
DD DSN=DSNCAT.ARCHLOG1.A0000041,UNIT=TAPE,VOL=SER=T06573,
//
//SYSIN
DD *
RBASTART (61F321)
URID (61F321) DBID(4)
/*
Figure 135. Example DSN1LOGP statement with RBASTART and URID options
814
Example 4: Use DSN1LOGP with the SUMMARY option

The DSN1LOGP SUMMARY option allows you to scan the recovery log to
determine what work is incomplete at restart time. You can specify this option
either by itself or when you use DSN1LOGP to produce a detail report of log data.
Summary log results appear in SYSSUMRY; therefore, you must include a
SYSSUMRY DD statement as part of the JCL with which you execute DSN1LOGP.
The following example produces both a detail and a summary report that uses the
BSDS to identify the log data sets. The summary report summarizes all recovery
log information within the RBASTART and RBAEND specifications. You cannot
limit the output of the summary report with any of the other options, except by
using the FILTER option with a URID or LUWID specification. RBASTART and
RBAEND specification use depends on whether a BSDS is used.
This example is similar to Example 1, in that it shows how to extract the
information from the recovery log when you have the BSDS available. However,
this example also shows you how to specify a summary report of all logged
information between the log RBA of XAF000 and the log RBA of XB3000. This
summary is generated with a detail report, but it is printed to SYSSUMRY
separately.
//SYSSUMRY DD SYSOUT=A
//BSDS
//SYSIN
DD *
RBASTART (AF000) RBAEND (B3000)
DBID (10A) OBID(1F) SUMMARY(YES)
/*
Example 5: Use DSN1LOGP on all members of a data sharing

group
The following example shows how to extract log information that pertains to the
table space that is identified by DBID X112 and OBID X1D from all members of
a data sharing group.
//SYSPRINT SYSOUT=A
//SYSABEND SYSOUT=A
//GROUP DD DSN=DSNDB0G.BSDS01,DISP=SHR
//SYSIN DD *
DATAONLY (YES)
LRSNSTART (A7951A001AD5) LRSNEND (A7951A003B6A)
DBID (112) OBID(1D)
/*
Example 6: Use DSN1LOGP on a single member of a data

sharing group
The following example shows how to extract log information that pertains to the
table space that is identified by DBID X112 and OBID X1D from a single
member of a data sharing group.
//SYSPRINT SYSOUT=A
//SYSABEND SYSOUT=A
815
//M01BSDS DD DSN=DSNDB0G.DB1G.BSDS01,DISP=SHR
//SYSIN DD *
DATAONLY (YES)
LRSNSTART (A7951A001AD5) LRSNEND (A7951A003B6A)
DBID (112) OBID(1D)
/*
Related reference
Chapter 37, DSNJU004 (print log map), on page 751
Related information
Resetting the log RBA (DB2 Administration Guide)
DSN1LOGP output
Reviewing DSN1LOGP output

With the SUMMARY option, you can produce a summary report, a detail report, or
both. You can also use the CHECK(DATA) option to produce a summary and
detail report of page regression errors.
For data sharing, you might see multiple log records with the same LRSN value on
a single DB2 data sharing member.
|
|
Description of the summary report

The summary report in the following figure contains a summary of completed
events, consisting of an entry for each completed unit of work. Each entry shows,
among other information, the start time, user, and all page sets that were modified.
When possible, the report shows whether an object is LOGGED or NOT LOGGED.
The summary report is divided into two distinct sections:

v The first section is headed by the following message:
DSN1150I SUMMARY OF COMPLETED EVENTS
v The second section is headed by the following message:

DSN1157I RESTART SUMMARY
The first section lists all completed units of recovery (URs) and checkpoints within
the range of the log that is scanned. Events are listed chronologically, with URs
listed according to when they were completed and checkpoints listed according to
when the end of the checkpoint was processed. The page sets that are changed by
each completed UR are listed. If a log record that is associated with a UR is
unavailable, the attribute INFO=PARTIAL is displayed for the UR. Otherwise, the
UR is marked INFO=COMPLETE. A log record that is associated with a UR is
unavailable if the range of the scanned log is not large enough to contain all
records for a given UR.
The DISP attribute can be one of the following values: COMMITTED, ABORTED,
INFLIGHT, IN-COMMIT, IN-ABORT, POSTPONED ABORT, or INDOUBT. The
DISP attributes COMMITTED and ABORTED are used in the first section; the
remaining attributes are used in the second section.
816
The list in the second section shows the work that is required of DB2 at restart as
it is recorded in the log that you specified. If the log is available, the checkpoint
that is to be used is identified, as is each outstanding UR, together with the page
sets it changed. Each page set with pending writes is also identified, as is the
earliest log record that is required to complete those writes. If a log record that is
associated with a UR is unavailable, the attribute INFO=PARTIAL is displayed,
and the identification of modified page sets is incomplete for that UR.
DSN1212I DSN1LGRD FIRST LOG LRSN ENCOUNTERED AA526968220D
================================================================================
DSN1150I SUMMARY OF COMPLETED EVENTS
DSN1151I DSN1LPRT MEMBER=V91B UR CONNID=V91B CORRID=021.OPNLGR00 AUTHID=SYSOPR PLAN=SYSTEM
START DATE=94.347 TIME=11:15:22 DISP=COMMITTED INFO=COMPLETE
STARTRBA=00000000E570 ENDRBA=00000000EB64 STARTLRSN=AA52696B1269 ENDLRSN=AA526999D14D NID=*
LUWID=USIBMSY.SYEC1B.AA52696825CE.0001 COORDINATOR=*
PARTICIPANTS=*
DATA MODIFIED:
DATABASE=0001=DSNDB01 PAGE SET=00CF=SYSLGRNX
DATABASE=0001=DSNDB01 PAGE SET=0087=DSNLLX01
DSN1151I DSN1LPRT MEMBER=V91B UR CONNID=V91B CORRID=021.OPNLGR00 AUTHID=SYSOPR PLAN=SYSTEM
START DATE=94.347 TIME=11:16:14 DISP=COMMITTED INFO=COMPLETE
STARTRBA=00000000ECFC ENDRBA=00000000F20A STARTLRSN=AA52699C97A9 ENDLRSN=AA52699CADC5 NID=*
LUWID=USIBMSY.SYEC1B.AA52699C9508.0001 COORDINATOR=*
PARTICIPANTS=*
DATA MODIFIED:
DATABASE=0001=DSNDB01 PAGE SET=00CF=SYSLGRNX
....
DSN1213I DSN1LGRD LAST LOG LRSN ENCOUNTERED AA527C9B8392
DSN1214I NUMBER OF LOG RECORDS READ 0000000000004991
================================================================================
DSN1157I RESTART SUMMARY
DSN1153I DSN1LSIT CHECKPOINT MEMBER=V91B
STARTRBA=000000068CD3 ENDRBA=00000006CAED STARTLRSN=AA527AA809DF ENDLRSN=AA527AA829F4
DATE=94.347 TIME=12:32:29
DSN1162I DSN1LPRT MEMBER=V91C UR CONNID=BATCH CORRID=S5529927 AUTHID=ADMF001 PLAN=PLNFW543
START DATE=94.347 TIME=12:41:04 DISP=INFLIGHT
INFO=COMPLETE
STARTRBA=000000016000 STARTLRSN=AA527C9278DF NID=*
LUWID=USIBMSY.SYEC1C.AA527C22E283.0001 COORDINATOR=*
PARTICIPANTS=*
DATA MODIFIED:
DATABASE=0113=DBFW5401 PAGE SET=0002=TPFW5401
DATABASE=0113=DBFW5401 PAGE SET=0005=IPFW5401
DSN1162I DSN1LPRT MEMBER=V91A UR CONNID=BATCH CORRID=S5529925 AUTHID=ADMF001 PLAN=PLNFW541
START DATE=94.347 TIME=12:41:04 DISP=INFLIGHT INFO=COMPLETE
STARTRBA=000001F9A3C1 STARTLRSN=AA527C92E419 NID=*
LUWID=USIBMSY.SYEC1DB2.AA527C1D674B.0001 COORDINATOR=*
PARTICIPANTS=*
DATA MODIFIED:
DATABASE=0113=DBFW5401 PAGE SET=0002=TPFW5401
...
DSN1160I DATABASE WRITES PENDING:
DATABASE=0001=DSNDB01
PAGE SET=0046=DSNLUX02 START=000000068CD3
PAGE SET=0044=DSNLUX01 START=000000068CD3
...
PAGE SET=0076=DSNUCX01 START=000000068CD3
PAGE SET=0072=DSNUCH01 START=000000068CD3
...
Figure 136. Sample DSN1LOGP summary report
817
Description of the detail report

The detail report in the following figure includes the following records:
v Redo and undo log records
v System events log records, including begin and end checkpoint records, begin
current status rebuild records, and begin forward and backward recovery
records
v Page set control log records, including open and close page set log records, open
and close data set log records, set write, reset write, and page set write log
records
v UR control log records for the complete or incomplete unit of recovery
You can reduce the volume of the detail log records by specifying one or more of
the optional keywords in the DSN1LOGP utility control statement.
DSN1212I DSN1LGRD FIRST LOG RBA ENCOUNTERED 00000335916E
0000033591D4 MEMBER(M01
TYPE(PAGE SET CONTROL)
*LRH* 00660066 00020009
536BE583 0001
0000 000600B2 C4E2D5C4
0020 EC3AAB62 5260AB0B
0000000109E2 MEMBER(M02
TYPE(PAGE SET CONTROL)
*LRH* 00A0006E 00020001
53746CE3 0002
0000 01130008 6C010100
0020 00060000 10009201
0040 00000000 00000010
0060 00AB624B 192CEEAB
) LRSN(AB62536BE583) DBID(0006) OBID(00B2)

SUBTYPE(PAGE SET STATUS RECORD)
0E800000 00000000 00000335 916E0126 00000335 916EAB62
C2F0F640 C4E2D5E3 D5E7F0F1 00010000 92018000 00000334
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
) LRSN(AB6253746CE3) DBID(0113) OBID(0008)
SUBTYPE(PAGE SET OPEN)
0E800000 00000000 00000000 00000126 00000000 0000AB62
00000005
00130020
00010000
624B4783
0040C4C2
00000000
00000000
F8000000
C6E6F0F0
00000000
00000000
0000C4E2
F1F1C9C3
00000000
00000000
D5C3F4F1
C6E6F0F0 F0F10001
00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000
F040
000000010A82 MEMBER(M02
) URID(000000010A82) LRSN(AB6253747801)
TYPE(UR CONTROL) SUBTYPE(BEGIN UR)
*LRH* 009000A0 00200001 03800000 00010A82 00000000 00000126 00000000
53747801 0002
0000 00010000 0000D000 00000000 00000700 0000D4F0 F0F0F1F0 F2F54040
0020 E5E3F0F0 F340AB62 537477FC B803C4E2 D5E3C5D7 F340C2C1 E3C3C840
0040 E3C3C840 40400000 00000000 0000001A 0001E4E2 C9C2D4E2 E840E2E8
0060 4040AB62 5362554A 0001
0000AB62
4040D7C6
4040C2C1
C5C3F1C4
000000010B12 MEMBER(M02
) URID(000000010A82) LRSN(AB6253747807)
TYPE( UNDO ) SUBTYPE(SAVEPOINT)
*LRH* 002F0090 22000014 0E800000 00010A82 00000001 0A820126 00000001 0A82AB62
53747807 0002
0000 00E7D9E4 C9000000 02
000000010B42 MEMBER(M02
) URID(000000010A82) LRSN(AB625374780E) DBID(0113) OBID(0008)
PAGE(00000003)
TYPE( UNDO REDO ) SUBTYPE(TYPE 2 INDEX UPDATE) CLR(NO) PROCNAME(DSNKDLE )
*LRH* 0053002F 06000019 0E800000 00010A82 00000001 0B120126 00000001 0B12AB62
5374780E 0002
*LG** 84011300 08000003 63000000 00000000 0000
0000 001B3000 00B40001 00000201 000A0000 02C5C5F0 F6C1C1D4 F3F1C1
000000010B94 MEMBER(M02
) URID(000000010A82) LRSN(AB6253747CEF) DBID(0113) OBID(0008)
PAGE(00000003)
TYPE( UNDO REDO ) SUBTYPE(TYPE 2 INDEX UPDATE) CLR(NO) PROCNAME(DSNKINSL)
*LRH* 00530053 06000019 0E800000 00010A82 00000001 0B420126 00000001 0B42AB62
53747CEF 0002
*LG** 04011300 08000003 64000000 00000000 0000
0000 001B1000 00B30001 00000201 000A2000 00C5C5F0 F6C1C1D7 D7D3F4
......
00000001138E MEMBER(M02
) URID(0000000110A0) LRSN(AB62537B4931)
TYPE(UR CONTROL) SUBTYPE(BEGIN COMMIT1)
*LRH* 005C0053 00200002 03800000 000110A0 00000001 133B0126 00000001 133BAB62
537B4931 0002
0000 00020000 00004000 00000000 00000700 0000F0F2 F14BD6D7 D5D3C7D9 F0F04040
0020 40404040 40400000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0000
0000000113EA MEMBER(M02
) URID(0000000110A0) LRSN(AB62537B4940)
TYPE(UR CONTROL) SUBTYPE(PHASE 1 TO 2)
818
*LRH* 0034005C 0020000C 03800000 000110A0 00000001 138E0126 00000001 138EAB62

537B4940 0002
0000 00020000 00004000 00000000 0000
0000033685DE MEMBER(M01
) LRSN(AB6254D9A231) DBID(0001) OBID(001F)
TYPE( CHECKPOINT) SUBTYPE(DBE TABLE WITH EXCEPTION DATA)
*LRH* 0061003E 2100001D 0E800000 00000000 00000336 85A00126 00000336 85A0AB62
54D9A231 0001
0000 00000000 C4E2D5C4 C2F0F140 C4C2C4F0 F1404040 0001001F 00000000 00000000
0020 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 000000
00000336863F MEMBER(M01
) LRSN(AB6254D9A237) DBID(0001) OBID(001F)
TYPE( CHECKPOINT) SUBTYPE(DBE TABLE WITH PIECE DATA)
*LRH* 01F60061 2100001E 0E800000 00000000 00000336 85DE0126 00000336 85DEAB62
54D9A237 0001
0000 00000100 1FC4E2D5 C4C2F0F1 40C4C2C4 F0F14040 40000000 0020FFFF FFFFFFFF
0020 00000000 00000000 0000006C 00000090 FFFFFFFF 00000000 00000000 00FFFFFF
0040 FF000000 00000000 0000FFFF FFFF0000 00000000 000000FF FFFFFF00 00000000
0060 00000000 FFFFFFFF 00000000 00000000 00FFFFFF FF000000 00000000 0000FFFF
0080 FFFF0000 00000000 000000FF FFFFFF00 00000000 00000000 FFFFFFFF 00000000
00A0 00000000 00FFFFFF FF000000 00000000 0000FFFF FFFF0000 00000000 000000FF
00C0 FFFFFF00 00000000 00000000 FFFFFFFF 00000000 00000000 00FFFFFF FF000000
00E0 00000000 0000FFFF FFFF0000 00000000 000000FF FFFFFF00 00000000 00000000
0100 FFFFFFFF 00000000 00000000 00FFFFFF FF000000 00000000 0000FFFF FFFF0000
0120 00000000 000000FF FFFFFF00 00000000 00000000 FFFFFFFF 00000000 00000000
0140 00FFFFFF FF000000 00000000 0000FFFF FFFF0000 00000000 000000FF FFFFFF00
0160 00000000 00000000 FFFFFFFF 00000000 00000000 00FFFFFF FF000000 00000000
0180 0000FFFF FFFF0000 00000000 000000FF FFFFFF00 00000000 00000000 FFFFFFFF
01A0 00000000 00000000 00FFFFFF FF000000 00000000 0000FFFF FFFF0000 00000000
01C0 000000FF FFFFFF00 00000000 00000000
...
000000057EA2 MEMBER(M02
) LRSN(AB62564FF606) DBID(0113) OBID(000A)
TYPE(PAGE SET CONTROL) SUBTYPE(PAGE SET WRITE)
*LRH* 009C002A 00020007 0E800000 00000000 00000005 7E780126 00000005 7E78AB62
564FF606 0002
0000 0000F5D7 C3D60113 000AC4C2 C6E6F0F0 F1F1C9E4 C6E6F0F0 F0F20000 00000000
0020 00000000 0004D98E 00000004 D98E0000 00000000 11040000 00000000 03000003
0040 AB62553F 98780000 00000000 04000004 AB62553F 930C0000 00000000 05000005
0060 AB62553F 95C30000 00000000 06000006 AB62553F 9855
000000057F3E MEMBER(M02
) LRSN(AB62564FFFBA) DBID(0113) OBID(000A)
TYPE(PAGE SET CONTROL) SUBTYPE(PAGE SET CLOSE)
*LRH* 002A009C 00020003 0E800000 00000000 00000005 7EA20126 00000005 7EA2AB62
564FFFBA 0002
0000 0113000A
DSN1213I DSN1LGRD LAST LOG RBA ENCOUNTERED 00000337A000
DSN1214I NUMBER OF LOG RECORDS READ 0000000000004661
Figure 137. Sample DSN1LOGP detail report
Description of data propagation information in the summary

report
The sample output in the following figure shows information from the DSN1LOGP
summary report about log records of changes to DB2 tables that were defined with
DATA CAPTURE CHANGES.
The fields show the following information:
v START RBA and END RBA show the first and last RBAs that are captured for
the unit of recovery that was not retrieved. The range that the start and end
RBA encompass can include one or all of the SQL statements within the scope of
the unit of recovery.
v TABLE LIST OVERFLOW indicates whether more than 10 distinct data capture
table IDs were updated by this unit of recovery. This example indicates that no
overflow occurred.
819
v LR WRITTEN shows the number of written log records that represented changes
to tables that were defined for data capture and were available to the
DB2CDCEX routine. Recursive SQL changes from DB2CDCEX and changes from
other attachments that are not associated with DB2CDCEX are not included. If
you receive a value of 2147483647, an overflow occurred and the count is not
valid.
v LR RETRIEVED is the number of captured RBAs that were retrieved by
DB2CDCEX. If you receive a value of 2147483647, an overflow occurred and the
count is not valid.
v LR NOT RETRIEVED is the difference between the number of written log
records (LR WRITTEN) and the number of retrieved log records (LR
RETRIEVED). The following example output shows that four log records were
written, and none were retrieved.
DATA PROPAGATION INFORMATION:
START RBA=000004A107F4
END RBA=000004A10A5C
LR WRITTEN=0000000000000004 LR RETRIEVED=0000000000000000
DATABASE=0112=DBCS1701
PAGESET=0002=TSCS1701
TABLE LIST OVERFLOW=NO

LR NOT RETRIEVED=0000000000000004
TABLE OBID=0005
Figure 138. Sample data propagation information from the summary report
Description of the report on page regression errors

DSN1LOGP reports page regression errors when you specify the CHECK(DATA)
option. The value of the SUMMARY option determines whether the utility creates
a detail report, a summary report, or both.
A detail report contains the following information for each page regression error:
v DBID
v OBID
v
v
v
v
v
Page number
Current LRSN or RBA
Member name
Previous level
Previous update
v Date
v Time
A summary report contains the total number of page regressions that the utility
found as well as the following information for each table space in which it found
page regression errors:
v Database name
v Table space name
v DBID
v OBID
If no page regression errors are found, DSN1LOGP outputs a single message that
no page regression errors were found.
The sample output in the following figure shows detail and summary reports
when page regression errors are found.
820
DSN1212I DSN1LGRD FIRST LOG RBA ENCOUNTERED 5182C4758000

DSN1212I DSN1LGRD FIRST LOG LRSN ENCOUNTERED B7A829006D13
DSN1191I:
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DETAIL REPORT OF PAGE REGRESSION ERRORS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DBID OBID PAGE#
CURRENT
MEMBER PREV-LEVEL PREV-UPDATE DATE TIME
---- --- -------- ------------ ------- ----------- ------------ ------ -------0001 OOCF OOOO132F B7A83F071892 0002
84A83BBEE81F B7A83C6042DF 02.140 15:29:20
0001 OOCF 000086C2 B7A84BD4C3E5 0003
04A83BC42C58 B7A83C61D53E 02.140 18:01:13
0006 0009 00009DBF B7A8502A39F4 0002
04A83BC593B6 B7A83C669743 02.140 18:20:37
DSN1213I DSN1LGRD LAST LOG RBA ENCOUNTERED 51830AC57F47
DSN1213I DSN1LGRD LAST LOG LRSN ENCOUNTERED B7A8568367E6
DSN12141 NUMBER OF LOG RECORDS READ 0000000007816406
DSN1194I:
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------SUMMARY REPORT OF PAGE REGRESSION ERRORS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DATABASE SPACENAM DBID OBID #PG REGRESSIONS
-------- -------- ---- ---- --------------DSNDB01 SYSLGRNX 0001 00CF 00000002
DSNDB06 SYSDBASE 0006 0009 00000001
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DSN1197I TOTAL PAGES CHECKED FOR REGRESSION = 00312927
:
:
Figure 139. Sample DSN1LOGP detail and summary reports for page regression errors.
Interpreting error codes

When an error occurs, DSN1LOGP formats a reason code from the DB2
stand-alone log service in the SYSPRINT output.
|
|
|
|
DSN1LOGP can abnormally terminate with a user abend code of X099.

DSN1LOGP finds the corresponding abend reason code in register 15 (at the time
of error). If the specified RBA or LRSN range was not found in the input data sets
DSN1LOGP will terminate with return code 4.
Related information
Registers and return codes (DB2 Administration Guide)
821
822
Chapter 42. DSN1PRNT

With the DSN1PRNT stand-alone utility, you can print DB2 VSAM data sets that
contain table spaces or index spaces (including dictionary pages for compressed
data), image copy data sets, and Sequential data sets that contain DB2 table spaces
or index spaces.
A DB2 VSAM data set is a single piece of a nonpartitioned table space or index, or
a single partition of a partitioned table space or index. The input must be a single
z/OS sequential or VSAM data set. Concatenation of input data sets is not
supported.
Using DSN1PRNT, you can print hexadecimal dumps of DB2 data sets and
databases. If you specify the FORMAT option, DSN1PRNT formats the data and
indexes for any page that does not contain an error that would prevent formatting.
If DSN1PRNT detects such an error, it prints an error message just before the page
and dumps the page without formatting. Formatting resumes with the next page.
Compressed records are printed in compressed format.
DSN1PRNT is especially useful when you want to identify the contents of a table
space or index. You can run DSN1PRNT on image copy data sets and on table
spaces and indexes. DSN1PRNT accepts an index image copy as input when you
specify the FULLCOPY option.
You cannot run DSN1PRNT on concurrent copies.
DSN1PRNT is compatible with LOB table spaces, when you specify the LOB
keyword and omit the INLCOPY keyword.
DSN1PRNT does not decrypt any encrypted data; the utility displays the data as
is.
Output
Environment
Run DSN1PRNT as a z/OS job.
You can run DSN1PRNT even when the DB2 subsystem is not operational. If you
choose to use DSN1PRNT when the DB2 subsystem is operational, ensure that the
DB2 data sets that are to be printed are not currently allocated to DB2.
To make sure that a data set is not currently allocated to DB2, issue the DB2 STOP
DATABASE command, specifying the table spaces and indexes that you want to
print.
823
No special authorization is required. However, if any of the data sets is RACF
protected, the authorization ID of the job must have RACF authority.
Required data sets

DSN1PRNT uses the following DD statements:
SYSPRINT
Defines the data set that contains output messages from DSN1PRNT and
all hexadecimal dump output.
SYSUT1
Defines the input data set. That data set can be a sequential data set or a
VSAM data set.
Disposition for this data set must be specified as OLD (DISP=OLD) to
ensure that it is not in use by DB2. Specify the disposition for this data set
as SHR (DISP=SHR) only in circumstances where the DB2 STOP
DATABASE command does not work.
The requested operation takes place only for the specified data set. If the
input data set belongs to a linear table space or index space that is larger
than 2 GB, or if it is a partitioned table space or index space, you must
ensure the correct data set is specified. For example, to print a page range
in the second partition of a four-partition table space, specify
NUMPARTS(4) and the data set name of the data set in the group of
VSAM data sets comprising the table space. The following code shows the
data set name:
DSN=...A002
If you run the online REORG utility with FASTSWITCH behavior, verify
the data set name before running the DSN1PRNT utility. The fifth-level
using FASTSWITCH. If the table space has cloning, the fifth-level qualifier
can be I0002 or J0002. Specify the correct fifth-level qualifier in the data set
name to successfully execute the DSN1PRNT utility. To determine the
correct fifth-level qualifier, query the IPREFIX column of
query.
Related information
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Syntax and options of the DSN1PRNT control statement

The DSN1PRNT utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
824
DSN1PRNT syntax diagram

32K
PAGESIZE (
4K
8K
16K
32K
FULLCOPY
INCRCOPY
INLCOPY
LARGE
LOB
DSSIZE ( integer
G )

PIECESIZ(integer
K
M
G
NUMPARTS(integer)
(1)
PRINT EBCDIC

(1)
EBCDIC
PRINT
(hexadecimal-constant,hexadecimal-constant)
ASCII
UNICODE

VALUE(
string
FORMAT
EXPAND
NODATA
NODATPGS
Notes:
1
EBCDIC is not necessarily the default if the first page of the input data set is a header page. If
the first page is a header page, DSN1PRNT uses the format information in the header page as the
default format.
Option descriptions
To run DSN1PRNT, specify one or more of the following parameters on the EXEC
statement.
Important: If you specify more than one parameter:
v Separate them by commas (no blanks).
v Specify them in any order.
32K
Specifies that the SYSUT1 data set has a 32-KB page size. If you specify this
option and the SYSUT1 data set does not have a 32-KB page size, DSN1COPY
might produce unpredictable results.
825
PAGESIZE
page size, DSN1PRNT might produce unpredictable results.
If you do not specify the page size, DSN1PRNT tries to determine the page
size from the input data set if the first page of the input data set is a header
page. DB2 issues an error message if DSN1PRNT cannot determine the input
page size. This might happen if the header page is not in the input data set, or
if the page size field in the header page contains an invalid page size.
FULLCOPY
data is to be used as input. If this data is partitioned, you also need to specify
the NUMPARTS parameter to identify the number and length of the partitions.
If you specify FULLCOPY without including a NUMPARTS specification,
DSN1PRNT assumes that the input file is not partitioned.
The FULLCOPY parameter must be specified when you use an image copy as
input to DSN1PRNT. Omitting the parameter can cause error messages or
unpredictable results.
INCRCOPY
Specifies that an incremental image copy of the data is to be used as input. If
the data is partitioned, also specify NUMPARTS to identify the number and
length of the partitions. If you specify INCRCOPY without NUMPARTS,
DSN1PRNT assumes that the input file is not partitioned.
The INCRCOPY parameter must be specified when you use an incremental
image copy as input to DSN1PRNT. Omitting the parameter can cause error
messages or unpredictable results.
INLCOPY
Specifies that the input data is to be an inline copy data set.
When you use DSN1PRNT to print a page or a page range from an inline copy
that is produced by LOAD or REORG, DSN1PRNT prints all instances of the
pages. The last instance of the printed page or pages is the last one that is
created by the utility.
LARGE
LARGE option, or an index on such a table space. If you specify LARGE, DB2
assumes that the data set has a 4-GB boundary. The recommended method of
specifying a table space that was defined with the LARGE option is
DSSIZE(4G).
the results from DSN1PRNT are unpredictable.
If you specify LARGE, you cannot specify LOB or DSSIZE.
LOB
Specifies that the SYSUT1 data set is a LOB table space. You cannot specify the
INLCOPY option with the LOB parameter.
DB2 attempts to determine if the input data set is a LOB data set. If you
specify the LOB option but the data set is not a LOB data set, or if you omit
the LOB option but the data set is a LOB data set, DB2 issues an error message
and DSN1PRNT terminates.
826
If you specify LOB, you cannot specify LARGE.

DSSIZE(integer G)
Specifies the data set size, in gigabytes, for the input data set. If you omit the
DSSIZE keyword or the LARGE keyword, DSN1PRNT assumes the
appropriate default input data set size that is listed in the following table.
Table 149. Default input data set sizes
Object
Default input data set size (in GB)
Non-LOB linear table space or index
LOB

NUMPARTS = 1-16

NUMPARTS = 17-32

NUMPARTS = 33-64

NUMPARTS >64
was defined.
from DSN1PRNT are unpredictable.
If you specify DSSIZE, you cannot specify LARGE.
PIECESIZ(integer)
Specifies the maximum piece size (data set size) for nonpartitioned indexes.
The value that you specify must match the value that is specified when the
secondary index was created or altered.
The defaults for PIECESIZ are 2G (2 GB) for indexes that are backed by
non-large table spaces and 4G (4 GB) for indexes that are backed by table
spaces that were defined with the LARGE option. This option is required if a
print range is specified and the piece size is not one of the default values. If
PIECESIZ is omitted and the index is backed by a table space that was defined
with the LARGE option, the LARGE keyword is required for DSN1PRNT.
The subsequent keyword K, M, or G, indicates the units of the value that is
specified in integer.
K
Indicates that the integer value is to be multiplied by 1 KB to specify

the maximum piece size in bytes. integer must be either 256 or 512.
Indicates that the integer value is to be multiplied by 1 MB to specify

the maximum piece size in bytes. integer must be a power of 2,
between 1 and 512.
Indicates that the integer value is to be multiplied by 1 GB to specify

the maximum piece size in bytes. integer must be 1, 2, or 4.
Valid values for piece size are:

v 1 MB or 1 GB
v 2 MB or 2 GB
v 4 MB or 4 GB
v 8 MB
v 16 MB
827
v
v
v
v
v
32 MB
64 MB
128 MB
256 KB or 256 MB
512 KB or 512 MB
NUMPARTS(integer)
PRINT(hexadecimal-constant,hexadecimal-constant)
Causes the SYSUT1 data set to be printed in hexadecimal format on the
SYSPRINT data set. This option is the default for DSN1PRNT.
You can specify the PRINT parameter with or without page range
specifications. If you do not specify a range, all pages of the SYSUT1 are
printed. If you want to limit the range of pages that are printed, you can do so
by indicating the beginning and ending page numbers with the PRINT
parameter or, if you want to print a single page, by indicating only the
beginning page. In either case, your range specifications must be from one to
eight hexadecimal characters in length.
The following example shows how to code the PRINT parameter if you want
to begin printing at page X2F0 and to stop at page X35C:
PRINT(2F0,35C)
Note that the actual size of a 4-GB DB2 data set that is full is 4G - 256 x 4KB.
This size also applies to data sets that are created with a DFSMS data class that
has extended addressability. When calculating the print range of pages in a
non-first data set of a multiple data set linear table space or index with 4G
DSSIZE or PIECESIZ, use the actual data set size.
The relationship between the page size and the number of pages in a 4-GB
data set is shown in the following table.
Table 150. Relationship between page size and the number of pages in a 4-GB data set
Page size
Number of pages
4 KB
XFFF00
8 KB
X7FF80
16 KB
X3FFC0
32 KB
X1FFE0
For example, if PAGESIZE is 4 KB, the page number of the first page of the
third data set is 2*FFF00 = 1FFE00.
To print only the header page for a nonpartitioned table space, specify
PRINT(0).
828
You can indicate the format of the row data in the PRINT output by specifying
EBCDIC, ASCII, or UNICODE. The part of the output that is affected by these
options is in bold in the following figure.
RECORD: XOFFSET='0014'X PGSFLAGS='00'X PGSLTH=65 PGSLTH='0041'X PGSOBD='0003'X PGSBID='01'X
C5C5F0F6 C1404040 40404040 F1F34040 40C1E2D6 F1F3F5E7 40404040 40404040
EE06A
13
ASO135X
C1C6F3F1 C587C6F0 01800000 14199002 01174522 00000080 000000
AF31E.F0...................
RECORD: XOFFSET='0055'X PGSFLAGS='00'X PGSLTH=65 PGSLTH='0041'X PGSOBD='0003'X PGSBID='02'X
C5C5F0F6 C1404040 40404040 F1F34040 40C1E2D6 F1F3F5E7 40404040 40404040
EE06A
13
ASO135X
C1C6F5F2 D487C5F0 09800000 78199002 01174522 00000080 000000
AF52M.E0...................
Figure 140. The part of the DSN1PRNT FORMAT output that is affected by the EBCDIC, ASCII, and UNICODE
options
EBCDIC
EBCDIC.
The default value is EBCDIC if the first page of the input data set is not a
header page.
If the first page is a header page, DSN1PRNT uses the format information
in the header page as the default format. However, if you specify EBCDIC,
ASCII, or UNICODE, that format overrides the format information in the
header page. The unformatted header page dump is always displayed in
EBCDIC, because most of the fields are in EBCDIC.
ASCII
ASCII. Specify ASCII when printing table spaces that contain ASCII data.
UNICODE
Unicode. Specify UNICODE when printing table spaces that contain
Unicode data.
VALUE
Causes each page of the input data set SYSUT1 to be scanned for the character
string that you specify in parentheses following the VALUE parameter. Each
page that contains that character string is then printed in SYSPRINT. You can
specify the VALUE parameter in conjunction with any of the other DSN1PRNT
parameters.
(string)
Can consist of from 1 to 20 alphanumeric EBCDIC characters. For
non-EBCDIC characters, use hexadecimal characters.
(hexadecimal-constant)
Consists of from 2 to 40 hexadecimal characters. You must specify two
apostrophe characters before and after the hexadecimal character string.
If, for example, you want to search your input file for the string 12345, your
JCL should look like the following JCL:
//STEP1 EXEC PGM=DSN1PRNT,PARM='VALUE(12345)'
Alternatively, you might want to search for the equivalent hexadecimal

character string, in which case your JCL should look like the following JCL:
//STEP1 EXEC PGM=DSN1PRNT,PARM='VALUE(''F1F2F3F4F5'')'
829
FORMAT
Causes the printed output to be formatted. Page control fields are identified,
and individual records are printed. Empty fields are not displayed.
EXPAND
Specifies that the data is compressed and causes DSN1PRNT to expand it
before formatting. This option is intended to be used only under the
direction of your IBM Support Center.
NODATA
Suppresses printing of table row data. The row headers are formatted and
printed. Specify NODATA to reduce the volume of the output when the
contents of the rows are not important.
|
|
|
NODATPGS
Suppresses all data pages of a table space. Specify NODATPGS to format
and print only non-data pages to reduce the volume of the output when
only certain page types are of interest (for example, LOB space map
pages). Alternatively, you can specify NODHDR.
DSN1PRNT cannot format a leaf or nonleaf page for an index page set that
contains keys with altered columns. When it encounters this situation,
DSN1PRNT generates the following message:
*KEY WITH ALTERED COLUMN HAS BEEN DETECTED-UNABLE TO FORMAT PAGE*
DSN1PRNT generates unformatted output for the page.

FORMAT attempts to format a broken page and dumps the unformatted
version of the page following the formatted version.
|
|
Related concepts
Using VERIFY with REPLACE and DELETE operations on page 557
Printing with DSN1PRNT instead of DSN1COPY

If you want to print information about a data set, use the DSN1PRNT utility rather
than the DSN1COPY utility. DSN1COPY scans the entire SYSUT1 data set, but
DSN1PRNT might be able to stop scanning before the end of the data set. Also, the
DSN1PRNT utility can write a formatted dump.
Determining page size and DSSIZE

You can determine page size and DSSIZE by running a query against the DB2
catalog.
Before using DSN1PRNT, determine the page size and data set size (DSSIZE) for
the page set. Use the query in the following figure on the DB2 catalog to get the
information that you need, in this example for table DEPT:
CASE S.DSSIZE
WHEN 0 THEN
ELSE
830

ELSE NULL
END
ELSE 2097152
END
END
ELSE S.DSSIZE
END
AS DSSIZE
WHERE
T.NAME = 'DEPT' AND
T.TSNAME = S.NAME;
Figure 141. Example SQL query that returns the page size and data set size for the page
set.
Related reference
Data sets that REORG INDEX uses on page 433
Sample DSN1PRNT control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own DSN1PRNT
control statements.
Example 1: Printing a data set and formatting the output

The following example specifies that the DSN1PRNT utility is to print the data set
that is identified by the SYSUT1 DD statement and the output is to be formatted.
This data set is to be printed on the data set that is identified by the SYSPRINT
DD statement. The fifth-level qualifier in the data set name can be either I0001 or
J0001. This example uses I0001.
//jobname JOB acct info
//RUNPRNT EXEC PGM=DSN1PRNT,PARM='PRINT,FORMAT'
//STEPLIB DD DSN=prefix.SDSNLOAD
//SYSUT1 DD DSN=DSNCAT.DSNDBC.DSNDB01.SYSUTILX.I0001.A001,DISP=SHR
Example 2: Printing a nonpartitioning index with a 64-MB piece

size
The following example specifies that DSN1PRNT is to print the first 16 pages of
the 61st piece of an nonpartitioned index with a piece size of 64 MB. The pages
that are to be printed are identified by the PRINT option. These page values are
determined as follows: A data set of size 64 MB contains X4000 4-KB pages.
Decimal 61 is X3D. The page number of the first page of the 61st piece is
4000*(3D-1) = 4000*3C = F0000. To print the last 16 pages of the 61st piece, specify
PARM=(PRINT(F3FF0,F3FFF), ...).
The fifth-level qualifier in the data set name can be either I0001 or J0001. This
example uses I0001.
831
//PRINT2 EXEC
//
//SYSUDUMP DD
//SYSPRINT DD
//SYSUT1
DD
PGM=DSN1PRNT,
PARM=(PRINT(F0000,F000F),FORMAT,PIECESIZ(64M))
SYSOUT=A
SYSOUT=A
DISP=OLD,DSN=DSNCAT.DSNDBD.MMRDB.NPI1.I0001.A061
Example 3: Printing a single page of an image copy

The following example specifies that DSN1PRNT is to print one page of an image
copy. The image copy is identified by the SYSUT1 DD statement. The PRINT
option specifies that the only page to be printed is X1.
//STEP2
//
//STEPLIB
//SYSUDUMP
//SYSPRINT
//SYSUT1
EXEC PGM=DSN1PRNT,
PARM='PRINT(1),FORMAT,INLCOPY'
DD DSN=DB2A.SDSNLOAD,DISP=SHR
DD SYSOUT=A
DD SYSOUT=A
DD DSN=HUHYU205.L1.STEP1.DD2,DISP=SHR
Example 4: Printing a partitioned data set

The following example specifies that DSN1PRNT is to print the data set that is
identified by the SYSUT1 DD statement. Because this data set is a table space that
was defined with the LARGE option, the DSSIZE(4G) option is specified in the
parameter list for DSN1PRNT. You could specify the LARGE option in this list
instead, but specifying DSSIZE(4G) is recommended. This input table space has 260
partitions, as indicated by the NUMPARTS option.
//RUNPRNT1 EXEC PGM=DSN1PRNT,
//
PARM='DSSIZE(4G),PRINT,NUMPARTS(260),FORMAT'
//STEPLIB DD DSN=DB2A.SDSNLOAD,DISP=SHR
//SYSUT1
DD DSN=DSNCAT.DSNDBC.DBOM0301.TPOM0301.I0001.A259,DISP=SHR
/*
Example 5: Printing a page range of a specific partition
|
|
It is difficult to determine page numbers for a specific partition of a partitioned

table space.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This example describes a simple way of using DSN1PRNT without needing to

calculate page numbers.
1.
Run DSN1PRNT on the partition you want to process without specifying a

PRINT range. Set the FORMAT option to NODATPGS. Data pages are not
printed reducing the use of spool space.
//
EXEC PGM=DSN1PRNT,
//
PARM='FORMAT,NODATPGS,NUMPARTS(8)'
//SYSUT1
DD DSN=DSNT6USR.DSNDBC.V9DS306.XV9D0000.I0001.A008,DISP=SHR
The printout includes page numbers. Use these page numbers to setup another
DSN1PRNT job using the appropriate page numbers.
2. Run DSN1PRNT on partition 8 specifying your PRINT range
//
EXEC PGM=DSN1PRNT,
//
PARM='PRINT(xx000000,xx000020),FORMAT,NUMPARTS(8)'
//SYSUT1
DD DSN=DSNT6USR.DSNDBC.V9DS306.XV9D0000.I0001.A008,DISP=SHR
The page range must be specified in hexadecimal format.
832
Chapter 43. DSN1SDMP

Under the direction of IBM Software Support, use the IFC selective dump
(DSN1SDMP) utility to force dumps when selected DB2 trace events occur, write
DB2 trace records to a user-defined z/OS data set, and start another DB2 trace.
|
|
|
|
To ensure that you do not take action on an IFCID 4 or IFCID 5 start or stop trace
record, it is good practice to add
|
|
to your control statement, where hhhh is the hex representation of the IFCID that
you are trying to trigger on.
P4,00
DR,04,X'hhhh'
Output
Environment
Run DSN1SDMP as a z/OS job, and execute it with the DSN TSO command
processor. To execute DSN1SDMP, the DB2 subsystem must be running.
The z/OS job completes only under one of the following conditions:
v The TRACE and any additional selection criteria that are started by DSN1SDMP
meet the criteria specified in the FOR parameter.
v The TRACE that is started by DSN1SDMP is stopped by using the STOP TRACE
command.
v The job is canceled by the operator.
If you must stop DSN1SDMP, use the STOP TRACE command.
To execute this utility, the privilege set of the process must include one of the
following privileges or authorities:
v TRACE system privilege
v SYSOPR authority
v SYSADM authority
v MONITOR1 or MONITOR2 privileges (if you are using user-defined data sets)
The user who executes DSN1SDMP must have EXECUTE authority on the plan
that is specified in the trace-parameters of the START TRACE keyword.
Required data sets

DSN1SDMP uses the following DD statements:
SDMPIN
Defines the control data set that specifies the input parameters to
833
DSN1SDMP. This DD statement is required. The LRECL is 80. Only the

first 72 columns are checked by DSN1SDMP.
SDMPPRNT
Defines the sequential message data set that is used for DSN1SDMP
messages. If the SDMPPRNT DD statement is omitted, no messages are
written. The LRECL is 131.
SYSABEND
Defines the data set that is to contain an ABEND dump in case
DSN1SDMP abends. This DD statement is optional.
SDMPTRAC
Defines the sequential DB2 trace record data set that DB2 returns to
DSN1SDMP. The DD statement is required only if trace data is written to
an OPX trace destination. If the destination is anything other than an OPX
buffer, SDMPTRAC is ignored.
Trace records that DB2 writes to SDMPTRAC are of the same format as
SMF or GTF records except that the SDMPTRAC trace record headers
contain the monitor header (that is mapped by DSNDQWIW). The The
DCB parameters are VB, BLKSIZE=32760, LRECL=32756.
SYSTSIN
Defines the DSN commands to connect to DB2 and to execute an IFC
selective dump:
DSN SYSTEM(subsystem name)
RUN PROG(DSN1SDMP) LIB('prefix.SDSNLOAD') PLAN(DSNEDCL)
The DB2 subsystem name must be filled in by the user. The DSN RUN
command must specify a plan for which the user has execute authority.
DSN1SDMP dump does not execute the specified plan; the plan is used
only to connect to DB2.
When no plan name is specified on the DSN RUN command, the default
plan name is the program name. When DSN1SDMP is executed without a
plan, DSN generates an error if no DSN1SDMP plan exists for which the
user has execute authority.
Related information
Trace data record format (DB2 Performance Monitoring and Tuning Guide)
Syntax and options of the DSN1SDMP control statement

The DSN1SDMP utility control statement, with its multiple options, defines the
834
DSN1SDMP syntax diagram
START TRACE (trace-parameters)
SELECT function,offset,data-specification

(X00E60100)
ACTION
(action
)
(abend-code)
(1)
(STTRACE
second-trace-spec
(X00E60100)
,action
(abend-code)
AFTER (1)
FOR
(1)
AFTER (integer)
FOR
(integer)
Notes:
1
The options in the second-trace-spec do not have to be specified immediately following the
STTRACE option. However, they can be specified only if the STTRACE option is also specified.
second-trace-spec:

(X00E60100)
ACTION2( action
FILTER(
)
ACE
EB
COMMAND
command
(abend-code)
AFTER2 (1)
FOR2
(1)
AFTER2 (integer)
FOR2
(integer)
SELECT2 function,offset,data-specification
Option descriptions
START TRACE (trace-parameters)
Indicates the start of a DSN1SDMP job. START TRACE is a required keyword
and must be the first keyword that is specified in the SDMPIN input stream.
The trace parameters that you use are those that are described in DB2
Command Reference, except that you cannot use the subsystem recognition
character.
If the START TRACE command in the SDMPIN input stream is not valid, or if
the user is not properly authorized, the IFI (instrumentation facility interface)
835
returns an error code and START TRACE does not take effect. DSN1SDMP
writes the error message to the SDMPPRNT data set.
Trace Destination: If DB2 trace data is to be written to the SDMPTRAC data set,
the trace destination must be an IFI online performance (OP) buffer. OP buffer
destinations are specified in the DEST keyword of START TRACE. Eight OP buffer
destinations exist, OP1 to OP8. The OPX trace destination assigns the next
available OP buffer. Any record destined for the exclusive internal trace table (RES)
is not eligible to be evaluated. For example, if you start IFCID(0) DEST(RES), this
will not execute DSN1SDMP logic and cannot be acted upon.
|
|
|
The DB2 output text from the START TRACE command is written to SDMPPRNT.
START TRACE and its associated keywords must be specified first. Specify the
remaining selective dump keywords in any order following the START TRACE
command.
SELECT function,offset,data-specification
Specifies selection criteria in addition to those that are specified on the START
TRACE command. SELECT expands the data that is available for selection in a
trace record and allows more specific selection of data in the trace record than
using START TRACE alone. You can specify a maximum of eight SELECT
criteria.
The selection criteria use the concept of the current-record pointer. DB2
initializes the current-record pointer to zero, that is, at the beginning of the
trace record. For this instance of the DSN1SDMP trace, the trace record begins
with the self-defining section. The current-record pointer can be modified by
Px and LN functions, which are described in the list of functions below.
You can specify the selection criteria with the following parameters:
function
Specifies the type of search that is to be performed on the trace record. The
specified value must be two characters. The possible values are:
DR
Specifies a direct comparison of data from the specified offset. The
offset is always calculated from the current-record pointer.
GE
Specifies a comparison of data that is greater than or equal to the value
of the specified offset. The offset is always calculated from the
current-record pointer. The test succeeds if the data from the specified
offset is greater than or equal to data-specification, which you can
specify on the SELECT option.
LE Specifies a comparison of data that is less than or equal to the value of
the specified offset. The offset is always calculated from the
current-record pointer. The test succeeds if the data from the specified
offset is less than or equal to data-specification, which you specify on the
SELECT option.
P1, P2, or P4
Selects the 1-, 2-, or 4-byte field that is located offset bytes past the start
of the record. The function then moves the current-record pointer that
number of bytes into the record. P1, P2, and P4 always start from the
beginning of the record (plus the offset that you specify).
836
This offset is saved as the current-record pointer that is to be used on

subsequent DR, LE, GR, and LN requests.
For example, suppose that the user knows that the offset to the
standard header is 4 bytes long and is located in the first 4 bytes of the
record. P4,00 reads that offset and moves the current-record pointer to
the start of the standard header.
LN
Advances the current-record pointer by the number of bytes that are
indicated in the 2-byte field that is located offset bytes from the
previous current-record pointer.
This offset is saved as the current-record pointer that is to be used on
subsequent DR, LE, GR, and LN requests.
offset
Specifies the number (in decimal) of bytes into the trace record where the
comparison with the data-specification field begins. The offset starts from the
beginning of the trace record after a P1, P2, or P4, and from the
current-record pointer after a GE, LE, LN, or DR.
The format of the DB2 trace record at data-specification comparison time is
shown in the following figure.
Self defining
section
Data sections
Product
section
Figure 142. Format of the DB2 trace record at data specification comparison time
v The format of the self-defining section depends on the trace type.

v The format and content of the data sections depend on the IFCID that is
being recorded. Each record can have one or more data sections. Each
data section can have multiple repeating groups.
v The format and content of the trace header section depends on the trace
type.
data-specification
Specifies that the data can be hexadecimal (for example, X9FECBA10) or
character (CFIELD).
ACTION
Specifies the action to perform when a trace record passes the selection criteria
of the START TRACE and SELECT keywords.
Attention: The purpose of the ACTION keyword is to facilitate problem
analysis. You should use it with extreme caution because you might damage
existing data. Not all abends are recoverable, even if the ABENDRET
parameter is specified. Some abends might force the DB2 subsystem to
terminate, particularly those abends that occur during end-of-task or
end-of-memory processing due to the agent having experienced a previous
abend.
action(abend-code)
Specifies a particular action to perform. Possible values for action are:
ABENDRET
ABEND and retry the agent.
837
ABENDTER
ABEND and terminate the agent.
An abend reason code can also be specified on this parameter. The codes
must be in the range X00E60100 to X00E60199. The default value is
X00E60100.
STTRACE
Specifies that a second trace is to be started when a trace record passes the
selection criteria.
If you do not specify action or STTRACE, the record is written and no action is
performed.
AFTER(integer)
Specifies that the ACTION is to be performed after the trace point is reached
integer times.
integer must be between 1 and 32767.
The default value is AFTER(1).
FOR(integer)
Specifies the number of times that the ACTION is to take place when the
specified trace point is reached. After integer times, the trace is stopped, and
DSN1SDMP terminates.
integer must be between 1 and 32767 and includes the first action. If no
SELECT criteria are specified, use an integer greater than 1; the START TRACE
command automatically causes the action to take place one time.
The default value is FOR(1).
ACTION2
Specifies the action to perform when a trace record passes the selection criteria
of the START TRACE, SELECT, and SELECT2 keywords.
Attention: The ACTION2 keyword, like the ACTION keyword, should be
used with extreme caution, because you might damage existing data. Not all
abends are recoverable, even if the ABENDRET parameter is specified. Some
abends might force the DB2 subsystem to terminate, particularly those that
occur during end-of-task or end-of-memory processing due to the agent having
experienced a previous abend.
action(abend-code)
Specifies a particular action to perform. Possible values for action are:
ABENDRET
ABEND and retry the agent.
ABENDTER
ABEND and terminate the agent.
An abend reason code can also be specified on this parameter. The codes
must be in the range X00E60100-00E60199. If no abend code is specified,
X00E60100 is used.
If you do not specify action, the record is written and no action is performed.
FILTER
Specifies that DSN1SDMP is to filter the output of the second trace based on
either an ACE or an EB.
838
(ACE)
Specifies that DSN1SDMP is to include trace records only for the agent
control element (ACE) that is associated with the agent when the first
action is triggered and the second trace is started.
(EB)
Specifies that DSN1SDMP is to include trace records only for the execution
block (EB) that is associated with the agent when the first action is
triggered and the second trace is started.
COMMAND
Indicates that the specified command is to be issued when a trace record
passes the selection criteria for the first trace and a second trace is started. You
can start a second trace by specifying the STTRACE option.
command
Specifies a specific command to be issued.
FOR2(integer)
Specifies the number of times that the ACTION2 is to take place when the
specified second trace point is reached. After integer times, the second trace is
stopped, and DSN1SDMP terminates.
integer must be between 1 and 32767 and includes the first action. If no
SELECT2 criteria are specified, use an integer greater than 1; the STTRACE
option automatically causes the action to take place one time.
The default value is FOR2(1).
AFTER2(integer)
Specifies that the ACTION2 is to be performed after the second trace point is
reached integer times.
integer must be between 1 and 32767.
The default value is AFTER2(1).
SELECT2 function,offset,data-specification
Specifies selection criteria for the second trace. This option functions like the
SELECT option, except that it pertains to the second trace only. You can start a
second trace by specifying the STTRACE option.
Related information
Trace field descriptions (DB2 Performance Monitoring and Tuning Guide)
Assigning buffers
The OPX trace destination assigns the next available OP buffer. You must specify
the OPX destination for all traces that are being recorded to an OPn buffer, thereby
avoiding the possibility of starting a trace to a buffer that has already been
assigned.
If a trace is started to an OPn buffer that has already been assigned, DSN1SDMP
waits indefinitely until the trace is manually stopped. The default for
MONITOR-type traces is the OPX destination (the next available OP buffer). Other
trace types must be explicitly directed to OP destinations via the DEST keyword of
the START TRACE command. DSN1SDMP interrogates the IFCAOPN field after
the START TRACE COMMAND call to determine if the trace was started to an OP
buffer.
839
Trace Destination: If DB2 trace data is to be written to the SDMPTRAC data set,
the trace destination must be an IFI online performance (OP) buffer. OP buffer
destinations are specified in the DEST keyword of START TRACE. Eight OP buffer
destinations exist, OP1 to OP8. The OPX trace destination assigns the next
available OP buffer. Any record destined for the exclusive internal trace table (RES)
is not eligible to be evaluated. For example, if you start IFCID(0) DEST(RES), this
will not execute DSN1SDMP logic and cannot be acted upon.
|
|
|
Trace records are written to the SDMPTRAC data set when the trace destination is
an OP buffer. The instrumentation facilities component (IFC) writes trace records to
the buffer and posts DSN1SDMP to read the buffer when it fills to half of the
buffer size.
You can specify the buffer size on the BUFSIZE keyword of the START TRACE
command. All returned records are written to SDMPTRAC.
If the number of generated trace records requires a larger buffer size than was
specified, you can lose some trace records. If this happens, error message
DSN2724I is issued.
Conditions for generating a dump

DSN1SDMP generates a DB2 dump when certain events occur.
DSN1SDMP generates a DB2 dump when all of the following events occur:
v DB2 produces a trace record that satisfies all of the selection criteria.
v You specify an abend action (ABENDRET or ABENDTER).
v The AFTER and FOR conditions for the trace are satisfied.
If all three events occur, an 00E601xx abend occurs. xx is an integer between 1 and
99 that DB2 obtains from the user-specified value on the ACTION keyword.
Stopping or modifying DSN1SDMP traces

You can stop and modify DSN1SDMP traces.
If you must stop DSN1SDMP, use the STOP TRACE command.
If DSN1SDMP does not finish execution, you can stop the utility by issuing the
STOP TRACE command, as in the following example:
-STOP TRACE=P CLASS(32)
DSN1SDMP executes as a stand-alone batch utility without requiring external

intervention from the console operator or other programs. During execution,
DSN1SDMP issues an IFI READA request to obtain the data from the OPn buffer
and a STOP TRACE command to terminate the original trace that is started by
DSN1SDMP.
A STOP TRACE or MODIFY TRACE command that is entered from a console for
the trace that is started by DSN1SDMP causes immediate abnormal termination of
DSN1SDMP processing. The IFI READA function terminates with an appropriate
IFI termination message and reason code. Additional error messages and reason
codes that are associated with the DSN1SDMP STOP TRACE command vary
depending on the specific trace command that is entered by the console operator.
840
If the console operator terminates the original trace by using the STOP TRACE
command, the subsequent STOP TRACE command that is issued by DSN1SDMP
fails.
If the console operator enters a MODIFY TRACE command and processing of this
command completes before the STOP TRACE command is issued by DSN1SDMP,
the modified trace is also terminated.
Sample DSN1SDMP control statements

Use the sample control statements as models for developing your own DSN1SDMP
control statements.
Example 1: Creating the JCL for DSN1SDMP

This example shows the skeleton JCL for a DSN1SDMP job.
//DSN1J018 JOB 'IFC SD',CLASS=A,
//
MSGLEVEL=(1,1),USER=SYSADM,PASSWORD=SYSADM,REGION=1024K
//**********************************************************************
//*
//*
THIS IS A SKELETON OF THE JCL USED TO RUN DSN1SDMP.
//*
YOU MUST INSERT SDMPIN DD.
//*
//**********************************************************************
//IFCSD
EXEC PGM=IKJEFT01,DYNAMNBR=20,COND=(4,LT)
//STEPLIB DD DISP=SHR,DSN=prefix.SDSNLOAD
//SYSTSPRT DD SYSOUT=*
//SDMPPRNT DD SYSOUT=*
//SDMPTRAC DD DISP=(NEW,CATLG,CATLG),DSN=IFCSD.TRACE,
//
UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(8192,(100,100)),DCB=(DSORG=PS,
//
LRECL=32756,RECFM=VB,BLKSIZE=32760)
//SDMPIN
DD *
//**********************************************************************
//*
//*
INSERT SDMPIN DD HERE. IT MUST BEGIN WITH A VALID
//*
START TRACE COMMAND (WITHOUT THE SUBSYSTEM RECOGNITION CHAR)
//*
//**********************************************************************
(VALID SDMPIN GOES HERE)
/*
//**********************************************************************
//SYSUDUMP DD SYSOUT=*
//SYSTSIN DD *
DSN SYSTEM(DSN)
RUN PROG(DSN1SDMP) PLAN(DSNEDCL)
END
//*
Figure 143. Skeleton JCL for DSN1SDMP
Example 2: Abending and retrying agent on -904 SQL CODE

This example specifies that DB2 is to start a performance trace (which is indicated
by the letter A) and activate IFCID 53, 58. To start only those IFCIDs that are
specified in the IFCID option, use trace classes 30-32. In this example, trace class 32
is specified. The IFCID 53 and 58 are started and inspected to see if they match the
SELECT criteria.
841
The SELECT option indicates additional criteria for data in the trace record. In this
example, the P4,00 positions the current record pointer to the product section. The
GE, 04,X0005 insures that the IFCID being traced is either an IFCID 53 or 58 and
is not an IFCID4 which is automatically generated via the START TRACE
command. The P4,08 positions the current record pointer to data section 1 of the
IFCID 53 or 58. A direct comparison is then made at decimal offset 74 for SQL code
XFFFFFC78.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When a trace record passes the selection criteria of the START TRACE command
and SELECT keywords, DSN1SDMP is to perform the action that is specified by
the ACTION keyword. In this example, the job is to abend and retry with reason
code 00E60188. This action is to take place only once, as indicated by the FOR
option. FOR(1) is the default, and is therefore not required to be explicitly
specified.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
//SDMPIN
DD *
START TRACE=A CLASS(32) IFCID(53,58) DEST(OPX)
FOR(1)
AFTER(1)
ACTION(ABENDRET(00E60188))
SELECT
* Position to the prodcut section
P4,00
* Insure QWHSIID = 58 or 53 (not IFCID 4)
GE,04,X'0005'
* Position to the data section 1
P4,08
* Compare SQLCODE in QW0058SQ or QW0053SQ
DR,74,X'FFFFFC78'
/*
Figure 144. Example job that abends and terminates agent on -904 SQL code
Example 3: Abending and retrying on RMID 20

by the letter P) and activate all IFCIDs in classes 3 and 8. The trace output is to be
recorded in a generic destination that uses the first free OPn slot, as indicated by
the DEST option. The TDATA (TRA) option specifies that a CPU header is to be
placed into the product section of each trace record.
example, the SELECT option first specifies that the current-record pointer is to be
placed at the 4-byte field that is located at the start of the record. The current
record pointer is then to be advanced the number of bytes that are indicated in the
2-byte field that is located at the current record pointer. The utility is then to
directly compare the data that is 4 bytes from the current-record pointer with the
value X0025.
the ACTION keyword. In this example, the job is to abend and retry the agent.
842
//*
ABEND AND RETRY AN AGENT WHEN EVENT ID X'0025'
//*
(AGENT ALLOCATION) IS RECORDED BY RMID 20 (SERVICE
//*
CONTROLLER).
//*
//SDMPIN
DD *
* ENSURE ONLY THE TRACE HEADER IS APPENDED WITH THE STANDARD HEADER
* VIA THE TDATA KEYWORD ON START TRACE
START TRACE=P CLASS(3,8) RMID(20) DEST(OPX) TDATA(TRA)
* ABEND AND RETRY THE AGENT WITH THE DEFAULT ABEND CODE (00E60100)
ACTION(ABENDRET)
* SPECIFY THE SELECT CRITERIA FOR RMID.EID
SELECT
* OFFSET TO THE STANDARD HEADER
P4,00
* ADD LENGTH OF STANDARD HEADER TO GET TO TRACE HEADER
LN,00
* LOOK FOR EID 37 AT OFFSET 4 IN THE TRACE HEADER
DR,04,X'0025'
/*
Figure 145. Example job that abends and retries on RMID 20
Example 4: Generating a dump on SQLCODE -811 RMID16 IFCID

5
by the letter P) and activate all IFCIDs in class 3. The trace output is to be recorded
in the system management facility (SMF). The TDATA (COR,TRA) option specifies
that a trace header and a CPU header are to be placed into the product section of
each trace record.
example, the SELECT option first specifies that the current-record pointer is to be
placed at the 4-byte field that is located at the start of the record. The utility is then
to directly compare the data that is 2 bytes from the current-record pointer with
the value X0116003A. The current record pointer is then to be moved to the 4-byte
field that is located 8 bytes past the start of the current record. The utility is then
to directly compare the data that is 74 bytes from the current-record pointer with
the value XFFFFFCD5.
the ACTION keyword. In this example, the job is to abend with reason code
00E60188 and retry the agent. This action is to take place only once, as indicated
by the FOR option. FOR(1) is the default, and is therefore not required to be
explicitly specified. AFTER(1) indicates that this action is to be performed the first
time the trace point is reached. AFTER(1) is also the default.
843
//SDMPIN
DD *
START TRACE=P CLASS(3) RMID(22) DEST(SMF) TDATA(COR,TRA)
AFTER(1)
FOR(1)
SELECT
* POSITION TO HEADERS (QWHS IS ALWAYS FIRST)
P4,00
* CHECK QWHS 01, FOR RMID 16, IFCID 58
DR,02,X'0116003A'
* POSITION TO SECOND SECTION (1ST DATA SECTION)
P4,08
* COMPARE SQLCODE FOR 811
DR,74,X'FFFFFCD5'
ACTION(ABENDRET(00E60188))
/*
Figure 146. Example job that generates a dump on SQL code -811 RMID16 IFCID
Example 5: Starting a second trace

This example job starts a trace on IFC 196 records. An IFC 196 record is written
when a lock timeout occurs. In this example, when a lock timeout occurs,
DSN1SDMP is to start a second trace, as indicated by the ACTION(STTRACE)
option. This second trace is to be an accounting trace, as indicated by the
COMMAND START TRACE(ACCTG) option. This trace is to include records only
for the ACE that is associated with the agent that timed out, as indicated by the
FILTER(ACE) option. When the qualifying accounting record is found, DSN1SDMP
generates a dump.
//SDMPIN
DD
*
* START ONLY IFCID 196, TIMEOUT
START TRACE=P CLASS(32) IFCID(196) DEST(SMF)
AFTER(1)
* ACTION = START ACCOUNTING TRACE
ACTION(STTRACE)
* FILTER ON JUST 196 RECORDS...
SELECT
P4,00
DR,04,X'00C4'
* WHEN ACCOUNTING IS CUT, ABEND
ACTION2(ABENDRET(00E60188))
* START THE ACCOUNTING TRACE FILTER ON THE ACE OF THE AGENT
* THAT TIMED OUT
COMMAND
START TRACE(ACCTG) CLASS(32) IFCID(3) DEST(SMF)
* Filter can be for ACE or EB
FILTER(ACE)
/*
Figure 147. Example job that starts a second trace.
Related information
-STOP TRACE (DB2) (DB2 Command Reference)
844
Part 4. Appendixes
845
846
Appendix A. Limits in DB2 for z/OS

DB2 for z/OS has system limits, object and SQL limits, length limits for identifiers
and strings, and limits for certain data type values.
System storage limits might preclude the limits specified in this section. The limit
for items not that are not specified below is limited by system storage.
The following table shows the length limits for identifiers.
Table 151. Identifier length limits. The term byte(s) in this table means the number of bytes for the UTF-8
representation unless noted otherwise.
Item
Limit
External-java-routine-name
1305 bytes
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
128 bytes
Name of an alias, auxiliary table, collection, clone table,
constraint, correlation, cursor (except for DECLARE
CURSOR WITH RETURN or the EXEC SQL utility),
distinct type (both parts of two-part name), function (both
parts of two-part name), host identifier, index, JARs,
parameter, procedure, role, schema, sequence, specific,
statement, storage group, savepoint, SQL condition, SQL
label, SQL parameter, SQL variable, synonym, table,
trigger, view, XML attribute name, XML element name
Name of an authorization ID or name of a security label.
8 bytes
|
|
Routine version identifier
64 EBCDIC bytes, and the UTF-8 representation of the

name must not exceed 122 bytes.
Name of a column
30 bytes
Name of cursor that is created with DECLARE CURSOR

WITH RETURN
30 bytes
Name of cursor that is created with the EXEC SQL utility
8 bytes
Name of a location
16 bytes
Name of buffer pool name, catalog, database, plan,

program, table space
8 bytes
Name of package
8 bytes (Only 8 EBCDIC characters are used for packages

that are created with the BIND PACKAGE command. 128
bytes can be used for packages that are created as a result
of the CREATE TRIGGER statement.)
|
|
Name of a profile that is created with CREATE TRUSTED 127 bytes

CONTEXT or ALTER TRUSTED CONTEXT
Table 152 shows the minimum and maximum limits for numeric values.
Table 152. Numeric limits
Item
Limit
Smallest SMALLINT value
-32768
Largest SMALLINT value
32767
Smallest INTEGER value
-2147483648
Largest INTEGER value
2147483647
847
Table 152. Numeric limits (continued)

Item
Limit
| Smallest BIGINT value
-9223372036854775808
| Largest BIGINT value
9223372036854775807
Smallest REAL value
About -7.2x1075
Largest REAL value
About 7.2x1075
Smallest positive REAL value
About 5.4x10-79
Largest negative REAL value
About -5.4x10-79
Smallest FLOAT value
About -7.2x1075
Largest FLOAT value
About 7.2x1075
Smallest positive FLOAT value
About 5.4x10-79
Largest negative FLOAT value
About -5.4x10-79
Smallest DECIMAL value
1 - 1031
Largest DECIMAL value
1031 - 1
Largest decimal precision
| Smallest DECFLOAT(16) value
31
1
-9.999999999999999x10384
| Largest DECFLOAT(16) value1
9.999999999999999x10384
| Smallest positive DECFLOAT(16) value1
1.000000000000000x10-383
| Largest negative DECFLOAT(16) value1
-1.000000000000000x10-383
| Smallest DECFLOAT(34) value1
-9.999999999999999999999999999999999x106144.
| Largest DECFLOAT(34) value1
9.999999999999999999999999999999999x106144.
| Smallest positive DECFLOAT(34) value1
1.000000000000000000000000000000000x10-6143
| Largest negative DECFLOAT(34) value1
-1.000000000000000000000000000000000x10-6143
| Coefficient length for DECFLOAT values
DECFLOAT(16) is 16 digits; DECFLOAT(34) is 34 digits
| Maximum Exponent (Emax) for DECFLOAT values
DECFLOAT(16) is 384; DECFLOAT(34) is 6144
| Minimum Exponent (Emin) for DECFLOAT values
DECFLOAT(16) is -383; DECFLOAT(34) is -6143
| Bias for DECFLOAT values
DECFLOAT(16) is 398; DECFLOAT(34) is 6176
| Note:
| 1. These are the limits for normal numbers in DECFLOAT. DECFLOAT also contains special values such as NaN
and Infinity that are also valid. DECFLOAT also supports subnormal numbers that are outside of the documented
|
range.
|
The following table shows the length limits for strings.

Table 153. String length limits
Item
Limit
Maximum length of CHAR
255 bytes
Maximum length of GRAPHIC
127 double-byte characters
| Maximum length of BINARY

1
Maximum length of VARCHAR
848
255 bytes
4046 bytes for 4 KB pages
Table 153. String length limits (continued)
|
|
Item
Limit
Maximum length of VARCHAR that can be indexed by

an XML index
1000 bytes after conversion to UTF-8
Maximum length1 of VARGRAPHIC
2023 double-byte characters for 4 KB pages

| Maximum length of VARBINARY
32704 bytes
Maximum length of CLOB
2 147 483 647 bytes (2 GB - 1 byte)
Maximum length of DBCLOB
1 073 741 823 double-byte characters
Maximum length of BLOB
2 147 483 647 bytes (2 GB - 1 byte)
Maximum length of a character constant
32704 UTF-8 bytes
Maximum length of a hexadecimal character constant
32704 hexadecimal digits
Maximum length of a graphic string constant
16352 double-byte characters (32704 bytes when

expressed in UTF-8)
Maximum length of a hexadecimal graphic string

constant
32704 hexadecimal digits
| Maximum length of a text string used for a scalar

| expression
4000 UTF-8 bytes
Maximum length of a concatenated character string
2 147 483 647 bytes (2 GB - 1 byte)
Maximum length of a concatenated graphic string
1 073 741 824 double-byte characters
Maximum length of a concatenated binary string
2 147 483 647 bytes (2 GB - 1 byte)
| Maximum length of XML pattern text
4000 bytes after conversion to UTF-8
| Maximum length of an XML element or attribute name in 1000 bytes

| an XML document
| Maximum length of a namespace uri
1000 bytes
| maximum length of a namespace prefix
998 bytes
| largest depth of an internal XML tree
128 levels
Note:
1. The maximum length can be achieved only if the column is the only column in the table. Otherwise, the
maximum length depends on the amount of space remaining on a page.
The following table shows the minimum and maximum limits for datetime values.
Table 154. Datetime limits
Item
Limit
Smallest DATE value (shown in ISO format)
0001-01-01
Largest DATE value (shown in ISO format)
9999-12-31
Smallest TIME value (shown in ISO format)
00.00.00
Largest TIME value (shown in ISO format)
24.00.00
Smallest TIMESTAMP value
0001-01-01-00.00.00.000000
Largest TIMESTAMP value
9999-12-31-24.00.00.000000
The following table shows the DB2 limits on SQL statements.
849
Table 155. DB2 limits on SQL statements

Item
Limit
| Maximum number of columns that are in a table or view

| (the value depends on the complexity of the CREATE
750 or fewer (including hidden columns)

749 if the table is a dependent
VIEW statement) or columns returned by a table function.

Maximum number of base tables in a view, SELECT,
UPDATE, INSERT, MERGE, or DELETE
225
Maximum number of rows that can be inserted with a

single INSERT or MERGE statement
32767
Maximum row and record sizes for a table
See the description of CREATE TABLE in DB2 SQL

Reference.
Maximum number of volume IDs in a storage group
133
Maximum number of partitions in a partitioned table

space or partitioned index
64 for table spaces that are not defined with LARGE or a

DSSIZE greater than 2 GB.
4096, depending on what is specified for DSSIZE or
LARGE and the page size.
Maximum sum of the lengths of limit key values of a

partition boundary
765 UTF-8 bytes
Maximum size of a partition (table space or index)
For table spaces that are not defined with LARGE or a

DSSIZE greater than 2 GB:
4 GB, for 1 to 16 partitions
For table spaces that are defined with LARGE:
For table spaces that are defined with a DSSIZE greater
than 2 GB:
64 GB, depending on the page size (for 1 to 256
partitions for 4 KB pages, for 1 to 512 partitions for 8
KB pages, for 1 to 1024 partitions for 16 KB pages,
and 1 to 2048 partitions for 32 KB pages)
Maximum length of an index key
Partitioning index: 255-n

Nonpartitioning index that is padded: 2000-n
Nonpartitioning index that is not padded: 2000-n-2m
Where n is the number of columns in the key that allow
nulls and m is the number of varying-length columns in
the key
Maximum number of bytes used in the partitioning of a

partitioned index
255 (This maximum limit is subject to additional

limitations, depending on the number of partitions in the
table space. The number of partitions * (106 + limit key
size) must be less than 65394.)
Maximum number of columns in an index key
64
| Maximum number of expressions in an index key
64
Maximum number of tables in a FROM clause
225 or fewer, depending on the complexity of the

statement
Maximum number of subqueries in a statement
224
850
Table 155. DB2 limits on SQL statements (continued)

Item
Limit
Maximum total length of host and indicator variables

pointed to in an SQLDA
32767 bytes
Longest host variable used for insert or update operation
32704 bytes for a non-LOB
2 147 483 647 bytes (2 GB - 1 byte) for a LOB, subject to

the limitations that are imposed by the application
environment and host language

the limitations that are imposed by the application
environment and host language
Longest SQL statement
2 097 152 bytes
Maximum number of elements in a select list
750 or fewer, depending on whether the select list is for

the result table of static scrollable cursor1
Maximum number of predicates in a WHERE or

HAVING clause
Limited by storage
|
|
|
|
|
Maximum total length of columns of a query operation

requiring a sort key (SELECT DISTINCT, ORDER BY,
GROUP BY, UNION, EXCEPT, and INTERSECT, without
the ALL keyword, and the DISTINCT keyword for
aggregate functions)
4000 bytes
|
|
|
Maximum total length of columns of a query operation

requiring sort and evaluating column functions
(MULTIPLE DISTINCT and GROUP BY)
32600 bytes
Maximum length of a sort key
16000 bytes
Maximum length of a check constraint
3800 bytes
Maximum number of bytes that can be passed in a single

parameter of an SQL CALL statement
32765 bytes for a non-LOB
Maximum number of stored procedures, triggers, and

user-defined functions that an SQL statement can
implicitly or explicitly reference
16 nesting levels
Maximum length of the SQL path
2048 bytes
|
|
|
Maximum length of a WLM environment name in a

CREATE PROCEDURE, CREATE FUNCTION, ALTER
PROCEDURE, or ALTER FUNCTION statement.
32 bytes
|
|
Maximum number of XPath level in the XMLPATTERN

clause of the CREATE INDEX statement.
50 nesting levels
|
|

the limitations imposed by the application environment
and host language
Note:
1. If the scrollable cursor is read-only, the maximum number is 749 less the number of columns in the ORDER BY
that are not in the select list. If the scrollable cursor is not read-only, the maximum number is 747.
The following table shows the DB2 system limits.

Table 156. DB2 system limits
Item
Limit
Maximum number of concurrent DB2 or application

agents
Limited by the EDM pool size, buffer pool size, and the
amount of storage that is used by each DB2 or
application agent
851
Table 156. DB2 system limits (continued)

Item
Limit
| Largest non-LOB table or table space
128 terabytes (TB)
Largest simple or segmented table space
64 GB
Largest log space
248 bytes
Largest active log data set
4 GB -1 byte
Largest archive log data set
4 GB -1 byte
Maximum number of active log copies
Maximum number of archive log copies
Maximum number of active log data sets (each copy)
93
Maximum number of archive log volumes (each copy)
10000
Maximum number of databases accessible to an

application or end user
Limited by system storage and EDM pool size
| Maximum number of databases
65271
| Maximum number of implicitly created databases
10000
| Maximum number of indexes on declared global

| temporary tables
10000
Largest EDM pool
The installation parameter maximum depends on

available space
Maximum number of rows per page
255 for all table spaces except catalog and directory tables
spaces, which have a maximum of 127
Maximum simple or segmented data set size
2 GB
Maximum partitioned data set size
See item maximum size of a partition in Table 155 on

page 850
Maximum LOB data set size
64 GB
| Maximum number of table spaces that can be defined in

| a work file database
500
| Maximum number of tables and triggers that can be

| defined in a work file database
11767
852
Appendix B. DB2-supplied stored procedures

DB2 provides some stored procedures that you can call in your application
programs to perform a number of utility and application programming functions.
Typically, these procedures are created during installation or migration.
The following table lists all of the DB2-supplied stored procedures.
Table 157. DB2-supplied stored procedures
Stored procedure name
Description
ADMIN_COMMAND_DB2
The ADMIN_COMMAND_DB2 stored procedure is an

administrative enablement routine. It executes one or more DB2
commands on a connected DB2 subsystem or on a DB2 data sharing
group member and returns the command output messages.
ADMIN_COMMAND_DSN
The ADMIN_COMMAND_DSN stored procedure is an

administrative enablement routine. It executes a BIND, REBIND, or
FREE DSN subcommand and then returns the output from the
subcommand.
ADMIN_COMMAND_UNIX
The ADMIN_COMMAND_UNIX stored procedure is an

administrative enablement routine. It executes a USS command and
returns the output from the command.
ADMIN_DS_BROWSE
The ADMIN_DS_BROWSE stored procedure is an administrative

enablement routine. It returns either text or binary records from one
of the following entities:
v a physical sequential (PS) data set
v a generation data set (GDS)
v a partitioned data set (PDS)
v a partitioned data set extended (PDSE) member.
This stored procedure supports only data sets with LRECL=80 and
RECFM=FB.
ADMIN_DS_DELETE
The ADMIN_DS_DELETE stored procedure is an administrative

enablement routine. It deletes one of the following entities:
v a partitioned data set extended (PDSE)
v a member of a PDS or PDSE
ADMIN_DS_LIST
The ADMIN_DS_LIST stored procedure is an administrative

enablement routine. It returns a list of one of the following items:
v data set names
v generation data groups (GDG)
v partitioned data set (PDS) members
v partitioned data set extended (PDSE) members
v generation data sets of a GDG
853
Table 157. DB2-supplied stored procedures (continued)

Description
ADMIN_DS_RENAME
The ADMIN_DS_RENAME stored procedure is an administrative

enablement routine. It renames one of the following entities:
v a member of a PDS or PDSE
ADMIN_DS_SEARCH
The ADMIN_DS_SEARCH stored procedure is an administrative

enablement routine. It determines if one of the following items is
cataloged:
v a generation data group (GDG)
Alternatively, ADMIN_DS_SEARCH determines if a library member
of a cataloged PDS or PDSE exists.
ADMIN_DS_WRIT
The ADMIN_DS_WRITE stored procedure is an administrative

enablement routine. It writes either text or binary records that are
passed in a global temporary table to one of the following entities:
v partitioned data set (PDS) member
v partitioned data set extended (PDSE) member
v generation data set (GDS)
ADMIN_DS_WRITE can either append or replace an existing PS
data set, PDS member, PDSE member, or GDS. ADMIN_DS_WRITE
can create one of the following entities:
v a PS data set
v PDS data set or member
v PDSE data set or member
v GDS for an existing generation data group (GDG) as needed
This stored procedure supports only data sets with LRECL=80 and
RECFM=FB.
ADMIN_INFO_HOST
The ADMIN_INFO_HOST stored procedure is an administrative

enablement routine. It returns the host name of a connected DB2
subsystem or the host name of every member of a data sharing
group.
ADMIN_INFO_SSID
The ADMIN_INFO_SSID stored procedure is an administrative

enablement routine. It returns the subsystem ID of the connected
DB2 subsystem.
ADMIN_JOB_CANCEL
The ADMIN_JOB_CANCEL stored procedure is an administrative

enablement routine. It purges or cancels a job.
ADMIN_JOB_FETCH
The ADMIN_JOB_FETCH stored procedure is an administrative

enablement routine. It retrieves the output from the JES spool.
ADMIN_JOB_QUERY
The ADMIN_JOB_QUERY stored procedure is an administrative

enablement routine. It displays the status and completion
information of a job.
ADMIN_JOB_SUBMIT
The ADMIN_JOB_SUBMIT stored procedure is an administrative

enablement routine. It submits a job to a JES2 or JES3 system.
854

Description
ADMIN_TASK_ADD
The ADMIN_TASK_ADD stored procedure is an administrative task

scheduler routine. It adds a task to the task list of the administrative
task scheduler.
ADMIN_TASK_REMOVE
The ADMIN_TASK_REMOVE stored procedure is an administrative

task scheduler routine. It removes a task from the task list of the
administrative task scheduler.
ADMIN_UTL_SCHEDULE
The ADMIN_UTL_SCHEDULE stored procedure is an

administrative enablement routine. It executes utilities in parallel.
ADMIN_UTL_SORT
The ADMIN_UTL_SORT stored procedure is an administrative

enablement routine. It sorts database objects for parallel utility
execution using JCL or the ADMIN_UTL_SCHEDULE stored
procedure.
DSNACCOR
The real-time statistics stored procedure, DSNACCOR, queries the

DB2 real-time statistics tables. This information helps you determine
when you should run COPY, REORG, or RUNSTATS utility jobs, or
enlarge your DB2 data sets.
DSNACCOX
The enhanced DB2 real-time statistics stored procedure,

DSNACCOX, makes recommendations to help you maintain your
DB2 databases.
The DSNACCOX stored procedure replaces the previous
DSNACCOR stored procedure, beginning in Version 9.
DSNACICS
The CICS transaction invocation stored procedure, DSNACICS,

invokes CICS transactions from a remote workstation.
DSNAEXP
The DB2 EXPLAIN stored procedure, DSN8EXP, invokes the

EXPLAIN function on an SQL statement without requiring you to
have the authorization to execute that SQL statement.
The DSNAEXP stored procedure replaces the previous DSN8EXP
stored procedure, beginning in Version 8. DSN8EXP handles SQL
statements of up to 32,700 bytes in length. DSNAEXP can handle
longer statements.
DSNAHVPM
The DSNAHVPM stored procedure is used by Optimization Service

Center for DB2 for z/OS to convert host variables in a static SQL
statement to typed parameter markers.
DSNAIMS
The IMS transactions stored procedure, DSNAIMS, invokes IMS

transactions and commands, without requiring a DB2 subsystem to
maintain its own connection to IMS.
DSNAIMS2
The IMS transactions stored procedure 2, DSNAIMS2, performs the

same function as DSNAIMS, except that DSNAIMS2 also includes
multi-segment input support for IMS transactions.
DSNLEUSR
The SYSIBM.USERNAMES encryption stored procedure,

DSNLEUSR, stores encrypted values in the NEWAUTHID and
PASSWORD fields of the SYSIBM.USERNAMES catalog table.
DSNTBIND
The DSNTBIND stored procedure binds Java stored procedures.
DSNTPSMP
The DB2 for z/OS SQL procedure processor, DSNTPSMP, is a REXX

stored procedure that prepares external SQL procedures for
execution.
DSNUTILS
The utilities stored procedure for EBCDIC input, DSNUTILS,

invokes DB2 utilities from a local or remote client program. This
stored procedure accepts utility control statements that are encoded
in EBCDIC.
855

Description
DSNUTILU
The utilities stored procedure for Unicode input, DSNUTILU,

invokes DB2 utilities from a local or remote client program. This
stored procedure accepts utility control statements that are encoded
in Unicode.
| DSNWSPM
The DSNWSPM stored procedure formats IFCID 148 records.
| DSNWZP
|
The subsystem parameter stored procedure, DSNWZP, is used by

the DB2-supplied stored procedure WLM_REFRESH.
| GET_CONFIG
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The GET_CONFIG stored procedure is a common SQL API stored

procedure. It returns information about the data server
configuration, including information about the following items:
This stored procedure is used primarily by DB2 tools.
| GET_MESSAGE
|
|
The GET_MESSAGE stored procedure is a common SQL API stored

procedure. It returns the short message text for an SQL code. This
stored procedure is used primarily by DB2 tools.
| GET_SYSTEM_INFO
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The GET_SYSTEM_INFO stored procedure is a common SQL API

stored procedure. It returns system information, including
information about the following items:
This stored procedure is used primarily by DB2 tools
| SQLJ.ALTER_JAVA_PATH
|
|
|
The SQLJ.ALTER_JAVA_PATH stored procedure specifies the class

resolution path that the JVM searches to resolve class references.
This action is needed if a JAR that you have installed refers to
classes in other installed JARs.
| SQLJ.DB2_INSTALL_JAR
|
The SQLJ.DB2_INSTALL_JAR stored procedure installs a set of Java

classes into a local or remote catalog.
| SQLJ.DB2_REMOVE_JAR
|
The SQLJ.DB2_REMOVE_JAR stored procedure removes a Java JAR

file and its classes from a local or remote catalog.
| SQLJ.DB2_REPLACE_JAR
|
The SQLJ.DB2_REPLACE_JAR stored procedure replaces a

previously installed JAR file in a local or remote catalog.
| SQLJ.DB2_UPDATEJARINFO
|
|
The SQLJ.DB2_UPDATEJARINFO stored procedure inserts class,

class source, and associated options for a previously installed JAR
file in a local or remote catalog.
| SQLJ.INSTALL_JAR
|
The SQLJ.INSTALL_JAR stored procedure installs a set of Java

classes into the current SQL catalog and schema.
| SQLJ.REMOVE_JAR
|
The SQLJ.REMOVE_JAR stored procedure removes a Java JAR file

and its classes from a specified, local catalog.
856
v the data sharing group

v the DB2 subsystem parameters
v the DDF status and configuration
v the connected DB2 subsystem
v the RLF tables
v the active log data sets
v the last DB2 restart
v operating system
v product information
v PTF level of each DB2 module
v the SMP/E APPLY status of the requested SYSMOD
v WLM classification rules that apply to the DB2 workload for
subsystem types DB2 and DDF

Description
|
|
SQLJ.REPLACE_JAR
The SQLJ.REPLACE_JAR stored procedure replaces a previously

installed JAR file in a local catalog.
|
|
WLM_REFRESH
The WLM environment refresh stored procedure, WLM_REFRESH,

refreshes a WLM environment from a remote workstation.
|
|
|
WLM_SET_CLIENT_INFO
The WLM_SET_CLIENT_INFO stored procedure sets client

information that is associated with the current connection at the DB2
server.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Deprecated: XDBDECOMPXML
The XML decomposition stored procedure, XDBDECOMPXML,

extracts values from serialized XML data and populates relational
tables with the values. The XDBDECOMPXML stored procedure
uses an XML schema, which contains annotations that indicate
which columns and tables are to be used to store the decomposed
XML values.
|
|
|
XSR_ADDSCHEMADOC
The add XML schema document stored procedure,

XSR_ADDSCHEMADOC, adds every XML schema other than the
primary XML schema document to the XSR.
|
|
|
|
XSR_COMPLETE
The XML schema registration completion stored procedure,

XSR_COMPLETE, is the final stored procedure to be called as part
of the XML schema registration process. The XML schema
registration process registers XML schemas with the XSR.
|
|
|
|
XSR_REGISTER
The XML schema registration stored procedure, XSR_REGISTER, is

the first stored procedure to be called as part of the XML schema
registration process. The XML schema registration process registers
XML schemas with the XSR.
|
|
XSR_REMOVE
The XML schema removal stored procedure, XSR_REMOVE,

removes all components of an XML schema.
All of the MQ XML stored procedures have been deprecated.

|
Table 158. Deprecated MQ XML stored procedures
Description
|
|
|
|
|
|
DXXMQINSERT
DXXMQINSERT performs the following actions:

v returns a message that contains an XML document from an MQ message
queue
v decomposes the document
v stores the data in DB2 tables that are specified by an enabled XML
collection.
| DXXMQSHRED
|
|
|
|
|
DXXMQSHRED performs the following actions:
DXXMQSHRED does not require an enabled XML collection.

queue
v stores the data in DB2 tables that are specified in a document access
definition (DAD) file
857
| Table 158. Deprecated MQ XML stored procedures (continued)

| Stored procedure name
Description
| DXXMQINSERTCLOB
|
|
|
|
|
DXXMQINSERTCLOB performs the following actions:
|
|
DXXMQINSERTCLOB is intended for an XML document with a length of

up to 1 MB.
| DXXMQSHREDCLOB
|
|
|
|
|
DXXMQSHREDCLOB performs the following actions:
|
|
|
DXXMQSHREDCLOB does not require an enabled XML collection.

DXXMQSHREDCLOB is intended for an XML document with a length of
up to 1 MB.
| DXXMQINSERTALL
|
|
|
|
|
DXXMQINSERTALL performs the following actions:

queue
collection.

queue
v returns messages that contain XML documents from an MQ message

queue
v decomposes the documents
collection
|
|
DXXMQINSERTALL is intended for XML documents with a length of up to

3 KB.
| DXXMQSHREDALL
|
|
|
|
|
DXXMQSHREDALL performs the following actions:
|
|
|
DXXMQSHREDALL does not require an enabled XML collection.

DXXMQSHREDALL is intended for XML documents with a length of up to
3 KB.
| DXXMQSHREDALLCLOB
|
|
|
|
|
DXXMQSHREDALLCLOB performs the following actions:
|
|
|
DXXMQSHREDALLCLOB does not require an enabled XML collection.

DXXMQSHREDALLCLOB is intended for XML documents with a length of
up to 1 MB.
858

queue

queue
Table 158. Deprecated MQ XML stored procedures (continued)
Description
|
|
|
|
|
|
DXXMQINSERTALLCLOB
DXXMQINSERTALLCLOB performs the following actions:

queue
collection.
|
|
DXXMQINSERTALLCLOB is intended for XML documents with a length of

up to 1 MB.
| DXXMQGEN
|
|
|
DXXMQGEN performs the following actions:
DXXMQGEN is intended for XML documents with a length of up to 3 KB.
| DXXMQRETRIEVE
|
|
|
DXXMQRETRIEVE performs the following actions:
|
|
DXXMQRETRIEVE is intended for XML documents with a length of up to 3

KB.
| DXXMQGENCLOB
|
|
|
DXXMQGENCLOB performs the following actions:
|
|
DXXMQGENCLOB is intended for XML documents with a length of up to

32 KB.
| DXXMQRETRIEVECLOB
|
|
|
DXXMQRETRIEVECLOB performs the following actions:
|
|
|
DXXMQRETRIEVECLOB is intended for XML documents with a length of

up to 32 KB.
v constructs XML documents from data that is stored in the DB2 tables that
are specified in a document access definition (DAD) file
v sends the XML documents to an MQ message queue
are specified in an enabled XML collection
are specified in a document access definition (DAD) file
are specified in an enabled XML collection
859
Related reference
DSNACCOX stored procedure on page 895
Related information
Creating DB2-supplied routines (DB2 Installation Guide)
Stored procedures for administration (DB2 Administration Guide)
DSNACICS (DB2 Application Programming and SQL Guide)
The DB2 EXPLAIN stored procedure (DB2 Application Programming and SQL
Guide)
DSNAIMS (DB2 Application Programming and SQL Guide)
DSNAIMS2 (DB2 Administration Guide)
DSNLEUSR (DB2 Administration Guide)
Enabling stored procedures for Java program preparation (DB2 Installation
Guide)
Creating an external SQL procedure by using DSNTPSMP (DB2 Application
Programming and SQL Guide)
GET_CONFIG (DB2 Administration Guide)
GET_MESSAGE (DB2 Administration Guide)
GET_SYSTEM_INFO (DB2 Administration Guide)
SQLJ.ALTER_JAVA_PATH (DB2 Application Programming Guide and Reference
for Java)
SQLJ.DB2_INSTALL_JAR (DB2 Application Programming Guide and Reference
for Java)
Defining Java routines and JAR files to DB2 (DB2 Application Programming
Guide and Reference for Java)
SQLJ.DB2_REPLACE_JAR (DB2 Application Programming Guide and Reference
for Java)
SQLJ.INSTALL_JAR (DB2 Application Programming Guide and Reference for
Java)
SQLJ.REMOVE_JAR (DB2 Application Programming Guide and Reference for
Java)
SQLJ.REPLACE_JAR (DB2 Application Programming Guide and Reference for
Java)
WLM_REFRESH (DB2 Application Programming and SQL Guide)
XDBDECOMPXML (DB2 Application Programming and SQL Guide)
XSR_ADDSCHEMADOC (DB2 Application Programming and SQL Guide)
XSR_COMPLETE (DB2 Application Programming and SQL Guide)
XSR_REGISTER (DB2 Application Programming and SQL Guide)
XSR_REMOVE (DB2 Application Programming and SQL Guide)
Source code for activating DB2-supplied stored procedures
DSNUTILS stored procedure

The DSNUTILS stored procedure enables you use the SQL CALL statement to
execute DB2 utilities from a DB2 application program that specifies EBCDIC input.
When called, DSNUTILS performs the following actions:
v Dynamically allocates the specified data sets
v Creates the utility input (SYSIN) stream
860
v Invokes DB2 utilities (program DSNUTILB)

v Deletes all the rows that are currently in the created temporary table
(SYSIBM.SYSPRINT)
v Captures the utility output stream (SYSPRINT) into a created temporary table
(SYSIBM.SYSPRINT)
v Declares a cursor to select from SYSPRINT:
DECLARE SYSPRINT CURSOR WITH RETURN FOR
SELECT SEQNO, TEXT FROM SYSPRINT
ORDER BY SEQNO;
v Opens the SYSPRINT cursor and returns.

The calling program then fetches from the returned result set to obtain the
captured utility output.
Environment for DSNUTILS

DSNUTILS must run in a WLM environment. TCB=1 is also required.
Authorization required for DSNUTILS

To execute the CALL statement, the owner of the package or plan that contains the
CALL statement must have one or more of the following privileges on each
package that the stored procedure uses:
v The EXECUTE privilege on the package for DSNUTILS
v Ownership of the package
v PACKADM authority for the package collection
v SYSADM authority
Then, to execute the utility, you must use a privilege set that includes the
authorization to run the specified utility.
Control statement for DSNUTILS

DSNUTILS dynamically allocates the specified data sets. Any utility that requires a
sort must include the SORTDEVT keyword in the utility control statement, and
optionally, the SORTNUM keyword.
If the DSNUTILS stored procedure invokes a new utility, refer to Table 159 for
information about the default data dispositions that are specified for dynamically
allocated data sets. This table lists the DD name that is used to identify the data
set and the default dispositions for the data set by utility.
Table 159. Data dispositions for dynamically allocated data sets
DD name
CHECK
DATA
CHECK
INDEX or
CHECK
LOB
COPY
COPYTOCOPY
SYSREC
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
SYSDISC
ignored
ignored
ignored
SYSPUNCH
ignored
ignored
ignored
REORG
TABLESPACE
MERGECOPY
REBUILD
INDEX
REORG
INDEX
OLD KEEP
KEEP
ignored
ignored
ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
NEW CATLG
CATLG
ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
ignored
ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
NEW CATLG
CATLG
LOAD
UNLOAD
861
Table 159. Data dispositions for dynamically allocated data sets (continued)
DD name
CHECK
DATA
CHECK
INDEX or
CHECK
LOB
SYSCOPY
ignored
ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
SYSCOPY2
ignored
ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
SYSRCPY1
ignored
ignored
SYSRCPY2
ignored
SYSUT1
REORG
TABLESPACE
LOAD
MERGECOPY
REBUILD
INDEX
REORG
INDEX
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
NEW
DELETE
CATLG
NEW
DELETE
CATLG
ignored
ignored
NEW
DELETE
CATLG
ignored
NEW
DELETE
CATLG
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
NEW
DELETE
CATLG
ignored
SORTOUT
NEW
DELETE
CATLG
ignored
ignored
ignored
NEW
DELETE
CATLG
ignored
ignored
ignored
NEW
DELETE
CATLG
ignored
SYSMAP
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
SYSERR
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
ignored
ignored
NEW
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
FILTER
ignored
ignored
NEW
DELETE
CATLG
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
COPY
COPYTOCOPY
UNLOAD
If the DSNUTILS stored procedure restarts a current utility, refer to Table 160 for
information about the default data dispositions that are specified for
dynamically-allocated data sets on RESTART. This table lists the DD name that is
used to identify the data set and the default dispositions for the data set by utility.
Table 160. Data dispositions for dynamically allocated data sets on RESTART
DD name
CHECK
DATA
CHECK
INDEX or
CHECK
LOB
COPY
COPYTOCOPY
SYSREC
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
SYSDISC
ignored
ignored
ignored
SYSPUNCH
ignored
ignored
SYSCOPY
ignored
SYSCOPY2
REORG
TABLESPACE
MERGECOPY
REBUILD
INDEX
REORG
INDEX
OLD
KEEP
KEEP
ignored
ignored
ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
MOD CATLG
CATLG
ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
ignored
ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
MOD CATLG
CATLG
ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
ignored
ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
SYSRCPY1
ignored
ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
SYSRCPY2
ignored
ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
862
LOAD
UNLOAD
Table 160. Data dispositions for dynamically allocated data sets on RESTART (continued)
CHECK
DATA
CHECK
INDEX or
CHECK
LOB
COPY
COPYTOCOPY
SYSUT1
MOD
DELETE
CATLG
MOD
DELETE
CATLG
ignored
ignored
SORTOUT
MOD
DELETE
CATLG
ignored
ignored
SYSMAP
ignored
ignored
SYSERR
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
FILTER
ignored
DD name
MERGECOPY
REBUILD
INDEX
REORG
INDEX
REORG
TABLESPACE
MOD
DELETE
CATLG
ignored
MOD
DELETE
CATLG
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
MOD
DELETE
CATLG
ignored
ignored
MOD
DELETE
CATLG
ignored
ignored
ignored
MOD
DELETE
CATLG
ignored
ignored
ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
MOD
CATLG
CATLG
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
MOD
DELETE
CATLG
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
ignored
LOAD
UNLOAD
DSNUTILS stored procedure syntax diagram

The following syntax diagram shows the SQL CALL statement for invoking
utilities as a stored procedure. Because the linkage convention for DSNUTILS is
GENERAL, you cannot pass null values for input parameters. For character
parameters that you are not using, specify an empty string ().
CALL DSNUTILS (
utility-id,restart,utstmt,retcode , utility-name
,recdsn,recdevt,recspace ,discdsn,discdevt,discspace ,pnchdsn,pnchdevt,pnchspace
,copydsn1,copydevt1,copyspace1 ,copydsn2,copydevt2,copyspace2 ,rcpydsn1,rcpydevt1,rcpyspace1
,rcpydsn2,rcpydevt2,rcpyspace2 ,workdsn1,workdevt1,workspace1 ,workdsn2,workdevt2,workspace2
,mapdsn,mapdevt,mapspace ,errdsn,errdevt,errspace ,filtrdsn,filtrdevt,filtrspace )
DSNUTILS option descriptions

utility-id
Specifies a unique identifier for this utility within DB2.
This is an input parameter of type VARCHAR(16) in EBCDIC.
restart
Specifies whether DB2 is to restart a current utility, and, if so, at what point the
utility is to be restarted.
restart is an input parameter of type VARCHAR(8) in Unicode UTF-8, which
must be translatable to allowable EBCDIC characters. Specify one of the
following values for this parameter:
NO or null
Indicates that the utility job is new, not a restart. No other utility with the
same utility identifier (UID) can exist.
The default is null.
863
CURRENT
Restarts the utility at the last commit point.
PHASE
Restarts the utility at the beginning of the currently stopped phase. Use the
DISPLAY UTILITY to determine the currently stopped phase.
PREVIEW
Executes in PREVIEW mode the utility control statements that follow.
While in PREVIEW mode, DB2 parses all utility control statements for
syntax errors, but normal utility execution does not take place. If the
syntax is valid, DB2 expands all LISTDEF lists and TEMPLATE data set
name expressions that appear in SYSIN and prints the results to the
SYSPRINT data set. DB2 evaluates and expands all LISTDEF definitions
into an actual list of table spaces or index spaces. DB2 also evaluates
TEMPLATE data set name expressions into actual data set names through
variable substitution. DB2 also expands lists from the SYSLISTD DD and
TEMPLATE data set name expressions from the SYSTEMPL DD that is
referenced by a utility invocation.
Absence of the PREVIEW keyword turns off preview processing with one
exception. The absence of this keyword does not override the PREVIEW
JCL parameter which, if specified, remains in effect for the entire job step.
This option is identical to the PREVIEW JCL parameter.
utstmt
Specifies the utility control statements.
retcode
Specifies the utility highest return code.
This is an output parameter of type INTEGER.
utility-name
Specifies the utility that you want to invoke.
Because DSNUTILS allows only a single utility here, dynamic support of data
set allocation is limited. Specify only a single utility that requires data set
allocation in the utstmt parameter.
Select the utility name from the following list:
ANY1
CHECK DATA
CHECK INDEX
CHECK LOB
COPY
COPYTOCOPY
DIAGNOSE
LOAD
MERGECOPY
MODIFY RECOVERY
1. Use ANY to indicate that TEMPLATE dynamic allocation is to be used. This value suppresses the dynamic allocation that is
normally performed by DSNUTILS.
864
MODIFY STATISTICS
QUIESCE
REBUILD INDEX
RECOVER
REORG INDEX
REORG LOB
REORG TABLESPACE
REPAIR
REPORT RECOVERY
REPORT TABLESPACESET
RUNSTATS INDEX
RUNSTATS TABLESPACE
STOSPACE
UNLOAD
Recommendation: Invoke DSNUTILS with a utility-name of ANY and omit all
of the xxxdsn, xxxdevt, and xxxspace parameters. Use TEMPLATE statements
to allocate the data sets.
recdsn
Specifies the cataloged data set name that is required by LOAD for input, or
by REORG TABLESPACE as the unload data set. recdsn is required for LOAD.
It is also required for REORG TABLESPACE unless you also specified
NOSYSREC or SHRLEVEL CHANGE. If you specify recdsn, the data set is
allocated to the SYSREC DD name.
If you specified the INDDN parameter for LOAD, the specified ddname value
must be SYSREC.
If you specify the UNLDDN parameter for REORG TABLESPACE, the
specified ddname value must be SYSREC.
recdevt
Specifies a unit address, a generic device type, or a user-assigned group name
for a device on which the recdsn data set resides.
This is an input parameter of type CHAR(8) in EBCDIC.
recspace
Specifies the number of cylinders to use as the primary space allocation for the
recdsn data set. The secondary space allocation is 10% of the primary space
allocation.
This is an input parameter of type SMALLINT.
discdsn
Specifies the cataloged data set name that is used by LOAD as a discard data
set to hold records not loaded, and by REORG TABLESPACE as a discard data
set to hold records that are not reloaded. If you specify discdsn, the data set is
allocated to the SYSDISC DD name.
If you specify the DISCARDDN parameter for LOAD or REORG
TABLESPACE, the specified ddname value must be SYSDISC.
865
discdevt
for a device on which the discdsn data set resides.
discspace
discdsn data set. The secondary space allocation is 10% of the primary space
allocation.
pnchdsn
Specifies the cataloged data set name that REORG TABLESPACE UNLOAD
EXTERNAL or REORG TABLESPACE DISCARD uses to hold the generated
LOAD utility control statements. If you specify a value for pnchdsn, the data set
is allocated to the SYSPUNCH DD name.
If you specify the PUNCHDDN parameter for REORG TABLESPACE, the
specified ddname value must be SYSPUNCH.
pnchdevt
for a device on which the pnchdsn data set resides.
pnchspace
pnchdsn data set. The secondary space allocation is 10% of the primary space
allocation.
copydsn1
Specifies the name of the required target (output) data set, which is needed
when you specify the COPY, COPYTOCOPY, or MERGECOPY utilities. It is
optional for LOAD and REORG TABLESPACE. If you specify copydsn1, the
data set is allocated to the SYSCOPY DD name.
If you specify the COPYDDN parameter for COPY, COPYTOCOPY,
MERGECOPY, LOAD, or REORG TABLESPACE, the specified ddname1 value
must be SYSCOPY.
copydevt1
for a device on which the copydsn1 data set resides.
copyspace1
copydsn1 data set. The secondary space allocation is 10% of the primary space
allocation.
copydsn2
Specifies the name of the cataloged data set that is used as a target (output)
data set for the backup copy. It is optional for COPY, COPYTOCOPY,
866
MERGECOPY, LOAD, and REORG TABLESPACE. If you specify copydsn2, the

data set is allocated to the SYSCOPY2 DD name.
If you specify the COPYDDN parameter for COPY, COPYTOCOPY,
must be SYSCOPY2.
copydevt2
for a device on which the copydsn2 data set resides.
copyspace2
copydsn2 data set. The secondary space allocation is 10% of the primary space
allocation.
rcpydsn1
Specifies the name of the cataloged data set that is required as a target (output)
data set for the remote site primary copy. It is optional for COPY,
COPYTOCOPY, LOAD, and REORG TABLESPACE. If you specifyrcpydsn1, the
data set is allocated to the SYSRCPY1 DD name.
If you specified the RECOVERYDDN parameter for COPY, COPYTOCOPY,
must be SYSRCPY1.
rcpydevt1
for a device on which the rcpydsn1 data set resides.
rcpyspace1
rcpydsn1 data set. The secondary space allocation is 10% of the primary space
allocation.
rcpydsn2
Specifies the name of the cataloged data set that is required as a target (output)
data set for the remote site backup copy. It is optional for COPY,
COPYTOCOPY, LOAD, and REORG TABLESPACE. If you specify rcpydsn2, the
data set is allocated to the SYSRCPY2 DD name.
If you specify the RECOVERYDDN parameter for COPY, COPYTOCOPY,
must be SYSRCPY2.
rcpydevt2
for a device on which the rcpydsn2 data set resides.
867
rcpyspace2
rcpydsn2 data set. The secondary space allocation is 10% of the primary space
allocation
workdsn1
Specifies the name of the cataloged data set that is required as a work data set
for sort input and output. It is required for CHECK DATA, CHECK INDEX
and REORG INDEX. It is also required for LOAD and REORG TABLESPACE
unless you also specify the SORTKEYS keyword. It is optional for REBUILD
INDEX. If you specify workdsn1, the data set is allocated to the SYSUT1 DD
name.
If you specify the WORKDDN parameter for CHECK DATA, CHECK INDEX,
LOAD, REORG INDEX, REORG TABLESPACE, or REBUILD INDEX, the
specified ddname value must be SYSUT1.
workdevt1
for a device on which the workdsn1 data set resides.
workspace1
workdsn1 data set. The secondary space allocation is 10% of the primary space
allocation.
workdsn2
for sort input and output. It is required for CHECK DATA. It is also required if
you use REORG INDEX to reorganize non-unique type 1 indexes. It is required
for LOAD or REORG TABLESPACE unless you also specify the SORTKEYS
keyword. If you specify workdsn2, the data set is allocated to the SORTOUT
DD name.
If you specify the WORKDDN parameter for CHECK DATA, LOAD, REORG
INDEX, or REORG TABLESPACE, the specified ddname value must be
SORTOUT.
workdevt2
for a device on which the workdsn2 data set resides.
workspace2
workdsn2 data set. The secondary space allocation is 10% of the primary space
allocation.
mapdsn
868
for error processing during LOAD with ENFORCE CONSTRAINTS. It is

optional for LOAD. If you specify mapdsn, the data set is allocated to the
SYSMAP DD name.
If you specify the MAPDDN parameter for LOAD, the specified ddname value
must be SYSMAP.
mapdevt
for a device on which the mapdsn data set resides.
This is an input parameter of type CHAR(8).
mapspace
mapdsn data set. The secondary space allocation is 10% of the primary space
allocation.
errdsn
for error processing. It is required for CHECK DATA, and it is optional for
LOAD. If you specify errdsn, the data set is allocated to the SYSERR DD name.
If you specify the ERRDDN parameter for CHECK DATA or LOAD, the
specified ddname value must be SYSERR.
errdevt
for a device on which the errdsn data set resides.
errspace
errdsn data set. The secondary space allocation is 10% of the primary space
allocation.
filtrdsn
for error processing. It is optional for COPY CONCURRENT. If you specify
filtrdsn, the data set is allocated to the FILTER DD name.
If you specify the FILTERDDN parameter for COPY, the specified ddname value
must be FILTER.
filtrdevt
for a device on which the filtrdsn data set resides.
filtrspace
filtrdsn data set. The secondary space allocation is 10% of the primary space
allocation.
869

|
Restarting a utility with DSNUTILS
|
|
|
|
When restarting a utility with DSNUTILS, use the TEMPLATE utility and specify
the utility name ANY to dynamically allocate datasets. When TEMPLATE is used,
the utility will attempt to close and deallocate the dataset. However, under some
circumstances, the utility is unable to deallocate the dataset.
|
|
|
|
|
When a utility is unable to deallocate the dataset, we recommend that you use the
TERM UTIL command to terminate the failing utility, then issue one of the
following commands.
v VARY, such as VARY WLM,APPLENV=xxx,REFRESH
v WLM_REFRESH
|
|
|
|
|
|
However, if you plan to use the RESTART UTILITY when there is a failure, the
TERM UTIL will terminate the utility and the WLM REFRESH may cause datasets
needed for restart to be deleted. To ensure that you can restart, specify DISP of
NEW,CATLG,CATLG on your template, and do not terminate the utility when you
do the WLM REFRESH. You will need to clean up the allocated datasets manually
after the utility is finished running.
Modifying the WLM-established address space for DSNUTILS

Add DSSPRINT, SYSIN, and SYSPRINT to the JCL procedure for starting the
WLM-established address space in which DSNUTILS runs.
Requirement: You must allocate SYSIN and SYSPRINT in the procedure to
temporarily store utility input statements and utility output messages. If you plan
to invoke RUNSTATS and collect distribution statistics, you also need to allocate
RNPRIN01.
Use JCL similar to the following sample PROC:
//*************************************************************
//*
JCL FOR RUNNING THE WLM-ESTABLISHED STORED PROCEDURES
//*
ADDRESS SPACE
//*
RGN
-- THE MVS REGION SIZE FOR THE ADDRESS SPACE.
//*
DB2SSN -- THE DB2 SUBSYSTEM NAME.
//*
APPLENV -- THE MVS WLM APPLICATION ENVIRONMENT
//*
SUPPORTED BY THIS JCL PROCEDURE.
//*
//*
IMPORTANT: You must use the value 1 in this EXEC card:
//*
IEFPROC EXEC PGM=DSNX9WLM,REGION=&RGN,TIME=NOLIMIT,
//*
PARM='&DB2SSN,1,&APPLENV'
//*
//*************************************************************
//DSNWLM
PROC RGN=0K,APPLENV=WLMENV1,DB2SSN=DSN
//IEFPROC EXEC PGM=DSNX9WLM,REGION=&RGN,TIME=NOLIMIT,
//
//STEPLIB DD DISP=SHR,DSN=CEE.V!R!M!.SCEERUN
//
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=DSN!!0.SDSNLOAD
//RNPRIN01 DD SYSOUT=*
//DSSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
//SYSIN
//SYSPRINT DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(4000,(20,20),,,ROUND)
870
Sample program for calling DSNUTILS

Three example programs calling DSNUTILS are shipped in SDSNSAMP.
v DSNTEJ6U: A DSNUTILS caller that uses PL/I. Job DSNTEJ6U compiles,
link-edits, binds, and runs sample PL/I program DSN8EPU, which invokes the
DSNUTILS stored procedure to execute an utility.
v DSNTEJ6V: A DSNUTILS caller that uses C++. Job DSNTEJ6V compiles,
link-edits, binds, and runs sample C++ program DSN8EE1, which invokes the
DSNUTILS stored procedure to execute an utility.
v DSNTEJ80: A DSNUTILS caller that uses C and ODBC. You can use this sample
to compile, pre-link, link-edit, and execute the sample application DSN8OIVP,
which you can use to verify that your DB2 ODBC installation is correct.
DSNUTILS output
DB2 creates the result set according to the DECLARE statement that is shown
under Example of declaring a cursor to select from SYSPRINT.
Output from a successful execution of the DSNTEJ6U sample job or an equivalent
job lists the specified parameters followed by the messages that are generated by
the DB2 DIAGNOSE DISPLAY MEPL utility.
If DSNUTILB abends, the abend codes are returned as DSNUTILS return codes.
DSNUTILU stored procedure

The DSNUTILU stored procedure enables you to provide control statements in
Unicode UTF-8 characters instead of EBCDIC characters to execute DB2 utilities
from a DB2 application program.
To use the stored procedure DSNUTILU, input data sets for the utility control
statements can begin with the following Unicode characters:
v A Unicode UTF-8 blank (X20)
v A Unicode UTF-8 dash (X2D)
v Upper case Unicode UTF-8 A through Z (X41 through X5A)
When called, DSNUTILU performs the following actions:
v Translates the values that are specified for utility-id and restart to EBCDIC
v Creates the utility input (SYSIN) stream for control statements that use Unicode
characters
v Invokes DB2 utilities (Program DSNUTILB)
v Deletes all the rows that are currently in the created temporary table
(SYSIBM.SYSPRINT)
v Captures the utility output stream (SYSPRINT) into a created temporary table
(SYSIBM.SYSPRINT)
v Declares a cursor to select from SYSPRINT:
DECLARE SYSPRINT CURSOR WITH RETURN FOR
SELECT SEQNO, TEXT FROM SYSPRINT
ORDER BY SEQNO;
v Opens the SYSPRINT cursor and returns

The calling program then performs fetches from the returned result set to obtain
the captured utility output.
871
The BIND PACKAGE statement for the DSNUTILU stored procedure determines
the character set of the resulting utility SYSPRINT output that is placed in the
SYSIBM.SYSPRINT table. If ENCODING(EBCDIC) is specified, the SYSPRINT
contents are in EBCDIC. If ENCODING(UNICODE) is specified, the SYSPRINT
contents are in Unicode. The default install job, DSNTIJSG, is shipped with
ENCODING(EBCDIC).
Environment for DSNUTILU

DSNUTILU must run in a WLM environment. TCB=1 is also required.
Authorization required for DSNUTILU

To execute the CALL statement, the owner of the package or plan that contains the
CALL statement must have one or more of the following privileges on each
package that the stored procedure uses:
v The EXECUTE privilege on the package for DSNUTILU
v SYSADM authority
Then, to execute the utility, you must use a privilege set that includes the
authorization to run the specified utility.
Control statement for DSNUTILU

DSNUTILU does not dynamically allocate data sets. The TEMPLATE utility control
statement must be used to dynamically allocate data sets. Any utility that requires
a sort must include the SORTDEVT keyword in the utility control statement. Use
of the SORTNUM keyword is optional.
DSNUTILU stored procedure syntax diagram

The following syntax diagram shows the SQL CALL statement for invoking
utilities as a stored procedure.
CALL DSNUTILU ( utility-id,restart,utstmt,retcode )
DSNUTILU option descriptions

utility-id
Specifies a unique identifier for this utility within DB2.
This is an input parameter of type VARCHAR(16) in Unicode UTF-8, which
must be translatable to the following allowable EBCDIC characters:
v A - Z (upper and lower case)
v 0-9
v #, $, @, , !, ^, or period (.)
restart
Specifies whether DB2 is to restart a current utility, and, if so, at what point the
utility is to be restarted.
872
restart is an input parameter of type VARCHAR(8) in Unicode UTF-8, which

must be translatable to allowable EBCDIC characters. Specify one of the
following values for this parameter:
NO or null
Indicates that the utility job is new, not a restart. No other utility with the
same utility identifier (UID) can exist.
The default is null.
CURRENT
Restarts the utility at the last commit point.
PHASE
Restarts the utility at the beginning of the currently stopped phase. Use the
DISPLAY UTILITY to determine the currently stopped phase.
PREVIEW
Executes in PREVIEW mode the utility control statements that follow.
While in PREVIEW mode, DB2 parses all utility control statements for
syntax errors, but normal utility execution does not take place. If the
syntax is valid, DB2 expands all LISTDEF lists and TEMPLATE data set
name expressions that appear in SYSIN and prints the results to the
SYSPRINT data set. DB2 evaluates and expands all LISTDEFs into an
actual list of table spaces or index spaces. DB2 also evaluates TEMPLATE
data set name expressions into actual data set names through variable
substitution. DB2 also expands lists from the SYSLISTD DD and
TEMPLATE data set name expressions from the SYSTEMPL DD that is
referenced by a utility invocation.
Absence of the PREVIEW keyword turns off preview processing with one
exception. The absence of this keyword does not override the PREVIEW
JCL parameter which, if specified, remains in effect for the entire job step.
This option is identical to the PREVIEW JCL parameter.
utstmt
Specifies the utility control statements.
utstmt is an input parameter of type VARCHAR(32704) in UNICODE UTF-8.
retcode
Specifies the utility highest return code.
retcode is an output parameter of type INTEGER.
Modifying the WLM-established address space for DSNUTILU

Add DSSPRINT, SYSIN, and SYSPRINT to the JCL procedure for starting the
WLM-established address space, in which DSNUTILU runs. You must allocate
SYSIN and SYSPRINT in the procedure to temporarily store utility input
statements and utility output messages. If you plan to invoke RUNSTATS and
collect distribution statistics, you also need to allocate RNPRIN01.
Use JCL similar to the following sample PROC .
//*************************************************************
//*
JCL FOR RUNNING THE WLM-ESTABLISHED STORED PROCEDURES
//*
ADDRESS SPACE
//*
RGN
-- THE MVS REGION SIZE FOR THE ADDRESS SPACE.
//*
DB2SSN -- THE DB2 SUBSYSTEM NAME.
//*
APPLENV -- THE MVS WLM APPLICATION ENVIRONMENT
//*
SUPPORTED BY THIS JCL PROCEDURE.
873
//*
//*************************************************************
//DSNWLM
PROC RGN=0K,APPLENV=WLMENV1,DB2SSN=DSN
//IEFPROC EXEC PGM=DSNX9WLM,REGION=&RGN,TIME=NOLIMIT,
//
//STEPLIB DD DISP=SHR,DSN=CEE.V!R!M!.SCEERUN
//
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=DSN!!0.SDSNLOAD
//RNPRIN01 DD SYSOUT=*//DSSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
//SYSIN
//SYSPRINT DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(4000,(20,20),,,ROUND)
Restarting a utility with DSNUTILU
|
|
|
|
|
When a utility is unable to deallocate the dataset, we recommend that you use the
TERM UTIL command to terminate the failing utility, then issue one of the
following commands.
|
|
|
|
|
|
However, if you plan to use the RESTART UTILITY when there is a failure, the
TERM UTIL will terminate the utility and the WLM REFRESH may cause datasets
needed for restart to be deleted. To ensure that you can restart, specify DISP of
NEW,CATLG,CATLG on your template, and do not terminate the utility when you
do the WLM REFRESH. You will need to clean up the allocated datasets manually
after the utility is finished running.
v VARY, such as VARY WLM,APPLENV=xxx,REFRESH

v WLM_REFRESH
Sample program for calling DSNUTILU

The following sample program calls DSNUTILU and is shipped in SDSNSAMP:
DSNTEJ6R - A DSNUTILU caller using PL/I. Job DSNTEJ6R compiles,
link-edits, binds, and runs sample C-language caller program DSN8ED8, which
invokes the DSNUTILU stored procedure to execute a utility.
DSNUTILU output
DB2 creates the result set according to the DECLARE statement shown on Example
of declaring a cursor to select from SYSPRINT
Output from a successful execution of the DSNTEJ6R sample job or an equivalent
job lists the specified parameters, followed by the messages that are generated by
the DB2 DIAGNOSE DISPLAY MEPL utility.
DSNACCOR stored procedure

The DB2 real-time statistics stored procedure (DSNACCOR) is a sample stored
procedure that makes recommendations to help you maintain your DB2 databases.
The DSNACCOX stored procedure replaces the DSNACCOR stored procedure and
provides improved recommendations. If you have migrated your real-time
statistics to the DB2 catalog, or DB2 is running in DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS
new-function mode or later, you can use the DSNACCOX stored procedure to take
advantage of enhancements, including new fields, improved formulas, and the
option to select the formula that is used for making recommendations.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PSPI
In particular, DSNACCOR performs the following actions:
874
|
|
|
|
|
v Recommends when you should reorganize, image copy, or update statistics for
table spaces or index spaces
v Indicates when a data set has exceeded a specified threshold for the number of
extents that it occupies.
v Indicates whether objects are in a restricted state
DSNACCOR uses data from the SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACESTATS and
SYSIBM.SYSSYSINDEXSPACESTATS real-time statistics tables to make its
recommendations. DSNACCOR provides its recommendations in a result set.
DSNACCOR uses the set of criteria that are shown in DSNACCOR formulas for
recommending actions on page 884 to evaluate table spaces and index spaces. By
default, DSNACCOR evaluates all table spaces and index spaces in the subsystem
that have entries in the real-time statistics tables. However, you can override this
default through input parameters.
Important information about DSNACCOR recommendations:
v DSNACCOR makes recommendations based on general formulas that require
input from the user about the maintenance policies for a subsystem. These
recommendations might not be accurate for every installation.
v If the real-time statistics tables contain information for only a small percentage
of your DB2 subsystem, the recommendations that DSNACCOR makes might
not be accurate for the entire subsystem.
v Before you perform any action that DSNACCOR recommends, ensure that the
object for which DSNACCOR makes the recommendation is available, and that
the recommended action can be performed on that object. For example, before
you can perform an image copy on an index, the index must have the COPY
YES attribute.
Environment
DSNACCOR must run in a WLM-established stored procedure address space.
You should bind the package for DSNACCOR with isolation UR to avoid lock
contention. You can find the installation steps for DSNACCOR in job DSNTIJSG.
To execute the CALL DSNACCOR statement, the owner of the package or plan
that contains the CALL statement must have one or more of the following
privileges on each package that the stored procedure uses:
v
v
v
v
The EXECUTE privilege on the package for DSNACCOR

Ownership of the package
PACKADM authority for the package collection
SYSADM authority
The owner of the package or plan that contains the CALL statement must also
have:
v SELECT authority on the real-time statistics tables
v Select authority on catalog tables
v The DISPLAY system privilege
875
Syntax diagram
The following syntax diagram shows the CALL statement for invoking
DSNACCOR. Because the linkage convention for DSNACCOR is GENERAL WITH
NULLS, if you pass parameters in host variables, you need to include a null
indicator with every host variable. Null indicators for input host variables must be
initialized before you execute the CALL statement.
CALL DSNACCOR (
CatlgSchema
NULL
CRUpdatedPagesPct
NULL
ICRChangesPct
NULL
RRTDisorgLOBPct
NULL
RRIAppendInsertPct
NULL
RRINumLevelsLimit
NULL
SRIInsDelUpdPct
NULL
QueryType
NULL
ObjectType
NULL
LocalSchema
NULL
ChkLvl
NULL
CRChangesPct
NULL
CRIndexSize
NULL
,
SRTInsDelUpdPct
NULL
Restricted
NULL
,
SRTInsDelUpdAbs
NULL
RRILeafLimit
NULL
SRTMassDelLimit
NULL
ExtentLimit
NULL
RRIInsertDeletePct
NULL
RRIMassDelLimit
NULL
SRIMassDelLimit
NULL
ICRUpdatedPagesPct
NULL
RRTUnclustInsPct
NULL
RRTIndRefLimit
NULL
StatsSchema
NULL
CRDaySncLastCopy
NULL
RRIPseudoDeletePct
NULL
SRIInsDelUpdAbs
NULL
ICType
NULL
Criteria
NULL
RRTInsDelUpdPct
NULL
RRTMassDelLimit
NULL
LastStatement, ReturnCode, ErrorMsg, IFCARetCode, IFCAResCode, ExcessBytes )
Option descriptions
In the following option descriptions, the default value for an input parameter is
the value that DSNACCOR uses if you specify a null value.
QueryType
Specifies the types of actions that DSNACCOR recommends. This field
contains one or more of the following values. Each value is enclosed in single
quotation marks and separated from other values by a space.
ALL
Makes recommendations for all of the following actions.
COPY Makes a recommendation on whether to perform an image copy.

RUNSTATS
Makes a recommendation on whether to perform RUNSTATS.
REORG
Makes a recommendation on whether to perform REORG. Choosing
this value causes DSNACCOR to process the EXTENTS value also.
EXTENTS
Indicates when data sets have exceeded a user-specified extents limit.
876
RESTRICT
Indicates which objects are in a restricted state.
QueryType is an input parameter of type VARCHAR(40). The default is ALL.
ObjectType
Specifies the types of objects for which DSNACCOR recommends actions:
ALL
Table spaces and index spaces.
TS
Table spaces only.
IX
Index spaces only.
ObjectType is an input parameter of type VARCHAR(3). The default is ALL.

ICType
Specifies the types of image copies for which DSNACCOR is to make
recommendations:
F
Full image copy.
Incremental image copy. This value is valid for table spaces only.
Full image copy or incremental image copy.
ICType is an input parameter of type VARCHAR(1). The default is B.

StatsSchema
Specifies the qualifier for the real-time statistics table names. StatsSchema is an
input parameter of type VARCHAR(128). The default is SYSIBM.
CatlgSchema
Specifies the qualifier for DB2 catalog table names. CatlgSchema is an input
parameter of type VARCHAR(128). The default is SYSIBM.
LocalSchema
Specifies the qualifier for the names of tables that DSNACCOR creates.
LocalSchema is an input parameter of type VARCHAR(128). The default is
DSNACC.
ChkLvl
Specifies the types of checking that DSNACCOR performs, and indicates
whether to include objects that fail those checks in the DSNACCOR
recommendations result set. This value is the sum of any combination of the
following values:
0
DSNACCOR performs none of the following actions.
For objects that are listed in the recommendations result set, check the
SYSTABLESPACE or SYSINDEXES catalog tables to ensure that those
objects have not been deleted. If value 16 is not also chosen, exclude
rows for the deleted objects from the recommendations result set.
DSNACCOR excludes objects from the recommendations result set if
those objects are not in the SYSTABLESPACE or SYSINDEXES catalog
tables.
|
|
|
When this setting is specified, DSNACCOR does not use

EXTENTS>ExtentLimit to determine whether a LOB table space should
be reorganized.
2
For index spaces that are listed in the recommendations result set,
check the SYSTABLES, SYSTABLESPACE, and SYSINDEXES catalog
tables to determine the name of the table space that is associated with
each index space.
877
Choosing this value causes DSNACCOR to also check for rows in the
recommendations result set for objects that have been deleted but have
entries in the real-time statistics tables (value 1). This means that if
value 16 is not also chosen, rows for deleted objects are excluded from
the recommendations result set.
4
Check whether rows that are in the DSNACCOR recommendations

result set refer to objects that are in the exception table. For
recommendations result set rows that have corresponding exception
table rows, copy the contents of the QUERYTYPE column of the
exception table to the INEXCEPTTABLE column of the
recommendations result set.
Check whether objects that have rows in the recommendations result

set are restricted. Indicate the restricted status in the OBJECTSTATUS
column of the result set.
16
objects have not been deleted (value 1). In result set rows for deleted
objects, specify the word ORPHANED in the OBJECTSTATUS column.
32
Exclude rows from the DSNACCOR recommendations result set for

index spaces for which the related table spaces have been
recommended for REORG. Choosing this value causes DSNACCOR to
perform the actions for values 1 and 2.
64
For index spaces that are listed in the DSNACCOR recommendations

result set, check whether the related table spaces are listed in the
exception table. For recommendations result set rows that have
corresponding exception table rows, copy the contents of the
QUERYTYPE column of the exception table to the INEXCEPTTABLE
column of the recommendations result set.
ChkLvl is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 7 (values

1+2+4).
Criteria
Narrows the set of objects for which DSNACCOR makes recommendations.
This value is the search condition of an SQL WHERE clause. Criteria is an
input parameter of type VARCHAR(4096). The default is that DSNACCOR
makes recommendations for all table spaces and index spaces in the
subsystem. The search condition can use any column in the result set and
wildcards are allowed.
Restricted
A parameter that is reserved for future use. Specify the null value for this
parameter. Restricted is an input parameter of type VARCHAR(80).
CRUpdatedPagesPct
Specifies a criterion for recommending a full image copy on a table space or
index space. If the following condition is true for a table space, DSNACCOR
recommends an image copy:
The total number of distinct updated pages, divided by the total number of
preformatted pages (expressed as a percentage) is greater than
CRUpdatedPagesPct.
See item 2 in Figure 148 on page 884. If both of the following conditions are
true for an index space, DSNACCOR recommends an image copy:
878
v The total number of distinct updated pages, divided by the total number of
CRUpdatedPagesPct.
v The number of active pages in the index space or partition is greater than
CRIndexSize. See items 2 and 3 in Figure 149 on page 885.
CRUpdatedPagesPct is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 20.
CRChangesPct
The total number of insert, update, and delete operations since the last
image copy, divided by the total number of rows or LOBs in a table space
or partition (expressed as a percentage) is greater than CRChangesPct.
true for an index table space, DSNACCOR recommends an image copy:
v The total number of insert and delete operations since the last image copy,
divided by the total number of entries in the index space or partition
(expressed as a percentage) is greater than CRChangesPct.
CRIndexSize.
See items 2 and 4 in Figure 149 on page 885. CRChangesPct is an input
parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 10.
CRDaySncLastCopy
index space. If the number of days since the last image copy is greater than
this value, DSNACCOR recommends an image copy. (See item 1 in Figure 148
on page 884 and item 1 in Figure 149 on page 885.) CRDaySncLastCopy is an
input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 7.
ICRUpdatedPagesPct
Specifies a criterion for recommending an incremental image copy on a table
space. If the following condition is true, DSNACCOR recommends an
incremental image copy:
The number of distinct pages that were updated since the last image copy,
divided by the total number of active pages in the table space or partition
(expressed as a percentage) is greater than CRUpdatedPagesPct.
(See item 1 in Figure 150 on page 885.) ICRUpdatedPagesPct is an input
ICRChangesPct
The ratio of the number of insert, update, or delete operations since the last
image copy, to the total number of rows or LOBs in a table space or
partition (expressed as a percentage) is greater than ICRChangesPct.
(See item 2 in Figure 150 on page 885.) ICRChangesPct is an input parameter of
type INTEGER. The default is 1.
CRIndexSize
Specifies, when combined with CRUpdatedPagesPct or CRChangesPct, a criterion
879
for recommending a full image copy on an index space. (See items 2, 3, and 4
in Figure 149 on page 885.) CRIndexSize is an input parameter of type
INTEGER. The default is 50.
RRTInsDelUpdPct
Specifies a criterion for recommending that the REORG utility is to be run on a
table space. If the following condition is true, DSNACCOR recommends
running REORG:
The sum of insert, update, and delete operations since the last REORG,
divided by the total number of rows or LOBs in the table space or partition
(expressed as a percentage) is greater than RRTInsDelUpdPct
(See item 1 in Figure 151 on page 885.) RRTInsDelUpdPct is an input parameter
of type INTEGER. The default is 20.
RRTUnclustInsPct
running REORG:
The number of unclustered insert operations, divided by the total number
of rows or LOBs in the table space or partition (expressed as a percentage)
is greater than RRTUnclustInsPct.
(See item 2 in Figure 151 on page 885.) RRTUnclustInsPct is an input parameter
RRTDisorgLOBPct
running REORG:
The number of imperfectly chunked LOBs, divided by the total number of
rows or LOBs in the table space or partition (expressed as a percentage) is
greater than RRTDisorgLOBPct.
(See item 3 in Figure 151 on page 885.) RRTDisorgLOBPct is an input parameter
RRTMassDelLimit
table space. If one of the following values is greater than RRTMassDelLimit,
DSNACCOR recommends running REORG:
v The number of mass deletes from a segmented or LOB table space since the
last REORG or LOAD REPLACE
v The number of dropped tables from a nonsegmented table space since the
(See item 5 in Figure 151 on page 885.) RRTMassDelLimit is an input parameter
RRTIndRefLimit
table space. If the following value is greater than RRTIndRefLimit, DSNACCOR
recommends running REORG:
The total number of overflow records that were created since the last
REORG or LOAD REPLACE, divided by the total number of rows or LOBs
in the table space or partition (expressed as a percentage)
(See item 4 in Figure 151 on page 885.) RRTIndRefLimit is an input parameter of
880
RRIInsertDeletePct
Specifies a criterion for recommending that the REORG utility is to be run on
an index space. If the following value is greater than RRIInsertDeletePct,
The sum of the number of index entries that were inserted and deleted
since the last REORG, divided by the total number of index entries in the
index space or partition (expressed as a percentage)
(See item 1 in Figure 152 on page 886.) This is an input parameter of type
RRIAppendInsertPct
an index space. If the following value is greater than RRIAppendInsertPct,
The number of index entries that were inserted since the last REORG,
REBUILD INDEX, or LOAD REPLACE with a key value greater than the
maximum key value in the index space or partition, divided by the number
of index entries in the index space or partition (expressed as a percentage)
(See item 2 in Figure 152 on page 886.) RRIInsertDeletePct is an input parameter
RRIPseudoDeletePct
an index space. If the following value is greater than RRIPseudoDeletePct,
The number of index entries that were pseudo-deleted since the last
REORG, REBUILD INDEX, or LOAD REPLACE, divided by the number of
index entries in the index space or partition (expressed as a percentage)
(See item 3 in Figure 152 on page 886.) RRIPseudoDeletePct is an input
RRIMassDelLimit
an index space. If the number of mass deletes from an index space or partition
since the last REORG, REBUILD, or LOAD REPLACE is greater than this
value, DSNACCOR recommends running REORG.
(See item 4 in Figure 152 on page 886.) RRIMassDelLimit is an input parameter
RRILeafLimit
an index space. If the following value is greater than RRILeafLimit,
The number of index page splits that occurred since the last REORG,
REBUILD INDEX, or LOAD REPLACE that resulted in a large separation
between the parts of the original page, divided by the total number of
active pages in the index space or partition (expressed as a percentage)
(See item 5 in Figure 152 on page 886.) RRILeafLimit is an input parameter of
RRINumLevelsLimit
an index space. If the following value is greater than RRINumLevelsLimit,
881
The number of levels in the index tree that were added or removed since
the last REORG, REBUILD INDEX, or LOAD REPLACE
(See item 6 in Figure 152 on page 886.) RRINumLevelsLimit is an input
SRTInsDelUpdPct
Specifies, when combined with SRTInsDelUpdAbs, a criterion for
recommending that the RUNSTATS utility is to be run on a table space. If both
of the following conditions are true, DSNACCOR recommends running
RUNSTATS:
v The number of insert, update, or delete operations since the last RUNSTATS
on a table space or partition, divided by the total number of rows or LOBs
in table space or partition (expressed as a percentage) is greater than
SRTInsDelUpdPct.
v The sum of the number of inserted and deleted index entries since the last
RUNSTATS on an index space or partition is greater than SRTInsDelUpdAbs.
(See items 1 and 2 in Figure 153 on page 886.) SRTInsDelUpdPct is an input
SRTInsDelUpdAbs
Specifies, when combined with SRTInsDelUpdPct, a criterion for recommending
that the RUNSTATS utility is to be run on a table space. If both of the
following conditions are true, DSNACCOR recommends running RUNSTATS:
v The number of insert, update, and delete operations since the last
RUNSTATS on a table space or partition, divided by the total number of
rows or LOBs in table space or partition (expressed as a percentage) is
greater than SRTInsDelUpdPct.
(See items 1 and 2 in Figure 153 on page 886.) SRTInsDelUpdAbs is an input
SRTMassDelLimit
Specifies a criterion for recommending that the RUNSTATS utility is to be run
on a table space. If the following condition is true, DSNACCOR recommends
running RUNSTATS:
v The number of mass deletes from a table space or partition since the last
REORG or LOAD REPLACE is greater than SRTMassDelLimit.
(See item 3 in Figure 153 on page 886.) SRTMassDelLimit is an input parameter
SRIInsDelPct
Specifies, when combined with SRIInsDelAbs, a criterion for recommending
that the RUNSTATS utility is to be run on an index space. If both of the
v The number of inserted and deleted index entries since the last RUNSTATS
on an index space or partition, divided by the total number of index entries
in the index space or partition (expressed as a percentage) is greater than
SRIInsDelUpdPct.
RUNSTATS on an index space or partition is greater than SRIInsDelUpdAbs.
(See items 1 and 2 in Figure 154 on page 886.) SRIInsDelPct is an input
882
SRIInsDelAbs
Specifies, when combined with SRIInsDelPct, specifies a criterion for
recommending that the RUNSTATS utility is to be run on an index space. If the
following condition is true, DSNACCOR recommends running RUNSTATS:
SRIInsDelUpdPct.
RUNSTATS on an index space or partition is greater than SRIInsDelUpdAbs,
(See items 1 and 2 in Figure 154 on page 886.) SRIInsDelAbs is an input
SRIMassDelLimit
on an index space. If the number of mass deletes from an index space or
partition since the last REORG, REBUILD INDEX, or LOAD REPLACE is
greater than this value, DSNACCOR recommends running RUNSTATS.
(See item 3 in Figure 154 on page 886.) SRIMassDelLimit is an input parameter
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
ExtentLimit
table space or index space. Also specifies that DSNACCOR is to warn the user
that the table space or index space has used too many extents. DSNACCOR
recommends running REORG, and altering data set allocations if the following
condition is true:
v The number of physical extents in the index space, table space, or partition
is greater than ExtentLimit.
(See Figure 155 on page 886.) ExtentLimit is an input parameter of type
LastStatement
When DSNACCOR returns a severe error (return code 12), this field contains
the SQL statement that was executing when the error occurred. LastStatement is
an output parameter of type VARCHAR(8012).
ReturnCode
The return code from DSNACCOR execution. Possible values are:
0
DSNACCOR executed successfully. The ErrorMsg parameter contains

the approximate percentage of the total number of objects in the
subsystem that have information in the real-time statistics tables.
DSNACCOR completed, but one or more input parameters might be

incompatible. The ErrorMsg parameter contains the input parameters
that might be incompatible.
DSNACCOR terminated with errors. The ErrorMsg parameter contains

a message that describes the error.
12
DSNACCOR terminated with severe errors. The ErrorMsg parameter

contains a message that describes the error. The LastStatement
parameter contains the SQL statement that was executing when the
error occurred.
14
DSNACCOR terminated because it could not access one or more of the
883
real-time statistics tables. The ErrorMsg parameter contains the names

of the tables that DSNACCOR could not access.
15
DSNACCOR terminated because it encountered a problem with one of

the declared temporary tables that it defines and uses.
16
DSNACCOR terminated because it could not define a declared

temporary table. No table spaces were defined in the TEMP database.
NULL DSNACCOR terminated but could not set a return code.

ReturnCode is an output parameter of type INTEGER.
ErrorMsg
Contains information about DSNACCOR execution. If DSNACCOR runs
successfully (ReturnCode=0), this field contains the approximate percentage of
objects in the subsystem that are in the real-time statistics tables. Otherwise,
this field contains error messages. ErrorMsg is an output parameter of type
VARCHAR(1331).
IFCARetCode
Contains the return code from an IFI COMMAND call. DSNACCOR issues
commands through the IFI interface to determine the status of objects.
IFCARetCode is an output parameter of type INTEGER.
IFCAResCode
Contains the reason code from an IFI COMMAND call. IFCAResCode is an
output parameter of type INTEGER.
ExcessBytes
Contains the number of bytes of information that did not fit in the IFI return
area after an IFI COMMAND call. ExcessBytes is an output parameter of type
INTEGER.
DSNACCOR formulas for recommending actions

The following formulas specify the criteria that DSNACCOR uses for its
recommendations and warnings. The variables in italics are DSNACCOR input
parameters. The capitalized variables are columns of the
SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACESTATS or SYSIBM.SYSINDEXSPACESTATS tables. The
numbers to the right of selected items are reference numbers for the option
descriptions in Option descriptions on page 876.
The figure below shows the formula that DSNACCOR uses to recommend a full
image copy on a table space.
((QueryType='COPY' OR QueryType='ALL') AND

(ObjectType='TS' OR ObjectType='ALL') AND
ICType='F') AND
(COPYLASTTIME IS NULL OR
REORGLASTTIME>COPYLASTTIME OR
LOADRLASTTIME>COPYLASTTIME OR
(CURRENT DATE-COPYLASTTIME)>CRDaySncLastCopy OR
1
(COPYUPDATEDPAGES*100)/NACTIVE>CRUpdatedPagesPct OR 2
(COPYCHANGES*100)/TOTALROWS>CRChangesPct)
3
Figure 148. DSNACCOR formula for recommending a full image copy on a table space
884
image copy on an index space.

(ObjectType='IX' OR ObjectType='ALL') AND
(ICType='F' OR ICType='B')) AND
REBUILDLASTTIME>COPYLASTTIME OR
1
(NACTIVE>CRIndexSize AND
2
((COPYUPDATEDPAGES*100)/NACTIVE>CRUpdatedPagesPct OR 3
(COPYCHANGES*100)/TOTALENTRIES>CRChangesPct)))
4
Figure 149. DSNACCOR formula for recommending a full image copy on an index space
The figure below shows the formula that DSNACCOR uses to recommend an
incremental image copy on a table space.

ICType='I' AND
COPYLASTTIME IS NOT NULL) AND
(LOADRLASTTIME>COPYLASTTIME OR
(COPYUPDATEDPAGES*100)/NACTIVE>ICRUpdatedPagesPct OR 1
(COPYCHANGES*100)/TOTALROWS>ICRChangesPct))
2
Figure 150. DSNACCOR formula for recommending an incremental image copy on a table space
The figure below shows the formula that DSNACCOR uses to recommend a
REORG on a table space. If the table space is a LOB table space, and CHCKLVL=1,
the formula does not include EXTENTS>ExtentLimit.
((QueryType='REORG' OR QueryType='ALL') AND

(ObjectType='TS' OR ObjectType='ALL')) AND
(REORGLASTTIME IS NULL OR
((REORGINSERTS+REORGDELETES+REORGUPDATES)*100)/TOTALROWS>RRTInsDelUpdPct OR 1
(REORGUNCLUSTINS*100)/TOTALROWS>RRTUnclustInsPct OR
2
(REORGDISORGLOB*100)/TOTALROWS>RRTDisorgLOBPct OR
3
((REORGNEARINDREF+REORGFARINDREF)*100)/TOTALROWS>RRTIndRefLimit OR
4
REORGMASSDELETE>RRTMassDelLimit OR
5
EXTENTS>ExtentLimit)
6
Figure 151. DSNACCOR formula for recommending a REORG on a table space
REORG on an index space.
885

(ObjectType='IX' OR ObjectType='ALL')) AND
((REORGINSERTS+REORGDELETES)*100)/TOTALENTRIES>RRIInsertDeletePct OR
(REORGAPPENDINSERT*100)/TOTALENTRIES>RRIAppendInsertPct OR
(REORGPSEUDODELETES*100)/TOTALENTRIES>RRIPseudoDeletePct OR
REORGMASSDELETE>RRIMassDeleteLimit OR
(REORGLEAFFAR*100)/NACTIVE>RRILeafLimit OR
REORGNUMLEVELS>RRINumLevelsLimit OR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Figure 152. DSNACCOR formula for recommending a REORG on an index space
The figure below shows the formula that DSNACCOR uses to recommend
RUNSTATS on a table space.
((QueryType='RUNSTATS' OR QueryType='ALL') AND

(STATSLASTTIME IS NULL OR
(((STATSINSERTS+STATSDELETES+STATSUPDATES)*100)/TOTALROWS>SRTInsDelUpdPct AND 1
(STATSINSERTS+STATSDELETES+STATSUPDATES)>SRTInsDelUpdAbs) OR
2
STATSMASSDELETE>SRTMassDeleteLimit)
3
Figure 153. DSNACCOR formula for recommending RUNSTATS on a table space
RUNSTATS on an index space.

(((STATSINSERTS+STATSDELETES)*100)/TOTALENTRIES>SRIInsDelUpdPct AND 1
(STATSINSERTS+STATSDELETES)>SRIInsDelPct) OR
2
STATSMASSDELETE>SRIInsDelAbs)
3
Figure 154. DSNACCOR formula for recommending RUNSTATS on an index space
The figure below shows the formula that DSNACCOR uses to that too many index
space or table space extents have been used.
EXTENTS>ExtentLimit
Figure 155. DSNACCOR formula for warning that too many data set extents for a table space or index space are used
Using an exception table

An exception table is an optional, user-created DB2 table that you can use to place
information in the INEXCEPTTABLE column of the recommendations result set.
You can put any information in the INEXCEPTTABLE column, but the most
common use of this column is to filter the recommendations result set. Each row in
the exception table represents an object for which you want to provide information
for the recommendations result set.
886
To create the exception table, execute a CREATE TABLE statement similar to the
following one. You can include other columns in the exception table, but you must
include at least the columns that are shown.
CREATE TABLE DSNACC.EXCEPT_TBL
(DBNAME CHAR(8) NOT NULL,
NAME CHAR(8) NOT NULL,
QUERYTYPE CHAR(40))
CCSID EBCDIC;
The meanings of the columns are:

DBNAME
The database name for an object in the exception table.
NAME
The table space name or index space name for an object in the exception table.
QUERYTYPE
The information that you want to place in the INEXCEPTTABLE column of the
If you put a null value in this column, DSNACCOR puts the value YES in the
INEXCEPTTABLE column of the recommendations result set row for the object
that matches the DBNAME and NAME values.
Recommendation: If you plan to put many rows in the exception table, create a
nonunique index on DBNAME, NAME, and QUERYTYPE.
After you create the exception table, insert a row for each object for which you
want to include information in the INEXCEPTTABLE column.
Example: Suppose that you want the INEXCEPTTABLE column to contain the
string IRRELEVANT for table space STAFF in database DSNDB04. You also want
the INEXCEPTTABLE column to contain CURRENT for table space DSN8S91D in
database DSN8D91A. Execute these INSERT statements:
INSERT INTO DSNACC.EXCEPT_TBL VALUES('DSNDB04 ', 'STAFF ', 'IRRELEVANT');
INSERT INTO DSNACC.EXCEPT_TBL VALUES('DSN8D91A', 'DSN8S91D', 'CURRENT');
To use the contents of INEXCEPTTABLE for filtering, include a condition that

involves the INEXCEPTTABLE column in the search condition that you specify in
your Criteria input parameter.
Example: Suppose that you want to include all rows for database DSNDB04 in
the recommendations result set, except for those rows that contain the string
IRRELEVANT in the INEXCEPTTABLE column. You might include the following
search condition in your Criteria input parameter:
DBNAME='DSNDB04' AND INEXCEPTTABLE<>'IRRELEVANT'
Example
The following COBOL example that shows variable declarations and an SQL CALL
for obtaining recommendations for objects in databases DSN8D91A and
DSN8D91L. This example also outlines the steps that you need to perform to
retrieve the two result sets that DSNACCOR returns.
WORKING-STORAGE SECTION.
.
.
.
***********************
* DSNACCOR PARAMETERS *
***********************
887
01
01
01
01
01
49
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
QUERYTYPE.
49
QUERYTYPE-LN
PICTURE S9(4) COMP VALUE 40.
49
QUERYTYPE-DTA
PICTURE X(40) VALUE 'ALL'.
OBJECTTYPE.
49
OBJECTTYPE-LN
49
OBJECTTYPE-DTA
ICTYPE.
49
ICTYPE-LN
49
ICTYPE-DTA
PICTURE X(1) VALUE 'B'.
STATSSCHEMA.
49
STATSSCHEMA-LN
49
STATSSCHEMA-DTA
PICTURE X(128) VALUE 'SYSIBM'.
CATLGSCHEMA.
CATLGSCHEMA-LN
49
CATLGSCHEMA-DTA
LOCALSCHEMA.
49
LOCALSCHEMA-LN
49
LOCALSCHEMA-DTA
PICTURE X(128) VALUE 'DSNACC'.
CHKLVL
PICTURE S9(9) COMP VALUE +3.
CRITERIA.
49
CRITERIA-LN
49
CRITERIA-DTA
PICTURE X(4096) VALUE SPACES.
RESTRICTED.
49
RESTRICTED-LN
49
RESTRICTED-DTA
CRUPDATEDPAGESPCT
CRCHANGESPCT
CRDAYSNCLASTCOPY
ICRUPDATEDPAGESPCT
ICRCHANGESPCT
CRINDEXSIZE
RRTINSDELUPDPCT
RRTUNCLUSTINSPCT
RRTDISORGLOBPCT
RRTMASSDELLIMIT
RRTINDREFLIMIT
RRIINSERTDELETEPCT
RRIAPPENDINSERTPCT
RRIPSEUDODELETEPCT
RRIMASSDELLIMIT
RRILEAFLIMIT
RRINUMLEVELSLIMIT
SRTINSDELUPDPCT
SRTINSDELUPDABS
SRTMASSDELLIMIT
SRIINSDELUPDPCT
SRIINSDELUPDABS
SRIMASSDELLIMIT
EXTENTLIMIT
LASTSTATEMENT.
49
LASTSTATEMENT-LN
49
LASTSTATEMENT-DTA
RETURNCODE
ERRORMSG.
49
ERRORMSG-LN
49
ERRORMSG-DTA
IFCARETCODE
IFCARESCODE
EXCESSBYTES
*****************************************
* INDICATOR VARIABLES.
*
* INITIALIZE ALL NON-ESSENTIAL INPUT
*
* VARIABLES TO -1, TO INDICATE THAT THE *
* INPUT VALUE IS NULL.
*
*****************************************
01 QUERYTYPE-IND
PICTURE S9(4) COMP-4 VALUE +0.
01 OBJECTTYPE-IND
888
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
ICTYPE-IND
STATSSCHEMA-IND
CATLGSCHEMA-IND
LOCALSCHEMA-IND
CHKLVL-IND
CRITERIA-IND
RESTRICTED-IND
CRUPDATEDPAGESPCT-IND
CRCHANGESPCT-IND
CRDAYSNCLASTCOPY-IND
ICRUPDATEDPAGESPCT-IND
ICRCHANGESPCT-IND
CRINDEXSIZE-IND
RRTINSDELUPDPCT-IND
RRTUNCLUSTINSPCT-IND
RRTDISORGLOBPCT-IND
RRTMASSDELLIMIT-IND
RRTINDREFLIMIT-IND
RRIINSERTDELETEPCT-IND
RRIAPPENDINSERTPCT-IND
RRIPSEUDODELETEPCT-IND
RRIMASSDELLIMIT-IND
RRILEAFLIMIT-IND
RRINUMLEVELSLIMIT-IND
SRTINSDELUPDPCT-IND
SRTINSDELUPDABS-IND
SRTMASSDELLIMIT-IND
SRIINSDELUPDPCT-IND
SRIINSDELUPDABS-IND
SRIMASSDELLIMIT-IND
EXTENTLIMIT-IND
LASTSTATEMENT-IND
RETURNCODE-IND
ERRORMSG-IND
IFCARETCODE-IND
IFCARESCODE-IND
EXCESSBYTES-IND
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
+0.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
PROCEDURE DIVISION.
.
.
.
*********************************************************
* SET VALUES FOR DSNACCOR INPUT PARAMETERS:
*
* - USE THE CHKLVL PARAMETER TO CAUSE DSNACCOR TO CHECK *
*
FOR ORPHANED OBJECTS AND INDEX SPACES WITHOUT
*
*
TABLE SPACES, BUT INCLUDE THOSE OBJECTS IN THE
*
*
RECOMMENDATIONS RESULT SET (CHKLVL=1+2+16=19)
*
* - USE THE CRITERIA PARAMETER TO CAUSE DSNACCOR TO
*
*
MAKE RECOMMENDATIONS ONLY FOR OBJECTS IN DATABASES *
*
DSN8D91A AND DSN8D91L.
*
* - FOR THE FOLLOWING PARAMETERS, SET THESE VALUES,
*
*
WHICH ARE LOWER THAN THE DEFAULTS:
*
*
CRUPDATEDPAGESPCT
4
*
*
CRCHANGESPCT
2
*
*
RRTINSDELUPDPCT
2
*
*
RRTUNCLUSTINSPCT
5
*
*
RRTDISORGLOBPCT
5
*
*
RRIAPPENDINSERTPCT 5
*
*
SRTINSDELUPDPCT
5
*
*
SRIINSDELUPDPCT
5
*
*
EXTENTLIMIT
3
*
*********************************************************
MOVE 19 TO CHKLVL.
MOVE SPACES TO CRITERIA-DTA.
MOVE 'DBNAME = ''DSN8D91A'' OR DBNAME = ''DSN8D91L'''
TO CRITERIA-DTA.
MOVE 46 TO CRITERIA-LN.
MOVE 4 TO CRUPDATEDPAGESPCT.
889
MOVE 2 TO CRCHANGESPCT.
MOVE 2 TO RRTINSDELUPDPCT.
MOVE 5 TO RRTUNCLUSTINSPCT.
MOVE 5 TO RRTDISORGLOBPCT.
MOVE 5 TO RRIAPPENDINSERTPCT.
MOVE 5 TO SRTINSDELUPDPCT.
MOVE 5 TO SRIINSDELUPDPCT.
MOVE 3 TO EXTENTLIMIT.
********************************
* INITIALIZE OUTPUT PARAMETERS *
********************************
MOVE SPACES TO LASTSTATEMENT-DTA.
MOVE 1 TO LASTSTATEMENT-LN.
MOVE 0 TO RETURNCODE-O2.
MOVE SPACES TO ERRORMSG-DTA.
MOVE 1 TO ERRORMSG-LN.
MOVE 0 TO IFCARETCODE.
MOVE 0 TO IFCARESCODE.
MOVE 0 TO EXCESSBYTES.
*******************************************************
* SET THE INDICATOR VARIABLES TO 0 FOR NON-NULL INPUT *
* PARAMETERS (PARAMETERS FOR WHICH YOU DO NOT WANT
*
* DSNACCOR TO USE DEFAULT VALUES) AND FOR OUTPUT
*
* PARAMETERS.
*
*******************************************************
MOVE 0 TO CHKLVL-IND.
MOVE 0 TO CRITERIA-IND.
MOVE 0 TO CRUPDATEDPAGESPCT-IND.
MOVE 0 TO CRCHANGESPCT-IND.
MOVE 0 TO RRTINSDELUPDPCT-IND.
MOVE 0 TO RRTUNCLUSTINSPCT-IND.
MOVE 0 TO RRTDISORGLOBPCT-IND.
MOVE 0 TO RRIAPPENDINSERTPCT-IND.
MOVE 0 TO SRTINSDELUPDPCT-IND.
MOVE 0 TO SRIINSDELUPDPCT-IND.
MOVE 0 TO EXTENTLIMIT-IND.
MOVE 0 TO LASTSTATEMENT-IND.
MOVE 0 TO RETURNCODE-IND.
MOVE 0 TO ERRORMSG-IND.
MOVE 0 TO IFCARETCODE-IND.
MOVE 0 TO IFCARESCODE-IND.
MOVE 0 TO EXCESSBYTES-IND.
.
.
.
*****************
* CALL DSNACCOR *
*****************
EXEC SQL
CALL SYSPROC.DSNACCOR
(:QUERYTYPE
:QUERYTYPE-IND,
:OBJECTTYPE
:OBJECTTYPE-IND,
:ICTYPE
:ICTYPE-IND,
:STATSSCHEMA
:STATSSCHEMA-IND,
:CATLGSCHEMA
:CATLGSCHEMA-IND,
:LOCALSCHEMA
:LOCALSCHEMA-IND,
:CHKLVL
:CHKLVL-IND,
:CRITERIA
:CRITERIA-IND,
:RESTRICTED
:RESTRICTED-IND,
:CRUPDATEDPAGESPCT
:CRUPDATEDPAGESPCT-IND,
:CRCHANGESPCT
:CRCHANGESPCT-IND,
:CRDAYSNCLASTCOPY
:CRDAYSNCLASTCOPY-IND,
:ICRUPDATEDPAGESPCT :ICRUPDATEDPAGESPCT-IND,
:ICRCHANGESPCT
:ICRCHANGESPCT-IND,
:CRINDEXSIZE
:CRINDEXSIZE-IND,
:RRTINSDELUPDPCT
:RRTINSDELUPDPCT-IND,
:RRTUNCLUSTINSPCT
:RRTUNCLUSTINSPCT-IND,
:RRTDISORGLOBPCT
:RRTDISORGLOBPCT-IND,
:RRTMASSDELLIMIT
:RRTMASSDELLIMIT-IND,
890
:RRTINDREFLIMIT
:RRTINDREFLIMIT-IND,
:RRIINSERTDELETEPCT :RRIINSERTDELETEPCT-IND,
:RRIAPPENDINSERTPCT :RRIAPPENDINSERTPCT-IND,
:RRIPSEUDODELETEPCT :RRIPSEUDODELETEPCT-IND,
:RRIMASSDELLIMIT
:RRIMASSDELLIMIT-IND,
:RRILEAFLIMIT
:RRILEAFLIMIT-IND,
:RRINUMLEVELSLIMIT
:RRINUMLEVELSLIMIT-IND,
:SRTINSDELUPDPCT
:SRTINSDELUPDPCT-IND,
:SRTINSDELUPDABS
:SRTINSDELUPDABS-IND,
:SRTMASSDELLIMIT
:SRTMASSDELLIMIT-IND,
:SRIINSDELUPDPCT
:SRIINSDELUPDPCT-IND,
:SRIINSDELUPDABS
:SRIINSDELUPDABS-IND,
:SRIMASSDELLIMIT
:SRIMASSDELLIMIT-IND,
:EXTENTLIMIT
:EXTENTLIMIT-IND,
:LASTSTATEMENT
:LASTSTATEMENT-IND,
:RETURNCODE
:RETURNCODE-IND,
:ERRORMSG
:ERRORMSG-IND,
:IFCARETCODE
:IFCARETCODE-IND,
:IFCARESCODE
:IFCARESCODE-IND,
:EXCESSBYTES
:EXCESSBYTES-IND)
END-EXEC.
*************************************************************
* ASSUME THAT THE SQL CALL RETURNED +466, WHICH MEANS THAT *
* RESULT SETS WERE RETURNED. RETRIEVE RESULT SETS.
*
*************************************************************
* LINK EACH RESULT SET TO A LOCATOR VARIABLE
EXEC SQL ASSOCIATE LOCATORS (:LOC1, :LOC2)
WITH PROCEDURE SYSPROC.DSNACCOR
END-EXEC.
* LINK A CURSOR TO EACH RESULT SET
EXEC SQL ALLOCATE C1 CURSOR FOR RESULT SET :LOC1
END-EXEC.
END-EXEC.
* PERFORM FETCHES USING C1 TO RETRIEVE ALL ROWS FROM FIRST RESULT SET
* PERFORM FETCHES USING C2 TO RETRIEVE ALL ROWS FROM SECOND RESULT SET
Figure 156. Example of DSNACCOR invocation
Output
If DSNACCOR executes successfully, in addition to the output parameters
described in Option descriptions on page 876, DSNACCOR returns two result
sets.
The first result set contains the results from IFI COMMAND calls that DSNACCOR
makes. The following table shows the format of the first result set.
Table 161. Result set row for first DSNACCOR result set
Column name
Data type
Contents
RS_SEQUENCE
INTEGER
Sequence number of the output line
RS_DATA
CHAR(80)
A line of command output
The second result set contains DSNACCORs recommendations. This result set
contains one or more rows for a table space or index space. A nonpartitioned table
space or nonpartitioning index space can have at most one row in the result set. A
partitioned table space or partitioning index space can have at most one row for
each partition. A table space, index space, or partition has a row in the result set if
both of the following conditions are true:
891
v If the Criteria input parameter contains a search condition, the search condition
is true for the table space, index space, or partition.
v DSNACCOR recommends at least one action for the table space, index space, or
partition.
The following table shows the columns of a result set row.
Table 162. Result set row for second DSNACCOR result set
Column name
Data type
Description
DBNAME
CHAR(8)
Name of the database that contains the object.
NAME
CHAR(8)
Table space or index space name.
PARTITION
INTEGER
Data set number or partition number.
OBJECTTYPE
CHAR(2)
DB2 object type:

v TS for a table space
v IX for an index space
OBJECTSTATUS
CHAR(36)
Status of the object:

v ORPHANED, if the object is an index space with no
corresponding table space, or if the object does not exist
v If the object is in a restricted state, one of the following
values:
TS=restricted-state, if OBJECTTYPE is TS
IX=restricted-state, if OBJECTTYPE is IX
restricted-state is one of the status codes that appear in
DISPLAY DATABASE output. See DB2 Command Reference
for details.
v A, if the object is in an advisory state.
v L, if the object is a logical partition, but not in an advisory
state.
v AL, if the object is a logical partition and in an advisory
state.
IMAGECOPY
CHAR(3)
COPY recommendation:
v If OBJECTTYPE is TS: FUL (full image copy), INC
(incremental image copy), or NO
v If OBJECTTYPE is IX: YES or NO
RUNSTATS
CHAR(3)
RUNSTATS recommendation: YES or NO.
EXTENTS
CHAR(3)
Indicates whether the data sets for the object have exceeded
ExtentLimit: YES or NO.
REORG
CHAR(3)
REORG recommendation: YES or NO.
INEXCEPTTABLE
CHAR(40)
A string that contains one of the following values:

v Text that you specify in the QUERYTYPE column of the
exception table.
v YES, if you put a row in the exception table for the object
that this result set row represents, but you specify NULL in
the QUERYTYPE column.
v NO, if the exception table exists but does not have a row for
the object that this result set row represents.
v Null, if the exception table does not exist, or if the ChkLvl
input parameter does not include the value 4.
ASSOCIATEDTS
892
CHAR(8)
If OBJECTTYPE is IX and the ChkLvl input parameter includes

the value 2, this value is the name of the table space that is
associated with the index space. Otherwise null.
Table 162. Result set row for second DSNACCOR result set (continued)
Column name
Data type
Description
COPYLASTTIME
TIMESTAMP
Timestamp of the last full image copy on the object. Null if

COPY was never run, or if the last COPY execution was
terminated.
LOADRLASTTIME
TIMESTAMP
Timestamp of the last LOAD REPLACE on the object. Null if

LOAD REPLACE was never run, or if the last LOAD
REPLACE execution was terminated.
REBUILDLASTTIME
TIMESTAMP
Timestamp of the last REBUILD INDEX on the object. Null if

REBUILD INDEX was never run, or if the last REBUILD
INDEX execution was terminated.
CRUPDPGSPCT
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS or IX and IMAGECOPY is YES, the ratio

of distinct updated pages to preformatted pages, expressed as
a percentage. Otherwise null.
CRCPYCHGPCT
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS and IMAGECOPY is YES, the ratio of

the total number insert, update, and delete operations since
the last image copy to the total number of rows or LOBs in the
table space or partition, expressed as a percentage. If
OBJECTTYPE is IX and IMAGECOPY is YES, the ratio of the
total number of insert and delete operations since the last
image copy to the total number of entries in the index space or
partition, expressed as a percentage. Otherwise null.
CRDAYSCELSTCPY
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS or IX and IMAGECOPY is YES, the

number of days since the last image copy. Otherwise null.
CRINDEXSIZE
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is IX and IMAGECOPY is YES, the number of

active pages in the index space or partition. Otherwise null.
REORGLASTTIME
TIMESTAMP
Timestamp of the last REORG on the object. Null if REORG

was never run, or if the last REORG execution was terminated.
RRTINSDELUPDPCT
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS and REORG is YES, the ratio of the sum

of insert, update, and delete operations since the last REORG
to the total number of rows or LOBs in the table space or
RRTUNCINSPCT
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS and REORG is YES, the ratio of the

number of unclustered insert operations to the total number of
rows or LOBs in the table space or partition, expressed as a
percentage. Otherwise null.
RRTDISORGLOBPCT
INTEGER

number of imperfectly chunked LOBs to the total number of
RRTMASSDELETE
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS, REORG is YES, and the table space is a

segmented table space or LOB table space, the number of mass
deletes since the last REORG or LOAD REPLACE. If
OBJECTTYPE is TS, REORG is YES, and the table space is
nonsegmented, the number of dropped tables since the last
REORG or LOAD REPLACE. Otherwise null.
RRTINDREF
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS, REORG is YES, the ratio of the total

number of overflow records that were created since the last
REORG or LOAD REPLACE to the total number of rows or
LOBs in the table space or partition, expressed as a percentage.
Otherwise null.
893
Column name
Data type
Description
RRIINSDELPCT
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is IX and REORG is YES, the ratio of the total

number of insert and delete operations since the last REORG
to the total number of index entries in the index space or
RRIAPPINSPCT
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is IX and REORG is YES, the ratio of the

number of index entries that were inserted since the last
REORG, REBUILD INDEX, or LOAD REPLACE that had a key
value greater than the maximum key value in the index space
or partition, to the number of index entries in the index space
or partition, expressed as a percentage. Otherwise null.
RRIPSDDELPCT
INTEGER

number of index entries that were pseudo-deleted (the RID
entry was marked as deleted) since the last REORG, REBUILD
INDEX, or LOAD REPLACE to the number of index entries in
the index space or partition, expressed as a percentage.
Otherwise null.
RRIMASSDELETE
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is IX and REORG is YES, the number of mass

deletes from the index space or partition since the last REORG,
REBUILD, or LOAD REPLACE. Otherwise null.
RRILEAF
INTEGER

number of index page splits that occurred since the last
REORG, REBUILD INDEX, or LOAD REPLACE in which the
higher part of the split page was far from the location of the
original page, to the total number of active pages in the index
space or partition, expressed as a percentage. Otherwise null.
RRINUMLEVELS
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is IX and REORG is YES, the number of levels

in the index tree that were added or removed since the last
REORG, REBUILD INDEX, or LOAD REPLACE. Otherwise
null.
STATSLASTTIME
TIMESTAMP
Timestamp of the last RUNSTATS on the object. Null if

RUNSTATS was never run, or if the last RUNSTATS execution
was terminated.
SRTINSDELUPDPCT
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS and RUNSTATS is YES, the ratio of the

total number of insert, update, and delete operations since the
last RUNSTATS on a table space or partition, to the total
number of rows or LOBs in the table space or partition,
expressed as a percentage. Otherwise null.
SRTINSDELUPDABS
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS and RUNSTATS is YES, the total number

of insert, update, and delete operations since the last
RUNSTATS on a table space or partition. Otherwise null.
SRTMASSDELETE
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS and RUNSTATS is YES, the number of

mass deletes from the table space or partition since the last
SRIINSDELPCT
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is IX and RUNSTATS is YES, the ratio of the

RUNSTATS on the index space or partition, to the total
number of index entries in the index space or partition,
SRIINSDELABS
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is IX and RUNSTATS is YES, the number

insert and delete operations since the last RUNSTATS on the
index space or partition. Otherwise null.
894
Column name
Data type
Description
SRIMASSDELETE
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is IX and RUNSTATS is YES, the number of

mass deletes from the index space or partition since the last
REORG, REBUILD INDEX, or LOAD REPLACE. Otherwise,
this value is null.
TOTALEXTENTS
SMALLINT
If EXTENTS is YES, the number of physical extents in the table

space, index space, or partition. Otherwise, this value is null.
PSPI
Related reference
CREATE DATABASE (DB2 SQL Reference)
CREATE TABLESPACE (DB2 SQL Reference)
DSNACCOX stored procedure
|
|
|
The DB2 real-time statistics stored procedure (DSNACCOX) is a sample stored

The DSNACCOX stored procedure represents an enhancement to the DSNACCOR
stored procedure and provides improved recommendations, new fields and
formulas, and the option to choose the formula that is used for making
recommendations. However, the DSNACCOX stored procedure requires that the
real time statistics are migrated to the DB2 catalog, or DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS
new-function-mode. Otherwise, use the DSNACCOR stored procedure instead.
PSPI
In particular, DSNACCOX performs the following actions:

|
|
|
|
|
DSNACCOX uses data from catalog tables, including real-time statistics tables, to
make its recommendations. DSNACCOX provides its recommendations in a result
set.
DSNACCOX uses the set of criteria that are shown in DSNACCOX formulas for
default, DSNACCOX evaluates all table spaces and index spaces in the subsystem
Important information about DSNACCOX recommendations:
v DSNACCOX makes recommendations based on general formulas that require
of your DB2 subsystem, the recommendations that DSNACCOX makes might
895
v Before you perform any action that DSNACCOX recommends, ensure that the
object for which DSNACCOX makes the recommendation is available, and that
the recommended action can be performed on that object. For example, REORG
might be recommended for an object, but the object might be stopped.
|
|
|
|
Environment
DSNACCOX must run in a WLM-established stored procedure address space.
You should bind the package for DSNACCOX with isolation UR to avoid lock
contention. You can find the installation steps for DSNACCOX in job DSNTIJSG.
To execute the CALL DSNACCOX statement, the owner of the package or plan
v The EXECUTE privilege on the package for DSNACCOX
v SYSADM authority
have:
v SELECT authority on catalog tables
Syntax diagram
DSNACCOX. Because the linkage convention for DSNACCOX is GENERAL WITH
896
CALL DSNACCOX (
QueryType
NULL
LocalSchema
NULL
ChkLvl
NULL
CRUpdatedPagesAbs
NULL
ICRUpdatedPagesAbs
NULL
RRTInsertAbs
NULL
RRTDisorgLOBPct
NULL
-1
RRIInsertPct
NULL
-1
RRIAppendInsertPct
NULL
-1
RRINumLevelsLimit
NULL
-1
SRIInsDelUpdPct
NULL
-1
CRChangesPct
NULL
-1
,
ICType
NULL
Restricted
NULL
CRIndexSize
NULL
-1
RRTDeleteAbs
NULL
RRIDeletePct
NULL
-1
SRTInsDelUpdPct
NULL
-1
,
CatlgSchema
NULL
RRTInsertPct
NULL
-1
RRIDeleteAbs
NULL
RRILeafLimit
NULL
-1
SRTMassDelLimit
NULL
-1
ExtentLimit
NULL
-1
RRTIndRefLimit
NULL
-1
RRIMassDelLimit
NULL
-1
SRIMassDelLimit
NULL
-1
ICRUpdatedPagesPct
NULL
-1
RRTUnclustInsPct
NULL
-1
SRTInsDelUpdAbs
NULL
CRUpdatedPagesPct
NULL
-1
,
RRTMassDelLimit
NULL
-1
RRIPseudoDeletePct
NULL
-1
SRIInsDelAbs
NULL
CRDaySncLastCopy
NULL
-1
,
RRTDataSpaceRat
NULL
-1
ICRChangesPct
NULL
-1
RRIInsertAbs
NULL
-1
ObjectType
NULL
Criteria
NULL
RRTDeletePct
NULL
-1
Option descriptions
the value that DSNACCOX uses if you specify a null value.
QueryType
Specifies the types of actions that DSNACCOX recommends. This field
ALL

RUNSTATS
897
REORG
this value causes DSNACCOX to process the EXTENTS value also.
EXTENTS
RESTRICT
DSNACCOX recommends REORG on the table space when one of the
following conditions is true, and REORG (or ALL) is also specified for the
value of QUERYTYPE:
v The table space is in REORG-pending status.
v The table space is in advisory REORG-pending status as the result of an
ALTER TABLE statement.
DSNACCOX recommends REORG on the index when on the following
conditions is true and REORG (or ALL) is also specified for the value of
QUERYTYPE::
v The index is in REORG-pending status.
v The index is in advisory REORG-pending as the result of an ALTER TABLE
statement.
DSNACCOX recommends FULL COPY on the table space when on the
following conditions is true and COPY (or ALL) is also specified for the value
of QUERYTYPE::
v The table space is in COPY-pending status.
v The table space is in informational COPY-pending status.
DSNACCOX recommends FULL COPY on the index when on the following
conditions is true and COPY (or ALL) is also specified for the value of
QUERYTYPE: and SYSINDEX.COPY=Y:
v The index is in COPY-pending status.
v The index is in informational COPY-pending status.
QueryType is an input parameter of type VARCHAR(40). The default value is
ALL.
ObjectType
Specifies the types of objects for which DSNACCOX recommends actions:
ALL
TS
Table spaces only.
IX
Index spaces only.
ObjectType is an input parameter of type VARCHAR(3). The default value is

ALL.
ICType
Specifies the types of image copies for which DSNACCOX is to make
recommendations:
F
Full image copy.
898
CatlgSchema
parameter of type VARCHAR(128). The default value is SYSIBM.
|
|
|
LocalSchema
Specifies the qualifier for the names of local tables that DSNACCOX references.
LocalSchema is an input parameter of type VARCHAR(128). The default value is
DSNACC.
ChkLvl
Specifies the types of checking that DSNACCOX performs, and indicates
whether to include objects that fail those checks in the DSNACCOX
following values:
|
|
|
DSNACCOX performs none of the following actions.
Exclude rows from the DSNACCOX recommendations result set for

RUNSTATS on:
v Index spaces that are related to tables that are defined as VOLATILE.
v Table spaces for which all of the tables are defined as VOLATILE.
Reserved for future use.
Check whether rows that are in the DSNACCOX recommendations


16
32

recommended for REORG or RUNSTATS.
64
For index spaces that are listed in the DSNACCOX recommendations

column of the recommendations result set. Selecting CHKLVL64 also
activates CHKLVLs 32 and 4.
ChkLvl is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 5 (values 1+4).

Criteria
Narrows the set of objects for which DSNACCOX makes recommendations.
This value is the search condition of an SQL WHERE clause.Criteria is an input
parameter of type VARCHAR(4096). The default is that DSNACCOX makes
recommendations for all table spaces and index spaces in the subsystem. The
search condition can use any column in the result set and wildcards are
allowed.
Restricted
899
CRUpdatedPagesPct
Specifies, when combined with CRUpdatedPagesAbs, a criterion for
recommending a full image copy on a table space or index space. If both of the
following conditions are true for a table space, DSNACCOX recommends an
image copy:
CRUpdatedPagesPct.
v The total number of distinct updates pages is greater than
CRUpdatedPagesABS.
If all of the following conditions are true for an index space, DSNACCOX
CRUpdatedPagesPct.
CRUpdatedPagesABS.
CRIndexSize.
CRUpdatedPagesPct is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default is 20.0.
A negative value turns off both this criteria and CRUpdatedPagesABS.
CRUpdatedPagesABS
Specifies, when combined with CRUpdatedPagesPct, a criterion for
image copy:
CRUpdatedPagesPct.
v The total number of distinct updated pages is greater than
CRUpdatedPagesAbs.
CRUpdatedPagesPct.
CRUpdatedPagesAbs.
CRIndexSize.
CRUpdatedPagesAbs is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default value
is 0.
CRChangesPct
index space. If the following condition is true for a table space, DSNACCOX
900
If both of the following conditions are true for an index table space,
DSNACCOX recommends an image copy:
CRIndexSize.
CRChangesPct is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default is 10.0. A
negative value turns off this criterion.
CRDaySncLastCopy
this value, DSNACCOX recommends an image copy.
CRDaySncLastCopy is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 7. A
ICRUpdatedPagesPct
space. If both of the following conditions are true, DSNACCOX recommends
an incremental image copy:
v The number of distinct pages that were updated since the last image copy,
(expressed as a percentage) is greater than ICRUpdatedPagesPct..
v The number of distinct pages that were updated since last image copy is
greater than ICRUpdatedPagesAbs.
ICRUpdatedPagesPct is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default value
is 1.0. A negative value turns off this criterion and ICRUpdatedPagesAbs.
ICRChangesPct
space. If the following condition is true, DSNACCOX recommends an
ICRChangesPct is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default is 1.0. A
CRIndexSize
Specifies the minimum index size before checking the ICRUpdatedPagesPct or
ICRChangesPctcriteria for recommending a full image copy on an index space.
CRIndexSize is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 50. A
negative value turns of this criterion and ICRChangesPct.
RRTInsertPct
Specifies, when combined with RRTInsertAbs, a criterion for recommending
that the REORG utility is to be run on a table space. If both of the following
condition are true, DSNACCOX recommends running REORG:
v The sum of insert, update, and delete operations since the last REORG,
(expressed as a percentage) is greater than RRTInsertPct
v The sum of insert operations since the last REORG is greater than
RRTInsertAbs.
901
RRTInsertPct is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default value is 25.0.

A negative value turns off this criterion and RRTInsertAbs.
RRTInsertAbs
Specifies, when combined with RRTInsertPct, a criterion for recommending that
the REORG utility is to be run on a table space. If both of the following
v The sum of insert operations since the last REORG, divided by the total
number of rows or in the table space or partition (expressed as a percentage)
is greater than RRTInsertPct
RRTInsertAbs.
RRTInsertAbs is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default value is 0.
RRTDeletePct
Specifies, when combined with RRTDeleteAbs, a criterion for recommending
v The sum of delete operations since the last REORG, divided by the total
is greater than RRTDeletePct
RRTDeleteAbs.
A negative value turns off this criterion and RRTDeleteAbs.
RRTDeleteAbs
Specifies, when combined with RRTDeletePct, a criterion for recommending
v The sum of delete operations since the last REORG is greater than
RRTDeleteAbs.
RRTDeleteAbs is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default value is 0.
RRTUnclustInsPct
table space. If the following condition is true, DSNACCOX recommends
running REORG:
RRTUnclustInsPct is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default is 10.0.
A negative value will turn off this criterion.
RRTDisorgLOBPct
running REORG:
902
RRTDisorgLOBPct is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 50.0.

RRTDataSpaceRat
table space for space reclamation. If the following condition is true,
DSNACCOX recommends running REORG:
The SPACE allocated is greater than RRTDataSpaceRat multiplied by the
actual space used. (SPACE > RRTDataSpaceRat (DATASIZE/1024))
RRTDataSpaceRat is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default value is
2.0. A negative value turns off this criterion.
RRTMassDelLimit
RRTMassDelLimit is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 0.
RRTIndRefLimit
table space. If the following value is greater than RRTIndRefLimit, DSNACCOX
RRTIndRefLimit is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default is 5.0 in
data sharing environment and 10.0 in a non-data sharing environment.
RRIInsertPct
an index space. If the both of the following conditions are true, DSNACCOX
v The sum of the number of index entries that were inserted since the last
REORG, divided by the total number of index entries in the index space or
partition (expressed as a percentage) is greater than RRIInsertPct.
REORG is greater than RRIInsertAbs.
RRIInsertPct is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default is 30.0. A
RRIInsertAbs
903
RRIInsertAbs is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 0. A

RRIDeletePct
an index space. If the following value is greater than RRIDeletePct,
partition (expressed as a percentage) is greater than RRIDeletePct.
REORG is greater than RRIDeleteAbs.
This is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default is 30.0. A negative
value turns off this criterion.
RRIDeleteAbs
This is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 0. A negative
RRIAppendInsertPct
RRIInsertDeletePct is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default is 20.0.
A negative value turns off this criterion.
RRIPseudoDeletePct
RRIPseudoDeletePct is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default is 5.0
in data sharing and 10.0 in non data sharing environments. A negative value
turns off this criterion.
RRIMassDelLimit
value, DSNACCOX recommends running REORG.
904
RRIMassDelLimit is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 0. A

RRILeafLimit
REBUILD INDEX, or LOAD REPLACE in which the higher part of the split
page was far from the location of the original page, divided by the total
number of active pages in the index space or partition (expressed as a
percentage)
RRILeafLimit is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default is 10.0. A
RRINumLevelsLimit
RRINumLevelsLimit is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 0. A
SRTInsDelUpdPct
of the following conditions are true, DSNACCOX recommends running
RUNSTATS:
SRTInsDelUpdPct.
SRTInsDelUpdPct is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default is 20.0. A
SRTInsDelUpdAbs
following conditions are true, DSNACCOX recommends running RUNSTATS:
SRTInsDelUpdAbs is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 0.
SRTMassDelLimit
on a table space. If the following condition is true, DSNACCOX recommends
running RUNSTATS:
905
SRTMassDelLimit is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default is 0.0. A
SRIInsDelPct
SRIInsDelUpdPct.
SRIInsDelPct is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default is 20.0. A
SRIInsDelAbs
following condition is true, DSNACCOX recommends running RUNSTATS:
SRIInsDelUpdPct.
SRIInsDelAbs is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 0.
SRIMassDelLimit
greater than this value, DSNACCOX recommends running RUNSTATS.
SRIMassDelLimit is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default value is
0. A negative value turns off this criterion.
ExtentLimit
table space or index space. Also specifies that DSNACCOX is to warn the user
that the table space or index space has used too many extents. DSNACCOX
condition is true:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
ExtentLimit is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default value is 254.

|
|
LastStatement
When DSNACCOX returns a severe error (return code 12), this field contains
906
ReturnCode
The return code from DSNACCOX execution. Possible values are:
0
DSNACCOX executed successfully.
DSNACCOX completed with a warning. The ErrorMsg parameter

contains the input parameters that might be incompatible.
DSNACCOX terminated with errors. The ErrorMsg parameter contains

12
DSNACCOX terminated with severe errors. The ErrorMsg parameter

error occurred.
14
DSNACCOX terminated because the real time statistics table were not
yet migrated to the catalog.
15
DSNACCOX terminated because it encountered a problem with one of

16
DSNACCOX terminated because it could not define a declared

temporary table.
NULL DSNACCOX terminated but could not set a return code.

ErrorMsg
Contains information about DSNACCOX execution when DSNACCOX
terminates with a non-zero value for ReturnCode.
IFCARetCode
Contains the return code from an IFI COMMAND call. DSNACCOX issues
IFCAResCode
ExcessBytes
INTEGER.
DSNACCOX formulas for recommending actions

The following formulas specify the criteria that DSNACCOX uses for its
recommendations and warnings. The variables in italics are DSNACCOX input
The figure below shows the formula that DSNACCOX uses to recommend a full
907
(((QueryType='COPY' OR QueryType='ALL') AND

((COPYUPDATEDPAGES100)/NACTIVE>CRUpdatedPagesPct AND
(COPYUPDATEDPAGES>CRupdatedPagesAbs)) OR
((QueryType='RESTRICT' OR QueryType='ALL') AND
The table space is in advisory or informational REORG pending status))
Figure 157. DSNACCOX formula for recommending a full image copy on a table space

(SYSINDEXES.COPY = 'Y')) AND
(((COPYUPDATEDPAGES100)/NACTIVE>CRUpdatedPagesPct) AND
(COPYUPDATEDPAGES>CRUpdatedPagesAbs)) OR
(COPYCHANGES100)/TOTALENTRIES>CRChangesPct)) OR
(SYSINDEXES.COPY = 'Y') AND
The index space is in copy or informational copy pending status))
Figure 158. DSNACCOX formula for recommending a full image copy on an index space
The figure below shows the formula that DSNACCOX uses to recommend an

(ICType='I') AND
((COPYUPDATEDPAGES100)/NACTIVE>ICRUpdatedPagesPct) AND
(COPYUPDATEDPAGES>ICRUpdatedPagesAbs)) OR
(COPYCHANGES100)/TOTALROWS>ICRChangesPct)
Figure 159. DSNACCOX formula for recommending an incremental image copy on a table space
The figure below shows the formula that DSNACCOX uses to recommend a
908
(((QueryType='REORG' OR QueryType='ALL') AND

(REORGLASTTIME IS NULL AND LOADRLASTTIME IS NULL) OR
(NACTIVE IS NULL OR NACTIVE > 5) AND
((((REORGINSERTS100)/TOTALROWS>RRTInsertPct) AND
REORGINSERTS>RRTInsertAbs) OR
(((REORGDELETE100)/TOTALROWS>RRTDeletePct) AND
REORGDELETE>RRTDeleteAbs) OR
(REORGUNCLUSTINS100)/TOTALROWS>RRTUnclustInsPct OR
(REORGDISORGLOB100)/TOTALROWS>RRTDisorgLOBPct OR
(SPACE1024)/DATASIZE>RRTDataSpaceRat OR
((REORGNEARINDREF+REORGFARINDREF)100)/TOTALROWS>RRTIndRefLimit OR
EXTENTS>ExtentLimit)) OR
((QueryType='RESTRICT' ORQueryType='ALL') AND
The table space is in advisory or informational reorg pending status))
Figure 160. DSNACCOX formula for recommending a REORG on a table space

(REORGLASTTIME IS NULL AND REBUILDLASTTIME IS NULL) OR
((((REORGINSERTS100)/TOTALENTRIES>RRIInsertPct) AND
REORGINSERTS>RRIInsertAbs) OR
(((REORGDELETE100)/TOTALENTRIES>RRIDeletePct) AND
REORGDELETE>RRIDeleteAbs) OR
(REORGAPPENDINSERT100)/TOTALENTRIES>RRIAppendInsertPct OR
(REORGPSEUDODELETES100)/TOTALENTRIES>RRIPseudoDeletePct OR
(REORGLEAFFAR100)/NACTIVE>RRILeafLimit OR
An index is in advisory-REBUILD-pending stats (ARBDP)))
Figure 161. DSNACCOX formula for recommending a REORG on an index space
The figure below shows the formula that DSNACCOX uses to recommend

Table Space is not cloned) AND
STATSLASTTIME>LOADRLASTTIME OR
STATSLASTTIME>REORGLASTTIME OR
(((STATSINSERTS+STATSDELETES+STATSUPDATES)100)/TOTALROWS>SRTInsDelUpdPct AND
STATSMASSDELETE>SRTMassDeleteLimit)))
Figure 162. DSNACCOX formula for recommending RUNSTATS on a table space
909

(ObjectType='IX' OR ObjectType='ALL')
Table Space for the index is not cloned ) AND
(((STATSINSERTS+STATSDELETES)100)/TOTALENTRIES>SRIInsDelUpdPct AND
(STATSINSERTS+STATSDELETES)>SRIInsDelAbs) OR
STATSMASSDELETE>SRIInsDelAbs)))
Figure 163. DSNACCOX formula for recommending RUNSTATS on an index space

QUERYTYPE CHAR(40))
CCSID EBCDIC;

DBNAME
NAME
QUERYTYPE
If you put a null value in this column, DSNACCOX puts the value YES in the
910


Example: Suppose that you want to include all rows for database DSNDB04 in the
recommendations result set, except for those rows that contain the string
Example
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The figure below is a COBOL example that shows variable declarations and an
SQL CALL for obtaining recommendations for objects in databases DSN8D91A and
retrieve the two result sets that DSNACCOX returns. These result sets are
described in DSNACCOX output on page 915. See DB2 Application Programming
and SQL Guide for more information about how to retrieve result sets from a stored
procedure.
***********************
* DSNACCOX PARAMETERS *
***********************
01 QUERYTYPE.
49
QUERYTYPE-LN
49
QUERYTYPE-DTA
01 OBJECTTYPE.
49
OBJECTTYPE-LN
49
OBJECTTYPE-DTA
01 ICTYPE.
49
ICTYPE-LN
49
ICTYPE-DTA
01 STATSSCHEMA.
49
STATSSCHEMA-LN
49
STATSSCHEMA-DTA
01 CATLGSCHEMA.
49
CATLGSCHEMA-LN
49
CATLGSCHEMA-DTA
01 LOCALSCHEMA.
49
LOCALSCHEMA-LN
49
LOCALSCHEMA-DTA
01 CHKLVL
01 CRITERIA.
49
CRITERIA-LN
49
CRITERIA-DTA
01 RESTRICTED.
49
RESTRICTED-LN
49
RESTRICTED-DTA
01 CRUPDATEDPAGESPCT
01 CRUPDATEDPAGESABS
01 CRCHANGESPCT
01 CRDAYSNCLASTCOPY
01 ICRUPDATEDPAGESPCT
01 ICRCHANGESPCT
01 CRINDEXSIZE
01 RRTINSERTPCT
01 RRTINSERTABS
911
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
RRTDELETEPCT
RRTDELETEABS
RRTUNCLUSTINSPCT
RRTDISORGLOBPCT
RRTDATASPACERAT
RRTMASSDELLIMIT
RRTINDREFLIMIT
RRIINSERTPCT
RRIINSERTABS
RRIDELETEPCT
RRIDELETEABS
RRIAPPENDINSERTPCT
RRIPSEUDODELETEPCT
RRIMASSDELLIMIT
RRILEAFLIMIT
RRINUMLEVELSLIMIT
SRTINSDELUPDPCT
SRTINSDELUPDABS
SRTMASSDELLIMIT
SRIINSDELPCT
SRIINSDELABS
SRIMASSDELLIMIT
EXTENTLIMIT
LASTSTATEMENT.
49
LASTSTATEMENT-LN
49
LASTSTATEMENT-DTA
RETURNCODE
ERRORMSG.
49
ERRORMSG-LN
49
ERRORMSG-DTA
IFCARETCODE
IFCARESCODE
EXCESSBYTES
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.

PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
S9(4) COMP VALUE 1331.

X(1331) VALUE SPACES.
S9(9) COMP VALUE +0.
*****************************************
*
*
*
*****************************************
01 QUERYTYPE-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 OBJECTTYPE-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 ICTYPE-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 STATSSCHEMA-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 CATLGSCHEMA-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 LOCALSCHEMA-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 CHKLVL-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 CRITERIA-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 RESTRICTED-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 CRUPDATEDPAGESPCT-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 CRUPDATEDPAGESABS-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 CRCHANGESPCT-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 CRDAYSNCLASTCOPY-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 ICRUPDATEDPAGESPCT-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 ICRCHANGESPCT-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 CRINDEXSIZE-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 RRTINSERTPCT-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 RRTINSERTABS-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 RRTDELETEPCT-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 RRTDELETEABS-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 RRTUNCLUSTINSPCT-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 RRTDISORGLOBPCT-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 RRTDATASPACERAT-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 RRTMASSDELLIMIT-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 RRTINDREFLIMIT-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 RRIINSERTPCT-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 RRIINSERTABS-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 RRIDELETEPCT-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
912
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
+0.
+0.
+0.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
RRIDELETEABS-IND
RRIMASSDELLIMIT-IND
RRILEAFLIMIT-IND
SRTINSDELUPDPCT-IND
SRTINSDELUPDABS-IND
SRTMASSDELLIMIT-IND
SRIINSDELPCT-IND
SRIINSDELABS-IND
SRIMASSDELLIMIT-IND
EXTENTLIMIT-IND
LASTSTATEMENT-IND
RETURNCODE-IND
ERRORMSG-IND
IFCARETCODE-IND
IFCARESCODE-IND
EXCESSBYTES-IND
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0
PROCEDURE DIVISION.
*********************************************************
* SET VALUES FOR DSNACCOX INPUT PARAMETERS:
*
* - USE THE CHKLVL PARAMETER TO CAUSE DSNACCOX TO CHECK *
*
FOR RELATED TABLE SPACES WHEN PROCESSING INDEX
*
*
SPACES, AND DELETE RECOMMENDATION FOR INDEXSPACES
*
*
WHEN AN ACTION (SUCH AS REORG) ON THE TABLE SPACE
*
*
WILL ALSO CAUSE THE ACTION TO BE DONE ON THE INDEX *
*
SPACE. (CHKLVL=64)
*
* - USE THE CRITERIA PARAMETER TO CAUSE DSNACCOX TO
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
CRUPDATEDPAGESPCT
4
*
*
CRCHANGESPCT
2
*
*
RRTINSDELUPDPCT
2
*
*
RRTUNCLUSTINSPCT
5
*
*
RRTDISORGLOBPCT
5
*
*
*
*
SRTINSDELUPDPCT
5
*
*
SRIINSDELPCT
5
*
*
EXTENTLIMIT
3
*
* - EXCLUDE CHECKING FOR THESE CRITERIA BY SET THE
*
*
FOLLOWING VALUES TO A NEGATIVE VALUE.
*
*
RRTMASSDELLIMIT
-1
*
*
RRIMASSDELLIMIT
-1
*
*********************************************************
MOVE 64 TO CHKLVL.
TO CRITERIA-DTA.
MOVE 2 TO RRTINSERTPCT.
MOVE 5 TO SRIINSDELPCT.
MOVE -1 TO RRTMASSDELLIMIT.
MOVE -1 TO RRIMASSDELLIMIT.
********************************
********************************
913
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*******************************************************
*
* DSNACCOX TO USE DEFAULT VALUES) AND FOR OUTPUT
*
* PARAMETERS.
*
*******************************************************
MOVE 0 TO RRTINSERTPCT-IND.
MOVE 0 TO SRIINSDELPCT-IND.
MOVE 0 TO RRTMASSDELLIMIT-IND.
MOVE 0 TO RRIMASSDELLIMIT-IND.
*****************
* CALL DSNACCOX *
*****************
EXEC SQL
CALL SYSPROC.DSNACCOX
(:QUERYTYPE
:OBJECTTYPE
:ICTYPE
:STATSSCHEMA
:CATLGSCHEMA
:LOCALSCHEMA
:CHKLVL
:CRITERIA
:RESTRICTED
:CRUPDATEDPAGESPCT
:CRUPDATEDPAGESABS
:CRCHANGESPCT
:CRDAYSNCLASTCOPY
:ICRUPDATEDPAGESPCT
:ICRCHANGESPCT
:CRINDEXSIZE
:RRTINSERTPCT
:RRTINSERTABS
:RRTDELETEPCT
:RRTDELETEABS
:RRTUNCLUSTINSPCT
:RRTDISORGLOBPCT
:RRTDATASPACERAT
:RRTMASSDELLIMIT
:RRTINDREFLIMIT
:RRIINSERTPCT
:RRIINSERTABS
:RRIDELETEPCT
:RRIDELETEABS
:RRIAPPENDINSERTPCT
914
:QUERYTYPE-IND,
:OBJECTTYPE-IND,
:ICTYPE-IND,
:STATSSCHEMA-IND,
:CATLGSCHEMA-IND,
:LOCALSCHEMA-IND,
:CHKLVL-IND,
:CRITERIA-IND,
:RESTRICTED-IND,
:CRUPDATEDPAGESABS-IND,
:CRCHANGESPCT-IND,
:ICRUPDATEDPAGESPCT-IND,
:ICRCHANGESPCT-IND,
:CRINDEXSIZE-IND,
:RRTINSERTPCT-IND,
:RRTINSERTABS-IND,
:RRTDELETEPCT-IND,
:RRTDELETEABS-IND,
:RRTDATASPACERAT-IND,
:RRIINSERTPCT-IND,
:RRIINSERTABS-IND,
:RRIDELETEPCT-IND,
:RRIDELETEABS-IND,
:RRIAPPENDINSERTPCT-IND,
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*************************************************************
*
*************************************************************
WITH PROCEDURE SYSPROC.DSNACCOX
END-EXEC.
END-EXEC.
END-EXEC.
DSNACCOX output
|
|
|
If DSNACCOX executes successfully, in addition to the output parameters

described in Option descriptions on page 897, DSNACCOX returns two result
sets.
|
|
The first result set contains the results from IFI COMMAND calls that DSNACCOX
Table 163. Result set row for first DSNACCOX result set
Column name
Data type
Contents
RS_SEQUENCE
INTEGER
|
|
RS_DATA
CHAR(80)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The second result set contains DSNACCOXs recommendations. This result set
:RRIPSEUDODELETEPCT
:RRIMASSDELLIMIT
:RRILEAFLIMIT
:RRINUMLEVELSLIMIT
:SRTINSDELUPDPCT
:SRTINSDELUPDABS
:SRTMASSDELLIMIT
:SRIINSDELPCT
:SRIINSDELABS
:SRIMASSDELLIMIT
:EXTENTLIMIT
:LASTSTATEMENT
:RETURNCODE
:ERRORMSG
:IFCARETCODE
:IFCARESCODE
:EXCESSBYTES
END-EXEC.
:RRIPSEUDODELETEPCT-IND,
:RRILEAFLIMIT-IND,
:SRIINSDELPCT-IND,
:SRIINSDELABS-IND,
:EXTENTLIMIT-IND,
:LASTSTATEMENT-IND,
:RETURNCODE-IND,
:ERRORMSG-IND,
:IFCARETCODE-IND,
:IFCARESCODE-IND,
:EXCESSBYTES-IND)
v DSNACCOX recommends at least one action for the table space, index space, or
partition.
915
| Table 164. Result set row for second DSNACCOX result set
| Column name
Data type
Description
| DBNAME
VARCHAR(24)
| NAME
VARCHARCHAR(128)
| PARTITION
INTEGER
| INSTANCE
|
INTEGER
Indicates if the object is associated with a data set

instance.
| CLONE
CHAR(1)
Y or N, Y indicates a cloned object.
| OBJECTTYPE
|
|
CHAR(2)
DB2 object type:
| INDEXSPACE
VARCHAR(24)
Index space name.
| CREATOR
VARCHAR(128)
Index creator name.
CHAR(36)
OBJECTSTATUS

v ORPHANED, if the object is an index space with

no corresponding table space, or if the object does
not exist
v If the object is in a restricted state, one of the
following values:
restricted-state is one of the status codes that appear
in DISPLAY DATABASE output. See DB2 Command
Reference for details.
v L, if the object is a logical partition, but not in an
advisory state.
v AL, if the object is a logical partition and in an
advisory state.
IMAGECOPY
CHAR(4)
v If OBJECTTYPE is TS: FULL (full image copy), INC
RUNSTATS
CHAR(3)
EXTENTS
CHAR(3)
Indicates whether the data sets for the object have

exceeded ExtentLimit: YES or NO.
REORG
CHAR(3)
916
Table 164. Result set row for second DSNACCOX result set (continued)
Column name
Data type
Description
INEXCEPTTABLE
CHAR(40)

v Text that you specify in the QUERYTYPE column
of the exception table.
v YES, if you put a row in the exception table for the
object that this result set row represents, but you
specify NULL in the QUERYTYPE column.
v NO, if the exception table exists but does not have
a row for the object that this result set row
represents.
v Null, if the exception table does not exist, or if the
ChkLvl input parameter does not include the value
4.
ASSOCIATEDTS
CHAR(8)
If OBJECTTYPE is IX this value is the name of the

table space that is associated with the index space.
Otherwise null.
COPYLASTTIME
TIMESTAMP
Timestamp of the last full image copy on the object.

Null if COPY was never run, or if the last COPY
execution is unknown.
LOADRLASTTIME
TIMESTAMP
Timestamp of the last LOAD REPLACE on the object.

Null if LOAD REPLACE was never run, or if the last
LOAD REPLACE execution is unknown.
REBUILDLASTTIME
TIMESTAMP
Timestamp of the last REBUILD INDEX on the object.

Null if REBUILD INDEX was never run, or if the last
REBUILD INDEX execution is unknown.
CRUPDPGSPCT
DOUBLE
IF OBJECTTYPE is TS or IX and IMAGECOPY is YES,

the ratio of distinct updated pages to pre-formatted
pages, expressed as a percentage. Otherwise null.
If the ratio of distinct updated pages to pre-formatted
pages, does not exceed the CRUpdatedPagesPct (for
table spaces) or ICRUpdatedPagesPct (for indexes),
this value is null.
CRUPDPGSABS
INTEGER

pages. Otherwise null.
pages, does not exceed the value specified
forCRUpdatedPagesPct (for table spaces) or
ICRUpdatedPagesPct (for indexes), this value is null.
917
Column name
Data type
Description
CRCPYCHGPCT
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS and IMAGECOPY is YES, the

ratio of the total number insert, update, and delete
operations since the last image copy to the total
number of rows or LOBs in the table space or
partition, expressed as a percentage. If OBJECTTYPE
is IX and IMAGECOPY is YES, the ratio of the total
number of insert and delete operations since the last
image copy to the total number of entries in the
index space or partition, expressed as a percentage.
Otherwise null.
If the ratio of the total number insert, update, and
delete operations since the last image copy to the
total number of rows or LOBs in the table space or
partition does not exceed the value specified
forCRChangesPct (for table spaces) or ICRChangesPct
(for index spaces), this value is null.
CRDAYSCELSTCPY
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS or IX and IMAGECOPY is YES,

the number of days since the last image copy.
Otherwise null.
If the number of days since the last image copy does
not exceed the value specified for CrDaySncLastCopy,
this value is null.
CRINDEXSIZE
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is IX and IMAGECOPY is YES, the

number of active pages in the index space or
partition. Otherwise null.
If the the number of active pages in the index space
or partition does not exceed the value specified for
CRIndexSize, this value is null.
REORGLASTTIME
TIMESTAMP
Timestamp of the last REORG on the object. Null if

REORG was never run, or if the last REORG
execution was terminated.
RRTINSERTSPCT
DOUBLE
If OBJECTTYPE is TS and REORG is YES, the ratio of

the sum of insert, update, and delete operations since
the last REORG to the total number of rows or LOBs
in the table space or partition, expressed as a
If the ratio of the sum of insert, update, and delete
operations since the last REORG to the total number
of rows or LOBs in the table space or partition does
not exceed the value specified for RRTInsertPct, this
value is null.
RRTINSERTSABS
INTEGER

the sum of insert operations since the last REORG to
the total number of rows in the table space or
If the the ratio of the sum of insert operations since
the last REORG to the total number of rows in the
table space or partition does not exceed the value
specified for RRTInsertAbs, this value is null.
918
Column name
Data type
Description
RRTDELETESPCT
DOUBLE
If the OBJECTTYTPE is TS and REORG is YES, the

ratio of the sum of delete operations since the last
REORG to the total number of rows in the table
space or partition, expressed as a percentage.
Otherwise null.
If the ratio of the sum of delete operations since the
last REORG to the total number of rows in the table
space or partition does not exceed the value specified
for RRTDeletePct, this value is null.
RRTDELETESABS
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS and REORG is YES, the total

number of delete operations since the last REORG on
a table space or partition. Otherwise null.
If the the total number of delete operations since the
last REORG does not exceed the value specified for
RRTDeleteAbs, this value is null.
RRTUNCINSPCT
DOUBLE

the number of unclustered insert operations to the
If the the ratio of the number of unclustered insert
operations to the total number of rows or LOBs does
not exceed the value specified for RRTUnclustInsPct,
this value is null.
RRTDISORGLOBPCT
DOUBLE

the number of imperfectly chunked LOBs to the total
If the the ratio of the number of imperfectly chunked
LOBs to the total number of rows or LOBs in the
table space or partition does not exceed the value of
RRTDisorgLOBPct, this value is null
| RRTDATASPACERAT
|
|
DOUBLE
If OBJECTTYPE is TS and REORG is YES,the ratio of

the number of SPACE allocated and the space used,
exceed RRTDataSpaceRat threshold. Otherwise null.
RRTMASSDELETE
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS, REORG is YES, and the table

space is a segmented table space or LOB table space,
the number of mass deletes since the last REORG or
LOAD REPLACE. If OBJECTTYPE is TS, REORG is
YES, and the table space is nonsegmented, the
number of dropped tables since the last REORG or
LOAD REPLACE. Otherwise null.
If the number of the number of dropped tables since
the last REORG or LOAD REPLACE does not exceed
the value specified for RRTMassDelLimit, this value is
null.
919
Column name
Data type
Description
RRTINDREF
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS, REORG is YES, the ratio of the

total number of overflow records that were created
since the last REORG or LOAD REPLACE to the total
If the ratio of the total number of overflow records
that were created since the last REORG or LOAD
REPLACE to the total number of rows or LOBs does
not exceed the value specified for RRTIndRef, this
value is null.
RRIINSERTPCT
DOUBLE
If OBJECTTYPE is IX and REORG is YES, the ratio of

the total number of insert operations since the last
REORG to the total number of index entries in the
Otherwise null.
If the ratio of the total number of insert operations
since the last REORG to the total number of index
entries does not exceed the value specified for
RRIInsertPct, this value is null.
RRIINSERTABS
INTEGER
If OBJECTYPE is IX and REORG is YES, t total

number of insert operations since the last REORG.
Otherwise null.
If the total number of insert operations since the last
REORG does not exceed the value specified for
RRTInsertAbs, this value is null.
RRIDELETEPCT
DOUBLE

the total number of delete operations since the last
Otherwise null.
If the ratio of the total number of delete operations
RRIDeletePct, this value is null.
RRIDELETABS
INTEGER
If OBJECTYPE is IX and REORG is YES, the total

number of delete operations since the last REORG.
Otherwise null.
920
Column name
Data type
Description
RRIAPPINSPCT
DOUBLE

the number of index entries that were inserted since
the last REORG, REBUILD INDEX, or LOAD
REPLACE that had a key value greater than the
maximum key value in the index space or partition,
to the number of index entries in the index space or
If the ratio of the number of index entries that were
inserted, which had a key value greater than the
maximum key value, to the number of index entries
does not exceed the value specified for
RRIAppendInsertPct, this value is null.
RRIPSDDELPCT
INTEGER

the number of index entries that were pseudo-deleted
(the RID entry was marked as deleted) since the last
REORG, REBUILD INDEX, or LOAD REPLACE to
the number of index entries in the index space or
pseudo-deleted since the last REORG, REBUILD
INDEX, or LOAD REPLACE to the number of index
RRIPseudoDeletePct, this value is null.
RRIMASSDELETE
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is IX and REORG is YES, the number

of mass deletes from the index space or partition
since the last REORG, REBUILD, or LOAD
REPLACE. Otherwise null.
If the number of mass deletes from the index space or
partition since the last REORG, REBUILD, or LOAD
REPLACE does not exceed the value specified for
RRIMassDelLimit, this value is null.
RRILEAF
INTEGER

the number of index page splits that occurred since
REPLACE in which the higher part of the split page
was far from the location of the original page, to the
total number of active pages in the index space or
If the ratio of the number of index page splits that
occurred since the last REORG, REBUILD INDEX, or
LOAD REPLACE to the total number of active pages
does not exceed the value specified for RRILeafLimit,
this value is null.
RRINUMLEVELS
INTEGER

of levels in the index tree that were added or
removed since the last REORG, REBUILD INDEX, or
If the number of levels in the index tree that were
added or removed does not exceed the value
specified for RRINumLevelsLimit, this value is null.
921
Column name
Data type
Description
STATSLASTTIME
TIMESTAMP
Timestamp of the last RUNSTATS on the object. Null

if RUNSTATS was never run, or if the last
RUNSTATS execution was unknown.
SRTINSDELUPDPCT
DOUBLE
If OBJECTTYPE is TS and RUNSTATS is YES, the

ratio of the total number of insert, update, and delete
operations since the last RUNSTATS on a table space
or partition, to the total number of rows or LOBs in
the table space or partition, expressed as a
If the ratio of the total number of insert, update, and
delete operations since the last RUNSTATS to the
total number of rows or LOBs does not exceed the
value specified for SRTInsDelUpdPct, this value is
null.
SRTINSDELUPDABS
INTEGER

total number of insert, update, and delete operations
since the last RUNSTATS on a table space or
If the total number of insert, update, and delete
operations since the last RUNSTATS does not exceed
the value specified for SRTInsDelUpdAbs, this value is
null.
SRTMASSDELETE
INTEGER

number of mass deletes from the table space or
partition since the last REORG or LOAD REPLACE.
Otherwise null.
If the number of mass deletes from the table space or
partition since the last REORG or LOAD REPLACE
SRTMassDelLimit, this value is null.
SRIINSDELPCT
DOUBLE
If OBJECTTYPE is IX and RUNSTATS is YES, the

ratio of the total number of insert and delete
operations since the last RUNSTATS on the index
space or partition, to the total number of index
entries in the index space or partition, expressed as a
If the ratio of the total number of insert and delete
operations since the last RUNSTATS, to the total
number of index entries does not exceed the value
specified for SRIInsDelPct, this value is null.
SRIINSDELABS
INTEGER

number insert and delete operations since the last
RUNSTATS on the index space or partition.
Otherwise null.
the value specified for SRIINSDELABS, this value is
null.
922
Column name
Data type
Description
SRIMASSDELETE
INTEGER

number of mass deletes from the index space or
partition since the last REORG, REBUILD INDEX, or
LOAD REPLACE. Otherwise, this value is null.
If the number of mass deletes does not exceed the
value specified for SRIMassDelete, this value is null.
TOTALEXTENTS
SMALLINT
If EXTENTS is YES, the number of physical extents in

the table space, index space, or partition. Otherwise,
this value is null.
If the number of physical extents does not exceed the
value specified for ExtentLimit, this value is null.
PSPI
923
924
Appendix C. Advisory or restrictive states

To control access and help ensure data integrity, DB2 sets a restrictive or
nonrestrictive (advisory) status on certain objects. This topic outlines the restrictive
and nonrestrictive (advisory) object statuses that affect utilities, and the required
steps to correct each status for a particular object.
Use the DISPLAY DATABASE command to display the current status for an object.
In addition to the states mentioned in this topic, the output from the DISPLAY
DATABASE command might also indicate that an object is in logical page list
(LPL) status. This state means that the pages that are listed in the LPL PAGES
column are logically in error and are unavailable for access. DB2 writes entries for
these pages in an LPL.
Related information
Removing pages from the logical page list (DB2 Administration Guide)
Auxiliary CHECK-pending status

The auxiliary CHECK-pending (ACHKP) restrictive status is set on when at least
one base table LOB column error is detected and not invalidated as a result of
running CHECK DATA AUXERROR REPORT.
A base table space with the NOT LOGGED attribute and its LOB table spaces,
which also have the NOT LOGGED attribute, are recovered to the current point in
time in the same RECOVER utility invocation. The base table space is put in the
auxiliary CHECK-pending state.
Refer to the following table for information about resetting the auxiliary
CHECK-pending status. This table lists the status name, abbreviation, affected
object, and any corrective actions.
Table 165. Resetting auxiliary CHECK-pending status
|
|
|
|
|
|
Status
Abbreviation
Object affected
Corrective action
Notes
Auxiliary
CHECKpending
ACHKP
Base table space
1. Update or delete invalid LOBs and XML

objects using SQL.
2. Run the CHECK DATA utility with the

appropriate SCOPE option to verify the
validity of LOBs and XML objects and reset
ACHKP status.
You can use the REPAIR utility, followed by
CHECK DATA, to reset the ACHKP status, but
use caution.
Note:
1. A base table space in the ACHKP status is unavailable for processing by SQL.
925
Auxiliary warning status

Auxiliary warning (AUXW) status is set on when at least one base table LOB
column has an invalidated LOB as a result of running CHECK DATA AUXERROR
INVALIDATE. An attempt to retrieve an invalidated LOB results in a -904 SQL
return code.
A base table space with the NOT LOGGED attribute and its LOB table spaces,
which also have the NOT LOGGED attribute, are recovered to the current point in
time in the same RECOVER utility invocation. The LOB table spaces are put in the
auxiliary warning state if there were updates to the LOB table spaces after the
recoverable point.
The RECOVER utility also sets AUXW status if it finds an invalid LOB column.
Invalid LOB columns might result from a situation in which all the following
actions occur:
1. LOB table space was defined with LOG NO.
2. LOB table space was recovered.
3. LOB was updated since the last image copy.
Refer to the following table for information about resetting the auxiliary warning
status. This table lists the status name, abbreviation, affected objects, and any
corrective actions.
Table 166. Resetting auxiliary warning status
Status
| Auxiliary
| warning
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Auxiliary
| warning
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Abbreviation
Object affected
Corrective action
Notes
AUXW
Base table space

objects using SQL.
1,2,3
2. If an orphan LOB exists or a version

mismatch exists between the base table and
the auxiliary index, use REPAIR to delete the
LOB from the LOB table space.
3. Run CHECK DATA utility to verify the
AUXW status.
AUXW
LOB table space

objects using SQL.
2. If an orphan LOB exists or a version

mismatch exists between the base table and
the auxiliary index, use REPAIR to delete the
LOB from the LOB table space.
3. Run CHECK LOB utility to verify the
AUXW status.
Note:
1. A base table space or LOB table space in the AUXW status is available for processing by SQL, even though it
contains invalid LOBs. However, an attempt to retrieve an invalid LOB results in a -904 SQL return code.
2. DB2 can access all rows of a base table space that are in the AUXW status. SQL can update the invalid LOB
column and delete base table rows, but the value of the LOB column cannot be retrieved. If DB2 attempts to
access an invalid LOB column, a -904 SQL code is returned. The AUXW status remains on the base table space
even when SQL deletes or updates the last invalid LOB column.
3. If CHECK DATA AUXERROR REPORT encounters only invalid LOB columns and no other LOB column errors,
the base table space is set to the auxiliary warning status.
926
The CHECK-pending (CHKP) restrictive status indicates that an object might be in
an inconsistent state and must be checked.
The following utilities set the CHECK-pending status on a table space if referential
integrity constraints are encountered:
v LOAD with ENFORCE NO
v RECOVER to a point in time
v CHECK LOB
The CHECK-pending status can also affect a base table space or a LOB table space.
DB2 ignores informational referential integrity constraints and does not set
CHECK-pending status for them.
Refer to the following table for information about resetting the CHECK-pending
corrective actions.
Table 167. Resetting CHECK-pending status
Status
Abbreviation
Object affected
Corrective action
CHECKpending
CHKP
Table space, base table

space
Check and correct referential integrity

constraints using the CHECK DATA utility.
Notes
If a table space is in both REORG-pending and

CHECK-pending status (or auxiliary
CHECK-pending status), run REORG first and
then use CHECK DATA to clear the respective
states.
CHECKpending
CHKP
CHECKpending
CHKP
Partitioning index,
nonpartitioning index,
index on the auxiliary
table
1. Run CHECK INDEX on the index.
LOB table space
Use the CHECK LOB utility to check the LOB

table space. If any errors are found:
2. If any errors are found, use the REBUILD

INDEX utility to rebuild the index from
existing data.
1. Correct any defects that are found in the

LOB table space by using the REPAIR utility.
2. Run CHECK LOB again to reset the
3. See Table 166 on page 926 if an AUXW
status exists.
Note:
| 1. An index might be placed in the CHECK-pending status if you recovered an index to a specific RBA or LRSN
|
from a copy and applied the log records, but you did not recover the table space in the same list. The
|
CHECK-pending status can also be placed on an index if you specified the table space and the index, but the
|
RECOVER point in time was not a QUIESCE or COPY SHRLEVEL REFERENCE point.
COPY-pending status
The COPY-pending (COPY) restrictive status indicates that the affected object must
be copied.
927
DB2 ignores informational referential integrity constraints and does not set
CHECK-pending status for them.
Refer to the following table for information about resetting the COPY-pending
corrective actions.
Table 168. Resetting COPY-pending status
Status
Abbreviation
Object affected
Corrective action
COPYpending
COPY
Table space, table space

partition
Take an image copy of the affected object.
Notes
DBET error status
The DBETE status identifies the objects that need special attention by the user.
|
|
|
|
|
To reduce outages caused by certain DBET abends during restart or RESTORE

SYSTEM, DB2 tolerates such abends and puts objects into advisory status DBETE,
as well as a restrictive exception status that requires objects to be recovered. The
recovery exception status is RECP, RBDP, or PSRBD depending on the type of
object.
|
|
|
Refer to the following table for information about resetting the DBET error status.
This table lists the status name, abbreviation, affected objects, and any corrective
actions.
| Table 169. Resetting DBET error status

| Status
Abbreviation
Object affected
Corrective action
| DBET error
|
|
|
|
DBETE

partition, index space,
index partition, or logical
index partition
Contact IBM Software Support to report the

problem. DB2 log records need to be analyzed
to diagnose the cause of the problem and
determine further actions.
Notes
Group buffer pool RECOVER-pending status

The group buffer pool RECOVER-pending (GRECP) status is set on when a
coupling facility fails with pages that were not externalized. The affected object
must be recovered
Refer to the following table for information about resetting the group buffer pool
RECOVER-pending status. This table lists the status name, abbreviation, affected
objects, and any corrective actions.
Table 170. Resetting group buffer pool RECOVER-pending status
Status
Abbreviation
Group buffer GRECP

pool
RECOVERpending
928
Object affected
Corrective action
Object
Recover the object, or use START DATABASE to

recover the object.
Notes
Informational COPY-pending status

The informational COPY-pending (ICOPY) advisory status indicates that the
affected object should be copied.
Refer to the following table for information about resetting the informational
COPY-pending status. This table lists the status name, abbreviation, affected
objects, and any corrective actions.
Table 171. Resetting informational COPY-pending status
Status
Abbreviation
Object affected
Corrective action
Informational ICOPY
COPYpending
NOT LOGGED table

spaces
Copy the affected table space.
Informational ICOPY
COPYpending
Partitioning index,
nonpartitioning index,
index on the auxiliary
table
Copy the affected index.
Notes
REBUILD-pending status
A REBUILD-pending restrictive status indicates that the affected index or index
partition is broken and must be rebuilt from the data.
REBUILD-pending (RBDP) status indicates that the physical or logical partition is
inaccessible and must be rebuilt. RBDP status is set on a data-partitioned
secondary index if you create the index after performing the following actions:
v Create a partitioned table space.
v Create a partitioning index.
v Insert a row into a table.
In this situation, the last partition of the table space is set to REORG-pending
(REORP) restrictive status.
REBUILD-pending star (RBDP*) status indicates that a logical partition of a
nonpartitioned secondary index is unavailable for read-write access and the entire
index is unavailable for read access.
Page set REBUILD-pending (PSRBD) status indicates that an entire nonpartitioned
secondary index or index on the auxiliary table is unavailable for read-write access.
Rebuilding an index and thereby resetting the REBUILD-pending status invalidates
the dynamic statement cache for the related table.
If you alter the data type of a column to a numeric data type, RECOVER INDEX
cannot complete. You must rebuild the index.
Refer to the following table for information about resetting a REBUILD-pending
corrective actions.
929
Table 172. Resetting REBUILD-pending status

Status
Abbreviation
Object affected
Corrective action
REBUILDpending
RBDP
Physical or logical index

partition
Run the REBUILD utility on the affected index

partition.
REBUILDpending star
RBDP*
Logical partitions of
Run REBUILD INDEX PART or RECOVER
nonpartitioned secondary utility on the affected logical partitions.
indexes
Page set
REBUILDpending
PSRBD
Nonpartitioned
secondary index, index
on the auxiliary table
REBUILDpending
RBDP, RBDP*, all

or PSRBD
Notes
Run REBUILD INDEX ALL, the RECOVER

utility, or run REBUILD INDEX listing all
indexes in the affected index space.
The following actions also reset the
REBUILD-pending status:
v Use LOAD REPLACE for the table space or
partition.
v Use REPAIR SET INDEX with NORBDPEND
on the index partition. Be aware that this
does not correct the data inconsistency in the
index partition. Use CHECK INDEX instead
of REPAIR to verify referential integrity
constraints.
v Start the database that contains the index
space with ACCESS FORCE. Be aware that
this does not correct the data inconsistency in
the index partition.
v Run REORG INDEX SORTDATA on the
affected index.
RECOVER-pending status
The RECOVER-pending (RECP) restrictive status indicates that a table space or
table space partition is broken and must be recovered.
Refer to the following table for information about resetting the RECOVER-pending
corrective actions.
Table 173. Resetting RECOVER-pending status
Status
Abbreviation
Object affected
Corrective action
RECOVERpending
RECP
Table space
Run the RECOVER utility on the affected object.
RECOVERpending
RECP
Table space partition
Recover the partition.
RECOVERpending
RECP
Index on the auxiliary

table
Correct the RECOVER-pending status by using

one of the following utilities:
v REBUILD INDEX
v RECOVER INDEX
v REORG INDEX SORTDATA
RECOVERpending
RECP
Index space
Run one of the following utilities on the affected

index space to reset RECP, RBDP, RBDP*, or
PSRBDP status:
v REBUILD INDEX
v RECOVER INDEX
v REORG INDEX SORTDATA
930
Notes
Table 173. Resetting RECOVER-pending status (continued)

Status
Abbreviation
Object affected
Corrective action
RECOVERpending
RECP
Any
The following actions also reset the

RECOVER-pending status:
Notes
v Use LOAD REPLACE for the table space or

partition.
v Use REPAIR SET TABLESPACE or INDEX
with NORCVRPEND on the table space or
partition. Be aware that this does not correct
the data inconsistency in the table space or
partition.
v Start the database that contains the table
space or index space with ACCESS FORCE.
Be aware that this does not correct the data
inconsistency in the table space or partition.
REFRESH-pending status
Whenever DB2 marks an object in refresh-pending (REFP) status, it also puts the
object in RECOVER-pending (RECP) or REBUILD-pending (RBDP or PSRBD).
If a user-defined table space is in refresh-pending (REFP) status, you can replace
the data by using LOAD REPLACE. At the successful completion of the RECOVER
and LOAD REPLACE jobs, both (REFP and RECP or REFP and RBDP or PSRBD)
statuses are reset.
The REORG-pending (REORP) restrictive status indicates that a table space
partition definition has changed and the affected partitions must be reorganized
before the data is accessible.
The REORG-pending (AREO*) advisory status indicates that a table space, index,
or partition needs to be reorganized for optimal performance.
Refer to the following table for information about resetting the REORG-pending
corrective actions.
Table 174. Resetting REORG-pending status
Status
Abbreviation
Object affected
Corrective action
REORGpending
REORP
Table space
Perform one of the following actions:
Notes
v Use LOAD REPLACE for the entire table

space.
v Run the REORG TABLESPACE utility with
SHRLEVEL NONE.
If a table space is in both REORG-pending
and CHECK-pending status (or auxiliary
CHECK-pending status), run REORG first
and then run CHECK DATA to clear the
respective states.
v Run REORG PARTm:n SHRLEVEL NONE.
931
Table 174. Resetting REORG-pending status (continued)

Status
Abbreviation
Object affected
Corrective action
REORGpending
REORP
Partitioned table space
For row lengths <= 32 KB:
Notes
1. Run REORG TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL

NONE SORTDATA.
For row lengths > 32 KB:
1. Run REORG TABLESPACE UNLOAD
ONLY.
2. Run LOAD TABLE FORMAT UNLOAD.
Advisory
REORGpending
AREO*
Table space
Run one of the following utilities:
v REORG TABLESPACE
v LOAD REPLACE
v REPAIR TABLESPACE
Advisory
REORGpending
AREO*
Index space
Run one of the following utilities:
v REORG TABLESPACE
v LOAD REPLACE
v REORG INDEX
v REPAIR INDEX
Note:
1.
You can reset AREO* for a specific partition without being restricted by another AREO* for an adjacent partition.
When you run REPAIR VERSIONS, the utility resets the status and updates the version information in
SYSTABLEPART for table spaces and SYSINDEXES for indexes.
Restart-pending status
The restart-pending (RESTP) status is set on if an object has backout work pending
at the end of DB2 restart.
Refer to the following table for information about resetting the restart-pending
corrective actions.
Table 175. Resetting restart-pending status
Status
Abbreviation
Object affected
Corrective action
Notes
Restartpending
RESTP

partitions, index spaces,
and physical index space
partitions
Objects in the RESTP status remain unavailable

until backout work is complete, or until restart
is canceled and a conditional restart or cold
start is performed in its place.
1,2,3
Note:
1. Delay running REORG TABLESPACE SHRLEVEL CHANGE until all RESTP statuses are reset.
2. You cannot use LOAD REPLACE on an object that is in the RESTP status.
3. Utility activity against page sets or partitions with RESTP status is not allowed. Any attempt to access a page set
or partition with RESTP status terminates with return code 8.
Related information
Starting a table space or index space that has restrictions (DB2 Administration
Guide)
932
Appendix D. Productivity-aid sample programs

DB2 provides four sample programs that many users find helpful as productivity
aids. These programs are shipped as source code, so you can modify them to meet
your needs.
DSNTIAUL
The sample unload program. This program, which is written in assembler
language, is a simple alternative to the UNLOAD utility. It unloads some
or all rows from up to 100 DB2 tables. With DSNTIAUL, you can unload
data of any DB2 built-in data type or distinct type. DSNTIAUL unloads the
rows in a form that is compatible with the LOAD utility and generates
utility control statements for LOAD. DSNTIAUL also lets you execute any
SQL non-SELECT statement that can be executed dynamically..
DSNTIAD
A sample dynamic SQL program that is written in assembler language.
With this program, you can execute any SQL statement that can be
executed dynamically, except a SELECT statement.
DSNTEP2
A sample dynamic SQL program that is written in the PL/I language. With
this program, you can execute any SQL statement that can be executed
dynamically. You can use the source version of DSNTEP2 and modify it to
meet your needs, or, if you do not have a PL/I compiler at your
installation, you can use the object code version of DSNTEP2.
DSNTEP4
A sample dynamic SQL program that is written in the PL/I language. This
program is identical to DSNTEP2 except DSNTEP4 uses multi-row fetch for
increased performance. You can use the source version of DSNTEP4 and
modify it to meet your needs, or, if you do not have a PL/I compiler at
your installation, you can use the object code version of DSNTEP4.
Because these four programs also accept the static SQL statements CONNECT, SET
CONNECTION, and RELEASE, you can use the programs to access DB2 tables at
remote locations.
Retrieval of UTF-16 Unicode data: You can use DSNTEP2, DSNTEP4, and
DSNTIAUL to retrieve Unicode UTF-16 graphic data. However, these programs
might not be able to display some characters, if those characters have no mapping
in the target SBCS EBCDIC CCSID.
DSNTIAUL and DSNTIAD are shipped only as source code, so you must
precompile, assemble, link, and bind them before you can use them. If you want to
use the source code version of DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4, you must precompile,
compile, link, and bind it. You need to bind the object code version of DSNTEP2 or
DSNTEP4 before you can use it. Usually a system administrator prepares the
programs as part of the installation process. The following table indicates which
installation job prepares each sample program. All installation jobs are in data set
DSN910.SDSNSAMP.
933
Table 176. Jobs that prepare DSNTIAUL, DSNTIAD, DSNTEP2, and DSNTEP4
Program name
Program preparation job
DSNTIAUL
DSNTEJ2A
DSNTIAD
DSNTIJTM
DSNTEP2 (source)
DSNTEJ1P
DSNTEP2 (object)
DSNTEJ1L
DSNTEP4 (source)
DSNTEJ1P
DSNTEP4 (object)
DSNTEJ1L
To run the sample programs, use the DSN RUN command.

The following table lists the load module name and plan name that you must
specify, and the parameters that you can specify when you run each program.
Table 177. DSN RUN option values for DSNTIAUL, DSNTIAD, DSNTEP2, and DSNTEP4
Program name
Load module
Plan
DSNTIAUL
DSNTIAUL
DSNTIB91
SQL
number of rows per fetch
TOLWARN(NO|YES)
DSNTIAD
DSNTIAD
DSNTIA91
RC0
SQLTERM(termchar)
DSNTEP2
DSNTEP2
DSNTEP91
ALIGN(MID)
or ALIGN(LHS)
NOMIXED or MIXED
SQLTERM(termchar)
TOLWARN(NO|YES)
PREPWARN
DSNTEP4
DSNTEP4
DSNTP491
ALIGN(MID)
or ALIGN(LHS)
NOMIXED or MIXED
SQLTERM(termchar)
TOLWARN(NO|YES)
PREPWARN
Parameters
Related reference
RUN (DSN) (DB2 Command Reference)
DSNTIAUL
Use the DSNTIAUL program to unload data from DB2 tables into sequential data
sets.
This topic contains information that you need when you run DSNTIAUL,
including parameters, data sets, return codes, and invocation examples.
To retrieve data from a remote site by using the multi-row fetch capability for
enhanced performance, bind DSNTIAUL with the DBPROTOCOL(DRDA) option.
To run DSNTIAUL remotely when it is bound with the DBPROTOCOL(PRIVATE)
option, switch DSNTIAUL to single-row fetch mode by specifying 1 for the
number of rows per fetch parameter.
934
DSNTIAUL parameters:
SQL
Specify SQL to indicate that your input data set contains one or more complete
SQL statements, each of which ends with a semicolon. You can include any
SQL statement that can be executed dynamically in your input data set. In
addition, you can include the static SQL statements CONNECT, SET
CONNECTION, or RELEASE. DSNTIAUL uses the SELECT statements to
determine which tables to unload and dynamically executes all other
statements except CONNECT, SET CONNECTION, and RELEASE. DSNTIAUL
executes CONNECT, SET CONNECTION, and RELEASE statically to connect
to remote locations.
number of rows per fetch
Specify a number from 1 to 32767 to specify the number of rows per fetch that
DSNTIAUL retrieves. If you do not specify this number, DSNTIAUL retrieves
100 rows per fetch. This parameter can be specified with the SQL parameter.
Specify 1 to retrieve data from a remote site when DSNTIAUL is bound with
the DBPROTOCOL(PRIVATE) option.
TOLWARN
Specify NO (the default) or YES to indicate whether DSNTIAUL continues to
retrieve rows after receiving an SQL warning:
NO
If a warning occurs when DSNTIAUL executes an OPEN or FETCH to

retrieve rows, DSNTIAUL stops retrieving rows. If the SQLWARN1,
SQLWARN2, SQLWARN6, or SQLWARN7 flag is set when DSNTIAUL
executes a FETCH to retrieve rows, DSNTIAUL continues to retrieve
rows.
YES
If a warning occurs when DSNTIAUL executes an OPEN or FETCH to

retrieve rows, DSNTIAUL continues to retrieve rows.
|
|
|
|
|
LOBFILE(prefix)
Specify LOBFILE to indicate that you want DSNTIAUL to dynamically allocate
data sets, each to receive the full content of a LOB cell. (A LOB cell is the
intersection of a row and a LOB column.) If you do not specify the LOBFILE
option, you can unload up to only 32 KB of data from a LOB column.
|
|
|
|
prefix
Specify a high-level qualifier for these dynamically allocated data sets. You
can specify up to 17 characters. The qualifier must conform with the rules
for TSO data set names.
|
|
|
DSNTIAUL uses a naming convention for these dynamically allocated data sets
of prefix.Qiiiiiii.Cjjjjjjj.Rkkkkkkk, where these qualifiers have the following
values:
|
|
prefix
The high-level qualifier that you specify in the LOBFILE option.
|
|
|
Qiiiiiii
The sequence number (starting from 0) of a query that returns one or more
LOB columns
|
|
|
Cjjjjjjj
The sequence number (starting from 0) of a column in a query that returns
one or more LOB columns
935
|
|
|
Rkkkkkkk
The sequence number (starting from 0) of a row of a result set that has one
or more LOB columns.
|
|
The generated LOAD statement contains LOB file reference variables that can
be used to load data from these dynamically allocated data sets.
If you do not specify the SQL parameter, your input data set must contain one or
more single-line statements (without a semicolon) that use the following syntax:
table or view name [WHERE conditions] [ORDER BY columns]
Each input statement must be a valid SQL SELECT statement with the clause
SELECT * FROM omitted and with no ending semicolon. DSNTIAUL generates a
SELECT statement for each input statement by appending your input line to
SELECT * FROM, then uses the result to determine which tables to unload. For this
input format, the text for each table specification can be a maximum of 72 bytes
and must not span multiple lines.
You can use the input statements to specify SELECT statements that join two or
more tables or select specific columns from a table. If you specify columns, you
need to modify the LOAD statement that DSNTIAUL generates.
DSNTIAUL data sets:

Data set
Description
SYSIN
Input data set.
You cannot enter comments in DSNTIAUL input.
The record length for the input data set must be at least 72 bytes.
DSNTIAUL reads only the first 72 bytes of each record.
SYSPRINT
Output data set. DSNTIAUL writes informational and error messages in
this data set.
The record length for the SYSPRINT data set is 121 bytes.
SYSPUNCH
Output data set. DSNTIAUL writes the LOAD utility control statements in
this data set.
SYSRECnn
Output data sets. The value nn ranges from 00 to 99. You can have a
maximum of 100 output data sets for a single execution of DSNTIAUL.
Each data set contains the data that is unloaded when DSNTIAUL
processes a SELECT statement from the input data set. Therefore, the
number of output data sets must match the number of SELECT statements
(if you specify parameter SQL) or table specifications in your input data
set.
Define all data sets as sequential data sets. You can specify the record length and
block size of the SYSPUNCH and SYSRECnn data sets. The maximum record
length for the SYSPUNCH and SYSRECnn data sets is 32760 bytes.
936
DSNTIAUL return codes:

Table 178. DSNTIAUL return codes
|
|
|
|
|
|
Return code
Meaning
Successful completion.
An SQL statement received a warning code.

v If TOLWARN(YES) is specified, and the warning occurred on a FETCH
or OPEN during the processing of a SELECT statement, DB2 performs
the unload operation.
v Otherwise if the SQL statement was a SELECT statement, DB2 did not
perform the associated unload operation.
|
|
|
If DB2 returns a +394, which indicates that it is using optimization hints,

or a +395, which indicates one or more invalid optimization hints, DB2
performs the unload operation.
|
|
|
An SQL statement received an error code. If the SQL statement was a

SELECT statement, DB2 did not perform the associated unload operation
or did not complete it.
|
|
|
|
12
DSNTIAUL could not open a data set, an SQL statement returned a

severe error code (-144, -302, -804, -805, -818, -902, -906, -911, -913, -922,
-923, -924, or -927), or an error occurred in the SQL message formatting
routine.
Example of using DSNTIAUL to unload a subset of rows in a

table:
Suppose that you want to unload the rows for department D01 from the project
table. Because you can fit the table specification on one line, and you do not want
to execute any non-SELECT statements, you do not need the SQL parameter. Your
invocation looks like the one that is shown in the following figure:
//UNLOAD EXEC PGM=IKJEFT01,DYNAMNBR=20
//SYSTSIN DD *
DSN SYSTEM(DSN)
RUN PROGRAM(DSNTIAUL) PLAN(DSNTIB91) LIB('DSN910.RUNLIB.LOAD')
//SYSREC00 DD DSN=DSN8UNLD.SYSREC00,
//
UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(32760,(1000,500)),DISP=(,CATLG),
//
VOL=SER=SCR03
//SYSPUNCH DD DSN=DSN8UNLD.SYSPUNCH,
//
//
VOL=SER=SCR03,RECFM=FB,LRECL=120,BLKSIZE=1200
//SYSIN
DD *DSN8910
.PROJ WHERE DEPTNO='D01'
Example of using DSNTIAUL to unload rows in more than one

table:
Suppose that you also want to use DSNTIAUL to perform the following actions:
v Unload all rows from the project table
v Unload only rows from the employee table for employees in departments with
department numbers that begin with D, and order the unloaded rows by
employee number
v Lock both tables in share mode before you unload them
937
v Retrieve 250 rows per fetch

For these activities, you must specify the SQL parameter and specify the number of
rows per fetch when you run DSNTIAUL. Your DSNTIAUL invocation is shown in
the following figure:
//SYSTSIN DD *
DSN SYSTEM(DSN)
RUN PROGRAM(DSNTIAUL) PLAN(DSNTIB91) PARMS('SQL,250') LIB('DSN910.RUNLIB.LOAD')
//
//
VOL=SER=SCR03
//
//
VOL=SER=SCR03
//
//
//SYSIN
DD *
LOCK TABLE DSN8910.EMP IN SHARE MODE;
LOCK TABLE DSN8910.PROJ IN SHARE MODE;
SELECT * FROM DSN8910.PROJ;
SELECT * FROM DSN8910.EMP
WHERE WORKDEPT LIKE 'D%'
ORDER BY EMPNO;
Example of using DSNTIAUL to obtain LOAD utility control

statements:
If you want to obtain the LOAD utility control statements for loading rows into a
table, but you do not want to unload the rows, you can set the data set names for
the SYSRECnn data sets to DUMMY. For example, to obtain the utility control
statements for loading rows into the department table, you invoke DSNTIAUL as
shown in the following figure:
//SYSTSIN DD *
DSN SYSTEM(DSN)
RUN PROGRAM(DSNTIAUL) PLAN(DSNTIB91) LIB('DSN910.RUNLIB.LOAD')
//SYSREC00 DD DUMMY
//
//
//SYSIN
DD *DSN8910
.DEPT
Example of using DSNTIAUL to unload LOB data:

This example uses the sample LOB table with the following structure:
CREATE TABLE DSN8910.EMP_PHOTO_RESUME

( EMPNO CHAR(06) NOT NULL,
EMP_ROWID ROWID NOT NULL GENERATED ALWAYS,
PSEG_PHOTO BLOB(500K),
BMP_PHOTO BLOB(100K),
938
RESUME CLOB(5K),
PRIMARY KEY (EMPNO))
IN DSN8D91L.DSN8S91B
CCSID EBCDIC;
The following call to DSNTIAUL unloads the sample LOB table. The parameters
for DSNTIAUL indicate the following options:
v The input data set (SYSIN) contains SQL.
v DSNTIAUL is to retrieve 2 rows per fetch.
v DSNTIAUL places the LOB data in data sets with a high-level qualifier of
DSN8UNLD.
//UNLOAD
//SYSTSIN
DD *
DSN SYSTEM(DSN)
RUN PROGRAM(DSNTIAUL) PLAN(DSNTIB91) PARMS('SQL,2,LOBFILE(DSN8UNLD)') LIB('DSN910.RUNLIB.LOAD')
//
//
VOL=SER=SCR03,RECFM=FB
//
//
VOL=SER=SCR03,RECFM=FB
//SYSIN
DD *
SELECT * FROM DSN8910.EMP_PHOTO_RESUME;
Given that the sample LOB table has 4 rows of data, DSNTIAUL produces the
following output:
v Data for columns EMPNO and EMP_ROWID are placed in the data set that is
allocated according to the SYSREC00 DD statement. The data set name is
DSN8UNLD.SYSREC00
v A generated LOAD statement is placed in the data set that is allocated according
to the SYSPUNCH DD statement. The data set name is DSN8UNLD.SYSPUNCH
v The following data sets are dynamically created to store LOB data:
DSN8UNLD.Q0000000.C0000002.R0000000
DSN8UNLD.Q0000000.C0000002.R0000001
DSN8UNLD.Q0000000.C0000002.R0000002
DSN8UNLD.Q0000000.C0000002.R0000003
DSN8UNLD.Q0000000.C0000003.R0000000
DSN8UNLD.Q0000000.C0000003.R0000001
DSN8UNLD.Q0000000.C0000003.R0000002
DSN8UNLD.Q0000000.C0000003.R0000003
DSN8UNLD.Q0000000.C0000004.R0000000
DSN8UNLD.Q0000000.C0000004.R0000001
DSN8UNLD.Q0000000.C0000004.R0000002
DSN8UNLD.Q0000000.C0000004.R0000003
For example, DSN8UNLD.Q0000000.C0000004.R0000001 means that the data set
contains data that is unloaded from the second row (R0000001) and the fifth
column (C0000004) of the result set for the first query (Q0000000).
939
DSNTIAD
Use the DSNTIAD program to execute SQL statements other than SELECT
statements dynamically.
DSNTIAD parameters:
RC0
If you specify this parameter, DSNTIAD ends with return code 0, even if the
program encounters SQL errors. If you do not specify RC0, DSNTIAD ends
with a return code that reflects the severity of the errors that occur. Without
RC0, DSNTIAD terminates if more than 10 SQL errors occur during a single
execution.
SQLTERM(termchar)
Specify this parameter to indicate the character that you use to end each SQL
statement. You can use any special character except one of those listed in the
following table. SQLTERM(;) is the default.
Table 179. Invalid special characters for the SQL terminator
Name
Character
blank
Hexadecimal representation
X40
comma
X6B
double quotation mark
X7F
left parenthesis
X4D
right parenthesis
X5D
single quotation mark
X7D
underscore
X6D
Use a character other than a semicolon if you plan to execute a statement that
contains embedded semicolons.
example:
Suppose that you specify the parameter SQLTERM(#) to indicate that the
character # is the statement terminator. Then a CREATE TRIGGER statement
with embedded semicolons looks like this:
CREATE TRIGGER NEW_HIRE
AFTER INSERT ON EMP
FOR EACH ROW MODE DB2SQL
BEGIN ATOMIC
UPDATE COMPANY_STATS SET NBEMP = NBEMP + 1;
END#
A CREATE PROCEDURE statement with embedded semicolons looks like the

CREATE PROCEDURE PROC1 (IN PARM1 INT, OUT SCODE INT)
LANGUAGE SQL
BEGIN
DECLARE SQLCODE INT;
DECLARE EXIT HANDLER FOR SQLEXCEPTION
SET SCODE = SQLCODE;
UPDATE TBL1 SET COL1 = PARM1;
END #
940
Be careful to choose a character for the statement terminator that is not used
within the statement.
DSNTIAD data sets:

Data set
Description
SYSIN
Input data set. In this data set, you can enter any number of non-SELECT
SQL statements, each terminated with a semicolon. A statement can span
multiple lines, but DSNTIAD reads only the first 72 bytes of each line.
You cannot enter comments in DSNTIAD input.
SYSPRINT
Output data set. DSNTIAD writes informational and error messages in this
data set. DSNTIAD sets the record length of this data set to 121 bytes and
the block size to 1210 bytes.
Define all data sets as sequential data sets.
DSNTIAD return codes:

Table 180. DSNTIAD return codes
Return code
Meaning
Successful completion, or the user-specified parameter RC0.
An SQL statement received an error code.
12
DSNTIAD could not open a data set, the length of an SQL statement was
more than 32760 bytes, an SQL statement returned a severe error code
(-8nn or -9nn), or an error occurred in the SQL message formatting
routine.
Example of DSNTIAD invocation:

Suppose that you want to execute 20 UPDATE statements, and you do not want
DSNTIAD to terminate if more than 10 errors occur. Your invocation looks like the
one that is shown in the following figure:
//RUNTIAD EXEC PGM=IKJEFT01,DYNAMNBR=20
//SYSTSIN DD *
DSN SYSTEM(DSN)
RUN PROGRAM(DSNTIAD) PLAN(DSNTIA91) PARMS('RC0') LIB('DSN910.RUNLIB.LOAD')
//SYSIN
DD *
UPDATE DSN8910.PROJ SET DEPTNO='J01' WHERE DEPTNO='A01';
UPDATE
DSN8910.PROJ SET DEPTNO='J02' WHERE DEPTNO='A02';
.
.
.
UPDATE DSN8910.PROJ SET DEPTNO='J20' WHERE DEPTNO='A20';
DSNTEP2 and DSNTEP4

Use the DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4 programs to execute SQL statements dynamically.
941
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
DSNTEP2 and DSNTEP4 write their results to the data set that is defined by the
SYSPRINT DD statement. SYSPRINT data must have a logical record length of 133
bytes (LRECL=133). Otherwise, the program issues return code 12 with abend
U4038 and reason code 1. This abend occurs due to the PL/I file exception error
IBM0201S ONCODE=81. The following error message is issued:
|
|
Important: When you allocate a new data set with the SYSPRINT DD statement,
either specify a DCB with LRECL=133, or do not specify the DCB parameter.
The UNDEFINEDFILE condition was raised because of conflicting DECLARE

and OPEN attributes (FILE= SYSPRINT).
DSNTEP2 and DSNTEP4 parameters:

ALIGN(MID) or ALIGN(LHS)
Specifies the alignment.
ALIGN(MID)
Specifies that DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4 output should be centered.
ALIGN(MID) is the default.
ALIGN(LHS)
Specifies that the DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4 output should be left-justified.
NOMIXED or MIXED
Specifies whether DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4 contains any DBCS characters.
NOMIXED
Specifies that the DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4 input contains no DBCS
characters. NOMIXED is the default.
MIXED
Specifies that the DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4 input contains some DBCS
characters.
|
|
|
|
PREPWARN
Specifies that DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4 is to display the PREPARE
SQLWARNING message and set the return code to 4 when an SQLWARNING
is encountered at PREPARE.
|
|
|
SQLFORMAT
Specifies how DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4 pre-processes SQL statements before
passing them to DB2. Select one of the following options:
This is the preferred mode for SQL statements other than SQL
procedural language. When you use this option, which is the default,
DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4 collapses each line of an SQL statement into a
single line before passing the statement to DB2. DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4
also discards all SQL comments.
|
|
|
|
|
SQL
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
SQLCOMNT
This mode is suitable for all SQL, but it is intended primarily for SQL
procedural language processing. When this option is in effect, behavior
is similar to SQL mode, except that DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4 does not
discard SQL comments. Instead, it automatically terminates each SQL
comment with a line feed character (hex 25), unless the comment is
already terminated by one or more line formatting characters. Use this
option to process SQL procedural language with minimal modification
by DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4.
|
|
SQLPL
This mode is suitable for all SQL, but it is intended primarily for SQL
942
|
|
|
|
|
|
procedural language processing. When this option is in effect,

DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4 retains SQL comments and terminates each line
of an SQL statement with a line feed character (hex 25) before passing
the statement to DB2. Lines that end with a split token are not
terminated with a line feed character. Use this mode to obtain
improved diagnostics and debugging of SQL procedural language.
SQLTERM(termchar)
Specifies the character that you use to end each SQL statement. You can use
any character except one of those that are listed in Table 179 on page 940.
SQLTERM(;) is the default.
Use a character other than a semicolon if you plan to execute a statement that
contains embedded semicolons.
Example: Suppose that you specify the parameter SQLTERM(#) to indicate that
the character # is the statement terminator. Then a CREATE TRIGGER
statement with embedded semicolons looks like this:
AFTER INSERT ON EMP
BEGIN ATOMIC
END#
A CREATE PROCEDURE statement with embedded semicolons looks like the

CREATE PROCEDURE PROC1 (IN PARM1 INT, OUT SCODE INT)
LANGUAGE SQL
BEGIN
DECLARE SQLCODE INT;
DECLARE EXIT HANDLER FOR SQLEXCEPTION
SET SCODE = SQLCODE;
UPDATE TBL1 SET COL1 = PARM1;
END #
Be careful to choose a character for the statement terminator that is not used
within the statement.
If you want to change the SQL terminator within a series of SQL statements,
you can use the --#SET TERMINATOR control statement.
Example: Suppose that you have an existing set of SQL statements to which
you want to add a CREATE TRIGGER statement that has embedded
semicolons. You can use the default SQLTERM value, which is a semicolon, for
all of the existing SQL statements. Before you execute the CREATE TRIGGER
statement, include the --#SET TERMINATOR # control statement to change the
SQL terminator to the character #:
SELECT * FROM DEPT;
SELECT * FROM ACT;
SELECT * FROM EMPPROJACT;
SELECT * FROM PROJ;
SELECT * FROM PROJACT;
--#SET TERMINATOR #
AFTER INSERT ON EMP
BEGIN ATOMIC
END#
943
See the following discussion of the SYSIN data set for more information about
the --#SET control statement.
TOLWARN
Specify NO (the default) or YES to indicate whether DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4
continues to process SQL SELECT statements after receiving an SQL warning:
NO
If a warning occurs when DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4 executes an OPEN or

FETCH for a SELECT statement, DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4 stops
processing the SELECT statement. If SQLCODE +445 or SQLCODE
+595 occurs when DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4 executes a FETCH for a
SELECT statement, DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4 continues to process the
SELECT statement. If SQLCODE +802 occurs when DSNTEP2 or
DSNTEP4 executes a FETCH for a SELECT statement, DSNTEP2 or
DSNTEP4 continues to process the SELECT statement if the
TOLARTHWRN control statement is set to YES.
YES
If a warning occurs when DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4 executes an OPEN or

FETCH for a SELECT statement, DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4 continues to
process the SELECT statement.
DSNTEP2 and DSNTEP4 data sets:

Data Set
Description
SYSIN
Input data set. In this data set, you can enter any number of SQL
statements, each terminated with a semicolon. A statement can span
multiple lines, but DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4 reads only the first 72 bytes of
each line.
You can enter comments in DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4 input with an asterisk
(*) in column 1 or two hyphens (--) anywhere on a line. Text that follows
the asterisk is considered to be comment text. Text that follows two
hyphens can be comment text or a control statement. Comments are not
considered in dynamic statement caching. Comments and control
statements cannot span lines.
|
|
You can enter control statements of the following form in the DSNTEP2
and DSNTEP4 input data set:
--#SET control-option value
The control options are:

TERMINATOR
The SQL statement terminator. value is any single-byte character other
than one of those that are listed in Table 179 on page 940. The default
is the value of the SQLTERM parameter.
ROWS_FETCH
The number of rows that are to be fetched from the result table. value
is a numeric literal between -1 and the number of rows in the result
table. -1 means that all rows are to be fetched. The default is -1.
ROWS_OUT
The number of fetched rows that are to be sent to the output data set.
value is a numeric literal between -1 and the number of fetched rows.
-1 means that all fetched rows are to be sent to the output data set. The
default is -1.
944
MULT_FETCH
This option is valid only for DSNTEP4. Use MULT_FETCH to specify
the number of rows that are to be fetched at one time from the result
table. The default fetch amount for DSNTEP4 is 100 rows, but you can
specify from 1 to 32676 rows.
TOLWARN
Indicates whether DSNTEP2 and DSNTEP4 continue to process an SQL
SELECT statement after an SQL warning is returned. value is either NO
(the default) or YES.
|
|
|
|
TOLARTHWRN
Indicates whether DSNTEP2 and DSNTEP4 continue to process an SQL
SELECT statement after an arithmetic SQL warning (SQLCODE +802)
is returned. value is either NO (the default) or YES.
|
|
|
PREPWARN
Indicates how DSNTEP2 and DSNTEP4 is to handle a PREPARE
SQLWARNING message.
|
|
|
|
|
NO
|
|
|
|
YES
Indicates that DSNTEP2 and DSNTEP4 displays the PREPARE
SQLWARNING message and sets the return code to 4 when an
SQLWARNING is encountered at PREPARE.
|
|
|
SQLFORMAT
Specifies how DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4 pre-processes SQL statements
before passing them to DB2. Select one of the following options:
Indicates that DSNTEP2 and DSNTEP4 does not display the

PREPARE SQLWARNING message and does not set the return
code to 4 when an SQLWARNING is encountered at PREPARE.
The default is NO.
This is the preferred mode for SQL statements other than SQL
procedural language. When you use this option, which is the
default, DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4 collapses each line of an SQL
statement into a single line before passing the statement to
DB2. DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4 also discards all SQL comments.
|
|
|
|
|
SQL
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
SQLCOMNT
This mode is suitable for all SQL, but it is intended primarily
for SQL procedural language processing. When this option is in
effect, behavior is similar to SQL mode, except that DSNTEP2
or DSNTEP4 does not discard SQL comments. Instead, it
automatically terminates each SQL comment with a line feed
character (hex 25), unless the comment is already terminated
by one or more line formatting characters. Use this option to
process SQL procedural language with minimal modification
by DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
SQLPL
This mode is suitable for all SQL, but it is intended primarily
for SQL procedural language processing. When this option is in
effect, DSNTEP2 or DSNTEP4 retains SQL comments and
terminates each line of an SQL statement with a line feed
character (hex 25) before passing the statement to DB2. Lines
that end with a split token are not terminated with a line feed
945
|
|
character. Use this mode to obtain improved diagnostics and

debugging of SQL procedural language.
|
|
|
MAXERRORS
Specifies that number of errors that DSNTEP2 and DSNTEP4 handle
before processing stops. The default is 10.
SYSPRINT
Output data set. DSNTEP2 and DSNTEP4 write informational and error
messages in this data set. DSNTEP2 and DSNTEP4 write output records of
no more than 133 bytes.
Define all data sets as sequential data sets.
DSNTEP2 and DSNTEP4 return codes

Table 181. DSNTEP2 and DSNTEP4 return codes
Return code
Meaning
Successful completion.
An SQL statement received an error code.
12
The length of an SQL statement was more than 32760 bytes, an SQL
statement returned a severe error code (-8nn or -9nn), or an error
occurred in the SQL message formatting routine.
Example of DSNTEP2 invocation

Suppose that you want to use DSNTEP2 to execute SQL SELECT statements that
might contain DBCS characters. You also want left-aligned output. Your invocation
looks like the one in the following figure.
//RUNTEP2 EXEC PGM=IKJEFT01,DYNAMNBR=20
//SYSTSIN DD *
DSN SYSTEM(DSN)
RUN PROGRAM(DSNTEP2) PLAN(DSNTEP91) PARMS('/ALIGN(LHS) MIXED TOLWARN(YES)') LIB('DSN910.RUNLIB.LOAD')
//SYSIN
DD *
SELECT * FROM DSN8910.PROJ;
Example of DSNTEP4 invocation

Suppose that you want to use DSNTEP4 to execute SQL SELECT statements that
might contain DBCS characters, and you want center-aligned output. You also
want DSNTEP4 to fetch 250 rows at a time. Your invocation looks like the one in
the following figure:
//RUNTEP2 EXEC PGM=IKJEFT01,DYNAMNBR=20
//SYSTSIN DD *
DSN SYSTEM(DSN)
RUN PROGRAM(DSNTEP4) PLAN(DSNTEP481) PARMS('/ALIGN(MID) MIXED') LIB('DSN910.RUNLIB.LOAD')
//SYSIN
DD *
--#SET MULT_FETCH 250
SELECT * FROM DSN8910.EMP;
946
Appendix E. How real-time statistics are used by DB2 utilities
DB2 utilities use real-time statistics to optimize data processing and operations.
|
|
|
Utilities can use real-time statistics to calculate how data processing is done. This is
more efficient than using statistics typically gathered by the RUNSTATS utility or
stored in catalogs.
|
|
The use of real-time statistics eliminates some of the dependency on regularly

running the RUNSTATS utility which is processing intensive and time consuming.
|
|
|
|
If real -time statistics are available and the system parameter UTSORTAL is set to
YES, the following utilities use real-time statistics to help determine how data is
processed:
v CHECK DATA
v CHECK INDEX
v REBUILD INDEX
v REORG TABLESPACE
v RUNSTATS
|
|
|
|
|
|
DB2 issues message DSNU3343I if there are no real-time statistics available. This
message can be issued for either table spaces or indexes. When message
DSNU3343I is returned, DB2 tries to gather real time statistics either from
associated indexes or table spaces, depending on what kind of real-time statistics
were not available. If no real-time statistics are available, DB2 uses RUNSTATS
based estimations.
Table space and index characteristics
|
|
|
Utilities regularly gather information about table space or index characteristics. The
information is used to calculate statistics that help determine how a utility
processes data.
|
|
|
|
|
Utilities read the totals number of rows from the column TOTALROWS in the table
SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACESTATS and the number of associated index keys from
column TOTALENTRIES in the table SYSIBM.SYSINDEXSPACESTATS. The
statistics that are calculated from this information are used to estimate the number
of records that need to be sorted and the size of the required sort work data sets.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Recommendation: To prevent utilities from using incorrect values when table

spaces are replaced by utilities such as DSN1COPY or other utilities not controlled
by DB2, column information can be set to NULL. When information for the
columns is set to NULL, the number of records is estimated based on statistics
gathered by RUNSTATS. The columns are then re-initialized the next time REORG
TABLESPACE, LOAD REPLACE, or REBUILD INDEX runs.
Related concepts
Appendix F, Real-time statistics, on page 949
|
|
|
947
948
Appendix F. Real-time statistics

The following topics provide detailed information about the real-time statistics
tables.
Setting up your system for real-time statistics

DB2 always generates in-memory statistics for each table space and index space in
your system, including catalog objects. However, only certain global values are
generated for the SYSRTS table space, and no incremental counters are maintained.
|
|
|
No statistics are generated for the directory. For partitioned spaces, DB2 generates
information for each partition. However, you need to set the interval for writing
statistics and establish base values for statistics.
Setting the interval for writing real-time statistics

You can set the interval for writing real-time statistics when you install DB2, and
you can subsequently update that interval online.
The installation field is REAL TIME STATS on panel DSNTIPO. In a data sharing
environment, each member has its own interval for writing real-time statistics.
To update the interval:
Modify STATSINT system parameter. The default interval is 30 minutes.
Establishing base values for real-time statistics

Many columns in the real-time statistics tables show the number of times an
operation was performed between the last time a particular utility was run and
when the real-time statistics are written.
For example, STATSINSERT in SYSTABLESPACESTATS indicates the number of
records or LOBs that have been inserted after the last RUNSTATS utility was run
on the table space or partition. Therefore, for each object for which you want
real-time statistics, run the appropriate utility (REORG, RUNSTATS, LOAD
REPLACE, REBUILD INDEX, or COPY) to establish a base value from which the
delta value can be calculated.
Contents of the real-time statistics tables

Real time statistics tables contain statistics for indexes and table spaces.
Related information
SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACESTATS table in (DB2 for z/OS SQL Reference)
SYSIBM.SYSINDEXSPACESTATS table (DB2 for z/OS SQL Reference)
Operating with real-time statistics

To use the real-time statistics effectively, you need to understand when DB2
collects and externalizes them, and what factors in your system can affect the
statistics.
949

The DB2 real-time statistics stored procedure (DSNACCOX) is a sample stored
The DSNACCOX stored procedure represents an enhancement to the DSNACCOR
stored procedure and provides improved recommendations, new fields and
formulas, and the option to choose the formula that is used for making
recommendations. However, the DSNACCOX stored procedure requires that the
real time statistics are migrated to the DB2 catalog, or DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS
new-function-mode. Otherwise, use the DSNACCOR stored procedure instead.
|
|
|
PSPI
In particular, DSNACCOX performs the following actions:

|
|

DSNACCOX uses data from catalog tables, including real-time statistics tables, to
make its recommendations. DSNACCOX provides its recommendations in a result
set.
|
|
|
DSNACCOX uses the set of criteria that are shown in DSNACCOX formulas for
default, DSNACCOX evaluates all table spaces and index spaces in the subsystem
Important information about DSNACCOX recommendations:
v DSNACCOX makes recommendations based on general formulas that require
of your DB2 subsystem, the recommendations that DSNACCOX makes might
v Before you perform any action that DSNACCOX recommends, ensure that the
object for which DSNACCOX makes the recommendation is available, and that
the recommended action can be performed on that object. For example, REORG
might be recommended for an object, but the object might be stopped.
|
|
|
|
Environment
DSNACCOX must run in a WLM-established stored procedure address space.
You should bind the package for DSNACCOX with isolation UR to avoid lock
contention. You can find the installation steps for DSNACCOX in job DSNTIJSG.
To execute the CALL DSNACCOX statement, the owner of the package or plan
950
v
v
v
v
The EXECUTE privilege on the package for DSNACCOX

Ownership of the package
PACKADM authority for the package collection
SYSADM authority
have:
|
v SELECT authority on catalog tables

Syntax diagram
DSNACCOX. Because the linkage convention for DSNACCOX is GENERAL WITH
951
CALL DSNACCOX (
QueryType
NULL
LocalSchema
NULL
ChkLvl
NULL
CRUpdatedPagesAbs
NULL
ICRUpdatedPagesAbs
NULL
RRTInsertAbs
NULL
RRTDisorgLOBPct
NULL
-1
RRIInsertPct
NULL
-1
RRIAppendInsertPct
NULL
-1
RRINumLevelsLimit
NULL
-1
SRIInsDelUpdPct
NULL
-1
Criteria
NULL
CRChangesPct
NULL
-1
CatlgSchema
NULL
RRTInsertPct
NULL
-1
RRIDeleteAbs
NULL
RRILeafLimit
NULL
-1
SRTMassDelLimit
NULL
-1
ExtentLimit
NULL
-1
RRTIndRefLimit
NULL
-1
RRIMassDelLimit
NULL
-1
SRIMassDelLimit
NULL
-1
ICRUpdatedPagesPct
NULL
-1
RRTUnclustInsPct
NULL
-1
SRTInsDelUpdAbs
NULL
CRUpdatedPagesPct
NULL
-1
,
RRTMassDelLimit
NULL
-1
RRIDeletePct
NULL
-1
SRTInsDelUpdPct
NULL
-1
SRIInsDelAbs
NULL
Restricted
NULL
RRTDeleteAbs
NULL
ICType
NULL
CRIndexSize
NULL
-1
RRIPseudoDeletePct
NULL
-1
CRDaySncLastCopy
NULL
-1
,
RRTDataSpaceRat
NULL
-1
RRIInsertAbs
NULL
-1
ICRChangesPct
NULL
-1
RRTDeletePct
NULL
-1
ObjectType
NULL
Option descriptions
the value that DSNACCOX uses if you specify a null value.
QueryType
Specifies the types of actions that DSNACCOX recommends. This field
ALL

RUNSTATS
952
REORG
this value causes DSNACCOX to process the EXTENTS value also.
EXTENTS
RESTRICT
DSNACCOX recommends REORG on the table space when one of the
following conditions is true, and REORG (or ALL) is also specified for the
value of QUERYTYPE:
v The table space is in REORG-pending status.
v The table space is in advisory REORG-pending status as the result of an
ALTER TABLE statement.
DSNACCOX recommends REORG on the index when on the following
conditions is true and REORG (or ALL) is also specified for the value of
QUERYTYPE::
v The index is in REORG-pending status.
v The index is in advisory REORG-pending as the result of an ALTER TABLE
statement.
DSNACCOX recommends FULL COPY on the table space when on the
following conditions is true and COPY (or ALL) is also specified for the value
of QUERYTYPE::
v The table space is in COPY-pending status.
v The table space is in informational COPY-pending status.
DSNACCOX recommends FULL COPY on the index when on the following
conditions is true and COPY (or ALL) is also specified for the value of
QUERYTYPE: and SYSINDEX.COPY=Y:
v The index is in COPY-pending status.
v The index is in informational COPY-pending status.
QueryType is an input parameter of type VARCHAR(40). The default value is
ALL.
ObjectType
Specifies the types of objects for which DSNACCOX recommends actions:
ALL
TS
Table spaces only.
IX
Index spaces only.
ObjectType is an input parameter of type VARCHAR(3). The default value is

ALL.
ICType
Specifies the types of image copies for which DSNACCOX is to make
recommendations:
F
Full image copy.

953
CatlgSchema
parameter of type VARCHAR(128). The default value is SYSIBM.
LocalSchema
Specifies the qualifier for the names of local tables that DSNACCOX references.
LocalSchema is an input parameter of type VARCHAR(128). The default value is
DSNACC.
|
|
|
ChkLvl
Specifies the types of checking that DSNACCOX performs, and indicates
whether to include objects that fail those checks in the DSNACCOX
following values:
|
|
|
DSNACCOX performs none of the following actions.

RUNSTATS on:
v Index spaces that are related to tables that are defined as VOLATILE.
v Table spaces for which all of the tables are defined as VOLATILE.
Check whether rows that are in the DSNACCOX recommendations


16
32

recommended for REORG or RUNSTATS.
64
For index spaces that are listed in the DSNACCOX recommendations

column of the recommendations result set. Selecting CHKLVL64 also
activates CHKLVLs 32 and 4.
ChkLvl is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 5 (values 1+4).

Criteria
Narrows the set of objects for which DSNACCOX makes recommendations.
This value is the search condition of an SQL WHERE clause.Criteria is an input
parameter of type VARCHAR(4096). The default is that DSNACCOX makes
recommendations for all table spaces and index spaces in the subsystem. The
search condition can use any column in the result set and wildcards are
allowed.
Restricted
954
CRUpdatedPagesPct
Specifies, when combined with CRUpdatedPagesAbs, a criterion for
image copy:
CRUpdatedPagesPct.
CRUpdatedPagesABS.
CRUpdatedPagesPct.
CRUpdatedPagesABS.
CRIndexSize.
CRUpdatedPagesPct is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default is 20.0.
A negative value turns off both this criteria and CRUpdatedPagesABS.
CRUpdatedPagesABS
Specifies, when combined with CRUpdatedPagesPct, a criterion for
image copy:
CRUpdatedPagesPct.
v The total number of distinct updated pages is greater than
CRUpdatedPagesAbs.
CRUpdatedPagesPct.
CRUpdatedPagesAbs.
CRIndexSize.
CRUpdatedPagesAbs is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default value
is 0.
CRChangesPct
index space. If the following condition is true for a table space, DSNACCOX
955
If both of the following conditions are true for an index table space,
DSNACCOX recommends an image copy:
CRIndexSize.
CRChangesPct is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default is 10.0. A
CRDaySncLastCopy
this value, DSNACCOX recommends an image copy.
CRDaySncLastCopy is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 7. A
ICRUpdatedPagesPct
space. If both of the following conditions are true, DSNACCOX recommends
an incremental image copy:
v The number of distinct pages that were updated since the last image copy,
(expressed as a percentage) is greater than ICRUpdatedPagesPct..
v The number of distinct pages that were updated since last image copy is
greater than ICRUpdatedPagesAbs.
ICRUpdatedPagesPct is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default value
is 1.0. A negative value turns off this criterion and ICRUpdatedPagesAbs.
ICRChangesPct
space. If the following condition is true, DSNACCOX recommends an
ICRChangesPct is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default is 1.0. A
CRIndexSize
Specifies the minimum index size before checking the ICRUpdatedPagesPct or
ICRChangesPctcriteria for recommending a full image copy on an index space.
CRIndexSize is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 50. A
negative value turns of this criterion and ICRChangesPct.
RRTInsertPct
Specifies, when combined with RRTInsertAbs, a criterion for recommending
v The sum of insert, update, and delete operations since the last REORG,
(expressed as a percentage) is greater than RRTInsertPct
RRTInsertAbs.
956

A negative value turns off this criterion and RRTInsertAbs.
RRTInsertAbs
Specifies, when combined with RRTInsertPct, a criterion for recommending that
the REORG utility is to be run on a table space. If both of the following
v The sum of insert operations since the last REORG, divided by the total
is greater than RRTInsertPct
RRTInsertAbs.
RRTInsertAbs is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default value is 0.
RRTDeletePct
Specifies, when combined with RRTDeleteAbs, a criterion for recommending
RRTDeleteAbs.
A negative value turns off this criterion and RRTDeleteAbs.
RRTDeleteAbs
Specifies, when combined with RRTDeletePct, a criterion for recommending
v The sum of delete operations since the last REORG is greater than
RRTDeleteAbs.
RRTDeleteAbs is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default value is 0.
RRTUnclustInsPct
running REORG:
RRTUnclustInsPct is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default is 10.0.
RRTDisorgLOBPct
running REORG:
957
RRTDisorgLOBPct is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 50.0.

RRTDataSpaceRat
table space for space reclamation. If the following condition is true,
The SPACE allocated is greater than RRTDataSpaceRat multiplied by the
actual space used. (SPACE > RRTDataSpaceRat (DATASIZE/1024))
RRTDataSpaceRat is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default value is
2.0. A negative value turns off this criterion.
RRTMassDelLimit
RRTMassDelLimit is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 0.
RRTIndRefLimit
table space. If the following value is greater than RRTIndRefLimit, DSNACCOX
RRTIndRefLimit is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default is 5.0 in
data sharing environment and 10.0 in a non-data sharing environment.
RRIInsertPct
RRIInsertPct is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default is 30.0. A
RRIInsertAbs
958
RRIInsertAbs is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 0. A

RRIDeletePct
This is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default is 30.0. A negative
RRIDeleteAbs
This is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 0. A negative
RRIAppendInsertPct
RRIInsertDeletePct is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default is 20.0.
RRIPseudoDeletePct
RRIPseudoDeletePct is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default is 5.0
in data sharing and 10.0 in non data sharing environments. A negative value
turns off this criterion.
RRIMassDelLimit
value, DSNACCOX recommends running REORG.
959
RRIMassDelLimit is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 0. A

RRILeafLimit
REBUILD INDEX, or LOAD REPLACE in which the higher part of the split
page was far from the location of the original page, divided by the total
number of active pages in the index space or partition (expressed as a
percentage)
RRILeafLimit is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default is 10.0. A
RRINumLevelsLimit
RRINumLevelsLimit is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 0. A
SRTInsDelUpdPct
of the following conditions are true, DSNACCOX recommends running
RUNSTATS:
SRTInsDelUpdPct.
SRTInsDelUpdPct is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default is 20.0. A
SRTInsDelUpdAbs
SRTInsDelUpdAbs is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 0.
SRTMassDelLimit
on a table space. If the following condition is true, DSNACCOX recommends
running RUNSTATS:
960
SRTMassDelLimit is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default is 0.0. A
SRIInsDelPct
SRIInsDelUpdPct.
SRIInsDelPct is an input parameter of type DOUBLE. The default is 20.0. A
SRIInsDelAbs
following condition is true, DSNACCOX recommends running RUNSTATS:
SRIInsDelUpdPct.
SRIInsDelAbs is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 0.
SRIMassDelLimit
greater than this value, DSNACCOX recommends running RUNSTATS.
SRIMassDelLimit is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default value is
0. A negative value turns off this criterion.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
ExtentLimit
table space or index space. Also specifies that DSNACCOX is to warn the user
that the table space or index space has used too many extents. DSNACCOX
condition is true:
ExtentLimit is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default value is 254.
LastStatement
When DSNACCOX returns a severe error (return code 12), this field contains
961
ReturnCode
The return code from DSNACCOX execution. Possible values are:
0
DSNACCOX executed successfully.
DSNACCOX completed with a warning. The ErrorMsg parameter

contains the input parameters that might be incompatible.
DSNACCOX terminated with errors. The ErrorMsg parameter contains

12
DSNACCOX terminated with severe errors. The ErrorMsg parameter

error occurred.
14
DSNACCOX terminated because the real time statistics table were not
yet migrated to the catalog.
15
DSNACCOX terminated because it encountered a problem with one of

16
DSNACCOX terminated because it could not define a declared

temporary table.
NULL DSNACCOX terminated but could not set a return code.

ErrorMsg
Contains information about DSNACCOX execution when DSNACCOX
terminates with a non-zero value for ReturnCode.
IFCARetCode
Contains the return code from an IFI COMMAND call. DSNACCOX issues
IFCAResCode
ExcessBytes
INTEGER.
DSNACCOX formulas for recommending actions

The following formulas specify the criteria that DSNACCOX uses for its
recommendations and warnings. The variables in italics are DSNACCOX input
962

((COPYUPDATEDPAGES100)/NACTIVE>CRUpdatedPagesPct AND
(COPYUPDATEDPAGES>CRupdatedPagesAbs)) OR
The table space is in advisory or informational REORG pending status))
Figure 164. DSNACCOX formula for recommending a full image copy on a table space

(SYSINDEXES.COPY = 'Y')) AND
(((COPYUPDATEDPAGES100)/NACTIVE>CRUpdatedPagesPct) AND
(COPYUPDATEDPAGES>CRUpdatedPagesAbs)) OR
(COPYCHANGES100)/TOTALENTRIES>CRChangesPct)) OR
(SYSINDEXES.COPY = 'Y') AND
The index space is in copy or informational copy pending status))
Figure 165. DSNACCOX formula for recommending a full image copy on an index space
The figure below shows the formula that DSNACCOX uses to recommend an

(ICType='I') AND
((COPYUPDATEDPAGES100)/NACTIVE>ICRUpdatedPagesPct) AND
(COPYUPDATEDPAGES>ICRUpdatedPagesAbs)) OR
(COPYCHANGES100)/TOTALROWS>ICRChangesPct)
Figure 166. DSNACCOX formula for recommending an incremental image copy on a table space
963

(REORGLASTTIME IS NULL AND LOADRLASTTIME IS NULL) OR
((((REORGINSERTS100)/TOTALROWS>RRTInsertPct) AND
REORGINSERTS>RRTInsertAbs) OR
(((REORGDELETE100)/TOTALROWS>RRTDeletePct) AND
REORGDELETE>RRTDeleteAbs) OR
(REORGUNCLUSTINS100)/TOTALROWS>RRTUnclustInsPct OR
(REORGDISORGLOB100)/TOTALROWS>RRTDisorgLOBPct OR
(SPACE1024)/DATASIZE>RRTDataSpaceRat OR
((REORGNEARINDREF+REORGFARINDREF)100)/TOTALROWS>RRTIndRefLimit OR
((QueryType='RESTRICT' ORQueryType='ALL') AND
The table space is in advisory or informational reorg pending status))
Figure 167. DSNACCOX formula for recommending a REORG on a table space

(REORGLASTTIME IS NULL AND REBUILDLASTTIME IS NULL) OR
((((REORGINSERTS100)/TOTALENTRIES>RRIInsertPct) AND
REORGINSERTS>RRIInsertAbs) OR
(((REORGDELETE100)/TOTALENTRIES>RRIDeletePct) AND
REORGDELETE>RRIDeleteAbs) OR
(REORGAPPENDINSERT100)/TOTALENTRIES>RRIAppendInsertPct OR
(REORGPSEUDODELETES100)/TOTALENTRIES>RRIPseudoDeletePct OR
(REORGLEAFFAR100)/NACTIVE>RRILeafLimit OR
An index is in advisory-REBUILD-pending stats (ARBDP)))
Figure 168. DSNACCOX formula for recommending a REORG on an index space

Table Space is not cloned) AND
(((STATSINSERTS+STATSDELETES+STATSUPDATES)100)/TOTALROWS>SRTInsDelUpdPct AND
STATSMASSDELETE>SRTMassDeleteLimit)))
Figure 169. DSNACCOX formula for recommending RUNSTATS on a table space
964

(ObjectType='IX' OR ObjectType='ALL')
Table Space for the index is not cloned ) AND
(((STATSINSERTS+STATSDELETES)100)/TOTALENTRIES>SRIInsDelUpdPct AND
(STATSINSERTS+STATSDELETES)>SRIInsDelAbs) OR
STATSMASSDELETE>SRIInsDelAbs)))
Figure 170. DSNACCOX formula for recommending RUNSTATS on an index space

QUERYTYPE CHAR(40))
CCSID EBCDIC;

DBNAME
NAME
QUERYTYPE
If you put a null value in this column, DSNACCOX puts the value YES in the
965


Example: Suppose that you want to include all rows for database DSNDB04 in the
recommendations result set, except for those rows that contain the string
Example
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The figure below is a COBOL example that shows variable declarations and an
SQL CALL for obtaining recommendations for objects in databases DSN8D91A and
retrieve the two result sets that DSNACCOX returns. These result sets are
described in DSNACCOX output on page 915. See DB2 Application Programming
and SQL Guide for more information about how to retrieve result sets from a stored
procedure.
***********************
* DSNACCOX PARAMETERS *
***********************
01 QUERYTYPE.
49
QUERYTYPE-LN
49
QUERYTYPE-DTA
01 OBJECTTYPE.
49
OBJECTTYPE-LN
49
OBJECTTYPE-DTA
01 ICTYPE.
49
ICTYPE-LN
49
ICTYPE-DTA
01 STATSSCHEMA.
49
STATSSCHEMA-LN
49
STATSSCHEMA-DTA
01 CATLGSCHEMA.
49
CATLGSCHEMA-LN
49
CATLGSCHEMA-DTA
01 LOCALSCHEMA.
49
LOCALSCHEMA-LN
49
LOCALSCHEMA-DTA
01 CHKLVL
01 CRITERIA.
49
CRITERIA-LN
49
CRITERIA-DTA
01 RESTRICTED.
49
RESTRICTED-LN
49
RESTRICTED-DTA
01 CRUPDATEDPAGESPCT
01 CRUPDATEDPAGESABS
01 CRCHANGESPCT
01 CRDAYSNCLASTCOPY
01 ICRUPDATEDPAGESPCT
01 ICRCHANGESPCT
01 CRINDEXSIZE
01 RRTINSERTPCT
01 RRTINSERTABS
966
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
RRTDELETEPCT
RRTDELETEABS
RRTUNCLUSTINSPCT
RRTDISORGLOBPCT
RRTDATASPACERAT
RRTMASSDELLIMIT
RRTINDREFLIMIT
RRIINSERTPCT
RRIINSERTABS
RRIDELETEPCT
RRIDELETEABS
RRIAPPENDINSERTPCT
RRIPSEUDODELETEPCT
RRIMASSDELLIMIT
RRILEAFLIMIT
RRINUMLEVELSLIMIT
SRTINSDELUPDPCT
SRTINSDELUPDABS
SRTMASSDELLIMIT
SRIINSDELPCT
SRIINSDELABS
SRIMASSDELLIMIT
EXTENTLIMIT
LASTSTATEMENT.
49
LASTSTATEMENT-LN
49
LASTSTATEMENT-DTA
RETURNCODE
ERRORMSG.
49
ERRORMSG-LN
49
ERRORMSG-DTA
IFCARETCODE
IFCARESCODE
EXCESSBYTES
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
S9(9)
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
COMP
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.

PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
S9(4) COMP VALUE 1331.

X(1331) VALUE SPACES.
*****************************************
*
*
*
*****************************************
01 QUERYTYPE-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 OBJECTTYPE-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 ICTYPE-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 STATSSCHEMA-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 CATLGSCHEMA-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 LOCALSCHEMA-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 CHKLVL-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 CRITERIA-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 RESTRICTED-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 CRUPDATEDPAGESPCT-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 CRUPDATEDPAGESABS-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 CRCHANGESPCT-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 CRDAYSNCLASTCOPY-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 ICRUPDATEDPAGESPCT-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 ICRCHANGESPCT-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 CRINDEXSIZE-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 RRTINSERTPCT-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 RRTINSERTABS-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 RRTDELETEPCT-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 RRTDELETEABS-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 RRTUNCLUSTINSPCT-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 RRTDISORGLOBPCT-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 RRTDATASPACERAT-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 RRTMASSDELLIMIT-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 RRTINDREFLIMIT-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 RRIINSERTPCT-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 RRIINSERTABS-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
01 RRIDELETEPCT-IND
PICTURE S9(4)
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
+0.
+0.
+0.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
967
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
RRIDELETEABS-IND
RRIMASSDELLIMIT-IND
RRILEAFLIMIT-IND
SRTINSDELUPDPCT-IND
SRTINSDELUPDABS-IND
SRTMASSDELLIMIT-IND
SRIINSDELPCT-IND
SRIINSDELABS-IND
SRIMASSDELLIMIT-IND
EXTENTLIMIT-IND
LASTSTATEMENT-IND
RETURNCODE-IND
ERRORMSG-IND
IFCARETCODE-IND
IFCARESCODE-IND
EXCESSBYTES-IND
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0
PROCEDURE DIVISION.
*********************************************************
* SET VALUES FOR DSNACCOX INPUT PARAMETERS:
*
* - USE THE CHKLVL PARAMETER TO CAUSE DSNACCOX TO CHECK *
*
FOR RELATED TABLE SPACES WHEN PROCESSING INDEX
*
*
SPACES, AND DELETE RECOMMENDATION FOR INDEXSPACES
*
*
WHEN AN ACTION (SUCH AS REORG) ON THE TABLE SPACE
*
*
WILL ALSO CAUSE THE ACTION TO BE DONE ON THE INDEX *
*
SPACE. (CHKLVL=64)
*
* - USE THE CRITERIA PARAMETER TO CAUSE DSNACCOX TO
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
CRUPDATEDPAGESPCT 4
*
*
CRCHANGESPCT
2
*
*
RRTINSDELUPDPCT
2
*
*
RRTUNCLUSTINSPCT
5
*
*
RRTDISORGLOBPCT
5
*
*
*
*
SRTINSDELUPDPCT
5
*
*
SRIINSDELPCT
5
*
*
EXTENTLIMIT
3
*
* - EXCLUDE CHECKING FOR THESE CRITERIA BY SET THE
*
*
FOLLOWING VALUES TO A NEGATIVE VALUE.
*
*
RRTMASSDELLIMIT
-1
*
*
RRIMASSDELLIMIT
-1
*
*********************************************************
MOVE 64 TO CHKLVL.
TO CRITERIA-DTA.
MOVE 2 TO RRTINSERTPCT.
MOVE 5 TO SRIINSDELPCT.
MOVE -1 TO RRTMASSDELLIMIT.
MOVE -1 TO RRIMASSDELLIMIT.
********************************
********************************
968
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*******************************************************
*
* DSNACCOX TO USE DEFAULT VALUES) AND FOR OUTPUT
*
* PARAMETERS.
*
*******************************************************
MOVE 0 TO RRTINSERTPCT-IND.
MOVE 0 TO SRIINSDELPCT-IND.
MOVE 0 TO RRTMASSDELLIMIT-IND.
MOVE 0 TO RRIMASSDELLIMIT-IND.
*****************
* CALL DSNACCOX *
*****************
EXEC SQL
CALL SYSPROC.DSNACCOX
(:QUERYTYPE
:OBJECTTYPE
:ICTYPE
:STATSSCHEMA
:CATLGSCHEMA
:LOCALSCHEMA
:CHKLVL
:CRITERIA
:RESTRICTED
:CRUPDATEDPAGESPCT
:CRUPDATEDPAGESABS
:CRCHANGESPCT
:CRDAYSNCLASTCOPY
:ICRUPDATEDPAGESPCT
:ICRCHANGESPCT
:CRINDEXSIZE
:RRTINSERTPCT
:RRTINSERTABS
:RRTDELETEPCT
:RRTDELETEABS
:RRTUNCLUSTINSPCT
:RRTDISORGLOBPCT
:RRTDATASPACERAT
:RRTMASSDELLIMIT
:RRTINDREFLIMIT
:RRIINSERTPCT
:RRIINSERTABS
:RRIDELETEPCT
:RRIDELETEABS
:RRIAPPENDINSERTPCT
:QUERYTYPE-IND,
:OBJECTTYPE-IND,
:ICTYPE-IND,
:STATSSCHEMA-IND,
:CATLGSCHEMA-IND,
:LOCALSCHEMA-IND,
:CHKLVL-IND,
:CRITERIA-IND,
:RESTRICTED-IND,
:CRUPDATEDPAGESABS-IND,
:CRCHANGESPCT-IND,
:ICRUPDATEDPAGESPCT-IND,
:ICRCHANGESPCT-IND,
:CRINDEXSIZE-IND,
:RRTINSERTPCT-IND,
:RRTINSERTABS-IND,
:RRTDELETEPCT-IND,
:RRTDELETEABS-IND,
:RRTDATASPACERAT-IND,
:RRIINSERTPCT-IND,
:RRIINSERTABS-IND,
:RRIDELETEPCT-IND,
:RRIDELETEABS-IND,
:RRIAPPENDINSERTPCT-IND,
969
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*************************************************************
*
*************************************************************
WITH PROCEDURE SYSPROC.DSNACCOX
END-EXEC.
END-EXEC.
END-EXEC.
DSNACCOX output
|
|
|
If DSNACCOX executes successfully, in addition to the output parameters

described in Option descriptions on page 897, DSNACCOX returns two result
sets.
|
|
The first result set contains the results from IFI COMMAND calls that DSNACCOX
Table 182. Result set row for first DSNACCOX result set
Column name
Data type
Contents
RS_SEQUENCE
INTEGER
|
|
RS_DATA
CHAR(80)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The second result set contains DSNACCOXs recommendations. This result set
:RRIPSEUDODELETEPCT
:RRIMASSDELLIMIT
:RRILEAFLIMIT
:RRINUMLEVELSLIMIT
:SRTINSDELUPDPCT
:SRTINSDELUPDABS
:SRTMASSDELLIMIT
:SRIINSDELPCT
:SRIINSDELABS
:SRIMASSDELLIMIT
:EXTENTLIMIT
:LASTSTATEMENT
:RETURNCODE
:ERRORMSG
:IFCARETCODE
:IFCARESCODE
:EXCESSBYTES
END-EXEC.
:RRIPSEUDODELETEPCT-IND,
:RRILEAFLIMIT-IND,
:SRIINSDELPCT-IND,
:SRIINSDELABS-IND,
:EXTENTLIMIT-IND,
:LASTSTATEMENT-IND,
:RETURNCODE-IND,
:ERRORMSG-IND,
:IFCARETCODE-IND,
:IFCARESCODE-IND,
:EXCESSBYTES-IND)
v DSNACCOX recommends at least one action for the table space, index space, or
partition.
970
|
|
Table 183. Result set row for second DSNACCOX result set
Column name
Data type
Description
DBNAME
VARCHAR(24)
NAME
VARCHARCHAR(128)
PARTITION
INTEGER
|
|
INSTANCE
INTEGER
Indicates if the object is associated with a data set

instance.
CLONE
CHAR(1)
Y or N, Y indicates a cloned object.
|
|
|
OBJECTTYPE
CHAR(2)
DB2 object type:
INDEXSPACE
VARCHAR(24)
Index space name.
CREATOR
VARCHAR(128)
Index creator name.
OBJECTSTATUS
CHAR(36)

v ORPHANED, if the object is an index space with

no corresponding table space, or if the object does
not exist
v If the object is in a restricted state, one of the
following values:
restricted-state is one of the status codes that appear
in DISPLAY DATABASE output. See DB2 Command
Reference for details.
v L, if the object is a logical partition, but not in an
advisory state.
v AL, if the object is a logical partition and in an
advisory state.
IMAGECOPY
CHAR(4)
v If OBJECTTYPE is TS: FULL (full image copy), INC
RUNSTATS
CHAR(3)
EXTENTS
CHAR(3)
Indicates whether the data sets for the object have

exceeded ExtentLimit: YES or NO.
REORG
CHAR(3)
971
Column name
Data type
Description
INEXCEPTTABLE
CHAR(40)

v Text that you specify in the QUERYTYPE column
of the exception table.
v YES, if you put a row in the exception table for the
object that this result set row represents, but you
specify NULL in the QUERYTYPE column.
v NO, if the exception table exists but does not have
a row for the object that this result set row
represents.
v Null, if the exception table does not exist, or if the
ChkLvl input parameter does not include the value
4.
ASSOCIATEDTS
CHAR(8)
If OBJECTTYPE is IX this value is the name of the

table space that is associated with the index space.
Otherwise null.
COPYLASTTIME
TIMESTAMP
Timestamp of the last full image copy on the object.

Null if COPY was never run, or if the last COPY
execution is unknown.
LOADRLASTTIME
TIMESTAMP
Timestamp of the last LOAD REPLACE on the object.

Null if LOAD REPLACE was never run, or if the last
LOAD REPLACE execution is unknown.
REBUILDLASTTIME
TIMESTAMP
Timestamp of the last REBUILD INDEX on the object.

Null if REBUILD INDEX was never run, or if the last
REBUILD INDEX execution is unknown.
CRUPDPGSPCT
DOUBLE

pages, expressed as a percentage. Otherwise null.
pages, does not exceed the CRUpdatedPagesPct (for
table spaces) or ICRUpdatedPagesPct (for indexes),
this value is null.
CRUPDPGSABS
INTEGER

pages. Otherwise null.
pages, does not exceed the value specified
forCRUpdatedPagesPct (for table spaces) or
ICRUpdatedPagesPct (for indexes), this value is null.
972
Column name
Data type
Description
CRCPYCHGPCT
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS and IMAGECOPY is YES, the

ratio of the total number insert, update, and delete
operations since the last image copy to the total
partition, expressed as a percentage. If OBJECTTYPE
is IX and IMAGECOPY is YES, the ratio of the total
number of insert and delete operations since the last
image copy to the total number of entries in the
Otherwise null.
If the ratio of the total number insert, update, and
delete operations since the last image copy to the
partition does not exceed the value specified
forCRChangesPct (for table spaces) or ICRChangesPct
(for index spaces), this value is null.
CRDAYSCELSTCPY
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS or IX and IMAGECOPY is YES,

the number of days since the last image copy.
Otherwise null.
If the number of days since the last image copy does
not exceed the value specified for CrDaySncLastCopy,
this value is null.
CRINDEXSIZE
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is IX and IMAGECOPY is YES, the

number of active pages in the index space or
If the the number of active pages in the index space
or partition does not exceed the value specified for
CRIndexSize, this value is null.
REORGLASTTIME
TIMESTAMP
Timestamp of the last REORG on the object. Null if

REORG was never run, or if the last REORG
execution was terminated.
RRTINSERTSPCT
DOUBLE

the sum of insert, update, and delete operations since
the last REORG to the total number of rows or LOBs
in the table space or partition, expressed as a
If the ratio of the sum of insert, update, and delete
operations since the last REORG to the total number
of rows or LOBs in the table space or partition does
not exceed the value specified for RRTInsertPct, this
value is null.
RRTINSERTSABS
INTEGER

the sum of insert operations since the last REORG to
the total number of rows in the table space or
If the the ratio of the sum of insert operations since
the last REORG to the total number of rows in the
table space or partition does not exceed the value
specified for RRTInsertAbs, this value is null.
973
Column name
Data type
Description
RRTDELETESPCT
DOUBLE
If the OBJECTTYTPE is TS and REORG is YES, the

ratio of the sum of delete operations since the last
REORG to the total number of rows in the table
space or partition, expressed as a percentage.
Otherwise null.
If the ratio of the sum of delete operations since the
last REORG to the total number of rows in the table
space or partition does not exceed the value specified
for RRTDeletePct, this value is null.
RRTDELETESABS
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS and REORG is YES, the total

number of delete operations since the last REORG on
a table space or partition. Otherwise null.
If the the total number of delete operations since the
last REORG does not exceed the value specified for
RRTUNCINSPCT
DOUBLE

the number of unclustered insert operations to the
If the the ratio of the number of unclustered insert
operations to the total number of rows or LOBs does
not exceed the value specified for RRTUnclustInsPct,
this value is null.
RRTDISORGLOBPCT
DOUBLE

the number of imperfectly chunked LOBs to the total
If the the ratio of the number of imperfectly chunked
LOBs to the total number of rows or LOBs in the
table space or partition does not exceed the value of
RRTDisorgLOBPct, this value is null
| RRTDATASPACERAT
|
|
DOUBLE
If OBJECTTYPE is TS and REORG is YES,the ratio of

the number of SPACE allocated and the space used,
exceed RRTDataSpaceRat threshold. Otherwise null.
RRTMASSDELETE
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS, REORG is YES, and the table

space is a segmented table space or LOB table space,
the number of mass deletes since the last REORG or
LOAD REPLACE. If OBJECTTYPE is TS, REORG is
YES, and the table space is nonsegmented, the
number of dropped tables since the last REORG or
If the number of the number of dropped tables since
the last REORG or LOAD REPLACE does not exceed
the value specified for RRTMassDelLimit, this value is
null.
974
Column name
Data type
Description
RRTINDREF
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS, REORG is YES, the ratio of the

total number of overflow records that were created
since the last REORG or LOAD REPLACE to the total
If the ratio of the total number of overflow records
that were created since the last REORG or LOAD
REPLACE to the total number of rows or LOBs does
not exceed the value specified for RRTIndRef, this
value is null.
RRIINSERTPCT
DOUBLE

the total number of insert operations since the last
Otherwise null.
If the ratio of the total number of insert operations
RRIInsertPct, this value is null.
RRIINSERTABS
INTEGER
If OBJECTYPE is IX and REORG is YES, t total

number of insert operations since the last REORG.
Otherwise null.
RRTInsertAbs, this value is null.
RRIDELETEPCT
DOUBLE

the total number of delete operations since the last
Otherwise null.
If the ratio of the total number of delete operations
RRIDeletePct, this value is null.
RRIDELETABS
INTEGER
If OBJECTYPE is IX and REORG is YES, the total

number of delete operations since the last REORG.
Otherwise null.
975
Column name
Data type
Description
RRIAPPINSPCT
DOUBLE

the number of index entries that were inserted since
REPLACE that had a key value greater than the
maximum key value in the index space or partition,
to the number of index entries in the index space or
inserted, which had a key value greater than the
maximum key value, to the number of index entries
RRIAppendInsertPct, this value is null.
RRIPSDDELPCT
INTEGER

the number of index entries that were pseudo-deleted
(the RID entry was marked as deleted) since the last
REORG, REBUILD INDEX, or LOAD REPLACE to
the number of index entries in the index space or
pseudo-deleted since the last REORG, REBUILD
INDEX, or LOAD REPLACE to the number of index
RRIPseudoDeletePct, this value is null.
RRIMASSDELETE
INTEGER

of mass deletes from the index space or partition
since the last REORG, REBUILD, or LOAD
REPLACE. Otherwise null.
If the number of mass deletes from the index space or
partition since the last REORG, REBUILD, or LOAD
REPLACE does not exceed the value specified for
RRIMassDelLimit, this value is null.
RRILEAF
INTEGER

the number of index page splits that occurred since
REPLACE in which the higher part of the split page
was far from the location of the original page, to the
total number of active pages in the index space or
If the ratio of the number of index page splits that
occurred since the last REORG, REBUILD INDEX, or
LOAD REPLACE to the total number of active pages
does not exceed the value specified for RRILeafLimit,
this value is null.
RRINUMLEVELS
INTEGER

of levels in the index tree that were added or
removed since the last REORG, REBUILD INDEX, or
If the number of levels in the index tree that were
added or removed does not exceed the value
specified for RRINumLevelsLimit, this value is null.
976
Column name
Data type
Description
STATSLASTTIME
TIMESTAMP
Timestamp of the last RUNSTATS on the object. Null

if RUNSTATS was never run, or if the last
RUNSTATS execution was unknown.
SRTINSDELUPDPCT
DOUBLE

ratio of the total number of insert, update, and delete
operations since the last RUNSTATS on a table space
or partition, to the total number of rows or LOBs in
the table space or partition, expressed as a
If the ratio of the total number of insert, update, and
delete operations since the last RUNSTATS to the
total number of rows or LOBs does not exceed the
value specified for SRTInsDelUpdPct, this value is
null.
SRTINSDELUPDABS
INTEGER

total number of insert, update, and delete operations
since the last RUNSTATS on a table space or
the value specified for SRTInsDelUpdAbs, this value is
null.
SRTMASSDELETE
INTEGER

number of mass deletes from the table space or
partition since the last REORG or LOAD REPLACE.
Otherwise null.
If the number of mass deletes from the table space or
partition since the last REORG or LOAD REPLACE
SRTMassDelLimit, this value is null.
SRIINSDELPCT
DOUBLE

ratio of the total number of insert and delete
operations since the last RUNSTATS on the index
space or partition, to the total number of index
entries in the index space or partition, expressed as a
If the ratio of the total number of insert and delete
operations since the last RUNSTATS, to the total
number of index entries does not exceed the value
specified for SRIInsDelPct, this value is null.
SRIINSDELABS
INTEGER

number insert and delete operations since the last
RUNSTATS on the index space or partition.
Otherwise null.
the value specified for SRIINSDELABS, this value is
null.
977
Column name
Data type
Description
SRIMASSDELETE
INTEGER

number of mass deletes from the index space or
partition since the last REORG, REBUILD INDEX, or
LOAD REPLACE. Otherwise, this value is null.
If the number of mass deletes does not exceed the
value specified for SRIMassDelete, this value is null.
TOTALEXTENTS
SMALLINT
If EXTENTS is YES, the number of physical extents in

the table space, index space, or partition. Otherwise,
this value is null.
If the number of physical extents does not exceed the
value specified for ExtentLimit, this value is null.
PSPI

The DB2 real-time statistics stored procedure (DSNACCOR) is a sample stored
The DSNACCOX stored procedure replaces the DSNACCOR stored procedure and
provides improved recommendations. If you have migrated your real-time
statistics to the DB2 catalog, or DB2 is running in DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS
new-function mode or later, you can use the DSNACCOX stored procedure to take
advantage of enhancements, including new fields, improved formulas, and the
option to select the formula that is used for making recommendations.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PSPI
In particular, DSNACCOR performs the following actions:

|
|
DSNACCOR uses data from the SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACESTATS and

SYSIBM.SYSSYSINDEXSPACESTATS real-time statistics tables to make its
recommendations. DSNACCOR provides its recommendations in a result set.
|
|
|
DSNACCOR uses the set of criteria that are shown in DSNACCOR formulas for
default, DSNACCOR evaluates all table spaces and index spaces in the subsystem
Important information about DSNACCOR recommendations:
v DSNACCOR makes recommendations based on general formulas that require
978
of your DB2 subsystem, the recommendations that DSNACCOR makes might
v Before you perform any action that DSNACCOR recommends, ensure that the
object for which DSNACCOR makes the recommendation is available, and that
the recommended action can be performed on that object. For example, before
you can perform an image copy on an index, the index must have the COPY
YES attribute.
Environment
DSNACCOR must run in a WLM-established stored procedure address space.
You should bind the package for DSNACCOR with isolation UR to avoid lock
contention. You can find the installation steps for DSNACCOR in job DSNTIJSG.
To execute the CALL DSNACCOR statement, the owner of the package or plan
v The EXECUTE privilege on the package for DSNACCOR
v SYSADM authority
have:
v SELECT authority on the real-time statistics tables
v Select authority on catalog tables
Syntax diagram
DSNACCOR. Because the linkage convention for DSNACCOR is GENERAL WITH
979
CALL DSNACCOR (
CatlgSchema
NULL
CRUpdatedPagesPct
NULL
ICRChangesPct
NULL
RRTDisorgLOBPct
NULL
RRIAppendInsertPct
NULL
RRINumLevelsLimit
NULL
SRIInsDelUpdPct
NULL
QueryType
NULL
ObjectType
NULL
LocalSchema
NULL
ChkLvl
NULL
CRChangesPct
NULL
CRIndexSize
NULL
,
SRTInsDelUpdPct
NULL
Restricted
NULL
,
SRTInsDelUpdAbs
NULL
RRILeafLimit
NULL
SRTMassDelLimit
NULL
ExtentLimit
NULL
RRIInsertDeletePct
NULL
RRIMassDelLimit
NULL
SRIMassDelLimit
NULL
ICRUpdatedPagesPct
NULL
RRTUnclustInsPct
NULL
RRTIndRefLimit
NULL
StatsSchema
NULL
CRDaySncLastCopy
NULL
RRIPseudoDeletePct
NULL
SRIInsDelUpdAbs
NULL
ICType
NULL
Criteria
NULL
RRTInsDelUpdPct
NULL
RRTMassDelLimit
NULL
Option descriptions
the value that DSNACCOR uses if you specify a null value.
QueryType
Specifies the types of actions that DSNACCOR recommends. This field
ALL

RUNSTATS
REORG
this value causes DSNACCOR to process the EXTENTS value also.
EXTENTS
RESTRICT
QueryType is an input parameter of type VARCHAR(40). The default is ALL.
ObjectType
Specifies the types of objects for which DSNACCOR recommends actions:
980
ALL
TS
Table spaces only.
IX
Index spaces only.
ObjectType is an input parameter of type VARCHAR(3). The default is ALL.

ICType
Specifies the types of image copies for which DSNACCOR is to make
recommendations:
F
Full image copy.

StatsSchema
Specifies the qualifier for the real-time statistics table names. StatsSchema is an
input parameter of type VARCHAR(128). The default is SYSIBM.
CatlgSchema
parameter of type VARCHAR(128). The default is SYSIBM.
LocalSchema
Specifies the qualifier for the names of tables that DSNACCOR creates.
LocalSchema is an input parameter of type VARCHAR(128). The default is
DSNACC.
ChkLvl
Specifies the types of checking that DSNACCOR performs, and indicates
whether to include objects that fail those checks in the DSNACCOR
following values:
0
DSNACCOR performs none of the following actions.
objects have not been deleted. If value 16 is not also chosen, exclude
rows for the deleted objects from the recommendations result set.
DSNACCOR excludes objects from the recommendations result set if
those objects are not in the SYSTABLESPACE or SYSINDEXES catalog
tables.
|
|
|
When this setting is specified, DSNACCOR does not use

EXTENTS>ExtentLimit to determine whether a LOB table space should
be reorganized.
2
For index spaces that are listed in the recommendations result set,
check the SYSTABLES, SYSTABLESPACE, and SYSINDEXES catalog
tables to determine the name of the table space that is associated with
each index space.
Choosing this value causes DSNACCOR to also check for rows in the
recommendations result set for objects that have been deleted but have
entries in the real-time statistics tables (value 1). This means that if
value 16 is not also chosen, rows for deleted objects are excluded from
the recommendations result set.
Check whether rows that are in the DSNACCOR recommendations

981

8

16
objects have not been deleted (value 1). In result set rows for deleted
objects, specify the word ORPHANED in the OBJECTSTATUS column.
32
Exclude rows from the DSNACCOR recommendations result set for

recommended for REORG. Choosing this value causes DSNACCOR to
perform the actions for values 1 and 2.
64
For index spaces that are listed in the DSNACCOR recommendations

column of the recommendations result set.
ChkLvl is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 7 (values

1+2+4).
Criteria
Narrows the set of objects for which DSNACCOR makes recommendations.
This value is the search condition of an SQL WHERE clause. Criteria is an
input parameter of type VARCHAR(4096). The default is that DSNACCOR
makes recommendations for all table spaces and index spaces in the
subsystem. The search condition can use any column in the result set and
wildcards are allowed.
Restricted
CRUpdatedPagesPct
The total number of distinct updated pages, divided by the total number of
CRUpdatedPagesPct.
true for an index space, DSNACCOR recommends an image copy:
CRUpdatedPagesPct.
CRIndexSize. See items 2 and 3 in Figure 149 on page 885.
CRUpdatedPagesPct is an input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 20.
982
CRChangesPct
true for an index table space, DSNACCOR recommends an image copy:
CRIndexSize.
See items 2 and 4 in Figure 149 on page 885. CRChangesPct is an input
CRDaySncLastCopy
this value, DSNACCOR recommends an image copy. (See item 1 in Figure 148
on page 884 and item 1 in Figure 149 on page 885.) CRDaySncLastCopy is an
input parameter of type INTEGER. The default is 7.
ICRUpdatedPagesPct
The number of distinct pages that were updated since the last image copy,
(expressed as a percentage) is greater than CRUpdatedPagesPct.
(See item 1 in Figure 150 on page 885.) ICRUpdatedPagesPct is an input
ICRChangesPct
(See item 2 in Figure 150 on page 885.) ICRChangesPct is an input parameter of
CRIndexSize
Specifies, when combined with CRUpdatedPagesPct or CRChangesPct, a criterion
for recommending a full image copy on an index space. (See items 2, 3, and 4
in Figure 149 on page 885.) CRIndexSize is an input parameter of type
RRTInsDelUpdPct
running REORG:
983
The sum of insert, update, and delete operations since the last REORG,
(expressed as a percentage) is greater than RRTInsDelUpdPct
(See item 1 in Figure 151 on page 885.) RRTInsDelUpdPct is an input parameter
RRTUnclustInsPct
running REORG:
(See item 2 in Figure 151 on page 885.) RRTUnclustInsPct is an input parameter
RRTDisorgLOBPct
running REORG:
(See item 3 in Figure 151 on page 885.) RRTDisorgLOBPct is an input parameter
RRTMassDelLimit
(See item 5 in Figure 151 on page 885.) RRTMassDelLimit is an input parameter
RRTIndRefLimit
table space. If the following value is greater than RRTIndRefLimit, DSNACCOR
(See item 4 in Figure 151 on page 885.) RRTIndRefLimit is an input parameter of
RRIInsertDeletePct
an index space. If the following value is greater than RRIInsertDeletePct,
The sum of the number of index entries that were inserted and deleted
since the last REORG, divided by the total number of index entries in the
index space or partition (expressed as a percentage)
984
(See item 1 in Figure 152 on page 886.) This is an input parameter of type
RRIAppendInsertPct
(See item 2 in Figure 152 on page 886.) RRIInsertDeletePct is an input parameter
RRIPseudoDeletePct
(See item 3 in Figure 152 on page 886.) RRIPseudoDeletePct is an input
RRIMassDelLimit
value, DSNACCOR recommends running REORG.
(See item 4 in Figure 152 on page 886.) RRIMassDelLimit is an input parameter
RRILeafLimit
REBUILD INDEX, or LOAD REPLACE that resulted in a large separation
between the parts of the original page, divided by the total number of
active pages in the index space or partition (expressed as a percentage)
(See item 5 in Figure 152 on page 886.) RRILeafLimit is an input parameter of
RRINumLevelsLimit
(See item 6 in Figure 152 on page 886.) RRINumLevelsLimit is an input
SRTInsDelUpdPct
985

of the following conditions are true, DSNACCOR recommends running
RUNSTATS:
SRTInsDelUpdPct.
(See items 1 and 2 in Figure 153 on page 886.) SRTInsDelUpdPct is an input
SRTInsDelUpdAbs
(See items 1 and 2 in Figure 153 on page 886.) SRTInsDelUpdAbs is an input
SRTMassDelLimit
on a table space. If the following condition is true, DSNACCOR recommends
running RUNSTATS:
(See item 3 in Figure 153 on page 886.) SRTMassDelLimit is an input parameter
SRIInsDelPct
SRIInsDelUpdPct.
(See items 1 and 2 in Figure 154 on page 886.) SRIInsDelPct is an input
SRIInsDelAbs
following condition is true, DSNACCOR recommends running RUNSTATS:
986
SRIInsDelUpdPct.
(See items 1 and 2 in Figure 154 on page 886.) SRIInsDelAbs is an input
SRIMassDelLimit
greater than this value, DSNACCOR recommends running RUNSTATS.
(See item 3 in Figure 154 on page 886.) SRIMassDelLimit is an input parameter
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
ExtentLimit
table space or index space. Also specifies that DSNACCOR is to warn the user
that the table space or index space has used too many extents. DSNACCOR
condition is true:
(See Figure 155 on page 886.) ExtentLimit is an input parameter of type
LastStatement
When DSNACCOR returns a severe error (return code 12), this field contains
ReturnCode
The return code from DSNACCOR execution. Possible values are:
0
DSNACCOR executed successfully. The ErrorMsg parameter contains

the approximate percentage of the total number of objects in the
subsystem that have information in the real-time statistics tables.
DSNACCOR completed, but one or more input parameters might be

incompatible. The ErrorMsg parameter contains the input parameters
that might be incompatible.
DSNACCOR terminated with errors. The ErrorMsg parameter contains

12
DSNACCOR terminated with severe errors. The ErrorMsg parameter

error occurred.
14
DSNACCOR terminated because it could not access one or more of the

real-time statistics tables. The ErrorMsg parameter contains the names
of the tables that DSNACCOR could not access.
15
DSNACCOR terminated because it encountered a problem with one of

987
16
DSNACCOR terminated because it could not define a declared

temporary table. No table spaces were defined in the TEMP database.
NULL DSNACCOR terminated but could not set a return code.

ErrorMsg
Contains information about DSNACCOR execution. If DSNACCOR runs
successfully (ReturnCode=0), this field contains the approximate percentage of
objects in the subsystem that are in the real-time statistics tables. Otherwise,
this field contains error messages. ErrorMsg is an output parameter of type
VARCHAR(1331).
IFCARetCode
Contains the return code from an IFI COMMAND call. DSNACCOR issues
IFCAResCode
ExcessBytes
INTEGER.
DSNACCOR formulas for recommending actions

The following formulas specify the criteria that DSNACCOR uses for its
recommendations and warnings. The variables in italics are DSNACCOR input

ICType='F') AND
1
(COPYUPDATEDPAGES*100)/NACTIVE>CRUpdatedPagesPct OR 2
(COPYCHANGES*100)/TOTALROWS>CRChangesPct)
3
Figure 171. DSNACCOR formula for recommending a full image copy on a table space
988

1
2
((COPYUPDATEDPAGES*100)/NACTIVE>CRUpdatedPagesPct OR 3
(COPYCHANGES*100)/TOTALENTRIES>CRChangesPct)))
4
Figure 172. DSNACCOR formula for recommending a full image copy on an index space
The figure below shows the formula that DSNACCOR uses to recommend an

ICType='I' AND
(COPYUPDATEDPAGES*100)/NACTIVE>ICRUpdatedPagesPct OR 1
(COPYCHANGES*100)/TOTALROWS>ICRChangesPct))
2
Figure 173. DSNACCOR formula for recommending an incremental image copy on a table space

((REORGINSERTS+REORGDELETES+REORGUPDATES)*100)/TOTALROWS>RRTInsDelUpdPct OR 1
(REORGUNCLUSTINS*100)/TOTALROWS>RRTUnclustInsPct OR
2
(REORGDISORGLOB*100)/TOTALROWS>RRTDisorgLOBPct OR
3
((REORGNEARINDREF+REORGFARINDREF)*100)/TOTALROWS>RRTIndRefLimit OR
4
5
6
Figure 174. DSNACCOR formula for recommending a REORG on a table space
989

((REORGINSERTS+REORGDELETES)*100)/TOTALENTRIES>RRIInsertDeletePct OR
(REORGAPPENDINSERT*100)/TOTALENTRIES>RRIAppendInsertPct OR
(REORGPSEUDODELETES*100)/TOTALENTRIES>RRIPseudoDeletePct OR
(REORGLEAFFAR*100)/NACTIVE>RRILeafLimit OR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Figure 175. DSNACCOR formula for recommending a REORG on an index space

(((STATSINSERTS+STATSDELETES+STATSUPDATES)*100)/TOTALROWS>SRTInsDelUpdPct AND 1
2
STATSMASSDELETE>SRTMassDeleteLimit)
3
Figure 176. DSNACCOR formula for recommending RUNSTATS on a table space

(((STATSINSERTS+STATSDELETES)*100)/TOTALENTRIES>SRIInsDelUpdPct AND 1
(STATSINSERTS+STATSDELETES)>SRIInsDelPct) OR
2
STATSMASSDELETE>SRIInsDelAbs)
3
Figure 177. DSNACCOR formula for recommending RUNSTATS on an index space
The figure below shows the formula that DSNACCOR uses to that too many index
space or table space extents have been used.
EXTENTS>ExtentLimit
Figure 178. DSNACCOR formula for warning that too many data set extents for a table space or index space are used

990
QUERYTYPE CHAR(40))
CCSID EBCDIC;

DBNAME
NAME
QUERYTYPE
If you put a null value in this column, DSNACCOR puts the value YES in the

Example: Suppose that you want to include all rows for database DSNDB04 in
the recommendations result set, except for those rows that contain the string
Example
The following COBOL example that shows variable declarations and an SQL CALL
for obtaining recommendations for objects in databases DSN8D91A and
retrieve the two result sets that DSNACCOR returns.
.
.
.
***********************
* DSNACCOR PARAMETERS *
***********************
991
01
01
01
01
01
49
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
QUERYTYPE.
49
QUERYTYPE-LN
49
QUERYTYPE-DTA
OBJECTTYPE.
49
OBJECTTYPE-LN
49
OBJECTTYPE-DTA
ICTYPE.
49
ICTYPE-LN
49
ICTYPE-DTA
STATSSCHEMA.
49
STATSSCHEMA-LN
49
STATSSCHEMA-DTA
CATLGSCHEMA.
CATLGSCHEMA-LN
49
CATLGSCHEMA-DTA
LOCALSCHEMA.
49
LOCALSCHEMA-LN
49
LOCALSCHEMA-DTA
CHKLVL
CRITERIA.
49
CRITERIA-LN
49
CRITERIA-DTA
RESTRICTED.
49
RESTRICTED-LN
49
RESTRICTED-DTA
CRUPDATEDPAGESPCT
CRCHANGESPCT
CRDAYSNCLASTCOPY
ICRUPDATEDPAGESPCT
ICRCHANGESPCT
CRINDEXSIZE
RRTINSDELUPDPCT
RRTUNCLUSTINSPCT
RRTDISORGLOBPCT
RRTMASSDELLIMIT
RRTINDREFLIMIT
RRIINSERTDELETEPCT
RRIAPPENDINSERTPCT
RRIPSEUDODELETEPCT
RRIMASSDELLIMIT
RRILEAFLIMIT
RRINUMLEVELSLIMIT
SRTINSDELUPDPCT
SRTINSDELUPDABS
SRTMASSDELLIMIT
SRIINSDELUPDPCT
SRIINSDELUPDABS
SRIMASSDELLIMIT
EXTENTLIMIT
LASTSTATEMENT.
49
LASTSTATEMENT-LN
49
LASTSTATEMENT-DTA
RETURNCODE
ERRORMSG.
49
ERRORMSG-LN
49
ERRORMSG-DTA
IFCARETCODE
IFCARESCODE
EXCESSBYTES
*****************************************
*
*
*
*****************************************
01 QUERYTYPE-IND
01 OBJECTTYPE-IND
992
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
ICTYPE-IND
STATSSCHEMA-IND
CATLGSCHEMA-IND
LOCALSCHEMA-IND
CHKLVL-IND
CRITERIA-IND
RESTRICTED-IND
CRUPDATEDPAGESPCT-IND
CRCHANGESPCT-IND
CRDAYSNCLASTCOPY-IND
ICRUPDATEDPAGESPCT-IND
ICRCHANGESPCT-IND
CRINDEXSIZE-IND
RRTINSDELUPDPCT-IND
RRTUNCLUSTINSPCT-IND
RRTDISORGLOBPCT-IND
RRTMASSDELLIMIT-IND
RRTINDREFLIMIT-IND
RRIINSERTDELETEPCT-IND
RRIMASSDELLIMIT-IND
RRILEAFLIMIT-IND
SRTINSDELUPDPCT-IND
SRTINSDELUPDABS-IND
SRTMASSDELLIMIT-IND
SRIINSDELUPDPCT-IND
SRIINSDELUPDABS-IND
SRIMASSDELLIMIT-IND
EXTENTLIMIT-IND
LASTSTATEMENT-IND
RETURNCODE-IND
ERRORMSG-IND
IFCARETCODE-IND
IFCARESCODE-IND
EXCESSBYTES-IND
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
PICTURE
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
S9(4)
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
COMP-4
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
+0.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
-1.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
+0.
PROCEDURE DIVISION.
.
.
.
*********************************************************
* SET VALUES FOR DSNACCOR INPUT PARAMETERS:
*
* - USE THE CHKLVL PARAMETER TO CAUSE DSNACCOR TO CHECK *
*
FOR ORPHANED OBJECTS AND INDEX SPACES WITHOUT
*
*
TABLE SPACES, BUT INCLUDE THOSE OBJECTS IN THE
*
*
RECOMMENDATIONS RESULT SET (CHKLVL=1+2+16=19)
*
* - USE THE CRITERIA PARAMETER TO CAUSE DSNACCOR TO
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
CRUPDATEDPAGESPCT
4
*
*
CRCHANGESPCT
2
*
*
RRTINSDELUPDPCT
2
*
*
RRTUNCLUSTINSPCT
5
*
*
RRTDISORGLOBPCT
5
*
*
*
*
SRTINSDELUPDPCT
5
*
*
SRIINSDELUPDPCT
5
*
*
EXTENTLIMIT
3
*
*********************************************************
MOVE 19 TO CHKLVL.
TO CRITERIA-DTA.
993
MOVE 2 TO RRTINSDELUPDPCT.
MOVE 5 TO SRIINSDELUPDPCT.
********************************
********************************
*******************************************************
*
* DSNACCOR TO USE DEFAULT VALUES) AND FOR OUTPUT
*
* PARAMETERS.
*
*******************************************************
MOVE 0 TO RRTINSDELUPDPCT-IND.
MOVE 0 TO SRIINSDELUPDPCT-IND.
.
.
.
*****************
* CALL DSNACCOR *
*****************
EXEC SQL
CALL SYSPROC.DSNACCOR
(:QUERYTYPE
:QUERYTYPE-IND,
:OBJECTTYPE
:OBJECTTYPE-IND,
:ICTYPE
:ICTYPE-IND,
:STATSSCHEMA
:STATSSCHEMA-IND,
:CATLGSCHEMA
:CATLGSCHEMA-IND,
:LOCALSCHEMA
:LOCALSCHEMA-IND,
:CHKLVL
:CHKLVL-IND,
:CRITERIA
:CRITERIA-IND,
:RESTRICTED
:RESTRICTED-IND,
:CRUPDATEDPAGESPCT
:CRCHANGESPCT
:CRCHANGESPCT-IND,
:CRDAYSNCLASTCOPY
:ICRUPDATEDPAGESPCT :ICRUPDATEDPAGESPCT-IND,
:ICRCHANGESPCT
:ICRCHANGESPCT-IND,
:CRINDEXSIZE
:CRINDEXSIZE-IND,
:RRTINSDELUPDPCT
:RRTINSDELUPDPCT-IND,
:RRTUNCLUSTINSPCT
:RRTDISORGLOBPCT
:RRTMASSDELLIMIT
994
:RRTINDREFLIMIT
:RRIINSERTDELETEPCT :RRIINSERTDELETEPCT-IND,
:RRIAPPENDINSERTPCT :RRIAPPENDINSERTPCT-IND,
:RRIPSEUDODELETEPCT :RRIPSEUDODELETEPCT-IND,
:RRIMASSDELLIMIT
:RRILEAFLIMIT
:RRILEAFLIMIT-IND,
:RRINUMLEVELSLIMIT
:SRTINSDELUPDPCT
:SRTINSDELUPDABS
:SRTMASSDELLIMIT
:SRIINSDELUPDPCT
:SRIINSDELUPDPCT-IND,
:SRIINSDELUPDABS
:SRIINSDELUPDABS-IND,
:SRIMASSDELLIMIT
:EXTENTLIMIT
:EXTENTLIMIT-IND,
:LASTSTATEMENT
:LASTSTATEMENT-IND,
:RETURNCODE
:RETURNCODE-IND,
:ERRORMSG
:ERRORMSG-IND,
:IFCARETCODE
:IFCARETCODE-IND,
:IFCARESCODE
:IFCARESCODE-IND,
:EXCESSBYTES
:EXCESSBYTES-IND)
END-EXEC.
*************************************************************
*
*************************************************************
WITH PROCEDURE SYSPROC.DSNACCOR
END-EXEC.
END-EXEC.
END-EXEC.
Figure 179. Example of DSNACCOR invocation
Output
If DSNACCOR executes successfully, in addition to the output parameters
described in Option descriptions on page 876, DSNACCOR returns two result
sets.
The first result set contains the results from IFI COMMAND calls that DSNACCOR
Table 184. Result set row for first DSNACCOR result set
Column name
Data type
Contents
RS_SEQUENCE
INTEGER
RS_DATA
CHAR(80)
The second result set contains DSNACCORs recommendations. This result set
995
v DSNACCOR recommends at least one action for the table space, index space, or
partition.
Table 185. Result set row for second DSNACCOR result set
Column name
Data type
Description
DBNAME
CHAR(8)
NAME
CHAR(8)
PARTITION
INTEGER
OBJECTTYPE
CHAR(2)
DB2 object type:

OBJECTSTATUS
CHAR(36)

v ORPHANED, if the object is an index space with no
corresponding table space, or if the object does not exist
v If the object is in a restricted state, one of the following
values:
restricted-state is one of the status codes that appear in
DISPLAY DATABASE output. See DB2 Command Reference
for details.
v L, if the object is a logical partition, but not in an advisory
state.
v AL, if the object is a logical partition and in an advisory
state.
IMAGECOPY
CHAR(3)
v If OBJECTTYPE is TS: FUL (full image copy), INC
RUNSTATS
CHAR(3)
EXTENTS
CHAR(3)
Indicates whether the data sets for the object have exceeded
ExtentLimit: YES or NO.
REORG
CHAR(3)
INEXCEPTTABLE
CHAR(40)

v Text that you specify in the QUERYTYPE column of the
exception table.
v YES, if you put a row in the exception table for the object
that this result set row represents, but you specify NULL in
the QUERYTYPE column.
v NO, if the exception table exists but does not have a row for
the object that this result set row represents.
v Null, if the exception table does not exist, or if the ChkLvl
input parameter does not include the value 4.
ASSOCIATEDTS
996
CHAR(8)
If OBJECTTYPE is IX and the ChkLvl input parameter includes

the value 2, this value is the name of the table space that is
associated with the index space. Otherwise null.
Column name
Data type
Description
COPYLASTTIME
TIMESTAMP
Timestamp of the last full image copy on the object. Null if

COPY was never run, or if the last COPY execution was
terminated.
LOADRLASTTIME
TIMESTAMP
Timestamp of the last LOAD REPLACE on the object. Null if

LOAD REPLACE was never run, or if the last LOAD
REPLACE execution was terminated.
REBUILDLASTTIME
TIMESTAMP
Timestamp of the last REBUILD INDEX on the object. Null if

REBUILD INDEX was never run, or if the last REBUILD
INDEX execution was terminated.
CRUPDPGSPCT
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS or IX and IMAGECOPY is YES, the ratio

of distinct updated pages to preformatted pages, expressed as
a percentage. Otherwise null.
CRCPYCHGPCT
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS and IMAGECOPY is YES, the ratio of

the total number insert, update, and delete operations since
the last image copy to the total number of rows or LOBs in the
table space or partition, expressed as a percentage. If
OBJECTTYPE is IX and IMAGECOPY is YES, the ratio of the
image copy to the total number of entries in the index space or
CRDAYSCELSTCPY
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS or IX and IMAGECOPY is YES, the

number of days since the last image copy. Otherwise null.
CRINDEXSIZE
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is IX and IMAGECOPY is YES, the number of

active pages in the index space or partition. Otherwise null.
REORGLASTTIME
TIMESTAMP
Timestamp of the last REORG on the object. Null if REORG

was never run, or if the last REORG execution was terminated.
RRTINSDELUPDPCT
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS and REORG is YES, the ratio of the sum

of insert, update, and delete operations since the last REORG
to the total number of rows or LOBs in the table space or
RRTUNCINSPCT
INTEGER

number of unclustered insert operations to the total number of
RRTDISORGLOBPCT
INTEGER

number of imperfectly chunked LOBs to the total number of
RRTMASSDELETE
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS, REORG is YES, and the table space is a

segmented table space or LOB table space, the number of mass
deletes since the last REORG or LOAD REPLACE. If
OBJECTTYPE is TS, REORG is YES, and the table space is
nonsegmented, the number of dropped tables since the last
RRTINDREF
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS, REORG is YES, the ratio of the total

number of overflow records that were created since the last
REORG or LOAD REPLACE to the total number of rows or
LOBs in the table space or partition, expressed as a percentage.
Otherwise null.
997
Column name
Data type
Description
RRIINSDELPCT
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is IX and REORG is YES, the ratio of the total

number of insert and delete operations since the last REORG
to the total number of index entries in the index space or
RRIAPPINSPCT
INTEGER

number of index entries that were inserted since the last
REORG, REBUILD INDEX, or LOAD REPLACE that had a key
value greater than the maximum key value in the index space
or partition, to the number of index entries in the index space
or partition, expressed as a percentage. Otherwise null.
RRIPSDDELPCT
INTEGER

number of index entries that were pseudo-deleted (the RID
entry was marked as deleted) since the last REORG, REBUILD
INDEX, or LOAD REPLACE to the number of index entries in
the index space or partition, expressed as a percentage.
Otherwise null.
RRIMASSDELETE
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is IX and REORG is YES, the number of mass

deletes from the index space or partition since the last REORG,
REBUILD, or LOAD REPLACE. Otherwise null.
RRILEAF
INTEGER

number of index page splits that occurred since the last
REORG, REBUILD INDEX, or LOAD REPLACE in which the
higher part of the split page was far from the location of the
original page, to the total number of active pages in the index
space or partition, expressed as a percentage. Otherwise null.
RRINUMLEVELS
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is IX and REORG is YES, the number of levels

in the index tree that were added or removed since the last
REORG, REBUILD INDEX, or LOAD REPLACE. Otherwise
null.
STATSLASTTIME
TIMESTAMP
Timestamp of the last RUNSTATS on the object. Null if

RUNSTATS was never run, or if the last RUNSTATS execution
was terminated.
SRTINSDELUPDPCT
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS and RUNSTATS is YES, the ratio of the

total number of insert, update, and delete operations since the
last RUNSTATS on a table space or partition, to the total
number of rows or LOBs in the table space or partition,
SRTINSDELUPDABS
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS and RUNSTATS is YES, the total number

of insert, update, and delete operations since the last
RUNSTATS on a table space or partition. Otherwise null.
SRTMASSDELETE
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is TS and RUNSTATS is YES, the number of

mass deletes from the table space or partition since the last
SRIINSDELPCT
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is IX and RUNSTATS is YES, the ratio of the

RUNSTATS on the index space or partition, to the total
number of index entries in the index space or partition,
SRIINSDELABS
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is IX and RUNSTATS is YES, the number

insert and delete operations since the last RUNSTATS on the
index space or partition. Otherwise null.
998
Column name
Data type
Description
SRIMASSDELETE
INTEGER
If OBJECTTYPE is IX and RUNSTATS is YES, the number of

mass deletes from the index space or partition since the last
REORG, REBUILD INDEX, or LOAD REPLACE. Otherwise,
this value is null.
TOTALEXTENTS
SMALLINT
If EXTENTS is YES, the number of physical extents in the table

space, index space, or partition. Otherwise, this value is null.
PSPI
Related reference
CREATE DATABASE (DB2 SQL Reference)
CREATE TABLESPACE (DB2 SQL Reference)
When DB2 externalizes real-time statistics

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
DB2 externalizes real-time statistics in certain circumstances.

v When you issue STOP DATABASE(DSNDB06) SPACENAM(space-name).
This command stops the in-memory statistics database and externalizes statistics
for all objects in the subsystem. No statistics are externalized for the DSNRTSDB
database.
v When you issue STOP DATABASE(database-name) SPACENAM(space-name)
This command externalizes statistics only for database-name and space-name. No
statistics are externalized when the DSNRTSDB database is stopped.
v At the end of the time interval that you specify during installation (the
STATSINT system parameter).
v When you issue STOP DB2 MODE(QUIESCE).
DB2 writes any statistics that are in memory when you issue this command to
the statistics tables. However, if you issue STOP DB2 MODE(FORCE), DB2 does
not write the statistics, and you lose them.
v During utility operations.
Some utilities modify the statistics tables.
DB2 does not maintain real-time statistics for any objects in the real-time
statistics database. Therefore, if you run a utility with a utility list, and the list
contains any real-time statistics objects, DB2 does not externalize real-time
statistics during the execution of that utility for any of the objects in the utility
list. DB2 does not maintain interval counter real-time statistics for SYSLGRNX
and its indexes during utility operation. DB2 maintains statistics for these objects
only during non-utility operation.
Recommendation: Do not include real-time statistics objects in utility lists.
DB2 does not externalize real-time statistics at a tracker site.
How DB2 utilities affect the real-time statistics

In general, SQL INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE statements cause DB2 to modify
the real-time statistics.
However, certain DB2 utilities also affect the statistics. The following topics discuss
the effect of each of those utilities on the statistics.
999
How LOAD affects real-time statistics

When you run LOAD REPLACE on a table space or table space partition, you
change the statistics associated with that table space or partition.
The table below shows how running LOAD REPLACE on a table space or table
space partition affects the SYSTABLESPACESTATS statistics.
|
|
Table 186. Changed SYSTABLESPACESTATS values during LOAD REPLACE

Column name
Settings for LOAD REPLACE after

RELOAD phase
TOTALROWS
Number of loaded rows or LOBs1
DATASIZE
Actual value
NPAGES
Actual value
NACTIVE
Actual value
SPACE
Actual value
EXTENTS
Actual value
LOADRLASTTIME
Current timestamp
REORGINSERTS
REORGDELETES
REORGUPDATES
REORGDISORGLOB
REORGUNCLUSTINS
REORGMASSDELETE
REORGNEARINDREF
REORGFARINDREF
STATSLASTTIME
Current timestamp2
STATSINSERTS
02
STATSDELETES
02
STATSUPDATES
02
STATSMASSDELETE
02
COPYLASTTIME
Current timestamp3
COPYUPDATEDPAGES
03
COPYCHANGES
03
COPYUPDATELRSN
Null3
COPYUPDATETIME
Null3
Notes:
1. Under certain conditions, such as a utility restart, the LOAD utility might not have an
accurate count of loaded records. In those cases, DB2 sets this value to null. Some rows
that are loaded into a table space and are included in this value might later be removed
during the index validation phase or the referential integrity check. DB2 includes counts
of those removed records in the statistics that record deleted records.
2. DB2 sets this value only if the LOAD invocation includes the STATISTICS option.
3. DB2 sets this value only if the LOAD invocation includes the COPYDDN option.
The table below shows how running LOAD REPLACE affects the
SYSINDEXSPACESTATS statistics for an index space or physical index partition.
|
|
1000
Table 187. Changed SYSINDEXSPACESTATS values during LOAD REPLACE
Column name
Settings for LOAD REPLACE after BUILD

phase
TOTALENTRIES
Number of index entries added1
NLEAF
Actual value
NLEVELS
Actual value
NACTIVE
Actual value
SPACE
Actual value
EXTENTS
Actual value
LOADRLASTTIME
Current timestamp
REORGINSERTS
REORGDELETES
REORGAPPENDINSERT
REORGPSEUDODELETES
REORGMASSDELETE
REORGLEAFNEAR
REORGLEAFFAR
REORGNUMLEVELS
STATSLASTTIME
Current timestamp2
STATSINSERTS
02
STATSDELETES
02
STATSMASSDELETE
02
COPYLASTTIME
Current timestamp3
COPYUPDATEDPAGES
03
COPYCHANGES
03
COPYUPDATELRSN
Null3
COPYUPDATETIME
Null3
Notes:
1. Under certain conditions, such as a utility restart, the LOAD utility might not have an
accurate count of loaded records. In those cases, DB2 sets this value to null.
2. DB2 sets this value only if the LOAD invocation includes the STATISTICS option.
3. DB2 sets this value only if the LOAD invocation includes the COPYDDN option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
For a logical index partition:

v A LOAD operation without the REPLACE option behaves similar to a SQL
INSERT operation in that the number of records loaded are counted in the
incremental counters such as REORGINSERTS, REORGAPPENDINSERT,
STATSINSERTS, and COPYCHANGES. A LOAD operation without the
REPLACE option affects the organization of the data and can be a trigger to run
REORG, RUNSTATS or COPY.
v DB2 does not reset the nonpartitioned index when it does a LOAD REPLACE on
a partition. Therefore, DB2 does not reset the statistics for the index. The REORG
counters from the last REORG are still correct. DB2 updates LOADRLASTTIME
when the entire nonpartitioned index is replaced.
1001
v When DB2 does a LOAD RESUME YES on a partition, after the BUILD phase,
DB2 increments TOTALENTRIES by the number of index entries that were
inserted during the BUILD phase.
How REORG affects real-time statistics

When you run the REORG utility DB2 modifies some of the real-time statistics for
the involved table space or index.
The table below shows how running REORG on a table space or table space
partition affects the SYSTABLESPACESTATS statistics.
Table 188. Changed SYSTABLESPACESTATS values during REORG
Column name
Settings for REORG SHRLEVEL

NONE after RELOAD phase
TOTALROWS
Number rows or LOBs loaded1

REFERENCE or CHANGE after SWITCH
phase
For SHRLEVEL REFERENCE: Number of
loaded rows or LOBs during RELOAD phase
For SHRLEVEL CHANGE: Number of loaded
rows or LOBs during RELOAD phase plus
number of rows inserted during LOG APPLY
phase minus number of rows deleted during
LOG phase
| DATASIZE
Actual value
Actual value
| NPAGES
Actual value
Actual value
NACTIVE
Actual value
Actual value
SPACE
Actual value
Actual value
EXTENTS
Actual value
Actual value
REORGLASTTIME
Current timestamp
Current timestamp
REORGINSERTS
Actual value2
REORGDELETES
Actual value2
REORGUPDATES
Actual value2
REORGDISORGLOB
Actual value2
REORGUNCLUSTINS
Actual value2
REORGMASSDELETE
Actual value2
REORGNEARINDREF
Actual value2
REORGFARINDREF
Actual value2
3
Current timestamp3
STATSLASTTIME
Current timestamp
STATSINSERTS
03
Actual value2
STATSDELETES
03
Actual value2
STATSUPDATES
03
Actual value2
STATSMASSDELETE
03
Actual value2
COPYLASTTIME
Current timestamp4
Current timestamp
COPYUPDATEDPAGES
Actual value2
COPYCHANGES
04
Actual value2
COPYUPDATELRSN
Null4
Actual value5
COPYUPDATETIME
Null4
Actual value5
1002
Table 188. Changed SYSTABLESPACESTATS values during REORG (continued)

Column name

phase
Notes:
1. Under certain conditions, such as a utility restart, the REORG utility might not have an accurate count of loaded
records. In those cases, DB2 sets this value to null. Some rows that are loaded into a table space and are included
in this value might later be removed during the index validation phase or the referential integrity check. DB2
includes counts of those removed records in the statistics that record deleted records.
2. This is the actual number of inserts, updates, or deletes that are due to applying the log to the shadow copy.
3. DB2 sets this value only if the REORG invocation includes the STATISTICS option.
4. DB2 sets this value only if the REORG invocation includes the COPYDDN option.
5. This is the LRSN or timestamp for the first update that is due to applying the log to the shadow copy.
The table below shows how running REORG affects the SYSINDEXSPACESTATS
statistics for an index space or physical index partition.
Table 189. Changed SYSINDEXSPACESTATS values during REORG
Column name

TOTALENTRIES

phase
For SHRLEVEL REFERENCE: Number of
added index entries during BUILD phase
For SHRLEVEL CHANGE: Number of added
index entries during BUILD phase plus
number of added index entries during LOG
phase minus number of deleted index entries
during LOG phase
| NLEAF
Actual value
Actual value
NLEVELS
Actual value
Actual value
NACTIVE
Actual value
Actual value
SPACE
Actual value
Actual value
EXTENTS
Actual value
Actual value
REORGLASTTIME
Current timestamp
Current timestamp
REORGINSERTS
Actual value2
REORGDELETES
Actual value2
REORGAPPENDINSERT
Actual value2
REORGPSEUDODELETES
Actual value2
REORGMASSDELETE
Actual value2
REORGLEAFNEAR
Actual value2
REORGLEAFFAR
Actual value2
REORGNUMLEVELS
Actual value2
STATSLASTTIME
Current timestamp3
Current timestamp3
STATSINSERTS
03
Actual value2
STATSDELETES
03
Actual value2
STATSMASSDELETE
03
Actual value2
COPYLASTTIME
Current timestamp4
Unchanged5
1003
Table 189. Changed SYSINDEXSPACESTATS values during REORG (continued)
Column name


phase
COPYUPDATEDPAGES
04
Unchanged5
COPYCHANGES
04
Unchanged5
COPYUPDATELRSN
Null4
Unchanged5
COPYUPDATETIME
Null4
Unchanged5
Notes:
1. Under certain conditions, such as a utility restart, the REORG utility might not have an accurate count of loaded
records. In those cases, DB2 sets this value to null.
2. This is the actual number of inserts, updates, or deletes that are due to applying the log to the shadow copy.
3. DB2 sets this value only if the REORG invocation includes the STATISTICS option.
4. DB2 sets this value only if the REORG invocation includes the COPYDDN option.
5. Inline COPY is not allowed for SHRLEVEL CHANGE or SHRLEVEL REFERENCE.
For a logical index partition, DB2 does not reset the nonpartitioned index when it
does a REORG on a partition. Therefore, DB2 does not reset the statistics for the
index. The REORG counters and REORGLASTTIME are relative to the last time the
entire nonpartitioned index is reorganized. In addition, the REORG counters might
be low because, due to the methodology, some index entries are changed during
REORG of a partition.
How REBUILD INDEX affects real-time statistics

Rebuilding an index has certain effects on the statistics for the index involved.
The table below shows how running REBUILD INDEX affects the
SYSINDEXSPACESTATS statistics for an index space or physical index partition.
Table 190. Changed SYSINDEXSPACESTATS values during REBUILD INDEX
1004
Column name
Settings after BUILD phase
TOTALENTRIES
NLEAF
Actual value
NLEVELS
Actual value
NACTIVE
Actual value
SPACE
Actual value
EXTENTS
Actual value
REBUILDLASTTIME
Current timestamp
REORGINSERTS
REORGDELETES
REORGAPPENDINSERT
REORGPSEUDODELETES
REORGMASSDELETE
REORGLEAFNEAR
REORGLEAFFAR
REORGNUMLEVELS
Table 190. Changed SYSINDEXSPACESTATS values during REBUILD INDEX (continued)

Column name
Settings after BUILD phase
Note:
1. Under certain conditions, such as a utility restart, the REBUILD utility might not have an
accurate count of loaded records. In those cases, DB2 sets this value to null.
For a logical index partition, DB2 does not collect TOTALENTRIES statistics for the
entire nonpartitioned index when it runs REBUILD INDEX. Therefore, DB2 does
not reset the statistics for the index. The REORG counters from the last REORG are
still correct. DB2 updates REBUILDLASTTIME when the entire nonpartitioned
index is rebuilt.
How RUNSTATS affects real-time statistics

When the RUNSTATS job starts, DB2 externalizes all in-memory statistics to the
real-time statistics tables.
Only RUNSTATS UPDATE ALL affects the real-time statistics.
The table below shows how running RUNSTATS UPDATE ALL on a table space or
table space partition affects the SYSTABLESPACESTATS statistics.
Table 191. Changed SYSTABLESPACESTATS values during RUNSTATS UPDATE ALL
Column name
During UTILINIT phase

1
After RUNSTATS phase

Timestamp of the start of
RUNSTATS phase
STATSLASTTIME
Current timestamp
STATSINSERTS
Actual value1
Actual value2
STATSDELETES
Actual value1
Actual value2
STATSUPDATES
Actual value1
Actual value2
STATSMASSDELETE
Actual value1
Actual value2
Notes:
1. DB2 externalizes the current in-memory values.
2. This value is 0 for SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, or the actual value for SHRLEVEL
CHANGE.
The table below shows how running RUNSTATS UPDATE ALL on an index affects
the SYSINDEXSPACESTATS statistics.
Table 192. Changed SYSINDEXSPACESTATS values during RUNSTATS UPDATE ALL
Column name

1
After RUNSTATS phase

RUNSTATS phase
STATSLASTTIME
Current timestamp
STATSINSERTS
Actual value1
Actual value2
STATSDELETES
Actual value1
Actual value2
STATSMASSDELETE
Actual value1
Actual value2
Notes:
CHANGE.
1005
How COPY affects real-time statistics

When a COPY job starts, DB2 externalizes all in-memory statistics to the real-time
statistics tables. Statistics are gathered for a full image copy or an incremental copy,
but not for a data set copy.
The table below shows how running COPY on a table space or table space
partition affects the SYSTABLESPACESTATS statistics.
Table 193. Changed SYSTABLESPACESTATS values during COPY
Column name

1
After COPY phase

COPY phase
COPYLASTTIME
Current timestamp
COPYUPDATEDPAGES
Actual value1
Actual value2
COPYCHANGES
Actual value1
Actual value2
COPYUPDATELRSN
Actual value1
Actual value3
COPYUPDATETIME
Actual value1
Actual value3
Notes:
CHANGE.
3. This value is null for SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, or the actual value for SHRLEVEL
CHANGE.
The table below shows how running COPY on an index affects the
SYSINDEXSPACESTATS statistics.
Table 194. Changed SYSINDEXSPACESTATS values during COPY
Column name

1
After COPY phase

COPY phase
COPYLASTTIME
Current timestamp
COPYUPDATEDPAGES
Actual value1
Actual value2
COPYCHANGES
Actual value1
Actual value2
COPYUPDATELRSN
Actual value1
Actual value3
COPYUPDATETIME
Actual value1
Actual value3
Notes:
CHANGE.
3. This value is null for SHRLEVEL REFERENCE, or the actual value for SHRLEVEL
CHANGE.
How RECOVER affects real-time statistics

After recovery to the current state, the in-memory counter fields are still valid, so
DB2 does not modify them. However, after a point-in-time recovery, the statistics
might not be valid.
Consequently, DB2 sets all the REORG, STATS, and COPY counter statistics to null
after a point-in-time recovery. After recovery to the current state, DB2 sets
1006
NACTIVE, SPACE, and EXTENTS to their new values. After a point-in-time

recovery, DB2 sets NLEVELS, NACTIVE, SPACE, and EXTENTS to their new
values.
How non-DB2 utilities affect real-time statistics

Non-DB2 utilities do not affect real-time statistics. Therefore, an object that is the
target of a non-DB2 COPY, LOAD, REBUILD, REORG, or RUNSTATS job can cause
incorrect statistics to be inserted in the real-time statistics tables.
Non-DB2 utilities do not affect real-time statistics. Therefore, an object that is the
target of a non-DB2 COPY, LOAD, REBUILD, REORG, or RUNSTATS job can cause
incorrect statistics to be inserted in the real-time statistics tables. Follow this
process to ensure correct statistics when you run non-DB2 utilities:
1. Stop the table space or index on which you plan to run the utility. This action
causes DB2 to write the in-memory statistics to the real-time statistics tables
and initialize the in-memory counters. If DB2 cannot externalize the statistics,
the STOP command does not fail.
2. Run the utility.
3. When the utility completes, update the statistics tables with new totals and
timestamps, and put zero values in the incremental counter.
Real-time statistics on objects in work file databases and the

TEMP database
Although you cannot run utilities on objects in the work files databases and TEMP
database, DB2 records the NACTIVE, SPACE, and EXTENTS statistics on table
spaces in those databases.
Real-time statistics for DEFINE NO objects

For objects that are created with DEFINE NO, no row is inserted into the real-time
statistics table until the object is physically defined.
Real-time statistics on read-only or nonmodified objects

DB2 does not externalize the NACTIVE, SPACE, or EXTENTS statistics for
read-only objects or objects that are not modified.
How dropping objects affects real-time statistics

If you drop a table space or index, DB2 deletes its statistics from the real-time
statistics tables.
However, if the real-time statistics database is not available when you drop a table
space or index, the statistics remain in the real-time statistics tables, even though
the corresponding object no longer exists. You need to use SQL DELETE statements
to manually remove those rows from the real-time statistics tables.
If a row still exists in the real-time statistics tables for a dropped table space or
index, and if you create a new object with the same DBID and PSID as the
dropped object, DB2 reinitializes the row before it updates any values in that row.
How SQL operations affect real-time statistics counters

SQL operations affect the counter columns in the real-time statistics tables. These
are the columns that record the number of insert, delete, or update operations, as
well as the total counters, TOTALROWS, and TOTALENTRIES.
1007
UPDATE
When you perform an UPDATE, DB2 increments the update counters.
INSERT
When you perform an INSERT, DB2 increments the insert counters. DB2 keeps
separate counters for clustered and unclustered INSERTs.
DELETE
When you perform a DELETE, DB2 increments the delete counters.
ROLLBACK
When you perform a ROLLBACK, DB2 increments the counters, depending on the
type of SQL operation that is rolled back:
Rolled-back SQL statement
Incremented counters
UPDATE
Update counters
INSERT
Delete counters
DELETE
Insert counters
Notice that for INSERT and DELETE, the counter for the inverse operation is
incremented. For example, if two INSERT statements are rolled back, the delete
counter is incremented by 2.
UPDATE of partitioning keys

If an update to a partitioning key causes rows to move to a new partition, the
following real-time statistics are impacted:
Action
When UPDATE is executed
Update count of old partition = +1

Insert count of new partition = +1
When UPDATE is committed
Delete count of old partition = +1
When UPDATE is rolled back
Update count of old partition = +1

(compensation log record)
Delete count of new partition = +1
(remove inserted record)
If an update to a partitioning key does not cause rows to move to a new partition,
the counts are accumulated as expected:
Action
1008
When UPDATE is executed
Update count of current partition = +1

NEAR/FAR indirect reference count = +1
(if overflow occurred)
When UPDATE is rolled back
Update count of current partition = +1

(compensation log record)
Mass DELETE
Performing a mass delete operation on a table space does not cause DB2 to reset
the counter columns in the real-time statistics tables. After a mass delete operation,
the value in a counter column includes the count from a time prior to the mass
delete operation, as well as the count after the mass delete operation.
Real-time statistics in data sharing

In a data sharing environment, DB2 members update their statistics serially.
Each member reads the target row from the statistics table, obtains a lock,
aggregates its in-memory statistics, and updates the statistics table with the new
totals. Each member sets its own interval for writing real-time statistics.
DB2 does locking based on the lock size of the DSNRTSDB.DSNRTSTS table space.
DB2 uses cursor stability isolation and CURRENTDATA(YES) when it reads the
statistics tables.
At the beginning of a RUNSTATS job, all data sharing members externalize their
statistics to the real-time statistics tables and reset their in-memory statistics. If all
members cannot externalize their statistics, DB2 sets STATSLASTTIME to null. An
error in gathering and externalizing statistics does not prevent RUNSTATS from
running.
At the beginning of a COPY job, all data sharing members externalize their
statistics to the real-time statistics tables and reset their in-memory statistics. If all
members cannot externalize their statistics, DB2 sets COPYLASTTIME to null. An
error in gathering and externalizing statistics does not prevent COPY from
running.
Utilities that reset page sets to empty can invalidate the in-memory statistics of
other DB2 members. The member that resets a page set notifies the other DB2
members that a page set has been reset to empty, and the in-memory statistics are
invalidated. If the notify process fails, the utility that resets the page set does not
fail. DB2 sets the appropriate timestamp (REORGLASTTIME, STATSLASTTIME, or
COPYLASTTIME) to null in the row for the empty page set to indicate that the
statistics for that page set are unknown.
|
How the EXCHANGE command affects real-time statistics
|
|
When the EXCHANGE command is used for clone tables real-time statistics are
affected.
|
|
|
|
The values of the INSTANCE columns in the SYSTABLESPACESTATS and

SYSINDEXSPACESTATS tables identify the VSAM data set that is associated with
the real-time statistics row. For a cloned object, the real-time statistics table row
might contain two rows, one for each instance of the object.
|
|
|
|
Utility operations and SQL operations can be run separately on each instance of
the cloned object. Therefore, each instance of an object can be used to monitor
activity, and allow recommendations on whether the base, the clone, or both
objects require a REORG, RUNSTATS, or COPY operation.
1009
Improving concurrency with real-time statistics

You can specify certain options to prevent timeouts and deadlocks when you work
with data in real-time statistics tables.
To reduce the risk of timeouts and deadlocks:
v When you run COPY, RUNSTATS, or REORG on the real-time statistics objects,
use SHRLEVEL CHANGE.
v When you execute SQL statements to query the real-time statistics tables, use
uncommitted read isolation.
Recovering the real-time statistics tables

When you recover a DB2 subsystem after a disaster, DB2 starts with the
ACCESS(MAINT) option. No statistics are externalized in this state.
Consequently, you need to perform the following actions on the real-time statistics
database:
v Recover the real-time statistics objects after you recover the DB2 catalog and
directory.
v Start the real-time statistics database explicitly, after DB2 restart.
Statistics accuracy
In general, the real-time statistics values are very accurate.
However, several factors can affect the accuracy of the statistics:
v Certain utility restart scenarios
v Certain utility operations that leave indexes in a database restrictive state, such
as RECOVER-pending (RECP)
Always consider the database restrictive state of objects before accepting a utility
recommendation that is based on real-time statistics.
v A DB2 subsystem failure
v A notify failure in a data sharing environment
If you think that some statistics values might be inaccurate, you can correct the
statistics by running REORG, RUNSTATS, or COPY on the objects for which DB2
generated the statistics.
1010
Appendix G. Delimited file format

A delimited file is a sequential file with column delimiters. Each delimited file is a
stream of records, which consists of fields that are ordered by column. Each record
contains fields for one row. Within each row, individual fields are separated by
column delimiters. All fields must be delimited character strings, non-delimited
character strings, or external numeric values. Delimited character strings can
contain column delimiters and can also contain character string delimiters when
two successive character string delimiters are used to represent one character.
All characters in all records are in the same CCSID. If EBCDIC or ASCII data
contains DBCS characters, the data must be in an appropriate mixed CCSID. If the
data is Unicode it must be in CCSID 1208.
The following figure describes the format of delimited files that can be loaded into
or unloaded from tables by using the LOAD and UNLOAD utilities.
Delimited file ::= Row 1 data ||
Row 2 data ||
.
.
.
Row n data
Row i data ::= Cell value(i,1) || Column delimiter ||
Cell value(i,2) || Column delimiter ||
.
.
.
Cell value(i,m)
Column delimiter ::= Character specified by COLDEL option;
the default value is a comma (,)
Cell value(i,j) ::= Leading spaces ||
External numeric values ||
Delimited character string ||
Non-delimited character string ||
Trailing spaces
Non-delimited character string ::= A set of any characters except
a column delimiter
Delimited character string ::= A character string delimiter ||
A set of any characters except a
character string delimiter unless
the character string delimiter is
part of two successive character
string delimiters ||
A character string delimiter ||
Trailing garbage
Character string delimiter ::= Character specified by CHARDEL option; the default
value is a double quotation mark (")
Trailing garbage ::= A set of any characters except a column delimiter
Figure 180. Format of delimited files

1011
Related concepts
Loading delimited files on page 263
Unloading delimited files on page 710
Delimited data types

The LOAD and UNLOAD utilities use a number of data sets during there
operation.
Table 195. Acceptable data type forms for delimited files
Data type

CHAR, VARCHAR

character string
delimiters. For VARCHAR,
length bytes do not precede
the data in the string.
GRAPHIC (any type)4
A delimited or non-delimited Data that is unloaded as a

character stream
delimited character string.
For VARGRAPHIC, length
bytes do not precede the data
in the string.
INTEGER (any type)1
A stream of characters that

EXTERNAL format
Numeric data in external

format.
DECIMAL (any type) 2

EXTERNAL format
A string of characters that

represents a number.
DECFLOAT EXTERNAL

represents
A SQL numeric constant.
FLOAT
1012

a delimited file
A representation of a number A string of characters that

in the range -7.2E+75 to
7.2E+75 in EXTERNAL
floating-point notation.
format
BLOB, CLOB

character string
string.
DBCLOB

character string
string.
DATE

character string that contains representation of a date.
a date value in EXTERNAL
format
Table 195. Acceptable data type forms for delimited files (continued)
Data type

a delimited file

TIME

character string that contains representation of a time.
a time value in EXTERNAL
format
TIMESTAMP

character string that contains representation of a
a timestamp value in
timestamp.
EXTERNAL format
Note:
1. Field specifications of INTEGER or SMALLINT are treated as INTEGER EXTERNAL.
2. Field specifications of DECIMAL, DECIMAL PACKED, or DECIMAL ZONED are treated
as DECIMAL EXTERNAL.
3. Field specifications of FLOAT, REAL, or DOUBLE are treated as FLOAT EXTERNAL.
4. EBCID graphic data must be enclosed in shift-out and shift-in characters.
Examples of delimited files

Use the examples as models to specify your own delimited files.
Example 1: Delimited file with delimited character strings

The following figure shows an example of a delimited file with delimited character
strings. In this example, the column delimiter is a comma (,). Because the character
strings contain the column delimiter character, they must be delimited with
character string delimiters. In this example, the character string delimiter is a
double quotation mark ().
"Smith, Bob",4973,15.46
"Jones, Bill",12345,16.34
"Williams, Sam",452,193.78
Figure 181. Example of a delimited file with delimited character strings
Example 2: Delimited file with non-delimited character strings

The following figure shows an example of a delimited file with non-delimited
character strings. In this example, the column delimiter is a semicolon (;). Because
the character strings do not contain the column delimiter character, they do not
need to be delimited with character string delimiters.
Smith, Bob;4973;15.46
Jones, Bill;12345;16.34
Williams, Sam;452;193.78
Figure 182. Example of a delimited file with non-delimited character strings
Appendix G. Delimited file format
1013
1014
Information resources for DB2 for z/OS and related products

Many information resources are available to help you use DB2 for z/OS and many
related products. A large amount of technical information about IBM products is
now available online in information centers or on library Web sites.
Disclaimer: Any Web addresses that are included here are accurate at the time this
information is being published. However, Web addresses sometimes change. If you
visit a Web address that is listed here but that is no longer valid, you can try to
find the current Web address for the product information that you are looking for
at either of the following sites:
v http://www.ibm.com/support/publications/us/library/index.shtml, which lists
the IBM information centers that are available for various IBM products
v http://www.elink.ibmlink.ibm.com/public/applications/publications/cgibin/
pbi.cgi, which is the IBM Publications Center, where you can download online
PDF books or order printed books for various IBM products
DB2 for z/OS product information

The primary place to find and use information about DB2 for z/OS is the
Information Management Software for z/OS Solutions Information Center
(http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/imzic), which also contains information
about IMS, QMF, and many DB2 and IMS Tools products. This information center
is also available as an installable information center that can run on a local system
or on an intranet server. You can order the Information Management for z/OS
Solutions Information Center DVD (SK5T-7377) for a low cost from the IBM
Publications Center (www.ibm.com/shop/publications/order).
The majority of the DB2 for z/OS information in this information center is also
available in the books that are identified in the following table. You can access
these books at the DB2 for z/OS library Web site (http://www.ibm.com/software/
data/db2/zos/library.html) or at the IBM Publications Center
(http://www.ibm.com/shop/publications/order).
Table 196. DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS book titles
Title
Publication
number
Available in
information
center
Available in
Available in BookManager Available in
format
printed book
PDF

Administration Guide
SC18-9840
DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS Application

Programming & SQL Guide
SC18-9841
DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS Application

Programming Guide and Reference for
Java
SC18-9842
DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS Codes
GC18-9843
DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS Command

Reference
SC18-9844
DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS Data Sharing:

Planning and Administration
SC18-9845
1015
Table 196. DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS book titles (continued)
Publication
number
Title
Available in
information
center
Available in
Available in BookManager Available in
format
printed book
PDF
DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS Diagnosis

Guide and Reference 1
LY37-3218
DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS Diagnostic

Quick Reference
LY37-3219
DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS Installation

Guide
GC18-9846
DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS Introduction to SC18-9847

DB2
DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS Licensed

Program Specifications
GC18-9848
DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS Messages
GC18-9849
DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS ODBC Guide

and Reference
SC18-9850
DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS Performance

Monitoring and Tuning Guide
SC18-9851
DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS Optimization

Service Center
DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS Program

Directory
GI10-8737
DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS RACF Access

Control Module Guide
SC18-9852
DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS Reference for

Remote DRDA Requesters and Servers
SC18-9853
DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS Reference

Summary
SX26-3854
DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS SQL Reference SC18-9854
DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS Utility Guide

and Reference
SC18-9855
DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS Whats New?
GC18-9856
DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS XML Extender SC18-9857

Administration and Programming
DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS XML Guide
SC18-9858
IRLM Messages and Codes for IMS and

DB2 for z/OS
GC19-2666
Note:
1. DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS Diagnosis Guide and Reference is available in PDF and BookManager formats on the DB2
Version 9.1 for z/OS Licensed Collection kit, LK3T-7195. You can order this License Collection kit on the IBM
Publications Center site (http://www.elink.ibmlink.ibm.com/public/applications/publications/cgibin/pbi.cgi).
This book is also available in online format in DB2 data set DSN910.SDSNIVPD(DSNDR).
Information resources for related products

In the following table, related product names are listed in alphabetic order, and the
associated Web addresses of product information centers or library Web pages are
indicated.
1016
Table 197. Related product information resource locations

Related product
Information resources
C/C++ for z/OS
Library Web site: http://www.ibm.com/software/awdtools/czos/library/

This product is now called z/OS XL C/C++.
CICS Transaction Server for Information center: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/cicsts/v3r1/index.jsp

z/OS
COBOL
Information center: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/pdthelp/v1r1/index.jsp

This product is now called Enterprise COBOL for z/OS.
DB2 Connect
Information center: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/db2luw/v9/index.jsp

This resource is for DB2 Connect 9.
DB2 Database for Linux ,

UNIX, and Windows
Information center: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/db2luw/v9/index.jsp
DB2 Query Management

Facility
Information center: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/imzic
DB2 Server for VSE & VM
One of the following locations:
This resource is for DB2 9 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows.
v For VSE: http://www.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?rs=66&uid=swg27003758

v For VM: http://www.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?rs=66&uid=swg27003759
DB2 Tools

v Information center: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/imzic
v Library Web site: http://www.ibm.com/software/data/db2imstools/library.html
These resources include information about the following products and others:
v DB2 Administration Tool
v DB2 Automation Tool
v DB2 Log Analysis Tool
v DB2 Object Restore Tool
v DB2 Query Management Facility
v DB2 SQL Performance Analyzer
DB2 Universal Database

for iSeries
Information center: http://www.ibm.com/systems/i/infocenter/
Debug Tool for z/OS
Enterprise COBOL for

z/OS
Enterprise PL/I for z/OS
IMS
Information center: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/imzic
1017
Table 197. Related product information resource locations (continued)

Related product
IMS Tools

These resources have information about the following products and others:
v IMS Batch Terminal Simulator for z/OS
v IMS Connect
v IMS HALDB Conversion and Maintenance Aid
v IMS High Performance Utility products
v IMS DataPropagator
v IMS Online Reorganization Facility
v IMS Performance Analyzer
Integrated Data
Management products
Information center: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/idm/v2r2/index.jsp

This information center has information about the following products and others:
v IBM Data Studio
v InfoSphere Data Architect
v InfoSphere Warehouse
v Optim Database Administrator
v Optim Development Studio
v Optim Query Tuner
PL/I

This product is now called Enterprise PL/I for z/OS.
System z
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/eserver/v1r2/index.jsp
| Tivoli OMEGAMONXE for Information center: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/tivihelp/v15r1/

| DB2 Performance Expert
index.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.ko2pe.doc/ko2welcome.htm
| on z/OS
In earlier releases, this product was called DB2 Performance Expert for z/OS.
WebSphere Application
Server
Information center: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/wasinfo/v6r0/index.jsp
WebSphere Message Broker Information center: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/wmbhelp/v6r0m0/

with Rules and Formatter
index.jsp
Extension
The product is also known as WebSphere MQ Integrator Broker.
WebSphere MQ
Information center: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/wmqv6/v6r0/index.jsp

The resource includes information about MQSeries.
WebSphere Replication
Server for z/OS
Either of the following locations:

This product is also known as DB2 DataPropagator.
z/Architecture
1018
Library Center site: http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/zseries/zos/bkserv/
Table 197. Related product information resource locations (continued)

Related product
z/OS
Library Center site: http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/zseries/zos/bkserv/

This resource includes information about the following z/OS elements and components:
v Character Data Representation Architecture
v Device Support Facilities
v DFSORT
v Fortran
v High Level Assembler
v NetView
v SMP/E for z/OS
v SNA
v TCP/IP
v TotalStorage Enterprise Storage Server
v VTAM
v z/OS C/C++
v z/OS Communications Server
v z/OS DCE
v z/OS DFSMS
v z/OS DFSMS Access Method Services
v z/OS DFSMSdss
v z/OS DFSMShsm
v z/OS DFSMSdfp
v z/OS ICSF
v z/OS ISPF
v z/OS JES3
v z/OS Language Environment
v z/OS Managed System Infrastructure
v z/OS MVS
v z/OS MVS JCL
v z/OS Parallel Sysplex
v z/OS RMF
v z/OS Security Server
v z/OS UNIX System Services
z/OS XL C/C++
http://www.ibm.com/software/awdtools/czos/library/
The following information resources from IBM are not necessarily specific to a
single product:
v The DB2 for z/OS Information Roadmap; available at: http://www.ibm.com/
software/data/db2/zos/roadmap.html
v DB2 Redbooks and Redbooks about related products; available at:
http://www.ibm.com/redbooks
v IBM Educational resources:
Information about IBM educational offerings is available on the Web at:
http://www.ibm.com/software/sw-training/
1019
A collection of glossaries of IBM terms in multiple languages is available on

the IBM Terminology Web site at: http://www.ibm.com/software/
globalization/terminology/index.jsp
v National Language Support information; available at the IBM Publications
Center at: http://www.elink.ibmlink.ibm.com/public/applications/publications/
cgibin/pbi.cgi
v SQL Reference for Cross-Platform Development; available at the following
developerWorks site: http://www.ibm.com/developerworks/db2/library/
techarticle/0206sqlref/0206sqlref.html
The following information resources are not published by IBM but can be useful to
users of DB2 for z/OS and related products:
v Database design topics:
DB2 for z/OS and OS/390 Development for Performance Volume I, by Gabrielle
Wiorkowski, Gabrielle & Associates, ISBN 0-96684-605-2
DB2 for z/OS and OS/390 Development for Performance Volume II, by Gabrielle
Wiorkowski, Gabrielle & Associates, ISBN 0-96684-606-0
Handbook of Relational Database Design, by C. Fleming and B. Von Halle,
Addison Wesley, ISBN 0-20111-434-8
v Distributed Relational Database Architecture (DRDA) specifications;
http://www.opengroup.org
v Domain Name System: DNS and BIND, Third Edition, Paul Albitz and Cricket
Liu, OReilly, ISBN 0-59600-158-4
v Microsoft Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) information;
http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/
v Unicode information; http://www.unicode.org
1020
How to obtain DB2 information

You can access the official information about the DB2 product in a number of
ways.
v DB2 on the Web
v DB2 product information
v DB2 education on page 1022
v How to order the DB2 library on page 1022
DB2 on the Web

Stay current with the latest information about DB2 by visiting the DB2 home page
on the Web:
www.ibm.com/software/db2zos
On the DB2 home page, you can find links to a wide variety of information
resources about DB2. You can read news items that keep you informed about the
latest enhancements to the product. Product announcements, press releases, fact
sheets, and technical articles help you plan and implement your database
management strategy.
DB2 product information

The official DB2 for z/OS information is available in various formats and delivery
methods. IBM provides mid-version updates to the information in the information
center and in softcopy updates that are available on the Web and on CD-ROM.
Information Management Software for z/OS Solutions Information Center
DB2 product information is viewable in the information center, which is
the primary delivery vehicle for information about DB2 for z/OS, IMS,
QMF, and related tools. This information center enables you to search
across related product information in multiple languages for data
management solutions for the z/OS environment and print individual
topics or sets of related topics. You can also access, download, and print
PDFs of the publications that are associated with the information center
topics. Product technical information is provided in a format that offers
more options and tools for accessing, integrating, and customizing
information resources. The information center is based on Eclipse open
source technology.
The Information Management Software for z/OS Solutions Information
Center is viewable at the following Web site:
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/imzic
CD-ROMs and DVD
Books for DB2 are available on a CD-ROM that is included with your
product shipment:
v DB2 V9.1 for z/OS Licensed Library Collection, LK3T-7195, in English
The CD-ROM contains the collection of books for DB2 V9.1 for z/OS in
PDF and BookManager formats. Periodically, IBM refreshes the books on
subsequent editions of this CD-ROM.
1021
The books for DB2 for z/OS are also available on the following CD-ROM
and DVD collection kits, which contain online books for many IBM
products:
v IBM z/OS Software Products Collection , SK3T-4270, in English
v IBM z/OS Software Products DVD Collection , SK3T4271, in English
PDF format
Many of the DB2 books are available in PDF (Portable Document Format)
for viewing or printing from CD-ROM or the DB2 home page on the Web
or from the information center. Download the PDF books to your intranet
for distribution throughout your enterprise.
BookManager format
You can use online books on CD-ROM to read, search across books, print
portions of the text, and make notes in these BookManager books. Using
the IBM Softcopy Reader, appropriate IBM Library Readers, or the
BookManager Read product, you can view these books in the z/OS,
Windows, and VM environments. You can also view and search many of
the DB2 BookManager books on the Web.
DB2 education
IBM Education and Training offers a wide variety of classroom courses to help you
quickly and efficiently gain DB2 expertise. IBM schedules classes are in cities all
over the world. You can find class information, by country, at the IBM Learning
Services Web site:
www.ibm.com/services/learning
IBM also offers classes at your location, at a time that suits your needs. IBM can
customize courses to meet your exact requirements. For more information,
including the current local schedule, contact your IBM representative.
How to order the DB2 library

To order books, visit the IBM Publication Center on the Web:
www.elink.ibmlink.ibm.com/public/applications/publications/cgibin/pbi.cgi
From the IBM Publication Center, you can go to the Publication Notification
System (PNS). PNS users receive electronic notifications of updated publications in
their profiles. You have the option of ordering the updates by using the
publications direct ordering application or any other IBM publication ordering
channel. The PNS application does not send automatic shipments of publications.
You will receive updated publications and a bill for them if you respond to the
electronic notification.
You can also order DB2 publications and CD-ROMs from your IBM representative
or the IBM branch office that serves your locality. If your location is within the
United States or Canada, you can place your order by calling one of the toll-free
numbers:
v In the U.S., call 1-800-879-2755.
v In Canada, call 1-800-426-4968.
To order additional copies of licensed publications, specify the SOFTWARE option.
To order additional publications or CD-ROMs, specify the PUBLICATIONS option.
1022
Be prepared to give your customer number, the product number, and either the
feature codes or order numbers that you want.
How to obtain DB2 information
1023
1024
How to use the DB2 library

Titles of books in the library begin with DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS. However,
references from one book in the library to another are shortened and do not
include the product name, version, and release. Instead, they point directly to the
section that holds the information. The primary place to find and use information
about DB2 for z/OS is the Information Management Software for z/OS Solutions
Information Center (http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/imzic).
|
|
|
|
If you are new to DB2 for z/OS, Introduction to DB2 for z/OS provides a
comprehensive introduction to DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS. Topics included in this
book explain the basic concepts that are associated with relational database
management systems in general, and with DB2 for z/OS in particular.
The most rewarding task associated with a database management system is asking
questions of it and getting answers, the task called end use. Other tasks are also
necessarydefining the parameters of the system, putting the data in place, and so
on. The tasks that are associated with DB2 are grouped into the following major
categories.
Installation
If you are involved with installing DB2, you will need to use a variety of resources,
such as:
v
v
v
v
v
v
DB2
DB2
DB2
DB2
DB2
DB2
Program Directory
Installation Guide
Administration Guide
Application Programming Guide and Reference for Java
Codes
Internationalization Guide
v
v
v
v
DB2
DB2
DB2
DB2
Messages
Performance Monitoring and Tuning Guide
RACF Access Control Module Guide
If you will be using data sharing capabilities you also need DB2 Data Sharing:
Planning and Administration, which describes installation considerations for data
sharing.
If you will be installing and configuring DB2 ODBC, you will need DB2 ODBC
Guide and Reference.
If you are installing IBM Spatial Support for DB2 for z/OS, you will need IBM
Spatial Support for DB2 for z/OS Users Guide and Reference.
If you are installing IBM OmniFind Text Search Server for DB2 for z/OS, you will
need IBM OmniFind Text Search Server for DB2 for z/OS Installation, Administration,
and Reference.
1025
End use
End users issue SQL statements to retrieve data. They can also insert, update, or
delete data, with SQL statements. They might need an introduction to SQL,
detailed instructions for using SPUFI, and an alphabetized reference to the types of
SQL statements. This information is found in DB2 Application Programming and SQL
Guide, and DB2 SQL Reference.
End users can also issue SQL statements through the DB2 Query Management
Facility (QMF) or some other program, and the library for that licensed program
might provide all the instruction or reference material they need. For a list of the
titles in the DB2 QMF library, see the bibliography at the end of this book.
Application programming
Some users access DB2 without knowing it, using programs that contain SQL
statements. DB2 application programmers write those programs. Because they
write SQL statements, they need the same resources that end users do.
Application programmers also need instructions for many other topics:
v How to transfer data between DB2 and a host programwritten in Java, C, or
COBOL, for example
v How to prepare to compile a program that embeds SQL statements
v How to process data from two systems simultaneously, for example, DB2 and
IMS or DB2 and CICS
|
|
v How to write distributed applications across operating systems

v How to write applications that use Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) to
access DB2 servers
v How to write applications that use JDBC and SQLJ with the Java programming
language to access DB2 servers
|
|
v How to write applications to store XML data on DB2 servers and retrieve XML
data from DB2 servers.
The material needed for writing a host program containing SQL is in DB2
Application Programming and SQL Guide.
The material needed for writing applications that use JDBC and SQLJ to access
DB2 servers is in DB2 Application Programming Guide and Reference for Java. The
material needed for writing applications that use DB2 CLI or ODBC to access DB2
servers is in DB2 ODBC Guide and Reference. The material needed for working with
XML data in DB2 is in DB2 XML Guide. For handling errors, see DB2 Messages and
DB2 Codes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you are a software vendor implementing DRDA clients and servers, you will
need DB2 Reference for Remote DRDA Requesters and Servers.
Information about writing applications across operating systems can be found in
IBM DB2 SQL Reference for Cross-Platform Development.
System and database administration

Administration covers almost everything else. DB2 Administration Guide divides
some of those tasks among the following sections:
1026
v DB2 concepts: Introduces DB2 structures, the DB2 environment, and high
availability.
v Designing a database: Discusses the decisions that must be made when
designing a database and tells how to implement the design by creating and
altering DB2 objects, loading data, and adjusting to changes.
v Security and auditing: Describes ways of controlling access to the DB2 system
and to data within DB2, to audit aspects of DB2 usage, and to answer other
security and auditing concerns.
v Operation and recovery: Describes the steps in normal day-to-day operation and
discusses the steps one should take to prepare for recovery in the event of some
failure.
DB2 Performance Monitoring and Tuning Guide explains how to monitor the
performance of the DB2 system and its parts. It also lists things that can be done to
make some parts run faster.
If you will be using the RACF access control module for DB2 authorization
checking, you will need DB2 RACF Access Control Module Guide.
If you are involved with DB2 only to design the database, or plan operational
procedures, you need DB2 Administration Guide. If you also want to carry out your
own plans by creating DB2 objects, granting privileges, running utility jobs, and so
on, you also need:
v DB2 SQL Reference, which describes the SQL statements you use to create, alter,
and drop objects and grant and revoke privileges
v DB2 Utility Guide and Reference, which explains how to run utilities
v DB2 Command Reference, which explains how to run commands
If you will be using data sharing, you need DB2 Data Sharing: Planning and
Administration, which describes how to plan for and implement data sharing.
Additional information about system and database administration can be found in
DB2 Messages and DB2 Codes, which list messages and codes issued by DB2, with
explanations and suggested responses.
Diagnosis
Diagnosticians detect and describe errors in the DB2 program. They might also
recommend or apply a remedy. The documentation for this task is in DB2 Diagnosis
Guide and Reference, DB2 Messages, and DB2 Codes.
How to use the DB2 library
1027
1028
Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.
IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in
other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the
products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM
product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,
program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may
be used instead. However, it is the users responsibility to evaluate and verify the
operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you
any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing
IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive
Armonk, NY 10504-1785
U.S.A.
For license inquiries regarding double-byte (DBCS) information, contact the IBM
Intellectual Property Department in your country or send inquiries, in writing, to:
Intellectual Property Licensing
Legal and Intellectual Property Law
IBM Japan, Ltd.
3-2-12, Roppongi, Minato-ku
Tokyo 106-8711
Japan
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other
country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS
PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or
implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply
to you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements
and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this
publication at any time without notice.
Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web
sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM
product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.
1029
IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it
believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose
of enabling: (i) the exchange of information between independently created
programs and other programs (including this one) and (ii) the mutual use of the
information which has been exchanged, should contact:
IBM Corporation
J46A/G4
555 Bailey Avenue
San Jose, CA 95141-1003
U.S.A.
Such information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions,
including in some cases, payment of a fee.
The licensed program described in this document and all licensed material
available for it are provided by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement,
IBM International Program License Agreement, or any equivalent agreement
between us.
This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business
operations. To illustrate them as completely as possible, the examples include the
names of individuals, companies, brands, and products. All of these names are
fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business
enterprise is entirely coincidental.
COPYRIGHT LICENSE:
This information contains sample application programs in source language, which
illustrate programming techniques on various operating platforms. You may copy,
modify, and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment to
IBM, for the purposes of developing, using, marketing or distributing application
programs conforming to the application programming interface for the operating
platform for which the sample programs are written. These examples have not
been thoroughly tested under all conditions. IBM, therefore, cannot guarantee or
imply reliability, serviceability, or function of these programs. The sample
programs are provided AS IS, without warranty of any kind. IBM shall not be
liable for any damages arising out of your use of the sample programs.
If you are viewing this information softcopy, the photographs and color
illustrations may not appear.
Programming Interface Information

This information is intended to help you to use DB2 for z/OS utilities. This
information also documents General-use Programming Interface and Associated
Guidance Information and Product-sensitive Programming Interface and
Associated Guidance Information provided by DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS.
1030
General-use Programming Interface and Associated Guidance

Information
General-use Programming Interfaces allow the customer to write programs that
obtain the services of DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS.
General-use Programming Interface and Associated Guidance Information is
identified where it occurs by the following markings:
General-use Programming Interface and Associated Guidance Information...
Product-sensitive Programming Interface and Associated

Guidance Information
Product-sensitive Programming Interfaces allow the customer installation to
perform tasks such as diagnosing, modifying, monitoring, repairing, tailoring, or
tuning of this IBM software product. Use of such interfaces creates dependencies
on the detailed design or implementation of the IBM software product.
Product-sensitive Programming Interfaces should be used only for these
specialized purposes. Because of their dependencies on detailed design and
implementation, it is to be expected that programs written to such interfaces may
need to be changed in order to run with new product releases or versions, or as a
result of service.
Product-sensitive Programming Interface and Associated Guidance Information is
identified where it occurs by the following markings:
PSPI
Product-sensitive Programming Interface and Associated Guidance
Information... PSPI
Trademarks
IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com are trademarks or registered marks of
International Business Machines Corp., registered in many jurisdictions worldwide.
Other product and service names might be trademarks of IBM or other companies.
A current list of IBM trademarks is available on the Web at http://www.ibm.com/
legal/copytrade.shtml.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Postscript, and the Postscript logo are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States,
and/or other countries.
Intel, Intel logo, Intel Inside, Intel Inside logo, Intel Centrino, Intel Centrino
logo, Celeron, Intel Xeon, Intel SpeedStep, Itanium, and Pentium are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the
United States and other countries.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other
countries, or both.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the Windows logo are trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both.
Notices
1031
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other
countries.
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks of Sun Microsystems,
Inc. in the United States, other countries, or both.
1032
Glossary
abend See abnormal end of task.
aggregate function
An operation that derives its result by
using values from one or more rows.
Contrast with scalar function.
abend reason code

A 4-byte hexadecimal code that uniquely
identifies a problem with DB2.
abnormal end of task (abend)
Termination of a task, job, or subsystem
because of an error condition that
recovery facilities cannot resolve during
execution.
|
|
|
access method services

The facility that is used to define, alter,
delete, print, and reproduce VSAM
key-sequenced data sets.
access path
The path that is used to locate data that is
specified in SQL statements. An access
path can be indexed or sequential.
active log
The portion of the DB2 log to which log
records are written as they are generated.
The active log always contains the most
recent log records. See also archive log.
|
|
|
|
|
address space
A range of virtual storage pages that is
identified by a number (ASID) and a
collection of segment and page tables that
map the virtual pages to real pages of the
computers memory.
address space connection
The result of connecting an allied address
space to DB2. See also allied address
space and task control block.
address space identifier (ASID)
A unique system-assigned identifier for
an address space.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
AFTER trigger
A trigger that is specified to be activated
after a defined trigger event (an insert,
update, or delete operation on the table
that is specified in a trigger definition).
Contrast with BEFORE trigger and
INSTEAD OF trigger.
agent
In DB2, the structure that associates all

processes that are involved in a DB2 unit
of work. See also allied agent and system
agent.
|
|
|
|
|
|
alias
An alternative name that can be used in

SQL statements to refer to a table or view
in the same or a remote DB2 subsystem.
An alias can be qualified with a schema
qualifier and can thereby be referenced by
other users. Contrast with synonym.
allied address space

An area of storage that is external to DB2
and that is connected to DB2. An allied
address space can request DB2 services.
See also address space.
allied agent
An agent that represents work requests
that originate in allied address spaces. See
also system agent.
allied thread
A thread that originates at the local DB2
subsystem and that can access data at a
remote DB2 subsystem.
allocated cursor
A cursor that is defined for a stored
procedure result set by using the SQL
ALLOCATE CURSOR statement.
ambiguous cursor
A database cursor for which DB2 cannot
determine whether it is used for update
or read-only purposes.
APAR See authorized program analysis report.
APF
See authorized program facility.
API
See application programming interface.
APPL A VTAM network definition statement

that is used to define DB2 to VTAM as an
application program that uses SNA LU
6.2 protocols.
application
A program or set of programs that
performs a task; for example, a payroll
application.
application plan
The control structure that is produced
during the bind process. DB2 uses the
1033
application plan to process SQL

statements that it encounters during
statement execution.
application process
The unit to which resources and locks are
allocated. An application process involves
the execution of one or more programs.
application programming interface (API)
A functional interface that is supplied by
the operating system or by a separately
orderable licensed program that allows an
application program that is written in a
high-level language to use specific data or
functions of the operating system or
licensed program.
authorized program analysis report (APAR)

A report of a problem that is caused by a
suspected defect in a current release of an
IBM supplied program.
|
|
|
automatic bind
(More correctly automatic rebind.) A
process by which SQL statements are
bound automatically (without a user
issuing a BIND command) when an
application process begins execution and
the bound application plan or package it
requires is not valid.
application requester
The component on a remote system that
generates DRDA requests for data on
behalf of an application.
application server
The target of a request from a remote
application. In the DB2 environment, the
application server function is provided by
the distributed data facility and is used to
access DB2 data from remote applications.
archive log
The portion of the DB2 log that contains
log records that have been copied from
the active log. See also active log.
ASCII An encoding scheme that is used to
represent strings in many environments,
typically on PCs and workstations.
Contrast with EBCDIC and Unicode.
ASID See address space identifier.
attachment facility
An interface between DB2 and TSO, IMS,
CICS, or batch address spaces. An
attachment facility allows application
programs to access DB2.
attribute
A characteristic of an entity. For example,
in database design, the phone number of
an employee is an attribute of that
employee.
|
|
|
|
|
authorization ID
A string that can be verified for
connection to DB2 and to which a set of
privileges is allowed. An authorization ID
can represent an individual or an
organizational group.
1034
authorized program facility (APF)

A facility that allows an installation to
identify system or user programs that can
use sensitive system functions.
automatic query rewrite

A process that examines an SQL statement
that refers to one or more base tables or
materialized query tables, and, if
appropriate, rewrites the query so that it
performs better.
|
|
|
auxiliary index
An index on an auxiliary table in which
each index entry refers to a LOB or XML
document.
auxiliary table
A table that contains columns outside the
actual table in which they are defined.
Auxiliary tables can contain either LOB or
XML data.
backout
The process of undoing uncommitted
changes that an application process made.
A backout is often performed in the event
of a failure on the part of an application
process, or as a result of a deadlock
situation.
backward log recovery
The final phase of restart processing
during which DB2 scans the log in a
backward direction to apply UNDO log
records for all aborted changes.
base table
A table that is created by the SQL
CREATE TABLE statement and that holds
persistent data. Contrast with clone table,
materialized query table, result table,
temporary table, and transition table.
base table space
A table space that contains base tables.
|
|
|
|
|
|
basic row format

A row format in which values for
columns are stored in the row in the
order in which the columns are defined
by the CREATE TABLE statement.
Contrast with reordered row format.
basic sequential access method (BSAM)
An access method for storing or retrieving
data blocks in a continuous sequence,
using either a sequential-access or a
direct-access device.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
BEFORE trigger
A trigger that is specified to be activated
before a defined trigger event (an insert,
an update, or a delete operation on the
table that is specified in a trigger
definition). Contrast with AFTER trigger
and INSTEAD OF trigger.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
binary large object (BLOB)

A binary string data type that contains a
sequence of bytes that can range in size
from 0 bytes to 2 GB, less 1 byte. This
string does not have an associated code
page and character set. BLOBs can
contain, for example, image, audio, or
video data. In general, BLOB values are
used whenever a binary string might
exceed the limits of the VARBINARY
type.
|
|
|
|
binary string
A sequence of bytes that is not associated
with a CCSID. Binary string data type can
be further classified as BINARY,
VARBINARY, or BLOB.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
bind
A process by which a usable control

structure with SQL statements is
generated; the structure is often called an
access plan, an application plan, or a
package. During this bind process, access
paths to the data are selected, and some
authorization checking is performed. See
also automatic bind.
bit data
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
v Data with character type CHAR or

VARCHAR that is defined with the
FOR BIT DATA clause. Note that using
BINARY or VARBINARY rather than
FOR BIT DATA is highly
recommended.
v Data with character type CHAR or
VARCHAR that is defined with the
FOR BIT DATA clause.
v A form of character data. Binary data is

generally more highly recommended
than character-for-bit data.
|
|
|
BLOB See binary large object.

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
block fetch
A capability in which DB2 can retrieve, or
fetch, a large set of rows together. Using
block fetch can significantly reduce the
number of messages that are being sent
across the network. Block fetch applies
only to non-rowset cursors that do not
update data.
bootstrap data set (BSDS)
A VSAM data set that contains name and
status information for DB2 and RBA
range specifications for all active and
archive log data sets. The BSDS also
contains passwords for the DB2 directory
and catalog, and lists of conditional
restart and checkpoint records.
BSAM
See basic sequential access method.
BSDS See bootstrap data set.
|
|
|
buffer pool
An area of memory into which data pages
are read, modified, and held during
processing.
|
|
|
|
built-in data type

A data type that IBM supplies. Among
the built-in data types for DB2 for z/OS
are string, numeric, XML, ROWID, and
datetime. Contrast with distinct type.
|
|
|
|
|
built-in function
A function that is generated by DB2 and
that is in the SYSIBM schema. Contrast
with user-defined function. See also
function, cast function, external function,
sourced function, and SQL function.
business dimension
A category of data, such as products or
time periods, that an organization might
want to analyze.
cache structure
A coupling facility structure that stores
data that can be available to all members
of a Sysplex. A DB2 data sharing group
uses cache structures as group buffer
pools.
CAF
See call attachment facility.
DB2 glossary
1035
call attachment facility (CAF)

A DB2 attachment facility for application
programs that run in TSO or z/OS batch.
The CAF is an alternative to the DSN
command processor and provides greater
control over the execution environment.
Contrast with Recoverable Resource
Manager Services attachment facility.
central processor (CP)

The part of the computer that contains the
sequencing and processing facilities for
instruction execution, initial program
load, and other machine operations.
CFRM See coupling facility resource
management.
CFRM policy
The allocation rules for a coupling facility
structure that are declared by a z/OS
administrator.
call-level interface (CLI)

A callable application programming
interface (API) for database access, which
is an alternative to using embedded SQL.
character conversion
The process of changing characters from
one encoding scheme to another.
cascade delete
A process by which DB2 enforces
referential constraints by deleting all
descendent rows of a deleted parent row.
Character Data Representation Architecture

(CDRA)
An architecture that is used to achieve
consistent representation, processing, and
interchange of string data.
CASE expression
An expression that is selected based on
the evaluation of one or more conditions.
cast function
A function that is used to convert
instances of a (source) data type into
instances of a different (target) data type.
castout
The DB2 process of writing changed
pages from a group buffer pool to disk.
castout owner
The DB2 member that is responsible for
casting out a particular page set or
partition.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
character set
A defined set of characters.
catalog
In DB2, a collection of tables that contains
descriptions of objects such as tables,
views, and indexes.
catalog table
Any table in the DB2 catalog.
CCSID
See coded character set identifier.
CDB
See communications database.
CDRA
See Character Data Representation
Architecture.
CEC
See central processor complex.
central electronic complex (CEC)

central processor complex (CPC)
A physical collection of hardware that
consists of main storage, one or more
central processors, timers, and channels.
1036
character large object (CLOB)

A character string data type that contains
a sequence of bytes that represent
characters (single-byte, multibyte, or both)
that can range in size from 0 bytes to 2
GB, less 1 byte. In general, CLOB values
are used whenever a character string
might exceed the limits of the VARCHAR
type.
|
|
|
|
|
character string
A sequence of bytes that represent bit
data, single-byte characters, or a mixture
of single-byte and multibyte characters.
Character data can be further classified as
CHARACTER, VARCHAR, or CLOB.
check constraint
A user-defined constraint that specifies
the values that specific columns of a base
table can contain.
check integrity
The condition that exists when each row
in a table conforms to the check
constraints that are defined on that table.
check pending
A state of a table space or partition that
prevents its use by some utilities and by
some SQL statements because of rows
that violate referential constraints, check
constraints, or both.
checkpoint
A point at which DB2 records status
information on the DB2 log; the recovery
process uses this information if DB2
abnormally terminates.
child lock
For explicit hierarchical locking, a lock
that is held on either a table, page, row,
or a large object (LOB). Each child lock
has a parent lock. See also parent lock.
|
|
|
|
CI
See control interval.
CICS
Represents (in this information): CICS

Transaction Server for z/OS: Customer
Information Control System Transaction
Server for z/OS.
CICS attachment facility

A facility that provides a multithread
connection to DB2 to allow applications
that run in the CICS environment to
execute DB2 statements.
claim
A notification to DB2 that an object is

being accessed. Claims prevent drains
from occurring until the claim is released,
which usually occurs at a commit point.
Contrast with drain.
claim class
A specific type of object access that can be
one of the following isolation levels:
v Cursor stability (CS)
v Repeatable read (RR)
v Write
class of service
A VTAM term for a list of routes through
a network, arranged in an order of
preference for their use.
clause In SQL, a distinct part of a statement,
such as a SELECT clause or a WHERE
clause.
CLI
See call-level interface.
client
See requester.
CLOB See character large object.

|
|
|
|
|
clone object
An object that is associated with a clone
table, including the clone table itself and
check constraints, indexes, and BEFORE
triggers on the clone table.
|
|
|
clone table
A table that is structurally identical to a
base table. The base and clone table each
have separate underlying VSAM data

sets, which are identified by their data set
instance numbers. Contrast with base
table.
|
|
|
|
closed application
An application that requires exclusive use
of certain statements on certain DB2
objects, so that the objects are managed
solely through the external interface of
that application.
clustering index
An index that determines how rows are
physically ordered (clustered) in a table
space. If a clustering index on a
partitioned table is not a partitioning
index, the rows are ordered in cluster
sequence within each data partition
instead of spanning partitions.
| CM
See conversion mode.
| CM*
See conversion mode*.
C++ member
A data object or function in a structure,
union, or class.
C++ member function
An operator or function that is declared
as a member of a class. A member
function has access to the private and
protected data members and to the
member functions of objects in its class.
Member functions are also called
methods.
C++ object
A region of storage. An object is created
when a variable is defined or a new
function is invoked.
An instance of a class.
coded character set
A set of unambiguous rules that establish
a character set and the one-to-one
relationships between the characters of
the set and their coded representations.
coded character set identifier (CCSID)
A 16-bit number that uniquely identifies a
coded representation of graphic
characters. It designates an encoding
scheme identifier and one or more pairs
that consist of a character set identifier
and an associated code page identifier.
code page
A set of assignments of characters to code
DB2 glossary
1037
points. Within a code page, each code

point has only one specific meaning. In
EBCDIC, for example, the character A is
assigned code point XC1, and character
B is assigned code point XC2.
operator or an IMS subsystem user to

route DB2 commands to specific DB2
subsystems.
command scope
The scope of command operation in a
data sharing group.
code point
In CDRA, a unique bit pattern that
represents a character in a code page.
commit
The operation that ends a unit of work by
releasing locks so that the database
changes that are made by that unit of
work can be perceived by other processes.
Contrast with rollback.
code unit
The fundamental binary width in a
computer architecture that is used for
representing character data, such as 7 bits,
8 bits, 16 bits, or 32 bits. Depending on
the character encoding form that is used,
each code point in a coded character set
can be represented by one or more code
units.
coexistence
During migration, the period of time in
which two releases exist in the same data
sharing group.
commit point
A point in time when data is considered
consistent.
|
|
|
|
|
cold start
A process by which DB2 restarts without
processing any log records. Contrast with
warm start.
communications database (CDB)

A set of tables in the DB2 catalog that are
used to establish conversations with
remote database management systems.
collection
A group of packages that have the same
qualifier.
comparison operator
A token (such as =, >, or <) that is used
to specify a relationship between two
values.
column
The vertical component of a table. A
column has a name and a particular data
type (for example, character, decimal, or
integer).
command
A DB2 operator command or a DSN
subcommand. A command is distinct
from an SQL statement.
command prefix
A 1- to 8-character command identifier.
The command prefix distinguishes the
command as belonging to an application
or subsystem rather than to z/OS.
command recognition character (CRC)
A character that permits a z/OS console
1038
compatibility mode
See conversion mode.
compatibility mode* (CM*)
See conversion mode*.
column function
See aggregate function.
come from checking
An LU 6.2 security option that defines a
list of authorization IDs that are allowed
to connect to DB2 from a partner LU.
common service area (CSA)

In z/OS, a part of the common area that
contains data areas that are addressable
by all address spaces. Most DB2 use is in
the extended CSA, which is above the
16-MB line.
|
|
composite key
An ordered set of key columns or
expressions of the same table.
compression dictionary
The dictionary that controls the process of
compression and decompression. This
dictionary is created from the data in the
table space or table space partition.
concurrency
The shared use of resources by more than
one application process at the same time.
conditional restart
A DB2 restart that is directed by a
user-defined conditional restart control
record (CRCR).
data; the converted string is shorter

because the shift codes are removed.
connection
In SNA, the existence of a communication
path between two partner LUs that allows
information to be exchanged (for example,
two DB2 subsystems that are connected
and communicating by way of a
conversation).
control interval (CI)

v A unit of information that VSAM
transfers between virtual and auxiliary
storage.
v In a key-sequenced data set or file, the
set of records that an entry in the
sequence-set index record points to.
connection context
In SQLJ, a Java object that represents a
connection to a data source.
conversation
Communication, which is based on LU
6.2 or Advanced Program-to-Program
Communication (APPC), between an
application and a remote transaction
program over an SNA logical
unit-to-logical unit (LU-LU) session that
allows communication while processing a
transaction.
connection declaration clause

In SQLJ, a statement that declares a
connection to a data source.
connection handle
The data object containing information
that is associated with a connection that
DB2 ODBC manages. This includes
general status information, transaction
status, and diagnostic information.
connection ID
An identifier that is supplied by the
attachment facility and that is associated
with a specific address space connection.
consistency token
A timestamp that is used to generate the
version identifier for an application. See
also version.
constant
A language element that specifies an
unchanging value. Constants are classified
as string constants or numeric constants.
Contrast with variable.
constraint
A rule that limits the values that can be
inserted, deleted, or updated in a table.
See referential constraint, check constraint,
and unique constraint.
context
An applications logical connection to the
data source and associated DB2 ODBC
connection information that allows the
application to direct its operations to a
data source. A DB2 ODBC context
represents a DB2 thread.
contracting conversion
A process that occurs when the length of
a converted string is smaller than that of
the source string. For example, this
process occurs when an EBCDIC
mixed-data string that contains DBCS
characters is converted to ASCII mixed
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
conversion mode (CM)

The first stage of the version-to-version
migration process. In a DB2 data sharing
group, members in conversion mode can
coexist with members that are still at the
prior version level. Fallback to the prior
version is also supported. When in
conversion mode, the DB2 subsystem
cannot use most new functions of the new
version. Contrast with conversion mode*,
enabling-new-function mode,
enabling-new-function mode*, and
new-function mode.
Previously known as compatibility mode
(CM).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
conversion mode* (CM*)

A stage of the version-to-version
migration process that applies to a DB2
subsystem or data sharing group that was
in enabling-new-function mode (ENFM),
enabling-new-function mode* (ENFM*), or
new-function mode (NFM) at one time.
Fallback to a prior version is not
supported. When in conversion mode*, a
DB2 data sharing group cannot coexist
with members that are still at the prior
version level. Contrast with conversion
mode, enabling-new-function mode,
new-function mode.
|
|
Previously known as compatibility mode*

(CM*).
coordinator
The system component that coordinates
DB2 glossary
1039
the commit or rollback of a unit of work

that includes work that is done on one or
more other systems.
coprocessor
See SQL statement coprocessor.
|
|
|
copy pool
A collection of names of storage groups
that are processed collectively for fast
replication operations.
copy target
A named set of SMS storage groups that
are to be used as containers for copy pool
volume copies. A copy target is an SMS
construct that lets you define which
storage groups are to be used as
containers for volumes that are copied by
using FlashCopy functions.
copy version
A point-in-time FlashCopy copy that is
managed by HSM. Each copy pool has a
version parameter that specifies the
number of copy versions to be maintained
on disk.
correlated columns
A relationship between the value of one
column and the value of another column.
correlated subquery
A subquery (part of a WHERE or
HAVING clause) that is applied to a row
or group of rows of a table or view that is
named in an outer subselect statement.
correlation ID
An identifier that is associated with a
specific thread. In TSO, it is either an
authorization ID or the job name.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
correlation name
An identifier that is specified and used
within a single SQL statement as the
exposed name for objects such as a table,
view, table function reference, nested table
expression, or result of a data change
statement. Correlation names are useful in
an SQL statement to allow two distinct
references to the same base table and to
allow an alternative name to be used to
represent an object.
cost category
A category into which DB2 places cost
estimates for SQL statements at the time
the statement is bound. The cost category
is externalized in the COST_CATEGORY
1040
column of the DSN_STATEMNT_TABLE

when a statement is explained.
|
|
|
|
|
coupling facility
A special PR/SM logical partition (LPAR)
that runs the coupling facility control
program and provides high-speed
caching, list processing, and locking
functions in a Parallel Sysplex.
coupling facility resource management (CFRM)
A component of z/OS that provides the
services to manage coupling facility
resources in a Parallel Sysplex. This
management includes the enforcement of
CFRM policies to ensure that the coupling
facility and structure requirements are
satisfied.
CP
See central processor.
CPC
CRC
See command recognition character.
created temporary table

A persistent table that holds temporary
data and is defined with the SQL
statement CREATE GLOBAL
TEMPORARY TABLE. Information about
created temporary tables is stored in the
DB2 catalog and can be shared across
application processes. Contrast with
declared temporary table. See also
temporary table.
cross-system coupling facility (XCF)
A component of z/OS that provides
functions to support cooperation between
authorized programs that run within a
Sysplex.
cross-system extended services (XES)
A set of z/OS services that allow multiple
instances of an application or subsystem,
running on different systems in a Sysplex
environment, to implement
high-performance, high-availability data
sharing by using a coupling facility.
CS
See cursor stability.
CSA
See common service area.
CT
See cursor table.
current data
Data within a host structure that is
current with (identical to) the data within
the base table.
current status rebuild

The second phase of restart processing
during which the status of the subsystem
is reconstructed from information on the
log.
database descriptor (DBD)

An internal representation of a DB2
database definition, which reflects the
data definition that is in the DB2 catalog.
The objects that are defined in a database
descriptor are table spaces, tables,
indexes, index spaces, relationships, check
constraints, and triggers. A DBD also
contains information about accessing
tables in the database.
cursor A control structure that an application

program uses to point to a single row or
multiple rows within some ordered set of
rows of a result table. A cursor can be
used to retrieve, update, or delete rows
from a result table.
database exception status

In a data sharing environment, an
indication that something is wrong with a
database.
cursor sensitivity
The degree to which database updates are
visible to the subsequent FETCH
statements in a cursor.
database identifier (DBID)

An internal identifier of the database.
cursor stability (CS)

The isolation level that provides
maximum concurrency without the ability
to read uncommitted data. With cursor
stability, a unit of work holds locks only
on its uncommitted changes and on the
current row of each of its cursors. See also
read stability, repeatable read, and
uncommitted read.
|
database management system (DBMS)

A software system that controls the
creation, organization, and modification of
a database and the access to the data that
is stored within it.
database request module (DBRM)
A data set member that is created by the
DB2 precompiler and that contains
information about SQL statements.
DBRMs are used in the bind process.
cursor table (CT)

The internal representation of a cursor.
cycle
A set of tables that can be ordered so that

each table is a descendent of the one
before it, and the first table is a
descendent of the last table. A
self-referencing table is a cycle with a
single member. See also referential cycle.
database server
The target of a request from a local
application or a remote intermediate
database server.
data currency
The state in which the data that is
retrieved into a host variable in a
program is a copy of the data in the base
table.
database
A collection of tables, or a collection of
table spaces and index spaces.
database access thread (DBAT)
A thread that accesses data at the local
subsystem on behalf of a remote
subsystem.
data dictionary
A repository of information about an
organizations application programs,
databases, logical data models, users, and
authorizations.
database administrator (DBA)

An individual who is responsible for
designing, developing, operating,
safeguarding, maintaining, and using a
database.
database alias
The name of the target server if it is
different from the location name. The
database alias is used to provide the
name of the database server as it is
known to the network.
data partition
A VSAM data set that is contained within
a partitioned table space.
data-partitioned secondary index (DPSI)
A secondary index that is partitioned
according to the underlying data.
Contrast with nonpartitioned secondary
index.
|
|
|
data set instance number

A number that indicates the data set that
contains the data for an object.
DB2 glossary
1041
DBCS See double-byte character set.
data sharing
A function of DB2 for z/OS that enables
applications on different DB2 subsystems
to read from and write to the same data
concurrently.
See database management system.

DBRM
See database request module.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
DDF
declarations generator (DCLGEN)

A subcomponent of DB2 that generates
SQL table declarations and COBOL, C, or
PL/I data structure declarations that
conform to the table. The declarations are
generated from DB2 system catalog
information.
DB2 catalog
A collection of tables that are maintained
by DB2 and contain descriptions of DB2
objects, such as tables, views, and
indexes.
declared temporary table

A non-persistent table that holds
temporary data and is defined with the
SQL statement DECLARE GLOBAL
TEMPORARY TABLE. Information about
declared temporary tables is not stored in
the DB2 catalog and can be used only by
the application process that issued the
DECLARE statement. Contrast with
created temporary table. See also
temporary table.
DBCLOB
See double-byte character large object.
See distributed data facility.
deadlock
Unresolvable contention for the use of a
resource, such as a table or an index.
DBAT See database access thread.
1042
DB2 thread
The database manager structure that
describes an applications connection,
traces its progress, processes resource
functions, and delimits its accessibility to
the database manager resources and
services. Most DB2 for z/OS functions
execute under a thread structure.
DCLGEN
See declarations generator.
See database administrator.
DB2 command
An instruction to the DB2 subsystem that
a user enters to start or stop DB2, to
display information on current users, to
start or stop databases, to display
information on the status of databases,
and so on.
See DB2 Interactive.
DBMS
data warehouse
A system that provides critical business
information to an organization. The data
warehouse system cleanses the data for
accuracy and currency, and then presents
the data to decision makers so that they
can interpret and use it effectively and
efficiently.
DBA
DB2I
DB2 Interactive (DB2I)

An interactive service within DB2 that
facilitates the execution of SQL
statements, DB2 (operator) commands,
and programmer commands, and the
invocation of utilities.
data sharing member

A DB2 subsystem that is assigned by XCF
services to a data sharing group.
data type
An attribute of columns, constants,
variables, parameters, special registers,
and the results of functions and
expressions.
See database descriptor.
DBID See database identifier.
data sharing group

A collection of one or more DB2
subsystems that directly access and
change the same data while maintaining
data integrity.
data source
A local or remote relational or
non-relational data manager that is
capable of supporting data access via an
ODBC driver that supports the ODBC
APIs. In the case of DB2 for z/OS, the
data sources are always relational
database managers.
DBD
|
|
default value
A predetermined value, attribute, or
option that is assumed when no other
|
|
|
|
|
value is specified. A default value can be

defined for column data in DB2 tables by
specifying the DEFAULT keyword in an
SQL statement that changes data (such as
INSERT, UPDATE, and MERGE).
deferred embedded SQL
SQL statements that are neither fully
static nor fully dynamic. These statements
are embedded within an application and
are prepared during the execution of the
application.
deferred write
The process of asynchronously writing
changed data pages to disk.
degree of parallelism
The number of concurrently executed
operations that are initiated to process a
query.
delete hole
The location on which a cursor is
positioned when a row in a result table is
refetched and the row no longer exists on
the base table. See also update hole.
delete rule
The rule that tells DB2 what to do to a
dependent row when a parent row is
deleted. Delete rules include CASCADE,
RESTRICT, SET NULL, or NO ACTION.
delete trigger
A trigger that is defined with the
triggering delete SQL operation.
delimited identifier
A sequence of characters that are enclosed
within escape characters such as double
quotation marks ().
delimiter token
A string constant, a delimited identifier,
an operator symbol, or any of the special
characters that are shown in DB2 syntax
diagrams.
denormalization
The intentional duplication of columns in
multiple tables to increase data
redundancy. Denormalization is
sometimes necessary to minimize
performance problems. Contrast with
normalization.
dependent
An object (row, table, or table space) that
has at least one parent. The object is also
said to be a dependent (row, table, or
table space) of its parent. See also parent

row, parent table, and parent table space.
dependent row
A row that contains a foreign key that
matches the value of a primary key in the
parent row.
dependent table
A table that is a dependent in at least one
descendent
An object that is a dependent of an object
or is the dependent of a descendent of an
object.
descendent row
A row that is dependent on another row,
or a row that is a descendent of a
dependent row.
descendent table
A table that is a dependent of another
table, or a table that is a descendent of a
dependent table.
deterministic function
A user-defined function whose result is
dependent on the values of the input
arguments. That is, successive invocations
with the same input values produce the
same answer. Sometimes referred to as a
not-variant function. Contrast with
nondeterministic function (sometimes
called a variant function).
dimension
A data category such as time, products, or
markets. The elements of a dimension are
referred to as members. See also
dimension table.
dimension table
The representation of a dimension in a
star schema. Each row in a dimension
table represents all of the attributes for a
particular member of the dimension. See
also dimension, star schema, and star join.
directory
The DB2 system database that contains
internal objects such as database
descriptors and skeleton cursor tables.
disk
A direct-access storage device that records

data magnetically.
distinct type
A user-defined data type that is
represented as an existing type (its source
DB2 glossary
1043
type), but is considered to be a separate

and incompatible type for semantic
purposes.
national languages such as Japanese and

Chinese, that have more symbols than can
be represented by a single byte. Each
character is 2 bytes in length. Contrast
with single-byte character set and
multibyte character set.
distributed data
Data that resides on a DBMS other than
the local system.
double-precision floating point number

A 64-bit approximate representation of a
real number.
distributed data facility (DDF)

A set of DB2 components through which
DB2 communicates with another
relational database management system.
Distributed Relational Database Architecture
(DRDA)
A connection protocol for distributed
relational database processing that is used
by IBM relational database products.
DRDA includes protocols for
communication between an application
and a remote relational database
management system, and for
communication between relational
database management systems. See also
DRDA access.
DRDA access
An open method of accessing distributed
data that you can use to connect to
another database server to execute
packages that were previously bound at
the server location.
DSN
v The default DB2 subsystem name.
v The name of the TSO command
processor of DB2.
v The first three characters of DB2
module and macro names.
domain
The set of valid values for an attribute.
domain name
The name by which TCP/IP applications
refer to a TCP/IP host within a TCP/IP
network.
dynamic cursor
A named control structure that an
application program uses to change the
size of the result table and the order of its
rows after the cursor is opened. Contrast
with static cursor.
domain name server (DNS)

A special TCP/IP network server that
manages a distributed directory that is
used to map TCP/IP host names to IP
addresses.
double-byte character set (DBCS)

A set of characters, which are used by
1044
The act of acquiring a locked resource by

quiescing access to that object. Contrast
with claim.
See Distributed Relational Database

Architecture.
| document ID
|
A value that uniquely identifies a row
|
that contains an XML column. This value
|
is stored with the row and never changes.
double-byte character large object (DBCLOB)

A graphic string data type in which a
sequence of bytes represent double-byte
characters that range in size from 0 bytes
to 2 GB, less 1 byte. In general, DBCLOB
values are used whenever a double-byte
character string might exceed the limits of
the VARGRAPHIC type.
drain
DRDA
| DOCID
|
See document ID.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See data-partitioned secondary index.
drain lock
A lock on a claim class that prevents a
claim from occurring.
See domain name server.
DNS
DPSI
dynamic dump
A dump that is issued during the
execution of a program, usually under the
control of that program.
|
|
|
|
|
dynamic SQL
SQL statements that are prepared and
executed at run time. In dynamic SQL,
the SQL statement is contained as a
character string in a host variable or as a
constant, and it is not precompiled.
EA-enabled table space
A table space or index space that is
enabled for extended addressability and
that contains individual partitions (or

pieces, for LOB table spaces) that are
greater than 4 GB.
EB
An enclave is similar to a program or run

unit. See also WLM enclave.
encoding scheme
A set of rules to represent character data
(ASCII, EBCDIC, or Unicode).
See exabyte.
EBCDIC
Extended binary coded decimal
interchange code. An encoding scheme
that is used to represent character data in
the z/OS, VM, VSE, and iSeries
environments. Contrast with ASCII and
Unicode.
embedded SQL
SQL statements that are coded within an
application program. See static SQL.
| enabling-new-function mode (ENFM)
|
A transitional stage of the
|
version-to-version migration process
|
during which the DB2 subsystem or data
|
sharing group is preparing to use the new
|
functions of the new version. When in
|
enabling-new-function mode, a DB2 data
|
sharing group cannot coexist with
|
members that are still at the prior version
|
level. Fallback to a prior version is not
|
supported, and most new functions of the
|
new version are not available for use in
|
enabling-new-function mode. Contrast
|
with conversion mode, conversion mode*,
|
|
new-function mode.
| enabling-new-function mode* (ENFM*)
|
A transitional stage of the
|
version-to-version migration process that
|
applies to a DB2 subsystem or data
|
sharing group that was in new-function
|
mode (NFM) at one time. When in
|
enabling-new-function mode*, a DB2
|
subsystem or data sharing group is
|
preparing to use the new functions of the
|
new version but cannot yet use them. A
|
data sharing group that is in
|
enabling-new-function mode* cannot
|
coexist with members that are still at the
|
prior version level. Fallback to a prior
|
version is not supported. Contrast with
|
conversion mode, conversion mode*,
|
enabling-new-function mode, and
|
new-function mode.
enclave
In Language Environment , an
independent collection of routines, one of
which is designated as the main routine.
| ENFM See enabling-new-function mode.

ENFM*
See enabling-new-function mode*.
| entity A person, object, or concept about which

|
information is stored. In a relational
|
database, entities are represented as
|
tables. A database includes information
|
about the entities in an organization or
|
business, and their relationships to each
|
other.
enumerated list
A set of DB2 objects that are defined with
a LISTDEF utility control statement in
which pattern-matching characters (*, %;,
_, or ?) are not used.
environment
A collection of names of logical and
physical resources that are used to
support the performance of a function.
|
|
|
|
environment handle
A handle that identifies the global context
for database access. All data that is
pertinent to all objects in the environment
is associated with this handle.
equijoin
A join operation in which the
join-condition has the form expression =
expression. See also join, full outer join,
inner join, left outer join, outer join, and
right outer join.
error page range
A range of pages that are considered to be
physically damaged. DB2 does not allow
users to access any pages that fall within
this range.
escape character
The symbol, a double quotation () for
example, that is used to enclose an SQL
delimited identifier.
exabyte
A unit of measure for processor, real and
virtual storage capacities, and channel
volume that has a value of 1 152 921 504
606 846 976 bytes or 260.
DB2 glossary
1045
|
|
|
|
|
|
exception
An SQL operation that involves the
EXCEPT set operator, which combines
two result tables. The result of an
exception operation consists of all of the
rows that are in only one of the result
tables.
exposed name
A correlation name or a table or view
name for which a correlation name is not
specified.
expression
An operand or a collection of operators
and operands that yields a single value.
exception table
A table that holds rows that violate
referential constraints or check constraints
that the CHECK DATA utility finds.
exclusive lock
A lock that prevents concurrently
executing application processes from
reading or changing data. Contrast with
share lock.
Extended Recovery Facility (XRF)

A facility that minimizes the effect of
failures in z/OS, VTAM, the host
processor, or high-availability applications
during sessions between high-availability
applications and designated terminals.
This facility provides an alternative
subsystem to take over sessions from the
failing subsystem.
executable statement
An SQL statement that can be embedded
in an application program, dynamically
prepared and executed, or issued
interactively.
Extensible Markup Language (XML)

A standard metalanguage for defining
markup languages that is a subset of
Standardized General Markup Language
(SGML).
execution context
In SQLJ, a Java object that can be used to
control the execution of SQL statements.
exit routine
A user-written (or IBM-provided default)
program that receives control from DB2 to
perform specific functions. Exit routines
run as extensions of DB2.
expanding conversion
A process that occurs when the length of
a converted string is greater than that of
the source string. For example, this
process occurs when an ASCII mixed-data
string that contains DBCS characters is
converted to an EBCDIC mixed-data
string; the converted string is longer
because shift codes are added.
explicit hierarchical locking
Locking that is used to make the
parent-child relationship between
resources known to IRLM. This kind of
locking avoids global locking overhead
when no inter-DB2 interest exists on a
resource.
|
|
|
|
|
explicit privilege
A privilege that has a name and is held as
the result of an SQL GRANT statement
and revoked as the result of an SQL
REVOKE statement. For example, the
SELECT privilege.
1046
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
external function
A function that has its functional logic
implemented in a programming language
application that resides outside the
database, in the file system of the
database server. The association of the
function with the external code
application is specified by the EXTERNAL
clause in the CREATE FUNCTION
statement. External functions can be
classified as external scalar functions and
external table functions. Contrast with
sourced function, built-in function, and
SQL function.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
external procedure
A procedure that has its procedural logic
implemented in an external programming
language application. The association of
the procedure with the external
application is specified by a CREATE
PROCEDURE statement with a
LANGUAGE clause that has a value other
than SQL and an EXTERNAL clause that
implicitly or explicitly specifies the name
of the external application. Contrast with
external SQL procedure and native SQL
procedure.
external routine
A user-defined function or stored
procedure that is based on code that is
written in an external programming
language.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
external SQL procedure

An SQL procedure that is processed using
a generated C program that is a
representation of the procedure. When an
external SQL procedure is called, the C
program representation of the procedure
is executed in a stored procedures address
space. Contrast with external procedure
and native SQL procedure.
failed member state
A state of a member of a data sharing
group in which the members task,
address space, or z/OS system terminates
before the state changes from active to
quiesced.
|
|
|
|
|
fan set
A direct physical access path to data,
which is provided by an index, hash, or
link; a fan set is the means by which DB2
supports the ordering of data.
federated database
The combination of a DB2 server (in
Linux, UNIX, and Windows
environments) and multiple data sources
to which the server sends queries. In a
federated database system, a client
application can use a single SQL
statement to join data that is distributed
across multiple database management
systems and can view the data as if it
were local.
fetch orientation
The specification of the desired placement
of the cursor as part of a FETCH
statement. The specification can be before
or after the rows of the result table (with
BEFORE or AFTER). The specification can
also have either a single-row fetch
orientation (for example, NEXT, LAST, or
ABSOLUTE n) or a rowset fetch
orientation (for example, NEXT ROWSET,

LAST ROWSET, or ROWSET STARTING
AT ABSOLUTE n).
field procedure
A user-written exit routine that is
designed to receive a single value and
transform (encode or decode) it in any
way the user can specify.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
fallback
The process of returning to a previous
release of DB2 after attempting or
completing migration to a current release.
Fallback is supported only from a
subsystem that is in conversion mode.
false global lock contention
A contention indication from the coupling
facility that occurs when multiple lock
names are hashed to the same indicator
and when no real contention exists.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
file reference variable

A host variable that is declared with one
of the derived data types (BLOB_FILE,
CLOB_FILE, DBCLOB_FILE); file
reference variables direct the reading of a
LOB from a file or the writing of a LOB
into a file.
filter factor
A number between zero and one that
estimates the proportion of rows in a
table for which a predicate is true.
|
|
|
|
fixed-length string
A character, graphic, or binary string
whose length is specified and cannot be
changed. Contrast with varying-length
string.
|
|
|
|
|
FlashCopy
A function on the IBM Enterprise Storage
Server that can, in conjunction with the
BACKUP SYSTEM utility, create a
point-in-time copy of data while an
application is running.
foreign key
A column or set of columns in a
dependent table of a constraint
relationship. The key must have the same
number of columns, with the same
descriptions, as the primary key of the
parent table. Each foreign key value must
either match a parent key value in the
related parent table or be null.
forest An ordered set of subtrees of XML nodes.
forward log recovery
The third phase of restart processing
during which DB2 processes the log in a
forward direction to apply all REDO log
records.
free space
The total amount of unused space in a
page; that is, the space that is not used to
store records or control information is free
space.
DB2 glossary
1047
buffer pool. Either read/write interest is

active among DB2 subsystems for this
page set, or the page set has changed
pages in the group buffer pool that have
not yet been cast out to disk.
full outer join

The result of a join operation that
includes the matched rows of both tables
that are being joined and preserves the
unmatched rows of both tables. See also
join, equijoin, inner join, left outer join,
outer join, and right outer join.
generalized trace facility (GTF)

A z/OS service program that records
significant system events such as I/O
interrupts, SVC interrupts, program
interrupts, or external interrupts.
| fullselect
|
A subselect, a fullselect in parentheses, or
|
a number of both that are combined by
|
set operators. Fullselect specifies a result
|
table. If a set operator is not used, the
|
result of the fullselect is the result of the
|
specified subselect or fullselect.
generic resource name

A name that VTAM uses to represent
several application programs that provide
the same function in order to handle
session distribution and balancing in a
Sysplex environment.
fully escaped mapping

A mapping from an SQL identifier to an
XML name when the SQL identifier is a
column name.
getpage
An operation in which DB2 accesses a
data page.
function
A mapping, which is embodied as a
program (the function body) that is
invocable by means of zero or more input
values (arguments) to a single value (the
result). See also aggregate function and
scalar function.
global lock
A lock that provides concurrency control
within and among DB2 subsystems. The
scope of the lock is across all DB2
subsystems of a data sharing group.
global lock contention
Conflicts on locking requests between
different DB2 members of a data sharing
group when those members are trying to
serialize shared resources.
Functions can be user-defined, built-in, or

generated by DB2. (See also built-in
function, cast function, external function,
sourced function, SQL function, and
user-defined function.)
function definer
The authorization ID of the owner of the
schema of the function that is specified in
the CREATE FUNCTION statement.
function package
A package that results from binding the
DBRM for a function program.
function package owner
The authorization ID of the user who
binds the function programs DBRM into
a function package.
function signature
The logical concatenation of a fully
qualified function name with the data
types of all of its parameters.
GB
Gigabyte. A value of (1 073 741 824 bytes).
GBP
See group buffer pool.
GBP-dependent
The status of a page set or page set
partition that is dependent on the group
1048
governor
See resource limit facility.
|
|
|
graphic string
A sequence of DBCS characters. Graphic
data can be further classified as
GRAPHIC, VARGRAPHIC, or DBCLOB.
| GRECP
|
See group buffer pool recovery pending.
gross lock
The shared, update, or exclusive mode locks
on a table, partition, or table space.
group buffer pool duplexing
The ability to write data to two instances
of a group buffer pool structure: a
primary group buffer pool and a
secondary group buffer pool. z/OS
publications refer to these instances as the
old (for primary) and new (for
secondary) structures.
group buffer pool (GBP)
A coupling facility cache structure that is
used by a data sharing group to cache

data and to ensure that the data is
consistent for all members.
hole
| group buffer pool recovery pending (GRECP)

|
The state that exists after the buffer pool
|
for a data sharing group is lost. When a
|
page set is in this state, changes that are
|
recorded in the log must be applied to the
|
affected page set before the page set can
|
be used.
home address space

The area of storage that z/OS currently
recognizes as dispatched.
host
host identifier
A name that is declared in the host
program.
group name
The z/OS XCF identifier for a data
sharing group.
host language
A programming language in which you
can embed SQL statements.
group restart
A restart of at least one member of a data
sharing group after the loss of either locks
or the shared communications area.
host program
An application program that is written in
a host language and that contains
embedded SQL statements.
See generalized trace facility.
handle
In DB2 ODBC, a variable that refers to a
data structure and associated resources.
See also statement handle, connection
handle, and environment handle.
host structure
In an application program, a structure
that is referenced by embedded SQL
statements.
help panel
A screen of information that presents
tutorial text to assist a user at the
workstation or terminal.
host variable
In an application program written in a
host language, an application variable
that is referenced by embedded SQL
statements.
heuristic damage
The inconsistency in data between one or
more participants that results when a
heuristic decision to resolve an indoubt
LUW at one or more participants differs
from the decision that is recorded at the
coordinator.
heuristic decision
A decision that forces indoubt resolution
at a participant by means other than
automatic resynchronization between
coordinator and participant.
| histogram statistics
|
A way of summarizing data distribution.
|
This technique divides up the range of
|
possible values in a data set into intervals,
|
such that each interval contains
|
approximately the same percentage of the
|
values. A set of statistics are collected for
|
each interval.
The set of programs and resources that

are available on a given TCP/IP instance.
host expression
A Java variable or expression that is
referenced by SQL clauses in an SQLJ
application program.
group level
The release level of a data sharing group,
which is established when the first
member migrates to a new release.
GTF
A row of the result table that cannot be

accessed because of a delete or an update
that has been performed on the row. See
also delete hole and update hole.
host variable array

An array of elements, each of which
corresponds to a value for a column. The
dimension of the array determines the
maximum number of rows for which the
array can be used.
|
|
IBM System z9 Integrated Processor (zIIP)

A specialized processor that can be used
for some DB2 functions.
IDCAMS
An IBM program that is used to process
access method services commands. It can
be invoked as a job or jobstep, from a
TSO terminal, or from within a users
application program.
DB2 glossary
1049
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A set of pointers that are logically ordered

by the values of a key. Indexes can
provide faster access to data and can
enforce uniqueness on the rows in a table.
IDCAMS LISTCAT
A facility for obtaining information that is
contained in the access method services
catalog.
index
identity column
A column that provides a way for DB2 to
automatically generate a numeric value
for each row. Identity columns are
defined with the AS IDENTITY clause.
Uniqueness of values can be ensured by
defining a unique index that contains
only the identity column. A table can
have no more than one identity column.
index-controlled partitioning
A type of partitioning in which partition
boundaries for a partitioned table are
controlled by values that are specified on
the CREATE INDEX statement. Partition
limits are saved in the LIMITKEY column
of the SYSIBM.SYSINDEXPART catalog
table.
IFCID See instrumentation facility component

identifier.
IFI
See instrumentation facility interface.
IFI call
An invocation of the instrumentation
facility interface (IFI) by means of one of
its defined functions.
image copy
An exact reproduction of all or part of a
table space. DB2 provides utility
programs to make full image copies (to
copy the entire table space) or incremental
image copies (to copy only those pages
that have been modified since the last
image copy).
IMS attachment facility
A DB2 subcomponent that uses z/OS
subsystem interface (SSI) protocols and
cross-memory linkage to process requests
from IMS to DB2 and to coordinate
resource commitment.
in-abort
A status of a unit of recovery. If DB2 fails
after a unit of recovery begins to be rolled
back, but before the process is completed,
DB2 continues to back out the changes
during restart.
in-commit
after beginning its phase 2 commit
processing, it knows, when restarted,
that changes made to data are consistent.
Such units of recovery are termed
in-commit.
independent
An object (row, table, or table space) that
is neither a parent nor a dependent of
another object.
1050
index key
The set of columns in a table that is used
to determine the order of index entries.
index partition
A VSAM data set that is contained within
a partitioning index space.
index space
A page set that is used to store the entries
of one index.
indicator column
A 4-byte value that is stored in a base
table in place of a LOB column.
indicator variable
A variable that is used to represent the
null value in an application program. If
the value for the selected column is null,
a negative value is placed in the indicator
variable.
indoubt
after it has finished its phase 1 commit
processing and before it has started phase
2, only the commit coordinator knows if
an individual unit of recovery is to be
committed or rolled back. At restart, if
DB2 lacks the information it needs to
make this decision, the status of the unit
of recovery is indoubt until DB2 obtains
this information from the coordinator.
More than one unit of recovery can be
indoubt at restart.
indoubt resolution
The process of resolving the status of an
indoubt logical unit of work to either the
committed or the rollback state.
inflight
before its unit of recovery completes
phase 1 of the commit process, it merely
backs out the updates of its unit of

recovery at restart. These units of
recovery are termed inflight.
inheritance
The passing downstream of class
resources or attributes from a parent class
in the class hierarchy to a child class.
initialization file
For DB2 ODBC applications, a file
containing values that can be set to adjust
the performance of the database manager.
inline copy
A copy that is produced by the LOAD or
REORG utility. The data set that the inline
copy produces is logically equivalent to a
full image copy that is produced by
running the COPY utility with read-only
access (SHRLEVEL REFERENCE).
inner join
includes only the matched rows of both
tables that are being joined. See also join,
equijoin, full outer join, left outer join,
inoperative package
A package that cannot be used because
one or more user-defined functions or
procedures that the package depends on
were dropped. Such a package must be
explicitly rebound. Contrast with invalid
package.
insensitive cursor
A cursor that is not sensitive to inserts,
updates, or deletes that are made to the
underlying rows of a result table after the
result table has been materialized.
insert trigger
triggering SQL operation, an insert.
install The process of preparing a DB2
subsystem to operate as a z/OS
subsystem.
| INSTEAD OF trigger
|
A trigger that is associated with a single
|
view and is activated by an insert,
|
update, or delete operation on the view
|
and that can define how to propagate the
|
insert, update, or delete operation on the
|
view to the underlying tables of the view.
|
Contrast with BEFORE trigger and
|
AFTER trigger.
instrumentation facility component identifier

(IFCID)
A value that names and identifies a trace
record of an event that can be traced. As a
parameter on the START TRACE and
MODIFY TRACE commands, it specifies
that the corresponding event is to be
traced.
instrumentation facility interface (IFI)
A programming interface that enables
programs to obtain online trace data
about DB2, to submit DB2 commands,
and to pass data to DB2.
Interactive System Productivity Facility (ISPF)
An IBM licensed program that provides
interactive dialog services in a z/OS
environment.
inter-DB2 R/W interest
A property of data in a table space, index,
or partition that has been opened by more
than one member of a data sharing group
and that has been opened for writing by
at least one of those members.
intermediate database server
The target of a request from a local
application or a remote application
requester that is forwarded to another
database server.
internal resource lock manager (IRLM)
A z/OS subsystem that DB2 uses to
control communication and database
locking.
internationalization
The support for an encoding scheme that
is able to represent the code points of
characters from many different
geographies and languages. To support all
geographies, the Unicode standard
requires more than 1 byte to represent a
single character. See also Unicode.
| intersection
|
An SQL operation that involves the
|
INTERSECT set operator, which combines
|
two result tables. The result of an
|
intersection operation consists of all of the
|
rows that are in both result tables.
invalid package
A package that depends on an object
(other than a user-defined function) that
is dropped. Such a package is implicitly
rebound on invocation. Contrast with
inoperative package.
DB2 glossary
1051
|
|
IP address
A value that uniquely identifies a TCP/IP
host.
IRLM See internal resource lock manager.
isolation level
The degree to which a unit of work is
isolated from the updating operations of
other units of work. See also cursor
stability, read stability, repeatable read,
and uncommitted read.
ISPF
See Interactive System Productivity

Facility.
iterator
In SQLJ, an object that contains the result
set of a query. An iterator is equivalent to
a cursor in other host languages.
iterator declaration clause
In SQLJ, a statement that generates an
iterator declaration class. An iterator is an
object of an iterator declaration class.
JAR
See Java Archive.
Java Archive (JAR)

A file format that is used for aggregating
many files into a single file.
JDBC A Sun Microsystems database application
programming interface (API) for Java that
allows programs to access database
management systems by using callable
SQL.
join
A relational operation that allows retrieval

of data from two or more tables based on
matching column values. See also
equijoin, full outer join, inner join, left
outer join, outer join, and right outer join.
KB
Kilobyte. A value of 1024 bytes.
Kerberos
A network authentication protocol that is
designed to provide strong authentication
for client/server applications by using
secret-key cryptography.
Kerberos ticket
A transparent application mechanism that
transmits the identity of an initiating
principal to its target. A simple ticket
contains the principals identity, a session
key, a timestamp, and other information,
which is sealed using the targets secret
key.
| key
1052
A column, an ordered collection of

columns, or an expression that is

identified in the description of a table,
index, or referential constraint. The same
column or expression can be part of more
than one key.
|
|
|
|
|
key-sequenced data set (KSDS)

A VSAM file or data set whose records
are loaded in key sequence and controlled
by an index.
KSDS See key-sequenced data set.
large object (LOB)
A sequence of bytes representing bit data,
single-byte characters, double-byte
characters, or a mixture of single- and
double-byte characters. A LOB can be up
to 2 GB minus 1 byte in length. See also
binary large object, character large object,
and double-byte character large object.
last agent optimization
An optimized commit flow for either
presumed-nothing or presumed-abort
protocols in which the last agent, or final
participant, becomes the commit
coordinator. This flow saves at least one
message.
latch
A DB2 mechanism for controlling

concurrent events or the use of system
resources.
LCID
See log control interval definition.
LDS
See linear data set.
leaf page
An index page that contains pairs of keys
and RIDs and that points to actual data.
Contrast with nonleaf page.
left outer join
that are being joined, and that preserves
the unmatched rows of the first table. See
also join, equijoin, full outer join, inner
join, outer join, and right outer join.
limit key
The highest value of the index key for a
partition.
linear data set (LDS)
A VSAM data set that contains data but
no control information. A linear data set
can be accessed as a byte-addressable
string in virtual storage.
linkage editor
A computer program for creating load
modules from one or more object
modules or load modules by resolving
cross references among the modules and,
if necessary, adjusting addresses.
link-edit
The action of creating a loadable
computer program using a linkage editor.
list
A type of object, which DB2 utilities can

process, that identifies multiple table
spaces, multiple index spaces, or both. A
list is defined with the LISTDEF utility
control statement.
list structure
A coupling facility structure that lets data
be shared and manipulated as elements of
a queue.
L-lock See logical lock.
load module
A program unit that is suitable for
loading into main storage for execution.
The output of a linkage editor.
LOB
See large object.
LOB locator
A mechanism that allows an application
program to manipulate a large object
value in the database system. A LOB
locator is a fullword integer value that
represents a single LOB value. An
application program retrieves a LOB
locator into a host variable and can then
apply SQL operations to the associated
LOB value using the locator.
LOB lock
A lock on a LOB value.
LOB table space
A table space that contains all the data for
a particular LOB column in the related
base table.
local
A way of referring to any object that the

local DB2 subsystem maintains. A local
table, for example, is a table that is
maintained by the local DB2 subsystem.
Contrast with remote.
locale The definition of a subset of a users

environment that combines a CCSID and
characters that are defined for a specific
language and country.
local lock
A lock that provides intra-DB2
concurrency control, but not inter-DB2
concurrency control; that is, its scope is a
single DB2.
local subsystem
The unique relational DBMS to which the
user or application program is directly
connected (in the case of DB2, by one of
the DB2 attachment facilities).
location
The unique name of a database server. An
application uses the location name to
access a DB2 database server. A database
alias can be used to override the location
name when accessing a remote server.
location alias
Another name by which a database server
identifies itself in the network.
Applications can use this name to access a
DB2 database server.
lock
A means of controlling concurrent events

or access to data. DB2 locking is
performed by the IRLM.
lock duration
The interval over which a DB2 lock is
held.
lock escalation
The promotion of a lock from a row, page,
or LOB lock to a table space lock because
the number of page locks that are
concurrently held on a given resource
exceeds a preset limit.
locking
The process by which the integrity of data
is ensured. Locking prevents concurrent
users from accessing inconsistent data.
See also claim, drain, and latch.
lock mode
A representation for the type of access
that concurrently running programs can
have to a resource that a DB2 lock is
holding.
lock object
The resource that is controlled by a DB2
lock.
lock promotion
The process of changing the size or mode
of a DB2 lock to a higher, more restrictive
level.
DB2 glossary
1053
lock size
The amount of data that is controlled by a
DB2 lock on table data; the value can be a
row, a page, a LOB, a partition, a table, or
a table space.
lock structure
A coupling facility data structure that is
composed of a series of lock entries to
support shared and exclusive locking for
logical resources.
log
A collection of records that describe the

events that occur during DB2 execution
and that indicate their sequence. The
information thus recorded is used for
recovery in the event of a failure during
DB2 execution.
log control interval definition

A suffix of the physical log record that
tells how record segments are placed in
the physical control interval.
logical recovery pending (LRECP)

The state in which the data and the index
keys that reference the data are
inconsistent.
logical unit (LU)
An access point through which an
application program accesses the SNA
network in order to communicate with
another application program. See also LU
name.
logical unit of work identifier (LUWID)
A name that uniquely identifies a thread
within a network. This name consists of a
fully-qualified LU network name, an
LUW instance number, and an LUW
sequence number.
logical unit of work
The processing that a program performs
between synchronization points.
logical claim
A claim on a logical partition of a
nonpartitioning index.
log initialization
The first phase of restart processing
during which DB2 attempts to locate the
current end of the log.
logical index partition

The set of all keys that reference the same
data partition.
log record header (LRH)

A prefix, in every log record, that contains
control information.
logical lock (L-lock)

The lock type that transactions use to
control intra- and inter-DB2 data
concurrency between transactions.
Contrast with physical lock (P-lock).
log record sequence number (LRSN)

An identifier for a log record that is
associated with a data sharing member.
DB2 uses the LRSN for recovery in the
data sharing environment.
logically complete
A state in which the concurrent copy
process is finished with the initialization
of the target objects that are being copied.
The target objects are available for
update.
log truncation
A process by which an explicit starting
RBA is established. This RBA is the point
at which the next byte of log data is to be
written.
logical page list (LPL)

A list of pages that are in error and that
cannot be referenced by applications until
the pages are recovered. The page is in
logical error because the actual media
(coupling facility or disk) might not
contain any errors. Usually a connection
to the media has been lost.
logical partition
A set of key or RID pairs in a
nonpartitioning index that are associated
with a particular partition.
1054
LPL
See logical page list.
LRECP
See logical recovery pending.
LRH
See log record header.
LRSN See log record sequence number.

LU
See logical unit.
LU name
Logical unit name, which is the name by
which VTAM refers to a node in a
network.
LUW
See logical unit of work.
physical and logical characteristics and

attributes of a session.
LUWID
See logical unit of work identifier.
mapping table
A table that the REORG utility uses to
map the associations of the RIDs of data
records in the original copy and in the
shadow copy. This table is created by the
user.
modify locks
An L-lock or P-lock with a MODIFY
attribute. A list of these active locks is
kept at all times in the coupling facility
lock structure. If the requesting DB2
subsystem fails, that DB2 subsystems
modify locks are converted to retained
locks.
mass delete
The deletion of all rows of a table.
multibyte character set (MBCS)

A character set that represents single
characters with more than a single byte.
UTF-8 is an example of an MBCS.
Characters in UTF-8 can range from 1 to 4
bytes in DB2. Contrast with single-byte
character set and double-byte character
set. See also Unicode.
materialize
v The process of putting rows from a
view or nested table expression into a
work file for additional processing by a
query.
v The placement of a LOB value into
contiguous storage. Because LOB
values can be very large, DB2 avoids
materializing LOB data until doing so
becomes absolutely necessary.
multidimensional analysis
The process of assessing and evaluating
an enterprise on more than one level.
materialized query table

A table that is used to contain information
that is derived and can be summarized
from one or more source tables. Contrast
with base table.
MB
Multiple Virtual Storage (MVS)

An element of the z/OS operating system.
This element is also called the Base
Control Program (BCP).
multisite update
Distributed relational database processing
in which data is updated in more than
one location within a single unit of work.
Megabyte (1 048 576 bytes).
MBCS See multibyte character set.

member name
The z/OS XCF identifier for a particular
DB2 subsystem in a data sharing group.
multithreading
Multiple TCBs that are executing one
copy of DB2 ODBC code concurrently
(sharing a processor) or in parallel (on
separate central processors).
menu A displayed list of available functions for

selection by the operator. A menu is
sometimes called a menu panel.
metalanguage
A language that is used to create other
specialized languages.
migration
The process of converting a subsystem
with a previous release of DB2 to an
updated or current release. In this
process, you can acquire the functions of
the updated or current release without
losing the data that you created on the
previous release.
mixed data string
A character string that can contain both
single-byte and double-byte characters.
mode name
A VTAM name for the collection of
MVS
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See Multiple Virtual Storage.
native SQL procedure

An SQL procedure that is processed by
converting the procedural statements to a
native representation that is stored in the
database directory, as is done with other
SQL statements. When a native SQL
procedure is called, the native
representation is loaded from the
directory, and DB2 executes the
procedure. Contrast with external
procedure and external SQL procedure.
nested table expression
A fullselect in a FROM clause
(surrounded by parentheses).
network identifier (NID)
The network ID that is assigned by IMS
DB2 glossary
1055
or CICS, or if the connection type is

RRSAF, the RRS unit of recovery ID
(URID).
forward direction. Nonscrollable cursors

are sometimes called forward-only cursors
or serial cursors.
| new-function mode (NFM)

|
The normal mode of operation that exists
|
after successful completion of a
|
version-to-version migration. At this
|
stage, all new functions of the new
|
version are available for use. A DB2 data
|
sharing group cannot coexist with
|
members that are still at the prior version
|
level, and fallback to a prior version is
|
not supported. Contrast with conversion
|
mode, conversion mode*,
|
enabling-new-function mode, and
|
enabling-new-function mode*.
| NFM
NID
normalization
A key step in the task of building a
logical relational database design.
Normalization helps you avoid
redundancies and inconsistencies in your
data. An entity is normalized if it meets a
set of constraints for a particular normal
form (first normal form, second normal
form, and so on). Contrast with
denormalization.
not-variant function
See deterministic function.
See new-function mode.

See network identifier.
| node ID index
|
See XML node ID index.
nondeterministic function
A user-defined function whose result is
not solely dependent on the values of the
input arguments. That is, successive
invocations with the same argument
values can produce a different answer.
This type of function is sometimes called
a variant function. Contrast with
deterministic function (sometimes called a
not-variant function).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
nonpartitioned secondary index (NPSI)

An index on a partitioned table space that
is not the partitioning index and is not
partitioned. Contrast with
data-partitioned secondary index.
nonpartitioning index
See secondary index.
nonscrollable cursor
A cursor that can be moved only in a
1056
See nonpartitioned secondary index.
NUL
The null character (\0), which is

represented by the value X00. In C, this
character denotes the end of a string.
null
A special value that indicates the absence

of information.
null terminator
In C, the value that indicates the end of a
string. For EBCDIC, ASCII, and Unicode
UTF-8 strings, the null terminator is a
single-byte value (X00). For Unicode
UTF-16 or UCS-2 (wide) strings, the null
terminator is a double-byte value
(X0000).
ODBC
nonleaf page
A page that contains keys and page
numbers of other pages in the index
(either leaf or nonleaf pages). Nonleaf
pages never point to actual data. Contrast
with leaf page.
nonpartitioned index
An index that is not physically
partitioned. Both partitioning indexes and
secondary indexes can be nonpartitioned.
NPSI
See Open Database Connectivity.

ODBC driver
A dynamically-linked library (DLL) that
implements ODBC function calls and
interacts with a data source.
|
OLAP See online analytical processing.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
online analytical processing (OLAP)

The process of collecting data from one or
many sources; transforming and
analyzing the consolidated data quickly
and interactively; and examining the
results across different dimensions of the
data by looking for patterns, trends, and
exceptions within complex relationships
of that data.
Open Database Connectivity (ODBC)
A Microsoft database application
programming interface (API) for C that
allows access to database management
systems by using callable SQL. ODBC
does not require the use of an SQL

preprocessor. In addition, ODBC provides
an architecture that lets users add
modules called database drivers, which link
the application to their choice of database
management systems at run time. This
means that applications no longer need to
be directly linked to the modules of all
the database management systems that
are supported.
ordinary identifier
An uppercase letter followed by zero or
more characters, each of which is an
uppercase letter, a digit, or the underscore
character. An ordinary identifier must not
be a reserved word.
ordinary token
A numeric constant, an ordinary
identifier, a host identifier, or a keyword.
originating task
In a parallel group, the primary agent
that receives data from other execution
units (referred to as parallel tasks) that are
executing portions of the query in
parallel.
outer join
that are being joined and preserves some
or all of the unmatched rows of the tables
that are being joined. See also join,
equijoin, full outer join, inner join, left
overloaded function
A function name for which multiple
function instances exist.
package
An object containing a set of SQL
statements that have been statically
bound and that is available for
processing. A package is sometimes also
called an application package.
package list
An ordered list of package names that
may be used to extend an application
plan.
|
|
|
|
|
package name
The name of an object that is used for an
application package or an SQL procedure
package. An application package is a
bound version of a database request
module (DBRM) that is created by a
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
BIND PACKAGE or REBIND PACKAGE

command. An SQL procedural language
package is created by a CREATE or
ALTER PROCEDURE statement for a
native SQL procedure. The name of a
package consists of a location name, a
collection ID, a package ID, and a version
ID.
| page
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A unit of storage within a table space (4

KB, 8 KB, 16 KB, or 32 KB) or index space
(4 KB, 8 KB, 16 KB, or 32 KB). In a table
space, a page contains one or more rows
of a table. In a LOB or XML table space, a
LOB or XML value can span more than
one page, but no more than one LOB or
XML value is stored on a page.
page set
Another way to refer to a table space or
index space. Each page set consists of a
collection of VSAM data sets.
page set recovery pending (PSRCP)
A restrictive state of an index space. In
this case, the entire page set must be
recovered. Recovery of a logical part is
prohibited.
panel
A predefined display image that defines

the locations and characteristics of display
fields on a display surface (for example, a
menu panel).
parallel complex
A cluster of machines that work together
to handle multiple transactions and
applications.
parallel group
A set of consecutive operations that
execute in parallel and that have the same
number of parallel tasks.
parallel I/O processing
A form of I/O processing in which DB2
initiates multiple concurrent requests for a
single user query and performs I/O
processing concurrently (in parallel) on
multiple data partitions.
parallelism assistant
In Sysplex query parallelism, a DB2
subsystem that helps to process parts of a
parallel query that originates on another
DB2 subsystem in the data sharing group.
DB2 glossary
1057
parallelism coordinator
In Sysplex query parallelism, the DB2
subsystem from which the parallel query
originates.
parent table space

A table space that contains a parent table.
A table space containing a dependent of
that table is a dependent table space.
Parallel Sysplex
A set of z/OS systems that communicate
and cooperate with each other through
certain multisystem hardware components
and software services to process customer
workloads.
participant
An entity other than the commit
coordinator that takes part in the commit
process. The term participant is
synonymous with agent in SNA.
parallel task
The execution unit that is dynamically
created to process a query in parallel. A
parallel task is implemented by a z/OS
service request block.
|
|
|
|
|
|
parameter marker
A question mark (?) that appears in a
statement string of a dynamic SQL
statement. The question mark can appear
where a variable could appear if the
statement string were a static SQL
statement.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
parameter-name
An SQL identifier that designates a
parameter in a routine that is written by a
user. Parameter names are required for
SQL procedures and SQL functions, and
they are used in the body of the routine
to refer to the values of the parameters.
Parameter names are optional for external
routines.
parent key
A primary key or unique key in the
parent table of a referential constraint.
The values of a parent key determine the
valid values of the foreign key in the
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| partition-by-growth table space

|
A table space whose size can grow to
|
accommodate data growth. DB2 for z/OS
|
manages partition-by-growth table spaces
|
by automatically adding new data sets
|
when the database needs more space to
|
satisfy an insert operation. Contrast with
|
range-partitioned table space. See also
|
universal table space.
|
|
|
|
|
|
parent table
A table whose primary key is referenced
by the foreign key of a dependent table.
partitioned data set (PDS)

A data set in disk storage that is divided
into partitions, which are called members.
Each partition can contain a program,
part of a program, or data. A program
library is an example of a partitioned data
set.
partitioned index
An index that is physically partitioned.
Both partitioning indexes and secondary
indexes can be partitioned.
parent lock
For explicit hierarchical locking, a lock
that is held on a resource that might have
child locks that are lower in the hierarchy.
A parent lock is usually the table space
lock or the partition intent lock. See also
child lock.
parent row
A row whose primary key value is the
foreign key value of a dependent row.
partition
A portion of a page set. Each partition
corresponds to a single, independently
extendable data set. The maximum size of
a partition depends on the number of
partitions in the partitioned page set. All
partitions of a given page set have the
same maximum size.
partitioned page set

A partitioned table space or an index
space. Header pages, space map pages,
data pages, and index pages reference
data only within the scope of the
partition.
|
|
|
|
|
|

A table space that is based on a single
table and that is subdivided into
partitions, each of which can be processed
independently by utilities. Contrast with
segmented table space and universal table
space.
partitioning index
An index in which the leftmost columns
1058
are the partitioning columns of the table.

The index can be partitioned or
nonpartitioned.
decimal number (called the size in the C

language). In the C language, the number
of digits to the right of the decimal point
(called the scale in SQL). The DB2
information uses the SQL terms.
partner logical unit

An access point in the SNA network that
is connected to the local DB2 subsystem
by way of a VTAM conversation.
path
See SQL path.
PDS
See partitioned data set.
precompilation
A processing of application programs
containing SQL statements that takes
place before compilation. SQL statements
are replaced with statements that are
recognized by the host language compiler.
Output from this precompilation includes
source code that can be submitted to the
compiler and the database request
module (DBRM) that is input to the bind
process.
physical consistency
The state of a page that is not in a
partially changed state.
physical lock (P-lock)
A type of lock that DB2 acquires to
provide consistency of data that is cached
in different DB2 subsystems. Physical
locks are used only in data sharing
environments. Contrast with logical lock
(L-lock).
physically complete
The state in which the concurrent copy
process is completed and the output data
set has been created.
piece
A data set of a nonpartitioned page set.
plan
See application plan.
plan allocation
The process of allocating DB2 resources to
a plan in preparation for execution.
plan member
The bound copy of a DBRM that is
identified in the member clause.
plan name
The name of an application plan.
P-lock See physical lock.
point of consistency
A time when all recoverable data that an
application accesses is consistent with
other data. The term point of consistency
is synonymous with sync point or commit
point.
policy See CFRM policy.
postponed abort UR
A unit of recovery that was inflight or
in-abort, was interrupted by system
failure or cancellation, and did not
complete backout during restart.
precision
In SQL, the total number of digits in a
predicate
An element of a search condition that
expresses or implies a comparison
operation.
prefix A code at the beginning of a message or
record.
|
|
|
preformat
The process of preparing a VSAM linear
data set for DB2 use, by writing specific
data patterns.
prepare
The first phase of a two-phase commit
process in which all participants are
requested to prepare for commit.
prepared SQL statement
A named object that is the executable
form of an SQL statement that has been
processed by the PREPARE statement.
primary authorization ID
The authorization ID that is used to
identify the application process to DB2.
primary group buffer pool
For a duplexed group buffer pool, the
structure that is used to maintain the
coherency of cached data. This structure
is used for page registration and
cross-invalidation. The z/OS equivalent is
old structure. Compare with secondary
group buffer pool.
primary index
An index that enforces the uniqueness of
a primary key.
primary key
In a relational database, a unique, nonnull
key that is part of the definition of a
DB2 glossary
1059
table. A table cannot be defined as a

parent unless it has a unique key or
primary key.
principal
An entity that can communicate securely
with another entity. In Kerberos,
principals are represented as entries in the
Kerberos registry database and include
users, servers, computers, and others.
principal name
The name by which a principal is known
to the DCE security services.
privilege
The capability of performing a specific
function, sometimes on a specific object.
See also explicit privilege.
privilege set
|
|
v For the installation SYSADM ID, the set

of all possible privileges.
|
|
|
|
v For any other authorization ID,

including the PUBLIC authorization ID,
the set of all privileges that are
recorded for that ID in the DB2 catalog.
process
In DB2, the unit to which DB2 allocates
resources and locks. Sometimes called an
application process, a process involves the
execution of one or more programs. The
execution of an SQL statement is always
associated with some process. The means
of initiating and terminating a process are
dependent on the environment.
program
A single, compilable collection of
executable statements in a programming
language.
program temporary fix (PTF)
A solution or bypass of a problem that is
diagnosed as a result of a defect in a
current unaltered release of a licensed
program. An authorized program analysis
report (APAR) fix is corrective service for
an existing problem. A PTF is preventive
service for problems that might be
encountered by other users of the
product. A PTF is temporary, because a
permanent fix is usually not incorporated
into the product until its next release.
protected conversation
A VTAM conversation that supports
two-phase commit flows.
1060
PSRCP
See page set recovery pending.
PTF
See program temporary fix.
QSAM
See queued sequential access method.
query A component of certain SQL statements
that specifies a result table.
query block
The part of a query that is represented by
one of the FROM clauses. Each FROM
clause can have multiple query blocks,
depending on DB2 processing of the
query.
query CP parallelism
Parallel execution of a single query, which
is accomplished by using multiple tasks.
See also Sysplex query parallelism.
query I/O parallelism
Parallel access of data, which is
accomplished by triggering multiple I/O
requests within a single query.
queued sequential access method (QSAM)
An extended version of the basic
sequential access method (BSAM). When
this method is used, a queue of data
blocks is formed. Input data blocks await
processing, and output data blocks await
transfer to auxiliary storage or to an
output device.
quiesce point
A point at which data is consistent as a
result of running the DB2 QUIESCE
utility.
RACF Resource Access Control Facility. A
component of the z/OS Security Server.
| range-partitioned table space
|
A type of universal table space that is
|
based on partitioning ranges and that
|
contains a single table. Contrast with
|
partition-by-growth table space. See also
|
RBA
See relative byte address.
RCT
See resource control table.
| RDO
See resource definition online.
read stability (RS)

An isolation level that is similar to
repeatable read but does not completely
isolate an application process from all
other concurrently executing application
processes. See also cursor

stabilityrepeatable read, and uncommitted
read.
recovery log
A collection of records that describes the
events that occur during DB2 execution
and indicates their sequence. The
recorded information is used for recovery
in the event of a failure during DB2
execution.
rebind
The creation of a new application plan for
an application program that has been
bound previously. If, for example, you
have added an index for a table that your
application accesses, you must rebind the
application in order to take advantage of
that index.
recovery manager
A subcomponent that supplies
coordination services that control the
interaction of DB2 resource managers
during commit, abort, checkpoint, and
restart processes. The recovery manager
also supports the recovery mechanisms of
other subsystems (for example, IMS) by
acting as a participant in the other
subsystems process for protecting data
that has reached a point of consistency.
rebuild
The process of reallocating a coupling
facility structure. For the shared
communications area (SCA) and lock
structure, the structure is repopulated; for
the group buffer pool, changed pages are
usually cast out to disk, and the new
structure is populated only with changed
pages that were not successfully cast out.
A coordinator or a participant (or both),

in the execution of a two-phase commit,
that can access a recovery log that
maintains the state of the logical unit of
work and names the immediate upstream
coordinator and downstream participants.
record The storage representation of a row or

other data.
record identifier (RID)
A unique identifier that DB2 uses to
identify a row of data in a table. Compare
with row identifier.
recovery pending (RECP)

A condition that prevents SQL access to a
table space that needs to be recovered.
record identifier (RID) pool

An area of main storage that is used for
sorting record identifiers during
list-prefetch processing.
recovery token
An identifier for an element that is used
in recovery (for example, NID or URID).
RECP See recovery pending.
record length
The sum of the length of all the columns
in a table, which is the length of the data
as it is physically stored in the database.
Records can be fixed length or varying
length, depending on how the columns
are defined. If all columns are
fixed-length columns, the record is a
fixed-length record. If one or more
columns are varying-length columns, the
record is a varying-length record.
Recoverable Resource Manager Services
attachment facility (RRSAF)
A DB2 subcomponent that uses Resource
Recovery Services to coordinate resource
commitment between DB2 and all other
resource managers that also use RRS in a
z/OS system.
recovery
The process of rebuilding databases after
a system failure.
redo
A state of a unit of recovery that indicates

that changes are to be reapplied to the
disk media to ensure data integrity.
reentrant code
Executable code that can reside in storage
as one shared copy for all threads.
Reentrant code is not self-modifying and
provides separate storage areas for each
thread. See also threadsafe.
referential constraint
The requirement that nonnull values of a
designated foreign key are valid only if
they equal values of the primary key of a
designated table.
|
|
|
|
|
referential cycle
A set of referential constraints such that
each base table in the set is a descendent
of itself. The tables that are involved in a
referential cycle are ordered so that each
DB2 glossary
1061
table is a descendent of the one before it,

and the first table is a descendent of the
last table.
|
|
|
referential integrity
The state of a database in which all
values of all foreign keys are valid.
Maintaining referential integrity requires
the enforcement of referential constraints
on all operations that change the data in a
table on which the referential constraints
are defined.
referential structure
A set of tables and relationships that
includes at least one table and, for every
table in the set, all the relationships in
which that table participates and all the
tables to which it is related.
refresh age
The time duration between the current
time and the time during which a
materialized query table was last
refreshed.
registry
See registry database.
registry database
A database of security information about
principals, groups, organizations,
accounts, and security policies.
relational database
A database that can be perceived as a set
of tables and manipulated in accordance
with the relational model of data.
relational database management system
(RDBMS)
A collection of hardware and software
that organizes and provides access to a
relational database.
| relational schema
|
See SQL schema.
relationship
A defined connection between the rows of
a table or the rows of two tables. A
relationship is the internal representation
of a referential constraint.
relative byte address (RBA)
The offset of a data record or control
interval from the beginning of the storage
space that is allocated to the data set or
file to which it belongs.
1062
remigration
The process of returning to a current
release of DB2 following a fallback to a
previous release. This procedure
constitutes another migration process.
remote
Any object that is maintained by a remote
DB2 subsystem (that is, by a DB2
subsystem other than the local one). A
remote view, for example, is a view that is
maintained by a remote DB2 subsystem.
Contrast with local.
remote subsystem
Any relational DBMS, except the local
subsystem, with which the user or
application can communicate. The
subsystem need not be remote in any
physical sense, and might even operate
on the same processor under the same
z/OS system.
reoptimization
The DB2 process of reconsidering the
access path of an SQL statement at run
time; during reoptimization, DB2 uses the
values of host variables, parameter
markers, or special registers.
| reordered row format
|
A row format that facilitates improved
|
performance in retrieval of rows that have
|
varying-length columns. DB2 rearranges
|
the column order, as defined in the
|
CREATE TABLE statement, so that the
|
fixed-length columns are stored at the
|
beginning of the row and the
|
varying-length columns are stored at the
|
end of the row. Contrast with basic row
|
format.
REORG pending (REORP)
A condition that restricts SQL access and
most utility access to an object that must
be reorganized.
REORP
See REORG pending.
repeatable read (RR)
The isolation level that provides
maximum protection from other executing
application programs. When an
application program executes with
repeatable read protection, rows that the
program references cannot be changed by
other programs until the program reaches
a commit point. See also cursor stability,

read stability, and uncommitted read.
repeating group
A situation in which an entity includes
multiple attributes that are inherently the
same. The presence of a repeating group
violates the requirement of first normal
form. In an entity that satisfies the
requirement of first normal form, each
attribute is independent and unique in its
meaning and its name. See also
normalization.
replay detection mechanism
A method that allows a principal to detect
whether a request is a valid request from
a source that can be trusted or whether an
untrustworthy entity has captured
information from a previous exchange
and is replaying the information exchange
to gain access to the principal.
request commit
The vote that is submitted to the prepare
phase if the participant has modified data
and is prepared to commit or roll back.
requester
The source of a request to access data at a
remote server. In the DB2 environment,
the requester function is provided by the
distributed data facility.
resource
The object of a lock or claim, which could
be a table space, an index space, a data
partition, an index partition, or a logical
partition.
resource allocation
The part of plan allocation that deals
specifically with the database resources.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
resource control table

A construct of previous versions of the
CICS attachment facility that defines
authorization and access attributes for
transactions or transaction groups.
Beginning in CICS Transaction Server
Version 1.3, resources are defined by
using resource definition online instead of
the resource control table. See also
resource definition online.
|
|
|
|
resource definition online (RDO)

The recommended method of defining
resources to CICS by creating resource
definitions interactively, or by using a
utility, and then storing them in the CICS
definition data set. In earlier releases of

CICS, resources were defined by using the
resource control table (RCT), which is no
longer supported.
|
|
|
|
resource limit facility (RLF)

A portion of DB2 code that prevents
dynamic manipulative SQL statements
from exceeding specified time limits. The
resource limit facility is sometimes called
the governor.
resource limit specification table (RLST)
A site-defined table that specifies the
limits to be enforced by the resource limit
facility.
resource manager
v A function that is responsible for
managing a particular resource and that
guarantees the consistency of all
updates made to recoverable resources
within a logical unit of work. The
resource that is being managed can be
physical (for example, disk or main
storage) or logical (for example, a
particular type of system service).
v A participant, in the execution of a
two-phase commit, that has recoverable
resources that could have been
modified. The resource manager has
access to a recovery log so that it can
commit or roll back the effects of the
logical unit of work to the recoverable
resources.
restart pending (RESTP)
A restrictive state of a page set or
partition that indicates that restart
(backout) work needs to be performed on
the object.
RESTP
See restart pending.
result set
The set of rows that a stored procedure
returns to a client application.
result set locator
A 4-byte value that DB2 uses to uniquely
identify a query result set that a stored
procedure returns.
result table
The set of rows that are specified by a
SELECT statement.
retained lock
A MODIFY lock that a DB2 subsystem
DB2 glossary
1063
was holding at the time of a subsystem

failure. The lock is retained in the
coupling facility lock structure across a
DB2 for z/OS failure.
RID
See record identifier.
rowset
RID pool
See record identifier pool.
A set of rows for which a cursor position

is established.
right outer join

that are being joined and preserves the
unmatched rows of the second join
operand. See also join, equijoin, full outer
join, inner join, left outer join, and outer
join.
RLF
See resource limit facility.
RLST See resource limit specification table.

| role
|
|
|
|
A database entity that groups together

one or more privileges and that can be
assigned to a primary authorization ID or
to PUBLIC. The role is available only in a
trusted context.
rollback
The process of restoring data that was
changed by SQL statements to the state at
its last commit point. All locks are freed.
Contrast with commit.
root page
The index page that is at the highest level
(or the beginning point) in an index.
routine
A database object that encapsulates
procedural logic and SQL statements, is
stored on the database server, and can be
invoked from an SQL statement or by
using the CALL statement. The main
classes of routines are procedures and
functions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
row
The horizontal component of a table. A

row consists of a sequence of values, one
for each column of the table.

statement, with respect to a single row
(for example, NEXT, LAST, or ABSOLUTE
n). Contrast with rowset-positioned fetch
orientation.
|
|
|
|
|
rowset cursor
A cursor that is defined so that one or
more rows can be returned as a rowset
for a single FETCH statement, and the
cursor is positioned on the set of rows
that is fetched.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
rowset-positioned fetch orientation

statement, with respect to a rowset (for
example, NEXT ROWSET, LAST
ROWSET, or ROWSET STARTING AT
ABSOLUTE n). Contrast with
row-positioned fetch orientation.
row trigger
A trigger that is defined with the trigger
granularity FOR EACH ROW.
RRSAF
See Recoverable Resource Manager
Services attachment facility.
RS
savepoint
A named entity that represents the state
of data and schemas at a particular point
in time within a unit of work.
SBCS See single-byte character set.
SCA
scale
row lock
A lock on a single row of data.
schema
1064
See shared communications area.
scalar function
An SQL operation that produces a single
value from another value and is
expressed as a function name, followed
by a list of arguments that are enclosed in
parentheses.
row identifier (ROWID)

A value that uniquely identifies a row.
This value is stored with the row and
never changes.
row-positioned fetch orientation

See read stability.
In SQL, the number of digits to the right

of the decimal point (called the precision
in the C language). The DB2 information
uses the SQL definition.
The organization or structure of a
database.
A collection of, and a way of qualifying,

database objects such as tables, views,
routines, indexes or triggers that define a
database. A database schema provides a
logical classification of database objects.
scrollability
The ability to use a cursor to fetch in
either a forward or backward direction.
The FETCH statement supports multiple
fetch orientations to indicate the new
position of the cursor. See also fetch
orientation.
statements such as COMMIT,

ROLLBACK, and some SET statements do
not use a section.
|
|
|
|
security label
A classification of users access to objects
or data rows in a multilevel security
environment.
segment
A group of pages that holds rows of a
single table. See also segmented table
space.
search condition
A criterion for selecting rows from a table.
A search condition consists of one or
more predicates.
segmented table space

A table space that is divided into
equal-sized groups of pages called
segments. Segments are assigned to tables
so that rows of different tables are never
stored in the same segment. Contrast with
partitioned table space and universal table
space.
secondary authorization ID
An authorization ID that has been
associated with a primary authorization
ID by an authorization exit routine.
self-referencing constraint
A referential constraint that defines a
relationship in which a table is a
dependent of itself.
secondary group buffer pool

For a duplexed group buffer pool, the
structure that is used to back up changed
pages that are written to the primary
group buffer pool. No page registration or
cross-invalidation occurs using the
secondary group buffer pool. The z/OS
equivalent is new structure.
self-referencing table
A table with a self-referencing constraint.
scrollable cursor
A cursor that can be moved in both a
forward and a backward direction.
secondary index
A nonpartitioning index that is useful for
enforcing a uniqueness constraint, for
clustering data, or for providing access
paths to data for queries. A secondary
index can be partitioned or
nonpartitioned. See also data-partitioned
secondary index (DPSI) and
nonpartitioned secondary index (NPSI).
section
The segment of a plan or package that
contains the executable structures for a
single SQL statement. For most SQL
statements, one section in the plan exists
for each SQL statement in the source
program. However, for cursor-related
statements, the DECLARE, OPEN,
FETCH, and CLOSE statements reference
the same section because they each refer
to the SELECT statement that is named in
the DECLARE CURSOR statement. SQL
sensitive cursor
A cursor that is sensitive to changes that
are made to the database after the result
table has been materialized.
sequence
A user-defined object that generates a
sequence of numeric values according to
user specifications.
sequential data set
A non-DB2 data set whose records are
organized on the basis of their successive
physical positions, such as on magnetic
tape. Several of the DB2 database utilities
require sequential data sets.
sequential prefetch
A mechanism that triggers consecutive
asynchronous I/O operations. Pages are
fetched before they are required, and
several pages are read with a single I/O
operation.
serialized profile
A Java object that contains SQL
statements and descriptions of host
variables. The SQLJ translator produces a
serialized profile for each connection
context.
DB2 glossary
1065
server The target of a request from a remote

requester. In the DB2 environment, the
server function is provided by the
distributed data facility, which is used to
access DB2 data from remote applications.
process by an attachment facility to

enable DB2 to verify that it is authorized
to use DB2 resources.
simple page set
A nonpartitioned page set. A simple page
set initially consists of a single data set
(page set piece). If and when that data set
is extended to 2 GB, another data set is
created, and so on, up to a total of 32
data sets. DB2 considers the data sets to
be a single contiguous linear address
space containing a maximum of 64 GB.
Data is stored in the next available
location within this address space without
regard to any partitioning scheme.
service class
An eight-character identifier that is used
by the z/OS Workload Manager to
associate user performance goals with a
particular DDF thread or stored
procedure. A service class is also used to
classify work on parallelism assistants.
|
|
service request block

A unit of work that is scheduled to
execute.
simple table space

A table space that is neither partitioned
nor segmented. Creation of simple table
spaces is not supported in DB2 Version
9.1 for z/OS. Contrast with partitioned
table space, segmented table space, and
session
A link between two nodes in a VTAM
network.
session protocols
The available set of SNA communication
requests and responses.
| set operator
|
The SQL operators UNION, EXCEPT, and
|
INTERSECT corresponding to the
|
relational operators union, difference, and
|
intersection. A set operator derives a
|
result table by combining two other result
|
tables.
single-byte character set (SBCS)

A set of characters in which each
character is represented by a single byte.
Contrast with double-byte character set or
multibyte character set.
single-precision floating point number
A 32-bit approximate representation of a
real number.
shared communications area (SCA)

A coupling facility list structure that a
DB2 data sharing group uses for
inter-DB2 communication.
SMP/E
See System Modification
Program/Extended.
share lock
A lock that prevents concurrently
executing application processes from
changing data, but not from reading data.
Contrast with exclusive lock.
SNA
SNA network
The part of a network that conforms to
the formats and protocols of Systems
Network Architecture (SNA).
shift-in character
A special control character (X0F) that is
used in EBCDIC systems to denote that
the subsequent bytes represent SBCS
characters. See also shift-out character.
shift-out character
A special control character (X0E) that is
used in EBCDIC systems to denote that
the subsequent bytes, up to the next
shift-in control character, represent DBCS
characters. See also shift-in character.
sign-on
A request that is made on behalf of an
individual CICS or IMS application
1066
See Systems Network Architecture.
socket A callable TCP/IP programming interface

that TCP/IP network applications use to
communicate with remote TCP/IP
partners.
|
|
|
|
|
|
sourced function
A function that is implemented by
another built-in or user-defined function
that is already known to the database
manager. This function can be a scalar
function or an aggregate function; it
returns a single value from a set of values
(for example, MAX or AVG). Contrast

with built-in function, external function,
and SQL function.
|
|
|
SQLDA
See SQL descriptor area.
SQL descriptor area (SQLDA)
A structure that describes input variables,
output variables, or the columns of a
result table.
source program
A set of host language statements and
SQL statements that is processed by an
SQL precompiler.
SQL escape character

The symbol that is used to enclose an
SQL delimited identifier. This symbol is
the double quotation mark (). See also
escape character.
source table
A table that can be a base table, a view, a
table expression, or a user-defined table
function.
source type
An existing type that DB2 uses to
represent a distinct type.
space
|
|
|
|
|
|
A sequence of one or more blank

characters.
special register
A storage area that DB2 defines for an
application process to use for storing
information that can be referenced in SQL
statements. Examples of special registers
are SESSION_USER and CURRENT
DATE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
SQL ID
See SQL authorization ID.
SQLJ
specific function name

A particular user-defined function that is
known to the database manager by its
specific name. Many specific user-defined
functions can have the same function
name. When a user-defined function is
defined to the database, every function is
assigned a specific name that is unique
within its schema. Either the user can
provide this name, or a default name is
used.
See Structured Query Language.
SQL authorization ID (SQL ID)

The authorization ID that is used for
checking dynamic SQL statements in
some situations.
SQLCA
See SQL communication area.
SQL communication area (SQLCA)
A structure that is used to provide an
application program with information
about the execution of its SQL statements.
SQL connection
An association between an application
process and a local or remote application
server or database server.
Structured Query Language (SQL) that is

embedded in the Java programming
language.
SQL path
An ordered list of schema names that are
used in the resolution of unqualified
references to user-defined functions,
distinct types, and stored procedures. In
dynamic SQL, the SQL path is found in
the CURRENT PATH special register. In
static SQL, it is defined in the PATH bind
option.
SPUFI See SQL Processor Using File Input.

SQL
SQL function
A user-defined function in which the
CREATE FUNCTION statement contains
the source code. The source code is a
single SQL expression that evaluates to a
single value. The SQL user-defined
function can return the result of an
expression. See also built-in function,
external function, and sourced function.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
SQL procedure
A user-written program that can be
invoked with the SQL CALL statement.
An SQL procedure is written in the SQL
procedural language. Two types of SQL
procedures are supported: external SQL
procedures and native SQL procedures.
See also external procedure and native
SQL procedure.
SQL processing conversation
Any conversation that requires access of
DB2 data, either through an application or
by dynamic query requests.
SQL Processor Using File Input (SPUFI)
A facility of the TSO attachment
subcomponent that enables the DB2I user
DB2 glossary
1067
to execute SQL statements without

embedding them in an application
program.
information. Each statement handle is

associated with the connection handle.
statement string
For a dynamic SQL statement, the
character string form of the statement.
SQL return code

Either SQLCODE or SQLSTATE.
SQL routine
A user-defined function or stored
procedure that is based on code that is
written in SQL.
statement trigger
A trigger that is defined with the trigger
granularity FOR EACH STATEMENT.
static cursor
A named control structure that does not
change the size of the result table or the
order of its rows after an application
opens the cursor. Contrast with dynamic
cursor.
| SQL schema
|
A collection of database objects such as
|
tables, views, indexes, functions, distinct
|
types, schemas, or triggers that defines a
|
database. An SQL schema provides a
|
logical classification of database objects.
SQL statement coprocessor
An alternative to the DB2 precompiler
that lets the user process SQL statements
at compile time. The user invokes an SQL
statement coprocessor by specifying a
compiler option.
SQL string delimiter
A symbol that is used to enclose an SQL
string constant. The SQL string delimiter
is the apostrophe (), except in COBOL
applications, where the user assigns the
symbol, which is either an apostrophe or
a double quotation mark ().
SRB
See service request block.
stand-alone
An attribute of a program that means that
it is capable of executing separately from
DB2, without using DB2 services.
star join
A method of joining a dimension column
of a fact table to the key column of the
corresponding dimension table. See also
join, dimension, and star schema.
star schema
The combination of a fact table (which
contains most of the data) and a number
of dimension tables. See also star join,
dimension, and dimension table.
statement handle
In DB2 ODBC, the data object that
contains information about an SQL
statement that is managed by DB2 ODBC.
This includes information such as
dynamic arguments, bindings for
dynamic arguments and columns, cursor
information, result values, and status
1068
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static SQL
SQL statements, embedded within a
program, that are prepared during the
program preparation process (before the
program is executed). After being
prepared, the SQL statement does not
change (although values of variables that
are specified by the statement might
change).
|
|
|
|
|
storage group
A set of storage objects on which DB2 for
z/OS data can be stored. A storage object
can have an SMS data class, a
management class, a storage class, and a
list of volume serial numbers.
stored procedure
A user-written application program that
can be invoked through the use of the
SQL CALL statement. Stored procedures
are sometimes called procedures.
string See binary string, character string, or
graphic string.
strong typing
A process that guarantees that only
user-defined functions and operations that
are defined on a distinct type can be
applied to that type. For example, you
cannot directly compare two currency
types, such as Canadian dollars and U.S.
dollars. But you can provide a
user-defined function to convert one
currency to the other and then do the
comparison.
structure
v A name that refers collectively to

different types of DB2 objects, such as
tables, databases, views, indexes, and
table spaces.
v A construct that uses z/OS to map and
manage storage on a coupling facility.
See also cache structure, list structure,
or lock structure.
two 16-bit code units, in which the first

value of the pair is a high-surrogate code
unit in the range U+D800 through
U+DBFF, and the second value is a
low-surrogate code unit in the range
U+DC00 through U+DFFF. Surrogate
pairs provide an extension mechanism for
encoding 917 476 characters without
requiring the use of 32-bit characters.
Structured Query Language (SQL)

A standardized language for defining and
manipulating data in a relational
database.
SVC dump
A dump that is issued when a z/OS or a
DB2 functional recovery routine detects
an error.
structure owner
In relation to group buffer pools, the DB2
member that is responsible for the
following activities:
sync point
See commit point.
syncpoint tree
The tree of recovery managers and
resource managers that are involved in a
logical unit of work, starting with the
recovery manager, that make the final
commit decision.
v Coordinating rebuild, checkpoint, and

damage assessment processing
v Monitoring the group buffer pool
threshold and notifying castout owners
when the threshold has been reached
subcomponent
A group of closely related DB2 modules
that work together to provide a general
function.
subject table
The table for which a trigger is created.
When the defined triggering event occurs
on this table, the trigger is activated.
subquery
A SELECT statement within the WHERE
or HAVING clause of another SQL
statement; a nested SQL statement.
|
|
|
|
|
subselect
That form of a query that includes only a
SELECT clause, FROM clause, and
optionally a WHERE clause, GROUP BY
clause, HAVING clause, ORDER BY
clause, or FETCH FIRST clause.
substitution character
A unique character that is substituted
during character conversion for any
characters in the source program that do
not have a match in the target coding
representation.
subsystem
A distinct instance of a relational database
management system (RDBMS).
surrogate pair
A coded representation for a single
character that consists of a sequence of
|
|
|
|
|
|
synonym
In SQL, an alternative name for a table or
view. Synonyms can be used to refer only
to objects at the subsystem in which the
synonym is defined. A synonym cannot
be qualified and can therefore not be used
by other users. Contrast with alias.
Sysplex
See Parallel Sysplex.
Sysplex query parallelism
Parallel execution of a single query that is
accomplished by using multiple tasks on
more than one DB2 subsystem. See also
query CP parallelism.
system administrator
The person at a computer installation
who designs, controls, and manages the
use of the computer system.
system agent
A work request that DB2 creates such as
prefetch processing, deferred writes, and
service tasks. See also allied agent.
| system authorization ID
|
The primary DB2 authorization ID that is
|
used to establish a trusted connection. A
|
system authorization ID is derived from
|
the system user ID that is provided by an
|
external entity, such as a middleware
|
server.
DB2 glossary
1069
v The set contains a base table and

associated auxiliary tables.
system conversation
The conversation that two DB2
subsystems must establish to process
system messages before any distributed
processing can begin.
System Modification Program/Extended (SMP/E)
A z/OS tool for making software changes
in programming systems (such as DB2)
and for controlling those changes.
Systems Network Architecture (SNA)
The description of the logical structure,
formats, protocols, and operational
sequences for transmitting information
through and controlling the configuration
and operation of networks.
table
A named data object consisting of a

specific number of columns and some
number of unordered rows. See also base
table or temporary table. Contrast with
auxiliary table, clone table, materialized
query table, result table, and transition
table.
table-controlled partitioning
A type of partitioning in which partition
boundaries for a partitioned table are
controlled by values that are defined in
the CREATE TABLE statement.
table function
A function that receives a set of
arguments and returns a table to the SQL
statement that references the function. A
table function can be referenced only in
the FROM clause of a subselect.
|
|
|
|
|
table locator
A mechanism that allows access to trigger
tables in SQL or from within user-defined
functions. A table locator is a fullword
integer value that represents a transition
table.
table space
A page set that is used to store the
records in one or more tables. See also
partitioned table space, segmented table
space, and universal table space.
table space set
A set of table spaces and partitions that
should be recovered together for one of
the following reasons:
v Each of them contains a table that is a
parent or descendent of a table in one
of the others.
1070
A table space set can contain both types

of relationships.
task control block (TCB)
A z/OS control block that is used to
communicate information about tasks
within an address space that is connected
to a subsystem. See also address space
connection.
TB
Terabyte. A value of 1 099 511 627 776

bytes.
TCB
See task control block.
TCP/IP
A network communication protocol that
computer systems use to exchange
information across telecommunication
links.
TCP/IP port
A 2-byte value that identifies an end user
or a TCP/IP network application within a
TCP/IP host.
template
A DB2 utilities output data set descriptor
that is used for dynamic allocation. A
template is defined by the TEMPLATE
temporary table
A table that holds temporary data.
Temporary tables are useful for holding
or sorting intermediate results from
queries that contain a large number of
rows. The two types of temporary table,
which are created by different SQL
statements, are the created temporary
table and the declared temporary table.
Contrast with result table. See also created
temporary table and declared temporary
table.
thread See DB2 thread.
threadsafe
A characteristic of code that allows
multithreading both by providing private
storage areas for each thread, and by
properly serializing shared (global)
storage areas.
three-part name
The full name of a table, view, or alias. It
consists of a location name, a schema

name, and an object name, separated by a
period.
time
new state. Contrast with auxiliary table,

base table, clone table, and materialized
query table.
A three-part value that designates a time

of day in hours, minutes, and seconds.
transition variable
A variable that contains a column value
of the affected row of the subject table in
its state before or after the triggering
event occurs. Triggered SQL statements in
the trigger definition can reference the set
of old values or the set of new values.
timeout
Abnormal termination of either the DB2
subsystem or of an application because of
the unavailability of resources. Installation
specifications are set to determine both
the amount of time DB2 is to wait for
IRLM services after starting, and the
amount of time IRLM is to wait if a
resource that an application requests is
unavailable. If either of these time
specifications is exceeded, a timeout is
declared.
Time-Sharing Option (TSO)
An option in z/OS that provides
interactive time sharing from remote
terminals.
timestamp
A seven-part value that consists of a date
and time. The timestamp is expressed in
years, months, days, hours, minutes,
seconds, and microseconds.
trace
A DB2 facility that provides the ability to

monitor and collect DB2 monitoring,
auditing, performance, accounting,
statistics, and serviceability (global) data.
| transaction
|
An atomic series of SQL statements that
|
make up a logical unit of work. All of the
|
data modifications made during a
|
transaction are either committed together
|
as a unit or rolled back as a unit.
transaction lock
A lock that is used to control concurrent
execution of SQL statements.
transaction program name
In SNA LU 6.2 conversations, the name of
the program at the remote logical unit
that is to be the other half of the
conversation.
transition table
A temporary table that contains all the
affected rows of the subject table in their
state before or after the triggering event
occurs. Triggered SQL statements in the
trigger definition can reference the table
of changed rows in the old state or the
tree structure
A data structure that represents entities in
nodes, with a most one parent node for
each node, and with only one root node.
trigger
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A database object that is associated with a

single base table or view and that defines
a rule. The rule consists of a set of SQL
statements that run when an insert,
update, or delete database operation
occurs on the associated base table or
view.
trigger activation
The process that occurs when the trigger
event that is defined in a trigger
definition is executed. Trigger activation
consists of the evaluation of the triggered
action condition and conditional
execution of the triggered SQL statements.
trigger activation time
An indication in the trigger definition of
whether the trigger should be activated
before or after the triggered event.
trigger body
The set of SQL statements that is executed
when a trigger is activated and its
triggered action condition evaluates to
true. A trigger body is also called
triggered SQL statements.
trigger cascading
The process that occurs when the
triggered action of a trigger causes the
activation of another trigger.
triggered action
The SQL logic that is performed when a
trigger is activated. The triggered action
consists of an optional triggered action
condition and a set of triggered SQL
statements that are executed only if the
condition evaluates to true.
DB2 glossary
1071
triggered action condition

An optional part of the triggered action.
This Boolean condition appears as a
WHEN clause and specifies a condition
that DB2 evaluates to determine if the
triggered SQL statements should be
executed.
triggered SQL statements
The set of SQL statements that is executed
when a trigger is activated and its
triggered action condition evaluates to
true. Triggered SQL statements are also
called the trigger body.
trigger granularity
In SQL, a characteristic of a trigger, which
determines whether the trigger is
activated:
v Only once for the triggering SQL
statement
v Once for each row that the SQL
statement modifies
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
triggering event
The specified operation in a trigger
definition that causes the activation of
that trigger. The triggering event is
comprised of a triggering operation
(insert, update, or delete) and a subject
table or view on which the operation is
performed.
triggering SQL operation

|
The SQL operation that causes a trigger to
|
be activated when performed on the
|
subject table or view.
trigger package
A package that is created when a
CREATE TRIGGER statement is executed.
The package is executed when the trigger
is activated.
| trust attribute
|
An attribute on which to establish trust. A
|
trusted relationship is established based
|
on one or more trust attributes.
| trusted connection
|
A database connection whose attributes
|
match the attributes of a unique trusted
|
context defined at the DB2 database
|
server.
| trusted connection reuse
|
The ability to switch the current user ID
|
on a trusted connection to a different user
|
ID.
1072
| trusted context
|
A database security object that enables the
|
establishment of a trusted relationship
|
between a DB2 database management
|
system and an external entity.
| trusted context default role
|
A role associated with a trusted context.
|
The privileges granted to the trusted
|
context default role can be acquired only
|
when a trusted connection based on the
|
trusted context is established or reused.
| trusted context user
|
A user ID to which switching the current
|
user ID on a trusted connection is
|
permitted.
| trusted context user-specific role
|
A role that is associated with a specific
|
trusted context user. It overrides the
|
trusted context default role if the current
|
user ID on the trusted connection matches
|
the ID of the specific trusted context user.
| trusted relationship
|
A privileged relationship between two
|
entities such as a middleware server and
|
a database server. This relationship allows
|
for a unique set of interactions between
|
the two entities that would be impossible
|
otherwise.
TSO
See Time-Sharing Option.
TSO attachment facility

A DB2 facility consisting of the DSN
command processor and DB2I.
Applications that are not written for the
CICS or IMS environments can run under
the TSO attachment facility.
typed parameter marker
A parameter marker that is specified
along with its target data type. It has the
general form:
CAST(? AS data-type)
type 2 indexes
Indexes that are created on a release of
DB2 after Version 7 or that are specified
as type 2 indexes in Version 4 or later.
UCS-2 Universal Character Set, coded in 2 octets,
which means that characters are
represented in 16-bits per character.
UDF
See user-defined function.
UDT
User-defined data type. In DB2 for z/OS,
the term distinct type is used instead of

user-defined data type. See distinct type.
uncommitted read (UR)
The isolation level that allows an
application to read uncommitted data. See
also cursor stability, read stability, and
repeatable read.
| universal table space

|
A table space that is both segmented and
|
partitioned. Contrast with partitioned
|
table space, segmented table space,
|
partition-by-growth table space, and
|
range-partitioned table space.
unlock
The act of releasing an object or system
resource that was previously locked and
returning it to general availability within
DB2.
underlying view
The view on which another view is
directly or indirectly defined.
undo
A state of a unit of recovery that indicates

that the changes that the unit of recovery
made to recoverable DB2 resources must
be backed out.
untyped parameter marker

A parameter marker that is specified
without its target data type. It has the
form of a single question mark (?).
Unicode
A standard that parallels the ISO-10646
standard. Several implementations of the
Unicode standard exist, all of which have
the ability to represent a large percentage
of the characters that are contained in the
many scripts that are used throughout the
world.
updatability
The ability of a cursor to perform
positioned updates and deletes. The
updatability of a cursor can be influenced
by the SELECT statement and the cursor
sensitivity option that is specified on the
DECLARE CURSOR statement.
| union An SQL operation that involves the

|
UNION set operator, which combines the
|
results of two SELECT statements. Unions
|
are often used to merge lists of values
|
that are obtained from two tables.
update hole
The location on which a cursor is
positioned when a row in a result table is
fetched again and the new values no
longer satisfy the search condition. See
also delete hole.
unique constraint
An SQL rule that no two values in a
primary key, or in the key of a unique
index, can be the same.
unique index
An index that ensures that no identical
key values are stored in a column or a set
of columns in a table.
unit of recovery (UOR)
A recoverable sequence of operations
within a single resource manager, such as
an instance of DB2. Contrast with unit of
work.
unit of work (UOW)
A recoverable sequence of operations
within an application process. At any
time, an application process is a single
unit of work, but the life of an application
process can involve many units of work
as a result of commit or rollback
operations. In a multisite update
operation, a single unit of work can
include several units of recovery. Contrast
with unit of recovery.
update trigger
triggering SQL operation update.
UR
See uncommitted read.
user-defined data type (UDT)

See distinct type.
user-defined function (UDF)
A function that is defined to DB2 by
using the CREATE FUNCTION statement
and that can be referenced thereafter in
SQL statements. A user-defined function
can be an external function, a sourced
function, or an SQL function. Contrast
with built-in function.
user view
In logical data modeling, a model or
representation of critical information that
the business requires.
UTF-8 Unicode Transformation Format, 8-bit
encoding form, which is designed for ease
of use with existing ASCII-based systems.
The CCSID value for data in UTF-8
DB2 glossary
1073
format is 1208. DB2 for z/OS supports

UTF-8 in mixed data fields.
UTF-16
Unicode Transformation Format, 16-bit
encoding form, which is designed to
provide code values for over a million
characters and a superset of UCS-2. The
CCSID value for data in UTF-16 format is
1200. DB2 for z/OS supports UTF-16 in
graphic data fields.
value
The smallest unit of data that is

manipulated in SQL.
variable
A data element that specifies a value that
can be changed. A COBOL elementary
data item is an example of a host
variable. Contrast with constant.
variant function
See nondeterministic function.
|
|
|
varying-length string
A character, graphic, or binary string
whose length varies within set limits.
Contrast with fixed-length string.
version
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1074
v A version of a record is a copy of the

record at a point in time.
| view
|
|
|
|
|
|
A logical table that consists of data that is

generated by a query. A view can be
based on one or more underlying base
tables or views, and the data in a view is
determined by a SELECT statement that is
run on the underlying base tables or
views.
|
|
|
Virtual Storage Access Method (VSAM)

An access method for direct or sequential
processing of fixed- and varying-length
records on disk devices.
Virtual Telecommunications Access Method
(VTAM)
An IBM licensed program that controls
communication and the flow of data in an
SNA network (in z/OS).
volatile table
A table for which SQL operations choose
index access whenever possible.
VSAM
See Virtual Storage Access Method.
VTAM
A member of a set of similar programs,

DBRMs, packages, or LOBs.
v A version of a program is the source
code that is produced by precompiling
the program. The program version is
identified by the program name and a
timestamp (consistency token).
v A version of an SQL procedural
language routine is produced by
issuing the CREATE or ALTER
PROCEDURE statement for a native
SQL procedure.
v A version of a DBRM is the DBRM
that is produced by precompiling a
program. The DBRM version is
identified by the same program name
and timestamp as a corresponding
program version.
v A version of an application package is
the result of binding a DBRM within a
particular database system. The
application package version is
identified by the same program name
and consistency token as the DBRM.
v A version of a LOB is a copy of a LOB
value at a point in time. The version
number for a LOB is stored in the
auxiliary index entry for the LOB.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See Virtual Telecommunications Access

Method.
warm start
The normal DB2 restart process, which
involves reading and processing log
records so that data that is under the
control of DB2 is consistent. Contrast with
cold start.
WLM application environment
A z/OS Workload Manager attribute that
is associated with one or more stored
procedures. The WLM application
environment determines the address
space in which a given DB2 stored
procedure runs.
| WLM enclave
|
A construct that can span multiple
|
dispatchable units (service request blocks
|
and tasks) in multiple address spaces,
|
allowing them to be reported on and
|
managed by WLM as part of a single
|
work request.
write to operator (WTO)
An optional user-coded service that
allows a message to be written to the
system console operator informing the
operator of errors and unusual system

conditions that might need to be corrected
(in z/OS).
WTO
See write to operator.
WTOR
Write to operator (WTO) with reply.
XCF
See cross-system coupling facility.
XES
See cross-system extended services.
XML
See Extensible Markup Language.
XML attribute
A name-value pair within a tagged XML
element that modifies certain features of
the element.
| XML column
|
A column of a table that stores XML
|
values and is defined using the data type
|
XML. The XML values that are stored in
|
XML columns are internal representations
|
of well-formed XML documents.
| XML data type
|
A data type for XML values.
XML element
A logical structure in an XML document
that is delimited by a start and an end
tag. Anything between the start tag and
the end tag is the content of the element.
| XML index
|
An index on an XML column that
|
provides efficient access to nodes within
|
an XML document by providing index
|
keys that are based on XML patterns.
| XML lock
|
A column-level lock for XML data. The
|
operation of XML locks is similar to the
|
operation of LOB locks.
XML node
The smallest unit of valid, complete
structure in a document. For example, a
node can represent an element, an
attribute, or a text string.
| XML node ID index
|
An implicitly created index, on an XML
|
table that provides efficient access to XML
|
documents and navigation among
|
multiple XML data rows in the same
|
document.
| XML pattern
|
A slash-separated list of element names,
|
an optional attribute name (at the end), or
kind tests, that describe a path within an

XML document in an XML column. The
pattern is a restrictive form of path
expressions, and it selects nodes that
match the specifications. XML patterns are
specified to create indexes on XML
columns in a database.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XML publishing function

A function that returns an XML value
from SQL values. An XML publishing
function is also known as an XML
constructor.
| XML schema
|
In XML, a mechanism for describing and
|
constraining the content of XML files by
|
indicating which elements are allowed
|
and in which combinations. XML schemas
|
are an alternative to document type
|
definitions (DTDs) and can be used to
|
extend functionality in the areas of data
|
typing, inheritance, and presentation.
| XML schema repository (XSR)
|
A repository that allows the DB2 database
|
system to store XML schemas. When
|
registered with the XSR, these objects
|
have a unique identifier and can be used
|
to validate XML instance documents.
| XML serialization function
|
A function that returns a serialized XML
|
string from an XML value.
| XML table
|
An auxiliary table that is implicitly
|
created when an XML column is added to
|
a base table. This table stores the XML
|
data, and the column in the base table
|
points to it.
| XML table space
A table space that is implicitly created
when an XML column is added to a base
table. The table space stores the XML
table. If the base table is partitioned, one
partitioned table space exists for each
XML column of data.
X/Open
An independent, worldwide open systems
organization that is supported by most of
the worlds largest information systems
suppliers, user organizations, and
software companies. X/Opens goal is to
increase the portability of applications by
combining existing and emerging
standards.
DB2 glossary
1075
XRF
See Extended Recovery Facility.
| XSR
See XML schema repository.
| zIIP
See IBM System z9 Integrated Processor.
z/OS
An operating system for the System z

product line that supports 64-bit real and
virtual storage.
z/OS Distributed Computing Environment (z/OS

DCE) A set of technologies that are provided by
the Open Software Foundation to
implement distributed computing.
1076
Index
Numerics
32K
option of DSN1COMP utility 773
option of DSN1COPY utility 783
option of DSN1PRNT utility 825
A
abend, forcing 177
ABEND, option of DIAGNOSE utility 175
abnormal-termination, option of TEMPLATE statement 643
Access Method Services, new active log definition 743
access path, catalog table columns used to select 620
accessibility
keyboard xvi
shortcut keys xvi
ACCESSPATH
option of MODIFY STATISTICS utility 328
option of REORG TABLESPACE utility 458
ACHKP 64
ACTION, option of DSN1SDMP utility 835
ACTION2
option of DSN1SDMP utility 835
active log
adding 743
data set with I/O error, deleting 746
defining in BSDS 743
deleting from BSDS 743
enlarging 743
recording from BSDS 743
active status, of a utility 33
AFTER, option of DSN1SDMP utility 835
AFTER2, option of DSN1SDMP utility 835
ALIAS, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
ALL
option of LISTDEF utility 187
option of REBUILD INDEX utility 355
option of RUNSTATS utility 604
ALLDUMPS, option of DIAGNOSE utility 175
ANCHOR, option of DSN1CHKR utility 765
archive log
adding to BSDS 745
deleting from BSDS 745
ARCHLOG, option of REPORT utility 565
ASCII
option of LOAD utility 210
option of UNLOAD utility 666
authorization ID
naming convention xvii
primary 3
secondary 3
SQL 3
AUXERROR INVALIDATE, option of CHECK DATA
utility 79
AUXERROR REPORT, option of CHECK DATA utility 79
AUXERROR, option of CHECK DATA utility 64
auxiliary CHECK-pending (ACHKP) status
description 925
resetting
for a LOB table space 925
auxiliary CHECK-pending (ACHKP) status (continued)

resetting (continued)
for a table space 925
set by CHECK DATA utility 64
auxiliary CHECK-pending (ACHKP) status, CHECK DATA
utility 64, 80
auxiliary index, reorganizing after loading data 292
auxiliary warning (AUXW) status
description 926
resetting 926
set by CHECK DATA utility 64, 79
AUXW 64
AVGKEYLEN column
SYSINDEXES catalog table 623
SYSINDEXES_HIST catalog table 623
SYSINDEXPART catalog table 623
SYSINDEXPART_HIST catalog table 623
AVGROWLEN column
SYSTABLEPART catalog table 623
SYSTABLEPART_HIST catalog table 623
SYSTABLES catalog table 623
SYSTABLES_HIST catalog table 623
SYSTABLESPACE catalog table 623
AVGSIZE column of SYSLOBSTATS catalog table 623
B
BACKOUT, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
BACKUP SYSTEM utility
authorization 43
compatibility 47
data sets needed 47
description 43
dumping 47
examples 48
data-only backup 48
dump to tape 49
force 49
full backup 48
execution phases 43
history, printing 751
option descriptions 45
output 43
restarting 48
running 46
syntax diagram 44
terminating 48
BASE, option of LISTDEF utility 187
basic predicate 458, 679
before running
COPY 124
BETWEEN predicate 458, 679
BIGINT
BINARY
BIT
option of LOAD utility for CHAR 229
1077
BLOB
BLOBF
BOTH, option of RUNSTATS utility 596, 604
BSDS
active log data set status 760
communication records, printing 751
converting 725
data set references, adding and deleting 747
GENERIC LUNAME parameter, updating 733
LOCATION value, updating 733
LUNAME value, updating 733
PASSWORD value, updating 733
updating 729
VSAM catalog name, changing 733
BUFNO, option of TEMPLATE statement 643
C
CANCEL, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
CARDF column
SYSCOLDIST catalog table 620
SYSTABLES catalog table 620
SYSTABSTATS catalog table 620
catalog
updating 55
catalog and directory
reorganizing 502
REPORT utility 570
catalog indexes, rebuilding 373
catalog name
changing 58
catalog table spaces, corresponding directory table spaces
catalog tables 396
columns used for tuning 623
columns used to select access path 620
integrity, verifying 763
loading data into 248
outdated information, removing 317
RUNSTATS utility 613
statistics history, clearing outdated information 327
statistics, deleting 331
SYSCOLDIST
CARDF column 620
COLGROUPCOLNO column 620
COLVALUE column 620
FREQUENCYF column 620
HIGHVALUE column 620
LOWVALUE column 620
NUMCOLUMNS column 620
SYSCOLUMNS
COLCARDF column 620
HIGH2KEY column 620
LOW2KEY column 620
SYSCOPY
deleting rows 322
SYSCOPY, removing outdated information 317
SYSINDEXES
AVGKEYLEN column 623
CLUSTERING column 620
CLUSTERRATIOF column 620
data collected by STOSPACE utility 637
DATAREPEATFACTORF column 620
1078
502
catalog tables (continued)

SYSINDEXES (continued)
FIRSTKEYCARDF column 620
FULLKEYCARDF column 620
NLEAF column 620
NLEVELS column 620
updating space information 637
SYSINDEXES_HIST
SYSINDEXPART
CARDF column 623
DSNUM column 623
example of query 439
EXTENTS column 623
FAROFFPOSF column 623
LEAFDIST column 623
LEAFFAR column 623
LEAFNEAR column 623
NEAROFFPOSF column 623
PQTY column 623
PSEUDO_DEL_ENTRIES column 623
SECQTYI column 623
SPACE column 623
SPACEF column 623
SQTY column 623
SYSINDEXPART_HIST
SYSLGRNX
deleting rows 322
outdated information, removing 317
SYSLOBSTATS
AVGSIZE column 623
FREESPACE column 623
ORGRATIO column 623
SYSSTOGROUP, data collected by STOSPACE utility
SYSTABLEPART
AVGROWLEN column 623
CARDF column 623
DSNUM column 623
example of query 498
EXTENTS column 623
FARINDREF column 623
NEARINDREF column 623
PAGESAVE column 623
PERCACTIVE column 623
PERCDROP column 623
PQTY column 623
SECQTYI column 623
SPACE column 623
SPACEF column 623
SQTY column 623
SYSTABLEPART_HIST
SYSTABLES
CARDF column 620
NPAGES column 620
NPAGESF column 620
PCTROWCOMP column 620
SYSTABLES_HIST
SYSTABLESPACE
637
catalog tables (continued)

SYSTABLESPACE (continued)
NACTIVE column 620
NACTIVEF column 620
updating space information 637
SYSTABSTATS
CARDF column 620
NPAGES column 620
updating 57
CATALOG, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
CATALOG, option of UNLOAD utility 666
catalog, repairing 557
CATENFM utility
authorization 51
compatibility 53
data sets needed 53
description 51
execution phases 51
instructions 52
syntax diagram 51
terminating 54
CATMAINT utility
authorization 55
compatibility 57
data sets needed 56
description 55
restarting 59
running 52, 56
syntax diagram 55
terminating 59
CCSID
CCSID information, deleting from BSDS 733
CCSIDS, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
CD-ROM, books on 1021
change log inventory utility 729
CHANGELIMIT, option of COPY utility 117, 138
CHAR
CHARDEL
CHECK DATA utility
authorization 61
claims and drains 74
compatibility 74
correct constraint violations 78
data sets
shadow 72
data sets needed 70
description 61
examples 81
AUXERROR 82
checking multiple table spaces 83
CLONE 83
creating exception tables 81
deleting invalid data 81
exception tables 81
EXCEPTIONS 83
LOBs 82
maximum number of exceptions 83
PART 83
SCOPE ALL 82
CHECK DATA utility (continued)

examples (continued)
SHRLEVEL CHANGE 83
use after LOAD RESUME 289
using exception tables 289
violation messages 77
exception table, creating 76
execution phases 61
finding violations 77
LOB column errors 79
LOB columns 69
output 61
restarting 80
specifying scope 77
syntax diagram 62
table spaces, multiple 83
terminating 80
use after LOAD REPLACE 289
CHECK INDEX utility
after checking 99
authorization 85
compatibility 92
data sets
shadow 90
data sets needed 89
description 85
examples 99
ALL 99, 100
checking all indexes 99
checking clone tables 101
checking more than one index 100
checking one index 100
checking partitions 100
LIST 100
LISTDEF 100
PART 100
SORTDEVT 100
execution phases 85
output 85, 98
parallel checking 95
physical or logical partitions 87
restarting 99
single logical partition 94
syntax diagram 86
terminating 99
use after loading table with indexes 291
CHECK LOB
before running 107
CHECK LOB utility
authorization 103
compatibility 110
data sets
shadow 108
data sets needed 107
description 103
example 111
execution phases 103
LOB violations, resolving 110
output 103
restarting 111
syntax diagram 104
terminating 111
Index
1079
CHECK-pending (CHECKP) status

resetting
for a LOB table space 110
CHECK-pending (CHKP) status
CHECK DATA utility 61, 78
description 927
indoubt referential integrity 289
resetting 927
for a table space 289
CHECK, option of DSN1COPY utility 783
CHECKPAGE, option of COPY utility 117
checkpoint queue
printing contents 751
updating 733
CHECKPT, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
CHKP 61
CHKPTRBA, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
CLOB
CLOBF
CLONE
option of CHECK DATA utility 64
option of CHECK INDEX utility 87
option of COPY utility 117
option of DIAGNOSE utility 175
option of MERGECOPY utility 308
option of MODIFY RECOVERY utility 318
option of QUIESCE utility 344
option of REBUILD INDEX 355
option of RECOVER utility 380
option of REORG INDEX utility 423
clone objects
recovering a table space 402
CLONED, option of LISTDEF utility 187
CLUSTERING column of SYSINDEXES catalog table, use by
RUNSTATS 620
CLUSTERRATIOF column, SYSINDEXES catalog table 620
CMON, option of CATENFM utility 52
COLCARDF column
SYSCOLUMNS catalog table 620
cold start
example, creating a conditional restart control record 745
specifying for conditional restart 733
COLDEL
COLGROUP, option of RUNSTATS utility 596
COLGROUPCOLNO column, SYSCOLDIST catalog table 620
COLUMN
option of LOAD STATISTICS 210
COLVALUE column, SYSCOLDIST catalog table 620
COMMAND, option of DSN1SDMP utility 835
commit point
DSNU command 22
REPAIR utility LOCATE statement 542
restarting after out-of-space condition 40
comparison operators 458
compatibility
CATENFM utility 53
CATMAINT utility 57
CHECK DATA utility 74
CHECK INDEX utility 92
CHECK LOB utility 110
1080
compatibility (continued)
COPY utility 126
COPYTOCOPY utility 162
declared temporary table 4
DEFINE NO objects 4
DIAGNOSE utility 177
EXEC SQL utility 183
LISTDEF utility 193
LOAD utility 253
MERGECOPY utility 311
MODIFY RECOVERY utility 322
MODIFY STATISTICS utility 330
OPTIONS utility 338
QUIESCE utility 346
REBUILD INDEX utility 364
RECOVER utility 388
REORG INDEX utility 437
REORG TABLESPACE utility 493
REPAIR utility 552
REPORT utility 568
RESTORE SYSTEM utility 589
STOSPACE utility 637
TEMPLATE utility 654
UNLOAD utility 700
utilities access description 33
COMPLETE, option of CATENFM utility 52
compression
data, UNLOAD utility description 714
estimating disk savings 771
compression dictionary, building 505
concurrency
BACKUP SYSTEM utility 47
utility jobs 35
with real-time statistics 1010
concurrent copies
COPYTOCOPY utility restriction 155
invoking 117
making 136
CONCURRENT, option of COPY utility 117, 136
conditional restart control record
creating 733, 745
reading 761
sample 761
status printed by print log map utility 751
connection-name, naming convention xvii
CONSTANT, option of UNLOAD utility 679
constraint violations, checking 61
CONTINUE, option of RECOVER utility 394
CONTINUEIF, option of LOAD utility 210
continuous operation, recovering an error range 394
control interval
LOAD REPLACE, effect of 257, 292
RECOVER utility, effect of 414
REORG TABLESPACE, effect of 520
control statement 15
CONTROL, option of DSNU CLIST command 22
conversion of data, LOAD utility 275
CONVERT, option of CATENFM utility 52
copies
merging 307
online, merging 313
copy pool 43
COPY SCOPE PENDING
COPY-pending 133
COPY statement, using more than one 134
COPY utility
adding conditional code 138
allowing other programs to access data 117
authorization 113
block size, specifying 124
catalog table, copying 129
checking pages 117
compatibility 126
consistency 131
COPY-pending status, resetting 113
copying a list of objects 133
copying segmented table spaces 135
description 113
directory, copying 129
effect on real-time statistics 1006
examples 143
allowing updates 150
CHANGELIMIT 150
CLONE 153
conditional copies 150
COPYDDN 143
copying LOB table spaces 151
DFSMSdss concurrent copy 151
filter data sets 151
FILTERDDN 151
full image copy 143, 152
incremental image copy 130, 150
JCL-defined and template-defined data sets 148
list of objects, making full image copy of 144
LISTDEF 149
lists 149
local site and recovery site copies 143
multiple image copies 131
PARALLEL 144, 147
parallel processing 147
RECOVERYDDN 143
reporting information 150
REPORTONLY 150
SCOPE PENDING 153
SHRLEVEL 144
TAPEUNITS 147
templates 149
full image copy, making 129
informational COPY-pending status, resetting 113
JCL parameters 124
MERGECOPY utility, when to use 313
multiple image copies 131
naming data sets 131
output 113
partition, copying 130
performance recommendations 140
processing in parallel
description 117, 133
number of threads 113, 133
recovery, preparing for 139
restart current 142
restarting
description 142
new data set 142
out-of-space condition 142
restricted states 126
restrictions 130
separate jobs 135
COPY utility (continued)

syntax diagram 114
table spaces 135
TERM UTILITY command 142
terminating
DD statements 142
description 142
using more than one COPY statement 134
COPY-pending status
COPY utility 117
description 928
LOAD utility 288
resetting
by taking a copy 928
by using COPY 126
by using LOAD 288
copy, consistency 131
COPY, option of LISTDEF utility 187
COPY1, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
COPY1VOL, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
COPY2, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
COPY2VOL, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
COPYDDN
option of COPYTOCOPY utility 158
option of LOAD utility 210, 271
option of REORG TABLESPACE utility 458, 507
COPYDSN, option of DSNU CLIST command 22
COPYDSN2, option of DSNU CLIST command 22
COPYTOCOPY statements, using multiple 164
COPYTOCOPY utility
authorization 155
block size, specifying 161
claims 162
compatibility 162
copying from a specific image copy 164
description 155
examples
cataloged copy data set, specifying 168
CLONE 170
copying from a specific image copy 164
copying objects from tape 166
FROMCOPY 164, 168
FROMLASTCOPY 168
FROMLASTFULLCOPY 168
FROMVOLUME 168, 169
full image copy 163
incremental image copy 163
input copy data set, specifying 168
list of objects, processing 169
LISTDEF 170
local backup copies, making 168
TEMPLATE 170
uncataloged data set, specifying 169
generation data groups, defining 165
input copy, determining which to use 165
JCL parameters 161
lists, copying 158
making copies 163
multiple statements, using 164
objects, copying from tape 166
output 155
Index
1081
COPYTOCOPY utility (continued)

output data sets
size 161
specifying 158
partitions, copying 158
syntax diagram 156
SYSIBM.SYSCOPY records, updating 165
tape mounts, retaining 161
terminating 167
using TEMPLATE 164
correlation ID, naming convention xvii
COUNT
COUNT option
option of RUNSTATS utility 596, 604
CREATE option of DSNJU003 utility 733
CRESTART, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
cross loader 270
cross loader function 181
CSRONLY, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
CURRENT DATE, incrementing and decrementing value
CURRENT option of REPORT utility 565
current restart, description 37
CURRENTCOPYONLY option of RECOVER utility 380
cursor
CYL, option of TEMPLATE statement 643
D
data
adding 260
compressing 267
converting 269
converting with LOAD utility 275
deleting 260
DATA
option of REPAIR DUMP 547
option of REPAIR REPLACE 546
option of REPAIR VERIFY 545
data compression
dictionary
building 267, 505
number of records needed 267
using again 267
LOAD utility
description 267
KEEPDICTIONARY option 210, 267
REORG TABLESPACE utility, KEEPDICTIONARY
option 458
DATA ONLY, option of BACKUP SYSTEM utility 45
data set
name format in ICF catalog 117
name limitations 655
data sets
CATENFM utility 53
CATMAINT utility 56
change log inventory utility (DSNJU003) 729
1082
679
data sets (continued)

concatenating 14, 18
COPY utility 124
copying partition-by-growth table spaces 135
copying table space in separate jobs 135
definitions, changing during REORG 504
disposition
defaults for dynamically allocated data sets 643
defaults for dynamically allocated data sets on
RESTART 643
disposition, controlling 14
DSNJCNVB utility 725
for copies, naming 131
input, using 14
LOAD utility 249
output, using 14
QUIESCE utility 346
RECOVER utility 387
recovering, partition 393
REPAIR utility 551
REPORT utility 568
security 14
space parameter, changing 433
space parameter, changing during REORG 504
specifying 14
UNLOAD utility 699
data sharing
backing up group 43
real-time statistics 1009
restoring data 589
running online utilities 35
data type, specifying with LOAD utility 229
data-only backup
example 48
explanation 45
database
limits 847
DATABASE
option of REPAIR utility 549
DATACLAS, option of TEMPLATE statement 643
DATAONLY, option of DSN1LOGP utility 806
DataRefresher 269
DATAREPEATFACTORF column of SYSINDEXES catalog
table 620
DATE EXTERNAL
DB2 books online 1021
DB2 Information Center for z/OS solutions 1021
DB2-supplied stored procedures 853
DB2I
option of DSNU CLIST command 22
DB2I (continued)
using to invoke online utilities 18
DBCLOB
DBCLOBF
DBD statement of REPAIR utility 117, 548
DBD, reclaiming space in 323
DBD01 directory table space
MERGECOPY restrictions 307, 308
order of recovering 396
DBETE status
description 928
resetting
by using START DATABASE command 928
DBID
option of DSN1LOGP utility 806
DBRM (database request module)
member naming convention xvii
partitioned data set naming convention xvii
DD name, naming convention xvii
DDF (distributed data facility), option of DSNJU003
utility 733
DDNAME, option of DSNJU004 utility 752
DEADLINE
DECFLOAT
DECFLOAT EXTERNAL
DECFLOAT_ROUNDMODE
DECIMAL EXTERNAL
DECIMAL PACKED
option of the LOAD utility 229
DECIMAL ZONED
DECIMAL, option of UNLOAD utility 679
declared temporary table
REPAIR utility 548
utility compatibility 4
DECPT
DEFAULTIF, option of LOAD utility 229
defects, calculating, LOAD utility 249
DEFINE NO objects
populating 4
utility compatibility 4
DEFINE NO table space, loading data 260
defining work data sets
DELAY
DELETE
DELETE (continued)
option of DSNJU003 utility 733
option of the CHECK DATA utility 78
statement of REPAIR utility, used in LOCATE block 541
DELETE statement of REPAIR utility 546
deleting
active log from BSDS 743
log data sets with errors 746
DELIMITED
delimited file format
acceptable data types 263, 1012
default delimiter values 263, 710
description 1011
examples 1013
loading 210, 263
maximum delimiter values 263
restrictions 263
delimited files
acceptable data type forms for LOAD and UNLOAD
utilities 710
unloading 710
delimiters
column 1011
default values 263, 710
maximum values 263
restrictions 710
string 1011
using 263
determining input copies 313
DFSMS (Data Facility Storage Management Subsystem)
concurrent copy
invoking with COPY utility 117, 136
requirements for using 136
restrictions 136
products, using with DB2 141, 165
DFSORT (Data Facility Sort)
data sets for REORG TABLESPACE, specifying device
type 458
messages from REORG TABLESPACE, specifying
destination 486
DIAGNOSE utility
ABEND statement
description 175
syntax diagram 173
authorization 173
compatibility 177
concurrency 177
description 173
DISPLAY statement
description 175
syntax diagram 173
examples 178
ABEND 179
ALLDUMPS 178
CLONE 180
diagnosis of a specific type 179
displaying MEPLs 178
forcing a dump 178
forcing an abend 179
service level, finding 178
suspending utility execution 179
TYPE 179
Index
1083
DIAGNOSE utility (continued)

WAIT 179
forcing an abend 177
instructions 177
restarting 178
syntax diagram 173
terminating 178
WAIT statement
description 175
syntax diagram 173
DIAGNOSE, option of REPAIR utility 549
DIR, option of TEMPLATE statement 643
directory
integrity, verifying 763
MERGECOPY utility, restrictions 307
order of recovering objects 396
disability xvi
discard data set, specifying DD statement for LOAD
utility 210
DISCARD, option of REORG TABLESPACE utility 458
DISCARDDN
option of LOAD PART 229
DISCARDS, option of LOAD utility 210
DISCDSN, option of DSNU CLIST command 22
DISP, option of TEMPLATE statement 643
DISPLAY DATABASE command, displaying range of pages in
error 394
DISPLAY UTILITY command
description 33
using with RESTORE SYSTEM utility on a data sharing
group 589
DISPLAY, option of DIAGNOSE utility 175
displaying status of DB2 utilities 33
disposition, data sets, controlling 14
DL/I, loading data 269
DOUBLE, option of UNLOAD utility 679
DRAIN
DRAIN_WAIT
option of CHECK LOB utility 105
DROP, option of REPAIR utility 549
DSN, option of TEMPLATE statement 643
DSN1CHKR utility
anchor point, mapping 765
authorization 763
description 763
DSN1CHKR utility
concurrent copy, compatibility 763
DSN1COPY utility, running before 763
dump format, printing 765
environment 763
examples 766
table space 768
temporary data set 766
formatting table space pages on output 765
hash value, specifying for DBID 765
1084
DSN1CHKR utility (continued)

output 764
pointers, following 765
running 763
syntax diagram 765
SYSPRINT DD name 763
SYSUT1 DD name 763
valid table spaces 764
DSN1COMP utility
authorization required 771
data set size, specifying 773
data sets required 771
DD statements
SYSPRINT 771
SYSUT1 771
description 771
environment 771
examples
free space 778
FREEPAGE 778
full image copy 777
FULLCOPY 777
LARGE 778
NUMPARTS 778
PCTFREE 778
REORG 778
ROWLIMIT 778
free pages, specifying 773
free space
including in compression calculations 776
specifying 773
FREEPAGE 776
full image copy as input, specifying 773
identical data rows 777
LARGE data sets, specifying 773
maximum number of rows to evaluate, specifying
message DSN1941 779
output
example 780
interpreting 779
sample 776, 779
page size of input data set, specifying 773
partitions, specifying number 773
PCTFREE 776
prerequisite actions 775
recommendations 771
REORG 776
running 771
savings comparable to REORG 773
savings estimate 776
syntax diagram 773
DSN1COPY utility
additional volumes, for SYSUT2 790
altering a table before running 794
checking validity of input 783
comparing to DSN1PRNT 788
copying a table space 788
copying identity column tables 797
copying tables to other subsystems 797
data set size, determining 788
data sets
input 790
message 790
773
DSN1COPY utility (continued)

data sets (continued)
OBIDXLAT 790
output 790
required 790
DD statements
SYSPRINT 790
SYSUT1 790
SYSUT2 790
SYSXLAT 790
description 781
environment 781
example 790
examples 798
checking input data 798
copying partitions 800
printing 16 pages 799
printing one page 799
translating internal identifiers 799
full image copy, specifying 783
image copy, using as input 795
inconsistent data, checking for 794
incremental copy, specifying 783
inline copy, specifying 783
internal identifiers, translating 794
LARGE input data set, specifying 783
LOB table space, specifying 783
log RBAs, resetting 795
maximum piece size, specifying 783
multiple data set table spaces 795
OBID translation 783
OBIDXLAT 788
page size of input data set, specifying 783
page size, determining 788
partitions, specifying number 783
preventing inconsistent data 794
printing data sets 797
printing in hexadecimal format 783
resetting log RBAs 783, 795
restoring indexes 796
restoring table spaces 796
restrictions 781
scanning input data set for value 783
segmented table space, specifying 783
subsystem, copying tables from one to another
syntax diagram 783
translating internal identifiers 794
DSN1LOGP utility
archive log data sets on tape, reading 812
authorization 803
data changes, limiting report to 806
data sharing example 815
data sharing requirements 805
database identifier, using to limit report 806
DBID, using to limit report 806
DD statements
ACTIVE 804
ARCHIVE 804
BSDS 804
SYSIN 803
SYSPRINT 803
SYSSUMRY 803
description 803
detail report
description 816
797
DSN1LOGP utility (continued)

detail report (continued)
sample 816
environment 803
error codes, interpreting 816
examples
data sharing 815
extracting information from the active log without the
BSDS 814
extracting information from the archive log without the
BSDS 814
extracting information from the recovery log with the
BSDS 813
SUMMARY option 815
JCL, requirements 803
log data sets, identifying 804
log range, specifying 806
LUWIDs, reporting on 806
output
description 816
reviewing 816
sample 816
page regression report
description 816
page, limiting report to 806
RID, using to limit report 806
running 803
summary report
description 816
description of data propagation information 816
sample 816
sample of data propagation information 816
summary report, specifying 806
syntax diagram 805
SYSCOPY log records, limiting report to 806
table and index identifiers, locating 813
type of log records, limiting report by 806
unit of recovery identifier, using to limit report 806
value in log record, limiting report by 806
DSN1PRNT utility
comparison with DSN1COPY utility 830
data set size, determining 830
DD statements
SYSPRINT 823
SYSUT1 823
description 823
environment 823
examples 831
printing a data set in hexadecimal format 831
printing a nonpartitioning index 831
printing a page range of a specific partition 832
printing a partitioned data set 832
printing a single page of an image copy 832
filtering pages by value 825
formatting output 825
full image copy, specifying 825
incremental copy, specifying 825
inline copy, specifying 825
LARGE data set, specifying 825
LOB table space, specifying 825
number of partitions, specifying 825
page size, determining 830
Index
1085
DSN1PRNT utility (continued)

page size, specifying 825
piece size, specifying 825
processing encrypted data 823
recommendations 830
running 823
syntax diagram 825
SYSUT1 data set, printing on SYSPRINT data set 825
DSN1SDMP utility
action, specifying 835
buffers, assigning 839
DD statements
SDMPIN 833
SDMPPRNT 833
SDMPTRAC 833
SYSABEND 833
SYSTSIN 833
description 833
dump, generating 840
environment 833
examples
abend 841, 842
dump 843
second trace 844
skeleton JCL 841
output 833
required data sets 833
running 833
selection criteria, specifying 835
syntax diagram 835
trace destination 835
traces
modifying 840
stopping 840
DSN8G810, updating space information 637
DSN8S81E table space, finding information about space
utilization 637
option descriptions 876, 980
output 891, 995
syntax diagram 876, 979
output 915, 970
syntax diagram 896, 951
DSNAME, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
DSNDB01.DBD01
copying restrictions 130
recovery information 570
DSNDB01.SYSCOPYs
DSNDB01.SYSUTILX 401
DSNDB06.SYSCOPY
DSNJCNVB utility
control statement 725
data sets used 725
description 725
dual BSDSs, converting 725
environment 725
1086
DSNJCNVB utility (continued)

example 726
output 726
prerequisite actions 725
running 725
SYSUT1 DD name 725
SYSUT2 DD name 725
DSNJLOGF utility
description 727
example 727
output 727
SYSUT1 DD name 727
DSNJU003 utility
active logs
adding 743
changing 743
deleting 743
enlarging 743
recording 743
altering references 747
archive logs
adding 745
changing 745
deleting 745
BSDS timestamp field, updating 729
data sets
cataloging 733
declaring 733
DELETE statement 747
description 729
environment 729
examples 749
adding a communication record to BSDS 749
adding a communication record with an alias to
BSDS 749
adding active log 743
adding archive log 745
adding archive log data set 749
alias ports 750
changing high-level qualifier 747
creating conditional restart control record 749
deleting a data set 749
deleting active log 743
deleting archive log 745
recording active log 743
removing aliases from a communication record 750
specifying a point in time for system recovery 750
SYSPITR 750
Updating a communication record with a secure
TCP/IP port number in the BSDS 749
invoking 729
NEWCAT statement
example output 747
using 747
NEWLOG statement 747
renaming log data sets 748
renaming system data sets 748
syntax diagram 730
SYSIN DD name 729
SYSUT1 DD name 729
DSNJU003 utility (continued)

SYSUT2 DD name 729
updating dual copy BSDSs 729
DSNJU004 utility
BSDS timestamps 758
checkpoints, sample output description of 761
description 751
environment 751
example 753
GROUP DD name 751
MnnBSDS DD name 751
output
description 753
sample 760
recommendations 751
running 751
syntax diagram 752
SYSIN DD name 751
SYSUT1 DD name 751
DSNTEJ1 sample 481
DSNTEP2 and DSNTEP4 sample program
specifying SQL terminator 934, 942
DSNTEP2 sample program
how to run 933
parameters 933
program preparation 933
DSNTEP4 sample program
how to run 933
parameters 933
DSNTIAD sample program
how to run 933
parameters 933
specifying SQL terminator 940
DSNTIAUL sample program
how to run 933
parameters 933
DSNTYPE, option of TEMPLATE statement 643
DSNU CLIST command
editing generated JCL 27
examples 27
invoking utilities 21
output 26
syntax 22
DSNUM
option of MODIFY RECOVERY utility 318, 322
option of REPORT utility 565
DSNUM column
SYSINDEXPART catalog table, use by RUNSTATS
DSNUPROC JCL procedure
description 28
sample 29
DSNUTILS stored procedure
DSNUTILS stored procedure (continued)

data sets 861
description 860
output 871
restarting a utility 860
sample JCL 871
syntax diagram 863
DSNUTILU stored procedure
data sets 872
description 871
output 874
restarting a utility 871
sample JCL 874
syntax diagram 872
DSSIZE
dump
example 49
DUMP
option of DSN1CHKR utility 765
statement of REPAIR utility 547
used in LOCATE block 541
DUMP, option of BACKUP SYSTEM utility 45
DUMPCLASS, option of BACKUP SYSTEM utility 45
dumping
utilities
BACKUP SYSTEM 47
DUMPONLY, option of BACKUP SYSTEM utility 45
623
EBCDIC
edit routine
LOAD utility 205
EDIT, option of DSNU CLIST command 22
embedded semicolon
embedded 940
enabling-new-function mode processing, stopping 54
encrypted data
running DSN1PRNT on 823
running REORG TABLESPACE on 481
running REPAIR on 550
running UNLOAD on 699
running utilities on 5
encryption
DSN1PRNT utility effect on 823
REORG TABLESPACE utility effect on 481
REPAIR utility effect on 550
UNLOAD utility effect on 699
utilities effect on 5
END FCINCREMENTAL
explanation 45
END FCINCREMENTAL, option of BACKUP SYSTEM
utility 45
END, option of DIAGNOSE utility 175
ENDLRSN, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
ENDRBA, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
ENDTIME, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
ENFMON, option of CATENFM utility 52
Index
1087
ENFORCE, option of LOAD utility 210, 265

ERRDDN
error data set
error range recovery 394
ERROR RANGE, option of RECOVER utility 380
error, calculating, LOAD utility 249
ESA data compression, estimating disk savings 771
ESCAPE clause 458, 679
explanation 45
ESTABLISH FCINCREMENTAL, option of BACKUP SYSTEM
utility 45
EVENT, option of OPTIONS statement 336
exception table
columns 76
creating 76
definition 70
example 81
with auxiliary columns 77
with LOB columns 69
EXCEPTIONS
exceptions, specifying the maximum number
EXCLUDE
option of LISTDEF 194
EXCLUDE, option of LISTDEF utility 187
EXEC SQL utility
authorization 181
compatibility 183
cursors 182
declare cursor statement
description 182
syntax diagram 181
description 181
dynamic SQL statements 182
examples 183
creating a table 183
declaring a cursor 184
inserting rows into a table 183
using a mapping table 530
execution phase 181
output 181
restarting 183
syntax diagram 181
terminating 183
EXEC statement
built by CLIST 26
description 30
executing
utilities, creating JCL 30
utilities, DB2I 18
utilities, JCL procedure (DSNUPROC) 28
exit procedure, LOAD utility 282
EXPDL, option of TEMPLATE statement 643
EXTENTS column
SYSINDEXPART catalog table, use by RUNSTATS 623
extracted key, calculating, LOAD utility 249
1088
F
fallback recovery considerations 481
FARINDREF column of SYSTABLEPART catalog table, use by
RUNSTATS 623
FAROFFPOSF column of SYSINDEXPART catalog table
catalog query to retrieve value for 498
description 623
field procedure, LOAD utility 282
filter data set, determining size 124
FILTER, option of DSN1LOGP utility 806
FILTER, option of DSN1SDMP utility 835
FILTERDDN, option of COPY utility 117
FIRSTKEYCARDF column, SYSINDEXES catalog table 620
FLOAT
option of UNLOAD utility 666, 679
FLOAT EXTERNAL, option of LOAD utility 229
FLOAT, option of LOAD utility 229
FOR EXCEPTION, option of CHECK DATA utility 64
FOR, option of DSN1SDMP utility 835
FOR2, option of DSN1SDMP utility 835
force
example 49
FORCE, option of BACKUP SYSTEM utility 45
FORCEROLLUP
foreign key, calculating, LOAD utility 249
FORMAT
FORMAT SQL/DS, option of LOAD utility 210
FORMAT UNLOAD, option of LOAD utility 210
FORWARD, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
free space
FREEPAGE, option of DSN1COMP utility 773
FREESPACE column of SYSLOBSTATS catalog table 623
FREQUENCYF column, SYSCOLDIST catalog table 620
FREQVAL
FROM TABLE
FROMCOPY
option of the COPYTOCOPY utility 164
FROMCOPYDDN, option of UNLOAD utility 666, 703
FROMLASTCOPY, option of COPYTOCOPY utility 158
FROMLASTFULLCOPY, option of COPYTOCOPY utility 158
FROMLASTINCRCOPY, option of COPYTOCOPY utility 158
FROMSEQNO, option of the UNLOAD utility 666
FROMVOLUME
FULL
option of BACKUP SYSTEM utility 45
full backup
description 45
full backup (continued)

example 48
FULLCOPY
FULLKEYCARDF column, SYSINDEXES catalog table
function
maximum number in select 847
G
GDGLIMIT
GDGLIMIT, option of TEMPLATE statement 643
GDGs 141
general-use programming information, described 1031
generation data groups
defining 141, 165
using with conditional copy 138
GENERIC, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
GRAPHIC
GRAPHIC EXTERNAL
GRECP 928
group buffer pool RECOVER-pending (GRECP) status
description 928
resetting 928
GUPI symbols 1031
H
HALT, option of OPTIONS statement 336
HASH, option of DSN1CHKR utility 765
HEADER, option of UNLOAD utility 679
hexadecimal-constant, naming convention xvii
hexadecimal-string, naming convention xvii
HIGH2KEY column, SYSCOLUMNS catalog table 620
HIGHRBA, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
HIGHVALUE column, SYSCOLDIST catalog table 620
HISTOGRAM
HISTORY
I
ICBACKUP column in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY 131
ICOPY status 113
ICUNIT column
SYSIBM.SYSCOPY 131
identity columns, loading 259
IDENTITYOVERRIDE
IGNOREFIELDS, option of LOAD utility 229
image copy
cataloging 124, 161
conditional, specifying 138
COPY utility 113
620
image copy (continued)

copying 155
data set, finding size 124
deleting all 322
full
description 113
making 117, 129
incremental
conditions 131
copying 163
description 113
making 130
merging 307
performance advantage 130
list of objects 133
making after loading a table 288
making in parallel 113
multiple, making 131
obtaining information about 138
putting on tape 142, 166
IMS DPROP 269
IN predicate 458, 679
in-abort state 733
in-commit state 733
INCLUDE, option of LISTDEF utility 187, 194
inconsistent data indicator, resetting 546
INCRCOPY
INCURSOR
INDDN
INDEREFLIMIT option of REORG TABLESPACE utility
index
building during LOAD 277
checking 85, 291
determining when to reorganize 439
organization 439
rebuilding in parallel 368
rebuilt, recoverability 373
version numbers, recycling 292
INDEX
option of REPAIR utility
LEVELID statement 537
LOCATE statement 543
SET statement 539
INDEX ALL, option of REPORT utility 565
INDEX NONE, option of REPORT utility 565
index partitions, rebuilding 366
index space
recovering 353
index space status, resetting 555
Index
458
1089
INDEX
indexes
copying 136
INDEXSPACE
SET statement 539
option of REPAIR utility for LEVELID statement 537
INDEXSPACES, option of LISTDEF utility 187
indoubt state 733
INDSN, option of DSNU CLIST command 22
inflight state 733
informational COPY-pending (ICOPY) status
COPY utility 117
description 929
resetting 113, 139, 929
informational referential constraints, LOAD utility 205
INLCOPY
inline COPY
base table space 285
copying 164
creating with LOAD utility 271
creating with REORG TABLESPACE utility 507
inline statistics
collecting during LOAD 285
using in place of RUNSTATS 614
input fields, specifying 276
INPUT, option of CATENFM utility 52
INSTANCE, option of DIAGNOSE utility 175, 177
INTEGER
INTEGER EXTERNAL
Interactive System Productivity Facility (ISPF) 18
INTO TABLE, option of LOAD utility 226
invalid LOB 79
invalid SQL terminator characters 940
invalidated plans and packages
identifying 58, 390, 811
invalidating statements
dynamic statement cache 615
ISPF (Interactive System Productivity Facility), utilities
panels 18
ITEMERROR, option of OPTIONS statement 336
J
JCL (job control language)
DSNUPROC utility 21
JCL PARM statement 336
JES3 environment, making copies 314
job control language 129
JOB statement, built by CLIST 26
1090
K
KEEPDICTIONARY
key
calculating, LOAD utility 249
foreign, LOAD operation 265
length
maximum 847
primary, LOAD operation 265
KEY
option of OPTIONS utility 336
option of REPAIR utility on LOCATE statement 542
KEYCARD
L
labeled-duration expression 458
LARGE
large partitioned table spaces, RUNSTATS utility 616
LAST
LEAFDIST column of SYSINDEXPART catalog table 623
LEAFDISTLIMIT, option of REORG INDEX utility 423
LEAFFAR column of SYSINDEXPART catalog table 623
LEAFLIM, option of DSN1COMP utility 773
LEAFNEAR column of SYSINDEXPART catalog table 623
LEAST, option of RUNSTATS utility 596, 604
LENGTH, option of REPAIR utility 547
level identifier, resetting 537
LEVELID, option of REPAIR utility 537
LIB, option of DSNU CLIST command 22
LIB, option of DSNUPROC utility 28
library 1021
library of LISTDEF statements 197
LIKE predicate 458, 679
limit
option of TEMPLATE statement 643
LIMIT, option of UNLOAD utility 679
limits, DB2 847
LIST
option of REPORT with INDEXSPACE option 565
option of REPORT with TABLESPACE option 565
option of RUNSTATS INDEX utility 604
option of RUNSTATS TABLESPACE utility 596
LIST (continued)
list of objects, copying 113
LISTDEF
EXCLUDE option 194
INCLUDE option 194
objects, excluding 194
objects, including 194
LISTDEF library, specifying 339
LISTDEF utility
authorization 185
catalog and directory objects, specifying 194
compatibility 193
concurrency 193
control statement
creating 193
description 193
placement 198
processing 194
COPY NO indexes, specifying 187
COPY YES indexes, specifying 187
description 185
examples 200
all objects in a database 201
CLONED 204
COPY YES 202
excluding objects 202
including all but one partition 202
including COPY YES indexes 202
library data set 202
lists that reference other lists 202
matching name patterns 201
partition-level lists 201
pattern-matching characters 201
related objects, including 204
RI option 204
simple list 200
using LIST 198
using with QUIESCE utility 202
indexes, specifying 187
LOB indicator keywords 187
LOB objects, including 187
OPTIONS, using 200
output 185
partitions, specifying 187
pattern-matching expressions
characters 194
description 194
restriction 194
using 194
previewing 197
restarting 200
restrictions 185, 194
statement library 197
syntax diagram 185
TEMPLATE, using 199
terminating 200
LISTDEFDD, option of OPTIONS statement 336
lists
objects
excluding 194
including 194
previewing 197
processing order 198
using with other utilities 198
LOAD INTO PART 260

LOAD REPLACE LOG YES 257
LOAD utility
adding more data 260
after loading 288
appending to data 210
authorization 205
auxiliary index, reorganizing after LOAD 292
BINARYXML 229
building indexes
in parallel 278
sequentially 277
catalog tables, loading 248
CHECK DATA
after LOAD RESUME 289
data sets used 289
error data sets 289
running 289
sort data sets 289
compatibility 253
compressing data 267
concatenating records 210
concurrent access to data, setting 210
cross loader 270
cursors
identifying 210, 229
preparing to use 248
data conversion 275
data type compatibility 275
data type, specifying 229
data with referential constraints 265
default values, setting criteria for 229
defects, calculating number 249
DEFINE NO table space, consequences 260
deleting all data 260
delimited file format
acceptable data types 263
restrictions 263
specifying 210
delimited files 263
delimiters 263
description 205
DFSORT data sets, device type 210
discard data set
declaring 210
maximum number of records 210
discarded rows, inline statistics 285
duplicate keys, effects 256
dynamic SQL 270
ENFORCE NO
actions to take 289
consequences 265
enforcing constraints 210
error work data set, specifying 210
error, calculating 249
examples 293
CHECK DATA 289
CHECK DATA after LOAD RESUME 289
concatenating records 297
CONTINUEIF 297
COPYDDN 300
CURSOR 304
data 294, 295, 303
declared cursors 304
default values, loading 297
Index
1091
LOAD utility (continued)

DEFAULTIF 297
DELIMITED 296
delimited files 296
ENFORCE CONSTRAINTS 298
ENFORCE NO 298
field positions, specifying 293
inline copies, creating 300
KEEPDICTIONARY 267
loading 305
loading by partition 260
LOBs 305
null values, loading 297
NULLIF 297
parallel index build 299
PART 294
partition parallelism 303, 304
POSITION 293
referential constraints 298
REPLACE 294
replace table in single-table table space 257
replace tables in multi-table table space 257
replacing data in a given partition 294
selected records, loading 294
SORTKEYS 299
STATISTICS 301
statistics, collecting 301
Unicode input, loading 302
UNICODE option 302
EXEC SQL statements 270
exit procedure 282
extracted keys, calculating number 249
failed job, recovering 292
field length
defaults 229
determining 229
field names, specifying 229
field position, specifying 229
field specifications 229
foreign keys
calculating 249
invalid values 265
format, specifying 210
free space 280
identity columns 259
improving parallel processing 273
improving performance 273, 274
informational referential constraints 205
inline copy 285
inline COPY 271
inline statistics, collecting 285
input data set, specifying 210
input data, preparing 248
input fields, specifying 276
into-table spec 226
KEEPDICTIONARY option 267
keys
calculating 249
estimating number 273
LOAD INTO TABLE options 229
loading data from DL/I 269
LOB column 282
LOG, using on LOB table space 283
LOG, using on XML table space 284
logging 210
map, calculating 249
1092
LOAD utility (continued)

multilevel security restriction on REPLACE option 205
multiple tables, loading 226
null values, setting criteria for 229
ordering records 256
output 205
parallel index build
data sets used 278
sort subtasks 278
sort work file, estimating size 278
partitions
copying 288
loading 229, 260
preprocessing 248
primary key
duplicate values 265
missing values 265
REBUILD-pending status 281
resetting 289
RECOVER-pending status 281
recovering failed job 292
recycling version numbers 292
loading data in 281
REPLACE option 257
replacing data 210
restarting 286
restrictive states, compatibility 257
RESUME YES SHRLEVEL CHANGE, without logging 284
reusing data sets 210
row selection criteria 229
ROWID columns 259, 282
skipping fields 229
sort work file, specifying 210
SORTKEYS NO 256
statistics, gathering 210
syntax diagram 207
table space, copying 288
terminating 285
Unicode data 210
variable-length data 256
work data sets
declaring 210
estimating size 249
XML column 283
loading
catalog tables 248
data
DL/I 269
dynamic SQL 270
generated by REORG UNLOAD EXTERNAL 259
generated by UNLOAD 259
large amounts 205, 260
using a cursor, preparations 248
partition-by-growth 262
partitions 260
variable-length data 256
XML data 262
LOB
violations, resolving 110
LOB (large object)

checking 64
invalid 79
missing 79
orphan 79
out-of-synch 79
recovering 401
LOB column
checking data 69
definitions, completing 69
errors 79
loading 282
LOB table space
copying 166
LOAD LOG 283
REORG LOG 283
reorganizing 514
LOBERROR INVALIDATE, option of CHECK DATA
utility 79
LOBERROR REPORT, option of CHECK DATA utility 79
LOBERROR, option of CHECK DATA utility 64
LOCALSITE
LOCATE INDEX statement of REPAIR utility 543
LOCATE INDEXSPACE statement of REPAIR utility 543
LOCATE statement of REPAIR utility 541
LOCATE TABLESPACE statement of REPAIR utility 542
location name, naming convention xvii
LOCATION, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
locking
CATENFM utility 53
CATMAINT utility 57
COPY utility 126
LISTDEF utility 193
LOAD utility 253
OPTIONS utility 338
QUIESCE utility 346
RECOVER utility 388
REPAIR utility 552
REPORT utility 568
UNLOAD utility 700
log
active
data set status 760
printing available data sets 751
backward recovery 733
command history, printing 751
log (continued)
data set
active, renaming 748
archive, renaming 748
printing map 751
printing names 751
forward recovery 733
record structure, types 806
truncation 749
utilities
DSNJU003 (change log inventory) 729
DSNJU004 (print log map) 751
LOG
log data sets with errors, deleting 746
log RBAs, resetting 795
logical partition, checking 94
logical unit name, naming convention xvii
LOGLIMIT
LOGONLY
option of RESTORE SYSTEM utility 586
LOGRANGES, option of RECOVER utility 380
LONGLOG
LOW2KEY column, SYSCOLUMNS catalog table 620
LOWVALUE column, SYSCOLDIST catalog table 620
LPL status 925
LRSNEND option of DSN1LOGP utility 806
LRSNSTART, option of DSN1LOGP utility 806
LUNAME, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
LUWID option of DSN1LOGP utility 806
M
MAP
map, calculating, LOAD utility 249
MAPDDN, option of LOAD utility 210
MAPPINGTABLE, option of REORG TABLESPACE
utility 458
MAXERR, option of UNLOAD utility 666
MAXPRIME, option of TEMPLATE statement 643
MAXRO
MAXROWS, option of DSN1COMP utility 773
MB, option of TEMPLATE statement 643
media failure
resolving 111
member name, naming convention xvii
MEMBER option of DSNJU004 utility 752
MERGECOPY utility
authorization 307
compatibility 311
COPY utility, when to use 313
DBD01 307, 308
description 307
different types, merging restrictions 313
directory table spaces 307
Index
1093
MERGECOPY utility (continued)

examples
merged full image copy 315, 316
merged incremental copy 314, 315
NEWCOPY NO 314, 315
NEWCOPY YES 315, 316
TEMPLATE 315
full image copy, merging with increment image
copies 308
individual data sets 313
JES3 environment, making copies 314
lists, using 308
LOG information, deleting 314
LOG RBA inconsistencies, avoiding 314
NEWCOPY option 312
online copies, merging 313
output 307
output data set
local, specifying 308, 310
remote, specifying 308, 310
partitions, merging copies 308
phases of execution 307
restarting 314
restrictions 307
syntax diagram 308
SYSCOPY 307, 308
SYSUTILX 307, 308
temporary data set, specifying 308, 310
terminating 314
type of copy, specifying 312
work data set, specifying 310
message
DSNU command 26
QUIESCE utility 343
RECOVER utility 377
MESSAGE, option of DIAGNOSE utility 175
MGMTCLAS, option of TEMPLATE statement 643
missing LOB 79
MIXED
MIXED, option of LOAD utility for VARCHAR 229
MODELDCB, option of TEMPLATE statement 643
MODIFY RECOVERY utility
age criteria 318
authorization 317
compatibility 322
copies, deleting 322
date criteria 318
DBD, reclaiming space 323
description 317
examples 325
AGE 325
CLONE 326
DATE 325
DELETE 325, 326
deleting all SYSCOPY records 326
deleting SYSCOPY records by age 325
deleting SYSCOPY records by date 325
DSNUM 325
partitions 325
RETAIN 326
1094
MODIFY RECOVERY utility (continued)

GDG limit 318
lists, using 318
log limit 318
partitions, processing 318
recent records 318
records, deleting 318
records, retaining 318
RECOVER-pending status, restriction 321
recovery index rows, deleting 322
REORG after adding column, improving performance 324
restarting 324
syntax diagram 318
SYSCOPY records, viewing 321
SYSCOPY, deleting rows 322
SYSLGRNX, deleting rows 322
SYSOBDS entries, deleting 323
terminating 324
MODIFY STATISTICS utility
authorization 327
compatibility 330
description 327
examples 332
ACCESSPATH 332
AGE 332
DATE 332
deleting access path records by date 332
deleting history records by age 332
deleting index statistics 333
deleting space statistics records by age 332
SPACE 332
lists, using 328
output 327
restarting 331
statistics history, deleting 331
syntax diagram 328
terminating 331
monitoring
index organization 439
table space organization 439, 498
utility status 33
MOST, option of RUNSTATS utility 596, 604
multilevel security with row-level granularity
authorization restrictions for online utilities 18
authorization restrictions for stand-alone utilities 724
LOAD REPLACE authorization restrictions 205
REORG TABLESPACE authorization restrictions 449
UNLOAD authorization restrictions 663
N
NACTIVE column, SYSTABLESPACE catalog table 620
NACTIVEF column, SYSTABLESPACE catalog table 620
naming convention, variables in command syntax xvii
NBRSECND, option of TEMPLATE statement 643
NEARINDREF column, SYSTABLEPART catalog table 623
NEAROFFPOSF column of SYSINDEXPART catalog table
catalog query to retrieve value for 498
description 623
new-function mode, converting to 53
NEWCAT, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
NEWCOPY, option of MERGECOPY utility 308
NEWLOG
statement 743
NGENERIC, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
NLEAF column, SYSINDEXES catalog table 620
NLEVELS column, SYSINDEXES catalog table 620
NOALIAS, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
NOAREORPENDSTAR, option of REPAIR utility 539
NOAUXCHKP, option of REPAIR utility 539
NOAUXWARN, option of REPAIR utility 539
NOCHECKPEND, option of REPAIR utility 539
NOCOPYPEND
NODUMPS, option of DIAGNOSE utility 175
non-DB2 utilities
NOPAD
NOPASSWD, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
NORBDPEND, option of REPAIR utility 539
NORCVRPEND, option of REPAIR utility 539
normal-termination, option of TEMPLATE utility 643
NOSUBS
NOSYSREC, option of REORG TABLESPACE utility
LOG
REORG TABLESPACE utility
logging, specifying 458
not sign, problems with 458
NPAGES column, SYSTABLES catalog table 620
NPAGES column, SYSTABSTATS catalog table 620
NPAGESF column, SYSTABLES catalog table 620
NULL predicate 458, 679
NULLIF, option of LOAD utility 229
NUMCOLS
NUMCOLUMNS column, SYSCOLDIST catalog table 620
NUMPARTS
NUMQUANTILES
O
OBID, option of DSN1LOGP utility 806
OBIDXLAT, option of DSN1COPY utility 783
object lists
adding related objects 194
creating 185
object status
advisory, resetting 925
restrictive, resetting 925
OBJECT, option of REPAIR utility 537
OFF, option of OPTIONS statement 336
OFFLRBA, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
OFFPOSLIMIT, option of REORG TABLESPACE utility
OFFSET
OFFSET (continued)
DUMP statement 547
REPLACE statement 546
VERIFY statement 545
OLDEST_VERSION column, updating 324
online 1021
online books 1021
online copies, merging 313
online utilities 13
description 3
invoking 13
option description, example 15
OPTIONS utility
altering return codes 339
authorization 335
compatibility 338
concurrency 338
description 335
errors, handling 336
examples 340
checking syntax 340
COPY 341
EVENT 340
forcing return code 0 340
ITEMERROR 341
LISTDEF 340
LISTDEF definition libraries 340
LISTDEFDD 340
MODIFY RECOVERY 340
PREVIEW 340
SKIP 341
TEMPLATE 340
TEMPLATE definition libraries 340
TEMPLATEDD 340
LISTDEF definition library, specifying 336
output 335
PREVIEW with LISTDEF 336
PREVIEW with TEMPLATE 336
restarting 339
syntax diagram 335
TEMPLATE definition library, specifying 336
terminating 339
order of recovering objects 396
ORGRATIO column of SYSLOBSTATS catalog table 623
orphan LOB 79
out-of-synch LOB 79
OUTDDN, option of REPAIR utility 549
owner, creator, and schema
renaming 57
ownership of objects
changing from an authorization ID to a role 57
458
page
checking 117
damaged, repairing 555
recovering 394
size, relationship to number of pages 825
PAGE
option of REPAIR utility on LOCATE statement
542
Index
1095
PAGE option
RECOVER utility 394
REPAIR utility 543
page set REBUILD-pending (PSRBD) status
resetting 372, 929
PAGES, option of REPAIR utility 547
PAGESAVE column of SYSTABLEPART catalog table, use by
RUNSTATS 623
PAGESIZE
panel
Control Statement Data Set Names 18
Data Set Names 18
DB2 Utilities 18
PARALLEL
option of COPY utility 113, 117
parsing rules, utility control statements 15, 723
PART
LOCATE INDEX and LOCATE INDEXSPACE
statements 543
LOCATE TABLESPACE statement 542
SET TABLESPACE and SETINDEX options 539
option of REPAIR utility for LEVELID 537
partition-by-growth table space
loading 262
partition-by-growth table spaces, rebuilding 367
partition-by-growth table spaces, reorganizing 513
partition, copying 130
loading 260
replacing a partition 260
unloading 702
partitioned table spaces, reorganizing 513
partitions
concatenating copies with UNLOAD utility 703
rebalancing with REORG 505
PARTLEVEL, option of LISTDEF utility 187
PASSWORD, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
pattern-matching characters, LISTDEF 194
patterns
advanced information 458, 679
PCTFREE, option of DSN1COMP utility 773
PCTPRIME, option of TEMPLATE statement 643
PCTROWCOMP column, SYSTABLES catalog table 620
pending status, resetting 925
PERCACTIVE column of SYSTABLEPART catalog table, use by
RUNSTATS 623
PERCDROP column of SYSTABLEPART catalog table, use by
RUNSTATS 623
performance
affected by
I/O activity 498
1096
performance (continued)
affected by (continued)
table space organization 498
COPY utility 140
LOAD utility, improving 272
monitoring with the STOSPACE utility 637
RECOVER utility 409
REORG INDEX utility, improving 442
REORG TABLESPACE utility, improving 508
phase restart, description 37
phases of execution
COPY utility 113
description 33
LISTDEF utility 185
LOAD utility 205
OPTIONS utility 335
QUIESCE utility 343
RECOVER utility 377
REPAIR utility 535
REPORT utility 563
UNLOAD utility 663
utilities
CATENFM 51
PIECESIZ
point-in-time recovery
options 380
performing 396, 403
planning for 396
PORT, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
POSITION
PQTY column
SYSTABLEPART catalog table, use by RUNSTATS
predicate
basic 458
BETWEEN 458
IN 458
LIKE 458
NULL 458
overview 458
predicates
basic 679
BETWEEN 679
IN 679
LIKE 679
NULL 679
623
PREFORMAT
option of REORG utility 274
preformatting active logs
description 727
example 727
output 727
PRESERVE WHITESPACE
PREVIEW
option of OPTIONS utility 336
using with LISTDEF utility 197
preview mode 339
PREVIEW mode, executing utilities in 654, 656
PRINT
print log map utility (DSNJU004)
JCL requirements 751
SYSIN stream parsing 751
privilege
description 3
granting 3
revoking 3
privilege set of a process 3
process, privilege set of 3
product-sensitive programming information, described 1031
programming interface information, described 1030
PSEUDO_DEL_ENTRIES column of SYSINDEXPART catalog
table 623
pseudo-deleted keys 623
PSPI symbols 1031
PUNCHDDN
PUNCHDSN, option of DSNU CLIST command 22
Q
qualifier-name, naming convention xvii
QUIESCE
before running 345
quiesce point, establishing 343
QUIESCE utility
authorization 343
catalog and directory objects 348
compatibility 346
description 343
examples
CLONE 352
list 350
quiesce point for three table spaces
table space set 351
WRITE NO 351
history record, printing 751
lists 348
lists, using 344
output 343
partitions 344
350
QUIESCE utility (continued)

quiesce point, establishing 348
recovery preparations 343
restarting 350
restrictive states, compatibility 349
syntax diagram 344
table space set 344
table space, specifying 344
terminating 350
write to disk, failure 349
writing changed pages to disk 344
R
RBA (relative byte address), range printed by print log
map 753
RBAEND, option of DSN1LOGP utility 806
RBASTART, option of DSN1LOGP utility 806
RBDP 929
RBDP (REBUILD-pending) status
resetting 411
RBDP* (REBUILD-pending star) status, resetting 372
RC0, option of OPTIONS statement 336
RCPYDSN1, option of DSNU CLIST command 22
RCPYDSN2, option of DSNU CLIST command 22
REAL TIME STATS
field of panel DSNTIPO 949
real-time statistics
accuracy 1010
data processing 947
for DEFINE NO objects 1007
for read-only objects 1007
for TEMP table spaces 1007
for work file table spaces 1007
improving concurrency 1010
in data sharing 1009
stored procedure 874, 895, 950, 978
used by utilities 947
when DB2 externalizes 999
Real-time statistics
clone tables 1009
EXCHANGE command 1009
real-time statistics tables
contents 949
effect of dropping objects 1007
effect of mass delete operations 1009
effect of SQL operations 1008
effect of updating partitioning keys 1008
recovering 1010
setting up 949
setting update interval 949
starting 949
REAL, option of UNLOAD utility 679
REBALANCE, option of REORG TABLESPACE utility 458
rebinding, recommended after LOAD 285
REBUILD INDEX utility
access, specifying 366
authorization 353
Before running 361
building indexes in parallel 368
catalog indexes 373
compatibility 364
Index
1097
REBUILD INDEX utility (continued)

description 353
DRAIN_WAIT, when to use 367
dynamic DFSORT and SORTDATA allocation,
overriding 368
effects 374
examples 374
all indexes in a table space, rebuilding 375
CLONE 376
index partitions, rebuilding 374
inline statistics 376
multiple partitions, rebuilding 374
partitions, rebuilding all 375
restrictive states, condition 376
SHRLEVEL CHANGE 376
single index, rebuilding 374
index partitions 366
partition-by-growth table spaces 367
REBUILD-pending status, resetting 372
recoverability of rebuilt index 373
restarting 373
several indexes
performance 367
SHRLEVEL CHANGE
log processing 366
when to use 367
SHRLEVEL option 366
slow log processing, operator actions 366
sort subtasks for parallel build 368
sort subtasks for parallel index build, determining
number 368
sort work file size 368
syntax diagram 354
terminating 373
work data sets, calculating size 362
REBUILD-pending (RBDP) status
resetting 411, 929
REBUILD-pending (RDBP) status
set by LOAD utility 289
REBUILD-pending star (RBDP*) status, resetting 372
REBUILD, option of REPAIR utility 549
RECDS, option of DSNU CLIST command 22
records, loaded, ordering 256
RECOVER
before running 387
effects 395
RECOVER utility
authorization 377
catalog and directory objects 396
catalog table spaces, recovering 396
CHECK-pending status, resetting 403
compatibility 388
compressed data, recovering 403
concurrent copies, improving recovery performance
damaged media, avoiding 413
description 377
DFSMShsm data sets 410
effects 414
error range, recovering 394
examples 414
1098
380
RECOVER utility (continued)

CLONE 417
concurrent copies 415
CURRENTCOPYONLY 415
different tape devices 416
DSNUM 391, 414
error range 394
index image copy, recovering to 415
last image copy, recovering to 415
LIST 416
list of objects, recovering in parallel 416
list of objects, recovering to point in time 416
LRSN, recovering to 415
multiple table spaces 391
PARALLEL 416
partition, recovering 414
partitions 391
point-in-time recovery 415
RESTOREBEFORE 417
single table space 391
table space, recovering 414
TAPEUNITS 416
TOLASTCOPY 415
TOLASTFULLCOPY 415
TOLOGPOINT 415
TORBA 391
fallback 412
hierarchy of dependencies 396
incremental image copies 393
input data sets 387
JES3 environment 411
lists of objects 392
lists, using 380
LOB data 401
LOGAPPLY phase, optimizing 410
mixed volume IDs 377
non-DB2 data sets 396
order of recovery 396
output 377
pages, recovering 380, 394
parallel recovery 380, 392
partitions, recovering 380, 393
point-in-time recovery
performing 396
planning for 396
point-time-recovery
planning for 403
RBA, recovering to 380
rebalancing partitions with REORG 403
REBUILD-pending status 377
recovery status 403
restarting 413
restriction 377
skipping SYSLGRNX during LOGAPPLY phase 380
specific data set, skipping 408
syntax diagram 379
table space sets 377
TABLESPACE option 139
tape mounts, retaining 413
terminating 413
RECOVER-pending (RECP) status
resetting 289, 411, 930
recovery
catalog objects 396
compressed data 403
consistency, ensuring 403
data set, partition 393
database
LOB table space 139
RECOVER utility 377
REORG makes image copies invalid 129
directory objects 396
error range 394
image copies 412
JES3 environment 411
page 394
partial 403
preparing for with copies 139
real-time statistics tables 1010
reporting information 568
table space
description 391
multiple spaces 391
recovery base 391
recovery information, reporting 565
recovery log
backward 733
forward 733
RECOVERY, option of REPORT utility 565
RECOVERYDDN
RECOVERYSITE
RECP 289, 930
referential constraint
loading data 265
violations, correcting 267
REFP 931
REFRESH-pending (REFP) status
description 931
resetting 931
remote site recovery 131
REORG INDEX
before running 432
REORG INDEX utility
access, allowing 423
authorization 419
catalog updates 445
CHECK-pending status, compatibility 432
compatibility 437
data set
shadow, determining name 435
data sets
definitions, changing 433
needed 433
shadow, estimating size 435
unload, specifying 423
user-managed 435
data-sharing considerations 432
description 419
drain behavior, specifying 423
REORG INDEX utility (continued)

examples 446
CLONE 447
HISTORY 446
KEYCARD 446
LIST 446
MAXRO 446
OPTIONS 446
REPORT 446
SHRLEVEL 446
single index 446
STATISTICS 446
TEMPLATE 446
UNLOAD PAUSE 446
UPDATE 446
WORKDDN 446
fallback recovery, considerations 432
inline statistics
gathering 423
reporting 423
interrupting 441
lists, using 423
long logs, actions for 423
no action 423
output 419, 445
partitions, specifying 423
performance 442
preformatting pages 423
REBUILD-pending status, compatibility 432
RECOVER-pending status, compatibility 432
region size 432
report only 423
restart-pending status, compatibility with SHRELEVEL
CHANGE 432
restarting 444
retries, specifying maximum number 423
shadow data sets, defining 435
shadow objects 435
SHRLEVEL CHANGE
log processing 440
when to use 442
SHRLEVEL option 440
slow log processing, operator actions 440
SWITCH phase deadline, specifying 423
syntax diagram 420
terminating 443
time for log processing, specifying 423
time-out condition, actions for 423
unloading data, action after 423
versions, effect on 445
waiting time when draining for SQL 423
REORG TABLESPACE utility
access, specifying 458, 499
actions after running 519
authorization 449
building indexes in parallel 510
catalog and directory
considerations 481
limitations for reorganizing 502
phases for reorganizing 502
reorganizing 502
compatibility
with all other utilities 493
Index
1099
REORG TABLESPACE utility (continued)

compatibility (continued)
with CHECK-pending status 481
with REBUILD-pending status 481
with RECOVER-pending status 481
with REORG-pending status 481
compression dictionary
building 505
not building new 458
CURRENT DATE option
decrementing 458
incrementing 458
data set
copy, specifying 458
discard, specifying 458
shadow, determining name 490
unload 501
data sets
shadow 490
unload 486
unload, specifying name 458
work 486
deadline for SWITCH phase, specifying 458
description 449
DFSORT messages, specifying destination 486
drain behavior, specifying 458
DSNDB07 database, restriction 449
dynamic DFSORT and SORTDATA allocation,
overriding 505
effects 520
error in RELOAD phase 513
examples 521
CLONE 533
conditional reorganization 525
DEADLINE 523
deadline for SWITCH phase, specifying 523
determining whether to reorganize 525
discarding records 531
DRAIN_WAIT 527
draining table space 527
LONGLOG 524
mapping table, using 530
maximum processing time, specifying 524
partition, reorganizing 522
range of partitions, reorganizing 524
read-write access, allowing 523
rebalancing partitions 505
RETRY 527
RETRY_DELAY 527
sample REORG output for conditional REORG 525
sample REORG output for draining table space 527
sample REORG output that shows if REORG limits
have been met 525
SCOPE PENDING 532
SHRLEVEL CHANGE 523
sort input data set, specifying 522
statistics, updating 524
table space, reorganizing 521
unload data set, specifying 522
failed job, recovering 515
fallback recovery considerations 481
indexes, building in parallel 510
inline copy 507
interrupting temporarily 505
1100

lists, using 458
LOB table space
reorganizing 514
restriction 449
log processing, specifying max time 458
long logs, action taken 458
LONGLOG action, specifying interval 458
mapping table
example 481
preventing concurrent use 481
specifying name 458
using 481
multilevel security restrictions 449
output 449, 519
partition-by-growth table spaces, reorganizing 513
partitioned table spaces, reorganizing 513
partitions in parallel 507
partitions, REORG-pending status considerations 505
performance recommendations
after adding column 324
general 508
phases of execution
BUILD phase 449
LOG phase 449
RELOAD phase, description 449
RELOAD phase, error 513
SORT phase 449
SORTBLD phase 449
SWITCH phase 449
UNLOAD phase 449
UTILINIT phase 449
UTILTERM phase 449
preformatting pages 458
REBALANCE
restrictions 481
rebalancing partitions 505
reclaiming space from dropped tables 502
records, discarding 458
region size recommendation 481
RELOAD phase
counting records loaded 514
RELOAD phase, encountering an error in 513
reload, skipping 502
restarting 517
restriction 449
sample generated LOAD statement 458
scope, specifying 458
segmented table spaces, reorganizing 514
selection condition 458
shadow data sets, defining 490
shadow objects 490
SHRLEVEL
specifying 499
user-managed data sets with 490
SHRLEVEL CHANGE
compatibility with restart-pending status 481
log processing 499
performance implications 508
when to use 508
slow processing, operator actions 499
sort device type, specifying 458
sort subtasks
allocation 510

sort subtasks (continued)
determining number 510
sort work file, estimating size 510
statistics, specifying 458
syntax diagram 452
temporary data sets, specifying number 458
time to wait for drain, specifying 458
time-out, specifying action 458
timestamps
decrementing 458
incrementing 458
unload, specifying action 458
unloading data, methods of 512
versions, effect on 520
REORG utility 267
compressing data 267
KEEPDICTIONARY option 267
REORG-pending (REORP) status
description 931
resetting 931
REORG, option of DSN1COMP utility 773
reorganizing
indexes 439
table spaces 439
table spaces, determining when to reorganize 498
REORP 931
REPAIR
before running 550
REPAIR utility 538
authorization 535
before running
copying table space 550
restoring indexes 550
catalog, repairing 557
CHECK-pending status 559
commit point for LOCATE statement 542
compatibility 552
damaged page, repairing 555
DBD statement
declared temporary table 548
description 548
syntax diagram 548
using 555
declared temporary table compatibility 4, 548
DELETE statement
description 546
syntax diagram 546
DELETE statement, using with VERIFY 557
description 535
DUMP statement
description 547
syntax diagram 547
examples 559
CLONE 561
damaged data, replacing 559
DBDs 560
nonindexed row, removing 559
orphan row, repairing 560
restrictive states, resetting 561
versions, updating 561
LOCATE INDEX statement 543
LOCATE INDEXSPACE statement 543
REPAIR utility (continued)

LOCATE statement
description 541
syntax diagram 541
LOCATE TABLESPACE KEY
example messages 556
restriction for multiple-column indexes 556
LOCATE TABLESPACE statement 542
logging, specifying 537
output 535, 558
output data sets
calculating size 551
description 551
partitions 537
REPLACE statement
description 545
syntax diagram 545
REPLACE statement, using with VERIFY 557
resetting states, options 539
restarting 558
rows, locating by key 556
SET INDEX statement
description 538
SET INDEXSPACE statement
description 538
SET TABLESPACE statement
description 538
status, resetting 554, 555
syntax diagram 536
terminating 558
VERIFY statement
description 544
syntax diagram 544
VERIFY statement, using with REPLACE and
DELETE 557
version information
updating on the same system 537
version information, updating when moving to another
system 557
warning 550
REPLACE
statement of REPAIR utility
description 545
used in LOCATE block 541
replacing data in a table space 257
REPORT
REPORT utility
authorization 563
catalog and directory 570
compatibility 568
description 563
Index
1101
REPORT utility (continued)

examples 577
recovery information for index 581
recovery information for partition 580, 582
recovery information for table space 577
referential relationships 579
SHOWDSNS 583
TABLESPACESET 579
output 563
RECOVERY
output 571
sample output 568, 571
recovery information, reporting 565
restarting 570
syntax diagram 564
table space recovery information 568
TABLESPACESET
output 571
sample output 571
terminating 570
REPORTONLY
REPORTONLY, option of COPY utility 138
RESET
resetting
DBETE status
DBET error 928
pending status
advisory 925
auxiliary CHECK-pending (ACHKP) 925
CHECK-pending (CHKP) 927
COPY-pending 928
group buffer pool RECOVER-pending (GRECP) 928
informational COPY-pending (ICOPY) 139, 929
page set REBUILD-pending (PSRBD) 929
REBUILD-pending (RBDP) 372
REBUILD-pending (RBDP), for the RECOVER
utility 411
REBUILD-pending (RBDP), summary 929
RECOVER-pending (RECP), for the RECOVER
utility 411
RECOVER-pending (RECP), summary 930
REORG-pending (REORP) 931
restart-pending 932
refresh status, REFRESH-pending (REFP) 931
warning status, auxiliary warning (AUXW) 926
RESPORT, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
restart
conditional control record
reading 761
sample 761
restart-pending (RESTP) status
description 932
resetting 932
RESTART, option of DSNU CLIST command 22
restarting
performing first two phases only 733
problems
cannot restart REPAIR 558
cannot restart REPORT 570
1102
restarting (continued)
utilities
BACKUP SYSTEM 48
CATMAINT 59
CHECK DATA 80
CHECK INDEX 99
CHECK LOB 111
COPY 142
creating your own JCL 39
current restart 37
data set name 37
data sharing 35
DIAGNOSE 178
EXEC SQL 183
EXEC statement 30
JCL, updating 39
LISTDEF 200
LISTS 41
LOAD 286
MERGECOPY 314
methods of restart 39
MODIFY STATISTICS 331
OPTIONS 339
out-of-space condition 40
phase restart 37
QUIESCE 350
REBUILD INDEX 373
RECOVER 413
REORG INDEX 443, 444
REORG TABLESPACE 515, 517
RESTORE SYSTEM 589
RUNSTATS 615
STATISTICS keyword 37
STOSPACE 638
TEMPLATE 658
templates 40
UNLOAD 714
using DB2I 39
using the DSNU CLIST command 39
utility statements 40
UTPROC 28
volume serial 37
restarting a utility
DSNUTILS 860
DSNUTILU 871
RESTORE SYSTEM utility
authorization 585
compatibility 589
creating system point in time for 733
data sharing environment 589
description 585
DISPLAY UTILITY command 589
effects of running 590
examples 590
FROMDUMP 591
LOGONLY 590
recovering a system 590
output 585
preparation 587
restarting 589
syntax diagram 586
terminating 589
RESTOREBEFORE
RESTP 932
restrictive status
resetting 554, 555, 925
RESUME, option of LOAD PART 229
RESUME, option of LOAD utility 210
RETAIN
RETPD, option of TEMPLATE statement 643
RETRY
RETRY_DELAY
return code, altering 339
return code, CHANGELIMIT 138
REUSE
RI, option of LISTDEF utility 187
RID
row format
REORG TABLESPACE, effect of 520
ROWID
ROWID columns
generating 282
loading 259, 282
ROWLIMIT, option of DSN1COMP utility 773
running online utilities
data sharing environment 35
JCL 30
RUNSTATS utility
access, specifying 596, 604
after LOAD 285
aggregation of statistics, specifying 596, 604
assessing table spaces 613
authorization 593
catalog table spaces
processing 613
sample output 613
catalog table updates 616
COLGROUP option 593
column frequency statistics, gathering 596
column information, gathering 596
compatibility 610
deciding when to run 612
description 593
542
542
RUNSTATS utility (continued)

device type for DFSORT, specifying 596, 604
distribution statistics for column groups 613
examples 630
collecting distribution statistics 632
gather histogram statistics 633
generating a report 631
invalidating statements in the dynamic statement
cache 633
reporting statistics only 631
updating access path statistics 630
updating all statistics 631
updating catalog and history statistics 631
updating frequency statistics 631
updating index statistics 630
updating key column statistics 631
updating statistics for a partition 631
updating statistics for a table space 630
updating statistics for several tables 630
updating statistics while allowing changes 630
updating statistics while not allowing changes 630
grouping columns 596
HISTOGRAM option 593
HISTORY option 615
index frequency statistics, gathering 596
INDEX option 593
index partitions, gathering statistics 596
index partitions, specifying 604
INDEX syntax diagram 603
key column combinations, gathering information 596
large partitioned table spaces 616
lists, using 596, 604
LOB table space, space statistics 615
option descriptions
options for RUNSTATS INDEX 604
output 593, 616
partitioned table space, updating statistics 613
preparation 608
reporting information 596, 604
restarting 615
sample of columns, gathering statistics 596
SAMPLE option 596
sort work data sets, specifying number 596, 604
space columns updated 623
table space partitions, gathering statistics 596
TABLESPACE option 593
TABLESPACE syntax diagram 594
terminating 615
updating catalog information 596, 604
work data sets
using for frequency statistics 614
S
SAMPLE
scanning rules, utility control statements 15, 723
SCOPE
option of CHECK DATA utility 64, 77
option of COPY utility
ALL 117
Index
1103
SCOPE (continued)
option of COPY utility (continued)
PENDING 117
SCOPE PENDING, CHECK DATA after LOAD utility 289
SECPORT, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
SECQTYI column
SYSTABLEPART catalog table, use by RUNSTATS 623
security
multilevel with row-level granularity
authorization restrictions for online utilities 18
authorization restrictions for stand-alone utilities 724
security, data sets 14
SEGMENT, option of DSN1COPY utility 783
segmented table spaces, reorganizing 514
SELECT statement
list
maximum number of elements 847
SYSIBM.SYSTABLESPACE, example 637
select-statement, option of EXEC SQL utility 182
SELECT, option of DSN1SDMP utility 835
SELECT2, option of DSN1SDMP utility 835
semicolon
embedded 940
SET INDEX statement 538
SET INDEX statement of REPAIR utility 538
SET INDEXSPACE statement 538
SET INDEXSPACE statement of REPAIR utility 538
SET TABLESPACE statement 538
SET TABLESPACE statement of REPAIR utility 538
setting SQL terminator
DSNTIAD 940
shadow data sets
defining
estimating size, REORG INDEX utility 435
shift-in character, LOAD utility 229
shift-out character, LOAD utility 229
shortcut keys
keyboard xvi
SHRLEVEL
option of COPY utility
CHANGE 117, 133
REFERENCE 117, 133
SHRLEVEL CHANGE
SIZE, option of DSNUPROC utility 28
SKIP, option of OPTIONS statement 336
SMALLINT
1104
softcopy publications 1021

SORTDATA, option of REORG TABLESPACE utility 458
SORTDEVT
option of REORG INDEX 423
SORTKEYS
SORTNUM
option of REORG INDEX 423
SORTOUT
data set of LOAD utility, estimating size 249
space
DBD, reclaiming 323
unused, finding for nonsegmented table space 498
SPACE
AGE option of MODIFY STATISTICS utility 328
DATE, option of MODIFY STATISTICS utility 328
option of TEMPLATE utility 643
SPACE column
analyzing values 638
SPACE column of SYSINDEXPART catalog table 623
space statistics 623
SPACEF column
SQL (Structured Query Language)
limits 847
statement terminator 940
SQL statement terminator
modifying in DSNTEP2 and DSNTEP4 934, 942
modifying in DSNTIAD 940
SQL terminator, specifying in DSNTEP2 and DSNTEP4 934,
942
SQL terminator, specifying in DSNTIAD 940
SQTY column
STACK, option of TEMPLATE statement 643
stand-alone utilities 723
control statement, creating 723
description 3
invoking 723
JCL EXEC PARM, using to specify options 723
multilevel security with row-level granularity, effects 724
specifying options 723
START TRACE command, option of DSN1SDMP utility 835
START, option of CATENFM utility 52
STARTIME, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
STARTRBA, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
state, utility execution 33
statistics
deciding when to gather 612
gathering 593
STATISTICS
statistics history
deleting specific entries 331
reasons to delete 331
statistics, space utilization and the REORG INDEX utility
status
CHECK-pending, resetting 289
COPY-pending, resetting 288
displaying 925
page set REBUILD-pending (PSRBD) 372
REBUILD-pending (RBDP) 372
REBUILD-pending star (RBDP*) 372
status of utility
active 33
stopped 33
terminated 33
STOGROUP, option of STOSPACE utility 636
stopped status, of a utility 33
stopping, state of utility execution 33
storage group, DB2
disk space 637
storage allocated 637
STORCLAS, option of TEMPLATE statement 643
stored procedure
DSNACCOR 874, 978
DSNACCOX 895, 950
DSNUTILS 860
DSNUTILU 871
real-time statistics 874, 895, 950, 978
stored procedures
>DSNACCOX 853
ADMIN_COMMAND_DB2 853
ADMIN_COMMAND_DSN 853
ADMIN_COMMAND_UNIX 853
ADMIN_DS_BROWSE 853
ADMIN_DS_DELETE 853
ADMIN_DS_LIST 853
ADMIN_DS_RENAME 853
ADMIN_DS_SEARCH 853
ADMIN_DS_WRITE 853
ADMIN_INFO_HOST 853
ADMIN_INFO_SSID 853
ADMIN_JOB_CANCEL 853
ADMIN_JOB_FETCH 853
ADMIN_JOB_QUERY 853
ADMIN_JOB_SUBMIT 853
ADMIN_TASK_ADD 853
ADMIN_TASK_REMOVE 853
ADMIN_UTL_SCHEDULE 853
ADMIN_UTL_SORT 853
DB2-supplied 853
DSNACCOR 853
DSNACICS 853
DSNAEXP 853
DSNAHVPM 853
DSNAIMS 853
DSNAIMS2 853
DSNLEUSR 853
DSNTBIND 853
439
stored procedures (continued)

DSNTPSMP 853
DSNUTILS 853
DSNUTILU 853
DSNWSPM 853
DSNWZP 853
GET_CONFIG 853
GET_MESSAGE 853
GET_SYSTEM_INFO 853
SQLJ.ALTER_JAVA_PATH 853
SQLJ.DB2_INSTALL_JAR 853
SQLJ.DB2_REMOVE_JAR 853
SQLJ.DB2_REPLACE_JAR 853
SQLJ.DB2_UPDATEJARINFO 853
SQLJ.INSTALL_JAR 853
SQLJ.REMOVE_JAR 853
SQLJ.REPLACE_JAR 853
WLM_REFRESH 853
XDBDECOMPXML 853
XSR_ADDSCHEMADOC 853
XSR_COMPLETE 853
XSR_REGISTER 853
XSR_REMOVE 853
STOSPACE utility
authorization 635
availability of objects, ensuring 637
catalog updates 637
compatibility 637
description 635
examples
all storage groups, updating space values 639
one storage group, updating space values 639
several storage groups, updating space values 639
stogroup names 639
monitoring disk space for a storage group 637
output 635
restarting 638
statistical information, obtaining 637
syntax diagram 636
terminating 638
string, naming convention xvii
strings
advanced information 458, 679
STRIP
option of LOAD utility
BINARY data type 229
CHAR data type 229, 277
GRAPHIC data type 229, 277
GRAPHIC EXTERNAL data type 229
VARBINARY data type 229
VARCHAR data type 229, 277
VARGRAPHIC data type 229, 277
STRIP, option of UNLOAD utility 679
STRTLRSN, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
STTRACE, option of DSN1SDMP utility 835
SUBMIT, option of DSNU CLIST command 22
substring notation, TEMPLATE utility 643
subsystem
backing up 43
restoring 585
subsystem, naming convention xvii
SUBTYPE, option of DSN1LOGP utility 806
SUMMARY
Index
1105
SUMMARY (continued)
switching
templates
TEMPLATE 658
syntax diagram 538
CATENFM utility 51
CATMAINT utility 55
change log inventory utility (DSNJU003) 730
COPY utility 114
DSN1CHKR utility 765
DSN1COMP utility 773
DSN1COPY utility 783
DSN1LOGP utility 805
DSN1PRNT utility 825
DSN1SDMP utility 835
DSNJU003 utility 730
DSNJU004 utility 752
DSNU CLIST command 22
DSNUTILS stored procedure 863
DSNUTILU stored procedure 872
how to read xx
LISTDEF utility 185
LOAD utility 207
OPTIONS statement 335
print log map utility 752
QUIESCE utility 344
RECOVER utility 379
REPAIR utility 536
REPORT utility 564
RUNSTATS INDEX 603
RUNSTATS TABLESPACE 594
TEMPLATE statement 641
UNLOAD utility 664
SYSCOPY
catalog table, information from REPORT utility 568
directory table space, MERGECOPY restrictions 307, 308
SYSCOPY, deleting rows 322
SYSDISC data set
LOAD utility, estimating size 249
SYSERR data set
LOAD utility, estimating size 249
SYSIBM.SYSCOPY
ICBACKUP column 131
ICUNIT column 131
SYSIN DD statement, built by CLIST 26
SYSLGRNX directory table, information from REPORT
utility 568
SYSLGRNX, deleting rows 322
SYSMAP data set
estimating size 249
1106
SYSOBDS entries, deleting 323

SYSPITR, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
SYSPITRT, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
SYSPRINT DD statement, built by CLIST 26
SYSTABLESPACESTATS
contents 949
SYSTEM
option of DSNUPROC utility 28
system data sets, renaming 748
system monitoring
index organization 439
table space organization 439, 498
system point in time, creating 733
system-level
backup 761
system-level-backup 391
system, limits 847
SYSTEMPAGES, option of COPY utility 117
SYSUT1 data set for LOAD utility, estimating size
SYSUTILX directory table space
MERGECOPY restrictions 307, 308
order of recovering 396
249
T
table
dropping, reclaiming space 502
exception, creating 76
multiple, loading 226
replacing 257
replacing data 257
TABLE
table name, naming convention xvii
table space
assessing status with RUNSTATS 613
checking 61
checking multiple 83
determining when to reorganize 439, 498
LOAD LOG 292
merging copies 307
mixed volume IDs, copying 141
nonsegmented, finding unused space 498
partitioned, updating statistics 613
REORG LOG 520
reorganizing
using SORTDATA option of REORG utility
utilization 439
segmented
copying 135
LOAD utility 257
status, resetting 554
table spaces
LOAD on NOT LOGGED, effect of 292, 520
TABLESPACE
498
TABLESPACE (continued)
general description 537
on LOCATE TABLESPACE statement 542
on SET TABLESPACE and SET INDEX statements 539
TABLESPACES, option of LISTDEF utility 187
TABLESPACESET
TAPEUNITS
TEMPLATE library 654
TEMPLATE library, specifying 339
TEMPLATE utility
authorization 641
BSAM buffers, specifying number 643
compatibility 654
data set names
convention for specifying 643
creating 655
guidelines 655
data set size
controlling 656
default space calculations 656
letting DB2 estimate 656
DD name for tape, specifying 643
description 641
devices
specifying 643
specifying number 643
disposition of data set
defaults for dynamically allocated data sets for new
utility executions 643
defaults for dynamically allocated data sets on
RESTART 643
specifying 643
examples
basic template 658
COPY job with LISTDEF and TEMPLATE 654
COPY job with TEMPLATE and LISTDEF 659
creating a GDG data set 660
GDG data set, copying to tape 660
LOB objects, unloading 661
specifying an expiration date 659
specifying disposition 659
specifying space parameters 659
template switching 146, 661
using default size 659
variable substring notation 658
expiration date for data set, specifying 643
GDG base, specifying number of entries 643
GDGs, working with 657
instructions 641, 654
model data set, specifying 643
operations 654
TEMPLATE utility (continued)

LRECL 643
RECFM 643
SUBSYS 643
output 641
PREVIEW mode, executing in 654, 656
previewing data set names 654, 656
restarting 658
retention period for data set, specifying 643
scope of control statement 654
SMS data class, specifying 643
SMS management class, specifying 643
SMS storage class, specifying 643
space parameters, specifying 643
substring notation 643
switching 658
syntax diagram 641
tape, working with 657
terminating 658
track recording technique, specifying 643
variables
DATE 643
example meaningful data set name 655
JOB 643
OBJECT 643
TIME 643
using in the data set name 643
UTILITY 643
volume serial numbers, specifying 643
volumes, specifying maximum number 643
TEMPLATEDD, option of OPTIONS statement 336
TERM UTILITY command
COPY utility 142
description 36
effect on
RECOVER utility 413
rerunning UNLOAD 714
LOAD 285
terminated status, of a utility 33
terminating
MERGECOPY 314
state of utility execution 33
utilities
BACKUP SYSTEM 48
CATENFM 54
CATMAINT 59
CHECK DATA 80
CHECK INDEX 99
CHECK LOB 111
COPY 142
COPYTOCOPY 167
data sharing 36
description 36
DIAGNOSE 178
EXEC SQL 183
LISTDEF 200
LOAD 285
MODIFY RECOVERY 324
OPTIONS 339
QUIESCE 350
REBUILD INDEX 373
RECOVER 413
REORG INDEX 443
REORG TABLESPACE 515
REPAIR 558
Index
1107
terminating (continued)
REPORT 570
RESTORE SYSTEM 589
RUNSTATS 615
STOSPACE 638
TEMPLATE 658
UNLOAD 714
TEST, option of REPAIR utility 549
TIME EXTERNAL
TIME, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
TIMEOUT
TIMESTAMP EXTERNAL
timestamp, BSDS 758
timestamp, incrementing and decrementing value 679
timestamps, printing system and utility 751
TOCOPY, option of RECOVER utility 380
TOKEN, option of BACKUP SYSTEM utility 45
TOLASTCOPY, option of RECOVER utility 380
TOLASTFULLCOPY option of RECOVER utility 380
TOLOGPOINT, option of RECOVER utility 380
TORBA option of RECOVER utility 380
TOSEQNO, option of RECOVER utility 380
TOVOLUME, option of RECOVER utility 380
TRACEID, option of DIAGNOSE utility 175, 177
TRK, option of TEMPLATE statement 643
TRTCH, option of TEMPLATE statement 643
TRUNCATE
option of LOAD utility
BINARY data type 229
CHAR data type 229, 277
GRAPHIC data type 229, 277
GRAPHIC EXTERNAL data type 229
VARBINARY data type 229
VARCHAR data type 229, 277
VARGRAPHIC data type 229, 277
TYPE
option of DIAGNOSE utility 175
U
UID
option of DSNU command 22
option of DSNUPROC utility 28
UNCNT, option of TEMPLATE statement 643
UNICODE
UNIT
unit of recovery
in-abort 733
inflight 733
unit of work
in-commit 733
indoubt, conditional restart 733
UNLDDN
1108
UNLDDN (continued)
UNLOAD
UNLOAD utility
64-bit floating point notation, specifying 679
ASCII format, specifying 666
binary floating-point number format, specifying 679
blanks in VARBINARY fields, removing 679
blanks in VARCHAR fields, removing 679
blanks in VARGRAPHIC fields, removing 679
BLOB data type, specifying 679
BLOB strings, truncating 679
CCSID format, specifying 666
CHAR data type, specifying 679
character string representation of date, specifying 679
character string representation of time, specifying 679
character strings, truncating 679
CLOB data type, specifying 679
CLOB strings, truncating 679
compatibility 700
compressed data 714
constant field, specifying 679
converting data types 705
copies, concatenating 703
data sets used 699
data type compatibility 705
data, identifying 666
DBCLOB format, specifying 679
DBCS string, truncating 679
DD name of unload data set, specifying 666
DD statement for image copy, specifying 666
decimal format, specifying 679
decimal point character, specifying for delimited
formats 666
delimited files 710
delimited format, specifying 666
delimiters
column 666
string 666
description 663
EBCDIC format, specifying 666
examples 715
CLONE 720
delimited file format 719
FROMCOPY option 716
HEADER option 716
LOBs 720
partitioned table space 717
SAMPLE option 716
specifying a header 716
unloading a sample of rows 716
unloading all columns 715
unloading data from an image copy 716
unloading data in parallel 717
unloading from two tables 716
unloading LOBs 720
unloading multiple table spaces 718
unloading specific columns 715
unloading specified partitions 717, 719
using a field specification list 715
using LISTDEF 717, 718, 719
using TEMPLATE 717
field position, specifying 679
UNLOAD utility (continued)

field specification errors, interpreting 714
field specifications 674
floating-point data, specifying format 666
FROM TABLE clause 703
compatibility with LIST 674
parentheses 674
FROM TABLE option descriptions 679
FROM TABLE syntax diagram 675
graphic type, specifying 679
graphic type, truncating 679
header field, specifying 679
image copies, unloading 703
image copy, specifying 666
integer format, specifying 679
labeled duration expression 679
lists, specifying 666
LOAD statements, generating 714
LOAD statements, specifying data set for 666
maximum errors allowed, specifying 666
maximum number of rows to unload, specifying 679
multilevel security restrictions 663
multiple tables, unloading 674
output 663
output columns
ordering 703
selecting 703
output field position, specifying 707
output field size, specifying 707
output field types, specifying 705
output fields, determining layout 708
padding for variable length data, not using 666
partitions, identifying 666, 702
preparation 699
real format, specifying 679
restarting 714
ROWID type, specifying for output data 679
sampling rows 679
selection condition 679
small integer, specifying 679
source partitions, selecting 702
source tables, selecting 703
STRIP option 713
substitutions, not using 666
syntax diagram 664
table space, specifying 666
terminating 714
TRUNCATE option 713
Unicode format, specifying 666
varying-length data format, specifying 679
varying-length graphic type, specifying 679
WHEN clause 679
XML data 702
unloading partitions 702
unloading XML data 702
UPDATE
option of CATMAINT utility 56
URID (unit of recovery ID), option of DSN1LOGP utility 806
utilities
controlling 33
data set disposition 14
executing
DB2I 18
DSNU CLIST command 21
JCL 28, 30
problems during 33
restart 37
failure, determining cause 33
loading 7
MERGECOPY 314
mixed-release data sharing environment, operating in
monitoring 33
online 30
description 3
invoking 13
packaging 7
phase, determining 33
real-time statistics 947
running concurrently 35
SMP/E jobs 7
stand-alone
description 3
invoking 723
suite
installing 7
target objects, declared temporary table 4
types
BACKUP SYSTEM 43
CATENFM 51
CATMAINT 55
change log inventory (DSNJU003) 729
CHECK DATA 61
CHECK INDEX 85
CHECK LOB 103
COPY 113
COPYTOCOPY 155
DIAGNOSE 173
DSN1CHKR 763
DSN1COMP 771
DSN1COPY 781
DSN1LOGP 803
DSN1PRNT 823
DSN1SDMP 833
DSNJCNVB 725
EXEC SQL 181
LISTDEF 185
LOAD 205
MERGECOPY 307
MODIFY RECOVERY 317
OPTIONS 335
preformat active log (DSNJLOGF) 727
print log map (DSNJU004) 751
QUIESCE 343
REBUILD INDEX 353
RECOVER 377
REORG 437
REORG INDEX 419
REORG TABLESPACE 449
REPAIR 535
REPORT 563
RESTORE SYSTEM 585
RUNSTATS 593
STOSPACE 635
Index
1109
types (continued)
TEMPLATE 641
UNLOAD 663
UTILITIES panel, DB2 18
utility control statements
creating 15
parsing rules 15
scanning rules 15
utility-id naming convention xvii
UTILITY, option of DSNU CLIST command 22
UTPRINT DD statement, built by CLIST 26
UTPROC, option of DSNUPROC utility 28
V
validation routine
LOAD utility 205
VALUE
VARBINARY
VARCHAR
data type, loading 256
VARGRAPHIC
data type, loading 256
varying-length rows, relocated to other pages, finding number
of 498
VERIFY, statement of REPAIR utility 541, 544
version information
updating when moving to another system 557
version number management 324
LOAD utility 292
VERSION, option of REPAIR utility on LOCATE
statement 542
VERSIONS, option of REPAIR utility 537
versions, REORG TABLESPACE effect on 520
violation messages 77
violations
correct 78
finding 77
VOLCNT, option of TEMPLATE statement 643
VOLUME, option of DSNU CLIST command 22
VOLUMES, option of TEMPLATE statement 643
VSAM (Virtual Storage Access Method)
used by REORG TABLESPACE 486
used by STOSPACE 637
VSAMCAT, option of DSNJU003 utility 733
W
WAIT, option of DIAGNOSE utility 175
WARNING, option of OPTIONS statement
WHEN
1110
336
WHEN (continued)
option of REORG TABLESPACE utility
work data sets
LOAD utility 249
WORKDDN
WRITE, option of QUIESCE utility 344
458
X
XML
XML column
loading 283
XML columns
loading 262
XML data
loading 262
XML table space
copying 135
LOAD LOG 284
XMLERROR, option of CHECK DATA utility
64

Program Number: 5635-DB2
Printed in USA
SC18-9855-05
Spine information:

DB2 Utility Guide and Reference PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DB2 Utility Guide and Reference PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DB2 Utility Guide and Reference PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DB2 Version 9.

Utility Guide and Reference

DB2 Version 9.1 for z/OS

Utility Guide and Reference

Sixth edition (December 2009)

Part 1. Introduction to the DB2 utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Chapter 2. DB2 utilities packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Part 2. DB2 online utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Data sets that online utilities use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4. Monitoring and controlling online utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Chapter 5. BACKUP SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Concurrency and compatibility for BACKUP

Syntax and options of the CATMAINT control statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 8. CHECK DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Syntax and options of the CHECK DATA control statement

Chapter 9. CHECK INDEX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Chapter 10. CHECK LOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Utility Guide and Reference

Resetting CHECK-pending status for a LOB

Chapter 11. COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Syntax and options of the COPY control statement .

Chapter 12. COPYTOCOPY

Syntax and options of the COPYTOCOPY control statement . . .

Chapter 13. DIAGNOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Chapter 14. EXEC SQL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Chapter 15. LISTDEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Chapter 16. LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Syntax and options of the LOAD control statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Utility Guide and Reference

Inline COPY for a base table space . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 17. MERGECOPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Chapter 18. MODIFY RECOVERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Chapter 19. MODIFY STATISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Chapter 20. OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Chapter 21. QUIESCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Syntax and options of the QUIESCE control statement.

Chapter 22. REBUILD INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Syntax and options of the REBUILD INDEX control statement

Chapter 23. RECOVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Syntax and options of the RECOVER control statement . . . . . . . .

Utility Guide and Reference

Termination or restart of RECOVER . .

Chapter 24. REORG INDEX

Syntax and options of the REORG INDEX control statement . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 25. REORG TABLESPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

Syntax and options of the REORG TABLESPACE control statement

Chapter 26. REPAIR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

Resetting index space status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 27. REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

Chapter 28. RESTORE SYSTEM

Syntax and options of the RESTORE SYSTEM control statement

Chapter 29. RUNSTATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Chapter 30. STOSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635

Utility Guide and Reference

How STOSPACE ensures availability of objects it STOSPACE

Chapter 31. TEMPLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641

Syntax and options of the TEMPLATE control statement

Chapter 32. UNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663

Syntax and options of the UNLOAD control statement .